[opensuse-translation-commit] r93099 - in branches/SLE12-SP1/yast: . ps ps/package ps/po

Author: keichwa Date: 2015-10-01 16:25:53 +0200 (Thu, 01 Oct 2015) New Revision: 93099 Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/COPYING branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/MAINTAINER branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/Makefile.am branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/Makefile.cvs branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/README branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/RPMNAME branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/SUBDIRS branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/VERSION branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/configure.ac branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/configure.in.in branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/package/ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/package/yast2-trans-ps.changes branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/Makefile.am branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/add-on-creator.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/add-on.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/audit-laf.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/auth-client.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/auth-server.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/autoinst.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/base.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/bootloader.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/ca-management.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/cio.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/cluster.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/control-center.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/control.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/country.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/crowbar.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/dhcp-server.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/dns-server.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/docker.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/drbd.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/fcoe-client.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/firewall-services.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/firewall.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/firstboot.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/fonts.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/ftp-server.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/geo-cluster.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/gtk.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/http-server.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/inetd.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/installation.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/instserver.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/iplb.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/iscsi-client.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/iscsi-lio-server.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/isns.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/journal.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/kdump.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/languages_db.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/ldap-client.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/ldap.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/live-installer.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/mail.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/multipath.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/ncurses-pkg.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/ncurses.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/network.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/nfs.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/nfs_server.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/nis.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/nis_server.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/ntp-client.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/oneclickinstall.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/online-update-configuration.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/online-update.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/opensuse_mirror.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/packager.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/pam.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/pkg-bindings.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/printer.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/product-creator.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/proxy.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/qt-pkg.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/qt.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/rdp.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/rear.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/registration.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/reipl.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/relocation-server.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/rpm-groups.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/samba-client.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/samba-server.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/samba-users.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/scanner.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/security.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/services-manager.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/slp-server.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/snapper.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/sound.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/squid.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/sshd.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/storage.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/sudo.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/support.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/sysconfig.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/tftp-server.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/timezone_db.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/tune.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/update.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/users.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/vm.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/vpn.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/wol.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/yast2-apparmor.ps.po branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/yast2-trans-ps.spec.in Log: from Factory Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/COPYING =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/COPYING (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/COPYING 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,339 @@ + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + Version 2, June 1991 + + Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc., + 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA + Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies + of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. + + Preamble + + The licenses for most software are designed to take away your +freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public +License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free +software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This +General Public License applies to most of the Free Software +Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to +using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by +the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it to +your programs, too. + + When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not +price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you +have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for +this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it +if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it +in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. + + To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid +anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. +These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you +distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. + + For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether +gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that +you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the +source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their +rights. + + We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and +(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, +distribute and/or modify the software. + + Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain +that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free +software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we +want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so +that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original +authors' reputations. + + Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software +patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free +program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the +program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any +patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. + + The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and +modification follow. + + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION + + 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains +a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed +under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, +refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" +means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: +that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, +either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another +language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in +the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you". + +Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not +covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of +running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program +is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the +Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). +Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. + + 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's +source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you +conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate +copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the +notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; +and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License +along with the Program. + +You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and +you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. + + 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion +of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and +distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 +above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: + + a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices + stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. + + b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in + whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any + part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third + parties under the terms of this License. + + c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively + when run, you must cause it, when started running for such + interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an + announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a + notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide + a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under + these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this + License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but + does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on + the Program is not required to print an announcement.) + +These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If +identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, +and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in +themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those +sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you +distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based +on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of +this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the +entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. + +Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest +your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to +exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or +collective works based on the Program. + +In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program +with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of +a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under +the scope of this License. + + 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, +under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of +Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: + + a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable + source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections + 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, + + b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three + years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your + cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete + machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be + distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium + customarily used for software interchange; or, + + c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer + to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is + allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you + received the program in object code or executable form with such + an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) + +The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for +making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source +code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any +associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to +control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a +special exception, the source code distributed need not include +anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary +form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the +operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component +itself accompanies the executable. + +If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering +access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent +access to copy the source code from the same place counts as +distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not +compelled to copy the source along with the object code. + + 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program +except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt +otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is +void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. +However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under +this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such +parties remain in full compliance. + + 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not +signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or +distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are +prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by +modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the +Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and +all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying +the Program or works based on it. + + 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the +Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the +original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to +these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further +restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. +You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to +this License. + + 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent +infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), +conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or +otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not +excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot +distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this +License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you +may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent +license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by +all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then +the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to +refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. + +If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under +any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to +apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other +circumstances. + +It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any +patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any +such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the +integrity of the free software distribution system, which is +implemented by public license practices. Many people have made +generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed +through that system in reliance on consistent application of that +system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing +to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot +impose that choice. + +This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to +be a consequence of the rest of this License. + + 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in +certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the +original copyright holder who places the Program under this License +may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding +those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among +countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates +the limitation as if written in the body of this License. + + 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions +of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will +be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to +address new problems or concerns. + +Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program +specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any +later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions +either of that version or of any later version published by the Free +Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of +this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software +Foundation. + + 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free +programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author +to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free +Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes +make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals +of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and +of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. + + NO WARRANTY + + 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY +FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN +OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES +PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED +OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF +MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS +TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE +PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, +REPAIR OR CORRECTION. + + 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING +WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR +REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, +INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING +OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED +TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY +YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER +PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + + END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS + + How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs + + If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest +possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it +free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. + + To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest +to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively +convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least +the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. + + + Copyright (C) <year> <name of author> + + This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify + it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by + the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or + (at your option) any later version. + + This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, + but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of + MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the + GNU General Public License for more details. + + You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along + with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., + 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA. + +Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. + +If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this +when it starts in an interactive mode: + + Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author + Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'. + This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it + under certain conditions; type `show c' for details. + +The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate +parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may +be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be +mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program. + +You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your +school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if +necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: + + Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program + `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker. + + <signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989 + Ty Coon, President of Vice + +This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into +proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may +consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the +library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General +Public License instead of this License. Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/MAINTAINER =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/MAINTAINER (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/MAINTAINER 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +Karl Eichwalder Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/Makefile.am =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/Makefile.am (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/Makefile.am 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,196 @@ +# Emacs: -*- makefile -*- +# +# Toplevel Makefile.am for a YaST2 subproject +# +# -- This file is generated by y2automake - DO NOT EDIT! -- +# (Edit ./SUBDIRS instead) +# + +#where devtools are +Y2TOOL = $(Y2DEVTOOLS_PREFIX)/bin/y2tool + +VERSION = $(shell cat $(srcdir)/VERSION) +RPMNAME = $(shell cat $(srcdir)/RPMNAME) +SUBDIRS_FILE = $(shell test -e $(srcdir)/SUBDIRS && echo SUBDIRS) +ACINCLUDE_FILE = $(shell test -e $(srcdir)/acinclude.m4 && echo acinclude.m4) + +HAS_YAST_LICENSE = $(shell test -e $(srcdir)/YAST_LICENSE && echo YAST_LICENSE) + +# do we do Makefile.am for devtools? It is a little special... +IS_DEVTOOLS = $(findstring yast2-devtools,$(RPMNAME)) + +DEVTOOLS_DIR = $(if $(IS_DEVTOOLS),$(srcdir)/devtools,$(Y2DEVTOOLS_PREFIX)/share/YaST2/data/devtools) +LEGALESE_DIR = $(if $(HAS_YAST_LICENSE),$(DEVTOOLS_DIR)/admin/copyright/yast,$(DEVTOOLS_DIR)/admin/copyright/gpl) + +COPYRIGHT_files_gpl = README COPYING + +COPYRIGHT_files_yast = YAST_LICENSE README COPYING COPYRIGHT.english \ + COPYRIGHT.french COPYRIGHT.german COPYRIGHT.spanish + +extra_COPYRIGHT_files = $(if $(HAS_YAST_LICENSE), $(COPYRIGHT_files_yast), $(COPYRIGHT_files_gpl)) + +# less strict; prefer bzip2 +AUTOMAKE_OPTIONS = foreign dist-bzip2 no-dist-gzip +# where devtools install m4 snippets +# argh, executed literally +#ACLOCAL_AMFLAGS = -I $(Y2DEVTOOLS_PREFIX)/share/aclocal +ACLOCAL_AMFLAGS = -I . -I `if test -d ./devtools/admin; then echo ./devtools/admin; else pkg-config --print-errors --variable=datadir yast2-devtools; fi`/aclocal + +Makefile.am.common: $(DEVTOOLS_DIR)/admin/Makefile.am.common + cmp -s $< $@ || cp -f $< $@ + +# create bzip2ed tar and make some sanity checks +$(RPMNAME)-$(VERSION).tar.bz2: checkpo dist-bzip2 + @if [ `bunzip2 -c $(RPMNAME)-$(VERSION).tar.bz2 | wc --bytes` = 0 ] ; then \ + echo "Error: created tar is empty" ; \ + exit 1 ; \ + fi + +CLEANFILES = +MAINTAINERCLEANFILES = package/$(RPMNAME)-$(VERSION).tar.bz2 package/$(RPMNAME).spec + +POT_DST = $(shell find -type d -name testsuite -prune , \ + -type f -name "*.pot") + +EXTRA_DIST = \ + VERSION RPMNAME MAINTAINER configure.in.in \ + $(SUBDIRS_FILE) $(ACINCLUDE_FILE) \ + $(if $(IS_DEVTOOLS),Makefile.am.common,$(POT_DST)) + +show-extra-dist: + @echo $(EXTRA_DIST) + +# info '(automake)Conditionals' +if CREATE_PKGCONFIG +# create the file here instead of by configure +# because the prerequisite is made here (not anymore!) +# and we don't want any paths in y2autoconf +# info '(autoconf)config.status Invocation' +$(RPMNAME).pc: $(RPMNAME).pc.in config.status + ./config.status --file=$@:$< + +if CREATE_PKGCONFIG_NOARCH +pkgconfigdata_DATA = $(RPMNAME).pc +else +pkgconfig_DATA = $(RPMNAME).pc +endif + +EXTRA_DIST += $(RPMNAME).pc.in +endif + +dist-hook: + @for I in $(extra_COPYRIGHT_files) ; \ + do \ + EX="" ; \ + if test -f $(srcdir)/$$I ; then \ + EX=$(srcdir)/$$I ; \ + elif test -f $(LEGALESE_DIR)/$$I ; then \ + EX=$(LEGALESE_DIR)/$$I ; \ + else \ + echo "Error: No file $$I in $(srcdir)/ or in $$LEGALESE_DIR/"; \ + exit 1 ; \ + fi ; \ + echo "cp $$EX $(distdir)" ; \ + cp $$EX "$(distdir)" ; \ + done + +pot: + $(Y2TOOL) y2makepot -s $(srcdir) + +install-pot: pot + @POT_DST=`find -type d -name testsuite -prune , \ + -type f -name "*.pot"` ; \ + if [ -n "$$POT_DST" ] ; then \ + echo "mkdir -p $(DESTDIR)$(potdir)" ; \ + mkdir -p $(DESTDIR)$(potdir) ; \ + list="$$POT_DST"; \ + for I in $$list ; \ + do \ + echo $$I ; \ + if [ "$$I" == "pot" ] ; then \ + continue ; \ + fi ; \ + echo "$(INSTALL_DATA) $$I $(DESTDIR)$(potdir)" ; \ + $(INSTALL_DATA) $$I $(DESTDIR)$(potdir) ; \ + done ; \ + fi + +spellcheck: pot + $(Y2TOOL) pot-spellcheck + +# all-local: $(if $(IS_DEVTOOLS),,$(POT_DST)) + +install-data-local: # $(if $(IS_DEVTOOLS),,install-pot) + mkdir -p $(DESTDIR)$(docdir) + @for I in $(extra_COPYRIGHT_files) ; \ + do \ + EX="" ; \ + if test -f $(srcdir)/$$I ; then \ + EX=$(srcdir)/$$I ; \ + elif test -f $(LEGALESE_DIR)/$$I ; then \ + EX=$(LEGALESE_DIR)/$$I ; \ + else \ + echo "Error: No file $$I in $(srcdir)/ or in $(LEGALESE_DIR)/"; \ + exit 1 ; \ + fi ; \ + echo "$(INSTALL_DATA) $$EX $(DESTDIR)$(docdir)" ; \ + $(INSTALL_DATA) $$EX $(DESTDIR)$(docdir) ; \ + done + +package-local: check-parse $(if $(IS_DEVTOOLS),,$(POT_DST)) $(RPMNAME)-$(VERSION).tar.bz2 + rm -f package/$(RPMNAME)-*.tar.bz2 + rm -f package/*~ + rm -f package/*.bak + rm -f package/*.auto + mv $(RPMNAME)-$(VERSION).tar.bz2 package/ + if ! test -x $(Y2TOOL); then \ + echo "$(Y2TOOL): not found."; \ + echo "You have to install yast2-devtools to making a package"; \ + false; \ + fi + here=`pwd`; \ + cd $(srcdir) && for i in $(RPMNAME)*.spec.in; do \ + newname="`echo "$$i" | sed "s/\.in$$//g"`"; \ + $(Y2TOOL) create-spec < $$i > $$here/package/$${newname} ; \ + done + +package: check-up-to-date check-tagversion check-textdomain package-local + +TAGVERSION = $(Y2TOOL) tagversion + +# check if there is no modified files and all commits were pushed +check-up-to-date: + if [ `git status --short --branch | sed '/##[^[]*$/d;/^??/d' | wc -l` -gt 0 ]; then \ + (echo "ERROR: Source is not commited and pushed. See `git status`"; false) \ + fi + +check-tagversion: + cd $(srcdir) && $(TAGVERSION) --check >/dev/null; \ + [ $$? = 0 ] || ( echo "ERROR: Please run 'tagversion' first"; false ) + +check-parse-old: + @if [ `find -type f -name "*.ycp" | wc -l` -gt 0 -a "$(RPMNAME)" != "yast2-core" ] ; then \ + echo "Running parseycp..." ; \ + parseycp -q -R ; \ + else \ + echo "Not running parseycp." ; \ + fi + +check-parse: + @echo "Not running parseycp." + +check-textdomain: + $(Y2TOOL) check-textdomain $(srcdir) + +stable: checkin-stable + +checkin-stable: package + $(Y2TOOL) checkin-stable + + +# For po/ modules +checkpo: + test ! -f $(srcdir)/po/Makefile || $(MAKE) -C po checkpo +# test ! -f $(srcdir)/po/Makefile || $(MAKE) -C po checkpo make-pox +# Contents of ./SUBDIRS +SUBDIRS = po Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/Makefile.cvs =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/Makefile.cvs (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/Makefile.cvs 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# +# Makefile.cvs for y2t_ps +# +PREFIX = /usr + +LIB = $(shell y2tool get-lib) + +configure: all + ./configure --prefix=$(PREFIX) --libdir=$(PREFIX)/$(LIB) + +all: + y2tool y2autoconf + y2tool y2automake + autoreconf --force --install + +install: configure + make + make install + +reconf: all + ./config.status --recheck + ./config.status Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/README =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/README (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/README 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +This program/library is part of YaST2 +See the file COPYING for license terms Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/RPMNAME =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/RPMNAME (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/RPMNAME 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +yast2-trans-ps Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/SUBDIRS =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/SUBDIRS (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/SUBDIRS 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +po Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/VERSION =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/VERSION (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/VERSION 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +3.1.0 Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/configure.ac =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/configure.ac (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/configure.ac 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,184 @@ +dnl configure.ac for yast2-trans-ps +dnl +dnl -- This file is generated by y2autoconf 3.0.5 - DO NOT EDIT! -- +dnl (edit configure.ac.in or configure.in.in instead) + +AC_INIT(yast2-trans-ps, 3.1.0, http://bugs.opensuse.org/, yast2-trans-ps) +dnl Check for presence of file 'RPMNAME' +AC_CONFIG_SRCDIR([RPMNAME]) + +dnl Checking host/target/build systems, for make, install etc. +AC_CANONICAL_TARGET +dnl Perform program name transformation +AC_ARG_PROGRAM + +AC_PREFIX_DEFAULT(/usr) + +dnl long filenames; we use GNU Make extensions and that's ok +AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE(tar-ustar -Wno-portability) + +dnl Important YaST2 variables +VERSION="3.1.0" +RPMNAME="yast2-trans-ps" +MAINTAINER="Karl Eichwalder " + +dnl pkgconfig honors lib64 +pkgconfigdir=\${libdir}/pkgconfig +pkgconfigdatadir=\${datadir}/pkgconfig +yast2dir=\${prefix}/share/YaST2 + +ybindir=\${prefix}/lib/YaST2/bin +# FIXME duplicates execcompdir +ystartupdir=\${prefix}/lib/YaST2 +plugindir=\${libdir}/YaST2/plugin +includedir=\${prefix}/include/YaST2 +potdir=\${docdir}/pot + +docdir=\${prefix}/share/doc/packages/$RPMNAME +mandir=\${prefix}/share/man + +execcompdir=\${prefix}/lib/YaST2 +agentdir=${execcompdir}/servers_non_y2 + +ydatadir=${yast2dir}/data +imagedir=${yast2dir}/images +themedir=${yast2dir}/theme +localedir=${yast2dir}/locale +clientdir=${yast2dir}/clients +moduledir=${yast2dir}/modules +yncludedir=${yast2dir}/include +schemadir=${yast2dir}/schema +scrconfdir=${yast2dir}/scrconf +desktopdir=\${prefix}/share/applications/YaST2 + +AC_SUBST(VERSION) +AC_SUBST(RPMNAME) +AC_SUBST(MAINTAINER) + +AC_SUBST(pkgconfigdir) +AC_SUBST(pkgconfigdatadir) + +AC_SUBST(yast2dir) + +AC_SUBST(ybindir) +AC_SUBST(ystartupdir) +AC_SUBST(plugindir) +AC_SUBST(includedir) +AC_SUBST(potdir) +AC_SUBST(execcompdir) + +AC_SUBST(docdir) +AC_SUBST(mandir) + +AC_SUBST(ydatadir) +AC_SUBST(imagedir) +AC_SUBST(themedir) +AC_SUBST(localedir) +AC_SUBST(clientdir) +AC_SUBST(moduledir) +AC_SUBST(yncludedir) +AC_SUBST(schemadir) +AC_SUBST(scrconfdir) +AC_SUBST(agentdir) +AC_SUBST(desktopdir) + +fillupdir_d="/var/adm/fillup-templates" +AC_ARG_WITH(fillupdir, + AS_HELP_STRING([--with-fillupdir=DIR], + [where to place fillup templates (default $fillupdir_d.]), + [ fillupdir="$withval" ], + [ fillupdir="$fillupdir_d" ]) +AC_SUBST(fillupdir) + +LL=${RPMNAME##*-} +AC_SUBST(LL) +ISO639=${LL%_*} +AC_SUBST(ISO639) + +AC_ARG_WITH(own_compendium, + AS_HELP_STRING([--with-own_compendium=FILE], + [Location of compendium file]), + y2compendium=yes, y2compendium=no) +if test "x$with_own_compendium" = "x" ; then + if test -d ../50-memory ; then + COMPENDIUM='../../50-memory/yast2.$(LL).po' + else + COMPENDIUM='../../memory/yast2.$(LL).po' + fi +else + COMPENDIUM=${with_own_compendium} +fi +AC_SUBST(COMPENDIUM) +if test -d ../50-pot ; then + POTDIR=../../50-pot +else + POTDIR=../../pot/pot +fi +AC_SUBST(POTDIR) + + +dnl Checks for programs. +AC_PROG_INSTALL +dnl The YCP interpreter checks whether dependent ybc files are older +dnl so we must preserve their timestamps +INSTALL="${INSTALL} -p" +AC_PROG_LN_S +AC_PROG_MAKE_SET + +dnl pkgconfig +AC_ARG_VAR([PKG_CONFIG_PATH], [where to search for pkg-config files]) +dnl devtools +dnl ... + +dnl no need for AC_ARG_VAR +AC_PATH_PROG(XGETTEXT, xgettext) +if test -z "$XGETTEXT" ; then + AC_MSG_ERROR(xgettext is missing; please install gettext-tools.) +fi + +Y2DEVTOOLS_PREFIX=`pkg-config --print-errors --variable=prefix yast2-devtools` +AC_SUBST(Y2DEVTOOLS_PREFIX) +devtools_ybindir=`pkg-config --print-errors --variable=ybindir yast2-devtools` +devtools_yast2dir=`pkg-config --print-errors --variable=yast2dir yast2-devtools` + +dnl producing pkg-config for others? +AM_CONDITIONAL(CREATE_PKGCONFIG, test "x${CREATE_PKGCONFIG}" != x) +AM_CONDITIONAL(CREATE_PKGCONFIG_NOARCH, test "x${CREATE_PKGCONFIG}" = xnoarch) + +dbdir=${devtools_yast2dir}/data/docbook +STYLESHEET_HTML=${dbdir}/stylesheets/customize-html.xsl +STYLESHEET_PDF=${dbdir}/stylesheets/customize-fo.xsl +STYLESHEET_CSS=${dbdir}/css/yast2docs.css +STYLESHEET_YDOC=${dbdir}/stylesheets/ydoc.xsl +STYLESHEET_YCPDOC=${dbdir}/stylesheets/ycpdoc.xsl +AC_SUBST(STYLESHEET_HTML) +AC_SUBST(STYLESHEET_PDF) +AC_SUBST(STYLESHEET_CSS) +AC_SUBST(STYLESHEET_YDOC) +AC_SUBST(STYLESHEET_YCPDOC) + + +dnl searches for some needed programs +AC_PATH_PROG(MSGFMT, msgfmt, no, /usr/bin) +if test x$MSGFMT != x"/usr/bin/msgfmt"; then + AC_MSG_ERROR(msgfmt is missing; please install gettext.) +fi +AC_PATH_PROGS(MSGCAT, msgcat pmsgcat, no) +if test x$MSGCAT = xno; then + AC_MSG_ERROR(msgcat is missing; please install gettext-0.11pre or better.) +fi + +AC_PATH_PROG(MSGMERGE, msgmerge, no, /usr/bin) +if test x$MSGMERGE != x"/usr/bin/msgmerge"; then + AC_MSG_ERROR(msgmerge is missing; please install gettext.) +fi + +AC_PATH_PROG(MSGCONV, msgconv, no, /usr/bin) +if test x$MSGCONV != x"/usr/bin/msgconv"; then + AC_MSG_ERROR(msgconv is missing; please install gettext.) +fi + + +AC_CONFIG_FILES(Makefile po/Makefile) +AC_OUTPUT + Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/configure.in.in =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/configure.in.in (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/configure.in.in 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,12 @@ +## YCP module configure.in.in + +## Initialize +@YAST2-INIT-COMMON@ +@YAST2-INIT-PO@ + +## some common checks +@YAST2-CHECKS-COMMON@ +@YAST2-CHECKS-PO@ + +## and generate the output... +@YAST2-OUTPUT@ Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/package/yast2-trans-ps.changes =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/package/yast2-trans-ps.changes (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/package/yast2-trans-ps.changes 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,5 @@ +------------------------------------------------------------------- +Mon Aug 12 10:00:07 2013 - ke@suse.de + +- initial version + Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/Makefile.am =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/Makefile.am (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/Makefile.am 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,175 @@ +# Emacs: -*- makefile -*- +# +# Makefile.am for a YaST2 translation (po/) subproject +# +# -- This file is generated by y2automake - DO NOT EDIT! -- +# +# --- START lines from /usr/share/YaST2/data/devtools/admin/po/Makefile.am.top --- +# Emacs: -*- makefile -*- +# --- END lines from /usr/share/YaST2/data/devtools/admin/po/Makefile.am.top --- +# --- START lines from /usr/share/YaST2/data/devtools/admin/po/Makefile.am.center --- +# Emacs: -*- makefile -*- + +LL = @LL@ +#POTDIR = ../../50-pot +POTDIR = @POTDIR@ +POTFILES = $(wildcard $(POTDIR)/*.pot) +GENERATED = $(MOFILES) +CLEANFILES = $(GENERATED) +POFILES = $(wildcard *.po) +ALL_TEXTDOMAINS = $(basename $(notdir $(POTFILES))) +BPOTFILES = $(shell source ../../50-tools/build.conf && echo $$business) +WANTED_TEXTDOMAINS = $(filter-out $(BPOTFILES), $(ALL_TEXTDOMAINS)) +WANTED_POFILES = $(addsuffix .$(LL).po, $(WANTED_TEXTDOMAINS)) +MOFILES = $(POFILES:%.po=%.mo) +INST_MOFILES = $(MOFILES:.$(LL).mo=.mo) +POXFILES = $(POFILES:%.po=%.pox) +EXTRA_DIST = $(WANTED_POFILES) $(stat) +localedir=@localedir@ +locale_lang_msg_dir=$(localedir)/$(LL)/LC_MESSAGES +compendium = @COMPENDIUM@ +with_compendium = + +stat=status.txt +PO_STATS= grep -v warning: | @ybindir@/po-stats + +MSGMERGE = @MSGMERGE@ --no-wrap --force-po --previous +MSGFMT = @MSGFMT@ +MSGCAT = @MSGCAT@ --no-wrap --force-po +MSGCONV = @MSGCONV@ --no-wrap --force-po +XGETTEXT = @XGETTEXT@ --no-wrap + +SUFFIXES = .po .pox .gmo .mo + +all-local: $(GENERATED) + +make-pox pox: Makefile $(POXFILES) +$(POXFILES): %.pox: %.po + -[ -f $@ ] && mv --backup=numbered $@ $@.bak; \ + pot=$$(echo $< | sed "s:$(LL).po:pot:"); \ + compendium=$(compendium); \ + [ -f $$compendium ] || compendium=/dev/null ; \ + $(MSGMERGE) -C $$compendium -o $@ $< $(POTDIR)/$$pot + +# update or init PO file +update-po: Makefile $(POTFILES) + for p in $(POTFILES); do \ + q=$${p##*/}; \ + po=$${q%pot}$(LL).po; \ + echo $$po; \ + if [ -f $$po ]; then \ + $(MSGMERGE) -o $$po.tmp $(with_compendium) $$po $$p; \ + else \ + $(MSGMERGE) -o $$po.tmp -C $(compendium) \ + --verbose /dev/null $$p; \ + fi || { echo "$(MSGMERGE) for \"$$po\" failed" ; \ + rm -f $$po.tmp ; }; \ + if cmp $$po.tmp $$po >/dev/null 2>&1; then \ + rm -vf $$po.tmp; \ + else \ + mv -vf $$po.tmp $$po; \ + fi; \ + done + $(MAKE) $(stat) + +$(stat): $(WANTED_POFILES) + if [ -f $(stat) ]; then \ + cp --backup=numbered $(stat) $(stat).bak; \ + :> $(stat); \ + fi + { for f in $(WANTED_POFILES); do \ + LANG=C msgfmt -o /dev/null -c -v --statistics $$f 2>&1; \ + done ; } | $(PO_STATS) | head -n 6 | tee $(stat) + +update-po-with-compendium: + $(MAKE) update-po with_compendium="-C $(compendium)" + +update-mo: $(MOFILES) + @: + +%.mo: %.po + file=$(srcdir)/`echo $* | sed 's,.*/,,'`.mo \ + && rm -f $$file \ + && $(MSGCONV) --to UTF-8 $< \ + | $(MSGFMT) -c --statistics -o $$file - + +showpo: + echo $(POFILES) + +showmo: + echo $(MOFILES) + +checkpo: + for f in $(POFILES); do \ + mypot=$(POTDIR)/$${f/$(LL).po/pot}; echo $$f $$mypot; \ + [ -f $$mypot ] && { LANG=C $(MSGMERGE) --verbose --output=/dev/null $$f $$mypot || exit 1; }; \ + LANG=C $(MSGFMT) --output=/dev/null --check --statistics --verbose $$f \ + || exit 1; \ + done + +# Try to checkin a .pox file +# FIXME make sure msgcat doesn't weird things with "" and comments +checkin: + p=$(MODULE).$(ci_ll); \ + cp --backup=numbered $(ci_opt) $$p.po $$p.po.bak; \ + if [ -d CVS ]; then \ + cvs -n update $$p.po | grep -q -v '^[UPMC]'; \ + else \ + LC_ALL=C svn status --show-updates --quiet $$p.po| grep -v '^Status against revision'; \ + fi; \ + if [ $$? = 0 ]; then \ + echo "CVS/Subversion mismatch; trying to merge..."; \ + rm -f $$p.po; \ + if [ -d CVS ]; then \ + cvs -q update $$p.po; \ + else \ + svn update $$p.po; \ + fi; \ + cp $$p.pox $$p.pox.new; \ + $(MSGCAT) $$p.po $$p.pox.new -o $$p.pox; \ + echo -e "\nCheck \"$$p.pox\" for fuzzy entries. Status:"; \ + $(MSGFMT) --check --statistics $$p.pox; \ + echo -e "Then try again to checkin \"$$p.pox\"."; \ + else \ + cp $(ci_opt) $$p.pox $$p.po; \ + if [ -d CVS ]; then \ + cvs -n ci $$p.po; \ + else \ + svn --dry-run commit $$p.po; \ + fi; \ + if [ $$? = 0 ] ; then \ + if [ -d CVS ]; then \ + cvs ci -m "$(ci_msg)" $$p.po; \ + else \ + svn commit --message "$(ci_msg)" $$p.po; \ + fi; \ + else \ + rm -f $$p.po; \ + if [ -d CVS ]; then \ + cvs -q update $$p.po; \ + else \ + svn update $$p.po; \ + fi; \ + cp $$p.pox $$p.pox.new; \ + $(MSGCAT) $$p.po $$p.pox.new -o $$p.pox; \ + echo -e "\nCheck \"$$p.pox\" for fuzzy entries. Status:"; \ + $(MSGFMT) --check --statistics $$p.pox; \ + echo "Then try to checkin \"$$p.pox\"."; \ + fi; \ + fi + +install-data-local: $(MOFILES) $(stat) + D=$(DESTDIR)$(locale_lang_msg_dir); \ + [ -d $$D ] || install -d -m 755 $$D; \ + for l in $(MOFILES); do \ + m=$${l/$(LL).mo/mo}; \ + install -m 644 $$l $$D/$$m; \ + done + install -d -m 755 $(DESTDIR)$(docdir) + $(INSTALL_DATA) $(stat) $(DESTDIR)$(docdir) +# --- END lines from /usr/share/YaST2/data/devtools/admin/po/Makefile.am.center --- +# --- START lines from /usr/share/YaST2/data/devtools/admin/po/Makefile.am.bottom --- +# Emacs: -*- makefile -*- + +## po/Makefile.am.bottom ends here +# --- END lines from /usr/share/YaST2/data/devtools/admin/po/Makefile.am.bottom --- Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/add-on-creator.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/add-on-creator.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/add-on-creator.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,2021 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. Command line help text for the add-on-creator module +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:54 +msgid "Creator for add-on products" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'create' action +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:67 +msgid "Create and build a new add-on product." +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'clone' action +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:77 +msgid "Create and build a new add-on product based on an existing one." +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'sign' action +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:87 +msgid "Sign unsigned Add-On Product" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'list' action +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:97 +msgid "List available add-on product configurations." +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'create' action +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:107 +msgid "Build an add-on product from the selected configuration." +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'create' action +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:117 +msgid "Delete the selected add-on product configuration." +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'rpm_dir' option +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:125 +msgid "Path to directory with packages" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'content' option (do not translate 'content', it's a name) +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:132 +msgid "Path to content file" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'existing' option +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:139 +msgid "Path to directory with existing Add-On Product" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'generate_descriptions' option +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:146 +msgid "Generate new package descriptions (do not copy)" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'package_descriptions_dir' option +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:152 +msgid "Path to directory with package descriptions" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'patterns_dir' option +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:159 +msgid "Path to directory with patterns definitions" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'output_dir' option +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:166 +msgid "Path to the output directory" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'create_iso' option +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:173 +msgid "Create the ISO image" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'iso_name' option +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:179 +msgid "Name of the output ISO image" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'output_dir' option +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:186 +msgid "Path to the output directory for ISO image" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'do_not_sign' option +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:193 +msgid "Do not sign the product" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'gpg_key' option +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:199 +msgid "GPG key ID used to sign a product" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'passphrase' option +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:206 +msgid "Passphrase to unlock GPG key" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'passphrase_file' option +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:213 +msgid "Path to file with the passphrase for GPG key" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'passphrase' option +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:220 +msgid "Resign all packages with selected key." +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'workflow' option +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:226 +msgid "Path to workflow definition file (installation.xml)" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'y2update' option +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:233 +msgid "Path to workflow dialogs archive (y2update.tgz)" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'y2update_packages_dir' option +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:240 +msgid "Path to directory with YaST packages to form the workflow" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'license' option +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:247 +msgid "Path to file with license texts (license.zip or license.tar.gz)" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'info' option +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:254 +msgid "Path to file with 'info' text (media.1/info.txt)" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'extra_prov' option +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:261 +msgid "Path to file with additional dependencies (EXTRA_PROV)" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'addon-dir' option +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:268 +msgid "Path to directory with Add-On Product" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'do_not_build' option +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:275 +msgid "Do not build the product, only save new configuration." +msgstr "" + +#. help text for 'number' option; do not translate 'list' +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:281 +msgid "Number of the selected add-on (see 'list' command for product numbers)." +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'changelog' option +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:288 +msgid "Generate a Changelog file." +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'no_release_package' option +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:294 +msgid "Do not generate the release package." +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'product_file' option +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:300 +msgid "Path to file with the product description (*.prod)" +msgstr "" + +#. error message, %1 is path +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:398 +msgid "File %1 does not exist." +msgstr "" + +#. error message, %1 is path +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:405 +msgid "Directory %1 does not exist." +msgstr "" + +#. question on command line +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:454 +msgid "Passphrase for key %1:" +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:475 +msgid "Path to output directory is missing." +msgstr "" + +#. error message, missing tool +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:609 +msgid "/usr/bin/unzip does not exists" +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:733 +msgid "Path to directory with packages is missing." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:742 +msgid "Path to content file is missing." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:756 +msgid "Path to existing Add-On is missing." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:774 +msgid "Path to directory with Add-On is missing." +msgstr "" + +#. command line summary, %1 is order, %2 product name +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:813 +msgid "(%1) Product Name: %2" +msgstr "" + +#. command line summary +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:821 +msgid "\tVersion: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. command line summary +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:828 +msgid "\tInput directory: %1" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:834 +msgid "\tOutput directory: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. command line summary, %1 is comma-separated list +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:842 +msgid "\tPatterns: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. command line message, do not translate 'create', 'clone' +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:864 +msgid "There is no add-on product configuration present. Create a new one using the 'create' or 'clone' commands." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:876 +msgid "Specify the add-on product to build." +msgstr "" + +#. command line message +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:917 +msgid "There is no add-on product configuration present." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:924 +msgid "Specify the add-on product configuration that should be deleted." +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:99 +msgid "Add-on Creator Configuration Overview" +msgstr "" + +#. summary item +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:128 +msgid "Input directory: %1<br>" +msgstr "" + +#. summary item +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:133 +msgid "Output directory: %1<br>" +msgstr "" + +#. summary item, %1 is comma-separated list +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:142 +msgid "Patterns: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:156 +msgid "<p>Start creating a new add-on product configuration with <b>Add</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:160 +msgid "<p>Use <b>Edit</b> to modify the selected add-on product configuration.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:164 +msgid "<p>Delete the selected configuration using <b>Delete</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:166 +msgid "<p>Build the new add-on product based on the selected configuration with <b>Build</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. table header item +#. summary header +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:178 +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:2476 +msgid "Product Name" +msgstr "" + +#. table header item +#. input field label +#. desctiption of pattern keys +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:180 +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:1272 src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:316 +msgid "Version" +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:192 +msgid "&Build" +msgstr "" + +#. yes/no popup +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:247 +msgid "Really delete configuration \"%1\"?" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:296 +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:450 +msgid "Add-On Product Creator" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:313 +msgid "Create an Add-On &from the Beginning" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:322 +msgid "Create an Add-On Based on an &Existing Add-On" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:332 +msgid "&Path to Directory of the Existing Add-On Product" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:343 +msgid "&Generate Package Descriptions" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:460 +msgid "&Add-On Product Label" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#. text entry label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:464 +#: src/include/add-on-creator/patterns.rb:126 +msgid "&Version" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:468 +msgid "Required Product" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:483 +msgid "SUSE &Linux Enterprise Server 11" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:492 +msgid "SUSE L&inux Enterprise Desktop 11" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:501 +msgid "S&USE Linux Enterprise 11" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:510 +msgid "SUSE Linux Enterprise 11 SP3" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:519 +msgid "openSUSE 12.&3" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:528 +msgid "openSUSE 13.1" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:538 +msgid "&Other" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:556 +msgid "&Path to Directory with Add-On Packages" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:566 +msgid "Path to Directory with Re&quired Product Packages" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#. error popup +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:639 +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:647 +msgid "Directory %1 is not accessible." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup (input validation failed) +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:726 +msgid "" +"The value of NAME may contain only\n" +"letters, numbers, and the characters \".~_-\"." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:756 +msgid "LABEL" +msgstr "" + +#. combo label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:758 +msgid "La&nguage Code" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#. textentry label +#. textentry label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:760 +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:1546 +#: src/include/add-on-creator/patterns.rb:172 +msgid "&Value" +msgstr "" + +#. Heading for help popup window +#. Heading for help popup window +#. Heading for help popup window +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:779 +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:1454 +#: src/include/add-on-creator/patterns.rb:246 +msgid "Help" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption - 'content' is file name +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:804 +msgid "Product Definition" +msgstr "" + +#. label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:896 +msgid "Content File" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#. table header +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:902 +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:941 +msgid "Key" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#. table header +#. table header 2/2 +#. table header 2/2 +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:904 +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:943 +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:1766 +#: src/include/add-on-creator/patterns.rb:355 +msgid "Value" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#. table header +#. label for 'Des' pattern key +#. label for 'Des' key +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:906 +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:945 src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:351 +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:579 +msgid "Description" +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#. button label +#. button label +#. button label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:914 +#: src/include/add-on-creator/dialogs.rb:187 +#: src/include/add-on-creator/dialogs.rb:488 +#: src/include/add-on-creator/dialogs.rb:730 +msgid "Im&port" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:920 +msgid "Show &Only Required Keywords" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:930 +msgid "Generate Release Package" +msgstr "" + +#. label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:935 +msgid "Product File" +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#. push button label +#. button label +#. button label +#. button label +#. button label +#. button label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:952 +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:1590 +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:1744 +#: src/include/add-on-creator/dialogs.rb:157 +#: src/include/add-on-creator/dialogs.rb:461 +#: src/include/add-on-creator/dialogs.rb:718 +#: src/include/add-on-creator/patterns.rb:342 +msgid "I&mport" +msgstr "" + +#. popup for file selection dialog +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:1024 +msgid "Choose the Existing Content File" +msgstr "" + +#. popup for file selection dialog +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:1071 +msgid "Choose the Existing Product File" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:1090 +msgid "" +"Enter the values for these items:\n" +"%1" +msgstr "" + +#. table item +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:1148 +msgid "Yes" +msgstr "" + +#. table item +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:1150 +msgid "No" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:1171 +msgid "Value of \"%1\"" +msgstr "" + +#. input field label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:1262 +msgid "Name" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:1282 +msgid "Flag" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:1285 +msgid "Equal" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:1287 +msgid "Greater than" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:1289 +msgid "Lower than" +msgstr "" + +#. input field label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:1300 src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:322 +msgid "Release" +msgstr "" + +#. input field label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:1310 +msgid "Flavor" +msgstr "" + +#. input field label +#. table item label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:1320 src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:735 +msgid "Patch level" +msgstr "" + +#. MultiSelectionBox label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:1414 +msgid "&Packages" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:1417 +msgid "Select or Deselect &All" +msgstr "" + +#. popup for file selection dialog +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:1611 +msgid "Choose the file with the text to be imported." +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:1633 +msgid "Package Descriptions" +msgstr "" + +#. combobox label +#. combobox label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:1695 +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:1731 +msgid "Description File &Language Code" +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#. button label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:1704 +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:1741 +msgid "Add Lan&guage" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#. label for 'Pkg' key +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:1754 src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:575 +msgid "Package" +msgstr "" + +#. table header 1/2 +#. table header 1/2 +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:1764 +#: src/include/add-on-creator/patterns.rb:353 +msgid "Attribute" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:1782 +msgid "Location of the File with Additional &Dependencies" +msgstr "" + +#. popup for file selection dialog +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:1896 +msgid "Choose the New Package Description File" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup (correct name is 'packages.*') +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:1909 +msgid "" +"The package description file is named incorrectly.\n" +"Choose another one." +msgstr "" + +#. popup for file selection dialog +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:2044 +msgid "Choose the Path to EXTRA_PROV File" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:2054 +msgid "" +"The file '%1' does not exist.\n" +"Choose another one." +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:2090 +msgid "Key Type" +msgstr "" + +#. radiobutton label (key type) +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:2104 +msgid "&DSA" +msgstr "" + +#. radiobutton label (key type) +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:2109 +msgid "&RSA" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:2119 +msgid "Key &Size" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:2124 +msgid "E&xpiration Date" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:2127 +msgid "&Name" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:2129 +msgid "Commen&t" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:2134 +msgid "E-&Mail Address" +msgstr "" + +#. password widget label +#. password entry label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:2137 +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:2251 +msgid "&Passphrase" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:2144 +msgid "New GPG Key" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup (see Name, Comment, Email Adress text entries +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:2189 +msgid "" +"Name, comment, and e-mail address values are empty.\n" +"You must enter at least one of them to provide user identification.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. feedback popup headline +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:2197 +msgid "Generating Primary Key Pair" +msgstr "" + +#. feedback message +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:2199 +msgid "" +"If it takes too long, do some other work to give\n" +"the OS a chance to collect more entropy.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:2217 +msgid "Signing the Add-On Product" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:2237 +msgid "GPG &Key ID" +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:2244 +msgid "&Create..." +msgstr "" + +#. password entry label (verification) +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:2258 +msgid "&Passphrase Verification" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:2265 +msgid "Re&sign all packages with selected key." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:2302 +msgid "Passwords do not match. Try again." +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:2334 +msgid "Output Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:2358 +msgid "P&ath to Output Directory" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:2364 +msgid "Create &ISO Image" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:2371 +msgid "Image File Name" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:2377 +msgid "&Generate Changelog" +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:2382 +msgid "&Configure Workflow..." +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:2384 +msgid "O&ptional Files..." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:2429 +msgid "Enter the path to the directory for the add-on." +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:2469 +msgid "Overview" +msgstr "" + +#. summary header +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:2480 +msgid "Patterns" +msgstr "" + +#. summary header +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:2488 +msgid "Input Directory" +msgstr "" + +#. summary header +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:2495 +msgid "Output Directory" +msgstr "" + +#. summary line +#: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:2505 +msgid "Creating an ISO image in the output directory" +msgstr "" + +#. popup message +#: src/include/add-on-creator/dialogs.rb:79 +msgid "" +"A file with this name already exists.\n" +"Choose a different one." +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/add-on-creator/dialogs.rb:98 +msgid "Expert Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/add-on-creator/dialogs.rb:136 +msgid "&info.txt File" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/dialogs.rb:141 +msgid "&License Files" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/dialogs.rb:171 +msgid "README Files" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/dialogs.rb:241 +msgid "&Name of the New README File" +msgstr "" + +#. popup for file selection dialog +#: src/include/add-on-creator/dialogs.rb:258 +msgid "Choose the New README File" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/dialogs.rb:300 +msgid "&Language for the New License File" +msgstr "" + +#. popup for file selection dialog +#: src/include/add-on-creator/dialogs.rb:320 +msgid "Choose the New License File" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/add-on-creator/dialogs.rb:401 +msgid "Expert Settings, Part 2" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/dialogs.rb:445 +msgid "©ING Files" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/dialogs.rb:472 +msgid "COPY&RIGHT Files" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/dialogs.rb:541 +msgid "&Language for the New COPYRIGHT File" +msgstr "" + +#. popup for file selection dialog +#: src/include/add-on-creator/dialogs.rb:560 +msgid "Choose the New COPYRIGHT File" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/dialogs.rb:605 +msgid "&Language for the New COPYING File" +msgstr "" + +#. popup for file selection dialog +#: src/include/add-on-creator/dialogs.rb:624 +msgid "Choose the New COPYING File" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/add-on-creator/dialogs.rb:701 +msgid "Expert Settings, Part 3" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/add-on-creator/dialogs.rb:715 +msgid "products" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/add-on-creator/dialogs.rb:721 +msgid "patches" +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/dialogs.rb:724 +msgid "&Import" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/add-on-creator/dialogs.rb:727 +msgid "media" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/add-on-creator/dialogs.rb:769 +msgid "Workflow Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/dialogs.rb:792 +msgid "&Location of the File with the Workflow Description" +msgstr "" + +#. radiobutton label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/dialogs.rb:806 +msgid "&No Additional YaST Modules" +msgstr "" + +#. radiobutton label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/dialogs.rb:815 +msgid "&Path to y2update.tgz" +msgstr "" + +#. pushbutton label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/dialogs.rb:823 +msgid "&Browse" +msgstr "" + +#. radiobutton label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/dialogs.rb:830 +msgid "&Import the Packages" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/include/add-on-creator/dialogs.rb:840 +msgid "YaST Module Package" +msgstr "" + +#. popup for file selection dialog +#: src/include/add-on-creator/dialogs.rb:892 +msgid "Choose the installation.xml File" +msgstr "" + +#. popup for file selection dialog +#: src/include/add-on-creator/dialogs.rb:911 +msgid "Choose the Path to the y2update.tgz File" +msgstr "" + +#. popup for file selection dialog +#: src/include/add-on-creator/dialogs.rb:922 +msgid "Choose the YaST Module Package" +msgstr "" + +#. Build dialog help +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:36 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Creating the Add-On</big></b><br>\n" +"Please wait...<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:40 +msgid "" +"<p>Writing the add-on configurations<br>\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for start menu +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:44 +msgid "<p>This module offers guidance for the creation of an add-on product.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for start menu, cont. +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:48 +msgid "<p>Select how to create the new add-on product. You can create it from the beginning or base it on an existing product.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for start menu, cont. +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:52 +msgid "<p>When basing the new product on an existing product, check <b>Generate Package Descriptions</b> to generate new descriptions of packages in the existing product.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for initial data (paragraph title) +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:56 +msgid "<p><b>Name and Version</b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for initial data, cont. +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:60 +msgid "<p>Enter the name and version of add-on product.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for initial data, cont. +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:62 +msgid "<p><b>Required Product</b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for initial data, cont. +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:64 +msgid "<p>Select the product to which the new add-on product can be applied. This selection forms the <b>REQUIRES</b> value of the <tt>content</tt> file.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for initial data (paragraph title), cont. +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:68 +msgid "<p><b>Add-On Packages</b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for initial data, cont. +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:70 +msgid "<p>Choose the path to the directory containing the RPM packages that should form your add-on product.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for initial data (paragraph title), cont. +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:74 +msgid "<p><b>Required Product Packages</b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for initial data, cont. +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:76 +msgid "<p>Optionally, choose the path to the directory containing the RPM packages from the product the add-on product should be based on. These packages will not be contained in the add-on product, but could be used for creating the patterns later in the workflow.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for content file editor (<tt>content</tt> is a name of file) +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:80 +msgid "<p>Here, edit the values of the <tt>content</tt> file.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for content file editor, cont. +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:84 +msgid "<p>Enter the information required to identify the add-on product. Deselect <b>Show Only Required Keywords</b> to see all attributes of the <tt>content</tt> file.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for content file editor, cont. +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:88 +msgid "<p>Use <b>Import</b> to import an existing <tt>content</tt> file.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for package description files +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:92 +msgid "<p>Edit the language-specific descriptions of packages (<tt>packages.lang</tt> files) here.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for package description files, cont. +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:96 +msgid "<p>Use <b>Add Language</b> to add a description file for a new language. The list of available languages is read from the <b>LINGUAS</b> value of the <tt>content</tt> file. Import an existing file with package descriptions with <b>Import</b>. Delete the description file with <b>Delete</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for package description files, cont. +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:100 +msgid "<p>Use <b>Add</b> and <b>Edit</b> in the second table to modify description entries for the selected package.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for package description files, cont. +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:104 +msgid "<p>Optionally, choose the path for the file providing <b>Additional Package Dependencies</b> (EXTRA_PROV).</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for patterns +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:108 +msgid "<p>Create and edit the patterns for the add-on product here.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for patterns, cont. +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:112 +msgid "<p>Use <b>New</b> to create a new pattern or <b>Import</b> to import an existing one.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for patterns, cont. +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:116 +msgid "<p>Use <b>Add</b> and <b>Edit</b> in the second table to modify pattern attributes.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for patterns, cont. +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:120 +msgid "" +"<p>Check <b>Required pattern</b> to mark the selected pattern as required for\n" +"the add-on product. Such a pattern will be automatically preselected when the installation of the add-on product is started.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for the 'various settings' dialog +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:124 +msgid "<p>Specify the path to the directory in which the add-on product should be created. Select <b>Create ISO Image</b> to create the ISO image of the product in the output directory.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for the 'various settings' dialog +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:128 +msgid "<p>Use <b>Generate Changelog</b> to generate a changelog file containing all changes of packages on the add-on product made in the last two years.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for the 'various settings' dialog +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:132 +msgid "<p>Adapt the workflow of the add-on product with <b>Configure Workflow</b>. Use <b>Optional Files</b> to configure texts of <tt>README</tt> files, licenses, and other optional values.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. workflow help text +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:136 +msgid "<p>Here, you can enter the files necessary for customizing your add-on product workflow.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. workflow help text +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:140 +msgid "<p>Enter the location of the file with the workflow description. This file is an alternative to <tt>control.xml</tt> and is saved as <tt>installation.xml</tt> in the add-on product's base directory.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. workflow help text +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:144 +msgid "<p>To use custom YaST modules during the installation of the add-on product, enter the path to the <tt>y2update.tgz</tt> archive where these modules are stored or configure the contents of <tt>y2update.tgz</tt> by specifying the YaST RPM packages in <b>Import the Packages</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for expert dialog 1 +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:148 +msgid "<p>The optional <tt>info.txt</tt> file gives information about the add-on that should be displayed as a pop-up window with an <b>OK</b> button.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for expert dialog 1, cont +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:152 +msgid "<p>The text of the license is displayed in a window with <b>Agree</b> and <b>Disagree</b> buttons before the installation starts. The files with the license texts in different languages are compressed to the <tt>license.zip</tt> archive and stored in the <tt>media.1</tt> directory.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for expert dialog 2 +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:156 +msgid "<p>The <tt>COPYRIGHT</tt> and <tt>COPYING</tt> files can have various language modifications and are stored in the root directory of the add-on product.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for signing dialog +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:160 +msgid "<p>Here, configure the signing of the add-on product. Choose a secret key from the list of keys available or create a new one with <b>Create</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for signing dialog, cont. +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:164 +msgid "<p>Enter the passphrase needed to unlock the secret key.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for signing dialog, cont. +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:166 +msgid "<p>Decide if you want to <b>Sign All Packages</b> of the add-on product with the selected key. All previous package signatures will be removed.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for generating new key dialog +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:170 +msgid "<p>Enter the values necessary for generating the new primary key pair.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for generating new key dialog, cont. +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:174 +msgid "<p>The default size of a DSA key is 1024 bits. RSA keys may be between 1024 and 4096 bits long.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for generating new key dialog, cont. +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:178 +msgid "<p>As <b>Expiration Date</b>, enter the number of days after which the key expires. If the number is followed by <tt>w</tt>,<tt>m</tt>, or <tt>y</tt>, it indicates the number of weeks, months, or years. Leave the entry empty for a key that never expires.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for generating new key dialog, cont. +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:182 +msgid "<p>Use <b>Name</b>, <b>Comment</b>, and <b>E-Mail Address</b> to provide the user identification with which the new key should be associated.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for overview dialog +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:186 +msgid "<p>Here, see the overview of data for generating the add-on product.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for overview dialog, cont. +#: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:190 +msgid "<p>Press <b>Finish</b> to create the add-on product in the output directory.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/patterns.rb:113 +msgid "&Name of the New Pattern" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/patterns.rb:118 +msgid "&Architecture" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/patterns.rb:128 +msgid "&Release" +msgstr "" + +#. popup message +#: src/include/add-on-creator/patterns.rb:150 +msgid "" +"Such a pattern already exists.\n" +"Choose a different name or architecture.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/add-on-creator/patterns.rb:198 +msgid "&Description" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/add-on-creator/patterns.rb:202 +msgid "&Summary" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/add-on-creator/patterns.rb:203 +msgid "Ca&tegory" +msgstr "" + +#. combo label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/patterns.rb:213 +msgid "&Language Code" +msgstr "" + +#. popup message +#: src/include/add-on-creator/patterns.rb:257 +msgid "" +"A key with this name already exists.\n" +"Choose a different one." +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/add-on-creator/patterns.rb:319 +msgid "Editor for Patterns" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/include/add-on-creator/patterns.rb:332 +msgid "Name of the Pattern" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/include/add-on-creator/patterns.rb:334 +msgid "Full Name" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label +#: src/include/add-on-creator/patterns.rb:369 +msgid "R&equired Pattern" +msgstr "" + +#. popup for file selection dialog +#: src/include/add-on-creator/patterns.rb:445 +msgid "Existing Pattern" +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/include/add-on-creator/patterns.rb:601 +msgid "" +"Such a pattern already exists.\n" +"Choose a different architecture.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. busy message +#: src/include/add-on-creator/wizards.rb:53 +msgid "Importing product..." +msgstr "" + +#. label of content file key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:139 +msgid "Content file style" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for content file CONTENTSTYLE key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:141 +msgid "Must be the first tag of the content file." +msgstr "" + +#. label of content file key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:150 +msgid "Product name" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for content file 'NAME' key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:152 +msgid "For internal usage. Same restrictions as for package names apply." +msgstr "" + +#. label of content file BASEARCHS key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:160 +msgid "Product architectures" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for content file 'BASEARCHS' key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:164 +msgid "Space-separated list of product architectures. Matches the available product-release packages architectures. " +msgstr "" + +#. label of content file 'VERSION' key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:172 +msgid "Product version and release" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for content file 'VERSION' key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:176 +msgid "Product version and release as in RPM <tt>major.minor-release</tt>." +msgstr "" + +#. table item label +#. table item label +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:185 src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:720 +msgid "Release number" +msgstr "" + +#. label of content file key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:192 +msgid "Distribution name" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for content file 'DISTRIBUTION' key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:194 +msgid "Some string denoting the distribution. The same string is most probably used in the .rpms to denote the distribution. Usually a composition of the name, version and architecture." +msgstr "" + +#. label of content file key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:201 +msgid "Package description directory" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for content file 'DESCRDIR' key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:206 +msgid "Package description directory (relative to product directory)." +msgstr "" + +#. label of content file key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:214 +msgid "Package data directory" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for content file 'DATADIR' key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:216 +msgid "Package data directory (relative to product directory)." +msgstr "" + +#. label of content file key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:225 +msgid "Label" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for content file '' key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:227 +msgid "UTF-8 encoded label. Default label if <b>LINGUAS</b> is omitted or no default language can be determined." +msgstr "" + +#. label of content file 'LINGUAS' key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:234 +msgid "Languages" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for content file 'LINGUAS' key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:236 +msgid "ISO language code or language code_country code." +msgstr "" + +#. label of content file 'LANGUAGE' key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:243 +msgid "Default language" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for content file 'LANGUAGE' key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:247 +msgid "Default language code." +msgstr "" + +#. label of content file 'PATTERNS' key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:256 +msgid "Preselected patterns" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for content file 'PATTERNS' key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:260 +msgid "List of patterns preselected by the product." +msgstr "" + +#. label of content file key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:267 +msgid "Vendor name" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for content file 'VENDOR' key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:269 +msgid "Vendor name (free form)." +msgstr "" + +#. label of content file 'RELNOTESURL' key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:277 +msgid "Release notes URL" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for content file 'RELNOTESURL' key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:281 +msgid "URL from which to fetch release notes." +msgstr "" + +#. label of content file 'UPDATEURLS' key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:288 +msgid "Update URL" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for content file 'UPDATEURLS' key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:290 +msgid "URL of the update source." +msgstr "" + +#. label of content file LABEL.lang key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:300 +msgid "Language-specific label" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for content file 'LABEL.lang' key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:304 +msgid "UTF-8-encoded <b>LABEL</b>. <tt>lang</tt> has the same syntax as the <b>LINGUAS</b> values. For each language in <b>LINGUAS</b>, a matching <b>LABEL.lang</b> is expected." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:328 +msgid "Architecture" +msgstr "" + +#. label for 'Sum' key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:338 src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:589 +msgid "Summary" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for 'Sum' pattern key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:340 +msgid "One line label in the default language" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for 'Sum.lang' pattern key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:344 +msgid "One line language-specific label." +msgstr "" + +#. help text for 'Des' pattern key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:354 +msgid "Multiple line description in the default language" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for 'Des.lang' pattern key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:358 +msgid "Multiple line description, language-specific." +msgstr "" + +#. label for 'Cat' pattern key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:364 +msgid "Category" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for 'Cat' pattern key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:366 +msgid "One line category in the default language used to group patterns. Categories are intended for the user and can be specified freely." +msgstr "" + +#. help text for 'Cat.lang' pattern key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:370 +msgid "Language-specific version of the category." +msgstr "" + +#. label for 'Vis' pattern key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:377 +msgid "Visibility" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for 'Vis' pattern key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:379 +msgid "Set whether the pattern should be visible in the user interface." +msgstr "" + +#. label for 'Prq' pattern key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:388 +msgid "Packages" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for 'Prq' pattern key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:390 +msgid "List of packages to install." +msgstr "" + +#. label for 'Prc' pattern key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:398 +msgid "Recommended packages" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for 'Prc' pattern key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:400 +msgid "These packages are installed by default but can be removed without complaint." +msgstr "" + +#. label for 'Prs' pattern key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:408 +msgid "Suggested packages" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for 'Prs' pattern key +#. help text for 'Sug' pattern key +#. help text for 'SUGGESTS' key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:410 src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:503 +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:712 +msgid "These are just hints for an application and not handled during dependency resolution." +msgstr "" + +#. label for 'Ico' pattern key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:418 +msgid "Icon filename" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for 'Ico' pattern key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:420 +msgid "" +"If unspecified, the pattern name is used \n" +" instead (with blanks in the name replaced by underscores). If the filename does not include a .png or .jpg extension, .png is appended. If no path is specified, icons are searched for in the theme icon path (first /usr/share/YaST2/theme/current/icons/32x32/apps/ then /usr/share/YaST2/theme/current/icons/48x48/apps/). Absolute and relative paths (to the theme path /usr/share/YaST2/theme/current/) are allowed." +msgstr "" + +#. label for 'Ord' pattern key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:429 +msgid "Pattern Order" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for 'Ord' pattern key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:431 +msgid "This three-digit integer value defines the order of the pattern when listing multiple patterns in the user interface." +msgstr "" + +#. label for 'Req' pattern key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:441 +msgid "Required patterns" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for 'Req' pattern key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:443 +msgid "Patterns that need to be installed together with this pattern." +msgstr "" + +#. label for 'Prv' pattern key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:451 +msgid "Provided patterns" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for 'Prv' pattern key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:453 +msgid "Capabilities this pattern provides. They can be used to match <b>REQUIRES</b> from others. Every resolvable has a provide by default--its own name and edition. For example, package <i>bar-1.42-1</i> provides the capability <tt>bar = 1.42-1</tt>." +msgstr "" + +#. label for 'Con' pattern key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:461 +msgid "Conflicting patterns" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for 'Con' pattern key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:463 +msgid "This pattern cannot be installed if the specified resolvable or one that provides the capability is installed." +msgstr "" + +#. label for 'Obs' pattern key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:471 +msgid "Patterns made obsolete" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for 'Obs' pattern key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:473 +msgid "" +"When this pattern is installed, it uninstalls any \n" +"other patterns marked as obsolete here." +msgstr "" + +#. label for 'Rec' pattern key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:481 +msgid "Recommended patterns" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for 'Rec' pattern key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:483 +msgid "A weak version of REQUIRES. If recommended patterns cannot be installed, no error is shown." +msgstr "" + +#. label for 'Sup' pattern key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:491 +msgid "Supplemented patterns" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for 'Sup' pattern key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:493 +msgid "A reverse <b>Rec</b>. This pattern is installed if the specified capability is provided by an installed resolvable. The dependency resolver installs it. Uninstalling it is silently accepted." +msgstr "" + +#. label for 'Sug' pattern key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:501 +msgid "Suggested patterns" +msgstr "" + +#. label for 'Fre' pattern key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:511 +msgid "Freshen" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for 'Fre' pattern key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:513 +msgid "The current pattern is only considered for installation if the pattern specified here is installed." +msgstr "" + +#. label for 'Ext' pattern key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:523 +msgid "Extends" +msgstr "" + +#. label for 'Inc' pattern key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:529 +msgid "Includes" +msgstr "" + +#. label for 'Exnh pattern key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:535 +msgid "Enhanced patterns" +msgstr "" + +#. label for 'Pcn' pattern key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:541 +msgid "Conflicting packages" +msgstr "" + +#. label for 'Pob' pattern key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:547 +msgid "Obsolete packages" +msgstr "" + +#. label for 'Pfr' pattern key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:553 +msgid "Freshened packages" +msgstr "" + +#. label for 'Psp' pattern key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:559 +msgid "Supplemented packages" +msgstr "" + +#. label for 'Pen' pattern key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:565 +msgid "Enhanced packages" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for 'Des' key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:581 +msgid "Multiple line package description." +msgstr "" + +#. help text for 'Sum' key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:591 +msgid "The package summary (label), a one line description of the package." +msgstr "" + +#. label for 'Ins' key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:599 +msgid "Installation Notification" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for 'Ins' key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:601 +msgid "An informal message shown to the user if the package is selected, such as a test version warning or a commercial license." +msgstr "" + +#. label for 'Del' key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:608 +msgid "Deletion Notification" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for 'Del' key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:610 +msgid "An informal message shown to the user if the package is selected for deletion, such as a warning that the system is unusable without the package." +msgstr "" + +#. label for 'Eul' key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:617 +msgid "EULA" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for 'Eul' key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:619 +msgid "Text of the EULA. This text is displayed before the package installation. If the user does not accept the EULA, the package is not installed." +msgstr "" + +#. label of key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:660 +msgid "Products that must be installed" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for 'REQUIRES' key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:662 +msgid "<p>Resolvables that must be installed on the system to meet product requirements.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. label of PROVIDES key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:670 +msgid "Provided products" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for 'PROVIDES' key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:672 +msgid "Capabilities this product provides. They can be used to match <b>requires</b> from others." +msgstr "" + +#. label of 'CONFLICTS' key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:680 +msgid "Conflicting products" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for 'CONFLICTS' key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:682 +msgid "This resolvable cannot be installed if the specified resolvable or one that provides the capability is installed." +msgstr "" + +#. label of 'OBSOLETES' key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:690 +msgid "Products made obsolete" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for 'OBSOLETES' key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:692 +msgid "When this resolvable is installed, it uninstalls any other resolvable with a name matching this keyword." +msgstr "" + +#. label of 'RECOMMENDS' key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:700 +msgid "Recommended products" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for 'RECOMMENDS' key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:702 +msgid "A weak version of <b>requires</b>. An attempt is made to fulfill <b>RECOMMENDS</b>, but they are silently ignored if no match is possible." +msgstr "" + +#. label of 'SUGGESTS' key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:710 +msgid "Suggested products" +msgstr "" + +#. table item label +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:725 +msgid "The URL for release notes RPM" +msgstr "" + +#. table item label +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:730 +msgid "Product description" +msgstr "" + +#. table item label +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:740 +msgid "Product summary" +msgstr "" + +#. table item label +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:745 +msgid "Product line" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for 'productline' key +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:747 +msgid "A short name for the product, which does not change between service packs and versions." +msgstr "" + +#. table item label +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:754 +msgid "Update repository key" +msgstr "" + +#. table item label +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:759 +msgid "Type of media" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for media type +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:761 +msgid "Type of media that will be used for target product. Possible values are: cd, ftp, dvd5, dvd9." +msgstr "" + +#. table item label +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:768 +msgid "Product flavor" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for media type +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:770 +msgid "Description of the flavor or variant of a product, e.g. DVD, FTP, Live" +msgstr "" + +#. AddOnCreator Build dialog caption +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:1694 +msgid "Generating Product Data" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:1698 +msgid "Find package directories" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:1702 +msgid "Looking for package directories..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:1709 +msgid "Check package architectures" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:1711 +msgid "Generate content file defaults" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:1718 +msgid "Checking package architectures..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:1720 +msgid "Generating content file defaults..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage +#. Progress step +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:1728 src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:1735 +msgid "Generate package descriptions" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:1746 +msgid "<b>Wait while generating data for add-on...</b><br/>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error report +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:2730 +msgid "" +"Failed to install obs-productconverter package.\n" +"Release package will not be generated." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:2923 +msgid "" +"Build of release package failed with\n" +"'%1'." +msgstr "" + +#. error label +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:3283 +msgid "Signing of the product failed." +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:3301 +msgid "Try again with different passphrase" +msgstr "" + +#. ask for pw now %1 is key id, %2 user name +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:3857 +msgid "" +"Enter passphrase for GPG key %1\n" +"(%2)" +msgstr "" + +#. AddOnCreator Build dialog caption +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:3879 +msgid "Creating the Add-On" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:3883 +msgid "Write the content file" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:3885 +msgid "Create the structure of the add-on" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:3887 +msgid "Write the patterns" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:3889 +msgid "Copy the packages" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:3891 +msgid "Generate the release package" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:3893 +msgid "Create MD5 sums" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:3895 +msgid "Sign resulting product" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:3899 +msgid "Writing the content file..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:3901 +msgid "Creating the structure of the add-on..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:3903 +msgid "Writing the patterns..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:3905 +msgid "Copying the packages..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:3907 +msgid "Generating the release package..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:3909 +msgid "Creating MD5 sums..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:3911 +msgid "Signing resulting product..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:3916 +msgid "Create ISO image" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:3918 +msgid "Creating ISO image..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress finished +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:3921 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#. Error message (do not translate 'content' +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:3957 +msgid "Cannot write content file." +msgstr "" + +#. Error message +#: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:3978 +msgid "Cannot create the output directory structure." +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/add-on.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/add-on.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/add-on.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,432 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:35+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline help +#: src/clients/add-on.rb:41 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Add-on Module Help\n" +"------------------\n" +"\n" +"To add a new add-on product via the command-line, use this syntax:\n" +" /sbin/yast2 add-on URL\n" +"URL is the path to the add-on source.\n" +"\n" +"Examples of URL:\n" +"http://server.name/directory/Lang-AddOn-10.2-i386/\n" +"ftp://server.name/directory/Lang-AddOn-10.2-i386/\n" +"nfs://server.name/directory/SDK1-SLE-i386/\n" +"disk://dev/sda5/directory/Product/CD1/\n" +"cd://\n" +"dvd://\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/add-on.rb:64 +msgid "Target file name ('xmlfile' option) is missing. Use xmlfile= command line option." +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#. this is a heading +#. Cleanup UI - Prepare it for progress callbacks +#: src/clients/add-on.rb:105 src/clients/add-on_proposal.rb:76 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1873 +msgid "Add-On Products" +msgstr "" + +#. busy message (dialog) +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog content - a very simple label +#: src/clients/add-on.rb:107 src/clients/inst_language_add-on.rb:155 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1874 +msgid "Initializing..." +msgstr "" + +#. help +#. TRANSLATORS: help text +#: src/clients/add-on.rb:109 src/clients/inst_language_add-on.rb:157 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1875 +msgid "<p>Initializing add-on products...</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Create a summary +#. return string +#: src/clients/add-on_auto.rb:70 +msgid "<li>Media: %1, Path: %2, Product: %3</li>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error report +#: src/clients/add-on_auto.rb:185 +msgid "Failed to add add-on product." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/add-on_auto.rb:193 +msgid "Make the add-on \"%1\" available via \"%2\"." +msgstr "" + +#. placeholder for unknown path +#. summary item, %1 is product name, %2 media URL, %3 directory on media +#. placeholder for unknown directory +#. place holder for unknown URL +#. placeholder for unknown path +#. placeholder for unknown URL +#: src/clients/add-on_proposal.rb:35 src/clients/add-on_proposal.rb:41 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:369 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:379 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:935 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:944 +msgid "Unknown" +msgstr "" + +#. summary string +#: src/clients/add-on_proposal.rb:47 +msgid "No add-on product selected for installation" +msgstr "" + +#. this is a menu entry +#: src/clients/add-on_proposal.rb:78 +msgid "Add-&on Products" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup message +#: src/clients/inst_language_add-on.rb:114 +msgid "Installation of the Language Extension has been finished." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog caption +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog caption +#. main screen heading +#: src/clients/inst_language_add-on.rb:153 +#: src/clients/inst_language_add-on.rb:212 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:907 +msgid "Add-On Product Installation" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS:: multi-selection box +#: src/clients/inst_language_add-on.rb:219 +msgid "&Select Language Extensions to Be Installed" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: help text +#: src/clients/inst_language_add-on.rb:226 +msgid "<p>Select the language extensions to be installed then click <b>OK</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup question +#: src/clients/inst_language_add-on.rb:245 +msgid "Are you sure you want to abort the add-on product installation?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_language_add-on.rb:260 +msgid "" +"There are no selected languages to be installed.\n" +"Are you sure you want to abort the installation?" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: multiselection box item, %1 stands for 'ar', 'mk', 'zh_TW' +#. it used only as a fallback +#: src/clients/inst_language_add-on.rb:329 +msgid "Language %1" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: error message - the module does not provide command line interface +#: src/clients/vendor.rb:34 +msgid "There is no user interface available for this module." +msgstr "" + +#. VENDOR: main screen heading +#: src/clients/vendor.rb:64 +msgid "Vendor Driver CD" +msgstr "" + +#. VENDOR: cant mount /dev/cdrom popup +#: src/clients/vendor.rb:84 +msgid "Please insert the vendor CD-ROM" +msgstr "" + +#. VENDOR: vendor cd contains wrong data +#. VENDOR: vendor cd contains wrong data +#. VENDOR: vendor cd contains wrong data +#: src/clients/vendor.rb:130 src/clients/vendor.rb:145 +#: src/clients/vendor.rb:202 +msgid "" +"Could not find driver data on the CD-ROM.\n" +"Aborting now." +msgstr "" + +#. VENDOR: vendor cd doesn't contain data for current system and linux version +#: src/clients/vendor.rb:177 +msgid "" +"The CD-ROM data does not match the running Linux system.\n" +"Aborting now.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. VENDOR: dialog heading +#: src/clients/vendor.rb:262 +msgid "Installing driver..." +msgstr "" + +#. VENDOR: popup if installation of driver failed +#: src/clients/vendor.rb:273 +msgid "" +"The installation failed.\n" +"Contact the address on the CD-ROM.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. VENDOR: message box with number of drivers installed +#: src/clients/vendor.rb:287 +msgid "Installed %1 drivers from CD" +msgstr "" + +#. VENDOR: message box with error text +#: src/clients/vendor.rb:292 +msgid "" +"No driver data found on the CD-ROM.\n" +"Aborting now." +msgstr "" + +#. table cell +#. table cell +#. List of all selected repositories +#. +#. +#. **Structure:** +#. +#. add_on_products = [ +#. $[ +#. "media" : 4, // ID of the source +#. "product_dir" : "/", +#. "product" : "openSUSE version XX.Y", +#. "autoyast_product" : "'PRODUCT' tag for AutoYaST Export", +#. "media_url" : "Zypp URL of the product", +#. ], +#. ... +#. ] +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:161 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:580 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1588 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1600 +msgid "No product found in the repository." +msgstr "" + +#. error report +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:314 +msgid "No software repository found on medium." +msgstr "" + +#. busy message +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:333 +msgid "Initializing new source..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:374 +msgid "URL: %1, Directory: %2" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:387 +msgid "Software Repository Selection" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:389 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>Software Repository Selection</b></big><br>\n" +"Multiple repositories were found on the selected medium.\n" +"Select the repository to use.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:399 +msgid "Repositories &Found" +msgstr "" + +#. if (Stage::initial()) +#. { +#. if (Popup::ConfirmAbort (`painless)) +#. break; +#. } +#. else +#. { +#. yes-no popup +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:411 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:738 +msgid "Really abort add-on product installation?" +msgstr "" + +#. popup message +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:422 +msgid "Select a repository." +msgstr "" + +#. message popup +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:627 +msgid "Dependencies of the add-on product cannot be fulfilled." +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:708 +msgid "Product Selection" +msgstr "" + +#. multi selection list +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:714 +msgid "Available Products" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:720 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Product Selection</big></b><br/>\n" +"Multiple products were found in the repository. Select the products\n" +"to install.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. message popup +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:788 +msgid "Dependencies of the selected add-on products cannot be fulfilled." +msgstr "" + +#. Help for add-on products +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:910 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>Add-On Product Installation</b></big><br/>\n" +"Here see all add-on products that are selected for installation.\n" +"To add a new product, click <b>Add</b>. To remove an already added one,\n" +"select it and click <b>Delete</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. table cell, %1 is URL, %2 is directory name +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:939 +msgid "%1, Directory: %2" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:965 +msgid "Product" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:967 +msgid "Media" +msgstr "" + +#. message report +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1120 +msgid "Select a product to delete." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: busy message +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1128 +msgid "Removing selected add-on..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog caption +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1255 +msgid "Installed Add-on Products" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: table header item +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1262 +msgid "Add-on Product" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: table header item +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1264 +msgid "URL" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: push button +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1278 +msgid "Run &Software Manager..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog help adp/1 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1282 +msgid "<p>All add-on products installed on your system are displayed.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog help adp/2 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1284 +msgid "<p>Click <b>Add</b> to add a new add-on product, or <b>Delete</b> to remove an add-on which is in use.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. no items +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1337 +msgid "<b>Vendor:</b> %1<br>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1338 +msgid "Unknown vendor" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1341 +msgid "<b>Version:</b> %1<br>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1342 +msgid "Unknown version" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1345 +msgid "<b>Repository URL:</b> %1<br>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1351 +msgid "Unknown repository URL" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1358 +msgid "<b>Repository Alias:</b> %1<br>" +msgstr "" + +#. Removes the currently selected Add-On +#. +#. @return [Boolean] whether something has changed its state +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1638 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1691 +msgid "Unknown product" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1641 +msgid "Unknown URL" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1697 +msgid "" +"Deleting the add-on product %1 may result in removing all the packages\n" +"installed from this add-on.\n" +"\n" +"Are sure you want to delete it?" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: busy popup message +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1714 +msgid "Removing product dependencies..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: pop-up headline +#: src/include/add-on/misc.rb:72 +msgid "Warning: Not enough memory!" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: pop-up question +#: src/include/add-on/misc.rb:74 +msgid "" +"Your system does not seem to have enough memory to use add-on products\n" +"during installation. You can enable add-on products later when the\n" +"system is running.\n" +"\n" +"Do you want to skip using add-on products?" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/audit-laf.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/audit-laf.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/audit-laf.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,892 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. Command line help text for the audit-laf module +#. Initialization dialog caption +#. Initialization dialog caption +#: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:55 src/include/audit-laf/wizards.rb:180 +#: src/include/audit-laf/wizards.rb:228 +msgid "Configuration of Linux Audit Framework (LAF)" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for show action +#: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:68 +msgid "Show information about audit settings" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for set action +#: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:81 +msgid "Set the specified option" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for 'show logfile' +#: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:89 +msgid "Show log file settings" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for 'show diskspace' +#: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:95 +msgid "Show disk space settings" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for 'show dispatcher' +#: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:101 +msgid "Show dispatcher settings" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for log_file option +#: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:107 +msgid "Name of the log file (full path name)" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for log_format option +#: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:114 +msgid "Log format" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for flush option +#: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:122 +msgid "How to write data to disk" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for frequency option +#: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:130 +msgid "How many records to write before a flush to disk is issued" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for max_log_file option +#: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:137 +msgid "Maximal size (in MByte) of the log file" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for max_log_file_action option +#: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:144 +msgid "Action if max_log_file is reached" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for num_logs option +#: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:152 +msgid "Number of log files to keep" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for name_format option +#: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:159 +msgid "Computer name format" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for name_format option +#: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:167 +msgid "Computer name (used if format is set to USER)" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for space_left option +#: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:174 +msgid "Space left on log partition (in MByte) when system starts to run low" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for space_left_action option +#: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:181 +msgid "Action if space_left is reached" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for space_left_script option +#: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:196 +msgid "Script to execute (full path name) if space_left is reached" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for admin_space_left +#: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:203 +msgid "Space left on log partition (in MByte) when system is running low" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for admin_space_left_action option +#: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:210 +msgid "Action if admin_space_left is reached" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for admin_space_left_script option +#: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:225 +msgid "Script to execute (full path name) if admin_space_left is reached" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for action_mail_acct option +#: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:232 +msgid "Mail sent to this account (if space_left_action set to EMAIL)" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for disk_full_action option +#: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:239 +msgid "Action to perform if disk is full" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for admin_space_left_script option +#: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:247 +msgid "Script to execute (full path name) if disk is full" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for disk_error_action option +#: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:254 +msgid "Action to perform on disk error" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for script on disk error option +#: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:262 +msgid "Script to execute (full path name) on disk error" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for communication control option +#: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:269 +msgid "How to communicate between dispatcher and the audit daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for dispatcher option +#: src/clients/audit-laf.rb:277 +msgid "Dispatcher program (full path name)" +msgstr "" + +#. Rich text title for AuditLaf in proposals +#: src/clients/audit-laf_proposal.rb:82 +msgid "AuditLaf" +msgstr "" + +#. Menu title for AuditLaf in proposals +#: src/clients/audit-laf_proposal.rb:86 +msgid "&AuditLaf" +msgstr "" + +#. Handle actions of log file dialog (button 'Select file') +#: src/include/audit-laf/complex.rb:126 +msgid "Select the log file" +msgstr "" + +#. Store all values in SETTINGS +#: src/include/audit-laf/complex.rb:178 +msgid "" +"The 'User Defined Name' is NOT set although\n" +"the 'Computer Name Format' is set to 'USER'.\n" +"Setting the format to 'NONE' (default)." +msgstr "" + +#. Handle actions of dispatcher dialog (button 'Select file') +#: src/include/audit-laf/complex.rb:223 +msgid "Select the dispatcher program" +msgstr "" + +#. Second part of an error message: the value won't be changed because of previous error +#: src/include/audit-laf/complex.rb:338 +msgid "Value of '%1' remains unchanged." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/audit-laf/complex.rb:342 +msgid "%1 doesn't exist.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/audit-laf/complex.rb:348 +msgid "%1 is not a regular file.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/audit-laf/complex.rb:355 +msgid "%1 not owned by root.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. check permissions +#: src/include/audit-laf/complex.rb:371 +msgid "File permissions of %1 NOT set to -rwxr-x---.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Warning - the audit configuration is locked, reset impossible +#: src/include/audit-laf/complex.rb:461 +msgid "" +"The rules are already locked, a reset is impossible.\n" +"\n" +"If you want to unlock, set the enabled flag accordingly and\n" +"finish the configuration. Afterwards a reboot is required." +msgstr "" + +#. Report success +#: src/include/audit-laf/complex.rb:488 +msgid "Rules successfully restored" +msgstr "" + +#. Report error - error during reset +#: src/include/audit-laf/complex.rb:492 +msgid "Cannot reset rules. Check /etc/audit/audit.rules." +msgstr "" + +#. Handle actions of rules dialog +#: src/include/audit-laf/complex.rb:560 +msgid "" +"The rules are already locked.\n" +"\n" +"A test is impossible because sending new rules\n" +"will cause an error.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/audit-laf/complex.rb:573 +msgid "" +"Lock is set in audit.rules (-e 2).\n" +"\n" +"It makes no sense to continue, because the rules will\n" +"be locked until next boot.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/audit-laf/complex.rb:606 +msgid "Success" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/audit-laf/complex.rb:609 +msgid "Cannot create tmp file for rules." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/audit-laf/complex.rb:616 +msgid "Select an example" +msgstr "" + +#. Called if 'Abort' button is pressed in main dialog. +#. If the rules are changed by a syntax check the changes will be reseted. +#: src/include/audit-laf/complex.rb:666 +msgid "Lock set" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/audit-laf/complex.rb:667 +msgid "" +"The audit configuration is locked (option -e 2).\n" +"This means the rules are locked until next boot!\n" +"If you really want this, make sure '-e 2' is the last entry\n" +"in the rules file. If not, either enable or disable auditing.\n" +"To check or change the rules, go back to the rules editor.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Frame label +#: src/include/audit-laf/dialogs.rb:69 +msgid "General Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. InputField label +#. Header of tab in tab widget +#: src/include/audit-laf/dialogs.rb:74 src/include/audit-laf/wizards.rb:117 +msgid "&Log File" +msgstr "" + +#. PushButton label +#. PushButton label +#: src/include/audit-laf/dialogs.rb:79 src/include/audit-laf/dialogs.rb:222 +msgid "Select Fi&le" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox label - select format of logging +#: src/include/audit-laf/dialogs.rb:90 +msgid "&Format" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox label - select how to flush data on disk +#: src/include/audit-laf/dialogs.rb:103 +msgid "Fl&ush" +msgstr "" + +#. InputField label - enter how many records to write before flush data to disk +#: src/include/audit-laf/dialogs.rb:119 +msgid "Fre&quency (Number of Records)" +msgstr "" + +#. Frame label - data regarding size of log file and action to perform +#: src/include/audit-laf/dialogs.rb:132 +msgid "Size and Action" +msgstr "" + +#. InputField label +#: src/include/audit-laf/dialogs.rb:137 +msgid "Ma&x File Size (MB)" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox label +#: src/include/audit-laf/dialogs.rb:145 +msgid "M&aximum File Size Action" +msgstr "" + +#. InputField label +#: src/include/audit-laf/dialogs.rb:162 +msgid "&Number of Log Files" +msgstr "" + +#. Frame label - data regarding how to write computer names to the log file +#: src/include/audit-laf/dialogs.rb:173 +msgid "Computer Names" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox label +#: src/include/audit-laf/dialogs.rb:181 +msgid "&Computer Name Format" +msgstr "" + +#. InputField label +#: src/include/audit-laf/dialogs.rb:192 +msgid "User Defined Name" +msgstr "" + +#. Frame label - settings of the dispatcher program +#: src/include/audit-laf/dialogs.rb:208 +msgid "Dispatcher Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. InputField label +#: src/include/audit-laf/dialogs.rb:216 +msgid "Dispatcher Program" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox label - communication between the audit daemon and the dispatcher program +#: src/include/audit-laf/dialogs.rb:230 +msgid "C&ommunication" +msgstr "" + +#. Frame label - keep it short! +#: src/include/audit-laf/dialogs.rb:252 +msgid "Value and Action for Space Is Starting to Run Low" +msgstr "" + +#. InputField label - space on disk is starting to run low if the entered value is reached +#: src/include/audit-laf/dialogs.rb:257 +msgid "&Space Left on Disk (MB)" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox label - select an action which is performed if space on disk is low +#: src/include/audit-laf/dialogs.rb:266 +msgid "&Action" +msgstr "" + +#. InputField label - enter the path to a script (which will be executed) +#. InputField label - enter the path to a script (which will be executed) +#. InputField label - enter the path to a script (which will be executed) +#. InputField label - enter the path to a script (which will be executed) +#: src/include/audit-laf/dialogs.rb:274 src/include/audit-laf/dialogs.rb:305 +#: src/include/audit-laf/dialogs.rb:332 src/include/audit-laf/dialogs.rb:350 +msgid "Path to Script" +msgstr "" + +#. Frame label - keep it short! +#: src/include/audit-laf/dialogs.rb:281 +msgid "Value and Action for Space Is Running Low" +msgstr "" + +#. InputField label - space on disk is running low if the entered value is reached +#: src/include/audit-laf/dialogs.rb:286 +msgid "&Admin Space Left (MB) " +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox label - select an action which is performed if space on disk is running low +#: src/include/audit-laf/dialogs.rb:295 +msgid "Ac&tion" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/audit-laf/dialogs.rb:311 +msgid "Action Mail Account" +msgstr "" + +#. Frame label - keep it short! +#: src/include/audit-laf/dialogs.rb:315 +msgid "Action on Error or Disk Full" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox label - select an action which is performed if disk is full +#: src/include/audit-laf/dialogs.rb:324 +msgid "Disk &Full Action" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox label - select an action which is performed on error +#: src/include/audit-laf/dialogs.rb:342 +msgid "Disk &Error Action" +msgstr "" + +#. label of a combo box with the possibilitiy to enable/disable auditing or lock the rules +#: src/include/audit-laf/dialogs.rb:374 +msgid "&Set Enabled Flag" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item +#: src/include/audit-laf/dialogs.rb:377 src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:233 +msgid "Auditing enabled" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item +#: src/include/audit-laf/dialogs.rb:379 src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:235 +msgid "Auditing disabled" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item +#: src/include/audit-laf/dialogs.rb:381 +msgid "Rules are locked (until next boot)" +msgstr "" + +#. Label - describes what can be done in the editor +#: src/include/audit-laf/dialogs.rb:393 +msgid "Edit the rules for the audit subsystem here:" +msgstr "" + +#. label of a push button (please keep it short) +#: src/include/audit-laf/dialogs.rb:401 +msgid "&Check Syntax" +msgstr "" + +#. label of push button (please keep it short) +#: src/include/audit-laf/dialogs.rb:404 +msgid "&Restore 'audit.rules'" +msgstr "" + +#. label of push button (please keep it short) +#: src/include/audit-laf/dialogs.rb:407 +msgid "R&estore and Reset" +msgstr "" + +#. label of a push button +#: src/include/audit-laf/dialogs.rb:410 +msgid "&Load " +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:35 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Initializing Configuration of Linux Audit Framework</big></b><br>\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:39 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Initialization:</big></b><br>\n" +"Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing <b>Abort</b> now.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:43 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Saving auditd Configuration and Rules</big></b><br>\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:47 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Saving:</big></b><br>\n" +"Abort the save procedure by pressing <b>Abort</b>.\n" +"An additional dialog informs whether it is safe to do so.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. logfile_settings dialog help 1/8 +#: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:54 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Auditd Log File Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"The audit daemon is the component of the Linux Auditing System which is responsible for writing all relevant audit events to the log file <i>/var/log/audit/audit.log</i> (default).\n" +"Events may come from the <i>apparmor</i> kernel module, from applications which use <i>libaudit</i> (e.g. PAM) or incidents caused by rules (e.g. file watches).</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. logfile_settings dialog help 2/8 +#: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:60 +msgid "" +"<p>The <b>Rules for auditctl</b> dialog offers more information about rules and the possibility to add rules.\n" +"Detailed information about the log file settings can be obtained from the manual page ('man auditd.conf').</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. logfile_settings dialog help 3/8 +#: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:64 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Log File</b>: Enter the full path name to the log file\n" +"(or use <b>Select File</b>.)</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. logfile_settings dialog help 4/8 +#: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:68 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Format</b>: set <i>RAW</i> to log all data (store in a format exactly as the kernel\n" +"sends it) or <i>NOLOG</i> to discard all audit information instead of writing it on disk (does not affect\n" +"data sent to the dispatcher).</p> " +msgstr "" + +#. logfile_settings dialog help 5/8 +#: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:74 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Flush</b>: describes how to write the data to disk. If set to <i>INCREMENTAL</i> the\n" +"<b>Frequency</b> parameter tells how many records to write before issuing an explicit flush to disk.\n" +"<i>NONE</i> means: no special effort is made to flush data, <i>DATA</i>: keep data portion synced,\n" +"<i>SYNC</i>: keep data and meta-data fully synced.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. logfile_settings dialog help 6/8 +#: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:81 +msgid "" +"<p>Configure the maximum log file size (in megabytes) and the action to take when this\n" +"value is reached via <b>Size and Action</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. logfile_settings dialog help 7/8 +#: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:85 +msgid "" +"<p>If the action is set to <i>ROTATE</i> the <b>Number of Log Files</b> specifies the number\n" +"of files to keep. Set to <i>SYSLOG</i>, the audit daemon will write a warning\n" +"to /var/log/messages. With <i>SUSPEND</i> the daemon stops writing records to\n" +"disk. <i>IGNORE</i> means do nothing, <i>KEEP_LOGS</i> is similar\n" +"to ROTATE, but log files are not overwritten.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. logfile_settings dialog help 8/8 +#: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:93 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Computer Name Format</b> describes how to write the computer name to the\n" +"log file. If <i>USER</i> is set, the <b>User Defined Name</b> is\n" +"used. <i>NONE</i> means no computer name is inserted. <i>HOSTNAME</i> uses the\n" +"name returned by the 'gethostname' syscall. <i>FQD</i> uses the fully qualified\n" +"domain name.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. dispatcher dialog help 1/5 +#: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:101 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Auditd Dispatcher Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Detailed information about the dispatcher settings can be obtained from the manual page\n" +"('man auditd.conf').</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. dispatcher dialog help 2/5 +#: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:107 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Dispatcher</b>: The dispatcher program is started by the audit daemon and\n" +"gets all audit events on stdin.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. dispatcher dialog help 3/5 +#: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:111 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Communication</b>: Controls the communication between the daemon and the dispatcher\n" +"program. A <i>lossy</i> communication means that events going to the dispatcher are discarded\n" +"when the queue (a 128kB buffer) is full. Choose <i>lossless</i> if you want a blocking/lossless\n" +"communication.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. dispatcher dialog help 4/5 +#: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:118 +msgid "" +"<p>The dispatcher 'audispd' is an audit event multiplexor.\n" +"For more information see the manual pages ('man audispd' and 'man audispd.conf').</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. dispatcher dialog help 5/5 +#: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:122 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Note:</b> The dispatcher program must be owned by 'root', have '0750'\n" +" file permissions, and the full path name has to be entered.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. disk space dialog help 1/6 +#: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:126 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Auditd Disk Space Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"The settings made here refer to disk space on log partition.\n" +"For detailed information, refer to the manual page ('man auditd.conf').</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. disk space dialog help 2/6 +#: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:132 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Space Left</b> (in megabytes) tells the audit daemon when to perform an <b>Action</b> because\n" +"the system is starting to run low on space.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. disk space dialog help 3/6 +#: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:136 +msgid "" +"<p>The value for <b>Admin Space Left</b> should be lower than above. The system <b>is running\n" +"low</b> on disk space if the value is reached and the specified <b>Action</b> will be performed.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. disk space dialog hep 4/6 +#: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:140 +msgid "" +"<p>If an action is set to <i>EMAIL</i>, a warning mail will be sent to the\n" +"account specified in <b>Action Mail Account</b>.<br> <i>SYSLOG</i> means the\n" +"disk space warning will be written to /var/log/messages. <i>IGNORE</i> means\n" +"do nothing. <i>EXEC</i> runs the script specified in <b>Path to\n" +"Script</b>. <i>SUSPEND</i> stops writing records to disk. <i>SINGLE</i>\n" +"switches the system to single user mode. <i>HALT</i> shuts down the\n" +"system.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. disk space dialog help 5/6 +#: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:150 +msgid "" +"<p>You can also specify a <b>Disk Full Action</b> (disk has become full already) and\n" +"a <b>Disk Error Action</b> (performed whenever an error is detected while writing to disk).\n" +"Available actions are the same as above (except for <i>EMAIL</i>).</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. disk space dialog help 5/6 +#: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:156 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Note:</b> All scripts specified for <i>EXEC</i> must be owned\n" +"by 'root', have '0750' file permissions, and the full path name has to be entered.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. rules dialog help 1/6 +#: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:160 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Rules for auditctl</big></b><br>\n" +"This dialog offers the possibility to enable or to disable the syscall\n" +"auditing as well as to lock the audit configuration.\n" +"The selected flag from <b>Set Enabled Flag</b> will be added to the rules.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. rules dialog help 2/6 +#: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:167 +msgid "<p><b>Note:</b><br>Locking the rules means they cannot be changed until next reboot.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. rules dialog help 3/6 +#: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:171 +msgid "" +"<p>Enabling auditing without additional rules will cause the\n" +" applications which use <i>libaudit</i>, e.g. PAM to log to /var/log/audit/audit.log (default).</p> " +msgstr "" + +#. rules dialog help 4/6 +#: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:175 +msgid "" +"<p>You can also edit the rules manually, which we only recommended for advanced users.<br>\n" +"For more information about all options, see 'man auditctl'.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. rules dialog help 5/6 +#: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:179 +msgid "<p><b>Check Syntax</b> sends the rules via <i>auditctl</i> to the audit subsystem and checks the syntax.<br><b>Restore</b> restores the settings from /etc/audit/audit.rules.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. rules dialog help 6/6 +#: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:183 +msgid "" +"<p>Click <b>Restore and Reset</b> to restore the rules and reset\n" +"the changes (from previous syntax checks) by calling <i>auditctl</i>.<br>\n" +"Click <b>Load</b> to open a file selection dialog in which you can load\n" +"an example rules file.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Header of tab in tab widget +#: src/include/audit-laf/wizards.rb:123 +msgid "&Dispatcher" +msgstr "" + +#. Header of tab in tab widget +#: src/include/audit-laf/wizards.rb:129 +msgid "Disk &Space" +msgstr "" + +#. Header of tab in tab widget +#. (auditctl is a program which sends the rules to the audit subsystem) +#: src/include/audit-laf/wizards.rb:136 +msgid "&Rules for 'auditctl'" +msgstr "" + +#. Initialization dialog contents +#: src/include/audit-laf/wizards.rb:230 +msgid "Initializing..." +msgstr "" + +#. Do not check UI when running in CommandLine mode +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:231 +msgid "The rules for auditctl are locked." +msgstr "" + +#. skip it during initial and second stage or when create AY profile +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:318 +msgid "<p>To continue the configuration of Linux Auditing, the package <b>%1</b> must be installed.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:321 +msgid "<p>Install it now?</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. additionally save initial settings +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:357 +msgid "" +"Cannot start the audit daemon.\n" +"Please check /var/log/messages for auditd errors.\n" +"You can use the module 'System Log' from group\n" +"'Miscellaneous' in YaST Control Center." +msgstr "" + +#. AuditLaf read dialog caption +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:376 +msgid "Initializing Audit Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1/4 +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:391 +msgid "Check for installed packages" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 2/4 +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:393 +msgid "Read the configuration of auditd" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 3/4 +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:395 +msgid "Read the rules file" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 4/4 +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:397 +msgid "Check status of auditd" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1/4 +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:401 +msgid "Checking for packages..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 2/4 +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:403 +msgid "Reading the configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 3/4 +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:405 +msgid "Reading the rules file..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 4/4 +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:407 +msgid "Checking status..." +msgstr "" + +#. Report error +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:434 +msgid "Cannot read auditd.conf." +msgstr "" + +#. Error message +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:444 +msgid "Cannot read audit.rules." +msgstr "" + +#. question shown in a popup about start of audit daemon +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:463 +msgid "" +"Do you want to start it and enable start at boot\n" +"or only start the daemon for now?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:466 +msgid "The daemon 'auditd' doesn't run.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. message about loaded kernel module +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:470 +msgid "" +"The 'apparmor' kernel module is loaded.\n" +"The kernel uses a running audit daemon to log audit\n" +"events to /var/log/audit/audit.log (default).\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Headline of a popup +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:477 +msgid "Start of Audit Daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. label of three buttons belonging to the popup +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:479 +msgid "Start and &Enable" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:479 +msgid "&Start" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:479 +msgid "&Do not start" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:488 +msgid "Cannot start the audit daemon." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:489 +msgid "" +"The rules may be locked.\n" +"Continue to check the rules. You can change\n" +"the 'Enabled Flag', but to activate the change\n" +"a reboot is required afterwards.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Auditd read dialog caption +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:545 +msgid "Saving Audit Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1/2 +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:561 +msgid "Write the settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 2/2 +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:563 +msgid "Write the rules" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 1/2 +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:567 +msgid "Writing the settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 2/2 +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:569 +msgid "Writing the rules..." +msgstr "" + +#. check first whether rules are already locked +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:585 +msgid "The rules are already locked." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:586 +msgid "" +"Do you want to change the 'Enabled Flag'?\n" +"If yes, the new rules will be written to /etc/audit/audit.rules.\n" +"Reboot the system afterwards for the change to take effect.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Error message +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:611 +msgid "Restart of the audit daemon failed." +msgstr "" + +#. Error message +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:618 +msgid "Cannot write settings to auditd.conf." +msgstr "" + +#. Error message, rules cannot be set +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:649 +msgid "Start yast2-audit-laf again and check the rules." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:655 +msgid "Cannot write settings to auditd.rules." +msgstr "" + +#. Create a textual summary and a list of unconfigured cards +#. @return summary of the current configuration +#: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:704 +msgid "Log file" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/auth-client.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/auth-client.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/auth-client.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,1124 @@ +# Pashto translations for opensuse-i package. +# Copyright (C) 2014 SuSE Linux Products GmbH, Nuernberg +# This file is distributed under the same license as the opensuse-i package. +# Automatically generated, 2014. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: opensuse-i 18n\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-05-19 09:34+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n" +"Language-Team: none\n" +"Language: ps\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#. translators: command line help text for authentication client module +#: src/clients/auth-client.rb:46 +msgid "Authentication client configuration module" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for summary action +#: src/clients/auth-client.rb:56 +msgid "Configuration summary of the authentication client" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for summary action +#: src/clients/auth-client.rb:61 +msgid "Create autoyast rnc from @parameters" +msgstr "" + +#. Create parameter editor controls (label, input, help text) and return them. +#: src/lib/yauthclient/initial_customisation_dialog.rb:70 +msgid "None." +msgstr "" + +#. Render controls for editing parameter values, according to parameter data type. +#: src/lib/yauthclient/initial_customisation_dialog.rb:105 +msgid "Mandatory Parameters" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/initial_customisation_dialog.rb:112 +msgid "Optional Parameters" +msgstr "" + +#. Check that all mandatory parameters are set +#: src/lib/yauthclient/initial_customisation_dialog.rb:138 +msgid "Please complete all of the following mandatory parameters:\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Render overview and edit buttons on left side, config editor on right side. +#: src/lib/yauthclient/main_dialog.rb:55 +msgid "Authentication Client Config" +msgstr "" + +#. Overview of all config sections +#: src/lib/yauthclient/main_dialog.rb:62 +msgid "Global Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/main_dialog.rb:65 +msgid "Create Home Directory on Login" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/main_dialog.rb:68 +msgid "Enable SSSD daemon" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/main_dialog.rb:73 +msgid "Sections" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/main_dialog.rb:76 +msgid "New Service/Domain" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/main_dialog.rb:77 +msgid "Delete Service/Domain" +msgstr "" + +#. For the currently selection config section, render customised parameters and values in a table. +#: src/lib/yauthclient/main_dialog.rb:112 +msgid "Customisation - %s" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/main_dialog.rb:116 +#: src/lib/yauthclient/main_dialog.rb:141 +msgid "Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/main_dialog.rb:116 +msgid "Value" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/main_dialog.rb:116 +#: src/lib/yauthclient/main_dialog.rb:141 +msgid "Description" +msgstr "" + +#. For the currently selected config section, render list of additional parameters for customisation. +#: src/lib/yauthclient/main_dialog.rb:135 +msgid "More Parameters" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/main_dialog.rb:138 +msgid "Name filter:" +msgstr "" + +#. Check system environment for the proper operation of SSSD +#: src/lib/yauthclient/main_dialog.rb:167 +msgid "" +"Your system is configured for using nss_ldap.\n" +"This module is designed to configure your system via sssd.\n" +"If you continue, your nss_ldap configuration will be removed.\n" +"Do you want to continue?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/main_dialog.rb:177 +msgid "" +"Your system is configured as OES client.\n" +"This module is designed to configure your system via sssd.\n" +"If you continue, your OES client configuration will be deactivated.\n" +"Do you want to continue?" +msgstr "" + +#. Delete the chosen section (domain or service) +#: src/lib/yauthclient/main_dialog.rb:221 +msgid "You may not delete section SSSD." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/main_dialog.rb:223 +msgid "Do you really wish to delete section %s?" +msgstr "" + +#. Forbid removal of mandatory parameters +#: src/lib/yauthclient/main_dialog.rb:267 +msgid "This is a mandatory parameter and it may not be deleted." +msgstr "" + +#. Warn against removal of important parameters +#: src/lib/yauthclient/main_dialog.rb:272 +msgid "Confirm parameter removal: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/main_dialog.rb:273 +msgid "" +"The parameter is important. Removal of the parameter may cause SSSD startup failure.\n" +"Please consult SSSD manual page before moving on.\n" +"Do you still wish to continue?" +msgstr "" + +#. Save settings - validate +#: src/lib/yauthclient/main_dialog.rb:303 +msgid "No domain enabled" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/main_dialog.rb:304 +msgid "" +"No domain has been enabled in [sssd] \"domains\" parameter.\n" +"SSSD will not start, and only local authentication will be available.\n" +"Do you still wish to proceed?" +msgstr "" + +#. user must correct the mistake +#: src/lib/yauthclient/main_dialog.rb:321 +msgid "Inactive domain(s) found" +msgstr "" + +#. Render input box and dropdowns for service/domain creation +#: src/lib/yauthclient/new_section_dialog.rb:49 +msgid "Would you like to enable another service or join a domain?" +msgstr "" + +#. New service +#: src/lib/yauthclient/new_section_dialog.rb:54 +msgid "Service" +msgstr "" + +#. New domain and provider types +#: src/lib/yauthclient/new_section_dialog.rb:58 +msgid "Domain" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/new_section_dialog.rb:61 +msgid "Domain name (example.com):" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/new_section_dialog.rb:64 +msgid "Identification provider:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/new_section_dialog.rb:69 +msgid "Authentication provider:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/new_section_dialog.rb:72 +msgid "Activate Domain" +msgstr "" + +#. Create new service +#: src/lib/yauthclient/new_section_dialog.rb:105 +msgid "There are no more services to be enabled." +msgstr "" + +#. Create new domain +#: src/lib/yauthclient/new_section_dialog.rb:123 +msgid "Please enter a name for the new domain." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/new_section_dialog.rb:126 +msgid "The domain name is already in-use." +msgstr "" + +#. Define Global Parameters +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:108 +msgid "Indicates what is the syntax of the config file." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:114 +msgid "Comma separated list of services that are started when sssd itself starts." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:115 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Supported services: nss, pam, sudo, autofs, ssh" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:120 src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:174 +msgid "Number of times services should attempt to reconnect in the event of a Data Provider crash or restart before they give up" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:125 +msgid "SSSD can use more domains at the same time, but at least one must be configured or SSSD won't start." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:126 +msgid "This parameter contains the list of domains in the order these will be queried." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:130 +msgid "Default regular expression that describes how to parse the string containing user name and domain into these components" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:134 +msgid "The default printf(3)-compatible format that describes how to translate a (name, domain) tuple into a fully qualified name." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:138 +msgid "SSSD monitors the state of resolv.conf to identify when it needs to update its internal DNS resolver." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:139 +msgid "By default, we will attempt to use inotify for this, and will fall back to polling resolv.conf every five seconds if inotify cannot be used." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:143 +msgid "Directory on the filesystem where SSSD should store Kerberos replay cache files." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:147 +msgid "This string will be used as a default domain name for all names without a domain name component." +msgstr "" + +#. Define Global Services Parameters +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:154 +msgid "Bit mask that indicates which debug levels will be visible. 0x0010 is the default value as well as the lowest allowed value, 0xFFF0 is the most verbose mode." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:159 +msgid "Add a timestamp to the debug messages" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:164 +msgid "Add microseconds to the timestamp in debug messages" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:169 +msgid "Timeout in seconds between heartbeats for this service." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:179 +msgid "This option specifies the maximum number of file descriptors that may be opened at one time by this SSSD process." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:184 +msgid "This option specifies the number of seconds that a client of an SSSD process can hold onto a file descriptor without communicating on it." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:189 +msgid "If a service is not responding to ping checks (see the “timeout” option), it is first sent the SIGTERM signal that instructs it to quit gracefully." +msgstr "" + +#. NSS configuration options +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:197 +msgid "How many seconds should cache nss_sss enumerations (requests for info about all users)?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:202 +msgid "The entry cache can be set to automatically update entries in the background if they are requested beyond a percentage of the entry_cache_timeout value for the domain." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:207 +msgid "Specifies for how many seconds nss_sss should cache negative cache hits (that is, queries for invalid database entries, like nonexistent ones) before asking the back end again." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:213 +msgid "Exclude certain users from being fetched by SSS backend" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:219 +msgid "Exclude certain groups from being fetched by SSS backend" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:224 +msgid "If you want filtered user to still be group members set this option to false." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:228 +msgid "Override the user's home directory. You can either provide an absolute value or a template." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:232 src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1185 +msgid "Set a default template for a user's home directory if one is not specified explicitly by the domain's data provider." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:236 +msgid "Override the login shell for all users." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:240 +msgid "Restrict user shell to one of the listed values." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:244 +msgid "Replace any instance of these shells with the shell_fallback" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:249 +msgid "The default shell to use if an allowed shell is not installed on the machine." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:253 src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1189 +msgid "The default shell to use if the provider does not return one during lookup." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:258 src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:301 +msgid "Specifies time in seconds for which the list of subdomains will be considered valid." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:263 +msgid "Specifies time in seconds for which records in the in-memory cache will be valid." +msgstr "" + +#. PAM configuration options +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:271 +msgid "If the authentication provider is offline, how long we should allow cached logins (in days since the last successful online login)." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:276 src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:281 +msgid "The time in minutes which has to pass after offline_failed_login_attempts has been reached before a new login attempt is possible." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:286 +msgid "Controls what kind of messages are shown to the user during authentication." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:291 +msgid "For any PAM request while SSSD is online, the SSSD will attempt to immediately update the cached identity information for the user in order to ensure that authentication takes place with the latest information." +msgstr "" + +#. The kerberos domain section +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:296 src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:788 +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1073 +msgid "Display a warning N days before the password expires." +msgstr "" + +#. SUDO configuration options +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:309 +msgid "Whether or not to evaluate the sudoNotBefore and sudoNotAfter attributes that implement time-dependent sudoers entries." +msgstr "" + +#. AUTOFS configuration options +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:317 +msgid "Specifies for how many seconds the autofs responder should cache negative hits before asking the back end again." +msgstr "" + +#. SSH configuration options +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:325 +msgid "Whether or not to hash host names and addresses in the managed known_hosts file." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:330 +msgid "How many seconds to keep a host in the managed known_hosts file after its host keys were requested." +msgstr "" + +#. DOMAIN SECTIONS +#. These configuration options can be present in a domain configuration section, that is, in a section called “[domain/NAME]” +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:339 src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:344 +msgid "UID and GID limits for the domain. If a domain contains an entry that is outside these limits, it is ignored." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:350 +msgid "Read all entities from backend database (increase server load)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:355 +msgid "If the service does not terminate after “force_timeout” seconds, the monitor will forcibly shut it down by sending a SIGKILL signal." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:360 +msgid "How many seconds nss_sss should consider entries valid before asking the backend again." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:365 +msgid "How many seconds nss_sss should consider user entries valid before asking the backend again." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:370 +msgid "How many seconds nss_sss should consider group entries valid before asking the backend again." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:375 +msgid "How many seconds nss_sss should consider netgroup entries valid before asking the backend again." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:380 +msgid "How many seconds nss_sss should consider service entries valid before asking the backend again." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:385 +msgid "How many seconds sudo should consider rules valid before asking the backend again." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:390 +msgid "How many seconds the autofs service should consider automounter maps valid before asking the backend again." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:396 +msgid "Cache credentials for offline use" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:401 +msgid "Number of days entries are left in cache after last successful login before being removed during a cleanup of the cache." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:408 +msgid "The identification provider used for the domain." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:413 +msgid "Use the full name and domain (as formatted by the domain's full_name_format) as the user's login name reported to NSS." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:420 +msgid "The authentication provider used for the domain" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:426 +msgid "The access control provider used for the domain." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:431 +msgid "The provider which should handle change password operations for the domain." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:437 +msgid "The SUDO provider used for the domain." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:443 +msgid "The provider which should handle loading of selinux settings." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:449 +msgid "The provider which should handle fetching of subdomains." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:455 +msgid "The autofs provider used for the domain." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:461 +msgid "The provider used for retrieving host identity information." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:466 +msgid "Regular expression for this domain that describes how to parse the string containing user name and domain into these components." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:471 +msgid "A printf(3)-compatible format that describes how to translate a (name, domain) tuple for this domain into a fully qualified name." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:477 +msgid "Provides the ability to select preferred address family to use when performing DNS lookups." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:482 +msgid "Defines the amount of time (in seconds) to wait for a reply from the DNS resolver before assuming that it is unreachable." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:486 +msgid "If service discovery is used in the back end, specifies the domain part of the service discovery DNS query." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:490 +msgid "Override the primary GID value with the one specified." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:495 +msgid "Treat user and group names as case sensitive." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:500 +msgid "When a user or group is looked up by name in the proxy provider, a second lookup by ID is performed to 'canonicalize' the name in case the requested name was an alias." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:505 +msgid "Use this homedir as default value for all subdomains within this domain." +msgstr "" + +#. Following options will be provided by SSSD's 'simple' access-control provider +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:511 +msgid "Comma separated list of users who are allowed to log in." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:516 +msgid "Comma separated list of groups who are allowed to log in. This applies only to groups within this SSSD domain." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:521 +msgid "Comma separated list of groups that are explicitly denied access. This applies only to groups within this SSSD domain." +msgstr "" + +#. The local domain section +#. This section contains settings for domain that stores users and groups in SSSD native database, that is, a domain that uses id_provider=local. +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:530 +msgid "The tools append the login name to base_directory and use that as the home directory." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:535 +msgid "Indicate if a home directory should be created by default for new users." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:540 +msgid "Indicate if a home directory should be removed by default for deleted users." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:545 +msgid "Used by sss_useradd(8) to specify the default permissions on a newly created home directory." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:550 +msgid "The skeleton directory, which contains files and directories to be copied in the user's home directory, when the home directory is created by sss_useradd(8)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:555 +msgid "The mail spool directory." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:559 +msgid "The command that is run after a user is removed." +msgstr "" + +#. The ldap domain section +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:568 +msgid "URIs (ldap://) of LDAP servers (comma separated)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:574 +msgid "The default base DN to use for performing LDAP sudo rules." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:579 +msgid "Specifies the comma-separated list of URIs of the LDAP servers to which SSSD should connect in the order of preference." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:585 src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:591 +msgid "Specifies the comma-separated list of URIs of the LDAP servers to which SSSD should connect in the order of preference to change the password of a user." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:597 +msgid "Base DN for LDAP search" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:604 +msgid "LDAP schema type" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:608 +msgid "The default bind DN to use for performing LDAP operations." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:614 +msgid "The type of the authentication token of the default bind DN." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:618 +msgid "The authentication token of the default bind DN." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:623 +msgid "The object class of a user entry in LDAP." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:628 +msgid "The LDAP attribute that corresponds to the user's login name." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:633 +msgid "The LDAP attribute that corresponds to the user's id." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:638 +msgid "The LDAP attribute that corresponds to the user's primary group id." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:643 +msgid "The LDAP attribute that corresponds to the user's gecos field." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:648 +msgid " The LDAP attribute that contains the name of the user's home directory." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:653 +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the path to the user's default shell." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:658 +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the UUID/GUID of an LDAP user object." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:663 +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the objectSID of an LDAP user object." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:668 src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:873 +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains timestamp of the last modification of the parent object." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:673 +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (date of the last password change)." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:678 +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (minimum password age)." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:683 +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (maximum password age)." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:688 +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (password warning period)." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:693 +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (password inactivity period)." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:698 +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow or ldap_account_expire_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (account expiration date)." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:703 +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=mit_kerberos, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute storing the date and time of last password change in kerberos." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:708 +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=mit_kerberos, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute storing the date and time when current password expires." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:713 +msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=ad, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute storing the expiration time of the account." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:718 +msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=ad, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute storing the user account control bit field." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:723 +msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=rhds or equivalent, this parameter determines if access is allowed or not." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:728 +msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines if access is allowed or not." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:733 +msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines until which date access is granted." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:738 +msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines the hours of a day in a week when access is granted." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:743 +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the user's Kerberos User Principal Name (UPN)." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:747 +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the user's SSH public keys." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:752 +msgid "Some directory servers, for example Active Directory, might deliver the realm part of the UPN in lower case, which might cause the authentication to fail." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:753 +msgid "Set this option to true if you want to use an upper-case realm." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:758 +msgid "Specifies how many seconds SSSD has to wait before refreshing its cache of enumerated records." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:763 +msgid "Determine how often to check the cache for inactive entries (such as groups with no members and users who have never logged in) and remove them to save space." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:768 +msgid "The LDAP attribute that corresponds to the user's full name." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:773 +msgid "The LDAP attribute that lists the user's group memberships." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:778 +msgid "If access_provider=ldap and ldap_access_order=authorized_service, SSSD will use the presence of the authorizedService attribute in the user's LDAP entry to determine access privilege." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:783 +msgid "If access_provider=ldap and ldap_access_order=host, SSSD will use the presence of the host attribute in the user's LDAP entry to determine access privilege." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:793 +msgid "The object class of a group entry in LDAP." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:798 +msgid "The LDAP attribute that corresponds to the group name." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:803 +msgid "The LDAP attribute that corresponds to the group's id." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:808 +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the names of the group's members." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:813 +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the UUID/GUID of an LDAP group object." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:818 +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the objectSID of an LDAP group object." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:823 +msgid " The LDAP attribute that contains timestamp of the last modification of the parent object." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:829 +msgid "If ldap_schema is set to a schema format that supports nested groups (e.g. RFC2307bis), then this option controls how many levels of nesting SSSD will follow." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:835 +msgid "This option tells SSSD to take advantage of an Active Directory-specific feature which may speed up group lookup operations on deployments with complex or deep nested groups." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:841 +msgid "This option tells SSSD to take advantage of an Active Directory-specific feature which might speed up initgroups operations (most notably when dealing with complex or deep nested groups)." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:847 +msgid " The object class of a netgroup entry in LDAP." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:853 +msgid "The LDAP attribute that corresponds to the netgroup name." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:858 +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the names of the netgroup's members." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:863 +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the (host, user, domain) netgroup triples." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:868 +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the UUID/GUID of an LDAP netgroup object." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:878 +msgid "The object class of a service entry in LDAP." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:883 +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the name of service attributes and their aliases." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:888 +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the port managed by this service." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:893 +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the protocols understood by this service." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:899 +msgid "An optional base DN, search scope and LDAP filter to restrict LDAP searches for this attribute type." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:904 +msgid " Specifies the timeout (in seconds) that ldap searches are allowed to run before they are cancelled and cached results are returned (and offline mode is entered)." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:909 +msgid "Specifies the timeout (in seconds) that ldap searches for user and group enumerations are allowed to run before they are cancelled and cached results are returned (and offline mode is entered)." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:914 +msgid "Specifies the timeout (in seconds) after which the poll(2)/select(2) following a connect(2) returns in case of no activity." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:919 +msgid "Specifies a timeout (in seconds) after which calls to synchronous LDAP APIs will abort if no response is received." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:924 +msgid "Specifies a timeout (in seconds) that a connection to an LDAP server will be maintained." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:929 +msgid "Specify the number of records to retrieve from LDAP in a single request. Some LDAP servers enforce a maximum limit per-request." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:934 +msgid "Disable the LDAP paging control." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:938 +msgid "When communicating with an LDAP server using SASL, specify the minimum security level necessary to establish the connection." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:943 +msgid "Specify the number of group members that must be missing from the internal cache in order to trigger a dereference lookup." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:950 +msgid "Validate server certification in LDAP TLS session" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:954 +msgid "Specifies the file that contains certificates for all of the Certificate Authorities that sssd will recognize." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:958 +msgid "Specifies the path of a directory that contains Certificate Authority certificates in separate individual files." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:962 +msgid "Specifies the file that contains the certificate for the client's key." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:966 +msgid "Specifies the file that contains the client's key." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:971 +msgid "Specifies acceptable cipher suites." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:976 +msgid "Specifies that the id_provider connection must also use tls to protect the channel." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:981 +msgid "Specifies that SSSD should attempt to map user and group IDs from the ldap_user_objectsid and ldap_group_objectsid attributes instead of relying on ldap_user_uid_number and ldap_group_gid_number." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:985 +msgid "Specify the SASL mechanism to use." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:990 +msgid "Specify the SASL authorization id to use." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:995 +msgid "Specify the SASL realm to use." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1000 +msgid "If set to true, the LDAP library would perform a reverse lookup to canonicalize the host name during a SASL bind." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1005 +msgid "Specify the keytab to use when using SASL/GSSAPI." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1010 +msgid "Specifies that the id_provider should init Kerberos credentials (TGT)." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1015 +msgid "Specifies the lifetime in seconds of the TGT if GSSAPI is used." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1020 +msgid "Select the policy to evaluate the password expiration on the client side." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1025 +msgid "Specifies whether automatic referral chasing should be enabled." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1030 +msgid "Specifies the service name to use when service discovery is enabled." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1034 +msgid "Specifies the service name to use to find an LDAP server which allows password changes when service discovery is enabled." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1039 +msgid "Specifies whether to update the ldap_user_shadow_last_change attribute with days since the Epoch after a password change operation." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1044 +msgid "If using access_provider = ldap and ldap_access_order = filter (default), this option is mandatory. It specifies an LDAP search filter criterion that must be met for the user to be granted access on this host." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1049 +msgid " With this option a client side evaluation of access control attributes can be enabled." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1055 +msgid "Comma separated list of access control options." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1060 +msgid "Specifies how alias dereferencing is done when performing a search." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1065 +msgid "Allows to retain local users as members of an LDAP group for servers that use the RFC2307 schema." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1078 +msgid "IP address or host names of Kerberos servers (comma separated)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1082 +msgid "Specifies the comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the Kerberos servers to which SSSD should connect, in the order of preference." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1087 +msgid "Kerberos realm (e.g. EXAMPLE.COM)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1091 src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1096 +msgid "If the change password service is not running on the KDC, alternative servers can be defined here." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1101 +msgid "Directory to store credential caches." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1106 +msgid "Location of the user's credential cache." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1111 +msgid " Timeout in seconds after an online authentication request or change password request is aborted." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1116 +msgid "Verify with the help of krb5_keytab that the TGT obtained has not been spoofed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1121 +msgid "The location of the keytab to use when validating credentials obtained from KDCs." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1126 +msgid "Store the password of the user if the provider is offline and use it to request a TGT when the provider comes online again." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1130 +msgid "Request a renewable ticket with a total lifetime, given as an integer immediately followed by a time unit." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1134 +msgid "Request ticket with a with a lifetime, given as an integer immediately followed by a time unit." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1138 +msgid "The time in seconds between two checks if the TGT should be renewed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1143 +msgid "Enables flexible authentication secure tunneling (FAST) for Kerberos pre-authentication." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1147 +msgid "Specifies the server principal to use for FAST." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1152 +msgid "Specifies if the host and user principal should be canonicalized." +msgstr "" + +#. The Active Directory domain section +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1164 +msgid "Specifies the name of the Active Directory domain." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1169 +msgid "IP addresses or host names of AD servers (comma separated)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1173 +msgid "The comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the AD servers to which SSSD should connect in order of preference." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1177 +msgid "Optional. May be set on machines where the hostname(5) does not reflect the fully qualified name used in the Active Directory domain to identify this host." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1181 +msgid "Override the user's home directory." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1194 +msgid " Specifies the lower bound of the range of POSIX IDs to use for mapping Active Directory user and group SIDs." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1199 +msgid "Specifies the upper bound of the range of POSIX IDs to use for mapping Active Directory user and group SIDs." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1204 +msgid "Specifies the number of IDs available for each slice." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1208 +msgid "Specify the domain SID of the default domain." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1212 +msgid "Specify the name of the default domain." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1217 +msgid "Changes the behavior of the ID-mapping algorithm to behave more similarly to winbind's “idmap_autorid” algorithm." +msgstr "" + +#. The Active Directory domain section +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1229 +msgid "Specifies the name of the IPA domain." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1234 +msgid "IP addresses or host names of IPA servers (comma separated)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1238 +msgid "May be set on machines where the hostname(5) does not reflect the fully qualified name." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1243 +msgid "The automounter location this IPA client will be using." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1248 +msgid "This option tells SSSD to automatically update the DNS server built into FreeIPA v2 with the IP address of this client." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1253 +msgid "The TTL to apply to the client DNS record when updating it." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/yauthclient/params.rb:1257 +msgid "Choose the interface whose IP address should be used for dynamic DNS updates." +msgstr "" + +#. autofs may only start after sssd is started +#: src/modules/AuthClient.rb:230 +msgid "Failed to enable %s service. Please use system journal to diagnose." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthClient.rb:232 +msgid "Failed to start %s service. Please use system journal (journalctl -n -u %s) to diagnose." +msgstr "" + +#. end Export +#. ################################################################ +#. ################################################################ +#. Summary() +#. returns html formated configuration summary +#. @return summary +#: src/modules/AuthClient.rb:345 +msgid "System is configured for using nss_ldap.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthClient.rb:348 +msgid "System is configured for using sssd.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthClient.rb:354 +msgid "System is configured for using OES.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthClient.rb:357 +msgid "System is configured for using /etc/passwd only.\n" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/auth-server.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/auth-server.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/auth-server.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,3226 @@ +# Pashto translations for opensuse-i package. +# Copyright (C) 2014 SuSE Linux Products GmbH, Nuernberg +# This file is distributed under the same license as the opensuse-i package. +# Automatically generated, 2014. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: opensuse-i 18n\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-05-19 09:34+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n" +"Language-Team: none\n" +"Language: ps\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#. Command line help text for the Xldap-server module +#: src/clients/auth-server.rb:37 +msgid "Configuration of Authentication server" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/auth-server.rb:49 +msgid "Enable/Disable the service" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/auth-server.rb:53 +msgid "Add a new database" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/auth-server.rb:60 +msgid "Show a list of currently available databases" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/auth-server.rb:64 +msgid "Show a list of currently configured schemas" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/auth-server.rb:68 +msgid "Add a schema to the list" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/auth-server.rb:72 +msgid "Enable the service" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/auth-server.rb:73 +msgid "Disable the service" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/auth-server.rb:75 +msgid "Database type (\"hdb\" or \"bdb\")" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/auth-server.rb:79 +msgid "Base DN for the database" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/auth-server.rb:83 +msgid "DN for the administrator login" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/auth-server.rb:87 +msgid "Administrator password" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/auth-server.rb:95 +msgid "Directory for the database" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/auth-server.rb:98 +msgid "File" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/auth-server.rb:99 +msgid "Position" +msgstr "" + +#. map edb = LdapServer::ReadDatabase(); +#. y2milestone("DBs: %1", edb); +#. +#: src/clients/auth-server.rb:192 +msgid "No base DN provided\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/auth-server.rb:209 +msgid "Database cannot be created when the service is not enabled" +msgstr "" + +#. y2milestone("db-options : %1", db); +#: src/clients/auth-server.rb:219 +msgid "Error while adding the database" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#. error popup +#: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:58 +#: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:228 +msgid "The LDAP database has already been created. You can change the settings later in the installed system." +msgstr "" + +#. y2error( "sysconfig var is '%1'", SCR::Read( .sysconfig.openldap.OPENLDAP_REGISTER_SLP ) ); +#: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:101 +msgid "[root password]" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:103 +msgid "[manually set]" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:106 +msgid "Unable to retrieve the system root password. Set an LDAP server password to continue." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:112 +msgid "Setting up LDAP Master Server:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:114 +msgid "Setting up standalone LDAP Server:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:121 +msgid "Base DN: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:125 +msgid "Root DN: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:128 +msgid "LDAP Password: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:135 +msgid "Setting up LDAP Slave Server" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:143 +msgid "Provider: " +msgstr "" + +#. all known interfaces for testing +#: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:185 +msgid "Open Port in Firewall" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:188 +#: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:203 +msgid "YES" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:190 +#: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:204 +#: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:212 +msgid "NO" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:194 +msgid "Firewall is disabled" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:200 +msgid "Register at SLP Daemon: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:212 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2192 +msgid "Start LDAP Server: " +msgstr "" + +#. Rich text title for LdapServer in proposals +#: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:253 +msgid "OpenLDAP Server" +msgstr "" + +#. Menu title for LdapServer in proposals +#: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:257 +msgid "Open&LDAP Server" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error popup before aborting the module +#. translators: error popup before aborting the module +#: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:280 +#: src/include/auth-server/complex.rb:53 +msgid "" +"The package '%1' is not available.\n" +"YaST2 cannot continue the configuration\n" +"without installing the package." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error popup before aborting the module +#. translators: error popup before aborting the module +#: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:291 +#: src/include/auth-server/complex.rb:64 +msgid "" +"YaST2 cannot continue the configuration\n" +"without installing the required packages." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:309 +msgid "OpenLDAP Replication Setup failed. Reconfigure after the installation has finished." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:344 +msgid "" +"OpenLDAP Server: Common server certificate not available.\n" +"StartTLS is disabled." +msgstr "" + +#. Command line help text for the Xldap-server module +#: src/clients/openldap-mirrormode.rb:36 +msgid "Configuration of OpenLDAP MirrorMode replication" +msgstr "" + +#. Start new config wizward +#: src/include/auth-server/complex.rb:106 +msgid "Existing configuration detected." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/complex.rb:107 +msgid "" +"You have an existing configuration, but the LDAP server is currently not running.\n" +"Do you want to start the server now and re-read its configuration data or do you \n" +"want to create a new configuration from scratch?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/complex.rb:112 +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:202 +msgid "Restart" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/complex.rb:114 +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:203 +msgid "New Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Start new config wizward +#: src/include/auth-server/complex.rb:134 +msgid "Migrate existing Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/complex.rb:135 +msgid "" +"Your system is currently configured to use the configuration file\n" +"/etc/openldap/slapd.conf. YaST only supports the dynamic configuration\n" +"database of OpenLDAP (back-config). Do you want to migrate your existing\n" +"configuration to the configuration database?\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/complex.rb:148 +msgid "Migrate existing configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/complex.rb:151 +msgid "Create a new configuration from scratch" +msgstr "" + +#. LdapServer summary dialog caption +#: src/include/auth-server/complex.rb:231 +msgid "Authentication Server Configuration Summary" +msgstr "" + +#. heading for all dialogs +#. FIXME: adapt to your needs +#. Initialization dialog caption +#. Initialization dialog caption +#. Initialization dialog caption +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:32 src/include/auth-server/wizards.rb:52 +#: src/include/auth-server/wizards.rb:122 +#: src/include/auth-server/wizards.rb:205 +#: src/include/auth-server/wizards.rb:298 +msgid "Authentication Server Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. ********************* +#. * dialog functions ** +#. ******************** +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:48 +msgid "General Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. list of valid encoding methods for password inputs, used by add database and edit database +#. dialogs +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:52 src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:40 +msgid "&Start LDAP Server" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:77 src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:59 +msgid "Register at an &SLP Daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. `HWeight(1, `PushButton( `id( `pb_interface_ldaps), "Interfaces ...")), +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:88 +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:127 +msgid "Firewall Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. create new item +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:198 +msgid "The LDAP Server is not running." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:199 +msgid "Do you want to start it now to re-read its configuration data or do you want to create a new configuration from scratch?" +msgstr "" + +#. get helps page +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:227 +msgid "help page for item <b>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:228 +msgid "</b> not available" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:327 +msgid "Server Type" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:338 +msgid "Stand-alone server" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:346 +msgid "Master server in a replication setup" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:354 +msgid "Replica (slave) server.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:355 +msgid "All data, including configuration, is replicated from a remote server." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:386 +msgid "" +"YaST was not able to determine the fully qualified hostname of this\n" +"computer. \n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:389 +msgid "Setting up a replication master is currently not possible." +msgstr "" + +#. Button text +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:452 +msgid "&Advanced Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:464 +msgid "Kerberos Authentication" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:467 +msgid "&Enable Kerberos Authentication" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:494 +msgid "Basic Kerberos Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. TextEntry label: "Realm" is a typical kerberos phrase. +#. Please think twice please before you translate this, +#. and check with kerberos.pot how it is translated there. +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:502 +msgid "R&ealm" +msgstr "" + +#. abort? +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:563 +msgid "" +"The package '%1' is not available.\n" +"YaST2 cannot enable Kerberos\n" +"without installing the package." +msgstr "" + +#. caption +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:595 +msgid "Advanced Kerberos Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. tree widget label +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:623 +msgid "Advanced &Options" +msgstr "" + +#. label widget +#. header label +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:637 +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:729 +msgid "Current Selection: " +msgstr "" + +#. tree widget headline +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:789 +msgid "Configuration:" +msgstr "" + +#. ############## input handler ################ +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:913 +msgid "LDAP Authentication failed. Try again?\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:914 +msgid "Error message: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:946 +msgid "Create new account in the first database" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:960 +msgid "User Id" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:967 +msgid "Container Object" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:973 +msgid "Browse" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:980 +msgid "Generate a Random Password" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:992 +msgid "Use the \"cn=config\" Account for Replication" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1007 +msgid "Configure Account for Replication" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1057 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:914 +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1173 +msgid "is not a valid LDAP DN" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1068 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1679 +msgid "Password" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1073 +msgid "Validate Password" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1093 +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1565 +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:910 +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:424 +msgid "Enter a password" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1101 +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1570 +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:916 +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:435 +msgid "The passwords you have entered do not match. Try again." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1131 +msgid "Provider Details" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1139 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1607 +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1702 +msgid "Protocol" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1146 +msgid "Provider Hostname" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1153 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1624 +msgid "Use StartTLS" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1162 +msgid "Administration Password for the \"cn=config\" Database" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1171 +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:261 +msgid "C&A Certificate File (PEM Format)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1174 +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:264 +msgid "Bro&wse..." +msgstr "" + +#. file selection headline +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1231 +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:567 +msgid "Select CA Certificate File" +msgstr "" + +#. **************************** +#. * tls handlers +#. *************************** +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1237 +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:458 +msgid "Select a Valid CA Certificate File" +msgstr "" + +#. Doing these checks during installation will +#. most probably fail +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1277 +msgid "Failed to open connection to the \"cn=config\" database on the provider server.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1280 +msgid "" +"Verify that the provider server allows remote connections to the \n" +"\"cn=config\" database and that you entered the correct password.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1287 +msgid "The following error messages were returned:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1302 +msgid "An error occurred while verifying the TLS/SSL configuration." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1314 +msgid "Do you want to import a different CA/Server Certificate?" +msgstr "" + +#. Check if the syncrepl config of cn=config makes sense +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1325 +msgid "The replication configuration on the provider server is missing.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1328 +msgid "Click Continue to create it now." +msgstr "" + +#. this test needs only be done in a non-MirrorMode setup +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1380 +msgid "" +"The replication configuration on the master server indicates that\n" +"it is already acting as a replication consumer.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1383 +msgid "Setting up cascaded replication of the cn=config is currently not supported." +msgstr "" + +#. 2. Verify that the binddn/credential combination acutally works +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1410 +msgid "Checking the authentication credentials defined in the replication configuration on the provider server failed.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1413 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1971 +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1998 +msgid "The test returned the following error messages:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1424 +msgid "Click \"Continue\" to correct this now." +msgstr "" + +#. ReplicatonSummary dialog +#. @return dialog result +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1519 +msgid "Replication Master setup" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1522 +msgid "" +"To act as a master server for replication, the configuration database needs\n" +"to be remotely accessible. Set a password for the configuration database.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1525 +msgid "" +"\n" +"(Remote access to the Configuration database will be restricted to encrypted\n" +"LDAP Connections.)\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1532 +msgid "Enter new &Password" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1537 +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:964 +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:1006 +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:406 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:219 +msgid "&Validate Password" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1543 +msgid "Prepare for MirrorMode replication (generates the serverId attribute)" +msgstr "" + +#. The "Startup Configuration node for the main tree widget +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:17 +msgid "<h3>Startup Configuration</h3>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:20 +msgid "<h4>Start LDAP Server</h4>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:21 +msgid "" +"<p>Select <b>Yes</b> if the LDAP server should be started automatically as \n" +"part of the boot process. Select <b>No</b> if the LDAP server should not be started. Note:\n" +"After selecting <b>No</b>, you cannot change the OpenLDAP configuration.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:26 +msgid "<h4>Protocol Listeners</h4>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:27 +msgid "<p>Enable and disable the various protocol listeners of OpenLDAP.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:30 +msgid "" +"<p><b>LDAP</b> is the standard LDAP interface on Port 389. TLS/SSL secured communication\n" +"is possible with the StartTLS operation when you have a server certificate configured.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:33 +msgid "" +"<p><b>LDAPS</b> enables the \"LDAP over SSL (ldaps)\" interface for SSL protected\n" +"connections on port 636. This only works if you have a server certificate configured (see \"Global Settings\"/\"TLS Settings\").\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:36 +msgid "" +"<p><b>LDAPI</b> enables the \"LDAP over IPC\" interface for accessing the\n" +"LDAP server via a Unix Domain Socket. Do not disable the LDAPI interface \n" +"as YaST uses it to communicate with the server.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:41 +msgid "<h4>Firewall Settings</h4>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:42 +msgid "" +"<p>Select whether SuSEFirewall should allow access on the LDAP-related\n" +"network ports or not.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. First part of the Add Database Widget +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:46 +msgid "<h3>Basic Database Settings</h3>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:49 +msgid "" +"<p>Choose the <b>Database</b> from <b>hdb</b> <b>bdb</b> and <b>mdb</b>. <b>Hdb</b> is a\n" +"variant of the <b>bdb</b> backend that uses a hierarchical database layout and\n" +"supports subtree renames. Otherwise it is identical to <b>bdb</b>. A\n" +"<b>hdb</b>-Database needs a larger <b>idlcachesize</b> than a\n" +"<b>bdb</b>-Database for a good search performance.\n" +"<b>mdb</b>-Database uses OpenLDAP's Lightning Memory-Mapped DB (LMDB) library to store data.\n" +"It similar to the <b>hdb</b> backend but it is both more space-efficient and more execution-efficient.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:58 +msgid "" +"<p>The <b>Base DN</b> option specifies the name of the root entry \n" +"of the database being created.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:61 +msgid "" +"<p>The <b>Administrator DN</b> along with a <b>LDAP Administrator Password</b> \n" +"specifies a superuser identity for the database, surpassing all ACLs and other \n" +"administrative limit restrictions. Checking <b>Append Base DN</b> appends the \n" +"<b>Base DN</b> entered above, for example, a base DN of <tt>dc=example,dc=com</tt>\n" +"and Administrator DN of <tt>c=Admin</tt> would combine to an effective Administrator DN\n" +"of <tt>c=Admin,dc=example,dc=com</tt>.</p> " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:69 +msgid "" +"<p>If this wizard was started during installation, the \n" +"<b>LDAP Administrator Password</b> is initially set to the system's root password\n" +"entered earlier in the installation process.</p> " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:74 +msgid "" +"<p>To use this database as default for the OpenLDAP client tools \n" +"(e.g. ldapsearch), check <b>Use this database as the default for OpenLDAP\n" +"clients</b>. This will result in the hostname \"localhost\" and the above \n" +"entered <b>Base DN</b> being written to the OpenLDAP client configuration \n" +"file <tt>/etc/openldap/ldap.conf</tt>. This checkbox is selected by default\n" +"when creating the first database on a server.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:82 +msgid "" +"YaST currently does not support this database. You can not \n" +"change any configuration settings here.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:85 +msgid "" +"<p>To enable or disable plaintext authentication (LDAP Simple Bind)\n" +"for the configuration database, click the associated checkbox. Plaintext \n" +"authentication to the configuration database will only be allowed when \n" +"using sufficiently protected (e.g. SSL/TLS encrypted) connections.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:91 +msgid "" +"<p>To change the administration password for the configuration database, \n" +"click <b>Change Password</b>. \n" +"A Popup will prompt you to enter the new password and select the \n" +"<b>Password Encryption</b>. \n" +"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already been \n" +"set in the configuration.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:99 +msgid "<h3>Edit BDB Database</h3>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:100 +msgid "<p>Change basic settings of BDB and HDB Databases.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:101 +msgid "" +"<p>Enter the complete DN or only the first part and append the base DN automatically\n" +"with <b>Append Base DN</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:104 +msgid "" +"<p>To change the password for the administrator account, click <b>Change Password</b>.\n" +"A Popup will prompt you to enter the new password and select the <b>Password Encryption</b>.\n" +"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already been set in the configuration.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:109 +msgid "" +"<p>With the <b>Entry Cache</b> and <b>Index Cache (IDL cache)</b> you can adjust\n" +"the sizes of OpenLDAP's internal caches. The <b>Entry Cache</b> defines the number of entries\n" +"that are kept in OpenLDAP's in-memory entry cache. If it is possible (enough RAM) this number\n" +"should be large enough to keep the whole database in memory. The <b>Index Cache (IDL cache)</b> \n" +"is used to speed up searches on indexed attributes. In general especially HDB-Databases require a\n" +"large IDL cache for good search performance (three times the size of the entry cache as a rule of\n" +"thumbs).</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:118 +msgid "<h3>Password Policy Settings</h3>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:119 +msgid "" +"<p>To make use of password policies for this database, enable \n" +"<b>Enable Password Policies</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:122 +msgid "" +"<p>Check <b>Hash Clear Text Passwords</b> to specify that the OpenLDAP server\n" +"should encrypt clear text passwords present in add and modify requests before storing them\n" +"in the database. Note that this violates the X.500/LDAP information model, but may be\n" +"needed to compensate for LDAP clients that do not use the password modify extended operation \n" +"to manage passwords.</p> " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:129 +msgid "" +"<p>If <b>Disclose \"Account Locked\" Status</b> is enabled, users trying to\n" +"authenticate to a locked account are notified that their account is\n" +"locked. This notification might provide useful information to an\n" +"attacker. Sites sensitive to security issues should not enable this\n" +"option.</p> \n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:136 +msgid "<p>Enter the name of the default policy object in <b>Default Policy Object DN</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:139 +msgid "" +"<p>Create or change the default policy by clicking <b>Edit Policy</b>. You may\n" +"be asked to enter the LDAP administrator password afterwards to allow the\n" +"Policy Object being read from the server.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:144 +msgid "<h3>Index Configuration</h3>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:145 +msgid "<p>Change the indexing options of a hdb of bdb-Database.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:146 +msgid "<p>The table displays a list of attributes which currently have an index defined.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:149 +msgid "" +"<p>Indexes are used by OpenLDAP to improve search performance on specific\n" +"types of searches. Indexes should be configured corresponding to the most\n" +"common searches on a database. YaST allows you to setup three different types\n" +"of indexes.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:155 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Presence</b>: This index is used for searches with presence filters\n" +"(i.e. <tt>(attributeType=*)</tt>). Presence indexes should only be configured\n" +"for attributes that occur rarely in the database.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:160 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Equality</b>: This index is used for searches with equality filters \n" +"(i.e.(<tt>(attributeType=<exact values>)</tt>). An <b>Equality</b> index\n" +"should always be configured with the <tt>objectclass</tt> attribute.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:165 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Substring</b>: This index is used for searches with substring filters\n" +"(i.e. <tt>(attributeType=<substring>*)</tt>)</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:168 +msgid "" +"<p>Use <b>Add</b> to define indexing options for a new attribute,\n" +"<b>Delete</b> to delete an existing index and <b>Edit</b> to change the\n" +"indexing options of an already indexed attribute.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:173 +msgid "" +"<p>Note: Depending on the database size it can take a while until newly added\n" +"indexes will get active on a database. After the configuration has been\n" +"written to the server, a background task will start to generate the indexing\n" +"information for the database.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:179 +msgid "<h3>Access Control Configuration</h3>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:182 +msgid "" +"<p>This table gives you an overview of all Access Control rules that are\n" +"currently configured for the selected database</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:185 +msgid "" +"<p>For each rule, you can see which target objects it matches. To see a more\n" +"detailed view of a rule or to change one, select the rule in the table and\n" +"click <b>Edit</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:190 +msgid "" +"<p>Use <b>Add</b> to create new access control rules and <b>Delete</b> to\n" +"delete an access control rule.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:193 +msgid "" +"<p>OpenLDAP's access control evaluation stops at the first rule whose target\n" +"definition (DN, filter and attributes) matches the entry being\n" +"accessed. Therefore you should order the rules according to your needs, using\n" +"the <b>Up</b> and <b>Down</b> buttons.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:199 +msgid "<h3>Replication Provider Settings</h3>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:202 +msgid "" +"<p>Select the \"<b>Enable ldapsync provider for this database</b>\" checkbox, if you want to \n" +"be able to replicate the currently selected database to another server.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:205 +msgid "<h4>Checkpoint Settings</h4>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:206 +msgid "" +"<p>Here you can specify how often the synchronization state indicator (stored\n" +"in the \"<i>contextCSN</i>\"-Attribute) is written to the database. It is synced\n" +"to the database after the number of write \"<i>Operations</i>\" you specify or\n" +"after more than the specified \"<i>Minutes</i>\" have passed since the indicator\n" +"has last been written. By default (both values are '0') the state indicator is\n" +"only written after a clean shutdown. Writing it more often can result in\n" +"a faster startup time after an unclean shutdown but might result in a small\n" +"performance hit in environments with many LDAP write operations.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:216 +msgid "<h4>Session log</h4>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:217 +msgid "" +"<p>Configures an in-memory session log for recording information about write operations\n" +"made on the database. Specify how many write operation should be recorded in the session log. \n" +"Configuring a session log is only useful for \"<i>refreshOnly</i>\" replication. In \n" +"such a case it can speed up replication and reduce the load on the master server.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:223 +msgid "<h3>Replication Consumer Settings</h3>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:226 +msgid "" +"<p>Select \"<b>This database is a Replication Consumer</b>\" if you want the\n" +"database to be a replica of a database on another server.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:229 +msgid "<h4>Provider</h4>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:230 +msgid "" +"Enter the connection details for the replication connection to the master\n" +"server here. Select the protocol to use (<b>ldap</b> or <b>ldaps</b>) and\n" +"enter the fully qualified hostname of the master server. It is important to\n" +"use the fully qualified hostname to verify the master server's TLS/SSL\n" +"certificate. Adjust the port number if the master server is using non-standard\n" +"ldap ports.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:238 +msgid "<h4>Replication Type</h4>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:239 +msgid "<p>OpenLDAP supports different modes of replication:</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:240 +msgid "" +"<p><b>refreshOnly</b>: The slave server will periodically open a new\n" +"connection, trigger a synchronization and close the connection again. The\n" +"interval how often this synchronization happens can be configured via the\n" +"<b>Replication Interval</b> setting.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:246 +msgid "" +"<p><b>refreshAndPersist</b>: The slave server will open a persistent\n" +"connection to the master server for synchronization. Updated entries on the\n" +"master server are immediately sent to the slave via this connection.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:251 +msgid "<h4>Authentication</h4>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:252 +msgid "" +"<p>Specify a DN and password which the slave server should use to authenticate against the master.\n" +"The specified DN needs to have read access to all entries in the replicated database on the master.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:255 +msgid "<h4>Update Referral</h4>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:256 +msgid "" +"<p>As the slave database is readonly, the slave server will answer write\n" +"operations with an LDAP referral. \n" +"By default, this referral points the client to the master server. You can configure a different update referral here.\n" +"This is e.g. useful in a cascaded replication setup where the provider for the\n" +"slave server is as slave server too. </p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:264 +msgid "<p><b><big>Initializing LDAP Server Configuration</big></b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:267 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Initialization:</big></b><br>\n" +"Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing <b>Abort</b> now.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:271 +msgid "<p><b><big>Saving LDAP Server Configuration</big></b></p> \n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:274 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Saving:</big></b><br>\n" +"Abort the save procedure by pressing <b>Abort</b>. An additional dialog\n" +"informs you whether it is safe to do so.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Summary dialog help 1/3 +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:280 +msgid "<h3>LDAP Server Configuration Summary</h3>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:283 +msgid "" +"<p>This dialog provides a short summary about the configuration you have\n" +"created. Click <b>Finish</b> to write the configuration and leave the LDAP\n" +"Server module.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Configuration Wizard Step 1 +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:289 +msgid "<p>With <b>Start LDAP Server Yes or No</b>, start or stop the LDAP server.</p> " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:292 +msgid "<p>If you select <b>Yes</b>, click <b>Next</b> to start the configuration wizard.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:295 +msgid "" +"<p>If the Firewall is enabled, open the required network ports\n" +"for OpenLDAP by checking the corresponding checkbox.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Configuration Wizard Step 2 +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:299 +msgid "<p>Select the type of LDAP server you want to setup. The following scenarios are available:</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:302 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Stand-alone server</b>: Setup a single stand-alone OpenLDAP server with\n" +"no preparations for replication.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:305 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Master server in a replication setup</b>: Create an OpenLDAP setup\n" +"prepared to act as a master server (provider) in a replication setup.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:308 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Replica slave server</b>: Setup an OpenLDAP slave server that replicates all its data,\n" +"including configuration, from a master server.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Configuration Wizard Step 3 +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:312 +msgid "<h3>TLS Settings</h3>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:315 +msgid "<h4>Basic Settings</h4>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:316 +msgid "" +"<p>To enable encryption via TLS/SSL, check the <b>Enabled TLS</b>\n" +"checkbox. Additionally you need to configure a certificate for the Server \n" +"to use.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:321 +msgid "" +"<p>Check <b>Enable LDAP over SSL (ldaps) interface</b>, to enable the server\n" +"to accept LDAPS connections on port 636. If not checked, OpenLDAP will only\n" +"support TLS encrypted connections through the StartTLS extended operation.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:326 +msgid "" +"<p>If you already have a common server certificate installed using the\n" +"corresponding YaST Module, check <b>Use common Server Certificate</b> so that\n" +"the OpenLDAP server uses this certificate.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:331 +msgid "<h4>Import Certificate</h4>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:332 +msgid "" +"<p>If you have no common server certificate or you want OpenLDAP to use a\n" +"different certificate, enter the file names of the <b>CA Certificate File</b>,\n" +"<b>Certificate File</b> and <b>Certificate Key File</b> into the corresponding\n" +"textfields.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:338 +msgid "" +"<p>To create a new CA or certificate, launch the CA management module by\n" +"clicking <b>Launch CA Management Module</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Tree Item Dialog "global" 1/1 +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:342 +msgid "<p>Below this item, configure some global parameters.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tree Item Dialog "schema" 1/ +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:346 +msgid "" +"<p>Add schema files in this dialog. Press <b>Add</b> to open a file dialog in which to choose\n" +"a new schema. Note: OpenLDAP (when used with back-config) does currently not support the removal of \n" +"Schema Data</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tree Item Dialog "loglevel" +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:352 +msgid "" +"<p>Select the subsystems that should log debugging statements and statistics\n" +"to syslog.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Tree Item Dialog "allow" 1/1 +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:356 +msgid "<p>Select which special features the OpenLDAP Server should allow or disallow:</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:359 +msgid "<h3>Select Allow Flags</h3>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:360 +msgid "" +"<p><b>LDAPv2 Bind Requests</b>: To let the server accept LDAPv2 bind requests.\n" +"Note that OpenLDAP does not truly implement LDAPv2.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:363 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Anonymous Bind when credentials not empty</b>: To allow anonymous bind when \n" +"credentials are not empty (i.e. password is present but bind DN is not present) </p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:366 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Unauthenticated Bind when DN not empty</b>: To allow unauthenticated \n" +"(anonymous) binds when DN is not empty</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:369 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Unauthenticated Update Operations to process</b>: To allow unauthenticated\n" +"(anonymous) update operations to be processed. They are still subject to\n" +"access controls and other administrative limits.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:374 +msgid "<h3>Select Disallow Flags</h3>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:375 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Disable acceptance of anonymous Bind Requests</b>: The Server will\n" +"not accept anonymous bind requests. Note that this does not generally\n" +"prohibit anonymous directory access.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:380 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Disable Simple Bind authentication</b>: Completely disable Simple Bind\n" +"authentication</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:383 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Disable forcing session to anonymous status upon StartTLS operation\n" +"receipt</b>: The server will no longer force an authenticated connection back\n" +"to the anonymous state when receiving the StartTLS operation.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:388 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Disallow the StartTLS operation if authenticated</b>:\n" +"The server will not allow the StartTLS operation on already authenticated\n" +"connections.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Tree Item Dialog "databases" +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:394 +msgid "" +"<p>This lists shows all configured databases. The databases with the type\n" +"\"frontend\" and \"config\" represent special internal databases. The \"Frontend\"\n" +"database is use to configure global access control restrictions and overlays\n" +"that apply to all databases. The \"Config\" database holds the configuration of\n" +"the LDAP server itself.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Tree Item Dialog "databases" 2/2 +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:402 +msgid "<p>To add a new database, press <b>Add Database...</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:403 +msgid "" +"<p>To delete a database, select a database from the list and press <b>Delete Database...</b>.\n" +"You cannot delete the \"config\" and \"frontend\" databases.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:406 +msgid "" +"<p>Enter a password for the configuration database (\"<i>cn=config</i>\") here. This is required to make\n" +"the configuration database accessible remotely.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:409 +msgid "" +"<p>If the server is supposed to participate in a MirrorMode setup, select the \"<b>Prepare for MirrorMode replication</b>\"\n" +"checkbox. This will ensure that the serverId attribute is generated as needed for MirrorMode replication.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:412 +msgid "" +"<p>To setup a slave server some details need to be queried from the master server. Please enter the master\n" +"server's hostname, adjust the protocol (either \"<i>ldap</i>\" or \"<i>ldaps</i>\") and port number as needed and enter the password\n" +"for the master's configuration database (\"<i>cn=config</i>\").</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. ########## kerberos +#. Help text: basic settings 1/2 +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:419 +msgid "<p>Specify the <big>Realm</big> and the <big>Master Password</big> for your Kerberos server.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Help text: basic settings 2/2 +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:423 +msgid "<p>Although your Kerberos realm can be any ASCII string, the convention is to use upper-case letters as in your domain name.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. advanced item help: database_name +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:427 +msgid "<p>This string specifies the location of the Kerberos database for this realm.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. advanced item help: acl_file +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:431 +msgid "<p>This string specifies the location of the access control list (ACL) file that kadmin uses to determine the principals' permissions on the database.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. advanced item help: admin_keytab +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:435 +msgid "<p>This string specifies the location of the keytab file that kadmin uses to authenticate to the database.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. advanced item help: default_principal_expiration +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:439 +msgid "<p>This absolute time specifies the default expiration date of principals created in this realm.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. advanced item help principal_flags 1/13 +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:443 +msgid "<p>These flags specify the default attributes of the principal created in this realm.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:446 +msgid "Allow postdated" +msgstr "" + +#. advanced item help principal_flags 2/13 :Allow postdated +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:448 +msgid "Enabling this flag allows the principal to obtain postdateable tickets." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:451 +msgid "Allow forwardable" +msgstr "" + +#. advanced item help principal_flags 3/13 :Allow forwardable +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:453 +msgid "Enabling this flag allows the principal to obtain forwardable tickets." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:456 +msgid "Allow renewable" +msgstr "" + +#. advanced item help principal_flags 4/13 :Allow renewable +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:458 +msgid "Enabling this flag allows the principal to obtain renewable tickets." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:461 +msgid "Allow proxiable" +msgstr "" + +#. advanced item help principal_flags 5/13 :Allow proxiable +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:463 +msgid "Enabling this flag allows the principal to obtain proxy tickets." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:464 +msgid "Enable user-to-user authentication" +msgstr "" + +#. advanced item help principal_flags 6/13 :Enable user-to-user authentication +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:466 +msgid "Enabling this flag allows the principal to obtain a session key for another user, permitting user-to-user authentication for this principal." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:469 +msgid "Requires preauth" +msgstr "" + +#. advanced item help principal_flags 7/13 :Requires preauth +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:471 +msgid "If this flag is enabled on a client principal, that principal is required to preauthenticate to the KDC before receiving any tickets. If you enable this flag on a service principal, the service tickets for this principal will only be issued to clients with a TGT that has the preauthenticated ticket set." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:474 +msgid "Requires hwauth" +msgstr "" + +#. advanced item help principal_flags 8/13 :Requires hwauth +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:476 +msgid "If this flag is enabled, the principal is required to preauthenticate using a hardware device before receiving any tickets." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:479 +msgid "Allow service" +msgstr "" + +#. advanced item help principal_flags 9/13 :Allow service +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:481 +msgid "Enabling this flag allows the KDC to issue service tickets for this principal." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:484 +msgid "Allow tgs request" +msgstr "" + +#. advanced item help principal_flags 10/13 :Allow tgs request +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:486 +msgid "Enabling this flag allows a principal to obtain tickets based on a ticket-granting-ticket, rather than repeating the authentication process that was used to obtain the TGT." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:489 +msgid "Allow tickets" +msgstr "" + +#. advanced item help principal_flags 11/13 :Allow tickets +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:491 +msgid "Enabling this flag means that the KDC will issue tickets for this principal. Disabling this flag essentially deactivates the principal within this realm." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:494 +msgid "Need change" +msgstr "" + +#. advanced item help principal_flags 12/13 :Needchange +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:496 +msgid "Enabling this flag forces a password change for this principal." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:497 +msgid "Password changing service" +msgstr "" + +#. advanced item help principal_flags 13/13 :Password changing service +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:499 +msgid "If this flag is enabled, it marks this principal as a password change service. This should only be used in special cases, for example, if a user's password has expired, the user has to get tickets for that principal to be able to change it without going through the normal password authentication." +msgstr "" + +#. advanced item help : dict_file +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:503 +msgid "<p>The string location of the dictionary file containing strings that are not allowed as passwords. If this tag is not set or if there is no policy assigned to the principal, no check will be done.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. advanced item help : kadmind_port +#. advanced item help : kpasswd_port +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:507 src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:511 +msgid "<p>This port number specifies the port on which the kadmind daemon listens for this realm.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. advanced item help : key_stash_file +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:515 +msgid "<p>This string specifies the location where the master key has been stored with kdb5_stash.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. advanced item help : kdc_ports +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:519 +msgid "<p>This string specifies the list of ports that the KDC listens to for this realm.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. advanced item help : master_key_name +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:523 +msgid "<p>This string specifies the name of the principal associated with the master key. The default value is K/M.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. advanced item help : master_key_type +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:527 +msgid "<p>This key type string represents the master keys key type.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. advanced item help : max_life +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:531 +msgid "<p>This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be valid for in this realm.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. advanced item help : max_renew_life +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:535 +msgid "<p>This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be renewed for in this realm.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. advanced item help : supported_enctypes +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:539 +msgid "<p>A list of key/salt strings that specifies the default key/salt combinations of principals for this realm.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. advanced item help : kdc_supported_enctypes +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:543 +msgid "<p>Specifies the permitted key/salt combinations of principals for this realm.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. advanced item help : reject_bad_transit +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:547 +msgid "<p>Specifies whether or not the list of transited realms for cross-realm tickets should be checked against the transit path computed from the realm names and the [capaths] section of its krb5.conf file</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. advanced item help : ldap_conns_per_server +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:551 +msgid "<p>This LDAP specific tag indicates the number of connections to be maintained via the LDAP server.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. advanced item help : ldap_service_password_file +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:555 +msgid "<p>This LDAP-specific tag indicates the file containing the stashed passwords for the objects used for starting the Kerberos servers.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. advanced item help : kdb_subtrees +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:559 +msgid "<p>Specifies the list of subtrees containing the principals of a realm. The list contains the DNs of the subtree objects separated by colon(:).</p><p>The search scope specifies the scope for searching the principals under the subtree.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. advanced item help : kdb_containerref +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:563 +msgid "<p>Specifies the DN of the container object in which the principals of a realm will be created. If the container reference is not configured for a realm, the principals will be created in the realm container.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. advanced item help : kdb_maxtktlife +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:567 +msgid "<p>Specifies maximum ticket life for principals in this realm.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. advanced item help : kdb_maxrenewlife +#: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:571 +msgid "<p>Specifies maximum renewable life of tickets for principals in this realm.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. ################################################################################# +#. ################################################################################# +#. ################################################################################# +#. ################################################################################# +#. itemlist = add(itemlist, ); +#. itemlist = add(itemlist, ); +#. itemlist = add(itemlist, ); +#. Treeview list item +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:49 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:1974 +msgid "Advanced Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Treeview list item +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:53 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:1885 +msgid "Database Path" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:60 +msgid "&Database Path" +msgstr "" + +#. Treeview list item +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:71 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:1889 +msgid "ACL File" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:78 +msgid "ACL &File" +msgstr "" + +#. Treeview list item +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:89 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:1893 +msgid "Administrator Keytab" +msgstr "" + +#. Treeview list item +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:107 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:1900 +msgid "Default Principal Expiration" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox text +#. checkbox text +#. checkbox text +#. checkbox text +#. checkbox text +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:116 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:396 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:429 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:615 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:648 +msgid "&Available" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:124 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:129 +msgid "&Date" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:135 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:140 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:403 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:407 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:436 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:440 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:622 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:626 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:655 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:659 +msgid "&Time" +msgstr "" + +#. `InputField(`opt(`hstretch),`id(`id_default_principal_expiration),"", +#. KerberosServer::getDBvalue("default_principal_expiration")), +#. Treeview list item +#. Treeview list item +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:158 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:672 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:1906 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:2008 +msgid "Default Principal Flags" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox text in MultiSelectionBox +#. checkbox text in MultiSelectionBox +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:166 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:680 +msgid "Allow p&ostdated" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox text in MultiSelectionBox +#. checkbox text in MultiSelectionBox +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:174 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:688 +msgid "Allow &forwardable" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox text in MultiSelectionBox +#. checkbox text in MultiSelectionBox +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:182 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:696 +msgid "Allow rene&wable" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox text in MultiSelectionBox +#. checkbox text in MultiSelectionBox +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:190 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:704 +msgid "Allow &proxiable" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox text in MultiSelectionBox +#. checkbox text in MultiSelectionBox +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:198 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:712 +msgid "Enable &user-to-user authentication" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox text in MultiSelectionBox +#. checkbox text in MultiSelectionBox +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:206 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:720 +msgid "Requires pr&eauth" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox text in MultiSelectionBox +#. checkbox text in MultiSelectionBox +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:214 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:728 +msgid "Requires &hwauth" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox text in MultiSelectionBox +#. checkbox text in MultiSelectionBox +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:220 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:734 +msgid "Allow &service" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox text in MultiSelectionBox +#. checkbox text in MultiSelectionBox +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:226 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:740 +msgid "Allow tgs re&quest" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox text in MultiSelectionBox +#. checkbox text in MultiSelectionBox +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:232 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:746 +msgid "Allow &tickets" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox text in MultiSelectionBox +#. checkbox text in MultiSelectionBox +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:238 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:752 +msgid "Need &change" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox text in MultiSelectionBox +#. checkbox text in MultiSelectionBox +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:246 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:760 +msgid "P&assword changing service" +msgstr "" + +#. Treeview list item +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:261 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:1911 +msgid "Dictionary File" +msgstr "" + +#. Treeview list item +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:279 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:1916 +msgid "Kadmin Daemon Port" +msgstr "" + +#. Treeview list item +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:297 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:1921 +msgid "Kpasswd Daemon Port" +msgstr "" + +#. Treeview list item +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:315 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:1926 +msgid "Key Stash File" +msgstr "" + +#. Treeview list item +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:333 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:1929 +msgid "KDC Port" +msgstr "" + +#. Treeview list item +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:351 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:1933 +msgid "Master Key Name" +msgstr "" + +#. Treeview list item +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:369 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:1938 +msgid "Master Key Type" +msgstr "" + +#. Treeview list item +#. Treeview list item +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:387 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:606 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:1943 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:1998 +msgid "Maximum Ticket Life Time" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:401 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:434 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:620 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:653 +msgid "&Days" +msgstr "" + +#. Treeview list item +#. Treeview list item +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:420 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:639 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:1948 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:2003 +msgid "Maximum Ticket Renew Time" +msgstr "" + +#. Treeview list item +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:453 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:1953 +msgid "Default Encryption Types" +msgstr "" + +#. Treeview list item +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:471 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:1958 +msgid "KDC Supported Encryption Types" +msgstr "" + +#. Treeview list item +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:489 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:1963 +msgid "Reject Bad Transit" +msgstr "" + +#. Treeview list item +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:507 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:1983 +msgid "Number of LDAP connections" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:525 +msgid "File for the LDAP password" +msgstr "" + +#. Treeview list item +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:545 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:1988 +msgid "Search Subtrees" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:558 +msgid "Search Scope" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:565 +msgid "&subtree search" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:572 +msgid "&one level" +msgstr "" + +#. Treeview list item +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:588 +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:1993 +msgid "Principal Container" +msgstr "" + +#. ldapitems = add(ldapitems, ); +#. ldapitems = add(ldapitems, ); +#. ldapitems = add(ldapitems, ); +#: src/include/auth-server/kerberos_advanced.rb:2016 +msgid "Advanced LDAP Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. File: include/ldap-server/mirrormode-wizard.ycp +#. Package: Configuration of ldap-server +#. Summary: Wizards definitions +#. Authors: Andreas Bauer +#. Ralf Haferkamp +#. +#. $Id$ +#: src/include/auth-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:25 +msgid "OpenLDAP MirrorMode Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:28 +msgid "MirrorMode Node List" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:38 +msgid "Server ID" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:38 +msgid "Server URI" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:50 +msgid "This server is not setup as a MirrorMode Node. Click \"Next\" to launch the standard OpenLDAP configuration wizard." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:85 +msgid "OpenLDAP MirrorMode Overview" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:127 +msgid "Deleting the host on which you started this YaST Module is not possible.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:130 +msgid "Start yast2 openldap-mirrormode on a different MirrorMode server." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:140 +msgid "Do you really want to remove \"%1\" from the MirrorMode setup?\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:145 +msgid "Changes will take effect immediately after clicking \"Yes\"" +msgstr "" + +#. Initialization dialog contents +#. Initialization dialog contents +#. Initialization dialog contents +#. Initialization dialog contents +#: src/include/auth-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:175 +#: src/include/auth-server/wizards.rb:53 +#: src/include/auth-server/wizards.rb:124 +#: src/include/auth-server/wizards.rb:207 +#: src/include/auth-server/wizards.rb:300 +msgid "Initializing..." +msgstr "" + +#. #-#-#-#-# auth-server.rxgettext.pot (PACKAGE VERSION) #-#-#-#-# +#. **************************************** +#. * tree structure definition ** +#. *************************************** +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:53 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2191 +msgid "Startup Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Tree item +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:62 +msgid "Global Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Tree item +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:67 +msgid "Schema Files" +msgstr "" + +#. Tree item +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:75 +msgid "Log Level Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Tree item +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:83 +msgid "Allow/Disallow Features" +msgstr "" + +#. Tree item +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:91 +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:218 +msgid "TLS Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Tree item +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:100 +msgid "Databases" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:108 +msgid "Suffix DN" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:108 +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:173 +msgid "Database Type" +msgstr "" + +#. widget_map["g_schema","inclist"] = l; +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:228 +msgid "Your TLS/SSL Configuration seems to be incomplete." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:229 +msgid "Do you really want to enable the \"ldaps\" protocol listener?" +msgstr "" + +#. add a new file to the list +#. file dialog heading +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:265 +msgid "Select New Schema File" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:272 +msgid "The schema file is already in the list." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:462 +msgid "Select a valid Certificate File" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:466 +msgid "Select a valid Certificate Key File" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:555 +msgid "A common server certificate is not available." +msgstr "" + +#. file selection headline +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:575 +msgid "Select Certificate File" +msgstr "" + +#. file selection headline +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:583 +msgid "Select Certificate Key File" +msgstr "" + +#. **************************************** +#. * handlers for database parent widget +#. *************************************** +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:717 +msgid "Cannot delete Frontend database" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:719 +msgid "Cannot delete Config database" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:721 +msgid "Do you really want to delete the database?" +msgstr "" + +#. Error Popup +#. Error Popup +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:750 +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:887 +msgid "Unable to write settings for the current database." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:804 +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:944 +msgid "Unable to read settings for the current database." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:962 +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:1004 +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:404 +msgid "New Administrator &Password" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:968 +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:1010 +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:408 +msgid "Password &Encryption" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:1018 +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:368 +msgid "Change Administration Password" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:1041 +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:1042 +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:1043 +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:1044 +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2193 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2212 +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2213 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2214 +msgid "No" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:1046 +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:1047 +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:1048 +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2193 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2212 +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2213 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2214 +msgid "Yes" +msgstr "" + +#. skip attribute that already have an index defined +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:1191 +msgid "Multiple Replication Consumers not supported currently" +msgstr "" + +#. **************************************** +#. tree generation functions ** +#. *************************************** +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:1293 +msgid "Index Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:1301 +msgid "Password Policy Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:1310 +msgid "Access Control Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:1319 +msgid "Replication Provider" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:1328 +msgid "Replication Consumer" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:70 +msgid "&Start Kerberos Server" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:94 +msgid "Protocol Listeners" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:100 +msgid "LDAP" +msgstr "" + +#. `HWeight(1, `PushButton( `id( `pb_interface_ldap), "Interfaces ...")), +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:112 +msgid "LDAP over SSL (ldaps)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:141 +msgid "Included &Schema Files" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:152 +msgid "Select &Log Level Flags:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:154 +msgid "Trace Function Calls" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:155 +msgid "Debug Packet Handling" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:156 +msgid "Heavy Trace Debugging (function args)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:157 +msgid "Connection Management" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:158 +msgid "Print Packets Sent and Received" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:159 +msgid "Search Filter Processing" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:160 +msgid "Configuration File Processing" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:161 +msgid "Access Control List Processing" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:162 +msgid "Log Connections, Operations, and Result" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:163 +msgid "Log Entries Sent" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:164 +msgid "Print Communication with Shell Back-Ends" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:165 +msgid "Entry Parsing" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:166 +msgid "LDAPSync Replication" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:167 +msgid "None" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:174 +msgid "Select &Allow Flags:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:176 +msgid "LDAPv2 Bind Requests" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:179 +msgid "Anonymous Bind when Credentials Not Empty" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:183 +msgid "Unauthenticated Bind when DN Not Empty" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:187 +msgid "Unauthenticated Update Operations to Process" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:193 +msgid "Select &Disallow Flags:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:197 +msgid "Disable acceptance of anonymous Bind Requests (does not prohibit anonymous directory access)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:201 +msgid "Disable Simple Bind authentication" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:204 +msgid "Disable forcing session to anonymous status upon StartTLS operation receipt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:210 +msgid "Disallow the StartTLS operation if authenticated" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:221 +msgid "Basic Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:227 +msgid "Enable TLS" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:234 +msgid "Enable LDAP over SSL (ldaps) interface" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:242 +msgid "Use common Server Certificate" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:254 +msgid "Import Certificate" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:273 +msgid "Certificate &File (PEM Format)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:276 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:234 +msgid "&Browse..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:285 +msgid "Certificate &Key File (PEM Format - Unencrypted)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:288 +msgid "B&rowse..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:295 +msgid "Launch CA Management Module" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:301 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:178 +msgid "&Base DN" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:305 +msgid "Administrator DN" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:307 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:81 +msgid "&Append Base DN" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:309 +msgid "Change Password" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:317 +msgid "Edit BDB Database" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:324 +msgid "Entry Cache" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:330 +msgid "Index Cache (IDL cache)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:341 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:2102 +msgid "Checkpoint Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:344 +msgid "kilobytes" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:346 +msgid "minutes" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:354 +msgid "Change Configuration Database Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:359 +msgid "Allow Plaintext Authentication (Simple Bind) for this Database. " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:362 +msgid "(Remote Connection needs to be encrypted)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:374 +msgid "Edit Database" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:376 +msgid "Database type not currently supported." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:381 +msgid "Indexing Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:384 +msgid "Attribute" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:384 +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:457 +msgid "Presence" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:384 +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:458 +msgid "Equality" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:384 +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:459 +msgid "Substring" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:403 +msgid "Change Administrator Password" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:410 +msgid "Update Kerberos Stash" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:452 +msgid "Add Index" +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:40 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:2239 +msgid "Password Policy Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:47 +msgid "Enable Password Policies" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:55 +msgid "Hash Clear Text Passwords" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:63 +msgid "Disclose \"Account Locked\" Status" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:73 +msgid "Default Policy Object DN" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:89 +msgid "Edit Policy" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:100 +msgid "All Entries" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:101 +msgid "All Entries in the Subtree" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:102 +msgid "The Entry with the DN" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:106 +msgid "Everybody" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:107 +msgid "Authenticated Clients" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:108 +msgid "Anonymous Clients" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:109 +msgid "The accessed Entry (self)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:110 +msgid "The user with the DN" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:111 +msgid "All entries in the subtree" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:112 +msgid "All members of the group" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:125 +msgid "<empty>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:126 +msgid "No Access" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:128 +msgid "No Access (but disclose information on error)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:131 +msgid "Authenticate" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:132 +msgid "Compare" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:133 +msgid "Read" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:134 +msgid "Write" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:135 +msgid "Manage (full access)" +msgstr "" + +#. don't count frontend and Config DB +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:167 +msgid "New Database" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:170 +msgid "Basic Database Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:189 +msgid "&Administrator DN" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:197 +msgid "A&ppend Base DN" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:211 +msgid "LDAP Administrator &Password" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:230 +msgid "&Database Directory" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:240 +msgid "Use this database as the default for OpenLDAP clients" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:311 +msgid "Select Database Directory" +msgstr "" + +#. check values +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:350 +msgid "Base DN must be set." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:359 +msgid "A database with this Base DN already exists." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:399 +msgid "Root DN must be set if a password is given." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:405 +msgid "Password validation failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:435 +msgid "" +"The Base Object: \"%1\" cannot be auto created by YaST:\n" +"%2" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:451 +msgid "A directory must be specified." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:458 +msgid "The directory does not exist. Create it?" +msgstr "" + +#. try to read the ppolicy from the server +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:637 +msgid "Authentication failed. The password is probably incorrect.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:640 +msgid "The error message was: '" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:645 +msgid "Try again?" +msgstr "" + +#. PasswordPolicyDialog only returns the changes made to the original +#. Entry, try to merge them here +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:720 +msgid "Available Attribute Types" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:724 +msgid "Selected Attribute Types" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup to add/edit the acl "by" clauses +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:813 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:985 +msgid "Who should this rule apply to" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:819 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:946 +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:989 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1227 +msgid "Entry DN" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:820 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:990 +msgid "Select" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:826 +msgid "Define the Access Level" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:836 +msgid "Stop access control evaluation here (default)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:843 +msgid "Continue with next access control rule (\"break\")" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:849 +msgid "Continue evaluation of this rule (\"continue\")" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:904 +msgid "Please enter a DN in the textfield" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:948 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1090 +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1225 +msgid "Subtree DN" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:950 +msgid "Group DN" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:973 +msgid "Edit Access Control Rule" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:978 +msgid "Target Objects" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:999 +msgid "Matching the filter:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1006 +msgid "LDAP Filter" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1016 +msgid "Apply this rule only to the listed attribute" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1021 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1315 +msgid "Attributes" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1023 +msgid "Edit" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1029 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1041 +msgid "Access Level" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1039 +msgid "Who" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1040 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1315 +msgid "DN" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1042 +msgid "Flow Control" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1047 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1319 +msgid "Up" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1048 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1320 +msgid "Down" +msgstr "" + +#. FIXME: Validate attribute types +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1185 +msgid "Enter a list of valid attributes in the <b>Attributes</b> textfield" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1197 +msgid "Enter valid a LDAP filter in the textfield" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1203 +msgid "You must add at least one item to the \"Access Level\" list." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1315 +msgid "Target" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1315 +msgid "Filter" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1347 +msgid "" +"The selected database contains access control rules that are currently\n" +"not supported by YaST. The Access Control Dialog will be disabled.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1594 +msgid "This database is a Replication Consumer." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1614 +msgid "Provider Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1619 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1716 +msgid "Port" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1637 +msgid "Replication Type" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1644 +msgid "Replication Interval" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1647 +msgid "Days" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1651 +msgid "Hours" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1655 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:2118 +msgid "Minutes" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1659 +msgid "Seconds" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1672 +msgid "Authentication DN" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1693 +msgid "Custom update referral" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1709 +msgid "Target Host" +msgstr "" + +#. no updateref +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1929 +msgid "Invalid replication interval specified" +msgstr "" + +#. test connection +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1965 +msgid "Checking LDAP connectivity to the provider failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1980 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:2007 +msgid "Do you still want to continue?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1989 +msgid "Checking the LDAPsync capabilities of the provider failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1995 +msgid "Please verify that the target server is enabled to be a LDAPsync provider" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:2094 +msgid "Enable ldapsync provider for this database" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:2108 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:2144 +msgid "Operations" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:2131 +msgid "Session Log" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:2137 +msgid "Enable Session Log" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:2271 +msgid "Replication Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:352 +msgid "Reading Startup Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:353 +msgid "Reading Configuration Backend" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:354 +msgid "Reading Configuration Data" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:355 +msgid "Initializing Authentication Server Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:390 +msgid "" +"Error while initializing configuration.\n" +"Is the LDAPI listener enabled?\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:466 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1033 +msgid "LDAP search failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:812 +msgid "Invalid LDAP URI scheme." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:828 +msgid "LDAP initialization failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:854 +msgid "LDAP bind failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:877 +msgid "Initializing LDAP schema failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:888 +msgid "Reading LDAP schema failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:898 +msgid "Kerberos Schema unknown by the LDAP server." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:975 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3482 +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3536 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3581 +msgid "Cannot execute kdb5_ldap_util." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1005 +msgid "Modifying the kerberos database failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1046 +msgid "LDAP modify failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1074 +msgid "Incomplete data." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1101 +msgid "Unsupported database type." +msgstr "" + +#. service was disabled during this session, just disable the service +#. in the system, stop it and ignore any configuration changes. +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1546 +msgid "Enabling LDAP Server" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1547 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1559 +msgid "Starting LDAP Server" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1549 +msgid "Activating OpenLDAP Server" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1560 +msgid "Restarting OpenLDAP Server" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1569 +msgid "Enabling Kerberos Server" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1570 +msgid "Starting Kerberos Server" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1572 +msgid "Activating Kerberos Server" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1602 +msgid "Writing Startup Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1603 +msgid "Cleaning up config directory" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1604 +msgid "Creating Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1605 +msgid "Starting OpenLDAP Server" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1606 +msgid "Creating Base Objects" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1607 +msgid "Saving Kerberos Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1608 +msgid "Writing Auth Server Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1616 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2569 +msgid "Switch from slapd.conf to config backend failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1624 +msgid "Enabling the LDAPI Protocol listener failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1648 +msgid "Config Directory cleanup failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1686 +msgid "Error while populating the configurations database with \"slapadd\"." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1706 +msgid "Enabling the LDAP Service failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1722 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2600 +msgid "Starting the LDAP service failed." +msgstr "" + +#. service was disabled during this session, just disable the service +#. in the system, stop it and ignore any configuration changes. +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1784 +msgid "Stopping LDAP Server" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1785 +msgid "Disabling LDAP Server" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1787 +msgid "De-activating OpenLDAP Server" +msgstr "" + +#. service was disabled during this session, just disable the service +#. in the system, stop it and ignore any configuration changes. +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1805 +msgid "Stopping Kerberos Server" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1806 +msgid "Disabling Kerberos Server" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1808 +msgid "De-activating Kerberos Server" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1825 +msgid "Writing Sysconfig files" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1826 +msgid "Applying changes to Configuration Database" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1827 +msgid "Applying changes to /etc/openldap/ldap.conf" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1828 +msgid "Creating Base Objects for newly created databases" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1829 +msgid "Updating Default Password Policy Objects" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1830 +msgid "Waiting for OpenLDAP background indexing tasks to complete (this might take some minutes)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1831 +msgid "Restarting OpenLDAP Server if required" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1834 +msgid "Writing AuthServer Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1931 +msgid "Creating base objects failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1940 +msgid "Creating Password Policy objects failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1953 +msgid "An error occurred while waiting for the OpenLDAP database indexer to finish.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1954 +msgid "Restart OpenLDAP manually." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2194 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2214 +msgid "Register at SLP Service: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2213 +msgid "Start Kerberos Server: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2215 +msgid "Create the following databases:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2220 +msgid "Database Suffix: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2221 +msgid "Database Type: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2227 +msgid "Not configured yet." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2472 +msgid "CA Certificate file does not exist." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2477 +msgid "Certificate File does not exist" +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2482 src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:1752 +msgid "Certificate key file does not exist." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2489 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2523 +msgid "Can not set a filesystem ACL on the private key." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2491 +msgid "Do you have filesystem acl support disabled?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2545 +msgid "Cleaning up directory for config database" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2546 +msgid "Converting slapd.conf to config database" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2547 +msgid "Switching startup configuration to use config database" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2548 +msgid "Restarting LDAP Server" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2549 +msgid "Migrating LDAP Server Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2559 +msgid "Output of \"slaptest\":\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2560 +msgid "Migration of existing configuration failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2579 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2587 +msgid "Enabling LDAPI listener failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2709 +msgid "Common server certificate not available. StartTLS is disabled." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2803 +msgid "Could not create database directory." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2810 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4107 +#: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:498 +msgid "Could not adjust ownership of database directory." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2859 +msgid "Could not determine own fully qualified hostname." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2860 +msgid "A master server for replication cannot work correctly without knowing its own fully qualified hostname." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3376 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3389 +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3402 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3415 +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3428 +msgid "Cannot write krb5.conf." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3514 +msgid "Creating Kerberos database failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3566 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3612 +msgid "Writing to password file failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3978 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3988 +msgid "is not a valid LDAP DN." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3983 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3993 +msgid "has multivalued RDNs." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4025 +#, perl-format +msgid "Invalid LDAP DN: \"%s\", cannot extract RDN values" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4033 +msgid "The value of the \"c\" attribute must contain a valid ISO-3166 country 2-letter code." +msgstr "" + +#. parameter check failed +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4040 src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:373 +msgid "First part of suffix must be c=, st=, l=, o=, ou= or dc=." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4052 +#, perl-format +msgid "Base DN \"%s\" is not a valid LDAP DN." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4057 +#, perl-format +msgid "Base DN \"%s\" has multivalued RDNs (not supported by YaST)." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4066 +#, perl-format +msgid "Root DN \"%s\" is not a valid LDAP DN." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4071 +#, perl-format +msgid "Root DN \"%s\" has multivalued RDNs (not supported by YaST)." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4078 +msgid "The Root DN must be a child object of the Base DN." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4100 src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:484 +msgid "Could not create directory." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4877 +#, perl-format +msgid "CA Certificate File: \"%s\" does not exist." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4887 +msgid "Error while trying to verify the server certificate of the provider server.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4888 +#, perl-format +msgid "" +"Please make sure that \"%s\" contains the correct\n" +"CA file to verify the remote Server Certificate." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4896 +#, perl-format +msgid "Certificate File: \"%s\" does not exist." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4901 +#, perl-format +msgid "Certificate Key File: \"%s\" does not exist." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4982 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4992 +msgid "Writing to krb5.conf failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:5360 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:5369 +msgid "Writing to kdc.conf failed." +msgstr "" + +#. error at paramter check +#: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:301 +#, perl-format +msgid "Database type '%s' is not supported. Allowed are 'bdb' and 'hdb'." +msgstr "" + +#. parameter check failed +#: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:347 +msgid "The countryName must be an ISO-3166 country 2-letter code." +msgstr "" + +#. parameter check failed +#: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:391 src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:726 +msgid "Invalid 'rootdn'." +msgstr "" + +#. parameter check failed +#: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:400 src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:734 +msgid "'rootdn' must be below the 'suffix'." +msgstr "" + +#. parameter check failed +#: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:415 +msgid "To set a password, you must define 'rootdn'." +msgstr "" + +#. parameter check failed +#: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:422 +msgid "Define 'rootpw'." +msgstr "" + +#. parameter check failed +#: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:435 src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:768 +#, perl-format +msgid "'%s' is an unsupported crypt method." +msgstr "" + +#. parameter check failed +#: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:475 +msgid "Define 'directory'." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:489 +msgid "The directory does not exist." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:511 src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:526 +msgid "Invalid cache size value." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:547 +msgid "Invalid checkpoint value." +msgstr "" + +#. parameter check failed +#: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:753 src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:758 +msgid "Define 'passwd'." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:805 +msgid "Database edit failed." +msgstr "" + +#. error message at parameter check +#: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:865 src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:938 +#: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:1086 src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:1129 +msgid "Missing parameter 'suffix'." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:1533 +msgid "Cannot restart the service." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:1540 +msgid "Cannot stop the service." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:1703 +msgid "CA certificate file does not exist." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:1719 +msgid "CA certificate path does not exist." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:1735 +msgid "Certificate file does not exist." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:1770 +msgid "Invalid value for 'TLSVerifyClient'." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:1779 +msgid "Writing failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:1944 +msgid "Missing 'ServerCertificateFile' parameter." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:1950 +msgid "Cannot read certificate file." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:1955 +msgid "Missing 'ServerCertificateData' parameter." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:1962 src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:1987 +#: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:2003 src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:2012 +msgid "Corrupt PEM data." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:1969 +msgid "Missing 'ServerKeyFile' parameter." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:1975 +msgid "Cannot read key file." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:1980 +msgid "Missing 'ServerKeyData' parameter." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:1998 +msgid "Cannot read CA certificate file." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:2021 +msgid "Cannot write certificate file." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:2027 +msgid "Cannot write key file." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/LdapServer.pm:2046 +msgid "Cannot write CA certificate file." +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/autoinst.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/autoinst.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/autoinst.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,2588 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-09-28 18:16+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. progress step title +#. progress step title +#: src/clients/autoinst_scripts1_finish.rb:47 +#: src/clients/autoinst_scripts2_finish.rb:45 +msgid "Executing autoinstall scripts in the installation environment..." +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#: src/clients/autoinst_test_clone.rb:15 +msgid "Reading configuration data..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/autoinst_test_clone.rb:16 src/clients/autoyast.rb:123 +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:622 +#: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:333 src/modules/Profile.rb:352 +msgid "This may take a while" +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. File: clients/autoyast.ycp +#. Summary: Main file for client call +#. Authors: Anas Nashif +#. +#. $Id$ +#: src/clients/autoyast.rb:35 +msgid "Error while reading configuration data." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/autoyast.rb:68 +msgid "AutoYaST" +msgstr "" + +#. command line options +#. Init variables +#. Import users configuration from the profile +#. +#. Backup +#. Now check if there any classes defined in theis pre final control file +#: src/clients/autoyast.rb:114 src/clients/ayast_setup.rb:148 +#: src/clients/inst_autoinit.rb:188 src/clients/inst_autosetup.rb:410 +#: src/clients/inst_autosetup_upgrade.rb:484 +#: src/modules/AutoInstallRules.rb:1001 +msgid "" +"Error while parsing the control file.\n" +"Check the log files for more details or fix the\n" +"control file and try again.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/autoyast.rb:122 src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:621 +#: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:332 +msgid "Reading configuration data" +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. * File: +#. * Package: Auto-installation +#. * Author: Uwe Gansert +#. * Summary: +#. * +#. * Changes: * initial +#. 0.2: * added Pkg::TargetInit +#. 0.3: * support for <post-packages> +#. 0.4: * support for the <ask> feature +#. 0.5: * support for the new "keep install network" +#. feature of 10.3 +#. * Version: 0.5 +#. * $Id$ +#. +#. this client can be called from a running system, +#. to do the autoyast configuration. +#. You have to provide a profile and autoyast will +#. configure your system like in the profile. +#. Only stage2 configuration can be done. +#. yast2 ./ayast_setup.rb setup filename=/tmp/my.xml +#: src/clients/ayast_setup.rb:48 +msgid "Client for AutoYaST configuration on the running system" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ayast_setup.rb:58 +msgid "Configure the system using given AutoYaST profile" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ayast_setup.rb:65 +msgid "Path to AutoYaST profile" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ayast_setup.rb:70 +msgid "enable/disable all package handling" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ayast_setup.rb:87 src/clients/clone_system.rb:101 +msgid "Empty parameter list" +msgstr "" + +#. the following is needed since 10.3 +#. otherwise the already configured network gets removed +#: src/clients/ayast_setup.rb:135 +msgid "Path to AutoYaST profile must be set." +msgstr "" + +#. if we get no argument or map of options we are not in command line +#: src/clients/clone_system.rb:66 +msgid "Client for creating an AutoYaST profile based on the currently running system" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/clone_system.rb:76 +msgid "known modules: %1" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/clone_system.rb:83 +msgid "comma separated list of modules to clone" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Warning that an already existing autoyast configuration file will be overwritten. +#: src/clients/clone_system.rb:114 +msgid "File %s exists! Really overwrite?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/clone_system.rb:118 +msgid "Cloning the system..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: %s is path where profile can be found +#: src/clients/clone_system.rb:120 +msgid "The resulting autoyast profile can be found in %s." +msgstr "" + +#. help 1/2 +#: src/clients/files_auto.rb:170 +msgid "" +"<p>Using this dialog, copy the contents of the file and specify the final\n" +"path on the installed system. YaST will copy this file to the specified location.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help 2/2 +#: src/clients/files_auto.rb:177 +msgid "" +"<p>To protect copied files, set the owner and the permissions of the files.\n" +"Set the owner using the syntax <i>userid:groupid</i>. Permissions can be a symbolic\n" +"representation of changes to make or an octal number representing the bit pattern for the\n" +"new permissions.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/files_auto.rb:185 +msgid "Configuration File Editor" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/files_auto.rb:191 +msgid "&File Path" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/files_auto.rb:200 +msgid "&Owner" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/files_auto.rb:206 +msgid "&Permissions" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/files_auto.rb:214 +msgid "&Retrieve from" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/files_auto.rb:221 +msgid "File So&urce" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/files_auto.rb:226 +msgid "&Load new contents" +msgstr "" + +#. why? +#. if (mode == `edit) +#. { +#. UI::ChangeWidget(`id(`filename), `Enabled, false); +#. } +#: src/clients/files_auto.rb:263 +msgid "" +"Provide at least the file\n" +"name and the contents of the file.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. OPEN +#: src/clients/files_auto.rb:273 src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:605 +#: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:397 +msgid "Select a file to load." +msgstr "" + +#. Summary of configuration +#: src/clients/files_auto.rb:301 +msgid "Available Files" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/files_auto.rb:305 +msgid "File Path" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/files_auto.rb:305 +msgid "Owner" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/files_auto.rb:305 +msgid "Permissions" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/files_auto.rb:319 +msgid "Add Complete Configuration Files" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/files_auto.rb:321 +msgid "" +"<p>For many applications and services, you might have prepared\n" +"a configuration file that should be copied in a complete form to a location in the\n" +"installed system. For example, this is the case if you are installing a web server\n" +"and have an httpd.conf configuration file prepared.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/files_auto.rb:332 +msgid "Select a file from the table first." +msgstr "" + +#. Help text for last dialog of base installation +#: src/clients/inst_autoconfigure.rb:35 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Please wait while the system is being configured.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress bar that displays overall progress in this dialog +#: src/clients/inst_autoconfigure.rb:60 +msgid "Progress" +msgstr "" + +#. Dialog title for autoyast dialog +#: src/clients/inst_autoconfigure.rb:69 +msgid "Configuring System according to auto-install settings" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Error message, %s is replaced by newline-separated +#. list of unsupported sections of the profile +#. Do not translate words in brackets +#: src/clients/inst_autoconfigure.rb:88 +msgid "" +"These sections of AutoYaST profile are not supported anymore:\n" +"\n" +"%s\n" +"\n" +"Please, use, e.g., <scripts/> or <files/> to change the configuration." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Error message, %s is replaced by newline-separated +#. list of unknown sections of the profile +#. Do not translate words in brackets +#: src/clients/inst_autoconfigure.rb:103 +msgid "" +"These sections of AutoYaST profile cannot be processed on this system:\n" +"\n" +"%s\n" +"\n" +"Maybe they were misspelled or your profile does not contain all the needed YaST packages in <software/> section." +msgstr "" + +#. determine name of client, if not use default name +#. Call::Function(module_auto, ["Import", eval(Profile::current[resource]:$[]) ]); +#: src/clients/inst_autoconfigure.rb:192 src/clients/inst_autoconfigure.rb:221 +#: src/clients/inst_autoconfigure.rb:234 +msgid "Configuring %1" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_autoconfigure.rb:194 src/clients/inst_autoconfigure.rb:223 +#: src/clients/inst_autoconfigure.rb:236 +msgid "Not Configuring %1" +msgstr "" + +#. online update +#: src/clients/inst_autoconfigure.rb:288 +msgid "Executing Post-Scripts" +msgstr "" + +#. Do not restart dbus. Otherwise some services will hang. +#. bnc#937900 +#: src/clients/inst_autoconfigure.rb:304 +msgid "Restarting all running services" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_autoconfigure.rb:327 +msgid "Activating systemd default target" +msgstr "" + +#. Just in case, remove this file to avoid reconfiguring... +#: src/clients/inst_autoconfigure.rb:342 +msgid "Finishing Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. NetworkInterfaces::Write( ".*" ); +#: src/clients/inst_autoconfigure.rb:448 +msgid "Processing resource %1" +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. File: clients/inst_autoimage.ycp +#. Package: Auto-installation +#. Author: Anas Nashif +#. Summary: Imaging +#. +#. $Id$ +#: src/clients/inst_autoimage.rb:31 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Please wait while the image is retrieved.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_autoimage.rb:32 +msgid "Retrieve Image File" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_autoimage.rb:32 +msgid "Install image file" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_autoimage.rb:35 +msgid "Retrieving image file..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_autoimage.rb:36 +msgid "Installing image file..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_autoimage.rb:40 +msgid "Installing image into system..." +msgstr "" + +#. if (!AutoinstImage::Get(AutoinstSoftware::ft_module, Installation::destdir )) +#. { +#. Report::Error(_("Error while retrieving image.")); +#. return `abort; +#. } +#: src/clients/inst_autoimage.rb:58 +msgid "" +"fetching image-script failed:\n" +"%1" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_autoimage.rb:67 +msgid "" +"running image-script failed:\n" +"%1" +msgstr "" + +#. import "Arch"; +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. File: clients/autoinst_post.ycp +#. Package: Auto-installation +#. Author: Anas Nashif +#. Summary: This module finishes auto-installation and configures +#. the system as described in the profile file. +#. +#. $Id$ +#: src/clients/inst_autoinit.rb:37 src/clients/inst_autopost.rb:48 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Please wait while the system is prepared for autoinstallation.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_autoinit.rb:41 +msgid "Probe hardware" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_autoinit.rb:42 +msgid "Retrieve & Read Control File" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_autoinit.rb:43 +msgid "Parse control file" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_autoinit.rb:44 src/clients/inst_autoinit.rb:201 +msgid "Initial Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_autoinit.rb:49 src/clients/inst_autopost.rb:66 +msgid "Preparing System for Automatic Installation" +msgstr "" + +#. progress bar length +#: src/clients/inst_autoinit.rb:57 +msgid "Preprobing stage" +msgstr "" + +#. // moved to autoset to fulfill fate #301193 +#. // the DASD section in an autoyast profile can't be changed via pre-script +#. // +#. if( Arch::s390 () && AutoinstConfig::remoteProfile == true ) { +#. y2milestone("arch=s390 and remote_profile=true"); +#. symbol ret = processProfile(); +#. if( ret != `ok ) { +#. return ret; +#. } +#. y2milestone("processProfile=ok"); +#. profileFetched = true; +#. +#. // FIXME: the hardcoded stuff should be in the control.xml later +#. if( haskey(Profile::current, "dasd") ) { +#. y2milestone("dasd found"); +#. Call::Function("dasd_auto", ["Import", Profile::current["dasd"]:$[] ]); +#. } +#. if( haskey(Profile::current, "zfcp") ) { +#. y2milestone("zfcp found"); +#. Call::Function("zfcp_auto", ["Import", Profile::current["zfcp"]:$[] ]); +#. } +#. } +#: src/clients/inst_autoinit.rb:90 +msgid "Probing hardware..." +msgstr "" + +#. Set reporting behaviour to default, changed later if required +#: src/clients/inst_autoinit.rb:183 +msgid "Parsing control file" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_autopost.rb:51 +msgid "Install required packages" +msgstr "" + +#. progress bar length +#: src/clients/inst_autopost.rb:74 +msgid "Checking for required packages..." +msgstr "" + +#. Add all found packages +#: src/clients/inst_autopost.rb:214 +msgid "Adding found packages..." +msgstr "" + +#. Run early network scripts +#: src/clients/inst_autopost.rb:220 +msgid "Running scripts..." +msgstr "" + +#. Finish +#: src/clients/inst_autopost.rb:237 +msgid "Checking for packages required for %1..." +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. File: clients/inst_autosetup.ycp +#. Package: Auto-installation +#. Summary: Setup and prepare system for auto-installation +#. Authors: Anas Nashif +#. Uwe Gansert +#. +#. $Id$ +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. File: clients/inst_autosetup.ycp +#. Package: Auto-installation +#. Summary: Setup and prepare system for auto-installation +#. Authors: Anas Nashif +#. Uwe Gansert +#. +#. $Id: inst_autosetup.ycp 61521 2010-03-29 09:10:07Z ug $ +#: src/clients/inst_autosetup.rb:53 src/clients/inst_autosetup_upgrade.rb:47 +msgid "<P>Please wait while the system is prepared for autoinstallation.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_autosetup.rb:57 src/clients/inst_autosetup_upgrade.rb:52 +msgid "Execute pre-install user scripts" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_autosetup.rb:58 src/clients/inst_autosetup_upgrade.rb:51 +msgid "Configure General Settings " +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_autosetup.rb:59 src/clients/inst_autosetup_upgrade.rb:53 +msgid "Set up language" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_autosetup.rb:60 +msgid "Create partition plans" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_autosetup.rb:61 src/clients/inst_autosetup_upgrade.rb:56 +msgid "Configure Bootloader" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_autosetup.rb:62 src/clients/inst_autosetup_upgrade.rb:54 +msgid "Registration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_autosetup.rb:63 src/clients/inst_autosetup_upgrade.rb:55 +msgid "Configure Software selections" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_autosetup.rb:64 +msgid "Configure Systemd Default Target" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_autosetup.rb:65 +msgid "Configure users and groups" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_autosetup.rb:69 src/clients/inst_autosetup_upgrade.rb:61 +msgid "Executing pre-install user scripts..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_autosetup.rb:70 src/clients/inst_autosetup_upgrade.rb:60 +msgid "Configuring general settings..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_autosetup.rb:71 src/clients/inst_autosetup_upgrade.rb:62 +msgid "Setting up language..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_autosetup.rb:72 +msgid "Creating partition plans..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_autosetup.rb:73 src/clients/inst_autosetup_upgrade.rb:65 +msgid "Configuring Bootloader..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_autosetup.rb:74 src/clients/inst_autosetup_upgrade.rb:63 +msgid "Registering the system..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_autosetup.rb:75 src/clients/inst_autosetup_upgrade.rb:64 +msgid "Configuring Software selections..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_autosetup.rb:76 +msgid "Configuring Systemd Default Target..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_autosetup.rb:77 +msgid "Importing users and groups configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_autosetup.rb:81 src/clients/inst_autosetup_upgrade.rb:69 +msgid "Preparing System for Automated Installation" +msgstr "" + +#. Second stage of installation will not be called but a +#. network configuration is available. So this will be written +#. while the general inst_finish process at the end of the +#. first stage. But for the installation workflow the linuxrc +#. network settings will be taken. (bnc#944942) +#: src/clients/inst_autosetup.rb:183 +msgid "Handling Add-On Products..." +msgstr "" + +#. Set it in the Language module. +#. +#. Set it in the Language module. +#: src/clients/inst_autosetup.rb:202 src/clients/inst_autosetup_upgrade.rb:149 +msgid "Configuring language..." +msgstr "" + +#. Yes, do not set Storage testsuite here as we want really GUI with proposal +#: src/clients/inst_autosetup.rb:290 +msgid "" +"Error while configuring partitions.\n" +"Try again.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Software +#: src/clients/inst_autosetup.rb:344 +msgid "" +"Error while configuring software selections.\n" +"Try again.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. ReportingDialog() +#. @return sumbol +#: src/clients/report_auto.rb:103 +msgid "Messages" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/report_auto.rb:109 +msgid "Sho&w messages" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/report_auto.rb:117 +msgid "Lo&g messages" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/report_auto.rb:128 +msgid "&Time-out (in sec.)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/report_auto.rb:140 +msgid "Warnings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/report_auto.rb:146 +msgid "Sh&ow warnings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/report_auto.rb:154 +msgid "Log wa&rnings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/report_auto.rb:165 +msgid "Time-out (in s&ec.)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/report_auto.rb:177 +msgid "Errors" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/report_auto.rb:183 +msgid "Show error&s" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/report_auto.rb:191 +msgid "&Log errors" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/report_auto.rb:202 +msgid "Time-o&ut (in sec.)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/report_auto.rb:217 +msgid "" +"<p>Depending on your experience, you can skip, log, and show (with time-out)\n" +"installation messages.</p> \n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/report_auto.rb:223 +msgid "" +"<p>It is recommended to show all <b>messages</b> with time-out.\n" +"Warnings can be skipped in some places, but should not be ignored.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/report_auto.rb:230 +msgid "Messages and Logging" +msgstr "" + +#. Select packages +#. @return [Symbol] +#: src/clients/software_auto.rb:87 +msgid "Software Selection" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/software_auto.rb:88 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Select one of the following <b>base</b> selections and click <i>Detailed<i> to add\n" +"more <b>add-on</b> selections and packages.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. AutoinstSoftware::pmInit(); +#. string mainRepo = "http://10.10.0.162/SLES11/DVD1/"; +#. string mainRepo = "ftp://10.10.0.100/install/SLP/openSUSE-11.2/x86_64/DVD1/"; +#: src/clients/software_auto.rb:120 +msgid "Location of the installation source (like http://myhost/11.3/DVD1/)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/software_auto.rb:128 +msgid "The inst-source of this system (you can't create images if you choose this)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/software_auto.rb:164 +msgid "using that installation source failed" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/software_auto.rb:189 +msgid "Reading package database..." +msgstr "" + +#. is result copy of part? +#: src/include/autoinstall/AdvancedPartitionDialog.rb:59 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Mount in /etc/fstab By:</b>\n" +"\tNormally, a file system to mount is identified in /etc/fstab\n" +"\tby the device name. This identification can be changed so the file system to mount\n" +"\tis found by searching for a UUID or a volume label. Not all file systems can be\n" +"\tmounted by UUID or a volume label. If an option is disabled, it is not possible.\n" +"\t" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, richtext format +#: src/include/autoinstall/AdvancedPartitionDialog.rb:71 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Volume Label:</b>\n" +"\t The name entered in this field is used as the volume label. This usually makes sense only \n" +"\t when you activate the option for mounting by volume label.\n" +"\t A volume label cannot contain the / character or spaces.\n" +"\t " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/AdvancedPartitionDialog.rb:82 +#: src/include/autoinstall/AdvancedPartitionDialog.rb:92 +msgid "Encryption" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/AdvancedPartitionDialog.rb:86 +msgid "Encryption key" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/AdvancedPartitionDialog.rb:93 +msgid "Encryption is not available for physical volumes" +msgstr "" + +#. `HWeight(30, `RichText(`opt(`hstretch),helpText)), +#: src/include/autoinstall/AdvancedPartitionDialog.rb:103 +msgid "Advanced Partition Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/AdvancedPartitionDialog.rb:110 +msgid "Fstab options" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/AdvancedPartitionDialog.rb:112 +msgid "Mount by" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/AdvancedPartitionDialog.rb:118 +msgid "Device name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/AdvancedPartitionDialog.rb:119 +msgid "Device id" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/AdvancedPartitionDialog.rb:120 +#: src/include/autoinstall/AdvancedPartitionDialog.rb:134 +msgid "Volume label" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/AdvancedPartitionDialog.rb:125 +msgid "Device path" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/AdvancedPartitionDialog.rb:126 +msgid "UUID" +msgstr "" + +#. INTERNAL STUFF +#. local copy of current device the user wants to +#. edit using this dialog +#: src/include/autoinstall/DriveDialog.rb:39 +msgid "Edit Drive" +msgstr "" + +#. GENERAL DIALOG IFACE +#: src/include/autoinstall/DriveDialog.rb:169 +msgid "D&evice" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/DriveDialog.rb:180 +msgid "&Intialize drive" +msgstr "" + +#. initially selected +#: src/include/autoinstall/DriveDialog.rb:185 +msgid "Re&use" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/DriveDialog.rb:190 +#: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:188 +msgid "&Type" +msgstr "" + +#. `ComboBox( `id(`vgType), _("Type"), toItemList(volgroupTypes)), +#: src/include/autoinstall/DriveDialog.rb:196 +#: src/include/autoinstall/PartitionDialog.rb:518 +#: src/include/autoinstall/VolgroupDialog.rb:139 +msgid "Apply" +msgstr "" + +#. determines if this partition is to be created on a VG +#: src/include/autoinstall/PartitionDialog.rb:94 +msgid "<none>" +msgstr "" + +#. LV +#: src/include/autoinstall/PartitionDialog.rb:135 +msgid "Provide a logical volume name." +msgstr "" + +#. MB, GB -> M, B +#: src/include/autoinstall/PartitionDialog.rb:197 +msgid "" +"You selected to create the partition, but you did not select a valid file\n" +"system. Select a valid filesystem to continue.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. We don't use the return value of the check, because we +#. currently can't stop the dialog switch from happening, so we +#. issue possible errors as warnings, and store anyway... should +#. be fixed. +#: src/include/autoinstall/PartitionDialog.rb:392 +msgid "Store unsaved changes to partition?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/PartitionDialog.rb:419 +msgid "Volgroup" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/PartitionDialog.rb:423 +msgid "Logical volume name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/PartitionDialog.rb:426 +msgid "Edit partition" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/PartitionDialog.rb:436 +msgid "&Mount point" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/PartitionDialog.rb:446 +msgid "File sys&tem" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/PartitionDialog.rb:453 +msgid "&Size" +msgstr "" + +#. HBox +#: src/include/autoinstall/PartitionDialog.rb:471 +msgid "Partiti&on number" +msgstr "" + +#. VBox +#: src/include/autoinstall/PartitionDialog.rb:482 +msgid "Reuse e&xisting partition" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/PartitionDialog.rb:489 +msgid "Res&ize existing partition" +msgstr "" + +#. HBox +#: src/include/autoinstall/PartitionDialog.rb:496 +msgid "Activate Striping" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/PartitionDialog.rb:500 +msgid "Number of Stripes" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/PartitionDialog.rb:508 +msgid "Stripe size" +msgstr "" + +#. HBox +#: src/include/autoinstall/PartitionDialog.rb:516 +msgid "Advan&ced" +msgstr "" + +#. user selected this partition to be part of volgroup +#: src/include/autoinstall/PartitionDialog.rb:592 +msgid "Size \"auto\" is only valid if mount point \"/boot\" or \"swap\" is selected." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/PartitionDialog.rb:600 +msgid "Size \"auto\" is invalid for physical volumes." +msgstr "" + +#. Displayed when tree is empty +#: src/include/autoinstall/StorageDialog.rb:34 +msgid "Nothing selected" +msgstr "" + +#. Main Partitioning Dialog +#. @return [Symbol] +#: src/include/autoinstall/StorageDialog.rb:175 +msgid "Partition p&lan" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/StorageDialog.rb:180 +msgid "Add D&rive" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/StorageDialog.rb:181 +msgid "Add &Partition" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/StorageDialog.rb:186 +msgid "Add &Volume Group" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/StorageDialog.rb:187 +#: src/include/autoinstall/classes.rb:66 +msgid "&Delete" +msgstr "" + +#. INTERNAL STUFF +#. local copy of current device the user wants to +#. edit using this dialog +#: src/include/autoinstall/VolgroupDialog.rb:33 +msgid "Edit Volume Group" +msgstr "" + +#. GENERAL DIALOG IFACE +#: src/include/autoinstall/VolgroupDialog.rb:112 +msgid "Store unsaved changes to volume group?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/VolgroupDialog.rb:136 +msgid "Volgroup device name" +msgstr "" + +#. Shows a dialog when 'control file' can't be found +#. @param [String] original Original value +#. @return [String] new value +#: src/include/autoinstall/autoinst_dialogs.rb:21 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"A profile for this machine could not be found or retrieved.\n" +"Check that you entered the correct location\n" +"on the command line and try again. Because of this error, you\n" +"can only enter a URL to a profile and not to a directory. If you\n" +"are using rules or host name-based control files, restart the\n" +"installation process and make sure the control files are accessible.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/autoinst_dialogs.rb:30 +msgid "System Profile Location" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/autoinst_dialogs.rb:45 +msgid "&Profile Location:" +msgstr "" + +#. This dialog selects the target disk for the installation. +#. Below this label, all targets are listed that can be used as +#. installation target +#. heading text +#: src/include/autoinstall/autoinst_dialogs.rb:117 +msgid "Choose a hard disk" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/autoinst_dialogs.rb:124 +msgid "No disks found." +msgstr "" + +#. There are several hard disks found. Linux is completely installed on +#. one hard disk - this selection is done here +#. "Preparing Hard Disk - Step 1" is the description of the dialog what to +#. do while the following locale is the help description +#. help part 1 of 1 +#: src/include/autoinstall/autoinst_dialogs.rb:132 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"All hard disks automatically detected on your system\n" +"are shown here. Select the hard disk on which to install &product;.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. force help text width +#: src/include/autoinstall/autoinst_dialogs.rb:154 +msgid "Hard Disk Selection" +msgstr "" + +#. there is a selection from that one option has to be +#. chosen - at the moment no option is chosen +#: src/include/autoinstall/autoinst_dialogs.rb:177 +msgid "Select one of the options to continue." +msgstr "" + +#. class_dialog_contents() +#. @return [Yast::Term] +#: src/include/autoinstall/classes.rb:56 +msgid "Class Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/classes.rb:56 +msgid "Order" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/classes.rb:56 +msgid "Configurations" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/classes.rb:61 +msgid "Class Description" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/classes.rb:64 +msgid "Ne&w" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/classes.rb:65 +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:175 +msgid "&Edit" +msgstr "" + +#. AddEditClasses() +#. Add or Edit a class +#. @param [Symbol] mode +#. @param symbol +#: src/include/autoinstall/classes.rb:102 +msgid "Edit or Create Classes" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/classes.rb:107 +msgid "Na&me" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/classes.rb:112 +msgid "Or&der:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/classes.rb:121 +msgid "Descri&ption:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/classes.rb:139 +#: src/include/autoinstall/classes.rb:145 +msgid "That name is already used. Select another name." +msgstr "" + +#. Manage Classes +#: src/include/autoinstall/classes.rb:198 +msgid "Classes" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/classes.rb:200 +msgid "<p>Use this interface to define classes of control files. </p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/classes.rb:206 +msgid "" +"<p>For example, you can define a class of configurations for\n" +"a specific department, group, or site in your company environment.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/classes.rb:213 +msgid "" +"<p>The order (priority) defines the hierarchy of a class\n" +"and when it is merged when creating a control file.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/classes.rb:243 +msgid "No Description" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/classes.rb:255 +msgid "" +"Select at least one class\n" +"to edit.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/classes.rb:262 +msgid "" +"Select at least one class\n" +"to delete.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. The merge operation +#: src/include/autoinstall/classes.rb:372 +msgid "" +"Merge failed:\n" +" %1" +msgstr "" + +#. Merge Dialog +#. @return [Symbol] +#: src/include/autoinstall/classes.rb:418 +msgid "Merge Classes" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/classes.rb:427 +#: src/include/autoinstall/classes.rb:592 +msgid "None" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/classes.rb:454 +msgid "No control files defined" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/classes.rb:469 +msgid "&Merge with Empty Control File" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/classes.rb:476 +msgid "Merge with &Currently-Loaded Control File" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/classes.rb:481 +msgid "Merge Cla&sses" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/classes.rb:487 +msgid "" +"<p>If you have defined and created <b>\n" +"classes</b>, you will be able to merge them using this interface to create\n" +"a new <i>Profile</i>, which will contain information from every class\n" +"depending on the priority (order) set when\n" +"creating the classes.</P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/classes.rb:497 +msgid "" +"<P>To merge the classes, an <b>XSLT</b>\n" +"script is used.</P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/classes.rb:540 +msgid "" +"Select at least %1 configurations\n" +"to perform a merge.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/classes.rb:579 +msgid "Class Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/classes.rb:580 +msgid "" +"<p>Choose one or more of the listed classes to which the current control\n" +"file should belong.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/classes.rb:614 +msgid "No profiles in this class" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/classes.rb:651 +msgid "Select at least one class configuration.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. File: clients/autoyast.ycp +#. Summary: Main file for client call +#. Authors: Anas Nashif +#. +#. $Id$ +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:27 +msgid "Autoinstallation - Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. SAVE +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:35 +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:697 +msgid "Save as..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:42 +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:709 +msgid "File %1 was saved successfully." +msgstr "" + +#. Profile::checkProfile(); +#. Profile::checkProfile(); +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:55 +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:716 +msgid "An error occurred while saving the file." +msgstr "" + +#. by "SortKey" or alphabetical +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:107 +msgid "Groups" +msgstr "" + +#. bnc #887115 comment #9: Desktop file is "hidden" and should not be shown at all +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:154 +msgid "No modules available" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:157 +msgid "Modules" +msgstr "" + +#. Creates an `HBox containing the buttons to be displayed below the summary column +#. +#. @return The `HBox widget. +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:170 +msgid "&Clone" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:171 +msgid "&Apply to System" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:176 +msgid "Clea&r" +msgstr "" + +#. Creates a `VBox containg the summary of the specified module and the action buttons below. +#. +#. @param [String] module_name The module to summarize. +#. @return The `VBox widget. +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:195 +msgid "Details" +msgstr "" + +#. Configure module +#. @param [String] resource Module/Resource to configure +#. @return [Object] +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:357 +msgid "The module returned invalid data." +msgstr "" + +#. Sets the menus in the wizard. +#. @return [void] +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:380 +msgid "&File" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:381 +msgid "&View" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:382 +msgid "&Classes" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:383 +msgid "&Tools" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:385 +msgid "&New" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:386 +msgid "&Open" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:387 +msgid "&Save" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:391 +msgid "Save &As" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:394 +msgid "Im&port" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:398 +msgid "Import &Kickstart File" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:404 +msgid "Settin&gs" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:411 +msgid "Change to Decrypted" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:412 +msgid "Change to Encrypted" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:418 +msgid "Apply Profile to this System" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:421 +msgid "E&xit" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:426 +msgid "Configu&ration Tree" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:433 +msgid "So&urce" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:440 +msgid "Cla&sses" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:446 +msgid "Me&rge Classes" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:453 +msgid "Create Reference Pro&file" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:459 +msgid "Check &Validity of Profile" +msgstr "" + +#. Show Source +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:495 +msgid "Source" +msgstr "" + +#. Some configuration modules removes/exchange the menu bar. +#. So we have to reset. (bnc#872711) +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:569 +msgid "Do you really want to apply the settings of the module '%1' to your current system?" +msgstr "" + +#. opening/parsing the xml file failed +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:644 +msgid "An error occurred while opening/parsing the XML file." +msgstr "" + +#. NEW +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:734 +msgid "Available Modules" +msgstr "" + +#. FIXME: sucks sucks sucks sucks sucks +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:749 +msgid "Do you really want to apply the settings of the profile to your current system?" +msgstr "" + +#. EXIT +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:790 +msgid "Control file changed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:791 +msgid "Save the changes to %1?" +msgstr "" + +#. Preferences Dialog +#. @return [Symbol] +#: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:37 +msgid "&Profile Repository:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:42 +msgid "&Select Directory" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:50 +msgid "&Class directory:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:55 +msgid "Select &Directory" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:63 +msgid "" +"<P>\n" +"Enter the directory where all <em>control files</em> should be stored in\n" +"the <b>Repository</b> field.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:71 +msgid "" +"<P>If you are using the classes feature\n" +"of Autoyast, also enter the class directory. This is where\n" +"all class files are stored.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:78 +msgid "Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:94 +#: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:101 +msgid "Select Directory" +msgstr "" + +#. Return a message about invalid file names +#. @param - +#. @return message +#: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:153 +msgid "" +"Invalid file name.\n" +"Names can only contain letters, numbers, and underscore,\n" +"must begin with letter, and must be\n" +"127 characters long or less.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. title +#: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:221 +msgid "Create a Reference Control File" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:224 +msgid "Select Additional Resources:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:247 +msgid "Collecting system data..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:248 +msgid "This may take a while..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:267 +msgid "Importing Kickstart file..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:270 +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:1094 +#: src/include/autoinstall/wizards.rb:53 +msgid "Initializing ..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage +#: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:288 +msgid "Read Kickstart file" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:289 +msgid "Import data" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:292 +msgid "Reading Kickstart file..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step +#: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:294 +msgid "Importing data..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step +#: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:296 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:307 +msgid "Select a kickstart file." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:324 +msgid "" +"Error while loading Kickstart file. Verify the syntax of\n" +"file and try again." +msgstr "" + +#. Set resource name, if not using default value +#: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:348 +msgid "" +"Kickstart file was imported.\n" +"Check the imported syntax and make sure the package selection and partitioning\n" +"were imported correctly." +msgstr "" + +#. Validate Dialog +#. @return [Symbol] +#: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:378 +msgid "Check profile validity" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:394 +msgid "OK" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:395 +#: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:264 +msgid "Error" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:396 +#: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:259 +msgid "Warning" +msgstr "" + +#. [ +#. _("Checking XML without validation..."), +#. "/usr/bin/xmllint --noout", +#. ], +#. [ +#. _("Checking XML with DTD validation..."), +#. "/usr/bin/xmllint --noout --valid" +#. ], +#. this function is a replacement for this code: +#. list<any> l = [ "key1",0,"key3" ]; +#. m[ l ] = v; +#. @return [Hash] +#: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:410 src/modules/Profile.rb:807 +msgid "Checking XML with RNG validation..." +msgstr "" + +#. section wise validation +#: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:432 +msgid "Section %1: " +msgstr "" + +#. jing validation -- validates complete xml profile +#: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:459 src/modules/Profile.rb:819 +msgid "Checking XML with RNC validation..." +msgstr "" + +#. the autoyast interface can check if the profile is logical or if important stuff is missing +#. the missing stuff is under the Label "Logic" +#: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:496 +msgid "Logic" +msgstr "" + +#. the autoyast config frontend can check if a root password is configured +#. and can warn the user if it is missing +#: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:502 +msgid "No root password configured" +msgstr "" + +#. Main dialog +#. @return [Symbol] +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:61 +msgid "Con&firm installation?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:65 +msgid "AutoYaST Second Stage" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:72 +msgid "Turn Off the Machine after the First Stage" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:79 +msgid "Turn off the Machine after the Second Stage" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:86 +msgid "Reboot the Machine after the Second Stage" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:90 +#: src/modules/AutoinstGeneral.rb:126 +msgid "Signature Handling" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:94 +msgid "Accept &Unsigned Files" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:101 +msgid "Accept Files without a &Checksum" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:108 +msgid "Accept Failed &Verifications" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:115 +msgid "Accept Unknown &GPG Keys" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:122 +msgid "Accept Non Trusted GPG Keys" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:129 +msgid "Import &New GPG Keys" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:136 +msgid "" +"<P>\n" +"The options in this dialog control the behavior of the AutoYaST during\n" +"automatic installation.\n" +"</P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:144 +msgid "" +"<P>\n" +"The installation confirmation option is selected by default\n" +"to avoid unwanted installation. It stops the system\n" +"during installation and shows a summary of requested operations in the\n" +"usual proposal screen. Uncheck this option to install automatically without interruption.\n" +"</P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:155 +msgid "" +"<P>\n" +"If you turn off the second stage of AutoYaST, the installation continues in manual mode\n" +"after the first reboot (after package installation).\n" +"</P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:165 +msgid "" +"<P>\n" +"For signature handling, read the AutoYaST documentation.\n" +"</P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:172 +msgid "Other Options" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:275 +msgid "Frametitle" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:280 +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:683 +msgid "Question" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:285 +msgid "Timeout (zero means no timeout)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:325 +msgid "Password" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:333 +msgid "Pathlist for answers (multiple paths are separated by space)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:341 +msgid "Store answer in this file" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:344 +msgid "Selection List for type 'Symbol'" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:349 +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:360 +msgid "Label" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:349 +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:361 +msgid "Value" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:374 +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:713 +msgid "<P></P>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:635 +msgid "1st Stage" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:641 +msgid "2nd Stage" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:645 +msgid "Dialog Title" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:646 +msgid "Helptext" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:651 +msgid "Add to Dialog List" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:656 +msgid "Apply changes to dialog" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:665 +msgid "Title" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:673 +msgid "Delete Dialog" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:675 +msgid "Dialog up" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:679 +msgid "Dialog down" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:682 +msgid "Questions in dialog" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:688 +msgid "Add Question" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:693 +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:985 +msgid "Edit Question" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:698 +msgid "Delete Question" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:703 +msgid "Question up" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:708 +msgid "Question down" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:714 +msgid "ASK Options" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: dialog caption +#: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:1093 +msgid "General Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. All helps are here +#: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:16 +msgid "<p><b><big>Profile Validation</big></b><br>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:17 +msgid "" +"<p>This tool uses <em>xmllint</em> to validate the profile against the DTD and\n" +"it checks for missing data. Some missing data might be intentional and any\n" +"reported errors can be ignored, for example, when creating classes.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:22 +msgid "" +"<p>Load a profile first. Otherwise an empty file\n" +"is validated.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:25 +msgid "<p><b><big>Importing Kickstart Files</big></b><br>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:26 +msgid "" +"<p>To import a Kickstart file, enter the path to the configuration file. \n" +"The imported data is loaded into the configuration management system \n" +"to add more configuration options available with SUSE.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:31 +msgid "" +"<p>This tool creates a reference profile by reading\n" +"information from this system. Select the resources to read from this system\n" +"in addition to the default resources, like partitioning and package selections.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:36 +msgid "<p> Partition your hard disks... </p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:37 +msgid "" +"<p>The table to the right shows the partitions to create on the target system.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:40 +msgid "<p><b>Hard disks</b> are designated like this </p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:41 +msgid "" +"<tt>/dev/hda </tt>1st EIDE disk\n" +"<tt>/dev/hdb </tt>2nd EIDE disk\n" +"<tt>/dev/hdc </tt>3rd EIDE disk" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:46 +msgid "<p>etc.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:47 +msgid "<p>- or - </p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:48 +msgid "" +"<p><tt>/dev/sda </tt>1st SCSI disk\n" +"<tt>/dev/sdb </tt>2nd SCSI disk\n" +"<tt>/dev/sdc </tt>3rd SCSI disk</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:53 +msgid "" +"If no partitions are defined and the specified drive is also\n" +"the drive where the root partition should reside, the following partitions are\n" +"created automatically:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:58 +msgid "" +" <tt>/boot</tt>, <tt>swap</tt>, and a root partition <tt>/</tt>.\n" +"Sizes are calculated automatically.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:61 +msgid "<p><b>Advanced Options</b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:62 +msgid "By default, AutoYaST will create an extended partition and adds all new partitions as logical devices. It is possible, however, to instruct AutoYaST to create a certain partition as a primary partition or as extended partition. Additionally, it is possible to specify the size of a partition using sectors rather than size in MBytes." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:65 +msgid "" +"These options and other advanced options cannot be configured using this\n" +"interface. Instead, add them manually to the control file.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:68 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"For LVM and RAID setup, consult the documentation and add the configuration\n" +"to an existing control file. You can only create unformatted LVM and RAID partitions as\n" +"a preparation.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. autoyast tried to read a file but had no success. +#: src/include/autoinstall/io.rb:123 +msgid "Cannot find URL '%1' via protocol HTTP(S). Server returned code %2." +msgstr "" + +#. autoyast tried to read a file but had no success. +#: src/include/autoinstall/io.rb:143 +msgid "Cannot find URL '%1' via protocol FTP. Server returned code %2." +msgstr "" + +#. FIXME: I have doubts this will ever work. Too early. +#: src/include/autoinstall/io.rb:159 +msgid "Reading file on %1/%2 failed.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/io.rb:175 +msgid "Reading file on %1 failed.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. autoyast tried to mount the CD but had no success. +#. autoyast tried to mount a NFS directory which failed +#. autoyast tried to mount a NFS directory which failed +#: src/include/autoinstall/io.rb:237 src/include/autoinstall/io.rb:293 +#: src/include/autoinstall/io.rb:337 +msgid "Mounting %1 failed." +msgstr "" + +#. autoyast tried to read a file but had no success. +#: src/include/autoinstall/io.rb:268 +msgid "Reading a file on CD failed. Path: %1/%2." +msgstr "" + +#. autoyast tried to copy a file via NFS which failed +#. autoyast tried to copy a file via NFS which failed +#: src/include/autoinstall/io.rb:316 src/include/autoinstall/io.rb:360 +msgid "Remote file %1 cannot be retrieved" +msgstr "" + +#. this is workaround for bnc#849767 +#. because of changes in autoyast startup this code is now +#. called much sooner (before Storage stuff is initialized) +#. call dummy method to trigger Storage initialization +#: src/include/autoinstall/io.rb:485 +msgid "%1 is not mounted and mount failed" +msgstr "" + +#. autoyast tried to copy a file but that file can't be found +#: src/include/autoinstall/io.rb:505 +msgid "File %1 cannot be found" +msgstr "" + +#. Device +#: src/include/autoinstall/io.rb:527 +msgid "Cannot find URL '%1' via protocol TFTP." +msgstr "" + +#. the user wanted autoyast to fetch it's profile via an unknown protocol +#: src/include/autoinstall/io.rb:534 +msgid "Unknown protocol %1." +msgstr "" + +#. Script Configuration +#. @return script configuration dialog +#: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:30 +msgid "Available Scripts" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:34 +msgid "Script Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:34 +msgid "Type" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:34 +msgid "Interpreter" +msgstr "" + +#. help 1/6 +#: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:64 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<h3>Preinstallation Scripts</h3>\n" +"<P>Add commands to run on the system before the installation begins. </P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help 2/6 +#: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:72 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<h3>Postinstallation Scripts</h3>\n" +"<P>You can also add commands to execute on the system after the installation\n" +"is completed. These scripts are run outside the chroot environment.\n" +"</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. help 3/6 +#: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:83 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<H3>Chroot Scripts</H3>\n" +"<P>For your postinstallation script to run inside the chroot\n" +"environment, choose the <i>chroot scripts</i> options. Those scripts are\n" +"run before the system reboots for the first time. By default, the chroot \n" +"scripts are run in the installation system. To access files in the installed \n" +"system, always use the mount point \"/mnt\" in your scripts.\n" +"</P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help 4/6 +#: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:97 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p>It is possible to run chroot scripts in a later stage after\n" +"the boot loader has been configured using the special boolean tag \"chrooted\".\n" +"This runs the scripts in the installed system. \n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help 5/6 +#: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:108 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<H3>Init Scripts</H3>\n" +"<P>These scripts are executed during the initial boot process and after\n" +"YaST has finished configuring the system. The final scripts are executed \n" +"using a special <b>rc</b> script that is executed only once. \n" +"The final scripts are executed toward the end of the boot\n" +"process and after network has been initialized.\n" +"</P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help 6/6 +#: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:123 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<H3>Interpreter:</H3>\n" +"<P>Preinstallation scripts can only be shell scripts. Do not use <i>Perl</i> or \n" +"<i>Python</i> for preinstallation scripts.\n" +"</P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:133 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<H3>Network Access:</H3>\n" +"<P>While executing postinstallation scripts, the network is disabled and\n" +"requires initialization in the scripts to make the network accessible. An\n" +"alternative for postinstallation scripts with network is using init scripts, which\n" +"guarantee a fully configured system when running the scripts. If you did an installation\n" +"over a network, you can use the <b>Network</b> option for the postscript, too.\n" +"</P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:146 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<H3>Feedback and Debug:</H3>\n" +"<P>All scripts except the init scripts can show STDOUT+STDERR in a pop-up box as feedback.\n" +"If you turn on debugging, you get more output in the feedback dialog that might help\n" +"you to debug your script.</P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:155 +msgid "Script Editor" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:161 +msgid "&File Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:166 +msgid "&Interpreter" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:170 +msgid "Perl" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:175 +msgid "Shell" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:180 +msgid "Python" +msgstr "" + +#. a checkbox where you can choose if you want to see script-feedback output or not +#: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:220 +msgid "&Feedback" +msgstr "" + +#. a checkbox where you can choose if you want to see script-debug output or not +#: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:226 +msgid "&Debug" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:231 +msgid "&Chrooted" +msgstr "" + +#. a checkbox where you can choose if you need to have network when the script is running +#: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:237 +msgid "&Network" +msgstr "" + +#. a checkbox where you can choose if you want to see script-feedback output or not +#: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:245 +msgid "&Feedback Type" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:249 +msgid "none" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:254 +msgid "Message" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:275 +msgid "Text of the notification popup" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:283 +msgid "Script Location" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:291 +msgid "S&cript Source" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:298 +msgid "&Load new source" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:372 +msgid "" +"Provide at least the script\n" +"name and the location or content of the script.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Main dialog +#. @return [Symbol] +#: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:474 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"By adding scripts to the autoinstallation process, customize the installation for\n" +"your needs and take control in different stages of the installation.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:480 +msgid "User Script Management" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:500 +#: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:508 +msgid "Select a script first." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: dialog caption +#: src/include/autoinstall/wizards.rb:52 +msgid "Autoinstall Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Read rules file +#. @return [void] +#: src/modules/AutoInstallRules.rb:448 +msgid "Parsing the rules file failed. XML parser reports:\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Merge Rule results +#. @param [String] result_profile the resulting control file path +#. @return [Boolean] true on success +#. autoyast has read the autoyast configuration file but something went wrong +#: src/modules/AutoInstallRules.rb:909 src/modules/Profile.rb:738 +msgid "The XML parser reported an error while parsing the autoyast profile. The error message is:\n" +msgstr "" + +#. backdoor for merging problems. +#: src/modules/AutoInstallRules.rb:1054 +msgid "" +"\n" +"User-defined classes could not be retrieved. Make sure all classes \n" +"are defined correctly and available for this system via the network\n" +"or locally. The system cannot be installed with the original control \n" +"file without using classes.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. The line above needs to be fixed when we have more attributes +#. comment will look like this: "(description=BLA BLA)" +#: src/modules/AutoinstConfig.rb:278 +msgid "Choose Profile" +msgstr "" + +#. SetProtocolMessage () +#. @return [void] +#: src/modules/AutoinstConfig.rb:334 +msgid "Retrieving control file from floppy." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstConfig.rb:337 +msgid "Retrieving control file (%1) from TFTP server: %2." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstConfig.rb:343 +msgid "Retrieving control file (%1) from NFS server: %2." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstConfig.rb:349 +msgid "Retrieving control file (%1) from HTTP server: %2." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstConfig.rb:355 +msgid "Retrieving control file (%1) from FTP server: %2." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstConfig.rb:361 +msgid "Copying control file from file: %1." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstConfig.rb:366 +msgid "Copying control file from device: /dev/%1." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstConfig.rb:370 +msgid "Copying control file from default location." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstConfig.rb:372 +msgid "Source unknown." +msgstr "" + +#. This probably gets never executed and it only breaks the commandline iface +#. by Mode::test() call which instantiates UI +#. else if (Mode::test () && Mode::normal ()) +#. { +#. local_rules_file = (string)WFM::Args(1); +#. } +#: src/modules/AutoinstConfig.rb:452 +msgid "" +"<h3>AutoYaST Configuration Management System</h3>\n" +"<p>Almost all resources of the control file can be\n" +"configured using the configuration management system.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstConfig.rb:457 +msgid "" +"<p>Most of the modules used to create the configuration are identical to those available\n" +"through the YaST Control Center. Instead of configuring this system, the data\n" +"entered is collected and exported to the control file that can be used to\n" +"install another system using AutoYaST.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstConfig.rb:464 +msgid "" +"<p>In addition to the existing and familiar modules,\n" +"new interfaces were created for special and complex configurations, including\n" +"partitioning, general options, and software.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Construct node name for display in tree. +#. +#. Constructed names are of the form: +#. "<device name> - {drive,volgroup} +#. +#. @param [Hash{String => Object}] drive to create node name for +#. +#. @return the newly created node name +#: src/modules/AutoinstDrive.rb:128 +msgid " - Drive" +msgstr "" + +#. volume group +#: src/modules/AutoinstDrive.rb:132 +msgid " - Volume group" +msgstr "" + +#. Settings Summary +#: src/modules/AutoinstFile.rb:46 +msgid "Configured Files:" +msgstr "" + +#. string language_name = ""; +#. string keyboard_name = ""; +#: src/modules/AutoinstGeneral.rb:90 +msgid "Confirm installation?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstGeneral.rb:93 src/modules/AutoinstGeneral.rb:99 +#: src/modules/AutoinstGeneral.rb:108 src/modules/AutoinstGeneral.rb:115 +#: src/modules/AutoinstGeneral.rb:122 +msgid "Yes" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstGeneral.rb:93 src/modules/AutoinstGeneral.rb:99 +#: src/modules/AutoinstGeneral.rb:108 +msgid "No" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstGeneral.rb:96 +msgid "Second Stage of AutoYaST" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstGeneral.rb:104 +msgid "Halting the machine after stage one" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstGeneral.rb:113 +msgid "Halting the machine after stage two" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstGeneral.rb:120 +msgid "Reboot the machine after stage two" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstGeneral.rb:130 +msgid "Accepting unsigned files" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstGeneral.rb:131 +msgid "Not accepting unsigned files" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstGeneral.rb:140 +msgid "Accepting files without a checksum" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstGeneral.rb:141 +msgid "Not accepting files without a checksum" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstGeneral.rb:150 +msgid "Accepting failed verifications" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstGeneral.rb:151 +msgid "Not accepting failed verifications" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstGeneral.rb:156 +msgid "Accepting unknown GPG keys" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstGeneral.rb:157 +msgid "Not accepting unknown GPG Keys" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstGeneral.rb:162 +msgid "Importing new GPG keys" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstGeneral.rb:163 +msgid "Not importing new GPG Keys" +msgstr "" + +#. NTP syncing +#: src/modules/AutoinstGeneral.rb:414 +msgid "Syncing time..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: %s is the name of the ntp server +#: src/modules/AutoinstGeneral.rb:416 +msgid "Syncing time with %s." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstGeneral.rb:420 +msgid "Time syncing failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstGeneral.rb:424 +msgid "Cannot update system time." +msgstr "" + +#. look for VGs to reuse +#: src/modules/AutoinstLVM.rb:113 +msgid "Cannot reuse volume group %1. The volume group does not exist." +msgstr "" + +#. if no feeder (PV) was found for current volume group +#. the next instructions taints result +#: src/modules/AutoinstPartPlan.rb:282 +msgid "Volume group '%1' must have at least one physical volume. Provide one." +msgstr "" + +#. PUBLIC INTERFACE +#. INTER FACE TO CONF TREE +#. Return summary of configuration +#. @return [String] configuration summary dialog +#. return Summary of configuration +#. @return [String] configuration summary dialog +#: src/modules/AutoinstPartPlan.rb:682 src/modules/AutoinstStorage.rb:913 +msgid "Drives" +msgstr "" + +#. We are counting harddisks only (type CT_DISK) +#: src/modules/AutoinstPartPlan.rb:688 +msgid "%s drive in total" +msgid_plural "%s drives in total" +msgstr[0] "" +msgstr[1] "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstPartPlan.rb:707 +msgid "Not yet cloned." +msgstr "" + +#. Return Summary +#. @return [String] summary +#: src/modules/AutoinstScripts.rb:328 +msgid "Preinstallation Scripts" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstScripts.rb:341 +msgid "Postinstallation Scripts" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstScripts.rb:354 +msgid "Chroot Scripts" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstScripts.rb:367 +msgid "Init Scripts" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstScripts.rb:380 +msgid "Postpartitioning Scripts" +msgstr "" + +#. return type of script as formatted string +#. @param script type +#. @return [String] type as translated string +#: src/modules/AutoinstScripts.rb:475 +msgid "Pre" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstScripts.rb:477 +msgid "Post" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstScripts.rb:479 +msgid "Init" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstScripts.rb:481 +msgid "Chroot" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstScripts.rb:483 +msgid "Postpartitioning" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstScripts.rb:485 +msgid "Unknown" +msgstr "" + +#. warning text during the installation. %1 is a list of package names +#: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:172 +msgid "" +"These packages could not be found in the software repositories:\n" +"%1" +msgstr "" + +#. 4 means "already exists" +#. Add add-ons +#: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:327 src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:347 +msgid "Adding repo %1 failed" +msgstr "" + +#. Install +#: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:375 +msgid "Image creation failed while pattern installation. Please check /tmp/ay_image.log" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:383 +msgid "Creating Image - installing packages" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:393 +msgid "Image creation failed while package installation. Please check /tmp/ay_image.log" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup::Message( _("in the next file dialog you have to choose the target directory to save the image") ); +#: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:404 +msgid "Store image to ..." +msgstr "" + +#. Compress image: +#. tar cfz /srv/www/htdocs/image.tar.gz --exclude="proc*" . +#: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:433 +msgid "" +"You can do changes to the image now in %1/\n" +"If you press the ok-button, the image will be compressed and can't be changed anymore." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:447 +msgid "Image compressing failed in '%1'. Please check /tmp/ay_image.log" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:454 +msgid "Image created successfully" +msgstr "" + +#. copy a directory (ends with / in directory.yast) +#: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:490 +msgid "" +"can not get the directory.yast file at `%1`.\n" +"You can create that file with 'ls -F > directory.yast' if it's missing." +msgstr "" + +#. don't copy subdirs. They have to be mentioned explicit. Copy only files from that dir. +#: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:524 +msgid "can not read '%1'. Try again?" +msgstr "" + +#. copy a file +#: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:542 +msgid "can not read '%1'. ISO creation failed" +msgstr "" + +#. we will have the image.tar.gz and autoinst.xml on the root of the DVD/CD +#: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:572 +msgid "Preparing ISO Filestructure ..." +msgstr "" + +#. prepare and save isolinux.cfg boot menu of the media +#: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:621 +msgid "boot config for the DVD" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:625 +msgid "Ok" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:628 +msgid "" +"You can do changes to the ISO now in %1, like adding a complete different AutoYaST XML file.\n" +"If you press the ok-button, the iso will be created." +msgstr "" + +#. create the actual ISO file +#. Popup::Message( _("Please choose a place where you want to save the ISO file in the next dialog") ); +#: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:647 +msgid "Store ISO image to ..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:648 +msgid "Creating ISO File ..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:669 +msgid "ISO successfully created at %1" +msgstr "" + +#. Summary +#. @return Html formatted configuration summary +#: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:745 +msgid "Selected Patterns" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:755 +msgid "Individually Selected Packages" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:761 +msgid "Packages to Remove" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:768 +msgid "Force Kernel Package" +msgstr "" + +#. set SoftLock to avoid the installation of recommended patterns (#159466) +#: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:858 +msgid "Could not set patterns: %1." +msgstr "" + +#. Solve dependencies +#: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:919 +msgid "The package resolver run failed. Please check your software section in the autoyast profile." +msgstr "" + +#. 1 cyl buffer per partition +#: src/modules/AutoinstStorage.rb:494 +msgid "The partition plan configured in your XML profile does not fit on the hard disk. %1MB missing" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstStorage.rb:917 +msgid "Total of %1 drive" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AutoinstStorage.rb:923 +msgid "No specific device configured" +msgstr "" + +#. Handle /etc/fstab usage +#. @return [Boolean] +#: src/modules/AutoinstStorage.rb:1018 +msgid "Evaluating root partition. One moment please..." +msgstr "" + +#. a popup +#: src/modules/AutoinstStorage.rb:1026 +msgid "No Linux root partition found." +msgstr "" + +#. We must only change RootPart::selectedRootPartition if booting +#. is inevitable. +#: src/modules/AutoinstStorage.rb:1039 +msgid "" +"Multiple root partitions found, but you did not configure\n" +"which root partition should be used. Automatic installation not possible.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. return list of available devices +#: src/modules/AutoinstStorage.rb:1122 +msgid "device '%1' not found by storage backend" +msgstr "" + +#. Prepare Profile for saving and remove empty data structs +#. @return [void] +#: src/modules/Profile.rb:351 +msgid "Collecting configuration data..." +msgstr "" + +#. Save YCP data into XML +#. @param path to file +#. @return [Boolean] true on success +#: src/modules/Profile.rb:454 +msgid "Encrypted AutoYaST profile. Enter the password twice." +msgstr "" + +#. Save sections of current profile to separate files +#. +#. @param [String] dir - directory to store section xml files in +#. @return - list of filenames +#: src/modules/Profile.rb:528 +msgid "Could not write section %1 to file %2." +msgstr "" + +#. Read XML into YCP data +#. @param path to file +#. @return [Boolean] +#: src/modules/Profile.rb:695 src/modules/ProfileLocation.rb:190 +msgid "Encrypted AutoYaST profile. Enter the correct password." +msgstr "" + +#. need to call this to force Storage stuff to initialize just now +#: src/modules/ProfileLocation.rb:156 +msgid "label not found while looking for autoyast profile" +msgstr "" + +#. autoyast hit an error while fetching it's config file +#: src/modules/ProfileLocation.rb:179 +msgid "An error occurred while fetching the profile:\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/ProfileLocation.rb:193 +msgid "&OK" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/base.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/base.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/base.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,5447 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. Translators: a warning message in a continue-cancel question +#. Opscode Chef is a different way to configure the system. +#: library/commandline/src/clients/other_tools_warning.rb:43 +msgid "" +"Chef Client is running. The changes that you make\n" +"may be overridden by Chef later.\n" +"Continue configuration with YaST?" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: help for 'help' option on command line +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:54 +msgid "Print the help for this module" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: help for 'longhelp' option on command line +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:60 +msgid "Print a long version of help for this module" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: help for 'xmlhelp' option on command line +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:66 +msgid "Print a long version of help for this module in XML format" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: help for 'interactive' option on command line +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:72 +msgid "Start interactive shell to control the module" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: help for 'exit' command line interactive mode +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:78 +msgid "Exit interactive mode and save the changes" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: help for 'abort' command line interactive mode +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:84 +msgid "Abort interactive mode without saving the changes" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line "help" option +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:92 +msgid "Print the help for this command" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line "verbose" option +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:98 +msgid "Show progress information" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line "xmlfile" option +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:104 +msgid "Where to store the XML output" +msgstr "" + +#. string: command line interface is not supported +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:144 +msgid "This YaST2 module does not support the command line interface." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: default error message for command line +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:324 +msgid "Use 'help' for a complete list of available commands." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: default error message for command line +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:329 +msgid "Use 'yast2 %1 help' for a complete list of available commands." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error message in command line interface +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:367 +msgid "Unknown Command: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error message - user did not provide a value for option %1 on the command line +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:405 +msgid "Option '%1' is missing value." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error message, %1 is a command, %2 is the wrong option given by the user +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:440 +msgid "Unknown option for command '%1': %2" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error message, %2 is the value given +#. translators: error message, %2 is the value given +#. translators: error message, %2 is the value given +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:461 +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:473 +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:483 +msgid "Invalid value for option '%1': %2" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error message, %2 is expected type, %3 is the value given +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:501 +msgid "Invalid value for option '%1' -- expected '%2', received %3" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error message if option has a value, but cannot have one +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:522 +msgid "Option '%1' cannot have a value. Given value: %2" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error message, how to get command line help for interactive mode +#. %1 is the module name, %2 is the action name +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:541 +msgid "Use '%1 %2 help' for a complete list of available options." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error message, how to get command line help for non-interactive mode +#. %1 is the module name, %2 is the action name +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:551 +msgid "Use 'yast2 %1 %2 help' for a complete list of available options." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line interface header, %1 is identification of the module +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:569 +msgid "YaST Configuration Module %1\n" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: the command does not provide any help +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:593 +msgid "No help available" +msgstr "" + +#. Process <command> "help" +#. translators: %1 is the command name +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:597 +msgid "Command '%1'" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line options +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:617 +msgid "" +"\n" +" Options:" +msgstr "" + +#. additional help for using command line +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:706 +msgid "" +"\n" +" Options of the [string] type must be written in the form 'option=value'." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: example title for command line +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:713 +msgid "" +"\n" +" Example:" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: default module description if none is provided by the module itself +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:743 +msgid "This is a YaST module." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: short help title for command line +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:748 +msgid "Basic Syntax:" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: module command line help, %1 is the module name +#. translate <command> and [options] only! +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:763 +msgid " yast2 %1 <command> [verbose] [options]" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: module command line help, %1 is the module name +#. translate <command> only! +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:790 +msgid " yast2 %1 <command> help" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: module command line help +#. translate <command> and [options] only! +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:797 +msgid " <command> [options]" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: module command line help +#. translate <command> only! +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:800 +msgid " <command> help" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line title: list of available commands +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:812 +msgid "Commands:" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error message: module does not provide any help messages +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:828 +msgid "No help available." +msgstr "" + +#. fallback message - invalid help has been provided by the yast module +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:864 +msgid "" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: module command line help, %1 is the module name +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:874 +msgid "Run 'yast2 %1 <command> help' for a list of available options." +msgstr "" + +#. error message - command line option xmlfile is missing +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:938 +msgid "Target file name ('xmlfile' option) is missing. Use xmlfile= command line option." +msgstr "" + +#. error message - command line option xmlfile is missing +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:950 +msgid "Target file name ('xmlfile' option) is empty. Use xmlfile= command line option." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: fallback name for a module at command line +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:1087 +msgid "unknown" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: the last command %1 in a list of unique commands +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:1461 +msgid "or '%1'" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error message - missing unique command for command line execution +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:1469 +msgid "Specify the command '%1'." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error message - missing unique command for command line execution +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:1476 +msgid "Specify one of the commands: %1." +msgstr "" + +#. size( unique_options ) == 1 here does not make sense +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:1486 +msgid "Specify only one of the commands: %1." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error message - the module does not provide command line interface +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:1531 +msgid "There is no user interface available for this module." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: progress message - command line interface ready +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:1560 +msgid "Ready" +msgstr "" + +#. non-GUI handling +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:1574 +msgid "Initializing" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: Progress message - the command line interface is about to finish +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:1610 +msgid "Finishing" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: The command line interface is finished +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:1617 +msgid "Done" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: The command line interface is finished without writing the changes +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:1620 +msgid "Quitting (without changes)" +msgstr "" + +#. prompt message displayed in the commandline mode +#. when user is asked to replay "yes" or "no" (localized) +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:1634 +msgid "yes or no?" +msgstr "" + +#. yes - used in the command line mode as input text for yes/no confirmation +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:1639 +msgid "yes" +msgstr "" + +#. no - used in the command line mode as input text for yes/no confirmation +#: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:1642 +msgid "no" +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. *************************************************************************** +#. +#. Copyright (c) 2002 - 2012 Novell, Inc. +#. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or +#. modify it under the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as +#. published by the Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +#. but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +#. MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +#. GNU General Public License for more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +#. along with this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, +#. you may find current contact information at www.novell.com +#. +#. *************************************************************************** +#. File: modules/InstError.ycp +#. Package: Installation +#. Summary: Module for reporting installation errors +#. Authors: Lukas Ocilka +#. +#. $Id$ +#. +#. This module provides unified interface for reporting +#. installation errors. +#: library/control/src/modules/InstError.rb:72 +msgid "Save y2logs to..." +msgstr "" + +#. Busy message, %1 is replaced with a filename +#: library/control/src/modules/InstError.rb:79 +msgid "Saving YaST logs to %1..." +msgstr "" + +#. Error message, %1 is replaced with a filename +#. %2 with am error reason (there is a newline between %1 and %2) +#: library/control/src/modules/InstError.rb:98 +msgid "" +"Unable to save YaST logs to %1\n" +"%2" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: part of an error message +#. // %1 - logfile, possibly with errors +#: library/control/src/modules/InstError.rb:139 +msgid "More information can be found near the end of the '%1' file." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: part of an error message +#. %1 - link to our bugzilla +#. %2 - directory where YaST logs are stored +#. %3 - link to the Yast Bug Reporting HOWTO Web page +#: library/control/src/modules/InstError.rb:157 +msgid "" +"This is worth reporting a bug at %1.\n" +"Please, attach also all YaST logs stored in the '%2' directory.\n" +"See %3 for more information about YaST logs." +msgstr "" + +#. link to the Yast Bug Reporting HOWTO +#. for translators: use the localized page for your language if it exists, +#. check the combo box "In other laguages" on top of the page +#. link to the Yast Bug Reporting HOWTO +#. for translators: use the localized page for your language if it exists, +#. check the combo box "In other laguages" on top of the page +#: library/control/src/modules/InstError.rb:167 +#: library/control/src/modules/ProductControl.rb:1444 +msgid "http://en.opensuse.org/Bugs/YaST" +msgstr "" + +#. FIXME: BNC #422612, Use `opt(`noSanityCheck) later +#: library/control/src/modules/InstError.rb:178 +msgid "&Save YaST Logs..." +msgstr "" + +#. Function is similar to ShowErrorPopUp but the error details are grabbed automatically +#. from YaST logs. +#. +#. @param [String] error_text (e.g., "Client inst_abc returned invalid data.") +#: library/control/src/modules/InstError.rb:226 +msgid "Installation Error" +msgstr "" + +#. Load a rpm package from the media into the inst-sys and ensure its +#. unloading after end of block. +#. @param [String] package to load +#. @param [Proc] Block to be yield +#. @raises [RuntimeError] when package loading failed +#. +#. @example +#. InstExtensionImage.with_extension("snapper") do +#. WFM.Execute(path(".local.bash"), "snapper magic") +#. end +#: library/control/src/modules/InstExtensionImage.rb:352 +msgid "Loading to memory package '%s'" +msgstr "" + +#: library/control/src/modules/InstExtensionImage.rb:358 +msgid "Removing from memory package '%s'" +msgstr "" + +#. error report +#: library/control/src/modules/ProductControl.rb:1253 +msgid "No workflow defined for this installation mode." +msgstr "" + +#. last part of the question (variable) +#: library/control/src/modules/ProductProfile.rb:180 +msgid "Do you want to continue or abort the installation?" +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#. Button that will continue with the installation +#: library/control/src/modules/ProductProfile.rb:183 +#: library/general/src/modules/Popup.rb:744 +msgid "&Continue Installation" +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#. Button that will really abort the installation +#: library/control/src/modules/ProductProfile.rb:185 +#: library/general/src/modules/Popup.rb:742 +msgid "&Abort Installation" +msgstr "" + +#. last part of the question (variable) +#: library/control/src/modules/ProductProfile.rb:190 +msgid "Do you want to add new product anyway?" +msgstr "" + +#. popup dialog caption +#. this string is usually used as headline of a popup +#: library/control/src/modules/ProductProfile.rb:197 +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:256 +msgid "Warning" +msgstr "" + +#. popup message, %1 is list of problems +#: library/control/src/modules/ProductProfile.rb:200 +msgid "" +"The profile does not allow you to run the products on this system.\n" +"Proceeding to run this installation will leave you in an unsupported state\n" +"and might impact your compliance requirements.\n" +" \n" +"The following requirements are not fulfilled on this system:\n" +" \n" +"%1\n" +"\n" +"%2" +msgstr "" + +#. make sure that every workflow is merged only once +#. bugzilla #332436 +#: library/control/src/modules/WorkflowManager.rb:1315 +msgid "An internal error occurred when integrating additional workflow." +msgstr "" + +#. message popup, %1 is a label of some widget +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWM.rb:677 +msgid "The value of %1 is invalid." +msgstr "" + +#. service status - label +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMServiceStart.rb:67 +msgid "Unavailable" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for service auto start widget +#. %1 and %2 are button labels +#. %1 is eg. "On -- Start Service when Booting" +#. %2 is eg. "Off -- Start Service Manually" +#. (both without quotes) +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMServiceStart.rb:225 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Service Start</big></b><br>\n" +"To start the service every time your computer is booted, set\n" +"<b>%1</b>. Otherwise set <b>%2</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for service auto start widget +#. %1, %2 and %3 are button labels +#. %1 is eg. "On -- Start Service when Booting" +#. %2 is eg. "Off -- Start Service Manually" +#. %3 is eg. "Start Service via xinetd" +#. (both without quotes) +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMServiceStart.rb:241 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Service Start</big></b><br>\n" +"To start the service every time your computer is booted, set\n" +"<b>%1</b>. To start the service via the xinetd daemon, set <b>%3</b>.\n" +"Otherwise set <b>%2</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. part of help text - radio button label, NO SHORTCUT!!! +#. part of help text - radio button label, NO SHORTCUT!!! +#. radio button +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMServiceStart.rb:255 +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMServiceStart.rb:267 +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMServiceStart.rb:315 +msgid "During Boot" +msgstr "" + +#. part of help text - radio button label, NO SHORTCUT!!! +#. part of help text - radio button label, NO SHORTCUT!!! +#. radio button +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMServiceStart.rb:257 +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMServiceStart.rb:269 +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMServiceStart.rb:322 +msgid "Manually" +msgstr "" + +#. part of help text - radio button label, NO SHORTCUT!!! +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMServiceStart.rb:271 +msgid "Via xinetd" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMServiceStart.rb:329 +msgid "Via &xinetd" +msgstr "" + +#. frame +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMServiceStart.rb:374 +msgid "Service Start" +msgstr "" + +#. service status - label +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMServiceStart.rb:465 +msgid "Service is running" +msgstr "" + +#. service status - label +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMServiceStart.rb:471 +msgid "Service is not running" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for service status displaying and switching widget 1/2 +#. %1 and %2 are push button labels +#. %1 is eg. "Start the Service Now" +#. %2 is eg. "Stop the Service Now" +#. (both without quotes) +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMServiceStart.rb:504 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Switch On or Off</big></b><br>\n" +"To start or stop the service immediately, use \n" +"<b>%1</b> or <b>%2</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for service start widget 2/2, optional +#. %3 is push button label, eg. "Save Changes and Restart Service Now" +#. (without quotes) +#. note: %3 is correct, do not replace with %1!!! +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMServiceStart.rb:516 +msgid "" +"<p>To save all changes and restart the\n" +"service immediately, use <b>%3</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. part of help text - push button label, NO SHORTCUT!!! +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMServiceStart.rb:531 +msgid "Start the Service Now" +msgstr "" + +#. part of help text - push button label, NO SHORTCUT!!! +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMServiceStart.rb:533 +msgid "Stop the Service Now" +msgstr "" + +#. part of help text - push button label, NO SHORTCUT!!! +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMServiceStart.rb:535 +msgid "Save Changes and Restart Service Now" +msgstr "" + +#. push button for immediate service starting +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMServiceStart.rb:577 +msgid "&Start the Service Now" +msgstr "" + +#. push button for immediate service stopping +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMServiceStart.rb:584 +msgid "S&top the Service Now" +msgstr "" + +#. push button for immediate saving of the settings and service starting +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMServiceStart.rb:591 +msgid "S&ave Changes and Restart Service Now" +msgstr "" + +#. Frame label (stoping starting service) +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMServiceStart.rb:614 +msgid "Switch On and Off" +msgstr "" + +#. Current status +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMServiceStart.rb:620 +msgid "Current Status: " +msgstr "" + +#. help text for LDAP enablement widget +#. %1 is button label, eg. "LDAP Support Active" (without quotes) +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMServiceStart.rb:730 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>LDAP Support</big></b><br>\n" +"To store the settings in LDAP instead of native configuration files,\n" +"set <b>%1</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. part of help text - check box label, NO SHORTCUT!!! +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMServiceStart.rb:743 +msgid "LDAP Support Active" +msgstr "" + +#. check box +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMServiceStart.rb:772 +msgid "&LDAP Support Active" +msgstr "" + +#. Fallback label for a tab if no is defined +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMTab.rb:48 +msgid "Tab" +msgstr "" + +#. push button +#. push button +#. Button label +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMTable.rb:370 +#: library/cwm/src/modules/TablePopup.rb:940 +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:166 +msgid "&Up" +msgstr "" + +#. push button +#. push button +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMTable.rb:372 +#: library/cwm/src/modules/TablePopup.rb:942 +msgid "&Down" +msgstr "" + +#. popup message +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMTsigKeys.rb:302 +msgid "" +"The selected TSIG key cannot be deleted,\n" +"because it is in use.\n" +"Stop using it in the configuration first." +msgstr "" + +#. popup title +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMTsigKeys.rb:308 +msgid "Cannot delete TSIG key." +msgstr "" + +#. popup headline +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMTsigKeys.rb:318 +msgid "Select File with the Authentication Key" +msgstr "" + +#. popup headline +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMTsigKeys.rb:333 +msgid "Select File for the Authentication Key" +msgstr "" + +#. error report +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMTsigKeys.rb:353 +msgid "Specified filename is an existing directory." +msgstr "" + +#. yes-no popup +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMTsigKeys.rb:358 +msgid "Specified file exists. Rewrite it?" +msgstr "" + +#. error report +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMTsigKeys.rb:368 +msgid "The TSIG key ID was not specified." +msgstr "" + +#. yes-no popup +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMTsigKeys.rb:375 +msgid "" +"The key with the specified ID exists and is used.\n" +"Remove it?" +msgstr "" + +#. yes-no popup +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMTsigKeys.rb:395 +msgid "" +"A key with the specified ID was found\n" +"on your disk. Remove it?" +msgstr "" + +#. yes-no popup +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMTsigKeys.rb:420 +msgid "The key will be created now. Continue?" +msgstr "" + +#. error report +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMTsigKeys.rb:436 +msgid "Creating the TSIG key failed." +msgstr "" + +#. message popup +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMTsigKeys.rb:446 +msgid "The specified file does not exist." +msgstr "" + +#. message popup +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMTsigKeys.rb:452 +msgid "The specified file does not contain any TSIG key." +msgstr "" + +#. yes-no popup +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMTsigKeys.rb:462 +msgid "" +"The specified file contains a TSIG key with the same\n" +"identifier as some of already present keys.\n" +"Old keys will be removed. Continue?" +msgstr "" + +#. tsig keys management dialog help 1/4 +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMTsigKeys.rb:565 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>TSIG Key Management</b></big><br>\n" +"Use this dialog to manage the TSIG keys.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. tsig keys management dialog help 2/4 +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMTsigKeys.rb:569 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>Adding an Existing TSIG Key</b></big><br>\n" +"To add an already created TSIG key, select a <b>Filename</b> of the file\n" +"containing the key and click <b>Add</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. tsig keys management dialog help 3/4 +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMTsigKeys.rb:575 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>Creating a New TSIG Key</b></big><br>\n" +"To create a new TSIG key, set the <b>Filename</b> of the file in which to\n" +"create the key and the <b>Key ID</b> to identify the key then click\n" +"<b>Generate</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. tsig keys management dialog help 4/4 +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMTsigKeys.rb:582 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>Removing a TSIG Key</b></big><br>\n" +"To remove a configured TSIG key, select it and click <b>Delete</b>.\n" +"All keys in the same file are deleted.\n" +"If a TSIG key is in use in the configuration\n" +"of the server, it cannot be deleted. The server must stop using it\n" +"in the configuration first.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Frame label - adding a created server key +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMTsigKeys.rb:594 +msgid "Add an Existing TSIG Key" +msgstr "" + +#. Frame label - creating a new server key +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMTsigKeys.rb:643 +msgid "Create a New TSIG Key" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMTsigKeys.rb:655 +msgid "&Key ID" +msgstr "" + +#. push button +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMTsigKeys.rb:687 +msgid "&Generate" +msgstr "" + +#. Table header - in fact label +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMTsigKeys.rb:699 +msgid "Current TSIG Keys" +msgstr "" + +#. Table header item - DNS key listing +#. table header - GPG key ID +#. table header - GPG key ID +#. GnuPG key ID used as "Key ID: 1144AAAA444" +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMTsigKeys.rb:707 +#: library/gpg/src/modules/GPGWidgets.rb:192 +#: library/gpg/src/modules/GPGWidgets.rb:224 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:57 +msgid "Key ID" +msgstr "" + +#. Table header item - DNS key listing +#: library/cwm/src/modules/CWMTsigKeys.rb:709 +msgid "Filename" +msgstr "" + +#. combobox header +#: library/cwm/src/modules/TablePopup.rb:487 +msgid "&Selected Option" +msgstr "" + +#. heading / label +#: library/cwm/src/modules/TablePopup.rb:536 +msgid "Current Option: " +msgstr "" + +#. error report +#: library/cwm/src/modules/TablePopup.rb:720 +msgid "The selected option is already present." +msgstr "" + +#. table header, shortcut for changed, keep very short +#: library/cwm/src/modules/TablePopup.rb:882 +msgid "Ch." +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#. table header +#: library/cwm/src/modules/TablePopup.rb:884 +#: library/cwm/src/modules/TablePopup.rb:891 +msgid "Option" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#. table header +#: library/cwm/src/modules/TablePopup.rb:886 +#: library/cwm/src/modules/TablePopup.rb:893 +msgid "Value" +msgstr "" + +#. help 1/4 +#: library/cwm/src/modules/TablePopup.rb:899 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Editing the Settings</big></b><br>\n" +"To edit the settings, choose the appropriate\n" +"entry of the table then click <b>Edit</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help 2/4, optional +#: library/cwm/src/modules/TablePopup.rb:908 +msgid "" +"<p>To add a new option, click <b>Add</b>. To remove\n" +"an option, select it and click <b>Delete</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help 3/4, optional +#: library/cwm/src/modules/TablePopup.rb:918 +msgid "" +"<P>The <B>Ch.</B> column of the table shows \n" +"whether the option was changed.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. help 4/4, optional +#: library/cwm/src/modules/TablePopup.rb:928 +msgid "" +"<p>To reorder the options, select an option\n" +"and use <b>Up</b> and <b>Down</b> to move it up or down\n" +"in the list.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. menu button +#: library/cwm/src/modules/WizardHW.rb:209 +msgid "&Other" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: message for hardware configuration without any configured +#. device +#: library/cwm/src/modules/WizardHW.rb:509 +msgid "The device is not configured" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: message for hardware configuration without any configured +#. device +#: library/cwm/src/modules/WizardHW.rb:512 +msgid "Press <B>Edit</B> to configure" +msgstr "" + +#. Message shown while loading modules information +#: library/desktop/src/clients/menu.rb:197 +msgid "Loading modules, please wait ..." +msgstr "" + +#. Heading for NCurses Control Center +#: library/desktop/src/clients/menu.rb:224 +msgid "YaST Control Center" +msgstr "" + +#: library/desktop/src/clients/menu.rb:262 +msgid "Run" +msgstr "" + +#. show popup when running as non-root +#: library/desktop/src/clients/menu.rb:273 +msgid "" +"YaST2 Control Center is not running as root.\n" +"You can only see modules that do not require root privileges." +msgstr "" + +#. NCurses (textmode) Control Center headline +#: library/desktop/src/clients/menu.rb:320 +msgid "Controlling YaST ncurses with the Keyboard" +msgstr "" + +#. NCurses Control Center help 1/ +#: library/desktop/src/clients/menu.rb:323 +msgid "" +"<p>1) <i>General</i><br>\n" +"Navigate through the dialog elements with [TAB] to go to\n" +"the next element and [SHIFT] (or [ALT]) + [TAB] to move backwards.\n" +"Select or activate elements with [SPACE] or [ENTER].\n" +"Some elements use arrow keys (e.g., to scroll in lists).</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. NCurses Control Center help 2/10 +#: library/desktop/src/clients/menu.rb:331 +msgid "<p>Tree navigation is also done by arrow keys. To open or close a branch use [SPACE]. For modules showing a tree (might look like a list) of configuration items on the left side use [ENTER] to get corresponding dialog on the right.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. NCurses Control Center help 3/10 +#: library/desktop/src/clients/menu.rb:338 +msgid "" +"<p>Buttons are equipped with shortcut keys (the highlighted\n" +"letter). Use [ALT] and the letter to activate the button.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. NCurses Control Center help 4/10 +#: library/desktop/src/clients/menu.rb:342 +msgid "" +"<p>Press [ESC] to close selection pop-ups (e.g., from\n" +"menu buttons) without choosing anything.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. NCurses Control Center help 5/10 +#: library/desktop/src/clients/menu.rb:346 +msgid "" +"<p>2) <i>Substitution of Keystrokes</i><br>\n" +"<p>Because the environment can affect the use of the keyboard,\n" +"there is more than one way to navigate the dialog pages.\n" +"If [TAB] and [SHIFT] (or [ALT]) + [TAB] do not work,\n" +"move focus forward with [CTRL] + [F] and backward with [CTRL] + [B].</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. NCurses Control Center help 6/10 +#: library/desktop/src/clients/menu.rb:354 +msgid "" +"<p>If [ALT] + [letter] does not work,\n" +"try [ESC] + [letter]. Example: [ESC] + [H] for [ALT] + [H].\n" +"[ESC] + [TAB] is also a substitute for [ALT] + [TAB].</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. NCurses Control Center help 7/10 +#: library/desktop/src/clients/menu.rb:360 +msgid "" +"<p>3) <i>Function Keys</i><br>\n" +"F keys provide a quick access to main functions. The function key bindings for the current dialog are shown in the bottom line.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. NCurses Control Center help 8/10 +#: library/desktop/src/clients/menu.rb:367 +msgid "<p>The F keys are usually connected to a certain action:</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. NCurses Control Center help 9/10 +#: library/desktop/src/clients/menu.rb:369 +msgid "" +"F1 = Help<br>\n" +"F2 = Info or Description<br>\n" +"F3 = Add<br>\n" +"F4 = Edit or Configure<br>\n" +"F5 = Delete<br>\n" +"F6 = Test<br>\n" +"F7 = Expert or Advanced<br>\n" +"F8 = Back<br>\n" +"F9 = Abort or Cancel<br>\n" +"F10 = OK, Next, Finish, or Accept<br>" +msgstr "" + +#. NCurses Control Center help 10/10 +#: library/desktop/src/clients/menu.rb:382 +msgid "" +"<p>In some environments, all or some\n" +"F keys are not available.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup question (with continue / cancel buttons) +#. %1 is the filesystem path +#: library/general/src/modules/FileUtils.rb:292 +msgid "" +"Although the path %1 exists, it is not a directory.\n" +"Continue or cancel the operation?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: question popup (with yes / no buttons). A user entered non-existent path +#. for a share, %1 is entered path +#: library/general/src/modules/FileUtils.rb:306 +msgid "" +"The path %1 does not exist.\n" +"Create it now?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup question (with continue / cancel buttons) +#. %1 is the name (path) of the directory +#: library/general/src/modules/FileUtils.rb:325 +msgid "" +"Failed to create the directory %1.\n" +"Continue or cancel the current operation?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Button label +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:46 +msgid "&Add" +msgstr "" + +#. Button label +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:52 +msgid "&Cancel" +msgstr "" + +#. Button label +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:58 +msgid "C&ontinue" +msgstr "" + +#. Button label +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:64 +msgid "&Yes" +msgstr "" + +#. Button label +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:70 +msgid "&No" +msgstr "" + +#. Button label +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:76 +msgid "&Finish" +msgstr "" + +#. Button label +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:82 +msgid "Ed&it" +msgstr "" + +#. Button label +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:88 +msgid "&OK" +msgstr "" + +#. Button label +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:94 +msgid "Abo&rt" +msgstr "" + +#. Button label +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:100 +msgid "Abo&rt Installation" +msgstr "" + +#. Button label +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:106 +msgid "&Ignore" +msgstr "" + +#. Button label +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:112 +msgid "&Next" +msgstr "" + +#. Button label +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:118 +msgid "Ne&w" +msgstr "" + +#. Button label +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:124 +msgid "Dele&te" +msgstr "" + +#. Button label +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:130 +msgid "&Back" +msgstr "" + +#. Button label +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:136 +msgid "&Accept" +msgstr "" + +#. Button label +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:142 +msgid "&Do Not Accept" +msgstr "" + +#. Button label +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:148 +msgid "&Quit" +msgstr "" + +#. Button label +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:154 +msgid "Retr&y" +msgstr "" + +#. Button label +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:160 +msgid "&Replace" +msgstr "" + +#. Button label +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:172 +msgid "Do&wn" +msgstr "" + +#. Button label +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:178 +msgid "Sele&ct" +msgstr "" + +#. Button label +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:184 +msgid "Remo&ve" +msgstr "" + +#. Button label +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:190 +msgid "&Refresh" +msgstr "" + +#. Button label +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:196 +msgid "&Help" +msgstr "" + +#. Button label +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:202 +msgid "&Install" +msgstr "" + +#. Button label +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:208 +msgid "&Do Not Install" +msgstr "" + +#. Button label +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:214 +msgid "&Download" +msgstr "" + +#. Button label +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:220 +msgid "&Save" +msgstr "" + +#. Button label +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:226 +msgid "&Stop" +msgstr "" + +#. Button label +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:232 +msgid "C&lose" +msgstr "" + +#. Button label +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:238 +msgid "Bro&wse..." +msgstr "" + +#. Button label +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:244 +msgid "Crea&te" +msgstr "" + +#. Button label +#. push button label during media change popup, user can skip +#. this media (CD) so no packages from this media will be installed +#. PushButton label +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:250 +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:664 +#: library/wizard/src/modules/Confirm.rb:126 +msgid "&Skip" +msgstr "" + +#. this string is usually used as headline of a popup +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:262 +msgid "Error" +msgstr "" + +#. this string is usually used as headline of a popup +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:268 +msgid "Please wait..." +msgstr "" + +#. TextEntry Label +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:313 +msgid "&Filename" +msgstr "" + +#. TextEntry Label +#. textentry label +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:319 +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:2230 +msgid "&Password" +msgstr "" + +#. TextEntry Label +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:325 +msgid "C&onfirm Password" +msgstr "" + +#. TextEntry Label +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:331 +msgid "&Port" +msgstr "" + +#. TextEntry Label +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:337 +msgid "&Hostname" +msgstr "" + +#. TextEntry Label +#: library/general/src/modules/Label.rb:343 +msgid "&Options" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup message +#: library/general/src/modules/Message.rb:46 +msgid "" +"YaST cannot continue the configuration\n" +"without installing the required packages." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup message, %1 is a service name like "smbd" +#: library/general/src/modules/Message.rb:56 +msgid "Cannot start '%1' service" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup message, %1 is a service name like "smbd" +#: library/general/src/modules/Message.rb:64 +msgid "Cannot restart '%1' service" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup message, %1 is a service name like "smbd" +#: library/general/src/modules/Message.rb:72 +msgid "Cannot stop '%1' service" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup message, %1 is file or service name like "/tmp/out" or "LDAP" +#. For Right-To-Left languages, you want to put %1 into its own empty line so +#. the text renderer doesn't get trip with the English filename +#. (see BNC #584466 for details) +#: library/general/src/modules/Message.rb:83 +msgid "Cannot write settings to '%1'" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup message, %1 is file or service name like "/tmp/out" or "LDAP", %2 is the reason of error +#. For Right-To-Left languages, you want to put %1 into its own empty line so +#. the text renderer doesn't get trip with the English filename +#. (see BNC #584466 for details) +#: library/general/src/modules/Message.rb:96 +msgid "" +"Cannot write settings to '%1'.\n" +"\n" +"Reason: %2" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup message, %1 is a file name like "/tmp/out" +#. For Right-To-Left languages, you want to put %1 into its own empty line so +#. the text renderer doesn't get trip with the English filename +#. (see BNC #584466 for details) +#: library/general/src/modules/Message.rb:114 +msgid "Error writing file '%1'" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup message, %1 is a file name like "/tmp/out", %2 is the reason of error +#. For Right-To-Left languages, you want to put %1 into its own empty line so +#. the text renderer doesn't get trip with the English filename +#. (see BNC #584466 for details) +#: library/general/src/modules/Message.rb:127 +msgid "" +"Error writing file '%1'.\n" +"\n" +"Reason: %2" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup message, %1 is the name of file like "/tmp/in" +#. For Right-To-Left languages, you want to put %1 into its own empty line so +#. the text renderer doesn't get trip with the English filename +#. (see BNC #584466 for details) +#: library/general/src/modules/Message.rb:141 +msgid "Cannot open file '%1'" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup message, %1 is the name of file like "/tmp/in", %2 is the reason of error +#. For Right-To-Left languages, you want to put %1 into its own empty line so +#. the text renderer doesn't get trip with the English filename +#. (see BNC #584466 for details) +#: library/general/src/modules/Message.rb:153 +msgid "" +"Cannot open file '%1'.\n" +"\n" +"Reason: %2" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Progress stage text +#: library/general/src/modules/Message.rb:160 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Progress stage text +#: library/general/src/modules/Message.rb:167 +msgid "Check the environment" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup message, %1 is the description of error +#: library/general/src/modules/Message.rb:175 +msgid "" +"Unknown Error.\n" +"\n" +"Description: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup message +#: library/general/src/modules/Message.rb:182 +msgid "This item must be completed." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup question +#. For Right-To-Left languages, you want to put %1 into its own empty line so +#. the text renderer doesn't get trip with the English directory +#. (see BNC #584466 for details) +#: library/general/src/modules/Message.rb:193 +msgid "" +"The directory '%1' does not exist.\n" +"Create it?" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup message +#: library/general/src/modules/Message.rb:203 +msgid "" +"The domain has changed.\n" +"You must reboot for the changes to take effect." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CheckBox / Button +#: library/general/src/modules/Message.rb:212 +msgid "Do Not Show This Message &Again" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup message, %1 is a service name like "smbd" +#: library/general/src/modules/Message.rb:220 +msgid "Cannot adjust '%1' service." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup message, %1 is a missing-parameter name +#: library/general/src/modules/Message.rb:228 +msgid "Missing parameter '%1'." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup message, %1 is a directory name +#. For Right-To-Left languages, you want to put %1 into its own empty line so +#. the text renderer doesn't get trip with the English directory +#. (see BNC #584466 for details) +#: library/general/src/modules/Message.rb:239 +msgid "Cannot create directory '%1'." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup message +#: library/general/src/modules/Message.rb:246 +msgid "Cannot read current settings." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup message +#: library/general/src/modules/Message.rb:253 +msgid "SuSEconfig script failed." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup message +#: library/general/src/modules/Message.rb:260 +msgid "Failed to install required packages." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup message +#: library/general/src/modules/Message.rb:265 +msgid "Updating system configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/modules/Message.rb:269 +msgid "This may take a while." +msgstr "" + +#. Get information about the OS release +#. Throws exception Yast::OSReleaseFileMissingError if release file +#. is missing. +#. +#. @param [String] directory containing the installed system (/ in installed system) +#. @return [String] the release information +#: library/general/src/modules/OSRelease.rb:62 +msgid "Release file %{file} not found" +msgstr "" + +#. Confirm user request to abort installation +#: library/general/src/modules/Popup.rb:740 +msgid "Really abort the installation?" +msgstr "" + +#. Confirm user request to abort System Repair +#: library/general/src/modules/Popup.rb:749 +msgid "Really abort YaST System Repair?" +msgstr "" + +#. Button that will really abort the repair +#: library/general/src/modules/Popup.rb:751 +msgid "Abort System Repair" +msgstr "" + +#. Button that will continue with the repair +#: library/general/src/modules/Popup.rb:753 +msgid "&Continue System Repair" +msgstr "" + +#. Warning text for aborting an installation before anything is installed +#: library/general/src/modules/Popup.rb:756 +msgid "" +"If you abort the installation now,\n" +"Linux will not be installed.\n" +"Your hard disk will remain untouched." +msgstr "" + +#. Warning text for aborting an installation during the install process +#. - After some installation steps have been performed - e.g. +#. disks formatted / some packages already installed +#: library/general/src/modules/Popup.rb:766 +msgid "" +"If you abort the installation now, you will\n" +"have an incomplete Linux system\n" +"that might or might not be usable.\n" +"You might need to reinstall.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Warning text for aborting an installation during the install process +#. right in the middle of some critical process (e.g. formatting) +#: library/general/src/modules/Popup.rb:775 +msgid "" +"If you abort the installation now,\n" +"Linux will be unusable.\n" +"You will need to reinstall." +msgstr "" + +#. Confirm aborting the program +#: library/general/src/modules/Popup.rb:829 +msgid "Really abort?" +msgstr "" + +#. Additional hint when trying to abort program in spite of changes +#: library/general/src/modules/Popup.rb:837 +msgid "All changes will be lost!" +msgstr "" + +#. FIXME: BNC #422612, Use `opt(`noSanityCheck) later +#. button label +#: library/general/src/modules/Popup.rb:867 +msgid "&Details..." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: summary header for messages generated through autoinstallation +#: library/general/src/modules/Report.rb:101 +msgid "Messages" +msgstr "" + +#. Report configuration - will be normal messages displayed? +#. '%1' will be replaced by translated string "Yes" or "No" +#: library/general/src/modules/Report.rb:109 +msgid "Display Messages: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: summary if the messages should be displayed +#. translators: summary if the messages should be written to log file +#. translators: summary if the warnings should be displayed +#. translators: summary if the warnings should be written to log file +#. translators: summary if the errors should be displayed +#. translators: summary if the errors should be written to log file +#. TRANSLATORS: human text for Boolean value +#: library/general/src/modules/Report.rb:111 +#: library/general/src/modules/Report.rb:127 +#: library/general/src/modules/Report.rb:141 +#: library/general/src/modules/Report.rb:157 +#: library/general/src/modules/Report.rb:171 +#: library/general/src/modules/Report.rb:187 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkPopup.rb:86 +#: library/types/src/modules/String.rb:101 +msgid "Yes" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/modules/Report.rb:111 +#: library/general/src/modules/Report.rb:127 +#: library/general/src/modules/Report.rb:141 +#: library/general/src/modules/Report.rb:157 +#: library/general/src/modules/Report.rb:171 +#: library/general/src/modules/Report.rb:187 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkPopup.rb:85 +#: library/types/src/modules/String.rb:101 +msgid "No" +msgstr "" + +#. Report configuration - will have normal messages timeout? +#. '%1' will be replaced by number of seconds +#: library/general/src/modules/Report.rb:118 +msgid "Time-out Messages: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. Report configuration - will be normal messages logged to file? +#. '%1' will be replaced by translated string "Yes" or "No" +#: library/general/src/modules/Report.rb:125 +msgid "Log Messages: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: summary header for warnings generated through autoinstallation +#: library/general/src/modules/Report.rb:132 +msgid "Warnings" +msgstr "" + +#. Report configuration - will be warning messages displayed? +#. '%1' will be replaced by translated string "Yes" or "No" +#: library/general/src/modules/Report.rb:139 +msgid "Display Warnings: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. Report configuration - will have warning messages timeout? +#. '%1' will be replaced by number of seconds +#: library/general/src/modules/Report.rb:148 +msgid "Time-out Warnings: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. Report configuration - will be warning messages logged to file? +#. '%1' will be replaced by translated string "Yes" or "No" +#: library/general/src/modules/Report.rb:155 +msgid "Log Warnings: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: summary header for errors generated through autoinstallation +#: library/general/src/modules/Report.rb:162 +msgid "Errors" +msgstr "" + +#. Report configuration - will be error messages displayed? +#. '%1' will be replaced by translated string "Yes" or "No" +#: library/general/src/modules/Report.rb:169 +msgid "Display Errors: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. Report configuration - will have error messages timeout? +#. '%1' will be replaced by number of seconds +#: library/general/src/modules/Report.rb:178 +msgid "Time-out Errors: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. Report configuration - will be error messages logged to file? +#. '%1' will be replaced by translated string "Yes" or "No" +#: library/general/src/modules/Report.rb:185 +msgid "Log Errors: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: warnings summary header +#: library/general/src/modules/Report.rb:662 +msgid "Warning:" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: errors summary header +#: library/general/src/modules/Report.rb:679 +msgid "Error:" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: message summary header +#. translators: message summary header +#: library/general/src/modules/Report.rb:696 +#: library/general/src/modules/Report.rb:713 +msgid "Message:" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: summary if the module has not been used yet in AutoYaST profile +#: library/general/src/modules/Summary.rb:68 +msgid "Not configured yet." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: summary if no hardware was detected +#: library/general/src/modules/Summary.rb:82 +msgid "Not detected." +msgstr "" + +#. Create an edit table with basic buttons. +#. +#. It contains table and buttons Add, Edit, Delete. User may specify table header +#. and content, content that will be placed above table, between table +#. and buttons, below buttons and rights from buttons (usually another +#. button). +#. +#. @param [Yast::Term] table_header Table header as defined in UI. +#. @param [Array] table_contents Table items. +#. @param [Yast::Term] above_table Content to place above table. There is no need to +#. place caption here, because the dialog has its caption. +#. Set it to nil if you do not want to place anything here. +#. @param [Yast::Term] below_table Contents to place between table and buttons. +#. Set it to nil if you do not want to place anything here. +#. @param [Yast::Term] below_buttons Content to place below bottons. +#. Set it to nil if you do not want to place anything here. +#. @param [Yast::Term] buttons Content to place rights from buttons. Usually +#. an additional button, e.g. Set as default. +#. Set it to nil if you do not want to place anything here. +#. @return Content for the SetWizardContent[Buttons]() +#. <B>UI elements ids:</B><table> +#. <tr><td>Table</td><td>`table</td></tr> +#. <tr><td>Button add</td><td>`add_button</td></tr> +#. <tr><td>Button edit</td><td>`edit_button</td></tr> +#. <tr><td>Button delete</td><td>`delete_button</td></tr> +#. </table> +#: library/general/src/modules/UIHelper.rb:82 +msgid "A&dd" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/modules/UIHelper.rb:83 +msgid "&Edit" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/modules/UIHelper.rb:84 +msgid "De&lete" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: Tree header +#: library/general/src/modules/ValueBrowser.rb:153 +msgid "&Variable" +msgstr "" + +#. FIXME: do it +#: library/gpg/src/modules/GPG.rb:234 +msgid "Xterm is missing, install xterm package." +msgstr "" + +#. Get widget description map +#. @return widget description map +#: library/gpg/src/modules/GPGWidgets.rb:187 +msgid "GPG Private Keys" +msgstr "" + +#. table header - GPG key user ID +#. table header - GPG key user ID +#: library/gpg/src/modules/GPGWidgets.rb:194 +#: library/gpg/src/modules/GPGWidgets.rb:226 +msgid "User ID" +msgstr "" + +#. table header - GPG key fingerprint +#. table header - GPG key fingerprint +#. lazy +#. Standard text strings +#. GnuPG fingerprint used as "Fingerprint: AAA BBB CCC" +#: library/gpg/src/modules/GPGWidgets.rb:196 +#: library/gpg/src/modules/GPGWidgets.rb:228 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:55 +msgid "Fingerprint" +msgstr "" + +#. fill up the widget in init handler +#: library/gpg/src/modules/GPGWidgets.rb:207 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>GPG Private Key</b></big><br>\n" +"The table contains list of the private GPG keys.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Get widget description map +#. @return widget description map +#: library/gpg/src/modules/GPGWidgets.rb:219 +msgid "GPG Public Keys" +msgstr "" + +#. fill up the widget in init handler +#: library/gpg/src/modules/GPGWidgets.rb:239 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>GPG Public Key</b></big><br>\n" +"The table contains list of the public GPG keys.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Get widget description map +#. @return widget description map +#: library/gpg/src/modules/GPGWidgets.rb:282 +msgid "&Create a new GPG key..." +msgstr "" + +#: library/gpg/src/modules/GPGWidgets.rb:285 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>Create a new GPG key</b></big><br>\n" +"<tt>gpg --gen-key</tt> is started, see <tt>gpg</tt> manual pager for more information.\n" +"Press Ctrl+C to cancel.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: library/gpg/src/modules/GPGWidgets.rb:325 +msgid "&Passphrase for GPG Key %1" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: library/gpg/src/modules/GPGWidgets.rb:333 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>Passphrase</b></big><br>\n" +"Enter passphrase to unlock the GPG key." +msgstr "" + +#. Create a popup window term with the passphrase widget. +#. @return [Yast::Term] definition of the popup +#: library/gpg/src/modules/GPGWidgets.rb:350 +msgid "Enter Passphrase" +msgstr "" + +#. ask for the passphrase in the commandline (interactive) mode +#: library/gpg/src/modules/GPGWidgets.rb:380 +msgid "Enter Passphrase to Unlock GPG Key %1: " +msgstr "" + +#. Prompt the user for a message to describe the changes +#. that she did using YaST, logs it using {#Note} +#: library/log/src/modules/ALog.rb:105 +msgid "Enter a log message that describes the changes you made." +msgstr "" + +#. help for the log widget, part 1, alt. 1 +#: library/log/src/modules/LogView.rb:109 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Displayed Log</big></b><br>\n" +"Use <b>Log</b> to select the log to display. It will be displayed in\n" +"the field below.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help for the log widget, part 1, alt. 2 +#: library/log/src/modules/LogView.rb:120 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>The Log</big></b><br>\n" +"This screen displays the log.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help for the log widget, part 2, alt. 1, %1 is a menu button label +#: library/log/src/modules/LogView.rb:130 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"To process advanced actions or save the log into a file, click <b>%1</b>\n" +"and select the action to process.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help for the log widget, part 2, alt. 2, %1 is a menu button label +#: library/log/src/modules/LogView.rb:145 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"To process advanced actions, click <b>%1</b>\n" +"and select the action to process.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help for the log widget, part 2, alt. 3 +#: library/log/src/modules/LogView.rb:158 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"To save the log into a file, click <b>Save Log</b> and select the file\n" +"to which to save the log.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. menu button +#. Get the buttons below the box with the log +#. @param [Boolean] popup boolean true if running in popup (and Close is needed) +#. @param [Hash{String => Object}] glob_param a map of global parameters of the log widget +#. @param [Array Object>}] log_maps a list of maps describing all the logs +#. @return [Yast::Term] the widget with buttons +#: library/log/src/modules/LogView.rb:177 +#: library/log/src/modules/LogView.rb:277 +#: library/log/src/modules/LogView.rb:308 +msgid "Ad&vanced" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box entry (only used as fallback in case +#. of error in the YaST code) +#: library/log/src/modules/LogView.rb:231 +msgid "Log" +msgstr "" + +#. logview caption +#. logview caption +#. menubutton +#: library/log/src/modules/LogView.rb:238 +#: library/log/src/modules/LogView.rb:349 +#: library/log/src/modules/LogView.rb:468 +#: library/log/src/modules/LogView.rb:545 +msgid "&Log" +msgstr "" + +#. menubutton entry +#: library/log/src/modules/LogView.rb:255 +msgid "&Save Log" +msgstr "" + +#. popup caption, save into home directory by default (bnc#653601) +#: library/log/src/modules/LogView.rb:390 +msgid "Save Log as..." +msgstr "" + +#. flag indicating if background process is (or should be) running +#: library/log/src/modules/LogViewCore.rb:67 +msgid "Error occurred while reading the log." +msgstr "" + +#. label +#: library/network/src/modules/CWMFirewallInterfaces.rb:109 +msgid "Firewall cannot be adjusted during first stage installation." +msgstr "" + +#. label +#: library/network/src/modules/CWMFirewallInterfaces.rb:114 +msgid "Firewall package is not installed." +msgstr "" + +#. label +#: library/network/src/modules/CWMFirewallInterfaces.rb:118 +msgid "Firewall is disabled" +msgstr "" + +#. label +#: library/network/src/modules/CWMFirewallInterfaces.rb:121 +msgid "Firewall port is closed" +msgstr "" + +#. label +#: library/network/src/modules/CWMFirewallInterfaces.rb:124 +msgid "Firewall port is open on all interfaces" +msgstr "" + +#. label +#: library/network/src/modules/CWMFirewallInterfaces.rb:127 +msgid "Firewall port is open on selected interfaces" +msgstr "" + +#. label +#: library/network/src/modules/CWMFirewallInterfaces.rb:130 +msgid "No network interfaces are configured" +msgstr "" + +#. BNC #483455: Interface zone name +#: library/network/src/modules/CWMFirewallInterfaces.rb:155 +msgid "Interface is not assigned to any zone" +msgstr "" + +#. transaltors: selection box title +#: library/network/src/modules/CWMFirewallInterfaces.rb:412 +msgid "&Network Interfaces with Open Port in Firewall" +msgstr "" + +#. Check the INT zone, it's not protected by default +#. See bnc #382686 +#: library/network/src/modules/CWMFirewallInterfaces.rb:499 +msgid "" +"These network interfaces assigned to internal network cannot be deselected:\n" +"%1\n" +msgstr "" + +#. question popup +#: library/network/src/modules/CWMFirewallInterfaces.rb:520 +msgid "" +"No interface is selected. Service will not\n" +"be available for other computers.\n" +"\n" +"Continue?" +msgstr "" + +#. yes-no popup +#: library/network/src/modules/CWMFirewallInterfaces.rb:550 +msgid "" +"Because of SuSE Firewall settings, the port\n" +"on the following interfaces will additionally be open:\n" +"%1\n" +"\n" +"Continue?" +msgstr "" + +#. yes-no popup +#. yes-no popup +#: library/network/src/modules/CWMFirewallInterfaces.rb:569 +#: library/network/src/modules/CWMFirewallInterfaces.rb:623 +msgid "" +"Because of SuSE Firewall settings, the port\n" +"on the following interfaces cannot be opened:\n" +"%1\n" +"\n" +"Continue?" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: selection box title +#: library/network/src/modules/CWMFirewallInterfaces.rb:713 +msgid "Network &Interfaces with Open Port in Firewall" +msgstr "" + +#. push button to select all network intefaces for firewall +#: library/network/src/modules/CWMFirewallInterfaces.rb:725 +msgid "Select &All" +msgstr "" + +#. push button to deselect all network intefaces for firewall +#: library/network/src/modules/CWMFirewallInterfaces.rb:733 +msgid "Select &None" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Error message, do not translate %{details} +#: library/network/src/modules/CWMFirewallInterfaces.rb:828 +msgid "" +"Error checking service status:\n" +"%{details}" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Error message, do not translate %{details} +#: library/network/src/modules/CWMFirewallInterfaces.rb:862 +msgid "" +"Error setting service status:\n" +"%{details}" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for firewall settings widget 1/3, +#. %1 is check box label, eg. "Open Port in Firewall" (without quotes) +#: library/network/src/modules/CWMFirewallInterfaces.rb:998 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Firewall Settings</big></b><br>\n" +"To open the firewall to allow access to the service from remote computers,\n" +"set <b>%1</b>.<br>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for firewall port openning widget 2/3, optional +#. %1 is push button label, eg. "Firewall &Details" (without quotes) +#. note: %2 is correct, do not replace with %1!!! +#: library/network/src/modules/CWMFirewallInterfaces.rb:1009 +msgid "" +"To select interfaces on which to open the port,\n" +"click <b>%2</b>.<br>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for firewall settings widget 3/3, +#: library/network/src/modules/CWMFirewallInterfaces.rb:1017 +msgid "" +"This option is available only if the firewall\n" +"is enabled.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. part of help text - check box label, NO SHORTCUT!!! +#: library/network/src/modules/CWMFirewallInterfaces.rb:1029 +msgid "Open Port in Firewall" +msgstr "" + +#. part of help text - push button label, NO SHORTCUT!!! +#: library/network/src/modules/CWMFirewallInterfaces.rb:1031 +msgid "Firewall Details" +msgstr "" + +#. check box +#: library/network/src/modules/CWMFirewallInterfaces.rb:1063 +msgid "Open Port in &Firewall" +msgstr "" + +#. push button +#: library/network/src/modules/CWMFirewallInterfaces.rb:1070 +msgid "Firewall &Details..." +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/CWMFirewallInterfaces.rb:1098 +msgid "Firewall Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: library/network/src/modules/CWMFirewallInterfaces.rb:1105 +msgid "Firewall is open" +msgstr "" + +#. pppN must be tried before pN, modem before netcard +#. Device type label +#. Device type label +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:406 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1201 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1212 +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:108 +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:198 +msgid "Modem" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:411 +msgid "Network Card" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#. Device type label +#. Device type label +#. Device type label +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:416 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1146 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1184 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1190 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1205 +msgid "ISDN" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:421 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1153 +msgid "DSL" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:423 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:487 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:488 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:760 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:761 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:996 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:998 +msgid "Unknown" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#. This is what used to be Virtual Interface (eth0:1). +#. In our data model, additional addresses for an interface +#. are represented as its sub-interfaces. +#. And also we frequently confuse "device" and "interface" +#. :-( +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1122 +msgid "Additional Address" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1127 +msgid "ARCnet" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1127 +msgid "ARCnet Network Card" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1130 +msgid "ATM" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1131 +msgid "Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM)" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1135 +msgid "Bluetooth" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1136 +msgid "Bluetooth Connection" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1139 +msgid "Bond" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1139 +msgid "Bond Network" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1142 +msgid "CLAW" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1143 +msgid "Common Link Access for Workstation (CLAW)" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1146 +msgid "ISDN Card" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1149 +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:223 +msgid "CTC" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1150 +msgid "Channel to Channel Interface (CTC)" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1153 +msgid "DSL Connection" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1155 +msgid "Dummy" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1155 +msgid "Dummy Network Device" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1158 +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:227 +msgid "ESCON" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1159 +msgid "Enterprise System Connector (ESCON)" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1163 +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:220 +msgid "Ethernet" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1164 +msgid "Ethernet Network Card" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1167 +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:222 +msgid "FDDI" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1167 +msgid "FDDI Network Card" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1170 +msgid "FICON" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1171 +msgid "Fiberchannel System Connector (FICON)" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1175 +msgid "HIPPI" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1176 +msgid "HIgh Performance Parallel Interface (HIPPI)" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1180 +msgid "Hipersockets" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1181 +msgid "Hipersockets Interface (HSI)" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1184 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1190 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1205 +msgid "ISDN Connection" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#. Device type label +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1186 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1188 +msgid "IrDA" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1186 +msgid "Infrared Network Device" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1188 +msgid "Infrared Device" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1193 +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:224 +msgid "IUCV" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1194 +msgid "Inter User Communication Vehicle (IUCV)" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1197 +msgid "OSA LCS" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1197 +msgid "OSA LCS Network Card" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1199 +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:219 +msgid "Loopback" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1199 +msgid "Loopback Device" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1203 +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:228 +msgid "Myrinet" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1203 +msgid "Myrinet Network Card" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1208 +msgid "Parallel Line" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1209 +msgid "Parallel Line Connection" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1215 +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:226 +msgid "QETH" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1216 +msgid "OSA-Express or QDIO Device (QETH)" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1220 +msgid "IPv6-in-IPv4" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1221 +msgid "IPv6-in-IPv4 Encapsulation Device" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1225 +msgid "Serial Line" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1226 +msgid "Serial Line Connection" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1230 +msgid "Token Ring" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1231 +msgid "Token Ring Network Card" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1234 +msgid "USB" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1234 +msgid "USB Network Device" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1236 +msgid "VMWare" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1236 +msgid "VMWare Network Device" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1239 +msgid "Wireless" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1240 +msgid "Wireless Network Card" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1243 +msgid "XPNET" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1243 +msgid "XP Network" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1245 +msgid "VLAN" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1245 +msgid "Virtual LAN" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1247 +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:89 +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:101 +msgid "Bridge" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1247 +msgid "Network Bridge" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1249 +msgid "TUN" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1249 +msgid "Network TUNnel" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1251 +msgid "TAP" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1251 +msgid "Network TAP" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1253 +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:152 +msgid "InfiniBand" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1253 +msgid "InfiniBand Device" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Informs that device name is not known +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkPopup.rb:70 +msgid "Unknown device" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Informs that the IP address is assigned via DHCP +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkPopup.rb:77 +msgid "DHCP address" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: table item, informing that device has no IP address +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkPopup.rb:83 +msgid "No IP address assigned" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: table header - details about the network device +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkPopup.rb:105 +msgid "Device Type" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkPopup.rb:106 +msgid "Device Name" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkPopup.rb:107 +msgid "IP Address" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkPopup.rb:108 +msgid "Device ID" +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkPopup.rb:109 +msgid "Connected" +msgstr "" + +#. label message +#. label message +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkPopup.rb:191 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkPopup.rb:222 +msgid "Scanning for hosts on this LAN..." +msgstr "" + +#. selection box label +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkPopup.rb:210 +msgid "&NFS Servers" +msgstr "" + +#. selection box label +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkPopup.rb:234 +msgid "Re&mote Hosts" +msgstr "" + +#. selection box label +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkPopup.rb:254 +msgid "&Exported Directories" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: pop-up question when reading the service configuration +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkService.rb:280 +msgid "" +"Your network interfaces are currently controlled by NetworkManager\n" +"but the service to configure might not work well with it.\n" +"\n" +"Really continue?" +msgstr "" + +#. If there is network running, return true. +#. Otherwise show error popup depending on Stage and return false +#. @return true if network running +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkService.rb:348 +msgid "" +"No running network detected.\n" +"Restart installation and configure network in Linuxrc\n" +"or continue without network." +msgstr "" + +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkService.rb:354 +msgid "" +"No running network detected.\n" +"Configure network with YaST or Network Manager plug-in\n" +"and start this module again\n" +"or continue without network." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup informing message, allowed characters for port-names +#: library/network/src/modules/PortAliases.rb:136 +msgid "" +"A port name may consist of the characters 'a-z', 'A-Z', '0-9', and '*+._-'.\n" +"A port number may be a number from 0 to 65535.\n" +"No spaces are allowed.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Firewall zone name - used in combo box or dialog title +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewall.rb:115 +msgid "External Zone" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Firewall zone name - used in combo box or dialog title +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewall.rb:119 +msgid "Internal Zone" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Firewall zone name - used in combo box or dialog title +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewall.rb:123 +msgid "Demilitarized Zone" +msgstr "" + +#. protocol name +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewall.rb:246 +msgid "TCP" +msgstr "" + +#. protocol name +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewall.rb:248 +msgid "UDP" +msgstr "" + +#. protocol name +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewall.rb:250 +msgid "RPC" +msgstr "" + +#. protocol name +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewall.rb:252 +msgid "IP" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Firewall zone full-name, used as combo box item or dialog title +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewall.rb:1158 +msgid "Unknown Zone" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Error message, %1 = interface name (like eth0) +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewall.rb:1506 +msgid "" +"Interface '%1' is included in multiple firewall zones.\n" +"Continuing with configuration can produce errors.\n" +"\n" +"It is recommended to leave the configuration and repair it manually in\n" +"the file '/etc/sysconfig/SuSEFirewall'." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Error message, %1 = interface name (like eth0) +#. TRANSLATORS: Error message, %1 = interface name (like eth0) +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewall.rb:1971 +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewall.rb:2047 +msgid "" +"Interface '%1' is not assigned to any firewall zone.\n" +"Run YaST2 Firewall and assign it.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Dialog caption +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewall.rb:2478 +msgid "Initializing Firewall Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Progress step +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewall.rb:2486 +msgid "Check for network devices" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Progress step +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewall.rb:2488 +msgid "Read current configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Progress step +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewall.rb:2490 +msgid "Check possibly conflicting services" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Progress step +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewall.rb:2494 +msgid "Checking for network devices..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Progress step +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewall.rb:2496 +msgid "Reading current configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Progress step +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewall.rb:2498 +msgid "Checking possibly conflicting services..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Dialog caption +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewall.rb:2648 +msgid "Writing Firewall Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Progress step +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewall.rb:2656 +msgid "Write firewall settings" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Progress step +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewall.rb:2658 +msgid "Adjust firewall service" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Progress step +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewall.rb:2662 +msgid "Writing firewall settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Progress step +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewall.rb:2664 +msgid "Adjusting firewall service..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: a popup error message +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewall.rb:2683 +msgid "Writing settings failed" +msgstr "" + +#. table item, %1 stands for the buggy protocol name +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewall.rb:3476 +msgid "Unknown protocol (%1)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Warning in installation proposal, %1 is a device name (eth0, sl0, ...) +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:167 +msgid "New network device '%1' found; added as an internal firewall interface" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Warning in installation proposal, %1 is a device name (eth0, sl0, ...) +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:178 +msgid "New network device '%1' found; added as an external firewall interface" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Proposal informative text +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:547 +msgid "SuSEfirewall2 package is not installed, firewall will be disabled." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Proposal informative text "Firewall is enabled (disable)" with link around +#. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:565 +msgid "Firewall is enabled (disable</a>)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Proposal informative text "Firewall is disabled (enable)" with link around +#. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:571 +msgid "Firewall is disabled (enable</a>)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Network proposal informative text with link around +#. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:606 +msgid "SSH port is open (close</a>)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Network proposal informative text with link around +#. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:612 +msgid "SSH port is blocked (open</a>)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Network proposal informative text with link around +#. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:633 +msgid "" +"SSH port is open (close</a>), but\n" +"there are no network interfaces configured" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: This is a warning message. Installation over SSH without SSH allowed on firewall +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:648 +msgid "You are installing a system over SSH, but you have not opened the SSH port on the firewall." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Network proposal informative text "Remote Administration (VNC) is enabled" with link around +#. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:690 +msgid "Remote Administration (VNC) ports are open (close</a>)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Network proposal informative text "Remote Administration (VNC) is disabled" with link around +#. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:696 +msgid "Remote Administration (VNC) ports are blocked (open</a>)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: This is a warning message. Installation over VNC without VNC allowed on firewall +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:707 +msgid "You are installing a system using remote administration (VNC), but you have not opened the VNC ports on the firewall." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Network proposal informative text +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:725 +msgid "iSCSI Target ports are open" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Network proposal informative text +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:728 +msgid "iSCSI Target ports are blocked" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: This is a warning message. Installation to iSCSI without iSCSI allowed on firewall +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:737 +msgid "You are installing a system using iSCSI Target, but you have not opened the needed ports on the firewall." +msgstr "" + +#. Returns service definition. +#. See @services for the format. +#. If `silent` is not defined or set to `true`, function throws an exception +#. SuSEFirewalServiceNotFound if service is not found on disk. +#. +#. @param [String] service name +#. @param [String] (optional) whether to silently return nil +#. when service is not found (default false) +#. Immediately writes the configuration of service defined by package to the +#. service definition file. Service must be defined by package, this function +#. doesn't work for hard-coded services (SuSEFirewallServices). +#. Function throws an exception SuSEFirewalServiceNotFound +#. if service is not known (undefined) or it is not a service +#. defined by package. +#. +#. @param [String] service ID (e.g., "service:ssh") +#. @param map of full service definition +#. @return [Boolean] if successful (nil in case of developer's mistake) +#. +#. @see #IsKnownService() +#. @see #ServiceDefinedByPackage() +#. +#. @example +#. SetNeededPortsAndProtocols ( +#. "service:something", +#. $[ +#. "tcp_ports" : [ "22", "ftp-data", "400:420" ], +#. "udp_ports" : [ ], +#. "rpc_ports" : [ "portmap", "ypbind" ], +#. "ip_protocols" : [ "esp" ], +#. "broadcast_ports" : [ ], +#. ] +#. ); +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallServices.rb:354 +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallServices.rb:637 +msgid "Service with name '%{service_name}' does not exist" +msgstr "" + +#. Fallback for presented service +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallServices.rb:430 +msgid "Service: %{filename}" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Name of unknown service. %1 is a requested service id like nis-server +#: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallServices.rb:503 +msgid "Unknown service '%1'" +msgstr "" + +#. the message is followed by list of required packages +#. Popup Text +#: library/packages/src/include/packages/common.rb:107 +#: library/packages/src/include/packages/common.rb:135 +msgid "These packages need to be installed:" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup Text +#: library/packages/src/include/packages/common.rb:109 +#: library/packages/src/include/packages/common.rb:137 +msgid "These packages need to be removed:" +msgstr "" + +#. labels changed for bug #215195 +#. Label::ContinueButton (), Label::CancelButton (), +#. push button label +#: library/packages/src/include/packages/common.rb:158 +msgid "&Uninstall" +msgstr "" + +#. -------------------------------------------------------------------------- +#. defaults +#. at start of file providal +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:149 +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:157 +msgid "Downloading package %1 (%2)..." +msgstr "" + +#. popup heading +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:161 +msgid "Downloading Package" +msgstr "" + +#. error message, %1 is a package name +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:220 +msgid "Package %1 is broken, integrity check has failed." +msgstr "" + +#. command line mode - ask user whether installation of the failed package should be retried +#. command line mode - ask user whether installation of the failed package should be retried +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:232 +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:447 +msgid "Retry installation of the package?" +msgstr "" + +#. command line mode - ask user whether the installation should be aborted +#. command line mode - ask user whether the installation should be aborted +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:240 +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:455 +msgid "Abort the installation?" +msgstr "" + +#. otherwise return Ignore (default) +#. error message, %1 is code of the error, +#. detail string is appended to the end +#. error message, %1 is code of the error, +#. detail string is appended to the end +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:268 +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:302 +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:2143 +msgid "Error: %1:" +msgstr "" + +#. TODO: add "Don't show again" checkbox +#. a warning popup displayed after pressing [Ignore] after a download error +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:326 +msgid "" +"Ignoring a download failure may result in a broken system.\n" +"Verify the system later by running the Software Management module.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. At start of package install. +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:364 +msgid "Uninstalling package %1 (%2)..." +msgstr "" + +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:366 +msgid "Installing package %1 (%2)..." +msgstr "" + +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:374 +msgid "Uninstalling Package" +msgstr "" + +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:374 +msgid "Installing Package" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup during package installation, %1 is the name of the package +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:430 +msgid "Removal of package %1 failed." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup during package installation, %1 is the name of the package +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:433 +msgid "Installation of package %1 failed." +msgstr "" + +#. TODO: add "Don't show again" checkbox +#. a warning popup displayed after pressing [Ignore] after a package installation error +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:506 +msgid "" +"Ignoring a package failure may result in a broken system.\n" +"The system should be later verified by running the Software Management module." +msgstr "" + +#. error report +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:575 +msgid "" +"<p>The repository at the specified URL now provides a different media ID.\n" +"If the URL is correct, this indicates that the repository content has changed. To \n" +"continue using this repository, start <b>Installation Repositories</b> from \n" +"the YaST control center and refresh the repository.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. media is double sided, we want the user to insert the 'Side A' of the media +#. the complete string will be "<product> <media> <number>, <side>" +#. e.g. "'SuSE Linux 9.0' DVD 1, Side A" +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:590 +msgid "Side A" +msgstr "" + +#. media is double sided, we want the user to insert the 'Side B' of the media +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:593 +msgid "Side B" +msgstr "" + +#. label for a repository - %1 product name (e.g. openSUSE 10.2), %2 medium number (e.g. 2) +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:608 +msgid "%1 (Disc %2)" +msgstr "" + +#. label for a repository - %1 product name (e.g. openSUSE 10.2), %2 medium number (e.g. 2) +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:611 +msgid "%1 (Medium %2)" +msgstr "" + +#. prompt to insert product (%1 == "SuSE Linux version 9.2 CD 2") +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:617 +msgid "" +"Insert\n" +"'%1'" +msgstr "" + +#. report error while accessing local directory with product (%1 = URL, %2 = "SuSE Linux ...") +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:622 +msgid "" +"Cannot access installation media\n" +"%1\n" +"%2.\n" +"Check whether the directory is accessible." +msgstr "" + +#. report error while accessing network media of product (%1 = URL, %2 = "SuSE Linux ...") +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:634 +msgid "" +"Cannot access installation media \n" +"%1\n" +"%2.\n" +"Check whether the server is accessible." +msgstr "" + +#. wrong media id, offer "Ignore" +#. push button label +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:659 +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1838 +msgid "Skip Autorefresh" +msgstr "" + +#. menu button label - used for more then one device +#. push button label - in the media change popup, user can eject the CD/DVD +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:678 +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:681 +msgid "&Eject" +msgstr "" + +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:688 +msgid "A&utomatically Eject CD or DVD Medium" +msgstr "" + +#. command line mode - ask user whether installation of the failed package should be retried +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:755 +msgid "Retry the installation?" +msgstr "" + +#. command line mode - ask user whether the installation should be aborted +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:763 +msgid "Skip the medium?" +msgstr "" + +#. otherwise ignore the medium +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:770 +msgid "Ignoring the bad medium..." +msgstr "" + +#. TextEntry label +#. TextEntry label +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:791 +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:847 +msgid "&URL" +msgstr "" + +#. popup label (%1 is repository URL) +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1039 +msgid "Creating Repository %1" +msgstr "" + +#. error message - a label followed by a richtext with details +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1072 +msgid "An error occurred while creating the repository." +msgstr "" + +#. error message - a label followed by a richtext with details +#. error message - a label followed by a richtext with details +#. error message - a label followed by a richtext with details +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1076 +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1203 +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1313 +msgid "Unable to retrieve the remote repository description." +msgstr "" + +#. error message - a label followed by a richtext with details +#. error message - a label followed by a richtext with details +#. error message - a label followed by a richtext with details +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1079 +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1206 +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1316 +msgid "An error occurred while retrieving the new metadata." +msgstr "" + +#. error message - a label followed by a richtext with details +#. error message - a label followed by a richtext with details +#. error message - a label followed by a richtext with details +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1082 +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1209 +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1319 +msgid "The repository is not valid." +msgstr "" + +#. error message - a label followed by a richtext with details +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1085 +msgid "The repository metadata is invalid." +msgstr "" + +#. command line mode - ask user whether the repository refreshment should be retried +#. command line mode - ask user whether the repository refreshment should be retried +#. command line mode - ask user whether the repository refreshment should be retried +#. command line mode - ask user whether target initializatin can be restarted +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1098 +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1228 +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1332 +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:2097 +msgid "Retry?" +msgstr "" + +#. popup label (%1 is repository URL) +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1144 +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1152 +msgid "Probing Repository %1" +msgstr "" + +#. error message - a label followed by a richtext with details +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1199 +msgid "Error occurred while probing the repository." +msgstr "" + +#. error message - a label followed by a richtext with details +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1212 +msgid "Repository probing details." +msgstr "" + +#. error message - a label followed by a richtext with details +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1215 +msgid "Repository metadata is invalid." +msgstr "" + +#. error message - a label followed by a richtext with details +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1309 +msgid "Repository %1" +msgstr "" + +#. at start of delta providal +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1397 +msgid "Downloading delta RPM package %1 (%2)..." +msgstr "" + +#. popup heading +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1405 +msgid "Downloading Delta RPM package" +msgstr "" + +#. at start of delta application +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1418 +msgid "Applying delta RPM package %1..." +msgstr "" + +#. popup heading +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1425 +msgid "Applying delta RPM package" +msgstr "" + +#. popup heading +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1427 +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:3075 +msgid "Package: " +msgstr "" + +#. close popup +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1493 +msgid "Starting script %1 (patch %2)..." +msgstr "" + +#. popup heading +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1502 +msgid "Running Script" +msgstr "" + +#. label, patch name follows +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1507 +msgid "Patch: " +msgstr "" + +#. label, script name follows +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1516 +msgid "Script: " +msgstr "" + +#. label +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1522 +msgid "Output of the Script" +msgstr "" + +#. label, %1 is patch name with version and architecture +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1610 +msgid "" +"Patch: %1\n" +"\n" +msgstr "" + +#. a popup question with "Continue", "Skip" and "Abort" buttons +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1627 +msgid "" +"The repositories are being refreshed.\n" +"Continue with refreshing?\n" +"\n" +"Note: If the refresh is skipped some packages\n" +"might be missing or out of date." +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1642 +msgid "&Skip Refresh" +msgstr "" + +#. heading of popup +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1676 +msgid "Downloading" +msgstr "" + +#. message in a progress popup +#. progress bar label, %1 is URL with optional download rate +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1723 +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1771 +msgid "Downloading: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. heading of popup +#. heading of popup +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1875 +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1941 +msgid "Checking Package Database" +msgstr "" + +#. message in a progress popup +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1878 +msgid "Rebuilding package database. This process can take some time." +msgstr "" + +#. error message, %1 is the cause for the error +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1911 +msgid "" +"Rebuilding of package database failed:\n" +"%1" +msgstr "" + +#. message in a progress popup +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1944 +msgid "Converting package database. This process can take some time." +msgstr "" + +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1957 +msgid "Status" +msgstr "" + +#. error message, %1 is the cause for the error +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:1981 +msgid "" +"Conversion of package database failed:\n" +"%1" +msgstr "" + +#. progress message (command line mode) +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:2017 +msgid "Reading RPM database..." +msgstr "" + +#. popup heading +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:2027 +msgid "Reading Installed Packages" +msgstr "" + +#. progress bar label +#. TODO: allow Abort +#. , +#. `VBox( +#. `Label(""), +#. `PushButton(`id(`abort), Label::AbortButton()) +#. ) +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:2033 +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:2049 +msgid "Scanning RPM database..." +msgstr "" + +#. error message, could not read RPM database +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:2086 +msgid "Initialization of the target failed." +msgstr "" + +#. status message (command line mode) +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:2178 +msgid "RPM database read" +msgstr "" + +#. heading in a popup window +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:2212 +msgid "User Authentication" +msgstr "" + +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:2218 +msgid "" +"URL: %1\n" +"\n" +"%2" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:2227 +msgid "&User Name" +msgstr "" + +#. check box +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:3010 +msgid "Show &details" +msgstr "" + +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:3076 +msgid "Size: " +msgstr "" + +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:3099 +msgid "Remaining time to automatic retry: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. ask to send quit signal to PackageKit +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageLock.rb:58 +msgid "" +"PackageKit is still running (probably busy).\n" +"Ask PackageKit to quit again?" +msgstr "" + +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageLock.rb:62 +msgid "" +"PackageKit is blocking software management.\n" +"This happens when the updater applet or another software management\n" +"application is running.\n" +"\n" +"Ask PackageKit to quit?" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: a popup headline +#. TRANSLATORS: a popup headline +#. TRANSLATORS: a popup headline +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageLock.rb:108 +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageLock.rb:159 +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageLock.rb:183 +msgid "Accessing the Software Management Failed" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: an error message with question +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageLock.rb:112 +msgid "" +"Would you like to continue without having access\n" +"to the software management or retry to access it?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: an error message with question +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageLock.rb:163 +msgid "" +"Would you like to retry accessing the software manager,\n" +"continue without having access to the software management,\n" +"or abort?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: an error message with question +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageLock.rb:187 +msgid "Would you like to abort or try again?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. print the question +#. popup heading, with rich text widget and Yes/No buttons +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageSystem.rb:188 +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageSystem.rb:194 +msgid "Do you accept this license agreement?" +msgstr "" + +#. error message, after pressing [OK] the package manager is displayed +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageSystem.rb:224 +msgid "" +"There are unresolved dependencies which need\n" +"to be solved manually in the software manager." +msgstr "" + +#. error report +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageSystem.rb:415 +msgid "Installing required packages failed." +msgstr "" + +#. continue/cancel popup +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageSystem.rb:419 +msgid "" +"Installing required packages failed. If you continue\n" +"without installing required packages,\n" +"YaST may not work properly.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error report +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageSystem.rb:430 +msgid "Cannot continue without installing required packages." +msgstr "" + +#. continue/cancel popup +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackageSystem.rb:435 +msgid "" +"If you continue without installing required \n" +"packages, YaST may not work properly.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog heading, %1 is package name +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:152 +msgid "Confirm Package License: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. push button +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:159 +msgid "I &Agree" +msgstr "" + +#. push button +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:161 +msgid "I &Disagree" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:173 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>License Confirmation</big></b><br>\n" +"The package in the headline of the dialog requires an explicit confirmation\n" +"of acceptance of its license.\n" +"If you reject the license of the package, the package will not be installed.\n" +"<br>\n" +"To accept the license of the package, click <b>I Agree</b>.\n" +"To reject the license of the package, click <b>I Disagree</b></p>." +msgstr "" + +#. Help text for software patterns / selections dialog +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:326 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"\t\t This dialog allows you to define this system's tasks and what software to install.\n" +"\t\t Available tasks and software for this system are shown by category in the left\n" +"\t\t column. To view a description for an item, select it in the list.\n" +"\t\t </p>" +msgstr "" + +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:333 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"\t\t Change the status of an item by clicking its status icon\n" +"\t\t or right-click any icon for a context menu.\n" +"\t\t With the context menu, you can also change the status of all items.\n" +"\t\t </p>" +msgstr "" + +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:340 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"\t\t <b>Details</b> opens the detailed software package selection\n" +"\t\t where you can view and select individual software packages.\n" +"\t\t </p>" +msgstr "" + +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:346 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"\t\t The disk usage display in the lower right corner shows the remaining disk space\n" +"\t\t after all requested changes will have been performed.\n" +"\t\t Hard disk partitions that are full or nearly full can degrade\n" +"\t\t system performance and in some cases even cause serious problems.\n" +"\t\t The system needs some available disk space to run properly.\n" +"\t\t </p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Dialog title +#. Hint for German translation: "Softwareauswahl und Einsatzzweck des Systems" +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:367 +msgid "Software Selection and System Tasks" +msgstr "" + +#. don't get all the way out - the user might just have +#. been scared of the gory details. +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:408 +msgid "(more)" +msgstr "" + +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:424 +msgid "Installation Successfully Finished" +msgstr "" + +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:426 +msgid "Package Installation Failed" +msgstr "" + +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:438 +msgid "Error Message: %1" +msgstr "" + +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:455 +msgid "Failed Packages: %1" +msgstr "" + +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:474 +msgid "Installed Packages: %1" +msgstr "" + +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:493 +msgid "Updated Packages: %1" +msgstr "" + +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:512 +msgid "Removed Packages: %1" +msgstr "" + +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:534 +msgid "Not Installed Packages: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. Table headings for CD statistics during installation +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:550 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:533 +msgid "Packages" +msgstr "" + +#. reset the items list +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:561 +msgid "Elapsed Time: %1" +msgstr "" + +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:571 +msgid "Total Installed Size: %1" +msgstr "" + +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:581 +msgid "Total Downloaded Size: %1" +msgstr "" + +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:590 +msgid "Statistics" +msgstr "" + +#. display installation log +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:603 +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:691 +msgid "Installation log" +msgstr "" + +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:610 +msgid "Details" +msgstr "" + +#. open a new wizard dialog if needed +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:658 +msgid "After Installing Packages" +msgstr "" + +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:659 +msgid "Show This Report" +msgstr "" + +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:660 +msgid "Finish" +msgstr "" + +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:661 +msgid "Continue in the Software Manager" +msgstr "" + +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:666 +msgid "<P><BIG><B>Installation Report</B></BIG><BR>Here is a summary of installed or removed packages.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:674 +msgid "Installation Report" +msgstr "" + +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:696 +msgid "Installed Packages" +msgstr "" + +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:701 +msgid "Updated Packages" +msgstr "" + +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:706 +msgid "Removed Packages" +msgstr "" + +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:711 +msgid "Remaining Packages" +msgstr "" + +#. disabling installation report dialog, inform the user how to enable it back +#: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:732 +msgid "" +"If you want to show this report dialog again edit\n" +"\n" +"System > Yast2 > GUI > PKGMGR_ACTION_AT_EXIT\n" +"\n" +"value in the YaST sysconfig editor." +msgstr "" + +#. popup question, %1 stands for the package name +#. %2 is a repository name +#. %3 is URL of the repository +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:463 +msgid "" +"The package %1 from repository %2\n" +"%3\n" +"is not digitally signed. This means that the origin\n" +"and integrity of the package cannot be verified. Installing the package\n" +"may put the integrity of your system at risk.\n" +"\n" +"Install it anyway?" +msgstr "" + +#. popup question, %1 stands for the filename +#. %2 is a repository name +#. %3 is URL of the repository +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:476 +msgid "" +"The file %1 from repository %2\n" +"%3\n" +"is not digitally signed. The origin and integrity of the file\n" +"cannot be verified. Using the file anyway puts the integrity of your \n" +"system at risk.\n" +"\n" +"Use it anyway?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup heading +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:500 +msgid "Unsigned Package" +msgstr "" + +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:502 +msgid "Unsigned File" +msgstr "" + +#. popup question, %1 stands for the package name +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:551 +msgid "" +"No checksum for package %1 was found in the repository.\n" +"While the package is part of the signed repository, it is not contained \n" +"in the list of checksums in this repository. Installing the package puts \n" +"the integrity of your system at risk.\n" +"\n" +"Install it anyway?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup question, %1 stands for the filename +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:561 +msgid "" +"No checksum for file %1 was found in the repository.\n" +"This means that the file is part of the signed repository,\n" +"but the list of checksums in this repository does not mention this file. Using the file\n" +"may put the integrity of your system at risk.\n" +"\n" +"Use it anyway?" +msgstr "" + +#. popup heading +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:579 +msgid "No Checksum Found" +msgstr "" + +#. Part of the GnuPG key description in popup, %1 is a GnuPG key ID +#. Part of the GnuPG key description in popup, %1 is a GnuPG key ID +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:622 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:833 +msgid "ID: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. Part of the GnuPG key description in popup, %1 is a GnuPG key fingerprint +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:631 +msgid "Fingerprint: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. Part of the GnuPG key description in popup, %1 is a GnuPG key name +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:637 +msgid "Name: %1" +msgstr "" + +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:643 +msgid "Created: %1" +msgstr "" + +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:655 +msgid "Expires: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. GPG key property +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:671 +msgid "ID: " +msgstr "" + +#. GPG key property +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:677 +msgid "Name: " +msgstr "" + +#. GPG key property +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:690 +msgid "Fingerprint: " +msgstr "" + +#. GPG key property +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:701 +msgid "Created: " +msgstr "" + +#. GPG key property +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:712 +msgid "Expires: " +msgstr "" + +#. popup question, %1 stands for the package name, %2 for the complete description of the GnuPG key (multiline) +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:734 +msgid "" +"Package %1 from repository %2\n" +"%3\n" +"is signed with the following GnuPG key, but the integrity check failed: %4\n" +"\n" +"The package has been changed, either by accident or by an attacker,\n" +"since the repository creator signed it. Installing it is a big risk\n" +"for the integrity and security of your system.\n" +"\n" +"Install it anyway?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup question, %1 stands for the filename, %2 for the complete description of the GnuPG key (multiline) +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:747 +msgid "" +"File %1 from repository %2\n" +"%3\n" +"is signed with the following GnuPG key, but the integrity check failed: %4\n" +"\n" +"The file has been changed, either by accident or by an attacker,\n" +"since the repository creator signed it. Using it is a big risk\n" +"for the integrity and security of your system.\n" +"\n" +"Use it anyway?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup heading +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:771 +msgid "Validation Check Failed" +msgstr "" + +#. popup question, %1 stands for the package name, %2 for the complex multiline description of the GnuPG key +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:801 +msgid "" +"The package %1 is digitally signed\n" +"with the following unknown GnuPG key: %2.\n" +"\n" +"This means that a trust relationship to the creator of the package\n" +"cannot be established. Installing the package may put the integrity\n" +"of your system at risk.\n" +"\n" +"Install it anyway?" +msgstr "" + +#. popup question, %1 stands for the filename, %2 for the complex multiline description of the GnuPG key +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:813 +msgid "" +"The file %1\n" +"is digitally signed with the following unknown GnuPG key: %2.\n" +"\n" +"This means that a trust relationship to the creator of the file\n" +"cannot be established. Using the file may put the integrity\n" +"of your system at risk.\n" +"\n" +"Use it anyway?" +msgstr "" + +#. popup heading +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:843 +msgid "Unknown GnuPG Key" +msgstr "" + +#. popup question, %1 stands for the package name, %2 for the key ID, %3 for the key name +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:894 +msgid "" +"The package %1 is digitally signed\n" +"with key '%2 (%3)'.\n" +"\n" +"There is no trust relationship with the owner of the key.\n" +"If you trust the owner, mark the key as trusted.\n" +"\n" +"Installing a package from an unknown repository puts\n" +"the integrity of your system at risk. It is safest\n" +"to skip the package.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup question, %1 stands for the filename, %2 for the key ID, %3 for the key name +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:907 +msgid "" +"The file %1 is digitally signed\n" +"with key '%2 (%3)'.\n" +"\n" +"There is no trust relationship with the owner of the key.\n" +"If you trust the owner, mark the key as trusted.\n" +"\n" +"Installing a file from an unknown repository puts\n" +"the integrity of your system at risk. It is safest\n" +"to skip it.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup heading +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:930 +msgid "Signed with Untrusted Public Key" +msgstr "" + +#. push button +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:939 +msgid "&Trust and Import the Key" +msgstr "" + +#. additional Richtext (HTML) warning text (kind of help), 1/2 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:973 +msgid "" +"<p>The owner of the key may distribute updates,\n" +"packages, and package repositories that your system will trust and offer\n" +"for installation and update without any further warning. In this way,\n" +"importing the key into your keyring of trusted keys allows the key owner\n" +"to have a certain amount of control over the software on your system.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. additional Richtext (HTML) warning text (kind of help), 2/2 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:981 +msgid "" +"<p>A warning dialog opens for every package that\n" +"is not signed by a trusted (imported) key. If you do not trust the key,\n" +"the packages or repositories created by the owner of the key will not be used.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. popup message - label, part 1, %1 stands for repository name, %2 for its URL +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:991 +msgid "" +"The following GnuPG key has been found in repository\n" +"%1\n" +"(%2):" +msgstr "" + +#. popup message - label, part 2 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:1002 +msgid "" +"You can choose to import it into your keyring of trusted\n" +"public keys, meaning that you trust the owner of the key.\n" +"You should be sure that you can trust the owner and that\n" +"the key really belongs to that owner before importing it." +msgstr "" + +#. warning label - the key to import is expired +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:1014 +msgid "WARNING: The key has expired!" +msgstr "" + +#. popup heading +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:1042 +msgid "Import Untrusted GnuPG Key" +msgstr "" + +#. push button +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:1058 +msgid "&Trust" +msgstr "" + +#. popup question, %1 stands for the filename, %2 is expected checksum +#. %3 is the current checksum (e.g. "803a8ff00d00c9075a1bd223a480bcf92d2481c1") +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:1134 +msgid "" +"The expected checksum of file %1\n" +"is %2,\n" +"but the current checksum is %3.\n" +"\n" +"The file has been changed by accident or by an attacker\n" +"since the repository creator signed it. Using it is a big risk\n" +"for the integrity and security of your system.\n" +"\n" +"Use it anyway?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog heading - displayed in a big bold font +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:1151 +msgid "Wrong Digest" +msgstr "" + +#. popup question, %1 stands for the filename, %2 is expected digest, %3 is the current digest +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:1170 +msgid "" +"The checksum of file %1\n" +"is %2,\n" +"but the expected checksum is not known.\n" +"\n" +"This means that the origin and integrity of the file\n" +"cannot be verified. Using the file puts the integrity of your system at risk.\n" +"\n" +"Use it anyway?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog heading - displayed in a big bold font +#: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:1184 +msgid "Unknown Digest" +msgstr "" + +#. we need to remember the values for tab switching +#. these are the initial values +#. Return the description for the current stage. +#. @return [String] localized string description +#. translators: default global progress bar label +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:151 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:152 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:323 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:344 +msgid "Installing..." +msgstr "" + +#. Table headings for CD statistics during installation +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:529 +msgid "Media" +msgstr "" + +#. Table headings for CD statistics during installation - keep as short as possible! +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:531 +msgid "Remaining" +msgstr "" + +#. Table headings for CD statistics during installation +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:535 +msgid "Time" +msgstr "" + +#. Construct widgets for the "details" page +#. +#. @return A term describing the widgets +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:551 +msgid "Actions performed:" +msgstr "" + +#. Help text while software packages are being installed (displayed only in rare cases) +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:633 +msgid "<p>Packages are being installed.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:634 +msgid "<P><B>Aborting Installation</B> Package installation can be aborted using the <B>Abort</B> button. However, the system then can be in an inconsistent or unusable state or it may not boot if the basic system component is not installed.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Tab name, keep short, %s is product name, e.g. SLES +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:652 +msgid "%s Release Notes" +msgstr "" + +#. tab +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:664 +msgid "Slide Sho&w" +msgstr "" + +#. tab +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:666 +msgid "&Details" +msgstr "" + +#. Dialog heading - software packages are being upgraded +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:705 +msgid "Performing Upgrade" +msgstr "" + +#. Dialog heading - software packages are being installed +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:708 +msgid "Performing Installation" +msgstr "" + +#. Dialog heading while software packages are being installed +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:743 +msgid "Package Installation" +msgstr "" + +#. popup yes-no +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:815 +msgid "" +"Do you really want\n" +"to quit the installation?" +msgstr "" + +#. Mode::update (), Stage::cont () +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:827 +msgid "Aborted" +msgstr "" + +#. remove remaining ASCII control characters (ASCII 0-31 and 127 (DEL)) +#. except new line (LF = 0xa) and carriage return (CR = 0xd) +#: library/system/src/clients/view_anymsg.rb:196 +msgid "File not found." +msgstr "" + +#. Fill the LogView with file content +#: library/system/src/clients/view_anymsg.rb:202 +msgid "System Log (%1)" +msgstr "" + +#. Class names collected +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:45 +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:46 +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:182 +msgid "Unclassified device" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:47 +msgid "VGA compatible unclassified device" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:50 +msgid "Mass storage controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:51 +msgid "SCSI storage controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:52 +msgid "IDE interface" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:53 +msgid "Floppy disk controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:54 +msgid "IPI bus controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:55 +msgid "RAID bus controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:56 +msgid "Unknown mass storage controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:59 +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:65 +msgid "Network controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:60 +msgid "Ethernet controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:61 +msgid "Token ring network controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:62 +msgid "FDDI network controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:63 +msgid "ATM network controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:64 +msgid "ISDN controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:66 +msgid "Myrinet controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:69 +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:73 +msgid "Display controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:70 +msgid "VGA-compatible controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:71 +msgid "XGA-compatible controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:72 +msgid "3D controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:76 +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:80 +msgid "Multimedia controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:77 +msgid "Multimedia video controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:78 +msgid "Multimedia audio controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:79 +msgid "Computer telephony device" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:83 +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:86 +msgid "Memory controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:84 +msgid "RAM memory" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:85 +msgid "FLASH memory" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:90 +msgid "Host bridge" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:91 +msgid "ISA bridge" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:92 +msgid "EISA bridge" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:93 +msgid "MicroChannel bridge" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:94 +msgid "PCI bridge" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:95 +msgid "PCMCIA bridge" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:96 +msgid "NuBus bridge" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:97 +msgid "CardBus bridge" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:98 +msgid "RACEway bridge" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:99 +msgid "Semitransparent PCI-to-PCI bridge" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:100 +msgid "InfiniBand to PCI host bridge" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:104 +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:109 +msgid "Communication controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:105 +msgid "Serial controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:106 +msgid "Parallel controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:107 +msgid "Multiport serial controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:112 +msgid "Generic system peripheral" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:113 +msgid "PIC" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:114 +msgid "DMA controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:115 +msgid "Timer" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:116 +msgid "RTC" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:117 +msgid "PCI hotplug controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:118 +msgid "System peripheral" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:121 +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:127 +msgid "Input device controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:122 +msgid "Keyboard controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:123 +msgid "Digitizer pen" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:124 +msgid "Mouse controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:125 +msgid "Scanner controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:126 +msgid "Gameport controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:130 +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:132 +msgid "Docking station" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:131 +msgid "Generic docking station" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:135 +msgid "Processor" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:136 +msgid "386" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:137 +msgid "486" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:138 +msgid "Pentium" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:139 +msgid "Alpha" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:140 +msgid "Power PC" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:141 +msgid "MIPS" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:142 +msgid "Coprocessor" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:145 +msgid "Serial bus controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:146 +msgid "FireWire (IEEE 1394)" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:147 +msgid "ACCESS bus" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:148 +msgid "SSA" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:149 +msgid "USB controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:150 +msgid "Fiber channel" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:151 +msgid "SMBus" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:155 +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:159 +msgid "Wireless controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:156 +msgid "IRDA controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:157 +msgid "Consumer IR controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:158 +msgid "RF controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:161 +msgid "Intelligent controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:161 +msgid "I2O" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:163 +msgid "Satellite communications controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:164 +msgid "Satellite TV controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:165 +msgid "Satellite audio communication controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:166 +msgid "Satellite voice communication controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:167 +msgid "Satellite data communication controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:170 +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:173 +msgid "Encryption controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:171 +msgid "Network and computing encryption device" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:172 +msgid "Entertainment encryption device" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:176 +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:180 +msgid "Signal processing controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:177 +msgid "DPIO module" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:178 +msgid "Performance counters" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:179 +msgid "Communication synchronizer" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:184 +msgid "Monitor" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:185 +msgid "CRT monitor" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:186 +msgid "LCD monitor" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:189 +msgid "Internally used class" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:190 +msgid "ISA PnP interface" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:191 +msgid "Main memory" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:192 +msgid "CPU" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:193 +msgid "FPU" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:194 +msgid "BIOS" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:195 +msgid "PROM" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:196 +msgid "System" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:198 +msgid "Win modem" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:199 +msgid "ISDN adapter" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:200 +msgid "PS/2 controller" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:202 +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:207 +msgid "Mouse" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:203 +msgid "PS/2 mouse" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:204 +msgid "Serial mouse" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:205 +msgid "Bus mouse" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:206 +msgid "USB mouse" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:210 +msgid "Mass storage device" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:211 +msgid "Disk" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:212 +msgid "Tape" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:213 +msgid "CD-ROM" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:214 +msgid "Floppy disk" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:215 +msgid "Storage device" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:218 +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:229 +msgid "Network interface" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:221 +msgid "Token ring" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:225 +msgid "HSI" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:232 +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:233 +msgid "Keyboard" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:234 +msgid "Console" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:236 +msgid "Printer" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:237 +msgid "Hub" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:237 +msgid "USB hub" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:238 +msgid "Braille display" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:239 +msgid "Scanner" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:240 +msgid "Joystick" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:240 +msgid "Gamepad" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:241 +msgid "Chipcard reader" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:243 +msgid "Camera" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:244 +msgid "Webcam" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:245 +msgid "Digital camera" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:247 +msgid "Framebuffer" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:247 +msgid "VESA framebuffer" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:249 +msgid "DVB card" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:250 +msgid "DVB-C card" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:251 +msgid "DVB-S card" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:252 +msgid "DVB-T card" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:254 +msgid "TV card" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:255 +msgid "Partition" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:256 +msgid "DSL card" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:257 +msgid "Bluetooth device" +msgstr "" + +#. Continue/Cancel question, %1 is a file name +#: library/system/src/modules/FileChanges.rb:175 +msgid "" +"File %1 has been changed manually.\n" +"YaST might lose some of the changes.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Continue/Cancel question, %1 is a coma separated list of file names +#: library/system/src/modules/FileChanges.rb:180 +msgid "" +"Files %1 have been changed manually.\n" +"YaST might lose some of the changes" +msgstr "" + +#: library/system/src/modules/FileChanges.rb:193 +msgid "Do not show this message anymore" +msgstr "" + +#. Continue/Cancel question, %s is a file name +#: library/system/src/modules/FileChanges.rb:236 +msgid "" +"File %s has been created manually.\n" +"YaST might lose this file." +msgstr "" + +#. Continue/Cancel question, %s is a comma separated list of file names +#: library/system/src/modules/FileChanges.rb:239 +msgid "" +"Files %s have been created manually.\n" +"YaST might lose these files." +msgstr "" + +#. error report +#: library/system/src/modules/Initrd.rb:415 +msgid "An error occurred during initrd creation." +msgstr "" + +#. inform the user that he/she has to reboot to activate new kernel +#: library/system/src/modules/Kernel.rb:665 +msgid "" +"Reboot your system\n" +"to activate the new kernel.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. bnc #421002 +#: library/system/src/modules/ModuleLoading.rb:177 +msgid "Confirm driver activation" +msgstr "" + +#. This is in information message. Next come the +#. vendor and device information strings as stored +#. in the hardware-probing database. +#: library/system/src/modules/ModuleLoading.rb:184 +msgid "YaST2 detected the following device" +msgstr "" + +#. Caption for Textentry with module information +#: library/system/src/modules/ModuleLoading.rb:193 +msgid "&Driver/Module to load" +msgstr "" + +#. describe valid MAC address +#: library/types/src/modules/Address.rb:80 +msgid "" +"A valid MAC address consists of six pairs of hexadecimal\n" +"digits separated by colons." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: dot: ".", hyphen: "-" +#: library/types/src/modules/Hostname.rb:55 +msgid "" +"A valid domain name consists of components separated by dots.\n" +"Each component contains letters, digits, and hyphens. A hyphen may not\n" +"start or end a component and the last component may not begin with a digit." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: hyphen: "-" +#: library/types/src/modules/Hostname.rb:66 +msgid "" +"A valid host name consists of letters, digits, and hyphens.\n" +"A host name may not begin or end with a hyphen.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: dot: "." +#: library/types/src/modules/IP.rb:56 +msgid "" +"A valid IPv4 address consists of four integers\n" +"in the range 0-255 separated by dots." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: colon: ":" +#: library/types/src/modules/IP.rb:74 +msgid "" +"A valid IPv6 address consists of up to eight\n" +"hexadecimal numbers in the range 0 - FFFF separated by colons.\n" +"It can contain up to one double colon." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: description of the valid network definition +#: library/types/src/modules/IP.rb:128 +msgid "" +"A valid network definition can contain the IP,\n" +"IP/Netmask, IP/Netmask_Bits, or 0/0 for all networks.\n" +"\n" +"Examples:\n" +"IP: 192.168.0.1 or 2001:db8:0::1\n" +"IP/Netmask: 192.168.0.0/255.255.255.0 or 2001:db8:0::1/56\n" +"IP/Netmask_Bits: 192.168.0.0/24 or 192.168.0.1/32 or 2001:db8:0::1/ffff::0\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Byte abbreviated +#: library/types/src/modules/String.rb:127 +msgid "B" +msgstr "" + +#. KiloByte abbreviated +#: library/types/src/modules/String.rb:129 +msgid "KiB" +msgstr "" + +#. MegaByte abbreviated +#: library/types/src/modules/String.rb:131 +msgid "MiB" +msgstr "" + +#. GigaByte abbreviated +#: library/types/src/modules/String.rb:133 +msgid "GiB" +msgstr "" + +#. TeraByte abbreviated +#: library/types/src/modules/String.rb:135 +msgid "TiB" +msgstr "" + +#. format download rate message: %1 = the current download rate (e.g. "242.6kB/s") +#. %2 is the average download rate (e.g. "228.3kB/s") +#. to translators: keep translation of "on average" as short as possible +#: library/types/src/modules/String.rb:201 +msgid "%1 (on average %2)" +msgstr "" + +#. ellipsis - used to replace part of text to make it shorter +#. example: "/really/very/long/file/name", "/.../file/name") +#: library/types/src/modules/String.rb:738 +msgid "..." +msgstr "" + +#. covert a number to download rate string +#. %1 is string - size in bytes, B, KiB, MiB, GiB or TiB +#: library/types/src/modules/String.rb:855 +msgid "%1/s" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup-Box for manual hardware detection. +#. If the user selects 'manual installation' when +#. booting from CD, YaST2 does not load any modules +#. automatically, but asks the user for confirmation +#. about every module. +#. The popup box informs the user about the detected +#. hardware and suggests a module to load. +#. The user can confirm the module or change +#. the suggested load command +#. +#. This is the heading of the popup box +#: library/wizard/src/modules/Confirm.rb:102 +msgid "Confirm Hardware Detection" +msgstr "" + +#. This is in information message. Next come the +#. hardware class name (network cards). +#: library/wizard/src/modules/Confirm.rb:107 +msgid "YaST will detect the following hardware:" +msgstr "" + +#. Message in a continue/cancel popup +#: library/wizard/src/modules/Confirm.rb:182 +msgid "" +"This module must be run as root.\n" +"If you continue now, the module may not function properly.\n" +"For example, some settings can be read improperly\n" +"and it is unlikely that settings can be written.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup headline +#: library/wizard/src/modules/Confirm.rb:190 +msgid "Root Privileges Needed" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup question +#: library/wizard/src/modules/Confirm.rb:207 +msgid "Really delete selected entry?" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup question, %1 is an item to delete (or filename, etc.) +#: library/wizard/src/modules/Confirm.rb:221 +msgid "Really delete '%1'?" +msgstr "" + +#. button text +#. Open a dialog with "Accept", "Cancel" +#. and set the keyboard focus to "Accept". +#: library/wizard/src/modules/Wizard.rb:259 +#: library/wizard/src/modules/Wizard.rb:508 +msgid "&Apply" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: dialog title to appear before any content is initialized +#: library/wizard/src/modules/Wizard.rb:286 +msgid "Initializing ..." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: dialog title to appear before any content is initialized +#: library/wizard/src/modules/Wizard.rb:339 +msgid "" +"YaST\n" +"Initializing ...\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Heading for help popup window +#: library/wizard/src/modules/Wizard.rb:375 +msgid "Help" +msgstr "" + +#. fallback name for the dialog title +#. fallback name for the dialog title +#: library/wizard/src/modules/Wizard.rb:1139 +#: library/wizard/src/modules/Wizard.rb:1193 +msgid "Module" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:32 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:33 +msgid "United Arab Emirates" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:33 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:144 +msgid "Albania" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:34 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:81 +msgid "Argentina" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:35 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:60 +msgid "Austria" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:36 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:66 +msgid "Australia" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:37 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:55 +msgid "Bosnia and Herzegowina" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:38 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:61 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:68 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:105 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:130 +msgid "Belgium" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:39 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:52 +msgid "Bulgaria" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:40 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:34 +msgid "Bahrein" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:41 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:53 +msgid "Bangladesh" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:42 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:82 +msgid "Bolivia" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:43 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:136 +msgid "Brasil" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:44 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:67 +msgid "Botswana" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:45 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:51 +msgid "Belarus" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:46 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:69 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:106 +msgid "Canada" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:47 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:62 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:107 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:118 +msgid "Switzerland" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:48 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:83 +msgid "Chile" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:49 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:158 +msgid "Peoples Republic of China" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:50 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:84 +msgid "Colombia" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:51 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:85 +msgid "Costa Rica" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:52 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:57 +msgid "Czech Republic" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:53 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:63 +msgid "Germany" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:54 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:59 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:70 +msgid "Denmark" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:55 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:86 +msgid "Dominican Republic" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:56 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:35 +msgid "Algeria" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:57 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:87 +msgid "Ecuador" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:58 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:101 +msgid "Estonia" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:59 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:36 +msgid "Egypt" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:60 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:56 +msgid "Catalonia" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:61 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:88 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:102 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:111 +msgid "Spain" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:62 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:103 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:146 +msgid "Finland" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:63 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:104 +msgid "Faroe Islands" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:64 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:54 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:108 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:134 +msgid "France" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:65 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:58 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:71 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:112 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:123 +msgid "Great Britain" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:66 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:121 +msgid "Georgia" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:67 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:122 +msgid "Greenland" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:68 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:65 +msgid "Greece" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:69 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:89 +msgid "Guatemala" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:70 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:72 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:159 +msgid "Hong Kong" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:71 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:90 +msgid "Honduras" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:72 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:114 +msgid "Croatia" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:73 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:115 +msgid "Hungary" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:74 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:116 +msgid "Indonesia" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:75 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:73 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:110 +msgid "Ireland" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:76 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:113 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:120 +msgid "Israel" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:77 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:37 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:74 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:148 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:149 +msgid "India" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:78 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:38 +msgid "Iraq" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:79 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:117 +msgid "Iceland" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:80 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:119 +msgid "Italy" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:81 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:39 +msgid "Jordan" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:82 +msgid "Japan" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:83 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:40 +msgid "Kuwait" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:84 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:41 +msgid "Lebanon" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:85 +msgid "Liechtenstein" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:86 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:124 +msgid "Lithuania" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:87 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:64 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:109 +msgid "Luxemburg" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:88 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:125 +msgid "Latvia" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:89 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:42 +msgid "Libyan Arab Jamahiriya" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:90 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:43 +msgid "Morocco" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:91 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:127 +msgid "Macedonia" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:92 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:129 +msgid "Malta" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:93 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:91 +msgid "Mexico" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:94 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:128 +msgid "Malaysia" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:95 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:92 +msgid "Nicaragua" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:96 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:131 +msgid "Netherlands" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:97 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:132 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:133 +msgid "Norway" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:98 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:75 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:126 +msgid "New Zealand" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:99 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:44 +msgid "Oman" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:100 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:93 +msgid "Panama" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:101 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:94 +msgid "Peru" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:102 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:76 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:152 +msgid "Philippines" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:103 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:155 +msgid "Pakistan" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:104 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:135 +msgid "Poland" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:105 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:95 +msgid "Puerto Rico" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:106 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:137 +msgid "Portugal" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:107 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:96 +msgid "Paraguay" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:108 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:45 +msgid "Qatar" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:109 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:138 +msgid "Romania" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:110 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:139 +msgid "Russia" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:111 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:46 +msgid "Saudi Arabia" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:112 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:47 +msgid "Sudan" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:113 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:147 +msgid "Sweden" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:114 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:77 +msgid "Singapore" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:115 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:143 +msgid "Slovenia" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:116 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:142 +msgid "Slovakia" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:117 +msgid "San Marino" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:118 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:97 +msgid "El Salvador" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:119 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:48 +msgid "Syrian Arab Republic" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:120 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:151 +msgid "Thailand" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:121 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:150 +msgid "Tajikistan" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:122 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:49 +msgid "Tunisia" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:123 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:153 +msgid "Turkey" +msgstr "" + +#. "TW" : _("Taiwan"), +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:125 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:140 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:154 +msgid "Ukraine" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:126 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:78 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:98 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:157 +msgid "USA" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:127 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:99 +msgid "Uruguay" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:128 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:156 +msgid "Uzbekistan" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:129 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:100 +msgid "Venezuela" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:130 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:50 +msgid "Yemen" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:131 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:141 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:145 +msgid "Yugoslavia" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:132 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:32 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:79 +msgid "South Africa" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country.ycp:133 +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:80 +msgid "Zimbabwe" +msgstr "" + +#: library/general/src/data/country_long.ycp:160 +msgid "Taiwan" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup error message during parameters validation, +#. %1 is a string that should be IPv4 +#: library/network/src/modules/DnsServerAPI.pm:129 +msgid "%1 is not a valid IPv4 address." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup error message, Calling function which needs DNS zone name defined +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup error message, Calling function which needs DNS zone defined +#: library/network/src/modules/DnsServerAPI.pm:142 +#: library/network/src/modules/DnsServerAPI.pm:1431 +msgid "The zone name must be defined." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup error message, Trying to get information from zone which doesn't exist, +#. %1 is the zone name +#: library/network/src/modules/DnsServerAPI.pm:153 +msgid "DNS zone %1 does not exist." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup error message, Trying manage records in zone which is not 'master' type +#. only 'master' zone records can be managed +#. %1 is the zone name +#: library/network/src/modules/DnsServerAPI.pm:187 +msgid "DNS zone %1 is not type master." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup error message, Calling function which needs DNS zone type defined +#: library/network/src/modules/DnsServerAPI.pm:197 +msgid "The zone type must be defined." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup error message, Calling function with unsupported DNZ zone type, +#. %1 is the zone type +#: library/network/src/modules/DnsServerAPI.pm:204 +msgid "Zone type %1 is not supported." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup error message, Calling function which needs ACL name defined +#: library/network/src/modules/DnsServerAPI.pm:217 +msgid "The ACL name must be defined." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup error message, Calling function with unknown ACL, +#. %1 is the ACL's name +#: library/network/src/modules/DnsServerAPI.pm:228 +msgid "An ACL named %1 does not exist." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup error message, Calling function with undefined parameter +#: library/network/src/modules/DnsServerAPI.pm:238 +msgid "The hostname must be defined." +msgstr "" + +#. Popup error message, wrong FQDN format +#: library/network/src/modules/DnsServerAPI.pm:250 +msgid "The hostname must be in the fully qualified domain name format." +msgstr "" + +#. Popup error message, FQDN hostname must finish with a dot +#: library/network/src/modules/DnsServerAPI.pm:256 +msgid "The fully qualified hostname must end with a dot." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup error message, wrong hostname, allowed syntax is described +#. two lines below using a pre-defined text +#: library/network/src/modules/DnsServerAPI.pm:266 +msgid "The hostname is invalid." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup error message, Checking parameters, MX priority is a needed parameter +#: library/network/src/modules/DnsServerAPI.pm:278 +msgid "The mail exchange priority must be defined." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup error message, Checking parameters, wrong format +#: library/network/src/modules/DnsServerAPI.pm:284 +msgid "" +"The mail exchange priority is invalid.\n" +"It must be a number from 0 to 65535.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup error message, Wrong hostname which should be part of the zone, +#. %1 is the hostname, %2 is the zone name +#: library/network/src/modules/DnsServerAPI.pm:305 +msgid "" +"The hostname %1 is not part of the zone %2.\n" +"\n" +"The hostname must be relative to the zone or must end \n" +"with the zone name followed by a dot, for example,\n" +"'dhcp1' or 'dhcp1.example.org.' for the zone 'example.org'.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup error message, Wrong reverse IPv4, +#. %1 is the reveresed IPv4 +#: library/network/src/modules/DnsServerAPI.pm:341 +msgid "" +"The reverse IPv4 address %1 is invalid.\n" +"\n" +"A valid reverse IPv4 consists of four integers in the range 0-255\n" +"separated by a dot then followed by the string '.in-addr.arpa.'.\n" +"For example, '1.32.168.192.in-addr.arpa.' for the IPv4 address '192.168.32.1'.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup error message, user can't use hostname %1 because it doesn't make +#. sense to e relative to zone %2 (%2 is a reverse zone name like '32.200.192.in-addr.arpa') +#: library/network/src/modules/DnsServerAPI.pm:363 +msgid "" +"The relative hostname %1 cannot be used with zone %2.\n" +"Use a fully qualified hostname finished with a dot instead,\n" +"such as 'host.example.org.'.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup error message, Checking MX (Mail eXchange) record format +#: library/network/src/modules/DnsServerAPI.pm:432 +msgid "" +"Invalid MX record.\n" +"Use the format 'priority server-name'.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup error message, Checking time value for specific SOA section (key), +#. %1 is the section name, %2 is the minimal value, %3 si the maximal value of the section +#: library/network/src/modules/DnsServerAPI.pm:543 +#: library/network/src/modules/DnsServerAPI.pm:554 +msgid "" +"Invalid SOA record.\n" +"%1 must be from %2 to %3 seconds.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup error message, Checking special BIND time format consisting of numbers +#. and defined suffies, also only number (as seconds) is allowed, %1 is a section name +#. like 'ttl' or 'refresh' +#: library/network/src/modules/DnsServerAPI.pm:583 +msgid "" +"Invalid SOA record.\n" +"%1 must be a BIND time type.\n" +"A BIND time type consists of numbers and the case-insensitive\n" +"suffixes W, D, H, M, and S. Time in seconds is allowed without the suffix.\n" +"Enter values such as 12H15m, 86400, or 1W30M.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup error message, Checking SOA record, +#. %1 is a part of SOA, %2 is typically 0, %3 is some huge number +#: library/network/src/modules/DnsServerAPI.pm:614 +msgid "" +"Invalid SOA record.\n" +"%1 must be a number from %2 to %3.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup error message, parameters validation, 'filename' is needed parameter +#: library/network/src/modules/DnsServerAPI.pm:1020 +msgid "The filename must be defined when logging to a file." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup error message, parameters validation, wrongly set file size +#: library/network/src/modules/DnsServerAPI.pm:1028 +msgid "" +"Invalid file size.\n" +"\n" +"It must be set in the format 'number[suffix]'.\n" +"\n" +"Possible suffixes are k, K, m, M, g, and G.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup error message, parameters validation, wrongly set number of versions +#: library/network/src/modules/DnsServerAPI.pm:1041 +msgid "The count of file versions must be a number." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup error message, Trying to get 'master server' for zone which is not 'slave' type, +#. 'master' servers haven't any 'masterservers', they ARE masterservers +#. %1 is name of the zone, %2 is type of the zone +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup error message, Trying to set 'master server' for zone which is not 'slave' type, +#. %1 is name of the zone, %2 is type of the zone +#: library/network/src/modules/DnsServerAPI.pm:1334 +#: library/network/src/modules/DnsServerAPI.pm:1381 +msgid "" +"Only slave zones have a master server defined.\n" +"Zone %1 is type %2.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup error message, Trying to add new zone which already exists +#: library/network/src/modules/DnsServerAPI.pm:1440 +msgid "Zone name %1 already exists." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup error message, Adding new 'slave' zone without defined needed option 'masterserver' +#: library/network/src/modules/DnsServerAPI.pm:1449 +msgid "Option masterserver is needed for slave zones." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup error message +#: library/network/src/modules/DnsServerAPI.pm:2531 +#: library/network/src/modules/DnsServerAPI.pm:2581 +msgid "Host's IP cannot be empty." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup error message, No reverse zone for %1 record found, +#. %2 is the hostname, %1 is the IPv4 +#: library/network/src/modules/DnsServerAPI.pm:2539 +msgid "" +"There is no reverse zone for %1 administered by your DNS server.\n" +"Hostname %2 cannot be added." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/ui/srv_status_component.rb:60 +msgid "Service Status" +msgstr "" + +#. Content for the help +#: src/lib/ui/srv_status_component.rb:114 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Current status</big></b><br>\n" +"Displays the current status of the service. The status will remain the same after saving the settings, independently of the value of 'start service during boot'.</p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Reload After Saving Settings</big></b><br>\n" +"Only applicable if the service is currently running. Ensures the running service reloads the new configuration after saving it (via 'ok' or 'save' buttons).</p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Start During System Boot</big></b><br>\n" +"Check this field to enable the service at system boot. Un-check it to disable the service. This does not affect the current status of the service in the already running system.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Widget displaying the status and associated buttons +#: src/lib/ui/srv_status_component.rb:181 +msgid "Current status:" +msgstr "" + +#. Widget to configure the status on boot +#: src/lib/ui/srv_status_component.rb:194 +msgid "Start During System Boot" +msgstr "" + +#. Widget to configure reloading of the running service +#: src/lib/ui/srv_status_component.rb:208 +msgid "Reload After Saving Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: status of a service +#: src/lib/ui/srv_status_component.rb:218 +msgid "running" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/ui/srv_status_component.rb:220 +msgid "Stop now" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: status of a service +#: src/lib/ui/srv_status_component.rb:225 +msgid "stopped" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/ui/srv_status_component.rb:227 +msgid "Start now" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/bootloader.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/bootloader.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/bootloader.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,1139 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-09-28 18:16+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. command line help text for Bootloader module +#: src/clients/bootloader.rb:35 +msgid "Boot loader configuration module" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for summary action +#: src/clients/bootloader.rb:48 +msgid "Configuration summary of boot loader" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for delete action +#: src/clients/bootloader.rb:58 +msgid "Delete a global option" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for set action +#: src/clients/bootloader.rb:65 +msgid "Set a global option" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for print action +#: src/clients/bootloader.rb:75 +msgid "Print value of specified option" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an option +#: src/clients/bootloader.rb:83 +msgid "The key of the option" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an option +#: src/clients/bootloader.rb:90 +msgid "The value of the option" +msgstr "" + +#. command line error report +#: src/clients/bootloader.rb:152 +msgid "Value was not specified." +msgstr "" + +#. command line error report +#: src/clients/bootloader.rb:174 +msgid "Option was not specified." +msgstr "" + +#. command line, %1 is the value of bootloader option +#: src/clients/bootloader.rb:180 +msgid "Value: %s" +msgstr "" + +#. command line error report +#: src/clients/bootloader.rb:183 +msgid "Specified option does not exist." +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. File: +#. include/bootloader/grup/helps.ycp +#. +#. Module: +#. Bootloader installation and configuration +#. +#. Summary: +#. Help and label strings for bootloader installation and configuration +#. +#. Authors: +#. Joachim Plack +#. +#. $Id$ +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:23 +msgid "<p><big><b>Boot Menu</b></big><br></p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:24 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Set active Flag in Partition Table for Boot Partition</b><br>\n" +"To activate the partition which contains the boot loader. The generic MBR code will then\n" +"boot the active partition. Older BIOSes require one partition to be active even\n" +"if the boot loader is installed in the MBR.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. File: +#. include/bootloader/grup/helps.ycp +#. +#. Module: +#. Bootloader installation and configuration +#. +#. Summary: +#. Help and label strings for bootloader installation and configuration +#. +#. Authors: +#. Joachim Plack +#. +#. $Id$ +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:30 +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/common_helps.rb:23 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Timeout in Seconds</b><br>\n" +"Specifies the time the bootloader will wait until the default kernel is loaded.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:33 +msgid "" +"<p> By pressing <b>Set as Default</b> you mark the selected section as\n" +"the default. When booting, the boot loader will provide a boot menu and\n" +"wait for the user to select a kernel or OS to boot. If no\n" +"key is pressed before the timeout, the default kernel or OS will\n" +"boot. The order of the sections in the boot loader menu can be changed\n" +"using the <b>Up</b> and <b>Down</b> buttons.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:41 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Write generic Boot Code to MBR</b> replace the master boot record of your disk with generic code (OS independent code which\n" +"boots the active partition).</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:44 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Boot from Boot Partition</b> is one of the recommended options, the other is\n" +"<b>Boot from Root Partition</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:47 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Boot from Master Boot Record</b> is not recommended if you have another operating system\n" +"installed on your computer</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:50 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Boot from Root Partition</b> is the recommended option whenever there is a suitable\n" +"partition. Either select <b>Set active Flag in Partition Table for Boot Partition</b> and <b>Write generic Boot Code to MBR</b>\n" +"in <b>Boot Loader Options</b> to update the master boot record if that is needed or configure your other boot manager\n" +"to start this section.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:56 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Boot from Extended Partition</b> should be selected if your root partition is on \n" +"logical partition and the /boot partition is missing</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:59 +msgid "<p><b>Custom Boot Partition</b> lets you choose a partition to boot from.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:62 +msgid "" +"<p>MD array is build from 2 disks. <b>Enable Redundancy for MD Array</b>\n" +"enable to write GRUB to MBR of both disks.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:65 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Use Serial Console</b> lets you define the parameters to use\n" +"for a serial console. Please see the grub documentation (<code>info grub2</code>) for details.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:68 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Terminal Definition</b></p><br>\n" +"Defines the type of terminal you want to use. For a serial terminal (e.g. a serial console),\n" +"you have to specify <code>serial</code>. You can also pass <code>console</code> to the\n" +"command, as <code>serial console</code>. In this case, a terminal in which you\n" +"press any key will be selected as a GRUB terminal.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:75 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Fallback Sections if default Fails</b> contains a list of section numbers\n" +"that will be used for booting in case the default section is unbootable.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:78 +msgid "<p>Selecting <b>Hide Menu on Boot</b> will hide the boot menu.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:81 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Protect Boot Loader with Password</b><br>\n" +"At boot time, modifying or even booting any entry will require the password. If <b>Protect Entry Modification Only</b> is checked then booting any entry is not restricted but modifying entries requires the password (which is the way GRUB 1 behaved).<br>YaST will only accept the password if you repeat it in <b>Retype Password</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/5 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:91 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>Disks Order</b></big><br>\n" +"To specify the order of the disks according to the order in BIOS, use\n" +"the <b>Up</b> and <b>Down</b> buttons to reorder the disks.\n" +"To add a disk, push <b>Add</b>.\n" +"To remove a disk, push <b>Remove</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:101 +msgid "Boot Loader Locations" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:102 +msgid "Set &active Flag in Partition Table for Boot Partition" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:105 +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/common_helps.rb:28 +msgid "&Timeout in Seconds" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:106 +msgid "&Default Boot Section" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:107 +msgid "Write &generic Boot Code to MBR" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:108 +msgid "Custom Boot Partition" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:109 +msgid "Boot from Master Boot Record" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:110 +msgid "Boot from Root Partition" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:111 +msgid "Boot from Boot Partition" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:112 +msgid "Boot from Extended Partition" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:113 +msgid "Serial Connection &Parameters" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:114 +msgid "Fallback Sections if Default fails" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:115 +msgid "&Hide Menu on Boot" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:116 +msgid "Pa&ssword for the Menu Interface" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:117 +msgid "Debugg&ing Flag" +msgstr "" + +#. Validate function of a popup +#. @param [String] key any widget key +#. @param [Hash] event map event that caused validation +#. @return [Boolean] true if widget settings ok +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/options.rb:73 +msgid "Prot&ect Boot Loader with Password" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: checkbox entry +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/options.rb:79 +msgid "P&rotect Entry Modification Only" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/options.rb:85 +msgid "&Password" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/options.rb:88 +msgid "Re&type Password" +msgstr "" + +#. Create Frame "Boot Loader Location" +#. +#. @return [Yast::Term] with widgets +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/options.rb:222 +msgid "Boot from &Root Partition" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/options.rb:224 +msgid "Boo&t from Boot Partition" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/options.rb:235 +msgid "C&ustom Boot Partition" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/options.rb:250 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/options.rb:280 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/options.rb:301 +msgid "Boot Loader Location" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/options.rb:256 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/options.rb:286 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/options.rb:307 +msgid "Boot from &Master Boot Record" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/options.rb:263 +msgid "Boot from &Extended Partition" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/options.rb:312 +msgid "Enable Red&undancy for MD Array" +msgstr "" + +#. Title in tab +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/dialogs.rb:57 +msgid "Boot Code Options" +msgstr "" + +#. Title in tab +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/dialogs.rb:84 +msgid "Kernel Parameters" +msgstr "" + +#. Title in tab +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/dialogs.rb:103 +msgid "Bootloader Options" +msgstr "" + +#. Window title +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/dialogs.rb:149 +msgid "Boot Loader Options" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/dialogs.rb:190 +msgid "Secure Boot" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/dialogs.rb:196 +msgid "Enable &Secure Boot Support" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: place where boot code is installed +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/dialogs.rb:247 +msgid "Boot &Loader Location" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/dialogs.rb:266 +msgid "Choose partition where is boot sequence installed." +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. File: +#. include/bootloader/grup2/helps.ycp +#. +#. Module: +#. Bootloader installation and configuration +#. +#. Summary: +#. Help and label strings for bootloader installation and configuration +#. +#. Authors: +#. Joachim Plack +#. +#. $Id: helps.ycp 58279 2009-08-04 16:01:51Z juhliarik $ +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:23 +msgid "<p><b>Optional Kernel Command Line Parameter</b> lets you define additional parameters to pass to the kernel.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:26 +msgid "<p><b>Vga Mode</b> defines the VGA mode the kernel should set the <i>console</i> to when booting.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:29 +msgid "<p><b>Probe Foreign OS</b> by means of os-prober for multiboot with other foreign distribution </p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:32 +msgid "<p><b>Protective MBR flag</b> is expert only settings, that is needed only on exotic hardware. For details see Protective MBR in GPT disks. Do not touch if you are not sure.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:38 +msgid "O&ptional Kernel Command Line Parameter" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:39 +msgid "&Vga Mode" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:40 +msgid "Probe Foreign OS" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:41 +msgid "Protective MBR flag" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item +#. %1 is X resolution (width) in pixels +#. %2 is Y resolution (height) in pixels +#. %3 is color depth (usually one of 8, 16, 24, 32) +#. %4 is the VGA mode ID (hexadecimal number) +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/options.rb:58 +msgid "%1x%2, %3 bits (mode %4)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/options.rb:68 +msgid "Standard 8-pixel font mode." +msgstr "" + +#. item of a combo box +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/options.rb:71 +msgid "Text Mode" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/options.rb:72 +msgid "Unspecified" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: set flag on disk +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/options.rb:102 +msgid "set" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: remove flag from disk +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/options.rb:104 +msgid "remove" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: do not change flag on disk +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/options.rb:106 +msgid "do not change" +msgstr "" + +#. Init function for console +#. @param [String] widget +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/options.rb:173 +msgid "Autodetect by grub2" +msgstr "" + +#. FATE: #110038: Serial console +#. add or remove console key with value for sections +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/options.rb:246 +msgid "Choose new graphical theme file" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/options.rb:258 +msgid "Use &graphical console" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/options.rb:265 +msgid "&Console resolution" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/options.rb:273 +msgid "&Console theme" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/options.rb:292 +msgid "Use &serial console" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub2/options.rb:299 +msgid "&Console arguments" +msgstr "" + +#. FIXME: this should be better handled by exception and show it properly, but it require too big change now +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/autoinstall.rb:131 +msgid "Unsupported bootloader '%s'. Adapt your AutoYaST profile accordingly." +msgstr "" + +#. file open popup caption +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/common_options.rb:98 +msgid "Select File" +msgstr "" + +#. F#300779 - Install diskless client (NFS-root) +#. kokso: additional warning that root partition is nfs type -> bootloader will not be installed +#. kokso: additional warning that root partition is nfs type -> bootloader will not be installed +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/dialogs.rb:86 src/modules/Bootloader.rb:239 +msgid "The boot partition is of type NFS. Bootloader cannot be installed." +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/dialogs.rb:114 +msgid "Boot Loader Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. message +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/dialogs.rb:142 +msgid "There are no options to set for the current boot loader." +msgstr "" + +#. combo box +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/global_widgets.rb:109 +msgid "&Boot Loader" +msgstr "" + +#. popup - Continue/Cancel +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/global_widgets.rb:138 +msgid "" +"\n" +"If you do not install any boot loader, the system\n" +"might not start.\n" +"\n" +"Proceed?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. menu button entry +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/global_widgets.rb:175 +msgid "E&dit Configuration Files" +msgstr "" + +#. menubutton item, keep as short as possible +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/global_widgets.rb:182 +msgid "&Propose New Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. menubutton item, keep as short as possible +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/global_widgets.rb:189 +msgid "&Start from Scratch" +msgstr "" + +#. menubutton item, keep as short as possible +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/global_widgets.rb:197 +msgid "&Reread Configuration from Disk" +msgstr "" + +#. menubutton item, keep as short as possible +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/global_widgets.rb:214 +msgid "Restore MBR of Hard Disk" +msgstr "" + +#. menubutton item, keep as short as possible +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/global_widgets.rb:222 +msgid "Write bootloader boot code to disk" +msgstr "" + +#. menu button +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/global_widgets.rb:230 +msgid "Other" +msgstr "" + +#. message popup +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/global_widgets.rb:254 +msgid "MBR restored successfully." +msgstr "" + +#. message popup +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/global_widgets.rb:257 +msgid "Failed to restore MBR." +msgstr "" + +#. Bootloader::blSave (false, false, false); +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/global_widgets.rb:280 +msgid "Writing bootloader settings failed." +msgstr "" + +#. push button +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/global_widgets.rb:329 +msgid "Boot &Loader Options" +msgstr "" + +#. push button +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/global_widgets.rb:342 +msgid "Boot Loader Installation &Details" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/1 (shown during settings reading progress) +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:32 +msgid "" +"<P><BIG><B>Boot Loader Configuration Tool</B></BIG><BR>\n" +"Change the settings of your boot loader.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:41 +msgid "" +"<P><B><BIG>Saving Boot Loader Configuration</BIG></B><BR>\n" +"Please wait...<br></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/2 (%1 may be following sentence, optionally empty) +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:52 +msgid "" +"<P>From <B>Other</B>,\n" +"you can manually edit the boot loader configuration files, clear the current \n" +"configuration and propose a new configuration, start from scratch, or reread\n" +"the configuration saved on your disk. %1</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/1 +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:67 +msgid "" +"<P>To edit boot loader configuration files\n" +"manually, click <B>Edit Configuration Files</B>.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. help 1/4 +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:76 +msgid "" +"<P> In the table, each section represents one item\n" +"in the boot menu.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. help 2/4 +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:80 +msgid "" +"<P> Press <B>Edit</B> to display the properties of the\n" +"selected section.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. help 3/4 +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:84 +msgid "" +"<P> By pressing <b>Set as Default</b>, mark the selected \n" +"section as default. When booting, the boot loader will provide \n" +"a boot menu and wait for the user to select the kernel or other \n" +"OS to boot. If no key is pressed before the time-out, the default \n" +"kernel or OS will be booted. The order of sections in the boot loader\n" +"menu can be changed using the <B>Up</B> and <B>Down</B> buttons.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. help 4/4 +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:93 +msgid "" +"<P>Press <B>Add</B> to create a new boot loader section\n" +"or <B>Delete</B> to delete the selected section.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for the custom boot manager installation, 1 of 7 +#. %1 = name of boot loader (e.g. "LILO") +#. this should be per architecture +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:107 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>Boot Loader Location</b></big><br>\n" +"The boot manager (%1) can be installed in the following ways:</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. custom bootloader help text, 2 of 7 +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:116 +msgid "" +"<p>- In the <b>Master Boot Record</b> (MBR).\n" +"This is not recommended if there is another operating system installed\n" +"on the computer.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. custom bootloader help text, 3 of 7 +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:126 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"- In the <b>Boot Sector</b> of the <tt>/boot</tt> or <tt>/</tt> (root) \n" +"partition. This is the recommended option whenever there is a suitable\n" +"partition. Either set <b>Activate Boot Loader Partition</b> and\n" +"<b>Replace MBR with Generic Code</b> in <b>Boot Loader Installation Details</b>\n" +"to update the master boot record\n" +"if it is needed or configure your other boot manager\n" +"to start &product;.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. custom bootloader help text, 5 of 7 +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:141 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"- In some <b>Other</b> partition. Consider your system's restrictions\n" +"when selecting this option.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. optional part, only inserted on x86 architectures. 6 of 7 +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:151 +msgid "" +"<p>For example, most PCs have a BIOS\n" +"limit that restricts booting to\n" +"hard disk cylinders smaller than 1024. Depending on the boot manager used,\n" +"you may or may not be able to boot from a logical partition.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. custom bootloader help text, 7 of 7 +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:163 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Enter the device name of the partition (for example, <tt>/dev/hda3</tt> or\n" +"<tt>/dev/sdb</tt>) in the input field.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/1 +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:176 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Boot Loader Installation Details</b><br>\n" +"To adjust advanced boot loader installation options (such as the device\n" +"mapping), click <b>Boot Loader Installation Details</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/1 +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:187 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Boot Loader Type</b><br>\n" +"To select whether to install a boot loader and which bootloader to install,\n" +"use <b>Boot Loader</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/1 +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:198 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Boot Loader Options</b><br>\n" +"To adjust options of the boot loader, such as the time-out, click\n" +"<b>Boot Loader Options</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/1 +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:209 +msgid "" +"<P><B>Expert Manual Configuration</B><BR>\n" +"Here, manually edit the boot loader configuration.</P>\n" +"<P>Note: The final configuration file may have different indenting.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/1 +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:220 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Section Name</b><br>\n" +"Use <b>Section Name</b> to specify the boot loader section name. The section\n" +"name must be unique.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/5 +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:231 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>Type of the New Section</b></big><br>\n" +"Select the type of the new section to create.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/5 +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:235 +msgid "" +"<p>Select <b>Clone Selected Section</b> to clone the currently selected\n" +"section. Then modify the options that should differ from the\n" +"selected section.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 3/5 +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:241 +msgid "" +"<p>Select <b>Image Section</b> to add a new Linux kernel or other image\n" +"to load and start.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 4/5 +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:245 +msgid "" +"<p>Select <b>Xen Section</b> to add a new Linux kernel or other image,\n" +"but to start it in a Xen environment.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 5/5 +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:249 +msgid "" +"<p>Select <b>Other System (Chainloader)</b> to add a section that \n" +"loads and starts a boot sector of a partition of the disk. This is used for\n" +"booting other operating systems.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:254 +msgid "" +"<p>Select <b>Menu Section</b> to add a section that \n" +"loads configuration file (the list of boot sections) from a partition of the disk. This is used for\n" +"booting other operating systems.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. part of summary, %1 is a list of hard disks device names +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/lilolike.rb:108 +msgid "Order of Hard Disks: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. summary string +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/misc.rb:51 +msgid "Do not install any boot loader" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/misc.rb:54 +msgid "Do Not Install Any Boot Loader" +msgstr "" + +#. summary string +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/misc.rb:60 +msgid "Install the default boot loader" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/misc.rb:63 +msgid "Install Default Boot Loader" +msgstr "" + +#. summary string +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/misc.rb:68 +msgid "Boot loader" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/misc.rb:71 +msgid "Boot Loader" +msgstr "" + +#. popup message +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/popups.rb:35 +msgid "" +"This function is not available if the boot\n" +"loader is not specified." +msgstr "" + +#. yes-no popup question +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/popups.rb:48 +msgid "" +"Really leave the boot loader configuration without saving?\n" +"All changes will be lost.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/popups.rb:57 +msgid "The password must not be empty." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/popups.rb:66 +msgid "" +"'Password' and 'Retype password'\n" +"do not match. Retype the password." +msgstr "" + +#. Confirmation box with yes-no popup. %1 is reason why we need to set +#. default location. It is translated on caller side and it is complete +#. sentence. +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/popups.rb:82 +msgid "%1Set default boot loader location?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/popups.rb:90 +msgid "" +"The name selected is already used.\n" +"Use a different one.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. yes-no popup +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/popups.rb:101 +msgid "" +"An error occurred during boot loader\n" +"installation. Retry boot loader configuration?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. warning popup. %1 is device name, %2 is date/time in form of +#. 'date' command output +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/popups.rb:125 +msgid "" +"Warning!\n" +"\n" +"Current MBR of %1 will now be rewritten with MBR\n" +"saved at %2.\n" +"\n" +"Only the booting code in the MBR will be rewritten.\n" +"The partition table remains unchanged.\n" +"\n" +"Continue?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. PushButton +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/popups.rb:147 +msgid "&Yes, Rewrite" +msgstr "" + +#. error report +#: src/include/bootloader/routines/wizards.rb:36 +msgid "Because of the partitioning, the boot loader cannot be installed properly." +msgstr "" + +#. Represents dialog for modification of device map +#: src/lib/bootloader/device_map_dialog.rb:53 +msgid "Device map must contain at least one device" +msgstr "" + +#. we just go back to original dialog +#: src/lib/bootloader/device_map_dialog.rb:96 +msgid "Disk order settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/bootloader/device_map_dialog.rb:101 +msgid "D&isks" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry header +#: src/lib/bootloader/device_map_dialog.rb:146 +msgid "&Device" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: %s stands for partition +#: src/lib/bootloader/disk_change_detector.rb:47 +msgid "Selected custom bootloader partition %s is not available any more." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS the %{path} is path where bootloader stage1 is selected to install and +#. the %{device} is device where it should be, but isn't +#: src/lib/bootloader/disk_change_detector.rb:61 +msgid "Selected bootloader location %{path} is not on %{device} any more." +msgstr "" + +#. Finish client for bootloader configuration +#: src/lib/bootloader/finish_client.rb:28 +msgid "Saving bootloader configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: reboot message +#. %1 is replaced with additional message from reIPL +#: src/lib/bootloader/finish_client.rb:145 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Your system will now shut down.%1\n" +"For details, read the related chapter \n" +"in the documentation. \n" +msgstr "" + +#. Final message after all packages from CD1 are installed +#. and we're ready to start (boot into) the installed system +#. Message that will be displayed along with information +#. how the boot loader was installed +#: src/lib/bootloader/finish_client.rb:158 +msgid "The system will reboot now..." +msgstr "" + +#. proposal part - bootloader label +#: src/lib/bootloader/proposal_client.rb:94 +msgid "Booting" +msgstr "" + +#. menubutton entry +#: src/lib/bootloader/proposal_client.rb:96 +msgid "&Booting" +msgstr "" + +#. warning text in the summary richtext +#: src/lib/bootloader/proposal_client.rb:174 +msgid "No boot loader is selected for installation. Your system might not be bootable." +msgstr "" + +#. error in the proposal +#: src/lib/bootloader/proposal_client.rb:183 +msgid "Because of the partitioning, the bootloader cannot be installed properly" +msgstr "" + +#. FATE#303643 Enable one-click changes in bootloader proposal +#. +#: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:168 +msgid "Install bootcode into MBR (do not install</a>)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:172 +msgid "Do not install bootcode into MBR (install</a>)" +msgstr "" + +#. check for separated boot partition, use root otherwise +#: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:185 +msgid "Install bootcode into /boot partition (do not install</a>)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:189 +msgid "Do not install bootcode into /boot partition (install</a>)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:195 +msgid "Install bootcode into \"/\" partition (do not install</a>)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:199 +msgid "Do not install bootcode into \"/\" partition (install</a>)" +msgstr "" + +#. no location chosen, so warn user that it is problem unless he is sure +#: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:209 +msgid "Warning: No location for bootloader stage1 selected.Unless you know what you are doing please select above location." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: title for list of location proposals +#: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:217 +msgid "Change Location: %s" +msgstr "" + +#. Display bootloader summary +#. @return a list of summary lines +#. Display bootloader summary +#. @return a list of summary lines +#: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:226 src/modules/BootGRUB2EFI.rb:100 +msgid "Boot Loader Type: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: extended is here for extended partition. Keep translation short. +#: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:237 +msgid " (extended)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: MBR is acronym for Master Boot Record, if nothing locally specific +#. is used in your language, then keep it as it is. +#: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:245 +msgid " (MBR)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:252 +msgid "Status Location: %1" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/BootGRUB2EFI.rb:108 +msgid "Enable Secure Boot: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. Check that bootloader is known and supported +#: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:65 +msgid "Unknown bootloader: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. grub2 is sooo cool... +#: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:99 +msgid "Unsupported combination of hardware platform %1 and bootloader %2" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: description of technical problem. Do not translate technical terms unless native language have well known translation. +#: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:139 +msgid "Boot from MBR does not work together with btrfs filesystem and GPT disk label without bios_grub partition.To fix this issue, create bios_grub partition or use any ext filesystem for boot partition or do not install stage 1 to MBR." +msgstr "" + +#. check if boot device is on raid0 +#: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:167 +msgid "The boot device is on raid type: %1. System will not boot." +msgstr "" + +#. bnc#501043 added check for valid configuration +#: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:187 +msgid "The boot device is on software RAID1. Select other bootloader location, e.g. Master Boot Record" +msgstr "" + +#. if partitioning worked before upgrade, it will keep working (bnc#886604) +#: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:239 +msgid "Missing ext partition for booting. Cannot install boot code." +msgstr "" + +#. activate set or there is already activate flag +#: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:248 +msgid "Activate flag is not set by installer. If it is not set at all, some BIOSes could refuse to boot." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:255 +msgid "The installer will not modify the MBR of the disk. Unless it already contains boot code, the BIOS won't be able to boot disk." +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage, text in dialog (short, infinitiv) +#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:146 +msgid "Check boot loader" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage, text in dialog (short, infinitiv) +#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:148 +msgid "Read partitioning" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage, text in dialog (short, infinitiv) +#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:150 +msgid "Load boot loader settings" +msgstr "" + +#. progress step, text in dialog (short) +#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:154 +msgid "Checking boot loader..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step, text in dialog (short) +#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:156 +msgid "Reading partitioning..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step, text in dialog (short) +#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:158 +msgid "Loading boot loader settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. dialog header +#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:162 +msgid "Initializing Boot Loader Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage, text in dialog (short) +#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:281 +msgid "Create initrd" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage, text in dialog (short) +#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:283 +msgid "Save boot loader configuration files" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage, text in dialog (short) +#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:285 +msgid "Install boot loader" +msgstr "" + +#. progress step, text in dialog (short) +#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:289 +msgid "Creating initrd..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step, text in dialog (short) +#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:291 +msgid "Saving boot loader configuration files..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step, text in dialog (short) +#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:293 +msgid "Installing boot loader..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress line +#: src/modules/Bootloader.rb:299 +msgid "Saving Boot Loader Configuration" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/ca-management.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/ca-management.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/ca-management.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,2992 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. Command line definition +#: src/clients/ca_mgm.rb:48 +msgid "Managing CA and certificates" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm.rb:51 +msgid "Create a root CA" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm.rb:52 +msgid "Create a certificate of a CA" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm.rb:53 +msgid "Create a CRL of a CA" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm.rb:54 +msgid "Export a CA to a file" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm.rb:56 +msgid "Export a certificate to a file" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm.rb:58 +msgid "Export a CRL to a file" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm.rb:65 +msgid "E-mail address" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm.rb:70 +msgid "Organizational unit" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm.rb:73 src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:870 +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:456 +#: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:321 +msgid "Organization" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm.rb:74 src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:884 +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:458 +#: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:323 +msgid "Locality" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm.rb:75 src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:889 +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:459 +#: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:324 +msgid "State" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm.rb:76 src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:865 +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:460 +#: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:325 +msgid "Country" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm.rb:77 +msgid "Valid days" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm.rb:79 +msgid "Key length" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm.rb:84 +msgid "Password (Security: This should be given by an environment variable)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm.rb:93 +msgid "CA password (Security: This should be given by an environment variable)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm.rb:100 +msgid "P12 password (Security: This should be given by an environment variable)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm.rb:112 +msgid "Path of the exported CA, certificate, or CRL" +msgstr "" + +#. Autoyast configuration of ca-management +#. For use with autoinstallation. +#. @return sequence result +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:170 +msgid "CA Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:172 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"YaST generates a default CA and certificate automatically. This CA and certificate\n" +"is used for communicating with the Apache server.\n" +"Here, change the settings of this CA and certificate or import a CA and certificate from a file.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Initialization dialog contents +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:193 +msgid "Import Common CA and Certificate" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:209 +msgid "&Path of Certificate" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:235 src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:362 +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:301 src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:466 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:573 +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:277 +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1211 +msgid "&Password:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:245 src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:372 +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:302 src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:476 +msgid "Co&nfirm Password" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:256 +msgid "Generate Common CA and Certificate" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:272 src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:401 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:211 +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1585 +msgid "&CA Name:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:285 src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:408 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:216 +msgid "&Common Name:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:299 src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:482 +msgid "E-Mail" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:309 src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:428 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:262 +msgid "C&ountry:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:319 src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:438 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:227 +msgid "O&rganization:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:328 src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:447 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:236 +msgid "Or&ganizational Unit:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:342 src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:455 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:247 +msgid "Loca&lity:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:351 src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:458 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:250 +msgid "&State:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:381 +msgid "Take Local Server Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:394 src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:418 +msgid "&Server Name:" +msgstr "" + +#. Get the user input. +#. +#. Get the user input. +#. +#. checking password +#. p12Passwd is required is keyPasswd has been given +#. export to file +#. export to file +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:478 src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:536 +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:320 src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:536 +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:216 src/include/ca-management/util.rb:565 +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:777 +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1121 +msgid "New passwords do not match." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:482 src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:540 +#: src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:540 +msgid "Password length should be greater than three characters." +msgstr "" + +#. finding entry in list +#. Error popup +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:495 src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:398 +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1665 +msgid "CA name required." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:506 src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:403 +msgid "Common name required." +msgstr "" + +#. CaMgm::prop_selection = `def; +#. Checking if there is an EMAIL entry without using the +#. "add" button +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:514 src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:284 +#: src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:589 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:347 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:428 +msgid "Invalid e-mail format." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:527 +msgid "Server name required." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:561 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5949 +msgid "Cannot read the certificate." +msgstr "" + +#. Configuration summary text for autoyast +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:831 +msgid "Import Certificate from File" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:837 +msgid "Server Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:839 +msgid "[local server name]" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:846 +msgid "CA Name" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: table headers +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:851 src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:454 +#: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:319 +msgid "Common Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:857 src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:863 +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:868 src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:873 +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:881 src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:887 +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:892 src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:902 +msgid "[not set]" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:860 +msgid "Email" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:875 src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:457 +#: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:322 +msgid "Organizational Unit" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:895 +msgid "Password" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:904 +msgid "[set]" +msgstr "" + +#. Write all ca-management settings +#. @return true on success +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:916 +msgid "Generating Common Server Certificate" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1/2 +#. Progress stage 1/2 +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:930 src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:936 +msgid "Read server information" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 2/2 +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:932 +msgid "Create the default CA and server certificate" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 2/2 +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:938 +msgid "Creating the default CA and server certificate..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress finished +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:940 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#. Error message +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:1064 +msgid "Cannot create certificates." +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. *************************************************************************** +#. +#. Copyright (c) 2004 - 2012 Novell, Inc. +#. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or +#. modify it under the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as +#. published by the Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +#. but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +#. MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +#. GNU General Public License for more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +#. along with this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, +#. you may find current contact information at www.novell.com +#. +#. *************************************************************************** +#. File: +#. clients/ca_mgm_proposal.ycp +#. +#. Package: +#. Configuration of CA Management +#. +#. Summary: +#. Proposal function dispatcher. +#. +#. Authors: +#. Stefan Schubert +#. +#. $Id$ +#. +#. Proposal function dispatcher for CA Management +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:107 +msgid "Cannot evaluate the name of the local machine. Change the values of Server Name and E-Mail." +msgstr "" + +#. new handling of force reset because of (#238754) +#. NO FORCE RESET +#. richtext label +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:159 src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:213 +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:440 src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:466 +msgid "CA Management" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:160 src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:214 +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:441 +msgid "Settings have already been written." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:161 src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:215 +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:442 +msgid "Delete the old settings?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:296 src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:338 +msgid "Unable to retrieve the system root password. Set a CA password to continue." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:325 +msgid "" +"The password is too short to use for the certificates. \n" +"Enter a valid password for the certificates or disable certificate creation.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:351 +msgid "Current default CA and certificate." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:356 src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:364 +msgid "Creating default CA and certificate." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:357 +msgid "With higher security requirements, you should change the password." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:369 +msgid "[manually set]" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:370 +msgid "[root password]" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:390 +#: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:487 +#: src/include/ca-management/dialog-ca.rb:158 +msgid "CA Name: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:391 +msgid "Common Name: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:392 +msgid "Server Name: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:393 +msgid "Country: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:394 +msgid "Password: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:395 +msgid "E-Mail: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:396 +msgid "Alternative Names: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:406 +msgid "" +"The root password is too short for use as the password for the certificates.\n" +" Enter a valid password for the certificates or disable certificate creation.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:413 +msgid "Not creating a CA and certificate." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:415 +msgid "Importing a CA and certificate from file" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:427 +msgid "<p>Is the default hostname <b>linux</b> really unique? The certificate is only valid if the hostname is correct.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. menu title +#: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:468 +msgid "&CA Management" +msgstr "" + +#. ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +#. MAIN module +#. ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +#: src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:61 +msgid "Managing CAs and Certificates" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:64 +msgid "Selection" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:72 +msgid "Create &Default CA and Certificate" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:81 +msgid "Edit Default &Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:89 +msgid "Do &Not Create CA and Certificate" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:96 +msgid "Import CA and Certificate from D&isk" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:103 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"In this frame, select the desired installation method for <b>CAs</b> and <b>certificates</b>\n" +"while completing the installation.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:112 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"You also have the possibility of creating the default CA and certificate in the installed system \n" +"if you do not want to create or import it now.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Creates Country items +#. @return a list country items formated for a UI table +#. saved default settings +#. push button label +#: src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:209 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_callbacks.rb:143 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_callbacks.rb:172 +msgid "&Name:" +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#: src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:225 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:164 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:215 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:258 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:330 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:425 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:446 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:489 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:514 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:610 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:628 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:653 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:680 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:705 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:730 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:755 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:780 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:805 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:830 +msgid "critical" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: table headers +#. To translators: table headers +#. To translators: table headers +#. To translators: table headers +#: src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:238 +#: src/include/ca-management/crlDefault.rb:218 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:278 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:535 +msgid "Kind" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:239 +#: src/include/ca-management/crlDefault.rb:219 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:279 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:536 +msgid "Name" +msgstr "" + +#. restoring table +#. restoring table +#. restoring table +#. restoring table +#: src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:302 src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:356 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_callbacks.rb:514 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_callbacks.rb:557 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_callbacks.rb:949 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_callbacks.rb:991 +msgid "No item has been selected." +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: ContinueCancel Popup headline +#. Handle events in a tab of a dialog +#. To translators: ContinueCancel Popup headline +#. To translators: ContinueCancel Popup headline +#. we need to fake a certificate name +#: src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:364 +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:585 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_callbacks.rb:523 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_callbacks.rb:958 +#: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:429 +#: src/include/ca-management/startup.rb:107 +msgid "Delete" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: ContinueCancel Popup +#. To translators: ContinueCancel Popup +#. To translators: ContinueCancel Popup +#: src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:366 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_callbacks.rb:525 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_callbacks.rb:960 +msgid "Really delete this entry?" +msgstr "" + +#. editDefaultEntries() - changing Entries +#. @return `next,`back,`abort +#: src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:388 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"YaST generates a <b>default CA and certificate</b> automatically. This CA and certificate\n" +"is used for communicating with the <b>Apache server</b>.\n" +"Here, change these <b>default settings</b>.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:484 +msgid "&Edit Alternative Names" +msgstr "" + +#. Screen title for the first interactive dialog +#: src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:490 +#: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:96 +msgid "Edit Default Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. The main () +#. To translators: dialog label +#. To translators: ContinueCancel Popup headline +#: src/clients/common_cert.rb:56 src/clients/common_cert.rb:175 +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1313 +msgid "Common Server Certificate" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/8 +#: src/clients/common_cert.rb:77 +msgid "<p>A Server Certificate is used by services which provide SSL/TLS encrypted network connections.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/8 +#: src/clients/common_cert.rb:84 +msgid "<p>The purpose of the <b>Common Server Certificate</b> is, to provide a certificate for several services running on this host. " +msgstr "" + +#. help text 3/8 +#: src/clients/common_cert.rb:92 +msgid "Some YaST modules provide the capability to use this certificate during configuration of such a service.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 4/8 +#: src/clients/common_cert.rb:100 +msgid "<p>With the <b>Import/Replace</b> button you can add a new server certificate or replace the current one.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 5/8 +#: src/clients/common_cert.rb:108 +msgid "<p>You can remove the Certificates by clicking the <b>Remove</b> button. But make sure, that it is not used anymore by other services.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 6/8 +#: src/clients/common_cert.rb:116 +msgid "<p>Certificates can be written to a file using <b>Export to File</b> in section <b>Certificate</b> in the <b>CA Management</b> module.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 7/8 +#: src/clients/common_cert.rb:124 +msgid "<p>Certificates to import from disk must have been written in <b>PKCS12 format with CA chain</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 8/8 +#: src/clients/common_cert.rb:132 +msgid "<p>For more information, please read the manual.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/clients/common_cert.rb:154 +msgid "" +"<pre>Common Server Certificate not found.\n" +"You can import a certificate from disk</pre>" +msgstr "" + +#. popup window header +#. popup window header +#. popup window header +#. popup window header +#: src/clients/common_cert.rb:160 src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:141 +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:264 +#: src/include/ca-management/crl.rb:166 +#: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:238 +msgid "Description" +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#: src/clients/common_cert.rb:167 +msgid "&Remove" +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#: src/clients/common_cert.rb:169 +msgid "&Import/Replace" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: warning popup yes/no question (1/3) +#: src/clients/common_cert.rb:209 +msgid "The certificate is not yet expired.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: warning popup yes/no question (2/3) +#: src/clients/common_cert.rb:211 +msgid "" +"Please make sure, that no service use this certificate anymore.\n" +"\n" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: warning popup yes/no question (3/3) +#: src/clients/common_cert.rb:215 +msgid "Are you sure, that you want to remove the certificate?" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/2 +#: src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:66 +msgid "<p>Here, see the most important values of the CA.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/2 +#: src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:70 +msgid "<p>Special information about the current CA is provided by <b>Certificates</b>, <b>CRL</b>, and <b>Advanced</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. getDescriptionCA - description of a CA +#. @param CA name +#. @return a string with the CA description +#: src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:164 +msgid "<p><b> Description for %1 </b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:177 +msgid "" +"\n" +"CA not found" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:183 +msgid "<p><b>Issued For:</b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length +#. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length +#: src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:187 src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:224 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Common Name: " +msgstr "" + +#. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length +#. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length +#: src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:192 src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:229 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Organization: " +msgstr "" + +#. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length +#. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length +#: src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:197 src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:234 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Location: " +msgstr "" + +#. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length +#. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length +#: src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:202 src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:239 +msgid "" +"\n" +"State: " +msgstr "" + +#. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length +#. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length +#: src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:207 src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:244 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Country: " +msgstr "" + +#. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length +#. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length +#: src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:212 src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:249 +msgid "" +"\n" +"EMAIL: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:220 +msgid "<p><b>Issued By:</b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:256 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Valid from: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:260 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Valid to: " +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: pushbutton label +#: src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:283 +msgid "&Advanced..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:285 +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:476 +#: src/include/ca-management/crl.rb:261 +#: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:350 +msgid "&View" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:286 +msgid "&Change CA Password" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:287 +msgid "C&reate SubCA" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:288 +msgid "Export to &File" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:289 +msgid "Export to &LDAP" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:290 +msgid "&Edit Default" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/4 +#: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:51 +msgid "<p>When creating a new subCA or certificate, the system suggests some default values.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/4 +#: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:57 +msgid "<p>With this workflow, change these default settings.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 3/4 +#. help text 3/3 +#: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:62 +#: src/include/ca-management/crlDefault.rb:153 +msgid "<p>However, the modified settings will be used for <b>new</B> entries only.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 4/4 +#: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:69 +msgid "<p>You can edit the default settings for <b>subCAs</b>, <b>client certificates</b>, and <b>server certificates</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:79 +msgid "Default Settings for:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:83 +msgid "&Sub CA" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:85 +msgid "&Client Certificate" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:88 +msgid "S&erver Certificate" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/2 +#: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:136 +msgid "<p>This frame gives an overview of all default settings before they are saved.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/2 +#: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:142 +msgid "<p>Click <b>Save</b> to finish the input.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:145 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:731 +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:786 +msgid "<p><b>Summary</b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:150 +#: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:169 +#: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:339 +#: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:351 +#: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:454 +#: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:505 +#: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:514 +#: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:523 +#: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:532 +#: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:544 +#: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:553 +#: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:562 +#: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:571 +#: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:580 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:824 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:844 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:1023 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:1035 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:1138 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:1199 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:1208 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:1217 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:1226 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:1238 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:1247 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:1256 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:1265 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:1274 +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:827 +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:838 +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:941 +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:950 +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:959 +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:1048 +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:1057 +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:1069 +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:1196 +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:1205 +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:1214 +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:1223 +msgid " (critical)\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:156 +msgid "Path Length: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:177 +#: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:462 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:861 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:1147 +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:966 +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:1006 +msgid "(critical) " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:182 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:866 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:266 +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:1011 +msgid "Copy Subject Alt Name from CA" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:224 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:908 +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:1082 +msgid "(critical)\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:336 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:1020 +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:824 +msgid "nsComment: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:350 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:1034 +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:837 +msgid "nsCertType: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:467 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:1152 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:522 +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:971 +msgid "Copy Standard E-Mail Address" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: dialog label +#: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:591 +msgid "Save Settings (step 3/3)" +msgstr "" + +#. creating new certificate +#: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:609 +msgid "Default has been saved." +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/6 +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:46 +msgid "<p>First, see a list view with all available certificates from this CA. The columns are the DN of the certificates including the e-mail address and the state of the certificate (such as valid or revoked).</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/6 +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:52 +msgid "<p>Select one of the certificates and execute some actions.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 3/6 +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:57 +msgid "<p><b>View</b> opens a window with a text representation of the complete certificate.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 4/6 +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:64 +msgid "<p>Furthermore, you can <b>Revoke</b>, <b>Delete</b>, or <b>Export</b> a certificate.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 5/6 +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:71 +msgid "<p>With <b>Add</b>, generate a new server or client certificate.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 6/6 +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:78 +msgid "<p>In the area below, see the most important values of the selected certificate.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. popup window header +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:142 +msgid "Revoke Certificate" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:145 +msgid "You are only revoking the certificate. No new CRL will be created." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:150 +msgid "Reasons" +msgstr "" + +#. getCertDescription - description of a certificate +#. @param map of description +#. @return a string with the certification description +#. getRequestDescription - description of a request +#. @param map of description, onlySubject +#. @return a string with the request description +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:288 +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:55 +msgid "<p><b>Description</b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:291 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Certificate not found" +msgstr "" + +#. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length +#. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:302 +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:65 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Common Name: " +msgstr "" + +#. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length +#. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:307 +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:80 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Organization: " +msgstr "" + +#. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length +#. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:312 +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:85 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Location: " +msgstr "" + +#. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length +#. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:317 +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:90 +msgid "" +"\n" +"State: " +msgstr "" + +#. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length +#. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:322 +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:95 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Country: " +msgstr "" + +#. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length +#. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:327 +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:100 +msgid "" +"\n" +"EMAIL: " +msgstr "" + +#. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length +#. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:333 +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:107 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Is CA: " +msgstr "" + +#. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length +#. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:338 +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:112 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Key Size: " +msgstr "" + +#. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:343 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Serialnumber: " +msgstr "" + +#. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length +#. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:348 +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:117 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Version: " +msgstr "" + +#. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:353 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Valid from: " +msgstr "" + +#. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:358 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Valid to: " +msgstr "" + +#. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length +#. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:363 +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:122 +msgid "" +"\n" +"algo. of pub. Key : " +msgstr "" + +#. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length +#. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:368 +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:127 +msgid "" +"\n" +"algo. of signature: " +msgstr "" + +#. Certificate status displayed in a table (Valid, Revoked, Expired) +#. Initialize the tab of the dialog +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:403 +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:532 +msgid "Valid" +msgstr "" + +#. Certificate status displayed in a table (Valid, Revoked, Expired) +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:406 +msgid "Revoked" +msgstr "" + +#. Certificate status displayed in a table (Valid, Revoked, Expired) +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:410 +msgid "Expired" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: table headers +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:453 +msgid "Status" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:455 +#: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:320 +msgid "E-Mail Address" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:470 +#: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:338 +msgid "Add" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:472 +msgid "Add Server Certificate" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:473 +msgid "Add Client Certificate" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:477 +#: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:351 +msgid "&Change Password" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:478 +msgid "&Revoke" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:479 +#: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:361 +msgid "&Delete" +msgstr "" + +#. Fate (#2613) +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:483 +#: src/include/ca-management/crl.rb:265 +msgid "Export" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:485 +#: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:362 +msgid "Export to File" +msgstr "" + +#. popup window header +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:486 +#: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:507 +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:494 +msgid "Export to LDAP" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:487 +msgid "Export as Common Server Certificate" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:586 +msgid "Delete current certificate?" +msgstr "" + +#. Create a certificate via command line +#. @param option map +#. @return success +#: src/include/ca-management/commandline.rb:106 +msgid "Wrong kind of certificate." +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/4 +#: src/include/ca-management/crl.rb:55 +msgid "<p>Here, see the most important values of the CRL.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/4 +#: src/include/ca-management/crl.rb:59 +msgid "<p>With <b>Generate CRL</b>, a new CRL will be generated.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 3/4 +#: src/include/ca-management/crl.rb:64 +msgid "<p><b>View</b> shows a complete description.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 4/4 +#: src/include/ca-management/crl.rb:69 +msgid "<p>You can <b>Export</b> the CRL to a file or LDAP Directory.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. popup window header +#: src/include/ca-management/crl.rb:95 +msgid "Generate New CRL" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/crl.rb:99 +msgid "&Valid to (days):" +msgstr "" + +#. getDescription - CRL description +#. @param CA name +#. @return a string with the CRL description +#: src/include/ca-management/crl.rb:210 +msgid "<p><b>Certificate Revocation List (CRL):</b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/crl.rb:225 +msgid "" +"\n" +"\n" +"Last Update: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/crl.rb:229 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Next Update: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/crl.rb:234 +msgid "" +"\n" +"\n" +"Revoked Certificates: " +msgstr "" + +#. Dialog Tab - CRL - +#. @return [Yast::Term] for the CRL of a selected CA +#: src/include/ca-management/crl.rb:260 +msgid "&Generate CRL" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/crl.rb:262 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_advanced.rb:129 +msgid "&Default" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/3 +#: src/include/ca-management/crlDefault.rb:142 +msgid "<p>When creating a new CRL, the system suggests some default values.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/3 +#: src/include/ca-management/crlDefault.rb:148 +msgid "<p>With this frame, change these default settings.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/crlDefault.rb:164 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:602 +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:724 +msgid "&Valid Period (days):" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/crlDefault.rb:179 +msgid "&Critical" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/crlDefault.rb:200 +msgid "C&ritical" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/crlDefault.rb:207 +msgid "C&opy Subject Alternative Name from CA" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/crlDefault.rb:254 +msgid "Default CRL Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: window caption +#: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:108 +msgid "Security Information" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: long help text - security information +#: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:111 +msgid "Warning!<br>Activating the automatic creation and export of a CRL will write the CA password to a configuration file on disk. The password will be stored there in plain text as it is needed to create a CRL. The file will only be readable for the root user." +msgstr "" + +#. Editing CRL defaults of a selected CA +#. @param selected CA +#: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:372 +#: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:522 +msgid "Export CRL" +msgstr "" + +#. this default can only be set inside this function +#: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:381 +msgid "<p>Export the CRL of this CA once by selecting <b>Export once</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:384 +msgid "<p>To set up a repeated recreation of the CRL, select <b>Repeated recreation and export</b>. In this case, set the interval for the recreation in <b>Periodic interval</b>. If you set the interval to 24 hours, you can additionally select the hour for the export. Make sure you read and understand the <b>Security Information</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:387 +msgid "<p>You can activate an export of the CRL to a local file or to an LDAP server or both. Set up the respective parameters in <b>Export to local file</b> and <b>Export to LDAP</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:401 +msgid "Export once" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:407 +msgid "Repeated recreation and export" +msgstr "" + +#. fix space issue (bnc#446137) +#: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:419 +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:496 +msgid "&Host Name:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:420 +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:497 +msgid "&Port:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:421 +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:498 +msgid "&DN:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:426 +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:499 +msgid "&Bind DN:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:427 +msgid "Pass&word" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:435 +msgid "Save &as" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:442 +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:628 src/include/ca-management/util.rb:853 +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:965 +msgid "Export Format" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:443 +msgid "PEM Format" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:444 +msgid "DER Format" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:453 +msgid "Periodic interval" +msgstr "" + +#. `HSquash( `IntField( `id(`interval_days), "&days", 0, 100, 30 )), +#. Translators: this is used to express a setting of "every XX hour(s)" +#: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:457 +msgid "every" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: this is used to express a setting of "every XX hour(s)" +#: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:463 +msgid "&hour(s)" +msgstr "" + +#. (bnc#446137) +#. Translators: in case "every XX hour(s)" is set to 24, the user can set "at XX o'clock" +#: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:472 +msgid "at" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: in case "every XX hour(s)" is set to 24, the user can set "at XX o'clock" +#: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:474 +msgid "&o'clock" +msgstr "" + +#. (bnc#446137) +#: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:479 +msgid "&Security Information" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:497 +msgid "Export to file" +msgstr "" + +#. gray out or ungray UI elements +#. Popup::Error(_("Currently not supported.")); +#: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:543 +#: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:455 +msgid "Save as" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:647 +msgid "Export to file failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:648 +#: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:673 +msgid "Do you want to retry?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:653 +#: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:468 +msgid "Saved to file successfully." +msgstr "" + +#. Checking error +#: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:669 +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:603 +msgid "Saved to LDAP successfully." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:672 +msgid "Export to LDAP failed." +msgstr "" + +#. When no dialog defined for this tab (software error) +#: src/include/ca-management/dialog-ca.rb:86 +msgid "Software error - Unknown Tab" +msgstr "" + +#. Dialog Caption - Expert Settings - Zone Editor +#: src/include/ca-management/dialog-ca.rb:141 +msgid "Certificate Authority (CA)" +msgstr "" + +#. Menu Item - CA - Tab +#: src/include/ca-management/dialog-ca.rb:147 +msgid "&Description" +msgstr "" + +#. Menu Item - CA - Tab +#: src/include/ca-management/dialog-ca.rb:149 +msgid "C&ertificates" +msgstr "" + +#. Menu Item - CA - Tab +#: src/include/ca-management/dialog-ca.rb:151 +msgid "CR&L" +msgstr "" + +#. Menu Item - CA - Tab +#: src/include/ca-management/dialog-ca.rb:153 +msgid "&Requests" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/7 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:89 +msgid "<p>To generate a new CA, some entries are needed.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:91 +msgid "<p>To generate a new certificate, some entries are needed.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:96 +msgid "<p>To generate a new request, some entries are needed.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/7 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:106 +msgid "<p>It depends on the policy defined in the configuration file.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 4/7 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:111 +msgid "<p>Only US ASCII characters are allowed.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 5/7 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:117 +msgid "<p><b>CA Name</b> is the name of a CA certificate. Use only the characters, \"a-z\", \"A-Z\", \"-\", and \"_\".</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:123 +msgid "<p><b>Common Name</b> is the name of the CA.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:129 +msgid "<p><b>Common Name</b> is the name of the user for whom to create the certificate.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:136 +msgid "<p><b>Common Name</b> is the fully qualified domain name of the server.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 6/7 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:145 +msgid "<p><b>E-Mail Addresses</b> are valid e-mail addresses of the user or server administrator.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 7/7 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:152 +msgid "<p><b>Organization</b>, <b>Organizational Unit</b>, <b>Locality</b>, and <b>State</b> are often optional.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: pushbutton label +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:173 +msgid "D&efault" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: table headers +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:194 +msgid "E-Mail Addresses" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:195 +msgid "default" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: dialog label +#. To translators: dialog label +#. To translators: dialog label +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:272 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:616 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:1285 +msgid "Create New " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:272 +msgid " (step 1/3)" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/4 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:469 +msgid "<p>The private key of the CA needs a <B>Password</B> with a minimum length of five characters. For verification reasons, reenter it in the next field.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/4 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:476 +msgid "<p>Each CA has its own <b>Key Length</b>. Some applications that use certificates need special key lengths.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 3/4 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:484 +msgid "<p>The CA is valid for only specific period (<b>Valid Period</b>). Enter the time frame in days.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 4/4 +#. help text 4/4 +#. help text 3/3 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:492 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:521 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:543 +msgid "<p><b>Advanced Options</b> are very special options. If you change these options, SUSE cannot guarantee that the generated certificate will work correctly.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/4 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:498 +msgid "<p>The private key of the certificate needs a <B>Password</B> with a minimum length of five characters. For verification reasons, reenter it in the next field.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/4 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:505 +msgid "<p>Each certificate has its own <b>Key Length</b>. Some applications that use certificates need special key lengths.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 3/4 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:513 +msgid "<p>The certificate is valid for only specific period (<b>Valid Period</b>). Enter the time frame in days.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/3 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:528 +msgid "<p>The private key of the request needs a <B>Password</B> with a minimum length of five characters. For verification reasons, reenter it in the next field.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/3 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:535 +msgid "<p>Each request has its own <b>Key Length</b>. Some applications that use certificates need special key lengths.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:561 +msgid "&Use CA Password as Certificate Password" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:582 +msgid "V&erify Password:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:590 +msgid "&Key Length (bit):" +msgstr "" + +#. tree widget label +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:611 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_advanced.rb:108 +msgid "&Advanced Options" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:616 +msgid " (step 2/3)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:661 +msgid "Passwords are different." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:667 +msgid "Password required." +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/2 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:700 +msgid "<p>This frame gives an overview of all settings for the CA that will be created.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/2 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:706 +msgid "<p>Click <b>Create</b> to generate the CA.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/2 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:710 +msgid "<p>This frame gives an overview of all settings for the certificate that will be created.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/2 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:716 +msgid "<p>Click <b>Create</b> to generate the certificate.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/2 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:721 +msgid "<p>This frame gives an overview of all settings for the request that will be created.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/2 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:727 +msgid "<p>Click <b>Create</b> to generate the request.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:736 +msgid "CA Name: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:743 +msgid "Common Name: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:752 +msgid "Organization: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:761 +msgid "Organizational Unit: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:769 +msgid "E-Mail Addresses: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:793 +msgid "Locality: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:801 +msgid "State: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:807 +msgid "Country: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:812 +msgid "Key Length: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:817 +msgid "Valid Period: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:820 +msgid " days\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:831 +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:814 +msgid "Path Length " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:1285 +msgid " (step 3/3)" +msgstr "" + +#. label widget +#. header label +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_advanced.rb:122 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_advanced.rb:241 +msgid "Current Selection: " +msgstr "" + +#. popup window header +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_advanced.rb:189 +msgid "Help" +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. *************************************************************************** +#. +#. Copyright (c) 2004 - 2012 Novell, Inc. +#. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or +#. modify it under the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as +#. published by the Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +#. but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +#. MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +#. GNU General Public License for more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +#. along with this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, +#. you may find current contact information at www.novell.com +#. +#. *************************************************************************** +#. +#. File: +#. new_cert_item.ycp +#. +#. Module: +#. CA Management +#. +#. Summary: +#. Items definition for advanced setting ( creating +#. new certificate ) +#. +#. Authors: +#. Stefan Schubert +#. +#. $Id$ +#. +#. Creating a new CA/Certificate +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:55 +msgid "<P>This frame shows further attributes and OpenSSL X509v3 extensions that can be set. If you are not familiar with these extensions, refer to the file /usr/share/doc/packages/openssl-doc/openssl.txt (package openssl-doc).</P>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:61 +msgid "<P>Wrong entries can make the certificate unusable.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. items for CA and Certificates +#. items for Requests +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:68 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:121 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:155 +msgid "Advanced Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:92 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:143 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:598 +msgid "Expert Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Creating default CA/Certificate +#. @return [Boolean] ( success ) +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_read_write.rb:1890 +msgid "Creating certificate..." +msgstr "" + +#. Creating server certificate +#. Exporting to common server certificate +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_read_write.rb:1932 +#: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_read_write.rb:2013 +msgid "" +"The default certificate can also be created in\n" +"the CA Management module.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: ContinueCancel Popup headline +#: src/include/ca-management/popup.rb:50 +msgid "Finish" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: ContinueCancel Popup +#: src/include/ca-management/popup.rb:52 +msgid "Really save configuration ?" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: YesNo Popup headline +#: src/include/ca-management/popup.rb:64 +msgid "Exit" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: YesNo Popup +#: src/include/ca-management/popup.rb:66 +msgid "Really exit configuration without saving ?" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup displaying openssl error messages +#. @return [void] +#: src/include/ca-management/popup.rb:88 +msgid "Details" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/6 +#: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:47 +msgid "<p>First, see a list view with all available requests of this CA. The columns are the DN of the request including the e-mail address.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/6 +#: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:53 +msgid "<p>Select one of the requests and execute some actions.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 3/6 +#: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:58 +msgid "<p><b>View</b> opens a window with a text representation of the complete request.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 4/6 +#: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:65 +msgid "<p>You can also <b>Sign</b>, <b>Delete</b>, or <b>Export</b> a request.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 5/6 +#: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:72 +msgid "<p>With <b>Import</b>, read a new request. With <b>Add</b>, generate a new request.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 6/6 +#: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:79 +msgid "<p>In the area below, see the most important values of the selected request.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:326 +msgid "Generate Time" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:335 +msgid "&Import" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:340 +msgid "Add Sub-CA Request" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:341 +msgid "Add Server Request" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:342 +msgid "Add Client Request" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:348 +msgid "&Request" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:354 +msgid "Sign" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:356 +msgid "As Client Certificate" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:357 +msgid "As Server Certificate" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:358 +msgid "As CA Certificate" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:430 +msgid "Delete current request?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:58 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Request not found.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Preformated Text: take care that all translations have the same length +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:74 +msgid "" +"\n" +"generation Time: " +msgstr "" + +#. Reset an accpetation of a RequestExtention +#. @param request extention +#. @return [void] +#. The user has decide that given request extention +#. will be used. --> setting for signation +#. @param request extention +#. @return [void] +#. Filling up reqeust extentions +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:257 +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:581 +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:686 +msgid "Extension \"%1\" not found." +msgstr "" + +#. IS CA ? +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:644 +msgid "This is a CA request. Really sign it as a %1?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:651 +msgid "This is not a CA request. Really sign it as a CA request?" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/3 +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:703 +msgid "<p>This frame shows the signing request.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/3 +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:708 +msgid "<p>The request has special request extensions, which you can accept.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 3/3 +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:715 +msgid "<p>If you reject these extensions, the default values are taken instead.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:731 +msgid "Requested Extensions" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:737 +msgid "Sign Request as a %1 (Step 1/2)" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/2 +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:777 +msgid "<p>This frame gives an overview of all settings for the request that will be signed.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/2 +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:783 +msgid "<p>Click <b>Sign Request</b> to go on.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:801 +msgid " days" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:807 +msgid " (critical)</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:1233 +msgid "&Edit Request" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: dialog label +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:1238 +msgid "Sign Request as a %1 (Step 2/2)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:1244 +msgid "Sign Request" +msgstr "" + +#. signing request +#: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:1257 +msgid "The request has been signed." +msgstr "" + +#. Deleting current CA +#: src/include/ca-management/startup.rb:105 +msgid "Really delete CA %1?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/startup.rb:118 +msgid "Force Delete" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/startup.rb:119 +msgid "This CA is still in use. Delete it?" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/3 +#: src/include/ca-management/startup.rb:145 +msgid "<p>Select one CA and press <b>Enter CA</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/3 +#: src/include/ca-management/startup.rb:149 +msgid "<p><b>Create Root CA</b> generates a new root certificate authority.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 3/3 +#: src/include/ca-management/startup.rb:156 +msgid "<p>For more information about CA Management, please read the manual.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: pushbutton label +#: src/include/ca-management/startup.rb:167 +msgid "&Enter CA" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/startup.rb:171 +msgid "&Delete CA" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: pushbutton label +#: src/include/ca-management/startup.rb:180 +msgid "&Create Root CA" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: pushbutton label +#: src/include/ca-management/startup.rb:187 +msgid "&Import CA" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: tree headers +#: src/include/ca-management/startup.rb:199 +msgid "CA Tree" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: dialog label +#: src/include/ca-management/startup.rb:208 +msgid "CA Selection" +msgstr "" + +#. Change password Dialog +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:173 +msgid "Change Certificate Password" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:174 +msgid "Change CA Password" +msgstr "" + +#. popup window header +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:186 +msgid "&Old Password:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:188 src/include/ca-management/util.rb:380 +msgid "&New Password:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:189 +msgid "&Verify Password:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:220 +msgid "" +"The new password is too short to use it for the certificates.\n" +"Enter a valid password for the certificates.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:245 +msgid "CA Password changed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:247 +msgid "Certificate Password changed." +msgstr "" + +#. popup window header +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:275 +msgid "Enter CA Password" +msgstr "" + +#. Dialog for exporting CA/Certificate/CRL to LDAP +#. +#. @param "CA" "CRL" "CERT" "subjectAltName" +#. @return true ( success ) +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:349 +msgid "LDAP P&assword:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:375 +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1032 +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1388 +msgid "Certificate &Password:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:381 src/include/ca-management/util.rb:697 +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1039 +msgid "&Verify Password" +msgstr "" + +#. popup window header +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:421 +msgid "LDAP Initialization" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:423 +msgid "" +"LDAP must initialize for the CA management.\n" +"Enter the required LDAP password.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:428 +msgid "P&assword:" +msgstr "" + +#. popup window header +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:625 +msgid "Export CA to File" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:636 +msgid "O&nly the Certificate in PEM Format" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:644 src/include/ca-management/util.rb:981 +msgid "Only the Key &Unencrypted in PEM Format" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:651 src/include/ca-management/util.rb:988 +msgid "Only the &Key Encrypted in PEM Format" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:658 src/include/ca-management/util.rb:995 +msgid "Ce&rtificate and the Key Unencrypted in PEM Format" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:665 +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1002 +msgid "C&ertificate and the Key Encrypted in PEM Format" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:672 +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1009 +msgid "&Certificate in DER Format" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:679 +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1016 +msgid "Cer&tificate and the Key in PKCS12 Format" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:686 +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1023 +msgid "&Like PKCS12 and Include the CA Chain" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:693 +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1035 +msgid "&New Password" +msgstr "" + +#. importCertificateFromDisk() - Importing certificate from disk +#. @return success +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:701 src/include/ca-management/util.rb:865 +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1043 +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1204 +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1485 +msgid "&File Name:" +msgstr "" + +#. export to file +#. reading certificate from disk +#. reading certificate from disk +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:783 src/include/ca-management/util.rb:913 +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1127 +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1261 +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1523 +msgid "File name required." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:829 +msgid "CA saved to file." +msgstr "" + +#. popup window header +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:850 +msgid "Export CRL to File" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:858 +msgid "&PEM Format" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:860 +msgid "&DER Format" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:941 +msgid "CRL saved to file." +msgstr "" + +#. popup window header +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:962 +msgid "Export Certificate to File" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:973 +msgid "&Only the Certificate in PEM Format" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1184 +msgid "Certificate saved to file." +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/3 +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1216 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Importing Common Server Certificate (PKCS12 + CA Chain Format)\n" +" from Disk:</big></b> Select one file name and press <b>Next</b> to continue.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/3 +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1222 +msgid "Import a server certificate and corresponding CA and copy them to a place where other YaST modules look for such a common certificate." +msgstr "" + +#. help text 3/3 +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1230 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Password:</b><br>\n" +"Certificate password</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1236 +msgid "Importing Common Certificate from Disk" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1267 +msgid "Importing certificate..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1281 +msgid "Certificate has been imported." +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: ContinueCancel Popup +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1315 +msgid "This is not a server certificate. Continue?" +msgstr "" + +#. check if hostname is in Subject Alt Name +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1361 +msgid "" +"The common name of the certificate (%1) is not the name of·\n" +"the server (%2).\n" +"This certificate might be not practical as a common server certificate.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1369 +msgid "" +"The hostname of this server (command: hostname --long) have to match \n" +"either the common name of the certificate (CN) or on of the values in subject alternative names." +msgstr "" + +#. popup window header +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1383 +msgid "Exporting as Common Server Certificate" +msgstr "" + +#. export to common certificate +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1409 +msgid "Exporting certificate..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1456 +msgid "Certificate has been written as common server certificate." +msgstr "" + +#. importRequestFromDisk() - Importing request from disk +#. @param [String] CaName +#. @return success +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1482 +msgid "Import Request from Disk" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1537 +msgid "File format not valid. Use PEM or DER files." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1541 +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1671 +msgid "Importing request..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1560 +msgid "Request has been imported." +msgstr "" + +#. importCAFromDisk() - Importing CA from disk +#. @return success +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1584 +msgid "Import CA from Disk" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1587 +msgid "&Path of CA Certificate" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1597 +msgid "&Path of Key" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1606 +msgid "&Key Password" +msgstr "" + +#. Error popup +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1649 +msgid "Path to certificate file required." +msgstr "" + +#. Error popup +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1653 +msgid "Path of the private key required." +msgstr "" + +#. Error popup +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1658 +msgid "" +"Key Password is required. \n" +"It must be the password for the encrypted key or a new one in case of a not encrypted key." +msgstr "" + +#. Error popup +#: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1693 +msgid "CA has been imported." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:499 +msgid "Cannot read CA list." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:560 +msgid "Cannot read CA tree." +msgstr "" + +#. parameter check failed +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:676 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:1357 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:1849 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:2124 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:2880 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:2978 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:4429 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:7306 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:7429 +msgid "Missing value 'caName'." +msgstr "" + +#. parameter check failed +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:683 +msgid "Missing value 'keyPasswd' or password is too short." +msgstr "" + +#. parameter check failed +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:688 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:1861 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:4451 +msgid "Missing value 'commonName'." +msgstr "" + +#. parameter check failed +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:694 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:4457 +msgid "According to 'basicConstraints', this is not a CA." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:781 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:1604 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:2004 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:4604 +msgid "Modifying RequestGenerationData failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:921 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:1532 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:2306 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:4735 +msgid "Modifying CertificateIssueData failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:945 +msgid "Creating Root CA failed." +msgstr "" + +#. parameter check failed +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:1055 +msgid "Missing parameter 'certType'." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:1260 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:7244 +msgid "Getting defaults failed." +msgstr "" + +#. parameter check failed +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:1364 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:2140 +msgid "Missing value 'certType'." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:1385 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:1887 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:2166 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3007 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3322 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3614 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3788 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:4122 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:4487 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:6127 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:6813 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:7327 +msgid "Initializing the CA failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:1635 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:7370 +msgid "Writing the defaults failed." +msgstr "" + +#. parameter check failed +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:1696 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:2760 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3115 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3267 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3559 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3720 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:4070 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:4251 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:4822 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5078 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5867 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:6098 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:6529 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:6895 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:6983 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:7089 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:7194 +msgid "Invalid value for parameter 'caName'." +msgstr "" + +#. parameter check failed +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:1704 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:2768 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3123 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5465 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:6537 +msgid "Invalid value for parameter 'type'." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:1750 +msgid "Parsing the CA failed." +msgstr "" + +#. parameter check failed +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:1856 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:4441 +msgid "Missing value 'keyPasswd'." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:2018 +msgid "Creating request failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:2129 +msgid "Missing value 'request'" +msgstr "" + +#. parameter check failed +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:2135 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:2887 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:2984 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:4446 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:7007 +msgid "Missing value 'caPasswd'." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:2320 +msgid "Signing certificate failed." +msgstr "" + +#. parameter check failed +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:2547 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:2652 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:6664 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:6770 +msgid "Missing parameter 'caName'." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:2553 +msgid "Missing parameter 'caPasswd'." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:2601 +msgid "Getting the certificate list failed." +msgstr "" + +#. parameter check failed +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:2658 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3303 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3566 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3727 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:4077 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:7096 +msgid "Invalid value for parameter 'caPasswd'." +msgstr "" + +#. error message; displayed in an popup dialog +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:2685 +msgid "Invalid password." +msgstr "" + +#. error message; displayed in an popup dialog +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:2692 +msgid "UpdateDB failed." +msgstr "" + +#. parameter check failed +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:2775 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3733 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:4258 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5874 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:6105 +msgid "Invalid value for parameter 'certificate'." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:2821 +msgid "Parsing the certificate failed." +msgstr "" + +#. parameter check failed +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:2892 +msgid "Missing value 'certificate'." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:2923 +msgid "Revoking the certificate failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:2988 +msgid "Missing value 'days'." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3041 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:7359 +msgid "Modifying CRLGenerationData failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3053 +msgid "Creating the CRL failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3173 +msgid "No CRL available." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3177 +msgid "Parsing the CRL failed." +msgstr "" + +#. parameter check failed +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3277 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3578 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3586 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3742 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:4093 +#, perl-format +msgid "Cannot parse destinationFile %s." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3284 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3593 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3749 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:4100 +msgid "Directory does not exist." +msgstr "" + +#. parameter check failed +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3296 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3761 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:4084 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:4175 +msgid "Invalid value for parameter 'exportFormat'." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3345 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3367 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3389 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3416 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3442 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3464 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3492 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3522 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3811 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3835 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3859 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3889 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3918 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3940 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3971 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:4001 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:4146 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:4168 +msgid "Export failed." +msgstr "" + +#. parameter check failed +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3472 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3501 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3949 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3979 +msgid "Parameter 'P12Password' missing." +msgstr "" + +#. parameter check failed +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3572 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:6544 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:6902 +msgid "Invalid value for parameter 'request'." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3625 +msgid "Request not found in" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3628 +msgid "Copy Request failed" +msgstr "" + +#. parameter check failed +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:3768 +msgid "Invalid value for parameter 'keyPasswd'." +msgstr "" + +#. parameter check failed +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:4289 +msgid "Invalid value for parameter 'purpose'." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:4303 +msgid "Verification failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:4435 +msgid "Missing value 'newCaName'." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:4750 +msgid "Creating the SubCA failed." +msgstr "" + +#. parameter check failed +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:4833 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5089 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5890 +msgid "Invalid value for parameter 'ldapHostname'." +msgstr "" + +#. parameter check failed +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:4845 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5101 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5902 +msgid "Invalid value for parameter 'ldapPort'." +msgstr "" + +#. parameter check failed +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:4854 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:4860 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5110 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5115 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5909 +msgid "Invalid value for parameter 'destinationDN'." +msgstr "" + +#. parameter check failed +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:4880 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5135 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5916 +msgid "Invalid value for parameter 'BindDN'." +msgstr "" + +#. parameter check failed +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:4887 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5142 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5923 +msgid "Invalid value for parameter 'ldapPasswd'." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:4893 +msgid "CA certificate does not exist." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:4904 +msgid "Cannot read the CA." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:4912 +msgid "Cannot parse the CA certificate." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:4933 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5188 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5521 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5685 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5977 +msgid "LDAP initialization failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:4940 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5195 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5528 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5694 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5984 +msgid "LDAP bind failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:4953 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5208 +#, perl-format +msgid "Container %s is not available in the LDAP directory." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:4971 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5227 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5244 +msgid "Error while searching in LDAP." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:4990 +msgid "Cannot add CA certificate to the LDAP directory." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5002 +msgid "Cannot modify CA certificate in the LDAP directory." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5148 +msgid "CRL does not exist." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5159 +msgid "Cannot read the CRL." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5167 +msgid "Cannot parse the CRL." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5265 +msgid "Cannot add the CRL to the LDAP directory." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5278 +msgid "Cannot modify the CRL in the LDAP directory." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5381 +msgid "Checking for new CRL Distribution Point failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5474 +msgid "Missing parameter 'commonName'." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5506 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5677 +msgid "No LDAP server configured." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5546 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5564 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5609 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5723 +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5739 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5772 +msgid "LDAP search failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5574 +msgid "No configuration available in LDAP." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5663 +msgid "LDAP password required." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5717 +msgid "Cannot add base configuration entry." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5767 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5789 +msgid "Cannot add CA configuration entry." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5929 +msgid "Certificate does not exist." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5956 +msgid "Cannot parse the certificate." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:5997 +#, perl-format +msgid "%s is not available in the LDAP directory." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:6008 +msgid "Cannot modify userCertificate in the LDAP directory." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:6026 +msgid "Exporting the certificate failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:6037 +msgid "Cannot modify userPKCS12 in LDAP directory." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:6139 +msgid "Deleting the certificate failed." +msgstr "" + +#. parameter check +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:6207 +msgid "Path to certificate file is needed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:6214 +msgid "Certificate not found in" +msgstr "" + +#. parameter check +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:6220 +msgid "Password is required." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:6232 +msgid "Importing the certificate failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:6321 +msgid "Missing parameter 'inFile'." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:6326 +msgid "File not found." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:6332 +msgid "Missing parameter 'type'." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:6336 +#, perl-format +msgid "Invalid value '%s' in 'type'." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:6343 +msgid "Missing parameter 'datatype'." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:6347 +#, perl-format +msgid "Unknown value '%s' in 'datatype'." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:6353 +msgid "Missing parameter 'inForm'." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:6357 +#, perl-format +msgid "Unknown value '%s' in 'inForm'." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:6462 +msgid "Parsing failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:6590 +msgid "Parsing the request failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:6704 +msgid "Getting the request list failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:6779 +#, perl-format +msgid "Request not found in %s." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:6786 +msgid "Cannot read the request." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:6792 +msgid "No request data found." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:6835 +msgid "Importing the request failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:6926 +msgid "Deleting the request failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:6989 +msgid "Invalid value for parameter 'caCertificate'." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:6994 +msgid "Invalid value for parameter 'caKey'." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:7001 +#, perl-format +msgid "CA key not available in %s." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:7030 +msgid "Importing the CA failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:7127 +msgid "Deleting the CA failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:7467 src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:7483 +msgid "Keyfile does not exist." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/CaManagement.pm:7502 +msgid "Password change failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:235 +#, perl-format +msgid "Invalid type for StringExtension '%s'." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:1881 +msgid "Missing 'data' map." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:1890 src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:1894 +#: src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:1900 src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:1906 +#: src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:1912 src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:1925 +#: src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:1932 src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:1941 +#: src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:1950 src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:1956 +#: src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:1979 src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:2000 +#: src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:2005 src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:2022 +#: src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:2027 src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:2041 +#: src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:2045 src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:2060 +#: src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:2064 src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:2082 +#: src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:2089 src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:2096 +#: src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:2103 src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:2110 +#: src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:2117 src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:2124 +#: src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:2130 src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:2137 +#: src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:2152 src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:2164 +#: src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:2182 src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:2187 +#: src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:2206 src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:2213 +#: src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:2220 src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:2227 +#: src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:2234 src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:2240 +#: src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:2246 src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:2252 +#: src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:2267 src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:2273 +#: src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:2279 +#, perl-format +msgid "Invalid value '%s' for parameter '%s'." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:1918 +#, perl-format +msgid "Password (%s) is too simple." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:1965 src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:1986 +#: src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:1993 src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:2012 +#: src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:2034 src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:2052 +#: src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:2071 src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:2146 +#: src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:2160 src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:2171 +#: src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:2195 src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:2259 +#, perl-format +msgid "Wrong use of 'critical' in '%s'." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaST/caUtils.pm:1974 +#, perl-format +msgid "Unknown value '%s' in '%s'." +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/cio.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/cio.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/cio.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. Copyright (c) 2014 SUSE LLC. +#. All Rights Reserved. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or +#. modify it under the terms of version 2 or 3 of the GNU General +#. Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +#. but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +#. MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +#. GNU General Public License for more details. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +#. along with this program; if not, contact SUSE LLC. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, +#. you may find current contact information at www.suse.com +#: src/lib/iochannel/channels_dialog.rb:125 +msgid "Available Input/Output Channels" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/iochannel/channels_dialog.rb:132 +msgid "Device" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/iochannel/channels_dialog.rb:132 +msgid "Used" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/iochannel/channels_dialog.rb:142 +msgid "yes" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/iochannel/channels_dialog.rb:142 +msgid "no" +msgstr "" + +#. filter can be empty if dialog is not yet created +#: src/lib/iochannel/channels_dialog.rb:160 +msgid "Filter channels" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/iochannel/channels_dialog.rb:162 +msgid "&Select All" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/iochannel/channels_dialog.rb:163 +msgid "&Clear selection" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/iochannel/channels_dialog.rb:164 +msgid "&Blacklist Selected Channels" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/iochannel/channels_dialog.rb:165 +msgid "&Unban Channels" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/iochannel/channels_dialog.rb:170 +msgid "&Exit" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: %s stands for the smallest snippet inside which we detect syntax error +#: src/lib/iochannel/unban_dialog.rb:80 +msgid "Specified range is invalid. Wrong value is inside snippet '%s'" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/iochannel/unban_dialog.rb:101 +msgid "Unban Input/Output Channels" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/iochannel/unban_dialog.rb:106 +msgid "" +"List of ranges of channels to unban separated by comma.\n" +"Range can be channel, part of channel which will be filled to zero or range specified with dash.\n" +"Example value: 0.0.0001, AA00, 0.1.0100-200" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/iochannel/unban_dialog.rb:110 +msgid "Ranges to Unban." +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/cluster.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/cluster.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/cluster.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,547 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. Command line help text for the Xcluster module +#: src/clients/cluster.rb:54 +msgid "Configuration of cluster" +msgstr "" + +#. Rich text title for Cluster in proposals +#: src/clients/cluster_proposal.rb:83 +msgid "Cluster" +msgstr "" + +#. Menu title for Cluster in proposals +#: src/clients/cluster_proposal.rb:87 +msgid "&Cluster" +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. Copyright (c) 2006 Novell, Inc. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under +#. the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as published by the +#. Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +#. ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS +#. FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with +#. this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, you may find +#. current contact information at www.novell.com. +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. File: include/cluster/wizards.ycp +#. Package: Configuration of cluster +#. Summary: Wizards definitions +#. Authors: Cong Meng +#. +#. $Id: wizards.ycp 27914 2006-02-13 14:32:08Z locilka $ +#: src/include/cluster/common.rb:47 +msgid "Communication Channels" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/common.rb:48 +msgid "Security" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/common.rb:49 +msgid "Service" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/common.rb:50 +msgid "Configure Csync2" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/common.rb:51 +msgid "Configure conntrackd" +msgstr "" + +#. return `cancel or a string +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:87 src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:122 +msgid "OK" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:88 src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:123 +msgid "Cancel" +msgstr "" + +#. BNC#871970, change member address struct +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:113 +msgid "IP Address" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:115 +msgid "Redundant IP Address" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:117 src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:501 +msgid "Node ID" +msgstr "" + +#. Set need to require 'set' +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:165 +msgid "Node ID has to be fulfilled with a positive integer" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:172 +msgid "Node ID must be unique" +msgstr "" + +#. BNC#871970, change member address struct +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:193 src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:247 +msgid "The Bind Network Address has to be fulfilled" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:199 +msgid "The cluster name has to be fulfilled" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:216 +msgid "The Member Address has to be fulfilled" +msgstr "" + +#. BNC#880242, expected_votes must have value when "udp" +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:222 +msgid "The Expected Votes has to be fulfilled when multicast transport is configured" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:228 src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:256 +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:1427 +msgid "The Multicast Address has to be fulfilled" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:238 src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:266 +msgid "The Multicast port must be a positive integer" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:272 +msgid "Only passive or active can be chosen if multiple interface used. Set to passive." +msgstr "" + +#. BNC#871970, change member address struct to memberaddr +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:441 +msgid "Transport:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:449 +msgid "Channel" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:454 src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:475 +msgid "Bind Network Address:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:460 src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:478 +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:1363 +msgid "Multicast Address:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:462 src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:479 +msgid "Multicast Port:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:469 +msgid "Redundant Channel" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:485 +msgid "Cluster Name:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:486 +msgid "Expected Votes:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:490 +msgid "rrp mode:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:495 +msgid "Auto Generate Node ID" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:500 +msgid "Member Address:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:501 +msgid "IP" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:501 +msgid "Redundant IP" +msgstr "" + +#. BNC#879596, check the corosync.conf format +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:541 +msgid "" +" NOTICE: Detected old corosync configuration.\n" +" Please reconfigure the member list and confirm all other settings." +msgstr "" + +#. Notice, current could be "nil" if the list is empty. +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:715 +msgid "Enable Security Auth" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:719 +msgid "For a newly created cluster, push the button below to generate /etc/corosync/authkey." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:724 +msgid "To join an existing cluster, please copy /etc/corosync/authkey from other nodes manually." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:750 +msgid "Failed to create /etc/corosync/authkey" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:752 +msgid "Create /etc/corosync/authkey succeeded" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:813 src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:883 +msgid "Running" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:815 +msgid "Not running" +msgstr "" + +#. servie:cluster is the name of /etc/sysconfig/SuSEfirewall2.d/services/cluster +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:851 +msgid "Booting" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:861 +msgid "On -- Start pacemaker during boot" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:868 +msgid "Off -- Start pacemaker manually" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:877 +msgid "Switch On and Off" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:882 +msgid "Current Status: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:891 +msgid "Start pacemaker Now" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:892 +msgid "Stop pacemaker Now" +msgstr "" + +#. BNC#874563,stop pacemaker could stop corosync since BNC#872651 is fixed +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:990 +msgid "Sync Host" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:994 src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:1006 +msgid "Add" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:995 src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:1007 +msgid "Del" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:996 src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:1008 +msgid "Edit" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:1002 +msgid "Sync File" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:1009 +msgid "Add Suggested Files" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:1018 +msgid "Generate Pre-Shared-Keys" +msgstr "" + +#. remove duplicated elements +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:1143 +msgid "Csync2 Status Unknown" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:1146 +msgid "Turn csync2 ON" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:1149 +msgid "Turn csync2 OFF" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:1179 +msgid "Enter a hostname" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:1193 +msgid "Edit the hostname" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:1207 +msgid "Enter a filename to synchronize" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:1222 +msgid "Edit the filename" +msgstr "" + +#. key file exist +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:1254 +msgid "" +"Key file %1 already exist.\n" +"Do you want to overwrite it?" +msgstr "" + +#. remove exist key file +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:1264 +msgid "Delete key file %1 failed." +msgstr "" + +#. generate key file +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:1278 +msgid "" +"Key file %1 is generated.\n" +"Clicking \"Add Suggested Files\" button adds it to sync list." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:1285 +msgid "Key generation failed." +msgstr "" + +#. SaveCsync2(); +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:1347 +msgid "" +"Conntrackd is a daemon which helps to duplicate firewall status between cluster nodes.\n" +"YaST can help to configure some basic aspects of conntrackd.\n" +"You need to start it with the ocf:heartbeat:conntrackd." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:1358 +msgid "Dedicated Interface:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:1361 +msgid "IP:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:1364 +msgid "Group Number:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:1368 +msgid "Generate /etc/conntrackd/conntrackd.conf" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:1435 +msgid "The Group Number must be a positive integer" +msgstr "" + +#. All helps are here +#: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:35 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Bind Network Address</big></b><br>This specifies the address which the openais executive should bind. This address should always end in zero. If the totem traffic should be routed over 192.168.5.92, set bindnetaddr to 192.168.5.0.<br>This may also be an IPV6 address, in which case IPV6 networking will be used. In this case, the full address must be specified and there is no automatic selection of the network interface within a specific subnet as with IPv4. If IPv6 networking is used, the nodeid field must be specified.<br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Multicast Address</big></b><br>This is the multicast address used by openais executive. The default should work for most networks, but the network administrator should be queried about a multicast address to use. Avoid 224.x.x.x because this is a \"config\" multicast address.<br>This may also be an IPV6 multicast address, in which case IPV6 networking will be used. If IPv6 networking is used, the nodeid field must be specified.</p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Port</big></b><br>This specifies the UDP port number. It is possible to use the same multicast address on a network with the openais services configured for different UDP ports.<br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Member Address</big></b><br>This list specifies all the nodes in the cluster by IP address. This could be configurable when using udpu(Unicast). <br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Node ID</big></b><br>This configuration option is optional when using IPv4 and required when using IPv6. This is a 32 bit value specifying the node identifier delivered to the cluster membership service. If this is not specified with IPv4, the node id will be determined from the 32 bit IP address the system to which the system is bound with ring identifier of 0. The node identifier value of zero is reserved and should not be used.<br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>rrp_mode</big></b><br>This specifies the mode of redundant ring, which may be none, active, or passive. Active replication offers slightly lower latency from transmit to delivery in faulty network environments but with less performance. Passive replication may nearly double the speed of the totem protocol if the protocol doesn't become cpu bound. The final option is none, in which case only one network interface will be used to operate the totem protocol. If only one interface directive is specified, none is automatically chosen. If multiple interface directives are specified, only active or passive may be chosen.<br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Expected votes</big></b><br>Expect vote number for voting quorum. Will be automatically calculated when the nodelist {} section is present in corosync.conf (the list will be generated when using unicast transport) or can be specified in the quorum {} section (Expect votes should use the total node numble of the cluster). If Expected votes presents in unicast transport, the value will override the one automatically calculated.<br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Auto Generate Node ID</big></b><br>Nodeid is required when using IPv6. Auto node ID enabled will generate nodeid automatically.<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:45 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p><b><big>Enable Security Auth</big></b><br>This specifies that HMAC/SHA1 authentication should be used to authenticate all messages. It further specifies that all data should be encrypted with the sober128 encryption algorithm to protect data from eavesdropping. Enabling this option adds a 36 byte header to every message sent by totem which reduces total throughput. Encryption and authentication consume 75% of CPU cycles in aisexec as measured with gprof when enabled. For 100Mbit networks with 1500 MTU frame transmissions: A throughput of 9Mb/s is possible with 100% cpu utilization when this option is enabled on 3GHz cpus. A throughput of 10Mb/s is possible wth 20% cpu utilization when this option is disabled on 3GHz cpus. For gig-e networks with large frame transmissions: A throughput of 20Mb/s is possible when this option is enabled on 3GHz cpus. A throughput of 60Mb/s is possible when this option is disabled on 3GHz cpus. The default is on. <b r></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:49 +msgid "" +"\n" +"\t\t\t<p><b><big>Booting</big></b><br>Starting corosync service during boot or not</p>\n" +"\t\t\t<p><b><big>Firewall Settings</big></b><br>Enable the port when Firewall is enabled</p>\n" +"\t\t\t" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:55 +msgid "" +"\n" +"\t\t<p><b><big>Sync Host</big></b><br>The hostnames used here must be the local hostnames of the cluster nodes. That means you must use exactly the same string as printed out by the hostname command.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b><big>Sync File</big></b><br>The full absolute filename to be synced.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b><big>Pre-Shared-Keys</big></b><br>Authentication is performed using the IP addresses and pre-shared-keys in Csync2. The key file is generated with csync2 -k /etc/csync2/key_hagroup. The file key_hagroup should be copied to all members of the cluster manually after it's created.</p>\n" +"\t" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:62 +msgid "" +"\n" +"\t\t<p><b><big>Dedicated Interface</big></b><br>A dedicated network interface for syncing. The interface must support multicast, and is UP for using. You may have to have it pre-configured. </p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b><big>IP</big></b><br>The IPv4 address assigned to the dedicated network interface. This is detected automatically.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b><big>Multicast Address</big></b><br>The multicast address to be used for syncing.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b><big>Group Number</big></b><br>A numeric ID indicate the group for syncing.</p>\n" +"\t" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:71 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Initializing cluster Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Please wait...<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:75 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Initialization:</big></b><br>\n" +"Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing <b>Abort</b> now.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:79 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Saving cluster Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Please wait...<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:83 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Saving:</big></b><br>\n" +"Abort the save procedure by pressing <b>Abort</b>.\n" +"An additional dialog informs whether it is safe to do so.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Initialization dialog caption +#: src/include/cluster/wizards.rb:172 +msgid "Cluster Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Initialization dialog contents +#: src/include/cluster/wizards.rb:174 +msgid "Initializing..." +msgstr "" + +#. Cluster read dialog caption +#: src/modules/Cluster.rb:390 +msgid "Initializing cluster Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1/3 +#: src/modules/Cluster.rb:406 +msgid "Read the database" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 2/3 +#: src/modules/Cluster.rb:408 +msgid "Read the previous settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 3/3 +#: src/modules/Cluster.rb:410 +msgid "Read SuSEFirewall Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 1/3 +#: src/modules/Cluster.rb:414 +msgid "Reading the database..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 2/3 +#: src/modules/Cluster.rb:416 +msgid "Reading the previous settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 3/3 +#: src/modules/Cluster.rb:418 +msgid "Reading SuSEFirewall settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress finished +#. Progress finished +#: src/modules/Cluster.rb:420 src/modules/Cluster.rb:522 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Cluster.rb:435 +msgid "Cannot install required package" +msgstr "" + +#. read database +#: src/modules/Cluster.rb:444 +msgid "Cannot load existing configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Error message +#: src/modules/Cluster.rb:455 +msgid "Cannot read database1." +msgstr "" + +#. Error message +#: src/modules/Cluster.rb:463 +msgid "Cannot read database2." +msgstr "" + +#. Error message +#: src/modules/Cluster.rb:479 +msgid "Cannot detect devices." +msgstr "" + +#. Cluster read dialog caption +#: src/modules/Cluster.rb:497 +msgid "Saving cluster Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1/2 +#: src/modules/Cluster.rb:512 +msgid "Write the settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 2/2 +#: src/modules/Cluster.rb:514 +msgid "Save changes to SuSEFirewall" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 1/2 +#: src/modules/Cluster.rb:518 +msgid "Writing the settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 2/2 +#: src/modules/Cluster.rb:520 +msgid "Saving changes to SuSEFirewall..." +msgstr "" + +#. Error message +#: src/modules/Cluster.rb:532 +msgid "Cannot write settings." +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/control-center.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/control-center.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/control-center.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#: src/main_window.cpp:150 +msgid "&Search" +msgstr "" + +#: src/main_window.cpp:191 +msgid "Ready" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: module name comes here (%1) e.g. HTTP server, Scanner,... +#: src/main_window.cpp:321 +msgid "Starting configuration module \"%1\"..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/main_window.cpp:341 src/main_window.cpp:406 +msgid "YaST Control Center" +msgstr "" + +#: src/main_window.cpp:342 +msgid "" +"YaST Control Center is not running as root.\n" +"You will only see modules which do not require root privileges." +msgstr "" + +#: src/yqsavelogs.cpp:73 +msgid "Log files written successfully." +msgstr "" + +#: src/yqsavelogs.cpp:77 +msgid "Couldn't save y2logs." +msgstr "" + +#: src/yqsavelogs.cpp:136 +msgid "Writing log files ..." +msgstr "" + +#. Confirm if the user wishes to overwrite an existing file +#: src/yqsavelogs.cpp:180 +msgid "%1 exists! Really overwrite?" +msgstr "" + +#. Confirm if the user wishes to overwrite a write-protected file %1 +#: src/yqsavelogs.cpp:185 +msgid "" +"%1 exists and is write-protected!\n" +"Really overwrite?" +msgstr "" + +#. Window title for confirmation dialog +#: src/yqsavelogs.cpp:190 +msgid "Confirm" +msgstr "" + +#: src/yqsavelogs.cpp:192 +msgid "C&ontinue" +msgstr "" + +#: src/yqsavelogs.cpp:193 +msgid "&Cancel" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/control.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/control.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/control.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,252 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:3 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p><b>Congratulations!</b></p>\n" +"<p>The installation of openSUSE on your machine is complete.\n" +"After clicking <b>Finish</b>, you can log in to the system.</p>\n" +"<p>Visit us at %1.</p>\n" +"<p>Have a lot of fun!<br>Your openSUSE Development Team</p>\n" +" " +msgstr "" + +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:10 +msgid "" +"The desktop environment on your computer provides the graphical user\n" +"interface for your computer, as well as a suite of applications for\n" +"email, Web browsing, office productivity, games, and utilities to\n" +"manage your computer.\n" +"\n" +"openSUSE offers a choice of desktop environments. The most widely\n" +"used desktop environments are GNOME and KDE, and they are equally\n" +"supported under openSUSE. Both desktop environments are easy to use,\n" +"highly integrated, and have an attractive look and feel. Each desktop\n" +"environment has a distinct style, so personal taste determines which\n" +"is the most appropriate desktop for you." +msgstr "" + +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:21 +msgid "GNOME Desktop" +msgstr "" + +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:22 +msgid "KDE Desktop" +msgstr "" + +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:23 +msgid "XFCE Desktop" +msgstr "" + +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:24 +msgid "LXDE Desktop" +msgstr "" + +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:25 +msgid "Minimal X Window" +msgstr "" + +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:26 +msgid "Enlightenment Desktop" +msgstr "" + +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:27 +msgid "Minimal Server Selection (Text Mode)" +msgstr "" + +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:28 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:29 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:32 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:70 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:71 +msgid "Installation Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:30 +msgid "Live Installation Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:31 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:85 +msgid "Update Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:33 +msgid "Network Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:34 +msgid "Hardware Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:35 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:77 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:103 +msgid "Preparation" +msgstr "" + +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:36 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:63 +msgid "Load linuxrc Network Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:37 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:64 +msgid "Network Autosetup" +msgstr "" + +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:38 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:65 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:78 +msgid "Welcome" +msgstr "" + +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:39 +msgid "Network Activation" +msgstr "" + +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:40 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:79 +msgid "Disk Activation" +msgstr "" + +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:41 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:42 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:80 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:104 +msgid "System Analysis" +msgstr "" + +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:43 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:67 +msgid "Disk" +msgstr "" + +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:44 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:66 +msgid "Time Zone" +msgstr "" + +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:45 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:82 +msgid "Online Repositories" +msgstr "" + +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:46 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:83 +msgid "Add-On Products" +msgstr "" + +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:47 +msgid "Desktop Selection" +msgstr "" + +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:48 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:49 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:68 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:69 +msgid "User Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:50 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:62 +msgid "Installation" +msgstr "" + +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:51 +msgid "Installation Overview" +msgstr "" + +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:52 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:53 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:54 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:55 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:56 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:57 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:58 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:59 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:60 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:61 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:72 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:73 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:74 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:75 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:76 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:96 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:97 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:98 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:99 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:100 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:101 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:102 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:117 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:118 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:119 +msgid "Perform Installation" +msgstr "" + +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:81 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:105 +msgid "System for Update" +msgstr "" + +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:84 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:108 +msgid "Update" +msgstr "" + +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:86 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:87 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:88 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:89 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:90 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:110 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:111 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:112 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:113 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:114 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:115 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:116 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:122 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:123 +msgid "Perform Update" +msgstr "" + +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:91 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:120 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:124 +msgid "Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:92 +msgid "Base Installation" +msgstr "" + +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:93 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:94 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:95 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:106 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:107 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:109 +msgid "AutoYaST Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:121 +#: control/control.openSUSE.glade.translations.glade:125 +msgid "System Configuration" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/country.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/country.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/country.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,1074 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. translators: command line help text for Securoty module +#: keyboard/src/clients/keyboard.rb:59 +msgid "Keyboard configuration." +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'summary' action +#: keyboard/src/clients/keyboard.rb:72 +msgid "Keyboard configuration summary." +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'set' action +#: keyboard/src/clients/keyboard.rb:79 +msgid "Set new values for keyboard configuration." +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'list' action +#: keyboard/src/clients/keyboard.rb:86 +msgid "List all available keyboard layouts." +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'set layout' option +#: keyboard/src/clients/keyboard.rb:94 +msgid "New keyboard layout" +msgstr "" + +#. summary label +#. summary label +#: keyboard/src/clients/keyboard.rb:160 keyboard/src/modules/Keyboard.rb:1402 +msgid "Current Keyboard Layout: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. error message (%1 is given layout); do not translate 'list' +#: keyboard/src/clients/keyboard.rb:184 +msgid "Keyboard layout '%1' is invalid. Use a 'list' command to see possible values." +msgstr "" + +#. summary item +#: keyboard/src/clients/keyboard_proposal.rb:91 +msgid "Keyboard Layout" +msgstr "" + +#. menue label text +#. title for selection box 'keyboard layout' +#. menu button label +#: keyboard/src/clients/keyboard_proposal.rb:93 +#: keyboard/src/include/keyboard/dialogs.rb:187 +#: language/src/clients/country_simple_proposal.rb:78 +msgid "&Keyboard Layout" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for keyboard expert screen +#: keyboard/src/include/keyboard/dialogs.rb:52 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Here, fine tune various settings of the keyboard module.\n" +"These settings are written into the file <tt>/etc/sysconfig/keyboard</tt>.\n" +"If unsure, use the default values already selected.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for keyboard expert screen cont. +#: keyboard/src/include/keyboard/dialogs.rb:60 +msgid "<p>Settings made here apply only to the console keyboard. Configure the keyboard for the graphical user interface with another tool.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. heading text +#: keyboard/src/include/keyboard/dialogs.rb:78 +msgid "Expert Keyboard Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: keyboard/src/include/keyboard/dialogs.rb:85 +msgid "Repeat &Rate" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: keyboard/src/include/keyboard/dialogs.rb:93 +msgid "De&lay before Repetition Starts" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: keyboard/src/include/keyboard/dialogs.rb:99 +msgid "Start-Up States" +msgstr "" + +#. combobox label +#: keyboard/src/include/keyboard/dialogs.rb:105 +msgid "&Num Lock On" +msgstr "" + +#. combobox item +#: keyboard/src/include/keyboard/dialogs.rb:108 +msgid "BIOS Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. combobox item +#: keyboard/src/include/keyboard/dialogs.rb:110 +#: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:644 +msgid "Yes" +msgstr "" + +#. combobox item +#: keyboard/src/include/keyboard/dialogs.rb:112 +#: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:645 +msgid "No" +msgstr "" + +#. combobox item +#: keyboard/src/include/keyboard/dialogs.rb:114 +msgid "<Untouched>" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: keyboard/src/include/keyboard/dialogs.rb:125 +msgid "D&isable Caps Lock" +msgstr "" + +#. title for input field to test the keyboard setting +#. (no more than about 25 characters!) +#: keyboard/src/include/keyboard/dialogs.rb:193 +msgid "&Test" +msgstr "" + +#. push button +#: keyboard/src/include/keyboard/dialogs.rb:203 +msgid "E&xpert Settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. help text for keyboard screen (header) +#: keyboard/src/include/keyboard/dialogs.rb:220 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p><big><b>Keyboard Configuration</b></big></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for keyboard screen (installation) +#: keyboard/src/include/keyboard/dialogs.rb:226 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Choose the <b>Keyboard Layout</b> to use for\n" +"installation and in the installed system. \n" +"Test the layout in <b>Test</b>.\n" +"For advanced options, such as repeat rate and delay, select <b>Expert Settings</b>.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. general help trailer +#: keyboard/src/include/keyboard/dialogs.rb:238 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"If unsure, use the default values already selected.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for keyboard screen (installation) +#: keyboard/src/include/keyboard/dialogs.rb:248 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Choose the <b>Keyboard Layout</b> to use in the system.\n" +"For advanced options, such as repeat rate and delay, select <b>Expert Settings</b>.</p>\n" +"<p>Find more options as well as more layouts in the keyboard layout tool of your desktop environment.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Screen title for keyboard screen +#: keyboard/src/include/keyboard/dialogs.rb:259 +msgid "System Keyboard Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. label text: user can choose the keyboard from the updated system +#. or continue with the one defined by his language. +#. 2 radio-buttons follow this label. +#. Such keyboard layout is used only for the time of the update, +#. it is not saved to the system. +#: keyboard/src/modules/Keyboard.rb:1313 +msgid "" +"You are currently using a keyboard layout\n" +"different from the one in the system to update.\n" +"Select the layout to use during update:" +msgstr "" + +#. Executes the command to set the keyboard in X11, reporting +#. any error to the user +#: keyboard/src/modules/Keyboard.rb:1513 +msgid "Failed to set X11 keyboard to '%s'" +msgstr "" + +#. summary label <%1>-<%2> are HTML tags, leave untouched +#: language/src/clients/country_simple_proposal.rb:45 +msgid "<%1>Keyboard Layout<%2>: %3" +msgstr "" + +#. summary label <%1>-<%2> are HTML tags, leave untouched +#: language/src/clients/country_simple_proposal.rb:56 +msgid "<%1>Language<%2>: %3" +msgstr "" + +#. rich text label +#: language/src/clients/country_simple_proposal.rb:73 +msgid "Locale Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. menu button label +#. menue label text +#: language/src/clients/country_simple_proposal.rb:76 +#: language/src/clients/language_proposal.rb:133 +msgid "&Language" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for language module +#: language/src/clients/language.rb:56 +msgid "Language configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'summary' action +#: language/src/clients/language.rb:69 +msgid "Language configuration summary" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'set' action +#: language/src/clients/language.rb:76 +msgid "Set new values for language" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'list' action +#: language/src/clients/language.rb:83 +msgid "List all available languages." +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'set lang' option +#: language/src/clients/language.rb:91 +msgid "New language value" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'set languages' option +#: language/src/clients/language.rb:98 +msgid "List of secondary languages (separated by commas)" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'set no_packages' option +#: language/src/clients/language.rb:105 +msgid "Do not install language specific packages" +msgstr "" + +#. progress title +#: language/src/clients/language.rb:134 +msgid "Saving Language Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage +#: language/src/clients/language.rb:139 +msgid "Save language and console settings" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage +#: language/src/clients/language.rb:141 +msgid "Install and uninstall affected packages" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage +#: language/src/clients/language.rb:143 +msgid "Update translations in boot loader menu" +msgstr "" + +#. progress step +#: language/src/clients/language.rb:147 +msgid "Saving language and console settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step +#: language/src/clients/language.rb:149 +msgid "Installing and uninstalling affected packages..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step +#: language/src/clients/language.rb:151 +msgid "Updating translations in boot loader menu..." +msgstr "" + +#. help for write dialog +#: language/src/clients/language.rb:233 +msgid "<p><b>Saving Configuration</b><br>Please wait...</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. summary label +#: language/src/clients/language.rb:252 +msgid "Current Language: %1 (%2)" +msgstr "" + +#. summary label +#. summary label +#: language/src/clients/language.rb:266 language/src/modules/Language.rb:793 +#: language/src/modules/Language.rb:827 +msgid "Additional Languages: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. error message (%1 is given layout); do not translate 'list' +#: language/src/clients/language.rb:301 +msgid "%1 is not a valid language. Use the list command to see possible values." +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#. heading text +#: language/src/clients/language_proposal.rb:131 +#: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:119 +msgid "Language" +msgstr "" + +#. ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +#. Build dialog +#. ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +#. heading text +#: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:115 +msgid "Languages" +msgstr "" + +#. heading text +#: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:123 +msgid "Welcome to System Repair" +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:165 +msgid "&Details" +msgstr "" + +#. multiselection box label +#: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:178 +msgid "&Secondary Languages" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label +#: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:189 +msgid "Primary &Language" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:199 +msgid "Primary Language Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. help text (language dependent packages) - at the end of help +#: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:231 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Additional packages with support for the selected primary and secondary languages will be installed. Packages no longer needed will be removed.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for initial (first time) language screen +#: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:239 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Choose the <b>Language</b> to use during installation and for\n" +"the installed system.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, continued +#: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:249 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Click <b>Next</b> to proceed to the next dialog.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, continued +#: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:259 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Nothing will happen to your computer until you confirm\n" +"all your settings in the last installation dialog.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, continued +#: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:270 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"You can select <b>Abort</b> at any time to abort the\n" +"installation process.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. different help text when called after installation +#. in an installed system +#: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:281 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Choose the new <b>Language</b> for your system.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text when "multiple languages" are suported 1/2 +#: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:290 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Choose the new <b>Primary Language</b> for your system.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for 'adapt keyboard checkbox' +#: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:300 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Check <b>Adapt Keyboard Layout</b> to change the keyboard layout to the primary language.\n" +"Check <b>Adapt Time Zone</b> to change the current time zone according to the primary language. If the keyboard layout or time zone is already adapted to the default language setting, the respective option is disabled.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text when "multiple languages" are suported 2/2 +#: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:312 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b>Secondary Languages</b><br>\n" +"In the selection box, specify additional languages to use on your system.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error message - package solver failed +#: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:533 +msgid "There are unresolved package dependencies." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:550 +msgid "" +"There is not enough space to install all additional packages.\n" +"Remove some languages from the selection." +msgstr "" + +#. help text for langauge expert screen +#: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:572 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Here, fine-tune settings for the language handling.\n" +"These settings are written into the file <tt>/etc/sysconfig/language</tt>.\n" +"If unsure, use the default values already selected.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for langauge expert screen +#: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:585 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b>Locale Settings for User root</b>\n" +"determines how the locale variables (LC_*) are set for the root user.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for langauge expert screen +#: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:592 +msgid "" +"<p><b>ctype Only</b>: root has the same LC_CTYPE as a normal user. Other values\n" +"are unset.<br>\n" +"<b>Yes</b>: root has the same locale settings as normal user.<br>\n" +"<b>No</b>: root has all locale variables unset.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for langauge expert screen +#: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:601 +msgid "<p>Use <b>Detailed Locale Setting</b> to set a locale for the primary language that is not offered in the list in the main dialog. Translation may not be available for the selected locale.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. heading text +#: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:634 +msgid "Language Details" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label +#: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:640 +msgid "Locale Settings for User &root" +msgstr "" + +#. do not translate "ctype" +#: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:643 +msgid "ctype Only" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:654 +msgid "Use &UTF-8 Encoding" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label +#: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:663 +msgid "&Detailed Locale Setting" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label (%1 is keyboard layout name) +#: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:723 +msgid "Adapt &Keyboard Layout to %1" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label (%1 is country name) +#: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:730 +msgid "Adapt &Time Zone to %1" +msgstr "" + +#. busy message +#: language/src/modules/Language.rb:382 +msgid "Downloading installation system language extension..." +msgstr "" + +#. summary label +#. summary label +#: language/src/modules/Language.rb:737 language/src/modules/Language.rb:809 +msgid "Primary Language: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. work-around for following in order not to depend on yast2-packager +#. PackageSlideShow::InitPkgData (false); +#. "value" : PackageSlideShow::total_size_to_install / 1024 , // kilobytes +#: language/src/modules/Language.rb:982 +msgid "Installing Packages..." +msgstr "" + +#. continue/cancel message +#: language/src/modules/Language.rb:1073 +msgid "" +"Translation of the primary language is not complete.\n" +"Some texts may be displayed in English.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup message +#: language/src/modules/Language.rb:1287 +msgid "" +"Only minimal support for the selected language is included on this media.\n" +"Add the Language add-on CD as an additional repository in order to get the appropriate support\n" +"for this language.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup message (user selected CJK language in text mode) +#: language/src/modules/Language.rb:1316 +msgid "" +"The selected language cannot be used in text mode. English is used for\n" +"installation, but the selected language will be used for the new system." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for timezone module +#: timezone/src/clients/timezone.rb:52 +msgid "Time zone configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'summary' action +#: timezone/src/clients/timezone.rb:65 +msgid "Time zone configuration summary" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'set' action +#: timezone/src/clients/timezone.rb:72 +msgid "Set new values for time zone configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'list' action +#: timezone/src/clients/timezone.rb:79 +msgid "List all available time zones" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'set timezone' option +#: timezone/src/clients/timezone.rb:87 +msgid "New time zone" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'set hwclock' option +#: timezone/src/clients/timezone.rb:94 +msgid "New value for hardware clock" +msgstr "" + +#. summary label +#: timezone/src/clients/timezone.rb:174 +msgid "Current Time Zone:\t%1" +msgstr "" + +#. summary label +#: timezone/src/clients/timezone.rb:181 +msgid "Hardware Clock Set To:\t%1" +msgstr "" + +#. summary text (Clock setting) +#. label text (Clock setting) +#. AutoYaST interface function: Return the summary of Timezone configuration as a map. +#. @return summary string (html) +#: timezone/src/clients/timezone.rb:184 timezone/src/modules/Timezone.rb:733 +#: timezone/src/modules/Timezone.rb:969 +msgid "UTC" +msgstr "" + +#. summary text (Clock setting) +#: timezone/src/clients/timezone.rb:186 +msgid "Local time" +msgstr "" + +#. summary label +#: timezone/src/clients/timezone.rb:193 +msgid "Current Time and Date:\t%1" +msgstr "" + +#. error text, %1 is output of 'date' command +#: timezone/src/clients/timezone_proposal.rb:39 +msgid "" +"Time %1 is in the past.\n" +"Set a correct time before starting installation." +msgstr "" + +#. summary item +#: timezone/src/clients/timezone_proposal.rb:85 +msgid "Time Zone" +msgstr "" + +#. menue label text +#: timezone/src/clients/timezone_proposal.rb:87 +msgid "&Time Zone" +msgstr "" + +#. help for time calculation basis: +#. hardware clock references local time or UTC? +#: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:105 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Specify whether your machine is set to local time or UTC in <b>Hardware Clock Set To</b>.\n" +"Most PCs that also have other operating systems installed (such as Microsoft\n" +"Windows) use local time.\n" +"Machines that have only Linux installed are usually\n" +"set to Universal Time Coordinated (UTC).\n" +"If the hardware clock is set to UTC, your system can switch from standard time\n" +"to daylight saving time and back automatically.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text: extra note about localtime +#: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:118 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Note: The internal system clock as used by the Linux kernel must\n" +"always be in UTC, because this is the reference for the correct localtime\n" +"in user space. If you are choosing localtime for CMOS clock,\n" +"check the user manual for background information about side effects.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. warning popup, in case local time is selected (bnc#732769) +#: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:131 +msgid "" +"\n" +"You selected local time, but only Linux seems to be installed on your system.\n" +"In such case, it is strongly recommended to use UTC, and to click Cancel.\n" +"\n" +"If you want to keep local time, you must adjust the CMOS clock twice the year\n" +"because of Day Light Saving switches. If you miss to adjust the clock, backups may fail,\n" +"your mail system may drop mail messages, etc.\n" +"\n" +"If you use UTC, Linux will adjust the time automatically.\n" +"\n" +"Do you want to continue with your selection (local time)?" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for set time dialog +#: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:187 +msgid "<p>The current system time and date are displayed. If required, change them to the correct values manually or use Network Time Protocol (NTP).</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, cont. +#: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:191 +msgid "<p>Press <b>Accept</b> to save your changes.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. label text, do not change "DD-MM-YYYY" +#: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:262 +msgid "Current Date in DD-MM-YYYY Format" +msgstr "" + +#. label text, do not change "HH:MM:SS" +#: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:278 +msgid "Current Time in HH:MM:SS Format" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:293 +msgid "Current Date" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:297 +msgid "Current Time" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label (= how to setup time) +#: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:312 +msgid "Manually" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label +#: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:328 +msgid "Change the Time Now" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label +#: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:341 +msgid "Synchronize with NTP Server" +msgstr "" + +#. TODO replace help text after ntp_installed, is. +#: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:356 +msgid "Change Date and Time" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text, %1 is entered value +#: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:466 +msgid "" +"Invalid time (HH:MM:SS) %1.\n" +"Enter the correct time.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text, %1 is entered value +#: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:475 +msgid "" +"Invalid date (DD-MM-YYYY) %1.\n" +"Enter the correct date.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. button text +#: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:541 +msgid "Other &Settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#. frame label +#: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:613 +#: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:910 +msgid "Date and Time (NTP is configured)" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#. frame label +#: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:615 +#: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:693 +#: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:912 +msgid "Date and Time" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label +#: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:631 +msgid "&Hardware Clock Set to UTC" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#. label text +#: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:650 +#: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:684 +msgid "&Region" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:657 +#: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:688 +msgid "Time &Zone" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:669 +msgid "Date and Time:" +msgstr "" + +#. help for timezone screen +#: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:791 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p><b><big>Time Zone and Clock Settings</big></b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help for timezone screen +#: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:793 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"To select the time zone to use in your system, first select the <b>Region</b>.\n" +"In <b>Time Zone</b>, then select the appropriate time zone, country, or \n" +"region from those available.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. general help trailer +#: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:810 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"If the current time is not correct, use <b>Change</b> to adjust it.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Screen title for timezone screen +#: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:820 +msgid "Clock and Time Zone" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:945 +msgid "Select a valid time zone." +msgstr "" + +#. label text, Clock setting: local time (not UTC) +#. label text, Clock setting: local time (not UTC) +#: timezone/src/modules/Timezone.rb:737 timezone/src/modules/Timezone.rb:973 +msgid "Local Time" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#. label text +#: timezone/src/modules/Timezone.rb:741 timezone/src/modules/Timezone.rb:977 +msgid "Hardware Clock Set To" +msgstr "" + +#. summary label +#: timezone/src/modules/Timezone.rb:755 +msgid "NTP configured" +msgstr "" + +#. summary label +#: timezone/src/modules/Timezone.rb:981 +msgid "Current Time Zone: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:35 +msgid "English (US)" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:47 +msgid "English (UK)" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:59 +msgid "German" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:71 +msgid "German (with deadkeys)" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:83 +msgid "German (Switzerland)" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:95 +msgid "French" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:107 +msgid "French (Switzerland)" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:119 +msgid "French (Canada)" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:132 +msgid "Canadian (Multilingual)" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:145 +msgid "Spanish" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:157 +msgid "Spanish (Latin America)" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:169 +msgid "Spanish (CP 850)" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:181 +msgid "Italian" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:193 +msgid "Portuguese" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:205 +msgid "Portuguese (Brazil)" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:217 +msgid "Portuguese (Brazil -- US accents)" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:229 +msgid "Greek" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:241 +msgid "Dutch" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:253 +msgid "Danish" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:265 +msgid "Norwegian" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:277 +msgid "Swedish" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:289 +msgid "Finnish" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:301 +msgid "Czech" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:316 +msgid "Czech (qwerty)" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:331 +msgid "Slovak" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:346 +msgid "Slovak (qwerty)" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:361 +msgid "Slovene" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:375 +msgid "Hungarian" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:389 +msgid "Polish" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:403 +msgid "Russian" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:417 +msgid "Serbian" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:429 +msgid "Estonian" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:441 +msgid "Lithuanian" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:453 +msgid "Turkish" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:464 +msgid "Croatian" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:486 +msgid "Japanese" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:498 +msgid "Belgian" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:510 +msgid "Dvorak" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:522 +msgid "Icelandic" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:534 +msgid "Ukrainian" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:556 +msgid "Khmer" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:578 +msgid "Korean" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:600 +msgid "Arabic" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:621 +msgid "Tajik" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:635 +msgid "Traditional Chinese" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:657 +msgid "Simplified Chinese" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:679 +msgid "Romanian" +msgstr "" + +#. keyboard layout +#: keyboard/src/data/keyboard_raw.ycp:700 +msgid "US International" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/crowbar.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/crowbar.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/crowbar.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,466 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-09-28 18:16+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. Command line help text for the Xcrowbar module +#: src/clients/crowbar.rb:51 +msgid "Configuration of crowbar" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button item: target repository is common for all available platform +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:90 +msgid "Common for All" +msgstr "" + +#. target platform name +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:92 +msgid "SLES 11 SP3" +msgstr "" + +#. target platform name +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:94 +msgid "SLES 12" +msgstr "" + +#. combobox label +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:106 +msgid "&Location of Repositories" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:109 +msgid "" +"<p>Here you can edit the location of your <b>Update Repositories</b>.</p>\n" +"<p>\n" +"If repositories are stored at SMT server or SUSE Manager server, it's enought to enter server's URL and the paths\n" +" to repositories will be filled automatically.</p>It is also possible to use custom paths. Some examples of how the URL could look like:\n" +"</p><p>\n" +"<ul>\n" +"<li><i>http://smt.example.com/repo/$RCE/SLES11-SP3-Pool/sle-11-x86_64/</i> for SMT server\n" +"<li><i>http://manager.example.com/ks/dist/child/suse-cloud-3.0-pool-x86_64/sles11-s...</i> for SUSE Manager Server.\n" +"</p><p>\n" +"For detailed description, check the Deployment Guide.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:148 +msgid "Administrator Name" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:158 +msgid "<p>Manage user names and passwords for Crowbar administrators.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:194 +msgid "&Mode" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for the Network mode tab (do not translate bastion) +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:196 +msgid "" +"<p>Here, define a <b>Network Mode</b> with relevant <b>Bonding Policy</b>.</p>\n" +"<p>You can also specify interface names for the bastion network conduits as space-separated list.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:206 +msgid "Bonding &Policy" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:215 +msgid "P&hysical interfaces mapping for bastion network" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for conduit if list +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:224 +msgid "" +"<p>Each physical interface definition needs to fit the pattern\n" +"<tt>[Quantifier][Speed][Order]</tt>.\n" +"Valid examples are <tt>+1g2</tt>, <tt>10g1</tt> or <tt>?1g2</tt>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:254 +msgid "Network" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:255 +msgid "Subnet Address" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:256 +msgid "Network Mask" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:257 +msgid "VLAN" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:275 +msgid "Use &VLAN" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:285 +msgid "VLAN &ID" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:295 +msgid "Rou&ter" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:317 +msgid "Router pre&ference" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:327 +msgid "&Subnet" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:350 +msgid "Net&mask" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:372 +msgid "Broa&dcast" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:382 +msgid "&Add Bridge" +msgstr "" + +#. push button label& +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:391 +msgid "Edit Ran&ges..." +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:402 +msgid "Add &Bastion Network" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:414 +msgid "&IP Address" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:520 +msgid "Name" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:522 src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:695 +msgid "URL" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:526 src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:696 +msgid "Ask On Error" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:531 src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:697 +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:715 +msgid "Target Platform" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:580 +msgid "" +"Repository '%1' already exists.\n" +"Choose a different name." +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:676 +msgid "Server &URL" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:694 +msgid "Repository Name" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:701 +msgid "&Ask On Error" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:707 +msgid "Repository &URL" +msgstr "" + +#. label (hint for user) +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:710 +msgid "Empty URL means that default value will be used." +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:726 +msgid "A&dd Repository" +msgstr "" + +#. combobox item +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:793 +msgid "Remote SMT Server" +msgstr "" + +#. combobox item +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:795 +msgid "SUSE Manager Server" +msgstr "" + +#. combobox item +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:797 +msgid "Custom" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:866 +msgid "User Name" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:868 +msgid "Password" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:870 +msgid "Repeat the Password" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:900 +msgid "User name cannot be empty." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:907 +msgid "" +"The passwords do not match.\n" +"Try again." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:915 +msgid "" +"User '%1' already exists.\n" +"Choose a different name." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1018 +msgid "The interface format '%1' is not valid" +msgstr "" + +#. Returns broadcast address. Based on current netmask and subnet +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1076 +msgid "disabled" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1173 +msgid "" +"The netmask '%1' is invalid.\n" +"%2" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#. error popup +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1184 src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1216 +msgid "" +"The IP address '%1' is invalid.\n" +"%2" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1194 +msgid "" +"The router address '%1' is invalid.\n" +"%2" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1203 +msgid "The router address '%1' is not part of network '%2'." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1225 +msgid "The IP address '%1' is not part of network '%2'." +msgstr "" + +#. popup message +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1246 +msgid "" +"Some address ranges are not part of network '%1'.\n" +"Adapt them using 'Edit ranges' button." +msgstr "" + +#. inputfield label +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1335 +msgid "Min IP Address" +msgstr "" + +#. inputfield label +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1342 +msgid "Max IP Address" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1395 +msgid "The address '%1' is not part of network '%2'." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1407 +msgid "The lowest address must be lower than the highest one." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1431 +msgid "Ranges '%1' and '%2' are overlapping." +msgstr "" + +#. tab header +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1499 +msgid "&User Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. label (hint for user) +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1511 +msgid "If no user is present, user 'crowbar' with default password will be used." +msgstr "" + +#. tab header +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1527 +msgid "N&etwork Mode" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1535 +msgid "Bastion Network" +msgstr "" + +#. tab header +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1578 +msgid "Net&works" +msgstr "" + +#. tab header +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1614 +msgid "Re&positories" +msgstr "" + +#. popup message %1 is FQDN +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1731 +msgid "" +"The Crowbar Admin Server has been deployed. Changing the network is\n" +"currently not supported.\n" +"\n" +"You can visit the Crowbar web UI on http://%1:3000/" +msgstr "" + +#. default dialog caption +#: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1749 +msgid "Crowbar Configuration Overview" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help +#: src/include/crowbar/helps.rb:37 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Initializing Crowbar Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Please wait...<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help +#: src/include/crowbar/helps.rb:41 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Saving Crowbar Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Please wait...<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Overview dialog help +#: src/include/crowbar/helps.rb:45 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Crowbar Configuration Overview</b>\n" +"<br></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Ovreview dialog help +#: src/include/crowbar/helps.rb:49 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"See the product deployment guide for details on the network\n" +"configuration and on using this YaST module.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Initialization dialog caption +#: src/include/crowbar/wizards.rb:87 +msgid "Crowbar Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Initialization dialog contents +#: src/include/crowbar/wizards.rb:89 +msgid "Initializing..." +msgstr "" + +#. Crowbar read dialog caption +#: src/modules/Crowbar.rb:142 +msgid "Initializing crowbar Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage +#: src/modules/Crowbar.rb:153 +msgid "Read the configuraton" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step +#: src/modules/Crowbar.rb:157 +msgid "Reading the configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress finished +#. Progress finished +#: src/modules/Crowbar.rb:159 src/modules/Crowbar.rb:249 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#. Crowbar read dialog caption +#: src/modules/Crowbar.rb:232 +msgid "Saving crowbar Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1/2 +#: src/modules/Crowbar.rb:243 +msgid "Write the settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 1/2 +#: src/modules/Crowbar.rb:247 +msgid "Writing the settings..." +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/dhcp-server.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/dhcp-server.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/dhcp-server.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,2411 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. command line help text for DHCP server module +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:25 +msgid "DHCP server configuration module" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an action +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:35 +msgid "Print the status of the DHCP server" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an action +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:42 +msgid "Enable the DHCP server" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an action +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:49 +msgid "Disable the DHCP server" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an action +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:56 +msgid "Manage individual host settings" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an action +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:63 +msgid "Select the network interface to listen to" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an action +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:70 +msgid "Manage global DHCP options" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an action +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:77 +msgid "Manage DHCP subnet options" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an option +#. command line help text for an option +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:85 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:138 +msgid "List all defined hosts with a fixed address" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an option +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:91 +msgid "Add a new host with a fixed address" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an option +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:97 +msgid "Edit a host with a fixed address" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an option +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:103 +msgid "Delete a host with a fixed address" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an option +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:109 +msgid "The name of the host with a fixed address" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an option +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:116 +msgid "The hardware address of the host with a fixed address" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an option +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:123 +msgid "The hardware type of the host with a fixed address" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an option +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:131 +msgid "The IP address (or hostname) of the host with a fixed address" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an option +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:144 +msgid "Select the network interface to use" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an option +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:151 +msgid "Print the currently used interface and list other available interfaces" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an option +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:157 +msgid "Print current options" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an option +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:163 +msgid "Set a global option" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an option +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:169 +msgid "Option key (for example, ntp-servers)" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an option +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:176 +msgid "Option value (for example, IP address)" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an option +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:183 +msgid "Lowest IP address of the dynamic address assigning range" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an option +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:190 +msgid "Highest IP address of the dynamic address assigning range" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an option +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:197 +msgid "Default lease time in seconds" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an option +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:204 +msgid "Maximum lease time in seconds" +msgstr "" + +#. status information for command line +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:245 +msgid "DHCP server is enabled" +msgstr "" + +#. status information for command line +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:247 +msgid "DHCP server is disabled" +msgstr "" + +#. command-line text output, %1 is host name +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:300 +msgid "Host: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. command-line text output, %1 is hardwarre address +#. and hardware type (eg. "ethernet 11:22:33:44:55:66") +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:306 +msgid "Hardware: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. command-line text output, %1 is IP address +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:312 +msgid "IP Address: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. command-line error report +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:327 +msgid "Hostname not specified." +msgstr "" + +#. command-line error report +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:337 +msgid "Specified host does not exist." +msgstr "" + +#. to be eventually pasted to "Selected interfaces: %1" +#. to be eventually pasted to "Other interfaces: %1" +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:398 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:402 +msgid "None" +msgstr "" + +#. command-line text output, %1 is list of network interfaces +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:406 +msgid "Selected Interfaces: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. command-line text output, %1 is list of network interfaces +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:409 +msgid "Other Interfaces: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. command-line error report +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:417 +msgid "Specified interface does not exist." +msgstr "" + +#. command-line error report +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:426 +msgid "Operation with the interface not specified." +msgstr "" + +#. command-line error report +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:452 +msgid "Option key must be set." +msgstr "" + +#. command-line error report +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:457 +msgid "Value must be set." +msgstr "" + +#. command-line output text, %1 and %1 are IP addresses +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:501 +msgid "Address Range: %1-%2" +msgstr "" + +#. command-line output text, %1 is integer +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:510 +msgid "Default Lease Time: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. command-line output text, %1 is integer +#: src/include/dhcp-server/commandline.rb:518 +msgid "Maximum Lease Time: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. yes-no popup +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs.rb:52 +msgid "Saving the configuration failed. Change the settings?" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs.rb:84 +msgid "DHCP Server Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#. Initialize the widget +#. @param [String] id any widget id +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs.rb:116 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/widgets.rb:541 +msgid "Global Options" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs.rb:151 +msgid "Subnet Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs.rb:185 +msgid "Host with Fixed Address" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs.rb:222 +msgid "Shared Network" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs.rb:256 +msgid "Pool of Addresses" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs.rb:291 +msgid "Group-Specific Options" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs.rb:325 +msgid "Class" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs.rb:374 +msgid "&Subnet" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs.rb:376 +msgid "&Host" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs.rb:378 +msgid "Shared &Network" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs.rb:380 +msgid "&Group" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs.rb:382 +msgid "&Pool of Addresses" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs.rb:384 +msgid "&Class" +msgstr "" + +#. frame +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs.rb:399 +msgid "Declaration Types" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs.rb:407 +msgid "Declaration Type" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs.rb:453 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs.rb:493 +msgid "Interface Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#. item of a menu button +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs.rb:522 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/widgets.rb:1118 +msgid "TSIG Key Management" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:47 +msgid "Days" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:49 +msgid "Hours" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:51 +msgid "Minutes" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:53 +msgid "Seconds" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:93 +msgid "DHCP Server: Start-Up" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#. tree item +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:95 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:97 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:181 +msgid "Start-Up" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:115 +msgid "DHCP Server: Card Selection" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#. tree item +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:117 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:119 +msgid "Card Selection" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:129 +msgid "DHCP Server: Global Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#. tree item +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:133 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:135 +msgid "Global Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:141 +msgid "DHCP Server: Dynamic DHCP" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#. tree item +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:143 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:145 +msgid "Dynamic DHCP" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:151 +msgid "DHCP Server: Host Management" +msgstr "" + +#. tree item +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:155 +msgid "Host Management" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:160 +msgid "DHCP Server: Expert Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. tree item +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:164 +msgid "Expert Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:205 +msgid "When &Booting" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:207 +msgid "&Manually" +msgstr "" + +#. part of help text - radio button label, NO SHORTCUT!!! +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:211 +msgid "When Booting" +msgstr "" + +#. part of help text - radio button label, NO SHORTCUT!!! +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:213 +msgid "Manually" +msgstr "" + +#. label - service status +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:221 +msgid "DHCP server is running" +msgstr "" + +#. label - service status +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:225 +msgid "DHCP server is not running" +msgstr "" + +#. push button +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:229 +msgid "&Start DHCP Server Now" +msgstr "" + +#. push button +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:233 +msgid "S&top DHCP Server Now" +msgstr "" + +#. push button +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:241 +msgid "Save Settings and Restart DHCP Server &Now" +msgstr "" + +#. part of help text - push button label, NO SHORTCUT!!! +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:247 +msgid "Start DHCP Server Now" +msgstr "" + +#. part of help text - push button label, NO SHORTCUT!!! +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:249 +msgid "Stop DHCP Server Now" +msgstr "" + +#. part of help text - push button label, NO SHORTCUT!!! +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:251 +msgid "Save Settings and Restart DHCP Server Now" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:371 +msgid "DHCP Server Start-up Arguments" +msgstr "" + +#. Table - listing available network cards +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:443 +msgid "Network Cards for DHCP Server" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: table header item +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:449 +msgid "Selected" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: table header item +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:451 +msgid "Interface Name" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: table header item +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:453 +msgid "Device Name" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: table header item +#. Table header item - IP of the host +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:455 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1650 +msgid "IP" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: a push-button +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:462 +msgid "&Select" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: a push-button +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:464 +msgid "&Deselect" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Table items; Informs that the IP is a DHCP Address +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:533 +msgid "DHCP address" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup error, DHCP Server needs to run on one or more interfaces, +#. currently no one is selected +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:608 +msgid "At least one network interface must be selected." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup error, DHCP Server requires selected interface to have +#. at least minimal configuration +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:616 +msgid "" +"One or more selected network interfaces is not configured (no assigned IP address \n" +"and netmask)." +msgstr "" + +#. configuration will be saved in ldap? +#. check box +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:632 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/widgets.rb:1079 +msgid "&LDAP Support" +msgstr "" + +#. FATE #227, comments #5 and #17 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:639 +msgid "DHCP Server &Name (optional)" +msgstr "" + +#. Textentry with name of the domain +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:652 +msgid "&Domain Name" +msgstr "" + +#. Textentry with IP address of primary name server +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:654 +msgid "&Primary Name Server IP" +msgstr "" + +#. Textentry with IP address of secondary name server +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:657 +msgid "&Secondary Name Server IP" +msgstr "" + +#. Textentry with IP address of default router +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:660 +msgid "Default &Gateway (Router) " +msgstr "" + +#. Textentry with IP address of time server +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:665 +msgid "NTP &Time Server" +msgstr "" + +#. Textentry with IP address of print server +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:667 +msgid "&Print Server" +msgstr "" + +#. Textentry with IP address of WINS (Windows Internet Naming Service) server +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:669 +msgid "&WINS Server" +msgstr "" + +#. Textentry with default lease time of IP address from dhcp server +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:674 +msgid "Default &Lease Time" +msgstr "" + +#. Units for defaultleasetime +#. Combobox - type of units for lease time +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:683 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1139 +msgid "&Units" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#. error popup +#. error popup +#. error popup +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1017 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1029 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1041 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1053 +msgid "The specified value is not a valid hostname or IP address." +msgstr "" + +#. frame +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1067 +msgid "Subnet Information" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: informative text entry (filled up, disabled) +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1073 +msgid "Current &Network" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: informative text entry (filled up, disabled) +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1078 +msgid "Current Net&mask" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: informative text entry (filled up, disabled) +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1083 +msgid "Netmask Bi&ts" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#. TRANSLATORS: text entry +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1090 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-dialogs.rb:81 +msgid "Min&imum IP Address" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#. TRANSLATORS: text entry +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1095 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-dialogs.rb:83 +msgid "Ma&ximum IP Address" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1103 +msgid "IP Address Range" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#. TRANSLATORS: text entry +#. TRANSLATORS: text entry +#. TRANSLATORS: text entry +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1109 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-dialogs.rb:93 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:356 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:917 +msgid "&First IP Address" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#. TRANSLATORS: text entry +#. TRANSLATORS: text entry +#. TRANSLATORS: text entry +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1114 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-dialogs.rb:95 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:358 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:919 +msgid "&Last IP Address" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1118 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/options.rb:1094 +msgid "Allow Dynamic &BOOTP" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1124 +msgid "Lease Time" +msgstr "" + +#. Textentry label - lease time for IPs in the range +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1130 +msgid "&Default" +msgstr "" + +#. TextEntryLabel - max. time for leasing of IPs from the range +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1148 +msgid "&Maximum" +msgstr "" + +#. Combobox - type of units for max lease time +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1158 +msgid "Uni&ts" +msgstr "" + +#. zone is not maintained by the DNS server +#. zone is maintained and it is a 'master' +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1360 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1369 +msgid "Create New DNS Zone from Scratch" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1371 +msgid "Edit Current DNS Zone" +msgstr "" + +#. zone is maintained but it is not a 'master' +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1377 +msgid "Get Current Zone Information" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1385 +msgid "&Synchronize DNS Server..." +msgstr "" + +#. Show DNS Zone Information +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1414 +msgid "" +"DNS zone %1 is not a master zone.\n" +"Therefore, you cannot change it here.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. A popup error text +#. A popup error text +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1547 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1555 +msgid "Enter values for both ends of the IP address range." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup error message +#. %1 is the tested IP which should match network %2 and netmask %3 +#. TRANSLATORS: popup error message +#. %1 is the tested IP which should match network %2 and netmask %3 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1594 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1617 +msgid "" +"The dynamic DHCP address range must be in the same network as the DHCP server.\n" +"IP %1 does not match the network %2/%3." +msgstr "" + +#. Label of the registered hosts table +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1642 +msgid "Registered Host" +msgstr "" + +#. Table header item - Name of the host +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1648 +msgid "Name" +msgstr "" + +#. MAC address of the host +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1652 +msgid "Hardware Address" +msgstr "" + +#. Network type of the host +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1654 +msgid "Type" +msgstr "" + +#. Frame label - configuration of particular host +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1661 +msgid "List Setup" +msgstr "" + +#. Textentry label - name of the host +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1669 +msgid "&Name" +msgstr "" + +#. Textentry label - IP address of the host +#. TRANSLATORS: text entry +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1674 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:229 +msgid "&IP Address" +msgstr "" + +#. Textentry label - hardware (mac) address of the host +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1682 +msgid "&Hardware Address" +msgstr "" + +#. Radiobutton label - network type of the host +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1689 +msgid "&Ethernet" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1691 +msgid "&Token Ring" +msgstr "" + +#. Pushbutton label - change host in list +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1706 +msgid "C&hange in List" +msgstr "" + +#. Pushbutton label - delete host from list +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1709 +msgid "Dele&te from List" +msgstr "" + +#. now, fill the dialog +#. combo box entry, networking technology name +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1810 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/options.rb:1039 +msgid "Ethernet" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box entry, networking technology name +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1811 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/options.rb:1041 +msgid "Token Ring" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#. error popup +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1885 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/options.rb:935 +msgid "The hardware address is invalid.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1931 +msgid "The hardware address must be unique." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1941 +msgid "The hostname cannot be empty." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup, %1 is host name +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1951 +msgid "A host named %1 already exists." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#. FIXME: text? +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1969 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2033 +msgid "Enter a host IP." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1984 +msgid "The hardware address must be defined." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#. yes-no popup +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2005 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2020 +msgid "Select a host first." +msgstr "" + +#. checking new MAC +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2047 +msgid "The input value must be defined." +msgstr "" + +#. yes-no popup +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2086 +msgid "" +"If you enter the expert settings, you cannot return \n" +"to this dialog. You may be able to display this dialog \n" +"by saving the changes and restarting the module. \n" +"If too complex a configuration is set, the expert \n" +"settings dialog is displayed when you\n" +"start the DHCP server module.\n" +"\n" +"Continue?" +msgstr "" + +#. remove leading '-' +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2133 +msgid "\"-%1\" is not a valid DHCP server commandline option" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2144 +msgid "DHCP server commandline option \"-%1\" requires an argument" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2155 +msgid "" +"You have specified an alternate configuration file for the DHCP server.\n" +"\n" +"YaST does not supported this. The DHCP server module can only read and write\n" +"/etc/dhcpd.conf. The new configuration from %1 will not be imported. All\n" +"changes will be saved to the default configuration file.\n" +" \n" +"Really continue?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption, %1 is step number +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2236 +msgid "DHCP Server Wizard (%1 of 4)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: +#. DNS Wizard - step 3 (part 4) +#. and +#. DNS for Experts (editing current settings) (part 5) +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-helps.rb:18 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Adding a New Range of DNS Records</big></b><br />\n" +"<b>First IP Address</b> defines\n" +"the starting address of the range and <b>Last IP Address</b> defines\n" +"the last one. <b>Hostname Base</b> is a string that determines how hostnames\n" +"are created (such as <tt>dhcp-%i</tt> or <tt>e25-%i-a</tt>).\n" +"<tt>%i</tt> is replaced with the number of the host in the range.\n" +"If no <tt>%i</tt> is defined, the number is added at the end of the\n" +"string. <tt>%i</tt> can be used only once in <b>Hostname Base</b>.\n" +"<b>Start</b> defines the first number that is used for the first\n" +"hostname. Hostnames are created incrementally.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: DNS Wizard - step 1 (part 1) +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-helps.rb:33 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>DNS Wizard</big></b><br />\n" +"In this wizard, create a new DNS zone\n" +"directly from the DHCP server configuration. This DNS zone is important\n" +"if you want to identify your DHCP clients by hostname. The DNS zone\n" +"translates names to the assigned IP addresses. You can also\n" +"create a reverse zone that translates IP addresses to names.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: DNS Wizard - step 1 (part 2) +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-helps.rb:42 +msgid "" +"<p><b>New Zone Name</b> or <b>Reverse Zone Name</b>\n" +"are taken from your current DHCP server and network settings and cannot be changed.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: DNS Wizard - step 1 (part 3) +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-helps.rb:46 +msgid "" +"<p>Select <b>Also Create Reverse Zone</b> to create a zone \n" +"to contain reverse entries of the main DNS zone.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: DNS Wizard - step 2 (part 1) +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-helps.rb:50 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>Name Servers</b></big><br />\n" +"Name servers are needed for proper DNS server functionality.\n" +"They administer all the DNS zone records.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: DNS Wizard - step 2 (part 2) +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-helps.rb:56 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>DNS Queries</big></b><br />\n" +"Every DNS query (for example searching an IP address for a\n" +"hostname in a DNS zone) first asks the parent zone\n" +"(<tt>com</tt> for <tt>example.com</tt>) for the current zone\n" +"name servers. Then it sends a DNS query to these name servers requesting\n" +"the desired IP address.<br />\n" +"Therefore, always specify the current DNS server hostname as one of\n" +"the zone name servers.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: DNS Wizard - step 2 (part 3) +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-helps.rb:67 +msgid "" +"<p>To add a <b>New Name Server</b>, click <b>Add</b>, complete the form,\n" +"then click <b>Ok</b>. If the new name server name is included in the current\n" +"DNS zone, also enter its IP address. This is mandatory because it is used\n" +"during the zone creation.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: DNS Wizard - step 2 (part 4) +#. TRANSLATORS: DNS Wizard - step 3 (part 5) +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-helps.rb:74 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-helps.rb:102 +msgid "" +"<p>To edit or delete an entry, select it and click\n" +"<b>Edit</b> or <b>Delete</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: DNS Wizard - step 3 (part 1) +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-helps.rb:80 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>DNS Records</big></b><br />\n" +"Define DNS hostnames for all DHCP clients. You do not need to define\n" +"all hostnames one by one. Set simple rules for how\n" +"the hostnames are created. These rules define the ranges of IP addresses to use\n" +"and the string from which hostnames are generated for a range.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: DNS Wizard - step 3 (part 2) +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-helps.rb:88 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Range of DNS Records</big></b><br />\n" +"For example, create a set of hostnames from <tt>dhcp-133-a</tt>\n" +"to <tt>dhcp-233-a</tt> with IP addresses from <tt>192.168.5.88</tt>\n" +"to <tt>192.168.5.188</tt>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: DNS Wizard - step 3 (part 3) +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-helps.rb:95 +msgid "" +"<p>To add a new range of DNS records, click <b>Add</b>,\n" +"complete the form, then click <b>Ok</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: DNS Wizard - summary (part 1) +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-helps.rb:107 +msgid "" +"<p>This is a summary of all data\n" +"entered in the configuration wizard so far.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: DNS Wizard - summary (part 2) +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-helps.rb:111 +msgid "" +"<p>Click <b>Accept</b> to save the settings for\n" +"the DNS server and return to the DHCP server configuration.\n" +"The settings are not saved permanently until you complete the \n" +"DHCP server configuration.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: DNS for Experts (editing current settings) (part 1) +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-helps.rb:119 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>DNS Synchronization</big></b><br />\n" +"This is an advanced tool for editing DNS server settings to match your\n" +"DHCP settings. Only 'A' records--DNS records that convert hostnames to\n" +"IP addresses--are maintained here.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: DNS for Experts (editing current settings) (part 2) +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-helps.rb:126 +msgid "" +"<b>Current Subnet</b> and <b>Netmask</b> show the current network settings.\n" +"<b>Domain</b> is taken from the current DHCP configuration.\n" +"<b>First IP Address</b> and <b>Second IP Address</b> match the current\n" +"Dynamic DHCP range.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: DNS for Experts (editing current settings) (part 3) +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-helps.rb:133 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"To create a DNS zone from scratch, use <b>Run Wizard</b>\n" +"from <b>Special Tasks</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: DNS for Experts (editing current settings) (part 4) +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-helps.rb:139 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +" To create or remove a single DNS record,\n" +"click <b>Add</b> or <b>Delete</b>.\n" +"To synchronize the DNS entries with their reverse forms in the corresponding\n" +"reverse zone, select <b>Synchronize with Reverse Zone</b>.\n" +"Use <b>Remove DNS Records Matching Range</b> \n" +"from <b>Special Tasks</b> to delete any information relating to this range of IP addresses from the DNS server. To create a new range of DNS records, select\n" +"<b>Add New Range of DNS Records</b> from <b>Special Tasks</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. old_range: $[ +#. "base" : "dhcp-%", +#. "start" : 0, +#. "from" : "192.168.10.1", +#. "to" : "192.168.10.100" +#. ] +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog caption +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-dialogs.rb:65 +msgid "Add New DNS Record Range" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog caption +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-dialogs.rb:68 +msgid "Edit DNS Record Range" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: text entry +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-dialogs.rb:87 +msgid "&Hostname Base" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: text entry +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-dialogs.rb:89 +msgid "&Start" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup error, %1 is the first IP of the range, %2 is the last one +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-dialogs.rb:154 +msgid "" +"Internal error.\n" +"Cannot create IP range from %1 and %2." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup error, %1 is an IP address +#. %2 is a network, %3 is a netmask +#. network bits must be the same in both IP and Network +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-dialogs.rb:179 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-dialogs.rb:195 +msgid "" +"IP address %1 does not match\n" +"the current network %2/%3.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup error +#. TRANSLATORS: popup error +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-dialogs.rb:228 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:455 +msgid "The last IP address must be higher than the first one." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup error, %1 an IP address +#. %2 is the first IP address of the range, %3 is the last one +#. TRANSLATORS: popup error, %1 an IP address +#. %2 is the first IP address of the range, %3 is the last one +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-dialogs.rb:246 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-dialogs.rb:272 +msgid "" +"The IP address %1 is\n" +"outside the current\n" +"dynamic DHCP range %2-%3.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup error '%i' is a special string, do not translate it, please +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-dialogs.rb:422 +msgid "There can be only one '%i' in the hostname base string." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup error, followed by a newline and a valid hostname description +#. TRANSLATORS: popup error, followed by a newline and a valid hostname description +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-dialogs.rb:453 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:256 +msgid "Invalid hostname." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup error, followed by a newline and a valid IPv4 description +#. TRANSLATORS: popup error, followed by a newline and a valid IPv4 description +#. TRANSLATORS: poupu error, followed by a newlone and a valid IPv4 description +#. TRANSLATORS: popup error, followed by a newline and a valid IPv4 description +#. TRANSLATORS: popup error, followed by a newline and a valid IPv4 description +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-dialogs.rb:462 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-dialogs.rb:490 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:265 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:394 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:402 +msgid "Invalid IP address." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup error, %1 is an IP address +#. %2 is the first IP address of the range, %3 is the last one +#. TRANSLATORS: popup error, %1 is an IP address +#. %2 is the first IP address of the range, %3 is the last one +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-dialogs.rb:475 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-dialogs.rb:503 +msgid "" +"IP address %1 is not in the range of allowed\n" +"IP addresses (%2-%3) defined in the DHCP server.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: busy message +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:157 +msgid "Regenerating DNS zone entries..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog frame label +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:224 +msgid "Adding a New DNS Record" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: text entry +#. TRANSLATORS: text entry +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:227 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:148 +msgid "&Hostname" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: busy message +#. %1 is the first IP address of the range, %2 is the last one +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:317 +msgid "Adding DHCP range %1-%2 to the DNS server..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog frame label +#. TRANSLATORS: menu entry +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:353 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:955 +msgid "Removing DNS Records Matching Range" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: busy message +#. %1 is the first IP address of the range, %2 is the last one +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:465 +msgid "Removing records in the range %1-%2 from the DNS server..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup error, %1 is the zone name +#. please, do not translate 'master' (exact DNS definition) +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:556 +msgid "" +"Zone %1 is not of the type master.\n" +"The DNS server cannot write any records to it.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup question, %1 is a DNS zone name +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:570 +msgid "" +"Zone %1 does not yet exist in the current DNS server configuration.\n" +"Create it?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup error, %1 is a zone name +#. TRANSLATORS: error message, %1 is a zone name +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:590 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:1107 +msgid "Cannot create zone %1." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: busy message +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:815 +msgid "Synchronizing DNS reverse records..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup question - canceling dns synchronization with dhcp +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:860 +msgid "" +"If you cancel, all changes made to the DNS server will be lost.\n" +"Really cancel this operation?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: text entry +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:909 +msgid "&Domain" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: text entry +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:911 +msgid "&Network" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: text entry +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:913 +msgid "Net&mask" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: table label +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:923 +msgid "DNS Zone Records" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: table header item +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:928 +msgid "Hostname" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: table header item +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:930 +msgid "Assigned IP" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: push button +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:937 +msgid "&Add..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: menu button +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:945 +msgid "&Special Tasks" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: menu entry +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:953 +msgid "Add New Range of DNS Records" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: menu entry +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:959 +msgid "Run Wizard to Rewrite the DNS Zone from Scratch" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: checkbox, %1 is a zone name +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:1031 +msgid "Synchronize with Reverse Zone %1" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog caption +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:1084 +msgid "DHCP Server: DNS Server Synchronization" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup headline +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:56 +msgid "Aborting the Wizard" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup question +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:58 +msgid "" +"All changes made in the wizard will be lost.\n" +"Really abort?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog frame label +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:121 +msgid "Add a New Name Server" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: dialgo frame label +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:128 +msgid "Edit Name Server" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: text entry +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:150 +msgid "Server &IP" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup question +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:234 +msgid "" +"No IP address has been provided for a name server in the current DNS zone.\n" +"This may not work because each zone needs the name and IP of its name server defined. \n" +"Really use the current settings?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup error, %1 si a server name +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:255 +msgid "Name server %1 already exists in the configuration." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup error +#. %1 the first IP address og 'another range' +#. %2 is the last one +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:319 +msgid "" +"This new range of DNS entries is already covered by\n" +"another one (%1-%2).\n" +"Really use the new one?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Adding new range definition +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:428 +msgid "At least one name server must be defined." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: a dialog caption +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:444 +msgid "DHCP Server: New DNS Zone--Step 1 of 3" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: text entry +#. TRANSLATORS: text entry +#. TRANSLATORS: text entry +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:455 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:505 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:562 +msgid "New &Zone Name" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: text entry +#. TRANSLATORS: text entry +#. TRANSLATORS: text entry +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:460 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:510 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:567 +msgid "&Current Network" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: check box +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:468 +msgid "&Also Create Reverse Zone" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: a dialog caption +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:494 +msgid "DHCP Server: Zone Name Servers--Step 2 of 3" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: table label +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:518 +msgid "Current Name Servers" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: table header item +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:523 +msgid "Server Name" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: table header item +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:525 +msgid "IP (Optional)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: push button +#. TRANSLATORS: push button +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:531 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:592 +msgid "A&dd..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: push button +#. TRANSLATORS: push button +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:533 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:594 +msgid "&Edit..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: a dialog caption +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:551 +msgid "DHCP Server: DNS Records--Step 3 of 3" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: table header label +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:575 +msgid "DNS Records for DHCP Clients" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: table header item +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:580 +msgid "Hostname Base" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: table header item +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:582 +msgid "Number to Start With" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: table header item +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:584 +msgid "From IP" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: table header item +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:586 +msgid "To IP" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: a dialog caption +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:612 +msgid "DHCP Server: DNS Records--Summary" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: text entry +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:641 +msgid "Re&verse Zone Name" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: HTML summary item +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:835 +msgid "<b>Zone Name:</b> %1" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: HTML summary item +#. TRANSLATORS: HTML summary note +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:844 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:867 +msgid "(Replacing the current zone with the new one)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: HTML summary item +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:856 +msgid "<b>Reverse Zone Name:</b> %1" +msgstr "" + +#. name servers +#. TRANSLATORS: html summary header +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:877 +msgid "Zone Name Servers:" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: HTML summary item, %1 is a hostname, %2 is an IP address +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:886 +msgid "Hostname: %1, IP: %2" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: IP address for the HTML summary item is not defined +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:889 +msgid "Not defined" +msgstr "" + +#. dhcp ranges +#. TRANSLATORS: HTML summary header +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:900 +msgid "Ranges of DNS Hosts:" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: HTML summary item +#. %1 is the first IP of the range, %2 is the last one +#. %3 defines the hostname base (e.g., 'dhcp-%i') +#. %4 is a number 'start' used incremental replacement for '%i' +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:912 +msgid "Range: %1-%2<br />Hostname Base: %3, Starting With: %4" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup error +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:1011 +msgid "At least one DNS record must be set." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: error message, %1 is a zone name +#. TRANSLATORS: error message, %1 is a reverse zone name +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:1087 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:1197 +msgid "Cannot remove zone %1." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: error message, %1 is a zone name +#. TRANSLATORS: error message, %1 is a zone name +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:1151 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:1246 +msgid "Cannot add name servers to zone %1." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: error message +#. TRANSLATORS: error message +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:1172 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:1268 +msgid "Cannot add zone DNS records." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: error message, %1 is a reverse zone name +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:1218 +msgid "Cannot create reverse zone %1." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: busy message +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:1279 +msgid "Creating DNS zone..." +msgstr "" + +#. restore previous settings +#. TRANSLATORS: busy message +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:1296 +msgid "Restoring previous DNS settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup question, %1 is a list of errors +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:1307 +msgid "" +"Errors occurred during DNS zone creation:\n" +"\n" +"%1\n" +"Return to the wizard?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup message +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:1326 +msgid "The DNS zone was created successfully." +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/1 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:16 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Initializing DHCP Server Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Please wait...</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/1 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:20 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Saving DHCP Server Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Please wait...</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/2 +#. help text 1/2 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:24 src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:233 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Network Interfaces</big></b><br>\n" +"Select the network interfaces to which the DHCP server should listen from\n" +"<b>Available Interfaces</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/2 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:30 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Firewall Settings</big></b><br>\n" +"To open the firewall to allow access to the service from \n" +"remote computers through the selected interface, set\n" +"<b>Open Firewall for Selected Interface</b>. \n" +"This option is only available if the firewall\n" +"is enabled.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/5 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:39 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>DHCP Server</big></b></p>\n" +"<p>To run the DHCP server every time your computer is started, set\n" +"<b>Start DHCP Server</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/5 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:45 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"To run the DHCP server in chroot jail, set\n" +"<b>Run DHCP Server in Chroot Jail</b>. Starting any daemon in a chroot jail\n" +"is more secure and strongly recommended.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 3/5 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:52 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"To store the DHCP configuration in LDAP,\n" +"enable <b>LDAP Support</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 4/5 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:58 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Configured Declarations</b> shows the configuration options in use.\n" +"To modify an existing declaration, select it and click <b>Edit</b>.\n" +"To add a new declaration, select a declaration that should include\n" +"the new declaration and click <b>Add</b>.\n" +"To delete a declaration, select it and click <b>Delete</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 5/5 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:66 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Advanced Functions</big></b><br>\n" +"Use <b>Advanced</b> to display the log of the DHCP server,\n" +"change network interfaces to which the DHCP server listens,\n" +"or manage TSIG keys that can be used for authentication of \n" +"dynamic DNS updates.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/3, alt. 1 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:74 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Subnet Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Set the <b>Network Address</b> and <b>Network Mask</b> of the subnet.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/3, alt. 1 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:78 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Host with Fixed Address</big></b><br>\n" +"Set the name of the host for which to set the fixed address or other\n" +"special options in <b>Hostname</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/3, alt. 3 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:84 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Group-Specific Options</big></b><br>\n" +"Set the name of the group of declarations in <b>Group Name</b>. \n" +"It is just for your identification.\n" +"The name does not affect behavior of the DHCP server.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/3, alt. 4 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:91 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Pool of Addresses</big></b><br>\n" +"Set the name of the pool of addresses in <b>Pool Name</b>. \n" +"It is just for your identification.\n" +"The name does not affect behavior of the DHCP server.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/3, alt. 5 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:98 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Shared Network</big></b><br>\n" +"Set the name for the shared network in <b>Shared Network Name</b>. \n" +"It is just for your identification.\n" +"The name does not affect behavior of the DHCP server.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/3, alt. 6 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:105 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Class</big></b><br>\n" +"Set the name of the class of hosts in <b>Class Name</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/3 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:109 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"To edit DHCP options, choose the appropriate\n" +"entry of the table then click <b>Edit</b>.\n" +"To add a new option, use <b>Add</b>. To remove\n" +"an option, select it and click <b>Delete</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 3/3 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:117 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"To adjust dynamic DNS for hosts of this subnet, use <b>Dynamic DNS</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/4 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:121 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Enabling Dynamic DNS</big></b><br>\n" +"To enable Dynamic DNS updates for this subnet, set\n" +"<b>Enable Dynamic DNS for This Subnet</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/4 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:127 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>TSIG Key</big></b><br>\n" +"To make Dynamic DNS updates, the authentication key must be set. Use\n" +"<b>TSIG Key</b> to select the key to use for authentication. The key must\n" +"be the same for both DHCP and DNS servers. Specify the key for both forward\n" +"and reverse zone.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 3/4 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:135 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Global DHCP Server Settings</big></b><br>\n" +"Global settings of DHCP server must be updated to make Dynamic\n" +"DNS work properly. To do it automatically, set\n" +"<b>Update Global Dynamic DNS Settings</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 4/4 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:142 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Zones to Update</big></b><br>\n" +"Specify forward and reverse zones to update. For both, also specify \n" +"their primary name server. If the name server runs on the same host as the DHCP\n" +"server, you can leave the fields empty.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:149 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>DHCP Server Start-Up Arguments</big></b><br>\n" +"Here you can specify parameters that you want DHCP Server to be started with \n" +"(e.g. \"-p 1234\") for a non-standard port to listen on). For all possible options,\n" +"consult dhcpd manual page. If left blank, default values will be used.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Wizard Installation - Step 1 (version for expert UI) +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:156 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Network Card Selection</big></b><br>\n" +"Select one or more of the listed network cards to use for the DHCP server.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Optional field - used with LDAP support +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:160 +msgid "" +"Optionally, you can also specify <b>DHCP Server Name</b>\n" +"(the name of dhcpServer LDAP object), if it differs from your hostname.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Wizard Installation - Step 2 1/9 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:164 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Global Settings</big></b><br>\n" +"Here, make several DHCP settings.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Wizard Installation - Step 2 2/9 +#. Wizard Installation - Step 2 3/9 (2 is removed) +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:171 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Domain Name</b> sets the domain for which the DHCP server\n" +"leases IPs to clients.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Wizard Installation - Step 2 4/9 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:175 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Primary Name Server IP</b> and <b>Secondary Name Server IP</b> \n" +"offer these name servers to the DHCP clients.\n" +"These values must be IP addresses.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Wizard Installation - Step 2 5/9 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:181 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Default Gateway</b> inserts this\n" +"value as the default route in the routing table of clients.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Wizard Installation - Step 2 6/9 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:185 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Time Server</b> tells clients to use this server\n" +"for time synchronization.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Wizard Installation - Step 2 7/9 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:189 +msgid "<p><b>Print Server</b> offers this server as the default print server.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Wizard Installation - Step 2 8/9 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:193 +msgid "" +"<p><b>WINS Server</b> offers this server as the WINS server\n" +"(Windows Internet Naming Service).</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Wizard Installation - Step 2 9/9 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:197 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Default Lease Time</b> sets the time after which the leased IP expires\n" +"and the client must ask for an IP again.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Wizard Installation - Step 3 1/4 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:201 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Subnet Information</big></b></br>\n" +"View information about the current subnet, such as its address,\n" +"netmask, minimum and maximum IP addresses available for the clients.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Wizard Installation - Step 3 2/4 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:208 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>IP Address Range</big></b><br>\n" +"Set the <b>First IP Address</b> and the <b>Last IP Address</b>\n" +"of the address range to be leased to clients. These addresses must have the same netmask.\n" +"For instance, <tt>192.168.1.1</tt> and <tt>192.168.1.64</tt>. Check the <b>\n" +"Allow Dynamic BOOTP</b> flag if the specified range may be dynamically\n" +"assigned to BOOTP clients as well as DHCP clients</p>.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Wizard Installation - Step 3 3/4 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:217 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Lease Time</big></b><br>\n" +"Set the <b>Default</b> lease time for the current IP address range,\n" +"which sets the optimal IP refreshing time for clients.<br></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Wizard Installation - Step 3 4/4 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:223 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Maximum</b> (optional value) sets the maximum time period\n" +"for which this IP is blocked for the client on the DHCP server.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Help text +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:227 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Expert Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"To enter the complete configuration of the DHCP server, click\n" +"<b>DHCP Server Expert Configuration</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. host management help 1/3 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:239 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Host Management</big></b><br>\n" +"Use this dialog to edit hosts with static address binding.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. host management help 1/3 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:243 +msgid "" +"<p>To add a new new host, set its <b>Name</b>,\n" +"<b>Hardware Address</b>, and <b>IP Address</b>\n" +"then click <b>Add</b>.</p>\n" +"<p>To modify a configured host, select it in the table,\n" +"change all values, and click <b>Change in List</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. host management help 1/3 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:251 +msgid "<p>To remove a host, select it and click <b>Delete from List</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/7 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:263 +msgid "<p>Select the type of declaration to add.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/7, optional +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:269 +msgid "" +"<p>To add a network declaration,\n" +"select <b>Subnet</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 3/7, optional +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:276 +msgid "" +"<p>To add a host that needs special parameters\n" +"(usually a fixed address), select <b>Host</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 4/7, optional +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:285 +msgid "" +"<p>To add a shared network (physical network with\n" +"multiple logical networks), select <b>Shared Network</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 5/7, optional +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:294 +msgid "" +"<p>To add a group of other declarations (usually\n" +"if they should share some settings), select <b>Group</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 6/7, optional +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:303 +msgid "" +"<p>To add a pool of addresses that will be treated\n" +"differently than other address pools although they are in the same\n" +"subnet, select <b>Pool of Addresses</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 7/7, optional +#: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:314 +msgid "" +"<p>To create a condition class that can be used for\n" +"handling clients differently depending on the class to which they belong,\n" +"select <b>Class</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. selection box +#. selection box +#. selection box +#: src/include/dhcp-server/options.rb:454 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/options.rb:475 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/options.rb:568 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/options.rb:781 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/options.rb:857 +msgid "A&ddresses" +msgstr "" + +#. popup message +#: src/include/dhcp-server/options.rb:470 +msgid "The entered address is not valid." +msgstr "" + +#. message popup +#. message popup +#: src/include/dhcp-server/options.rb:490 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/options.rb:543 +msgid "At least one address must be specified." +msgstr "" + +#. selection box +#. Handle the event on the popup +#. @param [Object] opt_id any option id +#. @param [String] key string option key +#. @param [Hash] event map event to be handled +#. selection box +#: src/include/dhcp-server/options.rb:512 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/options.rb:528 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/options.rb:819 +msgid "&Values" +msgstr "" + +#. message popup +#: src/include/dhcp-server/options.rb:563 +msgid "The entered addresses are not valid." +msgstr "" + +#. message popup +#: src/include/dhcp-server/options.rb:583 +msgid "At least one address pair must be specified." +msgstr "" + +#. table item, means switched on +#. table item, means switched on +#: src/include/dhcp-server/options.rb:620 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/options.rb:661 +msgid "On" +msgstr "" + +#. table item, means switched off +#. table item, means switched off +#: src/include/dhcp-server/options.rb:623 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/options.rb:664 +msgid "Off" +msgstr "" + +#. popup message +#: src/include/dhcp-server/options.rb:694 +msgid "A value must be specified." +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/include/dhcp-server/options.rb:786 +msgid "&New Address" +msgstr "" + +#. int field +#: src/include/dhcp-server/options.rb:824 +msgid "&New Value" +msgstr "" + +#. label (in role of help text) +#: src/include/dhcp-server/options.rb:861 +msgid "Separate multiple addresses with spaces." +msgstr "" + +#. push button +#: src/include/dhcp-server/options.rb:864 +msgid "&Add Address Pair" +msgstr "" + +#. popup message +#: src/include/dhcp-server/options.rb:1008 +msgid "The lowest address must be lower than the highest one." +msgstr "" + +#. label -- help text +#: src/include/dhcp-server/options.rb:1024 +msgid "If you change this, also update the syslog configuration." +msgstr "" + +#. combo box +#: src/include/dhcp-server/options.rb:1036 +msgid "&Hardware Type" +msgstr "" + +#. test entry, MAC better not to be translated, +#. translation would decrease the understandability +#: src/include/dhcp-server/options.rb:1046 +msgid "&MAC Address" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/include/dhcp-server/options.rb:1089 +msgid "&Lowest IP Address" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/include/dhcp-server/options.rb:1091 +msgid "&Highest IP Address" +msgstr "" + +#. Yes-No popup +#: src/include/dhcp-server/widgets.rb:174 +msgid "" +"If you leave the DHCP server configuration without saving,\n" +"all changes will be lost. Really leave?" +msgstr "" + +#. yes-no popup +#: src/include/dhcp-server/widgets.rb:355 +msgid "" +"The port in firewall is not open. The DHCP server\n" +"will not be able to serve your network.\n" +"Continue?" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup error message, %1 is list of network interfaces +#: src/include/dhcp-server/widgets.rb:383 +msgid "" +"The network interfaces listed below are not mentioned in any firewall zone.\n" +"%1\n" +"Run the YaST firewall configuration to assign them to a zone." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup error message, %1 a network interface name +#: src/include/dhcp-server/widgets.rb:398 +msgid "" +"Network interface %1 is not mentioned in any firewall zone.\n" +"Run the YaST firewall configuration to assign it to a zone." +msgstr "" + +#. popup message +#. popup message +#: src/include/dhcp-server/widgets.rb:424 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/widgets.rb:653 +msgid "" +"This function is not available during\n" +"preparation for autoinstallation." +msgstr "" + +#. menubutton entry, try to keep short +#: src/include/dhcp-server/widgets.rb:445 +msgid "Restart DHCP Server" +msgstr "" + +#. menubutton entry, try to keep short +#: src/include/dhcp-server/widgets.rb:450 +msgid "Save Settings and Restart DHCP Server" +msgstr "" + +#. tree widget +#. tree widget +#: src/include/dhcp-server/widgets.rb:548 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/widgets.rb:1097 +msgid "&Configured Declarations" +msgstr "" + +#. push button +#: src/include/dhcp-server/widgets.rb:637 +msgid "&Dynamic DNS" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box +#. combo box +#: src/include/dhcp-server/widgets.rb:733 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/widgets.rb:1239 +msgid "Forward Zone TSIG &Key" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box +#. combo box +#: src/include/dhcp-server/widgets.rb:742 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/widgets.rb:1246 +msgid "Reverse Zone TSIG &Key" +msgstr "" + +#. popup headline +#: src/include/dhcp-server/widgets.rb:861 +msgid "Select File with Authentication Key" +msgstr "" + +#. check box +#: src/include/dhcp-server/widgets.rb:1060 +msgid "&Start DHCP Server" +msgstr "" + +#. check box +#: src/include/dhcp-server/widgets.rb:1070 +msgid "&Run DHCP Server in Chroot Jail" +msgstr "" + +#. menu button +#: src/include/dhcp-server/widgets.rb:1111 +msgid "Ad&vanced" +msgstr "" + +#. item of a menu button +#: src/include/dhcp-server/widgets.rb:1114 +msgid "Display &Log" +msgstr "" + +#. item of a menu button +#: src/include/dhcp-server/widgets.rb:1116 +msgid "&Interface Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/include/dhcp-server/widgets.rb:1136 +msgid "&Network Address" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/include/dhcp-server/widgets.rb:1138 +msgid "Network &Mask" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/include/dhcp-server/widgets.rb:1156 +msgid "Group &Name" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/include/dhcp-server/widgets.rb:1164 +msgid "Pool &Name" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/include/dhcp-server/widgets.rb:1172 +msgid "Shared Network &Name" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/include/dhcp-server/widgets.rb:1180 +msgid "Class &Name" +msgstr "" + +#. multi selection box +#: src/include/dhcp-server/widgets.rb:1190 +msgid "Available Interfaces" +msgstr "" + +#. check box +#: src/include/dhcp-server/widgets.rb:1205 +msgid "Open &Firewall for Selected Interfaces" +msgstr "" + +#. check box +#: src/include/dhcp-server/widgets.rb:1231 +msgid "&Enable Dynamic DNS for This Subnet" +msgstr "" + +#. check box +#: src/include/dhcp-server/widgets.rb:1253 +msgid "&Update Global Dynamic DNS Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/include/dhcp-server/widgets.rb:1263 +msgid "&Zone" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/include/dhcp-server/widgets.rb:1290 +msgid "&Primary DNS Server" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/include/dhcp-server/widgets.rb:1296 +msgid "Re&verse Zone" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/include/dhcp-server/widgets.rb:1305 +msgid "Pr&imary DNS Server" +msgstr "" + +#. push button +#: src/include/dhcp-server/widgets.rb:1335 +msgid "DHCP Server &Expert Configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. Dhcp-server read dialog caption +#: src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:1388 +msgid "Initializing DHCP Server Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage +#: src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:1392 +msgid "Check the environment" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage +#: src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:1394 +msgid "Read firewall settings" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage +#: src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:1396 +msgid "Read DHCP server settings" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage +#: src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:1398 +msgid "Read DNS server settings" +msgstr "" + +#. progress step +#: src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:1402 +msgid "Checking the environment..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step +#: src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:1404 +msgid "Reading firewall settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step +#: src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:1406 +msgid "Reading DHCP server settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step +#: src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:1408 +msgid "Reading DNS server settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step +#: src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:1410 src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:1638 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: error report popup +#: src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:1440 +msgid "" +"This server needs at least one\n" +"configured network device (besides loopback) to\n" +"function properly.\n" +"Configure one.\n" +"\n" +"Aborting now." +msgstr "" + +#. error report +#: src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:1475 +msgid "" +"Cannot determine hostname. LDAP-based configuration of \n" +"DHCP server will not be available." +msgstr "" + +#. yes-no popup +#: src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:1543 +msgid "" +"The DHCP server does not seem to have been\n" +"configured yet. Create a new configuration?" +msgstr "" + +#. Dhcp-server read dialog caption */ +#: src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:1616 +msgid "Saving DHCP Server Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage +#: src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:1621 +msgid "Write DHCP server settings" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage +#: src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:1623 +msgid "Write firewall settings" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage +#: src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:1625 +msgid "Restart DHCP server" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage +#: src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:1627 +msgid "Write DNS server settings" +msgstr "" + +#. progress step +#: src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:1630 +msgid "Writing DHCP server settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step +#: src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:1632 +msgid "Writing firewall settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step +#: src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:1634 +msgid "Restarting DHCP server..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step +#: src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:1636 +msgid "Writing DNS server settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. error report +#: src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:1749 +msgid "Error occurred while restarting the DHCP daemon." +msgstr "" + +#. summary string +#: src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:1888 +msgid "The DHCP server is started at boot time" +msgstr "" + +#. summary string +#: src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:1893 +msgid "The DHCP server is not started at boot time" +msgstr "" + +#. summary string, %1 is list of network interfaces +#: src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:1901 +msgid "Listen On: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. summary string, %1 is IP address range +#: src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:1920 +msgid "Dynamic Address Range: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:2313 +msgid "Invalid LDAP configuration. Cannot use LDAP." +msgstr "" + +#. error report +#: src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:2553 src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:2594 +msgid "Support for multiple dhcpServiceDN not implemented." +msgstr "" + +#. error report +#: src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:2559 +msgid "DHCP service DN is not defined." +msgstr "" + +#. %1 is LDAP record key +#. Error report, %1 is LDAP record key +#. Error report +#. error report, %1 is LDAP record key +#: src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:2674 src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:2708 +#: src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:2772 src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:2847 +msgid "Error occurred while creating %1." +msgstr "" + +#. error report, %1 is LDAP record key +#: src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:2739 +msgid "Error occurred while updating %1." +msgstr "" + +#. error report, %1=ldap domain, %2=dhcp server +#: src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:2810 +msgid "Error occurred while creating cn=%2,ou=DHCP,%1." +msgstr "" + +#. error report, /etc/dhcpd.conf is filename +#: src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:2907 +msgid "Error occurred while writing /etc/dhcpd.conf." +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/dns-server.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/dns-server.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/dns-server.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,2384 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline general name of the module in help +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:24 +msgid "DNS server configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:32 +msgid "Start-up settings" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:38 +msgid "DNS forwarders" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:50 +msgid "Logging settings" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:63 +msgid "DNS zones" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:79 +msgid "Access control lists" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:87 +msgid "Zone transport rules" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command, base cmdline command +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:102 +msgid "Zone name servers" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command, base cmdline command +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:119 +msgid "Zone mail servers" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command, base cmdline command +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:133 +msgid "Start of authority (SOA)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command, base cmdline command +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:148 +msgid "Zone resource records, such as A, CNAME, NS, MX, or PTR" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command, base cmdline command, A is record type +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:166 +msgid "Handles A and corresponding PTR record at once" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:180 +msgid "Show current settings" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:186 +msgid "Start DNS server in the boot process" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:192 +msgid "Start DNS server manually" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:198 +msgid "Add a new record" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:204 +msgid "Remove a record" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:211 +msgid "IPv4 address" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:218 +msgid "Logging destination (syslog|file)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:224 +msgid "Set option" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:231 +msgid "Filename for logging (full path)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:238 +msgid "Maximum log size [0-9]+(KMG)*" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:245 +msgid "Maximum number of versions for rotation, '0' means no rotation" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:252 src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:273 +msgid "Zone name" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:259 +msgid "Zone type, master or slave" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:266 +msgid "DNS zone master server" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:280 +msgid "Enable option" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:287 +msgid "Disable option" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:294 +msgid "Name server (in fully qualified format finished with a dot or relative name)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:301 +msgid "Mail server (in fully qualified format finished with a dot or relative name)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:308 +msgid "Mail server priority (number from 0 to 65535)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:315 +msgid "Serial number of zone update" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:322 +msgid "General time to live of records in zone" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:329 +msgid "An interval before the zone records should be refreshed" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:336 +msgid "Interval between retries of failed refresh" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:343 +msgid "Interval after which zone records are no longer authoritative" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command, TTL is DNS-Specific (Time to Live), shouldn't be translated +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:350 +msgid "Minimum TTL that should be exported with records in this zone" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command, Types are DNS-Specific, cannot be translated +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:357 +msgid "DNS resource record type, such as A, CNAME, NS, MX, or PTR" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command, DNS query is a question for value when we have a /key/ and type, ('A' record for 'example.org'? -> 192.0.34.166) +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:364 +msgid "DNS query, such as example.org for A record" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:371 +msgid "DNS resource record value, such as 192.0.34.166 for example.org's A record" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:378 +msgid "Hostname for the DNS record" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command, %1 are possible untranlatable parameters "(yes|no)" +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:386 +msgid "Log named queries %1" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command, %1 are possible untranlatable parameters "(yes|no)" +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:394 +msgid "Log zone updates %1" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command, %1 are possible untranlatable parameters "(yes|no)" +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:402 +msgid "Log zone transfers %1" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:409 +msgid "Comma-separated list of zone forwarders" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: command line error message, %1 is a missing required parameter +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:494 +msgid "Parameter %1 is required." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: command line error message, %1 is a parameter name +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:507 +msgid "Unknown value for parameter %1." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline section header +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline section header +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline section header +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline section header +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:521 src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:528 +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:538 src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:555 +msgid "Start-Up Settings:" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline error message +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:523 +msgid "Only one parameter is allowed." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline progress information +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:530 +msgid "Enabling DNS server in the boot process..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline progress information +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:540 +msgid "Removing DNS server from the boot process..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline DNS service status information +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:549 +msgid "DNS server is enabled in the boot process." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline DNS service status information +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:552 +msgid "DNS server needs manual starting." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline section header, +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:573 +msgid "Forwarding:" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline table header item +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:575 +msgid "Forwarder IP" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline error message +#. Both Add and Remove defined => Error! +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:580 src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:867 +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:999 +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:1049 +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:1108 +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:1244 +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:1303 +msgid "Only one action parameter is allowed." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline table item +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline table item +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:651 src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:661 +msgid "Logging destination" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline table item +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:653 +msgid "System log" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline table item +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:663 +msgid "File" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline table item +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:671 +msgid "Filename" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline table item +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:679 +msgid "Maximum size" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline table item +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:687 +msgid "Maximum versions" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline table item, do not translate named +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:700 +msgid "Log named queries" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline table item +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:708 +msgid "Log zone updates" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline table item +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:716 +msgid "Log zone transfers" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline section header +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:723 +msgid "Logging Settings:" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline table header item +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:729 +msgid "Setting" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline table header item +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline table header item +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline table header item +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline table header item +#. Table header item - basic-options listing +#. Table header item - ACL-options +#. Table menu item - Records listing +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:731 src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:743 +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:944 +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:1157 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:1032 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:1625 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1419 +msgid "Value" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline table header item +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:741 +msgid "Logging Rule" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline section header, +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:835 +msgid "DNS Zones:" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline table header item +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline table header item +#. Textentry - DNS adding zone - Name +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:840 src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:940 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:1859 +msgid "Name" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline table header item +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline table header item +#. Combobox - DNS adding zone - Type +#. Table header item - DNS listing zones +#. Table menu item - Records listing +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:842 src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:942 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:1865 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:1907 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1417 +msgid "Type" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline table header item +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:844 +msgid "Master Server" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline table header item +#. Dialog Label - DNS - expert settings +#. Tree Menu Item - DNS - expert settings +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:846 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:443 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:446 +msgid "Forwarders" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: table item - ACL type +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:925 +msgid "Predefined" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: table item - ACL type +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:927 +msgid "Custom" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline section header +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:935 +msgid "ACLs:" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline section header +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:975 +msgid "Zone Transport:" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline table header item +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline table header item +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline table header item +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline table header item +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline table header item +#. Table header item - DNS listing zones +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:980 +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:1032 +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:1089 +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:1220 +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:1284 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:1905 +msgid "Zone" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline table header item +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:982 +msgid "Enabled ACL" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline section header +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:1027 +msgid "Name Servers:" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline table header item +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:1034 +msgid "Name Server" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline section header +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline section header +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:1084 +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:1215 +msgid "Mail Servers:" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline table header item +#. Table header item - listing mail servers +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:1091 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:739 +msgid "Mail Server" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline table header item +#. Table header item - listing mail servers +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:1093 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:741 +msgid "Priority" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline section header +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:1150 +msgid "Start of Authority (SOA):" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline table header item +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:1155 +msgid "Key" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline table header item +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:1222 +msgid "Record Query" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline table header item +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:1224 +msgid "Record Type" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline table header item +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:1226 +msgid "Record Value" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline section header +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:1279 +msgid "Hostname Record:" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline table header item +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:1286 +msgid "Hostname" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: commandline table header item +#: src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:1288 +msgid "IP" +msgstr "" + +#. Dialog caption (before a colon) +#. Dialog caption (before a colon) +#. Dialog caption (before a colon) +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-installwizard.rb:29 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-installwizard.rb:77 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-installwizard.rb:136 +msgid "DNS Server Installation" +msgstr "" + +#. Dialog caption (after a colon) +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-installwizard.rb:31 +msgid "Forwarder Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Dialog caption (after a colon) +#. Dialog Label - DNS - expert settings +#. Tree Menu Item - DNS - expert settings +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-installwizard.rb:79 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:517 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:520 +msgid "DNS Zones" +msgstr "" + +#. Dialog caption (after a colon) +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-installwizard.rb:138 +msgid "Finish Wizard" +msgstr "" + +#. Rich Text Item - Installation overview +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-installwizard.rb:152 +msgid "<li>Forwarders: %1</li>" +msgstr "" + +#. Rich Text Item - Installation overview +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-installwizard.rb:155 +msgid "<li>Domains: %1</li>" +msgstr "" + +#. check box +#. TRANSLATORS: checkbox label, turning LDAP support on or off +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-installwizard.rb:175 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:291 +msgid "&LDAP Support Active" +msgstr "" + +#. Label for Radiobuttons - DNS starting +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-installwizard.rb:188 +msgid "Start-up Behavior" +msgstr "" + +#. Radiobutton label - DNS starting +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-installwizard.rb:196 +msgid "O&n: Start Now and When Booting" +msgstr "" + +#. Radiobutton label - DNS starting +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-installwizard.rb:199 +msgid "O&ff: Only Start Manually" +msgstr "" + +#. Push Button - start expert configuration +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-installwizard.rb:208 +msgid "DNS Server &Expert Configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. Dialog label DNS - expert settings +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:261 +msgid "DNS Server" +msgstr "" + +#. FIXME: new startup +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:419 +msgid "Apply Changes" +msgstr "" + +#. Dialog Label - DNS - expert settings +#. Tree Menu Item - DNS - expert settings +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:425 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:428 +msgid "Start-Up" +msgstr "" + +#. Dialog Label - DNS - expert settings +#. Tree Menu Item - DNS - expert settings +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:456 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:459 +msgid "Basic Options" +msgstr "" + +#. Dialog Label - DNS - expert settings +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:469 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:471 +msgid "Logging" +msgstr "" + +#. Dialog Label - DNS - expert settings +#. Tree Menu Item - DNS - expert settings +#. multi selection box +#. multi selection box +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:482 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:485 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:163 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:2729 +msgid "ACLs" +msgstr "" + +#. Dialog Label - DNS - expert settings +#. Tree Menu Item - DNS - expert settings +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:499 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:502 +msgid "TSIG Keys" +msgstr "" + +#. T: ComboBox label +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:563 +msgid "Local DNS Resolution &Policy" +msgstr "" + +#. T: ComboBox item +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:566 +msgid "Merging forwarders is disabled" +msgstr "" + +#. T: ComboBox item +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:568 +msgid "Automatic merging" +msgstr "" + +#. T: ComboBox item +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:570 +msgid "Merging forwarders is enabled" +msgstr "" + +#. T: ComboBox item +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:572 +msgid "Custom configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:576 +msgid "Custom policy" +msgstr "" + +#. T: ComboBox label +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:583 +msgid "Local DNS Resolution &Forwarder" +msgstr "" + +#. T: ComboBox item +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:586 +msgid "Using system name servers" +msgstr "" + +#. T: ComboBox item +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:588 +msgid "This name server (bind)" +msgstr "" + +#. T: ComboBox item +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:590 +msgid "Local dnsmasq server" +msgstr "" + +#. Frame label for DNS-Forwarders adding IP +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:600 +msgid "Add IP Address" +msgstr "" + +#. Textentry for DNS-Forwarders adding IP +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:609 +msgid "IPv4 or IPv6 A&ddress" +msgstr "" + +#. Selectionbox for listing current DNS-Forwarders +#. Selectionbox for listing current DNS-Forwarders +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:638 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:669 +msgid "Forwarder &List" +msgstr "" + +#. Store settings of a tab of a dialog +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:813 +msgid "Cannot set local forwarder to %{forwarder}" +msgstr "" + +#. An error message, %1 is replaced with a variable IP +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:877 +msgid "Cannot find local equivalent for IP %1." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: A warning message, %1 is replaced with the input IP, %2 with the output IP +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:883 +msgid "" +"Forwarding DNS queries to itself would create an infinite loop.\n" +"IP address %1 is currently used by this server, so it has\n" +"been changed to its local equivalent %2." +msgstr "" + +#. both IPv4 and IPv6 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:911 +msgid "Invalid IPv4 or IPv6 address." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:914 +msgid "" +"A valid IPv6 address consists of letters a-f, numbers,\n" +"and colons." +msgstr "" + +#. error report +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:930 +msgid "The specified forwarder is already present." +msgstr "" + +#. Frame label for Basic-Options +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:959 +msgid "Add or Change Option" +msgstr "" + +#. Combobox for choosing the basic-option +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:973 +msgid "O&ption" +msgstr "" + +#. Textentry for setting the basic-option value +#. Textentry - adding ACL-optiopn - value +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:983 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:1588 +msgid "&Value" +msgstr "" + +#. Pushbutton for changing the basic-option +#. Pushbutton - Change Record +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:1007 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1387 +msgid "C&hange" +msgstr "" + +#. Table label for basic-options listing +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:1021 +msgid "Current Options" +msgstr "" + +#. Table header item - basic-options listing +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:1030 +msgid "Option" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup question +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:1161 +msgid "" +"Really set this\n" +"option without any value?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup question. Please, do not translate 'yes' and 'no' strings. %1 is a name of the option, %2 is the value of the option. +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:1173 +msgid "" +"Option %1 can only have a yes or no value set.\n" +"Really set it to %2?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup question. %1 is a name of the option, %2 is the value of the option. +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:1190 +msgid "" +"Option %1 can only be a number.\n" +"Really set it to %2?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup question. %1 is the value of the option. +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:1202 +msgid "" +"Quotes are not used correctly in this option.\n" +"Really set it to %1?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup question. %1 is the value of the option. +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:1214 +msgid "" +"Brackets are not used correctly in this option.\n" +"Really set it to %1?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup question, %1 is the name of the option +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:1258 +msgid "" +"Option %1 should be set only once.\n" +"Really add another one?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Table header - logging options +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:1298 +msgid "Log Type" +msgstr "" + +#. Radiobutton - log type +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:1310 +msgid "&System Log" +msgstr "" + +#. Radiobutton - log type +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:1319 +msgid "&File" +msgstr "" + +#. IntField - max. log size +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:1352 +msgid "Maximum &Size (MB)" +msgstr "" + +#. IntField - max. log age +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:1363 +msgid "Maximum &Versions" +msgstr "" + +#. Frame label - additional-logging +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:1381 +msgid "Additional Logging" +msgstr "" + +#. Checkbox - additional-logging +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:1386 +msgid "Log All DNS &Queries" +msgstr "" + +#. Checkbox - additional-logging +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:1389 +msgid "Log Zone &Updates" +msgstr "" + +#. Checkbox - additional-logging +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:1392 +msgid "Log Zone &Transfers" +msgstr "" + +#. popup headline +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:1549 +msgid "Select File for Log" +msgstr "" + +#. Frame label - adding ACL-optiopn +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:1566 +msgid "Option Setup" +msgstr "" + +#. Textentry - adding ACL-optiopn - name +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:1579 +msgid "&Name" +msgstr "" + +#. Table header - ACL-options listing +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:1615 +msgid "Current ACL List" +msgstr "" + +#. Table header item - ACL-options +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:1623 +msgid "ACL" +msgstr "" + +#. A popup question, %1 is number of zones +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:1743 +msgid "" +"This ACL is used by %1 zones.\n" +"Really remove it?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. An error popup message +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:1830 +msgid "The specified ACL entry already exists." +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:1847 +msgid "Add New Zone " +msgstr "" + +#. #-#-#-#-# dns-server.rxgettext.pot (PACKAGE VERSION) #-#-#-#-# +#. Combobox - DNS adding zone - Type Master +#. TRANSLATORS: Table item - Server type +#. #-#-#-#-# dns-server.xgettext.pot #-#-#-#-# +#. type of zone to be used in summary +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:1868 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:1958 src/modules/DnsServer.pm:1658 +msgid "Master" +msgstr "" + +#. #-#-#-#-# dns-server.rxgettext.pot (PACKAGE VERSION) #-#-#-#-# +#. Combobox - DNS adding zone - Type Slave +#. TRANSLATORS: Table item - Server type +#. TRANSLATORS: Table item - Server type +#. #-#-#-#-# dns-server.xgettext.pot #-#-#-#-# +#. type of zone to be used in summary +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:1870 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:1961 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:1964 src/modules/DnsServer.pm:1660 +msgid "Slave" +msgstr "" + +#. #-#-#-#-# dns-server.rxgettext.pot (PACKAGE VERSION) #-#-#-#-# +#. Combobox - DNS adding zone - Type Slave +#. TRANSLATORS: Table item - Server type +#. #-#-#-#-# dns-server.xgettext.pot #-#-#-#-# +#. type of zone to be used in summary +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:1872 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:1967 src/modules/DnsServer.pm:1666 +msgid "Forward" +msgstr "" + +#. Table header - DNS listing zones +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:1895 +msgid "Configured DNS Zones" +msgstr "" + +#. error report +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:2104 +msgid "A zone with the specified name is already configured." +msgstr "" + +#. Write settings dialog +#. @return `abort if aborted and `next otherwise +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:2153 +msgid "Saving the configuration failed. Change the settings?" +msgstr "" + +#. Writes settings and restores the dialog without exiting +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:2169 +msgid "Saving the configuration failed" +msgstr "" + +#. Yes-No popup +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-main.rb:2182 +msgid "" +"All changes will be lost.\n" +"Really leave the DNS server configuration without saving?" +msgstr "" + +#. check box +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:95 +msgid "A&llow Dynamic Updates" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:105 +msgid "TSIG &Key" +msgstr "" + +#. check box +#. check box +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:158 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:2725 +msgid "Enable &Zone Transport" +msgstr "" + +#. check box +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:178 +msgid "A&utomatically Generate Records From" +msgstr "" + +#. multi selection box +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:187 +msgid "Zon&e" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:199 +msgid "Connected Reverse Zones" +msgstr "" + +#. popup message +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:465 +msgid "" +"This function is not available during\n" +"preparation for autoinstallation.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error report +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:476 +msgid "No TSIG key is defined." +msgstr "" + +#. Textentry - adding nameserver +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:506 +msgid "&Name Server to Add" +msgstr "" + +#. Selectionbox - listing current nameservers +#. selection box label +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:529 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:555 +msgid "Na&me Server List" +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:653 +msgid "The specified name server already exists." +msgstr "" + +#. Frame label - adding mail server +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:699 +msgid "Mail Server to Add" +msgstr "" + +#. Textentry - addind mail server - Name +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:709 +msgid "&Address" +msgstr "" + +#. IntField - adding mail server - Priority +#. IntField - zone settings - Record Value +#. IntField - zone settings - Record Value +#. int field +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:712 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1237 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1295 +#: src/include/dns-server/options.rb:435 +msgid "&Priority" +msgstr "" + +#. Table label - listing mail servers +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:734 +msgid "Mail Relay List" +msgstr "" + +#. A popup error message +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:871 +msgid "The specified value is not a valid hostname or IP address." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:893 +msgid "The specified mail server already exists." +msgstr "" + +#. DNS Settings time units (combobox item) +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:940 +msgid "Seconds" +msgstr "" + +#. DNS Settings time units (combobox item) +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:942 +msgid "Minutes" +msgstr "" + +#. DNS Settings time units (combobox item) +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:944 +msgid "Hours" +msgstr "" + +#. DNS Settings time units (combobox item) +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:946 +msgid "Days" +msgstr "" + +#. DNS Settings time units (combobox item) +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:948 +msgid "Weeks" +msgstr "" + +#. Textentry - setting Serial for zone +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:960 +msgid "Seri&al" +msgstr "" + +#. Textentry - setting TTL for zone +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:969 +msgid "TT&L" +msgstr "" + +#. Combobox - Setting DNS Retry - Unit +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:974 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1011 +msgid "&Unit" +msgstr "" + +#. IntField - Setting DNS Refresh - Value +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:988 +msgid "Re&fresh" +msgstr "" + +#. Combobox - Setting DNS Refresh - Unit +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:996 +msgid "Un&it" +msgstr "" + +#. IntField - Setting DNS Retry - Value +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1005 +msgid "Retr&y" +msgstr "" + +#. IntField - Setting DNS Expiry - Value +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1018 +msgid "Ex&piration" +msgstr "" + +#. Combobox - Setting DNS Expiry - Unit +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1026 +msgid "U&nit" +msgstr "" + +#. IntField - Setting DNS Minimum - Value +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1035 +msgid "&Minimum" +msgstr "" + +#. Combobox - Setting DNS Minimum - Unit +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1043 +msgid "Uni&t" +msgstr "" + +#. Handle events in a tab of a dialog +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1166 +msgid "The serial number of the zone must be specified." +msgstr "" + +#. error report, %1 is an integer +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1174 +msgid "The serial number must be no more than %1 digits long." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: A popup with question, current setting could produce errors +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1195 +msgid "" +"The expiration time-out is higher than the time period\n" +"of zone refreshes. The zone will not be reachable\n" +"from slave name servers all the time.\n" +"Continue?" +msgstr "" + +#. Textentry - zone settings - Record Name +#. Textentry - zone settings - Record Name +#. Textentry - zone settings - Record Name +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1219 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1254 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1311 +msgid "&Record Key" +msgstr "" + +#. Combobox - zone settings - Record Type +#. Combobox - zone settings - Record Type +#. Combobox - zone settings - Record Type +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1227 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1286 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1319 +msgid "T&ype" +msgstr "" + +#. Textentry - zone settings - Record Value +#. IntField - zone settings - Record Value +#. Textentry - zone settings - Record Value +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1245 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1292 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1324 +msgid "Val&ue" +msgstr "" + +#. Textentry - zone settings - Record Name +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1261 +msgid "&Service" +msgstr "" + +#. Textentry - zone settings - Record Name +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1275 +msgid "&Protocol" +msgstr "" + +#. IntField - zone settings - Record Value +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1297 +msgid "&Weight" +msgstr "" + +#. IntField - zone settings - Record Value +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1299 +msgid "&Port" +msgstr "" + +#. reverse zone +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1344 +msgid "A: IPv4 Domain Name Translation" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1345 +msgid "AAAA: IPv6 Domain Name Translation" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1346 +msgid "CNAME: Alias for Domain Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1347 +msgid "NS: Name Server" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1348 +msgid "MX: Mail Relay" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1349 +msgid "PTR: Reverse Translation" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1350 +msgid "SRV: Services Record" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1351 +msgid "TXT: Text Record" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1352 +msgid "SPF: Sender Policy Framework" +msgstr "" + +#. Frame label - Adding/Changing IP/CNAME/Type... zone settings +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1369 +msgid "Record Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Table label - Records listing +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1405 +msgid "Configured Resource Records" +msgstr "" + +#. Table menu item - Records listing +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1415 +msgid "Record Key" +msgstr "" + +#. Pop-up error message, %1 is replaced with an example +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1845 +msgid "" +"Invalid IPv6 reverse IP.\n" +"\n" +"IPv6 reverse records are supported either in the full form (%1)\n" +"or in the relative form to the current zone." +msgstr "" + +#. (hostname or FQ) +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1883 +msgid "Invalid IPv6 address." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Error message +#. %{type} replaced with record type (TXT or SPF) +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1916 +msgid "" +"Invalid %{type} record key. It should consist of printable US-ASCII characters excluding '='\n" +"and must be at least one character long." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Error message +#. %{type} - replaced with record type (TXT or SPF) +#. %{max} - replaced with the maximal length +#. %{current} - replaced with the current length of a new TXT record. +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1934 +msgid "" +"Maximal length of a %{type} record is %{max} characters.\n" +"This message is %{current} characters long." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: a popup message, CNAME (link) points to itself +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1965 +msgid "CNAME cannot point to itself." +msgstr "" + +#. When no dialog defined for this tab (software error) +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:2341 +msgid "An internal error has occurred." +msgstr "" + +#. Dialog Caption - Expert Settings - Zone Editor +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:2413 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:2734 +msgid "Zone Editor" +msgstr "" + +#. Menu Item - Zone Editor - Tab +#. Menu Item - Zone Editor - Tab +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:2434 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:2446 +msgid "&Basics" +msgstr "" + +#. Menu Item - Zone Editor - Tab +#. Menu Item - Zone Editor - Tab +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:2436 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:2448 +msgid "NS Recor&ds" +msgstr "" + +#. Menu Item - Zone Editor - Tab +#. Menu Item - Zone Editor - Tab +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:2438 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:2452 +msgid "&SOA" +msgstr "" + +#. Menu Item - Zone Editor - Tab +#. Menu Item - Zone Editor - Tab +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:2440 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:2454 +msgid "R&ecords" +msgstr "" + +#. Menu Item - Zone Editor - Tab +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:2450 +msgid "M&X Records" +msgstr "" + +#. Label - connected with Textentry which shows current edited zone +#. Label - connected with Textentry which shows current edited zone +#. Label - connected with Textentry which shows current edited zone +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:2466 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:2703 +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:2906 +msgid "Settings for Zone" +msgstr "" + +#. ); +#. Menu Item - Zone Editor - Tab +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:2502 +msgid "Ad&vanced" +msgstr "" + +#. at least one NS server must be set +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:2550 +msgid "At least one NS server must be set." +msgstr "" + +#. warning message, %1 is replaced with a zone name +#. +#. Automatically Generate Records From is a feature that makes YaST to generate +#. DNS records manually from selected zone +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:2612 +msgid "" +"Current zone records are automatically generated from %1 zone.\n" +"To change records manually disable the Automatically Generate Records From feature." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Text entry +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:2717 +msgid "&Master DNS Server IP" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup error headline +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:2781 +msgid "Missing Master Server" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup error text +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:2783 +msgid "" +"Every slave zone must have its master server IP defined.\n" +"Configuration of a DNS server without a master server would fail.\n" +"If you continue, the current zone will be removed." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: A popup error message +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:2803 +msgid "No master DNS server defined." +msgstr "" + +#. A popup error message +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:2815 +msgid "The specified master name server is not a valid IP address." +msgstr "" + +#. Textentry - adding forwarder +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:2926 +msgid "New &Forwarder IP Address" +msgstr "" + +#. Selectionbox - listing current forwarders +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:2951 +msgid "Current &Zone Forwarders" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:2973 +msgid "Forward Zone Editor" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup question +#: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:3009 +msgid "" +"This forward zone has no forwarders defined, which means\n" +"that all DNS queries for this zone are denied.\n" +"Really deny these queries?" +msgstr "" + +#. yes-no popup +#: src/include/dns-server/dialogs.rb:34 +msgid "" +"All changes will be lost.\n" +"Really exit?" +msgstr "" + +#. message popup +#: src/include/dns-server/dialogs.rb:81 +msgid "A zone of this type cannot be edited with this tool." +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:20 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Initializing DNS Server Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Please wait...<br></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:24 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Initialization</big></b><br>\n" +"Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing <b>Abort</b> now.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:28 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Saving DNS Server Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Please wait...<br></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:32 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Saving</big></b><br>\n" +"Abort the save procedure by pressing <b>Abort</b>.\n" +"An additional dialog informs you whether it is safe to do so.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. main dialog +#. help 1/4 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:39 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Start DNS Server</big></b><br>\n" +"To run the DNS server every time your computer is started, set\n" +"<b>Start DNS Server</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help 2/4 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:45 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Chroot Jail</big></b><br>\n" +"To run the DNS server in chroot jail, set\n" +"<b>Run DNS Server in Chroot Jail</b>. Starting any daemon in a chroot jail\n" +"is more secure and strongly recommended.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help 3/4 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:52 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Editing DNS Zones</big></b><br>\n" +"To edit settings of a DNS zone, choose the appropriate\n" +"entry of the table and click <B>Edit</B>.\n" +"To add a new DNS zone, use <B>Add</B>. To remove\n" +"a configured DNS zone, select it and click <B>Delete</B>.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. help 4/4 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:60 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Advanced Functions</big></b><br>\n" +"To edit global options,\n" +"adjust firewall settings,\n" +"manage the TSIG keys for dynamic updates of the zones,\n" +"or display the log of the DNS server,\n" +"use <b>Advanced</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. zone dialog +#. help 1/5 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:70 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Zone Name</big></b><br>\n" +"Enter the name of the zone (domain) in <b>Zone Name</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help 2/5, alt. 1 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:74 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Dynamic DNS Zone Updates</big></b><br>\n" +"The zone can be updated automatically, usually because of dynamically\n" +"assigned IP addresses by DHCP server. To allow DDNS updates, set\n" +"<b>Allow Dynamic Updates</b> and the <b>TSIG Key</b>\n" +"to use for authentication. The key must be the same for\n" +"both DHCP and DNS servers.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help 3/5, only for alt. 1 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:83 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Editing a DNS Zone</big></b><br>\n" +"To edit the zone settings, choose the appropriate\n" +"entry of the table then click <b>Edit</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help 4/5, only for alt. 1 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:89 +msgid "" +"<p>To add a new record to the zone, click <b>Add</b>. To remove\n" +"a record, select it and click <b>Delete</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help 5/5, only for alt. 1 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:93 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>SOA Record</big></b><br>\n" +"To edit the SOA (Start of Authority) record of the zone, click\n" +"<b>Edit SOA</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help 2/5 alt. 2 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:99 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Master Servers</big></b><br>\n" +"Set the IP addresses of the master name servers for this zone. Use <b>Add</b>\n" +"to add a new master name server. Select an existing one then click <b>Delete</b>\n" +"to remove an existing one.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help 1/2 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:106 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Zone Type</big></b><br>\n" +"To make this name server the primary source of the data of the zone,\n" +"select <b>Master</b>. To make it the secondary name server, select <b>Slave</b>\n" +"or <b>Stub</b>, so the data of the zone will be mirrored from the master\n" +"server.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help 2/2 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:114 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Zone Direction</big></b><br>\n" +"DNS is used both for translating from domain names to IP addresses and back.\n" +"Select if this zone will be used to translate from domain names to IP\n" +"addresses (<b>Forward</b>) or from IP addresses to domain names\n" +"(<b>Reverse</b>).</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. firewall dialog +#. help text 1/2 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:123 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Interface Classes</big></b><br>\n" +"Select which interface classes should have access to the DNS server. The\n" +"interface classes are defined in the firewall configuration component.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/2 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:129 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Adapting Firewall Settings</big></b><br>\n" +"To adapt the firewall settings so that the DNS server can be accessed\n" +"via all network interfaces to which it listens, check\n" +"<b>Adapt Firewall Settings</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. soa dialog +#. help text 1/9 +#. Zone Editor - Help for tab - Zone (SOA) 1/7 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:137 src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:386 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>SOA Record Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Set the entries of the SOA record.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/9 - TTL +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:141 +msgid "" +"<p><b>$TTL</b> specifies the time to live for all records in the\n" +"zone that do not have an explicit TTL.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 3/9 - Primary source +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:145 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Primary Source</b> must contain the fully qualified domain name\n" +"of the primary name server.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 4/9 - Administrator's mail +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:149 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Administrator's Mail</b> must contain the e-mail address of\n" +"the administrator responsible for the zone.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 5/9 - Serial +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:153 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Serial</b> number is used for determining if the zone has changed on\n" +"the master servers (so that slave servers do not always need to synchronize the\n" +"entire zone).</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 6/9 - Refresh +#. Zone Editor - Help for tab - Zone (SOA) 4/7 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:159 src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:401 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Refresh</b> sets how often the zone should be synchronized from\n" +"master name server to slave name servers.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 7/9 - Retry +#. Zone Editor - Help for tab - Zone (SOA) 5/7 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:163 src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:405 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Retry</b> sets how often slave servers try to synchronize\n" +"the zone from the master server if synchronization fails.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 8/9 - Expiry +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:167 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Expiry</b> means the period after which the zone expires on slave\n" +"servers and slave servers stop answering replies until it is synchronized.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 9/9 - Minimum +#. Zone Editor - Help for tab - Zone (SOA) 7/7 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:173 src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:415 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Minimum</b> sets for how long the slave servers should cache\n" +"negative answers (name resolution failed).</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. ddns keys dialog +#. help text 1/1 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:178 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>TSIG Key Management</big></b><br>\n" +"Define TSIG keys used for dynamic zone updates.\n" +"To add a new TSIG key, use the \n" +"<b>File Name</b> text field or the <b>Browse</b> button then click <b>Add</b>.\n" +"To delete an existing TSIG key, select it in the list and click <b>Delete</b>.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Expert Mode Configuration - Start Up 1/3 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:187 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Booting</big></b><br>\n" +"To start the DNS server every time your computer is booted, set\n" +"<b>On</b>. Otherwise set <b>Off</b>.</p> " +msgstr "" + +#. Expert Mode Configuration - Start Up 1/3 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:194 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>LDAP Support</big></b><br>\n" +"To store the DNS zones in LDAP instead of native configuration files,\n" +"set <b>LDAP Support Active</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Expert Mode Configuration - Start Up 3/3 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:201 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Switch On or Off</big></b><br>\n" +"To start or stop the DNS server immediately, use \n" +"<b>Start DNS Server Now</b> or\n" +"<b>Stop DNS Server Now</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Expert Mode Configuration - Forwarders 1/3 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:208 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Forwarders</big></b><br>\n" +"Forwarders are DNS servers to which your DNS server should send queries\n" +"it cannot answer.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Expert Mode Configuration - Forwarders 2/3 +#. _("<p>To ask forwarders during name resolution and in case of fail do full +#. DNS lookup, set <b>Forward First</b>. To ask forwarders only, set +#. <b>Forwarders Only</b>. To do full DNS lookup always, do not check any +#. of these check boxes.</p> +#. ") + +#. Expert Mode Configuration - Forwarders 3/3 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:221 +msgid "" +"<p>To add a new forwarder, set its <b>IP Address</b> and click <b>Add</b>.\n" +"To delete a configured forwarder, select it and click <b>Delete</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Expert Mode Configuration - Basic Options 1/2 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:225 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Edit DNS Server Options</big></b><br>\n" +"Use this dialog to edit options of the DNS server.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Expert Mode Configuration - Basic Options 2/3 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:229 +msgid "" +"<p>To add new options, select the <b>Option</b>,\n" +"enter its <b>Value</b>, and click <b>Add</b>.</p>\n" +"<p>To modify a configured option, select it in the table,\n" +"change the <b>Value</b>, and click <b>Change</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Expert Mode Configuration - Basic Options 3/3 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:236 +msgid "<p>To remove an option, select it and click <b>Delete</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Expert Mode Configuration - Logging 1/3 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:238 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Logging</big></b><br>\n" +"Use this dialog to define various options of the DNS server logging.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Expert Mode Configuration - Logging 2/3 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:242 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Select <b>Log to System Log</b> to save DNS server log messages to the system log. \n" +"To save the DNS server log messages to a separate file, select \n" +"<b>Log to File</b> and set the <b>Filename</b> to which to save the log and \n" +"the <b>Maximum Size</b> of the log file.\n" +"The DNS server automatically rotates the log files. Use <b>Maximum Versions</b>\n" +"to specify how many log files should be saved.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Expert Mode Configuration - Logging 3/3 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:252 +msgid "" +"<p>In <b>Additional Logging</b>,\n" +"set which actions should be logged. Common actions are always logged.\n" +"<b>Log All DNS Queries</b> logs all queries from clients to the DNS server.\n" +"<b>Log Zone Updates</b> logs when DNS has been updated.\n" +"<b>Log Zone Transfers</b> logs when zone is completely transferred to the \n" +"secondary\n" +"name server.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Expert Mode Configuration - ACLs 1/2 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:262 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>ACLs</big></b><br>\n" +"In this dialog, define access control lists to control\n" +"access to zones.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Expert Mode Configuration - ACLs 2/2 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:268 +msgid "" +"<p>To add a new ACL entry, just enter the option's <b>Name</b>\n" +"and <b>Value</b> then click <b>Add</b>. To remove an \n" +"ACL entry, select it and click <b>Delete</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Expert Mode Configuration - Keys 1/3 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:274 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>TSIG Keys</big></b><br>\n" +"TSIG keys are used for authentication when remotely\n" +"changing the configuration of the DNS server. This is needed\n" +"for the dynamic updates of DNS zones (DDNS).</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Expert Mode Configuration - Keys 2/3 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:281 +msgid "" +"<p>To add an already created key, set the <b>Filename</b>\n" +"(or use the <b>Browse</b> button to select it) and click <b>Add</b>.\n" +"To generate a new key, enter the <b>Filename</b> and the <b>Key ID</b>\n" +"then click <b>Generate</b>. The new key will be generated and also added.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Expert Mode Configuration - Keys 3/3 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:288 +msgid "" +"<p>To remove an existing key, select it and\n" +"click <b>Delete</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Expert Mode Configuration - Zones #1 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:294 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>DNS Zones</big></b><br>\n" +"Use this dialog to manage the DNS zones.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Expert Mode Configuration - Zones #2 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:298 +msgid "" +"<p>To add a new zone, enter its <b>Zone Name</b>, select the <b>Zone Type</b>,\n" +"and click <b>Add</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Expert Mode Configuration - Zones #3 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:302 +msgid "" +"<p>To add a new IPv4 reverse zone, enter a part of the reverse IPv4 address followed by\n" +"<tt>.in-addr.arpa</tt> as its <b>Zone Name</b> (for example, zone name\n" +"<tt>0.168.192.in-addr.arpa</tt> for network <tt>192.168.0.0/24</tt>), select\n" +"the <b>Zone Type</b>, and click <b>Add</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Expert Mode Configuration - Zones #4 +#. %1, %2, %3, and %4 are replaced with examples +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:311 +msgid "" +"<p>To add a new IPv6 reverse zone, enter a part of the reverse IPv6 address followed by\n" +"<tt>%1</tt> as its <b>Zone Name</b>. Several formats for entering the zone name are\n" +"supported: Standard form: <tt>%2</tt>;\n" +"Forward form: <tt>%3</tt>;\n" +"Forward form without netmask bits: <tt>%4</tt>\n" +"(by default <tt>64</tt> netmask bits are used).</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Expert Mode Configuration - Zones #5 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:326 +msgid "" +"<p>To modify settings for a zone, such as zone transport and name and\n" +"mail servers, select it, and click <b>Edit</b>.\n" +"To remove a configured zone, select it and click <b>Delete</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Zone Editor - Help for tab - Basics 1/3 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:334 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>DDNS and Zone Transport</big></b><br>\n" +"Use this dialog to change dynamic DNS settings of the zone and control access\n" +"to the zone.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Zone Editor - Help for tab - Basics 2/3 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:342 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"To allow dynamic updates of the zone, set <b>Allow Dynamic Updates</b>\n" +"and select the <b>TSIG Key</b>. At least one TSIG key must be defined\n" +"before the zone can be updated dynamically.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Zone Editor - Help for tab - Basics 3/3 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:350 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"To allow transports of the zone, set <b>Enable Zone Transport</b>\n" +"and select the <b>ACLs</b> to check when a remote host\n" +"attempts to transfer the zone. At least one ACL must be defined\n" +"to allow zone transports.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Zone Editor - Help +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:358 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Reverse zone records can be generated from another master zone.\n" +"Select the <b>Automatically Generate Records From</b>\n" +"check-box and choose the zone to generate the records from.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Zone Editor - Help +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:365 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"If this is not a reverse zone, you can see which zones are generated\n" +"from the current on in the <b>Connected Reverse Zones</b> field.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Zone Editor - Help for tab - Name Servers +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:371 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>NS Records</big></b><br>\n" +"To add a new name server, enter the name server address and click <b>Add</b>.\n" +"To remove one of the listed name servers, select it and click\n" +"<b>Delete</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Zone Editor - Help for tab - Mail Servers +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:378 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>MX Records</big></b><br>\n" +"To add a new mail server, enter the <b>Address</b> and <b>Priority</b>\n" +"and click <b>Add</b>.\n" +"To remove one of the listed mail servers, select it and click\n" +"<b>Delete</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Zone Editor - Help for tab - Zone (SOA) 2/7 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:390 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Serial</b> is the number used for determining if the zone has \n" +"changed on\n" +"the master servers (then slave servers do not always need to synchronize the\n" +"entire zone).</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Zone Editor - Help for tab - Zone (SOA) 3/7 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:397 +msgid "" +"<p><b>TTL</b> specifies the time to live for all records in the\n" +"zone that do not have an explicit TTL.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Zone Editor - Help for tab - Zone (SOA) 6/7 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:409 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Expiration</b> means the period after which the zone expires on slave\n" +"servers and slave servers stop answering replies until it is synchronized.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Zone Editor - Help for tab - Records 1/7 or 1/5 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:419 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Records</big></b><br>\n" +"In this dialog, edit the resource records of the zone. To add new resource\n" +"records, set the <b>Record Key</b>, <b>Type</b>, and <b>Value</b> then\n" +"click <b>Add</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Zone Editor - Help for tab - Records 2/7 or 2/5 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:426 +msgid "" +"<p>To change an existing record, select it, modify the desired entries,\n" +"and click <b>Change</b>. To delete a record, select it and click\n" +"<b>Delete</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Zone Editor - Help for tab - Records 3/7 or 3/5 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:432 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Each type of record has its own syntax defined in the RFC.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Zone Editor - Help for tab - Records 4/7 (alt. 1) +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:436 +msgid "" +"<p><b>A: Domain Name Translation</b>:\n" +"<b>Record Key</b> is a hostname without domain or a fully qualified \n" +"hostname followed by a dot.\n" +" <b>Value</b> is an IP address.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Zone Editor - Help for tab - Records 5/7 (alt. 1) +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:443 +msgid "" +"<p><b>CNAME: Alias for Domain Name</b>:\n" +"<b>Record Key</b> is a hostname relative to the current zone or a fully\n" +"qualified hostname followed by a dot.\n" +"<b>Value</b> is a hostname relative to the current zone or a fully\n" +"qualified hostname followed by a dot. It must be represented by\n" +"an A record.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Zone Editor - Help for tab - Records 6/7 (alt. 1) +#. Zone Editor - Help for tab - Records 5/5 (alt. 2) +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:452 src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:479 +msgid "" +"<p><b>NS: Name Server</b>:\n" +"<b>Record Key</b> is a zone name relative to the current zone or an absolute\n" +"domain name followed by a dot.\n" +"<b>Value</b> is a hostname relative to the current zone or fully qualified\n" +"hostname followed by a dot. It must be represented by an A record.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Zone Editor - Help for tab - Records 7/7 (alt. 1) +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:460 +msgid "" +"<p><b>MX: Mail Relay</b>:\n" +"<b>Record Key</b> is a hostname or zone name relative to the current zone\n" +"or an absolute hostname or zone name followed by a dot.\n" +"<b>Value</b> is a hostname relative to the current zone or fully qualified\n" +"hostname followed by a dot. It must be represented by an A record.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Zone Editor - Help for tab - Records 4/5 (alt. 2) +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:468 +msgid "" +"<p><b>PTR: Reverse Translation</b>:\n" +"<b>Record Key</b> is a full reverse zone name (derived from the IP address)\n" +"followed by a dot\n" +"(such as <tt>1.0.168.192.in-addr.arpa.</tt> for IP address <tt>192.168.0.1</tt>)\n" +" or a part of reverse zone name relative to the current zone\n" +"(such as <tt>1</tt> for IP address <tt>192.168.0.1</tt> in zone\n" +"<tt>0.168.192.in-addr.arpa.</tt>).\n" +"<b>Value</b> is a fully qualified hostname followed by a dot.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Final step of the installation wizard - 1/5 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:487 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Finishing the Configuration</big></b></p>\n" +"<p>Check the entered settings before finishing the configuration.</p> \n" +msgstr "" + +#. Final step of the installation wizard - 2/5 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:491 +msgid "" +"<p>Select <b>Open Port in Firewall</b> to adapt the\n" +"SuSEfirewall2 settings to allow all connections to your DNS server.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Final step of the installation wizard - 3/5 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:495 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"To start the DNS server every time your computer is booted, set the \n" +"start-up behavior to <b>On</b>. Otherwise set it to <b>Off</b>.</p> \n" +msgstr "" + +#. Final step of the installation wizard - 4/5 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:502 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"To store the DNS zones in LDAP instead of native configuration files,\n" +"set <b>LDAP Support Active</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Final step of the installation wizard - 5/5 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:509 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"To enter the expert mode of the DNS server configuration, click\n" +"<b>DNS Server Expert Configuration</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. slave zone help text 1/2 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:515 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>Slave DNS Zone</b></big><br>\n" +"Each slave zone must have the master name server defined. Use\n" +"<b>Master DNS Server IP</b> to define the master name server.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. slave zone help text 2/2 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:521 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>Zone Transport</b></big><br>\n" +"To allow transports of the zone, set <b>Enable Zone Transport</b>\n" +"and select the <b>ACLs</b> to check when a remote host\n" +"attempts to transfer the zone. At least one ACL must be defined\n" +"to allow zone transports.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. forward zone help text 1/2 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:529 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>Forward DNS Zone</b></big><br>\n" +"This type of DNS zone only forwards DNS queries to forwarders\n" +"defined in it.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. forward zone help text 2/2 +#: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:535 +msgid "" +"<p>If there are no forwarders defined, all DNS queries\n" +"for the respective zone are denied, because there is no DNS\n" +"server to which that query should be forwarded.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. %1 is usually an IP address +#: src/include/dns-server/options.rb:159 +msgid "Unknown Record Type: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. table entry, %1 is IP address +#: src/include/dns-server/options.rb:180 +msgid "Host %1" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item, A is more technical description +#: src/include/dns-server/options.rb:188 +msgid "A -- Domain Name Translation" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/include/dns-server/options.rb:201 +msgid "&IP Addresses" +msgstr "" + +#. table entry, %1 is host name +#: src/include/dns-server/options.rb:218 +msgid "Alias for %1" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item, CNAME is more technical description +#: src/include/dns-server/options.rb:226 +msgid "CNAME -- Alias for Domain Name" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/include/dns-server/options.rb:237 +msgid "&Alias" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/include/dns-server/options.rb:240 +msgid "&Base Host Name" +msgstr "" + +#. table entry, %1 is host name +#: src/include/dns-server/options.rb:257 +msgid "Pointer to %1" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item, PTR is more technical description +#: src/include/dns-server/options.rb:265 +msgid "PTR -- Reverse Translation" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/include/dns-server/options.rb:276 +msgid "&IP Address" +msgstr "" + +#. table entry, %1 is host name +#: src/include/dns-server/options.rb:295 +msgid "Name Server %1" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item, NS is more technical description +#: src/include/dns-server/options.rb:303 +msgid "NS -- Name Server" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/include/dns-server/options.rb:314 +msgid "&Domain" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/include/dns-server/options.rb:317 +msgid "&Name Server" +msgstr "" + +#. table entry, %1 is host name, %2 is integer +#: src/include/dns-server/options.rb:337 +msgid "Mail Relay %1, Priority %2" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item, MX is more technical description +#: src/include/dns-server/options.rb:416 +msgid "MX -- Mail Relay" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/include/dns-server/options.rb:429 +msgid "&Domain Name" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/include/dns-server/options.rb:432 +msgid "&Mail Relay" +msgstr "" + +#. DNS server read dialog caption +#: src/modules/DnsServer.pm:960 +msgid "Initializing DNS Server Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage +#: src/modules/DnsServer.pm:964 +msgid "Check the environment" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage +#: src/modules/DnsServer.pm:966 src/modules/DnsServer.pm:1337 +msgid "Flush caches of the DNS daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage +#: src/modules/DnsServer.pm:968 +msgid "Read the firewall settings" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage +#: src/modules/DnsServer.pm:970 +msgid "Read the settings" +msgstr "" + +#. progress step +#: src/modules/DnsServer.pm:974 +msgid "Checking the environment..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step +#: src/modules/DnsServer.pm:976 src/modules/DnsServer.pm:1353 +msgid "Flushing caches of the DNS daemon..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step +#: src/modules/DnsServer.pm:978 +msgid "Reading the firewall settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step +#: src/modules/DnsServer.pm:980 +msgid "Reading the settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step +#: src/modules/DnsServer.pm:982 src/modules/DnsServer.pm:1367 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/DnsServer.pm:1266 +msgid "" +"Error occurred while calling netconfig.\n" +"Error: " +msgstr "" + +#. DNS server read dialog caption +#: src/modules/DnsServer.pm:1333 +msgid "Saving DNS Server Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage +#: src/modules/DnsServer.pm:1339 +msgid "Save configuration files" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage +#: src/modules/DnsServer.pm:1341 +msgid "Restart the DNS daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage +#: src/modules/DnsServer.pm:1343 +msgid "Update zone files" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage +#: src/modules/DnsServer.pm:1345 +msgid "Adjust the DNS service" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage +#: src/modules/DnsServer.pm:1347 +msgid "Call netconfig" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage +#: src/modules/DnsServer.pm:1349 +msgid "Write the firewall settings" +msgstr "" + +#. progress step +#: src/modules/DnsServer.pm:1355 +msgid "Saving configuration files..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step +#: src/modules/DnsServer.pm:1357 +msgid "Restarting the DNS daemon..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step +#: src/modules/DnsServer.pm:1359 +msgid "Updating zone files..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step +#: src/modules/DnsServer.pm:1361 +msgid "Adjusting the DNS service..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step +#: src/modules/DnsServer.pm:1363 +msgid "Calling netconfig..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step +#: src/modules/DnsServer.pm:1365 +msgid "Writing the firewall settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. Cannot start service 'named', because of error that follows Error:. Do not translate named. +#: src/modules/DnsServer.pm:1538 +msgid "" +"Error occurred while starting service named.\n" +"\n" +msgstr "" + +#. type of zone to be used in summary +#: src/modules/DnsServer.pm:1662 +msgid "Stub" +msgstr "" + +#. type of zone to be used in summary +#: src/modules/DnsServer.pm:1664 +msgid "Hint" +msgstr "" + +#. summary string +#: src/modules/DnsServer.pm:1673 +msgid "The DNS server starts when booting the system." +msgstr "" + +#. summary string +#: src/modules/DnsServer.pm:1679 +msgid "The DNS server does not start when booting the system." +msgstr "" + +#. summary string, %s is list of DNS zones (their names), coma separated +#: src/modules/DnsServer.pm:1707 +#, perl-format +msgid "Configured Zones: %s" +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/modules/DnsServer.pm:1721 +msgid "Invalid LDAP configuration. Cannot use LDAP." +msgstr "" + +#. yes-no popup +#: src/modules/DnsServer.pm:1802 +msgid "Enable LDAP support?" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/modules/DnsServer.pm:1890 +msgid "" +"Installation of required packages failed.\n" +"LDAP support will not be active." +msgstr "" + +#. BNC #679960 +#: src/modules/DnsServer.pm:1949 +msgid "Unknown LDAP initialization error." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup error message, %1 is an LDAP object whose creation failed +#: src/modules/DnsServer.pm:1985 +msgid "Error occurred while creating %1." +msgstr "" + +#. error report, %1 is ldap object +#: src/modules/DnsServer.pm:2021 +msgid "Error occurred while creating cn=defaultDNS,%1. Not using LDAP." +msgstr "" + +#. error report, %1 is LDAP record DN +#: src/modules/DnsServer.pm:2047 +msgid "Error occurred while updating %1." +msgstr "" + +#. error report, %1 is LDAP record DN +#: src/modules/DnsServer.pm:2082 +msgid "Error occurred while creating %1. Not using LDAP." +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/docker.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/docker.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/docker.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,137 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. Only root can start process +#: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:74 +msgid "Docker service does not run. Should YaST start docker? Otherwise YaST quits." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:78 +msgid "Docker service does not run. Run this module as root or start docker service manually." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:141 +msgid "Communication with docker failed with error: %s. Please try again." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:152 +msgid "Do you really want to stop the running container?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:154 src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:163 +msgid "Do you want to remove the container?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:161 +msgid "Do you really want to kill the running container?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:173 +msgid "&Images" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:174 +msgid "&Containers" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:184 +msgid "Docker Images" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:194 +msgid "Running Docker Containers" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:217 +msgid "Repository" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:218 +msgid "Tag" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:219 +msgid "Image ID" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:220 src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:234 +msgid "Created" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:221 +msgid "Virtual Size" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:231 +msgid "Container ID" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:232 +msgid "Image" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:233 +msgid "Command" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:235 +msgid "Status" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:236 +msgid "Ports" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:283 src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:293 +msgid "Re&fresh" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:284 +msgid "R&un" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:285 +msgid "&Delete" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:294 +msgid "S&how Changes" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:295 +msgid "Inject &Terminal" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:296 +msgid "&Stop Container" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:297 +msgid "&Kill Container" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:298 +msgid "&Commit" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:304 +msgid "&Exit" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/ydocker/main_dialog.rb:315 +msgid "Do you really want to delete image \"%s\"?" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/drbd.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/drbd.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/drbd.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,643 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. Command line help text for the Xdrbd module +#: src/clients/drbd.rb:54 +msgid "Configuration of DRBD" +msgstr "" + +#. Rich text title for Drbd in proposals +#: src/clients/drbd_proposal.rb:86 +msgid "DRBD" +msgstr "" + +#. Menu title for Drbd in proposals +#: src/clients/drbd_proposal.rb:88 +msgid "&DRBD" +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. Copyright (c) 2006 Novell, Inc. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under +#. the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as published by the +#. Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +#. ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS +#. FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with +#. this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, you may find +#. current contact information at www.novell.com. +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. File: include/drbd/dialogs.ycp +#. Package: Configuration of drbd +#. Summary: Dialogs definitions +#. Authors: xwhu +#. +#. $Id: dialogs.ycp 27914 2006-02-13 14:32:08Z locilka $ +#: src/include/drbd/common.rb:44 +msgid "Start-up Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/drbd/common.rb:45 +msgid "Global Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/drbd/common.rb:46 +msgid "Resource Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/drbd/common.rb:47 +msgid "LVM Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/drbd/common.rb:48 +msgid "Resource Basic Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/drbd/common.rb:49 +msgid "Resource Advanced Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. Copyright (c) 2006 Novell, Inc. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under +#. the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as published by the +#. Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +#. ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS +#. FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with +#. this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, you may find +#. current contact information at www.novell.com. +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. File: include/drbd/dialogs.ycp +#. Package: Configuration of drbd +#. Summary: Dialogs definitions +#. Authors: xwhu +#. +#. $Id: dialogs.ycp 27914 2006-02-13 14:32:08Z locilka $ +#: src/include/drbd/dialogs.rb:51 +msgid "Warning: YaST2 DRBD module will rename all\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/drbd/dialogs.rb:52 +msgid "" +"included files for DRBD into a supported schema.\n" +"\n" +"Do you want to continue?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/drbd/dialogs.rb:69 +msgid "Failed to read DRBD configuration file:\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/drbd/dialogs.rb:86 +msgid "Failed to write configuration to disk:\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Drbd configure1 dialog caption +#. Drbd configure2 dialog caption +#: src/include/drbd/dialogs.rb:99 src/include/drbd/dialogs.rb:138 +msgid "DRBD Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Drbd configure1 dialog contents +#: src/include/drbd/dialogs.rb:102 +msgid "First part of configuration of DRBD" +msgstr "" + +#. Drbd configure2 dialog contents +#: src/include/drbd/dialogs.rb:141 +msgid "Second part of configuration of DRBD" +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#: src/include/drbd/global_conf.rb:36 +msgid "Global Configuration of DRBD" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/drbd/global_conf.rb:42 +msgid "Minor Count" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/drbd/global_conf.rb:51 +msgid "Dialog Refresh" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/drbd/global_conf.rb:61 +msgid "Disable IP Verification" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:36 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Initializing DRBD Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Please wait...<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:40 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Initialization:</big></b><br>\n" +"Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing <b>Abort</b> now.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:44 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Saving DRBD Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Please wait...<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:48 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Saving:</big></b><br>\n" +"Abort the save procedure by pressing <b>Abort</b>.\n" +"An additional dialog informs whether it is safe to do so.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:54 +msgid "Start to configure DRBD." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:55 +msgid "<p><b><big>Startup Configuration of DRBD</big></b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:58 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Booting:</b></p>\n" +"\t\t\t<p>checking \"On\" to start DRBD server Now and when booting</p>\n" +"\t\t\t<p>checking \"Off\", DRBD server only starts manually</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>Switch On and Off:</b></p>\n" +"\t\t\t<p>Starting or Stopping DRBD Server right now</p>\n" +"\t\t" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:66 src/include/drbd/helps.rb:72 +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:85 +msgid "<p><b><big>Resource Configuration of DRBD</big></b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:69 +msgid "" +"<p>Clicking \"Add\", \"Edit\", \"Delete\" button to add, edit or delete a resource</p>\n" +"\t\t" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:75 +msgid "" +"\n" +"\t\t<p>\"Name\" is mandatory and must match the Linux host name (uname -n) of one of the nodes. Should not include \".\" in hostname.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>\"Address:Port\": A resource needs one IP address per device, which is used to wait for incoming connections from the partner device to reach the device. Each DRBD resource needs a TCP port which is used to connect to the node's partner device.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>\"Device\": The name of the block device node of the resource being described. You must use this device with your application (file system) and you must not use the low level block device which is specified with the disk parameter,following its minor number. Otherwise, you may omit the name, or the word minor and its number. If you omit the name a default of /dev/drbd'minor number' will be used.\n" +"\t\tLike: '/dev/drbd{service} minor {minor drbd number [0...255]}' or '/dev/drbd{minor drbd number [0...255]}'</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>\"Disk\": DRBD uses this block device to actually store and retrieve the data. Never access such a device while DRBD is running on top of it.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>\"Meta-disk\": internal. Internal means that the last part of the backing device is used to store the meta-data.</p>\n" +"\t\t" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:88 +msgid "" +"\n" +"\t\t<p><b>Protocol</b></p>\n" +"\t\t<p>Protocol A: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached local disk and local TCP send buffer.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>Protocol B: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached local disk and remote buffer cache.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>Protocol C: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached both local and remote disk.</p>\n" +"\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t \n" +"\t\t<p><b>wfc-timeout</b>: Wait for connection timeout</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>degr-wfc-timeout</b>: Wait for connection timeout, if this node was a degraded cluster</p>\n" +"\n" +"\t\t<p><b>on-io-error</b>: What to do when the lower level device reports io-error to the upper layers</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>sndbuf-size</b>: The size of the TCP socket send buffer</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>max-buffers</b>: Maximum number of requests to be allocated by DRBD</p>\n" +"\n" +"\t\t<p><b>timeout</b>: If the partner node fails to send an expected response packet within time 10ths of a second, the partner node is considered dead and therefore the TCP/IP connection is abandoned. This must be lower than connect-int and ping-int. The default value is 60 = 6 seconds, the unit 0.1 seconds.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>connect-int</b>: The time the peer has time to answer to a keep-alive packet. In case the peer's reply is not received within this time period, it is considered as dead. The default value is 500ms, the default unit is 100ms</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>ping-int</b>: The time the peer has time to answer to a keep-alive packet</p>\n" +"\n" +"\t\t<p><b>max-epoch-size</b>: The highest number of data blocks between two write barriers</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>ko-count</b>: the secondary node fails to complete a single write request for count times the timeout, it is expelled from the cluster. The default value is 0, which disables this feature.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>rate</b>: To ensure a smooth operation of the application on top of DRBD, it is possible to limit the bandwidth which may be used by background synchronizations. The default is 250 KB/sec, the default unit is KB/sec.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>al-extents</b>: parameter you control how big the hot area (= active set) can get. The default number of extents is 127. (Minimum: 7, Maximum: 3843)</p>\n" +"\t\t" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:112 +msgid "<p><b><big>LVM Configuration</big></b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:115 +msgid "" +"\n" +"\t\t<p><b>LVM configuration file /etc/lvm/lvm.conf</b></p>\n" +"\t\t<p>To use LVM with DRBD, it is necessary to change some options in the LVM configuration file and to remove stale cache entries on the nodes.</p>\t\t<p>Refer to 'man lvm.conf' for further information including the file layout.</p>\n" +"\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t \n" +"\t\t<p><b>Device Filter</b>: This masks the underlying block device from the list of devices LVM scans for Physical Volume signatures. This way, LVM is instructed to read Physical Volume signatures from DRBD devices, rather than from the underlying backing block devices.</p>\t\t<p><b>AutoFilter</b>: According to the configuration of drbd, LVM filter will always be changed automatically. To change it manually, disable the checkbox of AutoFilter.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>The filter consists of an array of regular expressions. These expressions can be delimited by a character of your choice, and prefixed with either an 'a' (for accept) or 'r' (for reject).</p>\t\t<p>For example, setting filter as [\"r|/dev/sda.*|\"]</p>\n" +"\n" +"\t\t<p><b>LVM cache</b>: Enable/turn on writing the LVM cache is default. Disable cache when for network storage, like nfs. </p>\n" +"\n" +"\t\t" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:130 +msgid "<p><b><big>Global Configuration of DRBD</big></b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:133 +msgid "<p>Check <b>\"Disable IP Verification\"</b> to disable one of drbdadm's sanity check</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:136 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Dialog Refresh:</b> The user dialog counts and displays the seconds it waited so\n" +" far. You might want to disable this if you have the console\n" +" of your server connected to a serial terminal server with\n" +" limited logging capacity.\n" +" The Dialog will print the count each 'dialog-refresh' seconds,\n" +" set it to 0 to disable redrawing completely. </p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:144 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Minor Count:</b>\n" +" use this if you want to define more resources later\n" +" without reloading the module.\n" +" by default we load the module with exactly as many devices\n" +" as configured mentioned in this file. </p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Summary dialog help 1/3 +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:152 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>DRBD Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Configure drbd here.<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Summary dialog help 2/3 +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:156 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Adding a drbd:</big></b><br>\n" +"Choose an drbd from the list of detected drbds.\n" +"If your drbd was not detected, use <b>Other (not detected)</b>.\n" +"Then press <b>Configure</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Summary dialog help 3/3 +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:163 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Editing or Deleting:</big></b><br>\n" +"If you press <b>Edit</b>, an additional dialog in which to change\n" +"the configuration opens.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Ovreview dialog help 1/3 +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:169 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>DRBD Configuration Overview</big></b><br>\n" +"Obtain an overview of installed drbds. Additionally\n" +"edit their configurations.<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Ovreview dialog help 2/3 +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:175 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Adding a drbd:</big></b><br>\n" +"Press <b>Add</b> to configure a drbd.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Ovreview dialog help 3/3 +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:179 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Editing or Deleting:</big></b><br>\n" +"Choose a drbd to change or remove.\n" +"Then press <b>Edit</b> or <b>Delete</b> as desired.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Configure1 dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:185 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Configuration Part One</big></b><br>\n" +"Press <b>Next</b> to continue.\n" +"<br></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Configure1 dialog help 2/2 +#. Configure2 dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:191 src/include/drbd/helps.rb:203 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Selecting Something</big></b><br>\n" +"It is not possible. You must code it first. :-)\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Configure2 dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:197 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Configuration Part Two</big></b><br>\n" +"Press <b>Next</b> to continue.\n" +"<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Default is always true (auto) +#: src/include/drbd/lvm_conf.rb:36 +msgid "LVM Filter Configuration of DRBD" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/drbd/lvm_conf.rb:44 +msgid "Modify LVM Device filter Automatically" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/drbd/lvm_conf.rb:54 +msgid "Device Filter" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/drbd/lvm_conf.rb:64 +msgid "Writing the LVM cache" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/drbd/lvm_conf.rb:73 +msgid "Enable LVM Cache" +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#: src/include/drbd/resource_conf.rb:134 +msgid "Resource Name" +msgstr "" + +#. Update new add disk used of drbd res for LVM filter +#. Ignore the removed disk +#: src/include/drbd/resource_conf.rb:326 +msgid "Protocol" +msgstr "" + +#. myHelp("basic_conf"); +#: src/include/drbd/resource_conf.rb:572 +msgid "Node names must be different." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/drbd/resource_conf.rb:578 +msgid "Node names must not include \".\" , using the local hostname." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/drbd/resource_conf.rb:608 +msgid "Please fill out all fields." +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. Package: Configuration of heartbeat +#. Authors: Martin Lazar +#. +#. $Id: startup_conf.ycp 30707 2006-05-04 13:19:08Z lslezak $ +#: src/include/drbd/startup_conf.rb:29 +msgid "Booting" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/drbd/startup_conf.rb:37 +msgid "On -- Start DRBD Server when Booting" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/drbd/startup_conf.rb:41 +msgid "Off -- Server Only Starts Manually" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/drbd/startup_conf.rb:50 +msgid "Switch On and Off" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/drbd/startup_conf.rb:55 +msgid "Current Status: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/drbd/startup_conf.rb:62 +msgid "Start DRBD Server Now" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/drbd/startup_conf.rb:67 +msgid "Stop DRBD Server Now" +msgstr "" + +#. firewall_layout is just a dialog +#: src/include/drbd/startup_conf.rb:89 +msgid "Propagate Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/drbd/startup_conf.rb:96 +msgid "" +"To propagate this configuration ,\n" +"copy the configuration file '/etc/drbd.conf' to the rest of nodes manually." +msgstr "" + +#. } +#: src/include/drbd/startup_conf.rb:141 +msgid "DRBD server is running." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/drbd/startup_conf.rb:142 +msgid "DRBD server is not running." +msgstr "" + +#. Report::Error ( Service::Error()); +#: src/include/drbd/startup_conf.rb:166 +msgid "Start DRBD service failed" +msgstr "" + +#. Report::Error ( Service::Error() ); +#: src/include/drbd/startup_conf.rb:174 +msgid "Stop DRBD service failed" +msgstr "" + +#. Initialization dialog caption +#: src/include/drbd/wizards.rb:139 +msgid "Heartbeat Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Initialization dialog contents +#: src/include/drbd/wizards.rb:141 +msgid "Initializing..." +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. Copyright (c) 2006 Novell, Inc. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under +#. the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as published by the +#. Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +#. ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS +#. FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with +#. this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, you may find +#. current contact information at www.novell.com. +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. File: modules/Drbd.ycp +#. Package: Configuration of drbd +#. Summary: Drbd settings, input and output functions +#. Authors: xwhu +#. +#. $Id: Drbd.ycp 27914 2006-02-13 14:32:08Z locilka $ +#. +#. Representation of the configuration of drbd. +#. Input and output routines. +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:110 +msgid "Failed to merge separated DRBD conf files\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:132 +msgid "Failed to write drbd.conf.YaST2prepare" +msgstr "" + +#. DRBD read dialog caption +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:185 +msgid "Initializing DRBD Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. We do not set help text here, because it was set outside +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:193 +msgid "Read global settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:194 +msgid "Read resources" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:195 +msgid "Read LVM configurations" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:196 +msgid "Read daemon status" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:197 src/modules/Drbd.rb:204 +msgid "Read SuSEFirewall Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:200 +msgid "Reading global settings..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:201 +msgid "Reading resources..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:202 +msgid "Reading LVM configurations..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:203 +msgid "Reading daemon status..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:205 src/modules/Drbd.rb:629 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#. new_map = remove(new_map, key); +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:497 +msgid "Failed to backup drbd.conf" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:506 +msgid "Failed to clean drbd.conf for drbdadm test" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:530 +msgid "" +"Invalid configuration of resource %1\n" +"%2" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:549 +msgid "Failed to bring drbd.conf back" +msgstr "" + +#. DRBD write dialog caption +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:605 +msgid "Writing DRBD Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Comment code below due to change the "booting" status +#. won't change modified flag +#. return true if !@modified +#. We do not set help text here, because it was set outside +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:617 +msgid "Write global settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:618 +msgid "Write resources" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:619 +msgid "Write LVM configurations" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:620 +msgid "Set daemon status" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:621 +msgid "Write the SuSEfirewall settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:624 +msgid "Writing global settings..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:625 +msgid "Writing resources..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:626 +msgid "Writing LVM configurations..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:627 +msgid "Setting daemon status..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:628 +msgid "Writing the SuSEFirewall settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Drbd.rb:639 +msgid "Failed to make directory /etc/drbd.d" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/fcoe-client.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/fcoe-client.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/fcoe-client.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,671 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. Command line help text for the Xfcoe-client module +#: src/clients/fcoe-client.rb:54 +msgid "Configuration of fcoe-client" +msgstr "" + +#. progress step title +#: src/clients/fcoe-client_finish.rb:67 +msgid "Saving fcoe configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. Rich text title for FcoeClient in proposals +#: src/clients/fcoe-client_proposal.rb:82 +msgid "FcoeClient" +msgstr "" + +#. Menu title for FcoeClient in proposals +#: src/clients/fcoe-client_proposal.rb:86 +msgid "&FcoeClient" +msgstr "" + +#. setting of config value is 'yes' +#: src/include/fcoe-client/complex.rb:48 +msgid "yes" +msgstr "" + +#. setting of config value is 'no' +#: src/include/fcoe-client/complex.rb:50 +msgid "no" +msgstr "" + +#. text of an error popup +#: src/include/fcoe-client/complex.rb:102 +msgid "" +"Cannot remove the FCoE interface.\n" +"Command %1 failed." +msgstr "" + +#. FCoE is not available on the interface +#: src/include/fcoe-client/complex.rb:195 +msgid "not available" +msgstr "" + +#. the interface is not configured for FCoE +#: src/include/fcoe-client/complex.rb:197 +msgid "not configured" +msgstr "" + +#. the flag is 'true' +#: src/include/fcoe-client/complex.rb:203 +msgid "true" +msgstr "" + +#. the flag is 'false' +#: src/include/fcoe-client/complex.rb:205 +msgid "false" +msgstr "" + +#. the flag is not set at all +#: src/include/fcoe-client/complex.rb:207 +msgid "not set" +msgstr "" + +#. headline of the edit dialog - configuration of values for a certain network interface +#: src/include/fcoe-client/complex.rb:306 +msgid "Configuration of VLAN interface %1 on %2" +msgstr "" + +#. text of an error popup +#: src/include/fcoe-client/complex.rb:368 +msgid "" +"Cannot start FCoE on VLAN interface %1\n" +"because FCoE is already configured on\n" +"network interface %2 itself." +msgstr "" + +#. text of an error popup +#: src/include/fcoe-client/complex.rb:383 +msgid "" +"Cannot start FCoE on network interface %1 itself\n" +"because FCoE is already configured on\n" +"VLAN interface(s) %2." +msgstr "" + +#. headline of a popup: creating and starting Fibre Channel over Ethernet +#: src/include/fcoe-client/complex.rb:417 +msgid "Creating and Starting FCoE on Detected VLAN Device" +msgstr "" + +#. question to the user: really create and start FCoE +#: src/include/fcoe-client/complex.rb:420 +msgid "" +"Do you really want to create a FCoE network\n" +"interface for discovered VLAN interface %1\n" +"on %2 and start the FCoE initiator?" +msgstr "" + +#. text of an error popup +#: src/include/fcoe-client/complex.rb:443 +msgid "Cannot create and start FCoE on %1." +msgstr "" + +#. text of an error popup: command failed on the network interface +#: src/include/fcoe-client/complex.rb:480 +msgid "Command \"%1\" on %2 failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/fcoe-client/complex.rb:488 +msgid "" +"Creating FCoE interface failed.\n" +"Continue because running in test mode" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text: really remove FCoE VLAN interface +#: src/include/fcoe-client/complex.rb:583 +msgid "Do you really want to remove the FCoE interface %1?" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text continues +#: src/include/fcoe-client/complex.rb:591 +msgid "" +"Attention:\n" +"Make sure the interface is not essential for a used device.\n" +"Removing it may result in an unusable system." +msgstr "" + +#. popup text continues +#: src/include/fcoe-client/complex.rb:601 +msgid "" +"Don't remove the interface if it's related\n" +"to an already activated multipath device." +msgstr "" + +#. replace values in table +#: src/include/fcoe-client/complex.rb:750 +msgid "Removing of interface %1 failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/fcoe-client/complex.rb:762 +msgid "Destroying interface %1 failed." +msgstr "" + +#. text of a warning popup +#: src/include/fcoe-client/complex.rb:794 +msgid "" +"DCB Required is set to \"yes\" but the\n" +"interface isn't DCB capable." +msgstr "" + +#. text of an information (notify) popup +#: src/include/fcoe-client/complex.rb:831 +msgid "" +"Service 'fcoe' requires enabled service 'lldpad'.\n" +"Enabling start on boot of service 'lldpad'." +msgstr "" + +#. radio button: start service on boot +#. radio button: start service on boot +#: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:48 src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:69 +msgid "When Booting" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button: start service manually +#. radio button: start service manually +#: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:56 src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:77 +msgid "Manually" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label: enable FCoE (yes/no) +#: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:109 +msgid "&FCoE Enable" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:110 +#: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:118 +#: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:125 +#: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:230 +#: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:241 +msgid "Yes" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:110 +#: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:118 +#: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:125 +#: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:230 +#: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:241 +msgid "No" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label: require DCB (yes/no) +#: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:117 +msgid "&DCB Required" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label: AUTO_VLAN setting (yes/no) +#: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:124 +msgid "&AUTO_VLAN" +msgstr "" + +#. frame containing radio buttons for fcoe service start +#: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:150 +msgid "FCoE Service Start" +msgstr "" + +#. frame containing radio buttons for lldpad service start +#: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:155 +msgid "Lldpad Service Start" +msgstr "" + +#. column headers of table of network interfaces (keep them short) +#: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:179 +msgid "Device" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:180 +msgid "MAC Address" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:181 +msgid "Model" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:182 +msgid "VLAN" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:183 +msgid "FCoE VLAN Interface" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:184 +msgid "FCoE Enable" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:185 +msgid "DCB Required" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:186 +msgid "AUTO VLAN" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:187 +msgid "DCB capable" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:188 +msgid "Driver" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:189 +msgid "Flag FCoE" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:190 +msgid "Flag iSCSI" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:191 +msgid "Storage Only" +msgstr "" + +#. button labels +#: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:198 +msgid "Retry &Detection" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:199 +msgid "Change &Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:200 +msgid "Create &FCoE Interface" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:201 +msgid "&Remove Interface" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label - configuration settings of FCoE +#: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:222 +msgid "Configuration Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label (debug setting yes/no) +#: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:229 +msgid "&Debug" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label (use syslog yes/no) +#: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:240 +msgid "&Use syslog" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:35 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Initializing fcoe-client Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Please wait...<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:39 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Initialization:</big></b><br>\n" +"Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing <b>Abort</b> now.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:43 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Saving fcoe-client Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Please wait...<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:47 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Saving:</big></b><br>\n" +"Abort the save procedure by pressing <b>Abort</b>.\n" +"An additional dialog informs whether it is safe to do so.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Summary dialog help 1/3 +#: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:54 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>FcoeClient Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Configure fcoe-client here.<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Summary dialog help 2/3 +#: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:58 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Adding a fcoe-client:</big></b><br>\n" +"Choose a fcoe-client from the list of detected fcoe-clients.\n" +"If your fcoe-client was not detected, use <b>Other (not detected)</b>.\n" +"Then press <b>Configure</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Summary dialog help 3/3 +#: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:65 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Editing or Deleting:</big></b><br>\n" +"If you press <b>Edit</b>, an additional dialog in which to change\n" +"the configuration opens.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Services dialog help 1/3 +#: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:71 +msgid "<p><b><big>Starting of services</big><br></b><br>Enable or disable the start of the services <b>fcoe</b> and <b>lldpad</b> at boot time.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Services dialog help 2/3 +#: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:76 +msgid "<p>Starting the service <b>fcoe</b> means starting the <i>Fibre Channel over Ethernet</i> service daemon <i>fcoemon</i> which controls the FCoE interfaces and establishes a connection with the daemon <i>lldpad</i>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Services dialog help 3/3 +#: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:82 +msgid "<p>The <b>lldpad</b> service provides the <i>Link Layer Discovery Protocol</i> agent daemon <i>lldpad</i>, which informs <i>fcoemon</i> about DCB (Data Center Bridging) features and configuration of the interfaces.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Interfaces dialog help 1/5 +#: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:88 +msgid "<p><b><big>Network interface overview</big></b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Interfaces dialog help 2/5 +#: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:92 +msgid "<p>The interfaces dialog shows all detected netcards including the status of VLAN and FCoE configuration.<br>FCoE is possible if a VLAN interface is configured for FCoE on the switch.<br>For every netcard (network interface), this is shown in column <i>FCoE VLAN Interface</i>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Interfaces dialog help 3/5 +#: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:99 +msgid "<p>It's possible to retry the check for FCoE services by using <b>Retry Detection</b>(might be required for interfaces needing some time to get up).</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Interfaces dialog help 4/5 +#: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:103 +msgid "<p>The values for <i>FCoE VLAN Interface</i> in detail:<br><b>not available</b>: Fibre Channel over Ethernet is not possible (must be enabled on the switch first).<br><b>not configured</b>: FCoE is possible but not yet activated.<br>Press <b>Create FCoE VLAN Interface</b> to activate.<br>If the FCoE VLAN interface has already been created, the name is shown in the column, e.g. eth3.200.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Interfaces dialog help 4/5 +#: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:113 +msgid "<p>To change the configuration of a FCoE VLAN interface, click on <b>Change Settings</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Configuration dialog help 1/3 +#: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:117 +msgid "<p><b><big>General Configuration of FCoE</big></b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Configuration dialog help 2/3 +#: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:121 +msgid "<p>Configure the general settings for the FCoE system service. The settings are written to '/etc/fcoe/config'.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Configuration dialog help 3/3 +#: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:125 +msgid "" +"<p>The values are:<br>\n" +"<b>Debug</b>: <i>yes</i> or <i>no</i><br>This is used to enable or disable debugging messages from the fcoe service script and <i>fcoemon</i>.<br><b>Use syslog</b>: <i>yes</i> or <i>no</i><br>Messages are sent to the system log if set to <i>yes</i> (data are logged to /var/log/messages).</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. edit dialog help 1/3 +#: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:133 +msgid "<p>Edit Settings in /etc/fcoe/ethx</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Edit dialog help 2/3 +#: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:137 +msgid "<p>The daemon <i>fcoemon</i> reads these configuration files on initialization.<br>There is a file for every interface and the values indicate whether FCoE instances should be created and if DCB is required.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Edit dialog help 3/3 +#: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:143 +msgid "<p>The values are:<br><b>FCoE Enable</b>: <i>yes</i> or <i>no</i><br>Enable or disable the creation of FCoE instances.<br><b>DCB Required</b>: <i>yes</i> or <i>no</i><br>The default is <i>yes</i>, DCB is usually required.<br><b>AUTO VLAN</b>: <i>yes</i> or <i>no</i><br>If set to <i>yes</i> 'fcoemon' will create the VLAN interfaces automatically.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Header of tab in tab widget +#. Header of tab in tab widget +#: src/include/fcoe-client/wizards.rb:110 +#: src/include/fcoe-client/wizards.rb:133 +msgid "&Interfaces" +msgstr "" + +#. Header of tab in tab widget +#. Header of tab in tab widget +#: src/include/fcoe-client/wizards.rb:116 +#: src/include/fcoe-client/wizards.rb:139 +msgid "&Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Header of tab in tab widget +#: src/include/fcoe-client/wizards.rb:127 +msgid "&Services" +msgstr "" + +#. Initialization dialog caption +#: src/include/fcoe-client/wizards.rb:184 +msgid "Fibre Channel over Ethernet Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. TODO: rename icon to yast-fcoe (yast2-theme package) +#: src/include/fcoe-client/wizards.rb:209 +msgid "Change FCoE Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Initialization dialog caption +#: src/include/fcoe-client/wizards.rb:315 +msgid "FcoeClient Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Initialization dialog contents +#: src/include/fcoe-client/wizards.rb:317 +msgid "Initializing..." +msgstr "" + +#. don't check interactively for packages (bnc#367300) -> comment from iscsi-client +#. skip it during initial and second stage or when create AY profile +#: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:413 +msgid "<p>To continue the FCoE configuration, the <b>%1</b> package must be installed.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:416 +msgid "<p>Install it now?</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. start service lldpad first +#: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:868 +msgid "Cannot start service 'lldpad'" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:877 +msgid "Cannot start service 'fcoe'" +msgstr "" + +#. first start lldpad +#: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:897 +msgid "Cannot start lldpad systemd socket" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:910 +msgid "Cannot start lldpad service." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:922 +msgid "Cannot start fcoemon systemd socket." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:935 +msgid "Cannot start fcoe service." +msgstr "" + +#. warning if no valid configuration found +#: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:1101 +msgid "" +"Cannot read config file for %1.\n" +"You may edit the settings and recreate the FCoE\n" +"VLAN interface to get a valid configuration." +msgstr "" + +#. FcoeClient read dialog caption +#: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:1466 +msgid "Initializing fcoe-client Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1/3 +#: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:1481 +msgid "Check installed packages" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 2/3 +#: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:1483 +msgid "Check services" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 3/3 +#: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:1485 +msgid "Detect network cards" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 4/4 +#: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:1487 +msgid "Read /etc/fcoe/config" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 1/3 +#: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:1491 +msgid "Checking for installed packages..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 2/3 +#: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:1493 +msgid "Checking for services..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 3/3 +#: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:1495 +msgid "Detecting network cards..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 4/4 +#: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:1497 +msgid "Reading /etc/fcoe/config" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress finished +#. Progress finished +#: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:1499 src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:1593 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#. Error message +#: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:1525 +msgid "Starting of services failed." +msgstr "" + +#. Error message +#: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:1538 +msgid "Cannot detect devices." +msgstr "" + +#. Error message +#: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:1548 +msgid "Cannot read /etc/fcoe/config." +msgstr "" + +#. FcoeClient read dialog caption +#: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:1564 +msgid "Saving fcoe-client Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1/2 +#: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:1579 +msgid "Write the settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 2/3 +#: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:1581 +msgid "Restart FCoE service" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 3/3 +#: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:1583 +msgid "Adjust start of services" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 1/2 +#: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:1587 +msgid "Writing the settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 2/3 +#: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:1589 +msgid "Restarting FCoE service..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress sstep 3/3 +#: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:1591 +msgid "Adjusting start of services..." +msgstr "" + +#. Error message +#: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:1611 +msgid "Cannot write settings to /etc/fcoe/config." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:1617 +msgid "" +"Cannot write settings for FCoE interfaces.\n" +"For details, see /var/log/YaST2/y2log." +msgstr "" + +#. Error message +#: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:1629 +msgid "Restarting of service fcoe failed." +msgstr "" + +#. Error message +#: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:1636 +msgid "Cannot write /etc/sysconfig/network/ifcfg-files." +msgstr "" + +#. Configuration summary text for autoyast +#: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:1693 +msgid "<b>General FCoE configuration</b>" +msgstr "" + +#. options from config file, not meant for translation +#: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:1707 +msgid "<b>Interfaces</b>" +msgstr "" + +#. network card, e.g. eth0 +#: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:1715 +msgid "<i>Netcard</i>:" +msgstr "" + +#. nothing to translate here (abbreviation for +#. Fibre Channel over Ethernet Virtual LAN interface) +#: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:1725 +msgid "<b>Starting of services</b>" +msgstr "" + +#. starting of service "fcoe" at boot time is enabled or disabled +#. starting of service "lldpad" at boot time is enabled or disabled +#: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:1733 src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:1743 +msgid "enabled" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:1734 src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:1744 +msgid "disabled" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/firewall-services.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/firewall-services.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/firewall-services.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,260 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:38+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Name of Service (File name: avahi, RPM: avahi), can be used as check box, item in multiple selection box... +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:37 +msgid "Zeroconf/Bonjour Multicast DNS" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Description of a Service (File name: avahi, RPM: avahi), used as a common label or an item in table +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:40 +msgid "Zeroconf/Bonjour Multicast DNS (mDNS) ports for Service Discovery (DNS-SD)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Name of Service (File name: cyrus-imapd, RPM: cyrus-imapd), can be used as check box, item in multiple selection box... +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:45 +msgid "cyrus-imapd Server" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Description of a Service (File name: cyrus-imapd, RPM: cyrus-imapd), used as a common label or an item in table +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:48 +msgid "Open ports for the cyrus-imapd Server." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Name of Service (File name: dhcp-server, RPM: dhcp), can be used as check box, item in multiple selection box... +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:51 +msgid "DHCPv4 Server" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Description of a Service (File name: dhcp-server, RPM: dhcp), used as a common label or an item in table +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:54 +msgid "Open ports for ISC DHCPv4 4.x server." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Name of Service (File name: dnsmasq-dhcp, RPM: dnsmasq), can be used as check box, item in multiple selection box... +#. TRANSLATORS: Name of Service (File name: dnsmasq-dns, RPM: dnsmasq), can be used as check box, item in multiple selection box... +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:57 +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:63 +msgid "dnsmasq" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Description of a Service (File name: dnsmasq-dhcp, RPM: dnsmasq), used as a common label or an item in table +#. TRANSLATORS: Description of a Service (File name: dnsmasq-dns, RPM: dnsmasq), used as a common label or an item in table +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:60 +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:66 +msgid "Open ports for the dnsmasq DNS/DHCP server." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Name of Service (File name: hplip, RPM: hplip), can be used as check box, item in multiple selection box... +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:69 +msgid "mDNS/Bonjour support for HPLIP" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Description of a Service (File name: hplip, RPM: hplip), used as a common label or an item in table +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:72 +msgid "Firewall Configuration file for mDNS/Bonjour support for HPLIP" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Name of Service (File name: iceccd, RPM: icecream), can be used as check box, item in multiple selection box... +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:77 +msgid "icecream daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Description of a Service (File name: iceccd, RPM: icecream), used as a common label or an item in table +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:80 +msgid "opens socket for the icecream compilation daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Name of Service (File name: icecream-scheduler, RPM: icecream), can be used as check box, item in multiple selection box... +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:83 +msgid "icecream scheduler" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Description of a Service (File name: icecream-scheduler, RPM: icecream), used as a common label or an item in table +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:86 +msgid "Opens ports for the icecream scheduler" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Name of Service (File name: isns, RPM: isns), can be used as check box, item in multiple selection box... +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:89 +msgid "iSNS Daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Description of a Service (File name: isns, RPM: isns), used as a common label or an item in table +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:92 +msgid "Open ports for iSNS daemon with broadcast allowed." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Name of Service (File name: netbios-server, RPM: samba), can be used as check box, item in multiple selection box... +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:95 +msgid "Netbios Server" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Description of a Service (File name: netbios-server, RPM: samba), used as a common label or an item in table +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:98 +msgid "Open ports for Samba Netbios server with broadcast allowed." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Name of Service (File name: nfs-client, RPM: nfs-client), can be used as check box, item in multiple selection box... +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:103 +msgid "NFS Client" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Description of a Service (File name: nfs-client, RPM: nfs-client), used as a common label or an item in table +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:106 +msgid "Firewall configuration for NFS client. Open ports for NFS client to allow connection to an NFS server." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Name of Service (File name: nfs-kernel-server, RPM: nfs-kernel-server), can be used as check box, item in multiple selection box... +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:111 +msgid "NFS Server Service" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Description of a Service (File name: nfs-kernel-server, RPM: nfs-kernel-server), used as a common label or an item in table +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:114 +msgid "Firewall configuration for NFS kernel server. Open ports for NFS to allow other hosts to connect." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Name of Service (File name: ntp, RPM: ntp), can be used as check box, item in multiple selection box... +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:119 +msgid "xntp Server" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Description of a Service (File name: ntp, RPM: ntp), used as a common label or an item in table +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:122 +msgid "Open ports for xntp." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Name of Service (File name: openldap, RPM: openldap2), can be used as check box, item in multiple selection box... +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:125 +msgid "OpenLDAP Server" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Description of a Service (File name: openldap, RPM: openldap2), used as a common label or an item in table +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:128 +msgid "Open ports for the OpenLDAP server (slapd)." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Name of Service (File name: openslp, RPM: openslp-server), can be used as check box, item in multiple selection box... +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:131 +msgid "OpenSLP Server (SLP)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Description of a Service (File name: openslp, RPM: openslp-server), used as a common label or an item in table +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:134 +msgid "Enable OpenSLP server to advertise services." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Name of Service (File name: rsync-server, RPM: rsync), can be used as check box, item in multiple selection box... +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:137 +msgid "Rsync server" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Description of a Service (File name: rsync-server, RPM: rsync), used as a common label or an item in table +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:140 +msgid "Opens port for rsync server in order to allow remote synchronization" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Name of Service (File name: samba-client, RPM: samba-client), can be used as check box, item in multiple selection box... +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:145 +msgid "Samba Client" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Description of a Service (File name: samba-client, RPM: samba-client), used as a common label or an item in table +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:148 +msgid "Enable browsing of SMB shares." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Name of Service (File name: samba-server, RPM: samba), can be used as check box, item in multiple selection box... +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:151 +msgid "Samba Server" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Description of a Service (File name: samba-server, RPM: samba), used as a common label or an item in table +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:154 +msgid "Open ports for Samba server." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Name of Service (File name: sendmail, RPM: sendmail), can be used as check box, item in multiple selection box... +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:157 +msgid "SMTP with sendmail" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Description of a Service (File name: sendmail, RPM: sendmail), used as a common label or an item in table +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:160 +msgid "Firewall configuration file for sendmail" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Name of Service (File name: sshd, RPM: openssh), can be used as check box, item in multiple selection box... +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:163 +msgid "Secure Shell Server" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Description of a Service (File name: sshd, RPM: openssh), used as a common label or an item in table +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:166 +msgid "Open ports for the Secure Shell server." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Name of Service (File name: svnserve, RPM: subversion), can be used as check box, item in multiple selection box... +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:169 +msgid "svnserve" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Description of a Service (File name: svnserve, RPM: subversion), used as a common label or an item in table +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:172 +msgid "Open ports for svnserve" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Name of Service (File name: vnc-httpd, RPM: tightvnc), can be used as check box, item in multiple selection box... +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:175 +msgid "VNC mini-HTTP server" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Description of a Service (File name: vnc-httpd, RPM: tightvnc), used as a common label or an item in table +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:178 +msgid "Opens the VNC HTTP ports so that browsers can connect." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Name of Service (File name: vnc-server, RPM: tightvnc), can be used as check box, item in multiple selection box... +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:181 +msgid "VNC" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Description of a Service (File name: vnc-server, RPM: tightvnc), used as a common label or an item in table +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:184 +msgid "Open VNC server ports so that viewers can connect." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Name of Service (File name: vsftpd, RPM: vsftpd), can be used as check box, item in multiple selection box... +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:187 +msgid "vsftpd Server" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Description of a Service (File name: vsftpd, RPM: vsftpd), used as a common label or an item in table +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:190 +msgid "Open ports for vsftpd server." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Name of Service (File name: ypbind, RPM: ypbind), can be used as check box, item in multiple selection box... +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:193 +msgid "NIS Client" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Description of a Service (File name: ypbind, RPM: ypbind), used as a common label or an item in table +#: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:196 +msgid "The ypbind daemon binds NIS clients to an NIS domain." +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/firewall.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/firewall.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/firewall.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,1819 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. TRANSLATORS: message popup +#: src/clients/firewall_proposal.rb:113 +msgid "" +"Firewall configuration cannot be changed.\n" +"The SuSEfirewall2 package is not installed." +msgstr "" + +#. RichText label +#: src/clients/firewall_proposal.rb:233 +msgid "Firewall" +msgstr "" + +#. Menu label +#: src/clients/firewall_proposal.rb:235 +msgid "&Firewall" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup headline +#: src/include/firewall/complex.rb:66 +msgid "Another Firewall Active" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup text +#: src/include/firewall/complex.rb:68 +msgid "" +"Another kind of firewall is active in your system.\n" +"If you continue, SuSEfirewall2 may produce undefined errors.\n" +"It would be better to remove the other firewall before\n" +"configuring SuSEfirewall2.\n" +"Continue with configuration?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup headline +#: src/include/firewall/complex.rb:108 +msgid "Aborting Firewall Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup message +#: src/include/firewall/complex.rb:110 +msgid "" +"All changes would be lost.\n" +"Really abort configuration?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Radio selection, See #h1 +#: src/include/firewall/dialogs.rb:65 +msgid "&Enable Firewall Automatic Starting" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Radio selection, See #h2 +#: src/include/firewall/dialogs.rb:69 +msgid "&Disable Firewall Automatic Starting" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: part of help text describind #h1, Do not use any shortcut +#: src/include/firewall/dialogs.rb:75 +msgid "Enable Firewall Automatic Starting" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: part of help text describing #h2, Do not use any shortcut +#: src/include/firewall/dialogs.rb:77 +msgid "Disable Firewall Automatic Starting" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: status information +#: src/include/firewall/dialogs.rb:85 +msgid "Firewall is running" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: status information +#: src/include/firewall/dialogs.rb:89 +msgid "Firewall is not running" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Push button +#: src/include/firewall/dialogs.rb:93 +msgid "&Start Firewall Now" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Push button +#: src/include/firewall/dialogs.rb:97 +msgid "S&top Firewall Now" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Push button +#: src/include/firewall/dialogs.rb:105 +msgid "Sa&ve Settings and Restart Firewall Now" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: part of help text - push button label, NO SHORTCUT!!! +#: src/include/firewall/dialogs.rb:119 +msgid "Start Firewall Now" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: part of help text - push button label, NO SHORTCUT!!! +#: src/include/firewall/dialogs.rb:121 +msgid "Stop Firewall Now" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: part of help text - push button label, NO SHORTCUT!!! +#: src/include/firewall/dialogs.rb:123 +msgid "Save Settings and Restart Firewall Now" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Part of dialog caption +#: src/include/firewall/dialogs.rb:271 +msgid "Firewall Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: part of dialog caption +#. TRANSLATORS: tree menu item +#: src/include/firewall/dialogs.rb:286 src/include/firewall/dialogs.rb:289 +msgid "Start-Up" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: part of dialog caption +#. TRANSLATORS: tree menu item +#. TRANSLATORS: Summary item label +#. TRANSLATORS: Summary item label +#: src/include/firewall/dialogs.rb:302 src/include/firewall/dialogs.rb:305 +#: src/include/firewall/summary.rb:151 src/include/firewall/summary.rb:153 +msgid "Interfaces" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: part of dialog caption +#. TRANSLATORS: tree menu item +#: src/include/firewall/dialogs.rb:313 src/include/firewall/dialogs.rb:316 +msgid "Allowed Services" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: part of dialog caption +#: src/include/firewall/dialogs.rb:331 +msgid "Network Masquerading" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: tree menu item +#. TRANSLATORS: frame label +#: src/include/firewall/dialogs.rb:334 src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:210 +msgid "Masquerading" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: part of dialog caption +#. TRANSLATORS: tree menu item +#: src/include/firewall/dialogs.rb:351 src/include/firewall/dialogs.rb:354 +msgid "Broadcast" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: part of dialog caption +#. TRANSLATORS: tree menu item +#: src/include/firewall/dialogs.rb:379 src/include/firewall/dialogs.rb:382 +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:840 +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:727 +msgid "Logging Level" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: part of dialog caption +#. TRANSLATORS: tree menu item +#. Example: +#. All requests from network 80.44.11.0/24 to UDP port 53 originating on port 53 +#. $[ "network" : "80.44.11.0/24", "protocol" : "udp", "dport" : "53", "sport" : "53" ] +#. +#. Possible keys for parameters are "network", "protocol", "dport" and "sport". +#. Mandatory are "network" and "protocol". +#: src/include/firewall/dialogs.rb:390 src/include/firewall/dialogs.rb:393 +#: src/include/firewall/summary.rb:464 +msgid "Custom Rules" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: part of dialog caption +#: src/include/firewall/dialogs.rb:438 +msgid "Summary" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Read dialog help +#: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:42 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Reading Firewall Configuration</big></b>\n" +"<br>Please wait...</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Write dialog help +#: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:46 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Saving Firewall Configuration</big></b>\n" +"<br>Please wait...</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Firewall interfaces dialog help +#: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:50 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Interfaces</big></b>\n" +"<br>Here, assign your network devices into firewall zones\n" +"by selecting the device in the table and clicking <b>Change</b>.</p>\n" +"\n" +"<p>Enter special strings, like <tt>any</tt>, using \n" +"<b>Custom</b>. You can also enter interfaces not yet configured here.\n" +"If you need masquerading, the string <tt>any</tt> is not allowed.</p>\n" +"\n" +"<p>Every network device should be assigned to a firewall zone.\n" +"Network traffic through any unassigned interface is blocked.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Network Manager +#. (NetworkService::IsManaged() ? +#. // TRANSLATORS: Optional help text for Firewall interfaces +#. // Used only when the network interfaces are handled by the Network Manager tool +#. // %1 is a string 'any' (by default) +#. // %2 is a zone name 'External Zone' (by default) +#. sformat(_("<p>You are currently using NetworkManager to control your +#. network interfaces. You should insert a string '%1' into the zone '%2' using +#. <b>Custom</b>. Otherwise your configuration might not work. +#. </p>"), SuSEFirewall::special_all_interface_string, SuSEFirewall::GetZoneFullName(SuSEFirewall::special_all_interface_zone)):"" +#. ), +#. TRANSLATORS: Allowed services dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:75 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Allowed Services</big></b>\n" +"<br>Specify services or ports that should be accessible from the network.\n" +"Networks are divided into firewall zones.</p>\n" +"\n" +"<p>To allow a service, select the <b>Zone</b> and the\n" +"<b>Service to Allow</b> then press <b>Add</b>.\n" +"To remove an allowed service, select the <b>Zone</b> and the <b>Allowed Service</b> then press <b>Delete</b>.</p>\n" +"\n" +"<p>By deselecting <b>Protect Firewall from Internal Zone</b>, you remove\n" +"protection from the zone. All services and ports in your internal network will\n" +"be unprotected.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Allowed services dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:89 +msgid "" +"<p>Additional settings can be configured using <b>Advanced</b>.\n" +"Entries must be separated by a space. There you can allow TCP, UDP, and RPC ports and\n" +"IP protocols.</p>\n" +"<p>TCP and UDP ports can be entered as port names (<tt>ftp-data</tt>),\n" +"port numbers (<tt>3128</tt>), and port ranges (<tt>8000:8520</tt>).\n" +"RPC ports must be entered as service names (<tt>portmap</tt> or <tt>nlockmgr</tt>).\n" +"Enter IP protocols as the protocol name (<tt>esp</tt>).\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Base masquerade dialog help +#: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:100 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Masquerading</big></b>\n" +"<br>Masquerading is a function that hides your internal network behind your firewall and allows\n" +"your internal network to access the external network, such as the Internet, transparently. Requests\n" +"from the external network to the internal one are blocked.\n" +"Select <b>Masquerade Networks</b> to masquerade your networks\n" +"to the external network.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Redirect-masquerade table dialog help +#: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:109 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Although requests from the external network cannot reach your internal network, it is possible to\n" +"transparently redirect any requested ports on your firewall to any internal IP. \n" +"To add a new redirect rule, press <b>Add</b> and complete the redirect form.</p>\n" +"\n" +"<p>To removed any redirect rule, select it in the table and press <b>Delete</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Simple broadcast configuration dialog help +#: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:118 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Broadcast Configuration</big></b>\n" +"<br>Broadcast packets are special UDP packets sent to the whole network to find \n" +"neighboring computers or send information to each computer in the network.\n" +"For example, CUPS servers provide information about their printing queues using broadcast packets.</p>\n" +"\n" +"<p>SuSEfirewall2 services selected in allowed interfaces automatically add needed broadcast\n" +"ports here. To remove any or add any others, edit lists of space-separated ports for\n" +"particular zones.</p>\n" +"\n" +"<p>Other dropped broadcast packets are logged. It could be quite a lot of packets in wider networks.\n" +"To suppress logging of these packets, deselect <b>Log Not Accepted Broadcast Packets</b>\n" +"for the desired zones.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:132 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Broadcast Reply</big></b><br>\n" +"Firewall usually drops packets that are sent by another machines as their reply\n" +"to broadcast packets sent by your system, e.g., Samba browsing or SLP browsing.</p>\n" +"\n" +"<p>Here you can configure which packets are allowed to pass through the firewall. Use <b>Add</b>\n" +"button to add a new rule. You will have to choose the firewall zone and also choose from\n" +"some already defined services or set your rule completely manually.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Base IPsec configuration dialog help +#: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:142 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>IPsec Support</big></b>\n" +"<br>IPsec is an encrypted communication between trusted hosts or networks through untrusted networks, such as\n" +"the Internet. This dialog opens IPsec for an external zone using\n" +"<b>Enabled</b>.</p>\n" +"\n" +"<p><b>Details</b> configures how to handle successfully decrypted\n" +"IPsec packets. For example, they could be handled as if they were from the internal zone.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Base Logging configuration dialog help +#: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:152 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Logging Level</big></b>\n" +"<br>This is a base configuration dialog for IP packet logging settings. Here,\n" +"configure logging for incoming connection packets. Outgoing ones are not logged at all.</p>\n" +"\n" +"<p>There are two groups of logged IP packets: <b>Accepted Packets</b> and <b>Not Accepted Packets</b>.\n" +"You can choose from three levels of logging for each group: <b>Log All</b> for logging every\n" +"packet, <b>Log Only Critical</b> for logging only interesting ones, or <b>Do Not Log Any</b>\n" +"for no logging. You should log at least critical accepted packets.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Base Summary dialog help +#: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:163 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Summary</big></b>\n" +"<br>Here, find a summary of your configuration settings.\n" +"This summary is divided into general configuration and parts for each firewall zone.\n" +"Every existing zone is summarized here.</p>\n" +"\n" +"<p><b>Firewall Starting</b> shows whether the firewall is started in the\n" +"<b>boot process</b> or only <b>manually</b>.</p>\n" +"\n" +"<p>Firewall zones must have a network interface assigned to list the following items in the summary:</p>\n" +"\n" +"<p><b>Interfaces</b>: All interfaces are listed using their configuration name and device name.</p>\n" +"\n" +"<p><b>Open Services, Ports, and Protocols</b>: This lists all allowed network services, additional\n" +"TCP (Transmission Control Protocol), UDP (User Datagram Protocol), and RPC (Remote Procedure Call)\n" +"ports, and IP (Internet Protocol) protocols.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Additional Services dialog help 1/6 +#: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:181 +msgid "" +"<p>Here, enter additional\n" +"ports or protocols to enable in the firewall zone.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Additional Services dialog help 2/6 +#. please, do not modify examples +#: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:186 +msgid "" +"<p><b>TCP Ports</b> and <b>UDP Ports</b> can be entered as\n" +"a list of port numbers, port names, or port ranges separated by spaces,\n" +"such as <tt>22</tt>, <tt>http</tt>, or <tt>137:139</tt>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Additional Services dialog help 3/6 +#. please, do not modify examples +#: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:193 +msgid "" +"<p><b>RPC Ports</b> is a list of RPC services, such as\n" +"<tt>nlockmgr</tt>, <tt>ypbind</tt>, or <tt>portmap</tt>, separated by spaces.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Additional Services dialog help 4/6 +#. please, do not modify examples +#: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:198 +msgid "" +"<p><b>IP Protocols</b> is a list of protocols, such as\n" +"<tt>esp</tt>, <tt>smp</tt>, or <tt>chaos</tt>, separated by spaces.\n" +"Find the current list of protocols at\n" +"http://www.iana.org/assignments/protocol-numbers.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Additional Services dialog help 5/6 +#. please, do not modify examples +#: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:206 +msgid "" +"<p>The <b>Port Range</b> consists of two colon-separated numbers that represent\n" +"all numbers inside the range including the numbers themselves.\n" +"The first port number must be lower than the second one,\n" +"for example, <tt>200:215</tt>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Additional Services dialog help 6/6 +#: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:213 +msgid "" +"<p>The <b>Port Name</b> is a name assigned to a port number by the IANA\n" +"organization. One port number can have multiple port names assigned. Find\n" +"the assignment currently in use in the <tt>/etc/services</tt> file.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: help for Installation Proposal Dialog +#: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:219 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Firewall</big></b><br />\n" +"A firewall is a defensive mechanism that protects your computer from network attacks.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: general help for Custom Rules 1/5 +#: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:223 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Custom Rules</big></b><br>\n" +"Set special firewall rules that allow new connections\n" +"matching these rules.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: general help for Custom Rules 2/5 +#. TRANSLATORS: help for Custom Rules - Adding new rule 1/4 +#: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:229 src/include/firewall/helps.rb:256 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Source Network</b><br>\n" +"Network or IP address where the connection comes from,\n" +"e.g., <tt>192.168.0.1</tt> or <tt>192.168.0.0/255.255.255.0</tt>\n" +"or <tt>192.168.0.0/24</tt> or <tt>0/0</tt> (which means <tt>all</tt>).</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: general help for Custom Rules 3/5 +#. TRANSLATORS: help for Custom Rules - Adding new rule 2/4 +#: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:236 src/include/firewall/helps.rb:263 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Protocol</b><br>\n" +"Protocol used by that packet. Special protocol <tt>RPC</tt> is used for\n" +"RPC services.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: general help for Custom Rules 4/5 +#. TRANSLATORS: help for Custom Rules - Adding new rule 3/4 +#: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:242 src/include/firewall/helps.rb:269 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Destination Port</b><br>\n" +"Port name, port number or range of ports that are allowed to be\n" +"accessed, e.g., <tt>smtp</tt> or <tt>25</tt> or <tt>100:110</tt>.\n" +"In case of <tt>RPC</tt> protocol, use the RPC service name.\n" +"This entry is optional.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: general help for Custom Rules 5/5 +#. TRANSLATORS: help for Custom Rules - Adding new rule 4/4 +#: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:250 src/include/firewall/helps.rb:277 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Source Port</b><br>\n" +"Port name, port number or range of ports where the packet\n" +"originates from. This entry is optional.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:289 +msgid "FIXME: Help for '%1' is missing!" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Frame label +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:87 +msgid "Firewall Interfaces" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: table header item +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:95 +msgid "Device" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: table header item +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:97 +msgid "Interface or String" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: table header item +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:99 +msgid "Configured In" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: push button +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:108 +msgid "&Change..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: push button +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:114 +msgid "C&ustom..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: frame label +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:128 +msgid "Zone for Network Interface" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: select box +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:140 +msgid "&Interface Zone" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: frame label +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:182 +msgid "Additional Interface Settings for Zones" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: check box +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:224 +msgid "&Masquerade Networks" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: combo box +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:267 +msgid "All&owed Services for Selected Zone" +msgstr "" + +#. items handled by replacepoint +#. TRANSLATORS: combo box +#. TRANSLATORS: select box +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:280 +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:865 +msgid "&Service to Allow" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: table header item +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:288 +msgid "Allowed Service" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: table header item +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:290 +msgid "Description" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: check box +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:300 +msgid "&Protect Firewall from Internal Zone" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: push button +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:322 +msgid "A&dvanced..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: combo box +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:339 +msgid "Expert Rules Services for Selected Zone" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: table header item +#. TRANSLATORS: table header item +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table header item +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:349 +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:509 +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:1056 +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1405 +msgid "Source Network" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: table header item +#. TRANSLATORS: table header item +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table header item +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table header item +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:351 +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:511 +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:1057 +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1131 +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1407 +msgid "Protocol" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: table header item +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:353 +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:1058 +msgid "Destination Port" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: table header item +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:355 +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:1059 +msgid "Source Port" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: frame label +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:386 +msgid "Additional Allowed Ports" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: label, %1 is a zone name like "External Zone" +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:392 +msgid "Settings for Zone: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: text entry +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:395 +msgid "&TCP Ports" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: text entry +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:397 +msgid "&UDP Ports" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: text entry +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:399 +msgid "&RPC Ports" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: text entry +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:404 +msgid "&IP Protocols" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: frame label +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:503 +msgid "Redirect Requests to Masqueraded IP" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: table header item, Req. == Requested +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table header item, Req.=Requested +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:513 +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1409 +msgid "Req. IP" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: table header item, Req. == Requested +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table header item, Req.=Requested +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:515 +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1411 +msgid "Req. Port" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: table header item, Redir. == Redirect +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table header item, Redir.=Redirect +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:518 +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1413 +msgid "Redir. to IP" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: table header item, Redir. == Redirect +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table header item, Redir.=Redirect +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:520 +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1415 +msgid "Redir. to Port" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: frame label +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:546 +msgid "Add Masqueraded Redirect Rule" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: section title in popup window +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:550 +msgid "Redirect Matching Rule:" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: editable select box +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:557 +msgid "&Source Network" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: text entry +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:564 +msgid "Re&quested IP (Optional)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: select box +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:573 +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:1092 +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:1980 +msgid "&Protocol" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: text entry +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:580 +msgid "R&equested Port" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: section title in popup window +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:586 +msgid "Redirection:" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: text entry +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:592 +msgid "Re&direct to Masqueraded IP" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: text entry +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:599 +msgid "&Redirect to Port (Optional)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: select box item +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:831 +msgid "Log All" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: select box item +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:833 +msgid "Log Only Critical" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: select box item +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:835 +msgid "Do Not Log Any" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: select box +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:846 +msgid "&Logging Accepted Packets" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: select box +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:854 +msgid "L&ogging Not Accepted Packets" +msgstr "" + +#. Only for Expert configuration +#. +#. term BroadcastConfigurationExpert () { +#. term dialog = `Frame ( +#. _("Broadcast Configuration"), +#. `VBox ( +#. `RadioButtonGroup (`id("broadcast_configuration"), +#. `VBox ( +#. `Left ( `RadioButton (`id("drop_incoming"), _("Drop Incoming Broadcast")) ), +#. `Left( `RadioButton (`id("allow_incoming"), _("Allow Incoming Broadcast")) ) +#. ) +#. ), +#. `HBox ( +#. `HWeight( 4, +#. `Empty() +#. ), +#. `HWeight( 50, +#. `MultiSelectionBox (`id("accept_broadcast_packets"), +#. _("Firewall Zones Allowing Broadcast Packets"), +#. GetZonesListedItems() +#. ) +#. ) +#. ), +#. `Left ( +#. `CheckBox (`id("dropped_packets"), _("Log Not Accepted Broadcast Packets")) +#. ) +#. ) +#. ); +#. +#. return dialog; +#. } +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:899 +msgid "Broadcast Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:908 +msgid "Accepting the Broadcast Reply" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table header item +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table header item +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table header item +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table header item +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:911 +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:601 +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1084 +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1129 +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1176 +msgid "Zone" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:911 +msgid "Service" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:911 +msgid "Accepted from Network" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:916 +msgid "&Add..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:917 +msgid "&Delete" +msgstr "" + +#. Only for Expert configuration +#. +#. term HierarchicalTokenBucket () { +#. term dialog = `Frame ( +#. _("Hierarchical Token Bucket"), +#. `VBox ( +#. `Left ( `Label (_("Adjust upstream limit for selected interface")) ), +#. `HBox ( +#. `HWeight ( 3, +#. `ComboBox (`id("htb_interface"), _("Interface"), [ +#. // FIXME: fake items +#. `item(`id(1), "RTL-8139 / eth-aa-bb-cc-dd-ee"), +#. `item(`id(1), "Askey 815C / modem0") +#. ]) +#. ), +#. `HWeight ( 1, +#. `InputField (`id("htb_unit"), `opt(`hsquash), _("kbit/sec.")) +#. ) +#. ) +#. ) +#. ); +#. +#. return dialog; +#. } +#. Only for Expert configuration +#. +#. term AdvancedSecuritySettings () { +#. term dialog = `Frame ( +#. _("Advanced Security Settings"), +#. `VBox ( +#. `Left( `ComboBox (`id("disallowed_packets"), _("Disallowed Packets"), [ +#. `item(`id("drop"), _("Drop")), +#. `item(`id("drop"), _("Reject")) +#. ])), +#. `Left ( `CheckBox (`id("block_new_connections"), _("Block New Connections from This Host")) ), +#. `Left ( `CheckBox (`id("allow_ping"), _("Allow to Ping This Host")) ), +#. `Left ( `CheckBox (`id("allow_traceroute"), _("Allow Traceroute through This Host")) ) +#. ) +#. ); +#. +#. return dialog; +#. } +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:971 +msgid "IPsec Support" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: check box +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:974 +msgid "&Enabled" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: push button +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:977 +msgid "&Details..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: select box item, trust IPsec packet the same as the origin of the packet +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:990 +msgid "Same Zone as Original Source Network" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: frame label +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:996 +msgid "IPsec Zone" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: select box +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:1003 +msgid "&Trust IPsec As" +msgstr "" + +#. Only for Expert configuration +#. +#. term IPv6Support () { +#. term dialog = `Frame ( +#. _("IPv6 Support"), +#. `VBox ( +#. `Label ("H I C S U N T L E O N E S") +#. ) +#. ); +#. +#. return dialog; +#. } +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:1041 +msgid "Custom Allowed Rules" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: combo box +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:1048 +msgid "Firewall &Zone" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:1060 +msgid "Options" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:1082 +msgid "Add New Allowing Rule" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:1087 +msgid "Source &Network" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:1106 +msgid "&Destination Port (Optional)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:1111 +msgid "&Source Port (Optional)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:1116 +msgid "Additional &Options (Optional)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: informative label in dialog +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:1144 +msgid "Creating summary..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: check box in summary dialog +#: src/include/firewall/subdialogs.rb:1147 +msgid "&Show Details" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Summary item label +#: src/include/firewall/summary.rb:53 +msgid "TCP Ports" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Summary item label +#: src/include/firewall/summary.rb:55 +msgid "UDP Ports" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Summary item label +#: src/include/firewall/summary.rb:57 +msgid "RPC Services" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Summary item label +#: src/include/firewall/summary.rb:59 +msgid "IP Protocols" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Summary item label +#: src/include/firewall/summary.rb:61 +msgid "Broadcast Ports" +msgstr "" + +#. (NetworkService::IsManaged() ? +#. // TRANSLATORS: an informative text, text presented in HTML - newlines are not needed +#. _("All network interfaces handled by NetworkManager and all other unassigned interfaces will be assigned to this zone.") +#. : +#. TRANSLATORS: an informative text, text presented in HTML - newlines are not needed +#: src/include/firewall/summary.rb:107 +msgid "Any unassigned interface will be assigned to this zone." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: informative text +#: src/include/firewall/summary.rb:114 +msgid "Currently supported only in external zone." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: informative text +#: src/include/firewall/summary.rb:121 +msgid "Unknown network interface." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: informative text +#: src/include/firewall/summary.rb:198 +msgid "No interfaces assigned to this zone." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine summary header +#. TRANSLATORS: UI summary header +#: src/include/firewall/summary.rb:349 src/include/firewall/summary.rb:351 +msgid "Open Services, Ports, and Protocols" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: informative text +#: src/include/firewall/summary.rb:362 +msgid "Internal zone is unprotected. All ports are open." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: informative text +#: src/include/firewall/summary.rb:431 +msgid "Zone has no open ports." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/firewall/summary.rb:473 +msgid "%1 custom rules are defined" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/firewall/summary.rb:486 +msgid "Network: <i>%1</i>, Protocol: <i>%2</i>, Destination port: <i>%3</i>, Source port: <i>%4</i>, Options: <i>%5</i>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/firewall/summary.rb:489 src/include/firewall/summary.rb:492 +#: src/include/firewall/summary.rb:499 src/include/firewall/summary.rb:504 +msgid "All" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/firewall/summary.rb:507 +msgid "None" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine Summary header +#. TRANSLATORS: UI Summary header +#: src/include/firewall/summary.rb:547 src/include/firewall/summary.rb:549 +msgid "Firewall Starting" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Summary text item +#: src/include/firewall/summary.rb:563 +msgid "<b>Enable</b> firewall automatic starting" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Summary text item +#: src/include/firewall/summary.rb:575 +msgid "<b>Disable</b> firewall automatic starting" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Summary text item +#: src/include/firewall/summary.rb:592 +msgid "Firewall starts after the configuration has been written" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Summary text item +#: src/include/firewall/summary.rb:605 +msgid "Firewall <b>starts</b> after the configuration has been written" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Summary text item +#: src/include/firewall/summary.rb:622 +msgid "Firewall <b>will be stopped</b> after the configuration has been written" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Summary text item +#: src/include/firewall/summary.rb:637 +msgid "Firewall will not start after the configuration has been written" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Summary text item +#. TRANSLATORS: Summary text item +#: src/include/firewall/summary.rb:659 src/include/firewall/summary.rb:661 +msgid "Unassigned Interfaces" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Warning plain text in summary +#: src/include/firewall/summary.rb:690 +msgid "No network traffic is permitted through these interfaces." +msgstr "" + +#. Function starts Firewall services and sets firewall +#. to be started after exiting YaST +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:136 +msgid "Starting firewall..." +msgstr "" + +#. Function stops Firewall services and sets firewall +#. to be stopped after exiting YaST +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:147 +msgid "Stopping firewall..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: table item, connected with firewall zone of interface +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:184 +msgid "No zone assigned" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: table item, "User defined string" instead of Device_name +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:224 +msgid "Custom string" +msgstr "" + +#. interface could be unassigned +#. TRANSLATORAS: selection box item, connected with firewall zone of interface +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:288 +msgid "No Zone Assigned" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: error message, %1 stands for the port number +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:487 +msgid "Port number %1 is invalid." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: error message, %1 stands for the port number, +#. %2 stands for, e.g., port range, where the wrong port definition %1 was found +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:492 +msgid "Port number %1 in definition %2 is invalid." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup headline +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:500 +msgid "Invalid Port Definition" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup message, %1 stands for the maximal port number +#. that is possible to use in port-range +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:506 +msgid "The port number must be in the interval from 1 to %1 (inclusive)." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup headline +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:584 +msgid "Invalid Port Range Definition" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup message, %1 is a port-range defined by user +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:587 +msgid "" +"Port range %1 is invalid.\n" +"It must be defined as the min_port_number:max_port_number and\n" +"max_port_number must be bigger than min_port_number." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup headline +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:604 +msgid "Unknown Port Name" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup message, %1 is a port-name +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:607 +msgid "" +"Port name %1 is unknown in your current system.\n" +"It probably would not work.\n" +"Really use this port?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup headline +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:636 +msgid "Invalid Additional Service Definition" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup message, %1 stands for the wrong settings (might be quite long) +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:639 +msgid "" +"It appears that the additional service settings\n" +"%1\n" +"are wrong. Entries should be separated by spaces instead of commas,\n" +"which are not allowed.\n" +"Really use the current settings?" +msgstr "" + +#. : +#. `Left(`Label("FIXME: missing functionality for expert configuration")) +#. ) +#. (!IsThisExpertConfiguration() ? +#. TRANSLATORS: informative label +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:1035 +msgid "Masquerading needs at least one external interface and one other interface." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup message +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:1056 +msgid "This entry must be completed." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup message, right port definition is two lines below this message +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:1080 +msgid "Wrong port definition." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup error message +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:1107 +msgid "" +"Wrong port definition.\n" +"No port number found for this port name.\n" +"Use the port number instead of the port name.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup message, right definition is two lines below this message +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:1136 +msgid "Invalid IP definition." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: check box +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:1463 +msgid "&Log Not Accepted Broadcast Packets" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup question +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:1524 +msgid "" +"Firewall automatic starting has been disabled\n" +"but firewall is currently running.\n" +"\n" +"Stop the firewall after the new configuration has been written?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. network is mandatory +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:1703 +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:1910 +msgid "Invalid network definition '%1'" +msgstr "" + +#. destination port is optional +#. source port is optional +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:1721 +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:1752 +msgid "Invalid port range '%1'" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:1733 +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:1764 +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:1924 +msgid "Invalid port name or number '%1'" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:1827 +msgid "All services using UDP" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:1829 +msgid "All services using TCP" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:1831 +msgid "Samba browsing" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:1833 +msgid "SLP browsing" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:1845 +msgid "All networks" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:1847 +msgid "Subnet: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. hard-coded default +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:1952 +msgid "&Zone" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:1956 +msgid "&Network" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:1963 +msgid "&Service" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:1969 +msgid "User-defined service" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:1994 +msgid "Po&rt" +msgstr "" + +#. redraw table +#: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:2089 +msgid "Select an item to delete." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:55 +msgid "Firewall configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:64 +msgid "Start-up settings" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:70 +msgid "Known firewall zones" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:78 +msgid "Network interfaces configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:89 +msgid "Allowed services, ports, and protocols" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:102 +msgid "Broadcast packet settings" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:110 +msgid "Masquerading settings" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:116 +msgid "Redirect requests to masqueraded IP" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:124 +msgid "Logging settings" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:133 +msgid "Firewall configuration summary" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:141 +msgid "Enables firewall" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:147 +msgid "Disables firewall" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:154 +msgid "Show current settings" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:158 +msgid "Start firewall in the boot process" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:164 +msgid "Start firewall manually" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:170 +msgid "List configured entries" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:177 +msgid "Zone short name" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:181 +msgid "Add a new record" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:185 +msgid "Remove a record" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:190 +msgid "Network interface configuration name" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:197 +msgid "Logging accepted packets (all|crit|none)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:204 +msgid "Logging not accepted packets (all|crit|none)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:211 +msgid "Logging broadcast packets (yes|no)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:217 +msgid "Set value" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:222 +msgid "Port name or number; comma-separate multiple ports" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:229 +msgid "Known firewall service; comma-separate multiple services" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:236 +msgid "TCP port name or number; comma-separate multiple ports" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:243 +msgid "UDP port name or number; comma-separate multiple ports" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:250 +msgid "RPC port name; comma-separate multiple ports" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:257 +msgid "IP protocol name; comma-separate multiple protocols" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:264 +msgid "Set zone protection (yes|no)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:270 +msgid "Detailed information" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:274 +msgid "Enable option" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:278 +msgid "Disable option" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:283 +msgid "Source network, such as 0/0 or 145.12.35.0/255.255.255.0" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:290 +msgid "Protocol (tcp|udp)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:295 +msgid "Requested external IP (optional)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:302 +msgid "Requested port name or number" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:309 +msgid "Redirect to internal IP" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:316 +msgid "Redirect to port on internal IP (optional)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:323 +msgid "Record number" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:327 +msgid "Use port names instead of port numbers" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error, %1 is a firewall zone shortcut +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:401 +msgid "Unknown zone %1." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error, %1 is needed parameter name +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error, %1 is needed parameter name +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error, %1 is needed parameter name +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error, %1 is needed parameter name +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error, %1 is needed parameter name +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error, %1 is needed parameter name +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error, %1 is needed parameter name +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error, %1 is needed parameter name +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error, %1 is needed parameter name +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:414 +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:616 +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:623 +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:655 +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:662 +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:915 +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:927 +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1442 +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1517 +msgid "Parameter %1 must be set." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine header +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:425 +msgid "Listing Known Firewall Zones:" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table header item +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:440 +msgid "Shortcut" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table header item +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table header item +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine header item +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:442 +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:775 +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:895 +msgid "Zone Name" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine header +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:487 +msgid "Summary:" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:502 +msgid "Only one parameter is allowed." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine header +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine header +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine header +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:506 +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:515 +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:524 +msgid "Start-Up:" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine progress information +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:509 +msgid "Enabling firewall in the boot process..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine progress information +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:518 +msgid "Removing firewall from the boot process..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine informative text +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:528 +msgid "Firewall is enabled in the boot process" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine informative text +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:531 +msgid "Firewall needs manual starting" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine header +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:564 +msgid "Network Interfaces in Firewall Zones:" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table item (unknown/special string/interface) +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:583 +msgid "Special firewall string" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table header item +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:603 +msgid "Interface" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table header item +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:605 +msgid "Device Name" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine progress information, %1 is the special string, %2 is the zone name +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:632 +msgid "Adding special string %1 into zone %2..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine progress information, %1 is the network interface name, %2 is the zone name +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:642 +msgid "Adding interface %1 into zone %2..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine progress information, %1 is the special string, %2 is the zone name +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:671 +msgid "Removing special string %1 from zone %2..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine progress information, %1 is the network interface name, %2 is the zone name +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:681 +msgid "Removing interface %1 from zone %2..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table item +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:702 +msgid "Log all" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table item +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:704 +msgid "Log only critical" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table item +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:706 +msgid "Do not log any" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine header +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:716 +msgid "Global Logging Settings:" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table header item +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:724 +msgid "Rule Type" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table header item +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:726 +msgid "Value" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table item +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:732 +msgid "Accepted" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table item +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:738 +msgid "Not accepted" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine header +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:750 +msgid "Logging Broadcast Packets:" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table item +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:763 +msgid "Logging enabled" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table item +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:765 +msgid "Logging disabled" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table header item +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine header item +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:773 +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:893 +msgid "Short" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table header item +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:777 +msgid "Logging Status" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message, %1 is an option value, %2 is an option name +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message, %1 is an option value, %2 is an option name +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message, %1 is an option value, %2 is an option name +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message, %1 is an option value, %2 is an option name +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message, %1 is an option value, %2 is an option name +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:794 +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:809 +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:838 +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1262 +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1468 +msgid "Value %1 is not allowed for option %2." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine header +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:878 +msgid "Allowed Broadcast Ports:" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine header item +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table header item +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:897 +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1133 +msgid "Port" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:908 +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1304 +msgid "Only one action command is allowed here." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine header +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:974 +msgid "Defined Firewall Services:" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table header item +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table header item +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:985 +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1403 +msgid "ID" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table header item +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table header item +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:987 +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1088 +msgid "Service Name" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table item +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1009 +msgid "TCP port" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table item +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1011 +msgid "UDP port" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table item +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1013 +msgid "RPC port" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table item +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1015 +msgid "IP protocol" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine header +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1021 +msgid "Allowed Services in Zones:" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table item (all firewall services are allowed in this zone) +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1034 +msgid "All services" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table item (this zone is not protected at all) +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table item (this zone is not protected at all) +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table item (this zone is not protected at all) +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1037 +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1114 +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1163 +msgid "Entire zone unprotected" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table header item +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1086 +msgid "Service ID" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine header +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1098 +msgid "Additional Allowed Ports:" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table item (all ports are allowed in this zone) +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1111 +msgid "All ports" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine header +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1145 +msgid "Allowed Additional IP Protocols in Zones:" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table item (all protocols are allowed in this zone) +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1160 +msgid "All IP protocols" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine table header item +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1178 +msgid "IP Protocol" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message, %1 is a service id +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1199 +msgid "Unknown service %1." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1272 +msgid "Protection can only be set for internal zones." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message, %1 is a list of possible entries (without translation) +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1333 +msgid "At least one of %1 must be set." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message, %1 is a list of possible action commands +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1348 +msgid "At least one action command from %1 must be set." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine header +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1365 +msgid "Redirect Requests to Masqueraded IP:" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message, %1 is a port name +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1491 +msgid "Unknown port name %1." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine header +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1541 +msgid "Masquerading Settings:" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine informative text, %1 is "enabled" or "disabled" +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1547 +msgid "Masquerading is %1" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine masquerade status +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1550 +msgid "enabled" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine masquerade status +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewallCMDLine.rb:1552 +msgid "disabled" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/firstboot.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/firstboot.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/firstboot.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,337 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/clients/firstboot_auto.rb:65 +msgid "Firstboot Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. text label, describing the check box meaning +#. keep in 2 lines with roughly the same length +#: src/clients/firstboot_auto.rb:71 +msgid "" +"Check Enable Firstboot Sequence here to start YaST\n" +"firstboot utility on the first boot after configuration.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label +#: src/clients/firstboot_auto.rb:79 +msgid "Enable Firstboot Sequence" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/clients/firstboot_auto.rb:89 +msgid "" +"<p>Check <b>Enable Firstboot Sequence</b> to start YaST firstboot utility on the first boot after configuration.</p>\n" +"<p>Check the documentation of yast2-firstboot module for further information.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. Copyright (c) 2012 Novell, Inc. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under +#. the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as published by the +#. Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +#. ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS +#. FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with +#. this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, you may find +#. current contact information at www.novell.com. +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. File: clients/firstboot.ycp +#. Package: Configuration of Firstboot +#. Summary: Main file +#. Authors: Anas Nashif +#. +#. $Id$ +#. +#. Main file for firstboot configuration. Uses all other files. +#. ** +#. <h3>Configuration of firstboot</h3> +#: src/clients/firstboot_config.rb:48 +msgid "Empty" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/firstboot_config.rb:49 +msgid "Enabled" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/firstboot_config.rb:50 +msgid "Disabled" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/firstboot_config.rb:54 +msgid "Help" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/firstboot_config.rb:57 +msgid "First Boot Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/firstboot_config.rb:59 +msgid "&Up" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/firstboot_config.rb:60 +msgid "D&own" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/firstboot_config.rb:61 +msgid "Enab&le or Disable" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/firstboot_config.rb:68 +msgid "Step" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/firstboot_config.rb:68 +msgid "Label" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/firstboot_config.rb:68 +msgid "Module Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/firstboot_config.rb:68 +msgid "Status" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: dialog text +#: src/clients/firstboot_desktop.rb:90 +msgid "" +"Select the desktop environment \n" +"to use from the list below.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text fro desktop dialog +#: src/clients/firstboot_desktop.rb:105 +msgid "" +"<p><h3>Desktop Selections</h3>\n" +"This system has more than one desktop environment installed. Select\n" +"the desktop to enable as the default desktop.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: dialog title +#: src/clients/firstboot_desktop.rb:113 +msgid "Select Your Default Desktop" +msgstr "" + +#. Check box: Should the YaST2 control center automatically +#. be started after this part of the installation is done? +#. Translators: About 40 characters max, +#. use newlines for longer translations. +#: src/clients/firstboot_finish.rb:64 +msgid "&Start YaST Control Center" +msgstr "" + +#. caption for dialog "Congratulation Dialog" +#: src/clients/firstboot_finish.rb:70 +msgid "Configuration Completed" +msgstr "" + +#. congratulation text 1/4 +#: src/clients/firstboot_finish.rb:73 +msgid "<p><b>Congratulations!</b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. congratulation text 2/4 +#: src/clients/firstboot_finish.rb:75 +msgid "" +"<p>The installation of &product; on your machine is complete.\n" +"After clicking <b>Finish</b>, you can log in to the system.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. congratulation text 3/4 +#. Translators: If there exists a SuSE web-page for your language +#. change the address accordingly. If in doubt leave the original. +#: src/clients/firstboot_finish.rb:81 +msgid "<p>Visit us at www.suse.com.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. congratulation text 4/4 +#: src/clients/firstboot_finish.rb:83 +msgid "<p>Have a lot of fun!<br>Your SuSE Development Team</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help 1/4 for dialog "Congratulation Dialog" +#: src/clients/firstboot_finish.rb:112 +msgid "<p>Your system is ready for use.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help 2/4 for dialog "Congratulation Dialog" +#: src/clients/firstboot_finish.rb:114 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Finish</b> will close the YaST installation and continue\n" +"to the login screen.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help 3/4 for dialog "Congratulation Dialog" +#: src/clients/firstboot_finish.rb:118 +msgid "" +"<p>If you choose the default graphical desktop KDE, you can\n" +"adjust some KDE settings to your hardware. Also notice\n" +"our SuSE Welcome Dialog.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help 4/4 for dialog "Congratulation Dialog" +#: src/clients/firstboot_finish.rb:128 +msgid "" +"<p>If desired, experts can use the full range of SuSE's configuration\n" +"modules at this time. Check <b>Start YaST Control Center</b> and it will start\n" +"after <b>Finish</b>. Note: The Control Center does not have a back button to\n" +"return to this installation sequence.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/clients/firstboot_language.rb:123 +msgid "" +"Your language setting has been changed.\n" +"\n" +"If necessary, you may want to adapt your keyboard settings to the new\n" +"language. Use keyboard layout configuration tool after the login." +msgstr "" + +#. ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +#. Build dialog +#. ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +#. heading text +#: src/clients/firstboot_language_keyboard.rb:72 +msgid "Language and Keyboard Layout" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label +#: src/clients/firstboot_language_keyboard.rb:78 +msgid "&Language" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label +#: src/clients/firstboot_language_keyboard.rb:86 +msgid "&Keyboard Layout" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for firstboot language + keyboard screen +#: src/clients/firstboot_language_keyboard.rb:113 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Choose the <b>Language</b> and the <b>Keyboard Layout</b> to be used during\n" +"configuration and in the installed system.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, continued +#: src/clients/firstboot_language_keyboard.rb:120 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Click <b>Next</b> to proceed to the next dialog.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, continued +#: src/clients/firstboot_language_keyboard.rb:126 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Select <b>Abort</b> to abort the\n" +"installation process at any time.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/clients/firstboot_language_keyboard.rb:271 +msgid "There is not enough space to install all additional packages." +msgstr "" + +#. progress stages +#: src/clients/firstboot_write.rb:45 +msgid "Update configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stages +#: src/clients/firstboot_write.rb:47 +msgid "Prepare system for first login" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stages +#: src/clients/firstboot_write.rb:52 +msgid "Updating configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress stages +#: src/clients/firstboot_write.rb:54 +msgid "Preparing system for first login..." +msgstr "" + +#. Help text for last dialog of base installation +#: src/clients/firstboot_write.rb:59 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Please wait while the system is being configured.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Headline for last dialog of first boot workflow +#: src/clients/firstboot_write.rb:70 +msgid "Completing the System Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. Copyright (c) 2012 Novell, Inc. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under +#. the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as published by the +#. Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +#. ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS +#. FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with +#. this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, you may find +#. current contact information at www.novell.com. +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. File: modules/Firstboot.ycp +#. Package: Configuration of firstboot +#. Summary: Firstboot settings, input and output functions +#. Authors: Anas Nashif +#. +#. $Id$ +#. +#. Representation of the configuration of firstboot. +#. Input and output routines. +#: src/modules/Firstboot.rb:51 +msgid "No Text Available" +msgstr "" + +#. summary item +#: src/modules/Firstboot.rb:172 +msgid "Firstboot configuration disabled" +msgstr "" + +#. summary item +#: src/modules/Firstboot.rb:175 +msgid "Firstboot configuration enabled" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/fonts.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/fonts.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/fonts.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,588 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. in case of changing profiles, please reflect +#. edits in test/data/sysconfig.fonts-config.* +#. otherwise testsuite will fail +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-config-state.rb:58 +msgid "Bitmap Fonts" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-config-state.rb:103 +msgid "Unlike 'outline fonts' (fonts described mathematically via curves; chosen in the rest of profiles), 'bitmap fonts' represents group of fonts, which contain bitmap for each glyph and size. Thus, only several sizes exist for each font. They are very fast to render, because there's no need to compute the bitmap and are considered more readable especially on small sizes (even, some outline fonts contains so called 'embedded bitmaps', bitmap versions of itself, for small sizes). Bitmap fonts are rendered black and white, not smoothed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-config-state.rb:106 +msgid "Black and White Rendering" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-config-state.rb:123 +msgid "Fonts rendered without antialiasing (grayscale smoothing), black and white. In contrast with smoothed fonts, they are much more readable without any drawback of smoothing (fuzzy or uneven stems etc.). In connection with good hinted fonts (e. g. Liberation 1 fonts), this setting can give bitmap quality fonts while maintaining scalability." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-config-state.rb:126 +msgid "Black and White Rendering for Monospaced Fonts" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-config-state.rb:143 +msgid "Monospaced fonts rendered not smoothed, other fonts (sans-serif, sans and unspecified) will use default setting. Default family preference list is used." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-config-state.rb:146 +msgid "Default" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-config-state.rb:163 +msgid "Fonts are smoothed with antialiasing. Unlike black and white rendered fonts, this setting can produce 'beautiful' fonts sometimes to the detriment of readability. TrueType fonts, which are known to have good hinting instructions are rendered with bytecode interpreter, otherwise FreeType autohinter is used on the 'hintslight' hinting level. Using font native hinting instructions produces glyphs displayed with thiner stems. Default family preference list is used (nowdays TrueType fonts with good instructions are prefered)." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-config-state.rb:166 +msgid "CFF Fonts" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-config-state.rb:206 +msgid "Given Adobe's contribution to FreeType library, CFF fonts can be considered good compromise between readability and smoothness of rendered glyphs." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-config-state.rb:209 +msgid "Exclusive Autohinter Rendering" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-config-state.rb:226 +msgid "Unlike in default profile, even for good hinted fonts, FreeType's autohinter is used (on the 'hintslight' level). That leads to thicker, but sometimes fuzzier (and therefore less readable), glyphs. Default family preference list is used." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-config-state.rb:229 src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:818 +msgid "Subpixel Rendering" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-config-state.rb:254 +msgid "Use subpixel rendering capability of LCD monitor. Requires subpixel rendering enabled FreeType library." +msgstr "" + +#. for testsuite +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:181 +msgid "installed" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:181 +msgid "not installed" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:190 +msgid "Preference List for %s" +msgstr "" + +#. nothing to do here, initialize_familylist_widget will +#. toggle off/on btn_add_manual as appropriate +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:324 +msgid "<p><b>Family:</b> %s</b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:325 +msgid "<p><b>Specimen for %s</b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:328 +msgid "<p>No specimen available for this font and script.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. unlikely +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:333 +msgid "<b>No script found for %s.</b>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:341 +msgid "<p><b>Family:</b> %s</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:342 +msgid "<p><b>Scripts</b><ul>" +msgstr "" + +#. nothing to do nowadays +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:496 +msgid "" +"Family preference list for %s\n" +"do not contain any installed family.\n" +"\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:499 +msgid "" +"Please make sure to install at least one for each\n" +"alias, otherwise this preference setting has no effect.\n" +"\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:502 +msgid "" +"Fonts can be installed e. g. via fontinfo.opensuse.org. \n" +"If you install them when this yast module is running,\n" +"reread the profile to see results.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. <table> do not work for text mode +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:542 +msgid "You have set LCD filter type (%s)." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:543 +msgid "" +" This needs subpixel rendering capabality\n" +"compiled in FreeType library." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:545 +msgid " Unfortunately, we can not ship it due patent reasons.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:547 +msgid "See README.subpixel-patents from yast2-fonts package documentation.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:560 +msgid "Match for %s" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:577 src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:766 +msgid "Font &Antialiasing" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:588 +msgid "Antialias Also &Monospaced Fonts" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:599 src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:769 +msgid "Force A&utohinting On" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:613 src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:772 +msgid "Force Hint St&yle" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:623 +msgid "Embedded Bitmaps" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:626 +msgid "Use &Embedded Bitmaps" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:632 +msgid "All Lan&guages" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:637 +msgid "Limit to &Selected Languages" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:644 +msgid "&Select" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:666 src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:777 +msgid "LCD &Filter" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:677 +msgid "&Layout" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:688 +msgid "Alias" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:707 +msgid "Font Family" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:707 +msgid "Available" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:708 +msgid "Remove" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:710 +msgid "Down" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:711 +msgid "Up" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:717 src/lib/fonts/fpl-add-dialog.rb:66 +msgid "&Add" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:719 +msgid "&Installed families..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:735 +msgid "Search &Metric Compatible" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:746 +msgid "Never use o&ther fonts" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:775 +msgid "Subpixel &Rendering" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:799 +msgid "&Rendering Details" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:803 +msgid "Antialiasing" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:810 +msgid "Hinting" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:837 +msgid "Prefered &Families" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:844 +msgid "Forcing Family Preferences" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:860 +msgid "Match &Preview" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:879 +msgid "&Presets" +msgstr "" + +#. create copy of system settings; remove fonts-config generated +#. config files to have such fontconfig setup as fonts-config +#. would never run; point fontconfig to this configuration +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:933 +msgid "Reading Font Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:936 +msgid "Read sysconfig file" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:937 +msgid "Reading %s..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:957 +msgid "Font Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:958 +msgid " (User Mode)" +msgstr "" + +#. misuse back_button a bit +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:963 +msgid "&Use system settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:975 +msgid "Writing Font Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:978 +msgid "Write sysconfig file" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:979 +msgid "Run fonts-config" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:980 +msgid "Writing %s..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:981 +msgid "Running fonts-config..." +msgstr "" + +#. we are in user mode +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:999 +msgid "This will irrecoverably remove user setting done previously with this module." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1026 +msgid "<h1>Font Configuraution Module</h1>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1027 +msgid "<p>Module to control <b>system wide</b> or <b>user</b> font rendering setting.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1028 +msgid "<i>Distribution default</i> is font setting shipped on media and it is that one almost same for years (not counting decisions of individual DE). " +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1030 +msgid "This setting can be changed:<ul>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1031 +msgid "<li>system wide when module is run with <tt>root</tt> credentials to create <i>system setting.</i> " +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1033 +msgid "System, where font module never run or <b>Default</b> preset was chosen, uses distribution default.</li>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1035 +msgid "<li>for <i>user setting</i> when module is run as ordindary user. " +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1036 +msgid "User, which never run this module or chooses to <b>Use system settings</b>, uses system settings. " +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1037 +msgid "User, which chooses <b>Default</b> preset, uses distribution default.</li></ul>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1038 +msgid "<p><b>NOTE:</b> " +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1039 +msgid "In general, it is not recommended to combine font module user mode with other font setting. " +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1040 +msgid "Nevertheless, setting in <tt>~/.config/fontconfig/fonts.conf</tt> should always have precendence before arbitrary font module setting.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1042 +msgid "<p>Help for <i>Presets</i> button and for the current tab follows.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1043 +msgid "<p><b>Presets</b> button serves a possibility to choose predefined profiles: <ul>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1045 +msgid "<li><b>%{name}: </b>%{help}</li>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1050 +msgid "Every single menu item there just fills appropriate setting in all tabs. That setting can be later arbitrarily customized in depth by respective individual fields of corresponding tabs.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1056 +msgid "<h2>Match Preview Tab</h2>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1057 +msgid "<p>In this paragraph, <i>current setting</i> means setting of the system plus changes made in currently running fonts module.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1059 +msgid "<p>Matches to system generic aliases can be seen in this initial tab. " +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1060 +msgid "In other words, for every alias (%s) you can see family name, which resolves to given alias according to <i>current setting.</i></p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1063 +msgid "<p>In adition to that, graphical mode allows to display font specimen of the matched font rendered (again) taking <i>current setting</i> into account. " +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1066 +msgid "In the corresponding combo box, script coverage of matched font can be seen and specimen string for given script can be chosen.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1068 +msgid "<p>At the bottom, there are crucial rendering options duplicated from Rendered Details Tab, which can be used to see changes in the rendering on the fly.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1074 +msgid "

Rendering Details Tab</h2>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1075 +msgid "<p>This tab controls <b>how</b> fonts are rendered. It allows you to amend font rendering algorithms to be used and change their options.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1078 +msgid "<h3>Antialiasing</h3>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1079 +msgid "<p>By default, all outline fonts are smoothed by method called <i>antialiasing.</i>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1081 +msgid " Black and white rendering can be forced for all fonts or for monospaced only.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1083 src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1097 +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1118 +msgid "<p>See: %s<p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1087 +msgid "<h3>Hinting</h3>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1088 +msgid "<p>Hinting instructions helps rasterizer to fit glyphs stems to the grid.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1090 +msgid "<p>In the default setting, FreeType's autohinter can be used depending on font type and quality of own instructions. Use of autohinter can be forced by <b>Force Autohinting On</b> option.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1094 +msgid "<p>For each hinting algorithm, hint style (hinting level) is chosen." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1095 +msgid " It is possible to set hint style globally by <b>Force Hint Style</b> option.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1101 +msgid "<h3>Embedded Bitmaps</h3>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1102 +msgid "<p>Some outline fonts contain so called bitmap strikes, i. e. bitmap version of given font for certain sizes. In this section it can be turned off entirely, on only for fonts which cover specified languages, or on for every font." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1109 +msgid "<h3>Subpixel Rendering</h3>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1110 +msgid "<p>Subpixel rendering multiples resolution in one direction by using colour primaries (subpixels) of an LCD display.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1112 +msgid "<p>Choose LCD filter, which should be used, and subpixel layout corresponding to display and its rotation.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1114 +msgid "<p>Note, that due to patent reasons, FreeType has subpixel rendering turned off by default." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1116 +msgid " Without FreeType's subpixel rendering support compiled in, setting in this section has no effect.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1122 +msgid "<h2>Prefered Families Tab</h2>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1123 +msgid "<p>This tab controls <b>which</b> fonts are rendered.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1124 +msgid "<h3>Preference Lists</h3>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1125 +msgid "<p>Here, Family Preference Lists (FPL) for generic aliases (%s) can be defined." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1127 +msgid " These are sorted lists of family names, with most prefered family first." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1129 +msgid " There is default (system-wide) FPL yet defined for each generic alias." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1130 +msgid " FPLs defined in this dialog will be prepended to them.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1131 +msgid "<p>System will look for the first <b>installed</b> family in the list, other query elements taking into account of course. Available font packages for SUSE distributions can be browsed and installed from <b>fontinfo.opensuse.org.</b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1138 +msgid "<h3>Forcing Family Preferences</h3>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1139 +msgid "<p>In some circumstances, FPLs defined in this dialog are not taken into account. Following two options strenghten their role.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1142 +msgid "<h4>Search Metric Compatible</h4>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1143 +msgid "<p>Two fonts are metric compatible, when all corresponding letters are of the same size. That implies, document displayed using these fonts has the same same size too, same line wraps etc.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1146 +msgid "<p>Via default setting, system substitutes metric compatible fonts preferably, and FPLs defined in this dialog can be circumvented by this rule.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1148 +msgid "<p>Where metric compatibility does not matter, this option can be unchecked.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1149 +msgid "<h4>Never use other fonts</h4>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fonts-dialog.rb:1150 +msgid "<p>When checked, this option introduces very strong position for here defined preference lists. It pushes families from there before document or GUI requests, if they cover required charset.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. delete families, that are part of list for some alias +#: src/lib/fonts/fpl-add-dialog.rb:57 +msgid "&Filter" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fpl-add-dialog.rb:61 +msgid "Installed Families" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fpl-add-dialog.rb:62 +msgid "Font Format" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fpl-add-dialog.rb:63 +msgid "Script Coverages" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/fpl-add-dialog.rb:65 src/lib/fonts/select-ebl-dialog.rb:242 +msgid "&Cancel" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/fonts/rich-text-dialog.rb:24 src/lib/fonts/select-ebl-dialog.rb:243 +msgid "&Ok" +msgstr "" + +#. save unknown langs +#: src/lib/fonts/select-ebl-dialog.rb:240 +msgid "&Languages" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/ftp-server.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/ftp-server.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/ftp-server.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,1848 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. Command line help text for the Xftpd module +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:43 +msgid "Configuration of FTP server" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:53 +msgid "Display settings" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:59 +msgid "Start-up settings" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:70 +msgid "Enable/disable chrooting." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:78 +msgid "Saved log messages into the log file." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:86 +msgid "Umask vsftpd: <local users>:<anonymous>, pure-ftpd: <files>:<dirs>" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:94 +msgid "Enter the existing directory for anonymous users." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:102 +msgid "Enter the existing directory for authenticated users (pure-ftpd only)." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:110 +msgid "The port range for passive connection replies" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:118 +msgid "The maximum idle time in minutes" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:126 +msgid "The maximum number of clients connected via IP" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:134 src/clients/ftp-server.rb:317 +msgid "The maximum connected clients" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:142 +msgid "The maximum data transfer rate permitted for local authenticated users (KB/s)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:150 +msgid "The maximum data transfer rate permitted for anonymous clients (KB/s)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:158 +msgid "Access permissions" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:168 +msgid "Access permissions for anonymous users" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:181 +msgid "Welcome message is the text to display when someone connects to the server (vsftpd only)." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:190 +msgid "vsftpd supports secure connections via SSL (vsftpd only)." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:199 +msgid "If enabled, this option will permit SSL v2 protocol connections (vsftpd only)." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:208 +msgid "If enabled, this option will permit SSL v3 protocol connections (vsftpd only)." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:217 +msgid "vsftpd supports connections via TLS (vsftpd only)." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:226 +msgid "Disallow downloading of files that were uploaded but not validated by a local admin (pure-ftpd only)." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:235 +msgid "Security settings for SSL and TLS protocol (pure-ftpd only)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:244 +msgid "Start FTP daemon in the boot process." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:250 +msgid "Start FTP daemon manually." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine progress information +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:256 src/clients/ftp-server.rb:698 +msgid "Start FTP daemon via xinetd" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:262 +msgid "Start xinetd if it is not running." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:268 +msgid "Enable option" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:272 src/clients/ftp-server.rb:277 +msgid "Disable option" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:282 +msgid "Directory for anonymous users" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:289 +msgid "Directory for authenticated users" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:296 +msgid "The minimum value for port range for passive connection replies" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:303 +msgid "The maximum value for port range for passive connection replies" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:310 +msgid "Maximum Idle Time (in minutes)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:324 +msgid "The maximum data transfer rate for ftp users (KB/s)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:330 +msgid "Access only for anonymous" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:336 +msgid "Access only for authenticated users" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:342 +msgid "Access for anonymous and authenticated users" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:348 +msgid "Anonymous users can upload." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:354 +msgid "Anonymous users can create directories." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:362 +msgid "Welcome message is the text to display when someone connects to the server." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:369 +msgid "SSL version 2" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:374 +msgid "SSL version 3" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:379 +msgid "Refuse connections that do not use SSL/TLS security mechanisms." +msgstr "" + +#. EOF +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:454 +msgid "Display Settings:" +msgstr "" + +#. start-up settings +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine header +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine header +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine header +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:457 src/clients/ftp-server.rb:677 +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:686 src/clients/ftp-server.rb:695 +msgid "Start-Up:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:459 +msgid "FTP daemon is started via xinetd." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine informative text +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:463 +msgid "FTP daemon is enabled in the boot process." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine informative text +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:466 +msgid "FTP daemon needs manual starting." +msgstr "" + +#. logging settings +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:470 +msgid "Verbose Logging:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:472 src/clients/ftp-server.rb:481 +msgid "Enable" +msgstr "" + +#. CommandLine::Print(""); +#. CommandLine::Print(""); +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:475 src/clients/ftp-server.rb:484 +msgid "Disable" +msgstr "" + +#. chroot settings +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:479 +msgid "Chroot Everyone:" +msgstr "" + +#. UMASK settings +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:491 src/clients/ftp-server.rb:753 +msgid "Umask for Anonymous: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:494 +msgid "Umask for Anonymous:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:495 src/clients/ftp-server.rb:503 +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:513 src/clients/ftp-server.rb:524 +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:532 src/clients/ftp-server.rb:541 +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:549 src/clients/ftp-server.rb:557 +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:565 src/clients/ftp-server.rb:573 +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:581 src/clients/ftp-server.rb:615 +msgid "Option is not set now." +msgstr "" + +#. CommandLine::Print(""); +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:498 src/clients/ftp-server.rb:502 +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:755 +msgid "Umask for Authenticated Users: " +msgstr "" + +#. CommandLine::Print(""); +#. CommandLine::Print(""); +#. part for pure-fptd +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:508 src/clients/ftp-server.rb:512 +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:783 +msgid "Umask: " +msgstr "" + +#. end of if (FtpServer::vsftpd_edit) +#. authenticated and anonymous dirs +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:520 +msgid "Authenticated dir: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:528 +msgid "Anonymous dir: " +msgstr "" + +#. port range +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:535 +msgid "Port Range: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:538 src/clients/ftp-server.rb:889 +msgid " - " +msgstr "" + +#. idle time +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:545 +msgid "Maximum Idle Time [minutes]: " +msgstr "" + +#. maximum clients per IP +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:553 +msgid "Maximum Clients per IP: " +msgstr "" + +#. maximum clients +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:561 +msgid "Maximum Number of Clients: " +msgstr "" + +#. max rate for authenticated users +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:569 +msgid "Maximum Rate for Authenticated Users [KB/s]: " +msgstr "" + +#. max rate for anonymous users +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:577 +msgid "Maximum Rate for Anonymous Users [KB/s]: " +msgstr "" + +#. general settings for access +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:585 +msgid "Access Allowed for: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:587 +msgid "Anonymous Users" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:589 +msgid "Authenticated Users" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:591 +msgid "Anonymous and Authenticated Users" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:593 +msgid "Option has wrong value." +msgstr "" + +#. access permissions for anonymous users +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:597 +msgid "Access Permissions for Anonymous: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:599 +msgid "Upload enabled; " +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:601 +msgid "Upload disabled; " +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:604 +msgid "Create directories enabled" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:606 +msgid "Create directories disabled" +msgstr "" + +#. welcome message vsftpd only +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:611 +msgid "Welcome message: " +msgstr "" + +#. CommandLine::PrintNoCR(_("Security settings: ")); +#. SSL options (SSL version and TLS) +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:622 +msgid "SSL is disabled" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:624 +msgid "SSL is enabled" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:628 +msgid "SSL version 2 is disabled" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:630 +msgid "SSL version 2 is enabled" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:634 +msgid "SSL version 3 is disabled" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:636 +msgid "SSL version 3 is enabled" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:640 +msgid "TLS is disabled" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:642 +msgid "TLS is enabled" +msgstr "" + +#. AntiWarez option +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:646 +msgid "Antiwarez: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:648 +msgid "Antiwarez enabled" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:650 +msgid "Antiwarez disabled" +msgstr "" + +#. SSL/TLS settings +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:653 +msgid "SSL/TLS settings: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:655 +msgid "SSL/TLS disabled" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:657 +msgid "SSL/TLS enabled" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:659 +msgid "Refuse connections without SSL/TLS" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:673 +msgid "Only one parameter (atboot/manual) is allowed." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine progress information +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:680 +msgid "Enabling FTP daemon in the boot process..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine progress information +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:689 +msgid "Removing FTP daemon from the boot process..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:712 src/clients/ftp-server.rb:726 +msgid "Only one parameter (enable/disable) is allowed." +msgstr "" + +#. end of else if (options["show"]:nil!=nil +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:741 +msgid "Umask:" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:745 +msgid "Only one parameter (show/set_umask) is allowed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:761 src/clients/ftp-server.rb:770 +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:788 +msgid "Entered umask is not valid." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:763 src/clients/ftp-server.rb:772 +msgid "Example of correct umask <local users>:<anonymous> (177:077)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:790 +msgid "Example of correct umask <files>:<dirs> (set_umask=177:077)" +msgstr "" + +#. end of if (vsftpd_edit) +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:803 +msgid "Anonymous users:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:809 +msgid "Anonymous directory:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:814 src/clients/ftp-server.rb:844 +msgid "Option is empty." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:816 +msgid "Example of correct input set_anon_dir=/srv/ftp" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:823 src/clients/ftp-server.rb:853 +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:935 src/clients/ftp-server.rb:1027 +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:1100 src/clients/ftp-server.rb:1151 +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:1241 +msgid "Only one parameter is allowed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:832 +msgid "Authenticated users:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:839 +msgid "Authenticated directory:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:846 +msgid "Example of correct input set_authen_dir=/srv/ftp" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:858 +msgid "Option is not supported in pure-ftpd server." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:867 +msgid "Port range:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:885 +msgid "Port range for passive mode: " +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:894 +msgid "Enter minimal port < maximal port." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:899 +msgid "Enter correct numbers." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:904 +msgid "Only two parameters are allowed." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:929 +msgid "Wrong value of option." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:1004 +msgid "Access (Anonymous/Authenticated):" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:1008 +msgid "Access allowed for: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:1011 +msgid "Anonymous users" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:1014 +msgid "Authenticated users" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:1017 +msgid "Anonymous and authenticated users" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:1020 +msgid "Unknown option." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:1040 +msgid "Access permission for anonymous users:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:1047 +msgid "Upload enabled" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:1050 +msgid "Upload disabled" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:1052 +msgid "; " +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:1055 +msgid "Create dirs enabled" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:1058 +msgid "Create dirs disabled" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:1062 +msgid "Only one or two parameters are allowed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:1075 +msgid "Welcome Message:" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:1079 src/clients/ftp-server.rb:1120 +msgid "This option is allowed only in vsftpd." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:1094 +msgid "Missing value of option" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:1103 +msgid "Example of correct input: welcome_message=\"Hello everybody\"" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:1127 +msgid "This option is allowed only in pure-ftpd." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:1145 src/clients/ftp-server.rb:1235 +msgid "Wrong option." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:1211 +msgid "Security Settings:" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:1215 +msgid "This option is allowed only in pure-ftp-server." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:1222 +msgid "SSL and TLS are enabled" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:1227 +msgid "SSL and TLS are disabled" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:1231 +msgid "Refuse connection without SSL/TLS" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:1244 +msgid "Example of correct input: SSL_TLS enable/disable/only" +msgstr "" + +#. Checking if ftp daemons are installed +#: src/include/ftp-server/complex.rb:70 +msgid "Packages for vsftpd and pure-ftpd are not available." +msgstr "" + +#. end of `VBox( +#: src/include/ftp-server/complex.rb:82 +msgid "No server package installed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ftp-server/complex.rb:83 +msgid "Choose an FTP daemon." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ftp-server/complex.rb:84 +msgid "Press Cancel to cancel FTP configuration." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ftp-server/complex.rb:85 src/include/ftp-server/complex.rb:196 +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:315 +msgid "&vsftpd" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ftp-server/complex.rb:86 src/include/ftp-server/complex.rb:204 +msgid "&pure-ftpd" +msgstr "" + +#. result = Package::Available(daemon); +#: src/include/ftp-server/complex.rb:134 +msgid "Installation failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ftp-server/complex.rb:146 +msgid "Package for FTP is not available." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ftp-server/complex.rb:150 +msgid "Package not found." +msgstr "" + +#. open dialog for choosing ftp daemon +#: src/include/ftp-server/complex.rb:191 +msgid "Choose daemon?" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup headline +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:150 +msgid "Aborting FTP Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup message +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:152 +msgid "All changes will be lost. Really abort configuration?" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Radio selection +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:188 +msgid "&When booting" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:189 +msgid "&Manually" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:190 +msgid "Via &xinetd" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:196 +msgid "When Booting" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:197 +msgid "Manually" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:198 +msgid "Via xinetd" +msgstr "" + +#. Init function where are added UI hadle functions +#. Start widget +#. +#. @return [Hash{String => Object}] map for start-stop widget +#. Init function where are added UI hadle functions +#. Start widget (pure-ftpd) +#. +#. @return [Hash{String => Object}] map for start-stop widget +#. Function start vsftpd +#. write settings to disk... +#. Function start pure-ftpd +#. write settings to disk... +#. Init function for start-up +#. +#. init starting via xinetd and update status +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:212 src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:261 +#: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:173 +#: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:263 +#: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:317 +#: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:408 +#: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:502 +#: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:511 +msgid "FTP is running" +msgstr "" + +#. UpdateInfoAboutStartingFTP (); +#. Popup::Message(_("This is not supported via xinetd now.")); +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:213 src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:262 +#: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:214 +#: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:359 +msgid "FTP is not running" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:214 src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:263 +msgid "&Start FTP Now" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:215 src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:264 +msgid "S&top FTP Now" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:224 src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:273 +msgid "Sa&ve Settings and Restart FTP Now" +msgstr "" + +#. part of help text - push button label, NO SHORTCUT!!! +#. part of help text - push button label, NO SHORTCUT!!! +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:242 src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:291 +msgid "Start FTP Daemon Now" +msgstr "" + +#. part of help text - push button label, NO SHORTCUT!!! +#. part of help text - push button label, NO SHORTCUT!!! +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:244 src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:293 +msgid "Stop FTP Daemon Now" +msgstr "" + +#. part of help text - push button label, NO SHORTCUT!!! +#. part of help text - push button label, NO SHORTCUT!!! +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:246 src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:295 +msgid "Save Settings and Restart FTP Daemon Now" +msgstr "" + +#. Init function where are added UI hadle functions +#. Start widget radiobuttons for switching daemons +#. +#. @return [Hash{String => Object}] map for start-stop widget +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:310 +msgid "Selected Service" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:315 +msgid "p&ure-ftpd" +msgstr "" + +#. -----------================= GENERAL SCREEN =============---------- +#. +#. Wellcome Message for vsftpd +#. General Settings widget +#. +#. @return [Hash{String => Object}] map for General screen +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:364 +msgid "&Welcome message" +msgstr "" + +#. Chroot Everyone +#. General Settings widget +#. +#. @return [Hash{String => Object}] map for General screen +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:391 +msgid "&Chroot Everyone" +msgstr "" + +#. Verbos Logging +#. General Settings widget +#. +#. @return [Hash{String => Object}] map for General screen +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:422 +msgid "&Verbose Logging" +msgstr "" + +#. Umask (umask files:umask dirs) only pure-ftpd +#. General Settings widget +#. +#. @return [Hash{String => Object}] map for General screen +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:454 +msgid "&Umask (umask files:umask dirs)" +msgstr "" + +#. Umask for Anonynous for vsftpd +#. General Settings widget +#. +#. @return [Hash{String => Object}] map for General screen +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:488 +msgid "&Umask for Anonymous" +msgstr "" + +#. Umask for Authenticated Users for vsftpd +#. General Settings widget +#. +#. @return [Hash{String => Object}] map for General screen +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:519 +msgid "Uma&sk for Authenticated Users" +msgstr "" + +#. Ftp Directory for Anonymous Users +#. General Settings widget +#. +#. @return [Hash{String => Object}] map for General screen +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:547 +msgid "FTP Directory for Anon&ymous Users" +msgstr "" + +#. "Browse" button for FTP Dir Anon +#. General Settings widget +#. +#. @return [Hash{String => Object}] map for General screen +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:582 +msgid "Brows&e" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:589 src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:644 +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1220 +msgid " " +msgstr "" + +#. Ftp Directory for Authenticated Users +#. General Settings widget +#. +#. @return [Hash{String => Object}] map for General screen +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:604 +msgid "&FTP Directory for Authenticated Users" +msgstr "" + +#. "Browse" button for FTP Dir Local/Authenticated +#. General Settings widget +#. +#. @return [Hash{String => Object}] map for General screen +#. "Browse" button for DSA Certificate +#. Expert Settings widget +#. +#. @return [Hash{String => Object}] map for Expert screen +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:637 +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1213 +msgid "Br&owse" +msgstr "" + +#. -----------================= PERFORMANCE SCREEN =============---------- +#. +#. Max Idle Time [minutes] +#. Performance Settings widget +#. +#. @return [Hash{String => Object}] map for Performance screen +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:663 +msgid "&Max Idle Time [minutes]" +msgstr "" + +#. Max Clients for One IP +#. Performance Settings widget +#. +#. @return [Hash{String => Object}] map for Performance screen +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:699 +msgid "Max Cli&ents for One IP" +msgstr "" + +#. Max Clients +#. Performance Settings widget +#. +#. @return [Hash{String => Object}] map for Performance screen +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:732 +msgid "Ma&x Clients" +msgstr "" + +#. Local Max Rate [KB/s] +#. Performance Settings widget +#. +#. @return [Hash{String => Object}] map for Performance screen +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:765 +msgid "&Local Max Rate [KB/s]" +msgstr "" + +#. Anonymous Max Rate [KB/s] +#. Performance Settings widget +#. +#. @return [Hash{String => Object}] map for Performance screen +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:798 +msgid "Anonymous Max &Rate [KB/s]" +msgstr "" + +#. -----------================= Authentication SCREEN =============---------- +#. +#. Enable/Disable Anonymous and Local Users +#. Authentication Settings widget +#. +#. @return [Hash{String => Object}] map for Performance screen +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:836 +msgid "Enable/Disable Anonymous and Local Users" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:842 +msgid "Anonymo&us Only" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:843 +msgid "Aut&henticated Users Only" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:844 +msgid "&Both" +msgstr "" + +#. Enable Upload +#. Authentication Settings widget +#. +#. @return [Hash{String => Object}] map for Performance screen +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:872 +msgid "&Enable Upload" +msgstr "" + +#. Anonymous Can Upload +#. Authentication Settings widget +#. +#. @return [Hash{String => Object}] map for Performance screen +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:903 +msgid "Anon&ymous Can Upload" +msgstr "" + +#. Anonymous Can Create Directories +#. Authentication Settings widget +#. +#. @return [Hash{String => Object}] map for Performance screen +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:935 +msgid "Anonymou&s Can Create Directories" +msgstr "" + +#. -----------================= EXPERT SETTINGS SCREEN =============---------- +#. +#. Enable Pass&ive Mode +#. Expert Settings widget +#. +#. @return [Hash{String => Object}] map for Expert screen +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:970 +msgid "Enable Pass&ive Mode" +msgstr "" + +#. Min Port for Pas. Mode +#. Expert Settings widget +#. +#. @return [Hash{String => Object}] map for Expert screen +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1001 +msgid "&Min Port for Pas. Mode" +msgstr "" + +#. Max Port for Pas. Mode +#. Expert Settings widget +#. +#. @return [Hash{String => Object}] map for Expert screen +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1033 +msgid "Max P&ort for Pas. Mode" +msgstr "" + +#. Enable SSL +#. Expert Settings widget +#. +#. @return [Hash{String => Object}] map for Expert screen +#. end of `Frame ( "Passiv Mode Settings" +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1071 +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1652 +msgid "Enab&le SSL" +msgstr "" + +#. Enable SSL v2 +#. Expert Settings widget +#. +#. @return [Hash{String => Object}] map for Expert screen +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1097 +msgid "&Enable SSL v2" +msgstr "" + +#. Enable SSL v3 +#. Expert Settings widget +#. +#. @return [Hash{String => Object}] map for Expert screen +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1126 +msgid "Enable SSL &v3" +msgstr "" + +#. Enable TLS +#. Expert Settings widget +#. +#. @return [Hash{String => Object}] map for Expert screen +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1155 +msgid "Enable &TLS" +msgstr "" + +#. DSA Certificate to Use for SSL Encrypted Connections +#. Expert Settings widget +#. +#. @return [Hash{String => Object}] map for Expert screen +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1183 +msgid "D&SA Certificate to Use for SSL-encrypted Connections" +msgstr "" + +#. Disable Downloading Unvalidated Data +#. Expert Settings widget +#. +#. @return [Hash{String => Object}] map for Expert screen +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1237 +msgid "Disable Downloading &Unvalidated Data" +msgstr "" + +#. Security Settings +#. Expert Settings widget +#. +#. @return [Hash{String => Object}] map for Expert screen +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1264 +msgid "Security Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1270 +msgid "Disable SSL/&TLS" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1271 +msgid "Accept &SSL and TLS" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1272 +msgid "&Refuse Connections Without SSL/TLS" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: part of dialog caption +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1320 +msgid "FTP Start-up" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: tree menu item +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1322 +msgid "Start-Up" +msgstr "" + +#. Init function where are added UI hadle functions +#. General Settings widget (vsftpd) +#. define for tabs_vsftpd necessary later in screens (CWNTree) +#. +#. @return [Hash{String => Object}] map for General Settings widget +#. Init function where are added UI hadle functions +#. General Settings widget (pure-ftpd) +#. define for tabs_pureftpd necessary later in screens (CWNTree) +#. +#. @return [Hash{String => Object}] map for General Settings widget +#. Init function where are added UI hadle functions +#. Performance Settings widget +#. define for tabs_vsftpd/tabs_pureftpd necessary later in screens (CWNTree) +#. +#. @return [Hash{String => Object}] map for Performance Settings widget +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1346 +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1420 +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1473 +msgid "General Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1359 +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1428 +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1485 +msgid "FTP Directories" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: part of dialog caption +#. TRANSLATORS: part of dialog caption +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1384 +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1446 +msgid "FTP General Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: tree menu item +#. TRANSLATORS: tree menu item +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1386 +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1448 +msgid "General" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: part of dialog caption +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1498 +msgid "FTP Performance Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: tree menu item +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1500 +msgid "Performance" +msgstr "" + +#. Init function where are added UI hadle functions +#. Anonymous Settings widget +#. define for tabs_vsftpd/tabs_pureftpd necessary later in screens (CWNTree) +#. +#. @return [Hash{String => Object}] map for Anonymous Settings widget +#. Init function where are added UI hadle functions +#. Anonymous Settings widget +#. define for tabs_vsftpd/tabs_pureftpd necessary later in screens (CWNTree) +#. +#. @return [Hash{String => Object}] map for Anonymous Settings widget +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1562 +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1597 +msgid "Uploading" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: part of dialog caption +#. TRANSLATORS: part of dialog caption +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1569 +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1613 +msgid "FTP Anonymous Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: tree menu item +#. TRANSLATORS: tree menu item +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1571 +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1615 +msgid "Authentication" +msgstr "" + +#. Init function where are added UI hadle functions +#. Expert Settings widget (vsftpd) +#. define for tabs_vsftpd necessary later in screens (CWNTree) +#. +#. @return [Hash{String => Object}] map for Expert Settings widget +#. Init function where are added UI hadle functions +#. Expert Settings widget (pure-ftpd) +#. define for tabs_pureftpd necessary later in screens (CWNTree) +#. +#. @return [Hash{String => Object}] map for Expert Settings widget +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1638 +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1712 +msgid "Passive Mode" +msgstr "" + +#. end of `CheckBoxFrame(`id("SSLEnable"), "Sec&urity Settings", true +#. end of `Frame ( _("Additional Settings") +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1671 +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1726 +msgid "SUSEfirewall Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: part of dialog caption +#. TRANSLATORS: part of dialog caption +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1676 +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1731 +msgid "FTP Expert Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: tree menu item +#. TRANSLATORS: tree menu item +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1678 +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1733 +msgid "Expert Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ftp-server/dialogs.rb:1720 +msgid "Additional Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:17 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Initializing FTP Server Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:21 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Initialization:</big></b><br>\n" +"Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing <b>Abort</b> now.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:25 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Saving FTP Server Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:29 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Saving:</big></b><br>\n" +"Abort the save procedure by pressing <b>Abort</b>.\n" +"An additional dialog informs whether it is safe to do so.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. -----------================= START_UP SCREEN =============---------- +#. +#. Start widget switching daemons help 1/1 +#: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:40 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Selected Service</b><br>\n" +" The frame shows which daemon is currently configured: <b>vsftpd, pure-ftpd, \n" +" </b>. If you have installed both daemons you can switch between them.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. -----------================= GENERAL SCREEN =============---------- +#. +#. general welcome message help 1/1 +#: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:50 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Welcome Message</b><br>\n" +"Specify the name of a file containing the\n" +"text to display when someone connects to the server.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. general chroot help 1/1 +#: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:57 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Chroot</b><br>\n" +"When enabled, local users will be (by default) placed in a \n" +"chroot() jail in their home directory after login.\n" +"<b>Warning:</b> This option has security implications, \n" +"especially if users have upload permission\n" +"or shell access. Only enable Chroot if you know what you are doing.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. general logging help 1/1 +#: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:67 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Verbose Logging</b><br>\n" +"When enabled, all FTP requests and responses are logged.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. general umask help - only pure-ftpd 1/1 +#: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:73 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Umask</b><br>\n" +"File creation mask. (umask for files):(umask for dirs). \n" +"177:077 if you feel paranoid.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. general umask for anonymous help - only vsftpd 1/1 +#: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:80 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Umask for Anonymous:</b><br>\n" +"The value to which the umask for file creation is set for anonymous users. \n" +"If you want to specify octal values, remember the \"0\" prefix, otherwise \n" +"the value will be treated as a base 10 integer.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. general umask for authenticated users help - only vsftpd 1/1 +#: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:88 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Umask for Authenticated Users:</b><br>\n" +"The value to which the umask for file creation is set for authenticated users. \n" +"If you want to specify octal values, remember the \"0\" prefix, otherwise \n" +"the value will be treated as a base 10 integer.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. general FTP dir for anonymous help 1/1 +#: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:96 +msgid "" +"<p><b>FTP Directory for Anonymous Users:</b><br>\n" +"Specify a directory which is used for FTP anonymous users. \n" +"Press <b>Browse</b> to select a directory from the local filesystem.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. general FTP dir for authenticated help 1/1 +#: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:103 +msgid "" +"<p><b>FTP Directory for Authenticated Users:</b><br>\n" +"Specify a directory which is used for FTP authenticated users. \n" +"Press <b>Browse</b> to select a directory from the local filesystem.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. -----------================= PERFORMANCE SCREEN =============---------- +#. +#. performance Max Idle Time help 1/1 +#: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:113 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Max Idle Time:</b><br>\n" +"The maximum time (timeout) a remote client \n" +"may wait between FTP commands.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. performance max clients per IP help 1/1 +#: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:120 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Max Clients for One IP:</b><br>\n" +"The maximum number of clients allowed to connect\n" +"from the same source internet address. \n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. performance max clients help 1/1 +#: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:127 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Max Clients:</b><br>\n" +"The maximum number of clients allowed to connect. \n" +"Any additional clients trying to connect will get an error message.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. performance local max rate help 1/1 +#: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:134 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Local Max Rate:</b><br>\n" +"The maximum data transfer rate permitted for local authenticated users.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. performance anonymous max rate help 1/1 +#: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:140 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Anonymous Max Rate:</b><br>\n" +"The maximum data transfer rate permitted for anonymous clients.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. -----------================= Authentication SCREEN =============---------- +#. +#. authentication Enable/Disable Anonymous and Local help 1/1 +#: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:147 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Enable/Disable Anonymous and Local Users</b><br>\n" +"<b>Anonymous Only</b>: If enabled, only anonymous logins are permitted.\n" +"<b>Authenticated Users Only</b>: If enabled, only authenticated users are permitted.\n" +"<b>Both</b> If enabled, authenticated users and anonymous users are permitted.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. authentication Enable Upload help 1/1 +#: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:155 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Enable Upload</b><br>\n" +"If enabled, FTP users can upload. To allow anonymous users \n" +"to upload, enable <b>Anonymous Can Upload</b>.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. authentication Anonymous Can Upload help 1/1 +#: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:162 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Anonymous Can Upload</b><br>\n" +"If enabled anonymous users will be permitted to upload.\n" +"<i>vsftpd only: </i>If you want to allow anonymous users to upload, you \n" +"need an existing directory with write permission in the home directory after login.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. authentication Anonymous Can Create Dirs help 1/1 +#: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:170 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Anonymous Can Create Dirs</b><br>\n" +"If enabled, anonymous users can create directories.\n" +"<i>vsftpd only:</i> If you want to allow anonymous users to create directories,\n" +"you need an existing directory with write permission in the home directory after login.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. -----------================= EXPERT SETTINGS SCREEN =============---------- +#. +#. expert settings Enable Passive Mode help 1/1 +#: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:181 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Enable Passive Mode</b><br>\n" +"If enabled, the FTP server will allow passive mode for connections. \n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. expert settings Min Port for Pas. Mode help 1/1 +#: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:187 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Min Port for Passive Mode</b><br>\n" +"Minimum value for a port range for passive connection replies.\n" +"This is used for protection by means of a firewall. \n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. expert settings Max Port for Pas. Mode help 1/1 +#: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:194 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Max Port for Pas. Mode</b><br>\n" +"Maximum value for a port range for passive connection replies.\n" +" This is used for protection by means of a firewall. \n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. expert settings Enable SSL help 1/1 +#: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:201 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Enable SSL</b><br>\n" +"If enabled, SSL connections are allowed.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. expert settings Enable SSL v2 help 1/1 +#: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:207 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Enable SSL v2</b><br>\n" +"If enabled, SSL version 2 connections are allowed.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. expert settings Enable SSL v3 help 1/1 +#: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:213 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Enable SSL v3</b><br>\n" +"If enabled, SSL version 3 connections are allowed.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. expert settings Enable TLS help 1/1 +#: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:219 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Enable TLS</b><br>\n" +"If enabled, TLS connections are allowed.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. expert settings DSA Certificate to Use for SSL Encrypted Connections help 1/1 +#: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:225 +msgid "" +"<p><b>DSA Certificate to Use for SSL-encrypted Connections</b><br>\n" +"This option specifies the location of the DSA certificate to \n" +"use for SSL-encrypted connections. Select a file by pressing <b>Browse</b>.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. expert settings Disable Downloading Unvalidated Data help 1/1 +#: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:232 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Disable Downloading Unvalidated Data</b><br>\n" +"Disallow downloading of files that were uploaded \n" +"but not validated by a local admin.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. expert settings Security Settings help 1/1 +#: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:239 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Security Settings</b><br>\n" +"<i>Disable SSL/TLS</i> Disable SSL/TLS encryption layer.\n" +"<i>Accept SSL and TLS</i> Accept both, traditional and encrypted sessions.\n" +"<i>Refuse Connections Without SSL/TLS</i> Refuse connections that do not use SSL/TLS security mechanisms, including anonymous sessions.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. -----------================= SUMMARY =============---------- +#. +#. Summary dialog help 1/3 +#: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:251 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>FTP Server Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Configure the FTP server.<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Summary dialog help 2/3 +#: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:255 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Adding an FTP Server:</big></b><br>\n" +"Choose an FTP server from the list of detected FTP servers.\n" +"If your FTP server was not detected, use <b>Other (not detected)</b>.\n" +"Then press <b>Configure</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Summary dialog help 3/3 +#: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:262 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Editing or Deleting</big></b><br>\n" +"If you press <b>Edit</b>, an additional dialog in which to change\n" +"the configuration opens.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Ovreview dialog help 1/3 +#: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:268 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>FTP Server Configuration Overview</big></b><br>\n" +"Obtain an overview of the installed FTP servers. Additionally,\n" +"edit their configurations.<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Ovreview dialog help 2/3 +#: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:274 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Adding a FTP Server</big></b><br>\n" +"Press <b>Add</b> to configure a FTP server.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Ovreview dialog help 3/3 +#: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:278 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Editing or Deleting</big></b><br>\n" +"Choose a FTP server to change or remove.\n" +"Then press <b>Edit</b> or <b>Delete</b> respectively.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. CWMServiceStart function with no parameter returning boolean value +#. that says if the service is started. +#: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:84 +msgid "Xinetd is not running." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:85 +msgid "Start it now?" +msgstr "" + +#. Valid function of "Umask (umask files:umask dirs)" +#. check value of textentry +#. only pure-ftpd +#: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:623 +msgid "Not a valid umask." +msgstr "" + +#. Handle function of "Browse" +#. handling value in textentry of "Umask for Anonynmous Users" +#. Handle function of "Browse" +#. handling value in textentry of "Umask for Authenticated Users" +#: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:785 +#: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:823 +msgid "Select directory" +msgstr "" + +#. end of if (button == "EnableUpload") { +#: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:1059 +msgid "Create the \"upload\" directory in %1\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:1064 +msgid "and enable write access?\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:1066 +msgid "" +"If you want anonymous users to be able to upload,\n" +" you need to create a directory with write access.\n" +"\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:1073 +#: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:1094 +#: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:1120 +#: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:1143 +msgid " is a home directory after the login of anonymous users." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:1084 +#: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:1131 +msgid "" +"Do you want to change permissions\n" +"for\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:1087 +#: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:1134 +msgid "Upload (allow writing)?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:1089 +msgid "" +"To allow anonymous users to upload, you need a directory with write access.\n" +"\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:1108 +msgid "Do you want to create a directory?\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:1111 +msgid "Upload with write access?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:1113 +msgid "" +"If you want to allow anonymous users to create directories,\n" +" you have to create a directory with write access.\n" +"\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:1136 +msgid "" +"If you want anonymous users to be able to create directories,\n" +" you need a directory with write access.\n" +"\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Handle function of "Anonymous Can Upload" +#. check permissions for upload dir +#. +#. end of if (FtpServer::pure_ftp_allowed_permissios_upload == 0) +#. Handle function of "Anonymous Can Create Directories" +#. check permissions for upload dir +#. +#. end of if (FtpServer::pure_ftp_allowed_permissios_upload == 0) +#: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:1203 +#: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:1223 +#: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:1290 +#: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:1310 +msgid "Change permissions of %1 ?\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:1207 +#: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:1294 +msgid "" +"If you want to allow uploads for \"anonymous\" users, \n" +"you need a directory with write access for them." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:1227 +msgid "For anonymous connections the home directory of an anonymous user should have no write access.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:1314 +msgid "For anonymous connections the home directory of an anonymous user should have no write access." +msgstr "" + +#. Valid function of "Max Port for Pas. Mode" +#. check values Max Port >= Min Port +#: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:1457 +msgid "Condition for ports is max port > min port." +msgstr "" + +#. Valid function of "DSA Certificate to Use for SSL Encrypted Connections" +#. check value if user enable SSL Certificate (textentry) doesn't be empty +#: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:1637 +msgid "DSA certificate is missing." +msgstr "" + +#. Handle function of "Browse" +#. handling value in textentry of "DSA Certificate to Use for SSL Encrypted Connections" +#: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:1664 +msgid "Select File" +msgstr "" + +#. Valid function of "Security Settings" +#. check of existing certificate +#: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:1722 +msgid "The <tt>/etc/ssl/private/pure-ftpd.pem</tt> certificate for the SSL connection is missing." +msgstr "" + +#. 0 => anonymous only, 1 => authenticated only, 2=> both +#: src/modules/FtpServer.rb:214 +msgid "Welcome message" +msgstr "" + +#. FtpServer read dialog caption +#: src/modules/FtpServer.rb:816 +msgid "Initializing FTP Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Part for commandline - it is necessary choose daemon if both are installed +#: src/modules/FtpServer.rb:827 +msgid "You have installed both daemons:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/FtpServer.rb:829 +msgid "Choose one of them for configuration." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/FtpServer.rb:831 +msgid "Do you want to configure vsftpd? Alternatively choose pure-ftpd." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/FtpServer.rb:839 +msgid "You have installed both daemons. Therefore you have to run the configuration in interactive mode." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1/2 +#: src/modules/FtpServer.rb:858 +msgid "Read settings from the config file" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 2/2 +#: src/modules/FtpServer.rb:860 +msgid "Read the previous settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1/2 +#: src/modules/FtpServer.rb:864 +msgid "Reading the settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. calling read function for reading settings form config file +#: src/modules/FtpServer.rb:874 +msgid "Cannot Read Current Settings." +msgstr "" + +#. FtpServer read dialog caption +#: src/modules/FtpServer.rb:891 +msgid "Saving FTP Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1/2 +#: src/modules/FtpServer.rb:901 +msgid "Write the settings to the config file" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 2/2 +#: src/modules/FtpServer.rb:903 +msgid "Write the settings for starting daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 1/1 +#: src/modules/FtpServer.rb:907 +msgid "Writing the settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. write options to the config file +#: src/modules/FtpServer.rb:917 +msgid "Cannot write settings!" +msgstr "" + +#. write settings for starting daemon +#: src/modules/FtpServer.rb:923 +msgid "Cannot write settings for xinetd!" +msgstr "" + +#. write settings for starting daemon +#: src/modules/FtpServer.rb:931 +msgid "Cannot create upload directory for anonymous connections." +msgstr "" + +#. anonymous dir +#: src/modules/FtpServer.rb:1079 +msgid "<p><ul><i>FTP daemon is not configured.</i></ul></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Summary head, if nothing configured +#: src/modules/FtpServer.rb:1089 +msgid "FTP daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Summary head, if something configured +#: src/modules/FtpServer.rb:1094 +msgid "FTP daemon %1" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/FtpServer.rb:1098 +msgid "These options will be configured" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/geo-cluster.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/geo-cluster.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/geo-cluster.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,478 @@ +# Pashto translations for opensuse-i package. +# Copyright (C) 2014 SuSE Linux Products GmbH, Nuernberg +# This file is distributed under the same license as the opensuse-i package. +# Automatically generated, 2014. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: opensuse-i 18n\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-05-19 09:34+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n" +"Language-Team: none\n" +"Language: ps\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#. Command line help text for the Xgeo-cluster module +#: src/clients/geo-cluster.rb:54 +msgid "Configuration of geo-cluster" +msgstr "" + +#. Rich text title for GeoCluster in proposals +#: src/clients/geo-cluster_proposal.rb:83 +msgid "GeoCluster" +msgstr "" + +#. Menu title for GeoCluster in proposals +#: src/clients/geo-cluster_proposal.rb:87 +msgid "&GeoCluster" +msgstr "" + +#. GeoCluster summary dialog caption +#. GeoCluster configure2 dialog caption +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. Copyright (c) 2006 Novell, Inc. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under +#. the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as published by the +#. Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +#. ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS +#. FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with +#. this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, you may find +#. current contact information at www.novell.com. +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. File: include/geo-cluster/wizards.ycp +#. Package: Configuration of geo-cluster +#. Summary: Wizards definitions +#. Authors: Dongmao Zhang +#. +#. $Id: wizards.ycp 27914 2006-02-13 14:32:08Z locilka $ +#. Initialization dialog caption +#: src/include/geo-cluster/complex.rb:83 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:465 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:814 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/wizards.rb:46 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/wizards.rb:141 +msgid "Geo Cluster Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. GeoCluster overview dialog caption +#: src/include/geo-cluster/complex.rb:143 +msgid "Geo Cluster Overview" +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. Copyright (c) 2006 Novell, Inc. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under +#. the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as published by the +#. Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +#. ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS +#. FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with +#. this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, you may find +#. current contact information at www.novell.com. +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. File: include/geo-cluster/dialogs.ycp +#. Package: Configuration of geo-cluster +#. Summary: Dialogs definitions +#. Authors: Dongmao Zhang +#. +#. $Id: dialogs.ycp 27914 2006-02-13 14:32:08Z locilka $ +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:51 +msgid "configuration file" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:58 +msgid "transport" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:65 +msgid "port" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:71 +msgid "arbitrator" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:74 src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:85 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:804 +msgid "Add" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:75 src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:86 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:805 +msgid "Edit" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:76 src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:87 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:806 +msgid "Delete" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:82 +msgid "site" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:93 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:235 +msgid "ticket" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:106 +msgid "Authentification" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:108 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:156 +msgid "Ca&ncel" +msgstr "" + +#. return `cancel or a string +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:109 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:157 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:177 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:254 +msgid "OK" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:122 +msgid "Enable Security Auth" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:128 +msgid "Authentification file" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:132 +msgid "A relative path will be saved in /etc/booth, or using absolute path directly." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:137 +msgid "For a newly created geo cluster, push the button below to generate /etc/booth/<key>." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:142 +msgid "To join a existing geo cluster, please copy /etc/booth/<key> from other node manually." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:146 +msgid "Generate Authentification Key File" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:154 +msgid "Basic" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:178 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:255 +msgid "Cancel" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:192 +msgid "Please enter a valid ip address" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:233 +msgid "Enter ticket and timeout" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:239 +msgid "timeout" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:241 +msgid "retries" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:243 +msgid "weights" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:245 +msgid "expire" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:247 +msgid "acquire-after" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:249 +msgid "before-acquire-handler" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:286 +msgid "timeout is invalid" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:288 +msgid "expire is invalid" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:290 +msgid "acquireafter is invalid" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:292 +msgid "retries is invalid" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:294 +msgid "retries values lower than 3 is illegal" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:296 +msgid "weights is invalid" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:298 +msgid "ticket can not be empty" +msgstr "" + +#. fill confs with global_files +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:407 +#: src/include/geo-cluster/wizards.rb:48 +msgid "Firewall Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Wizard::SetContentsButtons(caption, contents, HELPS["c2"]:"", +#. Label::BackButton(), Label::NextButton()); +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:554 +msgid "Enter an IP address of your arbitrator" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:565 +msgid "Edit IP address of your arbitrator" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:581 +msgid "Enter an IP address of your site" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:592 +msgid "Edit IP address of your site" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:614 +msgid "Ticket name already exist!" +msgstr "" + +#. Validation check before switch to authentification +#. Still fall to :authentification or :ok +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:646 +msgid "Configuration name can not be empty." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:649 +msgid "Configuration name can not be duplicated." +msgstr "" + +#. "5405d4" will show like "5405" +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:657 +msgid "port is invalid!" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:663 +msgid "transport have to be filled!" +msgstr "" + +#. Same to UI.QueryWidget(:arbitrator_box, :Value).to_s == "" +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:669 +msgid "arbitrator have to be filled!" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:674 +msgid "site have to be filled!" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:679 +msgid "ticket have to be filled!" +msgstr "" + +#. Validation check before switch to basic +#. Still fall to :basic or :ok +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:733 +msgid "Failed to create authentification file " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:736 +msgid "Succeed to created authentification file " +msgstr "" + +#. GeoCluster choose configure dialog caption +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:795 +msgid "GeoCluster Configuration Select" +msgstr "" + +#. Wizard::SetContentsButtons(caption, contents, HELPS["c2"]:"", +#. Label::BackButton(), Label::NextButton()); +#: src/include/geo-cluster/dialogs.rb:801 +msgid "Choose configuration file:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/geo-cluster/wizards.rb:47 +msgid "Authentification Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Initialization dialog contents +#: src/include/geo-cluster/wizards.rb:143 +msgid "Initializing..." +msgstr "" + +#. SCR won't write authfile when empty("") +#. Convert relative path to absolute path +#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:235 +msgid "Cannot write global conf settings." +msgstr "" + +#. List like site +#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:253 +msgid "Cannot write global settings." +msgstr "" + +#. Empty (all Int) ticket will be ignore by ag_booth +#. Create a ticket item +#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:277 +msgid "Cannot write global ticket settings." +msgstr "" + +#. GeoCluster read dialog caption +#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:284 +msgid "Initializing Geo Cluster Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. #-#-#-#-# geo-cluster.rxgettext.pot (PACKAGE VERSION) #-#-#-#-# +#. TODO FIXME Names of real stages +#. We do not set help text here, because it was set outside +#. #-#-#-#-# geo-cluster.xgettext.pot #-#-#-#-# +#. Progress stage 2/3 +#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:297 src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:143 +msgid "Read the previous settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:297 src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:300 +msgid "Read SuSEFirewall Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. #-#-#-#-# geo-cluster.xgettext.pot #-#-#-#-# +#. Progress step 2/3 +#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:299 src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:150 +msgid "Reading the previous settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress finished +#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:301 src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:369 +#: src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:154 src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:232 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#. GeoCluster write dialog caption +#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:343 +msgid "Saving Geo Cluster Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1/2 +#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:359 src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:223 +msgid "Write the settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 2/2 +#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:361 +msgid "Write the SuSEfirewall settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 1/2 +#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:365 src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:228 +msgid "Writing the settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 2/2 +#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:367 +msgid "Writing the SuSEFirewall settings" +msgstr "" + +#. #-#-#-#-# geo-cluster.rxgettext.pot (PACKAGE VERSION) #-#-#-#-# +#. Error message +#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:390 src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:242 +msgid "Cannot write settings." +msgstr "" + +#. TODO FIXME: your code here... +#. Configuration summary text for autoyast +#: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:451 +msgid "Configuration summary..." +msgstr "" + +#. GeoCluster read dialog caption +#: src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:129 +msgid "Initializing geo-cluster Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1/3 +#: src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:141 +msgid "Read the database" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 3/3 +#: src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:145 +msgid "Detect the devices" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 1/3 +#: src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:148 +msgid "Reading the database..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 3/3 +#: src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:152 +msgid "Detecting the devices..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:164 +msgid "Cannot read the database1." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:173 +msgid "Cannot read the database2." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:191 +msgid "Cannot detect devices." +msgstr "" + +#. GeoCluster read dialog caption +#: src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:211 +msgid "Saving geo-cluster Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 2/2 +#: src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:225 +msgid "Run SuSEconfig" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 2/2 +#: src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:230 +msgid "Running SuSEconfig..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:295 +msgid "Configuration summary ..." +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/gtk.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/gtk.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/gtk.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,209 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. translator: byte shorthand +#: src/YGProgressBar.cc:25 +msgid "B" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YGProgressBar.cc:26 +msgid "KB" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YGProgressBar.cc:27 +msgid "MB" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YGProgressBar.cc:28 +msgid "GB" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YGProgressBar.cc:29 +msgid "TB" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YGProgressBar.cc:115 +msgid "of" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YGTreeView.cc:119 +msgid "Total selected:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YGTreeView.cc:358 +msgid "No entries." +msgstr "" + +#: src/YGUI.cc:28 +msgid "Error" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YGUI.cc:132 +msgid "" +"Command line options for the YaST2 UI (GTK plugin):\n" +"\n" +"--noborder no window manager border for main dialogs\n" +"--fullscreen use full screen for main dialogs\n" +"--nothreads run without additional UI threads\n" +"--help prints this help text\n" +"\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YGUI.cc:327 +msgid "Open Macro file" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YGUI.cc:343 +msgid "Macro recording done." +msgstr "" + +#: src/YGUI.cc:349 +msgid "Save Macro" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YGUI.cc:358 +msgid "Save y2logs" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YGUI.cc:368 +#, c-format +msgid "Could not run: '%s' (exit value: %d)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YGUI.cc:394 +msgid "No dialog to take screenshot of." +msgstr "" + +#: src/YGUI.cc:409 +msgid "Could not take screenshot." +msgstr "" + +#: src/YGUI.cc:450 +msgid "Save screenshot" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YGUI.cc:462 +msgid "Could not save to:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YGUI.cc:505 +msgid "Select" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YGUtils.cc:626 +msgid "Apply" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YGUtils.cc:627 +msgid "Accept" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YGUtils.cc:628 +msgid "Install" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YGUtils.cc:629 +msgid "OK" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YGUtils.cc:630 +msgid "Cancel" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YGUtils.cc:631 +msgid "Abort" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YGUtils.cc:632 src/ygtkwizard.c:155 +msgid "Close" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YGUtils.cc:633 +msgid "Yes" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YGUtils.cc:634 +msgid "No" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YGUtils.cc:635 +msgid "Add" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YGUtils.cc:636 +msgid "Edit" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YGUtils.cc:637 +msgid "Delete" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YGUtils.cc:638 +msgid "Up" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YGUtils.cc:639 +msgid "Down" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YGUtils.cc:640 +msgid "Enable" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YGUtils.cc:641 +msgid "Disable" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YGUtils.cc:642 +msgid "Exit" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YGUtils.cc:643 +msgid "Back" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YGUtils.cc:644 +msgid "Next" +msgstr "" + +#: src/ygtksteps.c:75 +msgid "Current step" +msgstr "" + +#: src/ygtktreeview.c:135 +msgid "Loading..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/ygtktreeview.c:214 +msgid "&Show column" +msgstr "" + +#: src/ygtkwizard.c:83 +msgid "Clear" +msgstr "" + +#: src/ygtkwizard.c:107 src/ygtkwizard.c:617 +msgid "Help" +msgstr "" + +#: src/ygtkwizard.c:161 +msgid "&Find:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/ygtkwizard.c:448 +msgid "more" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/http-server.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/http-server.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/http-server.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,1605 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. translators: command line help for HTTP server module +#: src/clients/http-server.rb:36 +msgid "Configuration of HTTP server (Apache2)" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: help text for configure command line action +#: src/clients/http-server.rb:45 +msgid "Configure host settings" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: help text for modules command line action +#: src/clients/http-server.rb:55 +msgid "Configure the Apache2 server modules" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: help text for listen command line action +#: src/clients/http-server.rb:65 +msgid "Set up the ports and network addresses where the server should listen." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/http-server.rb:74 +msgid "Configure virtual hosts" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/http-server.rb:81 +msgid "Enable or disable wizard mode." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: help text for servername option (configure command line action) +#: src/clients/http-server.rb:92 +msgid "Server name, for example, www.example.com" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: help text for serveradmin option (configure command line action) +#: src/clients/http-server.rb:99 +msgid "E-mail address of the server administrator" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: help text for documentroot option (configure command line action) +#: src/clients/http-server.rb:106 +msgid "Directory where the documents of the server are stored" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: help text for host option (configure command line action) +#: src/clients/http-server.rb:113 +msgid "Name of the host to configure." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: help text for add subcommand (listen command line action) +#: src/clients/http-server.rb:121 +msgid "Add a new listen entry ([address:]port)" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: help text for delete subcommand (listen command line action) +#: src/clients/http-server.rb:129 +msgid "Delete an existing listen entry ([address:]port)" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: help text for list subcommand (listen command line action) +#: src/clients/http-server.rb:135 +msgid "List configured entries" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: help text for enable subcommand (modules command line action) +#: src/clients/http-server.rb:143 +msgid "Comma-separated list of modules to enable" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: help text for disable subcommand (modules command line action) +#: src/clients/http-server.rb:151 +msgid "Comma-separated list of modules to disable" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/http-server.rb:155 +msgid "Create new virtual host" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/http-server.rb:158 +msgid "Delete existing virtual host" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/http-server.rb:162 +msgid "Set selected virtual host as default host" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/http-server.rb:166 +msgid "Set wizard mode \"on\" or \"off\"." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error message in configure command line action +#: src/clients/http-server.rb:238 +msgid "Configured host not specified" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error message in configure command line action +#: src/clients/http-server.rb:242 +msgid "Only existing hosts can be specified as the host to configure" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: popup error message when validate servername +#: src/clients/http-server.rb:275 src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:885 +msgid "Invalid server name." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/http-server.rb:288 +msgid "Invalid server admin." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/http-server.rb:311 src/clients/http-server.rb:500 +msgid "Validate error " +msgstr "" + +#. translators: heading for the "modules list" command line action output +#. please, try to align the texts if possible. +#: src/clients/http-server.rb:339 +msgid "" +"Status \tModule\n" +"==================" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: server module status +#. translators: service status radio button label +#. if ((mod["default"]:"0" == "1") && (!contains(modules, name))) YaST::HTTPDData::ModifyModuleList ([name], true); +#. translators: server module status +#. string status = (string) select( (term) UI::QueryWidget( `id(`modules), `Item(ci) ), 2, _("Enabled") ); +#. string name = (string) select( (term) UI::QueryWidget( `id(`modules), `Item(ci) ), 1, nil ); +#: src/clients/http-server.rb:350 src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:357 +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:3066 src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:3089 +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:3136 src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:3145 +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:3148 src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:3152 +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:3181 +msgid "Enabled" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: server module status +#. translators: service status radio button label +#. translators: server module status +#: src/clients/http-server.rb:352 src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:355 +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:3068 src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:3146 +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:3168 +msgid "Disabled" +msgstr "" + +#. y2milestone("Ruby support %1", enable_ruby); +#. create list of all standard modules +#. create temporary list of maps from modules +#. translators: list of known and unknown modules +#. translators: server module status unknown +#. list of all installed modules +#: src/clients/http-server.rb:353 src/include/http-server/wizard-dialog.rb:167 +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:3039 src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:3049 +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:3050 src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:3059 +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:3208 +msgid "unknown" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: heading for the "listen list" command line action output +#. please, try to align the texts if possible. +#: src/clients/http-server.rb:376 +msgid "Listen Statements:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/http-server.rb:382 +msgid "All interfaces" +msgstr "" + +#. FIXME: check, if new address and port are correct values (if address is from machine's interfaces) +#: src/clients/http-server.rb:416 +msgid "Can use only existing interfaces" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error message in "listen add" command line action +#: src/clients/http-server.rb:423 +msgid "The listen statement '%1' is already configured." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error message in "listen delete" command line action +#: src/clients/http-server.rb:438 +msgid "Can remove only existing listeners" +msgstr "" + +#. check the command to be present exactly once +#: src/clients/http-server.rb:460 +msgid "Hosts list:" +msgstr "" + +#. create +#: src/clients/http-server.rb:471 +msgid "Some parameter missing" +msgstr "" + +#. remove and setdefault +#: src/clients/http-server.rb:520 +msgid "Argument can be only existing host" +msgstr "" + +#. popup - it is already the default host +#: src/clients/http-server.rb:526 src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:1324 +msgid "The host is already default." +msgstr "" + +#. remove the old non-default host +#. translators: popup error message - default host cannot be deleted +#: src/clients/http-server.rb:559 src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:1242 +msgid "Cannot delete the default host." +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. File: include/http-server/wizards.ycp +#. Package: Configuration of http-server +#. Summary: Wizards definitions +#. Authors: Stanislav Visnovsky +#. +#. $Id$ +#: src/include/http-server/dialogs.rb:32 +msgid "Listen Ports and Addresses" +msgstr "" + +#. `HSpacing (1), +#: src/include/http-server/dialogs.rb:57 +msgid "Server Modules" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: human-readable "default host" +#: src/include/http-server/dialogs.rb:66 +#: src/include/http-server/dialogs.rb:172 +msgid "Main Host" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/http-server/dialogs.rb:75 +msgid "Hosts" +msgstr "" + +#. Run server overview dialog +#. @return [Symbol] for wizard sequencer +#. translators: initialization dialog caption +#: src/include/http-server/dialogs.rb:108 +#: src/include/http-server/wizards.rb:200 +msgid "HTTP Server Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: dialog caption +#: src/include/http-server/dialogs.rb:169 +msgid "Host '%1' Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/http-server/dialogs.rb:212 +msgid "Configured Hosts" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: dialog caption +#: src/include/http-server/dialogs.rb:243 +msgid "New Host Information" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: dialog caption +#: src/include/http-server/dialogs.rb:269 +msgid "Virtual Host Details" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: dialog caption, %1 is the host name +#: src/include/http-server/dialogs.rb:299 +msgid "SSL Configuration for '%1'" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: human-readable "default host" +#. translators: human-readable "default host" +#. translators: human-readable "default host" +#: src/include/http-server/dialogs.rb:302 +#: src/include/http-server/dialogs.rb:357 +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:1273 +msgid "Default Host" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: pop up menu +#: src/include/http-server/dialogs.rb:324 +msgid "Certificates" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: Certificates pop-up menu item +#: src/include/http-server/dialogs.rb:327 +msgid "&Import Server Certificate..." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: Certificates pop-up menu item +#: src/include/http-server/dialogs.rb:329 +msgid "&Use Common Server Certificate" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: dialog caption, %1 is the host name +#: src/include/http-server/dialogs.rb:354 +msgid "Dir Configuration for '%1'" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:18 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Initializing HTTP Server Configuration</big></b>\n" +"<br>\n" +"Please wait...<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:24 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Initialization</big></b><br>\n" +"Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing <b>Abort</b> now.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:28 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Saving HTTP Server Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Please wait...<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:32 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Saving</big></b><br>\n" +"Abort the save procedure by pressing <b>Abort</b>.\n" +"An additional dialog informs you whether it is safe to do so.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: Wizard dialog 1/5 +#: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:38 +msgid "<p>The <b>Port</b> value defines the port on which Apache2 listens. The default is 80.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: Wizard dialog 1/5 +#: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:42 +msgid "<p><b>Listen on Interfaces</b> contains the list of all IP addresses configured for this host. Checked IP addresses are those on which Apache2 listens. If you are unsure, check all.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: Wizard dialog 2/5 +#: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:46 +msgid "<p>Here, enable the script languages the Apache2 server should support.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: Wizard dialog 5/5 +#: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:50 +msgid "<p>The summary displays the settings that will be written to the Apache2 configuration when you press <b>Finish</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: Wizard dialog 5/5 +#: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:54 +msgid "" +"<p>Press <b>HTTP Server Expert Configuration</b> \n" +"\t\tto create a more detailed configuration before writing the configuration.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. module dialog help 1/3 +#: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:58 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Editing HTTP Server Modules</big></b><br>\n" +"The table contains a list of all available Apache2 modules.\n" +"The first column contains the name of the module. \n" +"The second column shows whether the module should be\n" +"loaded by the server. Enabled modules will be loaded. The last column displays a short description\n" +"of the module.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. module dialog help 2/3 +#: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:67 +msgid "" +"<p>To change the status of a module, \n" +"choose the appropriate entry of the table and click <b>Toggle Status</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. module dialog help 3/3 +#: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:71 +msgid "" +"<p>If you need to add a module not listed in the table, \n" +"use <b>Add Module</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. apache service enabling help 1/1 +#: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:75 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>HTTP Server Settings</big></b><br>\n" +"Activate the HTTP server by choosing <b>Enabled</b>. To deactivate it, choose\n" +"<b>Disabled</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. firewall adapting help 1/1 +#: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:81 +msgid "" +"<p>By enabling <b>Open Firewall on Selected Ports</b>, \n" +"adapt the firewall according the ports on which Apache2 listens. \n" +"The interfaces of the firewall are not added or deleted. \n" +"This option is only available if the firewall is enabled.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. server configuration overview help 1/2 +#: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:88 +msgid "" +"<p>The list of options presents\n" +"several parts of the server configuration. <b>Listen On</b>\n" +"contains a list of ports and IP addresses on which the\n" +"server should listen for the incoming requests. \n" +"<b>Modules</b> allows configuring the modules loaded by the\n" +"server.\n" +"<b>Default Host</b> is a server name of a host used as a\n" +"default (fallback) host. If the server name of the default\n" +"host is not specified, a path to the document root of the\n" +"default host is displayed.\n" +"<b>Hosts</b> contains a list of hosts configured for the server.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. server configuration overview help 2/2 +#: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:102 +msgid "<p>Choose an appropriate entry from the table and click <b>Edit</b> to change settings.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help of menu button for server configuration 1/1 +#: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:106 +msgid "<p><b>Log Files</b> displays server log files.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. hosts list help 1/2 +#: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:108 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Configured Hosts</big></b><br>\n" +"This is a list of already configured hosts. One of the hosts is \n" +"marked as default (the asterisk next to the server name). A default host is used if no other host\n" +"matches for an incoming request. To set a host as default,\n" +"press <b>Set as Default</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. hosts list help 2/2 +#: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:116 +msgid "" +"<p>Choose an appropriate entry of the table and click <b>Edit</b> to change the host.\n" +"To add a host, click <b>Add</b>. To remove a host, select it and click <b>Delete</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. host editing help 1/2 +#: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:120 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Host Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"To edit the host settings, choose the appropriate entry of the table then click <b>Edit</b>.\n" +"To add a new option, click <b>Add</b>. To remove an option, select it and click <b>Delete</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. host editing help 2/2 +#: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:126 +msgid "" +"<p>The <b>Server Resolution</b> options set the resolution when using\n" +"\tvirtual hosts. However, when you choose <b>Resolution via HTTP Headers</b>,\n" +"\tthe default server will never be served requests to the IP address of\n" +"\ta name-based virtual host. If you plan to configure a SSL based vhost, use <b>Resolution via IP address</b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. listen dialog editor help 1/2 +#: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:133 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big><i>Listen</i> Settings for a Host</big></b><br>\n" +"The <i>Listen</i> directive allows selection of ports and network interfaces\n" +"where the HTTP server should listen for incoming requests.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. listen dialog editor help 2/2 +#: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:139 +msgid "" +"<p>Choose an appropriate entry of the table and click <b>Edit</b> to change the entry.\n" +"To add a new entry, click <b>Add</b>. To remove an entry, select it and click <b>Delete</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. ssl options dialog help 1/4 +#: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:143 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>SSL Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"This is a list of options related to the SSL (Secure Socket Layer) settings\n" +"of the host. SSL allows communicating securely with the host by \n" +"encrypting communication.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. ssl options dialog help 2/4 +#: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:150 +msgid "" +"<p>General behavior is determined by the SSL option. The host can\n" +"not support SSL at all (<tt>No SSL</tt>), allow both non-SSL and SSL access (<tt>Allowed</tt>),\n" +"or accept only connections encrypted via SSL (<tt>Required</tt>).\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. ssl options dialog help 3/4 +#: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:157 +msgid "" +"<p>Choose an appropriate option of the table and click <b>Edit</b> to change the option.\n" +"To add a new option, click <b>Add</b>. To remove an option, select it and click <b>Delete</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. ssl options dialog help 3/4 (empty in simple mode) +#: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:162 +msgid "" +"<p>The <b>Certificates</b> menu allows \n" +"importing server certificates. <b>Import Server Certificate</b> \n" +"allows use of a special purpose certificate. \n" +"<b>Use Common Certificate</b> configures usage of the\n" +"common certificate issued for this host.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. ssl options dialog help 4/4 +#: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:171 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Note:</b> If you enable use of SSL for a host, the <tt>mod_ssl</tt> \n" +"module should be loaded by the server.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. new host dialog help 1/3 +#: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:175 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>New Host</big></b><br>\n" +"This dialog allows you to enter a basic information about a new virtual host.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. new host dialog help 2/3 +#: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:179 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Server Identification</b> specifies the content and\n" +"the presentation of the the new virtual host. <b>Server Name</b> is the DNS name returned as a part\n" +"of the HTTP headers of the server response. <b>Server Contents Root</b>\n" +"is an absolute path to a directory containing all documents provided by\n" +"this virtual host. <b>Administrator E-Mail</b> allows setup of an e-mail\n" +"address for feedback about this host.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. new host dialog help 3/3 +#: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:188 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>Server Resolution</b></big><br>\n" +"Apache2 must be able to determine which virtual host\n" +"settings it should use to create a response for an HTTP request. \n" +"There are two basic approaches. If using HTTP headers\n" +"from the incoming request, the server looks up the host name specified by\n" +"the HTTP request headers. The other possibility is to determine the virtual host\n" +"by the IP address used by the client when connecting to the server.\n" +"If you plan to configure SSL-based vhost, use <b>Resolution via IP address</b>\n" +"Consult the Apache2 manual for further details.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. advanced new host dialog 1/5 +#: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:200 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Details for New Host</big></b><br>\n" +"This dialog allows you to specify additional information about a new virtual host.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. advanced new host dialog 2/5 +#: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:204 +msgid "" +"<p>Select <b>Enable CGI Support</b>\n" +"to run CGI scripts in the path in <b>CGI Directory Path</b> using the alias <tt>/cgi-bin/</tt>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. advanced new host dialog 3/5 +#: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:208 +msgid "" +"<p>For HTTPS access to this virtual host, select <b>Enable SSL Support</b>.\n" +"\n" +"Then enter the path for the certificate file in <b>Certificate File\n" +"Path</b>.This option is only available for IP-based vhosts.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. advanced new host dialog 4/5 +#: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:215 +msgid "<p>In <b>Directory Index</b>, enter a space-separated list of files that Apache should look for and provide when a URL for a directory (one that ends in <tt>/</tt>) is requested. The first matching file found is provided.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. advanced new host dialog 5/5 +#: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:219 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Public HTML</b>\n" +"\n" +"enables access to <tt>.public_html</tt> directories of all users.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Convert a Listen string to an item for table. Splits by the colon. +#. +#. @param [String] arg the Listen string +#. @param [Fixnum] id the id of this item +#. @return [Yast::Term] term for the table +#. translators: all network addresses Listen type +#. translators: all network addresses Listen type +#. translators: all network addresses Listen type +#. translators: Listen type for all addresses; +#. translators: all network addresses Listen type +#. translators: all network addresses Listen type +#: src/include/http-server/routines.rb:59 +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:2395 src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:2397 +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:2411 src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:2415 +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:3295 src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:3300 +msgid "All Addresses" +msgstr "" + +#. Sequention used for determining on which ip adresses and port apache2 will listen and if firewall is enebled +#. whether to open firewall on this port. +#. @return [Symbol] (`back, `abort, `next) +#: src/include/http-server/wizard-dialog.rb:24 +msgid "HTTP Server Wizard (1/5)--Network Device Selection" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/http-server/wizard-dialog.rb:41 +msgid "Network Device Selection" +msgstr "" + +#. Sequence to choose some script language modules +#. @return [Symbol] (`back, `abort, `next) +#: src/include/http-server/wizard-dialog.rb:125 +msgid "HTTP Server Wizard (2/5)--Modules" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/http-server/wizard-dialog.rb:130 +msgid "Modules" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/http-server/wizard-dialog.rb:168 +msgid "0" +msgstr "" + +#. Sequence to configure default host parameters +#. @return [Symbol] (`back, `abort, `next) +#: src/include/http-server/wizard-dialog.rb:186 +msgid "HTTP Server Wizard (3/5)--Default Host" +msgstr "" + +#. Sequence to cunfigure virtual hosts (add, remove, edit) and to change default host status +#. @return [Symbol] (`back, `abort, `next) +#: src/include/http-server/wizard-dialog.rb:260 +msgid "HTTP Server Wizard (4/5)--Virtual Hosts" +msgstr "" + +#. Sequence to configure whether apache2 starts on boot or not (manually). Here is possible +#. save all settings and exit or start expert configuration. +#. @return [Symbol] (`back, `abort, `next) +#: src/include/http-server/wizard-dialog.rb:291 +msgid "HTTP Server Wizard (5/5)--Summary" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: initialization dialog message +#: src/include/http-server/wizards.rb:202 +msgid "Initializing ..." +msgstr "" + +#. HttpServer read dialog caption +#: src/modules/HttpServer.rb:131 +msgid "Initializing HTTP Server Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: progress stage +#: src/modules/HttpServer.rb:142 +msgid "Check the environment" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: progress stage +#: src/modules/HttpServer.rb:144 +msgid "Read Apache2 configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: progress stage +#: src/modules/HttpServer.rb:146 +msgid "Read network configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: progress step +#: src/modules/HttpServer.rb:150 +msgid "Checking the environment..." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: progress step +#: src/modules/HttpServer.rb:152 +msgid "Reading Apache2 configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: progress step +#: src/modules/HttpServer.rb:154 +msgid "Reading network configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: progress finished +#. on(); +#. translators: progress step +#. translators: progress finished +#. translators: progress finished +#: src/modules/HttpServer.rb:156 src/modules/HttpServer.rb:388 +#: src/modules/HttpServer.rb:429 src/modules/HttpServer.rb:510 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#. notification about package needed 1/2 +#: src/modules/HttpServer.rb:185 +msgid "<p>To configure the HTTP server, the <b>%1</b> packages must be installed.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. notification about package needed 2/2 +#: src/modules/HttpServer.rb:189 +msgid "<p>Do you want to install it now?</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error popup before aborting the module +#: src/modules/HttpServer.rb:195 +msgid "" +"The package %1 is not available.\n" +"\n" +"Configuration cannot continue\n" +"\n" +"without installing the package." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error message, %1 is the file name of expected configuration file +#. translators: warning message, %1 is the file name of expected configuration file +#: src/modules/HttpServer.rb:223 src/modules/HttpServer.rb:247 +msgid "The configuration file '%1' does not exist." +msgstr "" + +#. off(); +#: src/modules/HttpServer.rb:279 +msgid "There is no DNS server running on this machine." +msgstr "" + +#. HttpServer read dialog caption +#: src/modules/HttpServer.rb:402 +msgid "Saving HTTP Server Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: progress stage 1/3 +#: src/modules/HttpServer.rb:413 +msgid "Write the Apache2 settings" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: progress stage 2/3 +#: src/modules/HttpServer.rb:416 +msgid "Enable Apache2 service" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: progress stage 3/3 +#: src/modules/HttpServer.rb:418 +msgid "Disable Apache2 service" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: progress step 1/3 +#: src/modules/HttpServer.rb:422 +msgid "Writing the settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: progress step 2/3 +#: src/modules/HttpServer.rb:425 +msgid "Enabling Apache2 service..." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: progress step 3/3 +#: src/modules/HttpServer.rb:427 +msgid "Disabling Apache2 service..." +msgstr "" + +#. install required RPMs for modules +#: src/modules/HttpServer.rb:441 +msgid "" +"The enabled modules require\n" +"installation of some of these additional packages:\n" +"%1\n" +"Install them now?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: warning in autoyast loading the configuration description. +#: src/modules/HttpServer.rb:550 +msgid "Module description does not have a name specified, ignoring." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: warning in autoyast loading the configuration description. +#: src/modules/HttpServer.rb:562 +msgid "Unknown change of a module for autoinstallation: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: warning in autoyast loading the configuration description. +#: src/modules/HttpServer.rb:581 +msgid "" +"Default value for module %1 does not match.\n" +"This can cause inconsistent module configuration." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error in autoyast loading the configuration description. +#: src/modules/HttpServer.rb:596 +msgid "Listen statement without port found." +msgstr "" + +#. "Listen on " information (interfaces, port) +#: src/modules/HttpServer.rb:730 +msgid "<h3>Listen On</h3>" +msgstr "" + +#. "Default host" information +#: src/modules/HttpServer.rb:750 +msgid "<h3>Default Host</h3>" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: assiciation server name with document root +#. translators: assiciation server name with document root +#: src/modules/HttpServer.rb:769 src/modules/HttpServer.rb:799 +msgid " in " +msgstr "" + +#. translators: whether SSL is enabled or disabled +#. translators: whether SSL is enabled or disable +#: src/modules/HttpServer.rb:774 src/modules/HttpServer.rb:803 +msgid "enabled" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/HttpServer.rb:774 src/modules/HttpServer.rb:803 +msgid "disabled" +msgstr "" + +#. the same information as in default host but for other virtual hosts +#: src/modules/HttpServer.rb:778 +msgid "<h3>Virtual Hosts</h3>" +msgstr "" + +#. menu button label +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:63 +msgid "&Log Files" +msgstr "" + +#. menu button item +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:66 +msgid "Show &Access Log" +msgstr "" + +#. menu button item +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:68 +msgid "Show &Error Log" +msgstr "" + +#. table cell description +#. table cell description +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:121 src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:127 +msgid "Server Name" +msgstr "" + +#. table cell description +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:134 +msgid "Document Root" +msgstr "" + +#. table cell description +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:143 +msgid "Server Administrator E-Mail" +msgstr "" + +#. table cell description +#. translators: frame title for method of incoming request resolution +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:154 src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:664 +msgid "Server Resolution" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: radio button for name-based virtual hosts +#. translators: radio button for name-based virtual hosts +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:162 src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:679 +msgid "Determine Request Server by HTTP &Headers" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: radio button for IP-based virtual hosts +#. translators: radio button for IP-based virtual hosts +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:164 src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:688 +msgid "Determine Request Server by Server IP &Address" +msgstr "" + +#. table cell description +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:171 +msgid "IP Address" +msgstr "" + +#. translator: server enable/disable radio button group +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:350 +msgid "HTTP &Service" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: radio button group label +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:387 +msgid "Listen on Ports:" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:392 +msgid "Network Address" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:394 +msgid "Port" +msgstr "" + +#. table header: module name +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:422 +msgid "Name" +msgstr "" + +#. table header: module status +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:424 +msgid "Status" +msgstr "" + +#. table header: module description +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:426 +msgid "Description" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: toggle button label +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:434 +msgid "&Toggle Status" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: add user-defined module button label +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:440 +msgid "&Add Module" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:552 +msgid "Directory" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: text entry +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:558 +msgid "&Port:" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: multi selection box +#. translators: multi selection box +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:572 src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:3474 +msgid "&Listen on Interfaces" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: radiobutton - to start Apache2 service automatically +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:596 +msgid "Start Apache2 Server When Booting" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: radiobutton - to don't start Apache2 service +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:600 +msgid "Start Apache2 Server Manually" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: button to enter expert configuration +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:608 +msgid "&HTTP Server Expert Configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: frame title for new hsot identification details +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:631 +msgid "Server Identification" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: textentry, new host server name +#. translators: textentry to set the host name +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:634 src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:1180 +msgid "Server &Name:" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: textentry, document root for the new host +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:637 +msgid "Server &Contents Root:" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: textentry, administrator's e-mail for the new host +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:641 +msgid "&Administrator E-Mail:" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: IP address for the new host +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:668 +msgid "VirtualHost" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:669 +msgid "Change VirtualHost ID" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: frame title for virtual host identification details +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:716 +msgid "CGI Options" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:722 +msgid "Enable &CGI for This Virtual Host" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: textentry, certificate file path +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:727 +msgid "CGI &Directory Path" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:737 +msgid "SSL Support" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:743 +msgid "Enable &SSL Support for This Virtual Host" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: textentry, certificate file path +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:750 +msgid "&Certificate File Path" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:755 +msgid "&Certificate Key File Path" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:763 +msgid "Directory Options" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:764 +msgid "&Directory Index" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:768 +msgid "Public HTML" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:769 +msgid "Enable &Public HTML" +msgstr "" + +#. these are for future use: +#. error message - the entered ip address is not found +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:803 +msgid "" +"The IP address is not configured\n" +"on this machine." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: popup error message when validate server ip +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:923 +msgid "Invalid IP address." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: popup error message when validate server +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:943 +msgid "The default host cannot be configured with SSL support." +msgstr "" + +#. for apache2.2 ServerName is not forced (if not - hostname will be used) +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:966 +msgid "When no Server name is defined, hostname will be used instead." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: popup error message when validate server +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:971 +msgid "Server name cannot be empty." +msgstr "" + +#. error message - the entered server name is already configured +#. in another virtual host +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:991 +msgid "The server name entered is already configured on another virtual host." +msgstr "" + +#. error message - the entered ip address is already +#. configured for another virtual host +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:1010 +msgid "The IP address is already configured on another virtual host" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: popup error message when validate ServerAdmin +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:1026 +msgid "Administrator E-Mail is invalid." +msgstr "" + +#. menubutton entry, try to keep short +#. menubutton entry, try to keep short +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:1073 src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:1117 +msgid "&Reload HTTP Server" +msgstr "" + +#. menubutton entry, try to keep short +#. menubutton entry, try to keep short +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:1078 src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:1122 +msgid "Save Settings and Re&start HTTP Server" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: popup description on changing the default host +#. the old default host is changed to a virtual one, but it may +#. miss some needed information. the popup asks to set them. +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:1166 +msgid "" +"The current default host will be replaced by \n" +"the new host and will become a virtual host.\n" +"\n" +"However, the current default host does not have\n" +"the IP address or the server name specified.\n" +"Therefore, it is not possible to use it as \n" +"a virtual host. Verify the suggested values below \n" +"and click OK to continue with the default host\n" +"switch. Otherwise click Cancel not to change\n" +"the default host.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: textentry to set the host IP address +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:1183 +msgid "Server &IP Address:" +msgstr "" + +#. message popup +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:1246 +msgid "Delete selected host?" +msgstr "" + +#. menu button label +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:1380 +msgid "Set as De&fault" +msgstr "" + +#. options = add(options, $["VALUE":newlist]); +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:1639 +msgid "Choose Document Root" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error popup +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:1662 +msgid "Administrator E-Mail cannot be empty." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:1709 +msgid "All addresses (*)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:1714 +msgid "IP Addresses" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:1716 +msgid "ServerName" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:1803 +msgid "Name for VirtualHost ID cannot be empty." +msgstr "" + +#. regexp matches '*' and '*:80' +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:1818 +msgid "" +"To use name-based virtual hosting,\n" +"you must designate the IP address on the server\n" +"that will be accepting requests for the hosts.\n" +"Also * for all addresses and *:port are acceptable." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:1854 +msgid "Master Zone %1" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:1872 +msgid "Record %1 already exists in zone %2." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:1880 src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:1925 +msgid "DNS Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:1884 +msgid "Add to Zone" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:1929 +msgid "Zone Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:1930 +msgid "Create New Zone" +msgstr "" + +#. disable using SSL for name-based virtual host +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:2021 +msgid "CGI Directory" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:2028 +msgid "Choose Certificate File" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error popup +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:2039 +msgid "Enter the certificate file." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:2045 +msgid "Choose Certificate Key File" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error popup +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:2057 +msgid "Enter the key file." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: dialog to set *.pem file with certificate +#. translators: dialog to set *.pem file with certificate +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:2192 src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:2230 +msgid "Select Certificate" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error message un failed certificate import +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:2222 +msgid "" +"Cannot import certificate\n" +"%1" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: combo box label for list of configured IPs +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:2429 +msgid "Network &Address:" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error message when validating Listen statement +#. translators: popup error +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:2474 src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:3442 +msgid "Invalid port number." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: table entry text for name-based vhosts +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:2940 +msgid "Resolution via HTTP Headers" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: table entry text for IP-based vhosts +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:2943 +msgid "Resolution via IP Address Used" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:3107 +msgid "Modules dependency problem" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:3109 +msgid "requires" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:3111 +msgid "Enable required module or disable first one." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: combo box for selsect module from installed unknown modules +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:3221 +msgid "New Module &Name:" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error message +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:3239 +msgid "A name for the module to add is required." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error message +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:3242 +msgid "The module is already in the list." +msgstr "" + +#. FIXME: CreateListen error reporting +#. translators: error message for adding a new Listen statement +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:3305 +msgid "The entry '%1' already exists." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error message +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:3326 +msgid "" +"The list of the ports to which the server should\n" +"listen cannot be empty." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: popup error - multi selection box with server network adresses +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:3493 +msgid "At least one interface must be selected." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: checkbox - support for php script language +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:3520 +msgid "Enable &PHP5 Scripting" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: checkbox - support for perl script language +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:3528 +msgid "Enable P&erl Scripting" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: checkbox - support for python script language +#: src/modules/HttpServerWidgets.rb:3536 +msgid "Enable P&ython Scripting" +msgstr "" + +#. illegal keys in vhost +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPD.pm:670 src/modules/YaPI/HTTPD.pm:753 +#, perl-format +msgid "Illegal key in virtual host '%s'." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPD.pm:739 +#, perl-format +msgid "Internal Error: Data must be an array ref and not %s." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPD.pm:764 +msgid "Illegal host ID." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPD.pm:786 +msgid "hostid already exists" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPD.pm:825 +msgid "can not delete default host" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPD.pm:846 +msgid "hostid not found" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPD.pm:1261 +msgid "illegal port" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPD.pm:1278 +msgid "writing the firewall rules failed" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPD.pm:1325 +msgid "listen value to delete not found" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPD.pm:1578 src/modules/YaPI/HTTPD.pm:1626 +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPD.pm:1671 src/modules/YaPI/HTTPD.pm:1754 +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPD.pm:1798 +msgid "Unable to fetch a host with the specified ID." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPD.pm:1587 src/modules/YaPI/HTTPD.pm:1634 +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPD.pm:1681 +msgid "Corrupt PEM data." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPD.pm:1761 +msgid "No certificate key file configured for this host ID." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPD.pm:1770 +msgid "Parsing the key file failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPD.pm:1803 +msgid "No CA certificate file configured for this host ID." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:13 +msgid "Provides access control based on client host name, IP address, etc." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:21 +msgid "Executing CGI scripts based on media type or request method" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:30 +msgid "Mapping different parts of the host file system in the document tree and for URL redirection" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:45 +msgid "Basic authentication" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:54 +msgid "User authentication using text files" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:62 +msgid "User Authorization" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:70 +msgid "Group authorization using plaintext files" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:79 +msgid "User authentication using DBM files" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:94 +msgid "Generates directory indices, automatically, similar to the Unix ls command" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:115 +msgid "Execution of CGI scripts" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:125 +msgid "Provides for trailing slash redirects and serving directory index files" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:134 +msgid "Modifies the environment passed to CGI scripts and SSI pages" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:144 +msgid "Generation of Expires HTTP headers according to user-specified criteria" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:159 +msgid "Server-parsed HTML documents (Server Side Includes)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:173 +msgid "Logging of the requests made to the server" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:185 +msgid "Associates the requested file name's extensions with the file's behavior and content" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:210 +msgid "Provides for content negotiation" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:220 +msgid "Allows the setting of environment variables based on characteristics of the request" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:231 +msgid "Provides information about server activity and performance" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:239 +msgid "Allows CGI scripts to run as a specified user and group" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:250 +msgid "User-specific directories" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:258 +msgid "Sends files that contain their own HTTP headers" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:264 +msgid "Allows \"anonymous\" user access to authenticated areas" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:285 +msgid "User authentication using MD5 Digest Authentication" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:300 +msgid "Allows an LDAP directory to be used to store the database for HTTP Basic authentication" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:318 src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:493 +msgid "Content cache keyed to URIs" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:335 +msgid "Specify character set translation or recoding" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:345 +msgid "Distributed Authoring and Versioning (WebDAV) functionality" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:360 +msgid "File system provider for mod_dav" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:371 +msgid "Compress content before it is delivered to the client" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:390 +msgid "Content cache storage manager keyed to URIs" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:403 +msgid "A simple echo server to illustrate protocol modules" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:411 +msgid "Pass the response body through an external program before delivery to the client" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:424 +msgid "Caches a static list of files in memory" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:434 +msgid "Customization of HTTP request and response headers" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:447 +msgid "Server-side image map processing" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:458 +msgid "Provides a comprehensive overview of the server configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:467 +msgid "LDAP connection pooling and result caching services for use by other LDAP modules" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:487 +msgid "Logging of input and output bytes per request" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:507 +msgid "Determines the MIME type of a file by looking at a few bytes of its contents" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:516 +msgid "HTTP/1.1 proxy/gateway server" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:564 +msgid "AJP support module for mod_proxy" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:571 +msgid "mod_proxy extension for CONNECT request handling" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:578 +msgid "FTP support module for mod_proxy" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:584 +msgid "HTTP support module for mod_proxy" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:590 +msgid "Provides a rule-based rewriting engine to rewrite requested URLs on the fly" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:617 +msgid "Attempts to correct mistaken URLs that users might have entered" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:626 +msgid "Strong cryptography using the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) and Transport Layer Security (TLS) protocols" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:666 +msgid "Provides an environment variable with a unique identifier for each request" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:672 +msgid "Clickstream logging of user activity on a site" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:692 +msgid "Provides support for dynamically configured mass virtual hosting" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:709 +msgid "Provides support for PHP5 dynamically generated pages" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:715 +msgid "Provides support for Perl dynamically generated pages" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:721 +msgid "Provides support for Python dynamically generated pages" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:727 +msgid "Provides support for AppArmor subprocess confinement within apache" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:733 src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:740 +msgid "Provides support for subversion" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaST/httpdUtils.pm:22 +msgid "Host not found" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaST/httpdUtils.pm:58 +#, perl-format +msgid "Illegal '%s' parameter" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/YaST/httpdUtils.pm:62 +msgid "ssl together with \"virtual by name\" is not possible" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/inetd.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/inetd.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/inetd.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,628 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. is this proposal or not? +#: src/clients/inetd.rb:63 +msgid "Configuration of Network Services (xinetd)" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for "summary" action +#: src/clients/inetd.rb:87 +msgid "Show the status of current system services" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for "id" option +#: src/clients/inetd.rb:99 +msgid "Unique identifier" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for "service" option +#: src/clients/inetd.rb:106 +msgid "Service name" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for "disable" option +#: src/clients/inetd.rb:113 +msgid "Disable service" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for "rpc_version" option +#: src/clients/inetd.rb:121 +msgid "RPC version of RPC service" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for "socket_type" option +#: src/clients/inetd.rb:128 +msgid "Socket type" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for "protocol" option +#: src/clients/inetd.rb:136 +msgid "Internet (IP) protocols" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for "wait" option +#: src/clients/inetd.rb:144 +msgid "Wait attribute" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for "user" option +#: src/clients/inetd.rb:152 +msgid "Determines the uid for the server process" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for "group" option +#: src/clients/inetd.rb:159 +msgid "Determines the gid for the server process" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for "server" option +#: src/clients/inetd.rb:166 +msgid "Path name of program to execute" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for "server_args" option +#: src/clients/inetd.rb:173 +msgid "Parameters for server" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for "comment" option +#: src/clients/inetd.rb:180 +msgid "User comment" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error message for command line +#: src/clients/inetd.rb:345 +msgid "You must specify a service ID." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error message for command line +#: src/clients/inetd.rb:356 +msgid "Specify the service using a 'service' option." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error message for command line +#. translators: error message for command line +#: src/clients/inetd.rb:371 src/clients/inetd.rb:391 +msgid "The 'id' option cannot be combined with other options." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inetd.rb:401 src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:356 +msgid "Status" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inetd.rb:402 src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:357 +msgid "Service" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inetd.rb:403 +msgid "Type" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inetd.rb:404 +msgid "Prot." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inetd.rb:405 src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:360 +msgid "Wait" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inetd.rb:406 src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:361 +msgid "User" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inetd.rb:407 src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:362 +msgid "Server" +msgstr "" + +#. id, +#. Translators: Service status: On = running, --- = stopped +#: src/clients/inetd.rb:437 src/include/inetd/routines.rb:191 +msgid "On" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inetd.rb:438 +msgid "Off" +msgstr "" + +#. determine wait mode (convert to string) +#: src/clients/inetd.rb:442 src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:855 +#: src/include/inetd/routines.rb:211 +msgid "Yes" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inetd.rb:442 src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:855 +#: src/include/inetd/routines.rb:213 +msgid "No" +msgstr "" + +#. create titles +#: src/clients/inetd_proposal.rb:81 +msgid "Xinetd" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inetd_proposal.rb:82 +msgid "&Xinetd" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: In autoinstallation mode: +#. The package name is stored in %1. This is Popup::ContinueCancel. +#: src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:164 +msgid "Package %1 will be installed during the write process." +msgstr "" + +#. if (true) { // for debugging +#. Translators: The package name is stored in %1. This is Popup::Message. +#: src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:183 +msgid "Package %1 was not installed. The service cannot be edited." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: The package name is stored in %1 +#: src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:205 +msgid "Package %1 was successfully installed." +msgstr "" + +#. This is main inetd module dialog. +#. @return dialog result +#: src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:303 +msgid "&Activate All Services" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:304 +msgid "&Deactivate All Services" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Initial and target state of xinetd (or inetd) +#: src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:339 +msgid "D&isable" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:340 +msgid "Enab&le" +msgstr "" + +#. Main dialog edit inetd.conf +#. Translators: Name of table with services (echo, chargen, ...) +#: src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:347 +msgid "Currently Available Services" +msgstr "" + +#. `opt(`notify), +#. `opt(`keepSorting), +#: src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:355 +msgid "Ch" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:358 +msgid "Type " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:359 +msgid "Protocol" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:363 +msgid "Server / Args" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Add service +#: src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:373 +msgid "&Add" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Edit service +#: src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:376 +msgid "&Edit" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Delete service +#: src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:379 +msgid "&Delete" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Change service status +#: src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:387 +msgid "&Toggle Status (On or Off)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:399 +msgid "Status for All &Services" +msgstr "" + +#. Inetd configure dialog caption +#: src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:413 +msgid "Network Service Configuration (xinetd)" +msgstr "" + +#. execute dialog +#. Translators: Caption for EditOrCreateServiceDlg() +#: src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:504 +msgid "Add a New Service Entry" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Popup::Error +#: src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:534 +msgid "Cannot delete the service. It is not installed." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Popup::Message +#: src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:558 +msgid "To delete a service, select one in the main dialog" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Popup::Message +#: src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:605 +msgid "To activate or deactivate a service, select one in the main dialog." +msgstr "" + +#. y2milestone("Current line %1", current_line); +#. Translators: Caption of EditOrCreateServiceDlg() +#: src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:742 +msgid "Edit a service entry" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Popup::Message +#: src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:757 +msgid "To edit a service, select one in the main dialog" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Popup::Warning +#: src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:788 +msgid "" +"All services are marked as disabled (locked).\n" +"Internet super-server will be disabled." +msgstr "" + +#. service name +#: src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:811 +msgid "&Service" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:813 +msgid "RPC Versio&n" +msgstr "" + +#. service status (running or stopped) +#: src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:819 +msgid "Service is acti&ve." +msgstr "" + +#. service socket type +#: src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:832 +msgid "Socket T&ype" +msgstr "" + +#. for protocol option - ediatble ComboBox +#: src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:843 +msgid "&Protocol" +msgstr "" + +#. for flags (wait/nowait) - noneditable ComboBox +#: src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:854 +msgid "&Wait" +msgstr "" + +#. user and group ComboBoxes +#: src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:864 +msgid "&User" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:866 +msgid "&Group" +msgstr "" + +#. Server arguments +#: src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:869 +msgid "S&erver" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:870 +msgid "Server Argumen&ts" +msgstr "" + +#. Comment above the service line in inetd.conf +#: src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:872 +msgid "Co&mment" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Please BE CAREFUL! This text is often used in code! This Translation must be the same. +#. do not add a "flags" field, it's currently in "unparsed" +#. Read user names from passwd. +#. It does not get the NIS entries. +#. "+" is filtered out. +#. @return [Array] users +#. Read group names from group +#. It does not get the NIS entries. +#. "+" is filtered out. +#. @return [Array] groups +#: src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:918 src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:956 +#: src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:961 src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:1000 +#: src/include/inetd/routines.rb:333 src/include/inetd/routines.rb:353 +msgid "--default--" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Popup::Message +#: src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:946 +msgid "" +"Service is empty.\n" +"Enter valid values.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Error message +#: src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:952 +msgid "Service name contains disallowed character \"/\"." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: sformat-ed() 3 strings +#: src/include/inetd/dialogs.rb:960 +msgid "The user %1 is reserved for internal server processes only." +msgstr "" + +#. Popup::Error +#: src/include/inetd/helps.rb:38 +msgid "No packages selected. Configuration aborted." +msgstr "" + +#. Not used! +#: src/include/inetd/helps.rb:42 +msgid "Selected packages will be installed." +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/inetd/helps.rb:46 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Initializing xinetd Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Please wait...<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/inetd/helps.rb:50 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting the Initialization Process:</big></b><br>\n" +"Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing <b>Abort</b> now.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/inetd/helps.rb:54 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Saving xinetd Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Please wait...<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/inetd/helps.rb:58 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting the Save Process:</big></b><br>\n" +"Abort saving by pressing <b>Abort</b>.\n" +"An additional dialog will inform you whether it is safe to do so.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Configure1 dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/inetd/helps.rb:65 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Network Service Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Click <b>Enable</b> to enable network services managed by a super-server\n" +"configuration. To stop the super-server, click <b>Disable</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/inetd/helps.rb:70 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Configuration Service Status:</big></b><br>\n" +"All services marked with <b>X</b> in column <b>Ch</b> were edited\n" +"and will be changed in the system configuration.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/inetd/helps.rb:75 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Services Status:</big></b><br>\n" +"All services marked with <b>---</b> are inactive (locked).\n" +"All services marked with <b>On</b> are active (unlocked).\n" +"All services marked with <b>NI</b> are not installed and cannot be configured.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/inetd/helps.rb:81 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Changing Service Status:</big></b><br>\n" +"Select the service to enable or disable and press <b>Toggle Status (On or Off)</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/inetd/helps.rb:84 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Editing Services:</big></b><br>\n" +"Select the service to edit and press <b>Edit</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/inetd/helps.rb:87 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Deleting Services:</big></b><br>\n" +"Select the service to delete and press <b>Delete</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/inetd/helps.rb:90 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Adding a New Entry:</big></b>\n" +"Click <b>Create</b> and complete the form.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/inetd/helps.rb:93 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Canceling Configuration:</big></b>\n" +"Leave the configuration untouched by pressing the <b>Cancel</b> button.\n" +"If you do so, all your changes will be lost and the original configuration will remain.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Help for the EditOrCreateServiceDlg () dialog. +#. @return The help text. +#: src/include/inetd/helps.rb:104 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p>To create a valid entry (service) for the super-server,\n" +"enter</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/inetd/helps.rb:109 +msgid "" +"<ul>\n" +"<li>service name\n" +"<li>RPC version (optional)\n" +"<li>socket type\n" +"<li>protocol\n" +"<li>wait/nowait\n" +"<li>user\n" +"<li>group\n" +"<li>server program\n" +"<li>server program arguments\n" +"</ul>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/inetd/helps.rb:122 +msgid "<p>This is a short description. For details, see <b>info xinetd.conf</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/inetd/helps.rb:125 +msgid "" +"<p>Enter a valid service name into the <b>service</b> field.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/inetd/helps.rb:128 +msgid "" +"<p>The <b>socket type</b> should be stream, dgram, raw, or seqpacket,\n" +"depending on whether the service is stream-based, is datagram-based,\n" +"requires direct access to IP, or requires reliable sequential datagram\n" +"transmission.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/inetd/helps.rb:134 +msgid "" +"<p>The <b>protocol</b> must be a valid protocol as specified in /etc/protocols.\n" +"Examples include <i>tcp</i>,<i>udp</i>,<i>rpc/tcp</i>, and <i>rpc/udp</i>.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/inetd/helps.rb:139 +msgid "" +"<p>The <b>wait/nowait</b> entry determines if the service is\n" +"single-threaded or multithreaded and whether xinetd accepts the\n" +"connection or the server program accepts the connection. If its value is\n" +"<b>yes</b>, the service is single-threaded. This means that xinetd \n" +"starts the server then stops handling requests for the service\n" +"until the server dies and that the server software accepts the\n" +"connection. If the attribute value is <b>no</b>, the service is\n" +"multithreaded and xinetd keeps handling new service requests and\n" +"xinetd accepts the connection. \n" +"<i>udp/dgram</i> services normally expect the value to be <b>yes</b>,\n" +"because udp is not connection oriented. <i>tcp/stream</i> servers\n" +"normally expect the value to be <b>no</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/inetd/helps.rb:153 +msgid "" +"<p>The server will be run with the permissions of the user selected in\n" +"<b>User</b>. This is useful to make services run with permissions\n" +"less than root.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/inetd/helps.rb:159 +msgid "" +"<p>In <b>Server</b>, enter the path name of the program to\n" +"be executed by the super-server when a request reaches its socket.\n" +"Parameters for this program can be specified in <b>Server Arguments</b>.\n" +"\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: This string you can leave unchanged +#: src/include/inetd/routines.rb:194 +msgid "---" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: This is used for status "Not Installed". +#. Please, make the +#. translation as short as possible. +#: src/include/inetd/routines.rb:206 +msgid "NI" +msgstr "" + +#. Whole configuration of inetd but without reading and writing. +#. For use with autoinstallation. +#. @return sequence result +#: src/include/inetd/wizards.rb:87 +msgid "Xinetd Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/inetd/wizards.rb:88 +msgid "Initializing ..." +msgstr "" + +#. Inetd read dialog caption +#: src/modules/Inetd.rb:188 +msgid "Initializing inetd Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Inetd.rb:196 +msgid "Read the Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Inetd.rb:197 +msgid "Reading the configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. read database +#: src/modules/Inetd.rb:197 src/modules/Inetd.rb:214 src/modules/Inetd.rb:278 +#: src/modules/Inetd.rb:306 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#. Inetd read dialog caption +#: src/modules/Inetd.rb:269 +msgid "Saving inetd Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Inetd.rb:277 +msgid "Write the settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Inetd.rb:278 +msgid "Writing the settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. in future: catch errors +#: src/modules/Inetd.rb:303 +msgid "Cannot write settings!" +msgstr "" + +#. "enabled" defaults to true +#: src/modules/Inetd.rb:598 +msgid "<p><ul><i>All services are marked as stopped.</i></ul></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Summary head, if nothing configured +#: src/modules/Inetd.rb:609 +msgid "Network services" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Summary head, if something configured +#: src/modules/Inetd.rb:613 +msgid "Network services are managed via %1" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Inetd.rb:616 +msgid "These services will be enabled" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/installation.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/installation.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/installation.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,1837 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-27 10:52+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. help for the dialog - busy message +#: src/include/installation/inst_inc_all.rb:52 +msgid "<p>Initializing the installation...</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog content - busy message +#: src/include/installation/inst_inc_all.rb:57 +msgid "Preparing the 1st system configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. help for the dialog - busy message +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog help +#: src/include/installation/inst_inc_all.rb:59 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_initialization.rb:48 +msgid "<p>Please wait...</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#. TRANSLATORS: progress message +#: src/include/installation/inst_inc_all.rb:64 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_installation_options.rb:154 +msgid "Initializing..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Error message +#: src/include/installation/inst_inc_all.rb:77 +msgid "" +"No installation control file has been found,\n" +"the installer cannot continue." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: busy message +#. progress step title +#: src/include/installation/inst_inc_all.rb:112 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/yast_inf_finish.rb:73 +msgid "Writing YaST configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: busy message +#. Dialog busy message +#: src/include/installation/inst_inc_all.rb:126 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_congratulate.rb:267 +msgid "Finishing the installation..." +msgstr "" + +#. Somehow the graphical frontend failed and we're running in +#. text mode. Inform the user about this fact. +#: src/include/installation/inst_inc_all.rb:174 +msgid "" +"Your computer does not fulfill all requirements for\n" +"a graphical installation. There is either less than %1 MB\n" +"memory or the X server could not be started.\n" +"\n" +"As fallback, the text front-end of YaST2 will guide you\n" +"through the installation. This front-end offers the\n" +"same functionality as the graphical one, but the screens\n" +"differ from those in the manual.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. The script YaST2 wants to inform about a problem with the +#. option no_x11 but it's broken. +#. else if (Installation::no_x11 ()) +#. Somehow the graphical frontend failed and we're running in +#. text mode. Inform the user about this fact. +#: src/include/installation/inst_inc_all.rb:193 +msgid "" +"The graphical interface could not be started.\n" +"\n" +"Either the required packages were not installed (minimal installation) \n" +"or the graphics card is not properly supported.\n" +"\n" +"As fallback, the text front-end of YaST2 will guide you\n" +"through the installation. This front-end offers the\n" +"same functionality as the graphical one, but the screens\n" +"differ from those in the manual.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: progress stage, %1 stands for service name +#: src/include/installation/inst_inc_second.rb:277 +msgid "Start service %1" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: progress stage, %1 stands for service name +#. TRANSLATORS: busy message +#: src/include/installation/inst_inc_second.rb:282 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_restore_settings.rb:47 +msgid "Starting service %1..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog caption +#: src/include/installation/inst_inc_second.rb:297 +msgid "Adjusting Network Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog help +#: src/include/installation/inst_inc_second.rb:303 +msgid "Network settings are being adjusted." +msgstr "" + +#. popup question (#x1) +#: src/include/installation/inst_inc_second.rb:356 +msgid "" +"The previous installation has failed.\n" +"Would you like it to continue?\n" +"\n" +"Note: You may have to enter some information again." +msgstr "" + +#. popup question (#x1) +#: src/include/installation/inst_inc_second.rb:364 +msgid "" +"The previous installation has been aborted.\n" +"Would you like it to continue?\n" +"\n" +"Note: You may have to enter some information again." +msgstr "" + +#. popup headline (#x1) +#. TRANSLATORS: starting the installation process +#. dialog cotent (progress information) +#: src/include/installation/inst_inc_second.rb:378 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_doit.rb:60 +msgid "Starting Installation..." +msgstr "" + +#. Heading for confirmation popup before the installation really starts +#: src/include/installation/misc.rb:167 +msgid "Confirm Installation" +msgstr "" + +#. Text for confirmation popup before the installation really starts 1/3 +#: src/include/installation/misc.rb:170 +msgid "<p>Information required for the base installation is now complete.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Text for confirmation popup before the installation really starts 2/3 +#: src/include/installation/misc.rb:182 +msgid "" +"<p>If you continue now, <b>existing\n" +"partitions</b> on your hard disk will be <b>deleted</b> or <b>formatted</b>\n" +"(<b>erasing any existing data</b> in those partitions) according to the\n" +"installation settings in the previous dialogs.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Text for confirmation popup before the installation really starts 2/3 +#: src/include/installation/misc.rb:193 +msgid "" +"<p>If you continue now, partitions on your\n" +"hard disk will be modified according to the installation settings in the\n" +"previous dialogs.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Text for confirmation popup before the installation really starts 3/3 +#. Text for confirmation popup before the update really starts 3/3 +#. Text for confirmation popup before the update really starts 3/3 +#: src/include/installation/misc.rb:204 src/include/installation/misc.rb:222 +#: src/lib/installation/proposal_runner.rb:136 +msgid "<p>Go back and check the settings if you are unsure.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Heading for confirmation popup before the update really starts +#. Heading for confirmation popup before the update really starts +#: src/include/installation/misc.rb:210 +#: src/lib/installation/proposal_runner.rb:124 +msgid "Confirm Update" +msgstr "" + +#. Text for confirmation popup before the update really starts 1/3 +#. Text for confirmation popup before the update really starts 1/3 +#: src/include/installation/misc.rb:214 +#: src/lib/installation/proposal_runner.rb:128 +msgid "<p>Information required to perform an update is now complete.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Text for confirmation popup before the update really starts 2/3 +#. Text for confirmation popup before the update really starts 2/3 +#: src/include/installation/misc.rb:216 +#: src/lib/installation/proposal_runner.rb:130 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p>If you continue now, data on your hard disk will be overwritten\n" +"according to the settings in the previous dialogs.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Label for the button that confirms startint the installation +#. Label for the button that confirms startint the installation +#: src/include/installation/misc.rb:225 +#: src/lib/installation/proposal_runner.rb:139 +msgid "Start &Update" +msgstr "" + +#. this is a heading +#: src/lib/installation/cio_ignore.rb:66 +msgid "Blacklist Devices" +msgstr "" + +#. this is a menu entry +#: src/lib/installation/cio_ignore.rb:68 +msgid "B&lacklist Devices" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Installation overview +#. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text +#: src/lib/installation/cio_ignore.rb:87 +msgid "Blacklist devices enabled (disable</a>)." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Installation overview +#. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text +#: src/lib/installation/cio_ignore.rb:93 +msgid "Blacklist devices disabled (enable</a>)." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: help text +#: src/lib/installation/cio_ignore.rb:102 +msgid "<p>Use <b>Blacklist devices</b> if you want to create blacklist channels to such devices which will reduce kernel memory footprint.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. progress step title +#: src/lib/installation/cio_ignore.rb:157 +msgid "Blacklisting Devices..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step title +#: src/lib/installation/clients/clone_finish.rb:43 +msgid "Generating AutoYaST profile if needed..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: help text +#: src/lib/installation/clients/clone_proposal.rb:39 +msgid "" +"<p>Use <b>Clone System Settings</b> if you want to create an AutoYaST profile.\n" +"AutoYaST is a way to do a complete SUSE Linux installation without user interaction. AutoYaST\n" +"needs a profile to know what the installed system should look like. If this option is\n" +"selected, a profile of the current system is stored in <tt>/root/autoinst.xml</tt>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/clone_proposal.rb:60 +msgid "Write AutoYaST profile to /root/autoinst.xmlat the end of installation?" +msgstr "" + +#. this is a heading +#: src/lib/installation/clients/clone_proposal.rb:71 +msgid "Clone System Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. this is a menu entry +#: src/lib/installation/clients/clone_proposal.rb:73 +msgid "&Clone System Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Installation overview +#. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text +#: src/lib/installation/clients/clone_proposal.rb:101 +msgid "The AutoYaST profile will be written under /root/autoinst.xml (do not write it</a>)." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Installation overview +#. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text +#: src/lib/installation/clients/clone_proposal.rb:110 +msgid "The AutoYaST profile will not be saved (write it</a>)." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step title +#: src/lib/installation/clients/copy_files_finish.rb:81 +msgid "Copying files to installed system..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step title +#: src/lib/installation/clients/copy_systemfiles_finish.rb:60 +msgid "Copying system files to the installed system..." +msgstr "" + +#. Create a summary +#. return string +#: src/lib/installation/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:90 +msgid "Installation from images is: <b>enabled</b>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:92 +msgid "Installation from images is: <b>disabled</b>" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog caption +#. this is a heading +#: src/lib/installation/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:113 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:118 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/deploying_proposal.rb:133 +msgid "Installation from Images" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:121 +msgid "Here you can choose to use Novell pre-defined images to speed up RPM installation." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:135 +msgid "&Install from Images" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:144 +msgid "&Do not Install from Images" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:155 +msgid "Custom images deployment - this needs a URL to be configured as installation source" +msgstr "" + +#. Image name, Image location +#: src/lib/installation/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:164 +msgid "Here you can create custom images.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:165 +msgid "You have to configure the software selection first before you can create an image here" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:176 +msgid "Create an image file (AutoYaST will fetch it from the given location during installation)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:183 +msgid "Create Image" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:188 +msgid "Where will AutoYaST find the image? (e.g. http://host/)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:200 +msgid "What is the name of the image? (e.g. my_image)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:213 +msgid "Create ISO (image and autoinst.xml will be on the media)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: help text +#. TRANSLATORS: help text +#: src/lib/installation/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:229 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/deploying_proposal.rb:69 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Installation from Images</b> is used to speed the installation up.\n" +"Images contain compressed snapshots of an installed system matching your\n" +"selection of patterns. The rest of the packages which are not contained in the\n" +"images will be installed from packages the standard way.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:235 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Creating own Images</b> is used if you\n" +"want to skip the complete step of RPM installation. Instead AutoYaST will dump an\n" +"image on the harddisk which is a lot faster and can be pre-configured already.\n" +"Everything else than RPM installation is done like during a normal auto-installation.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:338 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:349 +msgid "you need to do the software selection before creating an image" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: help text +#: src/lib/installation/clients/deploying_proposal.rb:76 +msgid "" +"<p>Note that when installing from images, the time stamps of all packages originating from the images will\n" +"not match the installation date but rather the date the image was created.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: help text +#: src/lib/installation/clients/deploying_proposal.rb:80 +msgid "" +"<p>Installation from images is disabled by default if the current\n" +"pattern selection does not fit any set of images.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/deploying_proposal.rb:90 +msgid "Error: Images should not be used for mode: %1." +msgstr "" + +#. changed to true +#: src/lib/installation/clients/deploying_proposal.rb:119 +msgid "" +"Cannot enable installation from images.\n" +"\n" +"Currently selected patterns do not fit the images\n" +"stored on the installation media.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. this is a menu entry +#: src/lib/installation/clients/deploying_proposal.rb:135 +msgid "Installation from &Images" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Installation overview +#: src/lib/installation/clients/deploying_proposal.rb:155 +msgid "No installation images are available" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Installation overview +#. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text +#: src/lib/installation/clients/deploying_proposal.rb:166 +msgid "Installation from images is enabled (disable</a>)." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Installation overview +#. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text +#: src/lib/installation/clients/deploying_proposal.rb:181 +msgid "Installation from images is disabled (enable</a>)." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step title +#: src/lib/installation/clients/desktop_finish.rb:70 +msgid "Initializing default window manager..." +msgstr "" + +#. feedback heading +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_addon_update_sources.rb:51 +msgid "Add-on Product Installation" +msgstr "" + +#. feedback message +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_addon_update_sources.rb:53 +msgid "Reading packages available in the repositories..." +msgstr "" + +#. popup error message +#. %1 represents the the error message details +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_addon_update_sources.rb:109 +msgid "" +"An error occurred while connecting to the server.\n" +"Details: %1\n" +"\n" +"Try again?" +msgstr "" + +#. bnc #542792 +#. Repository name must be generated from product details +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_addon_update_sources.rb:165 +msgid "Updates for %1 %2" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_addon_update_sources.rb:172 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:304 +msgid "Unknown Product" +msgstr "" + +#. strings for "ask for online update"-popup +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_ask_online_update.rb:70 +msgid "Run Update" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_ask_online_update.rb:71 +msgid "Skip Update" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_ask_online_update.rb:73 +msgid "Online Update" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_ask_online_update.rb:74 +msgid "Run Online Update now?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_ask_online_update.rb:76 +msgid "" +"Select whether to run an online update now.\n" +"You may skip this step and run an online update later.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +#. Build dialog +#. ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +#. heading text +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_complex_welcome.rb:65 +msgid "Language, Keyboard and License Agreement" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label +#. combobox +#. TRANSLATORS: Combo box +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_complex_welcome.rb:71 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_release_notes.rb:217 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_release_notes.rb:431 +msgid "&Language" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_complex_welcome.rb:79 +msgid "&Keyboard Layout" +msgstr "" + +#. bnc #359456 +#. TRANSLATORS: check-box +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_complex_welcome.rb:91 +msgid "I &Agree to the License Terms." +msgstr "" + +#. this type of contents will be shown only for initial installation dialog +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_complex_welcome.rb:110 +msgid "K&eyboard Test" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog caption +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_complex_welcome.rb:119 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_complex_welcome.rb:299 +msgid "License Agreement" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: button label +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_complex_welcome.rb:141 +msgid "License &Translations..." +msgstr "" + +#. help text for initial (first time) language screen +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_complex_welcome.rb:153 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Choose the <b>Language</b> and the <b>Keyboard layout</b> to be used during\n" +"installation and for the installed system.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, continued +#. Describes the #ICW_B1 button +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_complex_welcome.rb:161 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"The license must be accepted before the installation continues.\n" +"Use <b>License Translations...</b> to show the license in all available translations.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, continued +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_complex_welcome.rb:168 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Click <b>Next</b> to proceed to the next dialog.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, continued +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_complex_welcome.rb:174 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Nothing will happen to your computer until you confirm\n" +"all your settings in the last installation dialog.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, continued +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_complex_welcome.rb:181 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Select <b>Abort</b> to abort the\n" +"installation process at any time.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. In case of going back, Release Notes button may be shown, retranslate it (bnc#886660) +#. Assure that relnotes have been downloaded first +#. exit codes (see "man curl"): +#. 7 = Failed to connect to host. +#. 28 = Operation timeout. +#. push button +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_complex_welcome.rb:211 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_download_release_notes.rb:126 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:302 +msgid "Re&lease Notes..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_complex_welcome.rb:323 +msgid "You must accept the license to install this product" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: check box, see #ZMD +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_congratulate.rb:107 +msgid "&Disable ZMD Service" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: help text, see #ZMD +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_congratulate.rb:114 +msgid "" +"<p>Select <b>Disable ZMD Service</b> to stop and disable\n" +"the ZMD service during system start.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Check box: start the clone process and store the AutoYaST +#. profile in /root/autoinst.xml +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_congratulate.rb:149 +msgid "&Clone This System for AutoYaST" +msgstr "" + +#. caption for dialog "Congratulation Dialog" +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_congratulate.rb:155 +msgid "Installation Completed" +msgstr "" + +#. congratulation text 1/4 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_congratulate.rb:163 +msgid "<p><b>Congratulations!</b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. congratulation text 2/4 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_congratulate.rb:165 +msgid "" +"<p>The installation of &product; on your machine is complete.\n" +"After clicking <b>Finish</b>, you can log in to the system.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. congratulation text 3/4 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_congratulate.rb:169 +msgid "<p>Visit us at %1.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. congratulation text 4/4 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_congratulate.rb:172 +msgid "<p>Have a lot of fun!<br>Your SUSE Development Team</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help 1/4 for dialog "Congratulation Dialog" +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_congratulate.rb:196 +msgid "<p>Your system is ready for use.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help 2/4 for dialog "Congratulation Dialog" +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_congratulate.rb:198 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Finish</b> will close the YaST installation and take you\n" +"to the login screen.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help 3/4 for dialog "Congratulation Dialog" +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_congratulate.rb:203 +msgid "" +"<p>If you choose the default graphical desktop KDE, you can\n" +"adjust some KDE settings to your hardware. Also notice\n" +"our SUSE Welcome Dialog.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Show this help only in case of KDE as the default windowmanager +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_congratulate.rb:215 +msgid "" +"<p>Use <b>Clone</b> if you want to create an AutoYaST profile.\n" +"AutoYaST is a way to do a complete SUSE Linux installation without user interaction. AutoYaST\n" +"needs a profile to know what the installed system should look like. If this option is\n" +"selected, a profile of the current system is stored in <tt>/root/autoinst.xml</tt>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. #187558 +#. Load Add-On products configured in the fist stage +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_congratulate.rb:310 +msgid "<p>To clone the current system, the <b>%1</b> package must be installed.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_congratulate.rb:313 +msgid "<p>Install it now?</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_congratulate.rb:315 +msgid "autoyast2 package not installed. Cloning disabled." +msgstr "" + +#. OEM image if target disk is defined +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_deploy_image.rb:46 +msgid "The system will reboot now..." +msgstr "" + +#. bnc #395030 +#. Use less memory +#. twice more steps +#. FIXME: 2 minutes +#. own workflow for OEM image deployment +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_deploy_image.rb:106 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_deploy_image.rb:351 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_prepareprogress.rb:110 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_prepareprogress.rb:152 +msgid "Deploying Images..." +msgstr "" + +#. BNC #444209 +#. false == error +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_deploy_image.rb:167 +msgid "" +"Deploying images has failed.\n" +"Aborting the installation...\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: pop-up message +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_deploy_image.rb:199 +msgid "" +"Debugging has been turned on.\n" +"YaST will open a software manager for you to check the current status of packages." +msgstr "" + +#. unknown image +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_deploy_image.rb:375 +msgid "Downloading image at speed %1/s" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_deploy_image.rb:380 +msgid "Downloading image %1 at speed %2/s" +msgstr "" + +#. reset the label +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_deploy_image.rb:442 +msgid "Deploying image..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_deploy_image.rb:445 +msgid "Deploying image %1..." +msgstr "" + +#. FIXME: move blacklist to Storage +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_disk_for_image.rb:84 +msgid "Select the disk to deploy the image to." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_disk_for_image.rb:85 +msgid "All data on the disk will be lost!!!" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_disk_for_image.rb:87 +msgid "&Disk to Use" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_disk_for_image.rb:93 +msgid "Select the disk, which the image will be deployed to. All data on the disk will be lost and the disk will be partitioned as defined in the image." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_disk_for_image.rb:100 +msgid "Hard Disk for Image Deployment" +msgstr "" + +#. popup label +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_disks_activate.rb:60 +msgid "Detecting Available Controllers" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_disks_activate.rb:76 +msgid "Disk Activation" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_disks_activate.rb:86 +msgid "Configure &DASD Disks" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_disks_activate.rb:92 +msgid "Configure &ZFCP Disks" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_disks_activate.rb:98 +msgid "Configure &FCoE Interfaces" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_disks_activate.rb:110 +msgid "Configure &iSCSI Disks" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_disks_activate.rb:111 +msgid "Change Net&work Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog caption +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_doit.rb:56 +msgid "Installation - Warming Up" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog help +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_doit.rb:63 +msgid "<p>Installation is just about to start!</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Set the UI content to show some progress. +#. FIXME: use a better title (reused existing texts because of text freeze) +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog caption +#. bug #302384 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_download_release_notes.rb:134 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_initialization.rb:56 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_installation_options.rb:152 +msgid "Initializing" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog progress message +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_download_release_notes.rb:134 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_initialization.rb:44 +msgid "Initializing the installation..." +msgstr "" + +#. popup message, list of repositores is appended to the text +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_extrasources.rb:142 +msgid "Package updates have been found in these additional repositories:" +msgstr "" + +#. yes/no popup question +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_extrasources.rb:160 +msgid "Start the software manager to check and install the updates?" +msgstr "" + +#. check box +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_extrasources.rb:501 +msgid "Show &package updates" +msgstr "" + +#. Adjust a SlideShow dialog if not configured +#. kilobytes +#. just make it longer than inst_finish, TODO: better value later +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_finish.rb:79 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_prepareprogress.rb:140 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_prepareprogress.rb:158 +msgid "Finishing Basic Installation" +msgstr "" + +#. Might be left from the previous stage +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_finish.rb:105 +msgid "Creating list of finish scripts to call..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_finish.rb:204 +msgid "Copy files to installed system" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_finish.rb:211 +msgid "Save configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_finish.rb:218 +msgid "Save installation settings" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_finish.rb:227 +msgid "Install boot manager" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_finish.rb:234 +msgid "Prepare system for initial boot" +msgstr "" + +#. merge steps from add-on products +#. bnc #438678 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_finish.rb:338 +msgid "Checking stage: %1..." +msgstr "" + +#. a fallback busy message +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_finish.rb:425 +msgid "Calling step %1..." +msgstr "" + +#. use as ' * %1' -> ' * One of the finish steps...' in the SlideShow log +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_finish.rb:445 +msgid " * %1" +msgstr "" + +#. Anything else +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_finish.rb:482 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#. get the latest errors +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_finish.rb:614 +msgid "Installation Error" +msgstr "" + +#. Button to accept a license agreement +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_info.rb:63 +msgid "I &Agree" +msgstr "" + +#. Button to reject a license agreement +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_info.rb:67 +msgid "I Do &Not Agree" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog help +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_initialization.rb:42 +msgid "Installation is being initialized." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog progress message +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_initialization.rb:50 +msgid "Preparing the initial system configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_installation_options.rb:83 +msgid "Installation Options" +msgstr "" + +#. check box +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_installation_options.rb:181 +msgid "&Add Online Repositories Before Installation" +msgstr "" + +#. check box +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_installation_options.rb:193 +msgid "In&clude Add-on Products from Separate Media" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for installation method +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_installation_options.rb:204 +msgid "<p><big><b>Installation Options</b></big></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for installation option +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_installation_options.rb:207 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"To use suggested remote repositories during installation or update, select\n" +"<b>Add Online Repositories Before Installation</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for installation method +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_installation_options.rb:213 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"To install an add-on product from separate media together with &product;, select\n" +"<b>Include Add-on Products from Separate Media</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text: additional help for installation +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_installation_options.rb:216 +msgid "<p>If you need specific hardware drivers for installation, see <i>http://drivers.suse.com</i> site.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Error message +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_license.rb:128 +msgid "Internal error: Missing license to show" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog caption +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_network_check.rb:82 +msgid "Network Setup" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog label +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_network_check.rb:95 +msgid "" +"No network setup has been found.\n" +"It is important if using remote repositories,\n" +"otherwise you can safely skip it.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog label +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_network_check.rb:105 +msgid "Configure your network card now?" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: frame label +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_network_check.rb:109 +msgid "Select" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: radio button +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_network_check.rb:118 +msgid "&Yes, Run the Network Setup" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: radio button +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_network_check.rb:126 +msgid "No, &Skip the Network Setup" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: help text, part 1/2 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_network_check.rb:139 +msgid "" +"<p>The current installation system does not\n" +"have a configured network.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: help text, part 2/2 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_network_check.rb:143 +msgid "" +"<p>A configured network is needed for using remote repositories\n" +"or add-on products. If you do not use remote repositories, skip the configuration.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_network_check.rb:185 +msgid "" +"Network configuration has failed.\n" +"Check the log file %1 for details." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: help text, part 1 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_new_desktop.rb:57 +msgid "" +"<p>At Linux <b>choice</b> is a top priority. <i>openSUSE</i> offers a number \n" +"of different desktop environments. Below you see a list of the 2 major ones \n" +"<b>GNOME</b> and <b>KDE</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: help text, part 3 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_new_desktop.rb:63 +msgid "" +"<p>You may select alternative desktop environments (or one of minimal installation patterns)\n" +"that could fit your needs better using the <b>Other</b> option . Later in the software \n" +"selection or after installation, you can change your selection or add additional desktop \n" +"environments. This screen allows you to set the default.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog caption +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_new_desktop.rb:121 +msgid "Desktop Selection" +msgstr "" + +#. UI wait loop +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_new_desktop.rb:190 +msgid "" +"No desktop type was selected.\n" +"Select the desired desktop environment." +msgstr "" + +#. BNC #449818 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_new_desktop.rb:383 +msgid "Other" +msgstr "" + +#. hide the RN button and set the release notes for SlideShow (bnc#871158) +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_prepareprogress.rb:56 +msgid "Cannot find base product. Release notes will not be shown." +msgstr "" + +#. 1 GB is a good approximation +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_prepareprogress.rb:104 +msgid "Preparing disks..." +msgstr "" + +#. Use 'zero' if image installation is not used +#. BNC #439104 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_prepareprogress.rb:126 +msgid "Installing Packages..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: error message - the module does not provide command line interface +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_release_notes.rb:59 +msgid "There is no user interface available for this module." +msgstr "" + +#. combobox item +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_release_notes.rb:159 +msgid "Language: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. caption for dialog "Release Notes" +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_release_notes.rb:206 +msgid "Release Notes" +msgstr "" + +#. +2 thingies on the right +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_release_notes.rb:248 +msgid "&Product" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for dialog "Release Notes" +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_release_notes.rb:260 +msgid "" +"<p>The <b>release notes</b> for the installed Linux system provide a brief\n" +"summary of new features and changes.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. informative message in RichText widget +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_release_notes.rb:457 +msgid "<p>No release notes have been installed.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: help text +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_scenarios.rb:108 +msgid "" +"<p>Select the scenario that meets your needs best.\n" +"Additional software can be selected later in software proposal.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: pop-up message +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_scenarios.rb:138 +msgid "Choose one scenario, please." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: frame label +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_scenarios.rb:300 +msgid "Choose Scenario" +msgstr "" + +#. This dialog in not interactive +#. always return `back when came from the previous dialog +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:80 +msgid "Analyzing the Computer" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: progress steps in system probing +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:99 +msgid "Probe USB devices" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:100 +msgid "Probing USB devices..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:103 +msgid "Probe FireWire devices" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:104 +msgid "Probing FireWire devices..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:107 +msgid "Probe floppy disk devices" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:108 +msgid "Probing floppy disk devices..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:112 +msgid "Probe hard disk controllers" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:113 +msgid "Probing hard disk controllers..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:116 +msgid "Load kernel modules for hard disk controllers" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:117 +msgid "Loading kernel modules for hard disk controllers..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:120 +msgid "Probe hard disks" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:121 +msgid "Probing hard disks..." +msgstr "" + +#. FATE #302980: Simplified user config during installation +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:128 +msgid "Search for system files" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:129 +msgid "Searching for system files..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:132 +msgid "Initialize software manager" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:133 +msgid "Initializing software manager..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog caption +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:138 +msgid "System Probing" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog help +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:144 +msgid "YaST is probing computer hardware and installed systems now." +msgstr "" + +#. additonal error when HW was not found +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:240 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Check 'drivers.suse.com' if you need specific hardware drivers for installation." +msgstr "" + +#. pop-up error report +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:254 +msgid "" +"No hard disks were found for the installation.\n" +"Please check your hardware!\n" +"%1\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:264 +msgid "" +"No hard disks were found for the installation.\n" +"During an automatic installation, they might be detected later.\n" +"(especially on S/390 or iSCSI systems)\n" +msgstr "" + +#. pop-up error report +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:275 +msgid "" +"No hard disks and no hard disk controllers were\n" +"found for the installation.\n" +"Check your hardware.\n" +"%1\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup message +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:320 +msgid "" +"Failed to initialize the software repositories.\n" +"Aborting the installation." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Table item status (repository) +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:109 +msgid "Removed" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Table item status (repository) +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:113 +msgid "Enabled" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Table item status (repository) +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:117 +msgid "Disabled" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog caption +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog caption +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog caption +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:220 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:617 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:676 +msgid "Previously Used Repositories" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog text, possibly multiline, +#. Please, do not use more than 50 characters per line. +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:226 +msgid "" +"These repositories were found on the system\n" +"you are upgrading:" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Table header item +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:236 +msgid "Current Status" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Table header item +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:238 +msgid "Repository" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Table header item +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:240 +msgid "URL" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Push button +#. menu button +#. menu button +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:247 +#: src/lib/installation/proposal_runner.rb:659 +#: src/lib/installation/proposal_runner.rb:783 +msgid "&Change..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Push button +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:250 +msgid "&Toggle Status" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: help text 1/3 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:256 +msgid "" +"<p>Here you see all software repositories found\n" +"on the system you are upgrading. Enable the ones you want to include in the upgrade process.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: help text 2/3 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:260 +msgid "" +"<p>To enable, remove or disable an URL, click on the\n" +"<b>Toggle Status</b> button or double-click on the respective table item.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: help text 3/3 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:264 +msgid "<p>To change the URL, click on the <b>Change...</b> button.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. one_url already has "id" and some items might be deleted +#. looking to id_to_name is done via the original key +#. TRANSLATORS: Fallback name for a repository +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:286 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:293 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:299 +msgid "Unknown" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: textentry +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:373 +msgid "&Repository URL" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup header +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:587 +msgid "Network is not Configured" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup question +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:589 +msgid "" +"Remote repositories require an Internet connection.\n" +"Configure it?" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Progress text +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:620 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:677 +msgid "Adding and removing repositories..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: help text +#. TRANSLATORS: help text +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:623 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:682 +msgid "<p>Repositories are being added and removed.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:642 +msgid "Remove unused repositories" +msgstr "" + +#. force reloading the libzypp repomanager to notice the removed files +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:646 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:803 +msgid "Removing unused repositories..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:653 +msgid "Add enabled repositories" +msgstr "" + +#. Adds selected repositories as <tt>enabled</tt> +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:656 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:869 +msgid "Adding enabled repositories..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:665 +msgid "Add disabled repositories" +msgstr "" + +#. Adds selected repositories as <tt>disabled</tt> +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:669 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:1026 +msgid "Adding disabled repositories..." +msgstr "" + +#. true - OK, continue +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:843 +msgid "Correct Media Requested" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:845 +msgid "" +"Make sure that media with label %1\n" +"is in the CD/DVD drive.\n" +"\n" +"If you skip it, the repository will not be added.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Adding repositories in a disabled state, then enable them +#. for the system upgrade +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:908 +msgid "" +"Cannot add repository %1\n" +"URL: %2\n" +"\n" +"\n" +"Repository will be added in disabled state." +msgstr "" + +#. bnc #543468, do not check aliases of repositories stored in Installation::destdir +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:945 +msgid "" +"Cannot add enabled repository\n" +"Name: %1\n" +"URL: %2" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: error report +#. %1 is replaced with repo-name, %2 with repo-URL +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:965 +msgid "" +"An error occurred while refreshing repository\n" +"Name: %1\n" +"URL: %2" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: error report +#. %1 is replaced with repo-name, %2 with repo-URL +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:985 +msgid "" +"An error occurred while enabling repository\n" +"Name: %1\n" +"URL: %2\n" +msgstr "" + +#. do not probe! adding as disabled! +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:1066 +msgid "" +"Cannot add disabled repository\n" +"Name: %1\n" +"URL: %2" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_welcome.rb:68 +msgid "Welcome" +msgstr "" + +#. welcome text 1/4 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_welcome.rb:71 +msgid "<p><b>Welcome!</b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. welcome text 2/4 +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_welcome.rb:73 +msgid "" +"<p>There are a few more steps to take before your system is ready to\n" +"use. YaST will now guide you through some basic configuration. Click\n" +"<b>Next</b> to continue. </p>\n" +" \n" +msgstr "" + +#. help ttext +#: src/lib/installation/clients/inst_welcome.rb:85 +msgid "" +"<p>Click <b>Next</b> to perform the\n" +"basic configuration of the system.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: error message +#: src/lib/installation/clients/installation.rb:83 +msgid "No workflow defined for this kind of installation." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step title +#: src/lib/installation/clients/installation_settings_finish.rb:60 +msgid "Writing automatic configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step title +#: src/lib/installation/clients/kernel_finish.rb:63 +msgid "Updating kernel module dependencies..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step title +#: src/lib/installation/clients/ldconfig_finish.rb:60 +msgid "Setting up linker cache..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step title +#: src/lib/installation/clients/network_finish.rb:68 +msgid "Saving network configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step title +#: src/lib/installation/clients/pre_umount_finish.rb:65 +msgid "Checking the installed system..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step title +#: src/lib/installation/clients/proxy_finish.rb:62 +msgid "Saving proxy configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step title +#: src/lib/installation/clients/save_config_finish.rb:134 +msgid "Saving time zone..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step title +#: src/lib/installation/clients/save_config_finish.rb:143 +msgid "Saving language..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step title +#: src/lib/installation/clients/save_config_finish.rb:148 +msgid "Saving console configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step title +#: src/lib/installation/clients/save_config_finish.rb:167 +msgid "Saving keyboard configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step title +#: src/lib/installation/clients/save_config_finish.rb:172 +msgid "Saving product information..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step title +#: src/lib/installation/clients/save_config_finish.rb:177 +msgid "Saving automatic installation settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step title +#: src/lib/installation/clients/save_config_finish.rb:183 +msgid "Saving security settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step title +#: src/lib/installation/clients/save_hw_status_finish.rb:66 +msgid "Saving hardware configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step title +#: src/lib/installation/clients/ssh_settings_finish.rb:64 +msgid "Copying SSH settings to installed system..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step title +#: src/lib/installation/clients/switch_scr_finish.rb:65 +msgid "Moving to installed system..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step title +#: src/lib/installation/clients/umount_finish.rb:71 +msgid "Unmounting all mounted devices..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step title +#: src/lib/installation/clients/x11_finish.rb:65 +msgid "Copying X Window System configuration into system..." +msgstr "" + +#. call command +#: src/lib/installation/clients/yast_inf_finish.rb:108 +msgid "" +"\n" +"**************************************************************\n" +"\n" +"Loading installed kernel using kexec.\n" +"\n" +"Trying to load installed kernel via kexec instead of rebooting\n" +"Please, wait.\n" +"\n" +"**************************************************************\n" +"\t\t" +msgstr "" + +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. Copyright (c) 2006-2015 Novell, Inc. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under +#. the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as published by the +#. Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +#. ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS +#. FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with +#. this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, you may find +#. current contact information at www.novell.com. +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#: src/lib/installation/copy_logs_finish.rb:42 +msgid "Copying log files to installed system..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step title +#: src/lib/installation/prep_shrink.rb:34 +msgid "Shrinking PREP partition..." +msgstr "" + +#. question in a popup box +#: src/lib/installation/proposal_runner.rb:207 +msgid "Really reset everything to default values?" +msgstr "" + +#. explain consequences of a decision +#: src/lib/installation/proposal_runner.rb:209 +msgid "You will lose all changes." +msgstr "" + +#. while input loop +#: src/lib/installation/proposal_runner.rb:251 +msgid "Location of Stored Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. force write, so it always write profile even if user do not want +#. to store profile after installation +#: src/lib/installation/proposal_runner.rb:257 +msgid "Failed to store configuration. Details can be found in log." +msgstr "" + +#. message show when user has disabled the configuration +#: src/lib/installation/proposal_runner.rb:268 +msgid "Skipping configuration upon user request" +msgstr "" + +#. error message is a popup +#: src/lib/installation/proposal_runner.rb:288 +msgid "" +"The proposal contains an error that must be\n" +"resolved before continuing.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. busy message +#: src/lib/installation/proposal_runner.rb:394 +msgid "Adapting the proposal to the current settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. busy message; +#. Initial contents of proposal subwindow while proposals are calculated +#: src/lib/installation/proposal_runner.rb:398 +#: src/lib/installation/proposal_runner.rb:687 +msgid "Analyzing your system..." +msgstr "" + +#. fallback proposal, means usually an internal error +#: src/lib/installation/proposal_runner.rb:500 +msgid "ERROR: No proposal" +msgstr "" + +#. Submodules handle their own error reporting +#. text for a message box +#: src/lib/installation/proposal_runner.rb:539 +msgid "" +"Configuration saved.\n" +"There were errors." +msgstr "" + +#. Check box: Skip all the configurations in this dialog - +#. do this later manually or not at all +#. Translators: About 40 characters max, +#. use newlines for longer translations. +#. radio button +#: src/lib/installation/proposal_runner.rb:634 +msgid "&Skip Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#: src/lib/installation/proposal_runner.rb:643 +msgid "&Use Following Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. menu button +#: src/lib/installation/proposal_runner.rb:667 +#: src/lib/installation/proposal_runner.rb:778 +msgid "&Export Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Help message between headline and installation proposal / settings summary. +#. May contain newlines, but don't make it very much longer than the original. +#: src/lib/installation/proposal_runner.rb:713 +msgid "Click a headline to make changes or use the \"Change...\" menu below." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/proposal_runner.rb:717 +msgid "Click a headline to make changes." +msgstr "" + +#. menu button item +#: src/lib/installation/proposal_runner.rb:777 +msgid "&Reset to defaults" +msgstr "" + +#. FATE #120373 +#: src/lib/installation/proposal_runner.rb:800 +msgid "&Update" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/installation/proposal_runner.rb:800 +msgid "&Install" +msgstr "" + +#. @return [String] translated headline +#: src/lib/installation/proposal_store.rb:57 +msgid "Installation Overview" +msgstr "" + +#. General part of the help text for all types of proposals +#: src/lib/installation/proposal_store.rb:77 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Change the values by clicking on the respective headline\n" +"or by using the <b>Change...</b> menu.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Help text for installation proposal, continued +#: src/lib/installation/proposal_store.rb:85 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Your hard disk has not been modified yet. You can still safely abort.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Help text for installation proposal +#. General part ("You can change values...") is added as the next paragraph. +#: src/lib/installation/proposal_store.rb:417 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Select <b>Install</b> to perform a new installation with the values displayed.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. so update +#. Help text for update proposal +#. General part ("You can change values...") is added as the next paragraph. +#: src/lib/installation/proposal_store.rb:425 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Select <b>Update</b> to perform an update with the values displayed.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Help text for network configuration proposal +#. General part ("You can change values...") is added as the next paragraph. +#: src/lib/installation/proposal_store.rb:434 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Put the network settings into effect by pressing <b>Next</b>.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Help text for service configuration proposal +#. General part ("You can change values...") is added as the next paragraph. +#: src/lib/installation/proposal_store.rb:442 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Put the service settings into effect by pressing <b>Next</b>.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Help text for hardware configuration proposal +#. General part ("You can change values...") is added as the next paragraph. +#: src/lib/installation/proposal_store.rb:450 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Put the hardware settings into effect by pressing <b>Next</b>.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Proposal in uml module +#: src/lib/installation/proposal_store.rb:457 +msgid "<P><B>UML Installation Proposal</B></P>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/lib/installation/proposal_store.rb:459 +msgid "" +"<P>UML (User Mode Linux) installation allows you to start independent\n" +"Linux virtual machines in the host system.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. Generic help text for other proposals (not basic installation or +#. hardhware configuration. +#. General part ("You can change values...") is added as the next paragraph. +#: src/lib/installation/proposal_store.rb:473 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"To use the settings as displayed, press <b>Next</b>.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Text to display +#. +#. @return String +#: src/lib/installation/remote_finish_client.rb:67 +msgid "Enabling remote administration..." +msgstr "" + +#. Writes configuration +#. +#. It creates a snapshot when no second stage is required and +#. Snapper is configured. +#. +#. @return [TrueClass,FalseClass] True if snapshot was created; +#. otherwise it returns false. +#: src/lib/installation/snapshots_finish.rb:40 +msgid "Creating root filesystem snapshot..." +msgstr "" + +#. checking whether images are supported +#. BNC #409927 +#. Checking files for signatures +#: src/modules/ImageInstallation.rb:840 +msgid "Failed to read information about installation images" +msgstr "" + +#. count megabytes +#: src/modules/ImageInstallation.rb:1196 +msgid "Deploying..." +msgstr "" + +#. Function stores all new/requested states of all handled/supported types. +#. +#. @see #all_supported_types +#. @see #objects_state +#: src/modules/ImageInstallation.rb:1219 +msgid "Storing user preferences..." +msgstr "" + +#. Restores packages statuses from 'objects_state': Selects packages for removal, installation, upgrade. +#. +#. @return [Boolean] if successful +#: src/modules/ImageInstallation.rb:1351 +msgid "Restoring user preferences..." +msgstr "" + +#. Error message +#: src/modules/ImageInstallation.rb:1448 +msgid "" +"Installation was unable to solve package dependencies automatically.\n" +"Software manager will be opened for you to solve them manually." +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/instserver.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/instserver.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/instserver.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,632 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. repository overview - %1 is product name (e.g. "SUSE LINUX Version 10.0") +#: src/include/instserver/complex.rb:78 +msgid "Label: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. yes/no string displayed in the overview +#: src/include/instserver/complex.rb:87 +msgid "Announce Using SLP: %1" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/complex.rb:88 +msgid "Yes" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/complex.rb:88 +msgid "No" +msgstr "" + +#. Instserver overview dialog caption +#: src/include/instserver/complex.rb:119 +msgid "Installation Server" +msgstr "" + +#. menu item +#: src/include/instserver/complex.rb:122 +msgid "&Server Configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/include/instserver/complex.rb:130 +msgid "Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/complex.rb:130 +msgid "Product" +msgstr "" + +#. CD Popup +#. @param string popup message +#. @param boolean true if ISO +#. @return [Object] +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:49 +msgid "Change Media" +msgstr "" + +#. %1 is the current cd number +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:230 +msgid "Insert CD %1 then press continue." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:235 +msgid "Select ISO image %1 then press continue." +msgstr "" + +#. %2 is the product name and version +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:241 +msgid "Insert CD %1 of %2." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:242 +msgid "Select ISO image %1 of %2." +msgstr "" + +#. popup request, %1 is CD medium name +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:281 +msgid "" +"Insert\n" +"%1" +msgstr "" + +#. popup request, %1 is ISO name +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:310 +msgid "Select %1" +msgstr "" + +#. add-on medium (e.g. service pack) doesn't match configured repository +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:551 +msgid "" +"The medium requires product %1, which is not provided\n" +"by the current repository.\n" +"\n" +"Select the base product medium first." +msgstr "" + +#. else, we create CD1, CD2, etc. (for code10 always) +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:669 +msgid "Copying CD contents to local directory" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:670 +msgid "This may take a while..." +msgstr "" + +#. TODO: report more details (stderr) +#. rename the directory +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:727 src/modules/Instserver.rb:1341 +msgid "Error while moving repository content." +msgstr "" + +#. Instserver configuration dialog caption +#. Instserver configuration dialog caption +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:949 +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:1162 +msgid "Repository Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Instserver configure1 dialog contents +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:965 +msgid "Read &CD or DVD Medium" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:971 +msgid "Data &Source" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:979 +msgid "Use &ISO Images" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:988 +msgid "Di&rectory with CD Images:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:991 +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:1371 +msgid "Select &Directory" +msgstr "" + +#. abort? +#. abort? +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:1034 +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:1440 +msgid "Select Directory" +msgstr "" + +#. abort? +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:1051 +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:1215 +msgid "Installation server name missing." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:1066 +msgid "" +"Contents already exist in this directory.\n" +"Not copying CDs." +msgstr "" + +#. for translators: popup question (prefer more shorter lines than few long lines) +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:1094 +msgid "" +"Add an additional product (Service Pack, Additional\n" +"Package CD, etc.) to the repository?" +msgstr "" + +#. Instserver configure1 dialog contents +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:1170 +msgid "Repository &Name:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:1175 +msgid "A&nnounce as Installation Service with SLP" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:1223 +msgid "Invalid repository name." +msgstr "" + +#. an error message - entered repository name already exists +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:1231 +msgid "" +"Repository '%1' already exists,\n" +"enter another name." +msgstr "" + +#. create directory only for a new repository +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:1244 +msgid "" +"Error while creating <tt>repository</tt> directory.\n" +"Verify that the directory \n" +" %1 \n" +"is writable and try again.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. confirm removal of a repository, the action is done immediately and cannot be reverted +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:1263 +msgid "" +"Repository '%1' has been marked to delete.\n" +"When adding a new repository with the same name\n" +"the old content must deleted right now.\n" +"\n" +"Really delete the old content and create it from scratch?" +msgstr "" + +#. Instserver server dialog caption +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:1347 +msgid "Initial Setup -- Initial Setup" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:1363 +msgid "Do Not Configure Any Net&work Services" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:1368 +msgid "Di&rectory to Contain Repositories:" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:1383 +msgid "&Configure as HTTP Repository" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:1391 +msgid "&Configure as FTP Repository" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:1399 +msgid "&Configure as NFS Repository" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:1451 +msgid "Directory path for the installation server missing." +msgstr "" + +#. Instserver configure2 dialog caption +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:1478 +msgid "Installation Server -- NFS" +msgstr "" + +#. Instserver nfs dialog contents +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:1496 +msgid "&Host Wild Card" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:1498 +msgid "&Options" +msgstr "" + +#. store the firewall setting, (activation is in SetupNFS()) +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:1556 +msgid "Error occurred while configuring NFS." +msgstr "" + +#. Instserver configure2 dialog caption +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:1588 +msgid "Installation Server -- FTP" +msgstr "" + +#. Instserver nfs dialog contents +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:1596 +msgid "&FTP Server Root Directory:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:1598 +msgid "&Directory Alias:" +msgstr "" + +#. store the firewall setting, (activation is in SetupFTP()) +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:1655 +msgid "Error occurred while configuring FTP." +msgstr "" + +#. Instserver configure2 dialog caption +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:1675 +msgid "Installation Server -- HTTP" +msgstr "" + +#. Instserver nfs dialog contents +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:1691 +msgid "&Directory Alias" +msgstr "" + +#. store the firewall setting, (activation is in SetupHTTP()) +#: src/include/instserver/dialogs.rb:1748 +msgid "Error creating HTTPD configuration." +msgstr "" + +#. All helps are here +#: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:16 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Network Server Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:19 +msgid "" +"<p>Select one of the server options and specify where all the repositories\n" +"should be hosted on the local system.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:24 +msgid "" +"<p>If you have one of the services already running and want to do the\n" +"server configuration manually, select not to configure \n" +"the services.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:30 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>NFS Server Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:33 +msgid "" +"<p>To complete this configuration, a new entry in the file\n" +"<em>/etc/exports</em> must be added and the NFS server must be \n" +"installed and started.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:39 +msgid "" +"<p>If you need to restrict access to the exported directories to certain \n" +"hosts, add a more restrictive wild card mask. For example, use <em>192.168.1.0/24</em>\n" +"to restrict access to the <em>192.168.1.0</em> subnet.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:45 +msgid "" +"<p>Additionally, set the export options. For more details about the available\n" +"options, see the manual page for <em>exports</em> (man exports(5))\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:50 +msgid "" +"<p>The repository will be available at the following URL:\n" +"<tt>nfs://Host_IP/Repository_Name</tt></p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:53 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>FTP Server Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:56 +msgid "" +"<p>To complete this configuration, an FTP server must be \n" +"installed and started.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:59 +msgid "" +"<p>If the chosen software repository directory is outside\n" +"the FTP server hierarchy, a mount entry is added to <tt>/etc/fstab</tt>.\n" +"This makes the software repository directory available under the\n" +"FTP server (using the <tt>--bind</tt> option of <tt>mount</tt>).\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:66 +msgid "" +"<p>The installation server will be available to clients using the following URL:\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:69 +msgid "" +"<p><tt>ftp://<Host IP>/<Repository Name></tt>\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:70 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>HTTP Server Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:73 +msgid "" +"<p>To complete this configuration, an HTTP server must be \n" +"installed and started. The alias will be used to reference the installation\n" +"server root directory.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:78 +msgid "" +"<p>Select a short and easy to remember alias. For example, if you select\n" +"<em>SUSE</em> as the alias, the repositories will be available as shown below:</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:81 +msgid "" +"<p><tt>http://<Host IP>/SUSE/<Repository Name></tt>\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:84 src/include/instserver/helps.rb:94 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Configuration of the Repository</b><br>\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:85 +msgid "" +"<p>The repository name is used to create a directory under which all product\n" +"CDs are copied and managed. The repository is accessed using the\n" +"configured protocol (NFS, FTP, or HTTP).</p> \n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:90 +msgid "<p><b><big>SLP Support</big></b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:91 +msgid "" +"<p>SLP (Service Location Protocol) facilitates finding an installation server. \n" +"If checked, the repository will be announced on the network using SLP.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:95 +msgid "" +"<p>Select a source drive from the list, insert the first medium of a base product, and press\n" +"<b>Next</b> to copy the content into the local repository.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:98 +msgid "" +"<p>When the base media are copied to the local repository, you can add additional\n" +"CDs to the repository (for example, Service Pack CDs or any add-on CDs).</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:101 +msgid "<p><b><big>ISO Images</big></b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:102 +msgid "" +"<p>ISO images can be used instead of CD or DVD media. If you press <b>Next</b>, you can\n" +"select ISO image files.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:106 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Initializing Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Please wait...<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:110 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Initialization:</big></b><br>\n" +"Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing <b>Abort</b> now.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:114 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Saving Repository Configuration</b><br>\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:118 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Saving:</big></b><br>\n" +"Abort the save procedure by pressing <b>Abort</b>.\n" +"An additional dialog informs whether it is safe to do so.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Summary dialog help 1/3 +#: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:125 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Repository Configuration</b><br>\n" +"Configure the installation server here.<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Summary dialog help 2/3 +#: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:129 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Adding a Repository:</b><br>\n" +"Unconfigured directories are detected in the repository directory and then made \n" +"available for configuration.\n" +"To add a repository, select it from the list of unconfigured repositories and press <b>Configure</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Summary dialog help 3/3 +#: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:136 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Editing or Deleting:</big></b><br>\n" +"If you press <b>Edit</b>, an additional dialog in which to change\n" +"the configuration opens.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Ovreview dialog help 1/3 +#: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:142 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Repositories Overview</b><br>\n" +"Get an overview of the configured repositories and edit their \n" +"configuration if necessary.<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Ovreview dialog help 2/3 +#: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:148 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Adding a Repository:</b><br>\n" +"Press <b>Add</b> to configure a repository.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Ovreview dialog help 3/3 +#: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:152 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Editing or Deleting:</big></b><br>\n" +"Choose the repository you want to change or remove and\n" +"press <b>Edit</b> or <b>Delete</b>, respectively.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Read service data using _auto +#: src/modules/Instserver.rb:306 +msgid "" +"The FTP installation server requires an FTP server package. The vsftpd package\n" +"will now be installed.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write Apache config +#. @param string state : Yes/No +#. @return [void] +#: src/modules/Instserver.rb:450 +msgid "Unable to write /etc/sysconfig/apache2" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Instserver.rb:458 +msgid "" +"The HTTP installation server requires an HTTP server package. The apache2 package\n" +"will now be installed." +msgstr "" + +#. Setup NFS Server +#. @param string directory +#. @param [String] options +#. @return [Boolean] +#: src/modules/Instserver.rb:569 +msgid "" +"Directory is already exported via NFS.\n" +"Leave NFS exports unmodified?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Instserver read dialog caption +#: src/modules/Instserver.rb:1155 +msgid "Initializing Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1/2 +#: src/modules/Instserver.rb:1165 +msgid "Read configuration file" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 2/2 +#: src/modules/Instserver.rb:1167 +msgid "Search for a new repository" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 1/2 +#: src/modules/Instserver.rb:1171 +msgid "Reading configuration file..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 2/2 +#: src/modules/Instserver.rb:1173 +msgid "Searching for a new repository..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress finished +#. Progress finished +#: src/modules/Instserver.rb:1175 src/modules/Instserver.rb:1260 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Error message +#: src/modules/Instserver.rb:1188 +msgid "Cannot read current settings." +msgstr "" + +#. Instserver read dialog caption +#: src/modules/Instserver.rb:1240 +msgid "Saving Installation Server Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1/2 +#: src/modules/Instserver.rb:1250 +msgid "Write the settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 2/2 +#: src/modules/Instserver.rb:1252 +msgid "Run SuSEconfig" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 1/2 +#: src/modules/Instserver.rb:1256 +msgid "Writing the settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 2/2 +#: src/modules/Instserver.rb:1258 +msgid "Running SuSEconfig..." +msgstr "" + +#. Error message +#: src/modules/Instserver.rb:1274 +msgid "Cannot write settings." +msgstr "" + +#. Configuration summary text for autoyast +#: src/modules/Instserver.rb:1441 +msgid "Configured Repositories" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/iplb.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/iplb.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/iplb.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,697 @@ +# Pashto translations for opensuse-i package. +# Copyright (C) 2014 SuSE Linux Products GmbH, Nuernberg +# This file is distributed under the same license as the opensuse-i package. +# Automatically generated, 2014. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: opensuse-i 18n\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-05-19 09:34+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n" +"Language-Team: none\n" +"Language: ps\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#. Command line help text for the Xiplb module +#: src/clients/iplb.rb:54 +msgid "Configuration of IPLB" +msgstr "" + +#. Rich text title for Iplb in proposals +#: src/clients/iplb_proposal.rb:81 +msgid "Iplb" +msgstr "" + +#. Menu title for Iplb in proposals +#: src/clients/iplb_proposal.rb:83 +msgid "&Iplb" +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. Copyright (c) 2006 Novell, Inc. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under +#. the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as published by the +#. Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +#. ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS +#. FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with +#. this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, you may find +#. current contact information at www.novell.com. +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. File: clients/iplb.ycp +#. Package: Configuration of iplb +#. Summary: Main file +#. Authors: Cong Meng +#. +#. $Id: iplb.ycp 27914 2006-02-13 14:32:08Z locilka $ +#. +#. Main file for iplb configuration. Uses all other files. +#: src/include/iplb/common.rb:44 +msgid "Global Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/common.rb:45 +msgid "Virtual Servers Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Iplb summary dialog caption +#. Iplb configure1 dialog caption +#. Iplb configure2 dialog caption +#. Initialization dialog caption +#: src/include/iplb/complex.rb:83 src/include/iplb/dialogs.rb:46 +#: src/include/iplb/dialogs.rb:85 src/include/iplb/wizards.rb:140 +msgid "IPLB Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Iplb overview dialog caption +#: src/include/iplb/complex.rb:142 +msgid "IPLB Overview" +msgstr "" + +#. Iplb configure1 dialog contents +#: src/include/iplb/dialogs.rb:49 +msgid "First part of configuration of IPLB" +msgstr "" + +#. Iplb configure2 dialog contents +#: src/include/iplb/dialogs.rb:88 +msgid "Second part of configuration of IPLB" +msgstr "" + +#. ids of widget of global dialog +#: src/include/iplb/global_conf.rb:61 +msgid "yes" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/global_conf.rb:61 +msgid "no" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/global_conf.rb:68 src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:226 +msgid "&Global Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/global_conf.rb:69 src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:227 +msgid "&Virtual Server Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/global_conf.rb:75 +msgid "Check Interval" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/global_conf.rb:76 src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:205 +msgid "Check Timeout" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/global_conf.rb:78 src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:214 +msgid "Failure Count" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/global_conf.rb:79 src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:208 +msgid "Negotiate Timeout" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/global_conf.rb:85 src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:167 +msgid "Fallback" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/global_conf.rb:86 +msgid "Callback" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/global_conf.rb:87 +msgid "Execute" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/global_conf.rb:91 src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:186 +msgid "Email Alert" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/global_conf.rb:92 src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:187 +msgid "Email Alert Freq" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/global_conf.rb:93 src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:190 +msgid "Email Alert Status" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/global_conf.rb:100 +msgid "Auto Reload" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/global_conf.rb:101 src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:216 +msgid "Quiescent" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/global_conf.rb:102 +msgid "Fork" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/global_conf.rb:103 +msgid "Supervised" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/global_conf.rb:106 +msgid "Log File" +msgstr "" + +#. All helps are here +#: src/include/iplb/helps.rb:35 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p><b><big>check interval</big> =</b> <i>n</i>\n" +"</p><p>Defines the number of second between server checks.\n" +"</p><p>Default: 10 seconds\n" +"\n" +"</p><p><b><big>check timeout</big> =</b> <i>n</i>\n" +"</p><p>Timeout in seconds for connect, external and ping checks. If the timeout is exceeded then the real server is declared dead.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" +"</p><p>If undefined then the value of negotiatetimeout is used. negotiatetimeout is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-virtual setting.\n" +"</p><p>If both checktimeout and negotiatetimeout are unset, the default is used.\n" +"</p><p>Default: 5 seconds\n" +"\n" +"</p><p><b><big>failure count</big> =</b> <i>n</i>\n" +"</p><p>The number of consecutive times a failure will have to be reported by a check before the realserver is considered to have failed. A value of 1 will have the realserver considered failed on the first failure. A successful check will reset the failure counter to 0.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" +"</p><p>Default: 1\n" +"\n" +"</p><p><b><big>negotiate timeout</big> =</b> <i>n</i>\n" +"</p><p>Timeout in seconds for negotiate checks.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" +"</p><p>If undefined then the value of connecttimeout is used. connecttimeout is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-virtual setting.\n" +"</p><p>If both negotiatetimeout and connecttimeout are unset, the default is used.\n" +"</p><p>Default: 30 seconds\n" +"\n" +"</p><p><b><big>fallback</big> =</b> <i>ip_address|hostname[:portnumber|sercvicename]</i> [<b>gate</b>|<b>masq</b>|<b>ipip</b>]\n" +"</p><p>the server onto which a webservice is redirected if all real servers are down. Typically this would be 127.0.0.1 with an emergency page.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" +"\n" +"</p><p><b><big>log file</big> = \"</b><i>/path/to/logfile</i><b>\"</b>|syslog_facility\n" +"</p><p>An alternative logfile might be specified with this directive. If the logfile does not have a leading '/', it is assumed to be a <b>syslog</a></b>(3) facility name.\n" +"</p><p>Default: log directly to the file <i>/var/log/ldirectord.log</i>.\n" +"\n" +"</p><p><b><big>email alert</big> = \"</b><i>emailaddress</i><b>\"</b>\n" +"</p><p>A valid email address for sending alerts about the changed connection status to any real server defined in the virtual service. This option requires perl\n" +"module MailTools to be installed. Automatically tries to send email using any of the built-in methods. See perldoc Mail::Mailer for more info on methods.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" +"\n" +"</p><p><b><big>email alert freq</big> =</b> <i>n</i>\n" +"</p><p>Delay in seconds between repeating email alerts while any given real server in the virtual service remains inaccessible. A setting of zero seconds will\n" +"inhibit the repeating alerts. The email timing accuracy of this setting is dependent on the number of seconds defined in the checkinterval configuration\n" +"option.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" +"</p><p>Default: 0\n" +"\n" +"</p><p><b><big>email alert status</big> = all</b>|<b>none</b>|<b>starting</b>|<b>running</b>|<b>stopping</b>|<b>reloading</b>,...\n" +"</p><p>Comma delimited list of server states in which email alerts should be sent. <b>all</b> is a short-hand for\n" +"\"<b>starting</b>,<b>running</b>,<b>stopping</b>,<b>reloading</b>\". If <b>none</b> is specified, no other option may be specified, otherwise options are ORed\n" +"with each other.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" +"</p><p>Default: all\n" +"\n" +"</p><p><b><big>callback</big> = \"</b><i>/path/to/callback</i><b>\"</b>\n" +"</p><p>If this directive is defined, <b>ldirectord</b> automatically calls the executable <i>/path/to/callback</i> after the configuration file has changed on\n" +"disk. This is useful to update the configuration file through <b>scp</b> on the other heartbeated host. The first argument to the callback is the name of the\n" +"configuration.\n" +"</p><p>This directive might also be used to restart <b>ldirectord</b> automatically after the configuration file changed on disk. However, if <b>autoreload</b> is\n" +"set to yes, the configuration is reloaded anyway.\n" +"\n" +"</p><p><b><big>execute</big> = \"</b><i>configuration</i><b>\"</b>\n" +"</p><p>Use this directive to start an instance of ldirectord for the named <i>configuration</i>.\n" +"\n" +"</p><p><b><big>auto reload</big> = yes</b>|<b>no</b>\n" +"</p><p>Defines if <ldirectord> should continuously check the configuration file for modification. If this is set to 'yes' and the configuration file changed\n" +"on disk and its modification time (mtime) is newer than the previous version, the configuration is automatically reloaded.\n" +"</p><p>Default: no\n" +"\n" +"</p><p><b><big>quiescent</big> = yes</b>|<b>no</b>\n" +"</p><p>If <i>yes</i>, then when real or failback servers are determined to be down, they are not actually removed from the kernel's <small>LVS</small> table.\n" +"Rather, their weight is set to zero which means that no new connections will be accepted.\n" +"</p><p>This has the side effect, that if the real server has persistent connections, new connections from any existing clients will continue to be routed to the\n" +"real server, until the persistant timeout can expire. See ipvsadm for more information on persistant connections.\n" +"</p><p>This side-effect can be avoided by running the following:\n" +"</p><p>echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/vs/expire_quiescent_template\n" +"</p><p>If the proc file isn't present this probably means that the kernel doesn't have lvs support, <small>LVS</small> support isn't loaded, or the kernel is too\n" +"old to have the proc file. Running ipvsadm as root should load <small>LVS</small> into the kernel if it is possible.\n" +"</p><p>If <i>no</i>, then the real or failback servers will be removed from the kernel's <small>LVS</small> table. The default is <i>yes</i>.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" +"</p><p>Default: <i>yes</i>\n" +"\n" +"</p><p><b><big>fork</big> = yes</b>|<b>no</b>\n" +"</p><p>If <i>yes</i>, then ldirectord will spawn a child proccess for every virtual server, and run checks against the real servers from them. This will increase\n" +"response times to changes in real server status in configurations with many virtual servers. This may also use less memory then running many seperate instances\n" +"of ldirectord. Child processes will be automaticly restarted if they die.\n" +"</p><p>Default: <i>no</i>\n" +"\n" +"</p><p><b><big>supervised</big> = yes</b>|<b>no</b>\n" +"</p><p>If <i>yes</i>, then ldirectord does not go into background mode. All log-messages are redirected to stdout instead of a logfile. This is useful to run\n" +"<b>ldirectord</b> supervised from daemontools. See http://untroubled.org/rpms/daemontools/\">http://untroubled.org/rpms/daemontools/</a> or http://cr.yp.to/daemontools.html\">http://cr.yp.to/daemontools.html</a> for details.\n" +"</p><p>Default: <i>no</i>\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/helps.rb:127 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p><b><big>virtual server</big> =</b> <i>(ip_address|hostname:portnumber|servicename)|firewall-mark</i>\n" +"</p><p>Defines a virtual service by IP-address (or hostname) and port (or servicename) or firewall-mark. A firewall-mark is an integer greater than zero. The\n" +"configuration of marking packets is controled using the <tt>\"-m\"</tt> option to <b>ipchains</b>(8). All real services and flags for a virtual service\n" +"must follow this line immediately and be indented.\n" +"\n" +"\n" +"</p><p><b><big>real servers</big> =</b> <i>ip_address|hostname[->ip_address|hostname][:portnumber|servicename</i>]\n" +"<b>gate</b>|<b>masq</b>|<b>ipip</b> [<i>weight</i>] [<b>\"</b><i>request</i><b>\", \"</b><i>receive</i><b>\"</b>]\n" +"</p><p>Defines a real service by IP-address (or hostname) and port (or servicename). If the port is omitted then a 0 will be used, this is intended primarily for\n" +"fwmark services where the port for real servers is ignored. Optionally a range of <small>IP</small> addresses (or two hostnames) may be given, in which case\n" +"each <small>IP</small> address in the range will be treated as a real server using the given port. The second argument defines the forwarding method, must be\n" +"<b>gate</b>, <b>ipip</b> or <b>masq</b>. The thrid argument is optional and defines the weight for that real server. If omitted then a weight of 1 will be\n" +"used. The last two arguments are also optional. They define a request-receive pair to be used to check if a server is alive. They override the request-receive\n" +"pair in the virtual server section. These two strings must be quoted. If the request string starts with http://... the IP-address and port of the real\n" +"server is overridden, otherwise the IP-address and port of the real server is used.\n" +"</p><p>For <small>TCP</small> and <small>UDP</small> (non fwmark) virtual services, unless the forwarding method is masq and the <small>IP</small> address of a\n" +"real server is non-local (not present on a interface on the host running ldirectord) then the port of the real server will be set to that of its virtual\n" +"service. That is, port-mapping is only available to if the real server is another machine and the forwarding method is masq. This is due to the way that the\n" +"underlying <small>LVS</small> code in the kernel functions.\n" +"</p><p>More than one of these entries may be inside a virtual section. The checktimeout, negotiatetimeout, failurecount, fallback, emailalert, emailalertfreq and\n" +"quiescent options listed above may also appear inside a virtual section, in which case the global setting is overridden.\n" +"\n" +"\n" +"</p><p><b><big>check type</big> = connect</b>|<b>external</b>|<b>negotiate</b>|<b>off</b>|<b>on</b>|<b>ping</b>|<b>checktimeout</b><i>N</i>\n" +"</p><p>Type of check to perform. Negotiate sends a request and matches a receive string. Connect only attemts to make a <small>TCP/IP</small> connection, thus the\n" +"request and receive strings may be omitted. If checktype is a number then negotiate and connect is combined so that after each N connect attempts one negotiate\n" +"attempt is performed. This is useful to check often if a service answers and in much longer intervalls a negotiating check is done. Ping means that\n" +"<small>ICMP</small> ping will be used to test the availability of real servers. Ping is also used as the connect check for <small>UDP</small> services. Off\n" +"means no checking will take place and no real or fallback servers will be activated. On means no checking will take place and real servers will always be\n" +"activated. Default is <i>negotiate</i>.\n" +"\n" +"\n" +"</p><p><b><big>service</big> = dns</b>|<b>ftp</b>|<b>http</b>|<b>https</b>|<b>imap</b>|<b>imaps</b>|<b>ldap</b>|<b>mysql</b>|<b>nntp</b>|<b>none</b>|<b>oracle</b>|<b>pgsql</b>|<b>pop</b>|<b>pops</b>|<b>radius</b>|<b>simpletcp</b>|<b>sip</b>|<b>smtp</b>\n" +"</p><p>The type of service to monitor when using checktype=negotiate. None denotes a service that will not be monitored.\n" +"</p><p>simpletcp sends the <b>request</b> string to the server and tests it against the <b>receive</b> regexp. The other types of checks connect to the server\n" +"using the specified protocol. Please see the <b>request</b> and <b>receive</b> sections for protocol specific information.\n" +"</p><p>Default:\n" +"</p>

\n" +"<dt>* Virtual server port is 21: ftp\n" +"</dt><dt>* Virtual server port is 25: smtp\n" +"</dt><dt>* Virtual server port is 53: dns\n" +"</dt><dt>* Virtual server port is 80: http\n" +"</dt><dt>* Virtual server port is 110: pop\n" +"</dt><dt>* Virtual server port is 119: nntp\n" +"</dt><dt>* Virtual server port is 143: imap\n" +"</dt><dt>* Virtual server port is 389: ldap\n" +"</dt><dt>* Virtual server port is 443: https\n" +"</dt><dt>* Virtual server port is 993: imaps\n" +"</dt><dt>* Virtual server port is 995: pops\n" +"</dt><dt>* Virtual server port is 1521: oracle\n" +"</dt><dt>* Virtual server port is 1812: radius\n" +"</dt><dt>* Virtual server port is 3306: mysql\n" +"</dt><dt>* Virtual server port is 5432: pgsql\n" +"</dt><dt>* Virtual server port is 5060: sip\n" +"</dt><dt>* Otherwise: none\n" +"\n" +"\n" +"</dt><dt><b><big>check command</big> = \"</b><i>path to script</i><b>\"</b>\n" +"<p>This setting is used if checktype is external and is the command to be run to check the status of a real server. It should exit with status 0 if everything\n" +"is ok, or non-zero otherwise.\n" +"</p><p>Four parameters are passed to the script:\n" +"</p></dt><dt>* virtual server ip/firewall mark\n" +"</dt><dt>* virtual server port\n" +"</dt><dt>* real server ip\n" +"</dt><dt>* real server port\n" +"</dt><dt>Default: /bin/true\n" +"\n" +"\n" +"<p><b><big>check port</big> =</b> <i>n</i>\n" +"</p><p>Number of port to monitor. Sometimes check port differs from service port.\n" +"</p><p>Default: port specified for each real server\n" +"\n" +"\n" +"</p><p><b><big>request</big> = \"</b><i>uri to requested object</i><b>\"</b>\n" +"</p><p>This object will be requested each checkinterval seconds on each real server. The string must be inside quotes. Note that this string may be overridden by\n" +"an optional per real-server based request-string.\n" +"</p><p>For a <small>DNS</small> check this should the name of an A record, or the address of a <small>PTR</small> record to look up.\n" +"</p><p>For a MySQL, Oracle or PostgeSQL check, this should be an <small>SQL</small> query. The data returned is not checked, only that the answer is one or more\n" +"rows. This is a required setting.\n" +"</p><p>For a simpletcp check, this string is sent verbatim except any occurances of \n" +" are replaced with a new line character.\n" +"\n" +"\n" +"</p><p><b><big>receive</big> = \"</b><i>regexp to compare</i><b>\"</b>\n" +"</p><p>If the requested result contains this <i>regexp to compare</i>, the real server is declared alive. The regexp must be inside quotes. Keep in mind that\n" +"regexps are not plain strings and that you need to escape the special characters if they should as literals. Note that this regexp may be overridden by an\n" +"optional per real-server based receive regexp.\n" +"</p><p>For a <small>DNS</small> check this should be any one the A record's addresses or any one of the <small>PTR</small> record's names.\n" +"</p><p>For a MySQL check, the receive setting is not used.\n" +"\n" +"\n" +"</p><p><b><big>http method</big> = <small>GET</small></b> | <b><small>HEAD</small></b>\n" +"</p><p>Sets the <small>HTTP</small> method which should be used to fetch the <small>URI</small> specified in the request-string. <small>GET</small> is the\n" +"method used by default if the parameter is not set. If <small>HEAD</small> is used, the receive-string should be unset.\n" +"</p><p>Default: <small>GET</small>\n" +"\n" +"\n" +"</p><p><b><big>virtual host</big> = \"</b><i>hostname</i><b>\"</b>\n" +"</p><p>Used when using a negotiate check with <small>HTTP</small> or <small>HTTPS</small> . Sets the host header used in the <small>HTTP</small> request. In the\n" +"case of <small>HTTPS</small> this generally needs to match the common name of the <small>SSL</small> certificate. If not set then the host header will be\n" +"derived from the request url for the real server if present. As a last resort the <small>IP</small> address of the real server will be used.\n" +"\n" +"\n" +"</p><p><b><big>login</big> = \"</b><i>username</i><b>\"</b>\n" +"</p><p>For <small>FTP</small> , <small>IMAP</small> , <small>LDAP</small> , MySQL, Oracle, <small>POP</small> and PostgreSQL, the username used to log in.\n" +"</p><p>For Radius the passwd is used for the attribute User-Name.\n" +"</p><p>For <small>SIP</small> , the username is used as both the to and from address for an <small>OPTIONS</small> query.\n" +"</p><p>Default:\n" +"</p></dt><dt>* <small>FTP:</small> Anonymous\n" +"</dt><dt>* MySQL Oracle, and PostgreSQL: Must be specified in the configuration\n" +"</dt><dt>* <small>SIP:</small> ldirectord@<hostname>, hostname is derived as per the passwd option below.\n" +"</dt><dt>* Otherwise: empty string, which denotes that case authentication will not be attempted.\n" +"\n" +"\n" +"</dt><dt><b><big>password</big> = \"</b><i>password</i><b>\"</b>\n" +"<p>Password to use to login to <small>FTP</small> , <small>IMAP</small> , <small>LDAP</small> , MySQL, Oracle, <small>POP</small> , PostgreSQL and\n" +"<small>SIP</small> servers.\n" +"</p><p>For Radius the passwd is used for the attribute User-Password.\n" +"</p><p>Default:\n" +"</p></dt><dt>* <small>FTP:</small> ldirectord@<hostname>, where hostname is the environment variable <small>HOSTNAME</small> evaluated at run time, or sourced\n" +"from uname if unset.\n" +"</dt><dt>* Otherwise: empty string. In the case of <small>LDAP</small> , MySQL, Oracle, and PostgreSQL this means that authentication will not be performed.\n" +"\n" +"\n" +"</dt><dt><b><big>database name</big> = \"</b><i>databasename</i><b>\"</b>\n" +"<p>Database to use for MySQL, Oracle and PostgreSQL servers, this is the database that the query (set by <b>receive</b> above) will be performed against. This\n" +"is a required setting.\n" +"\n" +"\n" +"</p><p><b><big>radius secret</big> = \"</b><i>radiussecret</i><b>\"</b>\n" +"</p><p>Secret to use for Radius servers, this is the secret used to perform an Access-Request with the username (set by <b>login</b> above) and passwd (set by\n" +"<b>passwd</b> above).\n" +"</p><p>Default: empty string\n" +"\n" +"\n" +"</p><p><b><big>persistent</big> =</b> <i>n</i>\n" +"</p><p>Number of seconds for persistent client connections.\n" +"\n" +"\n" +"</p><p><b><big>netmask</big> =</b> <i>w.x.y.z</i>\n" +"</p><p>Netmask to be used for granularity of persistent client connections.\n" +"\n" +"\n" +"</p><p><b><big>scheduler</big> =</b> <i>scheduler_name</i>\n" +"</p><p>Scheduler to be used by <small>LVS</small> for loadbalancing. For an information on the available sehedulers please see the <b>ipvsadm</a></b>(8) man page.\n" +"</p><p>Default: \"wrr\"\n" +"\n" +"\n" +"</p><p><b><big>protocol</big> = tcp</b>|<b>udp</b>|<b>fwm</b>\n" +"</p><p>Protocol to be used. If the virtual is specified as an <small>IP</small> address and port then it must be one of tcp or udp. If a firewall mark then the\n" +"protocol must be fwm.\n" +"</p><p>Default:\n" +"</p></dt><dt>* Virtual is an <small>IP</small> address and port, and the port is not 53: tcp\n" +"</dt><dt>* Virtual is an <small>IP</small> address and port, and the port is 53: udp\n" +"</dt><dt>* Virtual is a firewall mark: fwm\n" +"</dt></dl>\n" +"\n" +"\n" +"</p><p><b><big>check timeout</big> =</b> <i>n</i>\n" +"</p><p>Timeout in seconds for connect, external and ping checks. If the timeout is exceeded then the real server is declared dead.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" +"</p><p>If undefined then the value of negotiatetimeout is used. negotiatetimeout is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-virtual setting.\n" +"</p><p>If both checktimeout and negotiatetimeout are unset, the default is used.\n" +"</p><p>Default: 5 seconds\n" +"\n" +"</p><p><b><big>negotiate timeout</big> =</b> <i>n</i>\n" +"</p><p>Timeout in seconds for negotiate checks.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" +"</p><p>If undefined then the value of connecttimeout is used. connecttimeout is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-virtual setting.\n" +"</p><p>If both negotiatetimeout and connecttimeout are unset, the default is used.\n" +"</p><p>Default: 30 seconds\n" +"\n" +"</p><p><b><big>failure count</big> =</b> <i>n</i>\n" +"</p><p>The number of consecutive times a failure will have to be reported by a check before the realserver is considered to have failed. A value of 1 will have the realserver considered failed on the first failure. A successful check will reset the failure counter to 0.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" +"</p><p>Default: 1\n" +"\n" +"</p><p><b><big>email alert</big> = \"</b><i>emailaddress</i><b>\"</b>\n" +"</p><p>A valid email address for sending alerts about the changed connection status to any real server defined in the virtual service. This option requires perl\n" +"module MailTools to be installed. Automatically tries to send email using any of the built-in methods. See perldoc Mail::Mailer for more info on methods.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" +"\n" +"</p><p><b><big>email alert freq</big> =</b> <i>n</i>\n" +"</p><p>Delay in seconds between repeating email alerts while any given real server in the virtual service remains inaccessible. A setting of zero seconds will\n" +"inhibit the repeating alerts. The email timing accuracy of this setting is dependent on the number of seconds defined in the checkinterval configuration\n" +"option.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" +"</p><p>Default: 0\n" +"\n" +"</p><p><b><big>email alert status</big> = all</b>|<b>none</b>|<b>starting</b>|<b>running</b>|<b>stopping</b>|<b>reloading</b>,...\n" +"</p><p>Comma delimited list of server states in which email alerts should be sent. <b>all</b> is a short-hand for\n" +"\"<b>starting</b>,<b>running</b>,<b>stopping</b>,<b>reloading</b>\". If <b>none</b> is specified, no other option may be specified, otherwise options are ORed\n" +"with each other.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" +"</p><p>Default: all\n" +"\n" +"</p><p><b><big>fallback</big> =</b> <i>ip_address|hostname[:portnumber|sercvicename]</i> [<b>gate</b>|<b>masq</b>|<b>ipip</b>]\n" +"</p><p>the server onto which a webservice is redirected if all real servers are down. Typically this would be 127.0.0.1 with an emergency page.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" +"\n" +"</p><p><b><big>quiescent</big> = yes</b>|<b>no</b>\n" +"</p><p>If <i>yes</i>, then when real or failback servers are determined to be down, they are not actually removed from the kernel's <small>LVS</small> table.\n" +"Rather, their weight is set to zero which means that no new connections will be accepted.\n" +"</p><p>This has the side effect, that if the real server has persistent connections, new connections from any existing clients will continue to be routed to the\n" +"real server, until the persistant timeout can expire. See ipvsadm for more information on persistant connections.\n" +"</p><p>This side-effect can be avoided by running the following:\n" +"</p><p>echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/vs/expire_quiescent_template\n" +"</p><p>If the proc file isn't present this probably means that the kernel doesn't have lvs support, <small>LVS</small> support isn't loaded, or the kernel is too\n" +"old to have the proc file. Running ipvsadm as root should load <small>LVS</small> into the kernel if it is possible.\n" +"</p><p>If <i>no</i>, then the real or failback servers will be removed from the kernel's <small>LVS</small> table. The default is <i>yes</i>.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" +"</p><p>Default: <i>yes</i>\n" +"\n" +"\n" +"\n" +msgstr "" + +#. overwrite global value part +#: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:146 +msgid "Check Type" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:150 +msgid "Check Port" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:151 +msgid "Service" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:152 +msgid "Check Command" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:157 +msgid "Http Method" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:160 +msgid "Request" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:162 +msgid "Receive" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:165 +msgid "Virtual Host" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:177 +msgid "Login" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:178 +msgid "Password" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:180 +msgid "Database Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:181 +msgid "Radius Secret" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:199 +msgid "Persistent" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:200 +msgid "Netmask" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:202 +msgid "Scheduler" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:211 +msgid "Protocol" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:231 +msgid "Virtual Servers" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:234 src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:301 +msgid "Add" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:235 src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:303 +msgid "Edit" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:236 src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:302 +msgid "Delete" +msgstr "" + +#. disable the delete & edit button if vserver box is empty +#: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:296 +msgid "Virtual Server" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:298 +msgid "Real Servers" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:310 +msgid "Check type" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:311 +msgid "Auth type" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:312 +msgid "Others" +msgstr "" + +#. return `cacel or a string +#: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:342 src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:427 +msgid "OK" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:343 src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:428 +msgid "Cancel" +msgstr "" + +#. split the real server ip value; +#: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:411 +msgid "" +"If using IPv6,the format should like this\n" +"[fe80::5054:ff:fe00:2]" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:413 +msgid "Real Server's IP Address" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:419 +msgid "Forward Method" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:422 +msgid "weight" +msgstr "" + +#. find next ] +#: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:456 +msgid "IP address is not Valid" +msgstr "" + +#. tab switch events end +#: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:547 +msgid "Add a new real server:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:564 +msgid "Edit the real server:" +msgstr "" + +#. Initialization dialog contents +#: src/include/iplb/wizards.rb:142 +msgid "Initializing..." +msgstr "" + +#. Read all iplb settings +#. @return true on success +#: src/modules/Iplb.rb:214 +msgid "Initializing IPLB Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Names of real stages +#: src/modules/Iplb.rb:221 +msgid "Read the global settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Iplb.rb:221 +msgid "Read the virtual host settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Iplb.rb:223 +msgid "Reading the global settings..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Iplb.rb:224 +msgid "Reading the virtual host settings..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Iplb.rb:225 src/modules/Iplb.rb:330 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#. Write all iplb settings +#. @return true on success +#: src/modules/Iplb.rb:320 +msgid "Saving IPLB Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Iplb.rb:326 +msgid "Write the settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Iplb.rb:326 +msgid "Run SuSEconfig" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Iplb.rb:328 +msgid "Writing the settings..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Iplb.rb:329 +msgid "Running SuSEconfig..." +msgstr "" + +#. write global conf +#. check for ipv6 address to decide whether to add "6=" or "=" +#. string key's format +#. 192.168.6.241:89 or [2001:db8::5]:119 +#. only extract the 2001:db8::5 part from the key string +#. to check whether it is an ipv6 address; +#: src/modules/Iplb.rb:355 src/modules/Iplb.rb:392 src/modules/Iplb.rb:405 +msgid "Cannot write settings." +msgstr "" + +#. TODO FIXME: your code here... +#. Configuration summary text for autoyast +#: src/modules/Iplb.rb:441 +msgid "Configuration summary..." +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/iscsi-client.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/iscsi-client.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/iscsi-client.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,579 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. Command line help text for the Xiscsi-client module +#: src/clients/iscsi-client.rb:56 +msgid "Configuration of an iSCSI initiator" +msgstr "" + +#. progress step title +#: src/clients/iscsi-client_finish.rb:69 +msgid "Saving iSCSI configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. Rich text title for IscsiClient in proposals +#: src/clients/iscsi-client_proposal.rb:85 +msgid "iSCSI Initiator" +msgstr "" + +#. Menu title for IscsiClient in proposals +#: src/clients/iscsi-client_proposal.rb:89 +msgid "&iSCSI Initiator" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button (starting SLP service - option 1) +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:64 +msgid "When &Booting" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button (starting SLP service - option 2) +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:68 +msgid "&Manually" +msgstr "" + +#. part of help text, used to describe radiobuttons (matching starting SLP service but without "&") +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:74 +msgid "When Booting" +msgstr "" + +#. part of help text, used to describe radiobuttons (matching starting SLP service but without "&") +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:76 +msgid "Manually" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:86 +msgid "iSNS Address" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:87 +msgid "iSNS Port" +msgstr "" + +#. name of iscsi client (/etc/iscsi/initiatorname.iscsi) +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:110 +msgid "&Initiator Name" +msgstr "" + +#. prefer to not translate 'Offload' unless there is a well +#. known word for this technology (it's special hardware +#. shifting load from processor to card) +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:119 +msgid "Offload Car&d" +msgstr "" + +#. table of connected targets +#. table of discovered targets +#. dialog for all targets from portal (connected/disconnected) +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:150 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:183 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:216 +msgid "Interface" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:151 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:184 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:217 +msgid "Portal Address" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:152 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:185 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:218 +msgid "Target Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:153 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:219 +msgid "Start-Up" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:159 +msgid "Add" +msgstr "" + +#. `PushButton(`id(`toggle), _("Toggle Start-Up")) +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:160 +msgid "Edit" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:161 +msgid "Disconnect" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:186 +msgid "Connected" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:192 +msgid "Discovery" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:193 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:223 +msgid "Connect" +msgstr "" + +#. authentification dialog for add/discovery target +#. authentication dialog for add target +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:238 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:272 +msgid "No Authentication" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:241 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:275 +msgid "Incoming Authentication" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:243 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:249 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:277 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:283 +msgid "Username" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:244 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:250 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:278 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:284 +msgid "Password" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:247 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:281 +msgid "Outgoing Authentication" +msgstr "" + +#. "handle" : handleDiscAuth, +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:301 +msgid "Startup" +msgstr "" + +#. widget for portal address +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:312 +msgid "IP Address" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:313 +msgid "Port" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:328 +msgid "Key" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:328 +msgid "Value" +msgstr "" + +#. service status dialog +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:339 +msgid "Service" +msgstr "" + +#. list og connected targets +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:362 +msgid "Connected Targets" +msgstr "" + +#. list of discovered targets +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:370 +msgid "Discovered Targets" +msgstr "" + +#. main tabbed dialog +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:389 +msgid "iSCSI Initiator Overview" +msgstr "" + +#. discovery new target +#. dialog for all targets from portal (connected/disconnected) +#. authentification dialog for add/discovery target +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:404 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:110 src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:122 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:129 +msgid "<h1>iSCSI Initiator</h1>" +msgstr "" + +#. authentication dialog for add new target +#. list of connected targets +#. authentication for connect to portal +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:439 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:478 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/dialogs.rb:504 +msgid "iSCSI Initiator Discovery" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:38 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Initializing iSCSI Initiator Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Please wait...<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:42 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Initialization</big></b><br>\n" +"Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing <b>Abort</b> now.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:46 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Saving iSCSI Initiator Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Please wait...<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:50 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Saving</big></b><br>\n" +"Abort the save procedure by pressing <b>Abort</b>.\n" +"An additional dialog informs whether it is safe to do so.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Summary dialog help 1/3 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:57 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>iSCSI Initiator Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Configure an iSCSI initiator here.<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Summary dialog help 2/3 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:61 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Adding an iSCSI Initiator</big></b><br>\n" +"Select an iSCSI initiator from the list of detected initiators.\n" +"If your iSCSI initiator was not detected, use <b>Other (not detected)</b>.\n" +"Then press <b>Configure</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Summary dialog help 3/3 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:68 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Editing or Deleting</big></b><br>\n" +"If you press <b>Edit</b>, an additional dialog in which to change\n" +"the configuration opens.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Ovreview dialog help 1/3 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:74 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>iSCSI Initiator Configuration Overview</big></b><br>\n" +"Obtain an overview of installed iSCSI initiators. Additionally\n" +"edit their configurations.<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Ovreview dialog help 2/3 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:80 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Adding an iSCSI Initiator</big></b><br>\n" +"Press <b>Add</b> to configure an iSCSI initiator.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Ovreview dialog help 3/3 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:84 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Editing or Deleting</big></b><br>\n" +"Choose an iSCSI Initiator to change or remove.\n" +"Then press <b>Edit</b> or <b>Delete</b> as desired.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. table of connected targets +#: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:90 +msgid "<p>List of current sessions.</p><p>Use the <b>Add</b> button to get additional targets. A discovery is started to detect new targets and the start-up mode of already connected targets keeps unchanged.<br>Use <b>Disconnect</b> to cancel the connection and with it remove the target from the list.<br>To change the start-up status, press <b>Edit</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Warning +#. Warning +#: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:99 src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:117 +msgid "<h1>Warning</h1>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:100 src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:118 +msgid "<p>When accessing an iSCSI device <b>READ</b>/<b>WRITE</b>, make sure that this access is exclusive. Otherwise there is a potential risk of data corruption.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:103 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Initiator Name</b> is a value from <tt>/etc/iscsi/initiatorname.iscsi</tt>. \n" +"In case you have iBFT, this value will be added from there and you are only able to change it in the BIOS setup.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:106 +msgid "" +"If you want to use <b>iSNS</b> (Internet Storage Name Service) for discovering targets instead of the default SendTargets method,\n" +"fill in the IP address of the iSNS server and port. The default port should be 3205.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:111 +msgid "" +"Enter the <b>IP Address</b> of the iSCSI target server.\n" +"Only change <b>Port</b> if needed. For authentication, use <b>Username</b> and <b>Password</b>. If you do not need authentication,\n" +"select <b>No Authentication</b>.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:125 +msgid "List of nodes offered by the iSCSI target. Select one item and click <b>Connect</b>. " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:132 +msgid "<h1>Startup</h1>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:133 +msgid "" +"<p><b>manual</b> is for iSCSI targets which are not to be connected by\n" +"default, the user needs to connect them manually</p>\n" +"<p><b>onboot</b> is for iSCSI targets to be connected during boot, i.e. when\n" +"root is on iSCSI. As such it will be evaluated by the initrd.</p>\n" +"<p><b>automatic</b> is for iSCSI targets to be connected when the iSCSI service\n" +"starts up.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:141 +msgid "<h1>Authentication</h1>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:142 +msgid "<p>The default setting here is <i>No Authentication</i>. Uncheck the checkbox if authentication is needed for security reasons. Enter <b>Username</b> and <b>Password</b> for 'Incoming Authentication', 'Outgoing Authentication' or for both.</p><p><b>Please note:</b><br>'Incoming Authentication' here correlates to 'Outgoing Authentication' on iSCSI target server side and the other way round.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. list of discovered targets +#: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:151 +msgid "<p>This screen shows the list of discovered targets.</p><p>Use the <b>Discovery</b> button to get available iSCSI targets from a server specified by IP address.<br><b>Connect</b> to a target to establih the connection. If login was successful the column <i>Connected</i> shows status 'True' and the target will appear on the <i>Connected Targets</i> screen.<br>To remove a target use the <b>Delete</b> button.<br> <b>Hint:</b> Removing of targets is only possible for not connected onces. If required, <b>Disconnect</b> at <i>Connected Targets</i> first.</p><p><b>Please note:</b> Starting the <b>Discovery</b> again means doing a re-discovery of targets which possibly will change the start-up mode of already connected targets (to default 'manual'). Switch to <i>Connected Targets</i> screen and use the <b>Add</b> button if you want to add new targets without changing the start-up mode.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:167 +msgid "<h1>iBTF</h1>" +msgstr "" + +#. string initiatorname=""; +#. function for run command in background +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:65 +msgid "Command timed out" +msgstr "" + +#. validation for authentication dialog entry +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:123 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:135 +msgid "Insert the username." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:128 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:140 +msgid "Insert the password." +msgstr "" + +#. init table of connected sessions +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:152 +msgid "Error While Connecting iscsid" +msgstr "" + +#. delete (logout from) connected target +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:214 +msgid "Really log out from the selected target?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:218 +msgid "Error occurred while logging out from the selected target." +msgstr "" + +#. toggle all 3 possible values (bnc#457252) +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:228 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:266 +msgid "No record found." +msgstr "" + +#. if nothing selected - disable some buttons, otherwise enable them +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:305 +msgid "No valid IP address" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:310 +msgid "Port field cannot be empty" +msgstr "" + +#. regexp for "cz.suse" or just "suse", "cz.su-se" +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:428 +msgid "Incorrect Initiator Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:429 +msgid "" +"\n" +"The correct syntax is\n" +"iqn.yyyy-mm.reversed.domain.name[:identifier]\n" +"or eui.yyyy-mm.reversed.domain.name[:identifier]\n" +"\n" +"Example:\n" +"iqn.2007-04.cz.server:storage.disk.sdb\n" +"\n" +"Do you want to use the name?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. brackets needed around IPv6 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:635 +msgid "Insert the IP address." +msgstr "" + +#. validate port number +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:641 +msgid "Insert the port." +msgstr "" + +#. string record = deletechars(row_in_string[0]:"", "[]"); +#. ******************* target table ************************* +#. initialize dialog for all targets from portal (connected/disconnected) +#. enable/disable connect button according target is or not already connected +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:754 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:859 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:887 +msgid "True" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:754 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:859 +msgid "False" +msgstr "" + +#. check if not already connected +#. check if not already connected +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:792 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:912 +msgid "The target with this TargetName is already connected. Make sure that multipathing is enabled to prevent data corruption." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:795 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:915 +msgid "Continue" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:796 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:916 +msgid "Cancel" +msgstr "" + +#. check if is not already connected +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:906 +msgid "The target is already connected." +msgstr "" + +#. Initialization dialog caption +#: src/include/iscsi-client/wizards.rb:121 +msgid "iSCSI Initiator Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Initialization dialog contents +#: src/include/iscsi-client/wizards.rb:123 +msgid "Initializing..." +msgstr "" + +#. don't check interactively for packages (bnc#367300) +#. skip it during second stage or when create AY profile +#: src/modules/IscsiClient.rb:96 +msgid "<p>To configure the iSCSI initiator, the <b>%1</b> package must be installed.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/IscsiClient.rb:99 +msgid "<p>Install it now?</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. IscsiClient read dialog caption +#: src/modules/IscsiClient.rb:152 +msgid "Initializing iSCSI Initiator Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1/3 +#: src/modules/IscsiClient.rb:168 +msgid "Read the database" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 2/3 +#: src/modules/IscsiClient.rb:170 +msgid "Read the previous settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 3/3 +#: src/modules/IscsiClient.rb:172 +msgid "Detect the devices" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 1/3 +#: src/modules/IscsiClient.rb:176 +msgid "Reading the database..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 2/3 +#: src/modules/IscsiClient.rb:178 +msgid "Reading the previous settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 3/3 +#: src/modules/IscsiClient.rb:180 +msgid "Detecting the devices..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress finished +#: src/modules/IscsiClient.rb:182 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#. IscsiClient read dialog caption +#: src/modules/IscsiClient.rb:237 +msgid "Saving iSCSI Initiator Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1/2 +#: src/modules/IscsiClient.rb:246 +msgid "Write AutoYaST settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 2/2 +#: src/modules/IscsiClient.rb:248 +msgid "Set up service status" +msgstr "" + +#. interface type for hardware offloading +#: src/modules/IscsiClientLib.rb:72 +msgid "default (Software)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/IscsiClientLib.rb:73 +msgid "all" +msgstr "" + +#. } +#: src/modules/IscsiClientLib.rb:698 +msgid "" +"InitiatorName from iBFT and from <tt>/etc/iscsi/initiatorname.iscsi</tt>\n" +"differ. The old initiator name will be replaced by the value of iBFT and a \n" +"backup created. If you want to use a different initiator name, change it \n" +"in the BIOS.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. change startup status (manual/onboot) for target +#: src/modules/IscsiClientLib.rb:1013 +msgid "Target connection failed.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. do discovery first +#: src/modules/IscsiClientLib.rb:1156 +msgid "Configuration summary..." +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/iscsi-lio-server.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/iscsi-lio-server.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/iscsi-lio-server.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,728 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. Command line help text for the iscsi-lio-server module +#: src/clients/iscsi-lio-server.rb:56 +msgid "Configuration of an iSCSI target via LIO" +msgstr "" + +#. Rich text title for IscsiLioServer in proposals +#: src/clients/iscsi-lio-server_proposal.rb:85 +msgid "iSCSI LIO Target" +msgstr "" + +#. Menu title for IscsiLioServer in proposals +#: src/clients/iscsi-lio-server_proposal.rb:89 +msgid "&iSCSI LIO Target" +msgstr "" + +#. first tab - service status and firewall +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:57 +msgid "Service" +msgstr "" + +#. second tab - global authentication +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:73 +#: src/modules/IscsiLioServer.rb:427 +msgid "Global" +msgstr "" + +#. third tab - targets / luns +#. targets dialog +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:89 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:320 +#: src/modules/IscsiLioServer.rb:443 +msgid "Targets" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:115 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:176 +msgid "Target" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:124 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:185 +msgid "Identifier" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:128 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:189 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:320 +msgid "Portal group" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:136 +msgid "Ip address" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:140 +msgid "Port number" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:143 +msgid "Bind all IP addresses" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:145 +msgid "Use Authentication" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:149 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:301 +msgid "LUN" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:149 +msgid "Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:149 +msgid "Path" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:154 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:198 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:237 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:325 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:372 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:442 +msgid "Add" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:155 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:238 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:326 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:373 +msgid "Edit" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:156 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:201 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:239 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:327 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:374 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:443 +msgid "Delete" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:193 +msgid "Client" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:193 +msgid "Lun Mapping" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:193 +msgid "Auth" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:199 +msgid "Edit LUN" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:200 +msgid "Edit Auth" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:202 +msgid "Copy" +msgstr "" + +#. enable/disable none/incoming/outgoing authentication +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:216 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:207 +#: src/modules/IscsiLioServer.rb:434 +msgid "No Authentication" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:225 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:218 +#: src/modules/IscsiLioServer.rb:437 +msgid "Incoming Authentication" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog to add/modify user and password +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:232 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:253 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:223 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:236 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:721 +msgid "Username" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:232 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:254 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:224 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:237 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:722 +msgid "Password" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:248 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:231 +#: src/modules/IscsiLioServer.rb:440 +msgid "Outgoing Authentication" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button (starting LIO target service - option 1) +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:274 +msgid "When &Booting" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button (starting LIO target service - option 2) +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:278 +msgid "&Manually" +msgstr "" + +#. part of help text, used to describe radiobuttons (matching starting LIO target service but without "&") +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:284 +#: src/modules/IscsiLioServer.rb:429 +msgid "When Booting" +msgstr "" + +#. part of help text, used to describe radiobuttons (matching starting LIO target service but without "&") +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:286 +#: src/modules/IscsiLioServer.rb:431 +msgid "Manually" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog for expert settings +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:369 +msgid "Key" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:369 +msgid "Value" +msgstr "" + +#. Summary dialog +#. @return dialog result +#. Main dialog - tabbed +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:430 +msgid "iSCSI LIO Target Overview" +msgstr "" + +#. expert dialog +#. LUN details +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:438 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:178 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:183 +msgid "<h1>iSCSI Target</h1>" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog for add target +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:473 +msgid "Add iSCSI Target" +msgstr "" + +#. discovery authentication dialog +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:507 +msgid "Modify iSCSI Target Client Setup" +msgstr "" + +#. edit target dialog +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:541 +msgid "Modify iSCSI Target Lun Setup" +msgstr "" + +#. expert target dialog +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/dialogs.rb:574 +msgid "iSCSI Target Expert Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:38 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Initializing iSCSI LIO Target Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Please wait...<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:42 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Initialization</big></b><br>\n" +"Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing <b>Abort</b> now.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:47 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Saving iSCSI Target Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Please wait...<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:51 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Saving:</big></b><br>\n" +"Abort the save procedure by pressing <b>Abort</b>.\n" +"An additional dialog informs whether it is safe to do so.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:57 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Save</b> button will export some information about\n" +"targets into selected file.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Summary dialog help 1/3 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:61 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>iSCSI Target Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Configure an iSCSI target here.<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Summary dialog help 2/3 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:65 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Adding an iSCSI Target</big></b><br>\n" +"Choose an iSCSI target from the list of detected iSCSI targets.\n" +"If your target was not detected, use <b>Other (not detected)</b>.\n" +"Then press <b>Configure</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Summary dialog help 3/3 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:72 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Editing or Deleting</big></b><br>\n" +"If you press <b>Edit</b>, an additional dialog in which to change\n" +"the configuration opens.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Ovreview dialog help 1/3 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:78 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>iSCSI Target Configuration Overview</big></b><br>\n" +"Obtain an overview of installed iSCSI targets. Additionally\n" +"edit their configurations.<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Ovreview dialog help 2/3 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:84 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Adding an iSCSI Target</big></b><br>\n" +"Press <b>Add</b> to configure an iSCSI target.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Ovreview dialog help 3/3 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:89 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Editing or Deleting</big></b><br>\n" +"Choose an iSCSI target to change or remove.\n" +"Then press <b>Edit</b> or <b>Delete</b> as desired.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Configure1 dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:95 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Configuration Part One</big></b><br>\n" +"Press <b>Next</b> to continue.\n" +"<br></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Configure1 dialog help 2/2 +#. Configure2 dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:101 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:113 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Selecting Something</big></b><br>\n" +"It is not possible. You must code it first. :-)\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Configure2 dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:107 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Configuration Part Two</big></b><br>\n" +"Press <b>Next</b> to continue.\n" +"<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. discovery authentication +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:119 +msgid "Select the type of authentication. Use <b>No Authentication</b> or one of <b>Incoming</b> and <b>Outgoing</b> (can be both together). Then insert <b>User</b> and <b>Password</b>." +msgstr "" + +#. target client setup. +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:124 +msgid "<p>Use <b>Add</b> to give a client access for a LUN imported from target portal group. Specify which client is allowed to access it (client name is <i>InitiatorName</i> in '/etc/iscsi/initiatorname.iscsi' on iscsi initiator). <b>Delete</b> will remove the client access to the LUN.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:130 +msgid "<p>With <b>Edit LUN</b> one can modify the LUN mapping. Please note that LUN target number must be unique.<br>After pressing <b>Edit Auth</b>, select the type of authentication. Use <b>Incoming</b>, <b>Outgoing</b> or both together. Then insert <b>User</b> and <b>Password</b>. If <b>Use Authentication</b> is disabled in previous dialog, <b>Edit Auth</b> is disabled here.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:136 +msgid "<p><b>Copy</b> offers the possibility to give an additional client access to the LUN.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. target dialog +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:138 +msgid "" +"List of offered targets and target portal groups. Create a new target by clicking <b>Add</b>.\n" +"To delete or modify an item, select it and press <b>Edit</b> or <b>Delete</b>." +msgstr "" + +#. edit target +#. add target +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:143 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:159 +msgid "<h1>iSCSI Target IP/Port and LUN setup</h1>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:146 +msgid "" +"It is possible to make arbitary block devices or files available under a <b>LUN</b>.\n" +"You have to provide <b>path</b> to either block devices or file. \n" +"The <b>LUN name</b> is an arbitrary name to uniquely identify the <b>LUN</b>. \n" +"The name needs to be unique within the target portal group. If the user\n" +"does not provide a name for LUN, it is generated automatically." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:153 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:172 +msgid "" +"<p>Under <b>Ip Address</b> and <b>Port Number</b> you specify under which address\n" +"and port the service will be available. Default for port number is 3260.\n" +"Only ip addresses assigned to one of the network cards are possible." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:162 +msgid "Create a new target. Replace template values with the correct values." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:165 +msgid "" +"It is possible to make arbitary block devices or files available under a lun.\n" +"You have to provide <b>path</b> to either block devices or file. \n" +"The <b>LUN name</b> is an arbitrary name to uniquely identify the <b>LUN</b>. \n" +"The name needs to be unique within the target portal group. If the user\n" +"does not provide a name for LUN, it is generated automatically." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:179 +msgid "It is possible to <b>add</b>, <b>edit</b> or <b>delete</b> all additional configuration options." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:184 +msgid "" +"Edit <b>LUN</b> number if needed, set <b>Type</b> (nullio is for testing purposes).\n" +"If Type=fileio set <b>Path</b> to disk device or file.<b>SCSI ID</b> and <b>Sectors</b> are optional." +msgstr "" + +#. save discovery authentication or authentication for given target +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:145 +msgid "Problem changing authentication" +msgstr "" + +#. validate functions checks the secret for incoming and outgoing cannot be same +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:161 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:171 +msgid "Invalid Username" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:161 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:171 +msgid "Invalid Password." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:251 +msgid "Selected Lun is already in use!" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:260 +msgid "Selected Name is already in use!" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:269 +msgid "Selected Path must be either block device or normal file!" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:275 +msgid "Selected Path is already in use!" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:310 +msgid "Path:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:313 +msgid "Browse" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:333 +msgid "Select file or device" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:436 +msgid "Client Lun" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:436 +msgid "Target LUN" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:444 +msgid "Change:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:537 +msgid "Target LUN %1 used more than once!" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:599 +msgid "Need to enable at least one Authentification!" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:619 +msgid "Client name:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:622 +msgid "Import LUNs from TPG" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:638 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:695 +msgid "Client name must not be empty!" +msgstr "" + +#. Don't check IscsiLioData.GetClntList(@curr_target, @curr_tpg) for existing +#. client name. It's allowed to have several LUNs accessable for same client. +#. TODO: verify whether it's necessary to check @changed_lun here? +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:644 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:701 +msgid "Client name already exists!" +msgstr "" + +#. Copy exisiting LUN, i.e. give additional client access to the LUN +#. (which is allowed, makes sense e.g. with multipath) +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:678 +msgid "New client name:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:724 +msgid "OK" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:725 +msgid "Cancel" +msgstr "" + +#. remove a item +#. **************** Edit Dialog ***************************** +#. init values for modifying target (read it from stored map) +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:820 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:934 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:1288 +msgid "Really delete the selected item?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:1002 +msgid "Problem creating target %1 with tpg %2" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:1024 +msgid "Problem setting network portal to %1" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:1045 +msgid "Problem removing lun %1" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:1070 +msgid "Problem setting lun %1 (name:%2) to path %3" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:1084 +msgid "Problem setting auth on %1:%2 to %3" +msgstr "" + +#. validate function checks if target/tpg are unique and not empty +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:1198 +msgid "The target cannot be empty." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:1202 +msgid "The target portal group cannot be empty." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:1213 +msgid "The target already exists." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:1233 +msgid "Incoming" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:1236 +msgid "Outgoing" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:1238 +msgid "None" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:1261 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:1364 +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:1401 +msgid "Disabled" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:1450 +msgid "" +"There isn't any client specified.\n" +"To allow a client login to the target, please\n" +"use the 'Add' button and enter the name\n" +"(see /etc/iscsi/initiatorname.iscsi on initiator).\n" +"Really want to continue without client access?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:1464 +msgid "Problem removing lun %4 for client %3 in %1:%2" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:1479 +msgid "Problem adding lun %4:%5 for client %3 in %1:%2" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:1500 +msgid "Problem removing client %3 from %1:%2" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:1524 +msgid "Problem creating client %3 for %1:%2" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/widgets.rb:1559 +msgid "Problem changing auth for client %3 in %1:%2" +msgstr "" + +#. Initialization dialog caption +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/wizards.rb:110 +msgid "iSCSI LIO Target Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Initialization dialog contents +#: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/wizards.rb:112 +msgid "Initializing..." +msgstr "" + +#. scope link IPv6 +#: src/modules/IscsiLioData.rb:1424 +msgid "Cannot save lio setup" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/IscsiLioData.rb:1428 +msgid "Cannot save tcm setup" +msgstr "" + +#. test if required package ("lio-utils") is installed +#: src/modules/IscsiLioServer.rb:136 +msgid "Can't continue without installing lio-utils package" +msgstr "" + +#. to translator: %1 is replaced by pathname e.g. /etc/init.d/target +#: src/modules/IscsiLioServer.rb:177 +msgid "Could not start service \"%1\"" +msgstr "" + +#. IscsiLioServer read dialog caption +#: src/modules/IscsiLioServer.rb:190 +msgid "Initializing iSCSI LIO Target Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1/3 +#: src/modules/IscsiLioServer.rb:206 +msgid "Read the database" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 2/3 +#: src/modules/IscsiLioServer.rb:208 +msgid "Read the previous settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 3/3 +#: src/modules/IscsiLioServer.rb:210 +msgid "Detect the devices" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 1/3 +#: src/modules/IscsiLioServer.rb:214 +msgid "Reading the database..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 2/3 +#: src/modules/IscsiLioServer.rb:216 +msgid "Reading the previous settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 3/3 +#: src/modules/IscsiLioServer.rb:218 +msgid "Detecting the devices..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress finished +#. Progress finished +#: src/modules/IscsiLioServer.rb:220 src/modules/IscsiLioServer.rb:306 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#. read configuration (/etc/ietd.conf) +#: src/modules/IscsiLioServer.rb:245 +msgid "" +"You have currently no active LIO targets but there seems \n" +"to be a valid config in /etc/ietd.conf. Should the module \n" +"try to import setting from /etc/ietd.conf into LIO?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/IscsiLioServer.rb:254 +msgid "Errors during import. Check LIO state!" +msgstr "" + +#. IscsiLioServer write dialog caption +#: src/modules/IscsiLioServer.rb:281 +msgid "Saving iSCSI LIO Target Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1/2 +#: src/modules/IscsiLioServer.rb:296 +msgid "Write firewall settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 2/2 +#: src/modules/IscsiLioServer.rb:298 +msgid "Write lio configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 1/2 +#: src/modules/IscsiLioServer.rb:302 +msgid "Writing the firewall settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 2/2 +#: src/modules/IscsiLioServer.rb:304 +msgid "Writing lio configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. Create a textual summary and a list of unconfigured cards +#. @return summary of the current configuration +#: src/modules/IscsiLioServer.rb:425 +msgid "Configuration summary..." +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/isns.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/isns.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/isns.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,248 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. Command line help text for the Xisns module +#: src/clients/isns.rb:35 +msgid "Configuration of an isns service" +msgstr "" + +#. progress step title +#: src/clients/isns_finish.rb:44 +msgid "Saving iSCSI configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. Rich text title for IsnsServer in proposals +#: src/clients/isns_proposal.rb:65 +msgid "iSCSI Initiator" +msgstr "" + +#. Menu title for IsnsServer in proposals +#: src/clients/isns_proposal.rb:69 +msgid "&iSCSI Initiator" +msgstr "" + +#. first tab - service status and firewall +#: src/include/isns/dialogs.rb:34 +msgid "Service" +msgstr "" + +#. second tab - iSCSI Nodes +#: src/include/isns/dialogs.rb:55 src/include/isns/dialogs.rb:102 +msgid "iSCSI Nodes" +msgstr "" + +#. third tab - Discovery Domains +#: src/include/isns/dialogs.rb:65 src/include/isns/dialogs.rb:120 +msgid "Discovery Domains" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/isns/dialogs.rb:87 +msgid "When &Booting" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/isns/dialogs.rb:88 +msgid "&Manually" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/isns/dialogs.rb:91 +msgid "When Booting" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/isns/dialogs.rb:92 +msgid "Manually" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/isns/dialogs.rb:105 src/include/isns/dialogs.rb:156 +#: src/include/isns/widgets.rb:66 +msgid "iSCSI Node Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/isns/dialogs.rb:105 src/include/isns/dialogs.rb:156 +#: src/include/isns/widgets.rb:108 +msgid "Node Type" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/isns/dialogs.rb:108 src/include/isns/dialogs.rb:133 +msgid "Delete" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/isns/dialogs.rb:126 src/include/isns/widgets.rb:29 +msgid "Discovery Domain Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/isns/dialogs.rb:132 +msgid "Create Discovery Domain" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/isns/dialogs.rb:151 +msgid "Discovery Domain Members" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/isns/dialogs.rb:162 +msgid "Add Existing iSCSI Node" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/isns/dialogs.rb:163 +msgid "Create iSCSI Node Member" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/isns/dialogs.rb:164 +msgid "Remove" +msgstr "" + +#. Summary dialog +#. @return dialog result +#. Main dialog - tabbed +#: src/include/isns/dialogs.rb:185 +msgid "iSNS Service" +msgstr "" + +#. curr_target = ""; +#: src/include/isns/dialogs.rb:198 +msgid "<h1>iSNS Service</h1>" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/isns/helps.rb:17 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Initializing iSNS daemon configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/isns/helps.rb:21 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Initialization</big></b><br>\n" +"Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing <b>Abort</b> now.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/isns/helps.rb:25 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Saving iSNS Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/isns/helps.rb:29 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Saving:</big></b><br>\n" +"Abort the save procedure by pressing <b>Abort</b>.\n" +"An additional dialog informs whether it is safe to do so.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Summary dialog help 1/3 +#: src/include/isns/helps.rb:36 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>iSNS Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Configure an iSNS server.<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/isns/helps.rb:39 +msgid "<p>The list of all available iSCSI nodes registered with the iSNS service are displayed.</p> <p>Nodes are registered by iSCSI initiators and iSCSI targets.</p> <p> It is only possible to <b>delete</b> them. Deleting a node removes it from the iSNS database.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. discovery domains +#: src/include/isns/helps.rb:43 +msgid "A list of all discovery domains is displayed. It is possible to <b>Create</b> a discovery domain or <b>Delete</b> one. <p>Deleting a domain removes the members from the domain but does not delete the iSCSI node members.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/isns/helps.rb:46 +msgid "A list of all iSCSI nodes are displayed by discovery domain. Selecting another discovery domain refreshes the list with members from that discovery domain. It is possible to <b>Add</b> an iSCSI node to a discovery domain or <b>Delete</b> the node. <p>Deleting a node removes it from the domain but does not delete the iSCSI node</p> <p>Creating an iSCSI node allows a not yet registered node to be added as a member of the discovery domain. When the initiator or target registers this node then it becomes part of this domain</p> <p>When an iSCSI initiator does a discovery request, the iSNS service returns all iSCSI node targets that are members of the same Discovery Domains.</p> " +msgstr "" + +#. dds table dialog +#: src/include/isns/helps.rb:50 +msgid "At the top a list of all Discovery Domain Sets are displayed. Discovery Domains belong to Discovery Domain Sets. <p>A Discovery Domain must be a member of a Discovery Domain Set in order to be active. </p><p>In an iSNS database, a Discovery Domain Set contains Discovery Domains and Discovery Domains contain iSCSI Node members.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/isns/helps.rb:53 +msgid "<p>The discovery domain set members list is refreshed whenever a different discovery domain set is selected.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. **************** global funcions and variables ***** +#: src/include/isns/widgets.rb:25 +msgid "Create New Discovery Domain" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/isns/widgets.rb:102 +msgid "Add iSCSI node to discovery domain" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/isns/widgets.rb:105 +msgid "Available Nodes to Add" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/isns/widgets.rb:108 +msgid "Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/isns/widgets.rb:112 +msgid "Add Node" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/isns/widgets.rb:113 +msgid "Done" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/isns/widgets.rb:145 src/include/isns/widgets.rb:168 +msgid "Target or Initiator" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/isns/widgets.rb:241 +msgid "Really delete the selected item?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/isns/widgets.rb:270 +msgid "Really delete this domain?" +msgstr "" + +#. boolean display = true; +#. Report::DisplayErrors(display,10); +#: src/include/isns/widgets.rb:351 +msgid "Unable to connect to iSNS server. Check if iSNS server is running." +msgstr "" + +#. Initialization dialog caption +#: src/include/isns/wizards.rb:70 +msgid "isns Daemon Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Initialization dialog contents +#: src/include/isns/wizards.rb:72 +msgid "Initializing..." +msgstr "" + +#. test if required package ("open-isns") is installed +#: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:149 +msgid "<p>To configure the isns service, the <b>%1</b> package must be installed.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:152 +msgid "<p>Install it now?</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. IsnsServer read dialog caption +#: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:277 +msgid "Initializing isns daemon configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. IsnsServer write dialog caption +#: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:300 +msgid "Saving isns Configuration" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/journal.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/journal.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/journal.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. Header +#: src/lib/systemd_journal/entries_dialog.rb:43 +msgid "Journal entries" +msgstr "" + +#. Filters +#: src/lib/systemd_journal/entries_dialog.rb:47 +msgid "Displaying entries with the following text" +msgstr "" + +#. Return the result as an array of Items +#: src/lib/systemd_journal/entries_dialog.rb:117 +msgid "Change filter..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/systemd_journal/entries_dialog.rb:119 +msgid "Refresh" +msgstr "" + +#. Header +#: src/lib/systemd_journal/query_dialog.rb:50 +msgid "Entries to display" +msgstr "" + +#. Interval +#: src/lib/systemd_journal/query_dialog.rb:53 +msgid "Time interval" +msgstr "" + +#. Filters +#: src/lib/systemd_journal/query_dialog.rb:59 +msgid "Filters" +msgstr "" + +#. User readable description of the current filters +#: src/lib/systemd_journal/query_presenter.rb:65 +msgid "With no additional conditions" +msgstr "" + +#. User readable description of the time interval +#: src/lib/systemd_journal/query_presenter.rb:82 +msgid "Since system's boot" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/systemd_journal/query_presenter.rb:84 +msgid "From previous boot" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/systemd_journal/query_presenter.rb:90 +msgid "Between %{since} and %{until}" +msgstr "" + +#. Possible intervals for a QueryPresenter object to be used in forms +#. +#. @return [Array<Hash>] each interval is represented by a hash with two keys +#. :value and :label +#: src/lib/systemd_journal/query_presenter.rb:102 +msgid "Between these dates" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/systemd_journal/query_presenter.rb:104 +msgid "Since system's boot (%s)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/systemd_journal/query_presenter.rb:108 +msgid "From previous boot (%s)" +msgstr "" + +#. Possible filters for a QueryPresenter object +#. +#. @return [Array<Hash>] for each filter there are 4 possible keys +#. +#. * :name name of the filter +#. * :label short label for the filter +#. * :form_label label for the widget used to set the filter +#. * :multiple boolean indicating if an array is a valid value +#. * :values optional list of valid values +#: src/lib/systemd_journal/query_presenter.rb:128 +msgid "Units" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/systemd_journal/query_presenter.rb:129 +msgid "For these systemd units" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/systemd_journal/query_presenter.rb:134 +msgid "Files" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/systemd_journal/query_presenter.rb:135 +msgid "For these files (executable or device)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/systemd_journal/query_presenter.rb:140 +msgid "Priority" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/systemd_journal/query_presenter.rb:141 +msgid "With at least this priority" +msgstr "" + +#. Fields to display for listing the entries +#. +#. @return [Array<Hash>] for each column a :label and a :method is provided +#: src/lib/systemd_journal/query_presenter.rb:164 +msgid "Time" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/systemd_journal/query_presenter.rb:165 +msgid "Source" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/systemd_journal/query_presenter.rb:166 +msgid "Message" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/kdump.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/kdump.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/kdump.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,1242 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-09-28 18:16+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. Command line help text for the kdump module +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:59 +msgid "Configuration of kdump" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:69 +msgid "Display settings" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:75 +msgid "Start-up settings" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:81 +msgid "Dump Level number 0-31" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:89 +msgid "Dump format for dump image none/ELF/compressed/lzo" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:102 +msgid "Dump target includes destination for saving dump images" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:117 +msgid "The naming scheme is:/boot/vmlinu[zx]-[.gz] Please enter only \"kernel_string\"." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:128 +msgid "The kdump commandline is the command line that needs to be passed off to the kdump kernel." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:139 +msgid "Set this variable if you only want to _append_ values to the default command line string." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:150 +msgid "Immediately reboot after saving the core in the kdump kernel." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:158 +msgid "Copy kernel into dump directory." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:166 +msgid "Specifies how many old dumps are kept. 0 means keep all." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:174 +msgid "SMTP server for sending notification messages." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:182 +msgid "SMTP username for sending notification messages." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:190 +msgid "SMTP password for sending notification messages. Path of file which includes password (plain text file)." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:198 +msgid "Email address for sending notification messages" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:209 +msgid "Email address for sending copy of notification messages" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:221 +msgid "Enable option" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:225 +msgid "Disable option" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:229 +msgid "Shows current option status" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:234 +msgid "Size of allocated memory MB" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:241 +msgid "Number for dump level includes pages for saving" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:248 +msgid "Dump format can be none, ELF, compressed or lzo" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:255 +msgid "Dump target includes type of target from: file (local filesystem), ftp, ssh, sftp, nfs, cifs" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:262 +msgid "Name of server" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:267 +msgid "Port for connection" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:272 +msgid "Directory for saving dump images" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:279 +msgid "Exported share" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:284 +msgid "User name" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:289 +msgid "Path of file which includes password (plain text file)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:296 +msgid "udev_id of raw partition" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:303 +msgid "The naming scheme is: /boot/vmlinu[zx]-[.gz] kernel means only \"kernel_string\"." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:310 +msgid "Include command line options." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:317 +msgid "Option means runlevel to boot the kdump kernel. Only values such as 1,2,3,5 or s are allowed" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:324 +msgid "Number of dumps. 0 means keep all." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:331 +msgid "Email address" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:365 +msgid "Handles usage of firmware-assisted dump" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:415 +msgid "Display Settings:" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:420 +msgid "Kdump is enabled (boot option \"crashkernel\" is added)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:425 +msgid "Allocate memory (MB) for kdump is: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:431 +msgid "Kdump is disabled" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:437 +msgid "Dump Level: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:445 +msgid "Dump Format: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. parsing target info +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:452 +msgid "Dump Target Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:457 +msgid "target: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:467 src/clients/kdump.rb:494 src/clients/kdump.rb:537 +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:565 src/clients/kdump.rb:582 +msgid "file directory: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:477 src/clients/kdump.rb:518 src/clients/kdump.rb:558 +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:575 +msgid "server name: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:486 src/clients/kdump.rb:528 +msgid "port: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:502 src/clients/kdump.rb:597 +msgid "user name: anonymous connection is allowed" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:507 src/clients/kdump.rb:547 src/clients/kdump.rb:602 +msgid "user name: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:589 +msgid "share: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:610 +msgid "EMPTY" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:618 +msgid "Custom kdump kernel: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:629 +msgid "Kdump command line: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:640 +msgid "Kdump command line append: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:650 +msgid "Kdump immediate reboots: %1" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:652 src/clients/kdump.rb:1262 +msgid "Enabled" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:653 src/clients/kdump.rb:1263 +msgid "Disabled" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:662 +msgid "Numbers of old dumps: All dumps are saved without deleting old dumps" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:670 +msgid "Numbers of old dumps: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:681 +msgid "Kdump SMTP Server: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:692 +msgid "Kdump SMTP User: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:701 +msgid "Kdump SMTP Password: ********" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:709 +msgid "Kdump Sending Notification To: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:720 +msgid "Kdump Sending Copy of Notification To: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:747 +msgid "" +"Kernel option \"crashkernel\" includes ranges and/or redundant values.\n" +"It will be rewritten." +msgstr "" + +#. Force value to false, so it's actually rewritten +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text +#. start kdump at boot +#. delete crashkernel parameter from bootloader +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:755 src/clients/kdump.rb:760 src/modules/Kdump.rb:487 +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:500 +msgid "To apply changes a reboot is necessary." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:764 src/clients/kdump.rb:790 src/clients/kdump.rb:819 +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:1051 src/clients/kdump.rb:1068 +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:1085 src/clients/kdump.rb:1102 +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:1117 src/clients/kdump.rb:1133 +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:1156 src/clients/kdump.rb:1176 +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:1196 src/clients/kdump.rb:1210 +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:1233 src/clients/kdump.rb:1253 +msgid "Wrong options were used." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:781 +msgid "Dump level was set." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:785 src/clients/kdump.rb:810 +msgid "Wrong value of option." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:806 +msgid "Dump format was set." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text help +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:813 +msgid "Option can include only \"none\", \"ELF\", \"compressed\" or \"lzo\" value." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:833 +msgid "File %1 does not exist." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:855 src/clients/kdump.rb:889 src/clients/kdump.rb:938 +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:972 src/clients/kdump.rb:1019 +msgid "Value for \"dir\" missing." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:869 src/clients/kdump.rb:919 src/clients/kdump.rb:960 +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:986 +msgid "Value for \"server\" missing." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:998 +msgid "Value for \"share\" missing." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:1040 +msgid "Wrong value for target." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:1151 +msgid "Wrong value of options \"no\"." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:1171 +msgid "Wrong value for option \"server\"." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:1191 +msgid "Wrong value for option \"user\"." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:1228 src/clients/kdump.rb:1248 +msgid "Wrong value for option \"email\"." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:1260 +msgid "Firmware-assisted dump: %{status}" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message +#: src/clients/kdump.rb:1278 +msgid "No option has been defined." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step title +#: src/clients/kdump_finish.rb:47 +msgid "Saving kdump configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. proposal part - kdump label +#: src/clients/kdump_proposal.rb:82 +msgid "Kdump" +msgstr "" + +#. menubutton entry +#: src/clients/kdump_proposal.rb:84 +msgid "&Kdump" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: RadioButtonGroup Label +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:57 +msgid "Enable/Disable Kdump" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:62 +msgid "Enable Kd&ump" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:63 +msgid "&Disable Kdump" +msgstr "" + +#. ---------============ Dump Filtering screen=============------------ +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:111 +msgid "Include in Dumping" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:118 +msgid "&Pages Filled with Zero" +msgstr "" + +#. `VStretch () +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:124 +msgid "Cach&e Pages" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:134 +msgid "Cache Priva&te Pages" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:139 +msgid "&User Data Pages" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:140 +msgid "&Free Pages" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: TextEntry Label +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:168 +msgid "&Dump Format" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:171 +msgid "&No Dump" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:172 +msgid "&ELF Format" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:173 +msgid "C&ompressed Format" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:174 +msgid "&LZO Compressed Format" +msgstr "" + +#. ---------============ Dump Target screen=============------------ +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:194 +msgid "&Select Target" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:198 +msgid "Local Directory" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:199 src/include/kdump/uifunctions.rb:106 +msgid "FTP" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:200 +msgid "SSH" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:201 +msgid "SFTP" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:202 src/include/kdump/uifunctions.rb:173 +msgid "NFS" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:203 src/include/kdump/uifunctions.rb:188 +msgid "CIFS (SMB)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: TextEntry Label +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:228 +msgid "&SMTP Server" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: TextEntry Label +#. text entry +#. text entry +#. text entry +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:240 src/include/kdump/uifunctions.rb:130 +#: src/include/kdump/uifunctions.rb:160 src/include/kdump/uifunctions.rb:212 +msgid "&User Name" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: TextEntry Label +#. password entry +#. password entry +#. password entry +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:252 src/include/kdump/uifunctions.rb:133 +#: src/include/kdump/uifunctions.rb:163 src/include/kdump/uifunctions.rb:215 +msgid "&Password" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: TextEntry Label +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:264 +msgid "Notification &To" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: TextEntry Label +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:280 +msgid "Notifica&tion CC" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: TextEntry Label +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:297 +msgid "Custom Kdump &Kernel" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: TextEntry Label +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:309 +msgid "Kdump Co&mmand Line" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: TextEntry Label +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:321 +msgid "Kdump Command &Line Append" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CheckBox Label +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:338 +msgid "&Enable Immediate Reboot After Saving the Core" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CheckBox Label +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:352 +msgid "Enable Copy Ke&rnel into the Dump Directory" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: CheckBox Label +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:366 +msgid "Enable &Delete Old Dump Images" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: IntField Label +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:383 +msgid "N&umber of Old Dumps" +msgstr "" + +#. "handle" : +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:408 +msgid "Kdump Memory" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:413 +msgid "Kdump Start-Up" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:414 +msgid "Start-Up" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:429 +msgid "Kdump - Dump Filtering" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:430 +msgid "Dump Filtering" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:436 +msgid "Saving Target for Kdump Image" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:443 src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:444 +msgid "Dump Target" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:450 +msgid "SMTP Server" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:460 +msgid "Notification Email Addresses" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:468 src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:469 +msgid "Email Notification" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:482 +msgid "Custom Kernel for Kdump" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:487 +msgid "Command Line" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:495 +msgid "Dump Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:508 +msgid "Kdump Expert Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:509 +msgid "Expert Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:529 +msgid "Kdump &Low Memory [MiB]" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:531 +msgid "Kdump Memor&y [MiB]" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:537 +msgid "Total System Memory [MiB]:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:544 +msgid "Usable Memory [MiB]:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/dialogs.rb:567 +msgid "Kdump &High Memory [MiB]" +msgstr "" + +#. Enable/Disable Kdump - RadioButtons 1/1 +#: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:36 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Enable/Disable Kdump</b><br>\n" +" Enable or disable kdump. The boot option crashkernel parameter is added/removed. \n" +" To apply changes, a reboot is necessary.<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Kdump Memor&y [MB] - IntField 1/1 +#: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:42 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Kdump Memory</b><br>\n" +" Allocation of memory for kdump kernel. <br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. T: help text for a combo box +#. description taken from http://lparbox.com/how-to/aix/19 +#: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:46 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Firmware-Assisted Dump</b><br>\n" +" Dumps are not generated before the partition is reinitialized but take place when the partition is restarting. When performing a firmware-assisted dump, system memory is frozen and the partition rebooted, which allows a new instance of the operating system to dump data from the previous kernel crash. This feature is suitable only when the system has more than 1.5 GB of memory.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Kdump Memor&y [MB] - IntField 1/1 +#: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:57 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Dump Level</b><br>\n" +" Specify the type of necessary page for analysis.\n" +" Pages of the specified type are copied to dumpfile. \n" +" The page type marked in the following table is included. <br></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Dump Format - RadioButtons 1/1 +#: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:64 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Dump Format</b><br>\n" +" <i>No Dump</i> - Only save the kernel log.<br>\n" +" <i>ELF Format</i> - Create dump file in the ELF format.<br>\n" +" <i>Compressed Format</i> - Compress dump data by each page with gzip.<br>\n" +" <i>LZO Compressed Format</i> - Slightly bigger files but much faster.<br>\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Dump Format - RadioButtons 1/7 +#: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:72 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Saving Target for Kdump Image</b><br>\n" +" The target for saving kdump images. Select type of target for saving dumps.<br></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Dump Format - RadioButtons 2/7 +#: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:76 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Local Filestem</b> - Save kdump image in the local filesystem.\n" +" <i>Directory for Saving Dumps</i> - The path for saving kdump images.\n" +" Selecting directory for saving kdump images via dialog by pressing <i>Browse</i>\n" +" <br></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Dump Format - RadioButtons 3/7 +#: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:83 +msgid "" +"<p><b>FTP</b> - Save kdump image via FTP.\n" +" <i>Server Name</i> - The name of ftp server.\n" +" <i>Port</i> - The port number for connection.\n" +" <i>Directory on Server</i> - The path for saving kdump images.\n" +" <i>Enable Anonymous FTP</i> enables anonymous connection to server.\n" +" <i>User Name</i> for ftp connection. <i>Password</i> for ftp connection.<br></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Dump Format - RadioButtons 4/7 +#: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:92 +msgid "" +"<p><b>SSH</b> - Save kdump image via SSH and 'dd' on target machine.\n" +" <i>Server Name</i> - The name of server.\n" +" <i>Port</i> - The port number for connection.\n" +" <i>Directory on Server</i> - The path for saving kdump images.\n" +" <i>User Name</i> for SSH connection. \n" +" <i>Password</i> for SSH connection.<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Dump Format - RadioButtons 5/7 +#: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:101 +msgid "" +"<p><b>SFTP</b> - Save kdump image via SFTP.\n" +" <i>Server Name</i> - The name of server.\n" +" <i>Port</i> - The port number for connection.\n" +" <i>Directory on Server</i> - The path for saving kdump images.\n" +" <i>User Name</i> for SSH connection. \n" +" <i>Password</i> for SSH connection.<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:109 +msgid "" +"<p>The choice between SSH and SFTP depends\n" +"on details of server configuration. SLE servers support both\n" +"by default.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Dump Format - RadioButtons 6/7 +#: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:115 +msgid "" +"<p><b>NFS</b> - Save kdump image on NFS.\n" +" <i>Server Name</i> - The name of nfs server.\n" +" <i>Directory on Server</i> - The path for saving kdump images.<br></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Dump Format - RadioButtons 7/7 +#: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:121 +msgid "" +"<p><b>CIFS</b> - Save kdump image via CIFS.\n" +" <i>Server Name</i> - The name of server.\n" +" <i>Exported Share</i> - The windows share name.\n" +" <i>Directory on Server</i> - The path for saving kdump images.\n" +" <i>Use Authentication</i> enables authenticated connection to server.\n" +" <i>User Name</i> for connection. <i>Password</i> for connection.<br></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Custom Kdump Kernel - TextEntry 1/1 +#: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:130 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Custom Kdump Kernel</b> The user can enter the custom kernel.\n" +" The naming scheme is:<i>/boot/vmlinu[zx]-[.gz]</i>\n" +" Please enter only <i>kernel_string</i>.<br></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Kdump Command Line - TextEntry 1/1 +#: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:136 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Kdump Command Line</b>\n" +" Additional arguments passed to kexec. <br></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Kdump Command Line Append - TextEntry 1/1 +#: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:140 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Kdump Command Line Append</b>\n" +" Set this option to _append_ values to the default command line string. \n" +" The string will be appended if the <i>Kdump Command Line</i>\n" +" is set. <br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Enable Immediate Reboot After Saving the Core - CheckBox 1/1 +#: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:147 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Enable Immediate Reboot After Saving the Core</b> - \n" +" Enable immediately reboot after saving the core in the kdump.<br></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Enable Delete Old Dump Images - CheckBox 1/1 +#: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:151 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Enable Delete Old Dump Images</b> - \n" +" Enable Delete Old Dump Images. If the number of dump files in \n" +" <i>Number of Old Dumps</i> exceeds this number, older dumps are removed.<br></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Enable Copy Ke&rnel into the Dump Directory - CheckBox 1/1 +#: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:157 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Enable Copy Kernel into the Dump Directory</b> - \n" +" If this option is selected, the kernel and the\n" +" debugging information (if installed) are copied into the dump\n" +" directory. The default is \"off\". It is useful to have\n" +" everything in place for debugging.<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. SMTP Server +#: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:165 +msgid "<p><b>SMTP Server</b> used for sending a notification email after a dump.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. SMTP User Name +#: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:169 +msgid "" +"<p><b>User Name</b> for SMTP authetication when <i>SMTP Server</i> is\n" +" set. This is optional. If you do not specifiy a username and password, plain SMTP will be used.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. SMTP Password +#: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:173 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Password</b> for SMTP authetication when <i>SMTP Server</i> is set. This\n" +" is optional. If you do not specify a username and password, plain SMTP will be used.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Notification To (email addresses) +#: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:177 +msgid "<p><b>Notification To</b> Specify the email address to which a notification email will be sent when a dump has been saved.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Notification CC (email addresses) +#: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:181 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Notification CC</b> Specify a list of space-separated email addresses to\n" +" which a notification email will be sent via cc if a dump has been saved.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Number of Old Dumps (number) +#: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:185 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Number of Old Dumps</b> specifies how many old dumps are kept. If the number of dump files \n" +"exceeds this number, older dumps are removed.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:189 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Initializing Kdump Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Please wait...<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:193 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Initialization:</big></b><br>\n" +"Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing <b>Abort</b> now.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:197 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Saving Kdump Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Please wait...<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:201 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Saving:</big></b><br>\n" +"Abort the save procedure by pressing <b>Abort</b>.\n" +"An additional dialog informs whether it is safe to do so.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Summary dialog help 1/3 +#: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:208 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Kdump Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Configure kdump here.<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Summary dialog help 2/3 +#: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:212 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Adding a Kdump:</big></b><br>\n" +"Choose an kdump from the list of detected kdumps.\n" +"If your kdump was not detected, select <b>Other (not detected)</b>.\n" +"Then press <b>Configure</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Summary dialog help 3/3 +#: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:219 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Editing or Deleting:</big></b><br>\n" +"If you press <b>Edit</b>, an additional dialog in which to change\n" +"the configuration opens.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Ovreview dialog help 1/3 +#: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:225 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Kdump Configuration Overview</big></b><br>\n" +"Obtain an overview of installed kdumps. Additionally\n" +"edit their configurations.<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Ovreview dialog help 2/3 +#: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:231 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Adding a Kdump:</big></b><br>\n" +"Press <b>Add</b> to configure a kdump.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Ovreview dialog help 3/3 +#: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:235 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Editing or Deleting:</big></b><br>\n" +"Choose a kdump to change or remove.\n" +"Then press <b>Edit</b> or <b>Delete</b> as desired.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. definition UI terms for saveing dump target +#. +#. terms +#: src/include/kdump/uifunctions.rb:85 +msgid "Local Filesystem" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/uifunctions.rb:91 +msgid "&Directory for Saving Dumps" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/uifunctions.rb:94 +msgid "B&rowse" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/uifunctions.rb:112 src/include/kdump/uifunctions.rb:149 +#: src/include/kdump/uifunctions.rb:177 src/include/kdump/uifunctions.rb:192 +msgid "Server Nam&e" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/uifunctions.rb:114 src/include/kdump/uifunctions.rb:151 +msgid "P&ort" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#. text entry +#: src/include/kdump/uifunctions.rb:119 src/include/kdump/uifunctions.rb:155 +#: src/include/kdump/uifunctions.rb:179 src/include/kdump/uifunctions.rb:198 +msgid "&Directory on Server" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/uifunctions.rb:124 +msgid "Enable Anon&ymous FTP" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/uifunctions.rb:143 +msgid "SSH / SFTP" +msgstr "" + +#. text entries +#: src/include/kdump/uifunctions.rb:196 +msgid "Exported Sha&re" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/uifunctions.rb:205 +msgid "Use Aut&hentication" +msgstr "" + +#. Function validates options in +#. "Saving Target for Kdump Image" +#: src/include/kdump/uifunctions.rb:661 +msgid "You need to specify \"Directory for Saving Dumps\"" +msgstr "" + +#. install cifs-mount package +#: src/include/kdump/uifunctions.rb:669 src/include/kdump/uifunctions.rb:695 +#: src/include/kdump/uifunctions.rb:729 +msgid "You need to specify \"Server Name\"" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/uifunctions.rb:676 src/include/kdump/uifunctions.rb:702 +#: src/include/kdump/uifunctions.rb:736 +msgid "You need to specify \"Directory on Server\"" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/uifunctions.rb:686 src/include/kdump/uifunctions.rb:753 +msgid "You need to specify \"User Name\"" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/kdump/uifunctions.rb:743 +msgid "You need to specify \"Exported Share\"" +msgstr "" + +#. KDUMP_SAVE_TARGET["user_name"]=""; +#. KDUMP_SAVE_TARGET["password"]=""; +#: src/include/kdump/uifunctions.rb:794 +msgid "Select directory for saving dump images" +msgstr "" + +#. Function validates if crashkernel option includes +#. several ranges and ask user about rewritting +#. +#. "KdumpMemory" +#: src/include/kdump/uifunctions.rb:1449 +msgid "Kernel option includes several ranges or redundant values. Rewrite it?" +msgstr "" + +#. T: Checkbox label +#: src/include/kdump/uifunctions.rb:1482 +msgid "Use &Firmware-Assisted Dump" +msgstr "" + +#. See FATE#315780 +#. See https://www.suse.com/support/kb/doc.php?id=7012786 +#. FIXME what about dracut? +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:412 +msgid "" +"Error updating initrd while calling '%{cmd}'.\n" +"See %{log} for details." +msgstr "" + +#. Kdump read dialog caption +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:514 +msgid "Initializing kdump Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1/4 +#. Progress step 1/4 +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:523 src/modules/Kdump.rb:531 +msgid "Reading the config file..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 3/4 +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:525 +msgid "Reading kernel boot options..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 4/4 +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:527 +msgid "Calculating memory limits..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 2/4 +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:533 +msgid "Reading partitions of disks..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress finished 3/4 +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:535 +msgid "Reading available memory and calibrating usage..." +msgstr "" + +#. Error message +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:547 +msgid "Cannot read config file /etc/sysconfig/kdump" +msgstr "" + +#. Error message +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:555 +msgid "Cannot read kernel boot options." +msgstr "" + +#. Error message +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:563 +msgid "Cannot read available memory." +msgstr "" + +#. Kdump read dialog caption +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:589 +msgid "Saving kdump Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1/2 +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:618 +msgid "Write the settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 2/2 +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:620 +msgid "Update boot options" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 1/2 +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:624 +msgid "Writing the settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 2/2 +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:626 +msgid "Updating boot options..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress finished +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:628 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#. Error message +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:638 +msgid "Cannot write settings." +msgstr "" + +#. Error message +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:647 +msgid "Adding crashkernel parameter to bootloader fault." +msgstr "" + +#. Create a textual summary +#. @return summary of the current configuration +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:758 +msgid "Kdump status: %1" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:759 +msgid "enabled" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:759 +msgid "disabled" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:766 +msgid "Value(s) of crashkernel option: %1" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:773 +msgid "Dump format: %1" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:780 +msgid "Target of dumps: %1" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:787 +msgid "Number of dumps: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: warning message in installation proposal, +#. do not translate %{requested} and %{available} - they are replaced with actual sizes later +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:879 +msgid "Warning! There might not be enough free space. %{required} required, but only %{available} are available." +msgstr "" + +#. Trying to use fadump on unsupported hardware +#: src/modules/Kdump.rb:974 +msgid "" +"Cannot use Firmware-assisted dump.\n" +"It is not supported on this hardware." +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/languages_db.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/languages_db.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/languages_db.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,306 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_af_ZA.ycp:36 +msgid "Afrikaans" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_ar_EG.ycp:37 +msgid "Arabic" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_ast_ES.ycp:36 +msgid "Asturian" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_bg_BG.ycp:36 +msgid "Bulgarian" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_bn_BD.ycp:36 +msgid "Bengali" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_bs_BA.ycp:36 +msgid "Bosnian" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_ca_ES.ycp:36 +msgid "Catalan" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_cs_CZ.ycp:36 +msgid "Czech" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_cy_GB.ycp:36 +msgid "Welsh" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_da_DK.ycp:36 +msgid "Danish" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_de_DE.ycp:36 +msgid "German" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_el_GR.ycp:36 +msgid "Greek" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_en_GB.ycp:36 +msgid "English (UK)" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_en_US.ycp:36 +msgid "English (US)" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_es_ES.ycp:36 +msgid "Spanish" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_et_EE.ycp:36 +msgid "Estonian" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_fi_FI.ycp:36 +msgid "Finnish" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_fr_FR.ycp:36 +msgid "French" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_gl_ES.ycp:36 +msgid "Galician" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_gu_IN.ycp:36 +msgid "Gujarati" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_he_IL.ycp:36 +msgid "Hebrew" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_hi_IN.ycp:36 +msgid "Hindi" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_hr_HR.ycp:36 +msgid "Croatian" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_hu_HU.ycp:36 +msgid "Hungarian" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_id_ID.ycp:36 +msgid "Indonesian" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_it_IT.ycp:36 +msgid "Italian" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_ja_JP.ycp:36 +msgid "Japanese" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_ka_GE.ycp:35 +msgid "Georgian" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_km_KH.ycp:36 +msgid "Khmer" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_ko_KR.ycp:36 +msgid "Korean" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_lt_LT.ycp:36 +msgid "Lithuanian" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_mk_MK.ycp:36 +msgid "Macedonian" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_mr_IN.ycp:36 +msgid "Marathi" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_nb_NO.ycp:36 +msgid "Norwegian" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_nl_NL.ycp:36 +msgid "Dutch" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_nn_NO.ycp:36 +msgid "Nynorsk" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_pa_IN.ycp:36 +msgid "Punjabi" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_pl_PL.ycp:36 +msgid "Polish" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_pt_BR.ycp:36 +msgid "Portuguese (Brazilian)" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_pt_PT.ycp:36 +msgid "Portuguese" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_ro_RO.ycp:36 +msgid "Romanian" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_ru_RU.ycp:36 +msgid "Russian" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_si_LK.ycp:36 +msgid "Sinhala" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_sk_SK.ycp:36 +msgid "Slovak" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_sl_SI.ycp:36 +msgid "Slovenian" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_sr_RS.ycp:36 +msgid "Serbian" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_sv_SE.ycp:36 +msgid "Swedish" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_ta_IN.ycp:36 +msgid "Tamil" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_tg_TJ.ycp:36 +msgid "Tajik" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_th_TH.ycp:36 +msgid "Thai" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_tr_TR.ycp:36 +msgid "Turkish" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_uk_UA.ycp:36 +msgid "Ukrainian" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_vi_VN.ycp:36 +msgid "Vietnamese" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_wa_BE.ycp:35 +msgid "Walloon" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_xh_ZA.ycp:36 +msgid "Xhosa" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_zh_CN.ycp:36 +msgid "Simplified Chinese" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_zh_TW.ycp:36 +msgid "Traditional Chinese" +msgstr "" + +#. language name +#: language/src/data/languages/language_zu_ZA.ycp:36 +msgid "Zulu" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/ldap-client.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/ldap-client.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/ldap-client.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,155 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. popup text +#: src/ui.rb:88 +msgid "Really abort the writing process?" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/ui.rb:96 +msgid "Writing LDAP Client Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. yes/no popup +#: src/ui.rb:144 +msgid "" +"If you reread settings from the server,\n" +"all changes will be lost. Really reread?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/3 +#: src/ui.rb:168 +msgid "" +"<p>Configure the template used for creating \n" +"new objects (like users or groups).</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/3 +#: src/ui.rb:172 +msgid "" +"<p>Edit the template attribute values with <b>Edit</b>.\n" +"Changing the <b>cn</b> value renames the template.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 3/3 +#: src/ui.rb:176 +msgid "" +"<p>The second table contains a list of <b>default values</b> used\n" +"for new objects. Modify the list by adding new values, editing or\n" +"removing current ones.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. table header 1/2 +#. table header 1/2 +#: src/ui.rb:245 src/ui.rb:580 +msgid "Attribute" +msgstr "" + +#. table header 2/2 +#. table header 2/2 +#: src/ui.rb:247 src/ui.rb:582 +msgid "Value" +msgstr "" + +#. label (table folows) +#: src/ui.rb:253 +msgid "Default Values for New Objects" +msgstr "" + +#. table header 1/2 +#: src/ui.rb:259 +msgid "Attribute of Object" +msgstr "" + +#. table header 2/2 +#: src/ui.rb:261 +msgid "Default Value" +msgstr "" + +#. button label (with non-default shortcut) +#: src/ui.rb:267 +msgid "A&dd" +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/ui.rb:269 +msgid "&Edit" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog label +#: src/ui.rb:281 +msgid "Object Template Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. yes/no popup, %1 is name +#: src/ui.rb:384 +msgid "Really delete default attribute \"%1\"?" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup, %1 is attribute name +#. error popup, %1 is attribute name +#: src/ui.rb:417 src/ui.rb:636 +msgid "" +"The \"%1\" attribute is mandatory.\n" +"Enter a value." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext 1/4 +#: src/ui.rb:438 +msgid "<p>Manage the configuration stored in the LDAP directory.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext 2/4 +#: src/ui.rb:442 +msgid "" +"<p>Each configuration set is called a \"configuration module.\" If there\n" +"is no configuration module in the provided location (base configuration),\n" +"create one with <b>New</b>. Delete the current module\n" +"using <b>Delete</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext 3/4 +#: src/ui.rb:449 +msgid "" +"<p>Edit the values of attributes in the table with <b>Edit</b>.\n" +"Some values have special meanings, for example, changing the <b>cn</b> value renames the\n" +"current module.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext 4/4 +#: src/ui.rb:455 +msgid "" +"<p>To configure the default template of the current module,\n" +"click <b>Configure Template</b>.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. combobox label +#: src/ui.rb:535 +msgid "Configuration &Module" +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/ui.rb:559 +msgid "C&onfigure Template" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog label +#: src/ui.rb:598 +msgid "Module Configuration" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/ldap.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/ldap.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/ldap.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,388 @@ +# Pashto translations for opensuse-i package. +# Copyright (C) 2014 SuSE Linux Products GmbH, Nuernberg +# This file is distributed under the same license as the opensuse-i package. +# Automatically generated, 2014. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: opensuse-i 18n\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-05-19 09:34+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n" +"Language-Team: none\n" +"Language: ps\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#. hint to error message +#: src/Ldap.rb:252 +msgid "Verify that the LDAP Server is running and reachable." +msgstr "" + +#. hint to error message +#: src/Ldap.rb:256 +msgid "" +"Failed to establish TLS encryption.\n" +"Verify that the correct CA Certificate is installed and the Server Certificate is valid." +msgstr "" + +#. hint to error message +#: src/Ldap.rb:260 +msgid "" +"Failed to establish TLS encryption.\n" +"Verify that the Server has StartTLS support enabled." +msgstr "" + +#. error message: +#: src/Ldap.rb:530 +msgid "" +"\n" +"The server could be down or unreachable.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error message: +#: src/Ldap.rb:534 +msgid "" +"\n" +"The value of DN is missing or invalid.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error message: +#: src/Ldap.rb:538 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Attribute type not found.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error message: +#: src/Ldap.rb:540 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Object class not found.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error message, more specific description follows +#. error message +#. error message +#: src/Ldap.rb:545 src/Ldap.rb:782 src/Ldap.rb:848 +msgid "Connection to the LDAP server cannot be established." +msgstr "" + +#. error message, more specific description follows +#: src/Ldap.rb:549 +msgid "A problem occurred while connecting to the LDAP server." +msgstr "" + +#. error message, more specific description follows +#: src/Ldap.rb:553 +msgid "A problem occurred while reading data from the LDAP server." +msgstr "" + +#. error message, more specific description follows +#: src/Ldap.rb:557 +msgid "A problem occurred while writing LDAP users." +msgstr "" + +#. error message, more specific description follows +#: src/Ldap.rb:561 +msgid "A problem occurred while writing LDAP groups." +msgstr "" + +#. error message, more specific description follows +#: src/Ldap.rb:565 +msgid "A problem occurred while writing data to the LDAP server." +msgstr "" + +#. error message, more specific description follows +#: src/Ldap.rb:569 +msgid "A problem occurred while reading schema from the LDAP server." +msgstr "" + +#. default error message +#: src/Ldap.rb:594 +msgid "An unknown LDAP error occurred." +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#. checkbox label +#. checkbox label +#: src/Ldap.rb:604 src/Ldap.rb:791 src/Ldap.rb:857 +msgid "&Show Details" +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#. error message +#. error message +#: src/Ldap.rb:722 src/Ldap.rb:742 src/Ldap.rb:912 +msgid "Unknown error. Perhaps 'yast2-ldap' is not available." +msgstr "" + +#. question following error message (yes/no buttons follow) +#: src/Ldap.rb:800 +msgid "Really keep this configuration?" +msgstr "" + +#. question following error message (yes/no buttons follow) +#: src/Ldap.rb:865 +msgid "" +"A possible reason for the failed connection may be that your client is\n" +"configured for TLS/SSL but the server does not support it.\n" +"\n" +"Retry connection without TLS/SSL?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Asks user for bind_dn and password to LDAP server +#. @param anonymous if anonymous access could be allowed +#. @return password +#: src/Ldap.rb:973 +msgid "BindDN" +msgstr "" + +#. password entering label +#. password entering label +#: src/Ldap.rb:975 src/ldap_browser.rb:155 +msgid "&LDAP Server Password" +msgstr "" + +#. label +#: src/Ldap.rb:979 +msgid "Server: %1:%2" +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/Ldap.rb:988 +msgid "&Anonymous Access" +msgstr "" + +#. error message, %1 is DN +#: src/Ldap.rb:1330 +msgid "" +"A direct parent for DN '%1' \n" +"does not exist in the LDAP directory.\n" +"The object with the selected DN cannot be created.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/Ldap.rb:1431 +msgid "" +"An object with the selected DN exists, but it is not a template object.\n" +"Select another one.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. yes/no popup, %1 is value of DN +#: src/Ldap.rb:1717 +msgid "" +"No entry with DN '%1'\n" +"exists on the LDAP server. Create it now?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#. button label +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:75 src/ldap_browser.rb:547 +msgid "&Open" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/3 +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:262 +msgid "<p>Set the new value for the current attribute.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/3 +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:264 +msgid "" +"<p>If the attribute can have more values, add new entries\n" +"with <b>Add Value</b>. Sometimes the button contains the list of\n" +"possible values to use for the current attribute.\n" +"If the value of the edited attribute should be a distinguished name (DN),\n" +"it is possible to choose it from the LDAP tree using <b>Browse</b>.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 3/3, %1 is attribute name, description follows. +#. The description will be not translated: maybe add a note +#. "available only in english" to the sentence for other languages? +#. Example: +#. "<p>The description of attribute \"%1\"<br>(available only in english):</p>" +#. or: +#. "<p>The description (only in english) of attribute \"%1\":<br></p>" +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:287 +msgid "<p>The description of attribute \"%1\":<br></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:311 +msgid "&Value of \"%1\" Attribute" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:322 +msgid "&Values of \"%1\" Attribute" +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#. button label +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:346 src/LdapPopup.rb:356 +msgid "&Add Value" +msgstr "" + +#. menubutton item (default value) +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:350 +msgid "&Empty Entry" +msgstr "" + +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:351 +msgid "Bro&wse" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:439 +msgid "" +"The value '%1' already exists.\n" +"Please select another one." +msgstr "" + +#. description of configuration object +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:467 +msgid "Configuration of user management tools" +msgstr "" + +#. description of configuration object +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:471 +msgid "Configuration of group management tools" +msgstr "" + +#. label +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:476 +msgid "Object Class of New Module" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label, do not translate "cn" +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:504 +msgid "&Name of New Module (\"cn\" Value)" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:530 +msgid "" +"The entered value already exists.\n" +"Select another one.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:536 +msgid "Enter the module name." +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/3 +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:555 +msgid "" +"<p>Here, set the values of attributes belonging\n" +"to an object using the current template. Such values are used as defaults when\n" +"the new object is created.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. // help text 2/3 do not translate "defaultObjectClass" +#. _("<p>The list of attributes provided in <b>Attribute Name</b> is the +#. list of allowed attributes for objects described in the \"defaultObjectClass\" +#. entry of the current template.</p> +#. ") + +#. help text 3/3 do not translate "homedirectory" +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:567 +msgid "" +"<p>You can use special syntax to create attribute\n" +"values from existing ones. The expression <i>%attr_name</i> will be replaced\n" +"with the value of attribute \"attr_name\" (for example, use \"/home/%uid\"\n" +"as a value of \"homeDirectory\").</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. combobox label +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:590 +msgid "Attribute &Name" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:596 +msgid "Attribute &Value" +msgstr "" + +#. general help text for LDAP browser +#: src/ldap_browser.rb:62 +msgid "<p>Browse the LDAP tree in the left part of the dialog.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for LDAP browser +#: src/ldap_browser.rb:64 +msgid "<p>Once the LDAP object is selected in the tree, the table shows the object data. Use <b>Edit</b> to change the value of the selected attribute. Use <b>Save</b> to save your changes to LDAP.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. popup question (Continue/Cancel follows) +#: src/ldap_browser.rb:69 +msgid "" +"There are unsaved changes in the current entry.\n" +"Discard these changes?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/ldap_browser.rb:85 +msgid "LDAP Browser" +msgstr "" + +#. combobox item +#: src/ldap_browser.rb:101 +msgid "Current LDAP Client settings" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label +#. combo box label +#: src/ldap_browser.rb:135 src/ldap_browser.rb:747 +msgid "LDAP Connections" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/ldap_browser.rb:146 +msgid "LDAP Server" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/ldap_browser.rb:152 +msgid "Administrator DN" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label +#: src/ldap_browser.rb:162 +msgid "L&DAP TLS" +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/ldap_browser.rb:168 +msgid "A&nonymous Access" +msgstr "" + +#. InputField label +#: src/ldap_browser.rb:230 +msgid "Enter the name of the new LDAP connection" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup, %1 is attribute name +#: src/ldap_browser.rb:452 +msgid "" +"The \"%1\" attribute is mandatory.\n" +"Enter a value." +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/ldap_browser.rb:550 +msgid "&Reload" +msgstr "" + +#. table header 1/2 +#: src/ldap_browser.rb:691 +msgid "Attribute" +msgstr "" + +#. table header 2/2 +#: src/ldap_browser.rb:693 +msgid "Value" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/live-installer.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/live-installer.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/live-installer.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,257 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. initialize package manager first +#. Called backwards +#: src/clients/inst_live_add_base_repo.rb:49 +#: src/clients/inst_live_sw_select.rb:40 +msgid "Software Installation" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress::New( +#. // Headline for last dialog of base installation: Install LILO etc. +#. _("Copying the Live Image to Hard Disk"), +#. "", // Initial progress bar label - not empty (reserve space!) +#. 100, +#. [ _("Evaluate filesystems to copy"), _("Copy root filesystem"), _("Copy additional filesystems") ], +#. [], +#. ""); +#. +#. Wizard::DisableBackButton (); +#. Wizard::DisableNextButton (); +#. +#. Progress::NextStage (); +#. Progress::Title (_("Evaluating filesystems to copy...")); +#: src/clients/inst_live_doit.rb:57 src/clients/inst_live_doit.rb:58 +msgid "Evaluating filesystems to copy..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_live_doit.rb:60 src/clients/inst_live_doit.rb:61 +msgid "Copying root filesystem..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_live_doit.rb:62 +msgid "Copying live image..." +msgstr "" + +#. Copy all the symlinks as needed +#. @param [Hash{String => String}] symlinks a map of resolved symlinks +#. @return [Boolean] true on success +#: src/clients/inst_live_doit.rb:152 src/clients/inst_live_doit.rb:154 +msgid "Copying %1..." +msgstr "" + +#. need to set some lower limit - roughly estimated maximum size of the last file which could have failed +#: src/clients/inst_live_doit.rb:222 +msgid "" +"Copying the live image to hard disk failed.\n" +"\n" +"You have run out of disk space. Choose\n" +"a bigger disk partition for the installation\n" +"of the live system." +msgstr "" + +#. generic error report +#: src/clients/inst_live_doit.rb:250 +msgid "Copying the live image to hard disk failed." +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/clients/inst_live_simple_proposal.rb:45 +#: src/clients/inst_live_simple_proposal.rb:211 +msgid "Installation Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. label +#: src/clients/inst_live_simple_proposal.rb:47 +msgid "Analyzing the system..." +msgstr "" + +#. partitioning summary +#: src/clients/inst_live_simple_proposal.rb:111 +msgid "Use %1%% of disk %2 for Linux" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_live_simple_proposal.rb:120 +msgid "Do not use disk %1" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_live_simple_proposal.rb:127 +msgid "Partitioning" +msgstr "" + +#. end of partitioning summary +#. bootloader summary +#: src/clients/inst_live_simple_proposal.rb:143 +msgid "System start-up" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_live_simple_proposal.rb:149 +msgid "Ask whether to boot Linux or existing system" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_live_simple_proposal.rb:150 +msgid "Boot only Linux" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_live_simple_proposal.rb:158 +msgid "System start time-out: %1 seconds" +msgstr "" + +#. end of bootloader summary +#. keyboard entry +#: src/clients/inst_live_simple_proposal.rb:167 +msgid "Keyboard" +msgstr "" + +#. end of keyboard entry +#. timezone entry +#: src/clients/inst_live_simple_proposal.rb:177 +msgid "Time Zone" +msgstr "" + +#. end of timezone entry +#: src/clients/inst_live_simple_proposal.rb:187 +msgid "Change Installation Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/3 +#: src/clients/inst_live_simple_proposal.rb:192 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Use <b>Accept</b> to perform a new installation with the values displayed.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/3 +#: src/clients/inst_live_simple_proposal.rb:196 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"To change the values, click the respective headline\n" +"or select <b>Change Installation Settings</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 3/3 +#: src/clients/inst_live_simple_proposal.rb:202 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Your hard disk has not been modified, you can still safely abort.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/1 +#: src/clients/inst_live_welcome.rb:37 +msgid "" +"<p>Welcome to the &product; installation.\n" +"Press <b>Next</p> to run the installation wizard.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption, %1 is product name (typically openSUSE) +#: src/clients/inst_live_welcome.rb:43 +msgid "Welcome to %1 installation" +msgstr "" + +#. wellcome label, %1 is product name +#: src/clients/inst_live_welcome.rb:47 +msgid "" +"Your %1 will be installed quickly\n" +"and easily in a few steps.\n" +"You will only have to answer some questions." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: error message - the module does not provide command line interface +#: src/clients/live-installer.rb:53 +msgid "There is no user interface available for this module." +msgstr "" + +#. pop-up, %1 is memory size, currently hardcoded "1 GB" +#: src/clients/live-installer.rb:78 +msgid "" +"Your computer has less than %1 of memory. This may not be\n" +"sufficient for the live installation, especially when installing\n" +"while running other applications.\n" +"Before continuing, close all running applications.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. continue/cancel pop-up +#: src/clients/live-installer.rb:121 +msgid "" +"YaST detected a mounted removable media. YaST cannot install\n" +"the system on mounted media.\n" +"Unmount the media to install the system on it.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. continue-cancel popup +#: src/clients/live-installer.rb:157 +msgid "" +"openSUSE installer detected DMRAID array.\n" +"It is not supported by the openSUSE live installer.\n" +"Continuing the installation may cause data loss." +msgstr "" + +#. popup dialog, text followed by 'Reboot Now' and 'Reboot Later' buttons +#: src/clients/live-installer.rb:218 +msgid "" +"The computer needs to be rebooted without the Live CD in the\n" +"drive to finish the installation. Either YaST can reboot\n" +"now or you can reboot any time later.\n" +"\n" +"Note that the Live CD is not ejected, you can either eject\n" +"it after the Live system shuts down or select \"Hard Disk\"\n" +"in the boot menu of the Live CD." +msgstr "" + +#. push button +#: src/clients/live-installer.rb:231 +msgid "Reboot &Now" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/live-installer.rb:232 +msgid "Reboot &Later" +msgstr "" + +#. error report +#: src/clients/live-installer.rb:246 +msgid "" +"Failed to restart the computer.\n" +"Reboot it manually. You may even need to push the\n" +"'Reset' button to restart it." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step title +#: src/clients/live_copy_files_finish.rb:76 +msgid "Copying files to installed system..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step title +#: src/clients/live_runme_at_boot_finish.rb:70 +msgid "Writing YaST Configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step title +#: src/clients/live_save_config_finish.rb:70 +msgid "Saving language..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step title +#: src/clients/live_save_config_finish.rb:75 +msgid "Saving keyboard configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step title +#: src/clients/live_save_config_finish.rb:80 +msgid "Saving time zone..." +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/mail.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/mail.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/mail.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,991 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. Command line help text for the mail module +#: src/clients/mail.rb:60 +msgid "Configuration of mail" +msgstr "" + +#. command line action help +#: src/clients/mail.rb:73 +msgid "Mail configuration summary" +msgstr "" + +#. TODO FIXME: Modify it to your needs! +#. For translators: mail read dialog help, part 1 of 2 +#: src/include/mail/helps.rb:30 +msgid "" +"<P><B><BIG>Initializing mail</BIG></B><BR>\n" +"Please wait...\n" +"<BR></P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. For translators: mail read dialog help, part 2 of 2 +#: src/include/mail/helps.rb:36 +msgid "" +"<P><B><BIG>Aborting the initialization:</BIG></B><BR>\n" +"Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing <B>Abort</B>\n" +"now.\n" +"</P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TODO FIXME: Modify it to your needs! +#. For translators: mail write dialog help, part 1 of 2 +#: src/include/mail/helps.rb:49 +msgid "" +"<P><B><BIG>Saving mail configuration</BIG></B><BR>\n" +"Please wait...\n" +"<BR></P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. For translators: mail write dialog help, part 2 of 2 +#: src/include/mail/helps.rb:55 +msgid "" +"<P><B><BIG>Aborting saving:</BIG></B><BR>\n" +"Abort saving by pressing <B>Abort</B>.\n" +"An additional dialog will inform you whether it is safe to do so.\n" +"</P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: mailer (MTA) selection dialog help, part 1 of 1 +#. do not translate MTA +#: src/include/mail/helps.rb:67 +msgid "" +"<p>Select the mail system (Mail Transfer Agent, MTA)\n" +"to install.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: connection type dialog help, part 1 of 2 +#: src/include/mail/helps.rb:73 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p>How are you connected to the Internet? With a dial-up connection,\n" +"mails will not be sent immediately but rather after invoking\n" +"<b>sendmail -q</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/mail/helps.rb:79 +msgid "" +"<p>If choosing <b>No Connection</b>, the mail server will be started.\n" +"However, only local mail transport is possible. The MTA listens to the localhost.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: masquerading dialog help, part 1 of 1 +#: src/include/mail/helps.rb:88 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p>Specify the rewriting of the sender's address here for each user.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: authentication dialog help 1/4 +#: src/include/mail/helps.rb:96 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p>Some servers require authentication for sending mails. Here you can\n" +"enter information for this option. If you do not want to use authentication,\n" +"simply leave these fields empty.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: authentication dialog help 2/4 +#: src/include/mail/helps.rb:103 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p>The outgoing mail server is generally intended for dial-up connections.\n" +"Enter the Internet service provider's SMTP server, such as <b>smtp.provider.com</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: authentication dialog help 3/4 +#: src/include/mail/helps.rb:109 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p>In the <b>User Name</b> field, enter the user name assigned by from your provider.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: authentication dialog help 4/4 +#: src/include/mail/helps.rb:113 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p>Enter your password in the <b>Password</b> field.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: authentication dialog help, 5/4 +#: src/include/mail/helps.rb:115 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p>Note: For simplicity, only one server is displayed in this dialog,\n" +"although there may be more of them in your configuration file.\n" +"They will not be lost.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: downloading dialog help, part 1 of 1 +#: src/include/mail/helps.rb:126 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p>These are parameters for downloading mail from\n" +"a POP or an IMAP server using <b>fetchmail</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: aliases dialog help, part 1 of 2 +#: src/include/mail/helps.rb:136 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p>This table redirects mail delivered locally.\n" +"Redirect it to another local user (useful for system accounts,\n" +"especially for <b>root</b>), to a remote address, or to a list of addresses.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: aliases dialog help, part 2 of 2 +#: src/include/mail/helps.rb:143 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p>See the aliases(5) manual page\n" +"for a description of advanced features.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: virtual domains dialog help, part 1 of 2 +#: src/include/mail/helps.rb:153 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p>This table redirects incoming mail. Unlike the alias table,\n" +"it also considers the domain\n" +"part of the address.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: virtual domains dialog help, part 2 of 2 +#: src/include/mail/helps.rb:160 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p>It allows hosting multiple \"virtual domains\"\n" +"on a single machine.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: continue/cancel dialog +#. %1 is a sysconfig variable name +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:120 +msgid "" +"The setting %1 is turned off. You have\n" +"probably modified the configuration files directly.\n" +"If you continue, it will be turned on and\n" +"Config Postfix will overwrite manual changes.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. After text freeze, but +#. a) either something is very broken -> user must know +#. b) user installed a different MTA -> knowledgeable enough to +#. ba) never see this message anyway +#. bb) read English +#. TODO: look at exim and mention it in the popup +#. Translators: error popup +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:140 +msgid "" +"YaST can only configure Postfix and Sendmail,\n" +"but neither of them is installed." +msgstr "" + +#. not to be displayed, #37554. +#. but ProbePackages still has to be called. +#. continue-cancel popup +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:157 +msgid "The configuration will be written now.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: dialog caption +#. Mailer: Sendmail or Postfix +#. Translators: frame label +#. Mailer: Sendmail or Postfix +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:204 src/include/mail/ui.rb:208 +msgid "Mail transfer agent" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: dialog caption +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:279 +msgid "General Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: frame label +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:282 +msgid "Connection type" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: radio button label +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:290 +msgid "&Permanent" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: radio button label +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:294 +msgid "&Dial-up" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: radio button label +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:299 +msgid "No &connection" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: radio button label +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:306 +msgid "Do not start Postfix as Daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: dialog caption +#. frame label +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:394 src/include/mail/ui.rb:419 +msgid "Outgoing Mail" +msgstr "" + +#. TLS +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:400 +msgid "TLS encryption" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:404 src/modules/Mail.rb:1353 +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:1356 src/modules/Mail.rb:1359 +msgid "No" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:405 +msgid "Use" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:406 +msgid "Enforce" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:410 +msgid "&Masquerading" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:411 +msgid "&Authentication" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: dialog caption +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:476 +msgid "Incoming Mail" +msgstr "" + +#. pushbutton +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:516 +msgid "&Details..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:522 +msgid "Start &fetchmail" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:523 +msgid "manual" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:523 +msgid "daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label: mail downloading (fetchmail) +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:529 +msgid "&Downloading" +msgstr "" + +#. menu button: details of incoming mail +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:548 +msgid "&Aliases..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:549 +msgid "&Virtual domains..." +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#. %1: variable name (eg. POSTFIX_LOCALDOMAINS) +#. %2: file name (eg. /etc/sysconfig/postfix) +#. %3: value (about 50 characters) +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:629 +msgid "" +"To be able to deliver mail to your local MTA,\n" +"the value of %1 in %2 will be set to\n" +"\"%3\"." +msgstr "" + +#. There is a check whether the information from the UI is +#. correct and complete. The login name may contain only +#. certain characters and must begin with a letter. +#. Already in Translation Memory +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:670 +msgid "" +"The user login may contain only\n" +"lower case letters, digits, \"-\" and \"_\"\n" +"and must begin with a letter or \"_\".\n" +"Please try again.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: popup dialog heading +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:709 +msgid "Sender address rewriting" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: text entry label +#. Translators: combo box label +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:712 src/include/mail/ui.rb:717 +#: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:269 +msgid "&Local user" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: text entry label +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:722 +msgid "&Display as" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: error message +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:754 +msgid "The address for this user is already defined." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:760 +msgid "The mail address format is incorrect." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: dialog caption +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:785 +msgid "Masquerading" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: radio button label +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:800 +msgid "Masquerade &local domains" +msgstr "" + +#. `HBox ( +#. `HSpacing (2), +#. `TextEntry (`id (`masqdomains), `opt (`disabled), _("That is"), ld) +#. // `Left (`Label (`opt (`outputField, `hstretch), ld)) +#. ), +#. Translators: radio button label +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:813 +msgid "Ma&squerade other domains" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: text entry label +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:823 +msgid "Do&mains to masquerade" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: table column headings +#. Translators: table column headings +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:835 src/include/mail/ui.rb:1153 +msgid "Local user" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: table column headings +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:837 +msgid "Display as" +msgstr "" + +#. `HBox ( +#. `HWeight (1, `ComboBox (`id (`user), `opt (`editable), _("Local user"), +#. ["holly", "jane", "tarzan"])), +#. `HWeight (2, `TextEntry (`id (`address), _("Display as"), "holly@red.dwarf")) +#. ), +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:847 src/include/mail/ui.rb:1158 +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:1314 src/include/mail/ui.rb:1397 +msgid "A&dd" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:848 src/include/mail/ui.rb:1159 +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:1315 src/include/mail/ui.rb:1398 +msgid "&Edit" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:849 +msgid "Dele&te" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: error popup +#. Already in Translation Memory +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:916 +msgid "The domain name is incorrect" +msgstr "" + +#. string mod = listToString (Mail::masquerade_other_domains); +#. list<string> lmod = []; +#. list<map> mu = Mail::masquerade_users; +#. Translators: dialog caption +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:952 +msgid "Outgoing Server Authentication" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:960 +msgid "Outgoing &Server" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:962 +msgid "&User name" +msgstr "" + +#. password entry +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:964 +msgid "&Password" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: popup dialog heading +#. Translators: dialog caption +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:1068 src/include/mail/ui.rb:1119 +msgid "Mail downloading" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: table column headings +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:1147 +msgid "Server" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: table column headings +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:1149 +msgid "Protocol" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: table column headings +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:1151 +msgid "User" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:1160 src/include/mail/ui.rb:1316 +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:1399 +msgid "De&lete" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: popup dialog heading +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:1232 +msgid "Incoming mail redirection" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: text entry label +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:1234 +msgid "&Alias" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: text entry label +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:1236 +msgid "&Destinations" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: error message +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:1269 +msgid "The alias format is incorrect." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: error message +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:1274 +msgid "The destinations for this alias are already defined." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: dialog caption +#. summary item +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:1298 src/modules/Mail.rb:1366 +msgid "Aliases" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: table column headings +#. Translators: table column headings +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:1306 src/include/mail/ui.rb:1389 +msgid "Alias" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: table column headings +#. Translators: table column headings +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:1308 src/include/mail/ui.rb:1391 +msgid "Destinations" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: dialog caption +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:1381 +msgid "Virtual domains" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: dialog caption +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:1499 +msgid "Mail configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. label +#: src/include/mail/ui.rb:1501 +msgid "Initializing..." +msgstr "" + +#. just a template, do not translate +#: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:71 +msgid "." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: text entry label +#: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:79 +msgid "&Outgoing mail server" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:83 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p>The outgoing mail server is generally intended for dial-up connections.\n" +"Enter the Internet service provider's SMTP server, such as\n" +"<b>smtp.provider.com</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: text entry label +#: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:102 +msgid "Do&main for the 'From' header" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:106 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p>You may want the mail you sent to appear as if it originated from\n" +"<b>company.com</b> instead of <b>pc-042.company.com</b>.\n" +"Use the text box provided or a more detailed dialog.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: text entry label +#: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:122 +msgid "&Domains for locally delivered mail" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:126 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p>Here, specify the domains for which the mail\n" +"will be delivered locally. If you enter nothing,\n" +"the local host name is assumed.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label +#: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:142 +msgid "Accept remote &SMTP connections" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:144 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p>Mail can be received directly via the SMTP protocol\n" +"or it can be downloaded from\n" +"a POP or an IMAP server using <b>fetchmail</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:156 +msgid "&Enable virus scanning (AMaViS)" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:162 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p><b>Enabling virus scanning (AMaViS)</b> checks incoming and outgoing mail\n" +"with AMaViS.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:168 +msgid "" +"<p>Enabling AMaViS will also enable the following modules: </p>\n" +"<p><b>Spamassassin</b> SPAM scanner</p>\n" +"<p><b>DKIM</b> checks Domain Key signed incomming mails</p>\n" +"<p><b>Clamav</b> open source virus scanner engine</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:175 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p>If AMaViS is not installed and you want to use it, it will be installed\n" +"automatically.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:186 +msgid "&Enable DKIM signing for outgoing mails." +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:190 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p><b>Enabling DKIM signig for outgoing mails.</b></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:194 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p>Enabling DKIM for outgoing emails requires additional actions. A SSL key\n" +"will be generated for the 'mydomain' value defined in Postfix. A new service\n" +"'submission' will be configured in Postfix. After this is set up you can send\n" +"email with this service 'submission' from 'mynetworks' with enabled SASL\n" +"authentication. Only the emails sent by this new service will be signed with\n" +"the domain key.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:204 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p>The public key of the domain key needs to be offered by a Domain Name\n" +"Service. The public key will be saved as a DNS TXT record\n" +"in <b>/var/db/dkim/[mydomain].public.txt</b> and needs to be deployed to an\n" +"according Domain Name Service. If there is a name service\n" +"running on this server, which is the authoritative server for that domain, the\n" +"public key will be added as a TXT record to that domain zone\n" +"automatically.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:215 +msgid "If you enable DKIM support, the virus scanning (AMaViS) will be enabled too." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: text entry label +#: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:224 +msgid "&Server" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: combo box label +#: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:234 +msgid "&Protocol" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: text entry label +#: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:243 +msgid "&Remote user name" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: text entry label +#: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:255 +msgid "P&assword" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: text entry label +#: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:282 +msgid "&Forward root's mail to" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:286 +msgid "" +"<p>It is recommended to have a regular user account\n" +"for the system administrator and redirect root's mail to this account.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: combo box label +#. /etc/sysconfig/postfix: POSTFIX_MDA +#: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:301 +msgid "&Delivery Mode" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:306 +msgid "<p>The <b>delivery mode</b> is usually <b>Directly</b>, unless you do not forward root's mail or want to access the mail via IMAP.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. LogView label. take a string from users? +#: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:345 +msgid "Reading the &User List" +msgstr "" + +#. LogView progress line +#: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:361 +msgid "Local users" +msgstr "" + +#. LogView progress line +#: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:377 +msgid "LDAP users" +msgstr "" + +#. LogView progress line +#: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:398 +msgid "NIS users" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: error popup +#. Translators: error popup +#: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:461 src/include/mail/widgets.rb:653 +msgid "The host name is incorrect" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: error popup +#. Translators: error popup +#. Translators: error popup +#: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:701 src/include/mail/widgets.rb:749 +#: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:779 +msgid "The user name format is incorrect." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: error popup +#. Validation +#: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:839 +msgid "Cannot use procmail when root's mail is not forwarded." +msgstr "" + +#. combo box choice: +#. deliver mail normally +#: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:863 +msgid "Directly" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box choice: +#. deliver mail through procmail +#: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:866 +msgid "Through procmail" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box choice: +#. deliver mail to imap -imapd using LMTP +#: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:869 +msgid "To IMAP Server" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: popup message part, ends with a newline +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:214 +msgid "AMaViS, a virus scanner, will be installed.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup. +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:228 +msgid "" +"AMaViS needs a virus scanner such as ClamAV\n" +"to do the actual scanning, but ClamAV was not found.\n" +"Configure a scanner manually." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: popup message part, ends with a newline +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:247 +msgid "Fetchmail, a mail downloading utility, will be installed.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: popup message part, ends with a newline +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:256 +msgid "Dovecot IMAP server, will be installed.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: dialog caption +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:300 +msgid "Initializing mail configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: progress label +#. do not translate MTA +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:309 +msgid "Determining Mail Transport Agent (MTA)" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: progress label +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:311 +msgid "Reading general settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: progress label +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:313 +msgid "Reading masquerading settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: progress label +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:315 +msgid "Reading downloading settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: progress label +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:317 +msgid "Reading alias tables" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: progress label +#. smtp-auth +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:320 +msgid "Reading authentication settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: error message, +#. %1 is a file name, +#. %2 is a long file name - leave it on a separate line +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:491 +msgid "" +"Error reading file %1. The file must have\n" +"a fixed format to be readable by YaST. For details, see\n" +"%2" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: error message +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:841 +msgid "Error writing the fetchmail configuration." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: error message +#. Translators: error message +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:933 src/modules/Mail.rb:942 +msgid "Error writing file %1" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: error message +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:963 +msgid "Error running config.postfix" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: error message +#. Translators: error message +#. Translators: error message +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:978 src/modules/Mail.rb:996 src/modules/Mail.rb:1013 +msgid "Error starting service %1." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: progress label +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:1032 +msgid "Writing general settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: progress label +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:1041 +msgid "Writing masquerading settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: progress label +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:1049 +msgid "Writing alias tables" +msgstr "" + +#. Write them unconditionally, because it is now possible to +#. enter them also in the Permanent mode. Bug #17417. +#. Translators: progress label +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:1061 +msgid "Writing downloading settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: progress label +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:1071 +msgid "Writing authentication settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: progress label +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:1080 +msgid "Finishing writing configuration files" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: progress label +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:1088 +msgid "Running Config Postfix" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: progress label +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:1098 +msgid "Restarting services" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: dialog caption +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:1105 +msgid "Saving mail configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. MTA used: other than Sendmail or Postfix +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:1300 +msgid "Other" +msgstr "" + +#. summary: connection type +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:1307 +msgid "Permanent" +msgstr "" + +#. summary: connection type +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:1310 +msgid "Dial-up" +msgstr "" + +#. summary: connection type +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:1313 +msgid "None" +msgstr "" + +#. summary header; mail transfer agent +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:1319 +msgid "MTA" +msgstr "" + +#. summary header +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:1322 +msgid "Connection Type" +msgstr "" + +#. summary header +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:1326 +msgid "Outgoing Mail Server" +msgstr "" + +#. summary header; the "From: foo@bar.com" mail header +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:1333 +msgid "From Header" +msgstr "" + +#. summary item +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:1339 +msgid "Local Domains" +msgstr "" + +#. summary item +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:1344 +msgid "Masquerade Other Domains" +msgstr "" + +#. summary item +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:1349 +msgid "Masquerade Users" +msgstr "" + +#. summary header +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:1352 +msgid "Accept remote SMTP connections" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:1353 src/modules/Mail.rb:1356 src/modules/Mail.rb:1359 +msgid "Yes" +msgstr "" + +#. summary header +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:1355 +msgid "Use AMaViS" +msgstr "" + +#. summary header +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:1358 +msgid "Use DKIM" +msgstr "" + +#. summary item +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:1361 +msgid "Fetchmail" +msgstr "" + +#. summary item +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:1374 +msgid "Virtual Users" +msgstr "" + +#. summary item +#: src/modules/Mail.rb:1379 +msgid "Authentication" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/multipath.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/multipath.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/multipath.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,429 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. Command line help text for the Xmultipath module +#: src/clients/multipath.rb:53 +msgid "Configuration of multipath" +msgstr "" + +#. Multipath summary dialog caption +#. Initialization dialog caption +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:56 src/include/multipath/wizards.rb:70 +msgid "Multipath Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:69 +msgid "Do ¬ use Multipath" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:77 +msgid "&Use Multipath" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:92 +msgid "Blacklist" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:97 src/include/multipath/complex.rb:122 +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:148 +msgid "Item" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:97 src/include/multipath/complex.rb:122 +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:148 +msgid "Value" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:117 +msgid "Blacklist Exceptions" +msgstr "" + +#. will be initiated in Read_Defaults.. +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:143 +msgid "Defaults" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:166 +msgid "Devices" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:171 +msgid "vendor" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:171 +msgid "product" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:190 +msgid "Multipaths" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:197 +msgid "alias" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:197 src/include/multipath/complex.rb:2284 +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:2955 +msgid "wwid" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:215 +msgid "Configure Defaults" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:216 +msgid "Configure Devices" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:218 +msgid "Configure Blacklist" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:223 +msgid "Configure Blacklist Exceptions" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:243 src/include/multipath/complex.rb:251 +#: src/modules/Multipath.rb:378 src/modules/Multipath.rb:387 +#: src/modules/Multipath.rb:398 +msgid "Status" +msgstr "" + +#. Disable configure tab during installation +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:244 src/include/multipath/complex.rb:251 +#: src/modules/Multipath.rb:359 src/modules/Multipath.rb:392 +#: src/modules/Multipath.rb:411 src/modules/Multipath.rb:455 +#: src/modules/Multipath.rb:481 src/modules/Multipath.rb:506 +#: src/modules/Multipath.rb:531 +msgid "Configure" +msgstr "" + +#. check if user input is legal, and popup necessary information +#. check if user input is legal, and popup necessary information +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:1063 src/include/multipath/complex.rb:3258 +msgid "Illegal parameters:\n" +msgstr "" + +#. duplicated configuraton checking +#. duplicated configuraton checking +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:1135 src/include/multipath/complex.rb:2001 +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:2669 src/include/multipath/complex.rb:3329 +msgid "Duplicated configuration." +msgstr "" + +#. used for store undecided input +#. used for store undecided input +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:1180 src/include/multipath/complex.rb:1226 +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:1244 src/include/multipath/complex.rb:3392 +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:3437 src/include/multipath/complex.rb:3455 +msgid "Show Details" +msgstr "" + +#. do not do with number id +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:1443 +msgid "Illegal parameter:" +msgstr "" + +#. devices section +#. if value is empty, do not write name into configuration file. +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:1893 src/include/multipath/complex.rb:2561 +msgid "Illegal parameters:" +msgstr "" + +#. do not handle, `ok will do with the value +#. do not handle, `ok will do with the value +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:2027 src/include/multipath/complex.rb:2033 +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:2272 src/include/multipath/complex.rb:2695 +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:2701 src/include/multipath/complex.rb:2943 +msgid "item" +msgstr "" + +#. duplicated configuraton checking +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:3343 +msgid "Duplicated configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:3607 +msgid "Can not find /sbin/multipath" +msgstr "" + +#. "multipath -l" may returns "" to bash +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:3647 +msgid "Use multipath failed:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:3653 +msgid "* Cannot enable multipathd." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:3663 +msgid "* Cannot start multipathd." +msgstr "" + +#. CallInsserv(true, "multipathd"); +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:3683 +msgid "Do not use multipath failed:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:3689 +msgid "* Cannot stop multipath." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/multipath/complex.rb:3699 +msgid "* Cannot disable multipathd." +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/multipath/helps.rb:36 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Initializing Multipath Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/multipath/helps.rb:40 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Saving Multipath Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog help for Status help +#: src/include/multipath/helps.rb:44 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Multipath Status</big></b><br>\n" +"\t\t\tStart or stop multipathd, check the multipath information.<br><br>\n" +"\n" +"\t\t\t<b><big>Stop/Start Multipathd</big></b><br>\n" +"\t\t\tClick <b>\"Use Multipath\"</b> to start multipathd. Click <b>\"Do not use Multipath\"</b> to stop multipathd.<br>\n" +"\t\t\tMultipath status information can still be displayed when multipathd stopped.<br><br>\n" +"\n" +"\t\t\t<b><big>Configure Multipath</big></b><br>\n" +"\t\t\tClick <b>Configure</b> Tab to make the multipath configurations.<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog help for Configure tab +#: src/include/multipath/helps.rb:56 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"\t\t\tAll the content of /etc/multipath.conf can be configured here. There are four sections in the configuration file:\n" +"\t\t\t<b>multipaths</b>, <b>defaults</b>, <b>blacklist</b>, <b>blacklist_exception</b>, <b>devices.</b><br><br>\n" +"\t\t\t<b>Multipaths:</b> list of multipaths finest-grained settings.<br>\n" +"\t\t\t<b>Defaults:</b> multipath-tools default settings.<br>\n" +"\t\t\tClick <b>\"Configure Defaults\"</b> button to configure defaults settings.<br>\n" +"\t\t\t<b>Blacklist:</b> list of device names to be discard as not multipath candidates.<br>\n" +"\t\t\tClick <b>\"Configure Blacklist\"</b> button to configure blacklist settings.<br>\n" +"\t\t\t<b>Blacklist Exceptions:</b> list of device names to be excluded from blacklist.<br>\n" +"\t\t\tClick <b>\"Configure Blacklist Exceptions\"</b> button to configure blacklist_exceptions settings.<br>\n" +"\t\t\t<b>Devices:</b> list of per storage controller settings. Overrides default settings, overridden by per multipath settings.<br>\n" +"\t\t\tClick <b>\"Configure devices\"</b> button to configure devices settings.<br><br>\n" +"\t\t\tClick <b>\"Finish\"</b> button to save and update the configurations.<br><br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog help for defaults section configure tab 1/3 +#: src/include/multipath/helps.rb:72 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Defaults Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"\t\t\tGlobal default settings can be configured and cleared here.<br>\n" +"\t\t\tAny default setting here will take effect in all multipath configurations, unless a corresponding local setting overwrites it.<br>\n" +"\t\t\tIf a default setting here is cleared, multipath will take its own value as default setting.<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog help for blacklist section configure tab 1/3 +#: src/include/multipath/helps.rb:79 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Blacklist Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"\t\t\tDevice names listed here can be discarded as not multipath candidates.<br>\n" +"\t\t\tThere are three methods to identify a device name: <b>wwid</b>, <b>devnode</b>, <b>device</b>.<br><br>\n" +"\t\t\t<b>wwid</b>: The world wide ID identifying the device in blacklist.<br>\n" +"\t\t\t<b>devnode</b>: Regular expression can be used here to identify device names in udev_dir (default in directory /dev). Common device names are cciss, fd, hd, md, dm, sr, scd, st, ram, raw, loop.<br>\n" +"\t\t\t<b>device</b>: Used to identify a specific storage controller in blacklist. A device can be specified by vendor and product name.<br>\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog help for blacklist_exception section configure tab 1/3 +#: src/include/multipath/helps.rb:89 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Blacklist Exceptions Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"\t\t\tDevice names listed here are excluded from blacklist.<br>\n" +"\t\t\tThere are three methods to identify a device name: <b>wwid</b>, <b>devnode</b>, <b>device</b>.<br><br>\n" +"\t\t\t<b>wwid</b>: The world wide ID identifying the device excepted from blacklist.<br>\n" +"\t\t\t<b>devnode</b>: Regular expression can be used here to identify device names in udev_dir (default in directory /dev). Common device names are cciss, fd, hd, md, dm, sr, scd, st, ram, raw, loop.<br>\n" +"\t\t\t<b>device</b>: Used to identify a specific storage controller excepted from blacklist. A device can be specified by vendor and product name.<br>\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog help for devcies section configure tab 1/3 +#: src/include/multipath/helps.rb:99 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Devices Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"\t\t\tPer storage controller settings are listed here, they override the default settings and are overridden by per multipath settings.<br>\n" +"\t\t\tEach device is identified by <b>vendor</b> and <b>product</b> name.<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. add quotes to configuration value, no matter how many words. +#. if the value has quotes pair, do not touch it. +#. if more than 1 quote at the head or end, only keep one. +#. if there are quote inside the value, ignore. +#: src/include/multipath/options.rb:832 src/include/multipath/options.rb:1662 +#: src/include/multipath/options.rb:1726 src/include/multipath/options.rb:1939 +msgid "should be a decimal integer" +msgstr "" + +#. replacewidget_notify = true; +#: src/include/multipath/options.rb:840 src/include/multipath/options.rb:857 +#: src/include/multipath/options.rb:911 src/include/multipath/options.rb:994 +#: src/include/multipath/options.rb:1079 src/include/multipath/options.rb:1156 +#: src/include/multipath/options.rb:1271 src/include/multipath/options.rb:1375 +#: src/include/multipath/options.rb:1437 src/include/multipath/options.rb:1538 +#: src/include/multipath/options.rb:1668 src/include/multipath/options.rb:1681 +#: src/include/multipath/options.rb:1744 src/include/multipath/options.rb:1805 +#: src/include/multipath/options.rb:1944 src/include/multipath/options.rb:1950 +#: src/include/multipath/options.rb:2017 src/include/multipath/options.rb:2171 +#: src/include/multipath/options.rb:2335 src/include/multipath/options.rb:2396 +msgid "illegal value" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/multipath/options.rb:847 src/include/multipath/options.rb:1674 +msgid "should be greater than 0" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/multipath/options.rb:1737 +msgid "invalid decimal integer" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/multipath/options.rb:2063 src/include/multipath/options.rb:2118 +#: src/include/multipath/options.rb:2223 src/include/multipath/options.rb:2278 +msgid "should not be empty" +msgstr "" + +#. Initialization dialog contents +#: src/include/multipath/wizards.rb:72 +msgid "Initializing..." +msgstr "" + +#. prepare for loading built-in configurations +#: src/modules/Multipath.rb:98 +msgid "Cannot read multipath section in multipath configuration." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Multipath.rb:106 +msgid "Cannot read defaults section in multipath configuration." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Multipath.rb:114 +msgid "Cannot read blacklist section in multipath configuration." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Multipath.rb:122 +msgid "Cannot read blacklist_exceptions section in multipath configuration." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Multipath.rb:132 +msgid "Cannot read devices section in multipath configuration." +msgstr "" + +#. Multipath read dialog caption +#: src/modules/Multipath.rb:145 +msgid "Initializing Multipath Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1/3 +#: src/modules/Multipath.rb:159 +msgid "Read configurations" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 2/3 +#: src/modules/Multipath.rb:161 +msgid "Read service status" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 3/3 +#: src/modules/Multipath.rb:163 +msgid "Detect the devices" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 1/3 +#: src/modules/Multipath.rb:167 +msgid "Reading the configurations..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 2/3 +#: src/modules/Multipath.rb:169 +msgid "Reading the service status..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 3/3 +#: src/modules/Multipath.rb:171 +msgid "Detecting the devices..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress finished +#. Progress finished +#: src/modules/Multipath.rb:173 src/modules/Multipath.rb:274 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#. BNC #418703 +#. Checking and Installing packages only if needed (possible) +#: src/modules/Multipath.rb:186 +msgid "Cannot install required packages." +msgstr "" + +#. Error message +#: src/modules/Multipath.rb:233 +msgid "Cannot detect devices." +msgstr "" + +#. Multipath read dialog caption +#: src/modules/Multipath.rb:248 +msgid "Saving Multipath Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1/3 +#: src/modules/Multipath.rb:264 +msgid "Write the settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 2/3 +#: src/modules/Multipath.rb:266 +msgid "Restart multipathd" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 1/2 +#: src/modules/Multipath.rb:270 +msgid "Writing the settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 2/2 +#: src/modules/Multipath.rb:272 +msgid "Restarting multipathd..." +msgstr "" + +#. write settings +#: src/modules/Multipath.rb:284 +msgid "Can not write settings." +msgstr "" + +#. restart multipathd +#: src/modules/Multipath.rb:299 +msgid "Restarting multipathd failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Multipath.rb:423 src/modules/Multipath.rb:432 +msgid "Ignore your modification?" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/ncurses-pkg.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/ncurses-pkg.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/ncurses-pkg.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,1126 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-09-28 18:16+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. headline of package versions popup +#: src/NCPackageSelector.cc:990 +msgid "Package Versions" +msgstr "" + +#. text above of list of all package versions +#: src/NCPackageSelector.cc:992 +msgid "List of all available package versions:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPackageSelector.cc:1105 +msgid "&Packages with Status" +msgstr "" + +#. headline - packages with automatic status change +#. headline of a popup with packages +#. the headline of the popup containing a list with packages with status changes +#: src/NCPackageSelector.cc:1280 src/NCPkgMenuDeps.cc:192 +#: src/NCPkgMenuDeps.cc:289 src/NCPkgStrings.cc:589 +msgid "Automatic Changes" +msgstr "" + +#. text part1 of popup with automatic changes (it's a label; text continous) +#: src/NCPackageSelector.cc:1282 src/NCPkgStrings.cc:596 +msgid "In addition to your manual selections, the following" +msgstr "" + +#. text part2 of popup with automatic changes +#. text part1 of popup with automatic changes continous +#: src/NCPackageSelector.cc:1284 src/NCPkgStrings.cc:603 +msgid "packages have been changed to resolve dependencies:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPackageSelector.cc:1307 +msgid "You can choose to install anyway, but you risk getting a corrupted system." +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPackageSelector.cc:1308 +msgid "&Continue anyway" +msgstr "" + +#. headline of a popup showing the package license +#: src/NCPackageSelector.cc:1502 +msgid "End User License Agreement" +msgstr "" + +#. label text - keep it short +#: src/NCPackageSelector.cc:1691 +msgid "Filter: " +msgstr "" + +#. label text - keep it short (use abbreviation if necessary) +#: src/NCPackageSelector.cc:1698 +msgid "Total Download Size: " +msgstr "" + +#. Help button +#: src/NCPackageSelector.cc:1711 src/NCPackageSelector.cc:1828 +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:107 +msgid "&Help" +msgstr "" + +#. add the Cancel button +#. begin: the label of the Cancel button +#: src/NCPackageSelector.cc:1717 src/NCPackageSelector.cc:1836 +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:691 +msgid "&Cancel" +msgstr "" + +#. add the OK button +#. the label of an Accept button +#: src/NCPackageSelector.cc:1722 src/NCPackageSelector.cc:1841 +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:705 +msgid "&Accept" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPackageSelector.cc:1747 +msgid "C&onfiguration" +msgstr "" + +#. fill seclection box +#: src/NCPkgFilterClassification.cc:74 +msgid "Recommended" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgFilterClassification.cc:77 +msgid "Suggested" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgFilterClassification.cc:80 +msgid "Orphaned" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgFilterClassification.cc:83 +msgid "Unneeded" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgFilterClassification.cc:203 +msgid "This is a list of useful packages. They will be additionally installed if recommeded by a newly installed package." +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgFilterClassification.cc:207 +msgid "It's suggested to install these packages because they fit to already installed packages. The decision to install it is by the user." +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgFilterClassification.cc:211 +msgid "The solver has detected that these packages are without a repository, i.e. updates aren't possible." +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgFilterClassification.cc:215 +msgid "These packages might be unneeded because former dependencies don't apply any longer." +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgFilterInstSummary.cc:65 +msgid "Delete" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgFilterInstSummary.cc:67 +msgid "Install" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgFilterInstSummary.cc:69 +msgid "Update" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgFilterInstSummary.cc:71 +msgid "Taboo" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgFilterInstSummary.cc:73 +msgid "Protected" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgFilterInstSummary.cc:75 +msgid "Keep" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgFilterInstSummary.cc:77 +msgid "Do not install" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: %s is a locale code, e.g. en_GB +#: src/NCPkgFilterLocale.cc:178 +#, c-format +msgid "Translations, dictionaries and other language-related files for <b>%s</b> locale" +msgstr "" + +#. the label of the selections +#: src/NCPkgFilterMain.cc:68 src/NCPkgStrings.cc:326 +msgid "Patterns" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgFilterMain.cc:71 +msgid "Languages" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgFilterMain.cc:74 +msgid "RPM Groups" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgFilterMain.cc:77 +msgid "Repositories" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgFilterMain.cc:80 +msgid "Search" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgFilterMain.cc:84 +msgid "Installation Summary" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgFilterMain.cc:87 +msgid "Package Classification" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgFilterPattern.cc:183 +#, c-format +msgid "%d of %d package installed" +msgid_plural "%d of %d packages installed" +msgstr[0] "" +msgstr[1] "" + +#: src/NCPkgFilterRepo.cc:196 +msgid "<b>@System</b>: local RPM database" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgFilterRepo.cc:199 +msgid "<b>Repository URL:</b>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgFilterSearch.cc:126 +msgid "&Ignore Case" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgFilterSearch.cc:132 +msgid "Search &Mode" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgFilterSearch.cc:134 +msgid "Contains" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgFilterSearch.cc:135 +msgid "Begins with" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgFilterSearch.cc:136 +msgid "Exact Match" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgFilterSearch.cc:137 +msgid "Use Wildcards" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgFilterSearch.cc:138 +msgid "Use RegExp" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgFilterSearch.cc:241 +msgid "Searching..." +msgstr "" + +#. Popup informs the user that the query std::string +#. entered for package search isn't correct +#: src/NCPkgFilterSearch.cc:262 +msgid "Query Error:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgFilterSearch.cc:275 +#, c-format +msgid "%d packages found" +msgstr "" + +#. Please note: add an appropriate number of whitespaces to get a well +#. formated menu (the [ ]s should be in one column) and use unique hotkeys until end: +#. begin: Actions menu, toggle the status of a package, e.g. change from installed to delete +#: src/NCPkgMenuAction.cc:72 +msgid "&Toggle [SPACE]" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuAction.cc:73 +msgid "&Install [+]" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuAction.cc:74 +msgid "&Delete [-]" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuAction.cc:75 +msgid "&Update [>]" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuAction.cc:76 +msgid "Ta&boo [!]" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuAction.cc:77 +msgid "&Lock [*]" +msgstr "" + +#. end: Actions menu, set status of all packages (title of a submenu) +#: src/NCPkgMenuAction.cc:79 +msgid "&All Listed Packages" +msgstr "" + +#. begin: submenu items actions concerning all packages +#: src/NCPkgMenuAction.cc:90 +msgid "&Install All" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuAction.cc:91 +msgid "&Delete All" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuAction.cc:92 +msgid "&Keep All" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuAction.cc:93 +msgid "U&pdate All Unconditionally" +msgstr "" + +#. end: submenu items: actions concerning all packages +#: src/NCPkgMenuAction.cc:95 +msgid "&Update If Newer Version Available" +msgstr "" + +#. YOU mode +#. Please note: add an appropriate number of whitespaces to get a well +#. formated menu (the [ ]s should be in one column) and use unique hotkeys until end: +#. begin: Online Update Actions menu +#: src/NCPkgMenuAction.cc:103 +msgid "&Toggle [SPACE]" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuAction.cc:104 +msgid "&Install [+]" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuAction.cc:105 +msgid "&Do Not Install [-]" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuAction.cc:106 +msgid "&Lock or Taboo [!]" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuConfig.cc:81 +msgid "Launch &Repository Manager" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuConfig.cc:82 +msgid "Launch &Online Update Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuConfig.cc:83 +msgid "&Action after Package Installation" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuConfig.cc:92 +msgid "&Restart Package Manager" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuConfig.cc:93 +msgid "&Close Package Manager" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuConfig.cc:94 +msgid "&Show Summary" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuDeps.cc:84 +msgid "&Automatic Dependency Check" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuDeps.cc:88 +msgid "&Check Dependencies Now" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuDeps.cc:91 +msgid "&System Verification Mode" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuDeps.cc:95 +msgid "&Verify System Now" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuDeps.cc:98 +msgid "Install &Recommended Packages" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuDeps.cc:102 +msgid "&Install Recommended Packages for Already Installed Packages Now" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuDeps.cc:105 +msgid "&Cleanup when Deleting Packages (Temporary Change)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuDeps.cc:109 +msgid "&Allow Vendor Change (Temporary Change)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuDeps.cc:113 +msgid "&Generate Dependency Solver Testcase" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuDeps.cc:169 +msgid "All package dependencies are OK." +msgstr "" + +#. part 1 of a text explaining the list of packages which follow +#: src/NCPkgMenuDeps.cc:194 +msgid "Being recommended by already installed packages, the following" +msgstr "" + +#. part 2 of the text +#: src/NCPkgMenuDeps.cc:196 src/NCPkgMenuDeps.cc:293 +msgid "packages have been automatically selected for installation:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuDeps.cc:226 +msgid "Dependency resolver test case written to " +msgstr "" + +#. part 1 of a text explaining the list of packages which follow +#: src/NCPkgMenuDeps.cc:291 +msgid "To fulfill the dependencies of already installed packages following" +msgstr "" + +#. dependencies OK, no automatic changes/the user has accepted the changes +#: src/NCPkgMenuDeps.cc:305 +msgid "System dependencies verify OK." +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuExtras.cc:78 +msgid "&Export Package List to File" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuExtras.cc:81 +msgid "&Import Package List from File" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuExtras.cc:84 +msgid "&Show Available Disk Space" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuExtras.cc:191 +msgid "Export List of All Packages and Patterns to File" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuExtras.cc:224 +msgid "Error exporting list of packages and patterns to " +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuExtras.cc:246 +msgid "Import List of All Packages and Patterns from File" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuExtras.cc:310 +msgid "Error importing list of packages and patterns from " +msgstr "" + +#. menu items of the filter menu for patches - keep them short +#. and use unique hotkeys from begin: to end: +#. begin: +#: src/NCPkgMenuFilter.cc:72 +msgid "&Needed Patches" +msgstr "" + +#. _( "Re&levant Patches" ) +#: src/NCPkgMenuFilter.cc:74 +msgid "&Installed Patches" +msgstr "" + +#. _( "&Satisfied Patches" ) ); +#: src/NCPkgMenuFilter.cc:76 +msgid "&Recommended" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuFilter.cc:77 +msgid "&Security" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuFilter.cc:78 +msgid "&Optional" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuFilter.cc:79 +msgid "&All Patches" +msgstr "" + +#. end: +#: src/NCPkgMenuFilter.cc:81 +msgid "S&earch" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuHelp.cc:71 +msgid "&General Help" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuHelp.cc:74 +msgid "&Package Status and Symbols" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuHelp.cc:77 +msgid "&How to Use the Filters" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuHelp.cc:80 +msgid "&Useful Functions in Menu" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuHelp.cc:84 +msgid "&Patch Status and Patch Installation" +msgstr "" + +#. begin: menu items of the view (package information) menu +#. please note: use unique hotkeys until end: +#: src/NCPkgMenuView.cc:71 +msgid "&Technical Data" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuView.cc:72 +msgid "&Package Description" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuView.cc:73 +msgid "Package &Versions" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuView.cc:74 +msgid "&File List" +msgstr "" + +#. end: menu items of the view menu +#. menu entry 1 - all about pkg dependencies +#: src/NCPkgMenuView.cc:76 src/NCPkgStrings.cc:57 +msgid "&Dependencies" +msgstr "" + +#. menu items of the patch view menu - keep them short and +#. use unique hotkeys from begin: to end: +#. begin: +#: src/NCPkgMenuView.cc:91 +msgid "&Long Description" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgMenuView.cc:92 +msgid "&Package List" +msgstr "" + +#. end: menu items of the view menu +#: src/NCPkgMenuView.cc:94 +msgid "&Versions" +msgstr "" + +#. name of the source package +#: src/NCPkgPackageDetails.cc:216 +msgid "Source Package: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgPackageDetails.cc:257 +msgid "<i>This information is available for installed packages only.</i>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgPackageDetails.cc:429 +msgid "References:<br>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgPatchSearch.cc:75 +msgid "Search for Patches" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgPatchSearch.cc:124 +msgid "Name of the Patch" +msgstr "" + +#. column header package description (keep it short!) +#: src/NCPkgPatchSearch.cc:126 src/NCPkgSearchSettings.cc:64 +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:387 +msgid "Summary" +msgstr "" + +#. the list containing the problems (the unresolved package dependencies) +#: src/NCPkgPopupDeps.cc:173 +msgid "&Problems" +msgstr "" + +#. the list containing the solutions of a dependency problem +#: src/NCPkgPopupDeps.cc:190 +msgid "Possible &Solutions" +msgstr "" + +#. hint for the user: more information below +#: src/NCPkgPopupDeps.cc:357 +msgid " see below" +msgstr "" + +#. hint for the user: there isn't any additional information +#. (for the currently selected solution of a dependency problem) +#: src/NCPkgPopupDeps.cc:542 +msgid "No further solution details available" +msgstr "" + +#. a help line for the dependency popup +#: src/NCPkgPopupDescr.cc:128 +msgid " [+] Select [-] Delete [>] Update " +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgPopupDiskspace.cc:348 +msgid "Error: Out of disk space!" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgPopupDiskspace.cc:356 +msgid "Warning: Disk space is running out!" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgSearchSettings.cc:62 +msgid "Name of the Package" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgSearchSettings.cc:66 +msgid "Keywords" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgSearchSettings.cc:68 +msgid "Description (time-consuming)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgSearchSettings.cc:70 +msgid "Provides" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgSearchSettings.cc:72 +msgid "Required by" +msgstr "" + +#. menu entry 2 - display different kinds of info on pkgs +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:64 +msgid "&View" +msgstr "" + +#. menu entry 3 - miscellaneous stuff +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:71 +msgid "&Extras" +msgstr "" + +#. pick a package filter - patterns, langs, repos, search,... +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:78 +msgid "&Filter" +msgstr "" + +#. All installed Packages +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:86 +msgid "Installed Packages" +msgstr "" + +#. Label under the pkg table - pkg name follows +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:93 +msgid "Package: " +msgstr "" + +#. Actions on pkgs (install, remove,..) +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:100 +msgid "A&ctions" +msgstr "" + +#. the headline of the help window +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:114 +msgid "General Help" +msgstr "" + +#. part1 of help text package installation +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:121 +msgid "<p><b>Welcome to the package selector</b></p><p>This tool will help you to manage the software on your system. You can install, update or remove single packages, as well as patterns (sets of packages serving certain purpose) or languages. Usually, you do not need to care about package dependencies when installing or removing anything, the solver will do it for you. The package selector consists of three main parts: <b>filters</b>, <b>package table</b> and <b>menu</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. part of help text package installation +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:129 +msgid "<p><b>Filter</b> on left panel is designed for easy orientation in a large amount of packages. Use filters to display only packages from a certain repository or in a selected pattern (for example, Games or C/C++ Development) or to search for particular keywords. More information on filters can be found in <i>How to use filters</i>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. additional help text for post installation +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:136 +msgid "<p><b>Package table</b> is the main component of the package selector. You will see a list of packages matching the current filter (for example, the selected RPM group or search result). Each line of the package table has several columns:</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. part2 of help text package installation +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:143 +msgid "<ol><li>Package status (for more information see <i>Package Status and Symbols</i>)</li> <li>Package name</li><li>Package summary</li><li>Available version (in some of the configured repositories)</li> <li>Installed version(empty for not yet installed packages)</li> <li>Package size</li></ol>" +msgstr "" + +#. part3 of help text package installation +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:151 +msgid "<p>The <b>Actions</b> menu below the table allows you to change the status of a selected package (or all packages in the list), for example, to delete a package or select an additional package for installation. The status change can also be done directly by pressing the key specified in the menu item (for detailed information about the package status, see <i>Package Status and Symbols</i>).</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. part4 of help text package installation +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:158 +msgid "<p><b>Menu</b> provides functions related to the handling of package dependencies. Display relevant information on packages or perform actions like opening the repository editor. For more information, see <i>Useful Functions in Menu</i>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. the headline of the help window +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:165 +msgid "Package Status and Symbols" +msgstr "" + +#. part 1 of help text package status +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:172 +msgid "<p>The package status can be changed using the <i>Actions</i> menu or the keys specified in the menu items. For example, use '+' to install an additional package.</p><p>The \"Taboo\" status means the package should never be installed. On the contrary, the \"Locked\" status means that the installed version of a package should always be kept.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. part 2 of help text package status +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:179 +msgid "<p>You can also use <b>RET</b> or <b>SPACE</b> to toggle the package status. The <i>Actions</i> menu also allows you to change the status for all packages in the list (select 'All Listed Packages').</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. part 3 of help text package status +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:185 +msgid "<p>The meaning of the status flags:</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text package status +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:192 +msgid "<p><b> + </b>: package will be installed</p><p><b>a+ </b>: package will be installed automatically</p><p><b> > </b>: package will be updated</p><p><b>a> </b>: package will be automatically updated</p><p><b> i </b>: package is installed</p><p><b> - </b>: package will be deleted</p><p><b>---</b>: never install this package (taboo)</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text package status +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:199 +msgid "<p><b>-i-</b>: keep the installed version and never update or delete it ( package locked )</p><p>Status information for pattern and languages:</p><p><b> i </b>: All requirements of this pattern/language are satisfied</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. label for an error popup +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:206 +msgid "How to Use Filters" +msgstr "" + +#. help text package status +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:213 +msgid "<p><b>Filter</b> allow you to filter all available packages according to the selected criteria. Package filters are based on package properties (repository, RPM group), package \"containers\" (patterns, languages), package classification or search results. Select the desired filter from the drop-down menu. Specific filters are described below.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text package status +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:220 +msgid "<p><b>Patterns</b> describe the features and functions a system should have (for example, X server or Console tools). Each pattern contains a set of packages it requires (must have), recommends (should have) and suggests (may have). If you select a pattern for installation, update, or deletion, the solver will run and change the status of subordinate packages accordingly.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text package status +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:227 +msgid "<p><b>Languages</b> are package containers very much like patterns. They contain packages with translations, dictionaries and other language-specific files for a selected language. <b>RPM Groups</b> are not package containers that can be installed. Instead, membership in a certain RPM group is a property of the package itself. They have a hierarchical (tree) structure. The <b>Repositories</b> filter displays packages available from a specific repository. </p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text package search +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:234 +msgid "<p>To use the <b>Search</b> filter, enter a keyword (or part of keyword) for the package search. For example, search for all 3D packages using the expression \"3d\". You can also search in package descriptions, RPM provides or requires. Select the appropriate check box and click the 'Search' button.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text package status +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:241 +msgid "<p>The <b>Installation summary</b> presents an overview of packages whose status has changed during this session (e.g. marked for installation or removal), either by the user or automatically by the solver. The filter <b>Package Classification</b> provides information about <i>Recommended</i>, <i>Suggested</i>, <i>Orphaned</i> and <i>Unneeded</i> packages.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. label for an error popup +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:248 +msgid "Useful Functions in Menu" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:254 +msgid "<p><b>Dependencies:</b><br> This menu offers various actions related to the handling of package dependencies. By default, package dependencies are checked with every status change. You will be informed about package conflicts in a dialog proposing possible conflict resolutions. To resolve the conflict, select one of the offered solutions and press 'OK -- Try Again'.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:260 +msgid "<p>To disable dependency checking on every status change, toggle <i>Automatic Dependency Check</i> OFF. You can check dependencies manually by selecting <i>Check Dependencies Now</i>. The <i>Verify system</i> entry will check the dependencies of already installed packages and resolve conflicts non-interactively, marking missing packages for automatic installation if necessary. For debugging purposes, use <i>Generate Dependency Solver Testcase</i>. It will dump package dependencies data into the directory <tt>/var/log/YaST2/solverTestcase</tt>. This is usually what you need when asked for a \"solver testcase\" in Bugzilla.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:267 +msgid "<p>Available options for dependency checking are:<br><i>Automatic Dependency Check</i> (see above), <i>Install Recommended Packages</i>: if ON, weak dependencies will be honored, <i>System Verification Mode</i>: repair dependencies of installed packages and solve immediately. Please note: after checking the system with <i>Verify System Now</i> the option <i>System Verification Mode</i> is ON (uncheck the option, if desired). These options are saved in the YaST configuration file <tt>/etc/sysconfig/yast2</tt>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:279 +msgid "<p>Advanced options:<br> <i>Cleanup when deleting packages</i>: remove dependent unused packages. <i>Allow vendor change</i>: package vendor may differ from vendor of installed package. These options will not be saved, they can only be set in the configuration file of the package library <tt>/etc/zypp/zypp.conf</tt>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:285 +msgid "<p><b>View:</b><br>Choose which information about the selected package will be displayed in the window below the package table. Available options are: package description, technical data (version, size, license etc.) package versions (all available), file list (all files included in the package) and dependencies (provides, requires etc.).</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:291 +msgid "<p><b>Configuration:</b><br>This menu integrates package selector with the rest of package management utils. From here, you can <b>Launch Repository Manager</b> and edit configured repositories or register to update repository and configure periodic download of available updates (<b>Launch Online Update Configuration</b>). Also, you can pick one of the three possible behaviours of package selector at exit - in <b>Action after Package Installation</b> menu.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:296 +msgid "<p><b>Extras:</b><br>Miscellaneous functions reside here. <i>Export Package List to File</i> will dump data on installed packages, patterns and languages into specified XML file. This file can be later read by <i>Import Package List from File</i> option e.g. on different computer. It will bring the set of packages on the target computer into the same state as described in provided XML file. <i>Show Available Disk Space</i> will show a popup table displaying disk usage and free disk space on currently mounted partition.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. label of a frame with search settings +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:304 +msgid "&Search in " +msgstr "" + +#. begin: text/labels for search popups (use unique hotkeys until the end:) +#. text for the package search popup +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:312 +msgid "Search &Phrase" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:332 +msgid "Code" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:338 +msgid "Language" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:344 +msgid "URL" +msgstr "" + +#. column header package name (keep it short!) +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:352 +msgid "Name" +msgstr "" + +#. column header installed package version (keep it short!) +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:359 +msgid "Version" +msgstr "" + +#. column header - repository of the package (e.g. openSUSE 10.3) +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:366 +msgid "Repository" +msgstr "" + +#. column header available package version (keep it short - use abbreviation!) +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:373 +msgid "Avail. Vers." +msgstr "" + +#. column header installed package version (keep it short - use abbreviation!) +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:380 +msgid "Inst. Vers." +msgstr "" + +#. column header package size (keep it short!) +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:395 +msgid "Size" +msgstr "" + +#. column header package architecture (keep it short!) +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:402 +msgid "Architecture" +msgstr "" + +#. column header patch kind (keep it short!) +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:409 +msgid "Kind" +msgstr "" + +#. a text for a small popup which is shown during package dependency checking +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:416 +msgid "Solving..." +msgstr "" + +#. a text for a small popup which is shown during writing package selection to a file +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:422 +msgid "Saving..." +msgstr "" + +#. a text for a samll popup which is shown during loading package selections from a file +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:428 +msgid "Loading..." +msgstr "" + +#. the headline of the disk space popup +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:435 +msgid "Disk Usage Overview" +msgstr "" + +#. column header name of the partition (keep it short!) +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:442 +msgid "Partition" +msgstr "" + +#. column header used disk space (keep it short!) +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:449 +msgid "Used" +msgstr "" + +#. column header free disk space (keep it short!) +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:456 +msgid "Free" +msgstr "" + +#. column header total disk space (keep it short!) +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:463 +msgid "Total" +msgstr "" + +#. +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:470 +msgid "<i>Out of disk space!</i>" +msgstr "" + +#. +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:477 +msgid "<b>Disk space is running out!</b>" +msgstr "" + +#. part of a text +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:484 +msgid "needs" +msgstr "" + +#. part of a text +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:491 +msgid "more disk space." +msgstr "" + +#. part of the package description +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:498 +msgid "<b>Version: </b>" +msgstr "" + +#. part of the package description +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:505 +msgid "<b>Size: </b>" +msgstr "" + +#. part of the package description +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:512 +msgid "<b>Installed: </b>" +msgstr "" + +#. part of the package description +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:519 +msgid "<b>Authors: </b>" +msgstr "" + +#. part of the package description +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:526 +msgid "<b>License: </b>" +msgstr "" + +#. part of the package description +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:533 +msgid "<b>Media No.: </b>" +msgstr "" + +#. part of the package description +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:540 +msgid "<b>Package Group: </b>" +msgstr "" + +#. part of the package description +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:547 +msgid "<b>Provides: </b>" +msgstr "" + +#. part of the package description +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:554 +msgid "<b>Requires: </b>" +msgstr "" + +#. part of the package description +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:561 +msgid "<b>Prerequires: </b>" +msgstr "" + +#. part of the package description +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:569 +msgid "<b>Conflicts with: </b>" +msgstr "" + +#. headline for a list of installed files +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:576 +msgid "<i>List of Installed Files:</i><br>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:582 +msgid "Translations, dictionaries and other language-related files for " +msgstr "" + +#. the headline of the help popup +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:610 +msgid "Patch Status and Patch Installation" +msgstr "" + +#. help text online udpate +#. Do NOT translate 'recommended' and 'security'! because the patch kind is always shown as english text. +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:618 +msgid "<p>General information about patches:</p><p>The patches of kind <b>security</b> are solving security issues and we highly recommend to install it. You should also install <b>recommended</b> patches, they usually contain important bug-fixes. Install <b>feature</b> patches if you are interested in the feature.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text online udpate continue +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:625 +msgid "<p>Patches for \"libzypp\" (Package, Patch, Pattern and Product Management) will always get installed first. Other patches must be installed on a second run.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text online udpate continue +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:632 +msgid "<p>Meaning of the status flags:</p><p><b>a+ </b>: Patches concerning your installation are preselected. They will be downloaded and installed on your system. If you do not want a certain patch, deselect it with '-'.</p><p><b> i </b>: All requirements of this patch are satisfied.</p><p><b> + </b>: You have selected this patch for installation.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text online udpate continue +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:639 +msgid "<p>More details about the status:<br>If there are several patches for a package (or a set of packages) which aren't yet applied to the system all got preselected and have status <b>a+</b>. If one of these patches is deselected with '-' it might show the status <b>i</b> afterwards. This is because any of the other patches concerning the same package(s) is still selected. The newer version(s) of the package(s) will be installed and with it this patch is satisfied. Deselecting of all patches is required if the patches are not wanted.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text online udpate continue +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:646 +msgid "<p>The menus:</p><p>The <b>Filter</b> menu allows to filter the patches, e.g. show the 'Installed' ones or list 'Security' patches. It also provides to search for patches.<br>Use the <b>Actions</b> menu to change the status of a patch.<br>The <b>View</b> menu offers the possibility to see which packages are concerned by the patch. Please note: If the filter is 'All Patches' the package list for some patches might be empty. This means no packages are concerned because none of the patch packages is installed on the system.<br>The <b>Dependencies</b> menu contains dependencies checks and the 'Generate Solver Testcase' entry.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. label for a warning popup +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:655 +msgid "Warning" +msgstr "" + +#. label for an error popup +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:662 +msgid "Error" +msgstr "" + +#. label for a notify popup +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:669 +msgid "Notify" +msgstr "" + +#. the label of an OK button +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:677 +msgid "&OK" +msgstr "" + +#. begin: the label of the Contiunue button +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:684 +msgid "C&ontinue" +msgstr "" + +#. the label of the Yes button +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:698 +msgid "&Yes" +msgstr "" + +#. the label of the No button +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:712 +msgid "&No" +msgstr "" + +#. the label of the Solve button - 'try again' implies that user +#. has to make some action (#213602) +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:720 +msgid "&OK -- Try Again" +msgstr "" + +#. text for a Notify popup +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:728 +msgid "<p>All changes in the package, patch or pattern selection will be lost.<br>Really exit?</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. the label of language table +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:736 +msgid "Available Languages" +msgstr "" + +#. the label of language table +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:743 +msgid "Available Repositories" +msgstr "" + +#. A label for a list of YOU Patches - keep it short - max 25 chars! +#. (the list shows all patches which are needed) +#. static const std::string value = _( "Installable Patches" ); +#. static const std::string value = _( "Relevant Patches" ); +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:753 +msgid "Needed Patches" +msgstr "" + +#. A label for a list of YOU Patches - keep it short - max. 25 chars! +#. (the list shows all patches which are already installed) +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:761 +msgid "Installed Patches" +msgstr "" + +#. A common label for a list of YOU Patches - keep it short - max. 25 chars! +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:769 +msgid "Online Update Patches" +msgstr "" + +#. the label Filter: Update Problem ( keep it short - max. 25 chars ) +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:776 +msgid "Update Problem -- see help" +msgstr "" + +#. the label for Filter: Search results +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:783 +msgid "Search Results" +msgstr "" + +#. the headline of the dependency popup +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:790 +msgid "Package Dependencies" +msgstr "" + +#. help text package status +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:797 +msgid "<b>Update Problem List</b><br><p>The packages in the list cannot be updated automatically.</p><p>Possible reasons:</p><p>They are obsoleted by other packages.</p><p>There is no newer version to which to update on any installation media.</p><p>They are third-party packages</p><p>Manually select what to do with them. The safest course of action is to delete them.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. column header source RPM installation (keep it short!) +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:804 +msgid "Source" +msgstr "" + +#. menu entry Update List +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:812 +msgid "&Update List" +msgstr "" + +#. part of the patch description +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:819 +msgid "<b>Patch: </b>" +msgstr "" + +#. info line is shown if YOU patch list is empty +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:826 +msgid "No patches available" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:832 +msgid "Script" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:838 +msgid "Incompatible Package Versions" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:845 +msgid "<p>You are trying to install multiversion-capable and non-multiversion-capable versions of this package at the same time.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:854 +msgid "<p>This version is multiversion-capable.</p><p>Press \"Continue\" to install this version and unselect the non-multiversion-capable version, \"Cancel\" to unselect this version and keep the other one.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:864 +msgid "<p>This version is not multiversion-capable.</p><p>Press \"Continue\" to install only this version and unselect all other versions, \"Cancel\" to unselect this version and keep the other ones.<p>" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/ncurses.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/ncurses.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/ncurses.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. label for text field showing the selected dir +#: src/NCAskForDirectory.cc:84 src/NCAskForFile.cc:126 +msgid "Selected Directory:" +msgstr "" + +#. label for checkbox +#: src/NCAskForDirectory.cc:92 src/NCAskForFile.cc:134 +msgid "&Detailed View" +msgstr "" + +#. column header name of diretcory +#: src/NCAskForDirectory.cc:98 src/NCFileSelection.cc:666 +#: src/NCFileSelection.cc:675 src/NCFileSelection.cc:686 +msgid "Directory Name" +msgstr "" + +#. stretchable = true +#. add the OK button +#: src/NCAskForDirectory.cc:114 src/NCAskForFile.cc:195 +msgid "&OK" +msgstr "" + +#. add the Cancel button +#: src/NCAskForDirectory.cc:121 src/NCAskForFile.cc:202 +msgid "&Cancel" +msgstr "" + +#: src/NCAskForFile.cc:143 +msgid "Directory name" +msgstr "" + +#. column header name of the file +#: src/NCAskForFile.cc:155 src/NCFileSelection.cc:434 +#: src/NCFileSelection.cc:443 src/NCFileSelection.cc:459 +msgid "File name" +msgstr "" + +#. label for text field showing the filename +#: src/NCAskForFile.cc:175 +msgid "&File name:" +msgstr "" + +#. label for text field showing the filter (e.g. *.bak) +#: src/NCAskForFile.cc:182 +msgid "Filter:" +msgstr "" + +#. column header size of the file +#: src/NCFileSelection.cc:445 +msgid "Size" +msgstr "" + +#. column header file permissions +#: src/NCFileSelection.cc:447 src/NCFileSelection.cc:676 +msgid "Permissions" +msgstr "" + +#. column header user +#: src/NCFileSelection.cc:449 src/NCFileSelection.cc:677 +msgid "User" +msgstr "" + +#. column header group +#: src/NCFileSelection.cc:451 src/NCFileSelection.cc:678 +msgid "Group" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/network.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/network.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/network.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,4188 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. Commandline help title +#: src/clients/dns.rb:63 +msgid "DNS Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Commandline command help +#. Commandline command help +#. Commandline command help +#. Commandline command help +#. Commandline command help +#: src/clients/dns.rb:71 src/clients/host.rb:67 src/clients/lan.rb:65 +#: src/clients/lan.rb:76 src/clients/remote.rb:64 +msgid "Display configuration summary" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/dns.rb:80 +msgid "Edit current settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/dns.rb:89 +msgid "Used machine hostname" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/dns.rb:94 +msgid "IP address of first nameserver." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/dns.rb:99 +msgid "IP address of second nameserver." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/dns.rb:104 +msgid "IP address of third nameserver." +msgstr "" + +#. Command line output Headline +#: src/clients/dns.rb:161 +msgid "DNS Configuration Summary:" +msgstr "" + +#. validator: a reference to boolean( string) is expected +#. setter: a reference to void( any) is expected +#. fail message: a string is expected +#: src/clients/dns.rb:186 +msgid "InvalidHostname. " +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/dns.rb:192 src/clients/dns.rb:200 src/clients/dns.rb:208 +msgid "Invalid IP. " +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/dns.rb:223 +msgid "Cannot set " +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/dns.rb:224 +msgid ". Network is managed by NetworkManager." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/dns.rb:243 +msgid "Invalid option value." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/dns.rb:252 +msgid "Internal error" +msgstr "" + +#. progress step title +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_finish.rb:63 +msgid "Writing Firewall Configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. Proposal title +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:141 +msgid "Firewall and SSH" +msgstr "" + +#. Menu entry label +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:143 +msgid "&Firewall and SSH" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:156 +msgid "Basic Firewall and SSH Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:161 +msgid "Firewall and SSH service" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: check-box label +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:172 +msgid "Enable Firewall" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: check-box label +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:181 +msgid "Enable SSH Service" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:195 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Firewall and SSH</big></b><br>\n" +"Firewall is a defensive mechanism that protects your computer from network attacks.\n" +"SSH is a service that allows logging into this computer remotely via dedicated\n" +"SSH client</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:201 +msgid "" +"<p>Here you can choose whether the firewall will be enabled or disabled after\n" +"the installation. It is recommended to keep it enabled.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:204 +msgid "" +"<p>With enabled firewall, you can decide whether to open firewall port for SSH\n" +"service and allow remote SSH logins. Independently you can also enable SSH service (i.e. it\n" +"will be started on computer boot).</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: help text +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:211 +msgid "" +"<p>You can also open VNC ports in firewall. It will not enable\n" +"the remote administration service on a running system but it is\n" +"started by the installer automatically if needed.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. anything but enabling the firewall closes this dialog +#. (VNC and SSH checkboxes do nothing) +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:284 +msgid "Firewall will be enabled (disable</a>)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:288 +msgid "Firewall will be disabled (enable</a>)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:294 +msgid "SSH service will be enabled (disable</a>)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:298 +msgid "SSH service will be disabled (enable</a>)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: check-box label +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:315 +msgid "Open SSH Port" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: check-box label +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:329 +msgid "Open &VNC Ports" +msgstr "" + +#. Show VNC port only if installing over VNC +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:347 +msgid "VNC ports will be open (close</a>)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:349 +msgid "VNC ports will be blocked (open</a>)" +msgstr "" + +#. Returns the SSH-port part of the firewall proposal description +#. Returns nil if this part should be skipped +#. @return [String] proposal html text +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:361 +msgid "SSH port will be open (block</a>)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:363 +msgid "SSH port will be blocked (open</a>)" +msgstr "" + +#. Commandline help title +#. configuration of hosts +#. Hosts dialog caption +#: src/clients/host.rb:57 src/include/network/services/host.rb:75 +msgid "Host Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Command line output Headline +#. configuration of hosts +#: src/clients/host.rb:123 +msgid "Host Configuration Summary:" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 1/3 +#: src/clients/inst_do_net_test.rb:107 +msgid "Connecting to Internet..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 2/3 +#: src/clients/inst_do_net_test.rb:109 +msgid "Downloading the latest release notes..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 3/3 +#: src/clients/inst_do_net_test.rb:111 +msgid "Closing connection..." +msgstr "" + +#. Test dialog caption +#: src/clients/inst_do_net_test.rb:239 +msgid "Running Internet Connection Test" +msgstr "" + +#. help for dialog "Running Internet Connection Test" +#: src/clients/inst_do_net_test.rb:242 +msgid "" +"<p>Here, view the progress of the\n" +"Internet connection test.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help for dialog "Running Internet Connection Test" +#: src/clients/inst_do_net_test.rb:246 +msgid "" +"<p>The test can be aborted by pressing\n" +"<b>Abort Test</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help for dialog "Running Internet Connection Test" +#: src/clients/inst_do_net_test.rb:254 +msgid "" +"<p>If the test fails, return to the network configuration\n" +"and correct the settings.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Label for result of internet test +#: src/clients/inst_do_net_test.rb:288 +msgid "Test Result:" +msgstr "" + +#. Push Button to abort internet test +#: src/clients/inst_do_net_test.rb:299 +msgid "&Abort Test" +msgstr "" + +#. Frame label: status of internet test +#: src/clients/inst_do_net_test.rb:304 +msgid "Test Status" +msgstr "" + +#. Push Button to see logs of internet test +#: src/clients/inst_do_net_test.rb:314 +msgid "&View Logs..." +msgstr "" + +#. result of internet test +#: src/clients/inst_do_net_test.rb:351 +msgid "Success" +msgstr "" + +#. result of internet test +#: src/clients/inst_do_net_test.rb:355 +msgid "Failure" +msgstr "" + +#. label of combobox where the log is selected +#: src/clients/inst_do_net_test.rb:365 +msgid "Kernel Network Interfaces" +msgstr "" + +#. label of combobox where the log is selected +#: src/clients/inst_do_net_test.rb:386 +msgid "Kernel Routing Table" +msgstr "" + +#. label of combobox where the log is selected +#: src/clients/inst_do_net_test.rb:406 +msgid "Hostname Lookup" +msgstr "" + +#. label of combobox where the log is selected +#: src/clients/inst_do_net_test.rb:426 +msgid "Kernel Messages" +msgstr "" + +#. label of combobox where the log is selected +#: src/clients/inst_do_net_test.rb:576 +msgid "Download of Release Notes" +msgstr "" + +#. popup error message +#: src/clients/inst_do_net_test.rb:719 +msgid "" +"Cannot install downloaded release notes.\n" +"RPM signature check failed." +msgstr "" + +#. popup error message +#: src/clients/inst_do_net_test.rb:746 +msgid "Installation of downloaded release notes failed." +msgstr "" + +#. label of combobox where the log is selected +#: src/clients/inst_do_net_test.rb:782 +msgid "Opening of Connection" +msgstr "" + +#. popup to inform user about the failure +#. popup to inform user about the failure +#: src/clients/inst_do_net_test.rb:789 src/clients/inst_do_net_test.rb:815 +msgid "" +"Connecting to the Internet failed. View\n" +"the logs for details.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Fallback for situation that mustn't exist +#: src/clients/inst_do_net_test.rb:873 +msgid "No URL for the release notes defined. Internet test cannot be performed." +msgstr "" + +#. popup informing user about the failure to retrieve release notes +#. most likely due to server-side error +#: src/clients/inst_do_net_test.rb:886 +msgid "" +"Download of latest release notes failed due to server-side error. \n" +"This does not necessarily imply a faulty network configuration.\n" +"\n" +"Click 'Continue' to proceed to the next installation step. To skip any steps\n" +"requiring an internet connection or to get back to your network configuration,\n" +"click 'Cancel'.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup to inform user about the failure +#: src/clients/inst_do_net_test.rb:898 +msgid "" +"Download of latest release notes failed. View\n" +"the logs for details." +msgstr "" + +#. label of combobox where the log is selected +#: src/clients/inst_do_net_test.rb:945 +msgid "Check for Patches" +msgstr "" + +#. popup to inform user about the failure +#: src/clients/inst_do_net_test.rb:954 +msgid "" +"Check for latest updates failed. View\n" +"the logs for details.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. label of combobox where the log is selected +#: src/clients/inst_do_net_test.rb:980 +msgid "Closing of Connection" +msgstr "" + +#. Commandline help title +#. Whole configuration of network but without reading and writing. +#. For use with autoinstallation and proposal +#. @param [String] mode if "proposal", NM dialog may be skipped +#. @return sequence result +#: src/clients/lan.rb:57 src/include/network/lan/wizards.rb:96 +msgid "Network Card Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Commandline command help +#: src/clients/lan.rb:87 +msgid "Add a network card" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/lan.rb:99 +msgid "Change existing configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Commandline command help +#: src/clients/lan.rb:107 +msgid "Delete a network card" +msgstr "" + +#. Commandline option help +#: src/clients/lan.rb:117 +msgid "List only configured cards" +msgstr "" + +#. Commandline option help +#: src/clients/lan.rb:121 +msgid "List only unconfigured cards" +msgstr "" + +#. Commandline option help +#: src/clients/lan.rb:127 +msgid "Device identifier" +msgstr "" + +#. Commandline option help +#: src/clients/lan.rb:132 +msgid "Config identifier" +msgstr "" + +#. Commandline option help +#: src/clients/lan.rb:137 +msgid "Use static or dynamic configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/lan.rb:141 +msgid "Configuration Name" +msgstr "" + +#. Commandline option help +#: src/clients/lan.rb:146 +msgid "Device IP address" +msgstr "" + +#. Commandline option help +#: src/clients/lan.rb:151 +msgid "Network mask" +msgstr "" + +#. Commandline option help +#: src/clients/lan.rb:156 +msgid "Prefix length" +msgstr "" + +#. Commandline option help +#: src/clients/lan.rb:161 +msgid "Bond Slaves" +msgstr "" + +#. Commandline option help +#: src/clients/lan.rb:166 +msgid "Ethernet Device for VLAN" +msgstr "" + +#. Commandline option help +#: src/clients/lan.rb:171 +msgid "Interfaces for Bridging" +msgstr "" + +#. see bnc#498993 +#. in case keep_install_network is set to true (in AY) +#. we'll keep values from installation +#. and merge with XML data (bnc#712864) +#: src/clients/lan_auto.rb:136 +msgid "Configuration Error: uninitialized interface." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help for network module +#: src/clients/network.rb:60 +msgid "" +"Configuration of network.\n" +"This is only a delegator to network sub-modules.\n" +"You can run these network modules:\n" +"\n" +"lan\t" +msgstr "" + +#. Selection box item +#: src/clients/network.rb:67 src/clients/network.rb:108 +msgid "Network Card" +msgstr "" + +#. Network dialog caption +#: src/clients/network.rb:88 +msgid "Network Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Network dialog help +#: src/clients/network.rb:91 +msgid "" +"<p>Choose one of the available network modules to configure\n" +" the corresponding devices and press <b>Launch</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Selection box label +#: src/clients/network.rb:105 +msgid "&Available Network Modules:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/network.rb:123 +msgid "&Launch" +msgstr "" + +#. Commandline help title +#: src/clients/remote.rb:54 +msgid "Remote Access Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Commandline command help +#: src/clients/remote.rb:74 +msgid "Allow remote access" +msgstr "" + +#. Commandline command help +#: src/clients/remote.rb:85 +msgid "Set 'yes' to allow or 'no' to disallow the remote administration" +msgstr "" + +#. Command line output Headline +#: src/clients/remote.rb:126 +msgid "Remote Access Configuration Summary:" +msgstr "" + +#. Command line error message +#: src/clients/remote.rb:146 +msgid "" +"Please set 'yes' to allow the remote administration\n" +"or 'no' to disallow it." +msgstr "" + +#. RichText label +#: src/clients/remote_proposal.rb:78 +msgid "VNC Remote Administration" +msgstr "" + +#. Menu label +#: src/clients/remote_proposal.rb:80 +msgid "VNC &Remote Administration" +msgstr "" + +#. Commandline help title +#. Main routing dialog +#. @return dialog result +#: src/clients/routing.rb:57 src/include/network/services/routing.rb:468 +msgid "Routing Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. FIXME +#: src/clients/routing.rb:64 +msgid "Show complete routing table" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/routing.rb:71 +msgid "Show routing table entry for selected destination" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/routing.rb:79 +msgid "IPv4 and IPv6 forwarding settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/routing.rb:87 +msgid "IPv4 only forwarding settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/routing.rb:95 +msgid "IPv6 only forwarding settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/routing.rb:103 +msgid "Add new route" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/routing.rb:111 +msgid "Edit an existing route" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/routing.rb:119 +msgid "Delete an existing route" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/routing.rb:130 +msgid "Destination IP address" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/routing.rb:132 +msgid "Gateway IP address" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/routing.rb:133 +msgid "Subnet mask" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/routing.rb:134 +msgid "Network device" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/routing.rb:135 +msgid "Additional options" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/routing.rb:136 +msgid "Show current settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/routing.rb:137 +msgid "Enable IP forwarding" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/routing.rb:138 +msgid "Disable IP forwarding" +msgstr "" + +#. main ui function +#. Frame label +#: src/clients/routing.rb:203 src/include/network/services/routing.rb:77 +msgid "Routing Table" +msgstr "" + +#. Table header 1/4 +#: src/clients/routing.rb:206 src/include/network/services/routing.rb:85 +msgid "Destination" +msgstr "" + +#. Table header 2/4 +#: src/clients/routing.rb:207 src/include/network/services/routing.rb:87 +msgid "Gateway" +msgstr "" + +#. Table header label +#: src/clients/routing.rb:208 src/include/network/lan/address.rb:99 +msgid "Netmask" +msgstr "" + +#. Table header 4/4 +#: src/clients/routing.rb:209 src/include/network/lan/complex.rb:75 +#: src/include/network/services/routing.rb:68 +#: src/include/network/services/routing.rb:72 +#: src/include/network/services/routing.rb:91 +msgid "Device" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/routing.rb:210 src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:399 +msgid "Options" +msgstr "" + +#. Handler for action "list" +#. @param [Hash{String => String}] options action options +#: src/clients/routing.rb:239 src/clients/routing.rb:377 +#: src/clients/routing.rb:423 +msgid "No entry for destination '%1' in routing table" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: %s is "IPv4" or "IPv6" +#: src/clients/routing.rb:261 +msgid "%s forwarding is enabled" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: %s is "IPv4" or "IPv6" +#: src/clients/routing.rb:264 +msgid "%s forwarding is disabled" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: %s is "IPv4" or "IPv6" +#: src/clients/routing.rb:268 +msgid "Enabling %s forwarding..." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: %s is "IPv4" or "IPv6" +#: src/clients/routing.rb:272 +msgid "Disabling %s forwarding..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/routing.rb:278 +msgid "IPv4 Forwarding:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/routing.rb:288 +msgid "IPv6 Forwarding:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/routing.rb:298 +msgid "IPv4 and IPv6 Forwarding:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/routing.rb:320 +msgid "At least destination and gateway IP addresses must be specified." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/routing.rb:329 +msgid "Adding '%1' destination to routing table ..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/routing.rb:343 +msgid "Destination IP address must be specified." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/routing.rb:348 +msgid "At least one of the following parameters (gateway, netmask, device, options) must be specified" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/routing.rb:370 +msgid "Updating '%1' destination in routing table ..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/routing.rb:415 +msgid "Deleting '%1' destination from routing table ..." +msgstr "" + +#. interface summary: WiFi without encryption +#. interface summary: WiFi without encryption +#: src/include/network/complex.rb:101 src/modules/LanItems.rb:1363 +msgid "Warning: no encryption is used." +msgstr "" + +#. Hyperlink: Change the configuration of an interface +#. Hyperlink: Change the configuration of an interface +#: src/include/network/complex.rb:107 src/modules/LanItems.rb:1365 +msgid "Change." +msgstr "" + +#. Table item +#. this is what used to be Virtual Interface +#. (eth0:1) +#: src/include/network/complex.rb:121 +msgid "Additional Address" +msgstr "" + +#. Summary text +#: src/include/network/complex.rb:171 +msgid "Already Configured Devices:" +msgstr "" + +#. Summary text +#: src/include/network/complex.rb:176 +msgid "Nothing is configured" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: src/include/network/complex.rb:202 +msgid "PCMCIA ISDN Card" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: src/include/network/complex.rb:204 +msgid "USB ISDN Card" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: src/include/network/complex.rb:206 +msgid "PCMCIA Ethernet Network Card" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: src/include/network/complex.rb:208 +msgid "USB Ethernet Network Card" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: src/include/network/complex.rb:210 +msgid "PCMCIA FDDI Network Card" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: src/include/network/complex.rb:212 +msgid "USB FDDI Network Card" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#. Device type label +#: src/include/network/complex.rb:214 src/include/network/complex.rb:218 +msgid "PCMCIA ISDN Connection" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#. Device type label +#: src/include/network/complex.rb:216 src/include/network/complex.rb:220 +msgid "USB ISDN Connection" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#. Device type label +#: src/include/network/complex.rb:222 src/include/network/complex.rb:226 +msgid "PCMCIA Modem" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#. Device type label +#: src/include/network/complex.rb:224 src/include/network/complex.rb:228 +msgid "USB Modem" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: src/include/network/complex.rb:230 +msgid "PCMCIA Token Ring Network Card" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: src/include/network/complex.rb:234 +msgid "USB Token Ring Network Card" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: src/include/network/complex.rb:236 +msgid "USB Network Device" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: src/include/network/complex.rb:238 +msgid "PCMCIA Wireless Network Card" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: src/include/network/complex.rb:240 +msgid "USB Wireless Network Card" +msgstr "" + +#. Device type label +#: src/include/network/complex.rb:257 +msgid "Unknown Network Device" +msgstr "" + +#. Modem status (%1 is device) +#. ISDN device status (%1 is device) +#. Network card status (%1 is device) +#: src/include/network/complex.rb:312 src/include/network/complex.rb:324 +#: src/include/network/complex.rb:383 +msgid "Configured as %1" +msgstr "" + +#. Modem status (%1 is device, %2 is provider) +#: src/include/network/complex.rb:316 +msgid "Configured as %1 with provider %2" +msgstr "" + +#. ISDN status (%1 is device, %2 is provider, %3 protocol) +#: src/include/network/complex.rb:333 +msgid "Configured as %1 with provider %2 (protocol %3)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/complex.rb:348 +msgid "Configured without address (NONE)" +msgstr "" + +#. Network card status +#: src/include/network/complex.rb:351 +msgid "Configured without an address" +msgstr "" + +#. Network card status (%1 is address) +#: src/include/network/complex.rb:355 +msgid "Configured with address %1" +msgstr "" + +#. Network card status (%1 is address, %2 is address) +#: src/include/network/complex.rb:361 +msgid "Configured with address %1 (remote %2)" +msgstr "" + +#. Network card status (%1 is protocol) +#: src/include/network/complex.rb:369 +msgid "Configured with %1" +msgstr "" + +#. Network card status (%1 is device, %2 is address) +#: src/include/network/complex.rb:387 +msgid "Configured as %1 with address %2" +msgstr "" + +#. Network card status (%1 is device, %2 is address, %3 is address) +#: src/include/network/complex.rb:394 +msgid "Configured as %1 with address %2 (remote %3)" +msgstr "" + +#. Network card status (%1 is device, %2 is protocol) +#: src/include/network/complex.rb:403 +msgid "Configured as %1 with %2" +msgstr "" + +#. Abbreviation for "The interface is Managed by NetworkManager" +#. ComboBox item +#: src/include/network/complex.rb:419 src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:438 +msgid "Managed" +msgstr "" + +#. Heading text +#: src/include/network/installation/dialogs.rb:59 +msgid "Enter Provider Password" +msgstr "" + +#. Steps dialog caption +#: src/include/network/installation/dialogs.rb:121 +msgid "Test Internet Connection" +msgstr "" + +#. Steps dialog caption 1/2 +#: src/include/network/installation/dialogs.rb:124 +msgid "" +"<p>Here, validate the Internet connection just\n" +"configured. The test is entirely optional.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Steps dialog caption 2/2 +#: src/include/network/installation/dialogs.rb:132 +msgid "" +"<p>A successful result enables you to run\n" +"the YaST Online Update.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Label text (keep lines max. 65 chars long) +#: src/include/network/installation/dialogs.rb:139 +msgid "" +"To validate your Internet access,\n" +"activate the test procedure." +msgstr "" + +#. Label text (keep lines max. 65 chars long) +#: src/include/network/installation/dialogs.rb:145 +msgid "" +"To validate your DSL Internet access,\n" +"activate the test procedure." +msgstr "" + +#. Label text (keep lines max. 65 chars long) +#: src/include/network/installation/dialogs.rb:149 +msgid "" +"To validate your ISDN Internet access,\n" +"activate the test procedure." +msgstr "" + +#. Label text (keep lines max. 65 chars long) +#: src/include/network/installation/dialogs.rb:153 +msgid "" +"To validate your modem Internet access,\n" +"activate the test procedure." +msgstr "" + +#. RadioButton label +#: src/include/network/installation/dialogs.rb:175 +msgid "&Yes, Test Connection to the Internet Via" +msgstr "" + +#. RadioButton label +#: src/include/network/installation/dialogs.rb:185 +msgid "N&o, Skip This Test" +msgstr "" + +#. label text - one step of during network test +#: src/include/network/installation/dialogs.rb:196 +msgid "- Connect to the Internet" +msgstr "" + +#. label text - one step of during network test +#: src/include/network/installation/dialogs.rb:201 +msgid "- Download latest release notes" +msgstr "" + +#. label text - one step of during network test +#: src/include/network/installation/dialogs.rb:207 +msgid "- Check for latest updates" +msgstr "" + +#. label text - one step of during network test +#: src/include/network/installation/dialogs.rb:212 +msgid "- Close connection" +msgstr "" + +#. Heading text +#: src/include/network/installation/dialogs.rb:223 +msgid "The following steps will be performed:" +msgstr "" + +#. Frame label +#: src/include/network/installation/dialogs.rb:231 +msgid "Select:" +msgstr "" + +#. RadioButton label +#: src/include/network/installation/dialogs.rb:284 +msgid "&Yes, Run Online Update Now" +msgstr "" + +#. RadioButton label +#: src/include/network/installation/dialogs.rb:286 +msgid "N&o, Skip Update" +msgstr "" + +#. Heading text +#: src/include/network/installation/dialogs.rb:296 +msgid "Online Updates Available" +msgstr "" + +#. Label text +#: src/include/network/installation/dialogs.rb:299 +msgid "Download and install them via the YaST Online Update?" +msgstr "" + +#. Heading +#: src/include/network/installation/dialogs.rb:344 +msgid "Internet Connection Test Logs:" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox label +#: src/include/network/installation/dialogs.rb:352 +msgid "&Select Log:" +msgstr "" + +#. Frame label +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:83 +msgid "Additional Addresses" +msgstr "" + +#. Table header label +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:95 +msgid "IPv4 Address Label" +msgstr "" + +#. Table header label +#. Table header label +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:97 src/include/network/lan/complex.rb:75 +#: src/include/network/services/host.rb:128 +msgid "IP Address" +msgstr "" + +#. PushButton label +#. PushButton label +#. PushButton label +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:106 +#: src/include/network/services/host.rb:139 +#: src/include/network/services/routing.rb:100 +msgid "Ad&d" +msgstr "" + +#. PushButton label +#. PushButton label +#. PushButton label +#. Pushbutton label +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:108 +#: src/include/network/services/host.rb:141 +#: src/include/network/services/routing.rb:102 +#: src/include/network/summary.rb:69 +msgid "&Edit" +msgstr "" + +#. PushButton label +#. PushButton label +#. PushButton label +#. Pushbutton label +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:110 +#: src/include/network/services/host.rb:143 +#: src/include/network/services/routing.rb:104 +#: src/include/network/summary.rb:71 +msgid "De&lete" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:131 +msgid "&Name of Interface" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:133 +msgid "<p>TODO kind of vague!</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Combo Box label +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:138 +msgid "Assign Interface to Firewall &Zone" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:146 +msgid "&Mandatory Interface" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox label +#. ComboBox label +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:154 +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:351 +msgid "&Device Type" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox label +#. TextEntry label +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:172 +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:337 +msgid "&Configuration Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:181 +msgid "Tunnel owner" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:182 +msgid "Tunnel group" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:191 +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:1297 +msgid "Bridged Devices" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:211 +msgid "Real Interface for &VLAN" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:214 +msgid "VLAN ID" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:231 +msgid "Bond Slaves and Order" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:235 +msgid "Up" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:236 +msgid "Down" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:240 +msgid "Bond &Slaves" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox label +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:256 +msgid "&Bond Driver Options" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:258 +msgid "<p>Select the bond driver options and edit them if necessary. </p>" +msgstr "" + +#. if (LanItems::type=="br") UI::ReplaceWidget(`rp, `Empty()); +#. else +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:283 +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:798 +msgid "No Link and IP Setup (Bonding Slaves)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:286 +msgid "Use iBFT Values" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:292 +msgid "Dynamic Address" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:308 +msgid "DHCP both version 4 and 6" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:309 +msgid "DHCP version 4 only" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:310 +msgid "DHCP version 6 only" +msgstr "" + +#. TODO : Stat ... Assigned +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:321 +msgid "Statically Assigned IP Address" +msgstr "" + +#. TextEntry label +#. TextEntry label +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:325 +#: src/include/network/lan/virtual.rb:213 +#: src/include/network/services/host.rb:341 +msgid "&IP Address" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:327 +msgid "&Subnet Mask" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:329 +msgid "&Hostname" +msgstr "" + +#. Text entry label +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:360 +msgid "R&emote IP Address" +msgstr "" + +#. validation error popup +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:369 +msgid "The remote IP address is invalid." +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:377 +msgid "&S/390" +msgstr "" + +#. validate device type, misdetection +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:1018 +msgid "" +"You have changed the interface type from the one\n" +"that has been detected. This only makes sense\n" +"if you know that the detection is wrong." +msgstr "" + +#. Popup text +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:1038 +msgid "Configuration %1 already present." +msgstr "" + +#. If firewall is active and interface in no zone, nothing +#. gets through (#62309) so warn and redirect to details +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:1062 +msgid "" +"The firewall is active, but this interface is not\n" +"in any zone. All its traffic would be blocked.\n" +"Assign it to a zone now?" +msgstr "" + +#. Validator for network masks adresses +#. @param [String] key the widget being validated +#. @param [Hash] event the event being handled +#. @return whether valid +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:1082 +msgid "No valid IP address." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:1089 +msgid "No valid netmask or prefix length." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:1097 +msgid "Invalid hostname." +msgstr "" + +#. There'll be no 127.0.0.2 -> remind user to define some hostname +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:1105 +msgid "" +"No hostname has been specified. We recommend to associate \n" +"a hostname with a static IP, otherwise the machine name will \n" +"not be resolvable without an active network connection.\n" +"\n" +"Really leave the hostname blank?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup text +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:1124 +msgid "" +"Duplicate IP address detected.\n" +"Really continue?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. @param [Array<String>] types network card types +#. @return their descriptions for CWM +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:1177 +msgid "&General" +msgstr "" + +#. TODO: "MANDATORY", +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:1188 +msgid "Device Activation" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:1192 +msgid "Firewall Zone" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:1197 +msgid "Maximum Transfer Unit (MTU)" +msgstr "" + +#. FIXME: we have helps per widget and for the whole +#. tab set but not for one tab +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:1207 +msgid "<p>Configure the detailed network card settings here.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. FIXME: here it does not complain about missing +#. shortcuts +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:1274 +msgid "&Address" +msgstr "" + +#. Address tab help +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:1277 +msgid "<p>Configure your IP address.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:1283 +msgid "&Hardware" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:1290 +msgid "&Bond Slaves" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:1304 +msgid "&Wireless" +msgstr "" + +#. Combo box label - when to activate device (e.g. on boot, manually, never,..) +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:1388 +msgid "Ifplugd Priority" +msgstr "" + +#. Device activation main help. The individual parts will be +#. substituted as %1 +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:1394 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>IFPLUGD PRIORITY</big></b></p> \n" +"<p> All interfaces configured with <b>On Cable Connection</b> and with IFPLUGD_PRIORITY != 0 will be\n" +" used mutually exclusive. If more then one of these interfaces is <b>On Cable Connection</b>\n" +" then we need a way to decide which interface to take up. Therefore we have to\n" +" set the priority of each interface. </p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Address dialog caption +#: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:1476 +msgid "Network Card Setup" +msgstr "" + +#. remove all aliases (bnc#590167) +#: src/include/network/lan/bridge.rb:103 +msgid "" +"At least one selected device is already configured.\n" +"Adapt the configuration for bridge?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Network card name (wireless) +#: src/include/network/lan/cards.rb:55 +msgid "Cisco/Aironet 802.11 wireless ISA/PCI and PCMCIA ethernet cards" +msgstr "" + +#. Network card name (wireless) +#: src/include/network/lan/cards.rb:62 +msgid "Lucent Orinoco, Prism II based, and similar wireless cards" +msgstr "" + +#. Network card name (wireless) +#: src/include/network/lan/cards.rb:69 +msgid "PCMCIA Lucent Orinoco, Prism II based, and similar wireless cards" +msgstr "" + +#. Network card name (wireless) +#: src/include/network/lan/cards.rb:76 +msgid "Wireless LAN cards using direct PCI interface" +msgstr "" + +#. Network card name (wireless) +#: src/include/network/lan/cards.rb:83 +msgid "Wireless LAN cards using the PLX9052 PCI bridge" +msgstr "" + +#. Network card name (wireless) +#: src/include/network/lan/cards.rb:90 +msgid "Wireless device using kernel module p80211.o" +msgstr "" + +#. Network card name (wireless) +#: src/include/network/lan/cards.rb:97 +msgid "Wireless device using kernel module prism2_cs.o" +msgstr "" + +#. Network card name (wireless) +#: src/include/network/lan/cards.rb:104 +msgid "Wireless device using kernel module prism2_pci.o" +msgstr "" + +#. Network card name (wireless) +#: src/include/network/lan/cards.rb:111 +msgid "Wireless device using kernel module prism2_plx.o" +msgstr "" + +#. Network card name (wireless) +#: src/include/network/lan/cards.rb:118 +msgid "Wireless device using kernel module prism2_usb.o" +msgstr "" + +#. Network card name +#: src/include/network/lan/cards.rb:126 +msgid "Apple onboard Ethernet mace" +msgstr "" + +#. Network card name +#: src/include/network/lan/cards.rb:132 +msgid "Apple onboard Ethernet bmac" +msgstr "" + +#. Network card name +#: src/include/network/lan/cards.rb:138 +msgid "Apple onboard Ethernet gmac" +msgstr "" + +#. Network card name +#: src/include/network/lan/cards.rb:171 +msgid "3Com 3c90x/3c980 B/C series" +msgstr "" + +#. Network card name +#: src/include/network/lan/cards.rb:202 +msgid "Apricot Xen-II onboard ethernet" +msgstr "" + +#. Network card name +#: src/include/network/lan/cards.rb:208 +msgid "AT-LAN-TEC/RealTek pocket adapter" +msgstr "" + +#. Network card name +#: src/include/network/lan/cards.rb:231 +msgid "D-Link DE600 pocket adapter" +msgstr "" + +#. Network card name +#: src/include/network/lan/cards.rb:237 +msgid "D-Link DE620 pocket adapter" +msgstr "" + +#. Network card name +#: src/include/network/lan/cards.rb:299 +msgid "ICL EtherTeam 16i/32 (experimental)" +msgstr "" + +#. Network card name +#: src/include/network/lan/cards.rb:320 +msgid "Intel PRO/100 / EtherExpress PRO/100 (alternate driver)" +msgstr "" + +#. Network card name +#: src/include/network/lan/cards.rb:440 +msgid "iSeries Virtual Network" +msgstr "" + +#. Network card name +#: src/include/network/lan/cards.rb:448 +msgid "IBM Tropic chipset token ring" +msgstr "" + +#. Network card name +#: src/include/network/lan/cards.rb:454 +msgid "IBM Olympic chipset PCI Token Ring" +msgstr "" + +#. Network card name +#: src/include/network/lan/cards.rb:460 +msgid "IBM OSA Token Ring" +msgstr "" + +#. Network card name +#: src/include/network/lan/cards.rb:473 +msgid "ARCnet COM90xx (standard)" +msgstr "" + +#. Network card name +#: src/include/network/lan/cards.rb:479 +msgid "ARCnet COM90xx (in IO-mapped mode)" +msgstr "" + +#. Network card name +#: src/include/network/lan/cards.rb:510 +msgid "Digital Equipment Corporation FDDI controller" +msgstr "" + +#. Network card name +#: src/include/network/lan/cards.rb:516 +msgid "SysKonnect FDDI adapter (SK-55xx, SK-58xx, Netelligent 100)" +msgstr "" + +#. Network subsystem name +#: src/include/network/lan/cards.rb:533 +msgid "Channel-to-Channel (CTC) network" +msgstr "" + +#. Network subsystem name +#: src/include/network/lan/cards.rb:541 +msgid "Hipersockets (HSI) Network" +msgstr "" + +#. Network subsystem name +#: src/include/network/lan/cards.rb:548 +msgid "IBM OSA LCS" +msgstr "" + +#. Network subsystem name +#: src/include/network/lan/cards.rb:553 +msgid "Enterprise System Connector (ESCON) network" +msgstr "" + +#. Network subsystem name +#: src/include/network/lan/cards.rb:561 +msgid "Fiberchannel System Connector (FICON) Network" +msgstr "" + +#. Network subsystem name +#: src/include/network/lan/cards.rb:569 +msgid "Inter User Communication Vehicle (IUCV)" +msgstr "" + +#. Network card name +#: src/include/network/lan/cards.rb:577 +msgid "CI7000 adapter" +msgstr "" + +#. list > overview = (list >)LanItems::Overview(); +#: src/include/network/lan/cmdline.rb:89 +msgid "Use \"id\" option to determine device." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/cmdline.rb:98 +msgid "Value of \"id\" is out of range. Use \"list\" option to check max. value of \"id\"." +msgstr "" + +#. Handler for action "add" +#. @param [Hash{String => String}] options action options +#. Handler for action "edit" +#. @param [Hash{String => String}] options action options +#: src/include/network/lan/cmdline.rb:214 +#: src/include/network/lan/cmdline.rb:265 +msgid "Impossible value for bootproto." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/cmdline.rb:223 +#: src/include/network/lan/cmdline.rb:289 +msgid "Impossible value for startmode." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/cmdline.rb:271 +msgid "For static configuration, the \"ip\" option is needed." +msgstr "" + +#. Handler for action "delete" +#. @param [Hash{String => String}] options action options +#: src/include/network/lan/cmdline.rb:316 +msgid "The device was deleted." +msgstr "" + +#. , :gw6dev encoding: utf-8 +#. *************************************************************************** +#. +#. Copyright (c) 2012 Novell, Inc. +#. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or +#. modify it under the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as +#. published by the Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +#. but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +#. MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +#. GNU General Public License for more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +#. along with this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, +#. you may find current contact information at www.novell.com +#. +#. ************************************************************************** +#. File: include/network/lan/dialogs.ycp +#. Package: Network configuration +#. Summary: Summary, overview and IO dialogs for network cards config +#. Authors: Michal Svec +#: src/include/network/lan/complex.rb:75 +msgid "Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/complex.rb:75 +msgid "Note" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/complex.rb:115 +msgid "Global Options" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/complex.rb:125 +msgid "Overview" +msgstr "" + +#. continue-cancel popup, #178848 +#. %1 is a (long) path to a README file +#: src/include/network/lan/complex.rb:153 +msgid "" +"A Xen network bridge was detected.\n" +"Due to the renaming of network interfaces by the bridge script,\n" +"network interfaces should not be configured or restarted.\n" +"See %1 for details." +msgstr "" + +#. Write settings dialog +#. @return `abort if aborted and `next otherwise +#: src/include/network/lan/complex.rb:199 +msgid "" +"Firmware is needed. Install it from \n" +"the add-on CD.\n" +"First add the add-on CD to your YaST software repositories then return \n" +"to this configuration dialog.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/complex.rb:213 +msgid "" +"The device needs a firmware to function properly. Usually, it can be\n" +"downloaded from your driver vendor's Web page. \n" +"If you have already downloaded and installed the firmware, click\n" +"<b>Continue</b> to configure the device. Otherwise click <b>Cancel</b> and\n" +"return to this dialog once you have installed the firmware.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. this is one of 2 places to install packages :-( +#. - kernel modules (InstallKernel): before loaded +#. - wlan firmware: here, just because it is copied from modems +#. #45960 +#: src/include/network/lan/complex.rb:232 +msgid "Installing firmware" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/complex.rb:233 +msgid "For successful firmware installation, the 'install_bcm43xx_firmware' script needs to be executed. Execute it now?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/complex.rb:247 +msgid "An error occurred during firmware installation." +msgstr "" + +#. Continue-Cancel popup +#: src/include/network/lan/complex.rb:402 +msgid "" +"The interface is currently set to be managed\n" +"by the NetworkManager applet.\n" +"\n" +"If you edit the settings for this interface here,\n" +"the interface will no longer be managed by NetworkManager.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. warn user when device to delete has STARTMODE=nfsroot (bnc#433867) +#: src/include/network/lan/complex.rb:456 +msgid "Device you select has STARTMODE=nfsroot. Really delete?" +msgstr "" + +#. Network setup method dialog caption +#: src/include/network/lan/complex.rb:487 src/include/network/widgets.rb:363 +msgid "Network Setup Method" +msgstr "" + +#. Evaluates if user should be asked again according dialogs result value +#. +#. it is basically useful if user aborts dialog and he has done some +#. changes already. Calling this function may results in confirmation +#. popup. +#: src/include/network/lan/complex.rb:519 +msgid "Network Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Frame label +#: src/include/network/lan/dhcp.rb:48 +msgid "DHCP Client Options" +msgstr "" + +#. CheckBox label +#. `Left(`CheckBox(`id(`broadcast), _("Request Broad&cast Response"))), +#. `VSpacing(0.49), +#. TextEntry label +#: src/include/network/lan/dhcp.rb:58 +msgid "DHCP Client &Identifier" +msgstr "" + +#. TextEntry label +#: src/include/network/lan/dhcp.rb:64 +msgid "&Hostname to Send" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/dhcp.rb:71 +msgid "Change Default Route via DHCP" +msgstr "" + +#. Manual network card setup help 1/4 +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:82 +msgid "" +"<p>Set up hardware-specific options for \n" +"your network device here.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Manual network card setup help 2/4 +#. translators: do not translated udev, MAC, BusID +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:91 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Device Type</b>. Various device types are available, select \n" +"one according your needs.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:99 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Udev Rules</b> are rules for the kernel device manager that allow\n" +"associating the MAC address or BusID of the network device with its name (for\n" +"example, eth1, wlan0 ) and assures a persistent device name upon reboot.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:105 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Show visible port identification</b> allows you to physically identify now configured NIC. \n" +"Set appropriate time, click <b>Blink</b> and LED diodes on you NIC will start blinking for selected time.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Manual network card setup help 2/4 +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:118 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Kernel Module</b>. Enter the kernel module (driver) name \n" +"for your network device here. If the device is already configured, see if there is more than one driver available for\n" +"your device in the drop-down list. If necessary, choose a driver from the list, but usually the default value works.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Manual networ card setup help 3/4 +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:125 +msgid "" +"<p>Additionally, specify <b>Options</b> for the kernel module. Use this\n" +"format: <i>option</i>=<i>value</i>. Each entry should be space-separated, for example: <i>io=0x300 irq=5</i>. <b>Note:</b> If two cards are \n" +"configured with the same module name, the options will be merged while saving.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:131 +msgid "<p>If you specify options via <b>Ethtool options</b>, ifup will call ethtool with these options.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Manual dialog help 4/4 +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:140 +msgid "" +"<p>If you have a <b>PCMCIA</b> network card, select PCMCIA.\n" +"If you have a <b>USB</b> network card, select USB.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. overwrite help +#. Manual dialog help 5/4 +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:149 +msgid "" +"<p>Here, set up your networking device. The values will be\n" +"written to <i>/etc/modprobe.conf</i> or <i>/etc/chandev.conf</i>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Manual dialog help 6/4 +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:153 +msgid "" +"<p>Options for the module should be written in the format specified\n" +"in the <b>IBM Device Drivers and Installation Commands</b> manual.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. CheckBox label +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:281 +msgid "&PCMCIA" +msgstr "" + +#. CheckBox label +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:290 +msgid "&USB" +msgstr "" + +#. #116211 - allow user to change modules from list +#. Frame label +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:302 +msgid "&Kernel Module" +msgstr "" + +#. Text entry label +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:312 +msgid "&Module Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:365 +msgid "Udev Rules" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:367 +msgid "Device Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:368 +msgid "Change" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:379 +msgid "Show Visible Port Identification" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: how many seconds will card be blinking +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:384 +msgid "Seconds" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:389 +msgid "Blink" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:394 +msgid "Ethtool Options" +msgstr "" + +#. Manual selection caption +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:472 +msgid "Manual Network Card Selection" +msgstr "" + +#. Manual selection help +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:475 +msgid "" +"<p>Select the network card to configure. Search\n" +"for a particular network card by entering the name in the search entry.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Selection box label +#. Selection box title +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:485 +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:540 +msgid "&Network Card" +msgstr "" + +#. Text entry field +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:489 +msgid "&Search" +msgstr "" + +#. bnc#767946 +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:799 +msgid "" +"Configuration name %1 already exists.\n" +"Choose a different one." +msgstr "" + +#. S/390 dialog caption +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:854 +msgid "S/390 Network Card Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Frame label +#. Frame label +#. Frame label +#. Frame label +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:873 +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:975 +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:1042 +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:1079 +msgid "S/390 Device Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. TextEntry label +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:883 +msgid "&Port Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:888 +msgid "Port Number" +msgstr "" + +#. CheckBox label +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:902 +msgid "&Enable IPA Takeover" +msgstr "" + +#. CheckBox label +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:909 +msgid "Enable &Layer 2 Support" +msgstr "" + +#. TextEntry label +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:916 +msgid "Layer2 &MAC Address" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:924 +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:1000 +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:1054 +msgid "Read Channel" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:930 +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:1006 +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:1060 +msgid "Write Channel" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:936 +msgid "Control Channel" +msgstr "" + +#. S/390 dialog help: QETH Port name +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:947 +msgid "<p>Enter the <b>Port Name</b> for this interface (case-sensitive).</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. S/390 dialog help: QETH Options +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:951 +msgid "<p>Enter any additional <b>Options</b> for this interface (separated by spaces).</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:954 +msgid "<p>Select <b>Enable IPA Takeover</b> if IP address takeover should be enabled for this interface.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:957 +msgid "<p>Select <b>Enable Layer 2 Support</b> if this card has been configured with layer 2 support.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:960 +msgid "<p>Enter the <b>Layer 2 MAC Address</b> if this card has been configured with layer 2 support.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. TextEntry label +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:984 +msgid "&Port Number" +msgstr "" + +#. TextEntry label +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:992 +msgid "&LANCMD Time-Out" +msgstr "" + +#. S/390 dialog help: LCS +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:1017 +msgid "<p>Choose the <b>Port Number</b> for this interface.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:1018 +msgid "<p>Specify the <b>LANCMD Time-Out</b> for this interface.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox item: CTC device protocol +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:1023 +msgid "Compatibility Mode" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox item: CTC device protocol +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:1025 +msgid "Extended Mode" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox item: CTC device protocol +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:1027 +msgid "CTC-Based tty (Linux to Linux Connections)" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox item: CTC device protocol +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:1029 +msgid "Compatibility Mode with OS/390 and z/OS" +msgstr "" + +#. TextEntry label +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:1048 +msgid "&Protocol" +msgstr "" + +#. S/390 dialog help: CTC +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:1071 +msgid "<p>Choose the <b>Protocol</b> for this interface.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. TextEntry label, #42789 +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:1088 +msgid "&Peer Name" +msgstr "" + +#. S/390 dialog help: IUCV, #42789 +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:1099 +msgid "" +"<p>Enter the name of the IUCV peer,\n" +"for example, the z/VM user name with which to connect (case-sensitive).</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. #176330, must be static +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:1220 +msgid "" +"An error occurred while creating device.\n" +"See YaST log for details." +msgstr "" + +#. Manual network card configuration dialog +#. @return dialog result +#: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:1242 +msgid "Hardware Dialog" +msgstr "" + +#. Network cards read dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:31 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Initializing Network Card\n" +"Configuration</big></b><br>Please wait...<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Network cards read dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:35 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting the Initialization:</big></b><br>\n" +"Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing <B>Abort</B> now.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Network cards write dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:39 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Saving Network Card\n" +"Configuration</big></b><br>Please wait...<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Network cards write dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:43 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Saving:</big></b><br>\n" +"Abort saving by pressing <b>Abort</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Network setup method help +#. NetworkManager and wicked are programs +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:48 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Network Setup Method</big></b></p>\n" +"<p>Use the <b>NetworkManager</b> as a desktop applet\n" +"managing connections for all interfaces. It is well suited\n" +"for switching among wired and wireless networks.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:54 +msgid "" +"<p>Use <b>wicked</b> if you do not run a desktop environment\n" +"or need to use multiple interfaces at the same time.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. For systems not including NetworkManager by default (bnc#892678) +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:59 +msgid "" +"<p><b>NetworkManager</b> is not part of every base\n" +"installation repository. For example, to enable it on SUSE\n" +"Linux Enterprise Server add the Workstation Extension\n" +"repository and install the 'NetworkManager' package.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:66 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Network Card Overview</big></b><br>\n" +"Obtain an overview of installed network cards. Additionally,\n" +"edit their configuration.<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:71 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Adding a Network Card:</big></b><br>\n" +"Press <b>Add</b> to configure a new network card manually.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:74 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Configuring or Deleting:</big></b><br>\n" +"Choose a network card to change or remove.\n" +"Then press <b>Edit</b> or <b>Delete</b> respectively.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. IPv6 help +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:81 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>IPv6 Protocol Settings</big></b></p>\n" +"<p>Check <b>Enable IPv6</b> to enable the ipv6 module in the kernel.\n" +"It is possible to use IPv6 together with IPv4. This is the default option.\n" +"To disable IPv6, uncheck this option. This will blacklist the kernel \n" +"module for ipv6. If the IPv6 protocol is not used on your network, the response \n" +"time can be faster.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:89 +msgid "<p>All changes will be applied after reboot.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Routing dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:92 +msgid "" +"<p>The routing can be set up in this dialog.\n" +"The <b>Default Gateway</b> matches every possible destination, but poorly. \n" +"If any other entry exists that matches the required address, it is\n" +"used instead of the default route. The idea of the default route is simply\n" +"to enable you to say \"and everything else should go here.\"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:99 +msgid "" +"<p>For each route, enter destination network IP address, gateway address,\n" +"and netmask. To omit any of these values, use a dash sign \"-\". Select\n" +"the device through which the traffic to the defined network will be routed.\"-\" is an alias for any interface.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Routing dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:105 +msgid "" +"<p>Enable <b>IPv4 Forwarding</b> (forwarding packets from external networks\n" +"to the internal one) if this system is a router.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:109 +msgid "" +"<p>Enable <b>IPv6 Forwarding</b> (forwarding packets from external networks\n" +"to the internal one) if this system is a router.\n" +"<b>Warning:</b> IPv6 forwarding disables IPv6 stateless address\n" +"autoconfiguration (SLAAC)." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:115 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Important:</b> if the firewall is enabled, allowing forwarding alone is not enough. \n" +"You should enable masquerading and/or set at least one redirect rule in the\n" +"firewall configuration. Use the YaST firewall module.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:121 +msgid "" +"<p>If you are using DHCP to get an IP address, check whether you get\n" +"also a hostname via DHCP. The hostname will be set automatically by the DHCP client.\n" +"However, changing the hostname at runtime may confuse the graphical desktop. \n" +"Therefore, disable this option if you connect to different networks that assign \n" +"different hostnames.</p> " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:129 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Assign Hostname to Loopback IP</b> associates your hostname with \n" +"the IP address <tt>127.0.0.2</tt> (loopback) in <tt>/etc/hosts</tt>. This is a \n" +"useful option if you want to have the hostname resolvable at all times, even \n" +"without an active network. In all other cases, use it carefully, especially \n" +"if this computer provides some network services.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:137 +msgid "" +"<p>Enter the name servers and domain search list for resolving \n" +"hostnames. Usually they can be obtained by DHCP.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. resolver dialog help +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:141 +msgid "" +"<p>A name server is a computer that translates hostnames into\n" +"IP addresses. This value must be entered as an <b>IP address</b>\n" +"(for example, 192.168.0.42), not as a hostname.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. resolver dialog help +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:147 +msgid "" +"<p>Search domain is the domain name where hostname searching starts.\n" +"The primary search domain is usually the same as the domain name of\n" +"your computer (for example, suse.de). There may be additional search domains\n" +"(such as suse.com). Separate the domains with commas or white space.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:154 +msgid "" +"<p>Enter the short name for this computer (e.g. <i>mymachine</i>) and the DNS domain\n" +"(e.g. <i>example.com</i>) that it belongs to. The domain is especially important if this \n" +"computer is a mail server. You can view the hostname of you computer using the <i>hostname</i> \n" +"command.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:161 +msgid "" +"<p>Select the way how the DNS configuration will be modified (name servers,\n" +"search list, the content of <i>/etc/resolv.conf</i>). Normally, it is handled\n" +"by the <i>netconfig</i> script, which merges statically defined data with\n" +"dynamically obtained data (e.g. from the DHCP client, NetworkManager,\n" +"etc.). This is the default. <b>Use Default Policy</b> is sufficient for most\n" +"configurations.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:169 +msgid "" +"<p>By choosing <b>Only Manually</b>, <i>netconfig</i> will no longer be\n" +"allowed to modify <i>/etc/resolv.conf</i>. You can however edit the file\n" +"manually. By choosing <b>Use Custom Policy</b>, you may specify a custom\n" +"policy string, which consists of a comma-separated list of interface names,\n" +"including wildcards, with STATIC and STATIC_FALLBACK as predefined special\n" +"values. For more information, see the <i>netconfig</i> manual page. Note:\n" +"Leaving the field blank is the same as using the <b> Only Manually</b>\n" +"policy.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Address dialog help 1-6/8: dynamic address preferred +#. Address dialog help 1/8 +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:181 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Address Setup</big></b></p>\n" +"<p>Select <b>No Address Setup</b> if you do not want to assign an IP address to this device.\n" +"This is particularly useful for bonding ethernet devices.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:186 +msgid "<p>Check <b>iBFT</b> if you want to keep the network configured in your BIOS.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Address dialog help 2/8 +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:190 +msgid "" +"<p>Select <b>Dynamic Address</b> if you do not have a static IP address \n" +"assigned by the system administrator or your Internet provider.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Address dialog help 3/8 +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:194 +msgid "" +"<p>Choose one of the dynamic address assignment methods. Select <b>DHCP</b>\n" +"if you have a DHCP server running on your local network. Network addresses \n" +"are then automatically obtained from the server.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Address dialog help 4/8 +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:200 +msgid "" +"<p>To search for an IP address and assign it statically, select \n" +"<b>Zeroconf</b>. To use DHCP and fall back to zeroconf, select <b>DHCP + Zeroconf\n" +"</b>. Otherwise, the network addresses must be assigned <b>Statically</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Address dialog help 5/8 +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:207 +msgid "" +"<p>Enter the <b>IP Address</b> (for example: <tt>192.168.100.99</tt>) for your computer, and the \n" +" <b>Remote IP Address</b> (for example: <tt>192.168.100.254</tt>)\n" +"for your peer.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Address dialog help 6/8 +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:214 +msgid "" +"<p>For <b>Static Address Setup</b> enter the static IP address for your computer (for example: <tt>192.168.100.99</tt>) and\n" +"the network mask (usually <tt>255.255.255.0</tt> or just length of prefix <tt>/24</tt>).Optionally, you can enter\n" +"a fully qualified hostname for this IP address. The hostname will be written to <tt>/etc/hosts</tt>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Address dialog help 8/8 +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:220 +msgid "" +"<p>Contact your <b>network administrator</b> for more information about\n" +"the network configuration.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:224 +msgid "" +"<p>DHCP configuration is not recommended for this product.\n" +"Components of this product might not work with DHCP.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:228 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Firewall Zone</big></b></p>\n" +"<p>Select the firewall zone to put the interface into. If you\n" +"select a zone, the firewall will be enabled. If you do not and other \n" +"firewalled interfaces exist, the firewall\n" +"will stay enabled but all traffic will be blocked for this\n" +"interface. If you do not select a zone and no others exist, \n" +"the firewall will be disabled.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:238 +msgid "<p><b>Mandatory Interface</b> specifies whether the network service reports failure if the interface fails to start at boot time.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:242 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Maximum Transfer Unit</big></b></p>\n" +"<p>Maximum transfer unit (<b>MTU</b>) is the maximum size of the packet,\n" +"transferred over the network in one frame. Usually, you do not need to\n" +"set a MTU, but using lower MTU values may improve the network performance,\n" +"especially on slow dial-up connections. Either select one of the recommended\n" +"values or define another one.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:251 +msgid "" +"<p>Select the slave devices for the bond device.\n" +"Only devices with the device activation set to <b>Never</b> and with <b>No Address Setup</b> are available.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. DHCP dialog help 1/7 +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:255 +msgid "<p><b><big>DHCP Client Options</big></b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. DHCP dialog help 2/7 +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:257 +msgid "" +"<p>The <b>DHCP Client Identifier</b>, if left empty, defaults to\n" +"the hardware address of the network interface. It must be different for each\n" +"DHCP client on a single network. Therefore, specify a unique free-form\n" +"identifier here if you have several (virtual) machines using the same\n" +"network interface and thus the same hardware address.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. DHCP dialog help 3/7 +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:265 +msgid "" +"<p>The <b>Hostname to Send</b> specifies a string used for the\n" +"hostname option field when the DHCP client sends messages to the DHCP server. Some \n" +"DHCP servers update name server zones (forward and reverse records) \n" +"according to this hostname (dynamic DNS).</p>\n" +"Some DHCP servers require the <b>Hostname to Send</b> option field to\n" +"contain a specific string in the DHCP messages from clients. Leave <b>AUTO</b>\n" +"to send the current hostname (for example, the one defined in <tt>/etc/HOSTNAME</tt>). \n" +"If you do not want to send a hostname, leave the field empty.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Aliases dialog help 1/4 +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:276 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Additional Addresses</big></b></p>\n" +"<p>Configure additional addresses of an interface in this table.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Aliases dialog help 2/4 +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:280 +msgid "" +"<p>Enter an <b>IPv4 Address Label</b>, an <b>IP Address</b>, and\n" +"the <b>Netmask</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Aliases dialog help 3/4 +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:284 +msgid "" +"<p><b>IPv4 Address Label</b>, formerly known as Alias Name, is optional and legacy. The total\n" +"length of interface name (inclusive of the colon and label) is\n" +"limited to 15 characters. The obsolete ifconfig utility truncates it after 9 characters.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Aliases dialog help 3/4, #83766 +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:290 +msgid "<p>Do not include the interface name in the label. For example, enter <b>foo</b> instead of <b>eth0:foo</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. shared between WirelessDialog and WirelessKeyPopup +#. this is suited to the button-switched key typing +#. Translators: dialog help +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:297 +msgid "" +"<p>Choose between three <b>Key Input Types</b> for your key.\n" +"<br><b>Passphrase</b>: The key is generated from the phrase entered.\n" +"<br><b>ASCII</b>: The ASCII values of the characters entered constitute the\n" +"key. Enter 5 characters for 64-bit keys, up to 13\n" +"characters for 128-bit keys, up to 16 characters for 156-bit keys, and\n" +"up to 29 characters for 256-bit keys.\n" +"<br><b>Hexadecimal</b>: Enter the hex codes of the key directly. Enter\n" +"10 hex digits for 64-bit keys, 26 digits for 128-bit keys, 32 digits\n" +"for 156-bit keys, and 58 digits for 256-bit keys. You can\n" +"use hyphens <tt>-</tt> to separate pairs or groups of digits, for example,\n" +"<tt>0a5f-41e6-48</tt>.\n" +"</p> \n" +msgstr "" + +#. Wireless dialog help +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:312 +msgid "" +"<p>Here, set the most important settings\n" +"for wireless networking.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:315 +msgid "" +"<p>The <b>Operating Mode</b> depends on the network topology. The mode\n" +"can be <b>Ad-Hoc</b> (peer-to-peer network without an access point),\n" +"<b>Managed</b> (network managed by an access point, sometimes also\n" +"called <i>Infrastructure Mode</i>), or <b>Master</b> (the network card\n" +"acts as an access point).</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:322 +msgid "" +"<p>Set the <b>Network Name (ESSID)</b> used to identify\n" +"cells that are part of the same virtual network. All stations in a\n" +"wireless LAN need the same ESSID to communicate with each other. If\n" +"you choose the operation mode <b>Managed</b> and no <b>WPA</b> authentication mode,\n" +"you can leave this field empty or set it to <tt>any</tt>. In this\n" +"case, your WLAN card associates with the access point with the best\n" +"signal strength.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:331 +msgid "" +"<p>In some networks, you need to set an <b>Authentication Mode</b>.\n" +"It depends on the protection technology used, WEP or WPA. <b>WEP</b>\n" +"(Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a system to encrypt wireless network\n" +"traffic with an optional authentication, based on the encryption\n" +"key used. In most cases where WEP is used, the <b>WEP-Open</b> mode (no\n" +"authentication at all) is fine. This does not mean that you cannot\n" +"use WEP encryption (in that case use <b>No Encryption</b>). \n" +"Some networks may require <b>WEP-Shared Key</b> authentication. \n" +"NOTE: Shared key authentication makes it easier for a\n" +"potential attacker to break into your network. Unless you have\n" +"specific needs for shared key authentication, use the <b>Open</b>\n" +"mode. Because WEP has been proven insecure, <b>WPA</b> (Wi-Fi Protected Access)\n" +"was defined to close its security holes, but not all hardware supports\n" +"WPA. If you want to use WPA, select <b>WPA-PSK</b> or <b>WPA-EAP</b> as the\n" +"authentication mode. This is only possible in the operation mode\n" +"<b>Managed</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:349 +msgid "" +"<p>To use WEP, enter the\n" +"WEP encryption key to use. It can have a key\n" +"length of 64, 128, 156, or 256 bits, but not all sizes are\n" +"supported by all devices. Of these keys, 24 bits\n" +"are dynamically generated, so you only need to enter 40 to 232 bits.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Wireless dialog help +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:357 +msgid "" +"<p>To use WPA-PSK (sometimes referred to as WPA Home),\n" +"enter the preshared key. This\n" +"key is used for authentication and encryption keys are generated from\n" +"it. These are not vulnerable to known attacks against WEP keys, but\n" +"dictionary attacks are still possible. Do not use a word that is\n" +"easy to guess as the passphrase.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:365 +msgid "" +"<p>To use WPA-EAP (sometimes referred to as WPA Enterprise),\n" +"enter some additional parameters in the next dialog.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:368 +msgid "" +"<p>These values will be written to the interface configuration file\n" +"'ifcfg-*' in '/etc/sysconfig/network'. If you need additional settings,\n" +"add them manually. Refer to the file 'wireless' in the same directory for all\n" +"available options.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. TextEntry label +#: src/include/network/lan/virtual.rb:209 +msgid "IPv4 &Address Label" +msgstr "" + +#. TextEntry label +#: src/include/network/lan/virtual.rb:217 +msgid "Net&mask" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup::Error text +#: src/include/network/lan/virtual.rb:247 +msgid "Label is too long." +msgstr "" + +#. Popup::Error text +#. Popup::Error text +#: src/include/network/lan/virtual.rb:257 +#: src/include/network/services/host.rb:386 +msgid "The IP address is invalid." +msgstr "" + +#. Popup::Error text +#: src/include/network/lan/virtual.rb:266 +msgid "The subnet mask is invalid." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: input type for a wireless key +#. radio button group label +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:54 +msgid "Key Input Type" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: input type for a wireless key +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:58 +msgid "&Passphrase" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: input type for a wireless key +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:61 +msgid "&ASCII" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: input type for a wireless key +#. (Hexadecimal) +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:65 +msgid "&Hexadecimal" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:75 +msgid "EAP &Mode" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item, one of WPA EAP modes +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:79 +msgid "TTLS" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item, one of WPA EAP modes +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:81 +msgid "PEAP" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item, one of WPA EAP modes +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:83 +msgid "TLS" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:85 +msgid "" +"<p>WPA-EAP uses a RADIUS server to authenticate users. There\n" +"are different methods in EAP to connect to the server and\n" +"perform the authentication, namely TLS, TTLS, and PEAP.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:98 +msgid "&Identity" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:100 +msgid "" +"<p>For TTLS and PEAP, enter your <b>Identity</b>\n" +"and <b>Password</b> as configured on the server.\n" +"If you have special requirements to set the username used as\n" +"<b>Anonymous Identity</b>, you may set it here. This is usually not needed.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:110 +msgid "&Anonymous Identity" +msgstr "" + +#. or password? +#. text entry label +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:118 +msgid "&Password" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:125 +msgid "&Client Certificate" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:127 +msgid "" +"<p>TLS uses a <b>Client Certificate</b> instead of a username and\n" +"password combination for authentication. It uses a public and private key pair\n" +"to encrypt negotiation communication, therefore you will additionally need\n" +"a <b>Client Key</b> file that contains your private key and\n" +"the appropriate <b>Client Key Password</b> for that file.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:143 +msgid "Client &Key" +msgstr "" + +#. or password? +#. text entry label +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:156 +msgid "Client Key Pass&word" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#. aka certificate of the CA (certification authority) +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:166 +msgid "&Server Certificate" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:170 +msgid "" +"<p>To increase security, it is recommended to configure\n" +"a <b>Server Certificate</b>. It is used\n" +"to validate the server's authenticity.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:211 +msgid "&Details" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:220 +msgid "" +"If you do not know your ID and password or you do not have\n" +"any certificate or key files, contact your system administrator.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:238 +msgid "&Authentication Method" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:239 +msgid "" +"<p>Here you can configure the inner authentication (also known as phase 2)\n" +"method. By default, all methods are allowed. If you want to restrict the\n" +"allowed methods or in case you have encountered difficulties regarding\n" +"authentication, choose your inner authentication method.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button group label +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:249 +msgid "&PEAP Version" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:250 +msgid "" +"<p>If you are using PEAP, you can also force the use of a specific PEAP\n" +"implementation (version 0 or 1). Normally this should not be necessary.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button: any version of PEAP +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:255 +msgid "&Any" +msgstr "" + +#. Wireless authentication modes: +#. ComboBox item +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:357 +msgid "No Encryption" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox item +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:361 +msgid "WEP - Open" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox item +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:363 +msgid "WEP - Shared Key" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox item +#. Ask me what it means, I don't know yet +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:366 +msgid "WPA-PSK (WPA version 1 or 2)" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox item +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:370 +msgid "WPA-EAP (WPA version 1 or 2)" +msgstr "" + +#. Wireless dialog caption +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:394 +msgid "Wireless Network Card Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Frame label +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:424 +msgid "Wireless Device Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox label +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:433 +msgid "O&perating Mode" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox item +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:436 +msgid "Ad-Hoc" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox item +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:440 +msgid "Master" +msgstr "" + +#. Text entry label +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:449 +msgid "Ne&twork Name (ESSID)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:452 +msgid "Scan Network" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox label +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:459 +msgid "&Authentication Mode" +msgstr "" + +#. Text entry label +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:466 +msgid "&Encryption Key" +msgstr "" + +#. PushButton label +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:475 +msgid "E&xpert Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. PushButton label, keys for WEP encryption +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:478 +msgid "&WEP Keys" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup text +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:560 +msgid "WPA authentication mode is only possible in managed operating mode." +msgstr "" + +#. Popup text +#. modes: combination of operation and authentication +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:571 +msgid "Specify the network name for this mode." +msgstr "" + +#. Popup text +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:578 +msgid "The network name must be shorter than 32 characters." +msgstr "" + +#. Error popup +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:598 +msgid "The passphrase must have between 8 and 63 characters (inclusively)." +msgstr "" + +#. Error popup +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:609 +msgid "The key must have %1 hexadecimal digits." +msgstr "" + +#. Popup text +#. Popup text +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:621 +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:939 +msgid "The encryption key is invalid." +msgstr "" + +#. error +#. Popup text +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:629 +msgid "The encryption key must be specified for this authentication mode." +msgstr "" + +#. warning only +#. Popup text +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:636 +msgid "" +"Using no encryption is a security risk.\n" +"Really continue?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Wireless expert dialog caption +#. Frame label +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:694 +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:775 +msgid "Wireless Expert Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Wireless expert dialog help 1/5 +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:697 +msgid "" +"<p>Here, set additional configuration parameters\n" +"(rarely needed).</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Wireless expert dialog help 2/5 +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:701 +msgid "" +"<p>To use your wireless LAN card in master or ad-hoc mode,\n" +"set the <b>Channel</b> the card should use here. This is not needed\n" +"for managed mode--the card will hop through the channels searching for access\n" +"points in that case.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Wireless expert dialog help 3/5 +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:708 +msgid "" +"<p>In some rare cases, you may want to set a transmission\n" +"<b>Bit Rate</b> explicitly. The default is to go as fast as possible.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Wireless expert dialog help 4/5 +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:712 +msgid "" +"<p>In an environment with multiple <b>Access Points</b>, you may want to\n" +"define the one to which to connect by entering its MAC address.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Wireless expert dialog help 5/5 +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:716 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Use Power Management</b> enables power saving mechanisms.\n" +"This is generally a good idea, especially if you are a laptop user and may\n" +"be disconnected from AC power.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Combobox item +#. Combobox item +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:744 +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:766 +msgid "Automatic" +msgstr "" + +#. Combobox label +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:781 +msgid "&Channel" +msgstr "" + +#. Combobox label +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:784 +msgid "B&it Rate" +msgstr "" + +#. Text entry label +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:790 +msgid "&Access Point" +msgstr "" + +#. CheckBox label +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:798 +msgid "Use &Power Management" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:807 +msgid "AP ScanMode" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: popup dialog heading +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:897 +msgid "Enter Encryption Key" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: text entry label +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:901 +msgid "&Key" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: popup title +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:925 +msgid "Help" +msgstr "" + +#. Wireless keys dialog caption +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:974 +msgid "Wireless Keys" +msgstr "" + +#. Wireless keys dialog help 1/3 +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:977 +msgid "" +"<p>In this dialog, define your WEP keys used\n" +"to encrypt your data before it is transmitted. You can have up to four keys,\n" +"although only one key is used to encrypt the data. This is the default key.\n" +"The other keys can be used to decrypt data. Usually you have only\n" +"one key.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Wireless keys dialog help 2/3 +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:985 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Key Length</b> defines the bit length of your WEP keys.\n" +"Possible are 64 and 128 bit, sometimes also referred to as 40 and 104 bit.\n" +"Some older hardware might not be able to handle 128 bit keys, so if your\n" +"wireless LAN connection does not establish, you may need to set this\n" +"value to 64.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Frame label +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:1010 +msgid "WEP Keys" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox label +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:1016 +msgid "&Key Length" +msgstr "" + +#. Table header label +#. Abbreviation of Number +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:1024 +msgid "No." +msgstr "" + +#. Table header label +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:1026 +msgid "Key" +msgstr "" + +#. Table header label +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:1028 +msgid "Default" +msgstr "" + +#. PushButton label +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:1038 +msgid "&Set as Default" +msgstr "" + +#. file browser dialog headline +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:1210 +msgid "Choose a Certificate" +msgstr "" + +#. validated in ValidateWpaEap +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:1255 +msgid "" +"Not using a Certificate Authority (CA) certificate can result in connections\n" +"to insecure, rogue wireless networks. Continue without CA ?" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup text +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:1283 +msgid "" +"Enter either the identity and password\n" +"or the client certificate." +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:1329 +msgid "WPA-EAP" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item, any of EAP authentication methods +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:1351 +msgid "Any" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item, an EAP authentication method +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:1355 +msgid "MD5" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item, an EAP authentication method +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:1357 +msgid "GTC" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item, an EAP authentication method +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:1359 +msgid "CHAP" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item, an EAP authentication method +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:1361 +msgid "PAP" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item, an EAP authentication method +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:1363 +msgid "MSCHAPv1" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item, an EAP authentication method +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:1367 +msgid "MSCHAPv2" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:1390 +msgid "WPA-EAP Details" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/lan/wizards.rb:97 +msgid "Initializing..." +msgstr "" + +#. Ramote Administration dialog caption +#: src/include/network/remote/dialogs.rb:56 +msgid "Remote Administration" +msgstr "" + +#. RadioButton label +#: src/include/network/remote/dialogs.rb:64 +msgid "&Allow Remote Administration" +msgstr "" + +#. RadioButton label +#: src/include/network/remote/dialogs.rb:72 +msgid "&Do Not Allow Remote Administration" +msgstr "" + +#. Remote Administration dialog help +#. %1 and %2 are port numbers for vnc and vnchttp, eg. 5901, 5801 +#: src/include/network/remote/dialogs.rb:89 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Remote Administration Settings</big></b></p>\n" +"<p>If this feature is enabled, you can\n" +"administer this machine remotely from another machine. Use a VNC\n" +"client, such as krdc (connect to <tt><hostname>:%1</tt>), or\n" +"a Java-capable Web browser (connect to <tt>http://<hostname>:%2/</tt>).\n" +"This form of remote administration is less secure than using SSH.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Dialog frame title +#: src/include/network/remote/dialogs.rb:109 +msgid "Remote Administration Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup text +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:144 +msgid "These packages need to be installed:" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup text +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:162 +msgid "" +"The required packages are not installed.\n" +"The configuration will be aborted.\n" +"\n" +"Try again?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Table field (Unknown device) +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:255 +msgid "Unknown" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup headline +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:279 +msgid "Configuration Successfully Saved" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup headline +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:284 +msgid "DNS Configuration Successfully Saved" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup headline +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:286 +msgid "DSL Configuration Successfully Saved" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup headline +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:288 +msgid "Hosts Configuration Successfully Saved" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup headline +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:292 +msgid "ISDN Configuration Successfully Saved" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup headline +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:296 +msgid "Network Card Configuration Successfully Saved" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup headline +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:300 +msgid "Modem Configuration Successfully Saved" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup headline +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:304 +msgid "Proxy Configuration Successfully Saved" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup headline +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:308 +msgid "Provider Configuration Successfully Saved" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup headline +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:312 +msgid "Routing Configuration Successfully Saved" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup text +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:321 +msgid "Configure mail now?" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup text +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:326 +msgid "Run configuration of %1?" +msgstr "" + +#. Disables all widgets which cannot be configured with current network service +#. +#. see bnc#433084 +#. if listed any items, disable them, if show_popup, show warning popup +#. +#. returns true if items were disabled +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:1004 +msgid "" +"Network is currently handled by NetworkManager\n" +"or completely disabled. YaST is unable to configure some options." +msgstr "" + +#. Confirmation: label text (detecting hardware: xxx) +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:1064 +msgid "Network Cards" +msgstr "" + +#. Confirmation: label text (detecting hardware: xxx) +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:1068 +msgid "Modems" +msgstr "" + +#. Confirmation: label text (detecting hardware: xxx) +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:1072 +msgid "ISDN Cards" +msgstr "" + +#. Confirmation: label text (detecting hardware: xxx) +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:1076 +msgid "DSL Devices" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:1081 +msgid "All Network Devices" +msgstr "" + +#. validation error popup +#. Popup::Error text +#: src/include/network/services/dns.rb:92 +#: src/include/network/services/host.rb:398 +msgid "The hostname is invalid." +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/network/services/dns.rb:111 +msgid "&Domain Name" +msgstr "" + +#. validation error popup +#: src/include/network/services/dns.rb:127 +msgid "The domain name is invalid." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/services/dns.rb:134 +msgid "&Change Hostname via DHCP" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/include/network/services/dns.rb:144 +msgid "&Assign Hostname to Loopback IP" +msgstr "" + +#. help +#: src/include/network/services/dns.rb:151 +msgid "&Modify DNS Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/services/dns.rb:154 +msgid "Only Manually" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/services/dns.rb:155 +msgid "Use Default Policy" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/services/dns.rb:156 +msgid "Use Custom Policy" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/services/dns.rb:167 +msgid "&Custom Policy Rule" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/network/services/dns.rb:177 +msgid "Name Server &1" +msgstr "" + +#. validation error popup +#: src/include/network/services/dns.rb:193 +msgid "The IP address of the name server is invalid." +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/network/services/dns.rb:201 +msgid "Do&main Search" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/network/services/dns.rb:228 +msgid "Name Server &2" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/network/services/dns.rb:230 +msgid "Name Server &3" +msgstr "" + +#. Frame label +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/network/services/dns.rb:234 +#: src/include/network/services/dns.rb:684 +#: src/include/network/services/dns.rb:697 +msgid "Hostname and Domain Name" +msgstr "" + +#. Frame label +#: src/include/network/services/dns.rb:251 +msgid "Name Servers and Domain Search List" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/services/dns.rb:268 +msgid "Hostname/DNS" +msgstr "" + +#. Init handler for DHCP_HOSTNAME. +#. enable or disable: is DHCP available? +#. @param [String] key the widget receiving the event +#. @param event the event being handled +#. @return nil so that the dialog loops on +#: src/include/network/services/dns.rb:442 +msgid "No interface with dhcp" +msgstr "" + +#. Validator for domain name, no_popup +#. @param [String] key the widget being validated +#. @param [Hash] event the event being handled +#. @return whether valid +#: src/include/network/services/dns.rb:496 +msgid "It's not recommended to use .local as domainname due to Multicast DNS. Use it at your own risk?" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup::Error text +#: src/include/network/services/dns.rb:520 +msgid "The search list can have at most %1 domains." +msgstr "" + +#. Popup::Error text +#: src/include/network/services/dns.rb:526 +msgid "The search list can have at most %1 characters." +msgstr "" + +#. Popup::Error text +#: src/include/network/services/dns.rb:535 +msgid "The search domain '%1' is invalid." +msgstr "" + +#. Standalone dialog only - embedded one is handled separately +#. via CWMTab +#: src/include/network/services/dns.rb:725 +msgid "Hostname and Name Server Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Warning popup text 1/2 +#: src/include/network/services/host.rb:57 +msgid "The host %1 is a system host." +msgstr "" + +#. Warning popup text 2/2 +#: src/include/network/services/host.rb:61 +msgid "Really delete it?" +msgstr "" + +#. Warning popup text 2/2 +#: src/include/network/services/host.rb:64 +msgid "Really change it?" +msgstr "" + +#. Hosts dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/network/services/host.rb:78 +msgid "<p>The hosts can be set up in this dialog.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Hosts dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/network/services/host.rb:80 +msgid "" +"<p>Enter a host <b>IP Address</b>, a <b>Hostname</b>, and optional\n" +"<b>Host Aliases</b>, separated by spaces.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Frame label +#: src/include/network/services/host.rb:118 +msgid "Current Hosts" +msgstr "" + +#. Table header label +#: src/include/network/services/host.rb:130 +msgid "Hostnames" +msgstr "" + +#. Table header label +#: src/include/network/services/host.rb:132 +msgid "Host Aliases" +msgstr "" + +#. TextEntry label +#: src/include/network/services/host.rb:351 +msgid "Hos&t Aliases" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup::Error text +#: src/include/network/services/host.rb:414 +msgid "Alias name \"%1\" is invalid." +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox label +#: src/include/network/services/routing.rb:67 +msgid "Default IPv4 &Gateway" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/services/routing.rb:71 +msgid "Default IPv6 &Gateway" +msgstr "" + +#. Table header 3/4 +#: src/include/network/services/routing.rb:89 +msgid "Genmask" +msgstr "" + +#. CheckBox label +#: src/include/network/services/routing.rb:110 +msgid "Enable &IPv4 Forwarding" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/services/routing.rb:111 +msgid "Enable I&Pv6 Forwarding" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/services/routing.rb:136 +msgid "Routing" +msgstr "" + +#. Route edit dialog +#. @param [Fixnum] id id of the edited route +#. @param [Yast::Term] entry edited entry +#. @param [Array] devs available devices +#. @return route or nil, if canceled +#: src/include/network/services/routing.rb:161 +msgid "&Destination" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/services/routing.rb:167 +msgid "Ge&nmask" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/services/routing.rb:175 +msgid "&Gateway" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/services/routing.rb:181 +msgid "De&vice" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup::Error text +#: src/include/network/services/routing.rb:240 +msgid "Destination is invalid." +msgstr "" + +#. Popup::Error text +#: src/include/network/services/routing.rb:248 +msgid "Gateway IP address is invalid." +msgstr "" + +#. Popup::Error text +#: src/include/network/services/routing.rb:256 +msgid "Subnetmask is invalid." +msgstr "" + +#. #178538 - disable routing dialog when NetworkManager is used +#. but instead of default route (#299448) - NM reads it +#: src/include/network/services/routing.rb:414 +msgid "The default gateway is invalid." +msgstr "" + +#. Pushbutton label +#: src/include/network/summary.rb:67 +msgid "A&dd" +msgstr "" + +#. Pushbutton label (different shortcut) +#: src/include/network/summary.rb:74 +msgid "&Add" +msgstr "" + +#. Pushbutton label (different shortcut) +#: src/include/network/summary.rb:76 +msgid "Ed&it" +msgstr "" + +#. Pushbutton label (different shortcut) +#: src/include/network/summary.rb:78 +msgid "Dele&te" +msgstr "" + +#. TextEntry label +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:54 +msgid "&Dial Prefix Regular Expression" +msgstr "" + +#. dial prefix regex help +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:57 +msgid "" +"<p>When <b>Dial Prefix Regular Expression</b> is set, users can\n" +"change the dial prefix in KInternet provided that it matches the expression.\n" +"A recommended value is <tt>[09]?</tt>, allowing <tt>0</tt>, <tt>9</tt>,\n" +"and the empty prefix. If the expression is empty, users are not allowed\n" +"to change the prefix.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button group label,method of setup +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:69 +msgid "Setup Method" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:75 +msgid "A&utomatic Address Setup (via DHCP)" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:77 +msgid "S&tatic Address Setup" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:80 +msgid "<p>H</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Combo box option for Device Activation +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:95 +msgid "At Boot Time" +msgstr "" + +#. is a part of the static help text +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:102 +msgid "Never" +msgstr "" + +#. Combo box option for Device Activation +#. DO NOT TRANSLATE NetworkManager, it is a program name +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:106 +msgid "By NetworkManager" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for Device Activation +#. DO NOT TRANSLATE NetworkManager, it is a program name +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:111 +msgid "" +"<b>By NetworkManager</b>: a desktop applet\n" +"controls the interface. There is no need to set it up in YaST." +msgstr "" + +#. Combo box option for Device Activation +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:117 +msgid "Manually" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for Device Activation +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:119 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Manually</b>: You control the interface manually\n" +"via 'ifup' or 'qinternet' (see 'User Controlled' below).</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Combo box option for Device Activation +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:125 +msgid "On Cable Connection" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for Device Activation +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:129 +msgid "" +"<b>On Cable Connection</b>:\n" +"The interface is watched for whether there is a physical\n" +"network connection. That means either the cable is connected or the\n" +"wireless interface can connect to an access point.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Combo box option for Device Activation +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:138 +msgid "On Hotplug" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for Device Activation +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:140 +msgid "" +"With <b>On Hotplug</b>,\n" +"the interface is set up as soon as it is available. This is\n" +"nearly the same as 'At Boot Time', but does not result in an error at\n" +"boot time if the interface is not present.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Combo box option for Device Activation +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:149 +msgid "On NFSroot" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for Device Activation +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:151 +msgid "" +"Using <b>On NFSroot</b> is similar to <tt>auto</tt>. Interfaces with this startmode will never\n" +"be shut down via <tt>rcnetwork stop</tt>. <tt>ifdown <iface></tt> is still available.\n" +"Use this if you have an NFS or iSCSI root filesystem.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Combo box label - when to activate device (e.g. on boot, manually, never,..) +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:184 +msgid "Activate &Device" +msgstr "" + +#. Device activation main help. The individual parts will be +#. substituted as %1 +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:190 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Device Activation</big></b></p> \n" +"<p>Choose when to bring up the network interface. <b>At Boot Time</b> activates it during system boot, \n" +"<b>Never</b> does not start the device.\n" +"%1</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:235 +msgid "IPoIB Device Mode" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:246 +msgid "Firewall is not installed." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: MTU value description (size in bytes, desc) +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:253 +msgid "1500 (Ethernet, DSL broadband)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:254 +msgid "1492 (PPPoE broadband)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:255 +msgid "576 (dial-up)" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: MTU value description (size in bytes, desc) +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:262 +msgid "65520 (IPoIB in connected mode)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:263 +msgid "2044 (IPoIB in datagram mode)" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label, Maximum Transfer Unit +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:271 +msgid "Set &MTU" +msgstr "" + +#. the user can control the network with the NetworkManager program +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:287 +msgid "NetworkManager Service" +msgstr "" + +#. ifup is a program name +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:295 +msgid "Traditional ifup" +msgstr "" + +#. wicked is network configuration backend like netconfig +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:303 +msgid "Wicked Service" +msgstr "" + +#. used when no network service is active or to disable network service +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:311 +msgid "Network Services Disabled" +msgstr "" + +#. Store the NetworkManager widget +#. @param [String] key id of the widget +#. @param [Hash] event the event being handled +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:342 +msgid "Applet needed" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:343 +msgid "" +"NetworkManager is controlled by desktop applet\n" +"(KDE plasma widget and nm-applet for GNOME).\n" +"Be sure it's running and if not, start it manually." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:358 +msgid "General Network Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:402 +msgid "IPv6 Protocol Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. enable ipv6 support +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:403 src/modules/Lan.rb:810 +msgid "Enable IPv6" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Informs that device name is not known +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:420 +msgid "Unknown device" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Part of label, device with IP address assigned by DHCP +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:429 +msgid "DHCP address" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Informs that no IP has been assigned to the device +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:436 +msgid "No IP address assigned" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:439 +msgid "" +"%1 \n" +"%2 - %3" +msgstr "" + +#. #186102 +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:492 +msgid "&Change Device" +msgstr "" + +#. popup dialog title +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:525 +msgid "Network Device Select" +msgstr "" + +#. this conditions origin from bridge configuration +#. if enslaving a configured device then its configuration is rewritten +#. to "0.0.0.0/32" +#. +#. translators: a note that listed device is already configured +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:571 +msgid "configured" +msgstr "" + +#. Shows a confirmation timed dialogue +#. +#. Returns :ok when user agreed, :cancel otherwise +#: src/lib/network/confirm_virt_proposal.rb:23 +msgid "Confirm Network Restart" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/network/confirm_virt_proposal.rb:24 +msgid "Because of the bridged network, YaST2 needs to restart the network to apply the settings." +msgstr "" + +#. Opens dialog for editing NIC name +#: src/lib/network/edit_nic_name.rb:93 +msgid "Device Name:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/network/edit_nic_name.rb:99 +msgid "Base Udev Rule On" +msgstr "" + +#. make sure there is enough space (#367239) +#: src/lib/network/edit_nic_name.rb:108 +msgid "MAC address: %s" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/network/edit_nic_name.rb:114 +msgid "BusID: %s" +msgstr "" + +#. check if the name is assigned to another device already +#: src/lib/network/edit_nic_name.rb:151 +msgid "Configuration name already exists." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/network/edit_nic_name.rb:155 +msgid "Invalid configuration name." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1 +#: src/modules/DNS.rb:377 +msgid "Write hostname" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 2 +#. Progress stage 10 +#: src/modules/DNS.rb:379 src/modules/Lan.rb:534 +msgid "Update configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 3 +#: src/modules/DNS.rb:381 +msgid "Update /etc/resolv.conf" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog caption +#: src/modules/DNS.rb:385 +msgid "Saving Hostname and DNS Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Allow to set hostname even if it's modified by DHCP (#13427) +#. if(NetworkConfig::DHCP["DHCLIENT_SET_HOSTNAME"]:false != true) { +#. Progress step 1/3 +#: src/modules/DNS.rb:394 +msgid "Writing hostname..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 2/3 +#. Progress step 10 +#: src/modules/DNS.rb:411 src/modules/Lan.rb:622 +msgid "Updating configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. if(SCR::Read(.target.size, resolv_conf) < 0) +#. SCR::Write(.target.string, resolv_conf, ""); +#. Progress step 3/3 +#: src/modules/DNS.rb:421 +msgid "Updating /etc/resolv.conf ..." +msgstr "" + +#. Summary text +#: src/modules/DNS.rb:538 +msgid "Hostname: Set by DHCP" +msgstr "" + +#. Summary text +#: src/modules/DNS.rb:544 +msgid "Hostname: %1" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/DNS.rb:552 +msgid "Hostname will not be written to /etc/hosts" +msgstr "" + +#. Summary text +#: src/modules/DNS.rb:573 +msgid "Name Servers: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. Summary text +#: src/modules/DNS.rb:583 +msgid "Search List: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. Check if there is anything to do +#: src/modules/Host.rb:138 +msgid "Update /etc/hosts" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Host.rb:140 +msgid "Saving Hostname Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. sleep for longer time, so that progress does not disappear right afterwards +#: src/modules/Host.rb:145 +msgid "Updating /etc/hosts ..." +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog caption +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:272 +msgid "Initializing Network Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1/9 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:285 +msgid "Detect network devices" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 2/9 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:287 +msgid "Read driver information" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 3/9 - multiple devices may be present, really plural +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:289 +msgid "Read device configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 4/9 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:291 +msgid "Read network configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 5/9 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:293 +msgid "Read firewall settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 6/9 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:295 +msgid "Read hostname and DNS configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 7/9 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:297 +msgid "Read installation information" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 8/9 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:299 +msgid "Read routing configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 9/9 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:301 +msgid "Detect current status" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 1/9 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:315 +msgid "Detecting ndiswrapper..." +msgstr "" + +#. modprobe ndiswrapper before hwinfo when needed (#343893) +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:334 +msgid "" +"Detected a ndiswrapper configuration,\n" +"but the kernel module was not modprobed.\n" +"Do you want to modprobe ndiswrapper?\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:342 +msgid "" +"ndiswrapper kernel module has not been loaded.\n" +"Check configuration manually.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 2/9 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:356 +msgid "Detecting network devices..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 3/9 - multiple devices may be present, really plural +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:364 +msgid "Reading device configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 4/9 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:370 +msgid "Reading network configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 5/9 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:379 +msgid "Reading firewall settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 6/9 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:387 +msgid "Reading hostname and DNS configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 7/9 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:394 +msgid "Reading installation information..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 8/9 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:400 +msgid "Reading routing configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 9/9 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:406 +msgid "Detecting current status..." +msgstr "" + +#. Final progress step +#. Final progress step +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:412 src/modules/Lan.rb:643 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#. (a specialization used when a parameterless function is needed) +#. @return Read(`cache) +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:438 +msgid "To apply this change, a reboot is needed." +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog caption +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:506 +msgid "Saving Network Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 2 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:513 +msgid "Write drivers information" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 3 - multiple devices may be present,really plural +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:515 +msgid "Write device configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 4 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:517 +msgid "Write network configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 5 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:519 +msgid "Write routing configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 6 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:521 +msgid "Write hostname and DNS configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 7 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:523 +msgid "Set up network services" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 8 +#. Progress stage 1 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:527 src/modules/Remote.rb:293 +msgid "Write firewall settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 9 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:531 +msgid "Activate network services" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 2 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:547 +msgid "Writing /etc/modprobe.conf..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 3 - multiple devices may be present, really plural +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:552 +msgid "Writing device configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 4 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:558 +msgid "Writing network configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 5 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:564 +msgid "Writing routing configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 6 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:572 +msgid "Writing hostname and DNS configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 7 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:585 +msgid "Setting up network services..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 8 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:593 src/modules/Remote.rb:307 +msgid "Writing firewall settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 9 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:603 +msgid "Activating network services..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:639 +msgid "No network running" +msgstr "" + +#. Import data +#. @param [Hash] settings settings to be imported +#. @return true on success +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:698 +msgid "AutoYaST setting networking/managed: NetworkManager is not available, Wicked will be used." +msgstr "" + +#. Create a textual summary for the general network settings +#. proposal (NetworkManager + ipv6) +#. @return [rich text, links] +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:782 +msgid "Network Mode" +msgstr "" + +#. network mode: the interfaces are controlled by the user +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:787 +msgid "Interfaces controlled by NetworkManager" +msgstr "" + +#. disable NetworkManager applet +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:789 +msgid "Disable NetworkManager" +msgstr "" + +#. network mode +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:793 +msgid "Traditional network setup with NetControl - ifup" +msgstr "" + +#. enable NetworkManager applet +#. for virtual network proposal (bridged) don't show hyperlink to enable networkmanager +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:796 +msgid "Enable NetworkManager" +msgstr "" + +#. ipv6 support is enabled +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:802 +msgid "Support for IPv6 protocol is enabled" +msgstr "" + +#. disable ipv6 support +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:804 +msgid "Disable IPv6" +msgstr "" + +#. ipv6 support is disabled +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:808 +msgid "Support for IPv6 protocol is disabled" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: a possible value for: IPoIB device mode +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:193 +msgid "connected" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:194 +msgid "datagram" +msgstr "" + +#. summary description of STARTMODE=auto +#. summary description of STARTMODE=auto +#. summary description of STARTMODE=hotplug +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1260 src/modules/LanItems.rb:1264 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1268 +msgid "Started automatically at boot" +msgstr "" + +#. summary description of STARTMODE=ifplugd +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1272 +msgid "Started automatically on cable connection" +msgstr "" + +#. summary description of STARTMODE=managed +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1276 +msgid "Managed by NetworkManager" +msgstr "" + +#. summary description of STARTMODE=off +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1280 +msgid "Will not be started at all" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1286 +msgid "Started manually" +msgstr "" + +#. do nothing +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1298 +msgid "IP address assigned using" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1302 +msgid "IP address: %s/%s" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1305 +msgid "IP address: %s, subnet mask %s" +msgstr "" + +#. FIXME: side effect: sets @type. No reason for that. It should only build item +#. overview. Check and remove. +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1329 +msgid "Not configured" +msgstr "" + +#. display it only if we need it, don't duplicate "ifcfg_name" above +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1351 src/modules/LanItems.rb:1411 +msgid "Device Name: %s" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1372 +msgid "Bonding slaves" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1386 +msgid "enslaved in %s" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1387 +msgid "Bonding master" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1401 +msgid "Not connected" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1402 +msgid "No hwinfo" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1417 +msgid "Unable to configure the network card because the kernel device (eth0, wlan0) is not present. This is mostly caused by missing firmware (for wlan devices). See dmesg output for details." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1423 +msgid "" +"The device is not configured. Press <b>Edit</b>\n" +"to configure.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1430 +msgid "Needed firmware" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1430 +msgid "unknown" +msgstr "" + +#. Package containing SuSEfirewall2 services has to be installed before +#. reading SuSEFirewall, otherwise exception is thrown by firewall +#: src/modules/Remote.rb:243 +msgid "" +"Package %{package} is not installed\n" +"firewall settings will be disabled." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 2 +#: src/modules/Remote.rb:295 +msgid "Configure display manager" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 3 +#: src/modules/Remote.rb:300 +msgid "Restart the services" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Remote.rb:303 +msgid "Saving Remote Administration Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Remote.rb:312 +msgid "Configuring display manager..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Remote.rb:316 +msgid "Restarting the service..." +msgstr "" + +#. Enable xinetd +#. Enable XDM +#: src/modules/Remote.rb:342 src/modules/Remote.rb:350 +msgid "Enabling service %{service} has failed" +msgstr "" + +#. Do this only if package xinetd is installed (#256385) +#: src/modules/Remote.rb:377 +msgid "" +"Your display manager must be restarted.\n" +"To take the changes in remote administration into account, \n" +"please restart it manually or log out and log in again." +msgstr "" + +#. description in proposal +#: src/modules/Remote.rb:408 +msgid "Remote administration is enabled." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Remote.rb:408 +msgid "Remote administration is disabled." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1 +#: src/modules/Routing.rb:261 +msgid "Write IP forwarding settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 2 +#: src/modules/Routing.rb:263 +msgid "Write routing settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Routing.rb:266 +msgid "Saving Routing Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1/2 +#: src/modules/Routing.rb:271 +msgid "Writing IP forwarding settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. at first stop the running routes +#. FIXME: SCR::Execute(.target.bash, "/etc/init.d/route stop"); +#. sysconfig does not support restarting routes only, +#. so we let our caller do it together with other things +#. Progress stage 2/2 +#: src/modules/Routing.rb:281 +msgid "Writing routing settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. Summary text +#: src/modules/Routing.rb:434 +msgid "Gateway: %s" +msgstr "" + +#. Summary text +#: src/modules/Routing.rb:438 +msgid "IP Forwarding for IPv4: %s" +msgstr "" + +#. Summary text +#: src/modules/Routing.rb:442 +msgid "IP Forwarding for IPv6: %s" +msgstr "" + +#. item in combo box Firewall Zone +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewall4Network.rb:124 +msgid "Automatically Assigned Zone" +msgstr "" + +#. item in combo box Firewall Zone +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewall4Network.rb:127 +msgid "Firewall Disabled" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Part of combo box item -> "Internal Zone (Unprotected)" +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewall4Network.rb:139 +msgid "(Unprotected)" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/nfs.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/nfs.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/nfs.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,432 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. Command line help text for the nfs module +#: src/clients/nfs.rb:29 +msgid "Configuration of NFS client" +msgstr "" + +#. command line action help +#: src/clients/nfs.rb:43 +msgid "List configured NFS mounts" +msgstr "" + +#. command line action help +#: src/clients/nfs.rb:50 +msgid "Add an NFS mount" +msgstr "" + +#. command line action help +#: src/clients/nfs.rb:55 +msgid "Edit an NFS mount" +msgstr "" + +#. command line action help +#: src/clients/nfs.rb:60 +msgid "Delete an NFS mount" +msgstr "" + +#. host:path +#. command line option help +#. fstab(5): fs_spec +#: src/clients/nfs.rb:70 +msgid "Remote file system (in the form 'host:path')" +msgstr "" + +#. path +#. command line option help +#. fstab(5): fs_file +#: src/clients/nfs.rb:79 +msgid "Local mount point" +msgstr "" + +#. a list? +#. command line option help +#. fstab(5): fs_mntops +#: src/clients/nfs.rb:89 +msgid "Mount options" +msgstr "" + +#. nfs or nfs4 +#. command line option help +#. fstab(5): fs_type +#: src/clients/nfs.rb:98 +msgid "File system ID, supported nfs and nfs4. Default value is nfs." +msgstr "" + +#. CLI action handler. +#. Print summary in command line +#. @param [Hash] options command options +#. @return false so that Write is not called in non-interactive mode +#. table header +#: src/clients/nfs.rb:159 src/include/nfs/ui.rb:481 +msgid "Server" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/nfs.rb:160 +msgid "Remote File System" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/clients/nfs.rb:161 src/include/nfs/ui.rb:484 +msgid "Mount Point" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/clients/nfs.rb:162 src/include/nfs/ui.rb:488 +msgid "Options" +msgstr "" + +#. CLI action handler. +#. @param [Hash] options command options +#. @return whether successful +#: src/clients/nfs.rb:205 src/clients/nfs.rb:236 +msgid "Unknown value for option \"type\"." +msgstr "" + +#. error +#. error +#: src/clients/nfs.rb:230 src/clients/nfs.rb:334 +msgid "No NFS mount specified." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/clients/nfs.rb:253 +msgid "No NFS mount matching the criteria found." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/clients/nfs.rb:271 +msgid "Multiple NFS mounts match the criteria:" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup message +#: src/include/nfs/routines.rb:83 +msgid "" +"The hostname entered is invalid. It must be\n" +"shorter than 50 characters and only use\n" +"valid IPv4, IPv6 or domain name.\n" +"Valid IPv4: %1\n" +"Valid IPv6: %2\n" +"Valid domain: %3" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup message +#: src/include/nfs/routines.rb:116 +msgid "" +"fstab already contains an entry\n" +"with mount point '%1'." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup message (spaces are now allowed) +#: src/include/nfs/routines.rb:139 +msgid "" +"The path entered is invalid.\n" +"It must be shorter than 70 characters\n" +"and it must begin with a slash (/)." +msgstr "" + +#. Help, part 1 of 3 +#: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:41 +msgid "" +"<p>The table contains all directories \n" +"exported from remote servers and mounted locally via NFS (NFS shares).</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Help, part 2 of 3 +#: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:46 +msgid "" +"<p>Each NFS share is identified by remote NFS server address and\n" +"exported directory, local directory where the remote directory is mounted, \n" +"NFS type (either plain nfs or nfsv4) and mount options. For further information \n" +"about mounting NFS and mount options, refer to <tt>man nfs.</tt></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Help, part 3 of 3 +#: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:53 +msgid "" +"<p>To mount a new NFS share, click <B>Add</B>. To change the configuration of\n" +"a currently mounted share, click <B>Edit</B>. Remove and unmount a selected\n" +"share with <B>Delete</B>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:60 +msgid "" +"<p>If you need to access NFSv4 shares (NFSv4 is a newer version of the NFS\n" +"protocol), check the <b>Enable NFSv4</b> option. In that case, you might need\n" +"to supply specific a <b>NFSv4 Domain Name</b> required for the correct setting\n" +"of file/directory access rights.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. selection box label +#. changed from "Remote hosts" because now it shows +#. NFS servers only +#: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:164 +msgid "&NFS Servers" +msgstr "" + +#. selection box label +#: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:176 +msgid "&Exported Directories" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:249 +msgid "&NFS Server Hostname" +msgstr "" + +#. pushbutton label +#. choose a host from a list +#. appears in help text too +#: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:255 +msgid "Choo&se" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:263 +msgid "&Remote Directory" +msgstr "" + +#. pushbutton label, +#. select from a list of remote filesystems +#. make it short +#. appears in help text too +#: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:270 +msgid "&Select" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:275 +msgid "NFS&v4 Share" +msgstr "" + +#. parallel NFS, protocol version 4.1 +#: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:278 +msgid "pNFS (v4.1)" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:287 +msgid "&Mount Point (local)" +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#. browse directories to select a mount point +#. appears in help text too +#: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:293 +msgid "&Browse" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:298 +msgid "O&ptions" +msgstr "" + +#. label message +#: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:319 +msgid "Scanning for hosts on this LAN..." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: 1st part of error message +#: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:325 +msgid "No NFS server has been found on your network." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: 2nd part of error message (1st one is 'No nfs servers have been found ...) +#: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:331 +msgid "" +"\n" +"This could be caused by a running SuSEfirewall2,\n" +"which probably blocks the network scanning." +msgstr "" + +#. Popup dialog, %1 is a host name +#: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:356 +msgid "Getting directory list for \"%1\"..." +msgstr "" + +#. heading for a directory selection dialog +#: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:371 +msgid "Select the Mount Point" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/4 +#. change: locally defined -> servers on LAN +#: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:420 +msgid "" +"<p>Enter the <b>NFS Server Hostname</b>. With\n" +"<b>Choose</b>, browse through a list of\n" +"NFS servers on the local network.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/4 +#. added "Select" button +#: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:429 +msgid "" +"<p>In <b>Remote File System</b>,\n" +"enter the path to the directory on the NFS server. Use\n" +"<b>Select</b> to select one from those exported by the server.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 3/4 +#: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:439 +msgid "" +"<p>\t\t\n" +"For <b>Mount Point</b>, enter the path in the local file system where the directory should be mounted. With\n" +"<b>Browse</b>, select your mount point\n" +"interactively.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 4/4 +#: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:450 +msgid "" +"<p>For a list of <b>Options</b>,\n" +"read the man page mount(8).</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. popup heading +#: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:455 +msgid "Help" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:482 +msgid "Remote Directory" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:486 +msgid "NFS Type" +msgstr "" + +#. #211570 +#: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:507 +msgid "Enable NFSv4" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:508 +msgid "NFSv4 Domain Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:513 +msgid "Enable &GSS Security" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:527 +msgid "&NFS Shares" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:528 +msgid "NFS &Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Default values +#: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:640 +msgid "Really delete %1?" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog heading +#: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:681 +msgid "NFS Client Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup message +#: src/modules/Nfs.rb:387 +msgid "Unable to create directory '%1'." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup message +#: src/modules/Nfs.rb:405 +msgid "" +"Unable to write to /etc/fstab.\n" +"No changes will be made to the\n" +"the NFS client configuration.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog label +#: src/modules/Nfs.rb:447 +msgid "Writing NFS Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage label +#: src/modules/Nfs.rb:452 +msgid "Stop services" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage label +#: src/modules/Nfs.rb:454 +msgid "Start services" +msgstr "" + +#. progress step label +#: src/modules/Nfs.rb:458 +msgid "Stopping services..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step label +#: src/modules/Nfs.rb:460 +msgid "Starting services..." +msgstr "" + +#. final progress step label +#: src/modules/Nfs.rb:462 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/modules/Nfs.rb:468 +msgid "Writing NFS client settings. Please wait..." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup message +#: src/modules/Nfs.rb:488 +msgid "Unable to mount the NFS entries from /etc/fstab." +msgstr "" + +#. summary header +#: src/modules/Nfs.rb:510 +msgid "NFS Entries" +msgstr "" + +#. summary item, %1 is a number +#: src/modules/Nfs.rb:514 +msgid "%1 entries configured" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: error popup +#: src/modules/NfsOptions.rb:140 +msgid "Empty option strings are not allowed." +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: error popup +#: src/modules/NfsOptions.rb:151 +msgid "Unexpected value '%{value}' for option '%{key}'" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: error popup +#: src/modules/NfsOptions.rb:155 +msgid "Unknown option: '%{key}'" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: error popup +#: src/modules/NfsOptions.rb:159 +msgid "Invalid option: '%{opt}'" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: error popup +#: src/modules/NfsOptions.rb:163 +msgid "Empty value for option: '%{key}'" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/nfs_server.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/nfs_server.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/nfs_server.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,437 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. Command line help text for the nfs-server module +#: src/clients/nfs_server.rb:46 +msgid "Configuration of NFS server" +msgstr "" + +#. command line action help +#: src/clients/nfs_server.rb:59 +msgid "NFS server configuration summary" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/nfs_server.rb:68 +msgid "Start NFS server" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/nfs_server.rb:72 +msgid "Stop NFS server" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/nfs_server.rb:76 +msgid "Add a directory to export" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/nfs_server.rb:83 +msgid "Delete a directory from export" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/nfs_server.rb:90 +msgid "Set the parameters for domain, security and enablev4." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/nfs_server.rb:98 +msgid "Directory to export" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/nfs_server.rb:102 +msgid "Host wild card for setting the access to directory" +msgstr "" + +#. command line option help (do not transl. 'man exports') +#: src/clients/nfs_server.rb:107 +msgid "Export options (see 'man exports')" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/nfs_server.rb:113 +msgid "Domain specification for NFSv4 ID mapping, such as 'localdomain' or 'abc.com' etc." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/nfs_server.rb:119 +msgid "Yes/No option for enabling/disabling support for NFSv4." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/nfs_server.rb:125 +msgid "Yes/No option for enabling/disabling secure NFS." +msgstr "" + +#. summary text +#: src/clients/nfs_server.rb:196 +msgid "NFS server is enabled" +msgstr "" + +#. summary text +#: src/clients/nfs_server.rb:199 +msgid "NFS server is disabled" +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/clients/nfs_server.rb:215 +msgid "Required packages (%1) are not installed." +msgstr "" + +#. error +#. error +#: src/clients/nfs_server.rb:255 src/clients/nfs_server.rb:285 +msgid "No mount point specified." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/nfs_server.rb:260 +msgid "" +"The exports table already\n" +"contains this directory." +msgstr "" + +#. CLI action handler. +#. @param [Hash] options command options +#. @return whether successful +#: src/clients/nfs_server.rb:319 +msgid "Domain cannot be set without enabling NFSv4. Use the 'set enablev4' command." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/nfs_server.rb:330 +msgid "Command 'set' must be used in the form 'set option=value'. Use 'set help' to get information about available options." +msgstr "" + +#. Then no need to check for conflict. +#: src/include/nfs_server/routines.rb:205 +#: src/include/nfs_server/routines.rb:215 +msgid "" +"%3 and %4 are both exported with the option fsid=0\n" +"for the same client '%1' (contained in '%2')" +msgstr "" + +#. selection box label +#: src/include/nfs_server/routines.rb:313 +msgid "Dire&ctories" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup message +#: src/include/nfs_server/routines.rb:331 +msgid "" +"The wild card or options string is invalid.\n" +"It must be shorter than 70 characters and it\n" +"must not contain spaces.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup message +#: src/include/nfs_server/routines.rb:353 +msgid "" +"Invalid option.\n" +"Only letters, digits, and the characters =/.:,_- are allowed." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup message +#: src/include/nfs_server/routines.rb:401 +msgid "Unknown option: '%1'" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup message +#: src/include/nfs_server/routines.rb:406 +msgid "Invalid option: '%1'" +msgstr "" + +#. %1 is a list of exported paths +#: src/include/nfs_server/routines.rb:438 +msgid "" +"There are unbalanced parentheses in export options\n" +"for %1.\n" +"Likely, there is a spurious whitespace in the configuration file.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:58 +msgid "&Directory to Export" +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:64 +msgid "&Browse..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:87 +msgid "Enter a non-empty export path. For example, /exports." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup message +#: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:95 +msgid "The exports table already contains this directory." +msgstr "" + +#. the dir does not exist +#: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:101 +msgid "The directory does not exist. Create it?" +msgstr "" + +#. title in the file selection dialog +#: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:111 +msgid "Select the Directory to Export" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:168 +msgid "&Host Wild Card" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:170 +msgid "O&ptions" +msgstr "" + +#. check to see if user has changed options entry in the dialogue +#. thrown due to a "Add Hosts" (as opposed to editing existing ones). +#. If yes, suggest the user with a suitable default option set. +#: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:222 +msgid "" +"'fsid=0' is not a valid option unless \n" +"NFSv4 is enabled (previous page).\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup message +#: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:240 +msgid "" +"Options for this wild card\n" +"are already set." +msgstr "" + +#. Opening NFS server dialog +#. @return `back, `abort, `next `or finish +#: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:272 +msgid "Unable to read the /etc/idmapd.conf file. Setting the default setting for the domain to 'localdomain'." +msgstr "" + +#. Help, part 1 of 2 +#: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:295 +msgid "" +"<P>Here, choose whether to start an NFS server on your computer\n" +"and export some of your directories to others.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. Help, part 2 of 2 +#: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:302 +msgid "" +"<P>If you choose <B>Start NFS Server</B>, clicking <B>Next</B> opens\n" +"a configuration dialog in which to specify the directories to export.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:311 +msgid "" +"<P>If the server needs to handle NFSv4 clients, check <B>Enable NFSv4</B>\n" +"and fill in the NFSv4 domain name you want the ID mapping daemon to use. Leave\n" +"it as localdomain or refer to the man page for idmapd and idmapd.conf if you are not sure.</P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. FIXME: use %1 as nfs-utils.src.rpm produces nfs-kernel-server.rpm +#: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:321 +msgid "" +"<P>If the server and client must authenticate using GSS library, check the\n" +"<B>Enable GSS Security</B> box. To use GSS API, you currently need to have Kerberos and gssapi (nfs-utils > 1.0.7) on your system.</P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:331 +msgid "NFS Server" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label +#: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:342 +msgid "&Start" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label +#: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:351 +msgid "Do &Not Start" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:369 +msgid "Enable NFSv4" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:376 +msgid "Enable NFS&v4" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:381 +msgid "Enter NFSv4 do&main name:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:391 +msgid "Enable &GSS Security" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog title +#: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:411 +msgid "NFS Server Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Help, part 1 of 4 +#: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:487 +msgid "" +"<P>The upper box contains all the directories to export.\n" +"If a directory is selected, the lower box shows the hosts allowed to\n" +"mount this directory.</P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Help, part 2 of 4 +#: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:495 +msgid "" +"<P><b>Host Wild Card</b> sets which hosts can access the selected directory.\n" +"It can be a single host, groups, wild cards, or\n" +"IP networks.</P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Help, part 3 of 4 +#: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:503 +msgid "<p>Enter an asterisk (<tt>*</tt>) instead of a name to specify all hosts.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Help, part 4 of 4 +#: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:509 +msgid "<P>Refer to <tt>man exports</tt> for more information.</P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:524 +msgid "Add &Directory" +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:526 +msgid "&Edit" +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:528 +msgid "De&lete" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:541 +msgid "Host Wild Card" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:543 +msgid "Options" +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:554 +msgid "Add &Host" +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:556 +msgid "Ed&it" +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:558 +msgid "Dele&te" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog title +#: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:565 +msgid "Directories to Export" +msgstr "" + +#. not fatal - write other dirs. +#: src/modules/NfsServer.rb:158 +msgid "" +"Unable to create a missing directory:\n" +"%1" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup message +#: src/modules/NfsServer.rb:170 +msgid "" +"Unable to write to /etc/exports.\n" +"No changes will be made to the\n" +"exported directories.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog label +#: src/modules/NfsServer.rb:192 +msgid "Writing NFS Server Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage label +#: src/modules/NfsServer.rb:197 +msgid "Save /etc/exports" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage label +#: src/modules/NfsServer.rb:199 +msgid "Restart services" +msgstr "" + +#. progress step label +#: src/modules/NfsServer.rb:203 +msgid "Saving /etc/exports..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step label +#: src/modules/NfsServer.rb:205 +msgid "Restarting services..." +msgstr "" + +#. final progress step label +#: src/modules/NfsServer.rb:207 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/modules/NfsServer.rb:215 +msgid "Writing NFS server settings. Please wait..." +msgstr "" + +#. Independent of @ref start because of Heartbeat (#27001). +#: src/modules/NfsServer.rb:229 +msgid "Unable to write to idmapd.conf." +msgstr "" + +#. FIXME svcgssd is gone! (only nfsserver is left) +#: src/modules/NfsServer.rb:266 +msgid "Unable to start svcgssd. Ensure your kerberos and gssapi (nfs-utils) setup is correct." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/NfsServer.rb:275 +msgid "Unable to restart 'svcgssd' service." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/NfsServer.rb:283 +msgid "'svcgssd' is running. Unable to stop it." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup message +#: src/modules/NfsServer.rb:299 +msgid "" +"Unable to restart the NFS server.\n" +"Your changes will be active after reboot.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. summary header; directories exported by NFS +#: src/modules/NfsServer.rb:322 +msgid "NFS Exports" +msgstr "" + +#. add information reg NFSv4 support, domain and security +#: src/modules/NfsServer.rb:340 +msgid "The NFSv4 domain for idmapping is %1." +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/nis.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/nis.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/nis.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,548 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. translators: command line help text for Ldap client module +#: src/clients/nis.rb:74 +msgid "NIS client configuration module." +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'enable' action +#: src/clients/nis.rb:84 +msgid "Enable your machine as NIS client" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'disable' action +#: src/clients/nis.rb:91 +msgid "Disable the NIS client" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'summary' action +#: src/clients/nis.rb:98 +msgid "Configuration summary of NIS client" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'configure' action +#: src/clients/nis.rb:109 +msgid "Change the global settings of NIS client" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'find' action +#: src/clients/nis.rb:116 +msgid "Show available NIS servers for given domain" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for the 'server' option +#: src/clients/nis.rb:124 +msgid "NIS server name or address" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for the 'domain' option +#: src/clients/nis.rb:131 +msgid "NIS domain" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for the 'automounter' option +#: src/clients/nis.rb:138 +msgid "Start or stop automounter" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for the 'broadcast' option +#: src/clients/nis.rb:146 +msgid "Set or unset broadcast search" +msgstr "" + +#. Print summary of basic options +#. @return [Boolean] false +#. summary header +#: src/clients/nis.rb:260 src/modules/Nis.rb:862 +msgid "Automounter enabled" +msgstr "" + +#. summary item: an option is turned on +#. summary item: an option is turned on +#. summary item: an option is turned on +#. summary item: an option is turned on +#. summary item: an option is turned on +#: src/clients/nis.rb:261 src/modules/Nis.rb:831 src/modules/Nis.rb:844 +#: src/modules/Nis.rb:853 src/modules/Nis.rb:857 src/modules/Nis.rb:864 +#: src/modules/Nis.rb:892 +msgid "Yes" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/nis.rb:261 src/modules/Nis.rb:892 +msgid "No" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: network broadcast address +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:62 +msgid "" +"<p>The <b>Broadcast</b> option enables searching\n" +"in the local network to find a server after the specified servers\n" +"fail to respond. It is a security risk.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: short for Expert settings +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:71 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Expert</b> gives access to some\n" +"less frequently used settings.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. pushbutton label +#. Select all items (in this case NIS servers) of a list +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:135 +msgid "Select &All" +msgstr "" + +#. pushbutton label +#. Deselect all items (in this case NIS servers) of a list +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:138 +msgid "Select &None" +msgstr "" + +#. popup window +#. LAN: local area network +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:190 +msgid "Scanning for NIS servers in domain %1 on this LAN..." +msgstr "" + +#. selection box label +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:209 +msgid "&NIS Servers in Domain %1" +msgstr "" + +#. firewall opening help +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:228 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Firewall Settings</b><br>\n" +"To open the firewall to allow accessing the 'ypbind' service\n" +"from remote computers, set <b>Open Port in Firewall</b>.\n" +"To select interfaces on which to open the port, click <b>Firewall Details</b>.\n" +"This option is only available if the firewall is enabled.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:240 +msgid "" +"<p>Enter your NIS domain, such as example.com,\n" +" and the NIS server's address, such as nis.example.com or 10.20.1.1.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for netconfig part +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:244 +msgid "" +"<p>Select the way how the NIS configuration will be modified. Normally, it is\n" +"handled by the netconfig script, which merges the data statically defined here\n" +"with dynamically obtained data (e.g. from DHCP client, NetworkManager\n" +"etc.). This is the Default Policy and sufficient for most configurations. \n" +"By choosing Only Manual Changes, netconfig will no longer be allowed to modify\n" +"the configuration. You can, however, edit the file manually. By choosing\n" +"Custom Policy, you can specify a custom policy string, which consists of a\n" +"space-separated list of interface names, including wildcards, with\n" +"STATIC/STATIC_FALLBACK as predefined special values. For more information, see\n" +"the netconfig manual page.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:260 +msgid "" +"<p>Specify multiple servers\n" +"by separating their addresses with spaces.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:271 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Automounter</b> is a daemon that mounts directories automatically,\n" +"such as users' home directories.\n" +"It is assumed that its configuration files (auto.*) already exist,\n" +"either locally or over NIS.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:279 +msgid "<p>NFS Settings which affects how the automounter operates could be set in NFS Client, which can be configured using <b>NFS Configuration</b> button.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:333 +msgid "Au&tomatic Setup (Via NetworkManager and DHCP)" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:335 +msgid "Au&tomatic Setup (via DHCP)" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#. frame label +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:342 src/include/nis/ui.rb:1028 +msgid "NIS client" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:352 +msgid "Netconfig NIS &Policy" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:355 +msgid "Only Manual Changes" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:357 +msgid "Default Policy" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:359 +msgid "Custom Policy" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:367 +msgid "C&ustom Policy" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:377 src/include/nis/ui.rb:393 +msgid "N&IS Domain" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:384 src/include/nis/ui.rb:401 +msgid "&Addresses of NIS servers" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:411 +msgid "Br&oadcast" +msgstr "" + +#. pushbutton label, find nis servers +#. Shortcut must not conflict with Finish and Next (#29960) +#. pushbutton label, find nis servers +#. Shortcut must not conflict with Finish and Next (#29960) +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:417 src/include/nis/ui.rb:864 +msgid "Fin&d" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:421 +msgid "Additional NIS Domains" +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:435 +msgid "&Edit" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:459 +msgid "Do ¬ use NIS" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:468 +msgid "&Use NIS" +msgstr "" + +#. button label (short for Expert settings) +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:489 +msgid "E&xpert..." +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:495 +msgid "NFS Configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. check box label +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:499 +msgid "Start Auto&mounter" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog title +#. dialog title +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:508 src/include/nis/ui.rb:1036 +msgid "Configuration of NIS client" +msgstr "" + +#. Message popup. The user wants to Find servers +#. but the domain is unknown. +#. Message popup. The user wants to Find servers +#. but the domain is unknown. +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:575 src/include/nis/ui.rb:904 +msgid "Finding servers works only when the domain is known." +msgstr "" + +#. yes-no popup +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:593 +msgid "" +"When you configure your machine as a NIS client,\n" +"you cannot retrieve the user data from LDAP.\n" +"Are you sure?" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/4 +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:676 +msgid "<p>Normally, it is possible for any host to query which server a client is using. Disabling <b>Answer Remote Hosts</b> restricts this only to the local host.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/4 +#. Check, ie. turn on a check box +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:684 +msgid "<p>Check <b>Broken server</b> if answers from servers running on an unprivileged port should be accepted. It is a security risk and it is better to replace such a server.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 3/4 +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:692 +msgid "<p>See <b>man ypbind</b> for details on other options.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#. dialog title +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:703 src/include/nis/ui.rb:731 +msgid "Expert settings" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:708 +msgid "Ans&wer Remote Hosts" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:712 +msgid "Br&oken server" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label (do not translate 'ypbind') +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:719 +msgid "Other &ypbind options" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: multilineedit label +#. comma: "," +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:846 +msgid "&Servers (separated by spaces or commas)" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:853 +msgid "&Broadcast" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:859 +msgid "&SLP" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: popup dialog heading +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:874 +msgid "Domain Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Add a domain, Adding a domain? Edit... +#. Translators: text entry label +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:877 +msgid "&Domain name" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: error message +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:932 +msgid "This domain is already defined." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: error message +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:937 +msgid "The format of server address '%1' is not correct." +msgstr "" + +#. error message, 'Broadcast' and 'SLP' are checkboxes +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:946 +msgid "" +"Enabling both Broadcast and SLP options\n" +"does not make any sense. Select just one option." +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:979 +msgid "<p>Specify the servers for additional domains.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:987 +msgid "<p>The Service Location Protocol (<b>SLP</b>) can be used to find NIS server.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog label +#. dialog subtitle +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:999 src/include/nis/ui.rb:1038 +msgid "Additional Domains" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#. summary item +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:1005 src/modules/Nis.rb:889 +msgid "Domain" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#. summary header +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:1007 src/modules/Nis.rb:842 +msgid "Broadcast" +msgstr "" + +#. table header - Service Location Protocol +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:1009 +msgid "SLP" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#. summary item +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:1011 src/modules/Nis.rb:887 +msgid "Servers" +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:1017 +msgid "A&dd" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: a yes-no popup +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:1123 +msgid "Really delete this domain?" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text FIXME better... +#: src/include/nis/ui.rb:1253 +msgid "NIS is now enabled." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: do not translate (none)! +#: src/modules/Nis.rb:580 +msgid "" +"A NIS domain name must not be empty,\n" +"it must not be \"(none)\",\n" +"and it must be at most 64 characters long.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. message popup +#: src/modules/Nis.rb:600 +msgid "" +"Only an IP address can be used\n" +"because host names are resolved using NIS.\n" +"\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: popup message part, ends with a newline +#: src/modules/Nis.rb:647 +msgid "The automounter package will be installed.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. summary: Domain or servers are retrieved by the +#. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. +#. Will be placed after NIS Domain/NIS Servers instead of the +#. actual settings. +#: src/modules/Nis.rb:826 +msgid "by DHCP" +msgstr "" + +#. summary header +#: src/modules/Nis.rb:829 +msgid "NIS Client enabled" +msgstr "" + +#. summary header +#: src/modules/Nis.rb:833 +msgid "NIS Domain" +msgstr "" + +#. summary header +#: src/modules/Nis.rb:836 +msgid "NIS Servers" +msgstr "" + +#. TODO: a full list +#: src/modules/Nis.rb:848 +msgid "Other domains" +msgstr "" + +#. summary header +#: src/modules/Nis.rb:851 +msgid "Answer to local host only" +msgstr "" + +#. summary header +#: src/modules/Nis.rb:855 +msgid "Broken server" +msgstr "" + +#. summary header +#: src/modules/Nis.rb:859 +msgid "ypbind options" +msgstr "" + +#. summary item (yes/no follows) +#: src/modules/Nis.rb:892 +msgid "Client Enabled" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog label +#: src/modules/Nis.rb:1206 +msgid "Writing NIS Configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage label +#: src/modules/Nis.rb:1211 +msgid "Stop services" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage label +#: src/modules/Nis.rb:1213 +msgid "Start services" +msgstr "" + +#. progress step label +#: src/modules/Nis.rb:1217 +msgid "Stopping services..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step label +#: src/modules/Nis.rb:1219 +msgid "Starting services..." +msgstr "" + +#. final progress step label +#: src/modules/Nis.rb:1221 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/modules/Nis.rb:1227 +msgid "Writing NIS client settings" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup message +#: src/modules/Nis.rb:1252 +msgid "Error while running ypclient." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup message +#: src/modules/Nis.rb:1260 +msgid "NIS server not found." +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/nis_server.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/nis_server.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/nis_server.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,852 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. translators: command line help text for nis server module +#: src/clients/nis_server.rb:58 +msgid "NIS server configuration module." +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'summary' action +#: src/clients/nis_server.rb:73 +msgid "Configuration summary of NIS server" +msgstr "" + +#. command line action help +#: src/clients/nis_server.rb:83 +msgid "Stop NIS server" +msgstr "" + +#. command line action help +#: src/clients/nis_server.rb:91 +msgid "Configure NIS master server" +msgstr "" + +#. command line action help +#: src/clients/nis_server.rb:101 +msgid "Configure NIS slave server" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for the 'domain' option +#: src/clients/nis_server.rb:109 +msgid "NIS domain" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for the 'master_ip' option +#: src/clients/nis_server.rb:116 +msgid "IP address of master NIS server" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for the 'yppasswd' option +#: src/clients/nis_server.rb:123 +msgid "Start or stop yppasswd service" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for the 'ypdir' option +#: src/clients/nis_server.rb:131 +msgid "YP source directory" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for the 'maps' option +#: src/clients/nis_server.rb:138 +msgid "Maps distributed by server" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for the 'hosts' option +#: src/clients/nis_server.rb:145 +msgid "Hosts allowed to query server ('netmask:network')" +msgstr "" + +#. summary label +#. To translators: label in the dialog +#. To translators: label in the dialog +#: src/clients/nis_server.rb:180 src/include/nis_server/what.rb:86 +#: src/include/nis_server/what.rb:142 +msgid "No NIS Server is configured." +msgstr "" + +#. summary label +#: src/clients/nis_server.rb:186 +msgid "A NIS master server is configured." +msgstr "" + +#. summary label +#: src/clients/nis_server.rb:189 +msgid "A NIS slave server is configured." +msgstr "" + +#. summary label +#. Create a textual summary and a list of unconfigured cards +#. @param split split configured and unconfigured? +#. @return summary of the current configuration +#: src/clients/nis_server.rb:196 src/modules/NisServer.rb:1290 +msgid "NIS Domain" +msgstr "" + +#. summary label: +#: src/clients/nis_server.rb:204 +msgid "YP Source Directory: " +msgstr "" + +#. summary label: +#: src/clients/nis_server.rb:209 +msgid "Available Maps: " +msgstr "" + +#. summary label: +#: src/clients/nis_server.rb:217 +msgid "NIS Master Server: " +msgstr "" + +#. summary label (netmask:network shows output format) +#: src/clients/nis_server.rb:235 +msgid "" +"Hosts Allowed to Query Server (netmask:network):\n" +"%1" +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/clients/nis_server.rb:258 +msgid "Required packages (%1) are not installed." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/clients/nis_server.rb:282 +msgid "Invalid netmask: %1.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/clients/nis_server.rb:289 +msgid "Invalid network: %1.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/clients/nis_server.rb:356 +msgid "" +"These maps are not supported:\n" +"%1" +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/clients/nis_server.rb:405 +msgid "NIS master server IP was not specified." +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/3 +#: src/include/nis_server/details.rb:66 +msgid "" +"<p>You can change NIS server source directory (usually\n" +"<i>'/etc'</i>).</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/3 +#: src/include/nis_server/details.rb:73 +msgid "" +"<p>Select if your <i>passwd</i> file should be merged with the <i>shadow</i>\n" +"file (only possible if the <i>shadow</i> file exists).</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 3/3 +#: src/include/nis_server/details.rb:81 +msgid "<p>You can also adjust the minimum user and group id.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: intfield label +#: src/include/nis_server/details.rb:86 +msgid "Minimum &UID" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: intfield label +#: src/include/nis_server/details.rb:89 +msgid "Minimum &GID" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: textentry label +#: src/include/nis_server/details.rb:98 +msgid "&YP Source directory" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label +#: src/include/nis_server/details.rb:103 +msgid "Merge pa&sswords" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: dialog label +#: src/include/nis_server/details.rb:111 +msgid "NIS Master Server Details Setup" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/1 +#. Translators: the text was truncated because now there's +#. a MultiSelectionBox instead of two SelectionBoxes that +#. were a pain to use. +#: src/include/nis_server/maps.rb:61 +msgid "<p>With this dialog, adjust which maps will be available.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. multilesection box label +#: src/include/nis_server/maps.rb:103 +msgid "&Maps" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: dialog label +#: src/include/nis_server/maps.rb:109 +msgid "NIS Server Maps Setup" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/3 +#: src/include/nis_server/master.rb:71 +msgid "" +"<p>Enter a NIS <b>domain</b>. If this host is also a NIS client using this machine as a server, check\n" +"the corresponding option.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/3 +#: src/include/nis_server/master.rb:78 +msgid "" +"<p>For slave servers to cooperate with this master, check\n" +"<i>Active Slave NIS server exists</i>. If you check\n" +"<i>Fast Map distribution</i>, it will speed up the transfer of maps to the\n" +"slaves.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 3/3 +#: src/include/nis_server/master.rb:89 +msgid "" +"<p><i>Allow changes to passwords</i> lets the users change their\n" +"passwords in the presence of NIS. Buttons to allow\n" +"changing the login shell or GECOS (full name and related information) can\n" +"be used to set up these more specific options.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: checkbox label +#: src/include/nis_server/master.rb:106 +msgid "Allow changes to &GECOS field" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: checkbox label +#: src/include/nis_server/master.rb:114 +msgid "Allow changes to login &shell" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: checkbox label +#: src/include/nis_server/master.rb:130 +msgid "Allow changes to &passwords" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: checkbox label +#. checkbox label +#: src/include/nis_server/master.rb:150 src/include/nis_server/slave.rb:98 +msgid "This host is also a NIS &client" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: frame label +#: src/include/nis_server/master.rb:164 +msgid "NIS &Domain Name" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: checkbox label +#: src/include/nis_server/master.rb:170 +msgid "Active Slave NIS server &exists" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: checkbox label +#: src/include/nis_server/master.rb:179 +msgid "&Fast Map distribution (rpc.ypxfrd)" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: frame label +#: src/include/nis_server/master.rb:185 +msgid "Changing of passwords" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: pushbutton label +#: src/include/nis_server/master.rb:193 +msgid "&Other global settings ..." +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: dialog label +#: src/include/nis_server/master.rb:201 +msgid "Master Server Setup" +msgstr "" + +#. warning popup +#: src/include/nis_server/routines.rb:133 +msgid "" +"Your machine is set up to change the NIS domain name via DHCP.\n" +"This may replace the domain name just entered. Check your\n" +"settings and consider not running a DHCP client on a NIS server.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. firewall openning help +#: src/include/nis_server/routines.rb:154 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Firewall Settings</b><br>\n" +"To open the firewall to allow accessing the NIS server\n" +"from remote computers, set <b>Open Port in Firewall</b>.\n" +"To select interfaces on which to open the port, click <b>Firewall Details</b>.\n" +"This option is only available if the firewall is enabled.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: popup dialog heading +#: src/include/nis_server/securenets.rb:117 +msgid "Edit netmask and network" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: textentry label +#: src/include/nis_server/securenets.rb:120 +msgid "Net&mask" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: textentry label +#: src/include/nis_server/securenets.rb:123 +msgid "Net&work" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: error message +#: src/include/nis_server/securenets.rb:149 +msgid "Wrong netmask!\n" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: error message +#: src/include/nis_server/securenets.rb:154 +msgid "Wrong network!\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/4 +#: src/include/nis_server/securenets.rb:172 +msgid "<p>Please enter which hosts are allowed to query the NIS server.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/4 +#: src/include/nis_server/securenets.rb:178 +msgid "" +"<p>A host address will be allowed if <b>network</b> is equal\n" +"to the bitwise <i>AND</i> of the host's address and the <b>netmask</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 3/4 +#: src/include/nis_server/securenets.rb:185 +msgid "" +"<p>The entry with <b>netmask</b> <tt>255.0.0.0</tt> and <b>network</b>\n" +"<tt>127.0.0.0</tt> must exist to allow connections from the local host.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 4/4 +#: src/include/nis_server/securenets.rb:192 +msgid "" +"<p>Entering <b>netmask</b> <tt>0.0.0.0</tt> and\n" +"<b>network</b> <tt>0.0.0.0</tt> gives access to all hosts.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: table header +#: src/include/nis_server/securenets.rb:206 +msgid "Netmask" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: table header +#: src/include/nis_server/securenets.rb:208 +msgid "Network" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: dialog label +#: src/include/nis_server/securenets.rb:222 +msgid "NIS Server Query Hosts Setup" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/2 +#: src/include/nis_server/slave.rb:62 +msgid "<p>Enter the NIS <b>domain</b> and the IP <b>address</b> or host name of the master NIS server.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/2 +#: src/include/nis_server/slave.rb:69 +msgid "<p>If this host is also a NIS client using this machine as a server, check the corresponding option.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/nis_server/slave.rb:82 +msgid "N&IS Domain Name:" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/nis_server/slave.rb:90 +msgid "NIS &Master Server:" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: dialog label +#: src/include/nis_server/slave.rb:109 +msgid "Slave Server Setup" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: selection box label +#: src/include/nis_server/slaves.rb:71 +msgid "&Remote hosts" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: textentry label +#: src/include/nis_server/slaves.rb:100 +msgid "&Slave's host name" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: popup dialog heading +#: src/include/nis_server/slaves.rb:112 +msgid "Edit slave" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: label message +#: src/include/nis_server/slaves.rb:145 +msgid "Scanning for hosts on this LAN..." +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/1 +#: src/include/nis_server/slaves.rb:175 +msgid "<p>Here, enter the names of hosts to configure as NIS server slaves. Use <i>Add</i> to add a new one, <i>Edit</i> to change an existing entry, and <i>Delete</i> to remove an entry.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: selection box label +#: src/include/nis_server/slaves.rb:195 src/include/nis_server/slaves.rb:234 +#: src/include/nis_server/slaves.rb:250 src/include/nis_server/slaves.rb:263 +msgid "&Slaves" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: dialog label +#: src/include/nis_server/slaves.rb:204 +msgid "NIS Master Server Slaves Setup" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: ContinueCancel Popup headline +#: src/include/nis_server/ui.rb:78 +msgid "Finish" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: ContinueCancel Popup +#: src/include/nis_server/ui.rb:80 +msgid "Really save configuration ?" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: YesNo Popup headline +#: src/include/nis_server/ui.rb:92 +msgid "Exit" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: YesNo Popup +#: src/include/nis_server/ui.rb:94 +msgid "Really exit configuration without saving ?" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: popup label +#: src/include/nis_server/ui.rb:106 +msgid "Error details" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: popup label +#: src/include/nis_server/ui.rb:121 +msgid "" +"Error during configuration:\n" +"%1" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: Error popup +#: src/include/nis_server/ui.rb:130 +msgid "&Details" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/2 +#: src/include/nis_server/what.rb:57 +msgid "" +"<p>Select whether to configure the NIS server as a <b>master</b> or a\n" +"<b>slave</b> or not to configure a NIS server.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/2 +#: src/include/nis_server/what.rb:73 +msgid "" +"<p>The NIS server package will be <b>installed</b> first if you want to\n" +"configure it.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: label in the dialog +#: src/include/nis_server/what.rb:81 +msgid "No NIS Software is installed." +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: label in the dialog +#: src/include/nis_server/what.rb:90 +msgid "Install and set up an NIS &Master Server" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: label in the dialog +#: src/include/nis_server/what.rb:92 +msgid "Install and set up an NIS &Slave Server" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: label in the dialog +#. To translators: checkbox label +#: src/include/nis_server/what.rb:94 src/include/nis_server/what.rb:150 +msgid "&Do nothing and leave set up" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: label in the dialog +#: src/include/nis_server/what.rb:100 src/include/nis_server/what.rb:137 +msgid "NIS Software is installed." +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: part of the label in the dialog +#: src/include/nis_server/what.rb:104 +msgid "Master" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: part of the label in the dialog +#: src/include/nis_server/what.rb:106 +msgid "Slave" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: label in the dialog, %1 is Master or Slave above +#: src/include/nis_server/what.rb:113 +msgid "A NIS %1 Server is configured." +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: label in the dialog +#: src/include/nis_server/what.rb:121 +msgid "Reconfigure NIS &Master Server" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: label in the dialog +#: src/include/nis_server/what.rb:123 +msgid "Change to NIS &Master Server" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: label in the dialog +#: src/include/nis_server/what.rb:125 +msgid "Reconfigure NIS &Slave Server" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: label in the dialog +#: src/include/nis_server/what.rb:127 +msgid "Change to NIS &Slave Server" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: label in the dialog +#: src/include/nis_server/what.rb:132 +msgid "&Deactivate any NIS server configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: checkbox label +#: src/include/nis_server/what.rb:146 +msgid "Create NIS &Master Server" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: checkbox label +#: src/include/nis_server/what.rb:148 +msgid "Create NIS &Slave Server" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: label in the dialog +#: src/include/nis_server/what.rb:155 +msgid "Current status:" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: frame label +#: src/include/nis_server/what.rb:207 +msgid "Select what you want to do" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: dialog label +#: src/include/nis_server/what.rb:213 +msgid "Network Information Service (NIS) Server Setup" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: dialog caption +#: src/include/nis_server/wizards.rb:134 +msgid "NIS Server Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. label +#: src/include/nis_server/wizards.rb:136 +msgid "Initializing..." +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/1 +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:192 +msgid "<p>Please wait while reading the configuration.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog heading +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:194 +msgid "Initializing NIS server setup" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: progress label %1 is filename +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:220 +msgid "Load '%1' file" +msgstr "" + +#. Trans: progress label +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:224 +msgid "Determine running services" +msgstr "" + +#. Trans: progress label +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:226 +msgid "Determine server type" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage label +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:228 +msgid "Read firewall settings" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: progress label %1 is filename +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:234 +msgid "Loading '%1'..." +msgstr "" + +#. Trans: progress label +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:238 +msgid "Determining running services..." +msgstr "" + +#. Trans: progress label +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:240 +msgid "Determining server type..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step label +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:242 +msgid "Reading firewall settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. Trans: progress label +#. progress step +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:244 src/modules/NisServer.rb:523 +msgid "Done." +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/1 +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:495 +msgid "<p>Please wait until the configuration is saved.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog heading +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:497 +msgid "Saving NIS server setup" +msgstr "" + +#. progress bar stage +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:512 +msgid "Save firewall settings" +msgstr "" + +#. progress step +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:521 +msgid "Saving firewall settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: message in the popup dialog +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:574 +msgid "Error while removing %1\n" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: message in the popup dialog +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:601 +msgid "Directory %1 cannot be created.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: message in the popup dialog +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:632 +msgid "Cannot get list of maps.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: message in the popup dialog +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:663 +msgid "Error while retrieving %1 map from master.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: message in the popup dialog +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:674 +msgid "Could not get list with slaves.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: message in the popup dialog, %1 is hostname +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:707 +msgid "" +"Hostname of this host (%1)\n" +"is not listed in the master's list.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: message in the popup dialog +#. To translators: message in the popup dialog +#. To translators: message in the popup dialog +#. To translators: message in the popup dialog +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:732 src/modules/NisServer.rb:749 +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:796 src/modules/NisServer.rb:804 +msgid "Error saving file %1\n" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: message in the popup dialog +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:762 +msgid "Error setting up domain name\n" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: message in the popup dialog +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:787 +msgid "Error setting up variable %1\n" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: message in the popup dialog +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:847 +msgid "Error while stopping %1 daemon\n" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: message in the popup dialog +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:858 +msgid "Error while starting %1 daemon\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:905 +msgid "Error while creating an empty user database.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: message in the popup dialog +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:927 +msgid "Error while creating the ypservers map.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: message in the popup dialog +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:946 +msgid "Error while creating database.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: message in the popup dialog +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:973 +msgid "Error while configuring the client.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: progress label +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:996 +msgid "Remove /var/yp/%1" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: progress label +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:1001 +msgid "Removing /var/yp/%1" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: progress label +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:1019 +msgid "Stop running daemons." +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: progress label +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:1021 +msgid "Stopping running daemons." +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: progress label +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:1038 +msgid "Get maps from master." +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: progress label +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:1040 +msgid "Getting maps from master." +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: progress label +#. To translators: progress label +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:1047 src/modules/NisServer.rb:1087 +msgid "Save hosts allowed to query server." +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: progress label +#. To translators: progress label +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:1049 src/modules/NisServer.rb:1089 +msgid "Saving hosts allowed to query server." +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: progress label +#. To translators: progress label +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:1056 src/modules/NisServer.rb:1118 +msgid "Set config variables." +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: progress label +#. To translators: progress label +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:1058 src/modules/NisServer.rb:1120 +msgid "Setting config variables." +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: progress label +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:1068 +msgid "Start daemon." +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: progress label +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:1070 +msgid "Starting daemon." +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: progress label +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:1103 +msgid "Save slaves." +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: progress label +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:1105 +msgid "Saving slaves." +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: progress label +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:1130 +msgid "Start daemons." +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: progress label +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:1132 +msgid "Starting daemons." +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: progress label +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:1142 +msgid "Create initial database." +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: progress label +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:1144 +msgid "Creating database." +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: progress label +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:1161 +msgid "Start NIS client." +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: progress label +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:1163 +msgid "Starting NIS client." +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: progress label +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:1176 +msgid "Stop NIS client." +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: progress label +#: src/modules/NisServer.rb:1178 +msgid "Stopping NIS client." +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/ntp-client.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/ntp-client.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/ntp-client.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,1319 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. progress step title +#: src/clients/ntp-client_finish.rb:37 +msgid "Writing NTP Configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:92 +msgid "<p>Press <b>Synchronize Now</b>, to get your system time set correctly using the selected NTP server. If you want to make use of NTP permanently, enable the <b>Save NTP Configuration</b> option</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:98 +msgid "<p>Enabling <b>Run NTP as daemon</b> option, the NTP service will be started as daemon. Otherwise the system time will be synchronized periodically. The default interval is 15 min. You can change it after installation with the <b>yast2 ntp-client module</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, cont. +#: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:107 +msgid "<p>Using the <b>Configure</b> button, open the advanced NTP configuration.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, cont. +#: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:116 +msgid "<p>Synchronization with the NTP server can be done only when the network is configured.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error popup +#: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:141 +msgid "Invalid NTP server hostname %1" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label +#: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:240 +msgid "&NTP Server Address" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label +#: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:250 +msgid "&Run NTP as daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label +#: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:259 +msgid "&Save NTP Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:269 +msgid "S&ynchronize now" +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#. bnc#449615: only simple config for inst-sys +#: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:275 +msgid "&Configure..." +msgstr "" + +#. Otherwise, prompt user for confirming pkg installation +#: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:380 +msgid "" +"Synchronization with NTP server is not possible\n" +"without package %1 installed." +msgstr "" + +#. Only if network is running try to synchronize the ntp server +#: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:392 +msgid "Synchronizing with NTP server..." +msgstr "" + +#. update time widgets +#: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:438 +msgid "Connection to selected NTP server failed." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: yes-no popup, +#. ntpdate is a command, %1 is the server address +#: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:469 +msgid "" +"Test query to server '%1' failed.\n" +"If server is not yet accessible or network is not configured\n" +"click 'No' to ignore. Revisit NTP server configuration?" +msgstr "" + +#. local clock type name +#: src/include/ntp-client/clocktypes.rb:17 +msgid "Undisciplined Local Clock (LOCAL)" +msgstr "" + +#. local clock type name +#: src/include/ntp-client/clocktypes.rb:24 +msgid "Trak 8820 GPS Receiver" +msgstr "" + +#. local clock type name +#: src/include/ntp-client/clocktypes.rb:30 +msgid "PSTI/Traconex 1020 WWV/WWVH Receiver" +msgstr "" + +#. local clock type name +#: src/include/ntp-client/clocktypes.rb:38 +msgid "Spectracom WWVB and GPS Receivers" +msgstr "" + +#. local clock type name +#: src/include/ntp-client/clocktypes.rb:46 +msgid "TrueTime GPS/GOES/OMEGA Receivers" +msgstr "" + +#. local clock type name +#: src/include/ntp-client/clocktypes.rb:54 +msgid "IRIG Audio Decoder" +msgstr "" + +#. local clock type name +#: src/include/ntp-client/clocktypes.rb:59 +msgid "Radio CHU Audio Demodulator/Decoder" +msgstr "" + +#. local clock type name +#: src/include/ntp-client/clocktypes.rb:67 +msgid "Generic Reference Driver" +msgstr "" + +#. local clock type name +#: src/include/ntp-client/clocktypes.rb:73 +msgid "Magnavox MX4200 GPS Receiver" +msgstr "" + +#. local clock type name +#: src/include/ntp-client/clocktypes.rb:79 +msgid "Austron 2200A/2201A GPS Receivers" +msgstr "" + +#. local clock type name +#: src/include/ntp-client/clocktypes.rb:87 +msgid "Arbiter 1088A/B GPS Receiver" +msgstr "" + +#. local clock type name +#: src/include/ntp-client/clocktypes.rb:93 +msgid "KSI/Odetics TPRO/S IRIG Interface" +msgstr "" + +#. local clock type name +#: src/include/ntp-client/clocktypes.rb:101 +msgid "Leitch CSD 5300 Master Clock Controller" +msgstr "" + +#. local clock type name +#: src/include/ntp-client/clocktypes.rb:109 +msgid "EES M201 MSF Receiver" +msgstr "" + +#. local clock type name +#. local clock type name +#: src/include/ntp-client/clocktypes.rb:115 +#: src/include/ntp-client/clocktypes.rb:175 +msgid "TrueTime generic receivers" +msgstr "" + +#. local clock type name +#: src/include/ntp-client/clocktypes.rb:121 +msgid "Bancomm GPS/IRIG Receiver" +msgstr "" + +#. local clock type name +#: src/include/ntp-client/clocktypes.rb:127 +msgid "Datum Precision Time System" +msgstr "" + +#. local clock type name +#: src/include/ntp-client/clocktypes.rb:133 +msgid "NIST Modem Time Service" +msgstr "" + +#. local clock type name +#: src/include/ntp-client/clocktypes.rb:139 +msgid "Heath WWV/WWVH Receiver" +msgstr "" + +#. local clock type name +#: src/include/ntp-client/clocktypes.rb:145 +msgid "Generic NMEA GPS Receiver" +msgstr "" + +#. local clock type name +#: src/include/ntp-client/clocktypes.rb:151 +msgid "TrueTime GPS-VME Interface" +msgstr "" + +#. local clock type name +#: src/include/ntp-client/clocktypes.rb:157 +msgid "PPS Clock Discipline" +msgstr "" + +#. local clock type name +#: src/include/ntp-client/clocktypes.rb:163 +msgid "PTB Modem Time Service" +msgstr "" + +#. local clock type name +#: src/include/ntp-client/clocktypes.rb:169 +msgid "USNO Modem Time Service" +msgstr "" + +#. local clock type name +#: src/include/ntp-client/clocktypes.rb:181 +msgid "Hewlett Packard 58503A GPS Receiver" +msgstr "" + +#. local clock type name +#: src/include/ntp-client/clocktypes.rb:189 +msgid "Arcron MSF Receiver" +msgstr "" + +#. local clock type name +#: src/include/ntp-client/clocktypes.rb:195 +msgid "Shared Memory Driver" +msgstr "" + +#. local clock type name +#: src/include/ntp-client/clocktypes.rb:201 +msgid "Trimble Navigation Palisade GPS" +msgstr "" + +#. local clock type name +#: src/include/ntp-client/clocktypes.rb:209 +msgid "Motorola UT Oncore GPS" +msgstr "" + +#. local clock type name +#: src/include/ntp-client/clocktypes.rb:215 +msgid "Rockwell Jupiter GPS" +msgstr "" + +#. local clock type name +#: src/include/ntp-client/clocktypes.rb:221 +msgid "Chrono-log K-series WWVB receiver" +msgstr "" + +#. local clock type name +#: src/include/ntp-client/clocktypes.rb:229 +msgid "Dumb Clock" +msgstr "" + +#. local clock type name +#: src/include/ntp-client/clocktypes.rb:235 +msgid "Ultralink WWVB Receivers" +msgstr "" + +#. local clock type name +#: src/include/ntp-client/clocktypes.rb:241 +msgid "Conrad Parallel Port Radio Clock" +msgstr "" + +#. local clock type name +#: src/include/ntp-client/clocktypes.rb:249 +msgid "Radio WWV/H Audio Demodulator/Decoder" +msgstr "" + +#. local clock type name +#: src/include/ntp-client/clocktypes.rb:257 +msgid "Forum Graphic GPS Dating station" +msgstr "" + +#. local clock type name +#: src/include/ntp-client/clocktypes.rb:265 +msgid "hopf GPS/DCF77 6021/komp for Serial Line" +msgstr "" + +#. local clock type name +#: src/include/ntp-client/clocktypes.rb:273 +msgid "hopf GPS/DCF77 6039 for PCI-Bus" +msgstr "" + +#. local clock type name +#: src/include/ntp-client/clocktypes.rb:281 +msgid "JJY Receivers" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for NTP client module +#: src/include/ntp-client/commandline.rb:23 +msgid "NTP client configuration module." +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an action +#: src/include/ntp-client/commandline.rb:33 +msgid "Print the status of the NTP daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an action +#: src/include/ntp-client/commandline.rb:40 +msgid "Print all configured synchronization relationships" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an action +#: src/include/ntp-client/commandline.rb:47 +msgid "Enable the NTP daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an action +#: src/include/ntp-client/commandline.rb:54 +msgid "Disable the NTP daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an action +#: src/include/ntp-client/commandline.rb:61 +msgid "Add new synchronization relationship" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an action +#: src/include/ntp-client/commandline.rb:68 +msgid "Edit existing synchronization relationship" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an action +#: src/include/ntp-client/commandline.rb:75 +msgid "Delete a synchronization relationship" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an option +#: src/include/ntp-client/commandline.rb:83 +msgid "The address of the server" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an option +#: src/include/ntp-client/commandline.rb:90 +msgid "The address of the peer" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an option +#: src/include/ntp-client/commandline.rb:97 +msgid "The address to which to broadcast" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an option +#: src/include/ntp-client/commandline.rb:104 +msgid "The address from which to accept broadcasts" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an option +#: src/include/ntp-client/commandline.rb:111 +msgid "The options of the relationship" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an option +#: src/include/ntp-client/commandline.rb:118 +msgid "Options for clock driver calibration" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an option +#: src/include/ntp-client/commandline.rb:125 +msgid "Use the server for initial synchronization" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for an option +#: src/include/ntp-client/commandline.rb:131 +msgid "Do not use the server for initial synchronization" +msgstr "" + +#. error report for command line +#: src/include/ntp-client/commandline.rb:191 +msgid "The synchronization peer not specified." +msgstr "" + +#. error report for command line +#: src/include/ntp-client/commandline.rb:198 +msgid "Specified synchronization peer not found." +msgstr "" + +#. status information for command line +#: src/include/ntp-client/commandline.rb:252 +msgid "NTP daemon is enabled." +msgstr "" + +#. status information for command line +#: src/include/ntp-client/commandline.rb:254 +msgid "NTP daemon is disabled." +msgstr "" + +#. table cell, NTP relationship type +#. table cell, NTP relationship type +#: src/include/ntp-client/commandline.rb:268 +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:565 +msgid "Server" +msgstr "" + +#. table cell, NTP relationship type +#. table cell, NTP relationship type +#: src/include/ntp-client/commandline.rb:270 +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:567 +msgid "Peer" +msgstr "" + +#. table cell, NTP relationship type +#: src/include/ntp-client/commandline.rb:272 +msgid "Broadcast" +msgstr "" + +#. table cell, NTP relationship type +#: src/include/ntp-client/commandline.rb:274 +msgid "Accepting Broadcasts" +msgstr "" + +#. table cell, %1 is integer 0-3 +#. table cell, %1 is integer 0-3 +#: src/include/ntp-client/commandline.rb:288 +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:587 +msgid "Unit Number: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. table cell, NTP relationship type +#. table cell, NTP relationship type +#: src/include/ntp-client/commandline.rb:294 +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:593 +msgid "Local Radio Clock" +msgstr "" + +#. command line error message +#: src/include/ntp-client/commandline.rb:344 +msgid "Reading the settings failed." +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/include/ntp-client/dialogs.rb:100 +msgid "NTP Server Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/ntp-client/dialogs.rb:113 +msgid "NTP Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: UI frame label +#: src/include/ntp-client/dialogs.rb:177 +msgid "Firewall Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ntp-client/dialogs.rb:189 +msgid "General Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ntp-client/dialogs.rb:200 +msgid "Security Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/ntp-client/dialogs.rb:229 +msgid "Advanced NTP Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/ntp-client/dialogs.rb:260 +msgid "New Synchronization" +msgstr "" + +#. Server editing dialog +#. @return [Symbol] for wizard sequencer +#: src/include/ntp-client/dialogs.rb:285 +msgid "Server Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/ntp-client/dialogs.rb:301 +msgid "NTP Server" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: frame label +#: src/include/ntp-client/dialogs.rb:331 +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1548 +msgid "Local NTP Server" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: frame label +#: src/include/ntp-client/dialogs.rb:377 +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1549 +msgid "Public NTP Server" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/ntp-client/dialogs.rb:420 +msgid "NTP Peer" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/ntp-client/dialogs.rb:459 +msgid "Local Reference Clock" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#. table cell, NTP relationship type +#: src/include/ntp-client/dialogs.rb:494 src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:569 +msgid "Outgoing Broadcast" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#. table cell, NTP relationship type +#: src/include/ntp-client/dialogs.rb:521 src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:573 +msgid "Incoming Broadcast" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/include/ntp-client/dialogs.rb:547 +msgid "&Reference ID" +msgstr "" + +#. int field +#: src/include/ntp-client/dialogs.rb:550 +msgid "&Stratum" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/include/ntp-client/dialogs.rb:555 +msgid "Calibration Offset 1" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/include/ntp-client/dialogs.rb:558 +msgid "Calibration Offset 2" +msgstr "" + +#. check box +#: src/include/ntp-client/dialogs.rb:563 +msgid "Flag &1" +msgstr "" + +#. check box +#: src/include/ntp-client/dialogs.rb:566 +msgid "Flag &2" +msgstr "" + +#. check box +#: src/include/ntp-client/dialogs.rb:571 +msgid "Flag &3" +msgstr "" + +#. check box +#: src/include/ntp-client/dialogs.rb:574 +msgid "Flag &4" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/ntp-client/dialogs.rb:582 +msgid "Clock Driver Calibration" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:17 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Initializing NTP Client Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Please wait...<br></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:21 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Initialization:</big></b><br>\n" +"Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing <b>Abort</b> now.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:25 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Saving NTP Client Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Please wait...<br></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:29 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Saving:</big></b><br>\n" +"Abort the save procedure by pressing <b>Abort</b>.\n" +"An additional dialog will inform you whether it is safe to do so.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/5 +#: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:35 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Start NTP Daemon</big></b><br>\n" +"Select whether to start the NTP daemon now and on every system boot. \n" +"The NTP daemon resolves host names when initializing. Your\n" +"network connection must be started before the NTP daemon starts.</p>\n" +"Selecting <b>Synchronize without Daemon</b> the ntp daemon will not be activated. \n" +"The system time will be set periodically. The interval is configurable. It is 15 minutes by default.\n" +" You can change this when the system was set up." +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/5 +#: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:45 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Chroot Jail</big></b><br>\n" +"To run the NTP daemon in chroot jail, set\n" +"<b>Run NTP Daemon in Chroot Jail</b>. Starting any daemon in a chroot jail\n" +"is more secure and strongly recommended.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:51 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Secure NTP Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"By selecting <b>Restrict NTP Service to Configured Servers Only</b>, remote hosts will not be able to view and modify NTP settings on your \n" +"computer. The NTP service is restricted to servers in the <tt>/etc/ntp.conf</tt> file and to localhost.<br> \n" +"Access control flags can be fine-tuded in the servers overview table. This option is not available if NTP is configured via DHCP.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 3/5 +#: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:58 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Configuring via DHCP</big></b><br>\n" +"To retrieve the information about NTP servers via the DHCP protocol from\n" +"your network server instead of setting them manually, set\n" +"<b>Configure NTP Daemon via DHCP</b>. Ask your network administrator if\n" +"the information about NTP servers is provided by the DHCP server.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 4/5 +#: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:66 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Configured Servers</big></b><br>\n" +"To adjust NTP servers, peers, local clocks, and NTP broadcasting,\n" +"select the appropriate line and click <b>Edit</b>. To add a new synchronization\n" +"peer, click <b>Add</b>. To delete an existing synchronization peer,\n" +"select it and click <b>Delete</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 5/5 +#: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:74 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Display Log</big></b></p>\n" +"<p>To view the logs of the NTP daemon, click <b>Display Log</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text to a button +#: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:78 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Advanced configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"To configure this host to synchronize against multiple remote hosts or against\n" +"a locally connected clock, use <b>Advanced Configuration</b>." +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/4 +#: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:84 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Clock Type</big></b><br>\n" +"Select the driver for the clock to configure.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/4 +#: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:88 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Unit Number</big></b><br>\n" +"If you have multiple clocks of the same type, you must set\n" +"<b>Unit Number</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 3/4 +#: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:94 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Device</big></b><br>\n" +"To make the clock work, it may be necessary to create a special symbolic link to \n" +"the device to which the clock is connected. To do this, check\n" +"<b>Create Symlink</b> and set the <b>Device</b>. To browse for the device,\n" +"click <b>Browse</b>.\n" +"For some clock types, it is not necessary to create a symbolic link or \n" +"it must be created manually.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 4/4 +#: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:104 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Driver Calibration</big></b><br>\n" +"To calibrate the clock driver, click <b>Driver Calibration</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/1, alt. 1 part 1/3 +#: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:108 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Address of the NTP Server</big></b><br>\n" +"To set the address of the NTP server, use the <b>Address</b> entry.\n" +"To find an NTP server, ask your network administrator or Internet service\n" +"provider.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/1, alt. 1 part 2/3 +#: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:115 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Selecting a Server</big></b><br>\n" +"To select an NTP server from those found in the local network\n" +"or from the list of known NTP servers, click <b>Select</b> and\n" +"choose between <b>Local NTP Server</b> and <b>Public NTP Server</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/1, alt. 1 part 3/3 +#: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:122 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Testing Server Accessibility</big></b><br>\n" +"To test if the selected server is up and responds properly,\n" +"click <b>Test</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/1, alt. 2 +#: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:128 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Address</big></b><br>\n" +"To set the address of the host with which to synchronize mutually,\n" +"use <b>Address</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/1, alt. 3 +#: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:134 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Address</big></b><br>\n" +"To set the address to which to broadcast, use the <b>Address</b>\n" +"text field.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/1, alt. 4 +#: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:140 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Address</big></b><br>\n" +"To set the address from which to accept broadcast packets, use \n" +"<b>Address</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/4, was removed +#. help text 3/4, optional +#: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:148 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Options</big></b><br>\n" +"To fine-tune the synchronization source, enter the respective options in the\n" +"<b>Options</b> text field. For details, see\n" +"<i>/usr/share/doc/packages/ntp-doc/confopt.htm</i>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:154 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Access Control Options</big></b><br>\n" +"Define the access control flags (<b><tt>restrict</tt></b> directive in\n" +"<i>/etc/ntp.conf</i>) for this server, indicating which types of actions the remote\n" +"host can perform on your NTP daemon. By default, it is set to <i>notrap\n" +"nomodify noquery</i>. This option is only available if you have checked the\n" +"<b>Restrict NTP Service to Configured Servers Only</b> option in\n" +"<b>Security Settings</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/6 +#: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:164 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Synchronization Peer Type</big></b><br>\n" +"Select the kind of synchronization peer to add here.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/6 +#: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:168 +msgid "" +"<p>To add an NTP server to which to synchronize,\n" +"select <b>Server</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 3/6 +#: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:172 +msgid "" +"<p>To add an NTP peer to synchronize mutually, select\n" +"<b>Peer</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 4/6 +#: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:176 +msgid "" +"<p>To configure a local clock connected directly to your computer,\n" +"select <b>Radio Clock</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 5/6 +#: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:180 +msgid "" +"<p>To broadcast time information through your network, select\n" +"<b>Outgoing Broadcast</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 6/6 +#: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:184 +msgid "" +"<p>To accept NTP packets broadcasted by other hosts on the network\n" +"and use them for setting local time, select <b>Incoming Broadcast<b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/5 +#: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:188 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>Server Location</b></big>\n" +"Select if you want to find the NTP server in the local network or select\n" +"the NTP server from the list of known NTP servers.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/5 +#: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:194 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>Finding Server in the Local\n" +"Network</b></big><br>\n" +"To find NTP servers in the local network using the\n" +"Service Location Protocol (SLP), click <b>Lookup</b>.\n" +"Then select a server from the list of found servers.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 3/5 +#: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:202 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>Selecting a Public NTP Server</b></big><br>\n" +"Select the NTP server to use from the <b>Public NTP Servers</b> list. To display\n" +"NTP servers only for a particular country, select it in <b>Country</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 4/5 +#: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:208 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>Note</b></big><br>\n" +"The listed NTP servers may not be available from any country, but only\n" +"for a particular country or region.\n" +"Before using any NTP server from the list, ask your system administrator\n" +"or Internet service provider if there is an NTP server closer to you and\n" +"prefer this recommended server to any server from this list.\n" +"You may also see <i>http://www.eecis.udel.edu/~mills/ntp/servers.html</i>\n" +"to find an NTP server near you.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 5/5 +#: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:219 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>Testing Server Accessibility</b></big><br>\n" +"To test if the selected server responds properly, click <b>Test</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text connected with checkbox: "Use Random Server from pool.ntp.org" +#. rwalter, please, correct it ;) +#: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:224 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>Use Random Servers</b></big><br>\n" +"This service is offered by pool.ntp.org. If you select this option,\n" +"three different servers are added to the configuration. The server names are\n" +"permanent, but they change their DNS records (IPs) every hour. This means that\n" +"your NTP client is synchronized with different servers every hour.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/2 +#: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:238 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>Clock Driver Calibration</b></big><br>\n" +"The clock driver may need to be calibrated. In this dialog, various calibration\n" +"options can be set. The meaning of particular options depends on the particular\n" +"driver. Some drivers do not use all the options.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/2 +#: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:245 +msgid "" +"To learn more about available options, install the package\n" +"<i>ntp-doc</i> and see <i>/usr/share/doc/packages/ntp-doc/html/refclock.htm</i>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. yes-no popup +#: src/include/ntp-client/misc.rb:35 +msgid "" +"Really exit?\n" +"All changes will be lost." +msgstr "" + +#. menubutton entry, try to keep short +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:65 +msgid "Restart NTP Daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. menubutton entry, try to keep short +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:70 +msgid "Save Settings and Restart NTP Daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. continue-cancel popup +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:179 +msgid "" +"Warning!\n" +"\n" +"If you do not have a permanent Internet connection,\n" +"starting the NTP daemon can take a very long time and \n" +"the daemon might not run properly." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup error message +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:240 +msgid "" +"NTP server '%1' is not a valid hostname,\n" +"fully qualified hostname, IPv4 address, or IPv6 address." +msgstr "" + +#. if there is already some server defined +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:531 +msgid "" +"Enabling Random Servers from pool.ntp.org would\n" +"replace the current NTP server.\n" +"\n" +"Really replace the current NTP server?" +msgstr "" + +#. popup header +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1067 +msgid "Select the Device" +msgstr "" + +#. selection box header +#. selection box header +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1132 +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1791 +msgid "Public NTP &Servers" +msgstr "" + +#. message report (no server selected) +#. report message +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1143 +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1226 +msgid "Select an NTP server." +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1172 +msgid "All Countries" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box header +#. combo box header +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1179 +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1781 +msgid "&Country" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Busy message +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1252 +msgid "Scanning for NTP servers on your network..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup error - no NTP server has been found during scanning the network. +#. There is a very high possibility that is is because of running firewall. +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1267 +msgid "" +"No NTP server has been found on your network.\n" +"This could be caused by a running SuSEfirewall2,\n" +"which probably blocks the network scanning." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup error - no NTP server has been found during scanning the network. +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1276 +msgid "No NTP server has been found on your network." +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label +#. table header +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1287 +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1573 +msgid "Address" +msgstr "" + +#. popup message +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1347 +msgid "No server is selected." +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1389 +msgid "A&ddress" +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1398 +msgid "Ad&vanced Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1409 +msgid "&Driver Calibration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1419 +msgid "&Interval of the Synchronization in Minutes" +msgstr "" + +#. frame +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1430 +msgid "Start NTP Daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1433 +msgid "Only &Manually" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1435 +msgid "&Synchronize without Daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1437 +msgid "Now and on &Boot" +msgstr "" + +#. check box +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1452 +msgid "Run NTP Daemon in Chroot &Jail" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1464 +msgid "&Restrict NTP Service to Configured Servers Only " +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item FIXME usability +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1478 +msgid "Manual" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1480 +msgid "Auto" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1482 +msgid "Custom" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1484 +msgid "&Runtime Configuration Policy" +msgstr "" + +#. FIXME +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1497 +msgid "&Custom Policy" +msgstr "" + +#. check box +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1508 +msgid "&Use Random Servers from pool.ntp.org" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#. text entry +#. combo box label +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1521 +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1539 +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1739 +msgid "&Address" +msgstr "" + +#. push button +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1546 +msgid "&Select..." +msgstr "" + +#. push button +#. push button +#. push button +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1557 +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1818 +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1829 +msgid "&Test" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1571 +msgid "Synchronization Type" +msgstr "" + +#. push button +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1586 +msgid "Display &Log..." +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1611 +msgid "Clock &Type" +msgstr "" + +#. int field +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1622 +msgid "Unit &Number" +msgstr "" + +#. check box +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1632 +msgid "Create &Symlink" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1656 +msgid "&Device" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1681 +msgid "Access Control Options" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button, NTP relationship type +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1693 +msgid "&Server" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button, NTP relationship type +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1695 +msgid "&Peer" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button, NTP relationship type +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1697 +msgid "&Radio Clock" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button, NTP relationship type +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1699 +msgid "&Outgoing Broadcast" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button, NTP relationship type +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1701 +msgid "&Incoming Broadcast" +msgstr "" + +#. frame +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1704 +msgid "Type" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1718 +msgid "Loc&al Network" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1720 +msgid "&Public NTP Server" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1725 +msgid "NTP Server Location" +msgstr "" + +#. push button +#: src/include/ntp-client/widgets.rb:1749 +msgid "&Lookup" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/ntp-client/wizards.rb:179 +msgid "NTP Client Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. label +#: src/include/ntp-client/wizards.rb:181 +msgid "Initializing ..." +msgstr "" + +#. NtpClient read dialog caption +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:486 +msgid "Initializing NTP Client Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:501 +msgid "Read network configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:503 +msgid "Read NTP settings" +msgstr "" + +#. progress step +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:507 +msgid "Reading network configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:509 +msgid "Reading NTP settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step +#. While calling "yast clone_system" it is possible that +#. the ntp server has not already been installed at that time. +#. (This would be done if yast2-ntp-client will be called in the UI) +#. In that case the error popup will not be shown. (bnc#889557) +#. progress step +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:511 src/modules/NtpClient.rb:606 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:767 src/modules/NtpClient.rb:918 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#. boolean update_dhcp = original_config_dhcp != config_dhcp; +#. NtpClient read dialog caption +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:740 +msgid "Saving NTP Client Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:757 +msgid "Write NTP settings" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:759 +msgid "Restart NTP daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. progress step +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:763 +msgid "Writing the settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:765 +msgid "Restarting NTP daemon..." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:850 +msgid "Cannot update the dynamic configuration policy." +msgstr "" + +#. error report +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:888 +msgid "Cannot restart the NTP daemon." +msgstr "" + +#. summary string +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:998 +msgid "The NTP daemon starts when starting the system." +msgstr "" + +#. summary string +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1004 +msgid "The NTP daemon does not start automatically." +msgstr "" + +#. summary string, %1 is list of addresses +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1010 +msgid "Servers: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. summary string, %1 is list of addresses +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1014 +msgid "Radio Clocks: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. summary string, %1 is list of addresses +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1018 +msgid "Peers: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. summary string, %1 is list of addresses +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1022 +msgid "Broadcast time information to: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. summary string, %1 is list of addresses +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1026 +msgid "Accept broadcasted time information from: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. summary string, FIXME +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1042 +msgid "Combine static and DHCP configuration." +msgstr "" + +#. summary string, FIXME +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1046 +msgid "Static configuration only." +msgstr "" + +#. summary string, FIXME +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1049 +msgid "Custom configuration policy." +msgstr "" + +#. An informative popup label diring the NTP server testings +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1082 +msgid "Testing the NTP server..." +msgstr "" + +#. message report - result of test of connection to NTP server +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1103 +msgid "Server is reachable and responds properly." +msgstr "" + +#. error message - result of test of connection to NTP server +#. report error instead of simple message (#306018) +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1107 +msgid "Server is unreachable or does not respond properly." +msgstr "" + +#. if package is not installed (in the inst-sys, it is: bnc#399659) +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1125 +msgid "" +"Cannot search for NTP server in local network\n" +"without package %1 installed.\n" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/oneclickinstall.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/oneclickinstall.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/oneclickinstall.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,397 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. Command line interface for One Click Install +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallCLI.rb:16 +msgid "One Click Install Command Line Installer" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallCLI.rb:20 src/clients/OneClickInstallCLI.rb:27 +msgid "Processes a YMP file, ready for installation" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallCLI.rb:36 +msgid "URL of .ymp file" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallCLI.rb:40 +msgid "File to put internal representation of YMP into" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallCLI.rb:44 +msgid "File containing internal representation of <b>One Click Install</b> instructions" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallCLI.rb:65 +msgid "Error: Nothing to do specified in the YMP file." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallCLI.rb:71 +msgid "If you continue, the following repositories will be subscribed:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallCLI.rb:81 +msgid "If you continue, the following software packages will be installed:" +msgstr "" + +#. trick ncurses +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallCLI.rb:110 +msgid "Unable to retrieve YMP at %1" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallCLI.rb:124 +msgid "Adding Repositories..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallCLI.rb:133 +msgid "Error: Unable to add repositories" +msgstr "" + +#. Remove any removals +#. initialize slideshow data (package counters) +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallCLI.rb:139 +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWorkerFunctions.rb:291 +msgid "Removing Packages..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallCLI.rb:146 +msgid "Error: Unable to remove packages" +msgstr "" + +#. if that was successful now try and install the patterns +#. initialize slideshow data (package counters) +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallCLI.rb:152 +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWorkerFunctions.rb:264 +msgid "Installing Patterns..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallCLI.rb:159 +msgid "Error: Unable to install patterns" +msgstr "" + +#. if that was successful now try and install the packages +#. initialize slideshow data (package counters) +#. initialize slideshow data (package counters) +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallCLI.rb:165 +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallWorker.rb:71 +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWorkerFunctions.rb:223 +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWorkerFunctions.rb:231 +msgid "Installing Packages..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallCLI.rb:172 +msgid "Error: Unable to install packages" +msgstr "" + +#. If we don't want to remain subscribed, remove the repositories that were added for installation. +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallCLI.rb:184 +msgid "Warning: Unable to remove temporarily added repositories." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallCLI.rb:188 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallCLI.rb:205 +msgid "Error: Must be root" +msgstr "" + +#. <region name="String constants"> * +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallUI.rb:46 +msgid "This wizard will install software on your computer." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallUI.rb:47 +msgid "See <tt>http://en.opensuse.org/One_Click_Install</tt> for more information." +msgstr "" + +#. <region name="Define the UI components"> * +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallUI.rb:59 +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:47 +msgid "Select the software components you wish to install:" +msgstr "" + +#. </region> * +#. <region name="Setup the Wizard Steps"> * +#. Add the splash to the advanced steps too. Requested. +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallUI.rb:79 src/clients/OneClickInstallUI.rb:261 +msgid "Software Description" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallUI.rb:80 src/clients/OneClickInstallUI.rb:109 +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallUI.rb:139 src/clients/OneClickInstallUI.rb:169 +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallUI.rb:192 src/clients/OneClickInstallUI.rb:216 +msgid "Installation Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. xxx add better stage and title when not in string freeze. +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallUI.rb:81 src/clients/OneClickInstallUI.rb:110 +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallUI.rb:140 src/clients/OneClickInstallUI.rb:170 +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallUI.rb:193 src/clients/OneClickInstallUI.rb:217 +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallWorker.rb:44 +msgid "Perform Installation" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallUI.rb:82 src/clients/OneClickInstallUI.rb:111 +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallUI.rb:141 src/clients/OneClickInstallUI.rb:171 +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallUI.rb:194 src/clients/OneClickInstallUI.rb:218 +msgid "Results" +msgstr "" + +#. Load the xml communication from the user interface. +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallUI.rb:107 src/clients/OneClickInstallUI.rb:136 +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallUI.rb:168 +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallWorker.rb:41 +msgid "Repositories" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallUI.rb:108 src/clients/OneClickInstallUI.rb:137 +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallUI.rb:191 src/clients/OneClickInstallUI.rb:214 +msgid "Software" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallUI.rb:138 src/clients/OneClickInstallUI.rb:215 +msgid "Removals" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallUI.rb:241 +msgid "Nothing to do." +msgstr "" + +#. #329644 +#. </region> * +#. <region name="wire up the wizard UI to the OCI module">* +#. encoding: utf-8 +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallUI.rb:382 src/clients/OneClickInstallUI.rb:439 +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallWorker.rb:31 +msgid "1-Click Install" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallUI.rb:384 +msgid "%1 Installation" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallUI.rb:391 +msgid "Installation Steps" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallWorker.rb:56 +msgid "An error occurred while attempting to subscribe to the required repositories. Review the yast2 logs for more information." +msgstr "" + +#. Remove any removals +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallWorker.rb:96 +msgid "An error occurred while attempting to remove the specified packages. Review the yast2 logs for more information." +msgstr "" + +#. if that was successful now try and install the patterns +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallWorker.rb:113 +msgid "An error occurred while attempting to install the specified patterns. Review the yast2 logs for more information." +msgstr "" + +#. if that was successful now try and install the packages +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallWorker.rb:129 +msgid "An error occurred while attempting to install the specified packages. Review the yast2 logs for more information." +msgstr "" + +#. If we don't want to remain subscribed, remove the repositories that were added for installation. +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallWorker.rb:148 +msgid "An error occurred while attempting to unsubscribe from the repositories that were used to perform the installation. You can remove them manually in YaST > Software Repositories. Review the yast2 logs for more information." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/OneClickInstallWorker.rb:159 +msgid "No error occurred." +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:18 +msgid "Additional Software Repositories" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:24 +msgid "Select the software repositories you wish to subscribe to:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:32 +msgid "Remain subscribed to these repositories after installation" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:41 +msgid "Software to Be Installed" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:55 +msgid "Software to Be Removed" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:61 +msgid "Select the software components you wish to remove:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:69 +msgid "Installation not possible" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:71 +msgid "The install link or file you opened does not contain instructions for %s." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:81 +msgid "Software is being installed." +msgstr "" + +#. This wouldn't be necessary if regexpsub wasn't so retarded. +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:122 +msgid "Repository Description:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:181 +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:233 +msgid "Package Description:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:292 +msgid "" +"Have you reviewed the changes that will be made to your system?\n" +"Malicious packages could damage your system.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:302 +msgid "Do not ask me again" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:348 +msgid "These repositories will only be added during installation. You will not remain subscribed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:352 +msgid "You will remain subscribed to these repositories after installation." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:360 +msgid "If you continue, the following changes will be made to your system:" +msgstr "" + +#. Put remove message at top, incase people try to push it off the bottom of the warning by adding lots of packages. +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:372 +msgid "Software to be removed:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:385 +msgid "Repositories to be added:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:389 +msgid "Note:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:399 +msgid "Software to be installed:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:414 +msgid "Proposal" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:416 +msgid "Customize" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:485 +msgid "Software installation" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:494 +msgid "Installation was successful" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:499 +msgid "Installation was only partially successful." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:507 +msgid "The installation has failed. For more information, see the log file at <tt>/var/log/YaST2/y2log</tt>. Failure stage was: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:515 +msgid "Error Message" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:524 +msgid "The following repositories could not be added" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:534 +msgid "The following patterns could not be installed" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:544 +msgid "The following packages could not be installed" +msgstr "" + +#. * Subscribe to all the specified repositories +#. * return true if all catalogues were added successfully, false otherwise. +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWorkerFunctions.rb:103 +msgid "Loading Package Management" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWorkerFunctions.rb:107 +msgid "Adding repository %1" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWorkerFunctions.rb:123 +msgid "An error occurred while initializing the software repository." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWorkerFunctions.rb:126 +msgid "Details:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWorkerFunctions.rb:131 +msgid "Try again?" +msgstr "" + +#. * Install all the specified packages +#. * return true if all installations were successful, false otherwise +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWorkerFunctions.rb:185 +msgid "Marking package %1 for installation" +msgstr "" + +#. If we didn't find it in the repos specified in the YMP try any repo. +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWorkerFunctions.rb:211 +msgid "Warning: package %1 could not be installed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWorkerFunctions.rb:225 +msgid "Performing Installation..." +msgstr "" + +#. * Install all the specified patterns +#. * return true if all installations were successful, false otherwise +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWorkerFunctions.rb:252 +msgid "Warning: pattern %1 could not be installed." +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWorkerResponse.rb:12 +msgid "unknown" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OneClickInstallWorkerResponse.rb:13 +msgid "Root privileges are required. Either they were not supplied, or an unknown error occurred." +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/online-update-configuration.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/online-update-configuration.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/online-update-configuration.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,200 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. support basic command-line output (bnc#439050) +#: src/clients/online_update_configuration.rb:59 +msgid "Online Update Configuration Module Help" +msgstr "" + +#. inst_source was renamed to repositories (bnc#828139) +#: src/clients/online_update_configuration.rb:256 +msgid "The registration module is not available." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/online_update_configuration.rb:257 +msgid "Please install yast2-registration and try again." +msgstr "" + +#. module title +#: src/include/online-update-configuration/OUCDialogs.rb:41 +msgid "Online Update Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: (default), meaning: "Current Update Repository: http://xyz/ (default)" +#: src/include/online-update-configuration/OUCDialogs.rb:43 +msgid "(default)" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: (none), meaning "Current Update Repository: (none)" +#: src/include/online-update-configuration/OUCDialogs.rb:45 +msgid "(none)" +msgstr "" + +#. frame title +#: src/include/online-update-configuration/OUCDialogs.rb:48 +msgid "Update Repository" +msgstr "" + +#. frame title +#: src/include/online-update-configuration/OUCDialogs.rb:50 +msgid "Automatic Online Update" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: "Set Default" meaning: Set the Update Repository to the default one +#: src/include/online-update-configuration/OUCDialogs.rb:53 +msgid "Set Default" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: a short button label called "Advanced" +#: src/include/online-update-configuration/OUCDialogs.rb:55 +msgid "Advanced" +msgstr "" + +#. for category filter +#: src/include/online-update-configuration/OUCDialogs.rb:58 +msgid "Filter by Category" +msgstr "" + +#. for category filter //translators: means: categories of patches +#: src/include/online-update-configuration/OUCDialogs.rb:60 +msgid "Patch Categories" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/online-update-configuration/OUCDialogs.rb:62 +msgid "enabled" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/online-update-configuration/OUCDialogs.rb:63 +msgid "disabled" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/online-update-configuration/OUCDialogs.rb:65 +msgid "Edit Software Repositories" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/online-update-configuration/OUCDialogs.rb:66 +msgid "Register for support and get update repository" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/online-update-configuration/OUCDialogs.rb:67 +msgid "Send hardware information to the smolt project" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/online-update-configuration/OUCDialogs.rb:68 +msgid "Interval" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/online-update-configuration/OUCDialogs.rb:69 +msgid "Skip Interactive Patches" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/online-update-configuration/OUCDialogs.rb:70 +msgid "Agree with Licenses" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/online-update-configuration/OUCDialogs.rb:71 +msgid "Include Recommended Packages" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/online-update-configuration/OUCDialogs.rb:72 +msgid "Use delta rpms" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/online-update-configuration/OUCDialogs.rb:73 +msgid "Current Update Repository:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/online-update-configuration/OUCDialogs.rb:74 +msgid "" +"In order to add the default update repository\n" +"you have to register this product." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/online-update-configuration/OUCDialogs.rb:77 +msgid "Do you want to perform the registration now?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/online-update-configuration/OUCDialogs.rb:81 +msgid "<p>In <b>%1</b> the current update repository is shown.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/online-update-configuration/OUCDialogs.rb:85 +msgid "<p>Press <b>%1</b> to use the default update repository.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/online-update-configuration/OUCDialogs.rb:89 +msgid "<p>Find related actions in the <b>%1</b> menu.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/online-update-configuration/OUCDialogs.rb:93 +msgid "<p>In <b>%1</b> set up the automatic online update.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/online-update-configuration/OUCDialogs.rb:97 +msgid "<p>Select an update interval and specify if interactive patches should be ignored and if licenses should be automatically agreed with.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/online-update-configuration/OUCDialogs.rb:102 +msgid "<p>All packages that are recommended by an updated package will be installed when <b>%1</b> is enabled.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/online-update-configuration/OUCDialogs.rb:108 +msgid "<p>Category filter for patches can be configured in the section <b>%1</b>. Only patches of the listed categories will be installed. Others will be skipped.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. cache the base product details +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateConfiguration.rb:73 +msgid "daily" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateConfiguration.rb:74 +msgid "weekly" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateConfiguration.rb:75 +msgid "monthly" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: this name is a (technical) category for an update package +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateConfiguration.rb:82 +msgid "Packagemanager and YaST" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: this name is a (technical) category for an update package +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateConfiguration.rb:87 +msgid "Security" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: this name is a (technical) category for an update package +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateConfiguration.rb:92 +msgid "Recommended" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: this name is a (technical) category for an update package +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateConfiguration.rb:97 +msgid "Optional" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: this name is a (technical) category for an update package: Document, meaning Documentation +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateConfiguration.rb:102 +msgid "Document" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: this name is a (technical) category for an update package +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateConfiguration.rb:107 +msgid "Other" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/online-update.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/online-update.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/online-update.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,485 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. nothing to do +#: src/clients/inst_you.rb:80 +msgid "Initializing ..." +msgstr "" + +#. popup heading, with rich text widget and Yes/No buttons +#: src/clients/inst_you.rb:264 +msgid "Do you accept this license agreement?" +msgstr "" + +#. message popup +#: src/clients/inst_you.rb:298 +msgid "" +"Some application requiring restart has been updated. The system will\n" +"reboot now then continue the installation.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text +#: src/clients/online_update.rb:55 +msgid "Online Update module" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for cd_update action +#: src/clients/online_update.rb:61 +msgid "Start Patch CD Update" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for simple_mode action +#: src/clients/online_update.rb:68 +msgid "Use simple package selector" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for cd_url option +#: src/clients/online_update.rb:77 +msgid "URL for Patch CD (default value is '%1')" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for cd_directory option +#: src/clients/online_update.rb:85 +msgid "Directory for patch data on Patch CD (default value is '%1')" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for online-update initialization +#: src/clients/online_update.rb:130 +msgid "<p>The system is initializing the installation and update repositories. Software repositories can be altered in the <b>Installation Source</b> module.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage label +#: src/clients/online_update.rb:137 +msgid "Initialize the target system" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage label +#: src/clients/online_update.rb:139 +msgid "Refresh software repositories" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage label +#: src/clients/online_update.rb:141 +msgid "Check for available updates" +msgstr "" + +#. progress step label +#: src/clients/online_update.rb:145 +msgid "Initializing the target system..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step label +#: src/clients/online_update.rb:147 +msgid "Refreshing software repositories..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step label +#: src/clients/online_update.rb:149 +msgid "Checking for available updates..." +msgstr "" + +#. final progress step label +#: src/clients/online_update.rb:151 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/clients/online_update.rb:156 +msgid "Initializing CD Update" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/clients/online_update.rb:158 +msgid "Initializing Online Update" +msgstr "" + +#. yes/no question +#: src/clients/online_update.rb:209 +msgid "" +"No update repository\n" +"configured yet. Run configuration workflow now?" +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/clients/online_update.rb:222 +msgid "No update repository configured yet." +msgstr "" + +#. progress window label +#: src/clients/online_update_install.rb:49 +msgid "Progress Log" +msgstr "" + +#. progress bar label +#: src/clients/online_update_install.rb:54 +msgid "Package Progress" +msgstr "" + +#. progress bar label +#. progress bar label +#: src/clients/online_update_install.rb:60 +#: src/clients/online_update_install.rb:101 +msgid "Total Progress" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for online update +#: src/clients/online_update_install.rb:66 +msgid "" +"<p>After connecting to the update server,\n" +"YaST will download all selected patches.\n" +"This could take some time. Download details are shown in the log window.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for online update +#: src/clients/online_update_install.rb:73 +msgid "<p>If special messages associated with patches are available, they will be shown in an extra dialog when the patch is installed.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. using SetContents (define in online_update.ycp) +#: src/clients/online_update_install.rb:81 +msgid "Patch Download and Installation" +msgstr "" + +#. progress information +#: src/clients/online_update_install.rb:114 +msgid "Installation finished.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. label +#: src/clients/online_update_install.rb:121 +msgid "Patch installation finished." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/clients/online_update_install.rb:130 +msgid "Patch processing failed." +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. Copyright (c) 2006-2012 Novell, Inc. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under +#. the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as published by the +#. Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +#. ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS +#. FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with +#. this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, you may find +#. current contact information at www.novell.com. +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. Package: Online update +#. Summary: Selection dialog +#. Authors: Cornelius Schumacher +#. +#. Call the PackageSelector in YOU mode. +#: src/clients/online_update_select.rb:49 +msgid "Initializing for CD update..." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup: cancel/retry buttons follow +#: src/clients/online_update_select.rb:61 +msgid "" +"Initialization failed. Check that\n" +"you have inserted the correct CD.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. FATE#312509: Show if patch needs a reboot and offer +#. to delay the patch installation +#: src/clients/online_update_select.rb:189 +msgid "" +"Cannot configure online update repository \n" +"without having package %1 installed" +msgstr "" + +#. popup message +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdate.rb:46 +msgid "" +"At least one of the updates installed requires restart of the session.\n" +"Log out and in again as soon as possible.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup message +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdate.rb:51 +msgid "" +"Packages for package management were updated.\n" +"Finishing and restarting YaST now." +msgstr "" + +#. popup message +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdate.rb:62 +msgid "" +"At least one of the updates installed requires a system reboot to function\n" +"properly. Reboot the system as soon as possible." +msgstr "" + +#. popup message +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdate.rb:67 +msgid "" +"These updates require a system reboot to function properly:\n" +"\n" +"%1.\n" +"\n" +"Reboot the system as soon as possible." +msgstr "" + +#. continue/cancel popup text +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdate.rb:76 +msgid "" +"There are patches for package management available that require a restart of YaST.\n" +"They should be installed first and all other patches after the restart.\n" +"\n" +"You selected some other patches to be installed now.\n" +"\n" +"Continue with installing your selection?" +msgstr "" + +#. progress log item (%1 is name of package) +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateCallbacks.rb:111 +msgid "Retrieving %1..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress bar label +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateCallbacks.rb:117 +msgid "Package Download Progress" +msgstr "" + +#. progress log action (what is being done with the package) +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateCallbacks.rb:146 +msgid "Removing" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateCallbacks.rb:146 +msgid "Installing" +msgstr "" + +#. progress bar label +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateCallbacks.rb:161 +msgid "Package Installation Progress" +msgstr "" + +#. progress log item (=previous action finished correctly) +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateCallbacks.rb:174 +msgid "OK" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress log. Leave the space at the end, some other text may follow +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateCallbacks.rb:230 +msgid "Downloading delta RPM %1 " +msgstr "" + +#. progress bar label +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateCallbacks.rb:236 +msgid "Delta RPM Download Progress" +msgstr "" + +#. progress log item (previous action failed(%1 is reason) +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateCallbacks.rb:262 +msgid "Failed to download delta RPM: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress log item (%1 is name of delta RPM). +#. Leave the space at the end, some other text may follow. +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateCallbacks.rb:277 +msgid "Applying delta RPM: %1 " +msgstr "" + +#. progress bar label +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateCallbacks.rb:284 +msgid "Delta RPM Application Progress" +msgstr "" + +#. progress log item (previous action failed(%1 is reason) +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateCallbacks.rb:313 +msgid "Failed to apply delta RPM: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. progress bar label +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateCallbacks.rb:354 +msgid "Script Execution Progress" +msgstr "" + +#. log entry, %1 is name of the patch which contains the script +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateCallbacks.rb:360 +msgid "Starting script %1" +msgstr "" + +#. label, %1 is patch name with version and architecture +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateCallbacks.rb:430 +msgid "" +"Patch %1\n" +"\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error popoup (detailed info follows) +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateCallbacks.rb:549 +msgid "There was an error in the repository initialization." +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. Copyright (c) 2006-2012 Novell, Inc. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under +#. the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as published by the +#. Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +#. ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS +#. FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with +#. this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, you may find +#. current contact information at www.novell.com. +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. Summary: YOU dialogs +#. Authors: Cornelius Schumacher +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateDialogs.rb:43 +msgid "No details available." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateDialogs.rb:45 +msgid "&Details <<" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateDialogs.rb:46 +msgid "&Details >>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateDialogs.rb:50 +msgid "Error" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateDialogs.rb:56 +msgid "Try again" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateDialogs.rb:57 +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateDialogs.rb:318 +msgid "Skip Patch" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateDialogs.rb:58 +msgid "Skip All" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateDialogs.rb:59 src/modules/OnlineUpdateDialogs.rb:65 +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateDialogs.rb:73 +msgid "Abort Update" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateDialogs.rb:68 +msgid "Warning" +msgstr "" + +#. Warning text for aborting the update before a patch is installed +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateDialogs.rb:152 +msgid "" +"If you abort the installation now, no patch will be installed.\n" +"Your installation will remain untouched.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Warning text for aborting if some patches are installed, some not +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateDialogs.rb:157 +msgid "" +"Patch download and installation in progress.\n" +"If you abort the installation now, the update is incomplete.\n" +"Repeat the update, including the download, if desired.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Warning text for aborting an installation during the install process +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateDialogs.rb:164 +msgid "" +"If you abort the installation now,\n" +"at least one patch is not installed correctly.\n" +"You will need to do the update again." +msgstr "" + +#. Confirm user request to abort installation +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateDialogs.rb:187 +msgid "Really abort YaST Online Update?" +msgstr "" + +#. Button that will really abort the installation +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateDialogs.rb:194 +msgid "&Abort Update" +msgstr "" + +#. Button that will continue with the installation +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateDialogs.rb:197 +msgid "&Continue Update" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateDialogs.rb:274 +msgid "<b>Patch:</b> %1<br>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateDialogs.rb:277 +msgid "<b>Summary:</b> %1<br>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateDialogs.rb:288 +msgid "<b>Packages:</b>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateDialogs.rb:302 +msgid "Patch &Details <<" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateDialogs.rb:303 +msgid "Patch &Details >>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateDialogs.rb:317 +msgid "Install Patch" +msgstr "" + +#. Dialog label above a list of patches +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateDialogs.rb:424 +msgid "These patches will need rebooting after installation" +msgstr "" + +#. Push button for Skipping all patches that require rebooting +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateDialogs.rb:433 +msgid "&Skip All" +msgstr "" + +#. Solver can't solve it automatically +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateDialogs.rb:457 +msgid "Online update was unable to unselect some patches that need rebooting." +msgstr "" + +#. Dialog label above a list of products (out of support) +#: src/modules/OnlineUpdateDialogs.rb:539 +msgid "" +"These products have reached their end of general support\n" +"and thus do not provide new updates anymore.\n" +"\n" +"In case that your subscription contains extended support,\n" +"please make sure that you have activated the extension.\n" +"\n" +"Contact us if you need further assistance." +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/opensuse_mirror.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/opensuse_mirror.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/opensuse_mirror.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. Copyright (c) 2014 SUSE LLC. +#. All Rights Reserved. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or +#. modify it under the terms of version 2 or 3 of the GNU General +#. Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +#. but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +#. MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +#. GNU General Public License for more details. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +#. along with this program; if not, contact SUSE LLC. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, +#. you may find current contact information at www.suse.com +#: src/lib/opensuse_mirror/main_dialog.rb:119 +msgid "Directory" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/opensuse_mirror/main_dialog.rb:119 +msgid "Mirrored" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/opensuse_mirror/main_dialog.rb:129 +msgid "yes" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/opensuse_mirror/main_dialog.rb:129 +msgid "no" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/opensuse_mirror/main_dialog.rb:139 +msgid "&Exit" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/opensuse_mirror/main_dialog.rb:144 +msgid "&Mirror" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/opensuse_mirror/main_dialog.rb:145 +msgid "&Do not Mirror" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/opensuse_mirror/main_dialog.rb:146 +msgid "Select/Deselect &All" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/packager.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/packager.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/packager.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,2626 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. module description +#: src/clients/checkmedia.rb:37 +msgid "Check CD or DVD media integrity" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/clients/do_not_show_again_editor.rb:67 +msgid "Editor for 'Do Not Show Again'" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/clients/do_not_show_again_editor.rb:70 +msgid "" +"<p>Remove entries by selecting them in the table and clicking the \n" +"<b>Delete</b> button. The entries will be removed immediately from \n" +"the current configuration.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/do_not_show_again_editor.rb:79 +msgid "Type" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/do_not_show_again_editor.rb:79 +msgid "Popup Ident." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/do_not_show_again_editor.rb:79 +msgid "Additional Info" +msgstr "" + +#. FIXME: Add filter +#. `PushButton(`id(`filter), _("&Filter...")), +#. `HSpacing(2), +#: src/clients/do_not_show_again_editor.rb:86 +msgid "&Delete" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/clients/inst_custom_packages.rb:36 +msgid "Could not read package information." +msgstr "" + +#. explanation text for GNOME +#: src/clients/inst_desktop.rb:55 +msgid "" +"GNOME is a powerful and intuitive desktop\n" +"environment that uses Evolution as mailer,\n" +"Firefox as browser, and Nautilus as file manager.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. explanation text for KDE +#: src/clients/inst_desktop.rb:63 +msgid "" +"KDE is a powerful and intuitive desktop\n" +"environment that uses Kontact as mailer,\n" +"Dolphin as file manager, and offers\n" +"both Firefox and Konqueror as Web browsers.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/3 +#: src/clients/inst_desktop.rb:71 +msgid "" +"<p>Both <b>KDE</b> and <b>GNOME</b> are powerful and intuitive\n" +"desktop environments. They combine ease of use\n" +"and attractive graphical interfaces with their\n" +"own sets of perfectly integrated applications.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/3 +#: src/clients/inst_desktop.rb:78 +msgid "" +"<p>Choosing the default <b>GNOME</b> or <b>KDE</b> desktop\n" +"environment installs a broad set of the\n" +"most important desktop applications on your\n" +"system.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 3/3 +#: src/clients/inst_desktop.rb:85 +msgid "" +"<p>Choose <b>Other</b> then select from\n" +"an alternative, such as a text-only system or a minimal graphical\n" +"system with a basic window manager.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#: src/clients/inst_desktop.rb:97 +msgid "&KDE" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#: src/clients/inst_desktop.rb:124 +msgid "&GNOME" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#: src/clients/inst_desktop.rb:162 +msgid "&Other" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/clients/inst_desktop.rb:185 +msgid "Desktop Selection" +msgstr "" + +#. by default, nothing is selected, enabling next +#. handling [Next] button +#: src/clients/inst_desktop.rb:220 +msgid "" +"No desktop was selected. Select the\n" +"desktop to install." +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#: src/clients/inst_desktop.rb:273 +msgid "&Minimal Graphical System" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#: src/clients/inst_desktop.rb:282 +msgid "&Text Mode" +msgstr "" + +#. an error popup +#. an error popup +#. an error popup +#. an error popup +#: src/clients/inst_kickoff.rb:461 src/clients/inst_kickoff.rb:544 +#: src/clients/inst_kickoff.rb:620 src/clients/inst_kickoff.rb:677 +msgid "Backup of %1 failed. See %2 for details." +msgstr "" + +#. dialog heading +#: src/clients/inst_mediacopy.rb:49 +msgid "Copy Installation Media" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/clients/inst_mediacopy.rb:51 +msgid "" +"<p>The installation CDs will be copied into the system\n" +"to create a repository that can be used to install\n" +"other systems.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. label for showing repositories +#: src/clients/inst_mediacopy.rb:57 +msgid "Registered Repositories" +msgstr "" + +#. force minimum width +#. table header - name of the repo +#. table header - name of the repo +#: src/clients/inst_mediacopy.rb:65 src/clients/repositories.rb:674 +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:687 +#: src/include/packager/key_manager_dialogs.rb:306 +msgid "Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_mediacopy.rb:65 +msgid "Version" +msgstr "" + +#. feedback popup 1/2 +#: src/clients/inst_mediacopy.rb:118 +msgid "Copying CD contents to a local directory..." +msgstr "" + +#. feedback popup 2/2 +#: src/clients/inst_mediacopy.rb:120 +msgid "Please wait..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup header +#. TRANSLATORS: popup header +#: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:268 +#: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:1346 +msgid "Aborting Configuration of Online Repository" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup question +#. TRANSLATORS: popup question +#: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:270 +#: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:1348 +msgid "Are you sure you want to abort the configuration?" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup header +#: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:302 +msgid "Network is not configured." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup question +#: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:304 +msgid "" +"Online sources defined by product require an Internet connection.\n" +"\n" +"Would you like to configure it?" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: progress step +#: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:646 +msgid "Check network configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: progress step +#: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:648 +msgid "Download list of online repositories" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: progress step +#: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:653 +msgid "Checking network configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: progress step +#: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:655 +msgid "Downloading list of online repositories..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: progress step +#: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:664 +msgid "Initialize the repository manager" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: progress step +#: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:669 +msgid "Initializing the repository manager..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog caption +#: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:679 +msgid "Reading List of Online Repositories" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog help +#: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:685 +msgid "" +"<p>The packager is being initialized and \n" +"the list of servers downloaded from the Web.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: error report +#: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:717 +msgid "" +"Cannot download list of repositories,\n" +"no network configured." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: light-warning message +#: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:795 +msgid "" +"No product URL defined from which to download\n" +"list of repositories.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: warning message +#: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:809 +msgid "" +"Unable to download list of repositories\n" +"or no repositories defined." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: HTML-formatted summary text +#. %1 is replaced with "Yes" (currently only "Yes") +#. see *4 +#: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:915 +msgid "<b>Recommended:</b> %1<br>" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: used for "Recommended: Yes" (see *4) +#: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:917 +msgid "Yes" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: This is a complex HTML-formatted information about selecetd external repository +#. It contains "key: value" pair, one per line, separated by <br> tags +#. %1 is replaced with an URL of the selected repository +#. %2 is replaced with an URL from which we've got this repository information +#. %3 is replaced with a summary text for the selected repository +#. %4 is replaced with a description text for the selected repository +#. %5 is replaced with an emty string or "Recommended: Yes" (*4) +#: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:929 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b>URL:</b> %1<br>\n" +"<b>Linked from:</b> %2<br>\n" +"<b>Summary:</b> %3<br>\n" +"<b>Description:</b> %4<br>\n" +"%5\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog caption +#: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:1237 +msgid "List of Online Repositories" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: push button +#. push button +#: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:1244 src/modules/SourceManagerSLP.rb:111 +msgid "&Filter" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: multi-selection box +#: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:1254 +msgid "&List of Repositories" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Rich-text widget (HTML) +#: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:1260 +msgid "Repository Description" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog help 1/3 +#: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:1264 +msgid "" +"<p>List of default online repositories.\n" +"Click on a repository for details.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog help 2/3 (version for installation) +#: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:1269 +msgid "<p>Select the online repositories you want to use then click <b>Next</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog help 2/3 (version for running system) +#: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:1273 +msgid "<p>Select the online repositories you want to use then click <b>Finish</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog help 3/3 +#: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:1278 +msgid "<p>To remove a used repository, simply deselect it.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog caption +#: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:1374 +msgid "Writing List of Online Repositories" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog help +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog help +#: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:1380 +#: src/include/packager/repositories_include.rb:91 +msgid "<p>The repository manager is downloading repository details...</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: pop-up error message +#. %1 is replaced with a repository name or URL +#. TRANSLATORS: pop-up error message +#. %1 is replaced with a repository name or URL +#. TRANSLATORS: pop-up error message +#. %1 is replaced with a repository name or URL +#: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:1472 +#: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:1496 +#: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:1514 +msgid "Adding repository %1 failed." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: progress step +#: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:1591 +msgid "Delete deselected online repositories" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: progress step +#: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:1593 +msgid "Deleting deselected online repositories..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: progress step +#: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:1601 +msgid "Add all selected online repositories" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: progress step +#: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:1606 +msgid "Adding all selected online repositories..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: progress step +#. %1 is replaced with repository name or URL +#: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:1615 +msgid "Add repository: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: progress step, +#. %1 is replaced with repository name or URL +#: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:1624 +msgid "Adding repository: %1 ..." +msgstr "" + +#. less than LOW_MEMORY_MIB RAM +#: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:1736 +msgid "" +"Low memory detected.\n" +"\n" +"Using online repositories during initial installation with less than\n" +"%dMiB system memory is not recommended.\n" +"\n" +"The installer may crash or freeze if the additional package data\n" +"need too much memory.\n" +"\n" +"Using the online repositories later in the installed system is\n" +"recommended in this case." +msgstr "" + +#. continue-cancel popup +#: src/clients/inst_rpmcopy.rb:81 +msgid "Initializing the target directory failed." +msgstr "" + +#. re-initialize package information +#. force reinitialization +#: src/clients/inst_rpmcopy.rb:129 src/clients/sw_single.rb:739 +msgid "Installing Packages..." +msgstr "" + +#. error report, %1 is number +#: src/clients/inst_rpmcopy.rb:322 +msgid "Failed to select %1 packages for installation." +msgstr "" + +#. set SoftLock to avoid the installation of recommended patterns (#159466) +#: src/clients/inst_rpmcopy.rb:358 +msgid "Could not set patterns: %1." +msgstr "" + +#. Solve dependencies +#: src/clients/inst_rpmcopy.rb:368 +msgid "The package resolver run failed. Check your software section in the AutoYaST profile." +msgstr "" + +#. error message - displayed in a scrollable text area +#. %1 - an error message (details) +#: src/clients/inst_rpmcopy.rb:416 +msgid "" +"Installation failed.\n" +"\n" +"Details:\n" +"%1\n" +"\n" +"Package installation will be aborted.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#. dialog caption +#. dialog caption +#: src/clients/key_manager.rb:70 src/clients/repositories.rb:1810 +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:682 +msgid "Initializing..." +msgstr "" + +#. intermediate popup while initializing internal packagemanagement +#: src/clients/media_proposal.rb:39 +msgid "Reading package information..." +msgstr "" + +#. Proposal for system to update, part of the richtext +#: src/clients/media_proposal.rb:52 +msgid "No Valid Installation Media" +msgstr "" + +#. this is a heading +#: src/clients/media_proposal.rb:87 +msgid "Installation Media" +msgstr "" + +#. this is a menu entry +#: src/clients/media_proposal.rb:89 +msgid "&Media" +msgstr "" + +#. progress step title +#: src/clients/pkg_finish.rb:50 +msgid "Saving the software manager configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. default (minimal) priority of a repository +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:55 +msgid "&Priority" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:57 +msgid "Keep Downloaded Packages" +msgstr "" + +#. Command line help text for the repository module, %1 is "zypper" +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:72 +msgid "Installation Repositories - This module does not support the command line interface, use '%1' instead." +msgstr "" + +#. pad to 3 characters +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:166 +msgid "Default" +msgstr "" + +#. unkown name (alias) of the source +#. get the editable propertis from 'source' parameter, +#. get the fixed propertis from the package manager +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:195 src/clients/repositories.rb:260 +msgid "Unknown Name" +msgstr "" + +#. displaye only repositories from the selected service +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:326 src/clients/repositories.rb:362 +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:368 src/modules/SourceManager.rb:436 +msgid "Unknown" +msgstr "" + +#. label to be used instead of URL if not found +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:328 src/clients/repositories.rb:361 +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1334 +msgid "URL: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. heading - in case repo name not found +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:357 +msgid "Unknown Repository Name" +msgstr "" + +#. label, %1 is repo category (eg. YUM) +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:367 +msgid "Category: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. label, %1 is repo category (eg. YUM) +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:377 +msgid "Service: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. #176013 +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:625 +msgid "All repositories" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:628 +msgid "All services" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:637 +msgid "Service '%1'" +msgstr "" + +#. combobox label +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:652 +msgid "View" +msgstr "" + +#. table header - priority of the repository - keep the translation as short as possible! +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:667 +msgid "Priority" +msgstr "" + +#. table header - is the repo enabled? - keep the translation as short as possible! +#. table header - is the repo enabled? - keep the translation as short as possible! +#. status info, to be used inside summary +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:669 src/clients/repositories.rb:682 +#: src/modules/SourceManager.rb:393 +msgid "Enabled" +msgstr "" + +#. table header - is autorefresh enabled for the repo? +#. keep the translation as short as possible! +#. table header - is autorefresh enabled for the repo? +#. keep the translation as short as possible! +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:672 src/clients/repositories.rb:685 +msgid "Autorefresh" +msgstr "" + +#. table header - service to which the repo belongs +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:676 +msgid "Service" +msgstr "" + +#. table header - URL of the repo +#. table header - URL of the repo +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:678 src/clients/repositories.rb:689 +msgid "URL" +msgstr "" + +#. push button - change URL of the selected repository +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:789 +msgid "&Replace..." +msgstr "" + +#. push button - refresh the selected repository now +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:791 +msgid "Re&fresh Selected" +msgstr "" + +#. push button - disable/enable the selected repository +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:793 +msgid "Status &on or off" +msgstr "" + +#. push button - disable/enable automatic refresh of the selected repository +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:795 +msgid "Refre&sh on or off" +msgstr "" + +#. push button - set name of the selected repository +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:797 +msgid "Set &Name..." +msgstr "" + +#. label +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:804 +msgid "Properties" +msgstr "" + +#. check box +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:809 +msgid "&Enabled" +msgstr "" + +#. check box +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:815 +msgid "Automatically &Refresh" +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:853 +msgid "&GPG Keys..." +msgstr "" + +#. menu button label +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:858 +msgid "Refresh" +msgstr "" + +#. menu button label +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:862 +msgid "Refresh all Autor&efreshed" +msgstr "" + +#. menu button label +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:864 +msgid "Refresh all &Enabled" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:871 +msgid "Configured Software Repositories" +msgstr "" + +#. help +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:874 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Manage configured software repositories and services.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:880 +msgid "<P>A <B>service</B> or <B>Repository Index Service (RIS) </B> is a protocol for package repository management. A service can offer one or more software repositories which can be dynamically changed by the service administrator.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:887 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b>Adding a new Repository or a Service</b><br>\n" +"To add a new repository, use <b>Add</b> and specify the software repository or service.\n" +"YaST will automatically detect whether a service or a repository is available at the entered location.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help, continued +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:899 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"To install packages from <b>CD</b>,\n" +"have the CD set or the DVD available.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help, continued +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:910 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"The CDs can be copied to <b>hard disk</b>\n" +"and then used as a repository.\n" +"Insert the path name where the first\n" +"CD is located, for example, /data1/<b>CD1</b>.\n" +"Only the base path is required if all CDs are copied\n" +"into one directory.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help, continued +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:926 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b>Modifying Status of a Repository or a Service</b><br>\n" +"To change a repository location, use <b>Edit</b>. To remove a repository, use\n" +"<b>Delete</b>. To enable or disable the repository or to change the refresh status at initialization time, select the repository in the table and use the check boxes below.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, continued +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:938 +msgid "" +"<P><B>Priority of a Repository</B><BR>\n" +"Priority of a repository is an integer value between 0 (the highest priority) and 200 (the lowest priority). Default is 99. If a package is available in more repositories, the repository with the highest priority is used.</P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, continued +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:946 +msgid "<P>Select the appropriate option on top of the window for navigation in repositories and services.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, continued +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:954 +msgid "" +"<P><B>Keep Downloaded Packages</B><BR>Check this option to keep downloaded\n" +"packages in a local cache so they can be reused later when the packages are\n" +"reinstalled. If not checked, the downloaded packages are deleted after installation.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:960 +msgid "<P>The default local cache is located in directory <B>/var/cache/zypp/packages</B>. Change the location in <B>/etc/zypp/zypp.conf</B> file.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. popup message part 1 +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:1005 +msgid "" +"Unable to save changes to the repository\n" +"configuration." +msgstr "" + +#. popup message part 2 followed by other info +#. popup message, after message header, header of details +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:1011 src/modules/Packages.rb:1329 +#: src/modules/SourceManager.rb:162 src/modules/SourceManager.rb:310 +msgid "Details:" +msgstr "" + +#. popup message part 3 +#. end of popup message, question +#. end of popup message, question +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:1013 src/modules/Packages.rb:1337 +#: src/modules/SourceManager.rb:164 src/modules/SourceManager.rb:312 +msgid "Try again?" +msgstr "" + +#. popup headline +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:1030 +msgid "Abort Repository Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. popup message +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:1032 +msgid "" +"Abort the repository configuration?\n" +"All changes will be lost." +msgstr "" + +#. refresh also the combobox widget +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:1329 +msgid "" +"There is no service at URL:\n" +"%1" +msgstr "" + +#. TODO: add help text +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:1440 +msgid "Refreshing Repositories" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:1441 +msgid "Refreshing Services" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:1446 +msgid "Refresh Repositories" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:1447 +msgid "Refresh Services" +msgstr "" + +#. progress bar label +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:1479 +msgid "Refreshing Repository %1..." +msgstr "" + +#. refreshing services +#. progress bar label +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:1505 +msgid "Refreshing Service %1..." +msgstr "" + +#. yes-no popup +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:1524 +msgid "Delete the selected repository from the list?" +msgstr "" + +#. yes-no popup +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:1538 +msgid "" +"Delete service %1\n" +"and its repositories?" +msgstr "" + +#. popup message +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:1606 +msgid "" +"For the selected repository, refresh\n" +"cannot be set." +msgstr "" + +#. popup question, %1 is repository URL +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:1768 +msgid "" +"Repository %1\n" +"has been already added. Each repository should be added only once.\n" +"\n" +"Really add the repository again?" +msgstr "" + +#. Error popup +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:1836 +msgid "<p>Errors occurred while restoring the repository configuration.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. the language_changed flag has NOT been set by the NLD frame +#. the language_changed flag has NOT been set by the NLD frame +#: src/clients/software_proposal.rb:93 +#: src/clients/software_simple_proposal.rb:48 +msgid "The software proposal is reset to the default values." +msgstr "" + +#. warning text +#. warning text +#: src/clients/software_proposal.rb:103 +#: src/clients/software_simple_proposal.rb:58 +msgid "Cannot solve dependencies automatically. Manual intervention is required." +msgstr "" + +#. this is a heading +#: src/clients/software_proposal.rb:145 +msgid "Software" +msgstr "" + +#. this is a menu entry +#: src/clients/software_proposal.rb:147 +msgid "&Software" +msgstr "" + +#. Command line help text for the software management module, %1 is "zypper" +#: src/clients/sw_single.rb:64 +msgid "Software Installation - This module does not support the command line interface, use '%1' instead." +msgstr "" + +#. error message (%1 is a package file name) +#: src/clients/sw_single.rb:194 +msgid "Error: Cannot copy package %1 to temporary repository." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/clients/sw_single.rb:216 +msgid "Error: Cannot add a temporary directory, packages cannot be installed." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#. error message +#: src/clients/sw_single.rb:243 src/clients/sw_single.rb:266 +msgid "Error: Cannot query package file %1." +msgstr "" + +#. Error message: +#. %1 = package name (may include complete RPM file name) +#. %2 = error message +#: src/clients/sw_single.rb:299 +msgid "" +"Package %1 could not be installed.\n" +"\n" +"Details:\n" +"%2\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup, %1 is the name of the .rpm package +#: src/clients/sw_single.rb:313 +msgid "Package %1 was not found on the medium." +msgstr "" + +#. start package manager +#: src/clients/sw_single.rb:362 +msgid "An error occurred during repository initialization." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/sw_single.rb:369 +msgid "" +"No repository is defined.\n" +"Only installed packages are displayed." +msgstr "" + +#. a stage in the progress dialog +#: src/clients/sw_single.rb:501 +msgid "Initialize the Target System" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/sw_single.rb:502 +msgid "Load the Configured Repositories" +msgstr "" + +#. %1 is path to the target system (e.g. /tmp/dirinstall +#: src/clients/sw_single.rb:510 +msgid "Reset the target system to %1" +msgstr "" + +#. a stage in the progress dialog +#: src/clients/sw_single.rb:516 +msgid "Starting the Software Manager" +msgstr "" + +#. reset summary +#: src/clients/sw_single.rb:580 +msgid "" +"During the last package installation\n" +"several packages failed to install.\n" +"Install them now?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. start the repository manager +#: src/clients/sw_single.rb:614 +msgid "" +"Cannot configure online update repository \n" +"without having package %1 installed" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/sw_single.rb:640 +msgid "" +"Cannot search packages in online repositories\n" +"without having package %1 installed" +msgstr "" + +#. error report, %1 is a list of packages +#: src/clients/sw_single.rb:668 +msgid "" +"The following packages have not been found on the medium:\n" +"%1\n" +msgstr "" + +#. rich text message, %1 = CD identification +#: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:94 +msgid "<BIG><B>%1</B></BIG>" +msgstr "" + +#. rich text message, %1 medium number, e.g. CD1,CD2... +#: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:99 +msgid "<UL><LI>Medium: %1</LI></UL>" +msgstr "" + +#. rich text message, %1 = size of the medium +#: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:103 +msgid "<UL><LI>Size: %1</LI></UL>" +msgstr "" + +#. rich text message, %1 = result of the check +#. the check has been canceled +#: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:107 src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:529 +msgid "<UL><LI>Result: %1</LI></UL>" +msgstr "" + +#. rich text - error message +#: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:112 +msgid "The drive does not contain a medium or the ISO file system is broken." +msgstr "" + +#. result of the check - success +#: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:122 +msgid "<B>OK</B> -- The medium has been successfully verified." +msgstr "" + +#. wrong MD5 +#: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:126 +msgid "<B>Error</B> -- MD5 sum does not match<BR>This medium should not be used." +msgstr "" + +#. the correct MD5 is unknown +#: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:131 +msgid "<B>Unknown</B> -- The correct MD5 sum of the medium is unknown." +msgstr "" + +#. warning popup - the CD/DVD drive doesn't contain the first medium (CD1/DVD1) +#: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:251 +msgid "Insert the first installation medium." +msgstr "" + +#. dialog header +#: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:299 +msgid "Media Check" +msgstr "" + +#. help text - media check (header) 1/8 +#: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:302 +msgid "<P><B>Media Check</B></P>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text - media check 2/8 +#: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:304 +msgid "" +"<P>When you have a problem with\n" +"the installation and you are using a CD or DVD installation medium, you should check\n" +"whether the medium is broken.</P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text - media check 3/8 +#: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:310 +msgid "" +"<P>Select a drive, insert a medium into the drive and press <B>Start Check</B>\n" +"or use <B>Check ISO File</B> and select an ISO file.\n" +"The check can take several minutes depending on speed of the\n" +"drive and size of the medium. The check verifies the MD5 checksum.</P> " +msgstr "" + +#. help text - media check 4/8 +#: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:317 +msgid "" +"<P>If the check of the medium fails, you should not continue the installation.\n" +"It may fail or you may lose your data. Better replace the broken medium.</P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text - media check 5/8 +#: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:321 +msgid "" +"After the check, insert the next medium and start the procedure again. \n" +"The order of the media is irrelevant.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text - media check 6/8 +#: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:325 +msgid "<P><B>Note:</B> You cannot change the medium while it is used by the system.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text - media check 7/8 +#: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:329 +msgid "<P>To check media before the installation, use the media check item in the boot menu.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text - media check 8/8 +#: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:333 +msgid "" +"<P>If you burn the media yourself, use the <B>pad</B> option in your recording\n" +"software. It avoids read errors at the end of the media during the check.</P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. advice check of the media +#. for translators: split the message to more lines if needed, use max. 50 characters per line +#: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:339 +msgid "" +"It is recommended to check all installation media\n" +"to avoid installation problems. To skip this step press 'Next'" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box +#: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:352 +msgid "&CD or DVD Drive" +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:360 +msgid "&Start Check" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:361 src/modules/SourceManager.rb:685 +msgid "&Eject" +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:367 +msgid "Check ISO File..." +msgstr "" + +#. widget label +#: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:370 +msgid "Status Information" +msgstr "" + +#. progress bar label +#: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:374 +msgid "Progress" +msgstr "" + +#. window title - open file dialog +#: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:421 +msgid "Select an ISO File to Check" +msgstr "" + +#. error message: the medium cannot be read or no medium in the drive; %1 = drive, e.g. /dev/hdc +#: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:461 +msgid "Cannot read medium in drive %1." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:471 +msgid "" +"The medium does not contain a MD5 checksum.\n" +"The content of the medium cannot be verified.\n" +"\n" +"Only readability of the medium will be checked.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:530 +msgid "<B>Canceled</B>" +msgstr "" + +#. escape <> characters in the key name +#. translators: %1 is GPG key name (e.g. 'SuSE Package Signing Key ') +#: src/include/packager/key_manager_dialogs.rb:48 +msgid "Name: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. %1 is a GPG Key fingerprint (e.g. '79C179B2E1C820C1890F9994A84EDAE89C800ACA') +#: src/include/packager/key_manager_dialogs.rb:56 +msgid "Finger Print: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. %1 is the date when the GPG key was generated (e.g. '9.10.2000') +#: src/include/packager/key_manager_dialogs.rb:63 +msgid "Created: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. %1 is the date when the GPG key expired (e.g. '10.6.2005'), display the date in red +#: src/include/packager/key_manager_dialogs.rb:70 +msgid "Expires: %1</font> (The key is expired.)" +msgstr "" + +#. summary string - the GPG key never expires +#: src/include/packager/key_manager_dialogs.rb:75 +msgid "The key never expires." +msgstr "" + +#. %1 is the date when the GPG key expires (e.g. '21.3.2015') or "Never" +#: src/include/packager/key_manager_dialogs.rb:78 +msgid "Expires: %1" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/packager/key_manager_dialogs.rb:95 +msgid "Key: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. Display a dialog for adding a GPG key +#: src/include/packager/key_manager_dialogs.rb:164 +msgid "Select a GPG Key" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/packager/key_manager_dialogs.rb:178 +msgid "Properties of the GPG Key" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/packager/key_manager_dialogs.rb:185 +msgid "Key ID: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/packager/key_manager_dialogs.rb:186 +msgid "Name: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/packager/key_manager_dialogs.rb:187 +msgid "Finger Print: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/packager/key_manager_dialogs.rb:188 +msgid "Created: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/packager/key_manager_dialogs.rb:189 +msgid "Expires: " +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/packager/key_manager_dialogs.rb:205 +msgid "Adding a GPG Public Key" +msgstr "" + +#. help +#. help +#: src/include/packager/key_manager_dialogs.rb:208 +#: src/include/packager/key_manager_dialogs.rb:281 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Manage known GPG public keys.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/packager/key_manager_dialogs.rb:212 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b>Adding a New GPG Key</b><br>\n" +"To add a new GPG key, specify the path to the key file.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. header in file selection popup +#: src/include/packager/key_manager_dialogs.rb:235 +msgid "Select a GPG Key To Import" +msgstr "" + +#. validate the entered file +#: src/include/packager/key_manager_dialogs.rb:255 +msgid "Enter a filename" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/packager/key_manager_dialogs.rb:278 +msgid "GPG Public Key Management" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/packager/key_manager_dialogs.rb:285 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b>Adding a New GPG Key</b><br>\n" +"To add a new GPG key, use <b>Add</b> and specify the path to the key file.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help, continued +#: src/include/packager/key_manager_dialogs.rb:296 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b>Modifying a GPG Key Status</b>\n" +"To modify the trusted flag, use <b>Edit</b>. To remove a GPG key, use\n" +"<b>Delete</b>.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/include/packager/key_manager_dialogs.rb:306 +msgid "Key ID" +msgstr "" + +#. remove the key +#: src/include/packager/key_manager_dialogs.rb:338 +msgid "" +"Really delete key '%1'\n" +"'%2'?" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog caption +#: src/include/packager/repositories_include.rb:77 +msgid "Adding a New Repository" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/packager/repositories_include.rb:81 +msgid "Check Repository Type" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/packager/repositories_include.rb:82 +msgid "Add Repository" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/packager/repositories_include.rb:83 +msgid "Read Repository License" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/packager/repositories_include.rb:86 +msgid "Checking Repository Type" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/packager/repositories_include.rb:87 +msgid "Adding Repository" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/packager/repositories_include.rb:88 +msgid "Reading Repository License" +msgstr "" + +#. add at least one product if the scan result is empty (no product info available) +#: src/include/packager/repositories_include.rb:152 +msgid "Repository" +msgstr "" + +#. continue-back popup +#. continue-back popup +#: src/include/packager/repositories_include.rb:224 +#: src/modules/SourceManager.rb:330 +msgid "" +"There is no product information available at the given location.\n" +"If you expected to to point a product, go back and enter\n" +"the correct location.\n" +"To make rpm packages located at the specified location available\n" +"in the packages selection, continue.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup message part 1 +#. Import GPG keys found in the inst-sys +#: src/include/packager/repositories_include.rb:319 +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:1324 src/modules/SourceManager.rb:306 +msgid "" +"Unable to create repository\n" +"from URL '%1'." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/include/packager/repositories_include.rb:331 +msgid "" +"Using an ISO image over ftp or http protocol is not possible.\n" +"Change the protocol or unpack the ISO image on the server side." +msgstr "" + +#. popup message part 2 +#: src/include/packager/repositories_include.rb:341 +msgid "Change the URL and try again?" +msgstr "" + +#. popup error message, %1 is the package name +#: src/include/packager/repositories_include.rb:418 +msgid "" +"Cannot search for SLP repositories\n" +"without having %1 package installed.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. New add-on product might add also new agents. +#. Functions Rereads all available agents. +#. +#. @see bugzilla #239055, #245508 +#. error report +#. popup error +#. popup error +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:516 src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:618 +#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:539 src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:730 +msgid "An error occurred while preparing the installation system." +msgstr "" + +#. error report +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:653 +msgid "Control file %1 not found on media." +msgstr "" + +#. FATE #305578: Add-On Product Requiring Registration +#. or check the content file +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:894 +msgid "" +"Package '%s' is not installed.\n" +"The add-on product cannot be registered." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: error report +#. TRANSLATORS: error report +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1261 src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1425 +msgid "Unable to use additional products." +msgstr "" + +#. fill up internal map (used later when item selected) +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1312 src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1318 +msgid "%1, URL: %2" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1328 +msgid "URL: %1, Path: %2" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup heading +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1359 +msgid "Additional Products" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: additional dialog information +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1365 +msgid "" +"The installation repository also contains the listed additional repositories.\n" +"Select the ones you want to use.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1376 +msgid "Additional Products to Select" +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1383 +msgid "Add Selected &Products" +msgstr "" + +#. %1 is either "CD" or "DVD" +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1515 +msgid "Insert the addon %1 medium" +msgstr "" + +#. %1 is the product name, %2 is either "CD" or "DVD" +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1520 +msgid "Insert the %1 %2 medium" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: error message, %1 is replaced with product URL +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1572 +msgid "Unable to add product %1." +msgstr "" + +#. adding the product to the list of products (BNC #269625) +#. no such products +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1764 src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1770 +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:471 +msgid "Unknown Product" +msgstr "" + +#. update the trusted flag +#: src/modules/KeyManager.rb:214 +msgid "" +"File '%1'\n" +"does not contain a valid GPG key.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. %1 is key ID (e.g. A84EDAE89C800ACA), %2 is key name (e.g. "SuSE Package Signing Key ") +#: src/modules/KeyManager.rb:235 +msgid "" +"Key '%1'\n" +"'%2'\n" +"is already known, it cannot be added again." +msgstr "" + +#. copy the key to the temporary directory (in fact the keys are imported in Write()) +#: src/modules/KeyManager.rb:279 +msgid "Cannot copy the key to the temporary directory." +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/modules/PackageInstallation.rb:53 +msgid "&Show Failed Packages List" +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/modules/PackageInstallation.rb:62 +msgid "&Show Full Log" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog headline +#: src/modules/PackageInstallation.rb:74 +msgid "Installation of some Packages Failed" +msgstr "" + +#. collect and set installation summary data +#: src/modules/PackageInstallation.rb:206 +msgid "Installation aborted by user." +msgstr "" + +#. the string is follwed by a media number, e.g. "Medium 1" +#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:50 +msgid "Medium %1" +msgstr "" + +#. Overflow (indicated by negative value) +#. When data throughput goes downhill (stalled network connection etc.), +#. cut off the predicted time at a reasonable maximum. +#. "%1" is a predefined maximum time. +#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:204 +msgid ">%1" +msgstr "" + +#. Nothing more to install from this CD (very concise - little space!!) +#. Nothing more to install from this CD (very concise - little space!!) +#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:222 src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:237 +msgid "Done." +msgstr "" + +#. Status line informing about the next CD that will be used +#. %1: Media type ("CD" / "DVD", ???) +#. %2: Media name ("SuSE Linux Professional CD 2" ) +#. %3: Time remaining until this media will be needed +#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:262 +msgid "Next: %1 -- %2" +msgstr "" + +#. Status line informing about the next CD that will be used +#. %1: Media type ("CD" / "DVD", ???) +#. %2: Media name ("SuSE Linux Professional CD 2" ) +#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:279 +msgid "Next: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. Add "Total" item - at the top so it is visible by default even if there are many items +#. +#. List column header for total remaining MB and time to install +#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:918 +msgid "Total" +msgstr "" + +#. do not show the average download rate if the space is limited +#. Update the current slide if applicable +#. +#. message in the installatino log, %1 is package name, +#. %2 is package size +#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1045 src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1297 +#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1349 +msgid "Downloading %1 (download size %2)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1075 +msgid " (Remaining: %1%2 packages)" +msgstr "" + +#. display download progress in DownloadInAdvance mode +#. translations: progress message (part1) +#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1108 +msgid "Downloading Packages..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress message (part2) +#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1111 +msgid " (Downloaded %1 of %2 packages)" +msgstr "" + +#. Heading for the progress bar for the current package +#. while it is deleted. "%1" is the package name. +#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1247 +msgid "Deleting %1" +msgstr "" + +#. package installation - summary text +#. %1 is RPM name, %2 is installed (unpacked) size (e.g. 6.20MB) +#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1254 +msgid "Installing %1 (installed size %2)" +msgstr "" + +#. message in the installatino log, %1 is package name, +#. %2 is package size +#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1332 +msgid "Applying delta RPM: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. warning text +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:311 +msgid "Your computer is a 64-bit x86-64 system, but you are trying to install a 32-bit distribution." +msgstr "" + +#. help text for software proposal +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:327 +msgid "<P>The pattern list states which functionality will be available after installing the system.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. (see bnc#178357 why these numbers) +#. translators: help text for software proposal +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:339 +msgid "<P>The proposal reports the total size of files which will be installed to the system. However, the system will contain some other files (temporary and working files) so the used space will be slightly larger than the proposed value. Therefore it is a good idea to have at least 25% (or about 300MB) free space before starting the installation.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for software proposal +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:344 +msgid "" +"<P>The total 'size to download' is the size of the packages which will be\n" +"downloaded from remote (network) repositories. This value is important if the connection is slow or if there is a data limit for downloading.</P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for software proposal - header +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:353 +msgid "<P><B>Software Proposal</B></P>" +msgstr "" + +#. installation proposal - SW summary, %1 is name of the installed product +#. (e.g. openSUSE 10.3, SUSE Linux Enterprise ...) +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:370 +msgid "Product: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. installation proposal - SW summary, %1 is name of the selected desktop or system type (e.g. KDE) +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:384 +msgid "System Type: %1" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:395 +msgid "Patterns:<br>" +msgstr "" + +#. installation proposal - SW summary, %1 is size of the selected packages (in MB or GB) +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:405 +msgid "Size of Packages to Install: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. installation proposal - SW summary, %1 is download size of the selected packages +#. which will be installed from an ftp or http repository (in MB or GB) +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:418 +msgid "Downloading from Remote Repositories: %1" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:480 +msgid "These add-on products have been marked for auto-removal: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. Warning message when some add-ons are marked to be removed automatically +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:504 +msgid "Contact the vendors of these add-ons to provide you with new installation media." +msgstr "" + +#. Warning message when some add-ons are marked to be removed automatically +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:508 +msgid "Contact the vendor of the add-on to provide you with a new installation media." +msgstr "" + +#. error message: %1: e.g. "/usr", %2: "/dev/sda2" +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:549 +msgid "Error: Cannot check free space in basic directory %1 (device %2), cannot start installation." +msgstr "" + +#. error message: %1: e.g. "/local", %2: "/dev/sda2" +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:569 +msgid "Warning: Cannot check free space in directory %1 (device %2)." +msgstr "" + +#. summary warning +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:612 +msgid "Not enough disk space." +msgstr "" + +#. summary warning +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:614 +msgid "Not enough disk space. Remove some packages in the single selection." +msgstr "" + +#. add a backslash if it's missing +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:635 +msgid "Only %1 (%2%%) free space available on partition %3.<BR>" +msgstr "" + +#. newly installed products +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:704 +msgid "New product <b>%s</b> will be installed" +msgstr "" + +#. product update: %s is a product name +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:714 +msgid "Product <b>%s</b> will be updated" +msgstr "" + +#. product update: %{old_product} is an old product, %{new_product} is the new one +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:716 +msgid "Product <b>%{old_product}</b> will be updated to <b>%{new_product}</b>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:723 +msgid "Product <b>%s</b> will stay installed" +msgstr "" + +#. Removing another product might be an issue +#. (just warn if removed by user or by YaST) +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:733 +msgid "<b>Warning:</b> Product <b>%s</b> will be removed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:734 +msgid "<b>Error:</b> Product <b>%s</b> will be automatically removed.</font>" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: update proposal warning, do NOT translate "-release", +#. it is part of a package name (like "sles-release") +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:760 +msgid "" +"<ul><li><b>Some products are marked for automatic removal.</b></li>\n" +"<ul><li>Contact the vendor of the removed add-on to provide you with a new\n" +"installation media</li><li>Or select the appropriate online extension or module\n" +"in the registration step</li><li>Or to continue with product upgrade go to the\n" +"software selection and mark the product (the -release package) for removal.\n" +"</li></ul></li></ul>" +msgstr "" + +#. error in proposal, %1 is URL +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:1345 +msgid "No repository found at '%1'." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: beginning of the rich text with the release notes +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:1618 +msgid "" +"<p><b>The release notes for the initial release are part of the installation\n" +"media. If an Internet connection is available during configuration, you can\n" +"download updated release notes from the SUSE Linux Web server.</b></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup - information label +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:1645 +msgid "Integrating booted media..." +msgstr "" + +#. close the popup in order to be able to ask about the license +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:1667 +msgid "Failed to integrate the service pack repository." +msgstr "" + +#. popup - information label +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:1700 +msgid "Initializing repositories..." +msgstr "" + +#. message popup, %1 is product name +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:1932 +msgid "Insert %1 CD 1" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:1934 +msgid "%1 CD 1 not found" +msgstr "" + +#. an error message +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:2044 +msgid "" +"Error while initializing package descriptions.\n" +"Check the log file %1 for more details." +msgstr "" + +#. bnc #436925 +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:2305 +msgid "" +"The software selection has been changed externally.\n" +"Software proposal will be called again." +msgstr "" + +#. popup label +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:2323 +msgid "Evaluating package selection..." +msgstr "" + +#. Error message, %{pattern_name} is replaced with the missing pattern name in runtime +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:2621 +msgid "" +"Failed to select default product pattern %{pattern_name}.\n" +"Pattern has not been found." +msgstr "" + +#. Sets that the license (file) has been already accepted +#. +#. @param [String] license_ident file name +#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:150 src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:157 +msgid "Cannot read license file %1" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:151 +msgid "To show the product license properly, put the license.tar.gz file to the root of the live media when building the image." +msgstr "" + +#. combo box +#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:295 +msgid "&Language" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label +#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:345 +msgid "I &Agree to the License Terms." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: addition license information +#. %1 is replaced with the filename +#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:383 +msgid "" +"If you want to print this EULA, you can find it\n" +"on the first media in the file %1" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:400 +msgid "" +"<p>Read the license agreement carefully and select\n" +"one of the available options. If you do not agree to the license agreement,\n" +"the configuration will be aborted.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog title +#. #459391 +#. If a progress is running open another dialog +#. dialog caption +#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:410 src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:1149 +#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:1227 +msgid "License Agreement" +msgstr "" + +#. popup question +#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:1021 +msgid "Really abort the add-on product installation?" +msgstr "" + +#. text asking whether to refuse a license (Yes-No popup) +#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:1045 +msgid "" +"Refusing the license agreement cancels the installation.\n" +"Really refuse the agreement?" +msgstr "" + +#. text asking whether to refuse a license (Yes-No popup) +#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:1048 +msgid "" +"Refusing the license agreement cancels the add-on\n" +"product installation. Really refuse the agreement?" +msgstr "" + +#. timed ok/cancel popup +#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:1058 +msgid "The system is shutting down..." +msgstr "" + +#. %s is an extension name, e.g. "SUSE Linux Enterprise Software Development Kit" +#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:1153 +msgid "%s License Agreement" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: %{license_url} is an URL where the displayed license can be found +#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:1593 +msgid "" +"If you want to print this EULA, you can download it from\n" +"%{license_url}" +msgstr "" + +#. popup yes-no +#: src/modules/SlideShowCallbacks.rb:59 +msgid "" +"Do you really want\n" +"to quit the installation?" +msgstr "" + +#. Mode::update (), Stage::cont () +#: src/modules/SlideShowCallbacks.rb:71 +msgid "Aborted" +msgstr "" + +#. message in the installation log widget, %1 is a patch name which contains the script +#: src/modules/SlideShowCallbacks.rb:143 +msgid "Starting script %1" +msgstr "" + +#. label, %1 is patch name with version and architecture +#: src/modules/SlideShowCallbacks.rb:198 +msgid "" +"Patch %1\n" +"\n" +msgstr "" + +#. warning popup - %1 is directory name (e.g. /boot) +#: src/modules/SlideShowCallbacks.rb:333 +msgid "" +"The disk space in partition %1 is nearly exhausted.\n" +"Continue with the installation?" +msgstr "" + +#. yes-no popup +#: src/modules/SlideShowCallbacks.rb:367 +msgid "" +"The disk space is nearly exhausted.\n" +"Continue with the installation?" +msgstr "" + +#. remote +#: src/modules/SlideShowCallbacks.rb:443 +msgid "Downloading delta RPM %1 (download size %2)" +msgstr "" + +#. error in installation log, %1 is detail error description +#: src/modules/SlideShowCallbacks.rb:472 +msgid "Failed to download delta RPM: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. error in installation log, %1 is detail error description +#: src/modules/SlideShowCallbacks.rb:481 +msgid "Failed to apply delta RPM: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:33 +msgid "&Scan Using SLP..." +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:35 +msgid "Commun&ity Repositories" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:37 +msgid "&Extensions and Modules from Registration Server..." +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:39 +msgid "Specify &URL..." +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:41 +msgid "&FTP..." +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:43 +msgid "&HTTP..." +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:45 +msgid "HTT&PS..." +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#. radio button +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:47 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1757 +msgid "S&MB/CIFS" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:49 +msgid "NF&S..." +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:51 +msgid "&CD..." +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:53 +msgid "&DVD..." +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:55 +msgid "&Hard Disk..." +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:57 +msgid "&USB Mass Storage (USB Stick, Disk)..." +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:59 +msgid "&Local Directory..." +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:61 +msgid "&Local ISO Image..." +msgstr "" + +#. check box +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:63 +msgid "&Download repository description files" +msgstr "" + +#. Help text suffix for some types of the media +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:116 +msgid "" +"<p>If the location is a file holding an ISO image\n" +"of the media, set <b>ISO Image</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Help text suffix for some types of the media +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:121 +msgid "" +"<p>If the repository is on multiple media,\n" +"set the location of the first media of the set.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:135 +msgid "&Server Name" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#. text entry +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:143 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1621 +msgid "&Path to Directory or ISO Image" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:151 +msgid "&ISO Image" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:153 +msgid "N&FS v4 Protocol" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:159 +msgid "Mount Options" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: "(default)" - is a combobox value and means default libzypp +#. NFS mount option (users can change it to anything else, the field is editable) +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:163 +msgid "(default)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:174 +msgid "URL of the Repository" +msgstr "" + +#. frame +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:183 +msgid "P&rotocol" +msgstr "" + +#. input field label +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:193 +msgid "&URL of the Repository" +msgstr "" + +#. label / dialog caption +#. bugzilla #219759 +#. service label can be empty (not defined) +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:208 src/modules/SourceManagerSLP.rb:323 +msgid "Repository URL" +msgstr "" + +#. label / dialog caption +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:210 +msgid "NFS Server" +msgstr "" + +#. label / dialog caption +#. label / dialog caption +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:212 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:214 +msgid "CD or DVD Media" +msgstr "" + +#. label / dialog caption +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:216 +msgid "Hard Disk" +msgstr "" + +#. label / dialog caption +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:218 +msgid "USB Stick or Disk" +msgstr "" + +#. label / dialog caption +#. dialog caption +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:220 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:926 +msgid "Local Directory" +msgstr "" + +#. label / dialog caption +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:222 +msgid "Local ISO Image" +msgstr "" + +#. label / dialog caption +#. label / dialog caption +#. label / dialog caption +#. label / dialog caption +#. label / dialog caption +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:224 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:226 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:228 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:230 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:232 +msgid "Server and Directory" +msgstr "" + +#. popup message +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:468 +msgid "The name of the repository cannot be empty." +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:480 +msgid "&Repository Name" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:495 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>Repository Name</b></big><br>\n" +"Use <b>Repository Name</b> to specify the name of the repository. If it is empty, YaST will use the product name (if available) or the URL as the name.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:509 +msgid "&Service Name" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:517 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>Service Name</b></big><br>\n" +"Use <b>Service Name</b> to specify the name of the service. If it is empty, YaST will use part of the service URL as the name.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup message +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:552 +msgid "URL cannot be empty." +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:566 +msgid "&URL" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:580 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>Repository URL</b></big><br>\n" +"Use <b>URL</b> to specify the URL of the repository.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Get widget description map +#. @return widget description map +#. Get widget description map +#. @return widget description map +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:753 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1893 +msgid "Edit Parts of the URL" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:760 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1900 +msgid "Edit Complete URL" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:772 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>NFS Server</b></big><br>\n" +"Use <b>Server Name</b> and <b>Path to Directory or ISO Image</b>\n" +"to specify the NFS server host name and path on the server.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:779 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>Mount Options</b></big><br>\n" +"You can specify extra options used for mounting the NFS volume.\n" +"This is an expert option, keeping the default value is recommened. See <b>man 5 nfs</b>\n" +"for details and the list of supported options." +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:834 +msgid "&CD-ROM" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:836 +msgid "&DVD-ROM" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:841 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>CD or DVD Media</b></big><br>\n" +"Set <b>CD-ROM</b> or <b>DVD-ROM</b> to specify the type of media.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:941 +msgid "ISO Image File" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup - the entered path is not a directory +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:964 +msgid "" +"The entered path is not a directory\n" +"or the directory does not exist.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup - the entered path is not a regular file +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:994 +msgid "" +"The entered path is not a file\n" +"or the file does not exist.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. continue/cancel popup, %1 is a file name +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1018 +msgid "" +"File '%1'\n" +"does not seem to be an ISO image.\n" +"Use it anyway?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1039 +msgid "&Path to Directory" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1047 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1305 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1372 +msgid "&Plain RPM Directory" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1062 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>Local Directory</b></big><br>\n" +"Use <b>Path to Directory</b> to specify the path to the\n" +"directory. If the directory contains only RPM packages without\n" +"any metadata (i.e. there is no product information), then check option\n" +"<b>Plain RPM Directory</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. `opt(`hstretch), +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1298 +msgid "&USB Mass Storage Device" +msgstr "" + +#. the spacing is added to make the widget wider +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1303 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1370 +msgid "&File System" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1304 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1371 +msgid "Dire&ctory" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1309 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>USB Stick or Disk</b></big><br>\n" +"Select the USB device on which the repository is located.\n" +"Use <b>Path to Directory</b> to specify the directory of the repository.\n" +"If the path is omitted, the system will use the root directory of the disk.\n" +"If the directory contains only RPM packages without\n" +"any metadata (i.e. there is no product information), then check option\n" +"<b>Plain RPM Directory</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. 'auto' is a value in the combo box widget, do not translate it! +#. 'auto' is a value in the combo box widget, do not translate it! +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1319 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1386 +msgid "" +"<p>The file system used on the device will be detected automatically\n" +"if you select file system 'auto'. If the detection fails or you\n" +"want to use a certain file system, select it from the list.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. combobox title +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1369 +msgid "&Disk Device" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1376 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>Disk</b></big><br>\n" +"Select the disk on which the repository is located.\n" +"Use <b>Path to Directory</b> to specify the directory of the repository.\n" +"If the path is omitted, the system will use the root directory of the disk.\n" +"If the directory contains only RPM packages without\n" +"any metadata (i.e. there is no product information), then check option\n" +"<b>Plain RPM Directory</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1402 +msgid "&Path to ISO Image" +msgstr "" + +#. push button +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1422 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>Local ISO Image</b></big><br>\n" +"Use <b>Path to ISO Image</b> to specify the path to the\n" +"ISO image file.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1603 +msgid "Server &Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1607 +msgid "&Port" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1612 +msgid "&Share" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1625 +msgid "ISO &Image" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1628 +msgid "&Directory on Server" +msgstr "" + +#. frame +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1633 +msgid "Au&thentication" +msgstr "" + +#. check box +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1640 +msgid "&Anonymous" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1649 +msgid "&Workgroup or Domain" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1658 +msgid "&User Name" +msgstr "" + +#. password entry +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1665 +msgid "&Password" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1740 +msgid "&FTP" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1743 +msgid "H&TTP" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1750 +msgid "HTT&PS" +msgstr "" + +#. help text - server dialog +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1924 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>Server and Directory</b></big><br>\n" +"Use <b>Server Name</b> and <b>Path to Directory or ISO Image</b>\n" +"to specify the NFS server host name and path on the server.\n" +"To enable authentication, uncheck <b>Anonymous</b> and specify the\n" +"<b>User Name</b> and the <b>Password</b>.</p>\n" +"<p>\n" +"For the SMB/CIFS repository, specify <b>Share</b> name and <b>Path to Directory\n" +"or ISO Image</b>. \n" +"If the location is a file holding an ISO image\n" +"of the media, set <b>ISO Image</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text - server dialog, there is a "Port" widget +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1937 +msgid "" +"<p>It is possible to set the <b>Port</b> number for a HTTP/HTTPS repository.\n" +"Leave it empty to use the default port.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Returns whether Community Repositories are defined in the control file. +#. +#. @return [Boolean] whether defined +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1999 +msgid "I would like to install an additional Add On Product" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2126 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>Media Type</b></big><br>\n" +"The software repository can be located on CD, on a network server,\n" +"or on the hard disk.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help, continued +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2135 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"To add <b>CD</b> or <b>DVD</b>,\n" +"have the product CD set or the DVD available.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help, continued +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2145 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"The product CDs can be copied to the hard disk.\n" +"Enter the path to the first CD, for example, /data1/<b>CD1</b>.\n" +"Only the base path is required if all CDs are copied\n" +"into the same directory.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help, continued +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2157 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Network installation requires a working network connection.\n" +"Specify the directory in which the packages from\n" +"the first CD are located, such as /data1/CD1.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2172 +msgid "Select the media type" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2178 +msgid "Insert the add-on product CD" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2179 +msgid "Insert the add-on product DVD" +msgstr "" + +#. ask for a medium +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2197 +msgid "No USB disk was detected." +msgstr "" + +#. use three slashes as third slash means path +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2403 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Download Files</b><br>\n" +"Each repository has description files which describe the content of the\n" +"repository. Check <b>Download repository description files</b> to download the\n" +"files when closing this YaST module. If the option is unchecked, YaST will\n" +"automatically download the files when it needs them later. </p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2623 +msgid "Media Type" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2647 +msgid "Add On Product" +msgstr "" + +#. Returns boolean whether user confirmed to abort the configuration +#. +#. @return [Boolean] whether to abort +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2678 +msgid "URL scheme '%s' is not valid." +msgstr "" + +#. SourceManager read dialog caption +#: src/modules/SourceManager.rb:100 +msgid "Initializing Available Repositories" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1/3 +#: src/modules/SourceManager.rb:112 +msgid "Read configured repositories" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 2/3 +#: src/modules/SourceManager.rb:114 +msgid "Detect available repositories via SLP" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 1/3 +#: src/modules/SourceManager.rb:118 +msgid "Reading configured repositories..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 2/3 +#: src/modules/SourceManager.rb:120 +msgid "Detecting available repositories..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress finished +#. Progress finished +#: src/modules/SourceManager.rb:122 src/modules/SourceManager.rb:200 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#. Error message +#: src/modules/SourceManager.rb:133 +msgid "Cannot read repositories." +msgstr "" + +#. Error message +#: src/modules/SourceManager.rb:141 +msgid "Cannot detect available repositories." +msgstr "" + +#. popup message header +#: src/modules/SourceManager.rb:160 +msgid "Unable to save changes to the repository.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. SourceManager read dialog caption +#: src/modules/SourceManager.rb:183 +msgid "Saving Repository Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1/1 +#: src/modules/SourceManager.rb:194 +msgid "Write repository settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 1/1 +#: src/modules/SourceManager.rb:198 +msgid "Writing the settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. Create a repository from an URL +#: src/modules/SourceManager.rb:296 +msgid "Adding repository..." +msgstr "" + +#. status info, to be used inside summary +#: src/modules/SourceManager.rb:395 +msgid "Disabled" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: name of a repository if no other idenfication found +#: src/modules/SourceManager.rb:407 +msgid "unknown" +msgstr "" + +#. corresponds to the "Enable/Disable" button +#: src/modules/SourceManager.rb:430 +msgid "On" +msgstr "" + +#. corresponds to the "Enable/Disable" button +#: src/modules/SourceManager.rb:432 +msgid "Off" +msgstr "" + +#. summary header +#: src/modules/SourceManager.rb:472 +msgid "Configured Repositories" +msgstr "" + +#. To adjust the width of the dialog, look for the more lengthy device label +#. (and add some extra space for the frame) +#: src/modules/SourceManager.rb:671 +msgid "&Drive to eject" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: popup heading (progress popup) +#: src/modules/SourceManagerSLP.rb:51 +msgid "SLP Search" +msgstr "" + +#. progress information +#. progress information +#: src/modules/SourceManagerSLP.rb:57 src/modules/SourceManagerSLP.rb:81 +msgid "Scanning network for installation services..." +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/modules/SourceManagerSLP.rb:106 +msgid "Filter Form" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: popup heading +#: src/modules/SourceManagerSLP.rb:158 +msgid "Choose SLP Repository" +msgstr "" + +#. tree label (tree of available products) +#: src/modules/SourceManagerSLP.rb:171 +msgid "Available Installation &Products" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SourceManagerSLP.rb:176 +msgid "&Details..." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#. message popup +#: src/modules/SourceManagerSLP.rb:211 src/modules/SourceManagerSLP.rb:217 +msgid "No details are available." +msgstr "" + +#. min Y in UI +#: src/modules/SourceManagerSLP.rb:274 +msgid "Repository Details" +msgstr "" + +#. table header item +#: src/modules/SourceManagerSLP.rb:281 +msgid "Key" +msgstr "" + +#. table header item +#: src/modules/SourceManagerSLP.rb:283 +msgid "Value" +msgstr "" + +#. message popup +#: src/modules/SourceManagerSLP.rb:403 +msgid "" +"Select one of the offered options.\n" +"More repositories are available for this product.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup error +#: src/modules/SourceManagerSLP.rb:423 +msgid "" +"An internal error occurred.\n" +"The selected repository has no URL." +msgstr "" + +#. progress information, %1 stands for number of services +#: src/modules/SourceManagerSLP.rb:493 +msgid "Collecting information of %1 services found..." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/modules/SourceManagerSLP.rb:591 +msgid "" +"No SLP repositories have been found on your network.\n" +"This could be caused by a running SuSEfirewall2,\n" +"which probably blocks the network scanning." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/modules/SourceManagerSLP.rb:600 +msgid "No SLP repositories have been found on your network." +msgstr "" + +#. Warning message, e.g.: Partition /usr needs 35 MB more disk space +#: src/modules/SpaceCalculation.rb:869 +msgid "Partition \"%1\" needs %2 more disk space." +msgstr "" + +#. popup message +#: src/modules/SpaceCalculation.rb:889 +msgid "" +"Deselect packages or delete data or temporary files\n" +"before updating the system.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup message +#: src/modules/SpaceCalculation.rb:898 +msgid "Deselect some packages." +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/pam.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/pam.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/pam.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. popup text (%1 is user name, %2 is additional info, +#. like "Now LDAP was enabled") +#: src/modules/Autologin.rb:146 +msgid "" +"The automatic login feature is enabled for user %1.\n" +"%2\n" +"Disable automatic login?" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/pkg-bindings.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/pkg-bindings.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/pkg-bindings.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,182 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#: src/GPGMap.cc:54 +msgid "Never" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/HelpTexts.h:36 +msgid "<P><BIG><B>Loading Available Packages</B></BIG></P><P>Loading available objects from the configured repositories is in progress. This may take a while...</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/HelpTexts.h:42 +msgid "<P><BIG><B>Loading Installed Packages</B></BIG></P><P>The package manager is reading installed packages...</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/HelpTexts.h:47 +msgid "<P><BIG><B>Registering a New Repository</B></BIG></P><P>A new repository is being registered. The package manager is reading the list of available packages in the repository...</P>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/HelpTexts.h:52 +msgid "<P><BIG><B>Saving Repositories</B></BIG></P><P>The package manager is updating configured repositories...</P>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/HelpTexts.h:55 +msgid "<P><BIG><B>Refreshing the Repository</B></BIG></P><P>The package manager is updating the repository content...</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/Package.cc:655 +msgid "The package cannot be selected to install." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/Package.cc:661 +msgid "The package is not available." +msgstr "" + +#. still not initialized, throw an exception +#. translators: this is an error message +#: src/PkgFunctions.cc:129 +msgid "Cannot connect to the package manager" +msgstr "" + +#: src/Source_Callbacks.cc:129 +msgid "Refreshing repository " +msgstr "" + +#: src/Source_Callbacks.cc:150 +msgid "Probing repository " +msgstr "" + +#: src/Source_Create.cc:52 +msgid "Scanning products in " +msgstr "" + +#: src/Source_Create.cc:581 +msgid "Search Available Products" +msgstr "" + +#: src/Source_Create.cc:586 +msgid "Probe Source Type" +msgstr "" + +#: src/Source_Create.cc:589 +msgid "Download Descriptions" +msgstr "" + +#: src/Source_Create.cc:590 src/Source_Download.cc:407 src/Source_Load.cc:155 +#: src/Source_Load.cc:479 +msgid "Rebuild Cache" +msgstr "" + +#: src/Source_Create.cc:594 src/Source_Load.cc:156 src/Source_Load.cc:480 +#: src/Source_Set.cc:76 +msgid "Load Data" +msgstr "" + +#: src/Source_Create.cc:597 +msgid "Adding the Repository..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/Source_Download.cc:56 src/Source_Download.cc:325 +msgid "Downloading " +msgstr "" + +#. stages: "download", "build cache" +#: src/Source_Download.cc:406 +msgid "Refresh Metadata" +msgstr "" + +#. 3 steps per repository (download, cache rebuild, load resolvables) +#: src/Source_Download.cc:414 +msgid "Refreshing Repository..." +msgstr "" + +#. error message (followed by directory name) +#: src/Source_Installation.cc:73 +msgid "Target is not a directory: " +msgstr "" + +#. error message (followed by directory name) +#: src/Source_Installation.cc:103 +msgid "Cannot create directory " +msgstr "" + +#. error message (followed by directory name) +#: src/Source_Installation.cc:112 +msgid "Cannot check status of directory " +msgstr "" + +#. error message (followed by detailed description) +#: src/Source_Installation.cc:190 src/Source_Installation.cc:216 +msgid "Error: Cannot copy the cache to the target directory\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/Source_Installation.cc:193 +msgid "Copying failed" +msgstr "" + +#. error message, service name and URL is appened at the end of the string +#: src/Source_Load.cc:109 +msgid "Error refreshing service" +msgstr "" + +#: src/Source_Load.cc:154 src/Source_Load.cc:478 +msgid "Refresh Sources" +msgstr "" + +#. 3 steps per repository (download, cache rebuild, load resolvables) +#: src/Source_Load.cc:161 src/Source_Load.cc:483 src/Source_Set.cc:83 +#: src/Target_Load.cc:74 src/Target_Load.cc:204 +msgid "Loading the Package Manager..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/Source_Load.cc:477 +msgid "Load Sources" +msgstr "" + +#. TODO: improve the error message +#: src/Source_Misc.cc:70 +msgid "Cannot find source" +msgstr "" + +#: src/Source_Save.cc:132 +msgid "Remove Repositories" +msgstr "" + +#. stages: "download", "build cache" +#: src/Source_Save.cc:137 +msgid "Save Repositories" +msgstr "" + +#. start the process +#: src/Source_Save.cc:145 +msgid "Saving Repositories..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/Target_Load.cc:70 +msgid "Initialize the Target System" +msgstr "" + +#: src/Target_Load.cc:71 src/Target_Load.cc:200 +msgid "Read Installed Packages" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/printer.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/printer.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/printer.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,3805 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. Command line help text for the printer module +#: src/clients/printer.rb:54 +msgid "Configuration of printer" +msgstr "" + +#. Write the AutoYaST related printer settings to the system +#. according to the Printer::autoyast_printer_settings_import map +#. which was stored by a previous call of the Import function by AutoYaST +#. or reset to an empty map by a previous call of the Reset function. +#: src/clients/printer_auto.rb:244 +msgid "Error: Failed to write /etc/cups/cupsd.conf" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/printer_auto.rb:263 +msgid "Error: Failed to write /etc/cups/client.conf" +msgstr "" + +#. which is added to its "Summary" text for AutoYaST +#. where %1 is replaced by the file name which cannot be read. +#: src/clients/printer_auto.rb:301 +msgid "Warning: Cannot read %1 (file may not exist)." +msgstr "" + +#. which is added to its "Summary" text for AutoYaST +#. where %1 is replaced by the file name which cannot be read. +#: src/clients/printer_auto.rb:338 +msgid "Error: Failed to read %1 (possibly empty file)." +msgstr "" + +#. which is added to its "Summary" text for AutoYaST +#. where %1 is replaced by the file name. +#: src/clients/printer_auto.rb:383 +msgid "Warning: Failed to backup %1 as %1.yast2save" +msgstr "" + +#. which is added to its "Summary" text for AutoYaST +#. where %1 is replaced by the file name. +#: src/clients/printer_auto.rb:411 +msgid "Warning: Failed to backup %1 as %1.yast2orig" +msgstr "" + +#. Propose configuration for each local printer: +#. Check if the packages cups-client and cups are installed +#. and skip the automated queue setup if one of them is missing, see +#. https://bugzilla.novell.com/show_bug.cgi?id=445719#c13 +#. If cups-client is missing, it would run into an endless sequence of errors. +#. If cups is missing, there can be no local running cupsd which is +#. mandatory to set up local print queues. +#: src/clients/printer_proposal.rb:92 +msgid "Cannot configure printing (required package cups-client is not installed)." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/printer_proposal.rb:102 +msgid "Cannot configure local printers (required package cups is not installed)." +msgstr "" + +#. Skip automated queue setup when it is a client-only config: +#: src/clients/printer_proposal.rb:117 +msgid "No local printer accessible (using remote CUPS server '%1' for printing)." +msgstr "" + +#. Wait half a minute for a new started cupsd: +#. Wait half a minute for a new started cupsd is necessary because +#. when a client-only config is switched to a "get Browsing info" config +#. the BrowseInterval in cupsd.conf on remote CUPS servers is by default 30 seconds +#. so that the local cupsd should listen at least 31 seconds to get Browsing info +#. before e.g. the Overview dialog can be shown with the right current queues. +#: src/clients/printer_proposal.rb:162 src/modules/Printerlib.rb:356 +msgid "" +"Started the CUPS daemon.\n" +"Waiting half a minute for the CUPS daemon to get ready to operate...\n" +msgstr "" + +#. for the very first time (e.g. on a new installed system) +#. until the cupsd is actually ready to operate. +#. E.g. because parsing of thousands of PPDs may need much time. +#. Therefore enforce waiting one minute now. +#. (Plain busy message without title.) +#. for the very first time (e.g. on a new installed system) +#. until the cupsd is actually ready to operate. +#. E.g. because parsing of thousands of PPDs may need much time. +#. Therefore enforce waiting one minute now. +#. (Plain busy message without title.) +#: src/clients/printer_proposal.rb:176 src/modules/Printerlib.rb:372 +msgid "" +"The CUPS daemon is not yet accessible.\n" +"Waiting one minute so that it is ready to operate..." +msgstr "" + +#. Skip automated queue setup when the cupsd is not accessible up to now. +#. A special case is when the cupsd does not listen on the official IANA IPP port (631). +#. Then Printerlib::GetAndSetCupsdStatus("") returns false because it calls +#. "lpstat -h localhost -r" which fails ("-h localhost:port" would have to be used). +#. The YaST printer module does not support when the cupsd listens on a non-official port +#. so that also in this special case no automated queue setup is done. +#: src/clients/printer_proposal.rb:196 +msgid "Cannot configure local printers (no local cupsd accessible)." +msgstr "" + +#. with an empty URI (i.e. no need to test this here) +#. but Printer::ConnectionItems adds trailing spaces +#. because the current YaST UI has almost no additional +#. space between table columns: +#: src/clients/printer_proposal.rb:223 +msgid "No local printer detected." +msgstr "" + +#. Since CUPS 1.4 the new DirtyCleanInterval directive controls +#. the delay when cupsd updates config files (see basicadd.ycp). +#. Since CUPS 1.4 the new DirtyCleanInterval directive controls the delay when cupsd updates config files: +#. Since CUPS 1.4 the new DirtyCleanInterval directive controls the delay when cupsd updates config files: +#: src/clients/printer_proposal.rb:340 src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:423 +#: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:814 +msgid "Creating New Printer Setup" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/printer_proposal.rb:343 src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:426 +#: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:817 +msgid "New Printer Configuration not yet Stored in the System" +msgstr "" + +#. Explanation details of a Popup::ErrorDetails. +#: src/clients/printer_proposal.rb:347 +msgid "This may result broken printer configurations." +msgstr "" + +#. has almost no additional space between table columns: +#: src/clients/printer_proposal.rb:389 +msgid "Found existing configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/printer_proposal.rb:397 +msgid "Created configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/printer_proposal.rb:410 +msgid "No local printer configured." +msgstr "" + +#. Create titles: +#: src/clients/printer_proposal.rb:438 +msgid "Printer" +msgstr "" + +#. Menu title for Printer in proposals +#: src/clients/printer_proposal.rb:440 +msgid "&Printer" +msgstr "" + +#. CheckBox to trigger an automatic configuration of local connected printers +#. by calling the YaST printer module autoconfig functionality right now. +#: src/include/printer/autoconfig.rb:49 +msgid "&Do an automatic configuration of local connected printers now" +msgstr "" + +#. Header for a dialog section where the user can +#. specify if USB printers are configured automatically: +#: src/include/printer/autoconfig.rb:61 +msgid "Specify if automatic USB printer configuration should happen when plug in" +msgstr "" + +#. CheckBox for automatic configuration of USB printers +#. by installing or removing the RPM package udev-configure-printer. +#. Do not change or translate "udev-configure-printer", it is a RPM package name. +#: src/include/printer/autoconfig.rb:75 +msgid "&Use the package udev-configure-printer for automatic USB printer configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. where %1 will be replaced by the server name: +#. where %1 will be replaced by the server name: +#. where %1 will be replaced by the server name: +#. where %1 will be replaced by the server name: +#. where %1 will be replaced by the server name: +#: src/include/printer/autoconfig.rb:97 src/include/printer/overview.rb:1098 +#: src/include/printer/policies.rb:135 +#: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:463 +#: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:639 +msgid "Disable Remote CUPS Server '%1'" +msgstr "" + +#. PopupYesNoHeadline headline +#. PopupYesNoHeadline body: +#: src/include/printer/autoconfig.rb:101 +msgid "A remote CUPS server setting conflicts with automatic configuration of printers for the local system." +msgstr "" + +#. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system +#. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). +#. Remove the 'ServerName' entry in /etc/cups/client.conf: +#: src/include/printer/autoconfig.rb:115 src/include/printer/overview.rb:217 +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:1115 src/include/printer/policies.rb:153 +#: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:478 +#: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:657 +msgid "Failed to remove the 'ServerName' entry in /etc/cups/client.conf" +msgstr "" + +#. There is no "abort" functionality which does a sudden death of the whole module (see dialogs.ycp). +#. Unfortunately when the YaST package installer is run via Printerlib::TestAndInstallPackage +#. it leaves a misused "abort" button labeled "Skip Autorefresh" with WidgetID "`abort" +#. so that this leftover "abort" button must be explicitly hidden here: +#: src/include/printer/autoconfig.rb:188 +msgid "Failed to install udev-configure-printer." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/autoconfig.rb:201 +msgid "Failed to remove udev-configure-printer." +msgstr "" + +#. Call the YaST printer module autoconfig functionality: +#: src/include/printer/autoconfig.rb:247 +msgid "The automated printer configuration was in vain." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/autoconfig.rb:252 +msgid "Automated printer configuration results" +msgstr "" + +#. BasicAddDialog dialog +#. @return dialog result +#. BasicModifyDialog dialog +#. @return dialog result +#: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:48 src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:51 +msgid "any model" +msgstr "" + +#. Caption for the "Add Printer" dialog (BasicAddDialog): +#: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:51 +msgid "Add New Printer Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. to avoid that the full list of thousands of PPDs is shown automatically +#. because it can take a very long time until the user can proceed: +#. to avoid that the full list of thousands of PPDs is shown automatically +#. because it can take a very long time until the user can proceed: +#. to avoid that the full list of thousands of PPDs is shown automatically +#. because it can take a very long time until the user can proceed: +#. to avoid that the full list of thousands of PPDs is shown automatically +#. because it can take a very long time until the user can proceed: +#: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:81 src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:536 +#: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:330 +#: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:994 +msgid "Enter your printer model here." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:87 +msgid "Specify the Connection" +msgstr "" + +#. Label of a PushButton to restart printer autodetection +#. to show more available printer connections +#. in the Table with a list of printer connections: +#. Label of a PushButton to restart printer autodetection +#. to show more available printer connections +#. in the Table with a list of printer connections: +#: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:94 src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:343 +msgid "&Detect More" +msgstr "" + +#. Label of a PushButton to go to the "Connection Wizard" +#. to specify the printer connection individually: +#. Label of a PushButton to go to the "Connection Wizard" +#. to specify the printer connection individually: +#. Label of a PushButton to go to the "Connection Wizard" +#. to specify the printer connection individually: +#: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:100 src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:349 +#: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:195 +msgid "Connection &Wizard" +msgstr "" + +#. Printer model name: +#. Printer model name: +#. Printer model name: +#. Printer model name: +#. Printer model name: +#: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:116 src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:456 +#: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:365 +#: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:893 +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:545 +msgid "Model" +msgstr "" + +#. Header of a Table column with a list of printer connections. +#. Connection of the printer (e.g. via USB or via parallel port): +#. Header of a Table column with a list of printer connections. +#. Connection of the printer (e.g. via USB or via parallel port): +#. Header of a Table column with a list of printer connections. +#. Connection of the printer (e.g. via USB or via parallel port): +#. Header of a Table column with a list of printer connections. +#. Connection of the printer (e.g. via USB or via parallel port): +#. Header of a Table column with a list of printer connections. +#. Connection of the printer (e.g. via USB or via parallel port): +#: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:119 src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:459 +#: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:336 +#: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:368 +#: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:896 +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:548 +msgid "Connection" +msgstr "" + +#. Header of a Table column with a list of printer connections. +#. Additional description of the printer or its particular connection: +#. Header of a Table column with a list of printer connections. +#. Additional description of the printer or its particular connection: +#. Header of a Table column with a list of printer connections. +#. Additional description of the printer or its particular connection: +#. Header of a Table column with a list of printer connections. +#. Additional description of the printer or its particular connection: +#. Header of a Table column with a list of printer connections. +#. Additional description of the printer or its particular connection: +#. Header of a Table column with a list of print queues. +#. Print queue description (e.g. model or driver): +#: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:122 src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:462 +#: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:371 +#: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:899 +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:551 +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:86 +msgid "Description" +msgstr "" + +#. Header of a Table column with a list of printer connections. +#: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:131 +msgid "Find and Assign a Driver" +msgstr "" + +#. Label of a PushButton to search a list for a search string +#. and then show the search result: +#. Label of a PushButton to search a list for a search string +#. and then show the search result: +#. Label of a PushButton to search a list for a search string +#. and then show the search result: +#. Label of a PushButton to search a list for a search string +#. and then show the search result: +#: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:147 src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:316 +#: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:407 +#: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:557 +msgid "&Search for" +msgstr "" + +#. Label of a PushButton to find and show more available printer drivers: +#. Label of a PushButton to find and show more available printer drivers: +#: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:168 src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:428 +msgid "&Find More" +msgstr "" + +#. Label of a PushButton to go to the "Add Driver" dialog +#. to install or remove driver packages (and perhaps download it before): +#. Label of a PushButton to go to the "Add Driver" dialog +#. to install or remove driver packages (and perhaps download it before): +#: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:174 src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:434 +msgid "Driver &Packages" +msgstr "" + +#. By default there is no UserInput() +#. if only something was selected in the SelectionBox +#. (without clicking additionally a button) +#. but the notify option forces UserInput() in this case: +#. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when no driver was selected: +#. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when no driver was selected: +#. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when no driver was selected: +#. because the first entry in a SelectionBox is always preselected in the GUI +#. (it does not help to have all items in a SelectionBox with 'false' as third argument). +#. Do not have this dummy entry preselected (i.e. no 'true' as a third argument) +#. because in the BasicModifyDialog the currently used driver is additionally prepended +#. and then the currently used driver must be preselected by default because +#. the currently used driver is then the very first entry in the SelectionBox. +#. because the first entry in a SelectionBox is always preselected in the GUI +#. (it does not help to have all items in a SelectionBox with 'false' as third argument). +#. Do not have this dummy entry preselected (i.e. no 'true' as a third argument) +#. because in the BasicModifyDialog the currently used driver is additionally prepended +#. and then the currently used driver must be preselected by default because +#. the currently used driver is then the very first entry in the SelectionBox. +#: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:187 src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:356 +#: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:588 src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:1082 +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:1954 src/modules/Printer.rb:1980 +msgid "Select a driver." +msgstr "" + +#. If the currently used driver is replaced by another driver, +#. show the same content as in the BasicAddDialog to set the default paper size: +#: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:193 src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:271 +msgid "Default paper size (if printer and driver supports it)" +msgstr "" + +#. Header of a TextEntry to enter the queue name: +#. Header of a TextEntry to enter the queue name: +#: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:220 src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:574 +msgid "Set Arbitrary &Name" +msgstr "" + +#. CheckBox to set a local print queue to be the default queue: +#. CheckBox to set a local print queue to be the default queue: +#: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:229 src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:478 +msgid "&Use as Default" +msgstr "" + +#. to set up HP printers: +#: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:241 +msgid "Alternative setup for HP printers:" +msgstr "" + +#. Label of a PushButton to run HPLIP's printer setup tool 'hp-setup'. +#. Do not change or translate "hp-setup", it is a program name: +#: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:249 +msgid "Run &hp-setup" +msgstr "" + +#. printer setup tool 'hp-setup' runs in English language. +#. Do not change or translate "hp-setup", it is a program name: +#: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:256 +msgid "hp-setup runs in English language" +msgstr "" + +#. nor a driver was selected: +#. Any queue or class can be tested if it is in "ready" state: +#. The URI scheme is the first word up to the ':' character in the URI: +#. Invalidate Printer::current_device_uri so that the Printer::ConnectionItems function +#. does not set a valid Printer::selected_connections_index so that the BasicAddDialog +#. does not preselect a connection so that the first connection in the list is preselected +#. (via Table widget fallback) which is still better than an arbitrary preselected entry: +#: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:337 src/include/printer/overview.rb:590 +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:676 src/include/printer/overview.rb:1150 +msgid "Nothing Selected" +msgstr "" + +#. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when neither a connection +#. nor a driver was selected: +#: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:340 +msgid "Select a connection and then assign a driver." +msgstr "" + +#. exists in the connection_selection table because the Printer::ConnectionItems function +#. sets Printer::selected_connections_index != -1 only if such an item exists in the table +#. so that this item can be preselected: +#. exists in the connection_selection table because the Printer::ConnectionItems function +#. sets Printer::selected_connections_index != -1 only if such an item exists in the table +#. so that this item can be preselected: +#: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:346 src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:496 +#: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:936 +msgid "No Connection Selected" +msgstr "" + +#. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when no connection was selected: +#. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when no connection was selected: +#. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when no connection was selected: +#: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:348 src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:498 +#: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:938 +msgid "Select a connection." +msgstr "" + +#. the widgets to change options for the currently used driver are recreated: +#: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:354 src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:586 +#: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:1080 +msgid "No Driver Selected" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:365 +msgid "No Queue Name" +msgstr "" + +#. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when no queue name was entered: +#: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:367 +msgid "Enter a queue name." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:377 +msgid "Invalid Queue Name" +msgstr "" + +#. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when a wrong queue name was entered: +#: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:379 +msgid "Only letters (a-z and A-Z), numbers (0-9), and the underscore '_' are allowed for the queue name." +msgstr "" + +#. when a queue name is changed to be valid: +#: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:389 +msgid "Confirm Validated Queue Name" +msgstr "" + +#. Body of a Popup::ContinueCancelHeadline +#. when a queue name was automatically changed to be valid +#. where %1 will be replaced by the old invalid queue name +#. and %2 will be replaced by a new valid queue name +#: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:395 +msgid "'%1' is invalid or it exists already. Use '%2' instead?" +msgstr "" + +#. Explanation details of a Popup::ErrorDetails. +#. The 'next dialog' is the overview dialog where the printer configurations are shown +#. which has a 'Refresh List' button to update the shown printer configurations: +#. Explanation details of a Popup::ErrorDetails. +#. The 'next dialog' is the overview dialog where the printer configurations are shown +#. which has a 'Refresh List' button to update the shown printer configurations: +#: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:430 src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:821 +msgid "If the next dialog does not show the new printer configuration as expected, wait some time and use the 'Refresh List' button." +msgstr "" + +#. Only a simple message because before the RunHpsetup function was called +#. and this function would have shown more specific messages. +#. Do not change or translate "hp-setup", it is a program name: +#: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:802 +msgid "Failed to run hp-setup." +msgstr "" + +#. Title of the Basic Modify Dialog where %1 will be replaced by the queue name. +#. The actual queue name is a system value which cannot be translated: +#: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:100 +msgid "Modify %1" +msgstr "" + +#. Label of a PushButton to go to a dialog +#. to set all available options for the printer driver +#. which is currently used for a print queue: +#: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:147 +msgid "All &Options for the Current Driver" +msgstr "" + +#. DefaultPageSize is required according to the Adobe PPD specification. +#. Nevertheless we don't rely on correct PPDs (e.g. whatever "third-party" PPDs) +#. and test if it really exists in the actually used PPD: +#: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:224 +msgid "Default Paper Size of the Current Driver" +msgstr "" + +#. Usually the id in the connection items is the matching index number in the connections list. +#. Here the id of the current connection is set to -1 because the uri of the current connection +#. is derived from the queues list and this uri may be not present in the connections list +#. for example when the queue has a special non-autodetectable DeviceURI (e.g. for iPrint) +#. or when the queue is for an USB printer which is currently not connected (e.g. a laptop user). +#. Therefore -1 (which means "invalid index number in the connections list") is used to be safe +#. and additionally -1 is used to distinguish when the current connection is kept +#. or when the connection was modified (then the id would be > 0 and valid in the connections list). +#. The current_connection item is preselected because it is the first entry in the +#. table of connections via prepend(): +#: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:298 +msgid "Current Connection" +msgstr "" + +#. Do not change or translate "raw", it is a technical term when no driver is used. +#. Do not change or translate "System V style interface script", it is a technical term. +#: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:315 +msgid "No driver is used (it is a 'raw' queue or a 'System V style interface script' is used)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:323 +msgid "Current Driver" +msgstr "" + +#. Header of a Table column with a list of printer connections. +#: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:384 +msgid "Adjust Options of the Current Driver or Assign a Different Driver" +msgstr "" + +#. Label of a TextEntry for a short printer driver description (only one line): +#: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:461 +msgid "Description &Text" +msgstr "" + +#. Label of a TextEntry for printer location string: +#: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:469 +msgid "&Location" +msgstr "" + +#. CheckBox to set a local print queue to accept print jobs: +#: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:485 +msgid "Accept Print &Jobs" +msgstr "" + +#. CheckBox to enable printing for a local print queue: +#: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:492 +msgid "&Enable Printing" +msgstr "" + +#. where %1 will be replaced by the queue name. +#. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system +#. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). +#: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:759 +msgid "Failed to modify %1." +msgstr "" + +#. Since CUPS 1.4 the new DirtyCleanInterval directive controls the delay when cupsd updates config files: +#: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:816 +msgid "Modifying Printer Setup" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:819 +msgid "Modified Printer Configuration not yet Stored in the System" +msgstr "" + +#. Explanation details of a Popup::WarningDetails. +#. The 'next dialog' is the overview dialog where the printer configurations are shown +#. which has a 'Refresh List' button to update the shown printer configurations: +#: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:823 +msgid "If the next dialog does not show the expected modifications, wait some time and use the 'Refresh List' button." +msgstr "" + +#. Exit this dialog in any case: +#. Return at least a list with only a fallback string so that the user is informed: +#. Have the PageSize option topmost: +#: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:853 src/modules/Printer.rb:2205 +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:2335 +msgid "No driver options available" +msgstr "" + +#. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when "Driver Options" was selected: +#: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:855 +msgid "Possible reasons: Nothing selected or it is a remote configuration." +msgstr "" + +#. Header for a ComboBox to keep the printer model or select another manufacturer: +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:416 +msgid "Keep the printer model or select another &manufacturer" +msgstr "" + +#. Header for a ComboBox to optionally +#. keep the printer model or select a printer manufacturer. +#. Do not change or translate "raw", it is a technical term +#. when no driver is used for a print queue. +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:432 +msgid "Keep the model or select a &manufacturer if no 'raw queue' should be set up" +msgstr "" + +#. Header for a ComboBox to select the printer manufacturer: +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:452 +msgid "Select the printer &manufacturer" +msgstr "" + +#. Header for a ComboBox to optionally select the printer manufacturer. +#. Do not change or translate "raw", it is a technical term +#. when no driver is used for a print queue. +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:467 +msgid "Select a printer &manufacturer if no 'raw queue' should be set up." +msgstr "" + +#. Header of a Table column with a list of printer connections. +#. TRANSLATORS: Text entry to fill IP or hostname of remote server +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:560 +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1742 +msgid "&IP Address or Host Name" +msgstr "" + +#. No URIpercentDecoding/Encondin(hostname) is done +#. when it contains a '@' because a lpd URI can be of the form +#. lpd://username@ip-address-or-hostname/... +#. and a ipp/http URI can be of the form +#. ipp://username:password@ip-address-or-hostname/... +#. http://username:password@ip-address-or-hostname/... +#. see https://bugzilla.novell.com/show_bug.cgi?id=512549 +#. TRANSLATORS: Text entry to fill IP or hostname of remote server +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:569 +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1734 +msgid "&IP Address or Host Name [percent-encoded]" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:576 +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1755 +msgid "Look up" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Button to search for remote servers +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:580 +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1759 +msgid "Look up for All Hosts" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: InputField for optional Device URI parameters: +#. TRANSLATORS: InputField for optional Device URI parameters: +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:593 +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1774 +msgid "Optional 'option=value' parameter (usually empty) [percent-encoded]" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Button to test remote printer machine +#. TRANSLATORS: Button to test remote printer machine +#. TRANSLATORS: Button to test remote printer machine +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:599 +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1596 +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1784 +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1899 +msgid "&Test Connection" +msgstr "" + +#. in the Connection Wizard but the RPM package hplip is not installed: +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:639 +msgid "" +"To access a HP device via the 'hp' backend,\n" +"the RPM package hplip must be installed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:644 +msgid "The RPM package hplip is not installed." +msgstr "" + +#. Label for an editable ComboBox where +#. a serial device node (e.g. /dev/ttyS0 or /dev/ttyS1) +#. can be selected or entered: +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:993 +msgid "&Serial device" +msgstr "" + +#. Label for an editable ComboBox where +#. the baud rate for a serial device +#. can be selected or entered: +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1007 +msgid "&Baud rate" +msgstr "" + +#. Label for an editable ComboBox where +#. the number of data bits for a serial device +#. can be selected or entered: +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1023 +msgid "&Data bits" +msgstr "" + +#. Label for an editable ComboBox where +#. the parity checking for a serial device +#. can be selected or entered: +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1037 +msgid "&Parity checking" +msgstr "" + +#. Label for an editable ComboBox where +#. the flow control for a serial device +#. can be selected or entered: +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1053 +msgid "&Flow control" +msgstr "" + +#. Label for an editable ComboBox where +#. the number of stop bits for a serial device +#. can be selected or entered: +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1067 +msgid "S&top bits" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1076 +msgid "To access a bluetooth printer, the RPM package bluez-cups must be installed." +msgstr "" + +#. The user can also decide during the actual installation not to install it +#. or the installation may have failed for whatever reason +#. so that we test again whether or not it is now actually installed: +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1092 +msgid "The RPM package bluez-cups is not installed." +msgstr "" + +#. Fallback message what the user may run manually when it fails +#. to generate a valid list of bluetooth device IDs: +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1098 +msgid "" +"It seems there are no bluetooth device IDs.\n" +"Run 'hcitool scan' to get the bluetooth device IDs.\n" +"Enter the ID without colons like '1A2B3C4D5E6F'." +msgstr "" + +#. Busy message: +#. Body of a Popup::ShowFeedback: +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1107 +msgid "Retrieving bluetooth device IDs..." +msgstr "" + +#. The command "hcitool scan" might need very much time or hang up. +#. To kill exactly hcitool there is the workaround via the temporary file because +#. hcitool scan | grep '...' & sleep 10 ; kill -9 $! +#. would kill only grep and +#. ( hcitool scan | grep '...' ) & sleep 10 ; kill -9 $! +#. would kill only the sub shell. +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1119 +msgid "Failed to get a list of bluetooth device IDs." +msgstr "" + +#. Label for an editable ComboBox where +#. a bluetooth device ID +#. can be selected or entered: +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1212 +msgid "&Bluetooth device ID" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1218 +msgid "Currently available bluetooth device IDs" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: List of input field labels, +#. first for network scan button, +#. second for the TCP port number: +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1268 +msgid "Scan for Direct Socket Servers" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1269 +msgid "TCP Port Number" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: List of input field labels, +#. first for network scan button, +#. second for name of printer queue +#. TRANSLATORS: List of input field labels, +#. first for network scan button, +#. second for name of printer queue +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1326 +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1653 +msgid "Scan for LPD Servers" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1327 +msgid "Queue Name (see the printer's manual)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Input field label +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1393 +msgid "URI (see the printer's manual) [percent-encoded]" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1402 +msgid "To access a SMB printer share, the RPM package samba-client must be installed." +msgstr "" + +#. The user can also decide during the actual installation not to install it +#. or the installation may have failed for whatever reason +#. so that we test again whether or not it is now actually installed: +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1418 +msgid "The RPM package samba-client is not installed." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Text entry for remote server name +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1526 +msgid "&Server (NetBIOS Host Name)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Text entry for printer name +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1535 +msgid "&Printer (Share Name)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Text entry for samba domain +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1545 +msgid "&Workgroup (Domain Name)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1552 +msgid "Authentication (if needed)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1555 +msgid "Use fixed username and password" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Text entry for username (authentication) +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1565 +msgid "&User" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Text entry for password (authentication) +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1573 +msgid "Pass&word" +msgstr "" + +#. A CheckBox to support Active Directory (R): +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1585 +msgid "Support for &Active Directory (R)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Label for menu to search for remote servers +#. TRANSLATORS: Text entry for name of remote printer queue +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1654 +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1765 +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1872 +msgid "Queue Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1757 +msgid "Scan for IPP Servers" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1758 +msgid "Scan for IPP Broadcasts" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1792 +msgid "To access an IPX print queue, the RPM package ncpfs must be installed." +msgstr "" + +#. The user can also decide during the actual installation not to install it +#. or the installation may have failed for whatever reason +#. so that we test again whether or not it is now actually installed: +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1808 +msgid "The RPM package ncpfs is not installed." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Text entry for IP or hostname of remote server +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1864 +msgid "IP Address or Host Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1878 +msgid "Authenticate as" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Text entry for username (authentication) +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1883 +msgid "User" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Text entry for password (authentication) +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1889 +msgid "&Password" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Text entry for URI (Uniform Resource Identifier) +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1976 +msgid "URI (Uniform Resource Identifier) [percent-encoded]" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1985 +msgid "To print via 'pipe', the RPM package cups-backends must be installed." +msgstr "" + +#. The user can also decide during the actual installation not to install it +#. or the installation may have failed for whatever reason +#. so that we test again whether or not it is now actually installed: +#. The user can also decide during the actual installation not to install it +#. or the installation may have failed for whatever reason +#. so that we test again whether or not it is now actually installed: +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2002 +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2061 +msgid "The RPM package cups-backends is not installed." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Text entry for program name that will be called via pipe: +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2034 +msgid "Program (/path/to/command?option=value) [percent-encoded]" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2044 +msgid "To use 'beh', the RPM package cups-backends must be installed." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Text entry for device URI (Uniform Resource Identifier) +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2163 +msgid "Device URI (for which 'beh' should be applied) [percent-encoded]" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Check box +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2173 +msgid "Never Disable the Queue" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Text entry +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2181 +msgid "Number of Retries ('0' means infinite retries)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Text entry +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2189 +msgid "Delay in Seconds Between Two Retries" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2197 +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2293 +msgid "Select a specific connection type." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Label for tree widget description +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2215 +msgid "&Connection Type" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Tree widget item +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2220 +msgid "Directly Connected Device" +msgstr "" + +#. Disabled legacy "Parallel Port" so that it is no longer accessible in the dialog: +#. Item(Id(:parallel), _("Parallel Port")), +#. TRANSLATORS: Tree widget item +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2226 +msgid "USB Port" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Tree widget item +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2228 +msgid "HP Devices (HPLIP)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Tree widget item +#. Disabled legacy "Serial Port" so that it is no longer accessible in the dialog: +#. Item(Id(:serial), _("Serial Port")), +#. TRANSLATORS: Tree widget item +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2233 +msgid "Bluetooth" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Tree widget item +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2239 +msgid "Access Network Printer or Printserver Box via" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2242 +msgid "TCP Port (AppSocket/JetDirect)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Tree widget item +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2244 +msgid "Line Printer Daemon (LPD) Protocol" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Tree widget item +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2246 +msgid "Internet Printing Protocol (IPP)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Tree widget item +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2252 +msgid "Print via Print Server Machine" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2255 +msgid "Windows (R) or Samba (SMB/CIFS)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Tree widget item +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2257 +msgid "Traditional UNIX Server (LPR/LPD)" +msgstr "" + +#. `item( `id(`iprint), _("iPrint (Novell OES)") ), +#. TRANSLATORS: Tree widget item +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2260 +msgid "CUPS Server (IPP)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Tree widget item +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2269 +msgid "Special" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2272 +msgid "Specify Arbitrary Device URI" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Tree widget item +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2276 +msgid "Send Print Data to Other Program (pipe)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Tree widget item +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2279 +msgid "Daisy-chain Backend Error Handler (beh)" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Tree widget item +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2290 +msgid "Connection Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. According to the YaST Style Guide (dated Thu, 06 Nov 2008) +#. there is no longer a "abort" functionality which exits the whole module. +#. Instead this button is now named "Cancel" and its functionality is +#. to go back to the Overview dialog (i.e. what the "back" button would do) +#. because it reads "Cancel - Closes the window and returns to the overview." +#. In this case the "overview" is not the actual Overview dialog but the dialog +#. from which this DriverOptionsDialog was called i.e. BasicModifyDialog. +#. Therefore the button with the "abort" functionality is not shown at all +#. and the button with the "back" functionality is named "Cancel". +#. According to the YaST Style Guide (dated Thu, 06 Nov 2008) +#. the "finish" button in a single (step) configuration dialog must now be named "OK". +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2313 +msgid "Connection Wizard" +msgstr "" + +#. see https://bugzilla.novell.com/show_bug.cgi?id=580121 +#. and http://www.cups.org/str.php?L3500 +#. i.e. the scsi backend will be dropped. +#. Therefore in yast2-printer SCSI printer support is also dropped. +#. Because of the dropped scsi backend there must be a user notification: +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2366 +msgid "In CUPS version 1.5 SCSI printer support is dropped." +msgstr "" + +#. Popup::ErrorDetails details (for experts only): +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2368 +msgid "" +"An untested and insecure workaround might be\n" +"to set 'FileDevice Yes' in cupsd.conf\n" +"and use a DeviceURI like 'file:/dev/sg...'" +msgstr "" + +#. while a Device URI to access a network printer via IPP +#. does probably not contain "/printers/" so that this is used here +#. as a best effort attempt to distinguish both cases: +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2443 +msgid "Select a connection" +msgstr "" + +#. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when no connection was selected +#. because there is no connection available to be selected: +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2446 +msgid "" +"If no connection is shown here, it is not possible\n" +"to access the device via this type of connection.\n" +"Was the printer connected and switched on all the time?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2454 +msgid "Select a valid connection" +msgstr "" + +#. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when an invalid connection was selected +#. because the current connection is no longer valid: +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2457 +msgid "" +"When the current connection is no longer valid,\n" +"it does no longer work to access the device via this connection.\n" +"Is the printer still connected and switched on?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2497 +msgid "Serial device and baud rate could not be empty." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2501 +msgid "The 'space' parity checking is only supported with 7 data bits." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2509 +msgid "The 'mark' parity checking is only supported with 7 data bits and 1 stop bit." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2551 +msgid "Bluetooth device ID could not be empty." +msgstr "" + +#. because special URI characters like ':' or '/' in connection_uri +#. must stay as is and not be percent encoded because only the values +#. of the URI parts must be percent encoded but not the whole URI. +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2564 +msgid "URI could not be empty." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2574 +msgid "Servername and printer could not be empty." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2580 +msgid "Both user and password must be specified." +msgstr "" + +#. because special URI characters like '=' or '&' in tcp_uri_options +#. must stay as is and not be percent encoded because tcp_uri_options +#. contains all options like 'option1=value1&option2=value2'. +#. Test whether or not a "client-only" server is accessible. +#. @param [String] server_name string of the "client-only" server name +#. +#. @return false if the "client-only" server is not accessible. +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2644 src/modules/Printer.rb:2348 +msgid "Servername could not be empty." +msgstr "" + +#. because special URI characters like '=' or '&' in lpd_uri_options +#. must stay as is and not be percent encoded because lpd_uri_options +#. contains all options like 'option1=value1&option2=value2'. +#. because special URI characters like '=' or '&' in cups_uri_options +#. must stay as is and not be percent encoded because cups_uri_options +#. contains all options like 'option1=value1&option2=value2'. +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2682 +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2721 +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2748 +msgid "Servername and queue name could not be empty." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2775 +msgid "Device URI, number of retries, and delay could not be empty." +msgstr "" + +#. because special URI characters like '/ ? = &' in pipe +#. must stay as is and not be percent encoded because pipe +#. contains all like 'path/to/command?option1=value1&option2=value2' +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2789 +msgid "Could not be empty." +msgstr "" + +#. Do not change or translate "raw", it is a technical term +#. when no driver is used for a print queue. +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2812 +msgid "Select a manufacturer or 'raw queue'." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2830 +msgid "Look up all hosts in the local network" +msgstr "" + +#. Body of a Popup::ShowFeedback: +#. Body of a Popup::ShowFeedback: +#. Body of a Popup::ShowFeedback: +#. Body of a Popup::ShowFeedback: +#. Body of a Popup::ShowFeedback: +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2832 +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2859 +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2874 +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2889 +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2904 +msgid "" +"Please wait...\n" +"This could take more than a minute." +msgstr "" + +#. where %1 will be replaced by the port number: +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2855 +msgid "Scan for hosts which are accessible via TCP port %1" +msgstr "" + +#. Sleep half a second to let the user notice the Popup::ShowFeedback in any case +#. before it is removed even when the above SCR::Read finished immediately: +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2872 +msgid "Scan for hosts which are accessible via Samba (SMB)" +msgstr "" + +#. Sleep half a second to let the user notice the Popup::ShowFeedback in any case +#. before it is removed even when the above SCR::Read finished immediately: +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2887 +msgid "Scan for hosts which are accessible via port 515 (LPD/LPR)" +msgstr "" + +#. Sleep half a second to let the user notice the Popup::ShowFeedback in any case +#. before it is removed even when the above SCR::Read finished immediately: +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2902 +msgid "Scan for hosts which are accessible via port 631 (CUPS/IPP)" +msgstr "" + +#. hosts = (list<string>)filter (string h, hosts, ``{ +#. list queues = (list<string>)SCR::Read (.cups.remote, h); +#. return size (queues) > 0; +#. }); +#. Sleep half a second to let the user notice the Popup::ShowFeedback in any case +#. before it is removed even when the above SCR::Read finished immediately: +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2929 +msgid "" +"Scanning in the network did not find any host.\n" +"(Network issue or firewall active?)" +msgstr "" + +#. where %1 will be replaced by the port number +#. and %2 will be replaced by the host name: +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2969 +msgid "Access test failed for port '%1' on host '%2'." +msgstr "" + +#. where %1 will be replaced by the queue name +#. and %2 will be replaced by the host name: +#. where %1 will be replaced by the queue name +#. and %2 will be replaced by the host name: +#. where %1 will be replaced by the queue name +#. and %2 will be replaced by the host name: +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2996 +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:3022 +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:3121 +msgid "Access test failed for queue '%1' on host '%2'." +msgstr "" + +#. because there is authentication via Active Directory (R) required: +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:3040 +msgid "" +"This is only a generic test which may untruly report failures\n" +"if authentication via Active Directory (R) is required.\n" +"In this case a user who is allowed to print via Active Directory (R)\n" +"should log in and test by himself if he can print from Gnome or KDE." +msgstr "" + +#. where %1 will be replaced by the SMB share name +#. and %2 will be replaced by the host name: +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:3071 +msgid "The generic test reports failures for share '%1' on host '%2'." +msgstr "" + +#. where %1 will be replaced by the SMB share name +#. and %2 will be replaced by the host name: +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:3091 +msgid "Access test failed for share '%1' on host '%2'." +msgstr "" + +#. Message of a Popup::ErrorDetails +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:3133 +msgid "Test OK" +msgstr "" + +#. Without a link name /usr/lib[64]/cups/backend/smb (which is provided by samba-client) +#. the rest makes no sense (in particular the ln commands would create nonsense links in $PWD): +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:3273 +msgid "To support Active Directory (R), the RPM package samba-krb-printing must be installed." +msgstr "" + +#. Show a user notification before it gets disabled: +#: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:3313 +msgid "Active Directory (R) support will be disabled for all SMB print queues." +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. Copyright (c) 2006 Novell, Inc. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under +#. the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as published by the +#. Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +#. ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS +#. FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with +#. this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, you may find +#. current contact information at www.novell.com. +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. File: include/printer/dialogs.ycp +#. Package: Configuration of printer +#. Summary: DialogTree definition +#. Authors: Michal Zugec +#. +#. $Id: dialogs.ycp 27914 2006-02-13 14:32:08Z locilka $ +#: src/include/printer/dialogs.rb:107 src/include/printer/dialogs.rb:108 +#: src/include/printer/dialogs.rb:109 src/include/printer/dialogs.rb:176 +msgid "Printer Configurations" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/dialogs.rb:114 src/include/printer/dialogs.rb:115 +#: src/include/printer/dialogs.rb:116 src/include/printer/dialogs.rb:183 +msgid "Print via Network" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/dialogs.rb:121 src/include/printer/dialogs.rb:122 +#: src/include/printer/dialogs.rb:123 +msgid "Share Printers" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/dialogs.rb:128 src/include/printer/dialogs.rb:129 +#: src/include/printer/dialogs.rb:130 +msgid "Policies" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/dialogs.rb:135 src/include/printer/dialogs.rb:136 +#: src/include/printer/dialogs.rb:137 +msgid "Automatic Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/dialogs.rb:175 src/include/printer/dialogs.rb:177 +msgid "AutoYaST Printer Configurations" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/dialogs.rb:182 src/include/printer/dialogs.rb:184 +msgid "AutoYaST Print via Network Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/dialogs.rb:192 +msgid "Detected Printers" +msgstr "" + +#. All the dialogs in "ids_order" are single (step) configuration dialogs +#. and according to the YaST Style Guide (dated Thu, 06 Nov 2008) +#. there is no longer a "abort" functionality which exits the whole module. +#. Instead this button is now named "Cancel" and its functionality is +#. to go back to the Overview dialog (i.e. what the "back" button would do) +#. because it reads "Cancel - Closes the window and returns to the overview." +#. Therefore the button with the "abort" functionality is not shown at all +#. and the button with the "back" functionality is named "Cancel". +#: src/include/printer/dialogs.rb:222 +msgid "AutoYaST Settings for Printing with CUPS via Network" +msgstr "" + +#. AddDriver dialog +#. @return dialog result +#: src/include/printer/driveradd.rb:47 +msgid "Driver Packages" +msgstr "" + +#. Header for a dialog section where the user can +#. add or remove printer driver packages: +#: src/include/printer/driveradd.rb:98 +msgid "Install or Remove Printer Driver Packages" +msgstr "" + +#. CheckBox to select or un-select the printer driver package OpenPrintingPPDs-ghostscript. +#. There is no need to have the package name "OpenPrintingPPDs-ghostscript" in this text +#. because it is shown in a separated column to the left of this text. +#: src/include/printer/driveradd.rb:111 +msgid "Printer Description Files for Ghostscript Drivers" +msgstr "" + +#. CheckBox to select or un-select the printer driver package OpenPrintingPPDs-hpijs. +#. There is no need to have the package name "OpenPrintingPPDs-hpijs" in this text +#. because it is shown in a separated column to the left of this text. +#: src/include/printer/driveradd.rb:122 +msgid "Printer Description Files for some PCL Printers" +msgstr "" + +#. CheckBox to select or un-select the printer driver package OpenPrintingPPDs-postscript. +#. There is no need to have the package name "OpenPrintingPPDs-postscript" in this text +#. because it is shown in a separated column to the left of this text. +#: src/include/printer/driveradd.rb:133 +msgid "Printer Description Files for PostScript Printers" +msgstr "" + +#. CheckBox to select or un-select the printer driver package gutenprint. +#. There is no need to have the package name "gutenprint" in this text +#. because it is shown in a separated column to the left of this text. +#. Do not change or translate "Gutenprint", it is a open source project name. +#. Do not change or translate "Gimp-Print", it is a open source project name. +#: src/include/printer/driveradd.rb:146 +msgid "Gutenprint/Gimp-Print Driver" +msgstr "" + +#. CheckBox to select or un-select the printer driver packages hplip and hplip-hpijs. +#. There is no need to have the package names "hplip" and "hplip-hpijs" in this text +#. because they are shown in a separated column to the left of this text. +#: src/include/printer/driveradd.rb:157 +msgid "Driver for HP Printers and HP All-in-One Devices" +msgstr "" + +#. CheckBox to select or un-select the printer driver package manufacturer-PPDs. +#. There is no need to have the package name "manufacturer-PPDs" in this text +#. because it is shown in a separated column to the left of this text. +#: src/include/printer/driveradd.rb:168 +msgid "Manufacturer's PostScript Printer Description Files" +msgstr "" + +#. CheckBox to select or un-select the printer driver package splix. +#. There is no need to have the package name "splix" in this text +#. because it is shown in a separated column to the left of this text. +#: src/include/printer/driveradd.rb:179 +msgid "SpliX Driver for SPL Printers without JBIG" +msgstr "" + +#. CheckBox to select or un-select the printer driver package epson-inkjet-printer-escpr. +#. There is no need to have the package name "epson-inkjet-printer-escpr" in this text +#. because it is shown in a separated column to the left of this text. +#: src/include/printer/driveradd.rb:202 +msgid "Epson ESC/P-R Inkjet Printer Driver" +msgstr "" + +#. Header for a dialog section where the user can +#. make a printer description file (PPD file) available +#. so that it can be used to set up a print queue with it: +#: src/include/printer/driveradd.rb:215 +msgid "Make a Printer Description File Available" +msgstr "" + +#. TextEntry to specify the full path of a PPD file: +#: src/include/printer/driveradd.rb:225 +msgid "Printer description &file name with full path where it is located" +msgstr "" + +#. Label of a PushButton to open a file selection box +#. to browse the file system to select a PPD file: +#: src/include/printer/driveradd.rb:235 +msgid "&Browse" +msgstr "" + +#. Header for a AskForExistingFile popup dialog +#. to browse the file system to select a PPD file: +#: src/include/printer/driveradd.rb:274 +msgid "Select a printer description file" +msgstr "" + +#. where %1 will be replaced by the file name: +#: src/include/printer/driveradd.rb:666 +msgid "Cannot access '%1'" +msgstr "" + +#. Simply exit this dialog because it does not make sense to proceed here +#. and there is nothing else to be done after this: +#: src/include/printer/driveradd.rb:685 +msgid "The printer description file is not in compliance with the specification." +msgstr "" + +#. when a PPD file is not in compliance: +#: src/include/printer/driveradd.rb:700 +msgid "Use the printer description file regardless of its errors?" +msgstr "" + +#. Body of a Popup::ContinueCancelHeadline +#. when PPD file is not in compliance: +#: src/include/printer/driveradd.rb:705 +msgid "A non-compliant printer description file can lead to arbitrary failures." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/driveradd.rb:722 +msgid "Failed to make the printer description file available" +msgstr "" + +#. Title of the Driver Options Dialog where %1 will be replaced by the queue name. +#. The actual queue name is a system value which cannot be translated: +#: src/include/printer/driveroptions.rb:55 +msgid "Driver Options for Queue %1" +msgstr "" + +#. where %1 will be replaced by the queue name. +#. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system +#. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). +#: src/include/printer/driveroptions.rb:138 +msgid "Failed to set driver options for queue %1." +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 1/1: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:37 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><big>Initializing printer Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 1/1: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:44 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><big>Finishing printer Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Overview dialog help 1/7: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:51 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><big>Print Queue Overview</big></b><br>\n" +"A printer device is not used directly but via a print queue.<br>\n" +"When various applications submit print jobs simultaneously,\n" +"these jobs are put in a queue and are sent one after the other to the printer\n" +"device.<br>\n" +"It is possible to have several different print queues for the same printer\n" +"device.\n" +"For example a second queue with a monochrome-only driver for a color device\n" +"or a PostScript queue and a queue with a PCL driver for a PostScript+PCL printer.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Overview dialog help 2/7: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:65 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><big>Using Remote Queues:</big></b><br>\n" +"Remote queues exist on other hosts in the network,\n" +"therefore they cannot be changed on this host.<br>\n" +"The remote queues listed here are known on this host.\n" +"Usually they can be used directly by applications\n" +"so there is no need to set up a local queue for a printer\n" +"that is already available via a remote queue.<br>\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Overview dialog help 3/7: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:77 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><big>Configure a printer:</big></b><br>\n" +"Press <b>Add</b> to set up a new queue for a printer device.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Overview dialog help 4/7: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:84 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><big>Change the settings for a queue:</big></b><br>\n" +"Select a local queue and press <b>Edit</b>.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Overview dialog help 5/7: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:91 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><big>Remove a queue:</big></b><br>\n" +"Select a local queue and press <b>Delete</b>.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Overview dialog help 6/7: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:98 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><big>Print a test page:</big></b><br>\n" +"Select the queue and press <b>Print Test Page</b>.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Overview dialog help 7/7: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:105 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><big>Refresh the list of queues:</big></b><br>\n" +"After changes to the network printing settings,\n" +"the available remote queues may have changed.\n" +"Usually it takes some time (up to several minutes)\n" +"until such changes become known to the local host.\n" +"Press <b>Refresh List</b> after some time to get an \n" +"up-to-date list of available remote queues.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. AutoYaST Overview dialog help 1/1: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:118 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><big>AutoYaST Print Queue Overview</big></b><br>\n" +"AutoYaST supports only settings for printing with CUPS via network.<br>\n" +"There is no AutoYaST support to set up local print queues.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. BasicAddDialog help 1/7: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:127 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><big>Set Up a New Queue for a Printer Device</big></b><br>\n" +"A printer device is not used directly but via a print queue.<br>\n" +"When various application programs submit print jobs simultaneously,\n" +"the jobs queue up and are sent one after the other to the printer device.<br>\n" +"It is possible to have several different print queues for the same printer device.\n" +"Usually several print queues are needed when several different printer drivers\n" +"should be used for the same printer device.\n" +"For example a second queue with a monochrome-only driver\n" +"to enforce black-only printout on a color device\n" +"or a PostScript queue and a queue with a PCL driver for a PostScript+PCL printer\n" +"because printing via the PCL driver is usually faster (but with less quality).\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. BasicAddDialog help 2/7: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:143 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"To set up a new queue:<br>\n" +"Select the connection of the matching printer device,<br>\n" +"find and assign a suitable printer driver, and<br>\n" +"set a unique queue name.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. BasicAddDialog help 3/7: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:152 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"The <b>connection</b> determines which way data is sent to the printer device.<br>\n" +"If a wrong connection is selected, no data can be sent to the device\n" +"so that there cannot be any printout.<br>\n" +"If a printer device is accessible via more than one connection type,\n" +"it is shown for each connection type.<br>\n" +"In particular HP devices are often accessible both via the 'usb:/...'\n" +"and the 'hp:/...' connection.\n" +"The latter is provided by the HP driver package 'hplip'.\n" +"For plain printing, both kinds of connections should work, but for anything else\n" +"(e.g. device status via 'hp-toolbox' or scanning with a HP all-in-one device)\n" +"the 'hp:/...' connection must be used.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. BasicAddDialog help 4/7: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:168 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"The <b>driver</b> determines that the right data is produced for the\n" +"specific printer model.<br>\n" +"If a wrong driver is assigned, wrong data is sent to the printer\n" +"which results bad looking printout, chaotic printout, or no printout at all.<br>\n" +"Initially the input field for the driver search string is preset\n" +"with the autodetected model name of the currently selected connection\n" +"and those drivers where the driver description matches to the model name\n" +"are shown by default.<br>\n" +"If driver descriptions match to the autodetected model name\n" +"and if all matching driver descriptions seem to belong to the same model,\n" +"the driver descriptions are sorted so that the most reasonable driver\n" +"should be listed topmost and this one is automatically preselected.\n" +"If no driver is automatically preselected, you must manually\n" +"find and select an appropriate driver.<br>\n" +"On the other hand if a driver was automatically preselected,\n" +"it does not necessarily mean that this driver is\n" +"a reasonable driver for your particular needs.\n" +"Strictly speaking an automatically preselected driver\n" +"may not work at all for your particular printer model.\n" +"The reason is that the automated driver selection\n" +"can only work based upon comparison of strings\n" +"(the autodetected model name and the driver descriptions)\n" +"so that the result can be only a best-guess proposal\n" +"how to set up your particular printer model.<br>\n" +"Therefore check if the currently preselected values make sense\n" +"and feel free to play around and modify the settings\n" +"to what you know what works best for your printer.<br>\n" +"If no driver description matches to the autodetected model name,\n" +"it does not necessarily mean that there is no driver available for the model.\n" +"Often only the model name in the driver descriptions\n" +"is different from the autodetected model name.\n" +"Therefore you can enter whatever you like as driver search string\n" +"and search through all available driver descriptions.<br>\n" +"Usually the default driver option settings should be reasonable\n" +"so that the driver works for your particular printer model.\n" +"Some driver option settings must match to your particular printer.\n" +"In particular the default paper size setting of the driver\n" +"must match to the paper which is actually loaded in your printer.\n" +"You can either explicitly select A4 or Letter as default paper size\n" +"or select nothing to use the built-in default paper size of the driver\n" +"which is also the fallback if the driver neither supports A4 nor Letter\n" +"(for example a driver for a small-format photo printer).\n" +"If you like to adjust other driver options except A4 or Letter,\n" +"you must first set up the queue and then in a second step\n" +"you can adjust all driver options in the 'Edit/Modify' dialog.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. BasicAddDialog help 5/7: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:218 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Application programs do not show the actual printer device\n" +"but its associated <b>queue name</b>.<br>\n" +"Only letters (a-z and A-Z), numbers (0-9), and the underscore '_'\n" +"are allowed for the queue name and it must start with a letter.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. BasicAddDialog help 6/7: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:227 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"One of the print queues may be set to be <b>used by default</b>.<br>\n" +"Application programs should use such a system default print queue\n" +"if no other print queue was specified by the user.\n" +"But there is no such thing as the 'one and only' default queue.\n" +"Beside a system default queue any user can maintain his own\n" +"default queue setting and furthermore any application program\n" +"may implement its own particular way of default queue setting\n" +"(e.g. the application may remember the previously used queue).<br>\n" +"For details see the openSUSE support database\n" +"article 'Print Settings with CUPS' at<br>\n" +"http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:Print_Settings_with_CUPS\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. BasicAddDialog help 7/7: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:243 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"An alternative way to set up HP devices is to <b>run hp-setup</b>.<br>\n" +"HP's own tool 'hp-setup' provides setup support in particular\n" +"for HP printers and HP all-in-one devices which require\n" +"a proprietary driver plugin to be downloaded from HP and\n" +"installed in the right way on a particular end-user's system.\n" +"Furthermore 'hp-setup' can provide better setup support\n" +"for HP network printers and HP all-in-one network devices\n" +"because HP's own tool can implement special handling\n" +"for special HP network devices.<br>\n" +"For details see the openSUSE support database\n" +"article 'How to set-up a HP printer' at<br>\n" +"http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:How_to_set-up_a_HP_printer\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. BasicModifyDialog help 1/4: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:261 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><big>Modify a Print Queue</big></b><br>\n" +"To modify a queue, select only what you really want to be changed.<br>\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. BasicModifyDialog help 2/4: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:268 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"The <b>connection</b> determines how data is sent to the printer device.<br>\n" +"If a wrong connection is selected, no data can be sent to the device\n" +"so that there cannot be any printout.<br>\n" +"If a printer device is accessible via more than one connection type,\n" +"it is shown for each connection type.<br>\n" +"In particular HP devices are often accessible both via the 'usb:/...'\n" +"and the 'hp:/...' connection.\n" +"The latter is provided by the HP driver package 'hplip'.\n" +"For plain printing, both kinds of connections should work, but for anything else\n" +"(e.g. device status via 'hp-toolbox' or scanning with a HP all-in-one device)\n" +"the 'hp:/...' connection must be used.<br>\n" +"When you exchange the currently used connection with another one,\n" +"the input field for the driver search string is preset\n" +"with the autodetected model name of the new selected connection.\n" +"The drivers for which the driver description matches the model name\n" +"are shown by default.<br>\n" +"If driver descriptions match the autodetected model name\n" +"and if all matching driver descriptions seem to belong to the same model,\n" +"the driver descriptions are sorted so that the most reasonable driver\n" +"should be listed topmost (but still below the currently used driver).\n" +"On the other hand, it does not necessarily mean that this driver is\n" +"a reasonable driver for your particular needs.\n" +"The topmost listed driver may not work at all for your particular \n" +"printer model. The automated driver selection\n" +"compares strings (the autodetected model name and the driver \n" +"descriptions) so the result can only be a best-guess proposal\n" +"how to set up your particular printer model.<br>\n" +"Therefore check if the currently preselected values make sense.\n" +"Feel free to play around and modify the settings\n" +"to what you know works best for your printer.<br>\n" +"If no driver description matches the autodetected model name, it does \n" +"not necessarily mean that there is no driver available for the model.\n" +"Often the model name in the driver descriptions\n" +"is different from the autodetected model name.\n" +"Therefore you can enter whatever you like as driver search string\n" +"and search through all available driver descriptions.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. BasicModifyDialog help 3/4: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:309 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"The <b>driver</b> determines that the right data is produced for the\n" +"specific printer model.<br>\n" +"If a wrong driver is assigned, wrong data is sent to the printer\n" +"which results bad looking printout, chaotic printout, or no printout at all.<br>\n" +"You can either select another driver and modify its driver option settings later\n" +"or keep the currently used driver and modify its driver option settings now.<br>\n" +"Some driver option settings must match to your particular printer.\n" +"For example the default paper size setting of the driver\n" +"must match to the paper which is actually loaded in your printer.<br>\n" +"For other driver option settings you can choose what you like.\n" +"For example any choice of the available printing resolutions\n" +"should work for the particular driver.\n" +"Nevertheless it may happen that your particular printer fails to print\n" +"with high resolution. For example when you have a laser printer\n" +"which has insufficient built-in memory to process high resolution pages.<br>\n" +"When you exchange the currently used driver by another one,\n" +"you must first apply this change to the print queue\n" +"so that the new driver is used for the queue\n" +"(i.e. you must finish this dialog as a first step)\n" +"and then in a second step you can adjust all driver options\n" +"by using this dialog again.<br>\n" +"Initially the input field for the driver search string is preset\n" +"with the description of the currently used driver when the connection was not changed.\n" +"This results usually only one single driver which matches\n" +"so that you would have to enter a less specific driver search string\n" +"to get also other drivers or you use the 'Find More' button.\n" +"If no driver matches, it does not mean that there is no driver available.\n" +"Therefore you can enter whatever you like as driver search string\n" +"and search through all available driver descriptions.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. BasicModifyDialog help 4/4: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:343 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"In contrast to connection and driver where you must select the right one,\n" +"you are free to enter arbitrary strings for <b>description</b> and <b>location</b>.\n" +"Application programs often show description and location in the print dialog.\n" +"To make sure that those strings look correct in any language\n" +"which a particular user of a particular application program may use,\n" +"it is safe when you use only plain ASCII text without\n" +"special characters e.g. only ASCII letters (a-z and A-Z),\n" +"ASCII numbers (0-9), and the ASCII space character (20 hex).\n" +"Usually the description describes the model and optionally the driver\n" +"(e.g. 'ACME FunPrinter 1000 using generic PCL driver')\n" +"and the location describes where the printer is located\n" +"(e.g. 'Room 123' or 'Front Desk').\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. DriverOptionsDialog help 1/3: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:361 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><big>Set Driver Options</big></b><br>\n" +"Usually it is best to leave the driver defaults because\n" +"the defaults should be reasonable for most cases.<br>\n" +"Additionally, the print dialogs in most applications\n" +"show the driver options too so that each user can specify\n" +"driver options for each individual printout.<br>\n" +"The only setting which should be checked in any case is the paper size,\n" +"which must be set to what is actually used by default in the printer.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. DriverOptionsDialog help 2/3: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:374 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Non-default settings may not work in all cases or have unexpected\n" +"consequences.<br> \n" +"For example, a high resolution setting may not work for a laser printer\n" +"when its default built-in memory is insufficient to process high resolution\n" +"pages.<br> \n" +"Or a high quality setting may print intolerably slow on an inkjet printer.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. DriverOptionsDialog help 3/3: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:385 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"In certain cases printer-specific driver settings\n" +"must be adjusted to get the full functionality of a printer.<br>\n" +"In particular, when the printer has optional units installed like\n" +"a duplex unit or optional paper feeders, the respective driver settings\n" +"should be checked and adjusted.<br>\n" +"For example, a duplex unit option must be set to 'installed' or 'true'\n" +"otherwise the driver may ignore duplex printing option settings.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. AddDriverDialog help 1/2: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:398 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><big>Add or Remove Printer Driver Packages</big></b><br>\n" +"If a printer driver package is not marked, it is not installed.\n" +"Select the package if you want to install it.<br>\n" +"If a printer driver package is marked, it is installed.\n" +"Deselect the package if you want to remove it.\n" +"In the latter case, make sure that there is no printer configuration \n" +"which needs the driver.<br>\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. AddDriverDialog help 2/2: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:410 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><big>Add a Printer Description File</big></b><br>\n" +"To set up a printer configuration, a printer description file\n" +"(PPD file) is required.<br>\n" +"If a PPD file is not located in the /usr/share/cups/model/ directory,\n" +"it is not available to set up a printer configuration with it.\n" +"Therefore you can specify the full path of a PPD file,\n" +"which is located elsewhere on your system, to get it installed\n" +"in the /usr/share/cups/model/ directory.<br>\n" +"Note that a printer description file is not a driver.<br>\n" +"For non-PostScript printers the PPD file alone is\n" +"not sufficient to set up a working printer configuration.\n" +"In particular, it does not work for non-PostScript printers\n" +"to download a PPD file from the Internet and then set up\n" +"the printer with such a PPD file.\n" +"The plain printer setup would work but actual printing\n" +"would not work because the driver would be missing.\n" +"For non-PostScript printers, you need a printer driver\n" +"and a PPD file which matches exactly the particular driver.\n" +"Matching PPD files are automatically installed at the right place\n" +"when you install the above mentioned printer driver packages.<br>\n" +"Only for PostScript printers, a PPD file alone is usually\n" +"sufficient to set up a working PostScript printer configuration.\n" +"In particular, it is sufficient when the PPD file does not\n" +"contain a 'cupsFilter' entry because such an entry would\n" +"reference a printer driver.<br>\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. ConnectionWizardDialog help 1/7: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:441 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><big>Specify the Connection</big></b><br>\n" +"The <b>connection</b> determines how data is sent to the printer device.<br>\n" +"If a wrong connection is used, no data can be sent to the device\n" +"so that there cannot be any printout.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. ConnectionWizardDialog help 2/7: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:450 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><big>Printer Device URI</big></b><br>\n" +"A connection is specified as so called <b>device URI</b>.<br>\n" +"Its first word (the so called URI scheme) specifies the kind of data-transfer,\n" +"for example 'usb', 'socket', 'lpd', or 'ipp'.<br>\n" +"After the scheme there are more or less additional components\n" +"which specify the details for this kind of data-transfer.<br>\n" +"Space characters are not allowed in an URI.\n" +"Therefore a space character in a value of an URI component\n" +"is encoded as '%20' (20 is the hexadecimal value of the space character).<br>\n" +"The components of an URI are separated by special reserved characters like\n" +"colon ':', slash '/', question mark '?', ampersand '&', or equals sign '='.<br>\n" +"Finally there could be optional parameters (separated by a question mark '?')\n" +"of the form 'option1=value1&option2=value2&option3=value3' so that\n" +"a full device URI could be for example:<br>\n" +"ipp://server.domain:631/printers/queuename?waitjob=false&waitprinter=false<br>\n" +"Some examples:<br>\n" +"A USB printer model 'Fun Printer 1000+' made by 'ACME'\n" +"with serial number 'A1B2C3' may have a device URI like:<br>\n" +"usb://ACME/Fun%20Printer%201000%2B?serial=A1B2C3<br>\n" +"A network printer with IP 192.168.100.1 which is accessible\n" +"via port 9100 may have a device URI like:<br>\n" +"socket://192.168.100.1:9100<br>\n" +"A network printer with IP 192.168.100.2 which is accessible\n" +"via LPD protocol with a remote LPD queue name 'LPT1'\n" +"may have a device URI like:<br>\n" +"lpd://192.168.100.2/LPT1\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. ConnectionWizardDialog help 3/7: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:481 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><big>Percent Encoding</big></b><br>\n" +"The issue is complicated.\n" +"It is recommended to avoid reserved characters and spaces\n" +"for component values in URIs if the values are under your control\n" +"(e.g. you cannot avoid it when you must specify such characters\n" +"in values for an URI to access a remote print queue\n" +"but the remote print queue is not under your control).\n" +"Whenever possible use only so called 'unreserved characters'.\n" +"Unreserved characters are uppercase and lowercase letters,\n" +"decimal digits, hyphen, period, underscore, and tilde.\n" +"Even hyphen, period, tilde, and case sensitivity\n" +"could cause special issues in special cases\n" +"(e.g. only letters, digits, and underscore are known to work\n" +"for a CUPS print queue name and case is not significant there).\n" +"Therefore it is best to use only lowercase letters, digits,\n" +"and underscore for all values in all URIs if possible.<br>\n" +"Reserved characters and space characters in the value of a component\n" +"must be percent-encoded (also known as URL encoding).<br>\n" +"When an input field in the dialog is intended to enter\n" +"only a single value for a single component of the URI\n" +"(e.g. separated input fields for username and password),\n" +"you must enter spaces and reserved characters literally\n" +"(i.e. non-percent-encoded).\n" +"For such input fields all spaces and reserved characters\n" +"will be automatically percent-encoded.\n" +"For example if a password is actually 'Foo%20Bar' (non-percent-encoded),\n" +"it must be entered literally in the password input field in the dialog.\n" +"The automated percent-encoding results 'Foo%2520Bar' which is how\n" +"the value of the password component is actually stored in the URI.<br>\n" +"In contrast when an input field in the dialog is intended to enter\n" +"more that a single value for a single component of the URI\n" +"(e.g. a single input field for all optional parameters\n" +"like 'option1=value1&option2=value2&option3=value3'\n" +"or a single input field to enter the whole URI),\n" +"you must enter spaces and reserved characters percent-encoded\n" +"because an automated percent-encoding is no longer possible.\n" +"Assume in an optional parameter 'option=value'\n" +"the value would be 'this&that' so that the whole\n" +"optional parameter would be 'option=this&that' (literally).\n" +"But a literal '&' character denotes\n" +"the separation of different optional parameters\n" +"so that 'option=this&that' in an URI means\n" +"a first optional parameter 'option=this' and\n" +"a second optional parameter which is only 'that'.\n" +"Therefore a single optional parameter 'option=this&that'\n" +"must be entered percent-encoded as 'option=this%26that'<br>\n" +"Input fields which require percent-encoded input\n" +"are denoted by a '[percent-encoded]' hint.<br>\n" +"Listing of characters and their percent encoding:<br>\n" +"space ' ' is percent encoded as %20<br>\n" +"exclamation mark ! is percent encoded as %21<br>\n" +"number sign # is percent encoded as %23<br>\n" +"Dollar sign $ is percent encoded as %24<br>\n" +"percentage % is percent encoded as %25<br>\n" +"ampersand & is percent encoded as %26<br>\n" +"apostrophe / single quotation mark ' is percent encoded as %27<br>\n" +"left parenthesis ( is percent encoded as %28<br>\n" +"right parenthesis ) is percent encoded as %29<br>\n" +"asterisk * is percent encoded as %2A<br>\n" +"plus sign + is percent encoded as %2B<br>\n" +"comma , is percent encoded as %2C<br>\n" +"slash / is percent encoded as %2F<br>\n" +"colon : is percent encoded as %3A<br>\n" +"semicolon ; is percent encoded as %3B<br>\n" +"equals sign = is percent encoded as %3D<br>\n" +"question mark ? is percent encoded as %3F<br>\n" +"at sign @ is percent encoded as %40<br>\n" +"left bracket [ is percent encoded as %5B<br>\n" +"right bracket ] is percent encoded as %5D<br>\n" +"For details see 'Uniform Resource Identifier (URI): Generic Syntax' at<br>\n" +"http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc3986\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. ConnectionWizardDialog help 4/7: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:557 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><big>Device URIs for Directly Connected Devices</big></b><br>\n" +"Devices which are connected via USB\n" +"are autodetected and the appropriate device URI is autogenerated.\n" +"For example:<br>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. ConnectionWizardDialog help 5/7: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:588 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><big>Device URIs to Access a Network Printer or a Printserver Box</big></b><br>\n" +"A printserver box is a small device with a network connection\n" +"and a USB or parallel port connection to connect the actual printer.\n" +"A network printer has such a device built-in.\n" +"Access happens via three different network protocols.\n" +"See the manual of your network printer or printserver box\n" +"to find out what your particular device supports:<br>\n" +"<b>TCP Port (AppSocket/JetDirect)</b><br>\n" +"The IP address and a port number is needed to access it.\n" +"Often the port number 9100 is the right one.\n" +"It is the simplest, fastest, and generally the most reliable protocol.\n" +"The matching device URI is:<br>\n" +"socket://ip-address:port-number<br>.\n" +"<b>Line Printer Daemon (LPD) Protocol</b><br>\n" +"A LPD runs on the device and provides one or more LPD queues.\n" +"The IP address and a LPD queue name is needed to access it.\n" +"Almost all network printers and printserver boxes support it.\n" +"Often an arbitrary queue name or 'LPT1' works.\n" +"But using a correct LPD queue which does not change\n" +"the data or add additional formfeeds or banner pages\n" +"could be essential for reliable printing.\n" +"The matching device URI is:<br>\n" +"lpd://ip-address/queue<br>.\n" +"<b>Internet Printing Protocol (IPP)</b><br>\n" +"IPP is the native protocol for CUPS running on a real computer,\n" +"but if IPP is implemented in a small printserver box,\n" +"it is often not implemented properly. Only use IPP if the vendor\n" +"actually documents official support for it. \n" +"The matching device URI is:<br>\n" +"ipp://ip-address:port-number/resource<br>.\n" +"What 'port-number' and 'resource' exactly is depends\n" +"on the particular network printer or printserver box model.<br>\n" +"For <b>more information</b> have a look at<br>\n" +"http://www.cups.org/documentation.php/network.html\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. ConnectionWizardDialog help 6/7: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:627 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><big>Device URIs to Print Via a Print Server Machine</big></b><br>\n" +"In contrast to a printserver box a print server machine\n" +"means a real computer which offers a print service.<br>\n" +"Access happens via various different network protocols.\n" +"Ask your network administrator what which print server machine\n" +"provides in your particular network:<br>\n" +"<b>Windows (R) or Samba (SMB/CIFS)</b><br>\n" +"To access a SMB printer share, the RPM package samba-client must be installed.\n" +"The package provides the CUPS backend 'smb' which is a link to\n" +"the <tt>/usr/bin/smbspool</tt> program which actually sends the data\n" +"to a SMB printer share.<br>\n" +"A server name and a printer share name and optionally a workgroup name\n" +"is needed to access it.\n" +"Furthermore a user name and a password may be required to get access.\n" +"Have in mind that spaces and special characters in those values\n" +"must be percent-encoded (see above).<br>\n" +"By default CUPS runs backends (here smbspool) as user 'lp'.\n" +"When printing in an Active Directory (R) environment (AD)\n" +"the user 'lp' is not allowed to print in this environment\n" +"so that the traditional way to print via smbspool as user 'lp'\n" +"would not work.<br>\n" +"For printing in an AD environment additionally\n" +"the RPM package samba-krb-printing must be installed.\n" +"In this case the CUPS backend 'smb' link\n" +"is changed to <tt>/usr/bin/get_printing_ticket</tt>\n" +"which is a wrapper to run smbspool as the original user\n" +"who submitted a particular print job.\n" +"When the Kerberos protocol is used for authentication\n" +"in an AD environment, a user gets a ticket granting ticket (TGT)\n" +"via the display manager during login at the Gnome or KDE desktop.\n" +"When smbspool is run as the original user who submitted\n" +"a particular print job, it can access the TGT of this user\n" +"and use it to pass the printing data to the SMB printer share\n" +"even in an AD environment with Kerberos authentication.\n" +"In this case neither a fixed user name nor a fixed password\n" +"has to be specified for authentication.\n" +"A precondition is that get_printing_ticket runs on the same host\n" +"where the user who submitted a particular print job is logged in.\n" +"This means that it must be set up on the workstation\n" +"for the particular user who will submit such print jobs\n" +"and the user's workstation must send its printing data\n" +"directly to the SMB printer share in the AD environment.\n" +"In particular it does not work on a separated CUPS server machine\n" +"where users who submit print jobs are not logged in.<br>\n" +"For the traditional way a matching full device URI is:<br>\n" +"smb://username:password@workgroup/server/printer<br>\n" +"For example 'John Doe' with password '@home!' may use something like\n" +"the following device URI to access a 'Fun Printer 1000+' share:<br>\n" +"smb://John%20Doe:%40home%21@MYGROUP/homeserver/Fun%20Printer%201000%2B<br>\n" +"For <b>more information</b> have a look at <tt>man smbspool</tt> and<br>\n" +"http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:Printing_via_SMB_(Samba)_Share_or_Windows_Share<br>\n" +"'Windows' and 'Active Directory' are registered trademarks\n" +"of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.<br>\n" +"<b>Traditional UNIX Server (LPR)</b><br>\n" +"A Line Printer Daemon (LPD) runs on a traditional UNIX server\n" +"and provides one or more LPD queues.\n" +"The IP address and a LPD queue name is needed to access it.\n" +"The matching device URI is:<br>\n" +"lpd://ip-address/queue<br>\n" +"<b>CUPS Server</b><br>\n" +"Usually you should not set up a local print queue to access\n" +"a remote queue on a CUPS server. Instead do the setup\n" +"in the <b>Print Via Network</b> dialog.\n" +"Only if you really know that you must set up a local print queue\n" +"to access a remote queue on a CUPS server proceed here.<br>\n" +"IPP is the native protocol for CUPS which runs on a server.\n" +"The official IANA port for IPP is 631.\n" +"The matching device URI is:<br>\n" +"ipp://ip-address:631/printers/queue<br>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. ConnectionWizardDialog help 7/7: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:714 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><big>Special Device URIs</big></b><br>\n" +"<b>Specify an Arbitrary Device URI</b>\n" +"if you know the exact right device URI for your particular case\n" +"or to modify an existing device URI in a special way.<br>\n" +"<b>Send Print Data to Other Program (pipe)</b><br>\n" +"To do this, the RPM package cups-backends must be installed.\n" +"The package provides the CUPS backend 'pipe' which runs\n" +"the program that you specified here.\n" +"The matching device URI is:<br>\n" +"pipe:/path/to/targetcommand<br>\n" +"<b>Daisy-chain Backend Error Handler (beh)</b><br>\n" +"To do this, the RPM package cups-backends must be installed.\n" +"The package provides the CUPS backend 'beh'.<br>\n" +"The backend 'beh' is a wrapper for the usual backend,\n" +"which is then called by beh.\n" +"This way beh can, depending on its configuration,\n" +"repeat the call of the backend or simply hide the error status\n" +"of the backend from being seen by the CUPS daemon.\n" +"The matching device URI is:<br>\n" +"beh:/nodisable/attempts/delay/originalDeviceURI<br>\n" +"If nodisable is '1' beh always exits successfully\n" +"so that the queue gets never disabled but on the other hand\n" +"print jobs are lost if there is an error.<br>\n" +"Attempts is the number of attempts to recall the backend\n" +"in case of an error. '0' means infinite retries.<br>\n" +"Delay is the number of seconds between two attempts\n" +"to call the backend.<br>\n" +"The last parameter is the original URI, which the queue had before.<br>\n" +"Example:<br>\n" +"beh:/1/3/5/socket://ip-address:port-number<br>\n" +"The beh backend tries to access a network printer 3 times with 5 second delay\n" +"between the attempts. If access still fails, the queue is not disabled\n" +"and the print job is lost.<br>\n" +"For <b>more information</b> have a look at <tt>/usr/lib[64]/cups/backend/beh</tt> and<br>\n" +"http://www.linuxfoundation.org/en/OpenPrinting/Database/BackendErrorHandler\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. PrintingViaNetworkDialog help 1/4: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:755 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><big>Printing Via Network</big></b><br>\n" +"Usually CUPS (Common Unix Printing System) is used to print via network.<br>\n" +"By default CUPS uses its so called 'Browsing' mode\n" +"to make printers available via network.<br>\n" +"In this case remote CUPS servers must publish their printers via network\n" +"and accordingly on your host the CUPS daemon process (cupsd) must run\n" +"which is listening for incoming information about published printers.<br>\n" +"CUPS Browsing information is received via UDP port 631.<br>\n" +"Regarding firewall:<br>\n" +"Check if a firewall is active for a network zone\n" +"in which printers are published via network.\n" +"By default the SuSEfirewall allows any incoming information\n" +"via a network interface which belongs to the 'internal zone'\n" +"because this zone is trusted by default.<br>\n" +"It does not make sense to do printing in a trusted internal network\n" +"with a network interface which belongs to the untrusted 'external zone'\n" +"(the latter is the default setting for network interfaces to be safe).\n" +"In particular do not disable firewall protection for CUPS\n" +"(i.e. for IPP which uses TCP port 631 and UDP port 631)\n" +"for the untrusted 'external zone'.<br>\n" +"To use remote printers in a trusted internal network\n" +"and be protected by the firewall against unwanted access\n" +"from any external network (in particular from the Internet),\n" +"assign the network interface which belongs to the internal network\n" +"to the internal zone of the firewall.\n" +"Use the YaST Firewall setup module to do this fundamental setup\n" +"to gain security plus usefulness in your network\n" +"and using remote printers in a trusted internal network\n" +"will work without any further firewall setup.<br>\n" +"For details see the openSUSE support database\n" +"article 'CUPS and SANE Firewall settings' at<br>\n" +"http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:CUPS_and_SANE_Firewall_settings\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. PrintingViaNetworkDialog help 2/4: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:792 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"If you can access remote CUPS servers for printing\n" +"but those servers do not publish their printer information via network\n" +"or when you cannot accept incoming information about published printers\n" +"(e.g. because you must have firewall protection for the network zone\n" +"in which printers are published), you can request printer information\n" +"from CUPS servers (provided the CUPS servers allow your access).<br>\n" +"For each CUPS server which is requested, a cups-polld process\n" +"is launched by the CUPS daemon process (cupsd) on your host.\n" +"By default each cups-polld polls a remote CUPS server\n" +"every 30 seconds for printer information.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. PrintingViaNetworkDialog help 3/4: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:807 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"If you print only via network and if you use only one single CUPS server,\n" +"there is no need to use CUPS Browsing and have a CUPS daemon running on your host.\n" +"Instead it is simpler to specify the CUPS server and access it directly.<br>\n" +"A possible drawback is that application programs may be delayed\n" +"for some time (until a timeout happens) when they try\n" +"to access the CUPS server but it is actually not available\n" +"(e.g. while traveling with a laptop). Usually it is a host name\n" +"resolution (DNS) timeout which causes the delay so that it may help\n" +"to have a hardcoded entry for the CUPS server in the /etc/hosts file.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. PrintingViaNetworkDialog help 4/4: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:821 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"You have to set up an appropriate print queue on your host\n" +"if there is no CUPS server in your network,\n" +"or when you must access a network printer directly,\n" +"or when you use another kind of print server\n" +"e.g. when printing via a Windows (R) or Samba server\n" +"or when printing via a traditional Unix server.<br>\n" +"'Windows' is a registered trademark\n" +"of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. SharingDialog help 1/4: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:835 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><big>Sharing Print Queues and Publish Them Via Network</big></b><br>\n" +"Usually CUPS (Common Unix Printing System) should be set up to use\n" +"its so called 'Browsing' mode to make printers available via network.<br>\n" +"In this case CUPS servers publish their local print queues via network\n" +"and accordingly on CUPS client systems the CUPS daemon process (cupsd) must run\n" +"which is listening for incoming information about published printers.<br>\n" +"CUPS Browsing information is received via UDP port 631.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. SharingDialog help 2/4: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:847 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"First of all CUPS client systems must be allowed to access the CUPS server.\n" +"Then specify whether or not printers should be published to the clients.<br>\n" +"In a local network the usual way to set up CUPS Browsing is\n" +"to allow remote access for all hosts in the local network\n" +"and to publish printers to all those hosts.<br>\n" +"It is not required to publish printers in any case.<br>\n" +"If you have only one single CUPS server, there is no need to use CUPS Browsing.\n" +"Instead it is simpler to specify the CUPS server on the client systems\n" +"(via 'Printing Via Network') so that the clients access the server directly.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. SharingDialog help 3/4: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:861 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"There are various ways which can coexist how to specify\n" +"which remote hosts are allowed to access the CUPS server.<br>\n" +"Allow remote access for computers within the local network\n" +"will allow access from all hosts in the local network.\n" +"A remote host is in the local network when it has an IP address\n" +"that belongs to the same network as the CUPS server\n" +"and when the network connection of the host\n" +"uses a non-PPP interface on the CUPS server\n" +"(an interface whose IFF_POINTOPOINT flag is not set).<br>\n" +"Alternatively or additionally an explicite list of network interfaces\n" +"from which remote access is allowed can be specified.<br>\n" +"Alternatively or additionally an explicite list of\n" +"allowed IP addresses and/or networks can be specified.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. SharingDialog help 4/4: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:879 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Regarding firewall:<br>\n" +"A firewall is used to protect running server processes\n" +"(in this case the CUPS server process 'cupsd')\n" +"on your host against unwanted access via network.<br>\n" +"Printing via network happens in a trusted internal network\n" +"(nobody lets arbitrary users from whatever external network\n" +"print on his printer) and usually the users need\n" +"physical printer access to get their paper output.<br>\n" +"By default the SuSEfirewall lets any network traffic pass\n" +"via a network interface which belongs to the 'internal zone'\n" +"because this zone is trusted by default.<br>\n" +"It does not make sense to do printing in a trusted internal network\n" +"with a network interface which belongs to the untrusted 'external zone'\n" +"(the latter is the default setting for network interfaces to be safe).\n" +"Do not disable firewall protection for CUPS\n" +"(i.e. for IPP which uses TCP port 631 and UDP port 631)\n" +"for the untrusted 'external zone'.<br>\n" +"To make printers accessible in a trusted internal network\n" +"and be protected by the firewall against unwanted access\n" +"from any external network (in particular from the Internet),\n" +"assign the network interface which belongs to the internal network\n" +"to the internal zone of the firewall.\n" +"Use the YaST Firewall setup module to do this fundamental setup\n" +"to gain security plus usefulness in your network and\n" +"sharing printers in a trusted internal network\n" +"will work without any further firewall setup.<br>\n" +"For details see the openSUSE support database\n" +"article 'CUPS and SANE Firewall settings' at<br>\n" +"http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:CUPS_and_SANE_Firewall_settings\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Policies help 1/2: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:914 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><big>CUPS Operation Policy</big></b><br>\n" +"Operation policies are the rules used for each operation in CUPS.\n" +"Such operations are for example 'print something', 'cancel a printout',\n" +"'configure a printer', 'modify or remove a printer configuration',\n" +"and 'enable or disable printing'.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Policies help 2/2: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:924 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><big>CUPS Error Policy</big></b><br>\n" +"The error policy defines the default policy that is used when\n" +"CUPS fails to send a print job to the printer device.<br>\n" +"Depending on the particular way how the printer is connected\n" +"(for example 'usb', 'socket', 'lpd', or 'ipp'),\n" +"and depending on the actual kind of failure,\n" +"the CUPS backend which actually sends the data to the printer\n" +"can overwrite the default error policy\n" +"and enforce another error policy (see <tt>man backend</tt>).\n" +"For example it can stop any further printing attempt\n" +"even when the default error policy is to retry the job.\n" +"This could happen when any attempt to establish\n" +"the communication with the printer is useless\n" +"so that it does no make sense to retry the job.\n" +"<br>\n" +"The following error policies exist:<br>\n" +"Stop the printer and keep the job for future printing.<br>\n" +"Re-send the job from the beginning after waiting some time (30 seconds by default).<br>\n" +"Abort and delete the job and proceed with the next job.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Autoconfig help 1/2: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:949 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><big>Automatic Configuration for Local Connected Printers</big></b><br>\n" +"Check the check box to run YaST's automatic configuration\n" +"for printers which are connected to the local host.<br>\n" +"For each autodetected local connected printer,\n" +"YaST tests if there exists already a configuration.\n" +"If there is not yet a configuration,\n" +"YaST tries to find a matching driver for the printer\n" +"and if one is found, the printer is configured.<br>\n" +"The resulting configuration is basically the same\n" +"as if one would have selected an autodetected printer\n" +"in the 'Add New Printer Configuration' dialog\n" +"and accepted whatever preselected values there.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Autoconfig help 2/2: +#: src/include/printer/helps.rb:966 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><big>Automatic Configuration for USB Printers</big></b><br>\n" +"The RPM package 'udev-configure-printer' provides\n" +"automatic configuration when USB printers are plugged in.<br>\n" +"When its check box is initially not checked, it is not installed\n" +"and then you can select it so that it will be installed.<br>\n" +"When its check box is initially checked, it is already installed\n" +"and then you can un-select it so that it will be removed.<br>\n" +"When udev-configure-printer is installed,\n" +"automatic USB printer configuration happens via the entries\n" +"in its udev config file /lib/udev/rules.d/70-printers.rules\n" +"which triggers to run 'udev-configure-printer add'\n" +"when a USB printer is plugged in\n" +"and 'udev-configure-printer remove' when it is unplugged.\n" +"There are no adjustable settings for udev-configure-printer\n" +"except one changes the 70-printers.rules file manually.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. Copyright (c) 2006 Novell, Inc. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under +#. the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as published by the +#. Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +#. ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS +#. FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with +#. this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, you may find +#. current contact information at www.novell.com. +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. File: include/printer/overview.ycp +#. Package: Configuration of printer +#. Summary: Overview dialog definition +#. Authors: Johannes Meixner +#. +#. $Id: overview.ycp 29363 2006-03-24 08:20:43Z mzugec $ +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:46 +msgid "Show" +msgstr "" + +#. CheckBox to select local print queues to be listed: +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:52 +msgid "&Local" +msgstr "" + +#. CheckBox to select remote print queues to be listed: +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:59 +msgid "&Remote" +msgstr "" + +#. Where the queue configuration exists (local or remote): +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:80 +msgid "Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Header of a Table column with a list of print queues. +#. Print queue name: +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:83 +msgid "Name" +msgstr "" + +#. Header of a Table column with a list of print queues. +#. Location of the printer (e.g. second floor, room 2.3): +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:89 +msgid "Location" +msgstr "" + +#. Header of a Table column with a list of print queues. +#. Whether or not is is the default queue: +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:92 +msgid "Default" +msgstr "" + +#. Header of a Table column with a list of print queues. +#. Queue status (accepting/rejecting and enabled/disabled): +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:95 +msgid "Status" +msgstr "" + +#. PushButton label to refresh the list of print queues: +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:107 +msgid "Re&fresh List" +msgstr "" + +#. PushButton label to print a test page: +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:112 +msgid "Print &Test Page" +msgstr "" + +#. Message of a Popup::ErrorDetails +#. when a local cupsd is required but it is not accessible. +#. YaST did already run 'lpstat -h localhost -r' +#. to check whether or not a local cupsd is accessible. +#. The command is shown here to the user (even if it is a bit technical) +#. to have him informed what goes on here and what he can do on his own. +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:128 +msgid "" +"A locally running CUPS daemon is required, but it seems to be not accessible.\n" +"Check with 'lpstat -h localhost -r' whether a local cupsd is accessible.\n" +"A non-accessible cupsd leads to an endless sequence of further failures.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Message of a Popup::ErrorDetails +#. when the local cupsd does not use the official IPP port (631). +#. A rather technical text because this does not happen on normal systems +#. By default the cupsd uses the official IPP port (631). +#. If not, the user must have intentionally and manually changed +#. the port setting for the cupsd in /etc/cups/cupsd.conf +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:140 +msgid "" +"The CUPS daemon seems not to listen on the official IANA IPP port (631).\n" +"Check with 'netstat -nap | grep cupsd' where the cupsd actually listens.\n" +"This happens when there is a 'Listen ...:1234' or 'Port 1234' setting\n" +"(where 1234 means any port number which is not the official port 631)\n" +"in /etc/cups/cupsd.conf (check also if there is 'BrowsePort 1234').\n" +"The YaST printer module does not support a non-official port.\n" +"A non-official port leads to an endless sequence of further failures.\n" +"If you really must use a non-official port, you cannot use\n" +"the YaST printer module to configure your printers.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Busy message: +#. Body of a Popup::ShowFeedback +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:182 +msgid "" +"Running several tests regarding CUPS server accessibility...\n" +"(this might take some time)" +msgstr "" + +#. where %1 will be replaced by the server name: +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:201 +msgid "Do no longer use the inaccessible CUPS server '%1'?" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup::YesNoHeadline body recommendation how to answer the headline question +#. where %1 will be replaced by the server name: +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:207 +msgid "To proceed, you should agree that '%1' will be no longer used." +msgstr "" + +#. The 'ServerName' entry in /etc/cups/client.conf was removed +#. so that it is now no longer a real client-only config and +#. therefore the Printerlib::client_* values must be determined anew: +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:223 src/include/printer/overview.rb:234 +msgid "A non-accessible server leads to an endless sequence of delays and failures." +msgstr "" + +#. where %1 will be replaced by the CUPS server name. +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:253 +msgid "CUPS Server %1" +msgstr "" + +#. Busy message: +#. Body of a Popup::ShowFeedback: +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:277 +msgid "Testing if CUPS server is accessible..." +msgstr "" + +#. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when no queue was selected from the list: +#. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when no queue was selected from the list: +#. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when no queue was selected from the list: +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:592 src/include/printer/overview.rb:678 +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:1152 +msgid "Select an entry." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:605 +msgid "Cannot Delete" +msgstr "" + +#. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when a remote queue was selected to be deleted: +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:607 +msgid "This is a remote configuration. Only local configurations can be deleted." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:614 +msgid "Confirm Deletion" +msgstr "" + +#. Body of a confirmation popup before a queue will be deleted: +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:616 +msgid "The selected configuration would be deleted immediately and cannot be restored." +msgstr "" + +#. 'Yes' button label of a confirmation popup before a queue will be deleted: +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:620 +msgid "Delete configuration %1" +msgstr "" + +#. 'No' button label of a confirmation popup before a queue will be deleted: +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:622 +msgid "Do not delete it" +msgstr "" + +#. because a class cannot be re-created with the YaST printer module because +#. the YaST printer module has no support to add or edit classes +#. because classes are only useful in bigger printing environments +#. which is out of the scope of the use cases of the YaST printer module. +#. Nevertheless it is possible to delete a class with the YaST printer module +#. so that the user can get rid of a class which may have been created by accident +#. with whatever other setup tool: +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:637 +msgid "Confirm Deletion of a Class" +msgstr "" + +#. Body of a confirmation popup before a class will be deleted: +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:639 +msgid "A deleted class cannot be re-created with this tool." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:685 +msgid "Rejecting Print Jobs" +msgstr "" + +#. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when the queue rejects print jobs: +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:687 +msgid "The testpage cannot be printed because print jobs are rejected." +msgstr "" + +#. Do a refresh of the overview content to be on the safe side. +#. Perhaps the actual current queue state is no longer "rejecting". +#. Re-run the OverviewDialog (with re-created queue status) via the sequencer: +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:697 +msgid "Printout Disabled" +msgstr "" + +#. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when printing is disabled for the queue: +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:699 +msgid "The testpage cannot be printed because printout is disabled." +msgstr "" + +#. Test whether there are already pending jobs in a local queue. +#. If yes, the queue is usually currently actively printing because +#. the test above makes sure that the queue has printing enabled. +#. When this command fails for whatever reason, it is a safe fallback +#. to assume that there are no pending jobs in the queue: +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:728 +msgid "There are pending print jobs which might be deleted before the testpage is printed." +msgstr "" + +#. where %1 will be replaced by the queue name. +#. where %1 will be replaced by the queue name. +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:748 src/include/printer/overview.rb:917 +msgid "Delete Pending Print Jobs For %1" +msgstr "" + +#. 'Yes' button label of a confirmation popup +#. before all pending jobs in a queue will be deleted: +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:756 +msgid "Delete them before printing testpage" +msgstr "" + +#. 'No' button label of a confirmation popup +#. before all pending jobs in a queue will be deleted: +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:759 +msgid "Print testpage after the other jobs" +msgstr "" + +#. where %1 will be replaced by the queue name. +#. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system. +#. where %1 will be replaced by the queue name. +#. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system. +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:772 src/include/printer/overview.rb:941 +msgid "Failed to delete all pending jobs for %1." +msgstr "" + +#. Since CUPS 1.4 there is no longer a readymade PostScript testpage in CUPS, see +#. https://bugzilla.novell.com/show_bug.cgi?id=520617 +#. Therefore a slightly modified CUPS 1.3.10 testprint.ps was added +#. to yast2-printer as /usr/share/YaST2/data/testprint.ps +#. The following modifications +#. --- cups-1.3.10/data/testprint.ps 2009-01-13 18:27:16.000000000 +0100 +#. +++ data/testprint.ps 2009-07-09 15:25:26.000000000 +0200 +#. @@ -564 +564 @@ +#. - (Printer Test Page) CENTER % Show text centered +#. + (CUPS Printer Test Page) CENTER % Show text centered +#. @@ -570 +570 @@ +#. - (Printed with CUPS v1.3.x) show +#. + (Printed with CUPS) show +#. make it obvious that it is not a YaST testpage but a CUPS testpage +#. and it is now independent of the CUPS version. +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:799 +msgid "Test printout" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup::AnyQuestion message: +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:801 +msgid "Print one or two pages e.g. to test duplex printing" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup::AnyQuestion so called 'yes' (default) button label: +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:803 +msgid "Single test page" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup::AnyQuestion so called 'no' button label: +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:805 +msgid "Two test pages" +msgstr "" + +#. where %1 will be replaced by the queue name. +#. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system. +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:835 +msgid "Failed to print testpage for %1." +msgstr "" + +#. When submitting the testpage to the queue failed (also for non-local queues) +#. there might be whatever reason (e.g. a remote queue might have been deleted in the meantime) +#. so that a refresh of the overview content is needed to be on the safe side. +#. Re-run the OverviewDialog (with re-created queue status) via the sequencer: +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:852 +msgid "Wait Until Testpage Printing Finished" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup::AnyQuestion message regarding testpage printout result +#. where %1 will be replaced by the queue name. +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:856 +msgid "Sent testpage to %1. Printing should start soon." +msgstr "" + +#. Popup::AnyQuestion 'Yes' button label +#. regarding a positive testpage printout result: +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:861 +msgid "Testpage printout was successful" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup::AnyQuestion 'No' button label +#. regarding a negative testpage printout result: +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:864 +msgid "Testpage printing failed" +msgstr "" + +#. it seems something went wrong with the testpage printing +#. so that the user can delete all pending jobs now. +#. Via the "cancel" command the cupsd sends termination signals +#. to running filter processes for the queue so that the filters +#. (in particular the printer driver) could do whatever is needed +#. to switch an actively printing printer device into a clean state +#. (e.g. exit its graphics printing mode and switch back to normal mode). +#. The backend process terminates when the filters have finished. +#. This helps in usual cases (in particular when a good driver is used) +#. if something had messed up for an actively printing job but +#. unfortunately there is no option for the "cancel" command +#. which lets the cupsd kill the backend process as emergency brake +#. when something is really wrong e.g. a wrong driver lets the printer +#. spit out zillions of sheets with nonsense characters. +#. When this command fails for whatever reason, it is a safe fallback +#. to assume that there are no pending jobs in the queue: +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:897 +msgid "There are pending print jobs which might be deleted now." +msgstr "" + +#. 'Yes' button label of a confirmation popup +#. before all pending jobs in a queue will be deleted: +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:925 +msgid "Delete all pending jobs" +msgstr "" + +#. 'No' button label of a confirmation popup +#. before all pending jobs in a queue will be deleted: +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:928 +msgid "Do not delete them" +msgstr "" + +#. Ignore an effectively empty test_print_cups_error_log: +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:1043 +msgid "For the full log, see the /var/log/cups/error_log file." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:1048 +msgid "CUPS log information while processing the testpage for %1 (English only)" +msgstr "" + +#. but the test_print_cups_error_log was effectively empty, +#. show a very generic info to the user to show at least something: +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:1065 +msgid "For CUPS log information, see the /var/log/cups/error_log file." +msgstr "" + +#. show a very generic info to the user to show at least something: +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:1075 +msgid "When printing via a remote system fails, you may ask an admin of the remote system." +msgstr "" + +#. PopupYesNoHeadline body: +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:1102 +msgid "A remote CUPS server setting conflicts with adding a configuration." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:1159 +msgid "Cannot Modify" +msgstr "" + +#. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when a remote queue was selected to be modified: +#: src/include/printer/overview.rb:1161 +msgid "This is a remote configuration. Only local configurations can be modified." +msgstr "" + +#. An entry for a ComboBox from which the user can select that the CUPS error policy +#. which is used when it fails to send a job to the printer is to +#. stop the printer and keep the job for future printing: +#: src/include/printer/policies.rb:45 +msgid "stop the printer and keep the job for future printing" +msgstr "" + +#. An entry for a ComboBox from which the user can select that the CUPS error policy +#. which is used when it fails to send a job to the printer is to +#. re-send the job from the beginning after waiting some time +#. (the default JobRetryInterval is 30 seconds but this can be changed): +#: src/include/printer/policies.rb:52 +msgid "re-send the job after waiting some time" +msgstr "" + +#. An entry for a ComboBox from which the user can select that the CUPS error policy +#. which is used when it fails to send a job to the printer is to +#. abort and delete the job and proceed with the next job: +#: src/include/printer/policies.rb:58 +msgid "abort and delete the job and proceed with the next job" +msgstr "" + +#. Header for a ComboBox to specify the CUPS error policy: +#: src/include/printer/policies.rb:77 +msgid "Specify the &error policy" +msgstr "" + +#. CheckBox to apply the CUPS error policy which is selected in the ComboBox above +#. to all local printer configurations (i.e. to all local print queues). +#. When possible we perefer to use the wording "printer configuration" +#. instead of "print queue" because the latter may sound too technical +#. but sometimes (e.g. in the Connection Wizard) we must use the exact technical term: +#: src/include/printer/policies.rb:93 +msgid "&Apply this error policy to all local printer configurations" +msgstr "" + +#. Header for a ComboBox to specify the CUPS operation policy: +#: src/include/printer/policies.rb:101 +msgid "Specify the &operation policy" +msgstr "" + +#. CheckBox to apply the CUPS operation policy which is selected in the ComboBox above +#. to all local printer configurations (i.e. to all local print queues). +#. When possible we perefer to use the wording "printer configuration" +#. instead of "print queue" because the latter may sound too technical +#. but sometimes (e.g. in the Connection Wizard) we must use the exact technical term: +#: src/include/printer/policies.rb:113 +msgid "Apply this operation &policy to all local printer configurations" +msgstr "" + +#. PopupYesNoHeadline headline +#. PopupYesNoHeadline body: +#: src/include/printer/policies.rb:139 +msgid "A remote CUPS server setting conflicts with setting policies for the local system." +msgstr "" + +#. where %1 will be replaced by the print queue name. +#: src/include/printer/policies.rb:331 +msgid "Failed to apply the policy to '%1'" +msgstr "" + +#. where %1 will be replaced by the default operation policy value. +#. Do not change or translate "DefaultPolicy", it is a system settings name. +#: src/include/printer/policies.rb:354 +msgid "Failed to set 'DefaultPolicy %1' in /etc/cups/cupsd.conf" +msgstr "" + +#. where %1 will be replaced by the default error policy value. +#. Do not change or translate "ErrorPolicy", it is a system settings name. +#: src/include/printer/policies.rb:373 +msgid "Failed to set 'ErrorPolicy %1' in /etc/cups/cupsd.conf" +msgstr "" + +#. There is only a "Cancel" functionality (via the "back" button) which goes back one step +#. and the button with the "abort" functionality is not shown at all (see dialogs.ycp). +#. Unfortunately when the YaST package installer is run via Printerlib::TestAndInstallPackage +#. it leaves a misused "abort" button labeled "Skip Autorefresh" with WidgetID "`abort" +#. so that this case is mapped to the "Cancel" functionality: +#. There is only a "Cancel" functionality (via the "back" button) which goes back one step +#. and the button with the "abort" functionality is not shown at all (see dialogs.ycp). +#. Unfortunately when the YaST package installer is run via Printerlib::TestAndInstallPackage +#. it leaves a misused "abort" button labeled "Skip Autorefresh" with WidgetID "`abort" +#. so that this case is mapped to the "Cancel" functionality: +#. There is only a "Cancel" functionality (via the "back" button) which goes back one step +#. and the button with the "abort" functionality is not shown at all (see dialogs.ycp). +#. Unfortunately when the YaST package installer is run via Printerlib::TestAndInstallPackage +#. it leaves a misused "abort" button labeled "Skip Autorefresh" with WidgetID "`abort" +#. so that this case is mapped to the "Cancel" functionality: +#: src/include/printer/policies.rb:414 +#: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:1102 +#: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:1037 +msgid "Failed to apply the settings to the system." +msgstr "" + +#. An entry for a ComboBox from which the user can select +#. that printer information is not accepted from any remote CUPS servers: +#: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:52 +msgid "do not accept any printer announcement" +msgstr "" + +#. An entry for a ComboBox from which the user can select +#. that printer information is accepted from +#. all remote CUPS servers: +#: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:56 +msgid "accept all announcements from anywhere" +msgstr "" + +#. An entry for a ComboBox from which the user can select +#. that printer information is accepted from +#. remote CUPS servers in the local network: +#: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:60 +msgid "accept from all hosts in the local network" +msgstr "" + +#. An entry for a ComboBox from which the user can select +#. that printer information is accepted only from +#. remote CUPS servers with specific addresses +#. where the specific addresses are specified in a TextEntry below: +#: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:67 +msgid "accept only from the specific addresses below" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:74 +msgid "Use CUPS to Print Via Network" +msgstr "" + +#. A CheckBox to accept printer information from remote CUPS servers: +#: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:81 +msgid "&Accept Printer Announcements from CUPS Servers" +msgstr "" + +#. A header for a ComboBox from which the user can select +#. a usual general setting from which remote CUPS servers +#. printer information is accepted: +#: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:96 +msgid "&General Setting" +msgstr "" + +#. A header for a TextEntry where the user can additionally +#. enter specific IP addresses and/or network/netmask +#. from where remote printer information is accepted: +#: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:121 +msgid "Additional IP Addresses or &Network/Netmask (separated by space)" +msgstr "" + +#. A CheckBox to poll printer information from remote CUPS servers: +#: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:134 +msgid "&Request Printer Information from CUPS Servers" +msgstr "" + +#. A header for a TextEntry where the user can enter +#. CUPS server names and/or IP addresses +#. from where remote printer information is polled: +#: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:146 +msgid "Polled CUPS server names or &IP Addresses (separated by space)" +msgstr "" + +#. A CheckBox to do all printing tasks directly +#. only via one single remote CUPS server: +#: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:158 +msgid "&Do All Printing Directly via One Single CUPS Server" +msgstr "" + +#. A header for a TextEntry where the user can enter +#. the one single remote CUPS server which is used +#. to do all his printing tasks: +#: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:170 +msgid "&One single CUPS server name or IP Address" +msgstr "" + +#. A PushButton to test whether or not the one single remote CUPS server +#. which is used to do all printing tasks is accessible: +#: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:178 +msgid "&Test Server" +msgstr "" + +#. or to set up to use a network printer directly: +#: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:189 +msgid "Use Another Print Server or Use a Network Printer Directly" +msgstr "" + +#. Use the exact same wording "printer announcements from CUPS servers" +#. as in the matching CheckBox to accept printer information from remote CUPS servers: +#: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:208 +msgid "A firewall may reject printer announcements from CUPS servers" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup::AnyMessage message: +#. Popup::AnyMessage message: +#: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:210 +#: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:263 +msgid "Regarding firewall setup see the help text of this dialog." +msgstr "" + +#. to a client-only config but with an effectively empty server name. +#. Such a client-only config does not make sense: +#: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:364 +msgid "A valid CUPS server name must be entered." +msgstr "" + +#. when a client-only server is not accessible +#. where %1 will be replaced by the server name: +#: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:391 +msgid "Continue regardless that '%1' is not accessible?" +msgstr "" + +#. Header of a Popup::ContinueCancelHeadline +#. Body of a Popup::ContinueCancelHeadline +#. when a client-only server is not accessible: +#: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:396 +msgid "A non-accessible server leads to an endless sequence of failures." +msgstr "" + +#. where %1 will be replaced by the server name. +#: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:430 +msgid "Tried to set 'ServerName %1' in /etc/cups/client.conf." +msgstr "" + +#. where %1 will be replaced by the server name. +#: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:441 +msgid "Failed to set 'ServerName %1' in /etc/cups/client.conf." +msgstr "" + +#. PopupYesNoHeadline body: +#: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:467 +msgid "The checkbox to do all printing via one CUPS server was disabled." +msgstr "" + +#. An effectively non-empty current_browse_allow_value requires "Browsing On" in cupsd.conf: +#. It was initially a BrowsePoll config but the user has +#. changed the server name values to be effectively empty. +#. This is the same as to turn off the BrowsePoll config so that +#. the "BrowsePoll config should be disabled" case below is triggered here: +#. Having "BrowseAddress" entries requires "Browsing On", +#. otherwise browsing information would not be sent at all: +#: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:548 +#: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:638 +#: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:575 +msgid "Failed to set 'Browsing On' in /etc/cups/cupsd.conf." +msgstr "" + +#. where %1 will be replaced by the values for BrowseAllow. +#: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:569 +msgid "Failed to set BrowseAllow value(s) '%1' in /etc/cups/cupsd.conf." +msgstr "" + +#. but now the user has deactivated it +#. so that the BrowseAllow config should be disabled. +#. Do not change the global "Browsing On/Off" entry in cupsd.conf +#. because "Browsing Off" disables also sharing of local printers +#. which might be needed by the "Share Printers" dialog. +#. Instead set only "BrowseAllow none" in cupsd.conf: +#: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:597 +msgid "Failed to set 'BrowseAllow none' in /etc/cups/cupsd.conf." +msgstr "" + +#. a BrowsePoll config but with effectively empty server names. +#. Such a BrowsePoll config does not make sense: +#: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:615 +msgid "At least one valid CUPS server name must be entered." +msgstr "" + +#. where %1 will be replaced by the values for BrowsePoll. +#: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:659 +msgid "Failed to set BrowsePoll value(s) '%1' in /etc/cups/cupsd.conf" +msgstr "" + +#. but now the user has deactivated it +#. so that the BrowsePoll config should be disabled: +#. Set only "BrowsePoll none" in cupsd.conf: +#: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:684 +msgid "Failed to set 'BrowsePoll none' in /etc/cups/cupsd.conf" +msgstr "" + +#. A "accept browsing info" config with a local running cupsd +#. was switched to a "not accept browsing info" config or +#. a BrowsePoll config with a local running cupsd was disabled. +#. A cups-polld polls remote servers for a list of available printer queues. +#. Those information is then broadcast to the localhost interface (127.0.0.1) +#. on the specified browse port for reception by the local cupsd. +#. Theerfore for the cupsd BrowsePoll information is the same +#. as the usual Browsing information via BrowseAllow. +#. The default BrowseTimeout value for the local cupsd is 5 minutes. +#. Therefore it takes by default 5 minutes until printer information +#. that was previously received by Browsing is removed (via timeout) +#. from the local cupsd's list. +#. I assume most users do not like to wait 5 minutes which is no problem +#. because they can just click the [OK] button to continue but then +#. they are at least informend why there may be still remote queues: +#: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:727 +msgid "" +"When switching from 'accept printer announcements' to 'not accept announcements'\n" +"or after 'request printer information from CUPS servers' was disabled\n" +"it takes usually 5 minutes until already received information faded away..." +msgstr "" + +#. where %1 will be replaced by the server name. +#: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:1144 +msgid "The server '%1' is accessible via port 631 (IPP/CUPS)." +msgstr "" + +#. A RadioButton label to deny remote access to local print queues: +#: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:64 +msgid "&Deny Remote Access" +msgstr "" + +#. A RadioButton label to allow remote access to local print queues: +#: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:73 +msgid "&Allow Remote Access" +msgstr "" + +#. A label which explains how the subsequent choices can be used: +#: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:83 +msgid "There are various ways how to specify which remote hosts are allowed:" +msgstr "" + +#. A CheckBox label to allow remote access to local print queues +#. for computers within the local network: +#: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:100 +msgid "For computers within the &local network" +msgstr "" + +#. A CheckBox label to publish local print queues by default within the local network: +#: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:111 +msgid "&Publish printers within the local network" +msgstr "" + +#. A caption for a table to allow remote access to local print queues +#. via network interfaces specified in the table below: +#: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:121 +msgid "Via network interfaces" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:133 +msgid "Interface" +msgstr "" + +#. A table column header where the column shows whether or not +#. local print queues are published by default +#. via the network interface in the other table column: +#: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:137 +msgid "Publish printers via this interface" +msgstr "" + +#. A PushButton label to add a network interface to the table which shows +#. the network interfaces to allow remote access to local print queues: +#: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:148 +msgid "&Add" +msgstr "" + +#. A PushButton label to change a network interface in the table which shows +#. the network interfaces to allow remote access to local print queues: +#: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:154 +msgid "&Edit" +msgstr "" + +#. A PushButton label to delete a network interface from the table which shows +#. the network interfaces to allow remote access to local print queues: +#: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:160 +msgid "&Delete" +msgstr "" + +#. A caption to allow remote access to local print queues +#. for hosts and/or networks specified in two TextEntries below: +#: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:169 +msgid "For Specific IP Addresses or Networks" +msgstr "" + +#. TextEntry to allow remote access to local print queues +#. for hosts and/or networks: +#: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:180 +msgid "Allow access from those IP addresses or &network/netmask (separated by space)" +msgstr "" + +#. TextEntry to publish local print queues +#. to IP addresses and/or network broadcast addresses: +#: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:192 +msgid "Publish to these IP addresses or network &broadcast addresses (separated by space)" +msgstr "" + +#. A CheckBox label to publish local print queues by default +#. via a partivular network interface which is shown below. +#: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:214 +msgid "&Publish printers by default via the network interface below." +msgstr "" + +#. A header for a ComboBox which lists network interfaces: +#: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:221 +msgid "Available Network &Interfaces:" +msgstr "" + +#. Use the exact same wording "remote access" +#. as in the matching RadioButton label to allow remote access to local print queues: +#: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:261 +msgid "A firewall may prevent remote access" +msgstr "" + +#. Do not change or translate "Listen localhost", it is a system settings name. +#: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:396 +msgid "Failed to set only 'Listen localhost' in /etc/cups/cupsd.conf." +msgstr "" + +#. Do not change or translate "Allow", it is a system settings name. +#: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:406 +msgid "Failed to remove 'Allow' entries from /etc/cups/cupsd.conf." +msgstr "" + +#. Do not change or translate "BrowseAddress", it is a system settings name. +#. Do not change or translate "BrowseAddress", it is a system settings name. +#: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:424 src/include/printer/sharing.rb:594 +msgid "Failed to remove 'BrowseAddress' entries from /etc/cups/cupsd.conf." +msgstr "" + +#. where %1 will be replaced by one or more system settings values. +#. Do not change or translate "Allow", it is a system settings name. +#: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:536 +msgid "Failed to set 'Allow' entries '%1' in /etc/cups/cupsd.conf." +msgstr "" + +#. where %1 will be replaced by one or more system settings values. +#. Do not change or translate "BrowseAddress", it is a system settings name. +#: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:560 +msgid "Failed to set 'BrowseAddress' entries '%1' in /etc/cups/cupsd.conf." +msgstr "" + +#. Do not change or translate "Listen *:631", it is a system settings name. +#: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:613 +msgid "Failed to set 'Listen *:631' in /etc/cups/cupsd.conf." +msgstr "" + +#. PopupYesNoHeadline headline +#. PopupYesNoHeadline body: +#: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:643 +msgid "A remote CUPS server setting conflicts with sharing local printer configurations." +msgstr "" + +#. Only "Printing via Network" configuration of printer. +#. For use with autoinstallation. +#. @return sequence result +#. Whole configuration of printer but without reading and writing. +#. For use with proposal at the end of the system installation. +#. @return sequence result +#: src/include/printer/wizards.rb:195 src/include/printer/wizards.rb:215 +msgid "Printer Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Initialization dialog contents +#. Initialization dialog contents +#: src/include/printer/wizards.rb:197 src/include/printer/wizards.rb:217 +msgid "Initializing..." +msgstr "" + +#. Settings: +#. Define all variables needed for configuration of a printer: +#. Global variables: +#. Used by AutoYaST by calling in printer_auto.ycp the "Summary" function. +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:58 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"AutoYaST settings for printing with CUPS via network.<br>\n" +"There is no AutoYaST support for local print queues.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Empty an existing progress file so that the DownloadProgress starts at the beginning. +#. Don't care if this command is successful. All what matters is if CreateDatabase() works. +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:367 +msgid "Retrieving printer driver information..." +msgstr "" + +#. Busy message: +#. Body of a Popup::ShowFeedback: +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:382 +msgid "" +"Retrieving printer driver information...\n" +"(this could take more than a minute)" +msgstr "" + +#. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system +#. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:396 +msgid "Failed to create PPD database." +msgstr "" + +#. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system +#. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). +#. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system +#. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). +#. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system +#. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). +#. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system +#. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:415 src/modules/Printer.rb:541 +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:621 src/modules/Printer.rb:694 +msgid "File %1 does not exist." +msgstr "" + +#. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system +#. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). +#. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system +#. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). +#. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system +#. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). +#. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system +#. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:437 src/modules/Printer.rb:566 +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:641 src/modules/Printer.rb:714 +msgid "Failed to read %1." +msgstr "" + +#. ExpectedSize to 1 (setting it to 0 results wrong output) by calling +#. UI::ChangeWidget( `id(`create_database_progress), `ExpectedSize, 1 ) +#. results bad looking output because the DownloadProgress widget is visible re-drawn +#. first with a small 1% initially starting progress bar which then jumps up to 100% +#. but what is intended is that the current progress bar jumps directly up to 100%. +#. Therefore DownloadProgress is not used at all but replaced by a 100% ProgressBar. +#. Because ProgressBar has a different default width than DownloadProgress, +#. a MinWidth which is sufficient for both is set above. +#. The size is measured in units roughly equivalent to the size of a character +#. in the respective UI (1/80 of the full screen width horizontally, +#. 1/25 of the full screen width vertically) where full screen size +#. is 640x480 pixels (y2qt) or 80x25 characters (y2ncurses). +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:459 +msgid "Retrieved Printer Driver Information" +msgstr "" + +#. Empty an existing progress file so that the DownloadProgress starts at the beginning. +#. Don't care if this command is successful. +#. Busy message: +#. Body of a Popup::ShowFeedback: +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:491 src/modules/Printer.rb:508 +msgid "Detecting printers..." +msgstr "" + +#. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system +#. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). +#. Do not confuse this error with the case when no printer was autodetected. +#. The latter results no error. +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:522 +msgid "Failed to detect printers automatically." +msgstr "" + +#. ExpectedSize to 1 results bad looking output (see above). +#. Therefore DownloadProgress is not used at all but replaced by a 100% ProgressBar +#. which requires a MinWidth with sufficient size (see above). +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:579 +msgid "Printer detection finished" +msgstr "" + +#. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system +#. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). +#. Do not confuse this error with the case when no queue was detected +#. (e.g. simply because there is no queue). This results no error. +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:607 +msgid "Failed to detect print queues." +msgstr "" + +#. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system +#. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). +#. Do not confuse this error with the case when no queue was detected +#. (e.g. simply because there is no queue). This results no error. +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:678 +msgid "Failed to determine driver options for queue %1." +msgstr "" + +#. Initialize printer configuration (checks only the installed packages) see +#. http://en.opensuse.org/Archive:YaST_Printer_redesign#Basic_Implementation_Pr...: +#. for background information +#. @return true on success +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:735 +msgid "Initializing Printer Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:738 +msgid "Check installed packages" +msgstr "" + +#. 1. progress stage name of a Progress::New: +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:740 +msgid "Checking installed packages..." +msgstr "" + +#. Last progress step progress bar title of a Progress::New: +#. Last progress step progress bar title of a Progress::New: +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:742 src/modules/Printer.rb:792 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#. Finish printer configuration (does actually nothing except to exit verbosely) see +#. http://en.opensuse.org/Archive:YaST_Printer_redesign#Basic_Implementation_Pr...: +#. for background information +#. @return true in any case (because it only exits) +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:785 +msgid "Finishing Printer Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:788 +msgid "Finish printer configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. 1. progress stage name of a Progress::New: +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:790 +msgid "Finishing printer configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system +#. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). +#. Do not confuse this error with the case when no queue was detected +#. (e.g. simply because there is no queue). This results no error. +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:1098 +msgid "Cannot show print queues (failed to detect print queues)." +msgstr "" + +#. Use local variables to have shorter variable names: +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:1119 +msgid "Local" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:1120 +msgid "Class" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:1121 +msgid "Remote" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:1122 +msgid "Yes" +msgstr "" + +#. When the queue accepts print jobs and printing is enabled: +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:1124 +msgid "Ready" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:1125 +msgid "Printout disabled" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:1128 +msgid "Rejecting print jobs, printout disabled" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:1130 +msgid "Rejecting print jobs" +msgstr "" + +#. Show a fallback text if there are no queues: +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:1167 +msgid "There is no print queue." +msgstr "" + +#. Only a simple message because before the function AutodetectPrinters +#. was called and this function would have shown more specific messages. +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:1212 +msgid "Failed to autodetect printers." +msgstr "" + +#. Show a fallback text if there are no connections. +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:1474 +msgid "No connections." +msgstr "" + +#. A hint what to do if there are no connections. +#. 'Detect More' and 'Connection Wizard' are +#. button lables and must be translated accordingly: +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:1478 +msgid "Try 'Detect More' or use the 'Connection Wizard'." +msgstr "" + +#. Only a simple message because before the function CreateDatabase +#. was called and this function would have shown more specific messages. +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:1496 +msgid "Failed to create the printer driver database." +msgstr "" + +#. fallback entry for a SelectionBox when no connection is selected. +#. It will be replaced by real content, when a connection is selected. +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:1525 +msgid "Select a connection, then matching drivers show up here." +msgstr "" + +#. Busy message: +#. Body of a Popup::ShowFeedback: +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:1543 +msgid "Determining matching printer drivers..." +msgstr "" + +#. show a meaningful text as fallback entry ('Find More' is a button label). +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:1588 +msgid "No matching driver found. Change the search string or try 'Find More'." +msgstr "" + +#. Busy message: +#. Body of a Popup::ShowFeedback: +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:1613 +msgid "Processing many printer drivers. Please wait..." +msgstr "" + +#. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system +#. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:2059 +msgid "Failed to add queue %1." +msgstr "" + +#. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system +#. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:2179 +msgid "Failed to delete configuration %1." +msgstr "" + +#. Only a simple message because this is only a fallback case +#. which should not happen at all: +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:2202 +msgid "Failed to determine the driver options." +msgstr "" + +#. Info for a currently selected item which is to be set as new value in the system: +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:2209 +msgid "new value" +msgstr "" + +#. Info for a current setting which is the currently still saved value in the system: +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:2211 +msgid "saved value" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:2358 +msgid "The server '" +msgstr "" + +#. Message of a Popup::Error when hp-setup should be run. +#. Do not change or translate "hp-setup", it is a program name. +#. Do not change or translate "DISPLAY", it is an environment variable name. +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:2371 +msgid "" +"Cannot run hp-setup because no graphical display can be opened.\n" +"This happens in particular when YaST runs in text-only mode,\n" +"or when the user who runs YaST has no DISPLAY environment variable set,\n" +"or when the YaST process is not allowed to access the graphical display.\n" +"In this case you should run hp-setup manually directly as user 'root'.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Message of a Popup::Error when hp-setup should be run. +#. Do not change or translate "hp-setup", it is a program name: +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:2381 +msgid "" +"Cannot run hp-setup because\n" +"/usr/bin/hp-setup is not executable\n" +"or does not exist.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Body of a Popup::ShowFeedback. +#. Do not change or translate "hp-setup", it is a program name: +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:2389 +msgid "" +"Launched hp-setup.\n" +"You must finish hp-setup before you can proceed with the printer configuration.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. from the BasicAdd dialog but the RPM package hplip is not installed: +#. Do not change or translate "hp-setup", it is a program name. +#. Do not change or translate "hplip", it is a package name. +#. Translate 'Driver Packages' the same as the PushButton name to go to the "Add Driver" dialog: +#: src/modules/Printer.rb:2423 +msgid "" +"To run hp-setup, the RPM package hplip must be installed.\n" +"Use 'Driver Packages' to install it." +msgstr "" + +#. Is the package available to be installed? +#. Package::Available returns nil if no package source is available. +#: src/modules/Printerlib.rb:179 +msgid "Required package %1 is not installed and there is no package repository available." +msgstr "" + +#. Message of a Popup::Error where %1 will be replaced by the package name: +#: src/modules/Printerlib.rb:194 +msgid "Required package %1 is not installed and not available in the repository." +msgstr "" + +#. Only a simple message because: +#. Either the user has explicitly rejected to install the package, +#. or this error does not happen on a normal system +#. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). +#: src/modules/Printerlib.rb:223 +msgid "Failed to install required package %1." +msgstr "" + +#. where %1 will be replaced by the package name +#. when removing package %1 would break dependencies. +#: src/modules/Printerlib.rb:242 +msgid "Remove package %1?" +msgstr "" + +#. where %1 will be replaced by the package name. +#: src/modules/Printerlib.rb:278 +msgid "Removing package %1 would break dependencies." +msgstr "" + +#. where %1 will be replaced by the package name +#. when removing package %1 would break dependencies. +#: src/modules/Printerlib.rb:287 +msgid "Remove %1 regardless of breaking dependencies?" +msgstr "" + +#. Header of a Popup::ContinueCancelHeadline +#. Body of a Popup::ContinueCancelHeadline +#. when removing package %1 would break dependencies. +#: src/modules/Printerlib.rb:292 +msgid "Breaking dependencies leads to arbitrary failures elsewhere." +msgstr "" + +#. where %1 will be replaced by the package name. +#. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system. +#: src/modules/Printerlib.rb:309 +msgid "Failed to remove package %1." +msgstr "" + +#. Enforce user confirmation before a new service is started +#. to be on the safe side that the user knows about it: +#: src/modules/Printerlib.rb:335 +msgid "Start locally running CUPS daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. PopupYesNoHeadline body: +#: src/modules/Printerlib.rb:337 +msgid "A locally running CUPS daemon is needed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Printerlib.rb:343 +msgid "Failed to start the CUPS daemon" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Printerlib.rb:383 src/modules/Printerlib.rb:432 +msgid "No locally running CUPS daemon is accessible." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Printerlib.rb:388 src/modules/Printerlib.rb:445 +msgid "Failed to enable starting of the CUPS daemon during system boot" +msgstr "" + +#. to be on the safe side regarding complaints in an enterprise environment +#. because a restart disrupts all currently actively printing jobs: +#: src/modules/Printerlib.rb:400 +msgid "Restart locally running CUPS daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. PopupYesNoHeadline body: +#: src/modules/Printerlib.rb:402 +msgid "A restart disrupts all currently active print jobs." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Printerlib.rb:408 +msgid "Failed to restart the CUPS daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. Wait half a minute for a restarted cupsd is necessary because +#. when a "no Browsing info" config is switched to a "get Browsing info" config +#. the BrowseInterval in cupsd.conf on remote CUPS servers is by default 30 seconds +#. so that the local cupsd should listen at least 31 seconds to get Browsing info +#. before e.g. the Overview dialog can be shown with the right current queues. +#: src/modules/Printerlib.rb:423 +msgid "" +"Restarted the CUPS daemon.\n" +"Waiting half a minute for the CUPS daemon to get ready to operate...\n" +msgstr "" + +#. To be on the safe side, ask the user to enable the cupsd +#. to be started during boot if it is not yet enabled: +#: src/modules/Printerlib.rb:439 +msgid "Enable starting of the CUPS daemon during system boot" +msgstr "" + +#. PopupYesNoHeadline body: +#: src/modules/Printerlib.rb:441 +msgid "Currently the CUPS daemon is not started during system boot." +msgstr "" + +#. to be on the safe side regarding complaints in an enterprise environment +#. because a stop disrupts all currently actively printing jobs: +#: src/modules/Printerlib.rb:461 +msgid "Stop locally running CUPS daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. PopupYesNoHeadline body: +#: src/modules/Printerlib.rb:463 +msgid "A stop disrupts all currently active print jobs." +msgstr "" + +#. Wait one second to make sure that cupsd has really finished (it may do some cleanup): +#: src/modules/Printerlib.rb:479 +msgid "A locally running CUPS daemon is still accessible." +msgstr "" + +#. where %1 will be replaced by the server name. +#: src/modules/Printerlib.rb:516 +msgid "The CUPS server '%1' is not accessible." +msgstr "" + +#. Label for a ProgressBar while waiting for updated config files: +#: src/modules/Printerlib.rb:649 +msgid "Updating configuration files..." +msgstr "" + +#. Label for a PushButton to skip waiting for updated config files: +#: src/modules/Printerlib.rb:657 +msgid "&Skip waiting" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/product-creator.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/product-creator.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/product-creator.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,2024 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. transltors: command line help text for the Xproduct-creator module +#: src/clients/image-creator.rb:45 +msgid "Configuration of Image Creator" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#. error popup +#. /bin/objcopy - binutils +#. /bin/mkzimage - lilo +#: src/clients/image-creator.rb:73 src/clients/kiwi.rb:99 +#: src/include/product-creator/wizards.rb:255 +msgid "" +"Installation of required packages\n" +"failed." +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for the kiwi module +#: src/clients/kiwi.rb:48 +msgid "Configuration of Kiwi" +msgstr "" + +#. transltors: command line help text for the product-creator module +#: src/clients/product-creator.rb:54 +msgid "Configuration of Product Creator" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for list action +#: src/clients/product-creator.rb:64 +msgid "Print existing configurations" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for create-iso action +#: src/clients/product-creator.rb:71 +msgid "Create installation ISO image" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for create-config action +#: src/clients/product-creator.rb:78 +msgid "Create new product configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for delete-config action +#: src/clients/product-creator.rb:85 +msgid "Delete existing configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for delete-config action +#: src/clients/product-creator.rb:92 +msgid "Edit existing configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for show action +#: src/clients/product-creator.rb:99 +msgid "Show the summary of selected configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for the 'name' option +#: src/clients/product-creator.rb:107 +msgid "Name of the configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for the 'passphrase' option +#: src/clients/product-creator.rb:114 +msgid "GPG passphrase required for signing the source." +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for the 'passhrase_file' option +#: src/clients/product-creator.rb:121 +msgid "File with GPG passphrase required for signing the source" +msgstr "" + +#. cmd line help text for the 'configfile' option, %1 is a file name +#: src/clients/product-creator.rb:129 +msgid "Path to the configuration file (default is %1)" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'output_dir' option +#: src/clients/product-creator.rb:136 +msgid "Path to the output directory" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'create_iso' option +#: src/clients/product-creator.rb:144 +msgid "Output should be an ISO image instead of directory tree" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'iso_name' option +#: src/clients/product-creator.rb:150 +msgid "Name of the output ISO image" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'savespace' option +#: src/clients/product-creator.rb:157 +msgid "Copy only needed files to save space" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'profile' option +#: src/clients/product-creator.rb:163 +msgid "Path to AutoYaST profile" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'copy_profile' option +#: src/clients/product-creator.rb:170 +msgid "Copy AutoYaST profile to CD image" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'isolinux_path' option +#: src/clients/product-creator.rb:176 +msgid "Path to isolinux.cfg file" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'gpg_key' option +#: src/clients/product-creator.rb:183 +msgid "GPG key ID used to sign a product" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'repositories' option +#: src/clients/product-creator.rb:190 +msgid "List of package repositories (separated by commas)" +msgstr "" + +#. command line error message +#. command line error message +#: src/include/product-creator/commandline.rb:79 +#: src/include/product-creator/commandline.rb:328 +msgid "Configuration name is missing." +msgstr "" + +#. command line error message, %1 is a name +#: src/include/product-creator/commandline.rb:86 +msgid "There is no configuration %1." +msgstr "" + +#. command line error message +#: src/include/product-creator/commandline.rb:104 +msgid "Path to output directory is missing." +msgstr "" + +#. command line error message +#: src/include/product-creator/commandline.rb:116 +msgid "List of package repositories is empty." +msgstr "" + +#. command line error message +#: src/include/product-creator/commandline.rb:124 +msgid "Path to AutoYaST profile is missing." +msgstr "" + +#. command line error message +#: src/include/product-creator/commandline.rb:164 +msgid "File %1 does not exist." +msgstr "" + +#. Command line handler for Create ISO action +#: src/include/product-creator/commandline.rb:233 +msgid "Loading configuration %1..." +msgstr "" + +#. command line error message +#: src/include/product-creator/commandline.rb:240 +msgid "Cannot load configuration %1." +msgstr "" + +#. command line error message (%1 is path) +#: src/include/product-creator/commandline.rb:290 +msgid "Cannot create ISO image %1." +msgstr "" + +#. command line info message +#: src/include/product-creator/commandline.rb:296 +msgid "ISO image %1 has been written." +msgstr "" + +#. command line error message +#: src/include/product-creator/commandline.rb:303 +msgid "Configuration name cannot be empty." +msgstr "" + +#. summary caption +#. summary caption +#: src/include/product-creator/commandline.rb:354 +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:531 +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1904 +msgid "Package Source" +msgstr "" + +#. summary line (%1 is file path) +#: src/include/product-creator/commandline.rb:369 +msgid "Using AutoYaST profile %1" +msgstr "" + +#. summary line (%1/%2 is file path) +#. summary line (%1/%2 is file path) +#: src/include/product-creator/commandline.rb:380 +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1942 +msgid "Creating ISO image %1/%2" +msgstr "" + +#. summary line (%1/%2 is file path) +#: src/include/product-creator/commandline.rb:389 +msgid "Creating directory tree in %1/%2" +msgstr "" + +#. summary text - %1 is GPG key ID (e.g. ABCDEF01), %2 is GPG key user ID (or empty if not defined) +#: src/include/product-creator/commandline.rb:412 +msgid "Digitally sign the medium with GPG key %1%2" +msgstr "" + +#. summary text +#. summary text +#: src/include/product-creator/commandline.rb:419 +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1990 +msgid "The medium will not be digitally signed" +msgstr "" + +#. error message: %1 and %2 are architecture names like i386, x86_64, ppc... +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:100 +msgid "" +"Target architecture of the current configuration (%1)\n" +"does not match the system architecture (%2).\n" +"\n" +"Kiwi cannot create images for different architectures." +msgstr "" + +#. ProductCreator overview dialog caption +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:133 +msgid "Product Creator Configuration Overview" +msgstr "" + +#. Table header +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:146 +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:812 +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:811 +msgid "Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:146 +msgid "Product" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:146 +msgid "Image" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:146 +msgid "GPG Key" +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#. combo box item +#. combo box item +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:156 +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:3004 +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:3024 +msgid "Xen Image" +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#. button label +#. combo box item +#. combo box item +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:158 +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2915 +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:3006 +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:3026 +msgid "Virtual Disk Image" +msgstr "" + +#. push box item +#. combo box item +#. combo box item +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:165 +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:3014 +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:3022 +msgid "Live ISO Image" +msgstr "" + +#. menu button label +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:175 +msgid "&Create Product..." +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:178 +msgid "ISO Image" +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:180 +msgid "Directory Tree" +msgstr "" + +#. menu button label +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:186 +msgid "Cre&ate Image with KIWI..." +msgstr "" + +#. TreeDialog +#. Dialog for creating the skeleton and copying common data. +#. @return [Symbol] +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:327 +msgid "" +"<P>Creating the directory structure for the new ISO image.</P>\n" +" \n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:332 +msgid "<p>Press <b>Next</b> to start creating the ISO file.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:338 +msgid "Create skeleton with common files" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:339 +msgid "Copy additional and customized files" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:340 +msgid "Copy selected packages" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:344 +msgid "Creating skeleton with essential files" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:345 +msgid "Copying additional and customized files to directory tree..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:346 +msgid "Copying selected packages" +msgstr "" + +#. label +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:354 +msgid "Sign the source with a GPG key" +msgstr "" + +#. progressbar label +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:359 +msgid "Signing the source with a GPG key..." +msgstr "" + +#. label +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:365 +msgid "Disable signature checks in linuxrc" +msgstr "" + +#. progressbar label +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:370 +msgid "Disabling signature checks in linuxrc..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:375 +msgid "Creating ISO image directory..." +msgstr "" + +#. redirect the download callbacks +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:404 +msgid "Error while creating skeleton." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:449 +msgid "ISO image directory ready" +msgstr "" + +#. if (!Mode::commandline()) +#. { +#. Wizard::EnableNextButton(); +#. Wizard::RestoreNextButton(); +#. } +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:495 +msgid "Creating CD Image..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:496 +msgid "This may take a while." +msgstr "" + +#. caption +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:530 +msgid "ISO Summary" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#. summary caption +#. richtext header +#. richtext header +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:537 +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:261 +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1911 +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:343 +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:373 +msgid "Packages" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:548 +msgid "Missing Packages" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:552 +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:129 +msgid "None" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:557 +msgid "" +"<p>Verify the data in the summary box then\n" +"press Finish to return to main dialog.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. caption +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:583 +msgid "Custom CDs" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:585 +msgid "" +"<p>Verifying data and packages...\n" +" </p>\n" +" \n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:592 +msgid "" +"<p>If there is something missing, the process will be aborted.\n" +"Fix the problem and try again.</p>\n" +" " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:600 +msgid "Set up Package Source" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:601 +msgid "Create Package List" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:602 +msgid "Verify Package Availability" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:603 +msgid "Check Destination" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:607 +msgid "Configuring package source..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:608 +msgid "Creating package list..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:609 +msgid "Verifying package availability..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:610 +msgid "Checking destination..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:614 +msgid "Verification of Data for ISO Image" +msgstr "" + +#. SCR::Execute(.target.mkdir, tmp + "/tmproot"); +#. Pkg::TargetInit( tmp + "/tmproot" , true); +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:636 +msgid "Enabling sources..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:645 +msgid "Selecting packages..." +msgstr "" + +#. the solver has failed, let the user resolve the dependencies +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:667 +msgid "Checking packages..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:675 +msgid "Verifying the destination directory..." +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:785 +msgid "<p>Start creating a new image configuration with <b>Add</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:787 +msgid "<p>Use <b>Edit</b> to change selected image configuration or create the image.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:791 +msgid "<p>Delete the directory with the selected configuration by selecting <b>Delete</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, %1 is directory +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:796 +msgid "<p>All image configurations are saved in <tt>%1</tt> directory.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. main dialog caption +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:804 +msgid "Image Creator Configuration Overview" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:812 +msgid "Version" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:812 +msgid "Size" +msgstr "" + +#. yes/no popup +#: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:881 +msgid "Delete configuration %1 (%2) now?" +msgstr "" + +#. corresponds to the "Enable/Disable" button +#. corresponds to the "Enable/Disable" button +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:80 +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:94 +msgid "On" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:81 +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:95 +msgid "Off" +msgstr "" + +#. ProductCreator configure1 dialog caption +#. ProductCreator configure2 dialog caption +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:168 +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:394 +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1223 +msgid "Product Creator Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:202 +msgid "Profile Loca&tion:" +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:209 +msgid "Select Fi&le" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:218 +msgid "Copy Profile to CD I&mage" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:232 +msgid "Pac&kage Manager" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:241 +msgid "&AutoYaST Control File" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:257 +msgid "&Configuration Name:" +msgstr "" + +#. set architecture if configured +#. error popup +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:313 +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:3512 +msgid "Enter the name of the configuration." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:319 +msgid "" +"A configuration with this name already exists.\n" +" Select a new name.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:344 +msgid "The file '%1' does not exist. Choose a correct one." +msgstr "" + +#. abort? +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:369 +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1260 +msgid "Select File" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:415 +msgid "Output:" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:423 +msgid "&Path to Generated Directory Tree:" +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:430 +msgid "&Select Directory" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:443 +msgid "&Generate ISO Image File" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:459 +msgid "&ISO Image File:" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:473 +msgid "Create Directory &Tree Only" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:484 +msgid "Other Options" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:490 +msgid "Copy only needed files to save space." +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:500 +msgid "CD Publisher:" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:509 +msgid "CD Preparer:" +msgstr "" + +#. ask for directory widget label +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:549 +msgid "Select Directory" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:562 +msgid "Path to generated directory tree missing." +msgstr "" + +#. preselect the first item +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:646 +msgid "Target Architecture" +msgstr "" + +#. the architecture is different, ask to switch it +#. %1 is URL of the repository +#. %2 is name of the architecture (like i386, x86_64, ppc...) +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:774 +msgid "" +"Source %1\n" +"does not support the current target architecture (%2).\n" +"Change the target architecture?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:802 +msgid "Source Selection" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:811 +msgid "Selected" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:811 +msgid "Status" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:811 +msgid "URL" +msgstr "" + +#. summary line, %1 is e.g. i386, x86_64, ppc... +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:822 +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1930 +msgid "Target architecture: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:835 +msgid "Cr&eate New..." +msgstr "" + +#. remove not found sources (with id = -1) +#. enable the source +#. disable the source +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:861 +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:900 +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:948 +msgid "X" +msgstr "" + +#. refresh the target architecture if it has been changed +#. change the architecture +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:908 +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1078 +msgid "Target Architecture: %1" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:969 +msgid "Select at least one source." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1004 +msgid "" +"There is a mismatch between the selected\n" +"repositories and the machine architecture.\n" +"\n" +"Either select a different repository or\n" +"change the target architecture.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. ask for the target architecture +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1045 +msgid "Select the new target architecture." +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1139 +msgid "Base Source Selection" +msgstr "" + +#. convert the URL to Id +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1167 +msgid "Selected Base Source" +msgstr "" + +#. FIXME: Manage files for other archs +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1234 +msgid "File Contents: %1" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1237 +msgid "Load File" +msgstr "" + +#. Pkg::TargetFinish (); +#. busy message +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1297 +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1522 +#: src/modules/ProductCreator.rb:286 +msgid "Reading data from Package Database..." +msgstr "" + +#. popup +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1298 +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1523 +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:1477 +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:1822 +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:3131 +#: src/modules/ProductCreator.rb:291 +msgid "Please wait..." +msgstr "" + +#. Open empty dialog for instant feedback +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1403 +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1537 +msgid "Reading package database..." +msgstr "" + +#. switch to packager textdomain, reuse the translations +#. Help text for software patterns / selections dialog +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1435 +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1512 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Select one of the following <b>base</b> selections and click <i>Detailed<i> to add\n" +"more <b>add-on</b> selections and packages.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1444 +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1510 +msgid "Software Selection" +msgstr "" + +#. error message, %1 = details +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1603 +msgid "" +"Dependencies cannot be resolved.\n" +"\n" +"%1\n" +msgstr "" + +#. refresh table and pushbutton state +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1822 +msgid "&Digitally Sign the Product on the Medium" +msgstr "" + +#. TODO: validate the dialog (is a key selected if the checkbox is selected? +#. "validate_help" : _("Select a gpg key in the table. Create...") +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1830 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>Sign</b></big><br>\n" +"To make it possible for users to verify your product, sign it with a GPG key. \n" +"This key is checked when the product is added as a repository.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. part of the help text (signing dialog), the URL can be modified to the translated language +#. (if the page exists in that language, you have to check that!) +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1837 +msgid "" +"<P>If the product is not signed, Yast automatically adds the option 'Insecure:\n" +"1' to the linuxrc configuration file, otherwise linuxrc would deny loading an unsigned installation system at boot. See http://en.opensuse.org/Linuxrc for more information.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1846 +msgid "Signing the Product on the Medium" +msgstr "" + +#. Configuration Summary +#. @return [void] +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1896 +msgid "Configuration Summary" +msgstr "" + +#. summary line +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1917 +msgid "Selected %1 packages" +msgstr "" + +#. display the architecture in the summary if it has been changed +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1925 +msgid "Architecture" +msgstr "" + +#. summary caption +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1935 +msgid "Output Directory" +msgstr "" + +#. summary line (%1/%2 is file path) +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1952 +msgid "Creating directory tree in <b> %1/%2 </b>" +msgstr "" + +#. header in the summary dialog +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1961 +msgid "Signing" +msgstr "" + +#. summary text - %1 is GPG key ID (e.g. ABCDEF01), %2 is GPG key user ID (or empty if not defined) +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1981 +msgid "Digitally sign the medium with GPG key <b>%1</b>%2" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1996 +msgid "" +"<p>Verify the data in the summary then press Next to continue.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. All helps are here +#: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:35 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Boot Options</big></b><br>\n" +"Add additional boot menu entries with boot options.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:40 +msgid "" +"<p>For example, \n" +"configure the CD for automatic installations and specify the installation\n" +"source location. If you are not sure, leave the file untouched and the original is used.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:46 +msgid "<p><b><big>Initializing Configuration</big></b></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:50 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Initialization:</big></b><br>\n" +"Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing <b>Abort</b> now.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:54 +msgid "<p><b><big>Saving Configuration</big></b></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:58 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Saving:</big></b><br>\n" +"Abort the save procedure by pressing <b>Abort</b>.\n" +"An additional dialog will inform you whether it is safe to do so.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Ovreview dialog help 1/3 +#: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:65 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Product Creator Configuration Overview</big></b><br>\n" +"Obtain an overview of available configurations. Additionally\n" +"edit those configurations.<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Ovreview dialog help 2/3 +#: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:71 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Adding a Configuration:</big></b><br>\n" +"Press <b>Add</b> to create a new configuration.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Ovreview dialog help 3/3 +#: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:75 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Editing or Deleting:</big></b><br>\n" +"Choose a configuration to change or remove.\n" +"Then press <b>Edit</b> or <b>Delete</b> respectively.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. overview dialog help part 4 +#: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:81 +msgid "" +"<p>Use <b>Create Product</b> to create the ISO image or installation\n" +"repository directory with the selected product.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. overview dialog help part 5 +#: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:85 +msgid "" +"<p>Press <b>Create Image with KIWI</b> for additional configuration of various\n" +"types of images, such as Live media or Xen images, with the KIWI image system.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Configure1 dialog help 1/4 +#: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:89 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Configuration Name and Packages</big></b><br>\n" +"Choose a configuration name and the method with which to select \n" +"the packages to add to the ISO image.<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Configure1 dialog help 3/4 +#: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:95 +msgid "" +"<b>AutoYaST Profile</b><p>\n" +"Select an AutoYaST profile with the software configuration.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Configure1 dialog help 3/4 +#: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:101 +msgid "" +"<b>Software Manager</b><p>\n" +"Use the software manager without any preselected packages. All\n" +"packages that would be automatically selected during installation must be\n" +"selected manually based on the hardware and architecture for which you are\n" +"creating this CD.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Source selection help 1/2 +#: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:110 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Select Package Sources</big></b><br>\n" +"Select at least one package source.<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Source selection help 2/2 +#: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:114 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Target Architecture</big></b><br>\n" +"It is possible to create a product for a different architecture than that of\n" +"the machine you are currently working on.\n" +"All selected repositories must support the target architecture.<br>\n" +"<b>Note:</b> KIWI does not support different architectures yet, do not change\n" +"the architecture if you intend to create a KIWI image from the current configuration.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Configure2 dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:123 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>ISO Directory and Image</big></b><br>\n" +"Enter the location in which to create the skeleton directory. All needed\n" +"files will be copied to this directory. Select a location with enough disk\n" +"space.\n" +"<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Configure2 dialog help 2/3 +#: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:131 +msgid "" +"<p>Create an ISO image or a directory that is suitable for \n" +"creating an ISO image at a later time.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Configure2 dialog help 2/3 +#: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:137 +msgid "" +"<p>To save space, select the check box to copy only needed files \n" +"to the skeleton. \n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text - the base selection dialog 1/4 +#: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:143 +msgid "<p><b>The Base Product</b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text - the base selection dialog 2/4 +#: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:147 +msgid "" +"<p>One of the used repositories must be marked as the base product. The base\n" +"product repository should be bootable to ensure the newly created product is also\n" +"bootable.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text - the base selection dialog 3/4 +#: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:153 +msgid "<p>The other repositories will be used as add-ons for the base repository.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text - the base selection dialog 4/4 +#: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:157 +msgid "" +"<p>The product creator solves dependencies of the selected products and proposes\n" +"the base product. If the proposed value is wrong, select the right base\n" +"repository from the list.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. what are we configuring now ("iso"/"xen"/...) +#. combo box label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:68 +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:610 +msgid "Packages for Image" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:69 +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:621 +msgid "Bootstrap" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:70 +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:624 +msgid "Xen Specific Packages" +msgstr "" + +#. richtext header +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:361 +msgid "Patterns" +msgstr "" + +#. label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:386 +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2419 +msgid "&Ignored Software" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup for modifying the list of 'bootinclude' packages +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:466 +msgid "Packages to be included in Boot Image" +msgstr "" + +#. separate bootinclude packages from normal ones +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:575 +msgid "" +"Some of the packages that are selected for installation\n" +"are also included in the list for deletion.\n" +"Continue anyway?" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:613 +msgid "Packages to Delete" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:627 +msgid "Testing" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label, %1 is profile name +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:634 +msgid "Image, Profile %1" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:644 +msgid "Include in Boot Image" +msgstr "" + +#. popup label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:1086 +msgid "Add New User" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:1088 +msgid "Login &Name" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:1090 +msgid "&Full Name" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:1094 +msgid "&Home Directory" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:1096 +msgid "&UID" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:1099 +msgid "G&roup Name" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:1101 +msgid "&GID" +msgstr "" + +#. popup label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:1138 +msgid "Edit User" +msgstr "" + +#. popup message +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:1150 +msgid "Enter the user name." +msgstr "" + +#. popup message +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:1156 +msgid "" +"The passwords do not match.\n" +"Try again." +msgstr "" + +#. popup for file selection dialog +#. popup for file selection dialog +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:1299 +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:3377 +msgid "Directory to Import" +msgstr "" + +#. popup for file selection dialog +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:1347 +msgid "Script to Import" +msgstr "" + +#. popup for file selection dialog ('root' is a name, do not translate) +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:1392 +msgid "Path to root Directory" +msgstr "" + +#. popup for file selection dialog ('config' is a name, do not translate) +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:1401 +msgid "Path to config Directory" +msgstr "" + +#. removing 'import_' button id prefix +#. popup for file selection dialog +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:1423 +msgid "Path to %1 File" +msgstr "" + +#. popup for file selection dialog +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:1443 +msgid "Path to images.sh File" +msgstr "" + +#. generic popup +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:1460 +msgid "Feature not implemented yet." +msgstr "" + +#. Check if selected packages are available (some of them may not after +#. deleting some repository) +#. return true if there was no conflict +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:1476 +msgid "Checking packages availability..." +msgstr "" + +#. do not check bootinclude packages +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:1508 +msgid "Missing packages" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:1513 +msgid "" +"<p>Packages from section '%1' are not available with selected repositories:</p>\n" +"<p>%2.</p>\n" +"<p>\n" +"Either remove the packages from the section, check the detailed package selection or ignore the situation.</p>\n" +"<p>\n" +"Going to detailed package selection and accepting the view without any further changes results in removal of problematic packages from the section.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:1528 +msgid "Remove Packages" +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:1530 +msgid "Check Package Selection" +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:1534 +msgid "Ignore" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:1534 +msgid "Cancel" +msgstr "" + +#. popup question +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:1651 +msgid "Create ISO image now?" +msgstr "" + +#. popup question +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:1653 +msgid "Create Xen image now?" +msgstr "" + +#. popup question +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:1655 +msgid "Create virtual disk image now?" +msgstr "" + +#. popup message, %1 is a dir +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:1660 +msgid "" +"ISO image successfully created in\n" +"%1\n" +"directory." +msgstr "" + +#. popup message, %1 is a dir +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:1666 +msgid "" +"Xen image files successfully created in\n" +"%1\n" +"directory.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup message, %1 is a dir +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:1672 +msgid "" +"Virtual disk image successfully created in\n" +"%1\n" +"directory." +msgstr "" + +#. popup label +#. default question +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:1710 +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:1748 +msgid "Create image now?" +msgstr "" + +#. default popup message, %1 is a dir +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:1778 +msgid "" +"Image successfully created in\n" +"%1\n" +"directory." +msgstr "" + +#. busy popup +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:1821 +msgid "Reading current image configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. tab header +#. default dialog caption +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2155 +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2934 +msgid "Image Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2178 +msgid "Installed Software" +msgstr "" + +#. tab header +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2204 +msgid "Description" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2217 +msgid "Locale settings" +msgstr "" + +#. tab header +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2235 +msgid "Users" +msgstr "" + +#. tab header +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2259 +msgid "Scripts" +msgstr "" + +#. informative label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2277 +msgid "Editing of following files is disabled for configurations imported from Studio." +msgstr "" + +#. tab header +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2305 +msgid "Directories" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2365 +msgid "Co&mpression" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2367 +msgid "" +"<p>Select the value for image <b>Compression</b>. This will modify the\n" +"<i>flags</i> value of the image type. Check the kiwi manual for an explanation of available values.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2384 +msgid "So&ftware Selection" +msgstr "" + +#. pusbutton label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2407 +msgid "Ch&ange..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2408 +msgid "<p>Adapt the software selection with <b>Change</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for "&Ignored software" +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2424 +msgid "<p>For <b>ignored software</b>, enter each entry (like 'smtp_daemon') on a new line.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2431 +msgid "Packages to &Delete" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for "&Ignored software" +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2436 +msgid "<p>Each entry of <b>Packages to Delete</b> is one package name to be uninstalled from the target image.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2443 +msgid "&Version" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2444 +msgid "<p>Enter the <b>Version</b> of your image configuration.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2459 +msgid "&Size" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for "Size" field and "Additive" checkbox +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2461 +msgid "" +"<p>Set the image <b>Size</b> in the specified <b>Unit</b>.\n" +"If <b>Additive</b> is checked, the meaning of <b>Size</b> is different: it is the minimal free space available on the image.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label (MB/GB values) +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2473 +msgid "&Unit" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2480 +msgid "Additive" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2487 +msgid "Encrypt Image with LUKS" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2489 +msgid "<p>To create an encrypted file system, check <b>Encrypt Image with LUKS</b> and enter the password.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2500 +msgid "Encrypted Image LUKS Password" +msgstr "" + +#. general help for directory structure tab +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2513 +msgid "<p>Edit the configuration scripts used to build your image.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. general help for directory structure tab +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2520 +msgid "<p>Point to the configuration directories for building your image.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2527 +msgid "Directory with System Configur&ation" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2531 +msgid "<p>Define the path to the <b>Directory with System Configuration</b> (the <tt>root</tt> directory). The entire directory is copied into the root of the image tree using <tt>cp -a</tt>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. label (above table) +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2551 +msgid "Directory with System Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2556 +msgid "Path to Directory" +msgstr "" + +#. help for table with users +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2561 +msgid "<p>Configure the <b>Directory with System Configuration</b> (the <tt>root</tt> directory). The entire directory is copied into the root of the image tree using <tt>cp -a</tt>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. label (above table) +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2588 +msgid "Directory with Scripts" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2593 +msgid "Path to File" +msgstr "" + +#. help for table with users +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2598 +msgid "<p>Configure the <b>Directory with Scripts</b> (the <tt>config</tt> directory). It contains scripts that are run after the installation of all the image packages.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2627 +msgid "Studio Custom Build Script" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#. textentry label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2635 +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2656 +msgid "&Import..." +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2645 +msgid "I&mage Configuration Script" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2646 +msgid "<p>Edit your <b>Image Configuration Script</b>, called <tt>config.sh</tt>. This script is run at the end of the installation but before the package scripts have run.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2666 +msgid "Pa&th to Directory with Scripts" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2667 +msgid "<p>The optional <b>Directory with Scripts</b> (<tt>config</tt> directory) contains scripts that are run after the installation of all the image packages.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2677 +msgid "Br&owse..." +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2687 +msgid "C&leanup Script" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2688 +msgid "<p>Edit your <b>Cleanup Script</b> (<tt>images.sh</tt>). This script is run at the beginning of the image creation process.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2698 +msgid "Im&port..." +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2709 +msgid "&Author" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for Author, Contact and Specification widgets +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2711 +msgid "<p>Set the values for <b>Author</b> of the image, <b>Contact Information</b>, and the image <b>Specification</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2724 +msgid "C&ontact" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2736 +msgid "&Specification" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2750 +msgid "&Locale" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for locale (heading) +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2758 +msgid "<p><b>Locale Settings</b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for locale +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2762 +msgid "<p>The value of <b>Locale</b> (e.g. <tt>en_US</tt>) defines the contents of the RC_LANG variable in <t>/etc/sysconfig/language</tt>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2770 +msgid "&Keyboard Layout" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for keytable +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2778 +msgid "<p><b>Keyboard Layout</b> specifies the name of the console keymap to use. The value corresponds to a map file in <tt>/usr/share/kbd/keymaps</tt>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2787 +msgid "&Time Zone" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for timezone +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2795 +msgid "<p>It is possible to set a specific <b>Time zone</b>. Available time zones are located in the <tt>/usr/share/zoneinfo</tt> directory.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. general help for users tab +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2803 +msgid "<p>Create users that should be available on the target system.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2814 +msgid "Login Name" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2816 +msgid "Full Name" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2818 +msgid "UID" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2820 +msgid "Home Directory" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2822 +msgid "Group" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2824 +msgid "GID" +msgstr "" + +#. help for table with users +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2828 +msgid "" +"<p>For each user, specify the <b>Name</b>, <b>Password</b>, <b>Home Directory</b> and group\n" +"to which the users belongs.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2911 +msgid "Live CD Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2913 +msgid "Xen Image Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2919 +msgid "&Create ISO" +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2921 +msgid "&Create Xen Image" +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2923 +msgid "&Create Virtual Disk Image" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for kiwi UI preparation +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2973 +msgid "<p>Enter the name of your image configuration. Base new configuration on template from the list or on the directory with the existing configuration.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for kiwi UI preparation +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2980 +msgid "<p>Place custom configuration templates under <tt>%1</tt> directory.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for kiwi UI preparation, cont. +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2988 +msgid "<p>Choose the <b>Image Type</b> which should be created.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for kiwi UI preparation, cont. +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2991 +msgid "<p>Select <b>Output Directory</b> for the created image.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for kiwi UI preparation, cont. +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2994 +msgid "<p>Modify the list of <b>Package Repositories</b> that will be used for creating the image. Use <b>Add From System</b> to add one of the current system repositories.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for kiwi UI preparation, cont. +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2999 +msgid "<p>Click <b>Next</b> to continue with the configuration.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:3020 +msgid "Network Boot Image" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:3028 +msgid "OEM Image" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:3123 +msgid "Selected directory does not contain valid description of system configuration." +msgstr "" + +#. busy popup +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:3131 +msgid "Importing repositories..." +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item, %1 is name, %2 version +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:3182 +msgid "%1, version %2" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:3197 +msgid "&32bit Architecture Image" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:3209 +msgid "Target is i586 only" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:3222 +msgid "&Kiwi Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:3236 +msgid "Create from Scratch" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:3247 +msgid "Base on Template" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:3266 +msgid "Base on Existing Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:3273 +msgid "&Choose..." +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:3284 +msgid "I&mage Type" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:3292 +msgid "&Output Directory" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:3304 +msgid "Package Repository" +msgstr "" + +#. menu butto label +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:3310 +msgid "A&dd from System" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:3318 +msgid "Image preparation" +msgstr "" + +#. popup error message, %1 is the package name +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:3414 +msgid "" +"Cannot search for SLP repositories\n" +"without having %1 package installed.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup for file selection dialog +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:3500 +msgid "Path to the Output Directory" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:3521 +msgid "" +"Configuration with name \"%1\" already exists.\n" +"Choose a different one." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:3533 +msgid "Enter the path to the output directory." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:3539 +msgid "Specify at least one package repository." +msgstr "" + +#. continue/cancel popup %1 is a \n separated list +#: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:3640 +msgid "" +"Failed to add these repositories:\n" +"\n" +"%1.\n" +"\n" +"Continue anyway?" +msgstr "" + +#. text box label +#: src/modules/Kiwi.rb:693 +msgid "Path to directory to store the log files" +msgstr "" + +#. text box label +#: src/modules/Kiwi.rb:702 +msgid "Standard output file name" +msgstr "" + +#. text box label +#: src/modules/Kiwi.rb:709 +msgid "Error output file name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Kiwi.rb:751 src/modules/Kiwi.rb:760 +msgid "" +"File %1 already exists.\n" +"Rewrite?" +msgstr "" + +#. run kiwi to finally create the selected image +#. @param [String] out_dir output directory for the result +#. @param [String] selected_profiles which profiles should be build (prepared part +#. of command line option) +#: src/modules/Kiwi.rb:825 +msgid "Removing old chroot directory failed." +msgstr "" + +#. label +#: src/modules/Kiwi.rb:848 +msgid "Preparing for Image Creation" +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/modules/Kiwi.rb:866 +msgid "Save logs" +msgstr "" + +#. label (command result) +#: src/modules/Kiwi.rb:940 +msgid "Image creation failed." +msgstr "" + +#. label +#: src/modules/Kiwi.rb:965 +msgid "Creating Image" +msgstr "" + +#. label (command result) +#: src/modules/Kiwi.rb:976 +msgid "Image creation succeeded." +msgstr "" + +#. label (command result) +#: src/modules/Kiwi.rb:995 +msgid "Image creation canceled." +msgstr "" + +#. ProductCreator read dialog caption +#: src/modules/ProductCreator.rb:448 +msgid "Initializing Product Creator Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: progress stage 1/1 +#: src/modules/ProductCreator.rb:462 +msgid "Read the configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: progress step 1/1 +#: src/modules/ProductCreator.rb:466 +msgid "Reading the database..." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: progress finished +#. translators: progress finished +#. translators: progress finished +#. translators: progress finished +#: src/modules/ProductCreator.rb:468 src/modules/ProductCreator.rb:495 +#: src/modules/ProductCreator.rb:548 src/modules/ProductCreator.rb:574 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error message +#: src/modules/ProductCreator.rb:489 +msgid "Cannot read the configuration." +msgstr "" + +#. ProductCreator read dialog caption +#: src/modules/ProductCreator.rb:528 +msgid "Saving Product Creator Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: progress stage 1/2 +#: src/modules/ProductCreator.rb:542 +msgid "Write the settings" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: progress step 1/1 +#: src/modules/ProductCreator.rb:546 +msgid "Writing the settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error message +#: src/modules/ProductCreator.rb:568 +msgid "Error while writing settings." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: Configuration summary text for autoyast +#: src/modules/ProductCreator.rb:601 +msgid "Configuration summary ..." +msgstr "" + +#. Create an overview table with all configured cards +#. @return table items +#: src/modules/ProductCreator.rb:614 +msgid "No Files" +msgstr "" + +#. an error message, %1 is the directory, %2 is URL of the source +#: src/modules/ProductCreator.rb:994 +msgid "" +"Cannot read directory %1\n" +"from source %2." +msgstr "" + +#. the copy is not needed if the sourse will be signed with a gpg key +#. check if the metadata are gzipped +#: src/modules/ProductCreator.rb:2080 src/modules/ProductCreator.rb:3682 +msgid "Error reading control file." +msgstr "" + +#. workaround for bnc#498464 +#: src/modules/ProductCreator.rb:2689 +msgid "" +"Could not add GPG key %1 to initrd\n" +"%2.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. yes/no popup: error message +#: src/modules/ProductCreator.rb:2883 +msgid "" +"Error: Could not digitally sign the source.\n" +"Try again?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error message, %1 is list of URLs (one URL per line) +#: src/modules/ProductCreator.rb:2993 +msgid "" +"These sources were not found:\n" +"%1" +msgstr "" + +#. popup question, %1 is directory name +#: src/modules/ProductCreator.rb:3245 +msgid "Remove the destination directory %1?" +msgstr "" + +#. remove the destination +#: src/modules/ProductCreator.rb:3270 +msgid "The destination %1 already exists." +msgstr "" + +#. TODO ask in interactive mode +#: src/modules/ProductCreator.rb:3279 +msgid "" +"Destination directory exists or is a file.\n" +"Remove directory %1?" +msgstr "" + +#. Check if selected packages are available +#. @return [String] error message +#: src/modules/ProductCreator.rb:3300 +msgid "Checking for package availability..." +msgstr "" + +#. add an empty map if the source doesn't exist +#: src/modules/ProductCreator.rb:3359 +msgid "%1 package not available." +msgstr "" + +#. change the label +#. copy the packages +#: src/modules/ProductCreator.rb:3415 src/modules/ProductCreator.rb:3554 +msgid "Copying %1" +msgstr "" + +#. string dir = basedir + product_map[source]:"/" + datadir + "/" + package["arch"]:""; +#: src/modules/ProductCreator.rb:3590 +msgid "" +"Cannot download package %1\n" +" from source %2.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/ProductCreator.rb:3607 +msgid "" +"Error while copying packages. \n" +"\t\t Check the created directory for possible hints." +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/proxy.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/proxy.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/proxy.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,404 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. Informative label +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:101 +msgid "No details available." +msgstr "" + +#. A push button +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:104 +msgid "&Details <<" +msgstr "" + +#. avoid confusing Emacs +#. A push button +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:106 +msgid "&Details >>" +msgstr "" + +#. The default error code, replaced with the current error code got from proxy if any code found +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:173 +msgid "Unknown Error Code" +msgstr "" + +#. Error message, +#. %1 is a string "HTTP", "HTTPS" or "FTP" +#. %2 is an error string such as "HTTP/1.0 403 Forbidden" +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:191 +msgid "" +"An error occurred during the %1 proxy test.\n" +"Proxy return code: %2.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Unknown return code, +#. %1 is the string HTTP, "HTTPS" or FTP, +#. %2 is an error string such as "HTTP/1.0 403 Forbidden" +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:206 +msgid "" +"An unknown error occurred during the %1 proxy test.\n" +"Proxy return code: %2.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. An informative popup label diring the proxy testings +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:227 +msgid "Testing the current proxy settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Error popup message +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:237 +msgid "An error occurred during the HTTP proxy test." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Error popup message +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:259 +msgid "An error occurred during the HTTPS proxy test." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Error popup message +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:281 +msgid "An error occurred during the FTP proxy test." +msgstr "" + +#. Popup message +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:299 +msgid "Proxy settings work correctly." +msgstr "" + +#. Proxy dialog caption +#. Commandline help title +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:399 src/lib/proxy/client.rb:27 +msgid "Proxy Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Proxy dialog help 1/8 +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:405 +msgid "" +"<p>Configure your Internet proxy (caching) settings here.</p>\n" +"<p><b>Note:</b> It is generally recommended to relogin for the settings to take effect, \n" +"however in some cases the application may pick up new settings immediately. Please check \n" +"what your application (web browser, ftp client,...) supports. </p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Proxy dialog help 2/8 +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:412 +msgid "" +"<p><b>HTTP Proxy URL</b> is the name of the proxy server for your access\n" +"to the World Wide Web (WWW).</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Proxy dialog help 3/8 +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:416 +msgid "" +"<p><b>HTTPS Proxy URL</b> is the name of the proxy server for your secured access\n" +"to the World Wide Web (WWW).</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Proxy dialog help 3.5/8 +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:420 +msgid "<p>Example: <i>http://proxy.example.com:3128/</i></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Proxy dialog help 4/8 +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:422 +msgid "" +"<p><b>FTP Proxy URL</b> is the name of the proxy server for your access\n" +"to the file transfer services (FTP).</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Proxy dialog help 5/8 +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:426 +msgid "" +"<p>If you check <b>Use the Same Proxy for All Protocols</b>, it is\n" +"enough to fill in the HTTP proxy URL. It will be used for all protocols\n" +"(HTTP, HTTPS and FTP).\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Proxy dialog help 6/8 +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:433 +msgid "" +"<p><b>No Proxy Domains</b> is a comma-separated list of domains\n" +"for which the requests should be made directly without caching,\n" +"for example, <i>%1</i>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Proxy dialog help 7/8 +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:442 +msgid "" +"<p>If you are using a proxy server with authorization, enter\n" +"the <b>Proxy User Name</b> and <b>Proxy Password</b>. A valid username\n" +"consists of printable ASCII characters only (except for quotation marks).</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Proxy dialog help 8/8 +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:450 +msgid "" +"<p>Press <b>Test Proxy Settings</b> to test\n" +"the current configuration for HTTP, HTTPS, and FTP proxy.</p> \n" +msgstr "" + +#. CheckBox entry label +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:467 +msgid "&Enable Proxy" +msgstr "" + +#. Frame label +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:473 +msgid "Proxy Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Text entry label +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:479 +msgid "&HTTP Proxy URL" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:481 +msgid "HTTP&S Proxy URL" +msgstr "" + +#. Text entry label +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:484 +msgid "F&TP Proxy URL" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:490 +msgid "Us&e the Same Proxy for All Protocols" +msgstr "" + +#. Text entry label +#. domains without proxying +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:495 +msgid "No Proxy &Domains" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:504 +msgid "Proxy Authentication" +msgstr "" + +#. Text entry label +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:513 +msgid "Proxy &User Name" +msgstr "" + +#. Password entry label +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:521 +msgid "Proxy &Password" +msgstr "" + +#. Test Proxy Settings - push button +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:533 +msgid "Test Pr&oxy Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup error text - http, https and ftp proxy URLs are blank +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:615 +msgid "" +"Proxy is enabled, but no proxy URL has been specified.\n" +"Really use these settings?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:628 +msgid "" +"Security warning:\n" +"Username and password will be stored unencrypted\n" +"in a worldwide readable plaintext file.\n" +"Really use these settings?" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup::Error text +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:643 +msgid "You cannot enter a password and leave the user name empty." +msgstr "" + +#. Popup::Error text +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:651 +msgid "HTTP proxy URL is invalid." +msgstr "" + +#. Popup::Error text +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:659 +msgid "HTTP proxy URL must contain a scheme specification (http)." +msgstr "" + +#. Popup::Error text +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:668 +msgid "The HTTPS proxy URL is invalid." +msgstr "" + +#. Popup::Error text +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:676 +msgid "The HTTPS proxy URL must contain a scheme specification (http)." +msgstr "" + +#. Popup::Error text +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:687 +msgid "FTP proxy URL is invalid." +msgstr "" + +#. Popup::Error text +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:695 +msgid "FTP proxy URL must contain a scheme specification (http)." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: no proxy domain is a domain that can be accessed without proxy +#: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:705 +msgid "" +"One or more no proxy domains are invalid. \n" +"Check if all domains match one of the following:\n" +"* IP address\n" +"* IP address/netmask\n" +"* Fully qualified hostname\n" +"* Domain name prefixed by '.'" +msgstr "" + +#. Return a modification status +#. @return true if data was modified +#: src/lib/proxy/auto_client.rb:104 +msgid "Status of Proxy Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/proxy/auto_client.rb:105 +msgid "Enabled" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/proxy/auto_client.rb:107 +msgid "HTTP" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/proxy/auto_client.rb:111 +msgid "HTTPS" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/proxy/auto_client.rb:115 +msgid "FTP" +msgstr "" + +#. command-line help +#: src/lib/proxy/client.rb:35 +msgid "Enable proxy settings" +msgstr "" + +#. command-line help +#: src/lib/proxy/client.rb:43 +msgid "Disable proxy settings" +msgstr "" + +#. command-line help +#: src/lib/proxy/client.rb:51 +msgid "Change the current proxy settings" +msgstr "" + +#. command-line help +#: src/lib/proxy/client.rb:61 +msgid "Set the authentication for proxy" +msgstr "" + +#. command-line help +#: src/lib/proxy/client.rb:71 +msgid "Show the summary of the current settings" +msgstr "" + +#. command-line option help +#: src/lib/proxy/client.rb:83 +msgid "Set HTTP proxy" +msgstr "" + +#. command-line option help +#: src/lib/proxy/client.rb:88 +msgid "Set HTTPS proxy" +msgstr "" + +#. command-line option help +#: src/lib/proxy/client.rb:93 +msgid "Set FTP proxy" +msgstr "" + +#. command-line option help +#: src/lib/proxy/client.rb:98 +msgid "Clear all options listed" +msgstr "" + +#. command-line option help +#: src/lib/proxy/client.rb:102 +msgid "Set domains for not using the proxy settings" +msgstr "" + +#. command-line option help +#: src/lib/proxy/client.rb:109 +msgid "The username to be used for proxy authentication" +msgstr "" + +#. command-line option help +#: src/lib/proxy/client.rb:116 +msgid "The password to be used for proxy authentication" +msgstr "" + +#. ask the user +#. translators: command line prompt for entering a password +#: src/lib/proxy/client.rb:233 +msgid "Password:" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup headline +#: src/modules/Proxy.rb:38 +msgid "Proxy Configuration Successfully Saved" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Proxy.rb:39 +msgid "It is recommended to relogin to make new proxy settings effective." +msgstr "" + +#. Write proxy settings and apply changes +#. @return true if success +#: src/modules/Proxy.rb:174 +msgid "Update proxy configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Proxy.rb:176 +msgid "Saving Proxy Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. sleep for longer time, so that progress does not disappear right afterwards +#. but only when Progress is visible +#: src/modules/Proxy.rb:184 +msgid "Updating proxy configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. Summary text +#: src/modules/Proxy.rb:418 +msgid "Proxy is disabled." +msgstr "" + +#. Summary text +#: src/modules/Proxy.rb:423 +msgid "Proxy is enabled." +msgstr "" + +#. Summary text +#: src/modules/Proxy.rb:432 +msgid "HTTP Proxy: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. Summary text +#: src/modules/Proxy.rb:440 +msgid "HTTPS Proxy: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. Summary text +#: src/modules/Proxy.rb:447 +msgid "FTP Proxy: %1" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/qt-pkg.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/qt-pkg.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/qt-pkg.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,1558 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-09-28 18:16+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:318 +msgid "&Update Problems" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:345 +msgid "Patter&ns" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:367 +msgid "Package &Groups" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:379 +msgid "&RPM Groups" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:392 +msgid "&Languages" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:408 +msgid "&Repositories" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:422 +msgid "S&earch" +msgstr "" + +#. DEBUG +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:429 src/YQPkgSearchFilterView.cc:114 +msgid "&Keywords" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:438 +msgid "&Installation Summary" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:526 +msgid "D&escription" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:539 +msgid "&Technical Data" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:552 src/YQPkgProductDialog.cc:115 +msgid "Dependencies" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:567 +msgid "&Versions" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:585 +msgid "File List" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:602 +msgid "Change Log" +msgstr "" + +#. "Cancel" button +#. button #0 +#. text +#. button #0 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:629 src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:194 +#: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:249 src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:305 +#: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:326 src/YQPatternSelector.cc:259 +#: src/YQPkgConflictDialog.cc:163 src/YQPkgConflictDialog.cc:398 +#: src/YQPkgSearchFilterView.cc:249 src/YQPkgTextDialog.cc:258 +#: src/YQPkgVersionsView.cc:413 src/YQSimplePatchSelector.cc:219 +msgid "&Cancel" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: "Accept" here refers to licenses or similar +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:639 src/YQPatternSelector.cc:268 +#: src/YQPkgTextDialog.cc:258 src/YQSimplePatchSelector.cc:228 +msgid "&Accept" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:682 +msgid "&File" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:684 +msgid "&Import..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:685 +msgid "&Export..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:689 +msgid "E&xit -- Discard Changes" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:690 +msgid "&Quit -- Save Changes" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:702 +msgid "&Package" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:742 src/YQPkgPackageKitGroupsFilterView.cc:92 +#: src/YQPkgRepoFilterView.cc:149 +msgid "All Packages" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:744 src/YQPkgObjList.cc:430 +msgid "Update if newer version available" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:747 src/YQPkgObjList.cc:415 +#: src/YQPkgObjList.cc:436 +msgid "Update unconditionally" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:761 +msgid "&Patch" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:788 +msgid "Confi&guration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:789 +msgid "&Repositories..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:790 +msgid "&Online Update..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:800 +msgid "&Dependencies" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:802 +msgid "&Check Now" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:804 +msgid "&Autocheck" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:809 +msgid "Install &Recommended Packages" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Menu for view options (Use a noun, not a verb!) +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:822 +msgid "&Options" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: This is about packages ending in "-devel", so don't translate that "-devel"! +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:825 +msgid "Show -de&vel Packages" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: This is about packages ending in "-debuginfo", so don't translate that "-debuginfo"! +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:834 +msgid "Show -&debuginfo/-debugsource Packages" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:842 +msgid "&System Verification Mode" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:847 +msgid "&Cleanup when deleting packages" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:851 +msgid "&Allow vendor change" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:864 +msgid "E&xtras" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:866 +msgid "Show &Products" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:867 +msgid "Show P&ackage Changes" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:868 +msgid "Show &History" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: This is about packages ending in "-devel", so don't translate that "-devel"! +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:876 +msgid "Install All Matching -&devel Packages" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: This is about packages ending in "-debuginfo", so don't translate that "-debuginfo"! +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:880 +msgid "Install All Matching -de&buginfo Packages" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: This is about packages ending in "-debugsource", so don't translate that "-debugsource"! +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:883 +msgid "Install All Matching -debug&source Packages" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:885 +msgid "Install All Matching &Recommended Packages" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:891 +msgid "Generate Dependency Resolver &Test Case" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:911 +msgid "&Help" +msgstr "" + +#. Note: The help functions and their texts are moved out +#. to a separate source file YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc +#. Menu entry for help overview +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:917 +msgid "&Overview" +msgstr "" + +#. Menu entry for help about used symbols ( icons ) +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:920 +msgid "&Symbols" +msgstr "" + +#. Menu entry for keyboard help +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:923 +msgid "&Keys" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1109 +msgid "All package dependencies are OK." +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1125 +msgid "P&atches" +msgstr "" + +#. startsWith +#. filter +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1187 +msgid "Save Package List" +msgstr "" + +#. Post error popup +#. parent +#. Post error popup. +#. parent +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1226 src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1320 +#: src/YQPkgConflictDialog.cc:425 src/YQPkgConflictList.cc:201 +#: src/YQPkgList.cc:605 +msgid "Error" +msgstr "" + +#. caption +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1227 +msgid "Error exporting package list to %1" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1239 +msgid "Load Package List" +msgstr "" + +#. caption +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1321 +msgid "Error loading package list from %1" +msgstr "" + +#. caption +#. Translators: %1 is the number of affected packages +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1423 +msgid "%1 packages will be updated" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1424 +msgid "&Continue" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1424 +msgid "C&ancel" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1463 +msgid "<p><small>Cancel switching</a> system packages to versions in repository %2</small></p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1482 +msgid "<p>Switch system packages</a> to the versions in this repository (%2)</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1571 src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1726 +msgid "Added Subpackages:" +msgstr "" + +#. "OK" button +#. addHStretch( hbox ); +#. "OK" button +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1572 src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1728 +#: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:214 src/YQPkgDescriptionDialog.cc:120 +#: src/YQPkgDiskUsageList.cc:156 src/YQPkgDiskUsageList.cc:165 +#: src/YQPkgProductDialog.cc:135 src/YQPkgTextDialog.cc:71 +msgid "&OK" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:93 +msgid "Reset &Ignored Dependency Conflicts" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:164 +msgid "System dependencies verify OK." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: RichText ( HTML-like ) format +#: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:185 +msgid "Error: Out of disk space!" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:186 +msgid "<p>You can choose to install anyway if you know what you are doing, but you risk getting a corrupted system that requires manual repairs. If you are not absolutely sure how to handle such a case, press <b>Cancel</b> now and deselect some packages.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:194 +msgid "C&ontinue Anyway" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:208 +msgid "The following items will be changed: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:248 +msgid "Abandon all changes?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:249 +msgid "&Abandon" +msgstr "" + +#. Dialog header +#: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:297 src/YQPkgChangesDialog.cc:116 +msgid "Automatic Changes" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:301 +msgid "In addition to your manual selections, the following packages have been changed to resolve dependencies:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:305 src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:326 +#: src/YQPkgConflictDialog.cc:397 src/YQPkgVersionsView.cc:412 +msgid "C&ontinue" +msgstr "" + +#. Dialog header +#: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:318 +msgid "Unsupported Packages" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:322 +msgid "Please realize that the following selected software is either unsupported or requires an additional customer contract for support." +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:421 +msgid "Not implemented yet. Sorry." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Headline for help about the package manager in general +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:62 +msgid "The YaST Package Manager" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:65 +msgid "<b>Note:</b> This is a just a short overview. Refer to the manual for details." +msgstr "" + +#. Help specific to online update mode +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:72 +msgid "In this dialog, select patches to download and install." +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:73 +msgid "The list on the left side contains available patches along with the respective patch kind (security, recommended, or optional) and the (estimated) download size." +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:76 +msgid "This list normally contains only those patches that are not installed on your system yet. You can change that with the <b>Include Installed Patches</b> check box below the list." +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:78 +msgid "The <b>Patch Description</b> field contains a longer explanation of the currently selected patch. Click a patch in the list to view its description here." +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:80 +msgid "The package list on the right side shows the contents of the currently selected patch, i.e., the packages it contains. You cannot install or delete individual packages from a patch, only the patch as a whole. This is intentional to avoid system inconsistencies." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Please keep the reference to "filter views" to distinguish between "filter views" that +#. affect the amount of visible packages in the package list and "details views" ( below the package list ) +#. that show details about the ( one ) currently selected package in the package list. +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:88 +msgid "In addition to <b>Patches</b>, you can also select one of the other filter views from <b>Filter</b> at the upper left:" +msgstr "" + +#. Help specific to normal (non-online-update) mode +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:96 +msgid "In this dialog, select which packages to install, update, or delete. You can select individual packages or entire package \"selections\"." +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:98 +msgid "Click the status icon for a package or selection to change the status or right-click it to open a context menu." +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:100 +msgid "Use the <b>Check Dependencies</b> button to resolve package dependencies. Some packages require other packages to be installed. Some packages can only be installed if certain other packages are not installed, too. This check will automatically mark required packages for installation and it will warn you if there are dependency conflicts." +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:105 +msgid "When you leave this dialog with <b>Accept</b>, this check will automatically be performed." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Please keep the reference to "filter views" to distinguish between "filter views" that +#. affect the amount of visible packages in the package list and "details views" (below the package list) +#. that show details about the (one) currently selected package in the package list. +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:111 +msgid "Select one of the available filter views with the <b>Filter</b> combo-box at the upper left:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:115 +msgid "<b>Selections</b> shows some predefined sets of packages that logically belong together." +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:116 +msgid "Use the check box next to the selection to select it as a whole. You can also select or deselect individual packages in the package list at the right." +msgstr "" + +#. Help common to all modes: Description of the various filter views +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:124 +msgid "<b>Package Groups</b> shows packages by category. You can expand and collapse tree items to refine or generalize categories. Click any category to display the packages in that category in the package list on the right side." +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:127 +msgid " <b>Hint:</b> There is a \"zzz All\" entry at the very end of the list that will show all packages. This may take a few seconds on slow machines." +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:130 +msgid "<b>Search</b> allows you to search for packages that meet various criteria. This is usually the easiest way to find a package if you know its name." +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:132 +msgid "<b>Hint:</b> You can also use this to find out what package contains a certain library. Search in the <b>Provides</b> RPM field." +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:135 +msgid "<b>Installation Summary</b> by default shows the changes to your system -- what packages will be installed, deleted, or updated." +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:137 +msgid "It is generally a good idea to use <b>Check Dependencies</b> then switch to <b>Installation Summary</b> before clicking <b>Accept</b>. This way you can see all changes that will be made to your system." +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:140 +msgid "You can also explicitly select what packages with what status to see here; use the check boxes at the left side." +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:142 +msgid "<b>Hint:</b> You can also reverse the effect of this filter. You can see what packages remain the same on your system. Simply check <b>Keep</b> and uncheck everything else." +msgstr "" + +#. Make sure all images used here are specified in +#. helpimages_DATA in include/Makefile.am ! +#. Translators: Headline for help about package status icons +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:159 +msgid "Symbols Overview" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Package status short (!) description +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:166 src/YQPkgStatusFilterView.cc:108 +msgid "Do not install" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:168 +msgid "This package is not installed and it will not be installed." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Package status short (!) description +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:172 src/YQPkgObjList.cc:278 +#: src/YQPkgStatusFilterView.cc:95 +msgid "Install" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:174 +msgid "This package will be installed. It is not installed yet." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Package status short (!) description +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:178 src/YQPkgObjList.cc:279 +#: src/YQPkgStatusFilterView.cc:107 +msgid "Keep" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:180 +msgid "This package is already installed. Leave it untouched." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Package status short (!) description +#. Translators: Keyboard action short (!) description +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:184 src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:293 +#: src/YQPkgObjList.cc:283 src/YQPkgStatusFilterView.cc:96 +msgid "Update" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:186 +msgid "This package is already installed. Update it or reinstall it (if the versions are the same)." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Package status short (!) description +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:191 src/YQPkgObjList.cc:277 +#: src/YQPkgStatusFilterView.cc:94 +msgid "Delete" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:193 +msgid "This package is already installed. Delete it." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Package status short (!) description +#. Translators: Keyboard action short (!) description +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:197 src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:310 +#: src/YQPkgStatusFilterView.cc:100 +msgid "Taboo" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:199 +msgid "This package is not installed and should not be installed under any circumstances, especially not because of unresolved dependencies that other packages might have or get." +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:203 src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:316 +msgid "Packages set to \"taboo\" are treated as if they did not exist on any installation media." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Package status short (!) description +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:207 src/YQPkgStatusFilterView.cc:101 +msgid "Protected" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:209 +msgid "This package is installed and should not be modified, especially not because of unresolved dependencies that other packages might have or get." +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:213 +msgid "Use this status for third-party packages that should not be overwritten by newer versions that may come with the distribution." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Package status short (!) description +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:218 src/YQPkgObjList.cc:275 +#: src/YQPkgStatusFilterView.cc:98 +msgid "Autoinstall" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:220 +msgid "This package will be installed automatically because some other package needs it." +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:222 +msgid "<b>Hint:</b> You may have to use \"taboo\" to get rid of such a package." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Package status short (!) description +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:226 src/YQPkgObjList.cc:276 +#: src/YQPkgStatusFilterView.cc:99 +msgid "Autoupdate" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:228 +msgid "This package is already installed, but some other package needs a newer version, so it will automatically be updated." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Package status short (!) description +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:233 src/YQPkgObjList.cc:274 +#: src/YQPkgStatusFilterView.cc:97 +msgid "Autodelete" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:235 +msgid "This package is already installed, but package dependencies require that it is deleted." +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:236 +msgid "This can happen, for example, if some other package obsoletes this one." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Headline for help about "magic keys" in the package manager +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:265 +msgid "Special Keys Overview" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Additional hint that will be added to any of the following keyboard actions. +#. Automatic word wrapping. +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:269 +msgid "In any case, go to the next list item." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Keyboard action short (!) description +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:276 +msgid "Add" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:278 +msgid "Get this package. Install it if it is not installed yet. Update it to the latest version if it is installed and there is a newer version." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Keyboard action short (!) description +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:285 +msgid "Remove" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:287 +msgid "Get rid of this package. Mark it as \"do not install\" if it is not installed yet. Delete it if it is installed." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:295 +msgid "Update this package if it is installed and there is a newer version. Ignore packages that are not installed." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Keyboard action short (!) description +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:302 +msgid "Undo Update" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:304 +msgid "Undo the effect of \">\" above: Set package to \"keep\" if it is currently set to \"update\". Ignore all other packages." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:312 +msgid "Set this package to \"taboo\" if it is not installed: make sure this package does not get installed, especially not because of unresolved dependencies that other packages might have or get. " +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Keyboard action short (!) description +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:322 +msgid "Protect" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:324 +msgid "Set this package to \"protected\" if it is installed: make sure this package will not be modified, especially not because of unresolved dependencies that other packages might have or get. " +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:328 +msgid "Use this for third-party packages that should not be overwritten by newer versions that may come with the distribution." +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPatternSelector.cc:180 src/YQPatternSelector.cc:248 +#: src/YQSimplePatchSelector.cc:182 src/YQSimplePatchSelector.cc:208 +msgid "&Details..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgChangeLogView.cc:87 src/YQPkgFileListView.cc:94 +msgid "Information only available for installed packages." +msgstr "" + +#. Dialog title +#: src/YQPkgChangesDialog.cc:76 +msgid "Changed Packages" +msgstr "" + +#. add the items. +#: src/YQPkgChangesDialog.cc:114 +msgid "All" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgChangesDialog.cc:115 +msgid "Selected by the user" +msgstr "" + +#. Set the dialog title. +#. +#. "Dependency conflict" is already used as the conflict list header just +#. some pixels below that, so don't use this twice. This dialog title may +#. or may not be visible, depending on whether or not there is a window +#. manager running (and configured to show any dialog titles). +#: src/YQPkgConflictDialog.cc:98 +msgid "Warning" +msgstr "" + +#. "OK" button +#: src/YQPkgConflictDialog.cc:134 +msgid "&OK -- Try Again" +msgstr "" + +#. "Expert" menu button +#: src/YQPkgConflictDialog.cc:145 +msgid "&Expert" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgConflictDialog.cc:157 +msgid "&Save This List to a File..." +msgstr "" + +#. Busy popup +#: src/YQPkgConflictDialog.cc:174 +msgid "Checking Dependencies..." +msgstr "" + +#. Heading for popup dialog +#: src/YQPkgConflictDialog.cc:388 +msgid "Create Dependency Resolver Test Case" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgConflictDialog.cc:391 +msgid "<p>Use this to generate extensive logs to help tracking down bugs in the dependency resolver. The logs will be stored in directory <br><tt>%1</tt></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. parent +#: src/YQPkgConflictDialog.cc:395 +msgid "Solver Test Case" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgConflictDialog.cc:410 +msgid "<p>Dependency resolver test case written to <br><tt>%1</tt></p><p>Prepare <tt>y2logs.tgz tar</tt> archive to attach to Bugzilla?</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. parent +#: src/YQPkgConflictDialog.cc:413 +msgid "Success" +msgstr "" + +#. caption +#: src/YQPkgConflictDialog.cc:426 +msgid "<p><b>Error</b> creating dependency resolver test case</p><p>Please check disk space and permissions for <tt>%1</tt></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. startsWith +#. filter +#: src/YQPkgConflictList.cc:180 +msgid "Save Conflicts List" +msgstr "" + +#. caption +#: src/YQPkgConflictList.cc:202 src/YQPkgList.cc:606 +msgid "Cannot open file %1" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgConflictList.cc:292 +msgid "Conflict Resolution:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgConflictList.cc:329 +msgid "<a href='/'>%1 more...</a>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgDependenciesView.cc:104 src/YQPkgDependenciesView.cc:134 +#: src/YQPkgTechnicalDetailsView.cc:154 src/YQPkgTechnicalDetailsView.cc:196 +msgid "Version:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgDependenciesView.cc:106 src/YQPkgDependenciesView.cc:136 +msgid "Provides:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgDependenciesView.cc:107 src/YQPkgDependenciesView.cc:137 +msgid "Prerequires:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgDependenciesView.cc:108 src/YQPkgDependenciesView.cc:138 +msgid "Requires:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgDependenciesView.cc:109 src/YQPkgDependenciesView.cc:139 +msgid "Conflicts:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgDependenciesView.cc:110 src/YQPkgDependenciesView.cc:140 +msgid "Obsoletes:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgDependenciesView.cc:111 src/YQPkgDependenciesView.cc:141 +msgid "Recommends:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgDependenciesView.cc:112 src/YQPkgDependenciesView.cc:142 +msgid "Suggests:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgDependenciesView.cc:113 src/YQPkgDependenciesView.cc:143 +msgid "Enhances:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgDependenciesView.cc:114 src/YQPkgDependenciesView.cc:144 +msgid "Supplements:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgDependenciesView.cc:127 src/YQPkgTechnicalDetailsView.cc:189 +msgid "<b>Alternate Version</b>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgDependenciesView.cc:128 src/YQPkgTechnicalDetailsView.cc:190 +msgid "<b>Installed Version</b>" +msgstr "" + +#. Dialog title +#: src/YQPkgDescriptionDialog.cc:72 +msgid "Package Description" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgDescriptionView.cc:114 +msgid "References:" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: %1 contains the support level like "Level 3", "unsupported" or "unknown" +#: src/YQPkgDescriptionView.cc:133 +msgid "Supportability: %1" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgDescriptionView.cc:262 +msgid "This package contains: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgDiskUsageList.cc:155 +msgid "<b>Error:</b> Out of disk space!" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgDiskUsageList.cc:164 +msgid "<b>Warning:</b> Disk space is running out!" +msgstr "" + +#. Dialog title +#: src/YQPkgDiskUsageWarningDialog.cc:71 +msgid "Disk Space Warning" +msgstr "" + +#. %1 is the total number of files in a file list +#: src/YQPkgFileListView.cc:130 +msgid "%1 files total" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Button with pop-up menu to open a new page (very much like +#. in a web browser) with another package filter view or to switch to an +#. existing one if it's open already +#: src/YQPkgFilterTab.cc:172 src/YQPkgFilterTab.cc:176 +msgid "&View" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgFilterTab.cc:530 +msgid "Move page &left" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgFilterTab.cc:540 +msgid "Move page &right" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgFilterTab.cc:547 +msgid "&Close page" +msgstr "" + +#. Dialog title +#: src/YQPkgHistoryDialog.cc:83 +msgid "Package History" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgHistoryDialog.cc:98 +msgid "Show History (/var/log/zypp/history)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgHistoryDialog.cc:110 +msgid "Date" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgHistoryDialog.cc:114 +msgid "Action" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgHistoryDialog.cc:114 +msgid "Version/URL" +msgstr "" + +#. "OK" button +#: src/YQPkgHistoryDialog.cc:131 +msgid "&Close" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: This is a (short) text indicating that something went +#. wrong while trying to read history file. +#: src/YQPkgHistoryDialog.cc:268 +msgid "Unable to read history" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Table column heading for language ISO code like "de_DE", "en_US" +#. Please keep this short to avoid stretching the column too wide! +#: src/YQPkgLangList.cc:70 +msgid "Code" +msgstr "" + +#. Full (human readable) language / country name like "German (Austria)" +#: src/YQPkgLangList.cc:73 +msgid "Language" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgList.cc:84 src/YQPkgList.cc:626 +msgid "Package" +msgstr "" + +#. headers << _( "Patch" ); _nameCol = numCol++; +#: src/YQPkgList.cc:85 src/YQPkgList.cc:627 src/YQPkgPatchList.cc:114 +#: src/YQPkgProductList.cc:66 +msgid "Summary" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgList.cc:90 src/YQPkgList.cc:628 +msgid "Installed (Available)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgList.cc:94 +msgid "Avail. Ver." +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgList.cc:97 +msgid "Inst. Ver." +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgList.cc:103 src/YQPkgProductList.cc:67 +msgid "Version" +msgstr "" + +#. headers << _( "Source" ); _srpmStatusCol = numCol++; +#: src/YQPkgList.cc:108 src/YQPkgList.cc:629 +msgid "Size" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgList.cc:247 src/YQPkgList.cc:517 src/YQPkgObjList.cc:579 +#: src/YQPkgPatchList.cc:436 +msgid "&All in This List" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgList.cc:474 src/YQPkgList.cc:495 +msgid "Export This List to &Text File..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgList.cc:526 +msgid "&Install Source" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgList.cc:530 +msgid "Do &Not Install Source" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgList.cc:534 +msgid "&Install All Available Sources" +msgstr "" + +#. key +#. enabled +#: src/YQPkgList.cc:540 +msgid "Do &Not Install Any Sources" +msgstr "" + +#. startsWith +#. filter +#: src/YQPkgList.cc:582 +msgid "Export Package List" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgList.cc:625 +#, c-format +msgid "Status" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgList.cc:887 +msgid "Install Sources" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgList.cc:888 +msgid "Do Not Install Sources" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgList.cc:892 +msgid "No Sources Available" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgList.cc:907 +msgid "Installed Version: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: This is the relation between two versions of one package +#. if both versions are the same, e.g., both "1.2.3-42", "1.2.3-42" +#: src/YQPkgList.cc:925 +msgid "same" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgList.cc:927 +msgid "newer" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgList.cc:928 +msgid "older" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: %1 is the version, %2 is one of "newer", "older", "same" +#: src/YQPkgList.cc:931 +msgid "Available Version: %1 (%2)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgList.cc:935 +msgid "Not available for installation" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgObjList.cc:280 +msgid "Do Not Install" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgObjList.cc:281 +msgid "Protected -- Do Not Modify" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgObjList.cc:282 +msgid "Taboo -- Never Install" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgObjList.cc:422 +msgid "Show solver information" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Additional hint what caused an auto-status +#: src/YQPkgObjList.cc:1472 +msgid "(by a software selection)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgObjList.cc:1474 +msgid "(by dependencies)" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: tool tip for patches / patterns that are installed, +#. but whose dependencies are broken (no longer satisfied) +#: src/YQPkgObjList.cc:1490 +msgid "Dependencies broken" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: tool tip for patches / patterns that are not installed, +#. but whose dependencies are satisfied +#: src/YQPkgObjList.cc:1500 +msgid "All dependencies satisfied" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPackageKitGroupsFilterView.cc:62 +msgid "Accessibility" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPackageKitGroupsFilterView.cc:63 +msgid "Accessories" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPackageKitGroupsFilterView.cc:64 +msgid "Education" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPackageKitGroupsFilterView.cc:65 +msgid "Games" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPackageKitGroupsFilterView.cc:66 +msgid "Graphics" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPackageKitGroupsFilterView.cc:67 +msgid "Internet" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPackageKitGroupsFilterView.cc:68 +msgid "Office" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPackageKitGroupsFilterView.cc:69 +msgid "Other" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPackageKitGroupsFilterView.cc:70 +msgid "Programming" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPackageKitGroupsFilterView.cc:71 +msgid "Multimedia" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPackageKitGroupsFilterView.cc:72 +msgid "System" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPackageKitGroupsFilterView.cc:73 +msgid "GNOME Desktop" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPackageKitGroupsFilterView.cc:74 +msgid "KDE Desktop" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPackageKitGroupsFilterView.cc:75 +msgid "XFCE Desktop" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPackageKitGroupsFilterView.cc:76 +msgid "Other Desktops" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPackageKitGroupsFilterView.cc:77 +msgid "Publishing" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPackageKitGroupsFilterView.cc:78 +msgid "Servers" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPackageKitGroupsFilterView.cc:79 +msgid "Fonts" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPackageKitGroupsFilterView.cc:80 +msgid "Admin Tools" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPackageKitGroupsFilterView.cc:81 +msgid "Legacy" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPackageKitGroupsFilterView.cc:82 +msgid "Localization" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPackageKitGroupsFilterView.cc:83 +msgid "Virtualization" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPackageKitGroupsFilterView.cc:84 +msgid "Security" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPackageKitGroupsFilterView.cc:85 +msgid "Power Management" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPackageKitGroupsFilterView.cc:86 +msgid "Communication" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPackageKitGroupsFilterView.cc:87 +msgid "Network" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPackageKitGroupsFilterView.cc:88 +msgid "Maps" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPackageKitGroupsFilterView.cc:89 +msgid "Software Sources" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPackageKitGroupsFilterView.cc:90 +#: src/YQPkgPackageKitGroupsFilterView.cc:102 +msgid "Unknown Group" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPackageKitGroupsFilterView.cc:93 +msgid "Suggested Packages" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPackageKitGroupsFilterView.cc:94 +msgid "Recommended Packages" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPackageKitGroupsFilterView.cc:95 +msgid "Orphaned Packages" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPackageKitGroupsFilterView.cc:96 +msgid "Unneeded Packages" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPackageKitGroupsFilterView.cc:97 +msgid "Multiversion Packages" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPackageKitGroupsFilterView.cc:197 src/YQPkgRepoFilterView.cc:165 +#: src/YQPkgRpmGroupTagsFilterView.cc:59 +msgid "Package Groups" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPatchFilterView.cc:92 +msgid "&Show Patch Category:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPatchFilterView.cc:99 +msgid "Needed Patches" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPatchFilterView.cc:100 +msgid "Unneeded Patches" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPatchFilterView.cc:101 +msgid "All Patches" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPatchFilterView.cc:113 +msgid "Patch Description" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: These are patch categories +#. Dialog title +#: src/YQPkgPatchList.cc:614 src/YQPkgTextDialog.cc:100 +msgid "YaST" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPatchList.cc:615 +msgid "security" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPatchList.cc:616 +msgid "recommended" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPatchList.cc:617 +msgid "optional" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPatchList.cc:618 +msgid "document" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgPatternList.cc:170 +msgid "Pattern" +msgstr "" + +#. Dialog title +#: src/YQPkgProductDialog.cc:73 +msgid "Products" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgProductList.cc:65 +msgid "Product" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgProductList.cc:68 +msgid "Vendor" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: This is a combo box where the user can apply a secondary filter +#. in addition to the primary filter by repository - one of +#. "All packages", "RPM groups", "search", "summary" +#. +#. And yes, the colon really belongs there since this is one of the very +#. few cases where a combo box label is left to the combo box rather than +#. above it. +#: src/YQPkgRepoFilterView.cc:139 +msgid "&Secondary Filter:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgRepoFilterView.cc:157 +msgid "Unmaintained Packages" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgRepoFilterView.cc:177 +msgid "Search" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgRepoFilterView.cc:192 +msgid "Installation Summary" +msgstr "" + +#. Column headers for repository list +#: src/YQPkgRepoList.cc:76 +msgid "Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgRpmGroupTagsFilterView.cc:63 +msgid "zzz All" +msgstr "" + +#. Search button +#: src/YQPkgSearchFilterView.cc:93 +msgid "&Search" +msgstr "" + +#. +#. Where to search +#. +#: src/YQPkgSearchFilterView.cc:106 +msgid "Search in" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgSearchFilterView.cc:112 +msgid "Nam&e" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgSearchFilterView.cc:116 +msgid "Su&mmary" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgSearchFilterView.cc:118 +msgid "Descr&iption" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgSearchFilterView.cc:123 +msgid "RPM \"P&rovides\"" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgSearchFilterView.cc:125 +msgid "RPM \"Re&quires\"" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgSearchFilterView.cc:128 +msgid "File list" +msgstr "" + +#. +#. Search mode +#. +#: src/YQPkgSearchFilterView.cc:143 +msgid "Search &Mode:" +msgstr "" + +#. Caution: combo box items must be inserted in the same order as enum SearchMode! +#: src/YQPkgSearchFilterView.cc:156 +msgid "Contains" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgSearchFilterView.cc:157 +msgid "Begins with" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgSearchFilterView.cc:158 +msgid "Exact Match" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgSearchFilterView.cc:159 +msgid "Use Wild Cards" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgSearchFilterView.cc:160 +msgid "Use Regular Expression" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgSearchFilterView.cc:167 +msgid "Case Sensiti&ve" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgSearchFilterView.cc:248 +msgid "Searching..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgSearchFilterView.cc:334 +msgid "No Results." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: This is a (short) text indicating that something went +#. wrong while searching for packages. At this point, it is not clear +#. if it's a user error (e.g., syntax error in regular expression) or +#. an internal error. But there is a "Details" button that will return +#. the original (translated) error message. +#: src/YQPkgSearchFilterView.cc:349 +msgid "Query Error" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgSelList.cc:64 +msgid "Selection" +msgstr "" + +#. Headline +#: src/YQPkgStatusFilterView.cc:77 +msgid "Changes Overview" +msgstr "" + +#. +#. Packages with what status to show +#. +#: src/YQPkgStatusFilterView.cc:87 +msgid "Show packages with status" +msgstr "" + +#. Refresh button +#: src/YQPkgStatusFilterView.cc:120 +msgid "&Refresh List" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgTechnicalDetailsView.cc:155 src/YQPkgTechnicalDetailsView.cc:197 +msgid "Build Time:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgTechnicalDetailsView.cc:159 src/YQPkgTechnicalDetailsView.cc:198 +msgid "Install Time:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgTechnicalDetailsView.cc:161 src/YQPkgTechnicalDetailsView.cc:199 +msgid "Package Group:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgTechnicalDetailsView.cc:162 src/YQPkgTechnicalDetailsView.cc:200 +msgid "License:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgTechnicalDetailsView.cc:163 src/YQPkgTechnicalDetailsView.cc:201 +msgid "Installed Size:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgTechnicalDetailsView.cc:164 src/YQPkgTechnicalDetailsView.cc:202 +msgid "Download Size:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgTechnicalDetailsView.cc:165 src/YQPkgTechnicalDetailsView.cc:203 +msgid "Distribution:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgTechnicalDetailsView.cc:166 src/YQPkgTechnicalDetailsView.cc:204 +msgid "Vendor:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgTechnicalDetailsView.cc:167 src/YQPkgTechnicalDetailsView.cc:205 +msgid "Packager:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgTechnicalDetailsView.cc:168 src/YQPkgTechnicalDetailsView.cc:206 +msgid "Architecture:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgTechnicalDetailsView.cc:169 src/YQPkgTechnicalDetailsView.cc:207 +msgid "Build Host:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgTechnicalDetailsView.cc:170 src/YQPkgTechnicalDetailsView.cc:208 +msgid "URL:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgTechnicalDetailsView.cc:171 src/YQPkgTechnicalDetailsView.cc:209 +msgid "Source Package:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgTechnicalDetailsView.cc:172 src/YQPkgTechnicalDetailsView.cc:211 +msgid "Media No.:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgTechnicalDetailsView.cc:173 src/YQPkgTechnicalDetailsView.cc:212 +msgid "Authors:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgUpdateProblemFilterView.cc:60 +msgid "" +"<br>\n" +"<h2>Update Problem</h2>\n" +"<p>\n" +"The packages in this list cannot be updated automatically.\n" +"</p>\n" +"<p>Possible reasons:</p>\n" +"<ul>\n" +"<li>They are obsoleted by other packages\n" +"<li>There is no newer version to update to on any installation media\n" +"<li>They are third-party packages\n" +"</ul>\n" +"</p>\n" +"<p>\n" +"Please choose manually what to do with them.\n" +"The safest course of action is to delete them.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgVersionsView.cc:207 +msgid "%1-%2 from vendor %3 (installed)" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Popup dialog text. Try to keep the lines about the same length. +#: src/YQPkgVersionsView.cc:382 +msgid "" +"You are trying to install multiversion-capable\n" +"and non-multiversion-capable versions of this\n" +"package at the same time." +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgVersionsView.cc:390 +msgid "" +"This version is multiversion-capable.\n" +"\n" +"Press \"Continue\" to install this version\n" +"and unselect the non-multiversion-capable version,\n" +"\"Cancel\" to unselect this version and keep the other one." +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgVersionsView.cc:399 +msgid "" +"This version is not multiversion-capable.\n" +"\n" +"Press \"Continue\" to install only this version\n" +"and unselect all other versions,\n" +"\"Cancel\" to unselect this version and keep the other ones." +msgstr "" + +#. Dialog heading +#: src/YQPkgVersionsView.cc:407 +msgid "Incompatible Package Versions" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: %1 is a package version, %2 the package architecture, +#. %3 describes the repository where it comes from, +#. %4 is the repository's priority +#. %5 is the vendor of the package +#. Examples: +#. 2.5.23-i568 from Packman with priority 100 and vendor openSUSE +#. 3.17.4-i386 from openSUSE-11.1 update repository with priority 20 and vendor openSUSE +#. ^^^^^^ ^^^^ ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ ^^ ^^^^^^^^ +#. %1 %2 %3 %4 %5 +#: src/YQPkgVersionsView.cc:533 src/YQPkgVersionsView.cc:570 +msgid "%1-%2 from %3 with priority %4 and vendor %5" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQPkgVersionsView.cc:554 +msgid "This version is installed in your system." +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQZyppSolverDialogPluginStub.cc:86 +msgid "Missing package" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQZyppSolverDialogPluginStub.cc:87 +msgid "Package libqdialogsolver is required for this feature." +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/qt.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/qt.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/qt.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,152 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# +# Pashto Team , 2009, 2013. +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-11-30 17:31+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: \n" +"Language-Team: British English \n" +"Language: en_GB\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" +"X-Generator: Lokalize 1.5\n" + +#: src/QY2DiskUsageList.cc:180 +msgid "Name" +msgstr "نوم" + +#. Translators: Please keep this short! +#: src/QY2DiskUsageList.cc:182 +msgid "Disk Usage" +msgstr "د ډسک استعمال" + +#. columnLabels << _("Used"); _usedSizeCol = numCol++; +#: src/QY2DiskUsageList.cc:185 +msgid "Free" +msgstr "تش" + +#: src/QY2DiskUsageList.cc:186 +msgid "Total" +msgstr "ټول ټال" + +#: src/QY2DiskUsageList.cc:188 +msgid "Device" +msgstr "آله" + +#: src/QY2DiskUsageList.cc:256 +msgid "Used %1" +msgstr "په کار وړل شوی %1" + +#. Window title for help wizard window +#: src/QY2HelpDialog.cc:63 src/QY2HelpDialog.cc:112 +msgid "Help" +msgstr "مرسته" + +#. Close button for wizard help window +#: src/QY2HelpDialog.cc:66 src/QY2HelpDialog.cc:113 +#: src/QY2RelNotesDialog.cc:86 src/QY2RelNotesDialog.cc:132 +msgid "&Close" +msgstr "بندول(&C)" + +#. Window title for help wizard window +#: src/QY2RelNotesDialog.cc:83 src/QY2RelNotesDialog.cc:131 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Release Notes..." +msgid "Release Notes" +msgstr "د خپريدو يادښت" + +#: src/QY2StyleEditor.cc:46 +msgid "Stylesheet Editor" +msgstr "د ډولپاڼی سمون" + +#: src/YQApplication.cc:643 +msgid "" +"You clicked the right mouse button where a left-click was expected.\n" +"Switch left and right mouse buttons?" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup dialog caption +#: src/YQApplication.cc:656 +msgid "Unexpected Click" +msgstr "غير متوقع ټس" + +#. parent +#: src/YQDialog.cc:629 +msgid "Color switching" +msgstr "د رنګونو بدلول" + +#. caption +#: src/YQDialog.cc:630 +msgid "" +"Switching to color palette for vision impaired users -\n" +"press Shift-F4 again to switch back to normal colors." +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: This is a very short warning that the CapsLock key +#. is active while trying to type in a password field. This warning +#. replaces the normal label (caption) of that password field while +#. CapsLock is active, so please keep it short. Please don't translate it +#. at all if the term "CapsLock" can reasonably expected to be understood +#. by the target audience. +#. +#. In particular, please don't translate this to death in German. +#. Simply leave it. +#: src/YQInputField.cc:238 +msgid "CapsLock!" +msgstr "" + +#: src/YQUI_builtins.cc:163 +msgid "Save screen shot to..." +msgstr "د پردی په مخ انځور ثبتول..." + +#: src/YQUI_builtins.cc:280 +msgid "YaST Logging" +msgstr "د ياسټ پړاوليکنه" + +#: src/YQUI_builtins.cc:281 +msgid "Configure YaST Logging:" +msgstr "د ياسټ د پړاوليکنی عيارول" + +#. Help button +#. QT handles duplicate shortcuts, it can be kept (bnc#880983) +#. "Help" button +#. QT handles duplicate shortcuts, it can be kept (bnc#880983) +#: src/YQWizard.cc:857 src/YQWizard.cc:1340 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Help" +msgid "&Help" +msgstr "مرسته" + +#. +#. "Release Notes" button +#. +#. Release Notes button +#. QT handles duplicate shortcuts, it can be kept (bnc#880983) +#. "Release Notes" button +#. QT handles duplicate shortcuts, it can be kept (bnc#880983) +#: src/YQWizard.cc:874 src/YQWizard.cc:1355 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Release Notes..." +msgid "&Release Notes" +msgstr "د خپريدو يادښت" + +#. "Steps" button +#. QT handles duplicate shortcuts, it can be kept (bnc#880983) +#: src/YQWizard.cc:1345 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Steps" +msgid "&Steps" +msgstr "پړاونه" + +#. "Tree" button +#. QT handles duplicate shortcuts, it can be kept (bnc#880983) +#: src/YQWizard.cc:1350 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Tree" +msgid "&Tree" +msgstr "شجره" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/rdp.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/rdp.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/rdp.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,143 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. Commandline help title +#: src/clients/rdp.rb:33 +msgid "Remote Access Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Commandline command help +#: src/clients/rdp.rb:43 +msgid "Display configuration summary" +msgstr "" + +#. Commandline command help +#: src/clients/rdp.rb:53 +msgid "Allow remote access" +msgstr "" + +#. Commandline command help +#: src/clients/rdp.rb:64 +msgid "Set 'yes' to allow or 'no' to disallow the remote administration" +msgstr "" + +#. Command line output Headline +#: src/clients/rdp.rb:107 +msgid "Remote Access Configuration Summary:" +msgstr "" + +#. Command line error message +#: src/clients/rdp.rb:127 +msgid "" +"Please set 'yes' to allow the remote administration\n" +"or 'no' to disallow it." +msgstr "" + +#. RichText label +#: src/clients/rdp_proposal.rb:57 +msgid "RDP Remote Administration" +msgstr "" + +#. Menu label +#: src/clients/rdp_proposal.rb:59 +msgid "RDP &Remote Administration" +msgstr "" + +#. Ramote Administration dialog caption +#: src/include/rdp/dialogs.rb:27 +msgid "Remote Administration" +msgstr "" + +#. RadioButton label +#: src/include/rdp/dialogs.rb:33 +msgid "&Allow Remote Administration" +msgstr "" + +#. RadioButton label +#: src/include/rdp/dialogs.rb:39 +msgid "&Do Not Allow Remote Administration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/rdp/dialogs.rb:54 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Remote Administration Settings</big></b></p>\n" +"<p>If this feature is enabled, you can\n" +"administer this machine remotely from another machine. Use a RDP\n" +"client, such as rdesktop (connect to <tt><hostname>:%1</tt>).\n" +"This form of remote administration is less secure than using SSH.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Dialog frame title +#: src/include/rdp/dialogs.rb:72 +msgid "Remote Administration Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Dialog frame title +#: src/include/rdp/dialogs.rb:78 +msgid "Firewall Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1 +#: src/modules/RDP.rb:90 +msgid "Write firewall settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 2 +#: src/modules/RDP.rb:92 +msgid "Configure xrdp" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 3 +#: src/modules/RDP.rb:98 +msgid "Restart the services" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/RDP.rb:100 +msgid "Stop the services" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/RDP.rb:104 +msgid "Saving Remote Administration Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. 100; //for testing +#: src/modules/RDP.rb:109 +msgid "Writing firewall settings..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/RDP.rb:115 +msgid "Configuring xrdp..." +msgstr "" + +#. Disable xrdp +#: src/modules/RDP.rb:134 +msgid "Restarting the service..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/RDP.rb:137 +msgid "Stopping the service..." +msgstr "" + +#. Label in proposal text +#: src/modules/RDP.rb:153 +msgid "Remote administration is enabled." +msgstr "" + +#. Label in proposal text +#: src/modules/RDP.rb:156 +msgid "Remote administration is disabled." +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/rear.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/rear.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/rear.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,276 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. Command line help text for the Xrear module +#: src/clients/rear.rb:54 +msgid "Configuration of Rear" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'configure' action +#: src/clients/rear.rb:67 +msgid "Change the Rear configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/rear.rb:73 +msgid "Output" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/rear.rb:74 +msgid "Netfs URL" +msgstr "" + +#. Dialog shown, when system is not supported by rear +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:85 +msgid "This system is not supported by rear, because:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:90 +msgid "Do NOT expect the created backup to be useful for system recovery if you ignore this warning." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:104 +msgid "This system is not supported." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:108 +msgid "&Ignore and continue" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:109 src/include/rear/ui.rb:153 +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:253 +msgid "&Cancel" +msgstr "" + +#. store original value of directories for the case that the users clicks cancel +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:143 +msgid "Additional Directories to Backup" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:152 src/include/rear/ui.rb:252 +msgid "&OK" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:171 +msgid "Choose Directory" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:199 +msgid "Cannot write rear configuration file." +msgstr "" + +#. store original value of modules for the case that the users clicks cancel +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:221 +msgid "Additional Kernel Modules" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:228 +msgid "Available Modules in current System:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:245 +msgid "Modules added to Rescue System:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:250 +msgid "Modules are sorted in the order they were loaded." +msgstr "" + +#. Dialog to run rear +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:327 +msgid "Preparing for Rear Execution." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:348 +msgid "Running rear..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:372 +msgid "Execution failed with return value %1." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:381 +msgid "Finished. You are strongly advised to test the created backup." +msgstr "" + +#. For translators: Caption of the dialog +#. The whole sequence +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:416 src/include/rear/ui.rb:680 +msgid "Rear Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for Rear +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:419 +msgid "<p>Configure Rear Relax and Recover (<b>ReaR</b>) backup for your computer.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:422 +msgid "<p>Decide how to start your <b>Recovery System</b>. Choose USB if you want to boot from an USB stick, or ISO for CD-ROM respectively.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:425 +msgid "<p>Choose where the <b>Backup</b> should be stored. Select NFS if you have to use a server that offers Network File System. Please specify the location as follows: <tt>nfs://hostname/directory</tt>. You can also choose USB to store your backup on an USB stick or USB disk.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:428 +msgid "<p>If no USB devices are shown, attach an USB stick or an USB disk and click <b>Rescan USB Devices</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:431 +msgid "<p>Select <b>Keep old backup</b> if you don't want the previous backup copy to be overwritten.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:434 +msgid "<p>The <b>Advanced</b> menu offers to add <b>additional directories to the backup</b> and <b>additional kernel modules to the rescue system</b>. That's only useful if your backup doesn't contain all the needed directories or the rescue system doesn't boot due to missing kernel modules.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:437 +msgid "<p>The <b>Save and run rear now</b> button runs rear and shows rear's output. <strong>Make sure to test if the created backup works as expected on your system!</strong></p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:440 +msgid "<p><b>OK</b> saves the configuration and quits while <b>Cancel</b> closes the configuration dialog without saving.<p>" +msgstr "" + +#. prepare advanced menu +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:459 +msgid "Additional Directories in Backup" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:462 +msgid "Additional Kernel Modules in Rescue System" +msgstr "" + +#. prepare main dialog +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:472 +msgid "Recovery System" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:480 +msgid "&Boot Media" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:490 +msgid "Backup" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:498 +msgid "&Backup Media" +msgstr "" + +#. this flag ensures that the combox is correctly +#. refilled when the USB/NFS combobox is changed +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:507 src/include/rear/ui.rb:615 +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:629 +msgid "&Location" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:517 +msgid "&Keep old backup" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:521 +msgid "Rescan USB Devices" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:529 +msgid "Advanced" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:531 +msgid "Save and run rear now" +msgstr "" + +#. set settings according to options read from config file. +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:551 +msgid "BACKUP is set to an unknown value.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. choose selected option or fallback to "ISO" if nothing is set +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:564 +msgid "OUTPUT is set to an unknown value.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:581 +msgid "NETFS_URL is set to an unknown value or in wrong format.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:590 +msgid "Your rear configuration file contains options this YaST2 module cannot configure.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:595 +msgid "Do you want to continue and overwrite these settings?" +msgstr "" + +#. open run rear dialg, if usb boot medium is selected show a warning +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:640 +msgid "Your USB medium will be overwritten. Do you want to continue?" +msgstr "" + +#. true: read-only +#. Rear read dialog caption +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:691 +msgid "Reading Rear Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:698 +msgid "Analyzing system" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:698 +msgid "Reading rear settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:699 +msgid "Analyzing system..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:699 +msgid "Reading rear settings..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/rear/ui.rb:699 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#. check bootloader +#. returns error message if system is not supported +#: src/modules/RearSystemCheck.rb:56 src/modules/RearSystemCheck.rb:77 +msgid "Cannot figure out which bootloader is used." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/RearSystemCheck.rb:68 +msgid "Bootloader %1 is used." +msgstr "" + +#. check devices +#: src/modules/RearSystemCheck.rb:106 +msgid "Device %1 is iscsi." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/RearSystemCheck.rb:118 +msgid "Device %1 is multipath." +msgstr "" + +#. check partitions +#: src/modules/RearSystemCheck.rb:134 +msgid "Partition %1 is mounted by uuid." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/RearSystemCheck.rb:151 +msgid "Partition %1 uses an unsupported filesystem (%2)." +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/registration.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/registration.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/registration.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,1072 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-09-28 18:17+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. popup heading (in bold) +#: src/clients/discover_registration_services.rb:42 +msgid "Local Registration Servers" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/discover_registration_services.rb:44 +msgid "" +"Select a detected registration server from the list\n" +"or the default SUSE registration server." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/clients/discover_registration_services.rb:68 +msgid "No registration server selected." +msgstr "" + +#. %s is the default SCC URL +#: src/clients/discover_registration_services.rb:114 +msgid "SUSE Customer Center (%s)" +msgstr "" + +#. popup message +#. popup message +#. popup message +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:54 src/clients/scc_auto.rb:49 +#: src/lib/registration/registration_ui.rb:40 +msgid "Contacting the Registration Server" +msgstr "" + +#. check the base product at start to avoid problems later +#. Translators: Text for UI Label - capitalized +#. dialog title +#. just set an empty Wizard dialog to replace the current one after +#. pressing "Next" +#. dialog title +#. display and run a dialog for updating the current registration +#. @return [Symbol] user input +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:186 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:104 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/base_system_registration_dialog.rb:48 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/migration_repos_workflow.rb:287 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/registered_system_dialog.rb:37 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/registration_update_dialog.rb:41 +msgid "Registration" +msgstr "" + +#. Command line help text for the repository module, %1 is "SUSEconnect" +#. Command line help text for the repository module, %1 is "SUSEconnect" +#: src/clients/registration.rb:43 src/clients/scc.rb:43 +msgid "Use '%s' instead of this YaST module." +msgstr "" + +#. popup message: registration finished properly +#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:201 +msgid "Registration was successfull." +msgstr "" + +#. remove possible duplicates +#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:229 +msgid "SLP discovery failed, no server found" +msgstr "" + +#. download and install the specified SSL certificate to the system +#. @param url [String] URL of the certificate +#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:247 +msgid "Downloading SSL Certificate" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:251 +msgid "Importing SSL Certificate" +msgstr "" + +#. %s is name of given product +#. then register the product(s) +#. %s is name of given product +#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:326 src/lib/registration/registration_ui.rb:281 +#: src/lib/registration/registration_ui.rb:311 +msgid "Registering %s ..." +msgstr "" + +#. display the extension selection dialog and wait for a button click +#. @return [Symbol] user input (:import, :cancel) +#: src/data/registration/autoyast_summary.erb:5 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:55 +msgid "Product Registration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/data/registration/autoyast_summary.erb:9 +msgid "Run registration during autoinstallation" +msgstr "" + +#: src/data/registration/autoyast_summary.erb:10 +msgid "Skip registration during autoinstallation" +msgstr "" + +#: src/data/registration/autoyast_summary.erb:15 +msgid "Registration Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/data/registration/autoyast_summary.erb:17 +msgid "E-mail Address: %s" +msgstr "" + +#: src/data/registration/autoyast_summary.erb:19 +msgid "Registration Code is Configured" +msgstr "" + +#: src/data/registration/autoyast_summary.erb:23 +msgid "Install Available Updates" +msgstr "" + +#: src/data/registration/autoyast_summary.erb:27 +msgid "Registration Server" +msgstr "" + +#: src/data/registration/autoyast_summary.erb:30 +#: src/data/registration/autoyast_summary.erb:32 +msgid "Server URL: %s" +msgstr "" + +#: src/data/registration/autoyast_summary.erb:32 +msgid "Use SLP discovery" +msgstr "" + +#: src/data/registration/autoyast_summary.erb:36 +msgid "SSL Server Certificate URL: %s" +msgstr "" + +#: src/data/registration/autoyast_summary.erb:40 +msgid "SSL Certificate Fingerprint: %s" +msgstr "" + +#: src/data/registration/autoyast_summary.erb:48 +msgid "Extensions and Modules" +msgstr "" + +#: src/data/registration/certificate_error.erb:6 +msgid "Secure Connection Error" +msgstr "" + +#: src/data/registration/certificate_error.erb:10 +msgid "Details:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/data/registration/certificate_error.erb:14 +msgid "Failed Certificate Details" +msgstr "" + +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:4 +#: src/lib/registration/ssl_certificate_details.rb:34 +msgid "Issued To" +msgstr "" + +#. label followed by the SSL certificate identification +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:7 +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:16 +#: src/lib/registration/ssl_certificate_details.rb:60 +msgid "Common Name (CN): " +msgstr "" + +#. label followed by the SSL certificate identification +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:8 +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:17 +#: src/lib/registration/ssl_certificate_details.rb:62 +msgid "Organization (O): " +msgstr "" + +#. label followed by the SSL certificate identification +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:9 +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:18 +#: src/lib/registration/ssl_certificate_details.rb:64 +msgid "Organization Unit (OU): " +msgstr "" + +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:13 +#: src/lib/registration/ssl_certificate_details.rb:35 +msgid "Issued By" +msgstr "" + +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:22 +msgid "Validity" +msgstr "" + +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:26 +msgid "Issued On: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:29 +msgid "WARNING: The certificate is not valid yet!" +msgstr "" + +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:32 +msgid "Expires On: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:35 +msgid "WARNING: The certificate has expired!" +msgstr "" + +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:43 +msgid "Serial Number: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:44 +#: src/lib/registration/ssl_certificate_details.rb:35 +msgid "SHA1 Fingerprint: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:46 +#: src/lib/registration/ssl_certificate_details.rb:37 +msgid "SHA256 Fingerprint: " +msgstr "" + +#. Error popup +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:74 +msgid "" +"Network is not configured, the registration server cannot be reached.\n" +"Do you want to configure the network now?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:80 +msgid "Network error, check the network configuration." +msgstr "" + +#. Error popup +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:85 +msgid "Connection time out." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: additional hint for an error message +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:93 +msgid "Check that this system is known to the registration server." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: additional hint for an error message +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:99 +msgid "" +"If you are upgrading from SLE11 make sure the SCC server\n" +"knows the old NCC registration. Synchronization from NCC to SCC\n" +"might take very long time.\n" +"\n" +"If the SLE11 system was installed recently you could log into\n" +"%s to speed up the synchronization process.\n" +"Just wait several minutes after logging in and then retry \n" +"the upgrade again." +msgstr "" + +#. add the hint to the error details +#. update the message when an old SMT server is found +#. Error popup +#. update the message when an old SMT server is found +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:113 +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:118 +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:121 +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:128 +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:179 +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:182 +msgid "Registration failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:123 +msgid "Registration client error." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:125 +msgid "" +"Registration server error.\n" +"Retry registration later." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:167 +msgid "Received SSL Certificate does not match the expected certificate." +msgstr "" + +#. %s are error details +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:197 +msgid "Details: %s" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: multiline error message - a SSL certificate has been +#. imported but the registration server still cannot be accessed securely, +#. user has to solve the certificate issue manually. +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:226 +msgid "" +"A certificate has been already imported\n" +"but the server connection still cannot be trusted.\n" +"\n" +"Please fix the certificate issue manually, ensure that the server\n" +"can be connected securely and start the YaST module again." +msgstr "" + +#. progress label +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:238 +msgid "Importing the SSL certificate" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:239 +msgid "Importing '%s' certificate..." +msgstr "" + +#. try to use a translatable message first, if not found then use +#. the original error message from openSSL +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:260 +msgid "Secure connection error: %s" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: error message, %s is a server URL, +#. e.g. https://smt.example.com +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:279 +msgid "" +"An old registration server was detected at\n" +"%s.\n" +"Make sure the latest product supporting the new registration\n" +"protocol is installed at the server." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step title +#: src/lib/registration/finish_dialog.rb:35 +msgid "Storing Registration Configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/lib/registration/helpers.rb:231 +msgid "" +"The base product was not found,\n" +"check your system." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: %s = bugzilla URL +#: src/lib/registration/helpers.rb:235 +msgid "" +"The installation medium or the installer itself is seriously broken.\n" +"Report a bug at %s." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/registration/helpers.rb:238 +msgid "" +"Make sure a product is installed and /etc/products.d/baseproduct\n" +"is a symlink pointing to the base product .prod file." +msgstr "" + +#. FIXME: reused an existing message due to text freeze +#. (later use a better text, it's system update actually...) +#: src/lib/registration/registration_ui.rb:80 +#: src/lib/registration/registration_ui.rb:267 +msgid "Registering the System..." +msgstr "" + +#. updating base product registration, %s is a new base product name +#. updating product registration, %s is a product name +#. updating registered addon/extension, %s is an extension name +#. TRANSLATORS: Progress label +#: src/lib/registration/registration_ui.rb:106 +#: src/lib/registration/registration_ui.rb:146 +#: src/lib/registration/registration_ui.rb:346 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/migration_repos_workflow.rb:304 +msgid "Updating to %s ..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: progress label +#: src/lib/registration/registration_ui.rb:163 +msgid "Synchronizing Products..." +msgstr "" + +#. load available addons from SCC server +#. the result is cached to avoid reloading when going back and forth in the +#. installation workflow +#. @return [ArrayRegistration::Addon] available addons +#. download the addons from SCC, let the user select addons to install +#. @return [Symbol] the user input +#: src/lib/registration/registration_ui.rb:177 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_workflow.rb:106 +msgid "Loading Available Extensions and Modules..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/registration/registration_ui.rb:191 +msgid "Loading Migration Products..." +msgstr "" + +#. dialog title +#: src/lib/registration/registration_ui.rb:208 +msgid "Register Extensions and Modules" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/lib/registration/registration_ui.rb:212 +msgid "<p>Extensions and Modules are being registered.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: updates popup question (1/2), multiline, max. ~60 chars/line +#: src/lib/registration/registration_ui.rb:237 +msgid "" +"The registration server offers update repositories.\n" +"\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: updates popup question (2/2), multiline, max. ~60 chars/line +#: src/lib/registration/registration_ui.rb:241 +msgid "" +"Would you like to enable these repositories during installation\n" +"in order to receive the latest updates?" +msgstr "" + +#. Yast::Mode.update +#. TRANSLATORS: updates popup question (2/2), multiline, max. ~60 chars/line +#: src/lib/registration/registration_ui.rb:245 +msgid "" +"Would you like to enable these repositories during upgrade\n" +"in order to receive the latest updates?" +msgstr "" + +#. indent size used in summary text +#: src/lib/registration/ssl_certificate_details.rb:34 +msgid "Certificate:" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: error popup, %s is a repository name, the popup is displayed +#. when a migration repository cannot be accessed, there are [Skip] +#. and [Abort] buttons displayed below the question +#: src/lib/registration/sw_mgmt.rb:97 +msgid "" +"Repository '%s'\n" +"cannot be loaded.\n" +"\n" +"Skip the repository or abort?" +msgstr "" + +#. create UI label for a base product +#. @param base_product [Hash] Product (hash from pkg-bindings) +#. @return [String] UI Label +#: src/lib/registration/sw_mgmt.rb:192 +msgid "Unknown product" +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#. error message +#: src/lib/registration/sw_mgmt.rb:219 src/lib/registration/sw_mgmt.rb:292 +msgid "Saving repository configuration failed." +msgstr "" + +#. # error message +#. error message +#: src/lib/registration/sw_mgmt.rb:256 src/lib/registration/sw_mgmt.rb:267 +msgid "Updating service '%s' failed." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/lib/registration/sw_mgmt.rb:262 +msgid "Adding service '%s' failed." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/lib/registration/sw_mgmt.rb:274 +msgid "Saving service '%s' failed." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/lib/registration/sw_mgmt.rb:279 +msgid "Refreshing service '%s' failed." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: %s is a product name +#: src/lib/registration/sw_mgmt.rb:486 +msgid "" +"Cannot find remote product %s.\n" +"The product cannot be registered." +msgstr "" + +#. Use .AnyQuestion instead of .YesNo or .ReallyAbort to have full control +#. on :focus_no and be consistent with the .ConfirmAbort behavior +#: src/lib/registration/ui/abort_confirmation.rb:35 +msgid "Really abort?" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog title +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_eula_dialog.rb:43 +msgid "License Agreement" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_eula_dialog.rb:44 +msgid "Downloading Licenses..." +msgstr "" + +#. download the addon EULAs to a temp dir +#. @param [Addon] addon the addon +#. @param [String] tmpdir target where to download the files +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_eula_dialog.rb:75 +msgid "Downloading License Agreement..." +msgstr "" + +#. %s is an extension name, e.g. "SUSE Linux Enterprise Software Development Kit" +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_eula_dialog.rb:88 +msgid "" +"Downloading the license for\n" +"%s\n" +"failed." +msgstr "" + +#. %s is an extension name, e.g. "SUSE Linux Enterprise Software Development Kit" +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_eula_dialog.rb:102 +msgid "%s License Agreement" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog title +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_reg_codes_dialog.rb:46 +msgid "Extension and Module Registration Codes" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_reg_codes_dialog.rb:50 +msgid "" +"<p>Enter registration codes for the requested extensions or modules.</p>\n" +"<p>Registration codes are required for successfull registration.If you cannot provide a registration code then go back and deselect the respective extension or module.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. part of the UI - labels in the dialog +#. @return [ArrayYast::Term] UI definition +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_reg_codes_dialog.rb:102 +msgid "The extension you selected needs a separate registration code." +msgid_plural "The extensions you selected need separate registration codes." +msgstr[0] "" +msgstr[1] "" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_reg_codes_dialog.rb:111 +msgid "Enter the registration code into the field below." +msgid_plural "Enter the registration codes into the fields below." +msgstr[0] "" +msgstr[1] "" + +#. create the main dialog definition +#. @return [Yast::Term] the main UI dialog term +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_base_dialog.rb:77 +msgid "Details" +msgstr "" + +#. addon description widget +#. @return [Yast::Term] the addon details widget +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_base_dialog.rb:88 +msgid "Select an extension or a module to show details here" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label for an unavailable extension +#. (%s is an extension name) +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_base_dialog.rb:164 +msgid "%s (not available)" +msgstr "" + +#. check if the count of addons requiring a reg. code fits two columns +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_base_dialog.rb:246 +msgid "YaST allows to select at most %s extensions or modules." +msgstr "" + +#. help text (2/3) +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_base_dialog.rb:257 +msgid "<p>Please note, that some extensions or modules might need specific registration code.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text (3/3) +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_base_dialog.rb:260 +msgid "<p>If you want to remove any extension or module you need to loginto the SUSE Customer Center and remove them manually there.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog title +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_registration_dialog.rb:31 +msgid "Extension and Module Selection" +msgstr "" + +#. help text (1/3) +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_registration_dialog.rb:34 +msgid "<p>Here you can select available extensions and modules for yoursystem.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. @return [String] the main dialog label +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_registration_dialog.rb:52 +msgid "Available Extensions and Modules" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog title +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_reregistration_dialog.rb:37 +msgid "Extension and Module Re-registration" +msgstr "" + +#. help text (1/3) +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_reregistration_dialog.rb:40 +msgid "<p>Here you can select extensions and modules which will be registered again.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. @return [String] the main dialog label +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_reregistration_dialog.rb:54 +msgid "Registered Extensions and Modules" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:38 +msgid "<p>Here you can select which extensions or moduleswill be registered together with the base product.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:41 +msgid "Register Optional Extensions or Modules" +msgstr "" + +#. create the main dialog content +#. @return [Yast::Term] UI definition +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:57 +msgid "Identifier" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:58 +msgid "Version" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:59 +msgid "Architecture" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:60 +msgid "Release Type" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:61 +msgid "Registration Code" +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:72 +msgid "Download Available Extensions..." +msgstr "" + +#. remove the selected addon after user confirms the removal +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:137 +msgid "Really delete '%s'?" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog definition for adding/editing an addon +#. @return [Yast::Term] popup definition +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:185 +msgid "Extension or Module &Identifier" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:186 +msgid "&Version" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:187 +msgid "&Architecture" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:188 +msgid "&Release Type" +msgstr "" + +#. handle nil specifically, it cannot be stored in XML profile +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:191 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:108 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/base_system_registration_dialog.rb:133 +msgid "Registration &Code" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:57 +msgid "" +"<p>Product registration includes your product in SUSE Customer Center database,\n" +"enabling you to get online updates and technical support.\n" +"To register while installing automatically, select <b>Run Product Registration</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:63 +msgid "" +"<p>If your network deploys a custom registration server, set the correct URL of the server\n" +"and the location of the SMT certificate in <b>SMT Server Settings</b>. Refer\n" +"to your SMT manual for further assistance.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. the UI defition for the global registration status +#. @return [Yast::Term] UI term +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:93 +msgid "Register the Product" +msgstr "" + +#. part of the main dialog definition - the input fields +#. @return [Yast::Term] UI term +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:106 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/base_system_registration_dialog.rb:131 +msgid "&E-mail Address" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:112 +msgid "Install Available Updates from Update Repositories" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Text for UI Label - capitalized +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:128 +msgid "Server Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:132 +msgid "Find Registration Server Using SLP Discovery" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Text for UI Label - capitalized +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:137 +msgid "Use Specific Server URL Instead of the Default" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Text for UI Label - capitalized +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:144 +msgid "Optional SSL Server Certificate URL" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Text for UI Label - capitalized +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:153 +msgid "Optional SSL Server Certificate Fingerprint" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:155 +msgid "none" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Text for UI Label - capitalized +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:166 +msgid "SSL Certificate Fingerprint" +msgstr "" + +#. the UI defition for the main dialog +#. @return [Yast::Term] UI term +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:189 +msgid "Register Extensions or Modules..." +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/lib/registration/ui/base_system_registration_dialog.rb:84 +msgid "&Local Registration Server..." +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/lib/registration/ui/base_system_registration_dialog.rb:97 +msgid "&Skip Registration" +msgstr "" + +#. display the addon re-registration button only in registered installed system +#: src/lib/registration/ui/base_system_registration_dialog.rb:106 +msgid "&Register Extensions or Modules Again" +msgstr "" + +#. part of the main dialog definition - the base product details +#. @return [Yast::Term] UI term +#. the main dialog content +#. @return [Yast::Term] UI term +#: src/lib/registration/ui/base_system_registration_dialog.rb:118 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/registered_system_dialog.rb:67 +msgid "The system is already registered." +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/lib/registration/ui/base_system_registration_dialog.rb:142 +msgid "Enter SUSE Customer Center credentials here to register the system to get updates and extensions." +msgstr "" + +#. Popup question: confirm skipping the registration +#: src/lib/registration/ui/base_system_registration_dialog.rb:177 +msgid "" +"If you do not register your system we will not be able\n" +"to grant you access to the update repositories.\n" +"\n" +"You can register after the installation or visit our\n" +"Customer Center for online registration.\n" +"\n" +"Really skip the registration now?" +msgstr "" + +#. label text describing the registration (1/2) +#. use \n to split to more lines if needed (use max. 76 chars/line) +#: src/lib/registration/ui/base_system_registration_dialog.rb:194 +msgid "" +"Please enter a registration or evaluation code for this product and your\n" +"User Name/E-mail address from the SUSE Customer Center in the fields below.\n" +"Access to security and general software updates is only possible on\n" +"a registered system." +msgstr "" + +#. label text describing the registration (2/2), +#. not displayed in installed system +#. use \n to split to more lines if needed (use max. 76 chars/line) +#: src/lib/registration/ui/base_system_registration_dialog.rb:206 +msgid "" +"If you skip product registration now, remember to register after\n" +"installation has completed." +msgstr "" + +#. UI term for the network configuration button (or empty if not needed) +#. @return [Yast::Term] UI term +#: src/lib/registration/ui/base_system_registration_dialog.rb:218 +msgid "Network Configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. SSL error message +#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:23 +msgid "Certificate has expired" +msgstr "" + +#. SSL error message +#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:25 +msgid "Self signed certificate" +msgstr "" + +#. SSL error message +#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:27 +msgid "Self signed certificate in certificate chain" +msgstr "" + +#. push button +#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:74 +msgid "&Trust and Import" +msgstr "" + +#. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (1/5) +#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:122 +msgid "<p>Secure connection (HTTPS) uses SSL certificates for verifying the authenticity of the server and for encrypting the transferred data.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (2/5) +#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:126 +msgid "<p>You can choose to import the certificate it into the list of known certificate autohorities (CA), meaning that you trust the subject and the issuer of the unknown certificate.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (3/5) +#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:131 +msgid "<p>Importing a certificate will allow to use for example a self-signed certificate.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (4/5) +#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:135 +msgid "<p><b>Important:</b> You should verify the fingerprint of the certificate to be sure you import the genuine certificate from the requested server.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (5/5) +#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:140 +msgid "<p><b>Importing an unknown certificate without verification is a big security risk.</b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. error message, the entered URL is not valid +#: src/lib/registration/ui/local_server_dialog.rb:67 +msgid "Invalid URL." +msgstr "" + +#. input field label +#: src/lib/registration/ui/local_server_dialog.rb:106 +msgid "&Local Registration Server URL" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: error message, %s are details +#. TRANSLATORS: error message, %s are details +#: src/lib/registration/ui/media_addon_workflow.rb:95 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/wizard_client.rb:57 +msgid "Internal error: %s" +msgstr "" + +#. register the base system if not already registered +#: src/lib/registration/ui/media_addon_workflow.rb:132 +msgid "" +"The base system has to be registered in order to register the '%s' add-on.\n" +"Skip the base system and the add-on registration?" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog title +#: src/lib/registration/ui/migration_repos_selection_dialog.rb:47 +msgid "Repositories used for Migration" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: help text +#: src/lib/registration/ui/migration_repos_selection_dialog.rb:50 +msgid "<p>In this dialog you can manually select which repositories willbe used for online migration. The packages will be upgraded to thehighest version found in the selected repositories.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Multiselection widget label +#: src/lib/registration/ui/migration_repos_selection_dialog.rb:85 +msgid "Select the Repositories used for Migration" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Push button label, starts the repository management module +#: src/lib/registration/ui/migration_repos_selection_dialog.rb:89 +msgid "Manage Repositories..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: summary text, %s is a repository URL +#: src/lib/registration/ui/migration_repos_selection_dialog.rb:114 +msgid "URL: %s" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: summary text, %s is a repository priority (1-99) +#: src/lib/registration/ui/migration_repos_selection_dialog.rb:116 +msgid "Priority: %s" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: a popup message with [Continue] [Cancel] buttons, +#. pressing [Continue] starts the registration module, [Cancel] aborts +#. the online migration +#: src/lib/registration/ui/migration_repos_workflow.rb:145 +msgid "" +"The system is not registered,\n" +"to run the online migration you need\n" +"to register the system first." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Error message +#: src/lib/registration/ui/migration_repos_workflow.rb:183 +msgid "No installed product found." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Error message +#: src/lib/registration/ui/migration_repos_workflow.rb:212 +msgid "No migration product found." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: progress message +#: src/lib/registration/ui/migration_repos_workflow.rb:289 +msgid "Preparing Migration Repositories..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog title +#: src/lib/registration/ui/migration_selection_dialog.rb:62 +msgid "Select the Migration Target" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: help text (1/3) +#: src/lib/registration/ui/migration_selection_dialog.rb:65 +msgid "<p>Here you can select the migration target products. The registrationserver may offer several possible migration to new products.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: help text (2/3) +#: src/lib/registration/ui/migration_selection_dialog.rb:68 +msgid "<p>Only one migration target from the list can be selected.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: help text (3/3), %s is replaced by the (translated) check box label +#: src/lib/registration/ui/migration_selection_dialog.rb:70 +msgid "<p>Use the <b>%s</b> check box to manually select the migration repositories later.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/migration_selection_dialog.rb:71 +msgid "Manually Select Migration Repositories" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: error popup, no target migration is selected +#: src/lib/registration/ui/migration_selection_dialog.rb:97 +msgid "Select the target migration." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: check button label +#: src/lib/registration/ui/migration_selection_dialog.rb:138 +msgid "Manually Adjust the Repositories for Migration" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: selection box label +#: src/lib/registration/ui/migration_selection_dialog.rb:153 +msgid "Possible Migration Targets" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: RichText header (details for the selected item) +#: src/lib/registration/ui/migration_selection_dialog.rb:191 +msgid "Migration Summary" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: An error message displayed in the migration details. +#. The product has not been mirrored to the SMT server and cannot be used +#. for migration. The SMT admin has to mirror the product to allow +#. using the selected migration. +#. %{url} is the URL of the registration server (SMT) +#. %{product} is a full product name, e.g. "SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 12" +#: src/lib/registration/ui/migration_selection_dialog.rb:214 +msgid "ERROR: Product <b>%{product}</b> is not available at the registration server (%{url}). Make the product available to allow using this migration." +msgstr "" + +#. this is rather a theoretical case, but anyway.... +#. TRANSLATORS: Summary message, rich text format +#. %s is a product name, e.g. "SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 12 SP1 x86_64" +#: src/lib/registration/ui/migration_selection_dialog.rb:225 +msgid "%s <b>will be installed.</b>" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Summary message, rich text format +#. %s is a product name, e.g. "SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 12" +#: src/lib/registration/ui/migration_selection_dialog.rb:242 +msgid "%s <b>stays unchanged.</b>" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Summary message, rich text format +#. %{old_product} is a product name, e.g. "SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 12" +#. %{new_product} is a product name, e.g. "SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 12 SP1 x86_64" +#: src/lib/registration/ui/migration_selection_dialog.rb:252 +msgid "%{old_product} <b>will be upgraded to</b> %{new_product}." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Summary message, rich text format +#. %{old_product} and %{new_product} are product names +#: src/lib/registration/ui/migration_selection_dialog.rb:257 +msgid "%{old_product} <b>will be downgraded to</b> %{new_product}." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: an error popup message +#: src/lib/registration/ui/migration_selection_dialog.rb:290 +msgid "" +"The selected migration contains a product\n" +"which is not available at the registration server.\n" +"\n" +"Select a different migration target or make the missing products\n" +"available at the registration server." +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/lib/registration/ui/registered_system_dialog.rb:40 +msgid "<p>The system is already registered.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/registered_system_dialog.rb:41 +msgid "<p>You can re-register it again or you can register additional extension or modules to enhance the functionality of the system.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/registered_system_dialog.rb:43 +msgid "<p>If you want to deregister your system you need to log into the SUSE Customer Center and remove the system manually there.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/lib/registration/ui/registered_system_dialog.rb:70 +msgid "Select Extensions" +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/lib/registration/ui/registered_system_dialog.rb:73 +msgid "Register Again" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/registration_update_dialog.rb:42 +msgid "Registration is being updated..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/registration_update_dialog.rb:43 +msgid "The previous registration is being updated." +msgstr "" + +#. automatic registration refresh during system upgrade failed, register from scratch +#: src/lib/registration/ui/registration_update_dialog.rb:65 +msgid "" +"Automatic registration upgrade failed.\n" +"You can manually register the system from scratch." +msgstr "" + +#. ignore SUSE manager registration servers (bnc#894470) +#: src/lib/registration/url_helpers.rb:203 +msgid "Searching..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/registration/url_helpers.rb:203 +msgid "Looking up local registration servers..." +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/reipl.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/reipl.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/reipl.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,267 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. Command line help text for the Xreipl module +#: src/clients/reipl.rb:53 +msgid "Configuration of reipl" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: part of a shutdown message +#. %1 is replaced with a device name +#. Newline at the end is required +#: src/clients/reipl_bootloader_finish.rb:64 +msgid "" +"\n" +"After shutdown, reload the system\n" +"with an IPL from DASD '%1'.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: part of a shutdown message +#. %1 is replaced with a FCP name +#. %2 is replaced with a WWPN name +#. %3 is replaced with a LUN name +#. Newline at the end is required +#: src/clients/reipl_bootloader_finish.rb:83 +msgid "" +"\n" +"After shutdown, reload the system\n" +"with an IPL from FCP '%1'\n" +"with WWPN '%2'\n" +"and LUN '%3'.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/reipl_bootloader_finish.rb:97 +msgid "" +"\n" +"After shutdown, reload the system \n" +"with an IPL from the device \n" +"that contains /boot" +msgstr "" + +#. Rich text title for Reipl in proposals +#: src/clients/reipl_proposal.rb:81 +msgid "Reipl" +msgstr "" + +#. Menu title for Reipl in proposals +#: src/clients/reipl_proposal.rb:85 +msgid "&Reipl" +msgstr "" + +#. Reipl configure dialog caption +#. Initialization dialog caption +#: src/include/reipl/dialogs.rb:59 src/include/reipl/wizards.rb:100 +msgid "Reipl Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Reipl configure dialog contents +#: src/include/reipl/dialogs.rb:63 +msgid "reipl methods" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/reipl/dialogs.rb:72 +msgid "&ccw" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/reipl/dialogs.rb:79 +msgid "&fcp" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/reipl/dialogs.rb:86 +msgid "&nss" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/reipl/dialogs.rb:98 +msgid "ccw parameters" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/reipl/dialogs.rb:103 +msgid "&Device" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/reipl/dialogs.rb:109 +msgid "&Loadparm" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/reipl/dialogs.rb:118 +msgid "fcp parameters" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/reipl/dialogs.rb:123 +msgid "D&evice" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/reipl/dialogs.rb:129 +msgid "&Worldwide port number" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/reipl/dialogs.rb:135 +msgid "Lo&gical unit number" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/reipl/dialogs.rb:141 +msgid "B&oot program selector" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/reipl/dialogs.rb:150 +msgid "nss parameters" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/reipl/dialogs.rb:155 +msgid "&Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/reipl/dialogs.rb:175 +msgid "reipl configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/reipl/dialogs.rb:177 +msgid "help missing in helps.ycp" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/reipl/helps.rb:36 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Initializing reipl Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/reipl/helps.rb:40 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Initialization:</big></b><br>\n" +"Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing <b>Abort</b> now.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/reipl/helps.rb:44 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Saving reipl Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/reipl/helps.rb:48 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Saving:</big></b><br>\n" +"Abort the save procedure by pressing <b>Abort</b>.\n" +"An additional dialog informs whether it is safe to do so.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Configure dialog help 1 +#: src/include/reipl/helps.rb:55 +msgid "<p><b><big>s390 reIPL Configuration</big></b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Configure dialog help 2 +#: src/include/reipl/helps.rb:59 +msgid "" +"<p>Choose one of the methods for rebooting your machine with the radio buttons\n" +"listed inside <b>reipl methods</b>. Depending on what your machine supports,\n" +"choose between CCW (channel command word) devices and SCSI devices,\n" +"which are attached through zFCP (fibre channel protocol). Then fill out the\n" +"necessary parameter entry fields for the respective method.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Configure dialog help 3 +#: src/include/reipl/helps.rb:67 +msgid "" +"<p>The <b>device</b> must be a valid device bus ID with lower case letters\n" +"in a sysfs compatible format 0.<i><subchannel set ID></i>.<i><device ID></i>,\n" +"such as 0.0.5c51. Depending on the chosen method, this can either refer to a DASD or to\n" +"an FCP adapter.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Configure dialog help 4 +#: src/include/reipl/helps.rb:74 +msgid "" +"<p>The <b>loadparm</b> must be a maximum of 8 characters and selects a boot\n" +"configuration from the menu of the zipl bootloader. Use one blank character\n" +"to select the default configuration.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Configure dialog help 5 +#: src/include/reipl/helps.rb:80 +msgid "" +"<p>The <b>worldwide port number</b> (WWPN) must be entered with lowercase\n" +"letters as a 16-digit hex value, such as 0x5005076300c40e5a.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Configure dialog help 6 +#: src/include/reipl/helps.rb:84 +msgid "" +"<p>The <b>logical unit number</b> (LUN) must be entered with lowercase letters\n" +"as a 16-digit hex value with all trailing zeros, such as 0x52ca000000000000.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Configure dialog help 7 +#: src/include/reipl/helps.rb:88 +msgid "" +"<p>The <b>boot program selector</b> must be a non-negative integer choosing\n" +"a boot configuration from the menu of the zipl bootloader. Use 0 to select\n" +"the default configuration.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Configure dialog help 8 +#: src/include/reipl/helps.rb:94 +msgid "" +"<p>The <b>boot record logical block address</b> (LBA) specifies the master\n" +"boot record and is currently always 0.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Configure dialog help 9 +#: src/include/reipl/helps.rb:98 +msgid "" +"<p>After confirmation of this dialog, you may trigger a reboot, e.g. by shutdown,\n" +"and the system will automatically restart from your specified device.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Initialization dialog contents +#: src/include/reipl/wizards.rb:102 +msgid "Initializing..." +msgstr "" + +#. Create a textual summary and a list of unconfigured cards +#. @return summary of the current configuration +#: src/modules/Reipl.rb:329 +msgid "Configured reipl methods" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Reipl.rb:336 +msgid "The method ccw is configured and being used." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Reipl.rb:338 +msgid "The method ccw is configured." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Reipl.rb:341 +msgid "The method ccw is not supported." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Reipl.rb:349 +msgid "The method fcp is configured and being used." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Reipl.rb:351 +msgid "The method fcp is configured." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Reipl.rb:354 +msgid "The method fcp is not supported." +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/relocation-server.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/relocation-server.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/relocation-server.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,365 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. Command line help text for the relocation-server module +#: src/clients/relocation-server.rb:58 +msgid "Configuration of relocation-server" +msgstr "" + +#. yes-no popup +#: src/include/relocation-server/complex.rb:48 +msgid "" +"Really exit?\n" +"All changes will be lost." +msgstr "" + +#. RelocationServer::SetAbortFunction(PollAbort); +#: src/include/relocation-server/complex.rb:166 +msgid "Select SSL Key File" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/relocation-server/complex.rb:175 +msgid "Select SSL Cert File" +msgstr "" + +#. A popup dialog caption +#: src/include/relocation-server/complex.rb:303 +msgid "Add New Port" +msgstr "" + +#. A popup dialog caption +#: src/include/relocation-server/complex.rb:305 +msgid "Edit Current Port" +msgstr "" + +#. A text entry +#: src/include/relocation-server/complex.rb:309 +msgid "&Port" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/relocation-server/complex.rb:336 +msgid "Port number must not be empty." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/relocation-server/complex.rb:343 +msgid "Port number out of range." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/relocation-server/complex.rb:350 +msgid "Port number already exists." +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. Copyright (c) 2006 Novell, Inc. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under +#. the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as published by the +#. Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +#. ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS +#. FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with +#. this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, you may find +#. current contact information at www.novell.com. +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. File: include/relocation-server/dialogs.ycp +#. Package: Configuration of relocation-server +#. Summary: Dialogs definitions +#. Authors: Li Dongyang +#. +#. $Id: dialogs.ycp 27914 2006-02-13 14:32:08Z locilka $ +#: src/include/relocation-server/dialogs.rb:43 +msgid "Global Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/relocation-server/dialogs.rb:49 +msgid "Relocation Address:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/relocation-server/dialogs.rb:56 +msgid "Allowed Hosts:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/relocation-server/dialogs.rb:59 +msgid "Use SSL as Default" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/relocation-server/dialogs.rb:65 +msgid "non-SSL Server" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/relocation-server/dialogs.rb:69 +#: src/include/relocation-server/dialogs.rb:85 +msgid "Port:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/relocation-server/dialogs.rb:73 +#: src/include/relocation-server/dialogs.rb:124 +msgid "Enable" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/relocation-server/dialogs.rb:79 +msgid "SSL Server" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/relocation-server/dialogs.rb:97 +msgid "SSL Key File:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/relocation-server/dialogs.rb:111 +msgid "SSL Cert File:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/relocation-server/dialogs.rb:130 +#: src/include/relocation-server/dialogs.rb:187 +msgid "Firewall" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/relocation-server/dialogs.rb:137 +msgid "Tunneled migration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/relocation-server/dialogs.rb:143 +msgid "Make sure tunneled migration works" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/relocation-server/dialogs.rb:149 +msgid "Plain migration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/relocation-server/dialogs.rb:155 +msgid "Make sure plain migration works" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/relocation-server/dialogs.rb:159 +msgid "TCP Ports" +msgstr "" + +#. A table header +#: src/include/relocation-server/dialogs.rb:165 +msgid "Port" +msgstr "" + +#. a push button +#: src/include/relocation-server/dialogs.rb:171 +msgid "&Add..." +msgstr "" + +#. a push button +#: src/include/relocation-server/dialogs.rb:173 +msgid "&Edit..." +msgstr "" + +#. a push button +#: src/include/relocation-server/dialogs.rb:175 +msgid "&Delete" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/relocation-server/dialogs.rb:182 +msgid "Include default port range" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/relocation-server/helps.rb:36 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Initializing relocation-server Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Please wait...<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/relocation-server/helps.rb:40 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Initialization:</big></b><br>\n" +"Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing <b>Abort</b> now.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/relocation-server/helps.rb:44 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Saving relocation-server Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Please wait...<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/relocation-server/helps.rb:48 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Saving:</big></b><br>\n" +"Abort the save procedure by pressing <b>Abort</b>.\n" +"An additional dialog informs whether it is safe to do so.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/relocation-server/helps.rb:54 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Relocation Address</b><br>\n" +"Address xend should listen on for relocation-socket connections</p>\n" +"<p><b>Allowed Hosts</b><br>\n" +"The hosts allowed to talk to the relocation port. If this is empty, then all connections are allowed. Otherwise, this should be a space-separated sequence of regular expressions. Any host with a fully-qualified domain name or an IP address that matches one of these regular expressions will be accepted.</p>\n" +"<p><b>SSL Key File/SSL Cert File</b><br>\n" +"SSL key and certificate to use for the ssl relocation interface</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/relocation-server/helps.rb:62 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Tunneled migration</big></b><br>\n" +"The source host libvirtd opens a direct connection to the destination host libvirtd for sending migration data. This allows the option of encrypting the data stream.</p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Plain migration</big></b><br>\n" +"The source host VM opens a direct unencrypted TCP connection to the destination host for sending the migration data. Unless a port is manually specified, libvirt will choose a migration port in the default range.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Main workflow of the relocation-server configuration +#. @return sequence result +#: src/include/relocation-server/wizards.rb:104 +msgid "&Xend" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/relocation-server/wizards.rb:109 +msgid "&KVM" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/relocation-server/wizards.rb:114 +msgid "&Xen Libxl" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/relocation-server/wizards.rb:161 +msgid "Relocation Server Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. RelocationServer read dialog caption +#: src/modules/RelocationServer.rb:307 +msgid "Initializing relocation-server Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1/3 +#: src/modules/RelocationServer.rb:317 +msgid "Read the current xend configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 2/3 +#: src/modules/RelocationServer.rb:319 +msgid "Read the current xend state" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 3/3 +#. Progress stage 1/2 +#: src/modules/RelocationServer.rb:321 src/modules/RelocationServer.rb:337 +msgid "Read firewall settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 1/3 +#: src/modules/RelocationServer.rb:326 +msgid "Reading the current xend configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 2/3 +#: src/modules/RelocationServer.rb:328 +msgid "Reading the current xend state..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 3/3 +#. Progress step 1/2 +#: src/modules/RelocationServer.rb:330 src/modules/RelocationServer.rb:344 +msgid "Reading firewall settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 2/2 +#: src/modules/RelocationServer.rb:339 +msgid "Read the current libvirtd/sshd state" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 2/2 +#: src/modules/RelocationServer.rb:346 +msgid "Reading the current libvirtd/sshd state..." +msgstr "" + +#. Error message +#: src/modules/RelocationServer.rb:368 +msgid "Cannot read the current Xend state." +msgstr "" + +#. Error message +#: src/modules/RelocationServer.rb:377 +msgid "Cannot read firewall settings." +msgstr "" + +#. Error message +#: src/modules/RelocationServer.rb:386 +msgid "Cannot read the current libvirtd/sshd state." +msgstr "" + +#. RelocationServer read dialog caption +#: src/modules/RelocationServer.rb:407 +msgid "Saving relocation-server Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1 +#: src/modules/RelocationServer.rb:417 +msgid "Write the Xend settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 2 +#: src/modules/RelocationServer.rb:419 +msgid "Adjust the Xend service" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 3 +#. Progress stage 2 +#: src/modules/RelocationServer.rb:421 src/modules/RelocationServer.rb:438 +msgid "Write firewall settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 1 +#: src/modules/RelocationServer.rb:426 +msgid "Writing the Xend settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 2 +#: src/modules/RelocationServer.rb:428 +msgid "Adjusting the Xend service..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 3 +#. Progress stage 2 +#: src/modules/RelocationServer.rb:430 src/modules/RelocationServer.rb:445 +msgid "Writing firewall settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1 +#: src/modules/RelocationServer.rb:436 +msgid "Adjust the libvirtd/sshd service" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 1 +#: src/modules/RelocationServer.rb:443 +msgid "Adjusting the libvirtd/sshd service" +msgstr "" + +#. Error message +#: src/modules/RelocationServer.rb:460 +msgid "Cannot write the xend settings." +msgstr "" + +#. Error message +#: src/modules/RelocationServer.rb:481 +msgid "Cannot write firewall settings." +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/rpm-groups.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/rpm-groups.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/rpm-groups.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,637 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2008-02-04 11:08+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +msgid "3D" +msgstr "" + +msgid "3D Editors" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Action" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Amusements" +msgstr "" + +msgid "AOLInstantMessenger" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Arcade" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Archie" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Archiving" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Astronomy" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Background" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Backup" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Base" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Benchmark" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Bitmap Editors" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Board" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Boot" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Breakout" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Browsers" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Building" +msgstr "" + +msgid "CAD" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Camera" +msgstr "" + +msgid "C and C++" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Card" +msgstr "" + +msgid "CD" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Chemistry" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Chess" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Chinese" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Clients" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Clocks" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Clustering" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Compression" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Computing" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Console" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Convertors" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Cross" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Daemons" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Databases" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Debuggers" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Development" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Diagnostic" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Dictionary" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Displaymanagers" +msgstr "" + +msgid "DNS" +msgstr "" + +msgid "DocBook" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Doc Generators" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Documentation" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Editors" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Editors and Convertors" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Electronics" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Emacs" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Email" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Emulators" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Fax" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Fhs" +msgstr "" + +msgid "File-Sharing" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Filesystems" +msgstr "" + +msgid "File utilities" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Finance" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Fonts" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Fortran" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Frontends" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Ftp" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Games" +msgstr "" + +msgid "GNOME" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Grabbers" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Graph" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Graphics" +msgstr "" + +msgid "GUI" +msgstr "" + +msgid "GUI Builders" +msgstr "" + +msgid "H323" +msgstr "" + +msgid "HA" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Hamradio" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Hardware" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Howto" +msgstr "" + +msgid "HTML" +msgstr "" + +msgid "I18n" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Icons" +msgstr "" + +msgid "ICQ" +msgstr "" + +msgid "IDE" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Instant Messenger" +msgstr "" + +msgid "IRC" +msgstr "" + +msgid "ISDN" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Japanese" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Java" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Joystick" +msgstr "" + +msgid "KDE" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Kernel" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Korean" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Language" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Languages" +msgstr "" + +msgid "LDAP" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Libraries" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Localization" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Logging" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Logic" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Mailinglists" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Man" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Management" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Math" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Mathematics" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Metapackages" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Midi" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Mixers" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Mobile" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Modem" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Monitoring" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Mono" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Morse" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Multimedia" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Napster" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Navigators" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Networking" +msgstr "" + +msgid "News" +msgstr "" + +msgid "NFS" +msgstr "" + +msgid "NIS" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Novell" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Office" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Organizers" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Other" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Packages" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Packet" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Palm" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Parallel" +msgstr "" + +msgid "PC" +msgstr "" + +msgid "PDA" +msgstr "" + +msgid "PDF" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Perl" +msgstr "" + +msgid "PHP" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Physics" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Players" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Pool" +msgstr "" + +msgid "PPP" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Presentation" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Printing" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Productivity" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Proxy" +msgstr "" + +msgid "PS" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Psion" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Psk31" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Publishing" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Puzzle" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Python" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Race" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Radio" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Radius" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Raytracers" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Real Time" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Record" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Remote Desktop" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Routing" +msgstr "" + +msgid "RPG" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Ruby" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Samba" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Satellite" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Scanner" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Scheme" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Scientific" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Screensavers" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Security" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Servers" +msgstr "" + +msgid "SGML" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Shells" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Shoot" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Simulation" +msgstr "" + +msgid "SIP" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Sound" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Sound Daemons" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Sources" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Spell" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Spreadsheets" +msgstr "" + +msgid "SSH" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Strategy" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Suite" +msgstr "" + +msgid "SUSE" +msgstr "" + +msgid "SUSE internal" +msgstr "" + +msgid "System" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Talk" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Tcl" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Teaching" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Telephony" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Terminals" +msgstr "" + +msgid "TeX" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Texinfo" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Text" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Tools" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Toys" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Troff" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Turn Based" +msgstr "" + +msgid "TV" +msgstr "" + +msgid "UPS" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Utilities" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Vector Editors" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Version Control" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Vi" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Video" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Viewers" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Visualization" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Web" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Wifi" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Word" +msgstr "" + +msgid "Word Processor" +msgstr "" + +msgid "X11" +msgstr "" + +msgid "XF86_3" +msgstr "" + +msgid "XF86_4" +msgstr "" + +msgid "XFCE" +msgstr "" + +msgid "XML" +msgstr "" + +msgid "YaST" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/samba-client.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/samba-client.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/samba-client.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,1014 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. translators: command line help text for Samba client module +#: src/clients/samba-client.rb:62 +msgid "" +"Samba client configuration module.\n" +"See Samba documentation for details." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for winbind action +#: src/clients/samba-client.rb:75 +msgid "Enable or disable the Winbind services (winbindd)" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for isdomainmember action +#: src/clients/samba-client.rb:85 +msgid "Check if this machine is a member of a domain" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for joindomain action +#: src/clients/samba-client.rb:95 +msgid "Join this machine to a domain" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for configure action +#: src/clients/samba-client.rb:105 +msgid "Change the global settings of Samba" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for winbind enable option +#: src/clients/samba-client.rb:113 +msgid "Enable the service" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for winbind disable option +#: src/clients/samba-client.rb:119 +msgid "Disable the service" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for domain to be checked/joined +#: src/clients/samba-client.rb:125 +msgid "The name of a domain to join" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for joindomain user option +#: src/clients/samba-client.rb:132 +msgid "" +"The user used for joining the domain. If omitted, YaST will\n" +"try to join the domain without specifying user and password.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for joindomain password option +#: src/clients/samba-client.rb:139 +msgid "The password used for the user when joining the domain" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for machine optioa +#: src/clients/samba-client.rb:146 +msgid "The machine account" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for the workgroup name option +#: src/clients/samba-client.rb:153 +msgid "The name of a workgroup" +msgstr "" + +#. user must provide the domain name to be tested +#. error message for isdomainmember command line action +#. must provide the domain name to be joined +#. error message for joindomain command line action +#: src/clients/samba-client.rb:211 src/clients/samba-client.rb:255 +msgid "Enter the name of a domain." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error message for isdomainmember command line action +#: src/clients/samba-client.rb:224 +msgid "Cannot test domain membership." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: result message for isdomainmember command line action +#: src/clients/samba-client.rb:231 +msgid "This machine is a member of %1." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: result message for isdomainmember command line action +#: src/clients/samba-client.rb:236 +msgid "This machine is not a member of %1." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: result message for joindomain command line action +#. Translators: Information popup, %1 is the name of the domain +#: src/clients/samba-client.rb:278 src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:280 +msgid "Domain %1 joined successfully." +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:61 +msgid "U&ID" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:63 +msgid "&Primary Group Name" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:65 +msgid "&Secondary Group Name" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:67 +msgid "&GID" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:72 +msgid "&Server Name" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:74 +msgid "Remote &Path" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:76 +msgid "&Mount Point" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:78 +msgid "O&ptions" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:80 +msgid "&User Name" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, do not translate 'winbind uid', 'winbind gid' +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:174 +msgid "<p>Specify the <b>Range</b> for Samba user and group IDs (<tt>winbind uid</tt> and <tt>winbind gid</tt> values).</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:235 +msgid "&UID Range" +msgstr "" + +#. int field label +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:238 +msgid "&Minimum" +msgstr "" + +#. int field label +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:240 +msgid "Ma&ximum" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:246 +msgid "&GID Range" +msgstr "" + +#. int field label +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:249 +msgid "M&inimum" +msgstr "" + +#. int field label +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:251 +msgid "M&aximum" +msgstr "" + +#. require_groups +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:256 +msgid "Allowed Group(s)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:261 +msgid "Group Name(s) or SID(s)" +msgstr "" + +#. combobox label +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:271 +msgid "&Kerberos Method" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:277 +msgid "Windows Internet Name Service" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:286 +msgid "Mount Server Directories" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:293 +msgid "Server Name" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:295 +msgid "Remote Path" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:297 +msgid "Local Mount Point" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:299 +msgid "User Name" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:301 +msgid "Options" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog title +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:319 +msgid "Expert Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup: min >= max +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:376 +msgid "" +"The minimum value in the range cannot be\n" +"larger than maximum one.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Samba-client workgroup dialog caption +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:427 +msgid "Windows Domain Membership" +msgstr "" + +#. busy popup text +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:448 +msgid "Verifying AD domain membership..." +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:460 +msgid "&Leave" +msgstr "" + +#. status label +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:467 +msgid "Currently a member of this domain" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: checkbox label to enable winbind +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:488 +msgid "&Use SMB Information for Linux Authentication" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:499 +msgid "&Create Home Directory on Login" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:510 +msgid "Join Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#. text entry label +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:516 +#: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:90 +msgid "&Username" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:525 +msgid "&Password" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:532 +msgid "Mac&hine Account OU" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:541 +msgid "Active Directory Server" +msgstr "" + +#. button label (run YaST client for NTP) +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:550 +msgid "N&TP Configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:554 +msgid "Disable Name Service Cache" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:556 +msgid "Start File Alteration Monitor" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: frame label +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:571 +msgid "Membership" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:579 +msgid "&Domain" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: text entry label +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:581 +msgid "&Domain or Workgroup" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:595 +msgid "Off&line Authentication" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:604 +msgid "&Single Sign-on for SSH" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:614 +msgid "Change primary DNS suffix" +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:621 +msgid "&Expert Settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. 1st part of an error message: +#. winbind cannot provide user information taken from +#. a workgroup, must be a domain; %1 is the workgroup name +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:777 +msgid "" +"Cannot use the workgroup\n" +"'%1' for Linux authentication." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: 2nd part of an error message +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:786 +msgid "Enter a valid domain." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: 2nd part of an error message +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:788 +msgid "" +"Enter a domain or disable\n" +"using SMB for Linux authentication." +msgstr "" + +#. we might use it to warn user (#155716) +#. continue/cancel popup +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:808 +msgid "" +"Configuring this system as a client for Active Directory resets the following\n" +"settings in smb.conf to the default values:\n" +"%1" +msgstr "" + +#. 1st part of an error message: +#. winbind cannot provide user information if the host +#. is not in a domain +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:827 +msgid "" +"The host must be a member of a domain\n" +"for Linux authentication using SMB." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: 2nd part of an error message +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:831 +msgid "" +"Join a domain or disable use of SMB\n" +"for Linux authentication." +msgstr "" + +#. used outside this module for autologin function. must be complete sentence. +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:840 +msgid "Samba is now enabled." +msgstr "" + +#. yes/no popup text +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:852 +msgid "" +"In a Microsoft environment,\n" +"hostname changes with DHCP are problematic.\n" +"Disable hostname changes with DHCP?" +msgstr "" + +#. message popup, part 1/2 +#: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:887 +msgid "" +"This change only affects newly created processes and not already\n" +"running services. Restart your services manually or reboot \n" +"the machine to enable it for all services.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:36 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Initializing Samba Client Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:40 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting the Initialization</big></b><br>\n" +"Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing <b>Abort</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:44 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Saving Samba Client Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:48 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Saving</big></b><br>\n" +"Abort the save procedure by pressing <b>Abort</b>.\n" +"An additional dialog informs you whether it is safe to do so.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: Samba workgroup dialog help title +#. translators: Samba membership dialog help title (installation) +#: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:55 src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:75 +msgid "<p><b><big>Selecting Windows Domain Membership</big></b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: Samba workgroup dialog help 1/3 +#: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:59 +msgid "" +"<p>A Linux client can be a member of a workgroup, NT domain, or Active Directory domain.\n" +"Specify the name of the membership.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Samba role dialog help 2/3 +#: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:63 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Use SMB Information for Linux Authentication</b> allows \n" +"verification of passwords with the NT server or the Kerberos server if joining an AD domain.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Samba role dialog help 2.5/3 +#: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:67 +msgid "" +"<p>Check <b>Change primary DNS suffix</b> to add your AD server into the list of name servers.\n" +"This option is only available for static network setups.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Samba role dialog help 3/3 +#: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:71 +msgid "" +"<p>When you press <b>OK</b>, the system verifies the membership and,\n" +"if it is a NT or Active Directory domain, allows this host to join the domain.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: Samba membership dialog help 1/2 (installation) +#: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:79 +msgid "<p>Specify the name of the NT or Active Directory domain.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: Samba membership dialog help 2/2 (installation) +#: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:81 +msgid "" +"<p>When you press <b>Next</b>, the system verifies the domain and\n" +"allows this host to join the domain.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Samba membership dialog help (common part 1/4) +#: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:85 +msgid "<p>Check <b>Create Home Directory on Login</b> to have local home directories created on the first login.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Samba membership dialog help (common part 2/4) +#: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:89 +msgid "<p><b>Offline Authentication</b> enables the user to log in even if there is no connection to the domain controller. For this option to work, you must log in to your domain at least once. The user's credentials are then stored encrypted on your computer and are reused for a domain login when no connection to the domain controller can be established. This is especially useful for mobile users." +msgstr "" + +#. Samba membership dialog help (common part) +#: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:93 +msgid "<p>Click <b>Expert Settings</b> to enable advanced features such as WINS options or mounting server home directories from Active Directory domains.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Samba membership dialog - additional help for autoyast config +#: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:97 +msgid "<p><b>Join Settings</b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Samba membership dialog - additional help for autoyast config +#: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:101 +msgid "" +"<p>Set the <b>Username</b> and <b>Password</b> that should be used for joining\n" +"the selected domain during autoinstallation. Note that the password will be saved to the profile in cleartext (unencrypted) form.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Samba membership dialog - additional help for autoyast config +#: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:105 +msgid "<p>Specify the <b>Active Directory Server</b> to use for joining an Active Directory domain. This is also used as the value for KDC in the Kerberos configuration.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Samba membership dialog - additional help for possible NTP configuration +#: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:109 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"To synchronize your time with an NTP server, configure your computer\n" +"as an NTP client. Access the configuration with <b>NTP Configuration</b>.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. default value of Machine Account +#: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:62 +msgid "(default)" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label +#: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:73 +msgid "&Machine Account OU" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:78 +msgid "O&btain list" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:121 +msgid "" +"User name and password are required\n" +"for listing the machine accounts." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:139 +msgid "&Machine Account" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: text for busy pop-up +#: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:177 +msgid "Verifying workgroup membership..." +msgstr "" + +#. popup to fill in the domain leaving info; %1 is the domain name +#: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:203 +msgid "Enter the username and the password for leaving the domain %1." +msgstr "" + +#. additional information for cluster environment +#: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:231 +msgid "The configuration will be propagated across cluster nodes." +msgstr "" + +#. popup to fill in the domain joining info; %1 is the domain name +#: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:242 +msgid "Enter the username and the password for joining the domain %1." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:249 +msgid "To join the domain anonymously, leave the text entries empty.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup question, the domain status cannot be found out, ask user what to do +#: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:304 +msgid "" +"Cannot automatically determine if this host\n" +"is a member of the domain %1." +msgstr "" + +#. popup question, first part +#: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:308 +msgid "" +"This host is not a member\n" +"of the domain %1." +msgstr "" + +#. last part of popup question +#: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:312 +msgid "Join the domain %1?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:316 +msgid "" +"Cannot automatically determine if this cluster\n" +"is a member of the domain %1." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:319 +msgid "" +"This cluster is not a member\n" +"of the domain %1." +msgstr "" + +#. popup question +#: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:361 +msgid "User shares already exist. Keep or delete these shares?" +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:363 +msgid "&Keep" +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:365 +msgid "&Delete" +msgstr "" + +#. yes/no popup +#: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:381 +msgid "Other Windows sharing services are available. Stop them as well?" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label +#: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:392 +msgid "&Use WINS for Hostname Resolution" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for "Use WINS for Hostname Resolution" check box label +#: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:401 +msgid "<p>If you want to use Microsoft Windows Internet Name Service (WINS) for name resolution, check <b>Use WINS for Hostname Resolution</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label +#: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:411 +msgid "Retrieve WINS server via &DHCP" +msgstr "" + +#. help text ("Retrieve WINS server via DHCP" is a checkbox label) +#: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:418 +msgid "<p>Check <b>Retrieve WINS server via DHCP</b> to use a WINS server provided by DHCP.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:438 +msgid "Sharing by Users" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:440 +msgid "Sharing" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:453 +msgid "&Allow Users to Share Their Directories" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:463 +msgid "Allow &Guest Access" +msgstr "" + +#. texty entry label +#: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:475 +msgid "&Permitted Group" +msgstr "" + +#. infield label +#: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:481 +msgid "&Maximum Number of Shares" +msgstr "" + +#. membership dialog help (common part 3/4), %1 is separator (e.g. '\') +#: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:511 +msgid "<p><b>Allow Users to Share Their Directories</b> enables members of the group in <b>Permitted Group</b> to share directories they own with other users. For example, <tt>users</tt> for a local scope or <tt>DOMAIN%1Users</tt> for a domain scope. The user also must make sure that the file system permissions allow access.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. membership dialog help (common part 3/4) +#: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:517 +msgid "<p>With <b>Maximum Number of Shares</b>, limit the total amount of shares that may be created.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. membership dialog help common part +#: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:522 +msgid "<p>To permit access to user shares without authentication, enable <b>Allow Guest Access</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for PAM Mount table +#: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:531 +msgid "" +"<p>In the table <b>Mount Server Directories</b>, you can specify server\n" +"directories (such as home directory) which should be locally mounted when the\n" +"user is logged in. If mounting should be user-specific, specify <b>User\n" +"Name</b> for the selected rule. Otherwise, the directory is mounted for each user. For more information, see pam_mount.conf manual page.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for PAM Mount table: example +#: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:538 +msgid "<p>For example, you may use <tt>/home/%(DOMAIN_USER)</tt> value for <b>Remote Path</b>, <tt>~/</tt> value for <b>Local Mount Point</b> to mount the home directory, together with a value <tt>user=%(DOMAIN_USER)</tt> as a part of <b>Options</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for kerberos method option +#: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:546 +msgid "<p>The value of <b>Kerberos Method</b> defines how kerberos tickets are verified. When <b>Single Sing-on for SSH</b> is used, the default Kerberos Method set by YaST is <tt>secrets and keytab</tt>. See smb.conf manual page for details.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: initialization dialog caption +#: src/include/samba-client/wizards.rb:74 +msgid "Samba Client Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: initialization dialog contents +#: src/include/samba-client/wizards.rb:76 +msgid "Initializing..." +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:650 +msgid "Saving Kerberos Client Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage label +#: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:655 +msgid "Write PAM settings" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage label +#: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:657 +msgid "Write Kerberos client settings" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage label +#: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:659 +msgid "Write OpenSSH settings" +msgstr "" + +#. progress step label +#: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:663 +msgid "Writing PAM settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step label +#: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:665 +msgid "Writing Kerberos client settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step label +#: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:667 +msgid "Writing OpenSSH settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. final progress step label +#. translators: progress finished +#. translators: write progress finished +#: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:669 src/modules/Samba.rb:643 +#: src/modules/Samba.rb:765 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage label +#: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:673 +msgid "Install required packages" +msgstr "" + +#. progress step label +#: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:675 +msgid "Installing required packages..." +msgstr "" + +#. summary header +#: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:947 +msgid "PAM Login" +msgstr "" + +#. summary item +#: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:953 +msgid "Use Kerberos" +msgstr "" + +#. summary item +#: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:955 +msgid "Do Not Use Kerberos" +msgstr "" + +#. summary header +#: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:959 +msgid "Default Realm" +msgstr "" + +#. summary header +#: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:966 +msgid "Default Domain" +msgstr "" + +#. summary header +#: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:973 +msgid "KDC Server Address" +msgstr "" + +#. summary header +#: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:977 +msgid "Clock Skew" +msgstr "" + +#. summary text, %1 is value +#: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:993 +msgid "<b>KDC Server</b>: %1<br>" +msgstr "" + +#. summary text, %1 is value +#: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:998 +msgid "<b>Default Domain</b>: %1<br>" +msgstr "" + +#. summary text, %1 is value +#: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:1004 +msgid "<b>Default Realm</b>: %1<br>" +msgstr "" + +#. summary text (yes/no follows) +#: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:1010 +msgid "<b>Kerberos Authentication Enabled</b>: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. summary value +#. translators: winbind status in summary +#: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:1013 src/modules/Samba.rb:1112 +msgid "Yes" +msgstr "" + +#. summary value +#. translators: winbind status in summary +#: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:1015 src/modules/Samba.rb:1114 +msgid "No" +msgstr "" + +#. summary line +#: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:1022 +msgid "Configuration Acquired via DNS" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup (wrong format of entered value) +#: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:1050 +msgid "" +"Clock skew is invalid.\n" +"Try again.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup (wrong format of entered value) +#: src/modules/Kerberos.rb:1053 +msgid "" +"Lifetime is invalid.\n" +"Try again." +msgstr "" + +#. Samba-client read dialog caption +#: src/modules/Samba.rb:622 +msgid "Initializing Samba Client Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: progress stage 1/2 +#: src/modules/Samba.rb:633 +msgid "Read the global Samba settings" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: progress stage 2/2 +#: src/modules/Samba.rb:635 +msgid "Read the winbind status" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: progress step 1/2 +#: src/modules/Samba.rb:639 +msgid "Reading the global Samba settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: progress step 2/2 +#: src/modules/Samba.rb:641 +msgid "Reading the winbind status..." +msgstr "" + +#. Samba-client read dialog caption +#: src/modules/Samba.rb:745 +msgid "Saving Samba Client Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: write progress stage +#: src/modules/Samba.rb:749 +msgid "Write the settings" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: write progress stage +#: src/modules/Samba.rb:752 +msgid "Disable Samba services" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: write progress stage +#: src/modules/Samba.rb:754 +msgid "Enable Samba services" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: write progress step +#: src/modules/Samba.rb:758 +msgid "Writing the settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: write progress step +#: src/modules/Samba.rb:761 +msgid "Disabling Samba services..." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: write progress step +#: src/modules/Samba.rb:763 +msgid "Enabling Samba services..." +msgstr "" + +#. write progress stage +#: src/modules/Samba.rb:773 +msgid "Write Kerberos configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. write progress step +#: src/modules/Samba.rb:775 +msgid "Writing Kerberos configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error message, %1 is filename +#. translators: error message, %1 is filename +#. translators: error message, %1 is filename +#: src/modules/Samba.rb:833 src/modules/Samba.rb:870 src/modules/Samba.rb:887 +msgid "Cannot write settings to %1." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error message, do not change winbind +#: src/modules/Samba.rb:846 +msgid "Cannot start winbind service." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error message, do not change winbind +#: src/modules/Samba.rb:851 +msgid "Cannot start winbind daemon." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error message, do not change winbind +#: src/modules/Samba.rb:857 +msgid "Cannot stop winbind service." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error message, do not change winbind +#: src/modules/Samba.rb:862 +msgid "Cannot stop winbind daemon." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error message +#: src/modules/Samba.rb:878 +msgid "Cannot write PAM settings." +msgstr "" + +#. summary header +#: src/modules/Samba.rb:1052 +msgid "Global Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. autoyast summary item: configured workgroup +#: src/modules/Samba.rb:1059 +msgid "Workgroup or Domain: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. autoyast summary item +#: src/modules/Samba.rb:1068 +msgid "Create Home Directory on Login" +msgstr "" + +#. autoyast summary item +#: src/modules/Samba.rb:1075 +msgid "Offline Authentication Enabled" +msgstr "" + +#. autoyast summary item +#: src/modules/Samba.rb:1083 +msgid "Maximum Number of Shares: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. summary item: configured workgroup +#: src/modules/Samba.rb:1104 +msgid "<p><b>Workgroup or Domain</b>: %1</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. summary item: authentication using winbind +#: src/modules/Samba.rb:1109 +msgid "<p><b>Authentication with SMB</b>: %1</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SambaNetJoin.pm:322 +msgid "Unable to proceed with join: Inconsistent cluster state" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/samba-server.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/samba-server.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/samba-server.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,1628 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. translators: command line help text for samba-server module +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:66 +msgid "Samba server configuration module (see Samba documentation for details)" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for share action +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:79 +msgid "Manipulate a single share" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for list action +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:89 +msgid "Show the list of available shares" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for role action +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:99 +msgid "Set the role of the server" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for backend selection action +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:109 +msgid "Set the back-end for storing user information" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for service activation action +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:119 +msgid "Enable or disable the Samba services (smb and nmb)" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for configure action +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:129 +msgid "Change the global settings of the Samba server" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for enable option +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:137 +msgid "Enable the share or a service" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for disable option +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:143 +msgid "Disable the share or a service" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for delete share option +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:149 +msgid "Remove the share from the configuration file" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for share name option +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:155 +msgid "The name of a share" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for "share add" subaction +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:162 +msgid "Add a new share" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for "share options" subaction +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:168 +msgid "Change options of a share" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for "share show" subaction +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:174 +msgid "Show the options of a share" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for share comment option +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:180 +msgid "The comment of a share" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for share path option +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:187 +msgid "The path (directory) to share" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for share printable option +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:194 +msgid "Flag if the share should act as a printer" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for share read_list option +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:201 +msgid "A comma-separated list of users allowed to read from the share" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for share write_list option +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:208 +msgid "A comma-separated list of users allowed to write to the share" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for share browseable option +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:215 +msgid "Flag if the share should be visible when browsing the LAN" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for share guest_ok option +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:222 +msgid "Flag if the share should allow guest access" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for share valid_users option +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:229 +msgid "A comma-separated list of users allowed to access the share" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for PDC role option +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:236 +msgid "Server should act as a primary domain controller" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for BDC role option +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:242 +msgid "Server should act as a backup domain controller" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for Domain Member role option +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:248 +msgid "Server should act as a domain member" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for standalone server role option +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:254 +msgid "Server should provide shares, but should not allow domain logins" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for smbpasswd option +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:260 +msgid "Use the 'smbpasswd' file to store user information" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for tdbsam option +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:266 +msgid "Use the 'passdb.tdb' file to store user information" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for ldapsam option +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:272 +msgid "Use the LDAP server to store user information" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for password option +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:278 +msgid "Password for the LDAP server" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for workgroup option +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:284 +msgid "The name of a workgroup" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for description option +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:291 +msgid "The human-readable description of the Samba server" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for ldap_suffix option +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:298 +msgid "The LDAP suffix DN for manipulating the user information on the LDAP server" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for ldap_admin_dn option +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:305 +msgid "The LDAP DN for modifying contents of the LDAP server (for example, changing passwords)" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error message for share command line action +#. must provide the share name +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:374 +msgid "Specify the share name." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error message for "share add" command line action, %1 is share name +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:380 +msgid "The share %1 does not exist." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error message for "add share" command line action +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:394 +msgid "Provide the path of a directory to share." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error message for "add share" command line action, %1 is share name +#. translators: popup error message for "add share", %1 is share name +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:400 src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1071 +msgid "Share %1 already exists." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: heading for "list" shares command line action +#. try to keep alignment +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:450 +msgid "" +"Status \tType\tName\n" +"==============================" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: share is a disk. %1 is the status, %2 comment +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:460 +msgid "%1\tDisk\t%2" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: share status +#. translators: share status +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:463 src/clients/samba-server.rb:481 +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:146 +msgid "Disabled" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: share status +#. translators: share status +#. check if given path has a corresponding snapper configuration +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:465 src/clients/samba-server.rb:483 +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:146 +msgid "Enabled" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: share is a printer. %1 is the status, %2 comment +#: src/clients/samba-server.rb:478 +msgid "%1\tPrinter\t%2" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: a popup message +#: src/include/samba-server/complex.rb:88 +msgid "" +"Because users are currently connected to this Samba server,\n" +"the server configuration has been reloaded instead of restarted.\n" +"To confirm that all settings are applied despite possibly disconnecting the users,\n" +"run '/etc/init.d/smb restart' and '/etc/init.d/nmb restart'" +msgstr "" + +#. table entry description for smbpasswd-based SAM +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs-items.rb:146 +msgid "smbpasswd file" +msgstr "" + +#. table entry description for LDAP-based SAM +#. Unknown passdb backend +#. // translators: passdb backend radio button +#. `Left (`RadioButton ( `id("mysql"), `opt (`notify),_("MySQL Database") ) ) +#. translators: passdb backend radio button +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs-items.rb:155 +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs-items.rb:598 +msgid "LDAP" +msgstr "" + +#. table entry description for TDB-based SAM +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs-items.rb:169 +msgid "TDB database" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup error +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs-items.rb:261 +msgid "Optional value must not begin with a space character." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup error +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs-items.rb:279 +msgid "Multiple optional values for one backend must be quoted." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup error, %1 is replaced with some URL +#. TRANSLATORS: popup error, %1 is replaced with some URL +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs-items.rb:291 +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs-items.rb:300 +msgid "The entered URL '%1' is invalid" +msgstr "" + +#. message popup +#. message popup +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs-items.rb:352 +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs-items.rb:405 +msgid "Delete the selected entry?" +msgstr "" + +#. we are already initialized +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs-items.rb:481 +msgid "At least one backend must be specified." +msgstr "" + +#. if (size (passdb_backends) == 1) +#. { +#. // error message if user tries to delete the last passdb backend +#. Report::Error (_("At least one back-end must be specified. +#. +#. The back-end cannot be deleted. +#. ")); +#. return false; +#. } +#. message popup +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs-items.rb:568 +msgid "Delete the selected back-end?" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: frame text when adding a passdb backend +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs-items.rb:583 +msgid "Back-End Type" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: passdb backend radio button +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs-items.rb:592 +msgid "smbpasswd File" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: passdb backend radio button +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs-items.rb:600 +msgid "TDB Database" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: textentry label to enter details for the selected passdb backend +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs-items.rb:605 +msgid "&Details" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error message, if the MySQL backend +#. is selected, but no details are entered +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs-items.rb:648 +msgid "" +"An identifier must be provided\n" +"in details \n" +"for the MySQL passdb back-end.\n" +"\n" +"Consult the Samba HOWTO collection for\n" +"further information.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. Copyright (c) 2006-2012 Novell, Inc. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under +#. the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as published by the +#. Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +#. ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS +#. FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with +#. this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, you may find +#. current contact information at www.novell.com. +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. File: include/samba-server/dialogs.ycp +#. Package: Configuration of samba-server +#. Summary: Dialogs definitions +#. Authors: Stanislav Visnovsky +#. Lukas Ocilka +#. +#. $Id$ +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:69 +msgid "&Primary Domain Controller (PDC)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:70 +msgid "B&ackup Domain Controller (BDC)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:71 +msgid "Not a Domain &Controller" +msgstr "" + +#. Samba LDAP Settings Misc Widget +#. ///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +#. translators: combo box value +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:153 +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:156 +#: src/include/samba-server/ldap-widget.rb:76 +msgid "Yes" +msgstr "" + +#. Samba LDAP Settings Security Widget +#. ///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +#. translators: combo box value +#. translators: combo box value +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:153 +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:156 +#: src/include/samba-server/ldap-widget.rb:65 +#: src/include/samba-server/ldap-widget.rb:78 +msgid "No" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:171 +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:236 +msgid "Samba Installation" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:171 +msgid "Step 1 of 2" +msgstr "" + +#. `ComboBox ( `id( "workgroups" ), `opt( `editable ), _("&Workgroup or Domain Name"), workgroups ) +#. TRANSLATORS: text entry +#. `ComboBox(`id("workgroup_domainname"), `opt(`editable, `hstretch), _("&Workgroup or Domain Name"), +#. SambaNmbLookup::GetAvailableNeighbours(nil)), +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:191 +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1188 +msgid "&Workgroup or Domain Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:236 +msgid "Step 2 of 2" +msgstr "" + +#. header of status-like information. followed by domain name +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:245 +msgid "Current Domain Name:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:250 +msgid "Samba Server Type" +msgstr "" + +#. appears on new line after Primary Domain Controller radio button +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:263 +msgid "Not available because a PDC is present." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog caption +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:584 +msgid "Rename Share" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: text entry +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:593 +msgid "New Share &Name" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup error message +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:622 +msgid "Enter a new share name." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup error message, %1 is a variable share name +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:631 +msgid "" +"Share '%1' already exists.\n" +"Choose another share name.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. confirmation dialog before deleting a share +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:727 +msgid "" +"If you delete share %1,\n" +"all its settings will be lost.\n" +"Really delete it?" +msgstr "" + +#. rwalter I couldn't make this one show up. Please make sure my deletions didn't make it too confusing. +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:757 +msgid "Trusted &Domain" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:758 +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1722 +msgid "&Password" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:779 +msgid "Domain name cannot be empty." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:785 +msgid "Cannot establish trusted domain relationship." +msgstr "" + +#. issue a warning, if not already done so +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:801 +msgid "" +"The password for trusted domains\n" +"is stored in the autoinstallation control file. The password\n" +"is stored as plain text. This can be considered\n" +"a security threat." +msgstr "" + +#. SambaTrustDom::List() might return 'nil' +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:823 +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1220 +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1336 +msgid "&Trusted Domains" +msgstr "" + +#. confirmation +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:844 +msgid "" +"Really abandon trust relationship\n" +"to trusted domain %1?" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:864 +msgid "Share %1" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:888 +msgid "Expert Global Settings Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:920 +msgid "Identification" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:922 +msgid "Share &Name" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:924 +msgid "Share &Description" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:928 +msgid "Share Type" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:933 +msgid "&Printer" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:935 +msgid "&Directory" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: text entry label +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:939 +msgid "Share &Path" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: checkbox label, setting for share +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:946 +msgid "&Read-Only" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:948 +msgid "&Inherit ACLs" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:950 +msgid "Expose Snapshots" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:952 +msgid "Utilize Btrfs Features" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: dialog caption +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:961 +msgid "New Share" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: file selection dialog title +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1007 +msgid "Path for a Share" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error message +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1031 +msgid "Share name cannot be empty." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: error message +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1036 +msgid "Share path cannot be empty." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1089 +msgid "Available Shares" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1093 +msgid "&Filter" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1095 +msgid "Show &All Shares" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1098 +msgid "Do Not Show &System Shares" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: table header texts +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1109 +msgid "Status" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1110 +msgid "Read-Only" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1111 +msgid "Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1112 +msgid "Path" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1113 +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1124 +msgid "Guest Access" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1114 +msgid "Comment" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1123 +msgid "&Rename..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1125 +msgid "&Toggle Status" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1143 +msgid "WINS Server Support" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1150 +msgid "Remote WINS Server" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1155 +msgid "Na&me" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: check box +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1165 +msgid "Use WINS for Hostname Resolution" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: combobox item +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1170 +msgid "Not a DC" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: combobox item +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1172 +msgid "Primary (PDC)" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: combobox item +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1176 +msgid "Backup (BDC)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1179 +msgid "Base Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: combobox label +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1194 +msgid "Domain &Controller" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1204 +msgid "Advanced Settings..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1206 +msgid "&Expert Global Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1207 +msgid "&User Authentication Sources" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1237 +msgid "Samba Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. tab label +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1242 +msgid "Start-&Up" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1260 +msgid "&Shares" +msgstr "" + +#. BNC #579993, Allow guest access +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1283 +msgid "I&dentity" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1298 +msgid "WINS" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1341 +msgid "&LDAP Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. BNC #247344, BNC #541958 (comment #18) +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1464 +msgid "NetBIOS &Hostname" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1565 +msgid "User Information Sources" +msgstr "" + +#. try to create it +#. first, ask for password +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1619 +msgid "" +"For a proper function, Samba server needs an\n" +"administrative account (root).\n" +"It will be created now." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1625 +msgid "Samba root &Password" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1626 +msgid "&Verify Password" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup error message +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1646 +msgid "" +"The first and the second version\n" +"of the password do not match." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup error message, %1 is a username +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1663 +msgid "Cannot create account for user %1." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: popup to fill in the domain joining info; %1 is the domain name +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1705 +msgid "" +"Enter the username and the password\n" +"for joining the domain %1." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1712 +msgid "" +"To join the domain anonymously, leave the\n" +"text entries empty." +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1720 +msgid "&Username" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: button label to skip joining to domain +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1725 +msgid "Do &Not Join" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Information popup, %1 is the name of the domain +#: src/include/samba-server/dialogs.rb:1761 +msgid "Domain %1 joined successfully." +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:37 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Initializing Samba Server Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Please wait...<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:41 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Initialization</big></b><br>\n" +"Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing <b>Abort</b> now.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:45 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Saving Samba Server Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Please wait...<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:49 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Saving</big></b><br>\n" +"Abort the save procedure by pressing <b>Abort</b>.\n" +"An additional dialog will inform you whether it is safe to do so.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Samba selecting workgroup or domain 1/1 - Installation step 1 +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:56 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Workgroup or Domain Selection</big></b><br>\n" +"Select existing name of workgroup or domain or type your own new name and click <b>Next</b>.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Samba select Samba Server type - Installation step 2 +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:62 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Samba Server Type</big></b></p>\n" +"<p>A domain controller allows Windows clients to log in to a Windows NT style domain.</p>\n" +"<p>The backup controller uses another domain controller for validation.\n" +"The primary controller uses its own information about users and their passwords.</p>\n" +"<p>The options available in the configuration dialogs depend on the settings in this selection. Windows NT style domain controller functionality will be phased out in future releases.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Samba select Samba Server type - Installation step 2 +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:73 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Samba Server Type</big></b></p>\n" +"<p>A domain controller allows Windows clients to log in to a Windows domain.</p>\n" +"<p>The options available in the configuration dialogs \n" +"depend on the settings in this selection.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Share list dialog help 1/4 +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:80 +msgid "<p><b><big>Shares</big></b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:83 +msgid "" +"<p>This is a list of already configured shares, whether they \n" +"are enabled or disabled, and some basic information about them.<br></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Share list dialog help 2/4 +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:87 +msgid "" +"<p>A share can be enabled or disabled.\n" +"A disabled share is not accessible, but its\n" +"configuration is still written into the configuration file.\n" +"So the share can be later enabled again.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Share list dialog help 3/4 +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:95 +msgid "" +"<p>Some of the shares are special. For example, the share\n" +"Homes is a special system share for accessing home directories\n" +"of users. The system shares can be hidden from the table\n" +"by selecting <b>Do Not Show System Shares</b> in the <b>Filter</b>\n" +"menu.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Share list dialog help 4/4 +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:103 +msgid "" +"<p>Use <b>Add</b> to add a new share, <b>Edit</b> to modify\n" +"already existing share, and <b>Delete</b> to \n" +"remove the information about a share.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Identity dialog help 1/5 +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:109 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Identity</big></b><br>\n" +"These options allow setup of the identity of the server and its\n" +"primary role in the network.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Samba role dialog help 2/5 +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:115 +msgid "" +"<p>The base settings set up the domain and the\n" +"server role. <b>Backup Domain Controller</b> and <b>Primary Domain Controller</b> allow Windows clients to log in to a Windows domain. The backup controller \n" +"uses another domain controller for validation. The primary controller\n" +"uses its own information about users and their passwords.\n" +"If the server should not participate as a domain controller, choose the\n" +"<b>Not a DC</b> value.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Samba role dialog help 2/5 +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:124 +msgid "" +"<p>The <b>Base Settings</b> set up the domain and the\n" +"server role. <b>Primary Domain Controller</b> allows Windows clients\n" +"to log in to a Windows domain. If the server should not participate\n" +"as a domain controller, choose <b>Not a DC</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Samba role dialog help 3/5 +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:131 +msgid "" +"<p><b>WINS</b> is a network protocol for mapping low-level\n" +"network identification of a host (for example, IP address) to\n" +"a NetBIOS name. The Samba server can be a \n" +"WINS server or can use another server for its\n" +"queries. In the latter case, choose <b>Remote WINS Server</b>\n" +"and enter the IP address of the WINS server.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Samba role dialog help 4/5 +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:140 +msgid "" +"<p>Optionally, set a <b>Server NetBIOS Name</b>. The\n" +"NetBIOS name is the name the server uses in the SMB network.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Samba role dialog help 5/5 +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:144 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Advanced Settings</b> provides access to \n" +"detailed configuration, user authentication sources, and expert global settings.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:147 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Trusted Domains</big></b><br>\n" +"NT-style trusted domains represent a possibility to assign\n" +"access rights to users from another domain.\n" +"Here, create a list of domains for which \n" +"the Samba server should provide access.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:154 +msgid "" +"<p>To add a new domain into the list, press <b>Add</b>.\n" +"Enter the name of the domain to trust\n" +"and a password in the dialog that opens. The password is used by the Samba\n" +"server to access the trusted domain. After <b>OK</b> is pressed,\n" +"the trust relationship is established. To delete a domain,\n" +"choose it in the list and press <b>Delete</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:162 +msgid "" +"<p>For more details about how trusted domains work,\n" +"see the Samba HOWTO collection.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Single share editing dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:166 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Edit a Share</big></b><br>\n" +"Here, fine-tune the options of a share.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Single share editing dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:170 +msgid "" +"<p>Use <b>Add</b> to add a new configuration option, <b>Edit</b> to modify\n" +"an existing option, and <b>Delete</b> to delete an option.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Global settings editing dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:174 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Expert Global Settings Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Here, fine-tune the global options of the server.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Global settings editing dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:178 +msgid "" +"<p>Use <b>Add</b> to add a new configuration option, <b>Edit</b> to modify\n" +"already existing option, and <b>Delete</b> to delete an option.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Advanced SAMBA configuration dialog help 1/3 +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:182 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>LDAP Samba Server Options</big></b><br>\n" +"Here, set up details about use of LDAP by the Samba\n" +"server.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Advanced SAMBA configuration dialog help 2/3 +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:188 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Search Base DN</b> (distinguished name) is\n" +"the base at which to start searching the information. <b>Administration DN</b> is used when\n" +"creating new users and groups. If the administration DN requires\n" +"a password for write access, set the password using\n" +"<b>Set LDAP Administration Password</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Advanced SAMBA configuration dialog help 3/3 +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:196 +msgid "<p><b>Note:</b> Settings are saved before the LDAP administration password is set.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. passdb backend configuration dialog help 1 +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:200 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>User Authentication Information Backends</big></b><br>\n" +"Choose where the Samba server should look for the authentication\n" +"information. Samba does not support multiple backends at once anymore,\n" +"only one is allowed.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. passdb backend configuration dialog help 2 +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:207 +msgid "" +"<p>If you want to change the user authentication source, remove the current one first\n" +"by pressing <b>Delete</b> and add a new one with <b>Add</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. passdb backend configuration dialog help 3 +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:211 +msgid "" +"<p><b>smbpasswd file</b> is the file using the same format as\n" +"the previous versions of Samba. Its layout is similar to the\n" +"passwd file. It is possible to have a multiple files in this \n" +"format.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. passdb backend configuration dialog help 4 +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:218 +msgid "" +"<p><b>LDAP</b> is a URL of an LDAP server to check for\n" +"the information.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. passdb backend configuration dialog help 5 +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:222 +msgid "" +"<p><b>TDB database</b> uses an internal Samba database binary format\n" +"to store and look up the information.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. we don't seem to support mysql anymore +#. /* passdb backend configuration dialog help 5/7 */ +#. _("<p><b>MySQL database</b> uses an external MySQL database to +#. to store and look up the information.</p> +#. ") + +#. not in UI anymore +#. passdb backend configuration dialog help 6/7 +#. _("<p>Use <b>Add</b> to add a new configuration option, <b>Edit</b> to modify +#. an existing option, and <b>Delete</b> to delete an option. +#. Use <b>Up</b> and <b>Down</b> to change the order +#. of the back-ends.</p> +#. "), +#. no such button there +#. /* passdb backend configuration dialog help 7/7 */ +#. _("<p>The <b>LDAP</b> button gives access to +#. details of an LDAP configuration and also allows +#. checking a connection to an LDAP server for the currently +#. selected LDAP back-end.</p> +#. "), +#. add new share dialog help 1/3 +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:248 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Add a New Share</big></b><br>\n" +"Here, enter the basic information about a share to add.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. add new share dialog help 2/3 +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:252 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Share Name</b> is used for accessing\n" +"the share from clients. <b>Share Description</b> describes the\n" +"purpose of the share.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. add new share dialog help 3/3 +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:258 +msgid "" +"<p>There are two types of shares. A <b>Printer</b> share\n" +"is presented as a printer to clients. A <b>Directory</b> share \n" +"is presented as a network disk. <b>Share Path</b> must be\n" +"entered for a directory share.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. add new share dialog help 4/3 +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:265 +msgid "" +"<p>If <b>Read-Only</b> is checked, users\n" +"of a service may not create or modify files in the service's\n" +"directory.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:270 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Inherit ACLS</b> can be used to ensure\n" +"that if default ACLs exist on parent directories, they are always\n" +"honored when creating a subdirectory.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. add new share dialog help +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:276 +msgid "<p>With <b>Expose Snapshots</b> selected, Samba exposes snapshots created by Snapper for access and manipulation by CIFS/SMB clients. This option is only available if Samba offers Snapper support, and the Share Path corresponds to a Btrfs backed Snapper configuration subvolume.<br> Relevant permissions must also be granted, see Samba's <b>vfs_snapper(8)</b> man page for further details.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:283 +msgid "<p><b>Utilize Btrfs Features</b> instructs Samba to take advantage of features specific to the Btrfs filesystem. This option is only available if Samba offers Btrfs support, and the Share Path is a Btrfs subvolume. See Samba's <b>vfs_btrfs(8)</b> man page for further details.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help for LDAP Settings dialog +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:289 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>LDAP Settings</big></b><br>\n" +"Here, determine the LDAP server to use for authentication.\n" +"</p>\n" +"<p>\n" +"Setting <b>LDAP Password Back-End</b> allows storing user information in the LDAP tree specified by the URL. With <b>LDAP Idmap Back-End</b>, store SID/uid/gid mapping tables in LDAP.\n" +"</p><p>\n" +"In the Authentication section, set the credentials for the LDAP server, including full Administrator DN.\n" +"</p>\n" +"<b>Search Base DN</b> is the LDAP suffix appended to Samba-specific LDAP objects.\n" +"</p><p>\n" +"To test the connection to your LDAP server, click <b>Test Connection</b>. To set expert LDAP settings or use default values, click <b>Advanced Settings</b>.<p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help for SambaLDAPSettingsSuffixesWidget +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:303 +msgid "<p><b>User Suffix</b> specifies where users are added to the LDAP tree. The value is pre-pended to the value of <b>Search Base DN</b>. Similarly, <b>Group Suffix</b> specifies the place for groups, <b>Machine Suffix</b> for machines and <b>Idmap Suffix</b> for idmap mappings.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help for SambaLDAPSettingsTimeoutsWidget +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:307 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Replication Sleep</b> is the amount of milliseconds Samba will wait after writing to the LDAP server, so LDAP replicas can catch up.</p>\n" +"<p><b>Time-Out</b> specifies the timeout for LDAP operations (in seconds).</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help for SambaLDAPSettingsSecurityWidget +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:311 +msgid "<p>Define whether to use SSL for LDAP connection with <b>Use SSL or TLS</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help for SambaLDAPSettingsMiscWidget +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:315 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Delete DN</b> specifies if the delete operation deletes the complete LDAP entry or only the Samba-specific attributes.</p>\n" +"<p>With <b>Synchronize Passwords</b>, define possible synchronization of the LDAP password with the NT and LM hashes. See the <tt>smb.conf</tt> manual page for details.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: warning text +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:322 +msgid "" +"If you change the NetBIOS Hostname, Samba creates a\n" +"service identifier (SID) for your server with the first client\n" +"connection. Because the new SID is not equal to the old one, clients can\n" +"no longer authenticate as domain members.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: warning text +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:329 +msgid "" +"Consider that /tmp and /var/tmp are publicly accessible\n" +"directories and a scheduled clean job might remove files after a\n" +"configured period. See MAX_DAYS_IN_TMP and TMP_DIRS_TO_CLEAR in\n" +"/etc/sysconfig/cron.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: warning text +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:336 +msgid "" +"Exporting /var might lead to security problems. The\n" +"directory includes many secrets of your system.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: warning text +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:340 +msgid "" +"Exporting /etc might lead to security problems. The\n" +"directory includes many secrets of your system.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: warning text +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:346 +msgid "" +"Exporting / might lead to security problems because it makes your\n" +"entire file system browsable from Samba clients.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:350 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Advanced Settings</b> provides access to \n" +"detailed configuration, such as LDAP settings, user authentication sources, and\n" +"expert global settings.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: combo box value +#: src/include/samba-server/ldap-widget.rb:67 +msgid "TLS" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: combo box value (updata password? Yes/No/Only = Only update the LDAP password and let the LDAP server do the rest) +#: src/include/samba-server/ldap-widget.rb:82 +msgid "Only" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: popup warning message about empty text entry +#: src/include/samba-server/ldap-widget.rb:166 +msgid "Enter the server URL." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: inform text +#: src/include/samba-server/ldap-widget.rb:181 +#: src/include/samba-server/ldap-widget.rb:289 +msgid "Passwords do not match." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: inform text +#: src/include/samba-server/ldap-widget.rb:300 +msgid "Passwords match." +msgstr "" + +#. Propose default values +#. translators: popup message +#: src/include/samba-server/ldap-widget.rb:351 +#: src/include/samba-server/ldap-widget.rb:369 +msgid "" +"All current LDAP-related values will be rewritten.\n" +"Continue?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: popup message +#: src/include/samba-server/ldap-widget.rb:364 +msgid "Connection successful." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: text entry label +#: src/include/samba-server/ldap-widget.rb:432 +msgid "&Search Base DN" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/ldap-widget.rb:435 +msgid "Authentication" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: text entry label +#: src/include/samba-server/ldap-widget.rb:438 +msgid "&Administration DN" +msgstr "" + +#. TODO: if Mode::config() => no ask for pssword +#. translators: password enrty label +#: src/include/samba-server/ldap-widget.rb:447 +msgid "Administration &Password" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: reenter password entry label +#: src/include/samba-server/ldap-widget.rb:453 +msgid "Administration Password (A&gain)" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: frame title (passdb == password database) +#: src/include/samba-server/ldap-widget.rb:464 +msgid "Passdb Back-End" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: check box label +#: src/include/samba-server/ldap-widget.rb:471 +msgid "Use LDAP Password &Back-End" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: text entry label +#: src/include/samba-server/ldap-widget.rb:475 +msgid "LDAP Server &URL" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: frame title (idmap = user id mapping) +#: src/include/samba-server/ldap-widget.rb:483 +msgid "Idmap Back-End" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: check box label +#: src/include/samba-server/ldap-widget.rb:490 +msgid "Use LDAP &Idmap Back-End" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: text entry label +#: src/include/samba-server/ldap-widget.rb:494 +msgid "LDAP Server U&RL" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/ldap-widget.rb:517 +msgid "&Test Connection" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/ldap-widget.rb:520 +msgid "Advanced &Settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: dialog caption +#: src/include/samba-server/ldap-widget.rb:522 +#: src/include/samba-server/ldap-widget.rb:820 +msgid "Expert LDAP Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/samba-server/ldap-widget.rb:523 +msgid "Default Values" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: frame label +#: src/include/samba-server/ldap-widget.rb:587 +msgid "Suffixes" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: text entry label +#: src/include/samba-server/ldap-widget.rb:590 +msgid "&User Suffix" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: text entry label +#: src/include/samba-server/ldap-widget.rb:592 +msgid "&Group Suffix" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: text entry label +#: src/include/samba-server/ldap-widget.rb:594 +msgid "&Machine Suffix" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: text entry label +#: src/include/samba-server/ldap-widget.rb:596 +msgid "&Idmap Suffix" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: frame label +#: src/include/samba-server/ldap-widget.rb:641 +msgid "Time-Outs" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: integer field label +#: src/include/samba-server/ldap-widget.rb:647 +msgid "&Replication Sleep" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: integer field label +#: src/include/samba-server/ldap-widget.rb:654 +msgid "&Time-Out" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: frame label +#: src/include/samba-server/ldap-widget.rb:693 +msgid "Security" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: combo box label +#: src/include/samba-server/ldap-widget.rb:699 +msgid "&Use SSL or TLS" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: frame label +#: src/include/samba-server/ldap-widget.rb:747 +msgid "Other Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. No such option, bug 169194 +#. translators: text entry label +#. `Left(`TextEntry(`id("ldap filter"), _("Search &Filter"))), +#. translators: combo box label +#: src/include/samba-server/ldap-widget.rb:757 +msgid "&Delete DN" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: combo box label +#: src/include/samba-server/ldap-widget.rb:767 +msgid "&Synchronize Passwords" +msgstr "" + +#. Initialization dialog caption +#: src/include/samba-server/wizards.rb:167 +msgid "Samba Server Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Initialization dialog contents +#: src/include/samba-server/wizards.rb:169 +msgid "Initializing..." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: in error message, followed by server error +#: src/modules/SambaBackendLDAP.pm:261 +msgid "Additional Information:" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: unknown error message +#: src/modules/SambaBackendLDAP.pm:265 +msgid "Unknown error. Perhaps yast2-ldap is not available." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SambaBackendLDAP.pm:338 +msgid "Unknown Class:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SambaBackendLDAP.pm:338 +msgid "Only dcObject (dc) and organizationalUnit (ou) classes are supported." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: warning message, %s is LDAP server name/IP +#: src/modules/SambaBackendLDAP.pm:624 +#, perl-format +msgid "" +"It seems that there is no functional\n" +"LDAP server at %s.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: server role name +#: src/modules/SambaRole.pm:50 +msgid "File and Printer Sharing" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: server role name +#: src/modules/SambaRole.pm:52 +msgid "Backup Domain Controller" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: server role name +#: src/modules/SambaRole.pm:54 +msgid "Primary Domain Controller" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: server role name +#: src/modules/SambaRole.pm:56 +msgid "Domain Member Server" +msgstr "" + +#. Samba-server read dialog caption +#: src/modules/SambaServer.pm:138 +msgid "Initializing Samba Server Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: progress stage +#: src/modules/SambaServer.pm:143 +msgid "Read global Samba settings" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: progress stage +#: src/modules/SambaServer.pm:145 +msgid "Read Samba secrets" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: progress stage +#: src/modules/SambaServer.pm:147 +msgid "Read Samba service settings" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: progress stage +#: src/modules/SambaServer.pm:149 +msgid "Read Samba accounts" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: progress stage +#: src/modules/SambaServer.pm:151 +msgid "Read the back-end settings" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: progress stage +#: src/modules/SambaServer.pm:153 +msgid "Read the firewall settings" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: progress stage +#: src/modules/SambaServer.pm:155 +msgid "Read Samba service role settings" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: progress step +#: src/modules/SambaServer.pm:158 +msgid "Reading global Samba settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: progress step +#: src/modules/SambaServer.pm:160 +msgid "Reading Samba secrets..." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: progress step +#: src/modules/SambaServer.pm:162 +msgid "Reading Samba service settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: progress step +#: src/modules/SambaServer.pm:164 +msgid "Reading Samba accounts..." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: progress step +#: src/modules/SambaServer.pm:166 +msgid "Reading the back-end settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: progress step +#: src/modules/SambaServer.pm:168 +msgid "Reading the firewall settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: progress stage +#: src/modules/SambaServer.pm:170 +msgid "Reading Samba service role settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: progress finished +#. translators: write progress step +#: src/modules/SambaServer.pm:172 src/modules/SambaServer.pm:285 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#. Samba-server read dialog caption +#: src/modules/SambaServer.pm:255 +msgid "Saving Samba Server Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: write progress stage +#: src/modules/SambaServer.pm:260 +msgid "Write global settings" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: write progress stage +#: src/modules/SambaServer.pm:262 +msgid "Disable Samba services" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: write progress stage +#: src/modules/SambaServer.pm:264 +msgid "Enable Samba services" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: write progress stage +#: src/modules/SambaServer.pm:266 +msgid "Write back-end settings" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: write progress stage +#: src/modules/SambaServer.pm:268 +msgid "Write Samba accounts" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: write progress stage +#: src/modules/SambaServer.pm:270 +msgid "Save firewall settings" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: write progress step +#: src/modules/SambaServer.pm:273 +msgid "Writing global settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: write progress step +#: src/modules/SambaServer.pm:275 +msgid "Disabling Samba services..." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: write progress step +#: src/modules/SambaServer.pm:277 +msgid "Enabling Samba services..." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: write progress step +#: src/modules/SambaServer.pm:279 +msgid "Writing back-end settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: write progress step +#: src/modules/SambaServer.pm:281 +msgid "Writing Samba accounts..." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: write progress step +#: src/modules/SambaServer.pm:283 +msgid "Saving firewall settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. /etc/samba/smb.conf is filename +#: src/modules/SambaServer.pm:309 +msgid "Cannot write settings to /etc/samba/smb.conf." +msgstr "" + +#. summary item: configured workgroup/domain +#: src/modules/SambaServer.pm:406 +msgid "Global Configuration:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SambaServer.pm:408 +#, perl-format +msgid "Workgroup or Domain: %s" +msgstr "" + +#. summary item: selected role for the samba server +#: src/modules/SambaServer.pm:412 +#, perl-format +msgid "Role: %s" +msgstr "" + +#. summary item: status of the samba service +#: src/modules/SambaServer.pm:415 +msgid "Samba server is disabled" +msgstr "" + +#. summary heading: configured shares +#: src/modules/SambaServer.pm:419 +msgid "Share Configuration:" +msgstr "" + +#. summary item: no configured shares +#: src/modules/SambaServer.pm:425 +msgid "None" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/samba-users.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/samba-users.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/samba-users.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. helptext +#: src/clients/users_plugin_samba.rb:74 +msgid "<p>Here, edit the setting of the user's samba account.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/users_plugin_samba.rb:77 +msgid "<p>If do not enter custom values for " +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/users_plugin_samba.rb:78 +msgid "<b>Home Drive</b>, <b>Home Path</b>, <b>Profile Path</b>, and <b>Logon Script</b> " +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/users_plugin_samba.rb:81 +msgid "the default values as defined in your local Samba Configuration will be used.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/users_plugin_samba.rb:96 +msgid "Home Drive" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/users_plugin_samba.rb:107 src/clients/users_plugin_samba.rb:128 +#: src/clients/users_plugin_samba.rb:149 src/clients/users_plugin_samba.rb:173 +msgid "Use Default Values" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/users_plugin_samba.rb:117 +msgid "Home Path" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/users_plugin_samba.rb:138 +msgid "Profile Path" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: logon is the Windows synonym for login +#: src/clients/users_plugin_samba.rb:162 +msgid "Logon Script" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/users_plugin_samba.rb:185 +msgid "Samba Account Disabled" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/users_plugin_samba.rb:187 +msgid "No Password Expiration" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#. dialog caption +#: src/clients/users_plugin_samba.rb:199 +#: src/clients/users_plugin_samba_groups.rb:112 +msgid "Edit Samba Attributes" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/clients/users_plugin_samba_groups.rb:82 +msgid "" +"<p>This plugin can be used to enable an LDAP group to be available for Samba.\n" +"The only setting that you can edit here is the <b>Samba Group Name</b> attribute,\n" +"which is the Name of the Group as it should appear to Samba-Clients. All other\n" +"settings are computed automatically. If you leave the <b>Samba Group Name</b>\n" +"empty, the same name as configured in the Global Settings of this Group will\n" +"be used.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/users_plugin_samba_groups.rb:99 +msgid "Samba Group Name" +msgstr "" + +#. plugin name +#: src/modules/UsersPluginSamba.pm:85 src/modules/UsersPluginSambaGroups.pm:85 +msgid "Samba Attributes" +msgstr "" + +#. summary +#: src/modules/UsersPluginSamba.pm:95 +msgid "Manage samba account parameters" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/UsersPluginSamba.pm:203 +msgid "Could not update objectClass attribute." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/UsersPluginSamba.pm:252 +msgid "Could not initialize Samba SID. Disabling plug-in." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/UsersPluginSamba.pm:294 +msgid "Change the password to create the Samba account" +msgstr "" + +#. summary +#: src/modules/UsersPluginSambaGroups.pm:95 +msgid "Manage Samba attribute of LDAP groups" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/scanner.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/scanner.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/scanner.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,1475 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. Text for the command_line_description: +#. (the same as the caption of the matching help text) +#. Whole configuration of scanner but without reading and writing. +#. For use with autoinstallation. +#. @return sequence result +#: src/clients/scanner.rb:51 src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:110 +#: src/include/scanner/wizards.rb:114 +msgid "Scanner Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. where scanners and associated drivers are listed: +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:116 +msgid "Driver" +msgstr "" + +#. Header for a column of the overview table +#. where scanners and associated drivers are listed: +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:119 +msgid "Scanner" +msgstr "" + +#. Label of a button to restart autodetection of scanners: +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:125 +msgid "&Restart Detection" +msgstr "" + +#. Label of a button to test a scanner: +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:130 +msgid "&Test" +msgstr "" + +#. Label of a button to run hp-setup. +#. Do not change or translate "hp-setup", it is a program name: +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:136 +msgid "Run &hp-setup" +msgstr "" + +#. Label of a button to go to the network scanning dialog. +#. Do not confuse "scanning via network" +#. (i.e. use a remote scanner via another host in the network) +#. with "scanning the network" +#. (i.e. scan the network for other hosts or services): +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:145 +msgid "Scanning via &Network..." +msgstr "" + +#. edit +#. delete +#. Test if the active backend is the 'net' meta-backend: +#. test +#. select a scanner +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:209 src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:334 +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:417 src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:456 +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:532 src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:753 +msgid "Nothing Selected" +msgstr "" + +#. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when nothing was selected: +#. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when nothing was selected: +#. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when nothing was selected: +#. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when nothing was selected: +#. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when nothing was selected: +#. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when no model was selected: +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:211 src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:336 +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:419 src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:458 +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:534 src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:755 +msgid "Select an entry." +msgstr "" + +#. without a matching active scanner was selected +#. and then the user clicked the [Edit] button. +#. Translate 'Edit' to the exact label of the [Edit] button. +#. when there is neither a detected scanner nor an active scanner or driver +#. and then the user clicked the [Edit] button. +#. Translate 'Edit' to the exact label of the [Edit] button. +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:284 src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:300 +msgid "Edit Not Possible" +msgstr "" + +#. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when an active driver +#. without a matching active scanner was selected +#. and then the user clicked the [Edit] button: +#. Translate 'delete' to the exact label of the [Delete] button. +#. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when an active driver +#. without a matching active scanner was selected +#. and then the user clicked the [Test] button: +#. Translate 'delete' to the exact label of the [Delete] button. +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:289 src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:497 +msgid "It is only possible to delete a driver without a matching scanner." +msgstr "" + +#. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when there is only the fallback entry +#. when there is neither a detected scanner nor an active scanner or driver +#. and then the user clicked the [Edit] button. +#. Translate 'add' to the exact label of the [Add] button. +#. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when there is only the fallback entry +#. when there is neither a detected scanner nor an active scanner or driver +#. and then the user clicked the [Delete] button. +#. Translate 'add' to the exact label of the [Add] button. +#. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when there is only the fallback entry +#. when there is neither a detected scanner nor an active scanner or driver +#. and then the user clicked the [Test] button. +#. Translate 'add' to the exact label of the [Add] button. +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:305 src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:374 +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:513 +msgid "It is only possible to add a scanner." +msgstr "" + +#. which is not yet configured was selected +#. and then the user clicked the [Delete] button. +#. Translate 'Delete' to the exact label of the [Delete] button. +#. when there is neither a detected scanner nor an active scanner or driver +#. and then the user clicked the [Delete] button. +#. Translate 'Delete' to the exact label of the [Delete] button. +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:355 src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:369 +msgid "Delete Not Possible" +msgstr "" + +#. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when an autodetected scanner +#. which is not yet configured was selected +#. and then the user clicked the [Delete] button: +#. Translate 'edit' to the exact label of the [Edit] button. +#. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when an autodetected scanner +#. which is not yet configured was selected +#. and then the user clicked the [Test] button: +#. Translate 'edit' to the exact label of the [Edit] button. +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:360 src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:482 +msgid "It is only possible to edit a detected scanner." +msgstr "" + +#. where %1 will be replaced by the driver name: +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:426 +msgid "Deactivate %1?" +msgstr "" + +#. where %1 will be replaced by the driver (backend) name. +#. Only a simple message because before the function Scanner::DeactivateBackend +#. was called and this function would have shown more specific messages. +#. Only a simple message because before the function Scanner::DeactivateBackend +#. was called and this function would have shown more specific messages. +#. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system +#. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:438 src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:971 +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:2261 +msgid "Failed to deactivate %1." +msgstr "" + +#. which is not yet configured was selected +#. and then the user clicked the [Test] button. +#. Translate 'Test' to the exact label of the [Test] button. +#. without a matching active scanner was selected +#. and then the user clicked the [Test] button. +#. Translate 'Test' to the exact label of the [Test] button. +#. when there is neither a detected scanner nor an active scanner or driver +#. and then the user clicked the [Test] button. +#. Translate 'Test' to the exact label of the [Test] button. +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:477 src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:492 +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:508 +msgid "Test Not Possible" +msgstr "" + +#. Only a simple message because before the function Scanner::TestBackend +#. was called and this function would have shown more specific messages. +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:542 +msgid "Failed to test %1." +msgstr "" + +#. Only a simple message because before the function Scanner::RunHpsetup +#. was called and this function would have shown more specific messages. +#. Do not change or translate "hp-setup", it is a program name: +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:582 +msgid "Failed to run hp-setup." +msgstr "" + +#. Select model dialog +#. @return dialog result +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:605 +msgid "Scanner Model and Driver Selection" +msgstr "" + +#. Header of a TextEntry user input field to enter a search string: +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:662 +msgid "S&earch String" +msgstr "" + +#. Label of a PushButton to search a list for a search string: +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:675 +msgid "&Search" +msgstr "" + +#. Label of a PushButton to show all entries of a list: +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:680 +msgid "Show Complete &List" +msgstr "" + +#. Header of a SelectionBox with a list of models: +#. Header of a SelectionBox with a list of models: +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:688 src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:724 +msgid "Scanner &Models" +msgstr "" + +#. Header of a SelectionBox with the complete list of models: +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:740 +msgid "All Scanner &Models" +msgstr "" + +#. Compare how the ModelItems function builds the matching status_strings by using the same logic: +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:773 +msgid "Unsupported Model" +msgstr "" + +#. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when an unsupported model was selected: +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:775 +msgid "" +"This model is not supported.\n" +"Ask the manufacturer for a Linux driver." +msgstr "" + +#. which is listed as "unsupported" for a particular driver: +#. %1 will be replaced by the backend (scanner driver) name +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:784 +msgid "Model Not Supported by the Driver %1" +msgstr "" + +#. Header of a Popup::AnyMessage when a model was selected +#. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when a model was selected +#. which is listed as "unsupported" for a particular driver: +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:789 +msgid "" +"Check if another driver supports it,\n" +"select a compatible model,\n" +"or ask the manufacturer for a Linux driver." +msgstr "" + +#. on a non-i386-compatible architecture (i.e. neither i386 nor x86_64). +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:832 +msgid "Unsupported Driver" +msgstr "" + +#. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when the epkowa driver was selected +#. on a non-i386-compatible architecture (i.e. neither i386 nor x86_64). +#. Do not change or translate "epkowa", it is a driver name. +#. Do not change or translate "i386", it is an architecture name. +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:837 +msgid "The epkowa driver is only available for i386-compatible architectures (32-bit i386 and also 64-bit x86_64)." +msgstr "" + +#. when the epkowa driver was selected on x86_64: +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:845 +msgid "Possibly Problematic Driver" +msgstr "" + +#. Body of a Popup::ContinueCancelHeadline +#. when the epkowa driver was selected on x86_64. +#. Do not change or translate "epkowa", it is a driver name. +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:849 +msgid "The epkowa driver may cause problems on 64-bit x86_64 architecture." +msgstr "" + +#. when the outdated hpoj driver was selected: +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:865 +msgid "Outdated Driver" +msgstr "" + +#. Body of a Popup::ContinueCancelHeadline +#. when the outdated hpoj driver was selected. +#. Do not change or translate "hpoj", it is a driver name. +#. Do not change or translate "hpaio", it is a driver name. +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:870 +msgid "" +"The hpoj driver should work but it is no longer maintained.\n" +"Try to use the up-to-date driver hpaio." +msgstr "" + +#. Configure backend dialog +#. @return dialog result +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:892 +msgid "Scanner and Driver Setup" +msgstr "" + +#. Only a simple message because before the function Scanner::ActivateBackend +#. was called and this function would have shown more specific messages. +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:940 +msgid "Failed to activate %1." +msgstr "" + +#. Caption of the ConfigureNetworkScanningDialog: +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:1005 +msgid "Set Up Scanning via Network" +msgstr "" + +#. Header of a TextEntry user input field. +#. Do not change or translate "saned", it is a program (sane daemon) name. +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:1008 +msgid "Permitted &Clients for saned" +msgstr "" + +#. Header of a TextEntry user input field. +#. Do not change or translate "net", it is a metadriver name. +#. Do not simply use "driver" because net is no normal driver but a metadriver. +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:1012 +msgid "&Servers Used for the net Metadriver" +msgstr "" + +#. All contenst of the scanning via network dialog: +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:1023 +msgid "Server Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Label of a Frame for the server settings for scanning via network. +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:1032 +msgid "Client Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Label of a Frame for the client settings for scanning via network. +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:1041 +msgid "Predefined Configurations" +msgstr "" + +#. Label of a PushButton for a predefined configuration. +#. Be careful when you change or translate "local host configuration" +#. because this term is used also in the help text +#. and in a message of a Popup::ContinueCancel +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:1050 +msgid "&Local Host Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Label of a PushButton to disable scanning via network. +#. Do not confuse "scanning via network" +#. (i.e. use a remote scanner via another host in the network) +#. with "scanning the network" +#. (i.e. scan the network for other hosts or services). +#: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:1061 +msgid "&Disable Scanning via Network" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 1/1: +#: src/include/scanner/helps.rb:36 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><big>Initializing Scanner Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Please wait...\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 1/1: +#: src/include/scanner/helps.rb:44 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><big>Saving Scanner Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Please wait...\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Overview dialog help 1/8: +#: src/include/scanner/helps.rb:52 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><big>Scanner Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Set up or change the scanner configuration and show the already active scanners.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Overview dialog help 2/8: +#: src/include/scanner/helps.rb:59 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"To set up a new scanner, choose the scanner from the list of\n" +"detected scanners and press <b>Edit</b>.\n" +"If your scanner has not been detected, use <b>Add</b> for a manual configuration.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Overview dialog help 3/8: +#. Do not change or translate "HP", it is a manufacturer name. +#. Do not change or translate "OfficeJet", it is a model name. +#. Do not change or translate "PSC", it is a model (Printer Scanner Copier) name. +#. Do not change or translate "hp-setup", it is a command name. +#. Do not change or translate "lsusb", it is a command name. +#: src/include/scanner/helps.rb:72 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"A normal USB scanner should be detected automatically.\n" +"By default, only those USB scanners are shown\n" +"for which the USB vendor and product IDs are known.\n" +"If a USB scanner is not shown or if there are unexpected results,\n" +"try <b>Other</b> and <b>Restart Detection</b>.\n" +"It might happen that particular USB devices which are not scanners\n" +"are shown too. There is no generic way to reliably distinguish a scanner\n" +"from other USB devices because there is no USB device class for scanners.\n" +"Try to proceed with <b>Add</b>.\n" +"For HP all-in-one devices you may have to run <tt>hp-setup</tt>\n" +"via <b>Other</b> and <b>Run hp-setup</b> before you can \n" +"configure the scanner unit with this tool.\n" +"If you have difficulties configuring your scanner,\n" +"check whether it appears in the output of <tt>lsusb</tt>.\n" +"If it is not listed there, the USB system cannot communicate with the scanner.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Overview dialog help 4/8: +#. Do not change or translate "lsscsi", it is a command name. +#: src/include/scanner/helps.rb:93 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"SCSI scanners are normally detected.\n" +"If difficulties arise proceeding with <b>Add</b>,\n" +"check whether your scanner is shown by the command <tt>lsscsi</tt>.\n" +"If not, the SCSI system cannot communicate with the scanner.\n" +"Verify that an appropriate kernel module for the SCSI host adapter has been loaded.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Overview dialog help 5/8: +#. Do not change or translate "hp-setup", it is a command name. +#: src/include/scanner/helps.rb:104 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Parallel port scanners cannot be configured with this tool\n" +"except for HP all-in-one devices.\n" +"Common parallel port scanners must be configured manually.\n" +"To set up the scanner unit in a HP all-in-one device,\n" +"which is connected to the parallel port,\n" +"you may have to run <tt>hp-setup</tt> via <b>Other</b> and <b>Run hp-setup</b>\n" +"before you can configure the scanner unit with this tool using <b>Add</b>.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Overview dialog help 6/8: +#. Do not confuse a "network scanner" (i.e. a scanner which is directly accessible in the network) +#. with a "network scanner" (i.e. a program which scans the network for other hosts or services) +#. or with a "remote scanner" (i.e. a scanner which is connected to another host in the network). +#. Do not confuse "scanning via network" (i.e. use a remote scanner via another host in the network) +#. with "scanning the network" (i.e. scan the network for other hosts or services). +#. Do not change or translate "hp-setup", it is a command name. +#: src/include/scanner/helps.rb:122 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Network scanners cannot be configured with this tool\n" +"except for HP all-in-one devices.\n" +"Network scanners must be configured manually.\n" +"A network scanner is a scanner that has a network interface\n" +"so it is directly accessible in the network.\n" +"In contrast, scanning via network means accessing a remote scanner\n" +"connected to another host in the network.\n" +"To set up the scanner unit in a HP all-in-one device,\n" +"which is connected via a built-in network interface,\n" +"you may have to run <tt>hp-setup</tt> via <b>Other</b> and <b>Run hp-setup</b>\n" +"before it works to configure the scanner unit with this tool using <b>Add</b>.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Overview dialog help 7/8: +#. Do not confuse "scanning via network" (i.e. use a remote scanner via another host in the network) +#. with "scanning the network" (i.e. scan the network for other hosts or services). +#. It is not possible to modify or remove an active scanner directly. +#. It is only possible to modify or remove a driver and this way +#. all scanners which are associated with this driver are modified or removed. +#. Do not change or translate "hp-setup", it is a command name. +#: src/include/scanner/helps.rb:144 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"The table lists the configured drivers with their associated scanners.\n" +"Press <b>Add</b> to select model and driver and enable it.\n" +"Press <b>Edit</b> to select and enable a driver.\n" +"Press <b>Delete</b> to disable the driver.\n" +"If you press <b>Other</b>, you can restart the detection, test enabled drivers,\n" +"set up HP all-in-one devices, or set up scanning via network.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Overview dialog help 8/8: +#. The most often problem which is reported by users regarding scanner setup is +#. when a driver was set up but then no scanner was recognized by this driver. +#. If the driver is the right one for the scanner, then in very most cases +#. the reason is a low-level (kernel related) device communication problem +#. (i.e. a low-level USB problem or a low-level SCSI problem). +#. Those problems cannot be fixed from within the YaST scanner setup module +#. but at least the user must be informed. +#. Be careful when you change or translate "No scanner recognized by this driver" +#. because exactly this text is shown here to the user in this case. +#. In particular keep the meaning of "recognize" because the driver actually runs +#. but the running driver fails to recognize the scanner. +#: src/include/scanner/helps.rb:166 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"If a driver is set up but no scanner is recognized by the driver, possible reasons are:\n" +"The scanner is not connected or switched off,\n" +"the driver is not the right one for the particular model\n" +"(even small differences in model names or internal differences in\n" +"the same model series may require different drivers),\n" +"there are low-level (kernel related) device communication problems\n" +"(e.g. a low-level USB problem or a low-level SCSI problem).\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. SelectModel dialog help 1/5: +#. Do not change or translate "SANE", it is a project name. +#: src/include/scanner/helps.rb:180 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><big>Scanner Model Selection</big></b><br>\n" +"All known scanner models, both supported and unsupported, are listed here.\n" +"Read all information carefully before selecting a model and pressing <b>Next</b>.\n" +"The information is based on data of the SANE project at\n" +"<tt>http://www.sane-project.org/</tt>.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. SelectModel dialog help 2/5: +#. Do not change or translate "SANE", it is a project name. +#. Do not change or translate "sane-backends", it is a package name. +#: src/include/scanner/helps.rb:192 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"A model is supported if there is at least one appropriate scanner driver available.\n" +"Most scanner drivers are from the SANE project and provided in the sane-backends package.\n" +"The support status for a particular model varies from minimal to complete.<br>\n" +"When a driver is shown as 'unmaintained', it does not mean that the driver does not work.\n" +"Even an unmaintained driver could work perfectly well.\n" +"But it means that there is no longer someone who knows about the driver internals\n" +"so that there is usually no help if there are issues with an unmaintained driver.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. SelectModel dialog help 3/5: +#: src/include/scanner/helps.rb:204 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Even if a model has no driver available, the manufacturer might have a driver.\n" +"Therefore, you should ask the scanner manufacturer for a driver for an unsupported scanner.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. SelectModel dialog help 4/5: +#. Add the following sentence to translations: +#. Such comments are only available in English. +#: src/include/scanner/helps.rb:213 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"When additional comments are available, they are shown in square brackets.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. SelectModel dialog help 4/5: +#. Do not change or translate "^Epson.*", "^Epson.*perfection", "^Epson.*1200": +#. These are intentionally selected actually working examples. +#: src/include/scanner/helps.rb:221 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Use the <b>Search String</b> to find an appropriate entry quickly.\n" +"To find some text anywhere in the table, enter it in the field.\n" +"A more complicated search using a case-insensitive regular expression is also possible.\n" +"If the scanner was detected and the manufacturer name is available in this list,\n" +"the search string is preset with the manufacturer name, such as <tt>^Epson.*</tt>.\n" +"To refine the search results, append model-specific details to the search string.\n" +"For example, append a word that is part of the model name as in <tt>^Epson.*perfection</tt>\n" +"or append some digits that are part of the model name as in <tt>^Epson.*1200</tt>.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. ConfigureBackend dialog help 1/4: +#: src/include/scanner/helps.rb:235 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><big>Scanner and Driver Setup</big></b><br>\n" +"The driver is activated and the associated scanners are probed.\n" +"This may take a few seconds, so you must wait until you can press <b>Next</b>.\n" +"If you press <b>Back</b>, the driver is deactivated.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. ConfigureBackend dialog help 2/4: +#: src/include/scanner/helps.rb:244 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><big>Additional Packages</big></b><br>\n" +"If the package that provides the driver is not yet installed,\n" +"an appropriate dialog is shown to install the package.\n" +"Such packages may not be available for all architectures.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. ConfigureBackend dialog help 3/4: +#: src/include/scanner/helps.rb:253 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><big>Firmware Upload</big></b><br>\n" +"Some models require a firmware upload.\n" +"In this case, an appropriate explanatory text is shown.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. ConfigureBackend dialog help 4/4: +#. Do not change or translate "HP", it is a manufacturer name. +#. Do not change or translate "HPOJ", it is a project name. +#. Do not change or translate "hp-officeJet", it is a package name. +#. Do not change or translate "PTAL", it is a subsystem name. +#. Do not change or translate "ptal", it is a service name. +#. Do not change or translate "HPLIP", it is a project name. +#. Do not change or translate "hpaio", it is a driver name. +#. The "for all" is crucial in "either ... or ... must be used for all HP all-in-one devices". +#: src/include/scanner/helps.rb:269 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><big>HP All-in-One Devices</big></b><br>\n" +"HP all-in-one devices may require a special setup.\n" +"In this case, an appropriate dialog is shown.\n" +"There are two software packages that provide support for HP all-in-one devices:\n" +"the outdated HPOJ software (package hp-officeJet which is no longer available),\n" +"which provides the PTAL system (with the ptal service) to access HP all-in-one devices,\n" +"and the up-to-date HPLIP software (package hplip), which provides the hpaio driver.\n" +"Both software packages can be installed at the same time\n" +"but the ptal service and the hpaio driver cannot run together.\n" +"Therefore either the patl service or the hpaio driver\n" +"must be used for all HP all-in-one devices.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. ConfigureNetworkScanning dialog help 1/5: +#. Do not confuse "scanning via network" (i.e. use a remote scanner via another host in the network) +#. with "scanning the network" (i.e. scan the network for other hosts or services). +#: src/include/scanner/helps.rb:288 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><big>Scanning via Network</big></b><br>\n" +"Enter the appropriate information and press <b>Next</b>\n" +"to set up scanning via network.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. ConfigureNetworkScanning dialog help 2/5: +#. Do not change or translate "saned", it is a program (sane daemon) name. +#. Do not change or translate "CIDR", it is a (sub)-network notation name. +#. Do not change or translate "192.168.1.0/24", it is an intentionally selected actually working example. +#. Do not change or translate "xinetd", it is a program (daemon) name. +#: src/include/scanner/helps.rb:300 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><big>Server Settings</big></b><br>\n" +"If you have locally connected scanners and want to make them accessible via the network,\n" +"set up the saned network scanning daemon so that your host becomes a server.\n" +"In <b>Permitted Clients</b>, enter which client hosts are permitted to access saned on your server.\n" +"Enter a comma-separated list of client hosts (hostnames or IP addresses)\n" +"or subnets (CIDR notation, such as 192.168.1.0/24).\n" +"If no client hosts are permitted, saned is not activated.\n" +"If saned is activated, xinetd is also activated and set up for saned.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. ConfigureNetworkScanning dialog help 3/5: +#. Do not change or translate "saned", it is a program (sane daemon) name. +#. Do not change or translate "sane-port", it is a port name (see /etc/services). +#. Be careful when you change or translate "external", "internal", and "zone" +#. to keep the relationship to the matching terms in the YaST firewall setup module +#. where also "external zone", and "internal zone" is used. +#. Keep the information that external access is useless and insecure (see "man saned"). +#: src/include/scanner/helps.rb:319 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><big>Regarding Firewall</big></b><br>\n" +"A firewall is used to protect running server processes\n" +"on your host against unwanted access via network.\n" +"For using scanners via network the SANE network daemon (the saned)\n" +"is the server process which must run so that remote clients\n" +"can access scanners which are connected to your local host.\n" +"Client hosts contact the saned via the sane-port (TCP port 6566)\n" +"but scanning data is transferred via an additional random port.\n" +"Therefore only port 6566 is not sufficient for scanning via network.<br>\n" +"Do not open the sane-port 6566 or any other port\n" +"regarding using scanners for the external zone in the firewall.\n" +"This is dangerous because it allows access to the saned from foreign hosts\n" +"so that the firewall does no longer provide any protection for the saned.\n" +"Allowing access from the external network (i.e. for the external zone)\n" +"does not make sense because scanning documents requires\n" +"physical scanner access by trusted users.<br>\n" +"On the other hand the default firewall settings allow\n" +"any access from an internal (i.e. trusted) network.\n" +"To make the saned on your server accessible from an internal network,\n" +"assign the network interface which belongs to the internal network\n" +"to the internal zone of the firewall.\n" +"Use the YaST Firewall setup module to do this fundamental setup\n" +"regarding network security and firewall and scanning via network\n" +"will work without any further firewall setup.<br>\n" +"For details see the openSUSE support database\n" +"article 'CUPS and SANE Firewall settings' at<br>\n" +"http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:CUPS_and_SANE_Firewall_settings\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. ConfigureNetworkScanning dialog help 4/5: +#. Do not change or translate "net", it is a metadriver name. +#. Do not simply use "driver" because net is no normal driver but a metadriver. +#. Do not change or translate "saned", it is a program (sane daemon) name. +#: src/include/scanner/helps.rb:354 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><big>Client Settings</big></b><br>\n" +"If you want to access scanners connected to other hosts (servers) in the network,\n" +"set up the net metadriver to access them via the daemon running on the servers.\n" +"The saned and the firewall on the servers must permit the access.\n" +"In <b>Servers Used</b>, enter which servers should be used.\n" +"Enter a comma-separated list of servers (server names or IP addresses).\n" +"If no servers are entered, net is not activated.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. ConfigureNetworkScanning dialog help 5/5: +#. Be careful when you change or translate "local host configuration" +#. because this term is used also in a message of a Popup::ContinueCancel +#. and as label of a PushButton for a predefined configuration. +#. Do not change or translate "saned", it is a program (sane daemon) name. +#. Do not change or translate "net", it is a metadriver name. +#. Do not simply use "driver" because net is no normal driver but a metadriver. +#. Do not change or translate "localhost", it is a fixed hostname for the local host. +#: src/include/scanner/helps.rb:373 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><big>Local Host Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"By using the loopback network, saned and the net metadriver\n" +"can be used even on your local host.\n" +"In this case, the server and client are the same machine (localhost).\n" +"Some scanners, such as parallel port scanners, require root privileges.\n" +"When you enter <tt>localhost</tt> for both the server and the client,\n" +"you can access such a scanner even as a normal user on your local host.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Label of the dialog for ScannerAutoSequence: +#: src/include/scanner/wizards.rb:116 +msgid "Initializing..." +msgstr "" + +#. to add a preceding "The error message is:" comment +#. to display an error message where +#. %1 will be replaced by the actual error message: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:355 +msgid "" +"The error message is:\n" +"\n" +"%1" +msgstr "" + +#. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system +#. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:377 +msgid "Failed to determine the version of package %1." +msgstr "" + +#. Message of a Popup::Error for models which require +#. the third-party Image Scan (IScan) driver software from Epson +#. (formerly Avasys, see https://bugzilla.novell.com/show_bug.cgi?id=746038). +#. Do not change or translate "Image Scan", it is a driver software name. +#. Do not change or translate "Avasys", it is a manufacturer name. +#. Do not change or translate "Epson", it is a manufacturer name. +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:399 +msgid "" +"The third-party Image Scan driver software from Epson/Avasys is required.\n" +"The Image Scan driver software is made and provided by Epson (formerly Avasys)\n" +"http://download.ebz.epson.net/dsc/search/01/search/?OSC=LXEpson\n" +"(formerly Avasys http://avasys.jp/eng/linux_driver/)\n" +"where RPM packages for 32-bit (i386) and 64-bit (x86_64) architecture\n" +"can be downloaded (if you accept the Epson/Avasys license agreements).\n" +"The Image Scan driver contains proprietary binary-only software.\n" +"For some models it is only available for 32-bit (i386) architecture\n" +"which does not work when you have a 64-bit system installation.\n" +"Some scanners are also supported by another (free-software) driver.\n" +"When your scanner model requires a DFSG non-free (proprietary) module,\n" +"you have to download and install two packages from Epson/Avasys:\n" +"The 'iscan' package for the base software and an additional\n" +"model dependant 'iscan-plugin' package with the proprietary module.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Is the package available to be installed? +#. Package::Available returns nil if no package source is available. +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:442 +msgid "Required package %1 is not installed and there is no package repository available." +msgstr "" + +#. Message of a Popup::Error where %1 will be replaced by the package name: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:457 +msgid "Required package %1 is not installed and not available in the repository." +msgstr "" + +#. Only a simple message because: +#. Either the user has explicitly rejected to install the package, +#. or this error does not happen on a normal system +#. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:476 +msgid "Failed to install required package %1." +msgstr "" + +#. Message of a Popup::Error when there is no response from the 'scanimage' command. +#. Do not change or translate "net", it is a metadriver name. +#. Do not simply use "driver" because net is no normal driver but a metadriver. +#. Do not change or translate "scanimage -L", it is a fixed command. +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:497 +msgid "" +"Failed to determine the active scanners.\n" +"If the net metadriver is activated while there is a problem\n" +"with the network, the 'scanimage -L' command may not respond. For example,\n" +"this may happen if communication with a server used by the net metadriver\n" +"gets distorted because a firewall drops some network traffic.\n" +"In this case, disable the net metadriver until the issue in the network is fixed.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system +#. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). +#. Do not confuse this error with the case when no active scanner was determined. +#. The latter results no error. +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:519 +msgid "Failed to determine the active scanners." +msgstr "" + +#. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system +#. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). +#. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system +#. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). +#. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system +#. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). +#. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system +#. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:533 src/modules/Scanner.rb:591 +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:650 src/modules/Scanner.rb:2500 +msgid "File %1 does not exist." +msgstr "" + +#. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system +#. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). +#. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system +#. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). +#. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system +#. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). +#. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system +#. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:553 src/modules/Scanner.rb:611 +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:670 src/modules/Scanner.rb:2520 +msgid "Failed to read %1." +msgstr "" + +#. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system +#. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). +#. Do not confuse this error with the case when no active driver was determined. +#. The latter results no error. +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:577 +msgid "Failed to determine the active drivers." +msgstr "" + +#. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system +#. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). +#. Do not confuse this error with the case when no scanner was autodetected. +#. The latter results no error. +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:636 +msgid "Failed to detect scanners automatically." +msgstr "" + +#. Global functions: +#. Read all scanner settings: +#. - Check installed packages +#. - Read or create the scanner database +#. - Determine active scanners +#. - Determine active backends +#. - Try to autodetect USB and SCSI scanners and HP all-in-one USB and NETWORK scanners +#. @return true on success +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:766 +msgid "Initializing Scanner Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:770 +msgid "Check installed packages" +msgstr "" + +#. 2. progress stage name of a Progress::New: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:772 +msgid "Read or create the scanner database" +msgstr "" + +#. 3. progress stage name of a Progress::New: +#. 5. progress stage name of a Progress::New: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:774 src/modules/Scanner.rb:1988 +msgid "Determine active scanners" +msgstr "" + +#. 4. progress stage name of a Progress::New: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:776 +msgid "Determine active drivers" +msgstr "" + +#. 5. progress stage name of a Progress::New: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:778 +msgid "Detect scanners" +msgstr "" + +#. 1. progress stage name of a Progress::New: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:781 +msgid "Checking installed packages..." +msgstr "" + +#. 2. progress step progress bar title of a Progress::New: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:783 +msgid "Reading or creating the scanner database..." +msgstr "" + +#. 3. progress step progress bar title of a Progress::New: +#. 5. progress step progress bar title of a Progress::New: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:785 src/modules/Scanner.rb:2001 +msgid "Determining active scanners..." +msgstr "" + +#. 4. progress step progress bar title of a Progress::New: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:787 +msgid "Determining active drivers..." +msgstr "" + +#. 5. progress step progress bar title of a Progress::New: +#. Busy message: +#. Body of a Popup::ShowFeedback: +#. Busy message: +#. Body of a Popup::ShowFeedback: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:789 src/modules/Scanner.rb:1001 +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1070 +msgid "Detecting scanners..." +msgstr "" + +#. Last progress step progress bar title of a Progress::New: +#. Last progress step progress bar title of a Progress::New: +#. Last progress step progress bar title of a Progress::New: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:791 src/modules/Scanner.rb:1030 +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:2003 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress 2. stage (Read or create the scanner database): +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:859 +msgid "Creating scanner database..." +msgstr "" + +#. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system +#. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:893 +msgid "Aborting: Failed to create the scanner database." +msgstr "" + +#. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system +#. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:933 +msgid "Aborting: Failed to read %1." +msgstr "" + +#. Write scanner settings: +#. - Save the actual environment +#. @return true on success +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1023 +msgid "Writing Scanner Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1026 +msgid "Save the actual environment" +msgstr "" + +#. 1. progress stage name of a Progress::New: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1028 +msgid "Saving the actual environment..." +msgstr "" + +#. Message of a Popup::Error when hp-setup should be run. +#. Do not change or translate "ptal", it is a service name. +#. Do not change or translate "hp-setup", it is a program name. +#. Do not change or translate "HPLIP", it is a subsystem name. +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1088 +msgid "" +"There is at least one printer configuration that uses the ptal service.\n" +"It is possible to proceed but then the running ptal service could prevent\n" +" hp-setup from working correctly.\n" +"It is recommended to abort the scanner configuration now,\n" +"stop the ptal service, change the printer configuration to use HPLIP,\n" +"and start the scanner configuration again afterwards.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Message of a Popup::Error when hp-setup should be run. +#. Do not change or translate "hp-setup", it is a program name: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1099 +msgid "" +"Cannot run hp-setup because no graphical display can be opened. \n" +"This happens if YaST runs in text-only mode, or the user who runs YaST \n" +"has no DISPLAY environment variable set, or if the YaST process is not \n" +"allowed to access the graphical display. In this case, abort the scanner \n" +"configuration, run hp-setup manually, and start the scanner configuration\n" +"again afterwards.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Message of a Popup::YesNo when hplip should be installed. +#. Do not change or translate "hp-setup", it is a program name. +#. Do not change or translate "hplip", it is a package name: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1111 +msgid "" +"It seems hplip is not installed, which is required to run hp-setup.\n" +"Should the hplip package be installed?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Message of a Popup::Error when hp-setup should be run. +#. Do not change or translate "hp-setup", it is a program name: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1117 +msgid "" +"Cannot run hp-setup because\n" +"/usr/bin/hp-setup is not executable\n" +"or does not exist.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Body of a Popup::ShowFeedback. +#. Do not change or translate "hp-setup", it is a program name: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1125 +msgid "" +"Launched hp-setup.\n" +"You must finish hp-setup before you can proceed with the scanner configuration.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. where autodetected scanners are listed in the second column +#. to denote those scanners which are not configured yet: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1296 +msgid "Not Configured:" +msgstr "" + +#. Fallback device name if the real device name is missing: +#. Fallback device name if the real device name is missing: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1326 src/modules/Scanner.rb:2242 +msgid "Unknown device" +msgstr "" + +#. Fallback manufacturer name if the real manufacturer name is missing: +#. Fallback manufacturer name if the real manufacturer name is missing: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1332 src/modules/Scanner.rb:2230 +msgid "Unknown manufacturer" +msgstr "" + +#. Fallback model name if the real model name is missing: +#. Fallback model name if the real model name is missing: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1335 src/modules/Scanner.rb:2236 +msgid "Unknown model" +msgstr "" + +#. %1 will be replaced by the manufacturer name +#. %2 will be replaced by the model name +#. %3 will be replaced by the device name +#. where the scanner is connected to: +#. %1 will be replaced by the manufacturer name +#. %2 will be replaced by the model name +#. %3 will be replaced by the device name where the scanner is connected to: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1360 src/modules/Scanner.rb:2225 +msgid "%1 %2 at %3" +msgstr "" + +#. A suffix for the second column of a table +#. where active scanner drivers are listed in the first column +#. to denote those drivers for which there is no matching active scanner: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1402 +msgid "No scanner recognized by this driver" +msgstr "" + +#. A fallback list entry so that there is no empty list shown to the user +#. when neither a scanner was autodetected +#. nor an active scanner was found +#. nor an active driver was found: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1426 +msgid "No scanner was detected and no active scanner or driver exists." +msgstr "" + +#. Scanner model list firmware entry for models which require a firmware upload: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1455 +msgid "Firmware upload required." +msgstr "" + +#. Scanner model list entry for models which require +#. the third-party Image Scan (IScan) driver software from Epson/Avasys. +#. Do not change or translate "Image Scan", it is a driver software name. +#. Do not change or translate "Avasys", it is a manufacturer name. +#. Do not change or translate "Epson", it is a manufacturer name. +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1461 +msgid "Third-party Image Scan driver software from Epson/Avasys required." +msgstr "" + +#. %1 will be replaced by the RPM package name +#. which provides the driver for the particular model: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1527 +msgid "Package %1" +msgstr "" + +#. but where the backend (scanner driver) is unmaintained: +#. %1 will be replaced by the backend (scanner driver) name +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1548 +msgid "Unmaintained driver %1 may provide good functionality." +msgstr "" + +#. %1 will be replaced by the backend (scanner driver) name +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1554 +msgid "Driver %1 should provide good functionality." +msgstr "" + +#. Scanner model list status entry for "good" supported models: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1561 +msgid "This scanner is not supported." +msgstr "" + +#. which are listed as "unsupported" for a particular driver: +#. %1 will be replaced by the backend (scanner driver) name +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1566 +msgid "This scanner is not supported by the driver %1." +msgstr "" + +#. but where the backend (scanner driver) is unmaintained: +#. %1 will be replaced by the backend (scanner driver) name +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1576 +msgid "Unmaintained driver %1 may provide complete functionality." +msgstr "" + +#. %1 will be replaced by the backend (scanner driver) name +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1584 +msgid "Driver %1 should provide complete functionality." +msgstr "" + +#. %1 will be replaced by the backend (scanner driver) name +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1592 +msgid "Driver %1 may work, but was not tested." +msgstr "" + +#. but where the backend (scanner driver) is unmaintained: +#. %1 will be replaced by the backend (scanner driver) name +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1601 +msgid "Unmaintained driver %1 may provide basic functionality." +msgstr "" + +#. %1 will be replaced by the backend (scanner driver) name +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1609 +msgid "Driver %1 should provide basic functionality." +msgstr "" + +#. but where the backend (scanner driver) is unmaintained: +#. %1 will be replaced by the backend (scanner driver) name +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1619 +msgid "Unmaintained driver %1 may provide minimal functionality." +msgstr "" + +#. %1 will be replaced by the backend (scanner driver) name +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1627 +msgid "Driver %1 should provide minimal functionality." +msgstr "" + +#. which are listed but without a known support status: +#. %1 will be replaced by the backend (scanner driver) name +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1635 +msgid "Driver %1 may work, but the functionality is unknown." +msgstr "" + +#. The body of a Popup::AnyMessage for scanners which require a firmware upload +#. Below this message on a seperated line a special command will be shown. +#. The "somewhere" is important because normally the firmware file is not simply +#. stored on the manufacturer's CD but often it is buried in a weird Windows-only +#. driver archive format. The text must indicate this. +#. Do not change or translate "SANE", it is a project name. +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1886 +msgid "" +"A firmware file contains software that must be uploaded to the scanner's memory.\n" +"Without firmware, the scanner cannot work.\n" +"\n" +"Because firmware is licensed by the scanner manufacturer, we cannot distribute it.\n" +"Usually the firmware file is stored somewhere on the manufacturer's CD.\n" +"Alternatively, it may be possible to download it from the manufacturer's web site.\n" +"Ask the manufacturer how to get the firmware file for your particular scanner.\n" +"Find additional useful information on the SANE web site at\n" +"http://www.sane-project.org/.\n" +"\n" +"After you get the firmware file, you must configure the driver manually.\n" +"The man page of the driver describes how to configure it for firmware upload.\n" +"The following command shows the man page for your driver:\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Message of a Popup::ContinueCancel for scanners which should be set up with the hpaio driver. +#. Do not change or translate "ptal", it is a service name. +#. Do not change or translate "HPLIP", it is a subsystem name. +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1905 +msgid "" +"There is at least one printer configuration that uses the ptal service.\n" +"It is possible to proceed but then the ptal service would be stopped\n" +"and all print queues that use the ptal service would no longer work.\n" +"If you proceed, change the printer configuration to use HPLIP.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Message of a Popup::YesNo for scanners which should be set up with the hpoj driver +#. Do not change or translate "hpoj", it is a driver name. +#. Do not change or translate "PTAL", it is a subsystem name. +#. Do not change or translate "ptal", it is a service name. +#. Do not change or translate "hplip", it is a service name. +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1917 +msgid "" +"The hpoj driver requires the PTAL system to be set up and running.\n" +"In particular, the ptal service must be up and running.\n" +"\n" +"Before the ptal service can be started, the PTAL system must be initialized.\n" +"Additionally, the ptal service should be activated for start when booting.\n" +"The PTAL system and the hplip service exclude each other.\n" +"Therefore a running hplip service would be stopped and deactivated\n" +"before the the PTAL system is initialized, activated, and started.\n" +"An automated initialization of the PTAL system is only safe for USB.\n" +"If you have a non-USB device or if the automated initialization for USB fails,\n" +"set up the PTAL system manually.\n" +"If you have an all-in-one device (scanner+printer), note that\n" +"a running ptal service monopolizes the USB device file (e.g., /dev/usb/lp0),\n" +"so the printer can no longer be addressed via the USB device file.\n" +"\n" +"Should the PTAL system for USB be initialized, activated, and started now?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Message of a Popup::ContinueCancel for scanners which should be set up with the hpoj driver. +#. Do not change or translate "hplip", it is a service name. +#. Do not change or translate "hpaio", it is a driver name. +#. Do not change or translate "ptal", it is a service name. +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1940 +msgid "" +"There is at least one printer configuration that uses the hplip service.\n" +"It is possible to proceed but then the hplip service would be stopped\n" +"and all print queues that use the hplip service would no longer work.\n" +"If the scanner is also supported by the hpaio driver, do not proceed.\n" +"Instead use hpaio to set up the scanner.\n" +"Alternatively proceed and change the printer configuration to use the ptal service.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. %1 will be replaced by the backend name +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1976 +msgid "Setting Up Driver %1" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1980 +msgid "Check whether additional packages must be installed" +msgstr "" + +#. 2. progress stage name of a Progress::New: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1982 +msgid "Check whether firmware upload is required" +msgstr "" + +#. 3. progress stage name of a Progress::New: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1984 +msgid "Test and set up special requirements for particular drivers" +msgstr "" + +#. 4. progress stage name of a Progress::New: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1986 +msgid "Activate the driver" +msgstr "" + +#. 1. progress stage name of a Progress::New: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1991 +msgid "Checking whether additional packages must be installed..." +msgstr "" + +#. 2. progress step progress bar title of a Progress::New: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1993 +msgid "Checking whether firmware upload is required..." +msgstr "" + +#. 3. progress step progress bar title of a Progress::New: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1995 +msgid "Testing and setting up special requirements for particular drivers..." +msgstr "" + +#. 4. progress step progress bar title of a Progress::New: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1999 +msgid "Activating the driver..." +msgstr "" + +#. the third-party Image Scan driver software from Epson/Avasys: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:2020 +msgid "Required Package Not Installed" +msgstr "" + +#. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage where +#. %1 will be replaced by the backend name +#. %2 will be replaced by the package name +#. Only a simple message because before there was a dialog +#. which let the user install the package so that this message is shown +#. if the user has explicitly rejected to install it. +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:2028 +msgid "The driver %1 requires the package %2." +msgstr "" + +#. The ptal service is associated with the hpoj backend. +#. It may happen that the conflicting service hplip is in use by the printing system. +#. The hplip service is associated with the hpaoi backend. +#. Activate the backend via bash script: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:2034 src/modules/Scanner.rb:2075 +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:2119 src/modules/Scanner.rb:2133 +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:2143 +msgid "Aborted" +msgstr "" + +#. Some scanners require a firmware upload to become ready to operate. +#. When building the sane package ':firmware "required"' entries have been +#. added for the respective scanners to the appropriate descriptions files. +#. See the sane.spec file of the sane package. +#. This makes only sense if a database_index was specified +#. because which scanner requires firmware upload is stored in the database +#. and additionally user confirmation must be requested. +#. Otherwise skip this section. +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:2054 +msgid "Firmware Upload Required" +msgstr "" + +#. Message of a Popup::Warning for scanners which should be set up with the hpoj backend. +#. Only a simple message because before there was a Popup::YesNo +#. which asked the user whether he wants to let YaST activate the ptal service +#. so that this message is shown if the user has explicitly rejected to do it. +#. Do not change or translate "ptal", it is a service name. +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:2109 +msgid "If the ptal service is not running, the scanner cannot work." +msgstr "" + +#. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system +#. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). +#. Do not change or translate "PTAL", it is a subsystem name. +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:2130 +msgid "Failed to set up the PTAL system." +msgstr "" + +#. Header message for a list of scanners which will be deactivated: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:2217 +msgid "" +"The following scanners use the same driver.\n" +"Therefore all those scanners will be deactivated:" +msgstr "" + +#. Only a simple message because everything is perfectly o.k. +#. but the user should get a notification +#. why the ptal service must be still active. +#. This works only if the CUPS printing system is used. +#. Do not change or translate "hpoj", it is a driver name. +#. Do not change or translate "ptal", it is a service name. +#. Do not change or translate "CUPS", it is a subsystem name. +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:2285 +msgid "The driver hpoj is deactivated but the associated service ptal is not deactivated because it is needed by the CUPS printing system." +msgstr "" + +#. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). +#. Do not change or translate "ptal", it is a service name. +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:2300 +msgid "Failed to stop the ptal service." +msgstr "" + +#. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). +#. Do not change or translate "ptal", it is a service name. +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:2311 +msgid "Failed to disable the ptal service." +msgstr "" + +#. If there is no active scanner for the backend +#. then show a message but exit successfully because +#. it is no error when there is no active scanner for the backend: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:2370 +msgid "No Scanner for %1" +msgstr "" + +#. Header of a Popup::AnyMessage where %1 will be replaced by the driver name: +#. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:2372 +msgid "It is not possible to test without a matching active scanner." +msgstr "" + +#. Header of a SelectionBox with a list of scanners: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:2387 +msgid "&Scanner to Test" +msgstr "" + +#. Test the device: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:2409 +msgid "Testing %1" +msgstr "" + +#. Header of a Popup::ShowFeedback where %1 will be replaced by the driver name: +#. Body of a Popup::ShowFeedback where %1 will be replaced by the SANE device identifier. +#. Do not change or translate "scanimage -d %1 -v", it is a fixed command. +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:2412 +msgid "Testing with 'scanimage -d %1 -v'..." +msgstr "" + +#. %1 will be replaced by the SANE device identifier +#. %2 will be replaced by the actual test results +#. which are usually only available in English. +#. Do not change or translate "scanimage -d %1 -v", it is a fixed command. +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:2424 +msgid "" +"Test with 'scanimage -d %1 -v' failed.\n" +"The results are:\n" +"\n" +"%2" +msgstr "" + +#. Fallback message if the real results are missing: +#. Fallback message if the real results are missing: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:2435 src/modules/Scanner.rb:2467 +msgid "(no results available)" +msgstr "" + +#. If the test failed, do the whole autodetection anew. +#. Even if normally nothing should have changed because of a failed test, +#. it might have happened that for example during the test somehow +#. the scanner had fallen into coma or the USB or SCSI system had crashed +#. and then the scanner would be no longer an active scanner nor could it be autodetected. +#. To simulate such an event, simply unplug an USB scanner while it is being tested. +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:2450 +msgid "Successfully Tested %1" +msgstr "" + +#. %1 will be replaced by the SANE device identifier +#. %2 will be replaced by the actual test results +#. which are usually only available in English. +#. Do not change or translate "scanimage -d %1 -v", it is a fixed command. +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:2456 +msgid "" +"Test with 'scanimage -d %1 -v' succeeded.\n" +"The results are:\n" +"\n" +"%2" +msgstr "" + +#. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system +#. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). +#. Do not confuse this error with the case when no scanning via network was configured. +#. The latter results no error. +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:2486 +msgid "Failed to determine the configuration for scanning via network." +msgstr "" + +#. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system +#. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). +#. Do not confuse this error with the case when no scanning via network is to be set up. +#. The latter results no error. +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:2562 +msgid "Failed to set up scanning via network." +msgstr "" + +#. Determine if any kind of firewall seems to be active by calling +#. "iptables -n -L | egrep -q 'DROP|REJECT'" +#. to find out if there are currently dropping or rejecting packet filter rules. +#. One might use a more specific test via +#. "iptables -n -L | grep -v '^LOG' | egrep -q '^DROP|^REJECT'" +#. to match only for DROP and REJECT targets and exclude LOG targets +#. but it does not cause real problems when there is a false positive result here +#. because all what happens it that then a needless firewall info popup would be shown. +#. If any kind of firewall seems to be active, show a popup message +#. regarding scanning via network and firewall. +#. @return true if any kind of firewall seems to be active +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:2590 +msgid "Check that your firewall allows scanning via network." +msgstr "" + +#. Popup::MessageDetails information regarding details: +#: src/modules/Scanner.rb:2592 +msgid "For details regarding firewall see the help text of this dialog." +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/security.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/security.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/security.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,1055 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. translators: command line help text for Security module +#: src/clients/security.rb:59 +msgid "Security configuration module" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'summary' action +#: src/clients/security.rb:72 +msgid "View summary of current configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'level' action +#: src/clients/security.rb:79 +msgid "Set the security level" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'set' action +#: src/clients/security.rb:86 +msgid "Set the value of the specific option" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'level workstation' option +#: src/clients/security.rb:94 +msgid "Workstation security level" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'level roaming' option +#: src/clients/security.rb:100 +msgid "Roaming Device (e.g. laptop or tablet) security level" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'level server' option +#: src/clients/security.rb:106 +msgid "Network Server security level" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'set passwd' option +#: src/clients/security.rb:112 +msgid "Password encryption method" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'set crack' option +#: src/clients/security.rb:120 +msgid "Check new passwords" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'set permissions' option +#: src/clients/security.rb:128 +msgid "Set file permissions to desired type" +msgstr "" + +#. command line help text for 'set remember' option +#: src/clients/security.rb:136 +msgid "Set the number of remembered user passwords" +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/clients/security.rb:250 +msgid "The number of passwords to remember must be between 0 an 400." +msgstr "" + +#. Main dialog caption +#: src/include/security/complex.rb:58 +msgid "Local Security Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. RadioButton label +#: src/include/security/complex.rb:93 +msgid "&Custom Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Frame caption +#: src/include/security/complex.rb:107 +msgid "Security Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. Copyright (c) 2006-2012 Novell, Inc. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under +#. the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as published by the +#. Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +#. ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS +#. FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with +#. this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, you may find +#. current contact information at www.novell.com. +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. File: include/security/dialogs.ycp +#. Package: Security configuration +#. Summary: Dialogs definitions +#. Authors: Michal Svec +#. +#. $Id$ +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:62 +msgid "Unknown" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:65 +msgid "Use magic SysRq keys" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:66 +msgid "Use secure file permissions" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:69 +msgid "Remote access to the display manager" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:72 +msgid "Write back system time to the hardware clock" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:75 +msgid "Always generate syslog message for cron scripts" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:78 +msgid "Run the DHCP daemon in a chroot" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:81 +msgid "Run the DHCP daemon as dhcp user" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:84 +msgid "Remote root login in the display manager" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:87 +msgid "Remote access to the X server" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:90 +msgid "Remote access to the email delivery subsystem" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:93 +msgid "Restart services on update" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:96 +msgid "Stop services on removal" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:99 +msgid "Enable TCP syncookies" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:102 +msgid "IPv4 forwarding" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:103 +msgid "IPv6 forwarding" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:104 +msgid "Enable basic system services" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:107 +msgid "Disable extra services" +msgstr "" + +#. handle the special cases at first +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:150 +msgid "Configure" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:152 +msgid "Enabled" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:154 +msgid "Disabled" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#. table header +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:180 src/include/security/dialogs.rb:409 +msgid "Security Setting" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:181 src/include/security/dialogs.rb:410 +msgid "Status" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:182 src/include/security/dialogs.rb:411 +msgid "Security Status" +msgstr "" + +#. add one line for each security setting +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:318 +msgid "Help" +msgstr "" + +#. this is a separator between service names +#. e.g.: "postfix" + " or " + "sendmail" +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:361 +msgid " or " +msgstr "" + +#. richtext message: %1 = runlevel ("3" or "5"), %2 = list of services +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:368 +msgid "<P>These basic system services are not enabled:<BR><B>%s</B></P>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:370 +msgid "<P>All basic services are enabled.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:378 +msgid "<P>These extra services are enabled:<BR><B>%s</B></P>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:379 +msgid "<P>Check the list of services and disable all unused services.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:381 +msgid "<P>Only basic system services are enabled.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:387 +msgid "Description" +msgstr "" + +#. Overview dialog caption +#. params: input tree, parent, label, id +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:399 src/include/security/wizards.rb:49 +msgid "Security Overview" +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:424 +msgid "Change &Status" +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:427 +msgid "&Description" +msgstr "" + +#. update the current value +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:521 +msgid "Analyzing system" +msgstr "" + +#. Boot dialog caption +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:575 src/include/security/wizards.rb:57 +msgid "Boot Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Frame label +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:587 +msgid "Boot Permissions" +msgstr "" + +#. Misc dialog caption +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:664 src/include/security/wizards.rb:60 +msgid "Miscellaneous Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Password dialog caption +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:744 src/include/security/wizards.rb:56 +msgid "Password Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Frame label +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:753 +msgid "Checks" +msgstr "" + +#. Frame label +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:768 +msgid "Password Age" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup text +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:846 +msgid "" +"The minimum number of days cannot be larger\n" +"than the maximum." +msgstr "" + +#. Popup text, %1 is number +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:863 +msgid "" +"The minimum password length cannot be larger than the maximum.\n" +"The maximum password length for the selected encryption method is %1." +msgstr "" + +#. Login dialog caption +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:895 src/include/security/wizards.rb:58 +msgid "Login Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Frame label +#: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:904 +msgid "Login" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:39 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Initializing Security Configuration</big></b>\n" +"<br>Please wait...<br></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:43 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting the Initialization</big></b><br>\n" +"Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing <b>Abort</b> now.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:47 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Saving Security Configuration</big></b>\n" +"<br>Please wait...<br></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:51 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Saving</big></b><br>\n" +"Abort the save procedure by pressing <b>Abort</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Boot dialog help 1/4 +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:55 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Boot Security</big></b></p>\n" +"<p>In this dialog, change various boot settings related to security.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Boot dialog help 2/4 +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:59 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Interpretation of Ctrl + Alt + Del</b>:\n" +"Configure what the system should do in response to\n" +"someone at the console pressing the CTRL + ALT + DEL key\n" +"combination. Usually the system reboots. Sometimes it is desirable\n" +"to ignore this event, for example, when the system serves as both\n" +"workstation and server.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Boot dialog help 3/4 +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:68 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Shutdown Behaviour of Login Manager</b>:\n" +"Set who is allowed to shut down the machine from KDM.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Boot dialog help 4/4 +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:72 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Hibernate System</b>:\n" +"Set the conditions for allowing users to hibernate the system. By default, user on active console has such right.\n" +"Other options are allowing the action to any user or requiring authentication in all cases.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Main dialog help 1/8 +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:78 +msgid "" +"<P><BIG><B>Configuring Local Security</B></BIG></P>\n" +"<p>Using predefined defaults, change the local security settings, which include\n" +" booting, login, password, user creation, and file permissions. The default\n" +" settings can be modified as needed.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Main dialog help 5/8 +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:86 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Workstation</b>: For a computer connected\n" +"to any type of network including the Internet.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Main dialog help 6/8 +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:90 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Roaming Device</b>: For a laptop, tablet or similar device\n" +"that connects to different networks.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Main dialog help 7/8 +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:94 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Network Server</b>: For a computer that provides\n" +"any type of service.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Main dialog help 8/8 +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:98 +msgid "<p><b>Custom Settings</b>: Create your own configuration.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Login dialog help 1/4 +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:100 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>Login Security</b></big></p>\n" +"<p>These login settings\n" +"are mainly stored in the /etc/login.defs file.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Login dialog help 2/4 +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:106 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Delay after Incorrect Login Attempt:</b>\n" +"It is advisable to wait some time after an incorrect login attempt to prevent\n" +"password guessing. Make the time small enough that users do not need to wait to\n" +"retry if a password is mistyped. A sensible value is three seconds (<tt>3</tt>).</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Login dialog help 3/4 +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:113 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Record Successful Login Attempts:</b> Logging successful login\n" +"attempts is useful. It can warn you of unauthorized access to the\n" +"system (for example, a user logging in from a different location than usual).\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Login dialog help 4/4 +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:120 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Allow Remote Graphical Login:</b> Checking this allows access\n" +"to a graphical login screen for this machine over the network. Remote access\n" +"to your machine using a display manager might be a security risk.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Password dialog help 1/8 +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:126 +msgid "" +"<p>These password settings\n" +"are mainly stored in the /etc/login.defs file.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Password dialog help 2/8 +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:130 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Check New Passwords</b>: It is wise to choose a password that\n" +"cannot be found in a dictionary and is not a name or other simple, common word.\n" +"By checking the box, enforce password checking in regard to these rules.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Password dialog help +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:136 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Minimum Acceptable Password Length:</b>\n" +"The minimum acceptable size for the new password reduced by the number\n" +"of different character classes (other, upper, lower and digit) used in the new\n" +"password. See man pam_cracklib for a more detailed explanation.\n" +"This option can only be modified when <b>Check New Passwords</b> is set.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Password dialog help 4/8 +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:144 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Passwords to Remember</b>:\n" +"Enter the number of user passwords to store and prevent the user from reusing.\n" +"Enter 0 if passwords should not be stored.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Password dialog help 5a/8 +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:150 +msgid "<p><b>Password Encryption Method:</b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Password dialog help 5b/8 +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:152 +msgid "" +"<p><b>DES</b>, the Linux default method, works in all network environments,\n" +"but it restricts you to passwords no longer than eight characters. If you need\n" +"compatibility with other systems, use this method.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Password dialog help 5c/8 +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:158 +msgid "" +"<p><b>MD5</b> allows longer passwords and is supported by all current Linux \n" +"distributions, but not by other systems or old software.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Password dialog help 5d/8 +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:162 +msgid "<p><b>SHA-512</b> is the current standard hash method, using other algorithms is not recommended unless needed for compatibility purpose.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Password dialog help 7/8 +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:166 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Password Age:</b> Set the minimum and\n" +"maximum number of days a password may be used.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Password dialog help 8/8 +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:170 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Days before Password Expires Warning</b>: This entry sets the\n" +"number of days users are warned before their passwords expire. The longer the\n" +"time, the less likely it is that someone can guess passwords.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Adduser dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:176 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>User Security</b></big></P>\n" +"<p>In this dialog, change various settings used to create users.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Adduser dialog help 2/3 +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:180 +msgid "" +"<p><b>User ID Limitations:</b>\n" +"Set the minimum and maximum possible user ID.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Adduser dialog help 3/3 +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:184 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Group ID Limitations</b>:\n" +"Set the minimum and maximum possible group ID.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Misc dialog help 1/14 +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:188 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>Other Security Settings</b></big></P>\n" +"<p>In this dialog, change miscellaneous settings related to local security.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Misc dialog help 2/14 +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:192 +msgid "" +"<p><b>File Permissions</b>: Settings for the permissions\n" +"of certain system files are set according to the data in /etc/permissions.secure\n" +"or /etc/permissions.easy. Which file is used depends on this selection.\n" +"Launching SuSEconfig sets these permissions according to /etc/permissions.*.\n" +"This fixes files with incorrect permissions, whether this occurred accidentally\n" +"or by intruders.</p><p>\n" +"With <b>Easy</b>, most of the system files that are only readable by root\n" +"in Secure are modified so other users can also read these files.\n" +"Using <b>Secure</b>, certain system files, such as /var/log/messages, can only\n" +"be viewed by the user root. Some programs can only be launched by root or by\n" +"daemons, not by ordinary users.\n" +"The most secure setting is <b>Paranoid</B>. With it, you must\n" +"decide which users are able to run X applications and setuid programs.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Misc dialog help 6/14 +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:208 +msgid "" +"<p><b>User Launching updatedb</b>: The program updatedb runs \n" +"once a day. It scans your entire file system and creates a database (locatedb)\n" +"that stores the location of every file. The database can be searched by the\n" +"program \"locate\". Here, set the user that runs this command: <b>nobody</b>\n" +" (few files) or <b>root</b> (all files).</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Misc dialog help 10/14 +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:216 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Current Directory in root's Path</b> On a DOS system,\n" +"the system first searches for executable files (programs) in the current\n" +"directory then in the current path variable. In contrast, a UNIX-like system\n" +"searches for them exclusively via the search path (variable PATH).</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Misc dialog help 11/14 +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:223 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Current Directory in the Path of Regular Users</b><br> A DOS\n" +"system first searches for executable files (programs) in the current directory\n" +"then in the current path variable. In contrast, a UNIX-like system searches\n" +"for them exclusively via the search path (variable PATH).</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Misc dialog help 12/14 +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:230 +msgid "" +"<p>Some systems set up a work-around by adding the dot (\".\") to the\n" +"search path, enabling files in the current path to be found and executed.\n" +"This is highly dangerous because you may accidentally launch unknown programs in\n" +"the current directory instead of the usual systemwide files. As a result,\n" +"executing <i>Trojan Horses</i>, which exploit this weakness and invade your system,\n" +"is rather easy if you set this option.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Misc dialog help 13/14 +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:239 +msgid "" +"<p>\"yes\": the dot (\".\") is attached to the end of the search\n" +"path of root, making it the last to be searched.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Misc dialog help 14/14 +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:243 +msgid "" +"<p>\"no\": the user root always must launch programs in the\n" +"current directory prefixed with a \"./\". Example: \"./configure\".</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Misc dialog help 14/14 +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:247 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Enable Magic SysRq Keys</b><br> If you check this option, you\n" +"will have some control over the system even if it crashes (for example, during kernel\n" +"debugging). For details, see /usr/src/linux/Documentation/sysrq.txt</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text: security overview dialog 1/ +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:253 +msgid "<P><B>Security Overview</B><BR>This overview shows the most important security settings.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text: security overview dialog 1/ +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:257 +msgid "<P>To change the current value, click the link associated to the option.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text: security overview dialog 1/ +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:261 +msgid "<P> A check mark in the <B>Security Status</B> column means that the current value of the option is secure.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. an error message (rich text) +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:265 +msgid "<P><B>The current value could not be read. The service is probably not installed or the option is missing on the system.</B></P>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:271 +msgid "" +"<P>A display manager provides a graphical login screen and can be accessed\n" +"across the network by an X server running on another system if so\n" +"configured.</P><P>The windows that are being displayed would then transmit\n" +"their data across the network. If that network is not fully trusted, then the\n" +"network traffic can be eavesdropped by an attacker, gaining access not only to\n" +"the graphical content of the display, but also to usernames and passwords that\n" +"are being used.</P><P>If you do not need <EM>XDMCP</EM> for remote graphical\n" +"logins, then disable this option.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:281 +msgid "" +"<P>Upon startup, the system time is being set from the hardware clock of the\n" +"computer. As a consequence, setting the hardware clock before shutting down is\n" +"necessary.</P><P>Consistent system time is essential for the system to create\n" +"correct log messages.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:287 +msgid "<P>Malfunctions in a system are usually detected by anomalies in its behaviour. Syslog messages about events that reoccur on a regular basis are important to find causes of problems. And the absence of a single record can tell more than the absence of all log records.</P><P>Therefore, syslog messages of system events are only useful if they are present.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:290 +msgid "<P>Chroot execution environments restrict a process to only access files that it needs by placing them in a separate subdirectory and running the process with a changed root (chroot) set to that directory.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:293 +msgid "<P>The DHCP client daemon should run as the user <EM>dhcpd</EM> to minimize a possible threat if the service is found vulnerable to a weakness in its program code.</P><P>Note that dhcpd must never run as <EM>root</EM> or with the <EM>CAP_SYS_CHROOT</EM> capability for the chroot execution confinement to be effective.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:296 +msgid "<P>Administrators should never log on as <EM>root</EM> into an X Window session to minimize the usage of the root privileges.</P><P>This option does not help against careless administrators, but shall prevent attackers to be able to log on as <EM>root</EM> via the display manager if they guess or otherwise acquire the password.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:299 +msgid "" +"<P>X Window clients, e.g. programs that open a window on your display, connect\n" +"to the X server that runs on the physical machine. Programs can also run on a\n" +"different system and display their content on the X server through network\n" +"connections.</P><P>When enabled, the X server listens on a port 6000 plus the\n" +"display number. Since network traffic is transferred unencrypted and therefore\n" +"subject to network sniffing, and since the port held open by the X server\n" +"offers attack options, the secure setting is to disable it.</P><P>To display X\n" +"Window clients across a network, we recommend the use of secure shell (<EM>ssh</EM>), which allows the X Window clients to connect to the X server through the encrypted ssh connection.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:309 +msgid "" +"<P>The email delivery subsystem is always started. However, it does not expose\n" +"itself outside the system by default, since it does not listen on the SMTP network port 25.</P><P>If you do not deliver emails to your system through the SMTP protocol, then disable this option.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:312 +msgid "" +"<P>If a package containing a service that is currently running is being\n" +"updated, the service is restarted after the files in the package have been\n" +"installed.</P><P>This makes sense in most cases, and it is safe to do,\n" +"considering that many services either need their binaries or configuration\n" +"files accessible in the file system. Otherwise these services would continue\n" +"to run until the services are stopped, e.g. running daemons are\n" +"killed.</P><P>This setting should only be changed if there is a specific\n" +"reason to do so.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:322 +msgid "" +"<P>If a package containing a service that is currently running is being\n" +"uninstalled, the service is stopped before the files of the package are\n" +"removed.</P><P>This makes sense in most cases, and it is safe to do,\n" +"considering that many services either need their binaries or configuration\n" +"files accessible in the file system. Otherwise these services would continue\n" +"to run until they are stopped, e.g. running daemons are\n" +"killed.</P><P>This setting should only be changed if there is a specific\n" +"reason to do so.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:332 +msgid "<P>A system can be overwhelmed with numerous connection attempts so that the system runs out of memory, leading to a Denial of Service (DoS) vulnerability.</P><P>The use of syncookies is a method that can help in such situations. But in configurations with a very large number of legitimate connection attempts from one source, the <EM>Enabled</EM> setting can cause problems with denied TCP connections under high load.</P><P>Still, for most environments, syncookies are the first line of defense against SYN flood DoS attacks, so the secure setting is <EM>Enabled</EM>.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:335 src/include/security/helps.rb:339 +msgid "<P>IP forwarding means to pass on network packets that have been received, but that are not destined for one of the system's configured network interfaces, e.g. network interface addresses.</P><P>If a system forwards network traffic on ISO/OSI layer 3, it is called a router. If you do not need that routing functionality, then disable this option.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:338 +msgid "<P>This setting applies to <EM>IPv4</EM> only.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:342 +msgid "<P>This setting applies to <EM>IPv6</EM> only.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:343 +msgid "<P>Magic SysRq Keys enable some control over the system even if it crashes (e.g. during kernel debugging) or if the system does not respond.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:346 +msgid "<P>There are predefined file permissions in /etc/permissions.* files. The most restrictive file permissions are defined 'secure' or 'paranoid' file.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:349 +msgid "<P>Basic system services must be enabled to provide system consistency and to run the security-related services.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/helps.rb:352 +msgid "<P>Every running service is a potential target of a security attack. Therefore it is recommended to turn off all services which are not used by the system.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. level name +#: src/include/security/levels.rb:54 +msgid "Workstation" +msgstr "" + +#. level name +#: src/include/security/levels.rb:56 +msgid "Roaming Device" +msgstr "" + +#. level name +#: src/include/security/levels.rb:58 +msgid "Network Server" +msgstr "" + +#. RadioButton label +#: src/include/security/levels.rb:63 +msgid "&Workstation" +msgstr "" + +#. RadioButton label +#: src/include/security/levels.rb:65 +msgid "&Roaming Device" +msgstr "" + +#. RadioButton label +#: src/include/security/levels.rb:67 +msgid "Network &Server" +msgstr "" + +#. Adduser dialog caption +#: src/include/security/users.rb:45 src/include/security/wizards.rb:59 +msgid "User Addition" +msgstr "" + +#. Frame label +#: src/include/security/users.rb:55 +msgid "User ID Limitations" +msgstr "" + +#. Frame label +#: src/include/security/users.rb:67 +msgid "Group ID Limitations" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup text +#: src/include/security/users.rb:127 +msgid "The minimum user ID cannot be larger than the maximum." +msgstr "" + +#. Popup text +#: src/include/security/users.rb:134 +msgid "" +"The minimum group ID cannot be larger than the\n" +"maximum." +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox label +#: src/include/security/widgets.rb:100 +msgid "&Interpretation of Ctrl + Alt + Del" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox value +#: src/include/security/widgets.rb:105 +msgid "Ignore" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox value +#: src/include/security/widgets.rb:107 +msgid "Reboot" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox value +#: src/include/security/widgets.rb:109 +msgid "Halt" +msgstr "" + +#. CheckBox label +#: src/include/security/widgets.rb:116 +msgid "Allow Remote &Graphical Login" +msgstr "" + +#. CheckBox label +#: src/include/security/widgets.rb:122 +msgid "&Magic SysRq Keys" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox value +#: src/include/security/widgets.rb:125 +msgid "Disable" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox value +#: src/include/security/widgets.rb:127 +msgid "Enable All Functions" +msgstr "" + +#. IntField label +#: src/include/security/widgets.rb:134 +msgid "&Delay after Incorrect Login Attempt" +msgstr "" + +#. IntField label +#. IntField label +#: src/include/security/widgets.rb:142 src/include/security/widgets.rb:205 +msgid "Maxim&um" +msgstr "" + +#. IntField label +#. IntField label +#: src/include/security/widgets.rb:148 src/include/security/widgets.rb:218 +msgid "M&inimum" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox label +#: src/include/security/widgets.rb:154 +msgid "&Shutdown Behaviour of KDM Login Manager:" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox value +#: src/include/security/widgets.rb:159 +msgid "Only root" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox value +#: src/include/security/widgets.rb:161 +msgid "All Users" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox value +#: src/include/security/widgets.rb:163 +msgid "Nobody" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox label +#: src/include/security/widgets.rb:170 +msgid "System Hybernation" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox value +#: src/include/security/widgets.rb:173 +msgid "User on the active console" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox value +#: src/include/security/widgets.rb:175 +msgid "Anyone can hibernate" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox value +#: src/include/security/widgets.rb:177 +msgid "Authentication always required" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox label +#: src/include/security/widgets.rb:184 +msgid "P&assword Encryption Method" +msgstr "" + +#. CheckBox label +#: src/include/security/widgets.rb:198 +msgid "&Check New Passwords" +msgstr "" + +#. IntField label +#: src/include/security/widgets.rb:211 +msgid "Numb&er of Passwords to Remember" +msgstr "" + +#. IntField label +#: src/include/security/widgets.rb:224 +msgid "&Minimum Acceptable Password Length" +msgstr "" + +#. IntField label +#: src/include/security/widgets.rb:232 +msgid "&Days before Password Expires Warning" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox label +#: src/include/security/widgets.rb:240 +msgid "&File Permissions" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox value +#: src/include/security/widgets.rb:243 +msgid "Easy" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox value +#: src/include/security/widgets.rb:245 +msgid "Secure" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox value +#: src/include/security/widgets.rb:247 +msgid "Paranoid" +msgstr "" + +#. ComboBox label +#: src/include/security/widgets.rb:254 +msgid "&User Launching updatedb" +msgstr "" + +#. IntField label +#: src/include/security/widgets.rb:261 +msgid "Ma&ximum" +msgstr "" + +#. IntField label +#: src/include/security/widgets.rb:267 +msgid "&Minimum" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/security/wizards.rb:53 +msgid "Predefined Security Configurations" +msgstr "" + +#. Dialog caption +#: src/include/security/wizards.rb:159 +msgid "Security Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Label +#: src/include/security/wizards.rb:161 +msgid "Initializing..." +msgstr "" + +#. Security read dialog caption +#: src/modules/Security.rb:654 +msgid "Saving Security Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1/4 +#: src/modules/Security.rb:663 +msgid "Write security settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 2/4 +#: src/modules/Security.rb:665 +msgid "Write inittab settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 3/4 +#: src/modules/Security.rb:667 +msgid "Write PAM settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 4/4 +#: src/modules/Security.rb:669 +msgid "Update system settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 1/5 +#: src/modules/Security.rb:673 +msgid "Writing security settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 2/5 +#: src/modules/Security.rb:675 +msgid "Writing inittab settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 3/5 +#: src/modules/Security.rb:677 +msgid "Writing PAM settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 4/5 +#: src/modules/Security.rb:679 +msgid "Updating system settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 5/5 +#: src/modules/Security.rb:681 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#. Summary text +#: src/modules/Security.rb:791 +msgid "Current Security Level: Custom settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Summary text +#: src/modules/Security.rb:795 +msgid "Current Security Level: %1" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/services-manager.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/services-manager.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/services-manager.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,311 @@ +# Pashto translations for opensuse-i package. +# Copyright (C) 2014 SuSE Linux Products GmbH, Nuernberg +# This file is distributed under the same license as the opensuse-i package. +# Automatically generated, 2014. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: opensuse-i 18n\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-05-19 09:35+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n" +"Language-Team: none\n" +"Language: ps\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: src/clients/default_target_finish.rb:30 +msgid "Saving default systemd target..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:26 +msgid "VNC needs graphical system to be available" +msgstr "" + +#. TODO implement behaviour if force_reset parameter provided +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:51 +msgid "&Default systemd target" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:52 +msgid "Default systemd target" +msgstr "" + +#. create the proposal dialog and get the sequence symbol from block +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:116 +msgid "Set Default Systemd Target" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:134 +msgid "Selecting the Default Systemd Target" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:136 +msgid "Systemd is a system and service manager for Linux. It consists of units whose job is to activate services and other units." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:139 +msgid "Default target unit is activated on boot by default. Usually it is a symlink located in path/etc/systemd/system/default.target . See more on systemd man page." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:143 +msgid "Multi-User target is for setting up a non-graphical multi-user system with network suitable for server (similar to runlevel 3)." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:146 +msgid "Graphical target for setting up a graphical login screen with network which is typical for workstations (similar to runlevel 5)." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:149 +msgid "When you are not sure what would be the best option for you then go with graphical target." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:160 +msgid "Available Targets" +msgstr "" + +#. Check if the user forced a particular target before; if he did and the +#. autodetection recommends a different one now, warn the user about this +#. and keep the default target unchanged. +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:220 +msgid "The installer is recommending you the default target '%s' " +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:232 +msgid "X11 packages have been selected for installation" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:235 +msgid "Live Installation is typically used for full GUI in target system" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:238 +msgid "Serial connection does typically not support GUI" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:242 +msgid "Text mode installation assumes no GUI on the target system" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:245 +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:249 +msgid "Using VNC assumes a GUI on the target system" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:252 +msgid "SSH installation mode assumes no GUI on the target system" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:255 +msgid "X11 packages have not been selected for installation" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:258 +msgid "This recommendation is based on the analysis of other installation settings" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for services-manager module +#. translators: command line help text for services-manager module +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:29 src/clients/services.rb:29 +msgid "" +"Systemd target and services configuration module.\n" +"Use systemctl for commandline services configuration." +msgstr "" + +#. Default for double-click in the table +#. Default for double-click in the table +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:89 src/clients/services.rb:89 +msgid "Writing configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:94 src/clients/services.rb:94 +msgid "Writing the configuration failed:\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Additional space for UI features +#. Additional space for UI features +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:131 src/clients/services.rb:131 +msgid "Default System &Target" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:142 src/clients/services.rb:142 +msgid "Service" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:143 src/clients/services-manager.rb:172 +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:188 src/clients/services.rb:143 +#: src/clients/services.rb:172 src/clients/services.rb:188 +#: src/data/services-manager/autoyast_summary.erb:16 +msgid "Enabled" +msgstr "" + +#. The current state matches the futural state +#. The current state matches the futural state +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:144 src/clients/services-manager.rb:173 +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:198 src/clients/services.rb:144 +#: src/clients/services.rb:173 src/clients/services.rb:198 +msgid "Active" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:145 src/clients/services.rb:145 +msgid "Description" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:150 src/clients/services.rb:150 +msgid "&Start/Stop" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:152 src/clients/services.rb:152 +msgid "&Enable/Disable" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:154 src/clients/services.rb:154 +msgid "Show &Details" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:157 src/clients/services.rb:157 +#: src/data/services-manager/autoyast_summary.erb:5 +msgid "Services Manager" +msgstr "" + +#. Redraws the services dialog +#. Redraws the services dialog +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:168 src/clients/services.rb:168 +msgid "Reading services status..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:172 src/clients/services-manager.rb:188 +#: src/clients/services.rb:172 src/clients/services.rb:188 +#: src/data/services-manager/autoyast_summary.erb:23 +msgid "Disabled" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:173 src/clients/services-manager.rb:198 +#: src/clients/services.rb:173 src/clients/services.rb:198 +msgid "Inactive" +msgstr "" + +#. The current state differs the the futural state +#. The current state differs the the futural state +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:205 src/clients/services.rb:205 +msgid "Active (will start)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:205 src/clients/services.rb:205 +msgid "Inactive (will stop)" +msgstr "" + +#. Opens up a popup with details about the currently selected service +#. Opens up a popup with details about the currently selected service +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:226 src/clients/services.rb:226 +msgid "Service %{service} Full Info" +msgstr "" + +#. TODO implement behaviour if force_reset parameter provided +#: src/clients/services_proposal.rb:52 +msgid "&Services" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/services_proposal.rb:53 +#: src/data/services-manager/autoyast_summary.erb:15 +msgid "Services" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/services_proposal.rb:116 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>Services</b></big><br>\n" +"The current setup does not provide any functionality now.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/services_proposal.rb:121 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>Services</b></big><br>\n" +"This installation proposal allows you to start and enable a service from the \n" +" list of services.</p>\n" +"<p>It may also open ports in the firewall for a service if firewall is enabled\n" +"and a particular service requires opening them.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/services_proposal.rb:145 +msgid "Service %service will be %toggled and port in firewall will be %switched %link" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/services_proposal.rb:160 +msgid "Service %service will be %toggled %link" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/services_proposal.rb:258 +msgid "Package %1 is not available" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/services_proposal.rb:268 +msgid "" +"Installation of required packages has failed; \n" +"enabling and starting the services may also fail" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/services_proposal.rb:283 +msgid "Cannot enable service %1" +msgstr "" + +#: src/data/services-manager/autoyast_summary.erb:6 +msgid "Default Target" +msgstr "" + +#. Name of the systemd default target unit. Suffix '.target' is optional. +#. @return [String] if the target has been specified in the profile. Can be nil. +#: src/lib/services-manager/services_manager_profile.rb:103 +msgid "Unknown autoyast services profile schema for 'services-manager'" +msgstr "" + +#. AutoYast summary +#: src/modules/services_manager.rb:29 +msgid "Not configured yet." +msgstr "" + +#. Do not start or stop services that are already in the desired state. +#. They might be coming from AutoYast import and thus marked as :modified. +#: src/modules/services_manager_service.rb:407 +msgid "Could not %{change} %{service} which is currently %{status}. " +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/services_manager_service.rb:426 +msgid "Could not %{change} %{service}. " +msgstr "" + +#. Default systemd target (previously: runlevel 5) option #1 +#: src/modules/services_manager_target.rb:20 +msgid "Graphical mode" +msgstr "" + +#. Default systemd target (previously: runlevel 3) option #2 +#: src/modules/services_manager_target.rb:22 +msgid "Text mode" +msgstr "" + +#. Systemd targets, bnc#892366 +#: src/modules/services_manager_target.rb:25 +msgid "Emergency Mode" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/services_manager_target.rb:26 +msgid "Graphical Interface" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/services_manager_target.rb:27 +msgid "Initrd Default Target" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/services_manager_target.rb:28 +msgid "Switch Root" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/services_manager_target.rb:29 +msgid "Multi-User System" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/services_manager_target.rb:30 +msgid "Rescue Mode" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/slp-server.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/slp-server.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/slp-server.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,350 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. Command line help text for the Xslp-server module +#: src/clients/slp-server.rb:35 +msgid "Configuration of an SLP server" +msgstr "" + +#. Rich text title for SlpServer in proposals +#: src/clients/slp-server_proposal.rb:64 +msgid "SLP Server" +msgstr "" + +#. Menu title for SlpServer in proposals +#: src/clients/slp-server_proposal.rb:68 +msgid "&SLP Server" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button (starting SLP service - option 1) +#: src/include/slp-server/dialogs.rb:49 +msgid "When &Booting" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button (starting SLP service - option 2) +#: src/include/slp-server/dialogs.rb:53 +msgid "&Manually" +msgstr "" + +#. part of help text, used to describe radiobuttons (matching starting SLP service but without "&") +#: src/include/slp-server/dialogs.rb:59 +msgid "When Booting" +msgstr "" + +#. part of help text, used to describe radiobuttons (matching starting SLP service but without "&") +#: src/include/slp-server/dialogs.rb:61 +msgid "Manually" +msgstr "" + +#. button for view log files +#: src/include/slp-server/dialogs.rb:73 src/include/slp-server/dialogs.rb:78 +msgid "Show Log" +msgstr "" + +#. button for expert settings (all config options) +#: src/include/slp-server/dialogs.rb:84 src/include/slp-server/dialogs.rb:89 +msgid "Expert Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. response + scopes widget +#: src/include/slp-server/dialogs.rb:99 +msgid "Response To" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/slp-server/dialogs.rb:100 +msgid "Broadcast" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/slp-server/dialogs.rb:101 +msgid "Multicast" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/slp-server/dialogs.rb:102 +msgid "DA Server" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/slp-server/dialogs.rb:107 +msgid "Becomes DA Server" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/slp-server/dialogs.rb:112 +msgid "&IP Addresses of DA Servers" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/slp-server/dialogs.rb:113 +msgid "&Scopes" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/slp-server/dialogs.rb:132 +msgid "SLP Server Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. description map for tabs in overview dialog +#: src/include/slp-server/dialogs.rb:251 +msgid "Global SLP Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Initialization dialog caption +#: src/include/slp-server/dialogs.rb:273 src/include/slp-server/wizards.rb:81 +msgid "SLP Server Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/slp-server/dialogs.rb:288 +msgid "Server Details" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/slp-server/dialogs.rb:303 +msgid "Static Configuration Files" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/slp-server/dialogs.rb:667 +msgid "Really delete this file?" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: combo box for selsect module from installed unknown modules +#: src/include/slp-server/dialogs.rb:690 +msgid "Name of New File" +msgstr "" + +#. UI::ChangeWidget(`id(`scope), `Enabled, false); +#: src/include/slp-server/dialogs.rb:866 +msgid "Scope and IP address must be inserted." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/slp-server/dialogs.rb:872 +msgid "Scope must be inserted." +msgstr "" + +#. SlpServer overview dialog caption +#: src/include/slp-server/dialogs.rb:883 +msgid "SLP Server Overview" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/slp-server/dialogs.rb:892 +msgid "<h1>SLP Server</h1>" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog for expert settings +#: src/include/slp-server/dialogs.rb:929 +msgid "SLP Server Configuration--Expert Dialog" +msgstr "" + +#. edit reg file dialog +#: src/include/slp-server/dialogs.rb:957 +msgid "SLP Server Configuration--Edit .reg File" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/slp-server/helps.rb:17 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Initializing SLP Server Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Please wait...<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/slp-server/helps.rb:21 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Initialization:</big></b><br>\n" +"Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing <b>Abort</b> now.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/slp-server/helps.rb:25 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Saving SLP Server Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Please wait...<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/slp-server/helps.rb:29 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Saving:</big></b><br>\n" +"Abort the save procedure by pressing <b>Abort</b>.\n" +"An additional dialog informs whether it is safe to do so.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Ovreview dialog help 1/3 +#: src/include/slp-server/helps.rb:36 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>SLP Server Configuration Overview</big></b><br>\n" +"Obtain an overview of installed SLP servers. Additionally\n" +"edit their configurations.<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Ovreview dialog help 2/3 +#: src/include/slp-server/helps.rb:42 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Adding an SLP Server</big></b><br>\n" +"Press <b>Add</b> to configure an SLP server.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Ovreview dialog help 3/3 +#: src/include/slp-server/helps.rb:46 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Editing or Deleting</big></b><br>\n" +"Choose an SLP server to change or remove.\n" +"Then press <b>Edit</b> or <b>Delete</b> as desired.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Configure1 dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/slp-server/helps.rb:52 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Configuration Part One</big></b><br>\n" +"Press <b>Next</b> to continue.\n" +"<br></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Configure1 dialog help 2/2 +#. Configure2 dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/slp-server/helps.rb:58 src/include/slp-server/helps.rb:70 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Selecting Something</big></b><br>\n" +"It is not possible. You must code it first. :-)\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Configure2 dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/slp-server/helps.rb:64 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Configuration Part Two</big></b><br>\n" +"Press <b>Next</b> to continue.\n" +"<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/slp-server/helps.rb:75 +msgid "<p>To show the slpd log file, use <b>Show Log</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/slp-server/helps.rb:78 +msgid "" +"<p>Here, set the mode in which to run the SLP daemon. The simplest mode is <b>Broadcast</b>.\n" +"In it, the SLP daemon answers all requests sent by broadcast. The next mode is <b>Multicast</b>. In it, the daemon answers queries\n" +"sent by multicast in appropriate SCOPES. In the <b>DA Server</b> mode, it informs DA servers on the specified IP addresses\n" +"about statically and dynamically registered services. The last options is <b>Becomes DA Server</b>. This is a cache server for service\n" +"answers.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/slp-server/helps.rb:85 +msgid "<p>With <b>Expert Settings</b>, access all options available in /etc/slp.conf.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/slp-server/helps.rb:88 +msgid "" +"Configuration files for static registration to SLP. With <b>Add</b>, create a new empty file. With <b>Modify</b>,\n" +"change the values of any existing file. With <b>Delete</b>, it is possible to delete files not owned by any package." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/slp-server/helps.rb:91 +msgid "Help for regedit" +msgstr "" + +#. Initialization dialog contents +#: src/include/slp-server/wizards.rb:83 +msgid "Initializing..." +msgstr "" + +#. check for package openslp-server installed +#: src/modules/SlpServer.rb:181 +msgid "<p>To configure the SLP server, the <b>%1</b> package must be installed.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SlpServer.rb:184 +msgid "<p>Do you want to install it now?</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. SlpServer read dialog caption +#: src/modules/SlpServer.rb:199 +msgid "Initializing SLP Server Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1/3 +#: src/modules/SlpServer.rb:215 +msgid "Read the database" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 2/3 +#: src/modules/SlpServer.rb:217 +msgid "Read the previous settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 3/3 +#: src/modules/SlpServer.rb:219 +msgid "Detect the devices" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 1/3 +#: src/modules/SlpServer.rb:223 +msgid "Reading the database..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 2/3 +#: src/modules/SlpServer.rb:225 +msgid "Reading the previous settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 3/3 +#: src/modules/SlpServer.rb:227 +msgid "Detecting the devices..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress finished +#. Progress finished +#: src/modules/SlpServer.rb:229 src/modules/SlpServer.rb:302 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#. read another database +#: src/modules/SlpServer.rb:253 +msgid "Cannot read database2." +msgstr "" + +#. SlpServer read dialog caption +#: src/modules/SlpServer.rb:276 +msgid "Saving SLP Server Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1/2 +#: src/modules/SlpServer.rb:292 +msgid "Write the settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 2/2 +#: src/modules/SlpServer.rb:294 +msgid "Run SuSEconfig" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 1/2 +#: src/modules/SlpServer.rb:298 +msgid "Writing the settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 2/2 +#: src/modules/SlpServer.rb:300 +msgid "Running SuSEconfig..." +msgstr "" + +#. Error message +#: src/modules/SlpServer.rb:313 +msgid "Cannot write settings." +msgstr "" + +#. Create a textual summary and a list of unconfigured cards +#. @return summary of the current configuration +#: src/modules/SlpServer.rb:378 +msgid "Configuration summary..." +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/snapper.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/snapper.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/snapper.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,475 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. Copyright (c) 2006-2012 Novell, Inc. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under +#. the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as published by the +#. Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +#. ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS +#. FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with +#. this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, you may find +#. current contact information at www.novell.com. +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. File: clients/snapper.ycp +#. Package: Configuration of snapper +#. Summary: Main file +#. Authors: Jiri Suchomel +#. +#. Main file for snapper configuration. Uses all other files. +#: src/clients/snapper.rb:49 +msgid "Configuration of system snapshots" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#. text entry label +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:123 src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:244 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:496 +msgid "Description" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#. text entry label +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:130 src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:290 +msgid "User data" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label +#. text entry label +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:138 src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:295 +msgid "Cleanup algorithm" +msgstr "" + +#. popup label, %{num} is number +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:153 +msgid "Modify Snapshot %{num}" +msgstr "" + +#. popup label, %{pre} and %{post} are numbers +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:159 +msgid "Modify Snapshot %{pre} and %{post}" +msgstr "" + +#. label +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:161 +msgid "Pre (%{pre})" +msgstr "" + +#. label +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:165 +msgid "Post (%{post})" +msgstr "" + +#. popup label +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:242 +msgid "Create New Snapshot" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:255 +msgid "Single snapshot" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label +#. 0 means there's no post +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:264 src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:442 +msgid "Pre" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label, snapshot selection will follow +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:274 +msgid "Post, paired with:" +msgstr "" + +#. yes/no popup question +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:350 +msgid "Really delete snapshot %{num}?" +msgstr "" + +#. yes/no popup question +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:357 +msgid "Really delete snapshots %{pre} and %{post}?" +msgstr "" + +#. summary dialog caption +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:372 +msgid "Snapshots" +msgstr "" + +#. generate list of snapshot table items +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:401 +msgid "Single" +msgstr "" + +#. pre canot be 0 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:426 +msgid "Pre & Post" +msgstr "" + +#. busy popup message +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:461 +msgid "Reading list of snapshots..." +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:481 +msgid "Current Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:492 +msgid "ID" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:493 +msgid "Type" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:494 +msgid "Start Date" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:495 +msgid "End Date" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:497 +msgid "User Data" +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:503 +msgid "Show Changes" +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:506 +msgid "Modify" +msgstr "" + +#. popup message +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:549 +msgid "" +"This 'Pre' snapshot is not paired with any 'Post' one yet.\n" +"Showing differences is not possible." +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:634 +msgid "Selected Snapshot Overview" +msgstr "" + +#. '%1: %2' means 'ID: description', adapt the order if necessary +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:666 +msgid "%1: %2" +msgstr "" + +#. busy popup message +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:685 +msgid "Calculating changed files..." +msgstr "" + +#. busy popup message +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:695 +msgid "Calculating file modifications..." +msgstr "" + +#. label +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:703 +msgid "New file was created." +msgstr "" + +#. label +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:707 +msgid "File was removed." +msgstr "" + +#. label +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:712 +msgid "File content was not changed." +msgstr "" + +#. label +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:718 +msgid "File does not exist in either snapshot." +msgstr "" + +#. label +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:724 +msgid "File content was modified." +msgstr "" + +#. text label, %1, %2 are file modes (like '-rw-r--r--') +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:734 +msgid "File mode was changed from '%1' to '%2'." +msgstr "" + +#. text label, %1, %2 are user names +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:749 +msgid "File user ownership was changed from '%1' to '%2'." +msgstr "" + +#. text label, %1, %2 are group names +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:765 +msgid "File group ownership was changed from '%1' to '%2'." +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:782 +msgid "R&estore from First" +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:784 +msgid "Restore" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:807 +msgid "Res&tore from Second" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:844 +msgid "Show the difference between snapshot and current system" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label, snapshot selection will follow +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:856 +msgid "Show the difference between current and selected snapshot:" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:903 +msgid "Show the difference between first and second snapshot" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:914 +msgid "Show the difference between first snapshot and current system" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:925 +msgid "Show the difference between second snapshot and current system" +msgstr "" + +#. label, date string will follow at the end of line +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:954 +msgid "Time of taking the snapshot:" +msgstr "" + +#. label, date string will follow at the end of line +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:962 +msgid "Time of taking the first snapshot:" +msgstr "" + +#. label, date string will follow at the end of line +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:967 +msgid "Time of taking the second snapshot:" +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:990 +msgid "&Open" +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:1036 +msgid "Restore Selected" +msgstr "" + +#. yes/no question, %1 is file name, %2 is number +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:1121 +msgid "" +"Do you want to delete the file\n" +"\n" +"%1\n" +"\n" +"from current system?" +msgstr "" + +#. yes/no question, %1 is file name, %2 is number +#. yes/no question, %1 is file name, %2 is number +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:1142 src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:1161 +msgid "" +"Do you want to copy the file\n" +"\n" +"%1\n" +"\n" +"from snapshot '%2' to current system?" +msgstr "" + +#. popup message +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:1187 +msgid "No file was selected for restoring." +msgstr "" + +#. popup headline +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:1197 +msgid "Restoring files" +msgstr "" + +#. popup message, %1 is snapshot number, %2 list of files +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:1200 +msgid "" +"<p>These files will be restored from snapshot '%1':</p>\n" +"<p>\n" +"%2\n" +"</p>\n" +"<p>Files existing in original snapshot will be copied to current system.</p>\n" +"<p>Files that did not exist in the snapshot will be deleted.</p>Are you sure?" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help +#: src/include/snapper/helps.rb:35 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Reading the list of snapshots</big></b><br>\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Summary dialog help: +#: src/include/snapper/helps.rb:39 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Snapshots Configuration</big></b><p>\n" +"<p>The table shows a list of root filesystem snapshots. There are three types\n" +"of snapshots, <b>single</b>, <b>pre</b> and <b>post</b>. Single snapshots are\n" +"used for storing the file system state in a certain time, while Pre and Post are used to define the changes done by special operation performed between taking those two snapshots. Pre and Post snapshots are paired together in the table.</p>\n" +"<p>Select a snapshot or snapshot pair and click <b>Show Changes</b> to see the\n" +"new file system changes in the specified snapshot.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Show snapshot dialog help +#: src/include/snapper/helps.rb:48 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Snapshot Overview</big></b><p>\n" +"<p>\n" +"The tree shows all the files that were modified between creating the first ('pre') and second ('post') snapshot. On the right side, you see the description generated when the first snapshot was created and the time of creation for both snapshots.\n" +"</p>\n" +"<p>\n" +"When a file is selected in the tree, you see the changes done to it. By default, changes between selected paired snapshots are shown, but it is possible to compare the file with different versions.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Show snapshot dialog help, alternative for single snapshots +#: src/include/snapper/helps.rb:58 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Snapshot Overview</big></b><p>\n" +"<p>\n" +"The tree shows all the files that differ in a selected snapshot and the current system. On the right side, you see the snapshot description and time of its creation.\n" +"</p>\n" +"<p>\n" +"When a file is selected in the tree, you can see the its difference between snapshot version and current system.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Return Tree of files modified between given snapshots +#. Map is recursively describing the filesystem structure; helps to build Tree widget contents +#: src/modules/Snapper.rb:108 +msgid "Failed to get config:\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Return the path to given snapshot +#: src/modules/Snapper.rb:129 +msgid "Failed to get snapshot mount point:\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Create new snapshot +#. Return true on success +#: src/modules/Snapper.rb:276 +msgid "Failed to create new snapshot:\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Modify existing snapshot +#. Return true on success +#: src/modules/Snapper.rb:291 +msgid "Failed to modify snapshot:\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Delete existing snapshot +#. Return true on success +#: src/modules/Snapper.rb:306 +msgid "Failed to delete snapshot:\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Snapper read dialog caption +#: src/modules/Snapper.rb:319 +msgid "Initializing Snapper" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1/2 +#: src/modules/Snapper.rb:324 +msgid "Read list of configurations" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 2/2 +#: src/modules/Snapper.rb:326 +msgid "Read list of snapshots" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 1/2 +#: src/modules/Snapper.rb:330 +msgid "Reading list of configurations" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 2/2 +#: src/modules/Snapper.rb:332 +msgid "Reading list of snapshots" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress finished +#: src/modules/Snapper.rb:334 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Snapper.rb:344 +msgid "Querying snapper configurations failed:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Snapper.rb:349 +msgid "" +"No snapper configurations exist. You have to create one or more\n" +"configurations to use yast2-snapper. The snapper command line\n" +"tool can be used to create configurations." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Snapper.rb:359 +msgid "Querying snapper snapshots failed:" +msgstr "" + +#. label for log window +#: src/modules/Snapper.rb:399 +msgid "Restoring Files..." +msgstr "" + +#. log entry (%1 is file name) +#: src/modules/Snapper.rb:428 +msgid "Deleted %1\n" +msgstr "" + +#. log entry (%1 is file name) +#: src/modules/Snapper.rb:481 +msgid "%1 skipped\n" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/sound.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/sound.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/sound.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,1218 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. popup error message +#: src/clients/sound.rb:49 +msgid "Sound card database not found. Please check your installation." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for Sound module +#: src/clients/sound.rb:59 +msgid "Sound card configuration module." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for summary action +#: src/clients/sound.rb:69 +msgid "Configuration summary of sound cards" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for add action +#: src/clients/sound.rb:79 +msgid "Add sound card. Without parameters, add first one detected." +msgstr "" + +#. help text for unknownd parameters +#: src/clients/sound.rb:84 +msgid "Value of the specific module parameter." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for remove action +#: src/clients/sound.rb:91 +msgid "Remove sound cards" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for test action +#: src/clients/sound.rb:98 +msgid "Play test sound on given sound card" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for test action +#: src/clients/sound.rb:105 +msgid "Show the information of given sound card" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for set action +#: src/clients/sound.rb:115 +msgid "Set the new values for given card parameters." +msgstr "" + +#. - for unknown parameter names +#. help text for unknownd parameters; do not translate 'show' +#: src/clients/sound.rb:121 +msgid "Value of the specific module parameter. Use the 'show' command to see a list of allowed parameters." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for volume action +#: src/clients/sound.rb:131 +msgid "Set the volume of specific channels of the given card." +msgstr "" + +#. - for unknown parameter names +#. help text; do not translate 'channels' as command name +#: src/clients/sound.rb:137 +msgid "Value of the specific channel (0-100). Use the 'channels' command to see a list of available channels." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for modules action +#: src/clients/sound.rb:144 +msgid "List all available sound kernel modules." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for channels action +#: src/clients/sound.rb:151 +msgid "List available volume channels of given card." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for the 'card' option +#: src/clients/sound.rb:159 +msgid "Number of sound card" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for the 'all' option +#: src/clients/sound.rb:166 +msgid "All available sound cards" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for the 'module' option +#: src/clients/sound.rb:172 +msgid "Kernel module (driver) for the sound card" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for the 'play' option +#: src/clients/sound.rb:179 +msgid "Play the test sound when the card is configured" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for the 'volume' option +#: src/clients/sound.rb:185 +msgid "Volume value for the sound card (0-100)" +msgstr "" + +#. result message, %1 is card name +#: src/clients/sound.rb:347 +msgid "Successfully added card '%1'." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#. error message +#. error message +#. error message +#: src/clients/sound.rb:374 src/clients/sound.rb:484 src/clients/sound.rb:568 +#: src/clients/sound.rb:611 +msgid "You must specify the card number." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#. error message +#. error message +#. error message +#. error message +#. error message +#: src/clients/sound.rb:379 src/clients/sound.rb:402 src/clients/sound.rb:425 +#: src/clients/sound.rb:490 src/clients/sound.rb:574 src/clients/sound.rb:617 +msgid "There is no such sound card." +msgstr "" + +#. label: list of card parameters will follow; %1 is card name, %2 driver +#: src/clients/sound.rb:437 +msgid "Parameters of card '%1' (using module %2):\n" +msgstr "" + +#. label (default value of sound module parameter) +#: src/clients/sound.rb:454 +msgid "" +"\n" +"\tDefault Value: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. label (current value of sound module parameter) +#: src/clients/sound.rb:464 +msgid "" +"\n" +"\tCurrent Value: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. Do not show any progress during Read() +#: src/clients/sound_proposal.rb:39 +msgid "Detecting sound cards..." +msgstr "" + +#. section name in proposal dialog +#: src/clients/sound_proposal.rb:72 +msgid "Sound" +msgstr "" + +#. section name in proposal - menu item +#: src/clients/sound_proposal.rb:74 +msgid "&Sound" +msgstr "" + +#. progress bar item +#: src/clients/sound_write.rb:102 +msgid "Save module configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. progress bar item +#: src/clients/sound_write.rb:104 +msgid "Save sound card information" +msgstr "" + +#. progress bar item +#: src/clients/sound_write.rb:106 +msgid "Save sysconfig values" +msgstr "" + +#. progress bar item +#: src/clients/sound_write.rb:108 +msgid "Start sound card" +msgstr "" + +#. progress bar item +#: src/clients/sound_write.rb:110 +msgid "Store volume" +msgstr "" + +#. progress bar item +#. progres bar label +#. progres bar label +#: src/clients/sound_write.rb:115 src/clients/sound_write.rb:139 +#: src/clients/sound_write.rb:145 +msgid "Saving sound card settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress bar item +#: src/clients/sound_write.rb:117 +msgid "Saving card information..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress bar item +#: src/clients/sound_write.rb:119 +msgid "Saving sysconfig values..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress bar item +#: src/clients/sound_write.rb:121 +msgid "Starting sound card..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress bar item +#: src/clients/sound_write.rb:123 +msgid "Storing volume settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress bar item +#: src/clients/sound_write.rb:128 +msgid "Install required packages" +msgstr "" + +#. progress bar item +#: src/clients/sound_write.rb:131 +msgid "Installing required packages..." +msgstr "" + +#. log mixer settings +#: src/clients/sound_write.rb:293 +msgid "" +"These required packages are not available: %1\n" +"Some sound devices may not work or some features may not be supported.\n" +"\n" +"Enable or add an additional software repository containing the packages.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. creates summary table with card labels and thier states +#. (running/not running/dissappeared) +#. @return [Array] table contents +#: src/include/sound/complex.rb:61 +msgid "Configured as sound card number %1" +msgstr "" + +#. sort the cards by index +#: src/include/sound/complex.rb:70 src/include/sound/complex.rb:112 +msgid "Driver %1" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sound/complex.rb:120 +msgid "Not configured" +msgstr "" + +#. popup question text +#: src/include/sound/complex.rb:259 +msgid "" +"To apply changes, the sound system\n" +"must be restarted.\n" +"Restart sound system now?\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sound/complex.rb:272 +msgid "" +"Restart of the sound system has failed.\n" +"Check options of the driver.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup message +#: src/include/sound/complex.rb:342 +msgid "PulseAudio is not installed or cannot be configured." +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/include/sound/complex.rb:352 +msgid "PulseAudio Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label +#: src/include/sound/complex.rb:359 +msgid "&Enable PulseAudio Support" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/include/sound/complex.rb:400 +msgid "Advanced Options" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label +#: src/include/sound/complex.rb:407 +msgid "&Start Sequencer (Load MIDI Drivers)" +msgstr "" + +#. menu item +#: src/include/sound/complex.rb:492 +msgid "&Volume..." +msgstr "" + +#. menu item +#: src/include/sound/complex.rb:494 +msgid "Play &Test Sound" +msgstr "" + +#. menu item +#: src/include/sound/complex.rb:496 +msgid "&Start Sequencer" +msgstr "" + +#. menu item +#: src/include/sound/complex.rb:498 +msgid "Set as the &Primary Card" +msgstr "" + +#. menu item +#: src/include/sound/complex.rb:500 +msgid "PulseAudio &Configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. menu item, do not translate "SoundFont" term (see http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sound_font) +#: src/include/sound/complex.rb:507 +msgid "&Install SoundFonts..." +msgstr "" + +#. dialog title +#: src/include/sound/complex.rb:513 +msgid "Sound Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/include/sound/complex.rb:516 +msgid "Index" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sound/complex.rb:516 +msgid "Card Model" +msgstr "" + +#. table entry (vendor was not defined) +#: src/include/sound/manual.rb:92 +msgid "Other" +msgstr "" + +#. table entry (all vendors) +#. item for all sound card models in sound card driver list +#: src/include/sound/manual.rb:97 src/include/sound/routines.rb:356 +msgid "All" +msgstr "" + +#. selection box title +#: src/include/sound/manual.rb:184 +msgid "Sound Card &Vendor" +msgstr "" + +#. selection box title +#: src/include/sound/manual.rb:186 +msgid "Sound card &driver" +msgstr "" + +#. selection box title +#: src/include/sound/manual.rb:196 +msgid "Sound card &model" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/include/sound/manual.rb:207 +msgid "Show List of Kernel Modules" +msgstr "" + +#. input field - label +#: src/include/sound/manual.rb:213 +msgid "&Search" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog title +#: src/include/sound/manual.rb:219 +msgid "Manual Sound Card Selection" +msgstr "" + +#. channel name - label for IntField widget in mixer dialog +#: src/include/sound/mixer.rb:33 +msgid "Master" +msgstr "" + +#. channel name - label for IntField widget in mixer dialog +#: src/include/sound/mixer.rb:37 +msgid "PCM" +msgstr "" + +#. channel name - label for IntField widget in mixer dialog +#: src/include/sound/mixer.rb:41 +msgid "Master Mono" +msgstr "" + +#. channel name - label for IntField widget in mixer dialog +#: src/include/sound/mixer.rb:45 +msgid "Headphone" +msgstr "" + +#. channel name - label for IntField widget in mixer dialog +#: src/include/sound/mixer.rb:49 +msgid "Line" +msgstr "" + +#. channel name - label for IntField widget in mixer dialog +#: src/include/sound/mixer.rb:53 +msgid "CD" +msgstr "" + +#. channel name - label for IntField widget in mixer dialog +#: src/include/sound/mixer.rb:57 +msgid "Mic" +msgstr "" + +#. channel name - label for IntField widget in mixer dialog +#: src/include/sound/mixer.rb:61 +msgid "Video" +msgstr "" + +#. channel name - label for IntField widget in mixer dialog +#: src/include/sound/mixer.rb:65 +msgid "Phone" +msgstr "" + +#. channel name - label for IntField widget in mixer dialog +#: src/include/sound/mixer.rb:69 +msgid "Aux" +msgstr "" + +#. channel name - label for IntField widget in mixer dialog +#: src/include/sound/mixer.rb:73 +msgid "PC Speaker" +msgstr "" + +#. channel name - label for IntField widget in mixer dialog +#: src/include/sound/mixer.rb:77 +msgid "Bass" +msgstr "" + +#. channel name - label for IntField widget in mixer dialog +#: src/include/sound/mixer.rb:81 +msgid "Treble" +msgstr "" + +#. channel name - label for IntField widget in mixer dialog +#: src/include/sound/mixer.rb:85 +msgid "Surround" +msgstr "" + +#. channel name - label for IntField widget in mixer dialog +#: src/include/sound/mixer.rb:89 +msgid "LFE" +msgstr "" + +#. channel name - label for IntField widget in mixer dialog +#: src/include/sound/mixer.rb:93 +msgid "Center" +msgstr "" + +#. channel name - label for IntField widget in mixer dialog +#: src/include/sound/mixer.rb:97 +msgid "Wave" +msgstr "" + +#. channel name - label for IntField widget in mixer dialog +#: src/include/sound/mixer.rb:101 +msgid "Wave Center" +msgstr "" + +#. channel name - label for IntField widget in mixer dialog +#: src/include/sound/mixer.rb:105 +msgid "Wave Surround" +msgstr "" + +#. channel name - label for IntField widget in mixer dialog +#: src/include/sound/mixer.rb:109 +msgid "AC97" +msgstr "" + +#. channel name - label for IntField widget in mixer dialog +#: src/include/sound/mixer.rb:113 +msgid "Music" +msgstr "" + +#. channel name - label for IntField widget in mixer dialog +#: src/include/sound/mixer.rb:117 +msgid "Front" +msgstr "" + +#. channel name - label for IntField widget in mixer dialog +#: src/include/sound/mixer.rb:121 +msgid "iSpeaker" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/include/sound/mixer.rb:219 +msgid "&Master volume" +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#. Test - button label +#: src/include/sound/mixer.rb:226 src/include/sound/volume.rb:90 +msgid "&Test" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/include/sound/mixer.rb:261 +msgid "&Other channels" +msgstr "" + +#. card name +#. add vendor/device ID +#: src/include/sound/mixer.rb:279 src/include/sound/read_routines.rb:435 +msgid "Unknown" +msgstr "" + +#. help text - mixer setting +#: src/include/sound/mixer.rb:377 +msgid "" +"<P>With this dialog you can set volume for each channel of the selected sound card. \n" +"Press <B>Next</B> to save your volume settings, press <B>Back</B> to restore the original settings.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog header, %1 = card id (number), %2 = name +#: src/include/sound/mixer.rb:385 +msgid "Volume Settings for Card %1 - %2" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: popup message, wrong value +#. To translators: popup message, wrong value +#: src/include/sound/options.rb:53 src/include/sound/options.rb:62 +msgid "The value: %1 must be a number" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: "space" means blank character +#: src/include/sound/options.rb:77 +msgid "(space)" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: popup message, wrong value +#: src/include/sound/options.rb:80 +msgid "String cannot contain: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. popup message: wrong value; %1 is list of right values +#: src/include/sound/options.rb:93 +msgid "" +"The value must be one of\n" +"%1" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: src/include/sound/options.rb:254 +msgid "" +"Possible value:\n" +"not known" +msgstr "" + +#. when the selected option in table is changed, we need to update +#. combo with values +#. @param [String] values list of values +#. @param [String] default_item default item +#. @return [void] +#: src/include/sound/options.rb:298 +msgid "Name of the &Option" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sound/options.rb:306 src/include/sound/options.rb:312 +msgid "&Value" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sound/options.rb:306 src/include/sound/options.rb:312 +msgid "&Option: " +msgstr "" + +#. all non-ASCII characters from value +#: src/include/sound/options.rb:346 +msgid "" +"Value of the option contains invalid\n" +"characters '%1'.\n" +"\n" +"Enter a valid value." +msgstr "" + +#. all non-ASCII characters from name +#: src/include/sound/options.rb:367 +msgid "" +"Name of the option contains invalid\n" +"characters '%1'.\n" +"\n" +"Enter a valid name." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sound/options.rb:394 +msgid "Change the Option" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sound/options.rb:398 +msgid "Add a New Option" +msgstr "" + +#. Returns description of card module option +#. @param [Object] arg type of arg can be string or list +#. @return [String] description +#: src/include/sound/options.rb:414 +msgid "No description available" +msgstr "" + +#. Table header -- option description +#: src/include/sound/options.rb:439 +msgid "Description" +msgstr "" + +#. Table header -- option name +#: src/include/sound/options.rb:441 +msgid "Option" +msgstr "" + +#. Table header -- value of an option +#: src/include/sound/options.rb:443 +msgid "Value" +msgstr "" + +#. restore original option values +#: src/include/sound/options.rb:454 +msgid "R&eset all" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog title +#: src/include/sound/options.rb:543 +msgid "Sound Card Advanced Options" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sound/options.rb:554 +msgid "There are no options for this module" +msgstr "" + +#. popup question +#: src/include/sound/options.rb:685 +msgid "Do you really want to reset all values?" +msgstr "" + +#. Confirmation: label text (detecting hardware: xxx) +#: src/include/sound/read_routines.rb:176 +msgid "Sound Cards" +msgstr "" + +#. list of all sound modules (table items) +#: src/include/sound/routines.rb:53 +msgid "Unknown CD-ROM device" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sound/routines.rb:71 +msgid "Unknown CD-ROM Device" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sound/routines.rb:100 +msgid "CD-ROM &Device" +msgstr "" + +#. returns list of all available sound modules (OSS only) +#. @return [Array] as above +#: src/include/sound/routines.rb:344 +msgid "%1 (%2)" +msgstr "" + +#. label to error popup, %1 is module name +#: src/include/sound/routines.rb:844 +msgid "" +"The kernel module %1 for sound support\n" +"could not be loaded. This can be caused by incorrect\n" +"module parameters, including invalid IO or IRQ parameters." +msgstr "" + +#. popup question: different module has to be choosed +#: src/include/sound/routines.rb:1115 +msgid "" +"It seems that you have a Thinkpad 600E laptop.\n" +"On this laptop, the CS4236 driver should be used\n" +"although the CS46xx chip is detected.\n" +"Attempt to probe the configuration of CS4236 driver?\n" +"\n" +"Warning: The probe procedure can take some time and\n" +"could make your system unstable.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text - setup type selection 1/3 +#. help text - quick configuration 1/3 +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:30 src/include/sound/texts.rb:53 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"To configure this sound card and adjust its \n" +"volume, check <b>Normal setup</b>.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text - setup type selection 2/3 +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:37 +msgid "" +"<p>To set a special option, \n" +"check <b>Advanced setup</b>.\n" +"Most users will not need this.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text - setup type selection 3/3 +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:44 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"If you do not want to adjust volume or set options now, \n" +"check <b>Quick automatic setup</b>. You can set the volume and \n" +"change options later.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text - quick configuration 2/3 +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:60 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"If you do not want to adjust the volume now, check <b>Quick \n" +"automatic setup</b>. You can set the volume and change options \n" +"later.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text - quick configuration 3/3 +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:68 +msgid "" +"<P>\n" +"To configure a card that was not detected, \n" +"check <B>More detailed installation of sound cards</B>.\n" +"</P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text - sound card selection 1/2 +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:76 +msgid "" +"<P>\n" +"<b>Manually</b> choose the sound card to \n" +"configure. Search for a particular sound card by \n" +"entering the name in the search box.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text - sound card selection 2/2 +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:84 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Select <b>All</b> to see the entire list of \n" +"supported sound card models.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text - which sound card to configure 1/2 +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:92 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Select the type of card to configure.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text - which sound card to configure 2/2 +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:98 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"If the list contains <b>autodetected</b> cards not yet \n" +"configured, select one and continue. Otherwise,\n" +"use <b>manual selection</b>.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. To reset the sound configuration these programs must be terminated +#. (popup label message) +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:108 src/include/sound/texts.rb:114 +msgid "" +"There are programs running that are currently using \n" +"the audio device.\n" +"To reset the configuration, these \n" +"programs must be terminated. Proceed?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text - options dialog 1/2 +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:122 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Here, modify options for the sound modules. \n" +"If you are not <b>absolutely sure</b> what you are doing, \n" +"leave this dialog untouched. \n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text - options dialog 2/2 +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:130 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Choose the option to set then use <b>Set</b> \n" +"to enable the new value. If there are known possible values for \n" +"the selected option, choose it under \n" +"<B>Possible value</B>. Reset all values \n" +"by pressing <b>Reset</b>. Numeric values can be entered as \n" +"decimal or hexadecimal (hexadecimal with a <b>0x</b> prefix).\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text - mixer setting 1/4 +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:142 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Adjust the volume.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text - mixer setting 2/4 +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:144 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Test your sound card by pressing <b>Test</b>.\n" +"\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text - mixer setting 3/4 +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:151 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"After configuration is complete, use <b>amixer</b> \n" +"or any program of your choice to adjust the volume.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text - mixer setting 4/4 +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:158 +msgid "" +"<p><b>WARNING:</b> Start testing your\n" +"sound card with <b>very</b> low volume settings to prevent \n" +"damage.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. warning/question message +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:166 +msgid "" +"Configuring this sound card on some Sony VAIO notebooks \n" +"may fail if X is running. This can be avoided by setting the\n" +"snd_vaio_hack option value to 1 or by \n" +"configuring this card outside X. Proceed?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:174 +msgid "Error while saving '/etc/modules.conf'.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. list of error +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:177 +msgid "" +"These errors occurred during saving configuration:\n" +"%1" +msgstr "" + +#. information message - success +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:180 +msgid "" +"The sound card was successfully configured.\n" +"It is now available for use.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:183 +msgid "The sound configuration was saved." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:186 +msgid "Error while saving file: %1 \n" +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:189 +msgid "Error while setting volume.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:190 +msgid "" +"The sound volume and configuration\n" +"for the sound card \n" +"will be saved now.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:195 +msgid "The sound configuration will be saved now." +msgstr "" + +#. this is the second part of message "The sound card 'sbLive' will be configured as the first card" +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:198 +msgid "will be configured as the first sound card (%1)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:199 +msgid "will be configured as the second sound card (%1)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:200 +msgid "will be configured as the third sound card (%1)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:201 +msgid "will be configured as the %2th sound card (%1)" +msgstr "" + +#. do not translate "SoundFont" term (see http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sound_font) +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:205 +msgid "Install SoundFonts" +msgstr "" + +#. do not translate "SoundFont" term (see http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sound_font) +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:208 +msgid "" +"Should YaST2 install the wavetable SoundFont-files from \n" +"your Soundblaster Live! or AWE driver CD?\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:211 +msgid "" +"Insert the driver CD for the Soundblaster Live! or AWE card\n" +"in the CD-ROM drive.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. To translators: the message below will look like this: "14 SoundFont-files have been installed in /usr/share/..." +#. do not translate "SoundFont" term (see http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sound_font) +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:217 +msgid "%1 SoundFont-files have been installed in %2." +msgstr "" + +#. do not translate "SoundFont" term (see http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sound_font) +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:220 +msgid "No SoundFont-files found." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:221 +msgid "Would you like to change the CD and retry ?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:222 +msgid "" +"'%1' and '%2' sound cards were autodetected on your system. \n" +"For proper functionality, skip the '%1' sound card and \n" +"configure only the '%2'.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:227 +msgid "" +"<P>\n" +"Hardware detection found a new sound card. To configure it, \n" +"select the appropriate item in list and press \n" +"<B>Configure<B>.\n" +"</P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:234 +msgid "" +"<P>\n" +"Press <B>Change</B> to configure cards already installed.\n" +"</P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:239 +msgid "" +"<P>\n" +"To save the current configuration, press <B>Finish</B>.\n" +"</P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. sound system dependent part: +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:251 +msgid "<p><big><b>Sound Cards</b><big></p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:252 +msgid "" +"<P>Select an unconfigured card from the list and press <B>Edit</B> to\n" +"configure it. If the card was not detected, press <B>Add</B> and\n" +"configure the card manually.</P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:257 +msgid "" +"<P>\n" +"To change the configuration of a card, select the card.\n" +"Then press <B>Edit</B>.\n" +"</P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:263 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Use <b>Other</b> to set the volume of the selected card or configure\n" +"the module loaded for playing MIDI files (<b>Start Sequencer</b>).\n" +"Use <b>Play Test Sound</b> to test the selected card.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:270 +msgid "" +"<P>PulseAudio daemon can be used to play sounds.\n" +"Use <B>PulseAudio Configuration</B> to enable or disable it.</P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:273 +msgid "" +"<p>The sound device with index 0 is the default device used by system and applications.\n" +"Use <b>Other</b> to set the selected sound device as the primary device.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:276 +msgid "" +"The applications which use OSS (Open Sound System) can use the software\n" +"mixer by using aoss wrapper. Use command <tt>aoss <application></tt> to\n" +"start the application." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:286 src/include/sound/texts.rb:316 +msgid "<p>An error has occurred. </p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:287 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"If the the problem persists, try passing \n" +"<b>options</b> to the ALSA module. If your sound card still\n" +"will not work, try <i>OSS/Free</i> or \n" +"another module.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:300 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"This is the complete sound card list. Use the <b>Finish</b> button \n" +"to save sound card information.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:306 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Use <b>Delete</b> to remove a configured sound card. \n" +"Use <b>Add sound card</b> to add a sound card.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sound/texts.rb:317 +msgid "<p>You can try to pass some <b>options</b> to the module.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. this is the first part of message "The sound card 'cardname' +#. will be configured as the first snd card" +#: src/include/sound/ui.rb:73 +msgid "The sound card\n" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label - type of setup +#: src/include/sound/ui.rb:86 +msgid "&Quick automatic setup" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label - type of setup +#: src/include/sound/ui.rb:94 +msgid "Normal &setup" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label - type of setup +#: src/include/sound/ui.rb:101 +msgid "Advanced setup with possibility to change &options" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog header +#: src/include/sound/ui.rb:123 +msgid "Sound Card Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. volume slider label +#. volume slider label +#: src/include/sound/volume.rb:51 src/include/sound/volume.rb:62 +msgid "&Volume" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog title +#: src/include/sound/volume.rb:76 +msgid "Settings for sound card" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/include/sound/volume.rb:82 +msgid "Volume Adjust and Test" +msgstr "" + +#. message label +#: src/include/sound/volume.rb:93 +msgid "Press 'Test' to start playing sound sample" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog title +#: src/include/sound/volume.rb:134 +msgid "Sound Card Volume" +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/include/sound/volume.rb:203 +msgid "" +"Please try to configure this sound card manually \n" +"using the \"Cirrus Logic CS4232\" or \"Cirrus \n" +"Logic CS4236\" driver and configure \n" +"its parameters using the 'Advanced setup'." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/include/sound/volume.rb:214 +msgid "An error occurred during the installation of" +msgstr "" + +#. popup message: test audio file was not found +#: src/include/sound/volume_routines.rb:118 +msgid "" +"Cannot find file:\n" +"%1\n" +"(test audio file)" +msgstr "" + +#. popup question +#: src/include/sound/wizards.rb:56 +msgid "Do you really want to delete this entry?" +msgstr "" + +#. part of a summary text (PulseAudio is disabled/enabled) +#: src/modules/PulseAudio.rb:175 +msgid "Enabled" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/PulseAudio.rb:175 +msgid "Disabled" +msgstr "" + +#. yes/no popup text, %1 is chip name +#: src/modules/Sound.rb:188 +msgid "" +"It looks like probing the chip\n" +"%1\n" +"failed last time.\n" +"\n" +"Probe the chip now?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. label +#: src/modules/Sound.rb:263 +msgid "" +"No card was found.\n" +"Attempt to detect the presence some old chips?\n" +"\n" +"Warning: The probe procedure can take some time and\n" +"could make your system unstable.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. selection box label +#: src/modules/Sound.rb:275 +msgid "&Select the Drivers to Probe" +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/modules/Sound.rb:280 +msgid "&Yes, Probe" +msgstr "" + +#. popup dialog header +#: src/modules/Sound.rb:304 +msgid "Probing:" +msgstr "" + +#. progress bar label +#: src/modules/Sound.rb:309 +msgid "Progress:" +msgstr "" + +#. label (%1 is name of the chip) +#: src/modules/Sound.rb:339 +msgid "Card with %1 Chip" +msgstr "" + +#. summary string, %1 is a list of packages +#: src/modules/Sound.rb:617 +msgid "Required packages to install: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. separator for constructing package list +#: src/modules/Sound.rb:619 +msgid ", " +msgstr "" + +#. sound Read dialog caption: +#: src/modules/Sound.rb:632 +msgid "Initializing Sound Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. summary text: '(sound card is) Configured as snd-card-1' +#: src/modules/Sound.rb:855 +msgid "Configured as %1." +msgstr "" + +#. returns list of configured/proposed sound cards. +#. @return [Array] of maps: [$["name": "ASDASD", "card_no": 0]...] +#: src/modules/Sound.rb:1100 +msgid "Sound card" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/squid.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/squid.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/squid.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,1512 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. Command line help text for the Xsquid module +#: src/clients/squid.rb:57 +msgid "Configuration of Squid cache proxy" +msgstr "" + +#. ***************** SRC ************************ +#. ***************** SRC END ******************** +#. ***************** DST ************************ +#: src/include/squid/SquidACL_local_functions.rb:150 +#: src/include/squid/SquidACL_local_functions.rb:197 +msgid "Invalid values." +msgstr "" + +#. ***************** DST END ******************** +#. ***************** MYIP ************************ +#. * Uses same functions as DST +#. /****************** MYIP END ******************* +#. *************** SRCDOMAIN ******************** +#: src/include/squid/SquidACL_local_functions.rb:244 +msgid "Domain Name must not be empty." +msgstr "" + +#. *************** SRCDOMAIN END **************** +#. *************** DSTDOMAIN ********************* +#. * Uses same functions as SRCDOMAIN. +#. /**************** DSTDOMAIN END **************** +#. *************** REGEXP *********************** +#. Returns universal widget for setting a regular expression. +#: src/include/squid/SquidACL_local_functions.rb:264 +#: src/include/squid/dialogs.rb:63 src/include/squid/popup_dialogs.rb:104 +msgid "Regular Expression" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/SquidACL_local_functions.rb:268 +#: src/include/squid/popup_dialogs.rb:106 src/modules/SquidACL.rb:319 +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:342 +msgid "Case Insensitive" +msgstr "" + +#. Universal verification function for regular expression. +#: src/include/squid/SquidACL_local_functions.rb:305 +msgid "Regular Expression must not be empty." +msgstr "" + +#. *************** REGEXP END ******************* +#. *************** TIME ************************* +#: src/include/squid/SquidACL_local_functions.rb:369 +msgid "You must select at least one day." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/SquidACL_local_functions.rb:372 +msgid "Time is not set in correct format." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/SquidACL_local_functions.rb:375 +msgid "From must be less than To." +msgstr "" + +#. *************** TIME END ********************* +#. *************** PORT ************************* +#. *************** PORT END ********************* +#. ************* MYPORT ************************* +#: src/include/squid/SquidACL_local_functions.rb:432 +#: src/include/squid/SquidACL_local_functions.rb:463 +msgid "Invalid value." +msgstr "" + +#. ************* MYPORT END ********************* +#. ************** PROTO ************************* +#: src/include/squid/SquidACL_local_functions.rb:495 +msgid "Protocol must not be empty." +msgstr "" + +#. ************** MAXCONN END ******************* +#. ************** HEADER ************************ +#: src/include/squid/SquidACL_local_functions.rb:587 +msgid "Header Name and Regular Expression must not be empty." +msgstr "" + +#. error report +#: src/include/squid/SquidACL_local_functions.rb:630 +msgid "MAC Address must not be empty." +msgstr "" + +#. error report +#: src/include/squid/SquidACL_local_functions.rb:634 +msgid "Incorrect format of MAC Address." +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. Copyright (c) 2006 Novell, Inc. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under +#. the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as published by the +#. Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +#. ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS +#. FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with +#. this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, you may find +#. current contact information at www.novell.com. +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. File: include/squid/complex.ycp +#. Package: Configuration of squid +#. Summary: Dialogs definitions +#. Authors: Daniel Fiser +#. +#. $Id: complex.ycp 29363 2006-03-24 08:20:43Z mzugec $ +#: src/include/squid/complex.rb:51 +msgid "Squid" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/complex.rb:64 +msgid "When &Booting" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/complex.rb:65 +msgid "&Manually" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/complex.rb:68 +msgid "When Booting" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/complex.rb:69 src/modules/Squid.rb:1590 +msgid "Manually" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/complex.rb:76 +msgid "Squid is running" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/complex.rb:77 +msgid "Squid is not running" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/complex.rb:78 +msgid "&Start Squid Now" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/complex.rb:79 +msgid "S&top Squid Now" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/complex.rb:84 +msgid "Sa&ve Settings and Restart Squid Now" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: part of help text - push button label, NO SHORTCUT!!! +#: src/include/squid/complex.rb:92 +msgid "Start Squid Now" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: part of help text - push button label, NO SHORTCUT!!! +#: src/include/squid/complex.rb:94 +msgid "Stop Squid Now" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: part of help text - push button label, NO SHORTCUT!!! +#: src/include/squid/complex.rb:96 +msgid "Save Settings and Restart Squid Now" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/complex.rb:104 +msgid "Open Ports in Firewall" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/complex.rb:261 +msgid "Firewall Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/complex.rb:268 src/include/squid/complex.rb:270 +msgid "Start-Up" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/complex.rb:277 +msgid "HTTP Ports Setting" +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. Copyright (c) 2006 Novell, Inc. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under +#. the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as published by the +#. Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +#. ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS +#. FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with +#. this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, you may find +#. current contact information at www.novell.com. +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. File: include/squid/dialogs.ycp +#. Package: Configuration of squid +#. Summary: Dialogs definitions +#. Authors: Daniel Fiser +#. +#. $Id: dialogs.ycp 27914 2006-02-13 14:32:08Z locilka $ +#: src/include/squid/complex.rb:279 src/include/squid/dialogs.rb:40 +msgid "HTTP Ports" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/complex.rb:286 +msgid "Refresh Patterns Setting" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/complex.rb:288 src/include/squid/dialogs.rb:57 +msgid "Refresh Patterns" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/complex.rb:295 src/include/squid/complex.rb:297 +#: src/include/squid/dialogs.rb:92 +msgid "Cache Setting" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/complex.rb:304 +msgid "Cache Directory Setting" +msgstr "" + +#. `HBox( +#. `HSpacing(3), +#. `Frame(_("Cache Setting"), +#. `HBox( +#. `HWeight(1,`VBox( +#. `VWeight(1, `HBox( +#. `IntField(`id("cache_mem"), _("C&ache Memory"), 1, 99999, 10), +#. sizeUnitWidget("cache_mem_units") +#. )), +#. `VSpacing(0.4), +#. `VWeight(1, `HBox( +#. `IntField(`id("cache_max_object_size"), _("Ma&x Object Size"), 0, 99999, 0), +#. sizeUnitWidget("cache_max_object_size_units") +#. )), +#. `VSpacing(0.4), +#. `VWeight(1, `HBox( +#. `IntField(`id("cache_swap_low"), _("Swap &Low-Water Mark (in percents)"), 0, 100, 0) +#. )), +#. `VSpacing(0.4), +#. `Left(`VWeight(1, `HBox( +#. `ComboBox(`id("cache_replacement_policy"), +#. _("&Cache Replacement Policy"), +#. [`item("lru"), `item("heap GDSF"), `item("heap LFUDA"), `item("heap LRU")]) +#. ))) +#. )), +#. `HSpacing(3), +#. `HWeight(1,`VBox( +#. `VWeight(1, `HBox(`Empty())), +#. `VSpacing(0.4), +#. `VWeight(1, `HBox( +#. `IntField(`id("cache_min_object_size"), _("M&in Object Size"), 0, 99999, 0), +#. sizeUnitWidget("cache_min_object_size_units") +#. )), +#. `VSpacing(0.4), +#. `VWeight(1, `HBox( +#. `IntField(`id("cache_swap_high"), _("Swap &High-Water Mark (in percents)"), 0, 100, 0) +#. )), +#. `VSpacing(0.4), +#. `Left(`VWeight(1, `HBox( +#. `ComboBox(`id("memory_replacement_policy"), +#. _("&Memory Replacement Policy"), +#. [`item("lru"), `item("heap GDSF"), `item("heap LFUDA"), `item("heap LRU")]) +#. ))) +#. )) +#. ) +#. ), +#. `HSpacing(3) +#. ); +#. cache_swap_low <= cache_swap_high +#: src/include/squid/complex.rb:306 src/include/squid/dialogs.rb:249 +#: src/include/squid/handlers.rb:224 +msgid "Cache Directory" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/complex.rb:317 +msgid "Access Control Setting" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/complex.rb:319 src/include/squid/dialogs.rb:290 +msgid "Access Control" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/complex.rb:330 +msgid "Logging and Timeouts Setting" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/complex.rb:332 +msgid "Logging and Timeouts" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/complex.rb:339 src/include/squid/dialogs.rb:369 +msgid "Miscellaneous Setting" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/complex.rb:341 +msgid "Miscellaneous" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/dialogs.rb:44 src/include/squid/popup_dialogs.rb:53 +msgid "Host" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/dialogs.rb:44 src/include/squid/popup_dialogs.rb:54 +msgid "Port" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/dialogs.rb:44 +msgid "Options" +msgstr "" + +#. , _("Options") +#. table header, stands for minimum +#: src/include/squid/dialogs.rb:65 +msgid "Min" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/include/squid/dialogs.rb:67 src/include/squid/popup_dialogs.rb:111 +msgid "Percent" +msgstr "" + +#. table header, stands for maximum +#: src/include/squid/dialogs.rb:69 +msgid "Max" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/dialogs.rb:97 +msgid "C&ache Memory" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/dialogs.rb:107 +msgid "Ma&x Object Size" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/dialogs.rb:121 +msgid "M&in Object Size" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/dialogs.rb:135 +msgid "Swap &Low-Water Mark (percentage)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/dialogs.rb:148 +msgid "Swap &High-Water Mark (percentage)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/dialogs.rb:162 +msgid "&Cache Replacement Policy" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/dialogs.rb:180 +msgid "&Memory Replacement Policy" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/dialogs.rb:253 +msgid "&Directory Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/dialogs.rb:258 +msgid "&Size (in MB)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/dialogs.rb:260 +msgid "L&evel 1 Directories" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/dialogs.rb:262 +msgid "Le&vel 2 Directories" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/dialogs.rb:273 src/include/squid/dialogs.rb:295 +msgid "ACL Groups" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/dialogs.rb:277 src/include/squid/popup_dialogs.rb:330 +msgid "Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/dialogs.rb:277 src/include/squid/popup_dialogs.rb:335 +msgid "Type" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/dialogs.rb:277 +msgid "Description" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/dialogs.rb:295 src/include/squid/popup_dialogs.rb:232 +msgid "Allow/Deny" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/dialogs.rb:317 +msgid "Logging" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/dialogs.rb:321 +msgid "&Access Log" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/dialogs.rb:327 +msgid "&Cache Log" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/dialogs.rb:333 +msgid "Cache &Store Log" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/dialogs.rb:345 +msgid "Timeouts" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/dialogs.rb:350 +msgid "Connection &Timeout" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/dialogs.rb:358 +msgid "Client &Lifetime" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/dialogs.rb:371 +msgid "&Language of error messages" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/dialogs.rb:373 +msgid "&Administrator's email" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/dialogs.rb:375 +msgid "&Use FTP Passive Mode" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/handlers.rb:294 +msgid "Access Log" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/handlers.rb:297 +msgid "Cache Log" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/handlers.rb:300 +msgid "Cache Store Log" +msgstr "" + +#. Returns a widget with setting of units +#: src/include/squid/helper_functions.rb:38 +msgid "&Units" +msgstr "" + +#. Returns a widget with setting of units +#: src/include/squid/helper_functions.rb:56 +msgid "seconds" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/helper_functions.rb:57 +msgid "minutes" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/helper_functions.rb:58 +msgid "hours" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/helper_functions.rb:59 +msgid "days" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/squid/helps.rb:34 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Initializing Squid Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/squid/helps.rb:38 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Initialization:</big></b><br>\n" +"Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing <b>Abort</b> now.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/squid/helps.rb:42 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Saving Squid Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/squid/helps.rb:46 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Saving:</big></b><br>\n" +"Abort the save procedure by pressing <b>Abort</b>.\n" +"An additional dialog informs whether it is safe to do so.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Summary dialog help +#: src/include/squid/helps.rb:53 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Squid Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Configure Squid here.<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Ovreview dialog help +#: src/include/squid/helps.rb:57 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Squid Configuration Overview</big></b><br>\n" +"Obtain an overview of installed squids and\n" +"edit their configurations if necessary.<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Http Ports Dialog +#: src/include/squid/helps.rb:63 +msgid "" +"<p>Define all ports where Squid will\n" +"listen for clients' http requests.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/helps.rb:66 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Host</b> can contain a hostname or IP address\n" +"or remain empty.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Cache Dialog +#: src/include/squid/helps.rb:70 +msgid "<p><b>Refresh Patterns</b> define how Squid treats the objects in the cache.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/helps.rb:73 +msgid "" +"<p>The refresh patterns are checked in the order listed here.\n" +"The first matching entry is used.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/helps.rb:76 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Min</b> determines how long (in minutes) an object should be\n" +"considered fresh if no explicit expiry time is given.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/helps.rb:79 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Percent</b> is the percentage of the object's age (time since last\n" +"modification). An object without explicit expiry time will be\n" +"considered fresh.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/helps.rb:84 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Max</b> is the upper limit of how long objects without an explicit\n" +"expiry time will be considered fresh.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Cache 2 Dialog +#: src/include/squid/helps.rb:88 +msgid "<p><b>Cache memory</b> defines the ideal amount of memory to be used for objects.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/helps.rb:91 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Max Object Size</b> defines the maximum size for objects to be stored\n" +"on the disk. Objects larger than this size will not be saved on disk.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/helps.rb:94 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Min Object Size</b> specifies the minimum size for objects. Smaller \n" +"objects will not be saved to the disk.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/helps.rb:97 +msgid "" +"<p>Replacement begins when the swap (disk) usage is above the\n" +"<b>Swap Low-Water Mark</b> and attempts to maintain utilization near the\n" +"<b>Swap Low-Water Mark</b>. As swap utilization gets close to\n" +"<b>Swap High-Water Mark</b>, object eviction becomes more aggressive.\n" +"If utilization is close to the <b>Swap Low-Water Mark</b>, less replacement\n" +"is done each time.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/helps.rb:105 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Cache Replacement Policy</b> determines which objects are to be replaced\n" +"when disk space is needed.\n" +"<b>Memory Replacement Policy</b> specifies the policy for object replacement in\n" +"memory when space for new objects is not available.\n" +"Policies could be:\n" +"<table>\n" +" <tr>\n" +" <td>lru</td>\n" +" <td>least recently used</td>\n" +" </tr>\n" +" <tr>\n" +" <td>heap GDSF</td>\n" +" <td>Greedy-Dual Size Frequency</td>\n" +" </tr>\n" +" <tr>\n" +" <td>heap LFUDA</td>\n" +" <td>Least Frequently Used with Dynamic Aging</td>\n" +" <tr>\n" +" <tr>\n" +" <td>heap LRU</td>\n" +" <td>lru policy implemented using a heap</td>\n" +" </tr>\n" +"</table>\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Cache Directory +#: src/include/squid/helps.rb:132 +msgid "<p><b>Directory Name</b> defines a top-level directory where cache swap files will be stored.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/helps.rb:135 +msgid "<p><b>Size</b> defines the amount of disk space (in MB) to use under this directory.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/helps.rb:138 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Level 1 Directories</b> defines a number of first-level subdirectories, \n" +"which will be created under the <b>Directory Name</b> directory.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/helps.rb:141 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Level 2 Directories</b> defines a number of second-level subdirectories,\n" +"which will be created under each first-level directory.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. ACL Groups +#: src/include/squid/helps.rb:145 +msgid "<p>Access to the Squid server can be controlled via <b>ACL Groups</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/helps.rb:148 +msgid "" +"<p><b>ACL Group</b> has various types and the description of ACL Group depends\n" +"on the particular type.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/helps.rb:151 +msgid "" +"<p>In the <b>Access Control</b> table, access can be denied or allowed to ACL Groups.\n" +"If there are more ACL Groups in one line, it means that access will be allowed\n" +"or denied to members who belong to all ACL Groups at the same time.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/helps.rb:156 +msgid "" +"<p>The <b>Access Control</b> table is checked in the order listed here.\n" +"The first matching entry is used.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Logging and Timeouts Dialog +#: src/include/squid/helps.rb:160 +msgid "<p><b>Access Log</b> defines the file in which client activities are logged.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/helps.rb:163 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Cache Log</b> defines the file in which general information about your\n" +"cache's behavior is logged.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/helps.rb:166 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Cache Store Log</b> defines the location of the transaction log of all\n" +"objects that are stored in the object store, as well as the time when an object\n" +"gets deleted. This option can be left empty.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/helps.rb:171 +msgid "" +"<p>With <b>Emulate httpd Log</b> specify that Squid writes its\n" +"<b>Access Log</b> in HTTPD common log file format.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/helps.rb:174 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Connection Timeout</b> is an option to force Squid to close\n" +"connections after a specified time.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/helps.rb:177 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Client Lifetime</b> defines the maximum amount of time that a client\n" +"(browser) is allowed to remain connected to the cache process.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Miscellaneous Dialog +#: src/include/squid/helps.rb:181 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Administrator's email</b> is the address which will be added to any\n" +"error pages that are displayed to clients. Defaults to webmaster.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. table cell +#: src/include/squid/inits.rb:73 src/include/squid/popup_dialogs.rb:55 +msgid "Transparent" +msgstr "" + +#. **************** HTTP PORT ******************* +#. returns true if something added/edited otherwise false +#: src/include/squid/popup_dialogs.rb:48 +msgid "Add New HTTP Port" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/popup_dialogs.rb:49 +msgid "Edit Current HTTP Port" +msgstr "" + +#. **************** HTTP PORT END *************** +#. **************** CACHE *********************** +#: src/include/squid/popup_dialogs.rb:95 +msgid "Add New Refresh Pattern" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/popup_dialogs.rb:96 +msgid "Edit Current refresh Pattern" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/popup_dialogs.rb:110 +msgid "Min (in minutes)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/popup_dialogs.rb:112 +msgid "Max (in minutes)" +msgstr "" + +#. **************** CACHE END ******************* +#. **************** ACCESS CONTROL ************** +#: src/include/squid/popup_dialogs.rb:226 +msgid "Add New HTTP Access" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/popup_dialogs.rb:226 +msgid "Edit HTTP Access" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/popup_dialogs.rb:233 +msgid "Allow" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/popup_dialogs.rb:233 +msgid "Deny" +msgstr "" + +#. `VSpacing(), +#: src/include/squid/popup_dialogs.rb:239 +msgid "ACL" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/popup_dialogs.rb:244 +msgid "O&pposite" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/popup_dialogs.rb:251 +msgid "Add ACL" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/popup_dialogs.rb:254 +msgid "not" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/popup_dialogs.rb:322 +msgid "Add New ACL Group" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/popup_dialogs.rb:322 +msgid "Edit ACL Group" +msgstr "" + +#. **************** HTTP_PORT ******************* +#: src/include/squid/store_del.rb:64 +msgid "Port number must not be empty." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/store_del.rb:74 +msgid "Host must contain valid IP address or hostname." +msgstr "" + +#. **************** HTTP_PORT END *************** +#. ************* REFRESH_PATTERNS *************** +#: src/include/squid/store_del.rb:129 +msgid "Regular expression must not be empty." +msgstr "" + +#. ************* REFRESH_PATTERNS END *********** +#. ************* CACHE DIALOG ******************* +#: src/include/squid/store_del.rb:202 src/include/squid/store_del.rb:292 +msgid "" +"Cache Memory + Size of Cache Directory\n" +"must be higher than Max Object Size.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/store_del.rb:264 +msgid "Cache directory must not be empty." +msgstr "" + +#. ************* CACHE DIALOG END *************** +#. ************* HTTP_ACCESS ******************** +#: src/include/squid/store_del.rb:351 +msgid "ACL table must not be empty." +msgstr "" + +#. test, if exists ACL with same name but different type +#: src/include/squid/store_del.rb:429 +msgid "ACL Group '%1' already exists with different type.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/store_del.rb:433 +msgid "ACL Group '%1' must have type '%2'.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/store_del.rb:438 +msgid "" +"If you want to change the type of this ACL Group, you must\n" +"delete other ACL Groups with the same name before that.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. test if changed ACL is used in http_access option. +#: src/include/squid/store_del.rb:453 +msgid "" +"You can not change the name of this ACL Group, because \n" +"it is used in the Access Control table.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/store_del.rb:456 src/include/squid/store_del.rb:517 +msgid "" +"If you want to change name of this ACL Group you must\n" +"delete all of its occurrences in Access Control table." +msgstr "" + +#. test if changed ACL is used in other option (not managed by thid module) +#: src/include/squid/store_del.rb:467 +msgid "If you change the name of this ACL Group, these options might be affected: \n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/store_del.rb:474 +msgid "Change name anyway" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/store_del.rb:475 +msgid "Do not change name" +msgstr "" + +#. test, if name is filled +#: src/include/squid/store_del.rb:485 +msgid "Name must not be empty." +msgstr "" + +#. Report::Error( _("This ACL Group can't be deleted.\nIt's used in Access Control table.")); +#: src/include/squid/store_del.rb:514 +msgid "" +"You must not delete this ACL Group, because \n" +"it is used in the Access Control table.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/store_del.rb:524 +msgid "If you delete this ACL Group, these options might be affected: \n" +msgstr "" + +#. + +#. _("Are you sure you want to delete this ACL Group?"); +#: src/include/squid/store_del.rb:535 +msgid "Delete anyway" +msgstr "" + +#. Label::YesButton(), +#: src/include/squid/store_del.rb:536 +msgid "Do not delete" +msgstr "" + +#. ************* ACL END ************************ +#. ******* LOGGING AND TIMEOUTS DIALOG ********** +#: src/include/squid/store_del.rb:578 +msgid "Access Log must not be empty." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/store_del.rb:588 +msgid "Cache Log must not be empty." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/store_del.rb:599 +msgid "Incorrect pathname in Access Log field." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/store_del.rb:610 +msgid "Incorrect pathname in Cache Log field." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/squid/store_del.rb:621 +msgid "Incorrect pathname in Cache Store Log field." +msgstr "" + +#. ******* LOGGING AND TIMEOUTS DIALOG END ****** +#: src/include/squid/store_del.rb:684 +msgid "Administrator's email must not contain any white spaces." +msgstr "" + +#. Initialization dialog caption +#: src/include/squid/wizards.rb:85 +msgid "Squid Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Initialization dialog contents +#: src/include/squid/wizards.rb:87 +msgid "Initializing..." +msgstr "" + +#. Read all squid settings +#. @return true on success +#: src/modules/Squid.rb:1088 +msgid "Initializing Squid Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Squid.rb:1092 +msgid "Read HTTP Ports from Config File." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Squid.rb:1093 +msgid "Read Refresh Patterns from Config File." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Squid.rb:1094 +msgid "Read ACL Groups from Config File." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Squid.rb:1095 +msgid "Read Access Control Table from Config File." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Squid.rb:1096 +msgid "Read Other Settings." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Squid.rb:1097 +msgid "Read Service Status." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Squid.rb:1098 +msgid "Read Firewall Settings." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Squid.rb:1101 +msgid "Reading HTTP Ports ..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Squid.rb:1102 +msgid "Reading Refresh Patterns ..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Squid.rb:1103 +msgid "Reading ACL Groups ..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Squid.rb:1104 +msgid "Reading Access Control Table ..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Squid.rb:1105 +msgid "Reading Other Settings ..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Squid.rb:1106 +msgid "Reading Service Status ..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Squid.rb:1107 +msgid "Reading Firewall Settings ..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Squid.rb:1117 +msgid "Cannot read configuration file." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Squid.rb:1122 +msgid "Cannot read service status." +msgstr "" + +#. We do not set help text here, because it was set outside +#: src/modules/Squid.rb:1465 +msgid "Saving Squid Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1/2 +#: src/modules/Squid.rb:1470 +msgid "Write the settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1/2 +#: src/modules/Squid.rb:1472 +msgid "Write firewall settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 2/2 +#: src/modules/Squid.rb:1474 +msgid "Start Service" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 1/2 +#: src/modules/Squid.rb:1478 +msgid "Writing the settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 1/2 +#: src/modules/Squid.rb:1480 +msgid "Writing firewall settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 2/2 +#: src/modules/Squid.rb:1482 +msgid "Starting Service..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress finished +#: src/modules/Squid.rb:1484 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#. write settings +#: src/modules/Squid.rb:1494 +msgid "Cannot write settings." +msgstr "" + +#. firewall +#: src/modules/Squid.rb:1500 +msgid "Cannot write firewall settings." +msgstr "" + +#. Header +#: src/modules/Squid.rb:1584 +msgid "Squid Cache Proxy" +msgstr "" + +#. Start daemon +#: src/modules/Squid.rb:1589 +msgid "Start daemon: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Squid.rb:1590 +msgid "When booting" +msgstr "" + +#. Http Ports +#: src/modules/Squid.rb:1594 +msgid "Configured ports:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Squid.rb:1611 +msgid " (transparent)" +msgstr "" + +#. Cache directory +#: src/modules/Squid.rb:1625 +msgid "Cache directory: " +msgstr "" + +#. ** +#. Unsupported ACLS: +#. * * * * * * * * * * * +#. ident, ident_regex, +#. src_as, dst_as, +#. proxy_auth, proxy_auth_regex, +#. snmp_community, +#. max_user_ip, +#. external, +#. urllogin, urlgroup +#. user_cert, ca_cert +#. ext_user +#. map of acl definition. format: +#. $[ +#. "type" : $[ "name" : "Name shown in dialogs", +#. "widget" : `WidgetDescribingThisType, +#. "widget_init" : FunctionWithInitsOfWidget, +#. "verification" : FunctionCalledToVerificateContentsOfWidget, +#. "options" : FunctionThatReturnsListOfOptions +#. ] +#. ] +#. +#. widget_init prototype: void FuncName(integer id_item) +#. verification prototype: boolean FuncName() +#. options prototype: list<string> FuncName() +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:68 +msgid "src" +msgstr "" + +#. `TextEntry(`id("acl_addr1"), _("IP Address 1"), ""), +#. `Label(" - "), +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:74 +msgid "IP Address or Range of IP Addresses" +msgstr "" + +#. `Label("/"), +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:78 src/modules/SquidACL.rb:92 +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:106 +msgid "Network Mask" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:84 +msgid "The IP address of the requesting client." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:89 +msgid "dst" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:91 +msgid "IP Address" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:98 +msgid "Destination IP Address." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:103 +msgid "myip" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:105 +msgid "Local IP Address" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:112 +msgid "The local IP address on which the client connection exists." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:119 +msgid "srcdomain" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:120 +msgid "Clients Domain Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:131 +msgid "This type matches the client's domain name." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:136 +msgid "dstdomain" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:137 +msgid "Destination Domain" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:148 +msgid "This refers to the destination domain, i.e. the source domain where the origin server is located." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:155 +msgid "Matches the client domain name." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:160 +msgid "Provides match for destination domain." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:165 +msgid "time" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:173 +msgid "Days" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:175 +msgid "Monday" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:176 +msgid "Tuesday" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:177 +msgid "Wednesday" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:178 +msgid "Thursday" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:179 +msgid "Friday" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:180 +msgid "Saturday" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:181 +msgid "Sunday" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:192 +msgid "From (H:M)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:195 +msgid "To (H:M)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:208 +msgid "Matches using a regular expression on the complete URL." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:213 +msgid "Matches the URL path minus any protocol, port, and host name information" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:220 +msgid "port" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:221 +msgid "Port Number or Range of Ports" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:226 +msgid "Matches the destination port for the request." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:231 +msgid "myport" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:232 +msgid "Port Number" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:237 +msgid "Provides match for local TCP port number." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:242 +msgid "proto" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:243 +msgid "Protocol" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:248 +msgid "Matches the protocol of the request." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:253 +msgid "method" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:256 +msgid "HTTP Method" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:271 +msgid "This type matches the HTTP method in the request headers." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:278 +msgid "A regular expression that matches the client's browser type based on the user agent header." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:288 +msgid "Maximum Number of HTTP Connections" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:300 +msgid "Matches when the client's IP address has more than the specified number of HTTP connections established." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:307 +msgid "Matches Referer header." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:314 src/modules/SquidACL.rb:337 +msgid "Header Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:315 src/modules/SquidACL.rb:338 +msgid "Regular Expression(s)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:328 +msgid "Regular expression matching any of the known request headers." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:351 +msgid "" +"Regular expression matching the mime type of the reply received by squid. Can\n" +"be used to detect file download or some types of HTTP tunnelling requests.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:358 +msgid "Match the mime type of the request generated by the client." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:363 +msgid "Match the mime type of the reply received by Squid." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:369 +msgid "MAC Address" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:374 +msgid "Ethernet (MAC) address matching." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: language name - combo box entry +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:53 +msgid "Afrikaans" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:54 +msgid "Arabic" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:55 +msgid "Armenian" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:56 +msgid "Azerbaijani" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:57 +msgid "Bulgarian" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:58 +msgid "Catalan" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:59 +msgid "Czech" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:60 +msgid "Danish" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:61 +msgid "German" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:62 +msgid "Greek" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:63 +msgid "English" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:64 +msgid "Spanish" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:65 +msgid "Estonian" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:66 +msgid "Persian" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:67 +msgid "Finnish" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:68 +msgid "French" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:69 +msgid "Hebrew" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:70 +msgid "Hungarian" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:71 +msgid "Indonesian" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:72 +msgid "Italian" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:73 +msgid "Japanese" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:74 +msgid "Korean" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:75 +msgid "Latvian" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:76 +msgid "Lithuanian" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:77 +msgid "Malay" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:78 +msgid "Dutch" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:79 +msgid "Occitan" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:80 +msgid "Polish" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:81 +msgid "Portuguese" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:82 +msgid "Brazilian Portuguese" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:83 +msgid "Romanian" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:84 +msgid "Russian" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:85 +msgid "Slovak" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:86 +msgid "Slovenian" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:87 +msgid "Serbian Cyrillic" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:88 +msgid "Serbian Latin" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:89 +msgid "Swedish" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:90 +msgid "Thai" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:91 +msgid "Turkish" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:92 +msgid "Ukrainian" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:93 +msgid "Uzbek" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:94 +msgid "Vietnamese" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:95 +msgid "Simplified Chinese" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:96 +msgid "Traditional Chinese" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/sshd.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/sshd.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/sshd.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,291 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. SSHD read dialog caption +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-continue1-Sshd.ycp:155 +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-Sshd.ycp:175 +#: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/Sshd.ycp:78 +msgid "Initializing SSHD Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1/2 +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-continue1-Sshd.ycp:161 +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-Sshd.ycp:181 +#: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/Sshd.ycp:84 +msgid "Read current SSHD configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 2/2 +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-continue1-Sshd.ycp:163 +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-Sshd.ycp:183 +#: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/Sshd.ycp:86 +msgid "Read current SSHD state" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 1/2 +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-continue1-Sshd.ycp:166 +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-Sshd.ycp:186 +#: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/Sshd.ycp:89 +msgid "Reading current SSHD configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 2/2 +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-continue1-Sshd.ycp:168 +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-Sshd.ycp:188 +#: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/Sshd.ycp:91 +msgid "Reading current SSHD state..." +msgstr "" + +#. Error message +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-continue1-Sshd.ycp:186 +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-Sshd.ycp:206 +#: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/Sshd.ycp:109 +msgid "Cannot read current SSHD state." +msgstr "" + +#. SSHD read dialog caption +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-continue1-Sshd.ycp:204 +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-Sshd.ycp:224 +#: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/Sshd.ycp:127 +msgid "Saving SSHD Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1/2 +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-continue1-Sshd.ycp:210 +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-Sshd.ycp:230 +#: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/Sshd.ycp:133 +msgid "Write the SSHD settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 2/2 +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-continue1-Sshd.ycp:212 +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-Sshd.ycp:232 +#: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/Sshd.ycp:135 +msgid "Adjust the SSHD service" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 1/2 +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-continue1-Sshd.ycp:215 +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-Sshd.ycp:235 +#: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/Sshd.ycp:138 +msgid "Writing the SSHD settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 2/2 +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-continue1-Sshd.ycp:217 +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-Sshd.ycp:237 +#: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/Sshd.ycp:140 +msgid "Adjusting the SSHD service..." +msgstr "" + +#. Error message +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-continue1-Sshd.ycp:228 +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-Sshd.ycp:248 +#: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/Sshd.ycp:151 +msgid "Cannot write SSHD settings." +msgstr "" + +#. A popup dialog caption +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-complex.ycp:116 +msgid "Add New Port" +msgstr "" + +#. A popup dialog caption +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-complex.ycp:119 +msgid "Edit Current Port" +msgstr "" + +#. A text entry +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-complex.ycp:121 +msgid "&Port" +msgstr "" + +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-complex.ycp:144 +msgid "Port number must not be empty." +msgstr "" + +#. a dialog caption +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-dialogs.ycp:28 +#: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/dialogs.ycp:28 +msgid "SSHD Server Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-dialogs.ycp:31 +#: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/dialogs.ycp:31 +msgid "SSHD TCP Ports" +msgstr "" + +#. a push button +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-dialogs.ycp:40 +#: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/dialogs.ycp:40 +msgid "&Add..." +msgstr "" + +#. a push button +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-dialogs.ycp:42 +#: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/dialogs.ycp:42 +msgid "&Edit..." +msgstr "" + +#. a push button +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-dialogs.ycp:44 +#: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/dialogs.ycp:44 +msgid "&Delete" +msgstr "" + +#. a dialog frame caption +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-dialogs.ycp:49 +#: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/dialogs.ycp:49 +msgid "Server Features" +msgstr "" + +#. a check box +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-dialogs.ycp:52 +#: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/dialogs.ycp:52 +msgid "Allow &TCP Forwarding" +msgstr "" + +#. a check box +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-dialogs.ycp:54 +#: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/dialogs.ycp:54 +msgid "Allow &X11 Forwarding" +msgstr "" + +#. a check box +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-dialogs.ycp:56 +#: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/dialogs.ycp:56 +msgid "Allow &Compression" +msgstr "" + +#. a dialog caption +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-dialogs.ycp:106 +#: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/dialogs.ycp:100 +msgid "SSHD Server Login Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-dialogs.ycp:110 +#: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/dialogs.ycp:104 +msgid "General Login Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. A check box +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-dialogs.ycp:113 +#: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/dialogs.ycp:107 +msgid "Print &Message of the Day After Login" +msgstr "" + +#. A check box +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-dialogs.ycp:115 +#: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/dialogs.ycp:109 +msgid "Permi&t Root Login" +msgstr "" + +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-dialogs.ycp:120 +#: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/dialogs.ycp:114 +msgid "Authentication Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. A text entry +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-dialogs.ycp:123 +#: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/dialogs.ycp:117 +msgid "Ma&ximum Authentication Tries" +msgstr "" + +#. A check box +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-dialogs.ycp:125 +#: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/dialogs.ycp:119 +msgid "Pa&sswordAuthentication" +msgstr "" + +#. A check box +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-dialogs.ycp:127 +#: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/dialogs.ycp:121 +msgid "RSA Authenti&cation" +msgstr "" + +#. A check box +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-final-dialogs.ycp:129 +#: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/dialogs.ycp:123 +msgid "Public &Key Authentication" +msgstr "" + +#. Sshd read dialog caption +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-start-Sshd.ycp:28 +msgid "Initializing sshd Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Sshd write dialog caption +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-start-Sshd.ycp:53 +msgid "Saving sshd Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Sshd overview dialog caption +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-start-complex.ycp:56 +msgid "Sshd Overview" +msgstr "" + +#. Table header +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-start-complex.ycp:63 +msgid "Number" +msgstr "" + +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-start-complex.ycp:63 +msgid "Sshd" +msgstr "" + +#. Sshd configure1 dialog caption +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-start-dialogs.ycp:25 +msgid "</command>Sshd Configuration<command>" +msgstr "" + +#. Sshd configure1 dialog contents +#: tutorials/tutorial-includes/sshd/t1-start-dialogs.ycp:28 +msgid "First part of configuration of sshd" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help +#: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/helps.ycp:18 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Initializing sshd Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Please wait...<br></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help +#: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/helps.ycp:22 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Saving sshd Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Please wait...<br></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Server Configuration dialog help +#: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/helps.ycp:26 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Server Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Configure SSHD here.<br></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Login Settings dialog help +#: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/helps.ycp:30 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Login Settings</big></b><br>\n" +"Configure SSHD login settings here.<br></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Command line help text for the Xsshd module +#: tutorials/tutorial-sources/clean-ycp/sshd.ycp:32 +msgid "Configuration of sshd" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/storage.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/storage.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/storage.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,5867 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-09-28 18:17+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. popup text +#: src/clients/disk.rb:50 +msgid "" +"Only use this program if you are familiar with partitioning hard disks.\n" +"\n" +"Never partition disks that may, in any way, be in use\n" +"(mounted, swap, etc.) unless you know exactly what you are\n" +"doing. Otherwise, the partitioning table will not be forwarded to the\n" +"kernel, which will most likely lead to data loss.\n" +"\n" +"To continue despite this warning, click Yes.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog heading +#. dialog caption +#: src/clients/disk.rb:67 src/include/partitioning/ep-main.rb:68 +msgid "Expert Partitioner" +msgstr "" + +#. text show during initialization +#: src/clients/disk.rb:69 +msgid "Initializing..." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/clients/disk.rb:71 +msgid "<p>Volumes are being detected.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Commandline help title +#: src/clients/disk_worker.rb:49 +msgid "Storage Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Commandline command help +#: src/clients/disk_worker.rb:57 +msgid "List disks and partitions" +msgstr "" + +#. Command line option help text +#: src/clients/disk_worker.rb:70 +msgid "List disks" +msgstr "" + +#. Command line option help text +#: src/clients/disk_worker.rb:74 +msgid "List partitions" +msgstr "" + +#. Title for dialogue +#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:76 +msgid "Suggested Partitioning" +msgstr "" + +#. Radiobutton for partition dialog +#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:78 +msgid "&Expert Partitioner..." +msgstr "" + +#. Radiobutton for partition dialog +#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:80 +msgid "&Create Partition Setup..." +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:123 +#: src/clients/partitions_proposal.rb:105 +msgid "" +"No automatic proposal possible.\n" +"Specify mount points manually in the 'Partitioner' dialog." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: button text +#. this is the resize case +#. +#. this is the normal case +#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:135 src/clients/inst_target_part.rb:164 +#: src/clients/inst_target_part.rb:178 src/clients/inst_target_part.rb:185 +msgid "Edit Proposal Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. help on suggested partitioning +#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:165 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Your hard disks have been checked. The partition setup\n" +"displayed is proposed for your hard drive.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text continued +#. %1 is replaced by button text +#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:175 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"To make only small adjustments to the proposed\n" +"setup (like changing filesystem types), choose\n" +"<b>%1</b> and modify the settings in the expert\n" +"partitioner dialog.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text continued +#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:188 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"If the suggestion does not fit your needs, create\n" +"your own partition setup starting with the partitions \n" +"currently present on the disks. Select\n" +"<b>%1</b>.\n" +"This is also the option to choose for\n" +"advanced configurations like RAID and encryption.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Attention! besides the testsuite, AutoYaST is using this to turn off +#. the proposal screen too. See inst_autosetup.ycp +#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:232 +msgid "Impossible to create the requested proposal." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup error message +#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:238 +msgid "Not enough space available to propose snapshots for root volume." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup error message +#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:244 src/clients/inst_target_part.rb:449 +msgid "Not enough space available to propose separate /home." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:295 +msgid "" +"Computing this proposal will overwrite manual changes \n" +"done so far. Continue with computing proposal?" +msgstr "" + +#. we need to open dialog and set up slideshow +#: src/clients/inst_prepdisk.rb:66 +msgid "Preparing disks..." +msgstr "" + +#. set to "true" to test non-graphical version +#. Unit for parition resizing - currently Megabytes +#. set to "true" to test non-graphical version +#. Unit for parition resizing - currently Megabytes +#: src/clients/inst_resize_dialog.rb:272 src/clients/inst_resize_ui.rb:487 +msgid "MB" +msgstr "" + +#. Labels for bar graph. "%1" will be replace with a numeric value. +#. Labels for bar graph. "%1" will be replace with a numeric value. +#: src/clients/inst_resize_dialog.rb:275 src/clients/inst_resize_ui.rb:490 +msgid "" +"Windows\n" +"Used\n" +"%1 " +msgstr "" + +#. Labels for bar graph. "%1" will be replace with a numeric value. +#. Labels for bar graph. "%1" will be replace with a numeric value. +#: src/clients/inst_resize_dialog.rb:277 src/clients/inst_resize_ui.rb:492 +msgid "" +"Windows\n" +"Free\n" +"%1 " +msgstr "" + +#. Labels for bar graph. "%1" will be replace with a numeric value. +#. Labels for bar graph. "%1" will be replace with a numeric value. +#: src/clients/inst_resize_dialog.rb:279 src/clients/inst_resize_ui.rb:494 +msgid "" +"Linux\n" +"%1 " +msgstr "" + +#. Labels for input fields. "%1" will be replaced with the current unit (MB). +#. Labels for input fields. "%1" will be replaced with the current unit (MB). +#: src/clients/inst_resize_dialog.rb:282 src/clients/inst_resize_ui.rb:497 +msgid "Windows Free (%1)" +msgstr "" + +#. Labels for input fields. "%1" will be replaced with the current unit (MB). +#. Labels for input fields. "%1" will be replaced with the current unit (MB). +#: src/clients/inst_resize_dialog.rb:284 src/clients/inst_resize_ui.rb:499 +msgid "Linux (%1)" +msgstr "" + +#. Help text for Windows partition resizing - +#. common part for both graphical mode (with bar graphs) +#. and non-graphical mode (text only). +#. Help text for Windows partition resizing - +#. common part for both graphical mode (with bar graphs) +#. and non-graphical mode (text only). +#: src/clients/inst_resize_dialog.rb:293 src/clients/inst_resize_ui.rb:508 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Choose the new size for your Windows partition.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text (common to both modes), continued +#. help text (common to both modes), continued +#: src/clients/inst_resize_dialog.rb:302 src/clients/inst_resize_ui.rb:517 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p>\n" +"The actual resizing will not be performed until after you confirm all your\n" +"settings in the last installation dialog. Until then your Windows\n" +"partition will remain untouched.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text (common to both modes), continued +#. help text (common to both modes), continued +#: src/clients/inst_resize_dialog.rb:315 src/clients/inst_resize_ui.rb:530 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p>\n" +"To skip resizing your Windows partition, press\n" +"<b>Back</b>.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Headline above bar graph that displays current windows partition size +#. Headline above bar graph that displays current windows partition size +#: src/clients/inst_resize_dialog.rb:330 src/clients/inst_resize_ui.rb:545 +msgid "Now" +msgstr "" + +#. Headline above bar graph that displays future windows and linux partitions +#. Headline above bar graph that displays future windows and linux partitions +#: src/clients/inst_resize_dialog.rb:337 src/clients/inst_resize_ui.rb:552 +msgid "After Installation" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, continued - graphical mode only +#. this help text will be appended to the help text common to both modes. +#. help text, continued - graphical mode only +#. this help text will be appended to the help text common to both modes. +#: src/clients/inst_resize_dialog.rb:359 src/clients/inst_resize_ui.rb:574 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p>\n" +"The upper bar graph displays the current situation.\n" +"The lower bar graph displays the situation after the installation (after\n" +"the partition resize).\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text (graphical mode), continued +#. help text (graphical mode), continued +#: src/clients/inst_resize_dialog.rb:372 src/clients/inst_resize_ui.rb:587 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p>\n" +"Drag the slider or enter a numeric value in either\n" +"input field to adjust the suggested values.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text (graphical mode), continued +#. help text (graphical mode), continued +#: src/clients/inst_resize_dialog.rb:384 src/clients/inst_resize_ui.rb:599 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p>\n" +"Within the space you reserve for Linux, partitions will automatically be\n" +"created as necessary.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Label for used part of the Windows partition in non-graphical mode +#. Label for used part of the Windows partition in non-graphical mode +#: src/clients/inst_resize_dialog.rb:397 src/clients/inst_resize_ui.rb:612 +msgid "Windows Used" +msgstr "" + +#. Label for free part of the Windows partition in non-graphical mode +#. Label for free part of the Windows partition in non-graphical mode +#: src/clients/inst_resize_dialog.rb:407 src/clients/inst_resize_ui.rb:622 +msgid "Free" +msgstr "" + +#. Edit field label for linux partition size in non-graphical mode +#. Edit field label for linux partition size in non-graphical mode +#: src/clients/inst_resize_dialog.rb:417 src/clients/inst_resize_ui.rb:632 +msgid "Linux" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, continued - non-graphical mode only +#. this help text will be appended to the help text common to both modes. +#. help text, continued - non-graphical mode only +#. this help text will be appended to the help text common to both modes. +#: src/clients/inst_resize_dialog.rb:437 src/clients/inst_resize_ui.rb:652 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p>Enter a value for the size of your <b>Linux</b> installation.\n" +"The partitions will automatically be created within this range\n" +"as required for &product;.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text (non-graphical mode), continued +#. help text (non-graphical mode), continued +#: src/clients/inst_resize_dialog.rb:449 src/clients/inst_resize_ui.rb:664 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p>\n" +"<b>Windows Used</b> is the size of the space your Windows partition uses.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text (non-graphical mode), continued +#. help text (non-graphical mode), continued +#: src/clients/inst_resize_dialog.rb:460 src/clients/inst_resize_ui.rb:675 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p><b>Free</b> indicates the current free space (before the Linux\n" +"installation) on the partition.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_resize_dialog.rb:472 src/clients/inst_resize_ui.rb:686 +msgid "Resizing the Windows Partition" +msgstr "" + +#. The Windows partition has not enough free space for Linux. Tell the user the needed amount +#. of free space and that he should terminate the installation now. +#: src/clients/inst_resize_ui.rb:390 +msgid "" +"An error has occurred.\n" +"\n" +"The space available on the Windows partition is not sufficient for\n" +"the minimum Linux installation.\n" +"\n" +"To install Linux, boot Windows first and uninstall some \n" +"applications or delete data to free space.\n" +"\n" +"You need at least %1 MB of free space on the\n" +"Windows device, including Windows workspace and\n" +"space for %2.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. not yet checked +#. Inform the user that his Windows partition is being checked. +#: src/clients/inst_resize_ui.rb:425 +msgid "" +"Checking the file system of your Windows partition\n" +"for consistency.\n" +"\n" +"Depending on the size of your Windows partition\n" +"and the amount of space used, this may take a while.\n" +"\n" +msgstr "" + +#. The file system on the device is faulty. Tell the user he should correct those errors. +#: src/clients/inst_resize_ui.rb:452 +msgid "" +"An error has occurred.\n" +"\n" +"Your Windows partition has errors in the file system.\n" +"\n" +"Boot Windows and clear those errors by running\n" +"scandisk and defrag.\n" +"\n" +"If the problem occurs again next time, resize your\n" +"Windows partition by other means.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. now let the automatic partitioner do its work +#: src/clients/inst_resize_ui.rb:774 +msgid "The available space is not sufficient for an installation." +msgstr "" + +#. An internal error has occured. Tell the user that the installation should +#. be terminated now and that his hard disk has not been altered yet. +#: src/clients/inst_resize_ui.rb:889 +msgid "" +"An internal error has occurred.\n" +"\n" +"\t You cannot shrink your Windows partition during\n" +"\t installation. Your hard disk has not been altered.\n" +"\n" +"\t Abort the installation now and shrink your\n" +"\t Windows partition by other means.\n" +"\t " +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/clients/inst_target_part.rb:96 +msgid "Your system can only be configured with the custom partitioning option." +msgstr "" + +#. Win NT / 2000 +#. The Windows version is Windows NT or Windows 2000. Tell the user that this is currently +#. not supported and that he can go back in the installation or abort it. +#: src/clients/inst_target_part.rb:268 +msgid "" +"An error has occurred.\n" +"\n" +"The Windows version on your system is \n" +"not compatible with the resizing tool.\n" +"Shrinking your Windows partition is not possible.\n" +"\n" +"Choose a different disk or abort the installation and\n" +"shrink your Windows partition by other means.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. local error +#. The Windows version used could not be determined. Tell the user +#. he can go back in the installation or abort it. +#: src/clients/inst_target_part.rb:287 +msgid "" +"The Windows version of your system could not be determined.\n" +"\n" +"It is therefore not possible to shrink your Windows partition.\n" +"\n" +"Choose a different disk or abort the installation and\n" +"shrink your Windows partition by other means.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. OK --> No NT or 2000 +#. Tell the user about the risks of resizing his windows. +#. Ask him if he really wants to do it +#: src/clients/inst_target_part.rb:308 +msgid "" +"You selected to shrink your Windows partition.\n" +"In the next dialog, specify the amount of\n" +"Windows space that should be freed for %1.\n" +"\n" +"A data backup is strongly recommended\n" +"because data must be reorganized. \n" +"Under rare circumstances, this could fail.\n" +"\n" +"Only continue if you have successfully run\n" +"the Windows system applications scandisk and defrag.\n" +"\n" +"Really shrink your Windows partition?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. button text +#: src/clients/inst_target_part.rb:329 +msgid "&Shrink Windows" +msgstr "" + +#. Tell the user about the consequences of deleting his windows. +#. Ask him if he really wants to do it +#: src/clients/inst_target_part.rb:345 +msgid "" +"You selected to delete your Windows partition completely.\n" +"\n" +"All data on this partition will be lost in the process.\n" +"\n" +"Really delete your Windows partition?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. button text +#: src/clients/inst_target_part.rb:356 +msgid "&Delete Windows" +msgstr "" + +#. trailing free partition after (deleted) windows partition +#: src/clients/inst_target_part.rb:423 +msgid "" +"Too few partitions are marked for removal or \n" +"the disk is too small. \n" +"To install Linux, select more partitions to \n" +"remove or select a larger disk." +msgstr "" + +#. loop over targetMap and build radio buttons for selection +#. dont use foreach here since we need a counter (as a shortcut) +#. anyway +#: src/clients/inst_target_selection.rb:115 +msgid "Available &Disks" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: src/clients/inst_target_selection.rb:149 +msgid "&Custom Partitioning (for experts)" +msgstr "" + +#. This dialog selects the target disk for the installation. +#. Below this label, all targets are listed that can be used as +#. installation target +#. heading text +#: src/clients/inst_target_selection.rb:161 +msgid "Hard Disk" +msgstr "" + +#. normally the target is located on hard disks. Here no hard disks +#. can be found. YaST2 cannot install. Update CD might have newer drivers. +#: src/clients/inst_target_selection.rb:172 +msgid "No disks found. Try using the update CD, if available, for installation." +msgstr "" + +#. There are several hard disks found. Linux is completely installed on +#. one hard disk - this selection is done here +#. "Preparing Hard Disk" is the description of the dialog what to +#. do while the following locale is the help description +#. help part 1 of 3 +#: src/clients/inst_target_selection.rb:184 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"All hard disks automatically detected on your system\n" +"are shown here. Select the hard disk on which to install &product;.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help part 2 of 3 +#: src/clients/inst_target_selection.rb:193 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"You may select later which part of the disk is used for &product;.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help part 3 of 3 +#: src/clients/inst_target_selection.rb:202 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p>\n" +"The <b>Custom Partitioning</b> option for experts allows full\n" +"control over partitioning the hard disks and assigning\n" +"partitions to mount points when installing &product;.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. first step of hd prepare, select a single disk or "expert" partitioning +#. Information what to do, background information +#. Information what to do, background information +#: src/clients/inst_target_selection.rb:215 +#: src/include/partitioning/auto_part_ui.rb:244 +#: src/include/partitioning/auto_part_ui.rb:302 +msgid "Preparing Hard Disk" +msgstr "" + +#. there is a selection from which one option must be +#. chosen - at the moment no option is chosen +#: src/clients/inst_target_selection.rb:271 +msgid "Select one of the options to continue." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_target_selection.rb:297 +msgid "Disk %1 is in use by %2" +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. Copyright (c) 2012 Novell, Inc. +#. +#. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it +#. under the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as published +#. by the Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +#. ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or +#. FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for +#. more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along +#. with this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, you may +#. find current contact information at www.novell.com. +#. File: multipath-simple.ycp +#. Package: yast2-storage +#. Summary: Simplistic multipath activation module. +#. Authors: Arvin Schnell +#: src/clients/multipath-simple.rb:34 +msgid "Activate multipath?" +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. Copyright (c) 2012 Novell, Inc. +#. +#. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it +#. under the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as published +#. by the Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +#. ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or +#. FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for +#. more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along +#. with this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, you may +#. find current contact information at www.novell.com. +#. Module: proposal_partitions.ycp +#. +#. $Id$ +#. +#. Author: Klaus Kaempf +#. +#. Purpose: Proposal function dispatcher - partitions. +#. +#. See also file proposal-API.txt for details. +#: src/clients/partitions_proposal.rb:93 +msgid "" +"The /home partition will not be formatted. After installation,\n" +"ensure that ownerships of home directories are set properly." +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: src/clients/partitions_proposal.rb:218 +msgid "Partitioning" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: src/clients/partitions_proposal.rb:220 +msgid "&Partitioning" +msgstr "" + +#. progress step title +#: src/clients/storage_finish.rb:69 +msgid "Saving file system configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. There is a consistency check for the selection. Next is the message, that +#. is displayed. The reason is determined within this consistency check and +#. then the message is passed through this interface transparently +#: src/include/partitioning/auto_part_ui.rb:53 +msgid "" +"The current selection is invalid:\n" +"%1" +msgstr "" + +#. list of partition checkboxes: show partition as unassigned +#. e.g. "1: 2 GB, unassigned" +#: src/include/partitioning/auto_part_ui.rb:72 +msgid "&%1: %2, unassigned" +msgstr "" + +#. and the "Use entire hard disk" button +#. - please avoid excessively long lines - rather, include a newline +#: src/include/partitioning/auto_part_ui.rb:104 +msgid "" +"Disk Areas to Use\n" +"to Install %1\n" +msgstr "" + +#. pushbutton to choose the entire disk, erasing all data on +#. the disk this is an easy way to select all partitions on +#. the target disk +#: src/include/partitioning/auto_part_ui.rb:118 +msgid "Use &Entire Hard Disk" +msgstr "" + +#. There were no prior partitions on this disk. +#. No partitions to choose from will be displayed. +#: src/include/partitioning/auto_part_ui.rb:153 +msgid "" +"There are no partitions on this disk yet.\n" +"The entire disk will be used for %1." +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/auto_part_ui.rb:166 +msgid "" +"This disk appears to be used by Windows.\n" +"There is not enough space to install Linux." +msgstr "" + +#. Radio button for using an entire (Windows) partition for Linux +#: src/include/partitioning/auto_part_ui.rb:181 +msgid "&Delete Windows Completely" +msgstr "" + +#. Radio button for resizing a (Windows) partition +#: src/include/partitioning/auto_part_ui.rb:189 +msgid "&Shrink Windows Partition" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: helptext, part 1 of 4 +#: src/include/partitioning/auto_part_ui.rb:208 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Select where on your hard disk to install &product;.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: helptext, part 2 of 4 +#: src/include/partitioning/auto_part_ui.rb:216 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Use either the <b>entire hard disk</b> or one or more of the\n" +"partitions or free regions shown.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: helptext, part 3 of 4 +#: src/include/partitioning/auto_part_ui.rb:225 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Notice: If you select a region that is not shown as <i>free</i>, you\n" +"might loose existing data on your hard disk. This could also affect\n" +"other operating systems.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: helptext, part 4 of 4 +#: src/include/partitioning/auto_part_ui.rb:235 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b><i>The marked regions will be deleted. All data there will be\n" +"lost. </i></b> There will be no way to recover this data.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Frame title for installation target hard disk / partition(s) +#. Frame title for installation target hard disk / partition(s) +#: src/include/partitioning/auto_part_ui.rb:249 +#: src/include/partitioning/auto_part_ui.rb:306 +msgid "Installing on:" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for semi-automatic partitioning +#. part 1 of 2 +#: src/include/partitioning/auto_part_ui.rb:280 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"The selected hard disk is probably used by Windows. There is not enough\n" +"space for &product;. You can either <b>delete Windows completely</b> or\n" +"<b>shrink</b> it to get enough free space.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext, part 2 of 2 +#: src/include/partitioning/auto_part_ui.rb:290 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"If you delete Windows, all data on this partition will be <b>irreversibly\n" +"lost</b> in the installation. When shrinking Windows, we <b>strongly\n" +"recommend a data backup</b>, because the data must be reorganized.\n" +"This may fail under rare circumstances.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Label text +#. TRANSLATORS: checkbox text +#: src/include/partitioning/auto_part_ui.rb:341 +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6245 +msgid "Propose Separate &Home Partition" +msgstr "" + +#. Label text +#: src/include/partitioning/auto_part_ui.rb:357 +msgid "Create &LVM Based Proposal" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/auto_part_ui.rb:368 +msgid "Encrypt Volume Group" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/auto_part_ui.rb:373 +msgid "Proposal type" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:251 +msgid "" +"You have not assigned a root partition for\n" +"installation. This does not work. Assign the root mount point \"/\" to a\n" +"partition.\n" +"\n" +"Really use this setup?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:264 +msgid "" +"You tried to mount a FAT partition to one of the following mount\n" +"points: /, /usr, /home, /opt or /var. This will very likely cause problems.\n" +"Use a Linux file system, such as ext3 or ext4, for these mount points.\n" +"\n" +"Really use this setup?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:277 +msgid "" +"You tried to mount a FAT partition to the\n" +"mount point /boot. This will very likely cause problems. Use a Linux file\n" +"system, such as ext3 or ext4, for this mount point.\n" +"\n" +"Really use this setup?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:291 +msgid "" +"You have mounted a partition with Btrfs to the\n" +"mount point /boot. This will very likely cause problems. Use a Linux file\n" +"system, such as ext3 or ext4, for this mount point.\n" +"\n" +"Really use this setup?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. A PReP/CHRP partition is not supposed to be mounted. So if we find any +#. other /boot partition, we should warn the user. +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:305 +msgid "" +"Warning:\n" +"Your system needs a boot partition with type 0x41 PReP/CHRP.\n" +"Please, consider creating one.\n" +"\n" +"Really use this setup?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text, %1 is a number +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:320 +msgid "" +"Warning:\n" +"Your boot partition ends above cylinder %1.\n" +"Your BIOS does not seem able to boot\n" +"partitions above cylinder %1.\n" +"With the current setup, your %2\n" +"installation might not be directly bootable.\n" +"\n" +"Really use this setup?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text, %1 is a size +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:340 +msgid "" +"Warning:\n" +"Your boot partition is smaller than %1.\n" +"We recommend to increase the size of /boot.\n" +"\n" +"Really keep this size of boot partition?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. /////////////////////////// NO BOOT /////////////////////////// +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:357 +msgid "" +"Warning: There is no partition of type bios_grub present.\n" +"Such a partition is recommended (required with Btrfs) when Grub2 is\n" +"installed in the MBR of a GPT disk. It must be unformatted and\n" +"approximately 1MB large.\n" +"Really use this setup?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#. If the user chooses 'no' here, the system will not be able to +#. boot from the hard drive! +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:377 +msgid "" +"Warning: There is no partition mounted as /boot.\n" +"To boot from your hard disk, a small /boot partition\n" +"(approx. %1) is required. Consider creating one\n" +"with type 0x41 PReP/CHRP.\n" +"\n" +"Really use the setup without /boot partition?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:396 +msgid "" +"Warning: According to your setup, you intend to\n" +"boot your machine from the root partition (/), which, unfortunately,\n" +"has an end cylinder above %1. Your BIOS does not seem capable\n" +"of booting partitions beyond the %1 cylinder boundary,\n" +"which means your %2 installation will not be\n" +"directly bootable.\n" +"\n" +"Really use this setup?\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:416 +msgid "" +"Warning: Some subvolumes of the root filesystem are shadowed by\n" +"mount points of other filesystem. This could lead to problems.\n" +"\n" +"Really use this setup?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:433 +msgid "" +"Warning: With your current setup, your %1\n" +"installation might not be directly bootable, because\n" +"your files below \"/boot\" are on a software RAID device.\n" +"The boot loader setup sometimes fails in this configuration.\n" +"\n" +"Really use this setup?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:451 +msgid "" +"Warning: With your current setup, your %2 installation\n" +"will encounter problems when booting, because you have no\n" +"FAT partition mounted on %1.\n" +"\n" +"This will cause severe problems with the normal boot setup.\n" +"\n" +"If you do not know exactly what you are doing, use a normal\n" +"FAT partition for your files below %1.\n" +"\n" +"Really use this setup?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:473 +msgid "" +"Warning: With your current setup, your %2 installation will\n" +"encounter problems when booting, because you have no \n" +"separate %1 partition on your RAID disk.\n" +"\n" +"This will cause severe problems with the normal boot setup.\n" +"\n" +"If you do not know exactly what you are doing, use a normal\n" +"partition for your files below %1.\n" +"\n" +"Really use this setup?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:496 +msgid "Really use this setup?" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:504 +msgid "" +"\n" +"You have not assigned a swap partition. In most cases, we highly recommend \n" +"to create and assign a swap partition.\n" +"Swap partitions on your system are listed in the main window with the\n" +"type \"Linux Swap\". An assigned swap partition has the mount point \"swap\".\n" +"You can assign more than one swap partition, if desired.\n" +"\n" +"Really use the setup without swap partition?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:520 +msgid "" +"\n" +"You chose to install onto an existing partition that will not be\n" +"formatted. YaST cannot guarantee your installation will succeed,\n" +"particularly in any of the following cases:\n" +msgstr "" + +#. continued popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:527 +msgid "" +"- if this is an existing ReiserFS partition\n" +"- if this partition already contains a Linux distribution that will be\n" +"overwritten\n" +"- if this partition does not yet contain a file system\n" +msgstr "" + +#. continued popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:534 +msgid "" +"If in doubt, better go back and mark this partition for\n" +"formatting, especially if it is assigned to one of the standard mount points\n" +"like /, /boot, /opt or /var.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. continued popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:540 +msgid "" +"If you decide to format the partition, all data on it will be lost.\n" +"\n" +"Really keep the partition unformatted?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text %1 is replaced by a raid name e.g. md0 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:595 +msgid "" +"The selected device belongs to the RAID (%1).\n" +"Remove it from the RAID before editing it.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text %1 is replaced by a name e.g. system +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:606 +msgid "" +"The selected device belongs to a volume group (%1).\n" +"Remove it from the volume group before editing it.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text %1 is replaced by a name e.g. system +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:616 +msgid "" +"The selected device is used by volume (%1).\n" +"Remove the volume before editing it.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text %2 is a device name, %1 is the raid name +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:649 +msgid "" +"The device (%2) belongs to the RAID (%1).\n" +"Remove it from the RAID before deleting it.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text, %1 and %2 are device names +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:660 +msgid "" +"The device (%2) is used by %1.\n" +"Remove %1 before deleting it.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:672 +msgid "It cannot be deleted while mounted." +msgstr "" + +#. popup text, %1 is a device name +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:708 +msgid "" +"The device (%1) cannot be removed since it is a logical partition and \n" +"another logical partition with a higher number is in use.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:784 +msgid "" +"The selected extended partition contains partitions which are currently mounted:\n" +"%1\n" +"We *strongly* recommend to unmount these partitions before you delete the extended partition.\n" +"Choose Cancel unless you know exactly what you are doing.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text, Do not translate LVM. +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:802 +msgid "" +"\n" +"The selected extended partition contains at least one LVM partition\n" +"assigned to a volume group. Remove all\n" +"partitions from their respective volume groups\n" +"before deleting the extended partition.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text, Do not translate RAID. +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:813 +msgid "" +"\n" +"The selected extended partition contains at least one partition\n" +"that is part of a RAID system. Unassign the\n" +"partitions from their respective RAID systems before\n" +"deleting the extended partition.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:824 +msgid "" +"\n" +"The selected extended partition contains at least one partition\n" +"that is in use. Remove the used volume before\n" +"deleting the extended partition.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. heading text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:70 +msgid "Enter your Password for the Encrypted File System." +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:74 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:768 +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6372 +msgid "Do not forget what you enter here!" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:78 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:771 +msgid "Empty password allowed." +msgstr "" + +#. heading text, %1 is replaced by device name (e.g. /dev/hda1) +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:84 +msgid "Password for Encrypted File System on %1" +msgstr "" + +#. translator comment: %1 is the device name, %2 is a directory +#. example: "...password for device /dev/hda6 mounted on /var" +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:105 +msgid "" +"Enter your encryption password for\n" +"device %1 mounted on %2.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. heading text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:121 +msgid "Enter your Password for the Encrypted File System" +msgstr "" + +#. Label: get password for user root +#. Please use newline if label is longer than 40 characters +#. Label: get password for user root +#. Please use newline if label is longer than 40 characters +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:136 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:796 +msgid "&Enter a Password for your File System:" +msgstr "" + +#. Label: get same password again for verification +#. Please use newline if label is longer than 40 characters +#. Label: get same password again for verification +#. Please use newline if label is longer than 40 characters +#. Label: get same password again for verification +#. Please use newline if label is longer than 40 characters +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:147 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:780 src/modules/Storage.rb:4002 +msgid "Reenter the Password for &Verification:" +msgstr "" + +#. Cancel button +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:159 +msgid "&Skip" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:188 +msgid "" +"The first and the second version\n" +"of the password do not match!\n" +"Try again.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#. popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:196 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:3958 +msgid "" +"You did not enter a password.\n" +"Try again.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#. popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:203 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:3966 +msgid "" +"The password must have at least %1 characters.\n" +"Try again.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:237 +msgid "No floating point number." +msgstr "" + +#. heading text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:361 +msgid "File system options:" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:443 +msgid "" +"The character '/' is no longer permitted in a volume label.\n" +"Change your volume label so that it does not contain this character.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, richtext format +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:466 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Mount in /etc/fstab by:</b>\n" +"Normally, a file system to mount is identified in /etc/fstab\n" +"by the device name. This identification can be changed so the file system \n" +"to mount is found by searching for a UUID or a volume label. Not all file \n" +"systems can be mounted by UUID or a volume label. If an option is disabled, \n" +"this is not possible.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, richtext format +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:479 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Volume Label:</b>\n" +"The name entered in this field is used as the volume label. This usually makes sense only \n" +"when you activate the option for mounting by volume label.\n" +"A volume label cannot contain the / character or spaces.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:494 +msgid "Mount in /etc/fstab by" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:501 +msgid "&Device Name" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#. label text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:508 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:544 +msgid "Volume &Label" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:515 +msgid "&UUID" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:525 +msgid "Device &ID" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:532 +msgid "Device &Path" +msgstr "" + +#. heading text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:672 +msgid "Fstab Options:" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text %1 is a number +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:846 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Maximum volume label length for the selected file system\n" +"is %1. Your volume label has been truncated to this size.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:869 +msgid "Provide a volume label to mount by label." +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:880 +msgid "This volume label is already in use. Select a different one." +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1046 +msgid "File &System" +msgstr "" + +#. button text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1053 +msgid "O&ptions..." +msgstr "" + +#. button text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1069 +msgid "&Encrypt Device" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1144 +msgid "File system &ID:" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1176 +msgid "Format" +msgstr "" + +#. button text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1186 +msgid "Do ¬ format" +msgstr "" + +#. button text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1196 +msgid "&Format" +msgstr "" + +#. button text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1249 +msgid "Fs&tab Options" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1256 +msgid "&Mount Point" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text %1 is a partition name, %2 a dirctory +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1268 +msgid "" +"\n" +"The selected partition (%1) is currently mounted on %2.\n" +"If you change parameters (such as the mount point or the file system type),\n" +"your Linux installation might be damaged.\n" +"\n" +"Unmount the partition if possible. If you are unsure,\n" +"we recommend to abort. Do not proceed unless you know\n" +"exactly what you are doing.\n" +"\n" +"Continue?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1297 +msgid "" +"\n" +"The file system on the partition cannot be shrunk by YaST2.\n" +"Only fat, ext2, ext3, ext4, and reiser allow shrinking of a file system." +msgstr "" + +#. Popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1304 +msgid "" +"\n" +"The file system on the logical volume cannot be shrunk by YaST2.\n" +"Only fat, ext2, ext3, ext4, and reiser allow shrinking of a file system." +msgstr "" + +#. Popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1316 +msgid "You risk losing data if you shrink this partition." +msgstr "" + +#. Popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1322 +msgid "You risk losing data if you shrink this logical volume." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1326 +msgid "Continue?" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1342 +msgid "" +"\n" +"The file system on the selected partition cannot be extended by YaST2.\n" +"Only fat, ext2, ext3, ext4, xfs, and reiser allow extending a file system." +msgstr "" + +#. Popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1349 +msgid "" +"\n" +"The file system on the selected logical volume cannot be extended by YaST2.\n" +"Only fat, ext2, ext3, ext4, xfs, and reiser allow extending a file system." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1357 +msgid "Continue resizing?" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1374 +msgid "You decreased a partition with a reiser file system on it." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1376 +msgid "You decreased a logical volume with a reiser file system on it." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1383 +msgid "" +"\n" +"It is possible to shrink a reiser file system, but this feature is not\n" +"very thoroughly tested. A backup of your data is recommended.\n" +"\n" +"Shrink the file system now?" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text, %1 is replaced by device name +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1437 +msgid "" +"The selected device contains partitions that are currently mounted:\n" +"%1\n" +"We *strongly* recommended to unmount these partitions before deleting the partition table.\n" +"Choose Cancel unless you know exactly what you are doing.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text, Do not translate LVM. +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1460 +msgid "" +"\n" +"The selected device contains at least one LVM partition\n" +"assigned to a volume group. Remove all\n" +"partitions from their respective volume groups\n" +"before deleting the device.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text, Do not translate RAID. +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1471 +msgid "" +"\n" +"The selected device contains at least one partition\n" +"that is part of a RAID system. Unassign the\n" +"partitions from their respective RAID systems before\n" +"deleting the device.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1482 +msgid "" +"\n" +"The selected device contains at least one partition\n" +"that is used by another volume. Delete the volume using it\n" +"before deleting the device.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, richtext format +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1543 +msgid "<p>Create and remove subvolumes from a Btrfs filesystem.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1548 +msgid "<p>Enable automatic snapshots for a Btrfs filesystem with snapper.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1562 +msgid "Existing Subvolumes:" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1568 +msgid "New Subvolume" +msgstr "" + +#. button text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1574 +msgid "Add new" +msgstr "" + +#. button text +#. push button text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1580 +#: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:147 +msgid "Remove" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATOR: checkbox text +#. TRANSLATORS: checkbox text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1592 +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6226 +msgid "Enable Snapshots" +msgstr "" + +#. heading text +#. button text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1603 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:409 +msgid "Subvolume Handling" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1666 +msgid "Empty subvolume name not allowed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1670 +msgid "" +"Only subvolume names starting with \"%1\" currently allowed!\n" +"Automatically prepending \"%1\" to name of subvolume." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1680 +msgid "Subvolume name %1 already exists." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1709 +msgid "Modifications done so far in this dialog will be lost." +msgstr "" + +#. help text for cryptofs +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_helptexts.rb:56 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Create an encrypted file system.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for cryptofs +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_helptexts.rb:63 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Access an encrypted file system.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for cryptofs +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_helptexts.rb:73 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Keep in mind that this file system is only protected when it is not\n" +"mounted. Once it is mounted, it is as secure as every other\n" +"Linux file system.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_helptexts.rb:87 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:708 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"This mount point corresponds to a temporary filesystem like /tmp or /var/tmp.\n" +"If you leave the encryption password empty, the system will create\n" +"a random password at system startup for you. This means, you will lose all\n" +"data on these filesystems at system shutdown.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, continued +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_helptexts.rb:100 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:723 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"If you forget your password, you will lose access to the data on your file system.\n" +"Choose your password carefully. A combination of letters and numbers\n" +"is recommended. To ensure the password was entered correctly,\n" +"enter it twice.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, continued +#. helptext, %1 is replaced by integer +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_helptexts.rb:114 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:737 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"You must distinguish between uppercase and lowercase. A password should have at\n" +"least %1 characters and, as a rule, not contain any special characters\n" +"(e.g., letters with accents or umlauts).\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, continued +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_helptexts.rb:129 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Possible characters are\n" +"<tt>%1</tt>, blanks, uppercase and lowercase\n" +"letters (<tt>A-Za-Z</tt>), and digits <tt>0</tt> to <tt>9</tt>.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, continued +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_helptexts.rb:142 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:749 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Do not forget this password!\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for cryptofs +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_helptexts.rb:150 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"You will need to enter your encryption password.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, continued +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_helptexts.rb:159 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"If the encrypted file system does not contain any system file and therefore is\n" +"not needed for the update, you may select <b>Skip</b>. In this case, the\n" +"file system is not accessed during update.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_helptexts.rb:173 +msgid "" +"Warning: With your current setup, your installation\n" +"will encounter problems when booting, because the disk on which \n" +"your /boot partition is located does not contain a GPT disk label.\n" +"\n" +"It will probably not be possible to boot such a setup.\n" +"\n" +"If you need to use this disk for installation, you should destroy \n" +"the disk label in the expert partitioner.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_helptexts.rb:187 +msgid "" +"Warning: Your system states that it requires an EFI \n" +"boot setup. Since the selected disk does not contain a \n" +"GPT disk label YaST will create a GPT label on this disk.\n" +"\n" +"You need to mark all partitions on this disk for removal.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:51 +msgid "You cannot use the mount point \"%1\" for LVM.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:78 +msgid "You cannot use the mount point %1 for RAID." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:97 +msgid "" +"You have selected to not automatically mount at start-up a file system\n" +"that may contain files that the system needs to work properly.\n" +"\n" +"This may cause problems.\n" +"\n" +"Really do this?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:120 +msgid "" +"You have assigned an encrypted file system to a partition\n" +"with one of the following mount points: \"/\", \"/usr\", \"/boot\",\n" +"/var\". This is not possible. Change the mount point or use a\n" +"nonloopbacked file system.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:158 +msgid "" +"You have set a file system as mountable by users. The file system\n" +"may contain files that need to be executable.\n" +"\n" +"This usually causes problems.\n" +"\n" +"Really do this?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Check all mount points and return true if the mount point is ok. +#. @param [Hash{String => map}] targetMap the TargetMap +#. @param mount mount point +#. @return [Boolean] +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:205 +msgid "Mount point must not be empty." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:210 +msgid "Swap devices must have swap as mount point." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:214 +msgid "Only swap devices may have swap as mount point." +msgstr "" + +#. && mount!="swap" ) +#. error popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:229 +msgid "This mount point is already in use. Select a different one." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:239 +msgid "" +"FAT filesystem used for system mount point (/, /usr, /opt, /var, /home).\n" +"This is not possible." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:248 +msgid "Invalid character in mount point. Do not use \"`'!\"%#\" in a mount point." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:257 +msgid "" +"You cannot use any of the following mount points:\n" +"/bin, /dev, /etc, /lib, /lib64, /lost+found, /mnt, /proc, /sbin, /sys,\n" +"/var/adm/mnt\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:266 +msgid "Your mount point must start with a \"/\" " +msgstr "" + +#. error popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:272 +msgid "" +"It is not allowed to assign the mount point swap\n" +"to a device without a swap file system." +msgstr "" + +#. warning message, %1 is replaced by fs name (e.g. Ext3) +#. %2 is prelaced by a size (e.g. 10 MB) +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:299 +msgid "" +"Your partition is too small to use %1.\n" +"The minimum size for this file system is %2.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:369 +msgid "" +"It is not allowed to assign a mount point\n" +"to a device with nonexistent or unknown file system." +msgstr "" + +#. warning message, %1 is replaced by fs name (e.g. Ext3) +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:491 +msgid "" +"\n" +"WARNING:\n" +"\n" +"This file system is not supported in %1;.\n" +"It is completely untested and might not be well-integrated \n" +"in the system. Do not report bugs against this file system \n" +"if it does not work properly or at all.\n" +"\n" +"Really use this file system?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. ////////////////////////////////////////////// +#. modify map new +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:919 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:946 +msgid "The file system is currently mounted on %1." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:924 +msgid "" +"You can try to unmount it now, continue without unmounting or cancel.\n" +"Click Cancel unless you know exactly what you are doing." +msgstr "" + +#. button text +#. button text +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:935 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:960 +msgid "Unmount" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:951 +msgid "" +"You can try to unmount it now or cancel.\n" +"Click Cancel unless you know exactly what you are doing." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:997 +msgid "It is not possible to shrink the file system while it is mounted." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:1010 +msgid "It is not possible to extend the file system while it is mounted." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:1021 +msgid "It is not possible to resize the file system while it is mounted." +msgstr "" + +#. push button text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-all.rb:80 +msgid "Rescan Devices" +msgstr "" + +#. push button text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-all.rb:85 +msgid "Import Mount Points..." +msgstr "" + +#. menu entry text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-all.rb:94 +msgid "Provide Crypt &Passwords..." +msgstr "" + +#. menu entry text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-all.rb:99 +msgid "Configure &iSCSI..." +msgstr "" + +#. menu entry text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-all.rb:104 +msgid "Configure &FCoE..." +msgstr "" + +#. menu entry text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-all.rb:109 +msgid "Configure &Multipath..." +msgstr "" + +#. menu entry text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-all.rb:114 +msgid "Configure &DASD..." +msgstr "" + +#. menu entry text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-all.rb:119 +msgid "Configure &zFCP..." +msgstr "" + +#. menu entry text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-all.rb:124 +msgid "Configure &XPRAM..." +msgstr "" + +#. menu button text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-all.rb:129 +msgid "Configure..." +msgstr "" + +#. dialog heading, %1 is replaced with hostname +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-all.rb:140 +msgid "Available Storage on %1" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-all.rb:155 +msgid "" +"<p>This view shows all storage devices\n" +"available.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-all.rb:163 +msgid "" +"<p>By double clicking a table entry,\n" +"you navigate to the view with detailed information about the\n" +"device.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-all.rb:173 +msgid "" +"<p>By selecting a table entry you can\n" +"navigate to the view with detailed information about the device.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-all.rb:233 +msgid "" +"Rescaning disks cancels all current changes.\n" +"Really rescan disks?" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-all.rb:251 +msgid "" +"Calling iSCSI configuration cancels all current changes.\n" +"Really call iSCSI configuration?" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-all.rb:260 +msgid "" +"Calling FCoE configuration cancels all current changes.\n" +"Really call FCoE configuration?" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#. popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-all.rb:274 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-all.rb:283 +msgid "" +"Calling multipath configuration cancels all current changes.\n" +"Really call multipath configuration?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-all.rb:300 +msgid "" +"Calling DASD configuration cancels all current changes.\n" +"Really call DASD configuration?" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-all.rb:309 +msgid "" +"Calling zFCP configuration cancels all current changes.\n" +"Really call zFCP configuration?" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-all.rb:318 +msgid "" +"Calling XPRAM configuration cancels all current changes.\n" +"Really call XPRAM configuration?" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog title +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-btrfs-dialogs.rb:64 +msgid "Edit Btrfs %1" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#. error popup +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-btrfs-dialogs.rb:165 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:151 +msgid "Select at least one device." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-btrfs-dialogs.rb:175 +msgid "<p>Change the devices that are used by the Btrfs volume.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-btrfs-dialogs.rb:219 +msgid "Unused Devices:" +msgstr "" + +#. label for selection box +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-btrfs-dialogs.rb:220 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:267 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:531 +msgid "Selected Devices:" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog title +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-btrfs-dialogs.rb:291 +msgid "Resize Btrfs Volume %1" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#. error popup +#. error popup +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-btrfs-lib.rb:35 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-btrfs-lib.rb:76 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-btrfs-lib.rb:130 +msgid "No Btrfs device selected." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-btrfs-lib.rb:47 +msgid "" +"The Btrfs %1 is in use. It cannot be\n" +"edited. To edit %1, make sure it is not used." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#. error popup +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-btrfs-lib.rb:168 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-lib.rb:134 +msgid "Failed to remove some physical devices." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: context menu entry +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. Copyright (c) 2012 Novell, Inc. +#. +#. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it +#. under the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as published +#. by the Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +#. ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or +#. FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for +#. more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along +#. with this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, you may +#. find current contact information at www.novell.com. +#. File: ep-main.ycp +#. Package: yast2-storage +#. Summary: Expert Partitioner +#. Authors: Arvin Schnell +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. Copyright (c) 2012 Novell, Inc. +#. +#. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it +#. under the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as published +#. by the Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +#. ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or +#. FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for +#. more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along +#. with this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, you may +#. find current contact information at www.novell.com. +#. File: ep-main.ycp +#. Package: yast2-storage +#. Summary: Expert Partitioner +#. Authors: Arvin Schnell +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. Copyright (c) 2012 Novell, Inc. +#. +#. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it +#. under the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as published +#. by the Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +#. ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or +#. FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for +#. more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along +#. with this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, you may +#. find current contact information at www.novell.com. +#. File: ep-main.ycp +#. Package: yast2-storage +#. Summary: Expert Partitioner +#. Authors: Arvin Schnell +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-btrfs.rb:40 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dm.rb:36 src/include/partitioning/ep-hd.rb:61 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-loop.rb:37 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm.rb:64 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid.rb:38 +msgid "Edit" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: context menu entry +#. disabled, see bnc #832196 +#. Item(Id(:resize), _("Resize")), +#. TRANSLATORS: context menu entry +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. Copyright (c) 2012 Novell, Inc. +#. +#. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it +#. under the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as published +#. by the Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +#. ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or +#. FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for +#. more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along +#. with this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, you may +#. find current contact information at www.novell.com. +#. File: ep-main.ycp +#. Package: yast2-storage +#. Summary: Expert Partitioner +#. Authors: Arvin Schnell +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-btrfs.rb:45 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd.rb:43 src/include/partitioning/ep-hd.rb:64 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-loop.rb:37 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm.rb:44 src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm.rb:66 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid.rb:40 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-tmpfs.rb:36 +msgid "Delete" +msgstr "" + +#. heading +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-btrfs.rb:130 +msgid "Btrfs Volumes" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: push button text +#. push button text +#. push button text +#. push button text +#. push button text +#. push button text +#. push button text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-btrfs.rb:140 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-btrfs.rb:205 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dm.rb:153 src/include/partitioning/ep-hd.rb:86 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-loop.rb:54 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm.rb:86 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid.rb:59 +msgid "Edit..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: push button text +#. disabled, see bnc #832196 +#. PushButton(Id(:resize), Opt(:key_F8), _("Resize...")), +#. TRANSLATORS: push button text +#. push button text +#. push button text +#. push button text +#. push button text +#. push button text +#. push button text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-btrfs.rb:145 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd.rb:92 src/include/partitioning/ep-loop.rb:56 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm.rb:90 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid.rb:63 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-tmpfs.rb:112 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-tmpfs.rb:170 +msgid "Delete..." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-btrfs.rb:154 +msgid "<p>This view shows all Btrfs volumes.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-btrfs.rb:213 +msgid "" +"<p>This view shows detailed information about the\n" +"selected Btrfs volume.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-btrfs.rb:289 +msgid "" +"<p>This view shows all devices used by the\n" +"selected Btrfs volume.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. heading +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-btrfs.rb:330 +msgid "Btrfs Device: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. push button text +#. push button text +#. tab heading +#. push button text +#. push button text +#. push button text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-btrfs.rb:337 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dm.rb:272 src/include/partitioning/ep-hd.rb:644 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm.rb:467 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid.rb:315 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-tmpfs.rb:241 +msgid "&Overview" +msgstr "" + +#. push button text +#. push button text +#. tab heading +#. push button text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-btrfs.rb:339 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dm.rb:274 src/include/partitioning/ep-hd.rb:651 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid.rb:317 +msgid "&Used Devices" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:39 +msgid "<p>Choose the role of the device.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:55 +msgid "Operating System" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:60 +msgid "Data and ISV Applications" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:65 +msgid "Swap" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:70 +msgid "Raw Volume (unformatted)" +msgstr "" + +#. heading for a frame in a dialog +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:78 +msgid "Role" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:107 +msgid "" +"<p>First, choose whether the partition should be\n" +"formatted and the desired file system type.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:114 +msgid "" +"<p>If you want to encrypt all data on the\n" +"volume, select <b>Encrypt Device</b>. Changing the encryption on an existing\n" +"volume will delete all data on it.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:124 +msgid "" +"<p>Then, choose whether the partition should\n" +"be mounted and enter the mount point (/, /boot, /home, /var, etc.).</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. set globals +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:309 +msgid "Formatting Options" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:317 +msgid "Format partition" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:328 +msgid "Do not format partition" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:344 +msgid "Do not mount partition" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:363 +msgid "Mounting Options" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:371 +msgid "Mount partition" +msgstr "" + +#. Column header +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:377 src/modules/StorageFields.rb:144 +msgid "Mount Point" +msgstr "" + +#. button text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:384 +msgid "Fs&tab Options..." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:558 +msgid "Crypt files must be encrypted." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:569 +msgid "" +"You chose to create the crypt file, but did not specify\n" +"that it should be formatted. This does not make sense.\n" +"\n" +"Also check the format option.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:585 +msgid "Crypt files require a mount point." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:599 +msgid "Tmpfs requires a mount point." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:683 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Keep in mind that this file system is only protected when it is not\n" +"mounted. Once it is mounted, it is as secure as every other\n" +"Linux file system.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:696 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"The file system used for this volume is swap. You can leave the encryption \n" +"password empty, but then the swap device cannot be used for hibernating\n" +"(suspend to disk).\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:766 +msgid "All data stored on the volume will be lost!" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:789 +msgid "Password" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:886 +msgid "Resize not supported by underlying device." +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:891 +msgid "" +"\n" +"You cannot resize the selected partition because the file system\n" +"on this partition does not support resizing.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:915 +msgid "" +"It is not possible to check whether a NTFS\n" +"can be resized while it is mounted." +msgstr "" + +#. FIXME: Really? +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:934 +msgid "" +"Partition %1 cannot be resized\n" +"because the filesystem seems to be inconsistent.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Heading for dialog +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:961 +msgid "Resize Partition %1" +msgstr "" + +#. Heading for dialog +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:982 +msgid "Resize Logical Volume %1" +msgstr "" + +#. size_k + min_size_k could be > max_size_k +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1014 +msgid "Current size: %1" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1026 +msgid "Currently used: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. frame heading +#. input field label +#. combo box label +#. Column header +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1039 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1076 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:256 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-loop-dialogs.rb:118 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:559 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:573 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:616 +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:129 +msgid "Size" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button text, %1 is replaced by size +#. radio button text, %1 is replaced by size +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1049 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:242 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:535 +msgid "Maximum Size (%1)" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button text, %1 is replaced by size +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1059 +msgid "Minimum Size (%1)" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button text +#. radio button text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1068 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:251 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:568 +msgid "Custom Size" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1102 +msgid "<p>Choose new size.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup, %1 and %2 are replaced by sizes +#. error popup, %1 and %2 are replaced by sizes +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1153 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:359 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:692 +msgid "The size entered is invalid. Enter a size between %1 and %2." +msgstr "" + +#. FIXME: To check whether the part. can be resized only +#. after user tries to do that is stupid - in some cases +#. we can tell beforehand, thus user should never get to this +#. point (e.g. when the partition is mounted) +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1196 +msgid "" +"You are extending a mounted filesystem by %1 Gigabyte. \n" +"This may be quite slow and can take hours. You might possibly want \n" +"to consider umounting the filesystem, which will increase speed of \n" +"resize task a lot." +msgstr "" + +#. label for log view +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1272 +msgid "Output of %1" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1299 +msgid "Rescanning disks..." +msgstr "" + +#. dialog title +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dm-dialogs.rb:62 +msgid "Edit DM %1" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dm-lib.rb:35 +msgid "No DM device selected." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dm-lib.rb:46 +msgid "" +"The DM %1 is in use. It cannot be\n" +"edited. To edit %1, make sure it is not used." +msgstr "" + +#. heading +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dm.rb:85 +msgid "Device Mapper (DM)" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dm.rb:97 +msgid "" +"<p>This view shows all Device Mapper devices except for those already \n" +"included in some other view. Therefore multipath disks,\n" +"BIOS RAIDs and LVM logical volumes are not shown here.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dm.rb:161 +msgid "" +"<p>This view shows detailed information about the\n" +"selected Device Mapper device.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dm.rb:232 +msgid "" +"<p>This view shows all devices used by the\n" +"selected Device Mapper device.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. heading +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dm.rb:265 +msgid "DM Device: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. Copyright (c) [2012-2015] Novell, Inc. +#. +#. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it +#. under the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as published +#. by the Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +#. ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or +#. FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for +#. more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along +#. with this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, you may +#. find current contact information at www.novell.com. +#. File: ep-graph.rb +#. Package: yast2-storage +#. Summary: Expert Partitioner +#. Authors: Arvin Schnell +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-graph.rb:39 +msgid "Add RAID" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog title +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-graph.rb:44 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:475 +msgid "Add Volume Group" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog heading, graph is the mathematic term for +#. a set of notes connected with edges +#. tree node label +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-graph.rb:70 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-main.rb:453 +msgid "Device Graph" +msgstr "" + +#. button text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-graph.rb:74 +msgid "Save Device Graph..." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-graph.rb:84 +msgid "<p>This view shows a graph of devices.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#. error popup +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-graph.rb:140 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-graph.rb:214 +msgid "Saving graph file failed." +msgstr "" + +#. dialog heading, graph is the mathematic term for +#. a set of notes connected with edges +#. tree node label +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-graph.rb:159 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-main.rb:459 +msgid "Mount Graph" +msgstr "" + +#. button text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-graph.rb:163 +msgid "Save Mount Graph..." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-graph.rb:173 +msgid "<p>This view shows a graph of mount points.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:41 +msgid "<p>Choose the partition type for the new partition.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:63 +msgid "&Primary Partition" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:76 +msgid "&Extended Partition" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:89 +msgid "&Logical Partition" +msgstr "" + +#. heading for a frame in a dialog +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:99 +msgid "New Partition Type" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:166 +msgid "<p>Choose the size for the new partition.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. frame heading +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:232 +msgid "New Partition Size" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:265 +msgid "Custom Region" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:272 +msgid "Start Cylinder" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:282 +msgid "End Cylinder" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:380 +msgid "The region entered is invalid." +msgstr "" + +#. dialog title +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:548 +msgid "Add Partition on %1" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog title +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:594 +msgid "Edit Partition %1" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup text, %1 is replace with name of partition +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:627 +msgid "No space to moved partition %1." +msgstr "" + +#. popup text, %1 is replace with name of partition +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:637 +msgid "Move partition %1 forward?" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text, %1 is replace with name of partition +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:646 +msgid "Move partition %1 backward?" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text, %1 is replace with name of partition +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:665 +msgid "Move partition %1?" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:667 +msgid "Forward" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:669 +msgid "Backward" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:725 +msgid "Confirm Deleting of All Partitions" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:727 +msgid "" +"The disk \"%1\" contains at least one partition.\n" +"If you proceed, the following partitions will be deleted:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:732 +msgid "Really delete all partitions on \"%1\"?" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#. error popup +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-lib.rb:42 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-lib.rb:245 +msgid "No hard disk selected." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#. TRANSLATORS: error popup +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-lib.rb:51 src/modules/Storage.rb:5240 +msgid "The disk is in use and cannot be modified." +msgstr "" + +#. dialog heading +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-lib.rb:86 +msgid "Select new partition table type for %1." +msgstr "" + +#. popup text, %1 is be replaced by disk name e.g. /dev/sda +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-lib.rb:111 +msgid "" +"Really create new partition table on %1? This will delete all data\n" +"on %1 and all RAIDs and Volume Groups using partitions on %1." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-lib.rb:131 +msgid "No disk selected." +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#. Must be called before removing device. +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-lib.rb:145 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lib.rb:199 +msgid "Really delete BIOS RAID %1?" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-lib.rb:159 +msgid "Really delete Partitioned RAID %1?" +msgstr "" + +#. error ppup +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-lib.rb:176 +msgid "There are no partitions to delete on this disk." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-lib.rb:229 +msgid "It is not possible to create a partition on %1." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#. error popup +#. error popup +#. error popup +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-lib.rb:321 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-lib.rb:370 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-lib.rb:426 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-lib.rb:483 +msgid "No partition selected." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup, %1 is replace by partition device name e.g. /dev/sdb1 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-lib.rb:334 +msgid "" +"The partition %1 is in use. It cannot be\n" +"edited. To edit %1, make sure it is not used." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-lib.rb:345 +msgid "An extended partition cannot be edited." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup, %1 is replace by partition device name, e.g. /dev/sdb1 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-lib.rb:387 +msgid "" +"The partition %1 is already created on disk\n" +"and cannot be moved." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-lib.rb:398 +msgid "An extended partition cannot be moved." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup, %1 is replace by partition device name, e.g. /dev/sdb1 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-lib.rb:443 +msgid "" +"The partition %1 is in use. It cannot be\n" +"resized. To resize %1, make sure it is not used." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-lib.rb:454 +msgid "An extended partition cannot be resized." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-lib.rb:527 +msgid "" +"<p>Select one or more (if available) hard disks\n" +"that will have the same partition layout as\n" +"this disk.</p>\n" +"<p>Disks marked with the sign '*' contain one or\n" +"more partitions. After cloning, these\n" +"partitions will be deleted.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-lib.rb:573 +msgid "" +"The following partitions will be deleted\n" +"and all data on them will be lost:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-lib.rb:580 +msgid "Really delete these partitions?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-lib.rb:596 +msgid "" +"There are no partitions on this disk, but a clonable\n" +"disk must have at least one partition.\n" +"Create partitions before cloning the disk.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-lib.rb:609 +msgid "" +"This disk cannot be cloned. There are no suitable\n" +"disks that could have the same partitioning layout." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-lib.rb:638 +msgid "Clone partition layout of %1" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-lib.rb:642 +msgid "Available target disks:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-lib.rb:670 +msgid "Select a target disk for creating a clone" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text, %1 is replaced by a dasd name e.g. /dev/dasda +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-lib.rb:751 +msgid "" +"Running dasdfmt deletes all data on the disk.\n" +"Really execute dasdfmt on disk %1?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-lib.rb:762 +msgid "" +"The disk is no longer marked for dasdfmt.\n" +"\n" +"Partitions currently present on this disk are again\n" +"displayed.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. Copyright (c) 2012 Novell, Inc. +#. +#. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it +#. under the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as published +#. by the Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +#. ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or +#. FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for +#. more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along +#. with this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, you may +#. find current contact information at www.novell.com. +#. File: ep-main.ycp +#. Package: yast2-storage +#. Summary: Expert Partitioner +#. Authors: Arvin Schnell +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd.rb:41 +msgid "Add Partition" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd.rb:62 +msgid "Move" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd.rb:63 src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm.rb:43 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm.rb:65 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid.rb:39 +msgid "Resize" +msgstr "" + +#. push button text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd.rb:88 +msgid "Move..." +msgstr "" + +#. push button text +#. push button text +#. push button text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd.rb:90 src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm.rb:88 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid.rb:61 +msgid "Resize..." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd.rb:132 +msgid "" +"Hard disks, BIOS RAIDs and multipath\n" +"devices cannot be moved." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd.rb:143 +msgid "" +"Hard disks, BIOS RAIDs and multipath\n" +"devices cannot be resized." +msgstr "" + +#. heading +#. tree node label +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd.rb:210 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-main.rb:380 +msgid "Hard Disks" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd.rb:220 +msgid "Add Partition..." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd.rb:231 +msgid "" +"<p>This view shows all hard disks including\n" +"iSCSI disks, BIOS RAIDs and multipath disks and their partitions.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. push button text (do not translate 'SMART', it is the name of the tool) +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd.rb:320 +msgid "Health Test (SMART)..." +msgstr "" + +#. push button text (do not translate 'hdparm', it is the name of the tool) +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd.rb:331 +msgid "Properties (hdparm)..." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd.rb:345 +msgid "" +"<p>This view shows detailed information about the\n" +"selected hard disk.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd.rb:393 +msgid "SMART is not available for this disk." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd.rb:401 +msgid "hdparm is not available for this disk." +msgstr "" + +#. menu entry text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd.rb:458 +msgid "Create New Partition Table" +msgstr "" + +#. menu entry text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd.rb:467 +msgid "Clone this Disk" +msgstr "" + +#. menu entry text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd.rb:477 +msgid "Execute dasd&fmt on the DASD Device" +msgstr "" + +#. push button text +#. push button text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd.rb:496 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm.rb:213 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm.rb:337 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-tmpfs.rb:110 +msgid "Add..." +msgstr "" + +#. menu button text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd.rb:501 +msgid "Expert..." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd.rb:511 +msgid "" +"<p>This view shows all partitions of the selected\n" +"hard disk. If the hard disk is used by e.g. BIOS RAID or multipath, no\n" +"partitions are shown here.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd.rb:596 +msgid "" +"<p>This view shows all devices used by the\n" +"selected hard disk. The view is only available for BIOS RAIDs, partitioned\n" +"software RAIDs and multipath disks.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. tab heading +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd.rb:646 +msgid "&Partitions" +msgstr "" + +#. heading +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd.rb:661 +msgid "Hard Disk: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. heading +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd.rb:721 +msgid "Partition: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd.rb:731 +msgid "" +"<p>This view shows detailed information about the\n" +"selected partition.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, richtext format +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-import.rb:296 +msgid "" +"<p>YaST has scanned your hard disks and found one or several existing \n" +"Linux systems with mount points. The old mount points are shown in \n" +"the table.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, richtext format +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-import.rb:305 +msgid "" +"<p>You can choose whether the existing system\n" +"volumes, e.g. / and /usr, will be formatted during the\n" +"installation. Non-system volumes, e.g. /home, will not be formatted.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-import.rb:328 +msgid "No previous system with mount points was detected." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-import.rb:343 +msgid "Show &Previous" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-import.rb:344 +msgid "Show &Next" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog heading +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-import.rb:353 +msgid "Import Mount Points from Existing System:" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-import.rb:368 +msgid "Format System Volumes" +msgstr "" + +#. pushbutton label +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-import.rb:374 +msgid "Import" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text %1 is replaced by a device name (e.g. /dev/hda1) +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-import.rb:400 +msgid "/etc/fstab found on %1 contains:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-import.rb:499 +msgid "Wrong Password Provided." +msgstr "" + +#. Must be called before removing device. +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lib.rb:107 +msgid "Confirm Deleting Partition Used by LVM" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lib.rb:109 +msgid "" +"The selected partition is used by volume group \"%1\".\n" +"To keep the system in a consistent state, the following volume group\n" +"and its logical volumes will be deleted:\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lib.rb:117 +msgid "Delete partition \"%1\" and volume group \"%2\" now?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lib.rb:127 +msgid "Confirm Deleting Partition Used by RAID" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lib.rb:129 +msgid "" +"The selected partition belongs to RAID \"%1\".\n" +"To keep the system in a consistent state, the following\n" +"RAID device will be deleted:\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lib.rb:137 +msgid "Delete partition \"%1\" and RAID \"%2\" now?" +msgstr "" + +#. YesNo popup text %1 is replaced by a disk name e.g. /dev/hda +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lib.rb:207 +msgid "Really delete all partitions on %1?" +msgstr "" + +#. /////////////////////////////////////////////////// +#. now delete partition!! +#. YesNo popup text, %1 is replaced by a device name e.g. /dev/hda1 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lib.rb:259 +msgid "Really delete %1?" +msgstr "" + +#. YesNo popup. %1 is path to a file +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lib.rb:273 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Should the loop file %1 also be removed?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Guarantee some minimal share (1%) of total graph width to the segment. +#. Prevents small partitions e.g. swaps from disappearing completely. +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lib.rb:340 +msgid "Unpartitioned" +msgstr "" + +#. Now there is some xtra space between the end of this partition and the start of the next one +#. or the end of the disk if +#. 1. end +1th cyl is not the next one +#. 2. end cyl is not the same as the next one (yeah, partitions may share a cylinder) +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lib.rb:443 +msgid "Unallocated" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lib.rb:482 +msgid "<p>No changes to partitioning.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lib.rb:484 +msgid "<p>Changes to partitioning:</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lib.rb:487 +msgid "<p>No changes to storage settings.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lib.rb:489 +msgid "<p>Storage settings:</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lib.rb:498 +msgid "<p>Packages to install:</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lib.rb:500 +msgid "<p>No packages need to be installed.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. heading +#. tree node label +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-log.rb:43 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-main.rb:493 +msgid "Log" +msgstr "" + +#. label for log view +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-log.rb:47 +msgid "Contents of %1:" +msgstr "" + +#. push button text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-log.rb:52 +msgid "Update" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext, %1 is replaced by a filename +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-log.rb:58 +msgid "This view shows the content of %1." +msgstr "" + +#. TODO +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-loop-dialogs.rb:36 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p><b>Path Name of Loop File:</b><br>This must be an absolute path to the file\n" +"containing the data for the encrypted loop device to set up.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-loop-dialogs.rb:45 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p><b>Create Loop File:</b><br>If this is checked, the file will be created\n" +"with the size given in the next field. <b>NOTE:</b> If the file already\n" +"exists, all data in it is lost.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-loop-dialogs.rb:56 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p><b>Size:</b><br>This is the size of the loop file. The file system\n" +"created in the encrypted loop device will have this size.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-loop-dialogs.rb:66 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p><b>NOTE:</b> During installation, YaST cannot carry out consistency\n" +"checks of file size and path names because the file system is not\n" +"accessible. It will be created at the end of the installation. Be\n" +"careful when providing the size and path name.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. input field label +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-loop-dialogs.rb:96 +msgid "Path Name of Loop File" +msgstr "" + +#. push button text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-loop-dialogs.rb:103 +msgid "Browse..." +msgstr "" + +#. check box text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-loop-dialogs.rb:111 +msgid "Create Loop File" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-loop-dialogs.rb:162 +msgid "" +"The file name \"%1\" is invalid.\n" +"Use an absolute path name.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup, %1 is replaced by size +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-loop-dialogs.rb:188 +msgid "The size entered is invalid. Enter a size of at least %1." +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-loop-dialogs.rb:206 +msgid "" +"The file name \"%1\" does not exist\n" +"and the flag for create is off. Either use an existing file or activate\n" +"the create flag." +msgstr "" + +#. dialog title +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-loop-dialogs.rb:281 +msgid "Add Crypt File" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog title +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-loop-dialogs.rb:325 +msgid "Edit Crypt File %1" +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. Copyright (c) 2012 Novell, Inc. +#. +#. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it +#. under the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as published +#. by the Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +#. ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or +#. FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for +#. more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along +#. with this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, you may +#. find current contact information at www.novell.com. +#. File: ep-main.ycp +#. Package: yast2-storage +#. Summary: Expert Partitioner +#. Authors: Arvin Schnell +#. error popup +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-loop-lib.rb:66 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-loop-lib.rb:107 +msgid "No crypt file selected." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup, %1 is replaced by device name +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-loop-lib.rb:77 +msgid "" +"The Crypt File %1 is in use. It cannot be\n" +"edited. To edit %1, make sure it is not used." +msgstr "" + +#. heading +#. tree node label +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-loop.rb:103 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-main.rb:404 +msgid "Crypt Files" +msgstr "" + +#. push button text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-loop.rb:112 +msgid "Add Crypt File..." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-loop.rb:121 +msgid "<p>This view shows all crypt files.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. heading +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-loop.rb:172 +msgid "Crypt File: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-loop.rb:183 +msgid "" +"<p>This view shows detailed information of the\n" +"selected crypt file.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:41 +msgid "Enter a name for the volume group." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:46 +msgid "The name for the volume group is longer than 128 characters." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:52 +msgid "The name for the volume group must not start with a \"-\"." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:58 +msgid "" +"The name for the volume group contains illegal characters. Allowed\n" +"are alphanumeric characters, \".\", \"_\", \"-\" and \"+\"." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:76 +msgid "The volume group \"%1\" already exists." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:85 +msgid "" +"The volume group name \"%1\" conflicts\n" +"with another entry in the /dev directory.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. pop-up dialog title +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:106 +msgid "Confirm Deleting of Volume Group" +msgstr "" + +#. pop-up dialog message part 1: %1 is vol.group name +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:109 +msgid "" +"The volume group \"%1\" contains at least one logical volume.\n" +"If you proceed, the following volumes will be unmounted (if mounted)\n" +"and deleted:" +msgstr "" + +#. pop-up dialog message part 2: %1 is vol.group name +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:118 +msgid "Really delete volume group \"%1\" and all related logical volumes?" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup, %1, %2 and %3 are replaced by sizes +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:132 +msgid "" +"The data entered is invalid. Insert a physical extent size larger than %1\n" +"in powers of 2, for example, \"%2\" or \"%3\"" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:167 +msgid "Enter a name for the logical volume." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:172 +msgid "The name for the logical volume is longer than 128 characters." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:178 +msgid "" +"The name for the logical volume contains illegal characters. Allowed\n" +"are alphanumeric characters, \".\", \"_\", \"-\" and \"+\"." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:197 +msgid "" +"A logical volume named \"%1\" already exists\n" +"in volume group \"%2\"." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:238 +msgid "<p>Enter the name and physical extent size of the new volume group.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:245 +msgid "<p>Select the physical volumes the volume group should contain.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. label for input field +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:283 +msgid "Volume Group Name" +msgstr "" + +#. label for combo box +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:293 +msgid "&Physical Extent Size" +msgstr "" + +#. label for selection box +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:308 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:413 +msgid "Available Physical Volumes:" +msgstr "" + +#. label for selection box +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:310 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:414 +msgid "Selected Physical Volumes:" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:378 +msgid "<p>Change the devices that are used for the volume group.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:491 +msgid "" +"<p>Enter the size as well as the number and size\n" +"of stripes for the new logical volume. The number of stripes cannot be higher\n" +"than the number of physical volumes of the volume group.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:500 +msgid "" +"<p>So called <b>Thin Volumes</b> can created\n" +"with arbitrary volume size. The space required is taken on demand from the \n" +"assigned <b>Thin Pool</b>. So one can create Thin Volume of a size larger\n" +"than the Thin Pool. Of course when there is really data written to a Thin\n" +"Volume, the assigned Thin Pool must be able to meet this space requirement.\n" +"Thin Volumes cannot have a Stripe Count." +msgstr "" + +#. heading for frame +#. Column header +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:598 +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:186 +msgid "Stripes" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:606 +msgid "Number" +msgstr "" + +#. A dialog title - %1 is a logical volume name, %2 is a volume group. +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:631 +msgid "Add Logical volume %1 on %2" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog title +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:756 +msgid "Resize Volume Group %1" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:774 +msgid "<p>Enter the name of the new logical volume.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:778 +msgid "" +"<p>You can declare the logical volume as a <b>Normal Volume</b>.\n" +"This is the default and means plain LVM Volumes like all volumes were before the feature of <b>Thin Provisioning</b> existed.\n" +"If in doubt this is most probably the right choice</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:787 +msgid "" +"<p>You can declare the logical volume as a <b>Thin Pool</b>.\n" +"This means <b>Thin Volumes</b> allocate their needed space on demand from such a pool.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:794 +msgid "" +"<p>You can declare the logical volume as a <b>Thin Volume</b>.\n" +"This means the volume allocates needed space on demand from a <b>Thin Pool</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. heading for frame +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:827 +msgid "Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:828 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm.rb:195 +msgid "Logical Volume" +msgstr "" + +#. heading for frame +#. Column header +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:839 +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:132 +msgid "Type" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:848 +msgid "Normal Volume" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:851 +msgid "Thin Pool" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:857 +msgid "Thin Volume" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:865 +msgid "Used Pool" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog title, %1 is a volume group +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:1028 +msgid "Add Logical Volume on %1" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog title - %1 is a logical volume name, %2 is a volume group +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:1075 +msgid "Edit Logical Volume %1 on %2" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-lib.rb:68 +msgid "" +"There are not enough suitable unused devices to create a volume group.\n" +"\n" +"To use LVM, at least one unused partition of type 0x8e (or 0x83) or one unused\n" +"RAID device is required. Change your partition table accordingly." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#. error popup +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-lib.rb:107 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-lib.rb:165 +msgid "No volume group selected." +msgstr "" + +#. empty VG - simple +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-lib.rb:181 +msgid "Really delete the volume group \"%1\"?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-lib.rb:198 +msgid "Deleting volume group \"%1\" failed." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#. error popup +#. error popup +#. error popup +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-lib.rb:214 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-lib.rb:315 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-lib.rb:367 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-lib.rb:402 +msgid "No logical volume selected." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-lib.rb:232 +msgid "No free space left in the volume group \"%1\"." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup, %1 is replace by partition device name e.g. /dev/system/root +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-lib.rb:326 +msgid "" +"The volume %1 is a thin pool.\n" +"It cannot be edited." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup, %1 is replace by partition device name e.g. /dev/system/root +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-lib.rb:337 +msgid "" +"The volume %1 is in use. It cannot be\n" +"edited. To edit %1, make sure it is not used." +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. Copyright (c) 2012 Novell, Inc. +#. +#. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it +#. under the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as published +#. by the Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +#. ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or +#. FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for +#. more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along +#. with this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, you may +#. find current contact information at www.novell.com. +#. File: ep-main.ycp +#. Package: yast2-storage +#. Summary: Expert Partitioner +#. Authors: Arvin Schnell +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm.rb:41 +msgid "Add Logical Volume" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm.rb:190 +msgid "Volume Group" +msgstr "" + +#. heading +#. tree node label +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm.rb:204 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-main.rb:396 +msgid "Volume Management" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm.rb:222 +msgid "" +"<p>This view shows all LVM volume groups and\n" +"their logical volumes.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm.rb:266 +msgid "" +"<p>This view shows detailed information about the\n" +"selected volume group.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm.rb:345 +msgid "" +"<p>This view shows all logical volumes of the\n" +"selected volume group.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm.rb:419 +msgid "" +"<p>This view shows all physical volumes used by\n" +"the selected volume group.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. heading +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm.rb:460 +msgid "Volume Group: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. push button text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm.rb:469 +msgid "&Logical Volumes" +msgstr "" + +#. push button text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm.rb:471 +msgid "&Physical Volumes" +msgstr "" + +#. heading +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm.rb:525 +msgid "Logical Volume: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm.rb:535 +msgid "" +"<p>This view shows detailed information about the\n" +"selected logical volume.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node label +#. heading +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-main.rb:388 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid.rb:123 +msgid "RAID" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node label +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-main.rb:412 +msgid "Device Mapper" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node label +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-main.rb:420 +msgid "NFS" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node label +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-main.rb:427 +msgid "Btrfs" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node label +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-main.rb:434 +msgid "tmpfs" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node label +#. heading +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-main.rb:441 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-unused.rb:87 +msgid "Unused Devices" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node label +#. dialog heading +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-main.rb:470 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-summary.rb:41 +msgid "Installation Summary" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node label +#. dialog heading +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-main.rb:481 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-settings.rb:130 +msgid "Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text, %1 will be replaces with button text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-main.rb:566 +msgid "" +"You have changed the partitioning or storage settings. These changes\n" +"will be lost if you exit the partitioner with %1.\n" +"Really exit?" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-main.rb:580 +msgid "<p>Here you can see the partitioning summary.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Fullscreen summary of changes +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-main.rb:592 +msgid ": Summary" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node label +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-main.rb:667 +msgid "System View" +msgstr "" + +#. fallback dialog content +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-nfs.rb:55 +msgid "NFS configuration is not available. Check yast2-nfs-client package installation." +msgstr "" + +#. heading +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-nfs.rb:127 +msgid "Network File System (NFS)" +msgstr "" + +#. rollback only if user does not want to save (#450060) +#. the mount might fail later if the errors are not corrected, but the user has been warned +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-nfs.rb:171 +msgid "" +"Test mount of NFS share '%1' failed.\n" +"Save it anyway?" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup, %1 is replaced by raid type e.g. "RAID1", %2 is replaced by integer +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:61 +msgid "For %1, select at least %2 device." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:82 +msgid "<p>Select the RAID type for the new RAID.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:87 +msgid "" +"<p><b>RAID 0:</b> This level increases your disk performance.\n" +"There is <b>NO</b> redundancy in this mode. If one of the drives crashes, data recovery will not be possible.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:95 +msgid "" +"<p><b>RAID 1:</b> <br>This mode has the best redundancy. It can be\n" +"used with two or more disks. This mode maintains an exact copy of all data on all\n" +"disks. As long as at least one disk is still working, no data is lost. The partitions\n" +"used for this type of RAID should have approximately the same size.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:106 +msgid "" +"<p><b>RAID 5:</b> <br>This mode combines management of a larger number\n" +"of disks and still maintains some redundancy. This mode can be used on three disks or more.\n" +"If one disk fails, all data is still intact. If two disks fail simultaneously, all data is lost</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:116 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Raid Name</b> gives you the possibility to provide a meaningful\n" +"name for the raid. This is optional. If name is provided, the device is\n" +"available as <tt>/dev/md/<name></tt>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:126 +msgid "" +"<p>Add partitions to your RAID. According to\n" +"the RAID type, the usable disk size is the sum of these partitions (RAID0), the size\n" +"of the smallest partition (RAID 1), or (N-1)*smallest partition (RAID 5).</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:136 +msgid "" +"<p>Generally, the partitions should be on different drives,\n" +"to get the redundancy and performance you want.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. heading +#. Column header +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:191 +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:192 +msgid "RAID Type" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators, 'Striping' is a technical term here. Translate only if +#. you are sure!! If in doubt, leave it in English. +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:201 +msgid "RAID &0 (Striping)" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators, 'Mirroring' is a technical term here. Translate only if +#. you are sure!! If in doubt, leave it in English. +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:210 +msgid "RAID &1 (Mirroring)" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators, 'Redundant Striping' is a technical term here. Translate +#. only if you are sure!! If in doubt, leave it in English. +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:219 +msgid "RAID &5 (Redundant Striping)" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators, 'Redundant Striping' is a technical term here. Translate only if +#. you are sure!! If in doubt, leave it in English. +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:228 +msgid "RAID &6 (Dual Redundant Striping)" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators, 'Mirroring' and 'Striping' are technical terms here. Translate only if +#. you are sure!! If in doubt, leave it in English. +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:237 +msgid "RAID &10 (Mirroring and Striping)" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:248 +msgid "Raid &Name (optional)" +msgstr "" + +#. label for selection box +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:265 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:530 +msgid "Available Devices:" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:338 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Chunk Size:</b><br>It is the smallest \"atomic\" mass\n" +"of data that can be written to the devices. A reasonable chunk size for RAID 5 is 128 kB. For RAID 0,\n" +"32 kB is a good starting point. For RAID 1, the chunk size does not affect the array very much.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:346 +msgid "Parity Algorithm:" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:353 +msgid "" +"The parity algorithm to use with RAID5/6.\n" +"Left-symmetric is the one that offers maximum performance on typical disks with rotating platters.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:361 +msgid "" +"For further details regarding the parity \n" +"algorithm please look at the man page for mdadm (man mdadm).\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Column header +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:406 +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:195 +msgid "Chunk Size" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:427 +msgid "Parity &Algorithm" +msgstr "" + +#. heading +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:436 +msgid "RAID Options" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:481 +msgid "<p>Change the devices that are used for the RAID.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog title +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:642 +msgid "Add RAID %1" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog title +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:676 +msgid "Resize RAID %1" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog title +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:722 +msgid "Edit RAID %1" +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. Copyright (c) 2012 Novell, Inc. +#. +#. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it +#. under the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as published +#. by the Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +#. ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or +#. FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for +#. more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along +#. with this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, you may +#. find current contact information at www.novell.com. +#. File: ep-main.ycp +#. Package: yast2-storage +#. Summary: Expert Partitioner +#. Authors: Arvin Schnell +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-lib.rb:76 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Raid %1 cannot be modified because it is in inactive state.\n" +"This normally means the subset of raid devices is too small\n" +"for the raid to be usable.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-lib.rb:99 +msgid "There are not enough suitable unused devices to create a RAID." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#. error popup +#. error popup +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-lib.rb:153 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-lib.rb:196 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-lib.rb:255 +msgid "No RAID selected." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup, %1 is replaced by device name e.g. /dev/md1 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-lib.rb:166 +msgid "" +"The RAID %1 is in use. It cannot be\n" +"edited. To edit %1, make sure it is not used." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup, %1 is replaced by device name e.g. /dev/md1 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-lib.rb:209 +msgid "" +"The RAID %1 is already created on disk. It cannot be\n" +"resized. To resize %1, remove it and create it again." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup, %1 is replaced by device name e.g. /dev/md1 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-lib.rb:222 +msgid "" +"The RAID %1 is in use. It cannot be\n" +"resized. To resize %1, make sure it is not used." +msgstr "" + +#. push button text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid.rb:132 +msgid "Add RAID..." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid.rb:141 +msgid "<p>This view shows all RAIDs except BIOS RAIDs.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid.rb:204 +msgid "" +"<p>This view shows detailed information about the\n" +"selected RAID.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid.rb:272 +msgid "" +"<p>This view shows all devices used by the\n" +"selected RAID.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. heading +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid.rb:308 +msgid "RAID: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. list entry +#. Column header +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-settings.rb:36 src/modules/StorageFields.rb:165 +msgid "Label" +msgstr "" + +#. list entry +#. combo box entry +#. Column header +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-settings.rb:38 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-settings.rb:65 src/modules/StorageFields.rb:162 +msgid "UUID" +msgstr "" + +#. list entry +#. Column header +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-settings.rb:40 src/modules/StorageFields.rb:147 +msgid "Mount by" +msgstr "" + +#. list entry +#. Column header +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-settings.rb:42 src/modules/StorageFields.rb:150 +msgid "Used by" +msgstr "" + +#. list entry +#. Column header +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-settings.rb:44 src/modules/StorageFields.rb:174 +msgid "BIOS ID" +msgstr "" + +#. list entry +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-settings.rb:47 +msgid "Cylinder information" +msgstr "" + +#. list entry +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-settings.rb:52 +msgid "Fibre Channel information" +msgstr "" + +#. list entry +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-settings.rb:56 +msgid "Encryption" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box entry +#. combo box entry +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-settings.rb:61 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-settings.rb:81 +msgid "Device Name" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box entry +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-settings.rb:63 +msgid "Volume Label" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box entry +#. combo box entry +#. Column header +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-settings.rb:67 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-settings.rb:83 src/modules/StorageFields.rb:171 +msgid "Device ID" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box entry +#. combo box entry +#. Column header +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-settings.rb:69 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-settings.rb:85 src/modules/StorageFields.rb:168 +msgid "Device Path" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box entry +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-settings.rb:74 +msgid "Optimal" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box entry +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-settings.rb:76 +msgid "Cylinder" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-settings.rb:136 +msgid "Default Mount by" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-settings.rb:145 +msgid "Default File System" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-settings.rb:154 +msgid "Alignment of Newly Created Partitions" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-settings.rb:164 +msgid "Show Storage Devices by" +msgstr "" + +#. multi selection box label +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-settings.rb:177 +msgid "Visible Information on Storage Devices" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-settings.rb:191 +msgid "" +"<p>This view shows general storage\n" +"settings:</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-settings.rb:196 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Default Mount by</b> gives the mount by\n" +"method for newly created file systems. <i>Device Name</i> uses the kernel\n" +"device name, which is not persistent. <i>Device ID</i> and <i>Device Path</i>\n" +"use names generated by udev from hardware information. These should be\n" +"persistent but unfortunately this is not always true. Finally <i>UUID</i> and\n" +"<i>Volume Label</i> use the file systems UUID and label.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-settings.rb:209 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Default File System</b> gives the file\n" +"system type for newly created file systems.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-settings.rb:217 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Alignment of Newly Created Partitions</b>\n" +"determines how created partitions are aligned. <b>cylinder</b> is the traditional alignment at cylinder boundaries of the disk. <b>optimal</b> aligns the \n" +"partitions for best performance according to hints provided by the Linux \n" +"kernel or tries to be compatible with Windows Vista and Win 7.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-settings.rb:228 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Show Storage Devices by</b> controls\n" +"the name displayed for hard disks in the navigation tree.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-settings.rb:236 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Visible Information On Storage\n" +"Devices</b> allows to hide information in the tables and overview.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-summary.rb:50 +msgid "<p>This view shows the installation summary.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog title +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-tmpfs-dialogs.rb:49 +msgid "Add tmpfs Mount" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-tmpfs-lib.rb:35 +msgid "No tmpfs device selected." +msgstr "" + +#. YesNo popup. %1 is path to a file +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-tmpfs-lib.rb:48 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Really delete tmpfs mounted to %1" +msgstr "" + +#. heading +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-tmpfs.rb:101 +msgid "tmpfs Volumes" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-tmpfs.rb:121 +msgid "<p>This view shows all tmpfs volumes.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-tmpfs.rb:178 +msgid "" +"<p>This view shows detailed information about the\n" +"selected tmpfs volume.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. heading +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-tmpfs.rb:234 +msgid "tmpfs mounted at %1" +msgstr "" + +#. push button text +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-unused.rb:96 +msgid "Rescan" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-unused.rb:104 +msgid "" +"<p>This view shows devices that have no mount\n" +"point assigned to them, disks that are unpartitioned and volume groups that\n" +"have no logical volumes.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. popup message +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-unused.rb:130 +msgid "" +"Rescanning unused devices cancels\n" +"all current changes. Really rescan unused devices?" +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. Copyright (c) 2012 Novell, Inc. +#. +#. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it +#. under the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as published +#. by the Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +#. ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or +#. FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for +#. more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along +#. with this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, you may +#. find current contact information at www.novell.com. +#. File: ep-main.ycp +#. Package: yast2-storage +#. Summary: Expert Partitioner +#. Authors: Arvin Schnell +#: src/include/partitioning/lvm_lv_lib.rb:38 +msgid "" +"A logical volume with the requested size could \n" +"not be created.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/partitioning/lvm_lv_lib.rb:42 +msgid "Try reducing the stripe count of the volume." +msgstr "" + +#. Popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/lvm_ui_dialogs.rb:48 +msgid "You can only remove logical volumes." +msgstr "" + +#. Popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/lvm_ui_dialogs.rb:54 +msgid "" +"There is at least one snapshot active for this volume.\n" +"Remove the snapshot first." +msgstr "" + +#. Popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/lvm_ui_dialogs.rb:63 +msgid "" +"There is at least one thin volume using this pool.\n" +"Remove the thin volume first." +msgstr "" + +#. Popup text +#: src/include/partitioning/lvm_ui_dialogs.rb:69 +msgid "Remove the logical volume %1?" +msgstr "" + +#. footer text, %1 is replaced by size +#: src/modules/DevicesSelectionBox.rb:92 +msgid "Total size: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. footer text, %1 is replaced by size +#: src/modules/DevicesSelectionBox.rb:107 +msgid "Resulting size: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. Copyright (c) 2012 Novell, Inc. +#. +#. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it +#. under the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as published +#. by the Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +#. ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or +#. FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for +#. more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along +#. with this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, you may +#. find current contact information at www.novell.com. +#. File: DualMultiSelectionBox.ycp +#. Package: yast2-storage +#. Summary: Expert Partitioner +#. Authors: Arvin Schnell +#. +#. The items must have the `id() as their first element. +#. button text +#: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:89 +#: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:312 +#: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:428 +msgid "Class" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:99 +msgid "Top" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:101 +msgid "Up" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:103 +msgid "Down" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:105 +msgid "Bottom" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:107 +msgid "Classify" +msgstr "" + +#. push button text +#: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:134 +msgid "Add" +msgstr "" + +#. push button text +#: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:140 +msgid "Add All" +msgstr "" + +#. push button text +#: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:153 +msgid "Remove All" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup text +#: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:183 +msgid "File %1 is not a regular file!" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup text +#: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:188 +msgid "File %1 is too big!" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup text +#: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:212 +msgid "" +"Pattern file has invalid format!\n" +"\n" +"The file needs to contain lines with a regular expression and a class name\n" +"per line. Example:" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:237 +msgid "Detected following pattern lines:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:250 +msgid "Ok to match devices to classes with these patterns?" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog help text +#: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:316 +msgid "" +"<p>This dialog is for defining classes for the raid devices\n" +"contained in the raid. Available classes are A, B, C, D and E but for many cases\n" +"fewer classes are needed (e.g. only A and B). </p>" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog help text +#: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:325 +msgid "" +"<p>You can put a device into a class by right-clicking on the\n" +"device and choosing the appropriate class from context menu. By pressing the \n" +"Ctrl or Shift key you can select multiple devices and put them into a class in\n" +"one step. One can also use the buttons labeled \"%1\" to \"%2\" to put currently \n" +"selected devices into this class.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog help text +#: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:340 +msgid "" +"<p>After choosing classes for devices you can order the \n" +"devices by pressing one of the buttons labeled \"%1\" or \"%2\"." +msgstr "" + +#. dialog help text +#: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:351 +msgid "" +"<b>Sorted</b> puts all devices of class A before all devices\n" +"of class B and so on." +msgstr "" + +#. dialog help text +#: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:359 +msgid "" +"<b>Interleaved</b> uses first device of class A, then first device of \n" +"class B, then all the following classes with assigned devices. Then the \n" +"second device of class A, the second device of class B, and so on will follow." +msgstr "" + +#. dialog help text +#: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:369 +msgid "" +"All devices without a class are sorted to the end of devices list.\n" +"When you leave the pop-up the current order of the devices is used as the \n" +"order in the RAID to be created.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog help text +#: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:379 +msgid "" +"By pressing button \"<b>%1</b>\" you can select a file that contains\n" +"lines with a regular expression and a class name (e.g. \"sda.* A\"). All devices that match \n" +"the regular expression will be put into the class on this line. The regular expression is \n" +"matched against the kernel name (e.g. /dev/sda1), \n" +"the udev path name (e.g. /dev/disk/by-path/pci-0000:00:1f.2-scsi-0:0:0:0-part1) and the\n" +"the udev id (e.g. /dev/disk/by-id/ata-ST3500418AS_9VMN8X8L-part1). \n" +"The first match finally determines the class if a devices name matches more then one\n" +"regular expression.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. headline text +#. Column header +#: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:428 src/modules/StorageFields.rb:126 +msgid "Device" +msgstr "" + +#. headline text +#: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:550 +msgid "Pattern File" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:278 +msgid "Tmpfs &Size" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:287 +msgid "" +"Invalid Size specified. Use number followed by K, M, G or %.\n" +"Value must be above 100k or between 1% and 200%. Try again." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:290 +msgid "Value must be between 1% and 200%. Try again." +msgstr "" + +#. help text, richtext format +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:297 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Tmpfs Size:</b>\n" +"Size may be either entered as a number followed by K,M,G for Kilo-, Mega- or Gigabyte or\n" +"as a number followed by a percent sign meaning percentage of memory.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:311 +msgid "Swap &Priority" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:319 +msgid "Value must be between 0 and 32767. Try again." +msgstr "" + +#. help text, richtext format +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:326 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Swap Priority:</b>\n" +"Enter the swap priority. Higher numbers mean higher priority.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. button text +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:481 +msgid "Mount &Read-Only" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, richtext format +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:485 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Mount Read-Only:</b>\n" +"Writing to the file system is not possible. Default is false. During installation\n" +"the file system is always mounted read-write.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. button text +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:497 +msgid "No &Access Time" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, richtext format +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:501 +msgid "" +"<p><b>No Access Time:</b>\n" +"Access times are not updated when a file is read. Default is false.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. button text +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:511 +msgid "Mountable by User" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, richtext format +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:515 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Mountable by User:</b>\n" +"The file system may be mounted by an ordinary user. Default is false.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. button text +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:528 +msgid "Do Not Mount at System &Start-up" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, richtext format +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:534 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Do Not Mount at System Start-up:</b>\n" +"The file system is not automatically mounted when the system starts.\n" +"An entry in /etc/fstab is created and the file system is mounted\n" +"with the appropriate options when the command <tt>mount <mount point></tt>\n" +"is entered (<mount point> is the directory to which the file system is mounted). Default is false.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. button text +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:551 +msgid "Enable &Quota Support" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, richtext format +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:557 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Enable Quota Support:</b>\n" +"The file system is mounted with user quotas enabled.\n" +"Default is false.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:576 +msgid "Data &Journaling Mode" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, richtext format +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:585 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Data Journaling Mode:</b>\n" +"Specifies the journaling mode for file data.\n" +"<tt>journal</tt> -- All data is committed to the journal prior to being\n" +"written into the main file system. Highest performance impact.<br>\n" +"<tt>ordered</tt> -- All data is forced directly out to the main file system\n" +"prior to its metadata being committed to the journal. Medium performance impact.<br>\n" +"<tt>writeback</tt> -- Data ordering is not preserved. No performance impact.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. button text +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:606 +msgid "&Access Control Lists (ACL)" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, richtext format +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:610 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Access Control Lists (ACL):</b>\n" +"Enable access control lists on the file system.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. button text +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:621 +msgid "&Extended User Attributes" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, richtext format +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:625 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Extended User Attributes:</b>\n" +"Allow extended user attributes on the file system.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:642 +msgid "Arbitrary Option &Value" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:647 +msgid "Invalid characters in arbitrary option value. Do not use spaces or tabs. Try again." +msgstr "" + +#. help text, richtext format +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:651 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Arbitrary Option Value:</b>\n" +"In this field, type any legal mount option allowed in the fourth field of /etc/fstab.\n" +"Multiple options are separated by commas.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:668 +msgid "Char&set for file names" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, richtext format +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:689 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Charset for File Names:</b>\n" +"Set the charset used for display of file names in Windows partitions.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:700 +msgid "Code&page for short FAT names" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, richtext format +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:706 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Codepage for Short FAT Names:</b>\n" +"This codepage is used for converting to shortname characters on FAT file systems.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:720 +msgid "Number of &FATs" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, richtext format +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:726 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Number of FATs:</b>\n" +"Specify the number of file allocation tables in the file system. The default is 2.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:735 +msgid "FAT &Size" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, richtext format +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:746 +msgid "" +"<p><b>FAT Size:</b>\n" +"Specifies the type of file allocation tables used (12, 16, or 32-bit). If auto is specified, YaST will automatically select the value most suitable for the file system size.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:755 +msgid "Root &Dir Entries" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:763 +msgid "The minimum size for \"Root Dir Entries\" is 112. Try again." +msgstr "" + +#. help text, richtext format +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:767 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Root Dir Entries:</b>\n" +"Select the number of entries available in the root directory.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:780 +msgid "Hash &Function" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, richtext format +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:787 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Hash Function:</b>\n" +"This specifies the name of the hash function to use to sort the file names in directories.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:796 +msgid "FS &Revision" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, richtext format +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:803 +msgid "" +"<p><b>FS Revision:</b>\n" +"This option defines the reiserfs format revision to use. '3.5' is for backwards compatibility with kernels of the 2.2.x series. '3.6' is more recent, but can only be used with kernel versions greater than or equal to 2.4.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#. label text +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:816 src/modules/FileSystems.rb:980 +msgid "Block &Size in Bytes" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, richtext format +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:823 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Block Size:</b>\n" +"Specify the size of blocks in bytes. Valid block size values are 512, 1024, 2048 and 4096 bytes per block. If auto is selected, the standard block size of 4096 is used.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#. label text +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:832 src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1062 +msgid "&Inode Size" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, richtext format +#. help text, richtext format +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:838 src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1068 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Inode Size:</b>\n" +"This option specifies the inode size of the file system.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:847 +msgid "&Percentage of Inode Space" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, richtext format +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:875 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Percentage of Inode Space:</b>\n" +"The option \"Percentage of Inode Space\" specifies the maximum percentage of space in the file system that can be allocated to inodes.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:884 +msgid "Inode &Aligned" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, richtext format +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:890 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Inode Aligned:</b>\n" +"The option \"Inode Aligned\" is used to specify whether inode allocation is or\n" +"is not aligned. By default inodes are aligned, which\n" +"is usually more efficient than unaligned access.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:920 +msgid "&Log Size in Megabytes" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:929 +msgid "" +"The \"Log Size\" value is incorrect.\n" +"Enter a value greater than zero.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. xgettext: no-c-format +#. help text, richtext format +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:934 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Log Size</b>\n" +"Set the log size (in megabytes). If auto, the default is 40% of the aggregate size.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:942 +msgid "Invoke Bad Blocks List &Utility" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:956 +msgid "Stride &Length in Blocks" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:964 +msgid "" +"The \"Stride Length in Blocks\" value is invalid.\n" +"Select a value greater than 1.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, richtext format +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:968 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Stride Length in Blocks:</b>\n" +"Set RAID-related options for the file system. Currently, the only supported\n" +"argument is 'stride', which takes the number of blocks in a\n" +"RAID stripe as its argument.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, richtext format +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:987 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Block Size:</b>\n" +"Specify the size of blocks in bytes. Valid block size values are 1024, 2048, and 4096 bytes per block. If auto is selected, the block size is determined by the file system size and the expected use of the file system.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:996 +msgid "Bytes per &Inode" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, richtext format +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1002 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Bytes per Inode:</b> \n" +"Specify the bytes to inode ratio. YaST creates an inode for every\n" +"<bytes-per-inode> bytes of space on the disk. The larger the\n" +"bytes-per-inode ratio, the fewer inodes will be created. Generally, this\n" +"value should not be smaller than the block size of the file system, or else\n" +"too many inodes will be created. It is not possible to expand the number of\n" +"inodes on a file system after its creation. So be sure to enter a reasonable\n" +"value for this parameter.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1018 +msgid "Percentage of Blocks &Reserved for root" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1028 +msgid "" +"The \"Percentage of Blocks Reserved for root\" value is incorrect.\n" +"Allowed are float numbers no larger than 99 (e.g. 0.5).\n" +msgstr "" + +#. xgettext: no-c-format +#. help text, richtext format +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1033 +msgid "<p><b>Percentage of Blocks Reserved for root:</b> Specify the percentage of blocks reserved for the super user. The default is computed so that normally 1 Gig is reserved. Upper limit for reserved default is 5.0, lowest reserved default is 0.1.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox text +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1042 +msgid "Disable Regular Checks" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, richtext format +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1050 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Disable Regular Checks:</b>\n" +"Disable regular file system check at booting.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1077 +msgid "&Directory Index Feature" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, richtext format +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1084 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Directory Index:</b>\n" +"Enables use of hashed b-trees to speed up lookups in large directories.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1096 +msgid "&No Journal" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, richtext format +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1103 +msgid "" +"<p><b>No Journal:</b>\n" +"Suppressed use of journaling on filesystem. Only activate this when you really\n" +"know what you are doing.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. this version makes some problems with interpreter, above lookup/add is OK +#: src/modules/Partitions.rb:930 +msgid "Operation not permitted on disk %1.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text %1 is replaced by disk name e.g. /dev/hda +#: src/modules/Partitions.rb:940 +msgid "" +"\n" +"The partitioning on your disk %1 is either not readable or not \n" +"supported by the partitioning tool parted used to change the\n" +"partition table.\n" +"\n" +"You can use the partitions on disk %1 as they are or\n" +"format them and assign mount points, but you cannot add, edit, \n" +"resize, or remove partitions from that disk here.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text %1 is replaced by disk name e.g. /dev/dasda +#: src/modules/Partitions.rb:958 +msgid "" +"\n" +"The disk %1 does not contain a partition table but for\n" +"compatibility the kernel has automatically generated a\n" +"partition spanning almost the entire disk.\n" +"\n" +"You can use the partition on disk %1 as it is or\n" +"format it and assign a mount point, but you cannot resize\n" +"or remove the partition from that disk here.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/modules/Partitions.rb:977 +msgid "" +"\n" +"\n" +"You can initialize the disk partition table to a sane state in the Expert\n" +"Partitioner by selecting \"Expert\"->\"Create New Partition Table\", \n" +"but this will destroy all data on all partitions of this disk.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/modules/Partitions.rb:989 +msgid "" +"\n" +"\n" +"Safely ignore this message if you do not intend to use \n" +"this disk during installation.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Returns map of free space per partition +#. +#. @param [String] device +#. @param integer testsize +#. @param [Symbol] used_fs +#. @param [Boolean] verbose +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:992 +msgid "Resize Not Possible:" +msgstr "" + +#. Sets a new size for volume +#. +#. @param [String] device name +#. @param [String] disk +#. @param integer new_size (in kBytes) +#. @return [Boolean] if successful +#. mark swap-partitions with pseudo Mountpoint swap in targetMap +#. @param [Hash{String => map}] target Disk map +#. @return [Hash{String => map}] modified target +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:2692 src/modules/Storage.rb:3915 +msgid "" +"Could not set encryption.\n" +"System error code is %1.\n" +"\n" +"The encryption password provided could be incorrect.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:3946 +msgid "" +"The first and the second version\n" +"of the password do not match.\n" +"Try again." +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:3977 +msgid "" +"The password may only contain the following characters:\n" +"0..9, a..z, A..Z, and any of \"@#* ,.;:._-+=!$%&/|?{[()]}^\\<>\".\n" +"Try again." +msgstr "" + +#. Label: get password for encrypted volume +#. Please use newline if label is longer than 40 characters +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4031 +msgid "&Enter Encryption Password:" +msgstr "" + +#. Clear password fields on every round. +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4090 +msgid "Provide Password" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4109 +msgid "The following encrypted volumes are already available." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4124 +msgid "Encrypted Volume Activation" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4128 +msgid "" +"The following volumes contain an encryption signature but the \n" +"passwords are not yet known.\n" +"The passwords need to be known if the volumes are needed either \n" +"during an update or if they contain an encrypted LVM physical volume." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4140 +msgid "Do you want to provide encryption passwords?" +msgstr "" + +#. text in help field +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4197 +msgid "" +"Enter encryption password for any of the\n" +"devices in the locked devices list.\n" +"Password will be tried for all devices." +msgstr "" + +#. header text +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4203 +msgid "Enter Encryption Password" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4206 +msgid "There are no encrypted volume to unlock." +msgstr "" + +#. label text, multiple device names follow +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4219 +msgid "Provide password for any of the following devices:" +msgstr "" + +#. label text, one device name follows +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4222 +msgid "Provide password for the following device:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4235 +msgid "Trying to unlock encrypted volumes..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4259 +msgid "Password did not unlock any volume." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4345 +msgid "IDE Disk" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4351 +msgid "SCSI Disk" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4357 +msgid "Disk" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4385 +msgid "DM RAID" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4398 +msgid "MD RAID" +msgstr "" + +#. TODO: more informative error message, but the Package module does +#. not provide anything +#. TRANSLATORS: error popup +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4893 +msgid "Installing required packages failed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4894 src/modules/StorageClients.rb:159 +msgid "Continue despite the error?" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: error popup +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5252 +msgid "Partitions cannot be created since other partitions on the disk are used." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5278 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Device %1 cannot be modified because it contains activated swap\n" +"that is needed to run the installation.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5292 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Device %1 cannot be modified because it contains the installation\n" +"data needed to perform the installation.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5321 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Device %1 cannot be removed because it contains activated swap\n" +"that is needed to run the installation.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5330 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Device %1 cannot be removed because it contains the installation\n" +"data needed to perform the installation.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5359 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Device %1 cannot be removed because this would indirectly change\n" +"device %2, which contains activated swap that is needed to run \n" +"the installation.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5370 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Device %1 cannot be removed because this would indirectly change\n" +"device %2, which contains data needed to perform the installation.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. the check for verbose is needed for calls from StorageProposal (see bnc#871779) +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5392 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Partition %1 cannot be removed since other partitions on the\n" +"disk %2 are used.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. FIXME: please, add description of the list that is returned by this function. +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5481 +msgid "Nothing assigned as root filesystem!" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5482 +msgid "Installation will most certainly fail fatally!" +msgstr "" + +#. Set rather than Add, there might be some packs left over +#. from previous 'MakeProposal' we don't need now +#. This also covers the case when AddPackagesList returns [] or nil +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:6032 +msgid "Adding the following resolvables failed: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. hack: assume every text change means another action +#: src/modules/StorageClients.rb:139 +msgid "Failure occurred during the following action:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/StorageClients.rb:151 +msgid "System error code was: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. Label: get password for device +#. Please use newline if label is longer than 40 characters +#: src/modules/StorageClients.rb:199 +msgid "&Enter Password for Device %1:" +msgstr "" + +#. human text for Boolean value +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:86 +msgid "Yes" +msgstr "" + +#. human text for Boolean value +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:89 +msgid "No" +msgstr "" + +#. Column header, abbreviation for "format" (to format a partition) +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:135 +msgid "F" +msgstr "" + +#. Column header, , abbreviation for "encrypted" (an encrypted device) +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:138 +msgid "Enc" +msgstr "" + +#. Column header, abbreviation for "Filesystem Type" +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:141 +msgid "FS Type" +msgstr "" + +#. Column header +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:153 +msgid "Start" +msgstr "" + +#. Column header +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:156 +msgid "End" +msgstr "" + +#. Column header +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:159 +msgid "FS ID" +msgstr "" + +#. Column header +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:177 +msgid "Disk Label" +msgstr "" + +#. Column header +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:180 +msgid "Metadata" +msgstr "" + +#. Column header, abbreviation for "Physical Extent" +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:183 +msgid "PE Size" +msgstr "" + +#. Column header +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:189 +msgid "RAID Version" +msgstr "" + +#. Column header +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:198 +msgid "Parity Algorithm" +msgstr "" + +#. Column header +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:201 +msgid "Vendor" +msgstr "" + +#. Column header +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:204 +msgid "Model" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for table column and overview entry +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:223 +msgid "" +"<b>BIOS ID</b> shows the BIOS ID of the hard\n" +"disk. This field can be empty." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for table column and overview entry +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:231 +msgid "" +"<b>Bus</b> shows how the device is connected to\n" +"the system. This field can be empty, e.g. for multipath disks." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for table column and overview entry +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:239 +msgid "" +"<b>Chunk Size</b> shows the chunk size for RAID\n" +"devices." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for table column and overview entry +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:245 +msgid "" +"<b>Cylinder Size</b> shows the size of the\n" +"cylinders of the hard disk." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for table column and overview entry +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:253 +msgid "" +"<b>Sector Size</b> shows the size of the\n" +"sectors of the hard disk." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for table column and overview entry +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:261 +msgid "" +"<b>Device</b> shows the kernel name of the\n" +"device." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for table column and overview entry +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:267 +msgid "" +"<b>Disk Label</b> shows the partition table\n" +"type of the disk, e.g <tt>MSDOS</tt> or <tt>GPT</tt>." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for table column and overview entry +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:275 +msgid "" +"<b>Encrypted</b> shows whether the device is\n" +"encrypted." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for table column and overview entry +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:281 +msgid "" +"<b>End Cylinder</b> shows the end cylinder of\n" +"the partition." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for table column and overview entry +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:287 +msgid "" +"<b>LUN</b> shows the Logical Unit Number for\n" +"Fibre Channel disks." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for table column and overview entry +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:295 +msgid "" +"<b>Port ID</b> shows the port id for Fibre\n" +"Channel disks." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for table column and overview entry +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:301 +msgid "" +"<b>WWPN</b> shows the World Wide Port Name for\n" +"Fibre Channel disks." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for table column and overview entry +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:309 +msgid "" +"<b>File Path</b> shows the path of the file for\n" +"an encrypted loop device." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for table column and overview entry +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:317 +msgid "" +"<b>Format</b> shows some flags: <tt>F</tt>\n" +"means the device is selected to be formatted." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for table column and overview entry +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:323 +msgid "<b>FS ID</b> shows the file system id." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for table column and overview entry +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:326 +msgid "<b>FS Type</b> shows the file system type." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for table column and overview entry +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:331 +msgid "" +"<b>Label</b> shows the label of the file\n" +"system." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for table column and overview entry +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:337 +msgid "" +"<b>Metadata</b> shows the LVM metadata type for\n" +"volume groups." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for table column and overview entry +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:341 +msgid "<b>Model</b> shows the device model." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for table column and overview entry +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:346 +msgid "" +"<b>Mount by</b> indicates how the file system\n" +"is mounted: (Kernel) by kernel name, (Label) by file system label, (UUID) by\n" +"file system UUID, (ID) by device ID, and (Path) by device path.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for table column and overview entry +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:356 +msgid "" +"A question mark (?) indicates that\n" +"the file system is not listed in <tt>/etc/fstab</tt>. It is either mounted\n" +"manually or by some automount system. When changing settings for this volume\n" +"YaST will not update <tt>/etc/fstab</tt>.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for table column and overview entry +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:368 +msgid "" +"<b>Mount Point</b> shows where the file system\n" +"is mounted." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for table column and overview entry +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:374 +msgid "" +"An asterisk (*) after the mount point\n" +"indicates a file system that is currently not mounted (for example, because it\n" +"has the <tt>noauto</tt> option set in <tt>/etc/fstab</tt>)." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for table column and overview entry +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:385 +msgid "" +"<b>Number of Cylinders</b> shows how many\n" +"cylinders the hard disk has." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for table column and overview entry +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:393 +msgid "" +"<b>Parity Algorithm</b> shows the parity\n" +"algorithm for RAID devices with RAID type 5, 6 or 10." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for table column and overview entry +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:401 +msgid "" +"<b>PE Size</b> shows the physical extent size\n" +"for LVM volume groups." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for table column and overview entry +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:407 +msgid "<b>RAID Version</b> shows the RAID version." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for table column and overview entry +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:412 +msgid "" +"<b>RAID Type</b> shows the RAID type, also\n" +"called RAID level, for RAID devices." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for table column and overview entry +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:418 +msgid "<b>Size</b> shows the size of the device." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for table column and overview entry +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:423 +msgid "" +"<b>Start Cylinder</b> shows the start cylinder\n" +"of the partition." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for table column and overview entry +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:431 +msgid "" +"<b>Stripes</b> shows the stripe number for LVM\n" +"logical volumes and, if greater than one, the stripe size in parenthesis.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for table column and overview entry +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:439 +msgid "" +"<b>Type</b> gives a general overview about the\n" +"device type." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for table column and overview entry +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:445 +msgid "" +"<b>Device ID</b> shows the persistent device\n" +"IDs. This field can be empty.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for table column and overview entry +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:453 +msgid "" +"<b>Device Path</b> shows the persistent device\n" +"path. This field can be empty." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for table column and overview entry +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:461 +msgid "" +"<b>Used By</b> shows if a device is used by\n" +"e.g. RAID or LVM. If not, this column is empty.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for table column and overview entry +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:469 +msgid "" +"<b>UUID</b> shows the Universally Unique\n" +"Identifier of the file system." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for table column and overview entry +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:475 +msgid "<b>Vendor</b> shows the device vendor." +msgstr "" + +#. row label, %1 is replace by device name +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:504 +msgid "Device: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. row label, %1 is replace by size +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:512 +msgid "Size: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:548 +msgid "DISK %1" +msgstr "" + +#. row label +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:570 +msgid "Type: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. row label +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:587 +msgid "Format: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. row label, %1 is replace by "Yes" or "No" +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:614 +msgid "Encrypted: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. row label, %1 is replace by file system name e.g. "Ext3" +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:627 +msgid "File System: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. row label, %1 is replace by mount point e.g. "/mnt" +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:643 +msgid "Mount Point: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. row label, %1 is replace by mount by method +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:678 +msgid "Mount by: %1" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:688 +msgid "Used by %1: %2" +msgstr "" + +#. row label, %1 is replace by file system uuid +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:704 +msgid "UUID: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. row label, %1 is replace by file system label +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:712 +msgid "Label: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. row label, %1 is replace by udev device path +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:720 +msgid "Device Path: %1" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:730 +msgid "Device ID %1: %2" +msgstr "" + +#. row label, %1 is replace by bios id +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:744 +msgid "BIOS ID: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. row label, %1 is replace by disk label e.g. "MSDOS" or "GPT" +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:754 +msgid "Disk Label: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. row label, %1 is replace by vendor name +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:762 +msgid "Vendor: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. row label, %1 is replace by model string +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:770 +msgid "Model: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. row label, %1 is replace by bus name e.g. "SCSI" +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:793 +msgid "Bus: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. row label, %1 is replace by metadata version string +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:804 +msgid "Metadata: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. row label, %1 is replace by size +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:817 +msgid "PE Size: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. row label, %1 is replace by integer +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:838 +msgid "Stripes: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. row label, %1 is replace by raid version e.g. "1.00" +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:846 +msgid "RAID Version: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. row label, %1 is replace by raid type e.g. "RAID1" +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:854 +msgid "RAID Type: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. row label, %1 is replace by size +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:867 +msgid "Chunk Size: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. row label, %1 is replace by algorithm name +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:879 +msgid "Parity Algorithm: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. row label, %1 is replace by integer +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:890 +msgid "Number of Cylinders: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. row label, %1 is replace by size +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:903 +msgid "Cylinder Size: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. row label, %1 is replace by integer +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:920 +msgid "Start Cylinder: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. row label, %1 is replace by integer +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:939 +msgid "End Cylinder: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. row label, %1 is replace by size +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:952 +msgid "Sector Size: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. row label, %1 is replace by file system id +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:964 +msgid "FS ID: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. row label, %1 is replace by file path e.g. "/data/secret" +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:973 +msgid "File Path: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. row label, %1 is replace by wwpn +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:997 +msgid "WWPN: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. row label, %1 is replace by lun +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:1010 +msgid "LUN: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. row label, %1 is replace by port id +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:1032 +msgid "Port ID: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. The predicate function determines whether the disk/partition is +#. included. The predicate function takes two arguments, disk and +#. partition. For disks predicate is called with the partitions set to +#. nil. +#. +#. Possible return values for predicate: +#. `show, `follow, `showandfollow, `ignore +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:1304 +msgid "<p>The table contains:</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. heading +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:1356 +msgid "Device:" +msgstr "" + +#. heading +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:1359 +msgid "File System:" +msgstr "" + +#. heading +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:1362 +msgid "Hard Disk:" +msgstr "" + +#. heading +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:1365 +msgid "Fibre Channel:" +msgstr "" + +#. heading +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:1368 +msgid "LVM:" +msgstr "" + +#. heading +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:1371 +msgid "RAID:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:1414 +msgid "<p>The overview contains:</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/modules/StorageInit.rb:91 +msgid "" +"The storage subsystem is locked by an unknown application.\n" +"You must quit that application before you can continue." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/modules/StorageInit.rb:105 +msgid "" +"The storage subsystem is locked by the application \"%1\" (%2).\n" +"You must quit that application before you can continue." +msgstr "" + +#. enable snapshots for root volume if desired +#. penalty for not having separate /home +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:4560 src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:5683 +msgid "Resize impossible due to inconsistent file system. Try checking file system under Windows." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: checkbox text +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6179 +msgid "Create &LVM-based Proposal" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: checkbox text +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6194 +msgid "Encr&ypt Volume Group" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: combobox label +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6212 +msgid "File System for Root Partition" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: combobox label +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6259 +msgid "File System for Home Partition" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: checkbox text +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6277 +msgid "Enlarge &Swap for Suspend" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6287 +msgid "Proposal Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: help text +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6302 +msgid "" +"<p>To create an LVM-based proposal, choose the corresponding button. The\n" +"LVM-based proposal can be encrypted.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: help text +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6309 +msgid "" +"<p>The filesystem for the root partition can be selected with the\n" +"corresponding combo box. With the filesystem BtrFS the proposal can\n" +"enable automatic snapshots with snapper. This will also increase the\n" +"size for the root partition.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: help text +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6318 +msgid "" +"<p>The proposal can create a separate home partition. The filesystem for\n" +"the home partition can be selected with the corresponding combo box.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: help text +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6325 +msgid "" +"<p>The swap partition can be made large enough to be used to suspend\n" +"the system to disk in most cases.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6350 +msgid "Enter your password for the proposal encryption." +msgstr "" + +#. Label: get password for user root +#. Please use newline if label is longer than 40 characters +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6357 +msgid "Password:" +msgstr "" + +#. Label: get same password again for verification +#. Please use newline if label is longer than 40 characters +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6368 +msgid "Reenter the password for verification:" +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. Copyright (c) 2012 Novell, Inc. +#. +#. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it +#. under the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as published +#. by the Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +#. ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or +#. FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for +#. more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along +#. with this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, you may +#. find current contact information at www.novell.com. +#. File: StorageSettings.ycp +#. Package: yast2-storage +#. Summary: Expert Partitioner +#. Authors: Arvin Schnell +#: src/modules/StorageSettings.rb:179 +msgid "Default Mount-by:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/StorageSettings.rb:180 +msgid "Default File System:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/StorageSettings.rb:181 +msgid "Show Storage Devices by:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/StorageSettings.rb:182 +msgid "Partition Alignment:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/StorageSettings.rb:183 +msgid "Visible Information on Storage Devices:" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/sudo.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/sudo.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/sudo.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,775 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. Command line help text for the Xsudo module +#: src/clients/sudo.rb:54 +msgid "Configuration of sudo" +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. Copyright (c) 2006 Novell, Inc. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under +#. the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as published by the +#. Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +#. ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS +#. FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with +#. this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, you may find +#. current contact information at www.novell.com. +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. File: include/sudo/complex.ycp +#. Package: Configuration of sudo +#. Summary: Dialogs definitions +#. Authors: Bubli +#. +#. $Id: complex.ycp 29363 2006-03-24 08:20:43Z mzugec $ +#: src/include/sudo/complex.rb:72 +msgid "" +"A valid netmask is either in dotted quad notation \n" +"(4 integers in the range 128 - 255 separated by dots) \n" +"or single integer in the range 0 - 32" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/complex.rb:95 +msgid "Add New Host to the Alias" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/complex.rb:99 +msgid "Hostname or Network" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/complex.rb:136 +msgid "Add New User to the Alias" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/complex.rb:142 +msgid "Local and System Users (Groups)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/complex.rb:176 +msgid "File, directory or command alias '%1' does not exist." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/complex.rb:195 +msgid "Add new command with optional parameters" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/complex.rb:202 src/include/sudo/dialog-cmnd.rb:52 +#: src/include/sudo/dialog-spec.rb:82 +msgid "Command" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/complex.rb:204 +msgid "Browse" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/complex.rb:206 +msgid "Parameters (optional)" +msgstr "" + +#. yes-no popup - an error occured when saving the configuration +#: src/include/sudo/complex.rb:291 +msgid "Saving sudoer's configuration failed. Change the settings?" +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#: src/include/sudo/dialog-cmnd.rb:40 +msgid "New Command Alias" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/dialog-cmnd.rb:44 +msgid "Existing Command Alias" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/dialog-cmnd.rb:48 src/include/sudo/dialog-host.rb:52 +#: src/include/sudo/dialog-runas.rb:58 src/include/sudo/dialog-user.rb:59 +msgid "Alias Name (in CAPITALS)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/dialog-cmnd.rb:49 +msgid "Command Names or Directories in the Alias" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/dialog-cmnd.rb:52 src/include/sudo/dialog-spec.rb:82 +msgid "Parameters" +msgstr "" + +#. next +#. next +#. next +#. next +#: src/include/sudo/dialog-cmnd.rb:101 src/include/sudo/dialog-host.rb:102 +#: src/include/sudo/dialog-runas.rb:109 src/include/sudo/dialog-user.rb:108 +msgid "Alias name must not be empty." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/dialog-cmnd.rb:109 src/include/sudo/dialog-host.rb:110 +#: src/include/sudo/dialog-runas.rb:117 src/include/sudo/dialog-user.rb:116 +msgid "Alias with name %1 already exists" +msgstr "" + +#. Sudo::RemoveHostAlias(current_alias_name); +#: src/include/sudo/dialog-cmnd.rb:118 src/include/sudo/dialog-host.rb:121 +#: src/include/sudo/dialog-runas.rb:126 src/include/sudo/dialog-user.rb:125 +msgid "Alias must have at least one member." +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#: src/include/sudo/dialog-host.rb:44 +msgid "New Host Alias" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/dialog-host.rb:48 +msgid "Existing Host Alias" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/dialog-host.rb:53 +msgid "Hostnames or Networks in the Alias" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/dialog-host.rb:54 +msgid "Hostnames/Networks" +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#: src/include/sudo/dialog-runas.rb:47 +msgid "New RunAs Alias" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/dialog-runas.rb:54 +msgid "Existing RunAs Alias" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/dialog-runas.rb:64 src/include/sudo/dialog-user.rb:64 +msgid "Alias Members" +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#: src/include/sudo/dialog-spec.rb:47 +msgid "New Sudo Rule" +msgstr "" + +#. Setting default values +#: src/include/sudo/dialog-spec.rb:50 +msgid "Existing Sudo Rule " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/dialog-spec.rb:60 +msgid "User, Group or User Alias" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/dialog-spec.rb:68 +msgid "Host or Host Alias" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/dialog-spec.rb:76 +msgid "RunAs or RunAs Alias" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/dialog-spec.rb:80 +msgid "No Password" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/dialog-spec.rb:81 +msgid "Commands to Run" +msgstr "" + +#. next +#: src/include/sudo/dialog-spec.rb:152 +msgid "Username must not be empty." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/dialog-spec.rb:157 +msgid "Hostname must not be empty." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/dialog-spec.rb:166 +msgid "Command list must have at least one entry." +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#: src/include/sudo/dialog-user.rb:47 +msgid "New User Alias" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/dialog-user.rb:54 +msgid "Existing User Alias" +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. Copyright (c) 2006 Novell, Inc. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under +#. the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as published by the +#. Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +#. ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS +#. FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with +#. this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, you may find +#. current contact information at www.novell.com. +#. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +#. File: include/sudo/dialogs.ycp +#. Package: Configuration of sudo +#. Summary: Dialogs definitions +#. Authors: Bubli +#. +#. $Id: dialogs.ycp 27914 2006-02-13 14:32:08Z locilka $ +#: src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:44 +msgid "Sudo Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:109 +msgid "Users" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:110 src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:224 +msgid "Hosts" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:111 +msgid "RunAs" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:112 +msgid "NOPASSWD" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:113 src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:259 +msgid "Commands" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:118 +msgid "Up" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:119 +msgid "Down" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:144 +msgid "Rules for sudo" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:146 +msgid "Rules for sudo " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:154 src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:189 +#: src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:224 src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:259 +msgid "Alias Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:154 src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:189 +msgid "Members" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:179 src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:181 +msgid "User Aliases" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:214 src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:216 +msgid "RunAs Aliases" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:249 src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:251 +msgid "Host Aliases" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:284 src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:286 +msgid "Command Aliases" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:442 +msgid "Yes" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:442 +msgid "No" +msgstr "" + +#. current_alias_name = ""; +#: src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:486 +msgid "" +"Host alias %1 is being used in one of the sudo rules.\n" +"Deleting it may result in an inconsistent sudo configuration file. Really delete it?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. No alias name set so far +#: src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:549 +msgid "" +"User alias %1 is being used in one of the sudo rules.\n" +"Deleting it may result in an inconsistent sudo configuration file. Really delete it?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. No alias name set so far +#: src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:612 +msgid "" +"RunAs alias %1 is being used in one of the sudo rules.\n" +"Deleting it may result in an inconsistent sudo configuration file. Really delete it?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. No alias name set so far +#: src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:674 +msgid "" +"Command alias %1 is being used in one of the sudo rules.\n" +"Deleting it may result in an inconsistent sudo configuration file. Really delete it?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:36 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Initializing sudo Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:40 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Initialization:</big></b><br>\n" +"Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing <b>Abort</b> now.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:44 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Saving sudo Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:48 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Saving:</big></b><br>\n" +"Abort the save procedure by pressing <b>Abort</b>.\n" +"An additional dialog informs whether it is safe to do so.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. User Specification help 1/6 +#: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:55 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Rules for sudo</big></b><br>\n" +"\tRules for sudo basically determine which commands an user may run \n" +"\ton specified hosts (optionally also as what user). Each rule\n" +"\tis a tuple consisting of user, host and list of commands, with optional \n" +"\tRunAs specification and additional tags. These are summarized \n" +"\tin the following table. \n" +"\t</p>\n" +"\t" +msgstr "" + +#. User Specification help 2/6 +#: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:66 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Users</b> column denotes local or system user or user alias. \n" +"\t<b>Hosts</b> column determines, on which hosts, or group \n" +"\tof hosts referred to by host alias an user may run specified commands.\n" +"\t</p>\n" +"\t" +msgstr "" + +#. User Specification help 3/6 +#: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:74 +msgid "" +"<b>RunAs</b> column is an\n" +"\toptional parameter, containing user name (or alias) whose access privileges\n" +"\twill be used to run commands. <b>NOPASSWD</b> is a tag, determining whether\n" +"\tusers need to authorize themselves before running commands.\n" +"\t</p>\n" +"\t" +msgstr "" + +#. User Specification help 4/6 +#: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:83 +msgid "" +"<p>A set of commands that user can run on specified hosts is summarized \n" +"\tin <b>Commands</b> column. \n" +"\t</p>\n" +"\t" +msgstr "" + +#. User Specification help 5/6 +#: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:90 +msgid "" +"<p> To add a new rule, click on <b>Add</b> button and fill in appropriate \n" +"\tentries. User name, hostname and command list must not be empty.\n" +"\t</p>\n" +"\t" +msgstr "" + +#. User Specification help 5/6 +#: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:97 +msgid "" +"<p>To edit existing rule, select an entry from the table and click on \n" +"\t<b>Edit</b> button. To delete selected entry, click on <b>Delete</b> button.\n" +"\t</p> \n" +"\t" +msgstr "" + +#. Single User Specification help 1/4 +#: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:104 +msgid "" +"<p><b>User Name or Alias</b> may be specified by single username (e.g.foo), group name prefixed\n" +"\twith '%' (e.g. %bar), or user alias name. If \n" +"\tkeyword 'ALL' is used, it stands for any user. Select from existing users, groups and aliases \n" +"\tin drop-down menu, or enter your own value. \n" +"\t</p>\n" +"\t" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:112 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Hostname or Alias</b> entry consists of either hostname(e.g. www.example.com), single IP \n" +"\taddress (e.g. 192.168.0.1), IP address combined with netmask, or host alias. If commands may be\n" +"\trun on any host, use keyword 'ALL'. Hostname or IP address is matched against your own hostname\n" +"\tor IP address, so if you don't intend to share one /etc/sudoers file between multiple machines, \n" +"\t'ALL' or 'localhost' entry will be sufficient for almost all purposes. \n" +"\t</p>\n" +"\t" +msgstr "" + +#. Single User Specification help 2/4 +#: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:122 +msgid "" +"<p><b>RunAs Username or Alias</b> is an optional parameter specifying an user, \n" +"\twhose access privileges \n" +"\twill be used to execute particular command. If empty, user <b>root</b> is the default\n" +"\tone. It can be again single username, groupname prefixed with '%' or run_as alias name\n" +"\tSelect from existing users, groups and aliases in drop-down menu, or enter your own value.\n" +"\t</p>\n" +"\t" +msgstr "" + +#. Single User Specification help 3/4 +#: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:132 +msgid "" +"<p><b>No Password</b> is an optional tag. Normally, users have to authenticate\n" +"\tthemselves (i.e. supply their own password, not root's one) before running particular \n" +"\tcommand. Set No Password tag to 'Yes' if you want to\n" +"\tdisable this authentication\n" +"\t</p>\n" +"\t" +msgstr "" + +#. Single User Specification help 4/4 +#: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:141 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Commands to Run</b> table is a list of commands (optionally with\n" +"\tparameters), directories and command aliases that particular user will be allowed \n" +"\tto run. If a directory name is used, any command in that directory can be run. \n" +"\tAgain, keyword 'ALL' stands for any command, so use it with care.\n" +"\t</p>\n" +"\t" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:149 +msgid "" +"To add a new command, click on <b>Add</b> button, fill in command name with optional\n" +"\tparameters and click <b>OK</b>. To remove command, select appropriate entry from the table\n" +"\tand click on <b>Delete</b> button.\n" +"\t" +msgstr "" + +#. User Aliases help 1/3 +#: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:156 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>User Aliases</big></b><br>\n" +"\tIn this dialog, you can configure user aliases. User alias is a set of users that is given\n" +"\tan unique name. This name is later used to refer to all users in this set in sudo configuration. \n" +"\t</p> \n" +"\t" +msgstr "" + +#. User Aliases help 2/3 +#: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:164 +msgid "" +"<p>To add a new user alias, click on <b>Add</b> button and fill in appropriate entries. \n" +"\tAlias name and list of users in the alias must not be empty. \n" +"\t</p>\n" +"\t" +msgstr "" + +#. User Aliases help 3/3 +#: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:171 +msgid "" +"<p>To edit existing user alias, select an entry from the table and click on <b>Edit</b>\n" +"\tbutton. To delete selected entry, click on <b>Delete</b> button. \n" +"\t</p>\n" +"\t" +msgstr "" + +#. Host Aliases help 1/3 +#: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:178 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Host Aliases</big></b><br>\n" +"\tIn this dialog, you can configure host aliases. Host alias is a set of hosts that is given\n" +"\tan unique name. This name is later used to refer to all hosts in this set in sudo configuration. \n" +"\t</p>\n" +"\t" +msgstr "" + +#. Host Aliases help 2/3 +#: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:186 +msgid "" +"<p>To add a new host alias, click on <b>Add</b> button and fill in appropriate entries. \n" +"\tAlias name and list of hosts in the alias must not be empty. \n" +"\t</p>\n" +"\t" +msgstr "" + +#. Host Aliases help 3/3 +#: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:193 +msgid "" +"<p>To edit existing host alias, select an entry from the table and click on <b>Edit</b>\n" +"\tbutton. To delete selected entry, click on <b>Delete</b> button. \n" +"\t</p>\n" +"\t" +msgstr "" + +#. RunAs Aliases help 1/3 +#: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:200 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>RunAs Aliases</big></b><br>\n" +"\tIn this dialog, you can configure RunAs aliases. RunAs alias is a set of users that is given\n" +"\tan unique name. This name is later used to refer to all users in this set in sudo configuration. \n" +"\t</p> \n" +"\t" +msgstr "" + +#. RunAs Aliases help 2/3 +#: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:208 +msgid "" +"<p>To add a new RunAs alias, click on <b>Add</b> button and fill in appropriate entries. \n" +"\tAlias name and list of users in the alias must not be empty. \n" +"\t</p>\n" +"\t" +msgstr "" + +#. RunAs Aliases help 3/3 +#: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:215 +msgid "" +"<p>To edit existing RunAs alias, select an entry from the table and click on <b>Edit</b>\n" +"\tbutton. To delete selected entry, click on <b>Delete</b> button. \n" +"\t</p>\n" +"\t" +msgstr "" + +#. Command Aliases help 1/3 +#: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:222 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Command Aliases</big></b><br>\n" +"\tIn this dialog, you can configure command aliases. Command alias is a set of commands \n" +"\t(optionally with parameters) that is given an unique name. This name is then used to refer\n" +"\tto all commands in this set in sudo configuration. \n" +"\t</p>\n" +"\t" +msgstr "" + +#. Command Aliases help 2/3 +#: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:231 +msgid "" +"<p>To add a new command alias, click on <b>Add</b> button and fill in appropriate entries. \n" +"\tAlias name and list of commands in the alias must not be empty. \n" +"\t</p>\n" +"\t" +msgstr "" + +#. Command Aliases help 3/3 +#: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:238 +msgid "" +"<p>To edit existing command alias, select an entry from the table and click on <b>Edit</b>\n" +"\tbutton. To delete selected entry, click on <b>Delete</b> button. \n" +"\t</p>\n" +"\t" +msgstr "" + +#. Single User Alias Help 1/2 +#: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:245 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>User Alias</big></b><br>\n" +"\tUser alias consists of one or more users, system groups (prefixed with '%') or other\n" +"\tuser aliases. It is given single name (must contain uppercase letters, numbers and underscore\tonly), which is then used to refer to all users in this alias.\n" +"\t</p>\n" +"\t" +msgstr "" + +#. Single User Alias Help 2/3 +#. Single User Alias Help 2/3 +#: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:253 src/include/sudo/helps.rb:306 +msgid "" +"<p>Enter unique name into <b>Alias Name</b> text entry. To add users or groups to the\n" +"\talias, select user or group name from the drop-down menu and click on <b>Add</b> button.\n" +"\tTo remove user from the alias, select appropriate entry from the table, and click on\n" +"\t<b>Remove</b> button. To finish the configuration, click <b>OK</b>.\n" +"\t</p>\n" +"\t" +msgstr "" + +#. Single User Alias Help 3/3 +#. Single Host Alias Help 4/4 +#. Single User Alias Help 2/3 +#. Single Command Alias Help 4/4 +#: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:262 src/include/sudo/helps.rb:292 +#: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:315 src/include/sudo/helps.rb:346 +msgid "" +"<b>Note:</b> Alias name must not be empty. Each alias must have at least one member.\n" +"\t" +msgstr "" + +#. Single Host Alias Help 1/4 +#: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:266 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Host Alias</big></b><br>\n" +"\tHost alias consists of one or more hostnames, single IP addresses, IP addresses\n" +"\tcombined with netmask id dotted quad notation (e.g. 192.168.0.0/255.255.255.0) or\n" +"\tCIDR number of bits notation (e.g. 192.168.0.0/24), or other host aliases. It is \n" +"\tgiven single name (must contain uppercase letters, numbers and underscore only), which \n" +"\tis then used to refer to all hosts in this alias.\n" +"\t</p>\n" +"\t" +msgstr "" + +#. Single Host Alias Help 2/4 +#: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:277 +msgid "" +"<p>Enter unique name into <b>Alias Name</b> text entry. To add hosts to the\n" +"\talias, click on <b>Add</b> button. A pop-up window will appear, where you can enter\n" +"\tvalid hostname or IP address and then click <b>OK</b>.\n" +"\t<p>\n" +"\t" +msgstr "" + +#. Single Host Alias Help 3/4 +#: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:285 +msgid "" +"To remove host from the alias, select appropriate entry from the table, and click on\n" +"\t<b>Remove</b> button. To finish the configuration, click <b>OK</b>.\n" +"\t</p>\n" +"\t" +msgstr "" + +#. Single RunAs Alias Help 1/2 +#: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:296 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>RunAs Alias</big></b><br>\n" +"\tRunAs alias is very similar to User Alias. It consists of one or more users, system groups \n" +"\t(prefixed with '%') or other RunAs aliases. It is given single name (must contain \n" +"\tuppercase letters, numbers and underscore only), which is then used to refer to all users \n" +"\tin this alias.\n" +"\t</p>\n" +"\t" +msgstr "" + +#. Single Command Alias Help 1/4 +#: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:319 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Command Alias</big></b><br>\n" +"\tCommand Alias is a list of one or more commands (with optional parameters), directories, or\n" +"\tother command aliases. It is given single name (must contain uppercase letters, numbers and\n" +"\tunderscore only), which is \n" +"\tthen used to refer to all commands in this alias. A command can optionally have one or more\n" +"\tparameters specified. If so, users can run the command with these parameters only. If a \n" +"\tdirectory name is used, any command in that directory can be run. \n" +"\t</p>\n" +"\t" +msgstr "" + +#. Single Command Alias Help 2/4 +#: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:331 +msgid "" +"<p>Enter unique name into <b>Alias Name</b> text entry. To add a new command to the alias,\n" +"\tclick on <b>Add</b> button.A pop-up window will appear, where you can enter command name\n" +"\t(or select one from file browser by clicking on <b>Browse</b> button. Additionally, you can\n" +"\tspecify command parameters in <b>Parameters</b> text entry\n" +"\t" +msgstr "" + +#. Single Command Alias Help 3/4 +#: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:339 +msgid "" +"To remove command from the alias, select appropriate entry from the table, and click on\n" +"\t<b>Remove</b> button. To finish the configuration, click <b>OK</b>.\n" +"\t</p>\n" +"\t" +msgstr "" + +#. if(issubstring(line[3]:"","NOPASSWD:")) { +#. m["no_passwd"] = (boolean) true; +#. } +#. else { +#. m["no_passwd"] = (boolean) false; +#. } +#: src/modules/Sudo.rb:400 +msgid "This rule is a system rule necessary for correct functionality of sudo.\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Sudo.rb:407 +msgid "" +"After deleting it, some applications may no longer work.\n" +"Really delete?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Sudo.rb:414 +msgid "" +"If you change it, some applications may no longer work.\n" +"Really edit? " +msgstr "" + +#. end Commands +#: src/modules/Sudo.rb:545 +msgid "All changes will be lost. Really quit sudo configuration without saving?" +msgstr "" + +#. Error message +#: src/modules/Sudo.rb:573 +msgid "An error occurred while reading users and groups." +msgstr "" + +#. Sudo read dialog caption +#: src/modules/Sudo.rb:605 +msgid "Saving sudo Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1/1 +#: src/modules/Sudo.rb:620 +msgid "Write the settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 1/1 +#: src/modules/Sudo.rb:624 +msgid "Writing the settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. Error message +#: src/modules/Sudo.rb:638 +msgid "Cannot write settings." +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/support.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/support.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/support.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,822 @@ +# Pashto translations for opensuse-i package. +# Copyright (C) 2014 SuSE Linux Products GmbH, Nuernberg +# This file is distributed under the same license as the opensuse-i package. +# Automatically generated, 2014. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: opensuse-i 18n\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-05-19 09:35+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n" +"Language-Team: none\n" +"Language: ps\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#. Command line help text for the Xsupport module +#: src/clients/support.rb:56 +msgid "Configuration of support" +msgstr "" + +#. Rich text title for Support in proposals +#: src/clients/support_proposal.rb:83 +msgid "Support" +msgstr "" + +#. Menu title for Support in proposals +#: src/clients/support_proposal.rb:87 +msgid "&Support" +msgstr "" + +#. Command line parameters dialog caption +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:50 +msgid "Supportconfig Overview Dialog" +msgstr "" + +#. Support configure1 dialog contents +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:57 +msgid "Open SUSE Support Center" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:62 +msgid "This will start a browser connecting to the SUSE Support Center Portal." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:72 +msgid "Open" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:83 +msgid "Collect Data" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:88 +msgid "This will create a tarball containing the collected log files." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:100 +msgid "Create report tarball" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:112 +msgid "Upload Data" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:116 +msgid "This will upload the collected logs to the specified URL." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:123 +msgid "Upload" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:153 +msgid "Could not find any installed browser." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:163 +msgid "" +"YaST will run a Web browser as superuser. Consider\n" +"running it as a non-provileged user and entering the URL\n" +"%1.\n" +"Start Web browser?\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:205 +msgid "Supportconfig Upload Dialog" +msgstr "" + +#. Support configure1 dialog contents +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:230 +msgid "Save as" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:233 +msgid "Directory to Save" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:243 +msgid "Package with log files" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:257 +msgid "Upload log files tarball to URL" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:259 src/include/support/dialogs.rb:760 +msgid "Upload Target" +msgstr "" + +#. } +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:331 +msgid "Cannot write settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:347 +msgid "Cannot write settings." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:393 +msgid "Choose Directory Where to Save Tarball" +msgstr "" + +#. Support::log_files["tmp_dir"]=save_dir; +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:405 +msgid "Choose Log Files Tarball File" +msgstr "" + +#. Command line parameters dialog caption +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:425 +msgid "Supportconfig Parameters Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:430 +msgid "Create a full file listing from '/'" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:435 +msgid "Exclude detailed disk info and scans" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:440 +msgid "Search root filesystem for eDirectory instances" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:445 +msgid "Include full SLP service lists" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:450 +msgid "Performs an rpm -V for each installed rpm" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:455 +msgid "Include all log file lines, gather additional rotated logs" +msgstr "" + +#. Support configure1 dialog contents +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:469 +msgid "Use Defaults (ignore /etc/supportconfig.conf)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:476 +msgid "Activates all support functions" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:483 +msgid "Only gather a minimum amount of info" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:491 +msgid "Use Custom (Expert) Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:493 +msgid "Expert Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:499 +msgid "Options" +msgstr "" + +#. Support overview dialog caption +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:588 +msgid "Supportconfig Expert Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. FIXME table header +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:618 +msgid "Default Options" +msgstr "" + +#. Support configure2 dialog caption +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:684 +msgid "Supportconfig Contact Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Support configure2 dialog contents +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:689 +msgid "Contact Information" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:694 +msgid "Company" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:705 +msgid "Email Address" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:712 +msgid "Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:719 +msgid "Phone Number" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:726 +msgid "Store ID" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:737 +msgid "Terminal ID" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:748 +msgid "GPG UID" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:755 +msgid "Upload Information" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:774 +msgid "11-digit service request number" +msgstr "" + +#. abort? +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:851 +msgid "The SR number must be 11 digits" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:869 +msgid "Collecting Data" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:870 +msgid "Progress" +msgstr "" + +#. Remove ANSI escape codes for cursor movement (bnc#921233) +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:939 +msgid "Collected Data Review" +msgstr "" + +#. FIXME use list of generated files, as well as directory prefix +#. `MultiLineEdit (`id (`file), `opt (`read_only), _("File Contents")) +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:986 src/include/support/dialogs.rb:1034 +msgid "File Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:992 +msgid "Remove from Data" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/support/helps.rb:36 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Initializing Support Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/support/helps.rb:40 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Initialization:</big></b><br>\n" +"Safely abort the configuration utility by pressing <b>Abort</b> now.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/support/helps.rb:44 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Saving Support Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/support/helps.rb:48 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Aborting Saving:</big></b><br>\n" +"Abort the save procedure by pressing <b>Abort</b>.\n" +"An additional dialog informs whether it is safe to do so.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Summary dialog help 1/3 +#: src/include/support/helps.rb:55 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Support Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Configure support here.<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Summary dialog help 2/3 +#: src/include/support/helps.rb:59 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Adding a support:</big></b><br>\n" +"Choose a support from the list of detected supports.\n" +"If your support was not detected, use <b>Other (not detected)</b>.\n" +"Then press <b>Configure</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Summary dialog help 3/3 +#: src/include/support/helps.rb:66 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Editing or Deleting:</big></b><br>\n" +"If you press <b>Edit</b>, an additional dialog in which to change\n" +"the configuration opens.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Ovreview dialog help 1/3 +#: src/include/support/helps.rb:72 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p><b><big>Opening SUSE Support Center</big></b><br>\n" +"To start a Web browser that opens the SUSE Support Center Portal, use <b>Open SUSE Support Center</b>.\n" +"You can then open a Service Request with Global Technical Support. Make sure you write down\n" +"the Service Request number to include in the supportconfig data upload.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Ovreview dialog help 2/3 +#: src/include/support/helps.rb:80 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Collecting Data</big></b><br>\n" +"To run the supportconfig data collection tool, use <b>Collect Data</b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Ovreview dialog help 3/3 +#: src/include/support/helps.rb:84 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Uploading Collected Data</big></b><br>\n" +"To upload the data already collected to a server, use <b>Upload Data</b>.\n" +"The server may or may not be Global Technical Support.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Configure1 dialog help 1/3 +#: src/include/support/helps.rb:90 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Supportconfig Options</big></b><br>\n" +"Select an option to override the defaults. You can use the default settings,\n" +"gather the most data or only gather a minimum amount of data." +msgstr "" + +#. Configure1 dialog help 2/3 +#: src/include/support/helps.rb:96 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Expert Settings</big></b><br>\n" +"Select <b>Use Custom</b> and click the <b>Expert Settings</b> button\n" +"to select specific data sets to collect.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Configure1 dialog help 3/3 +#: src/include/support/helps.rb:102 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Options</big></b><br>\n" +"Collect additional information. Usually these options are not\n" +"necessary, but can be included if circumstances require more information.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Expert dialog help 1/1 +#: src/include/support/helps.rb:108 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>Default Options</b></big><br>\n" +"Select or deselect each of the data sets you would like to include in the supportconfig tarball.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Contact dialog help 1/4 +#: src/include/support/helps.rb:112 +msgid "" +"<p><big><b>Contact Information</b></big><br>\n" +"Fill in each of the contact information fields that you would like to include\n" +"in the supportconfig tarball. The fields are saved in the basic-environment.txt file.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Contact dialog help 2/4 +#: src/include/support/helps.rb:118 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Upload Information</big></b><br>\n" +"The upload target is the supportconfig tarball's destination URI. Supported upload services include\n" +"ftp, http, https, scp. If you need to include the supportconfig tarball filename in your upload target,\n" +"use the <i>tarball</i> keyword. This will get replaced with the actual tarball filename.\n" +"See <i>man supportconfig(1)</i> for further details.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Contact dialog help 3/4 +#: src/include/support/helps.rb:126 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Upload Target Examples</big></b><br>\n" +"https://secure-www.novell.com/upload?appname=supportconfig&file=<i>tarball</i><br>\n" +"ftp://ftp.novell.com/incoming<br>\n" +"scp://central.server.foo.com/supportconfig/archives</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Contact dialog help 4/4 +#: src/include/support/helps.rb:133 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Note:</b> If you are uploading a supportconfig tarball to Global Technical Support,\n" +"make sure you include the 11-digit service request number from your open service request.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Collecting data dialkog help 1/1 +#: src/include/support/helps.rb:137 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Collecting Data</big></b>><br>\n" +"Data is being collected.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Data review dialog help 1/1 +#: src/include/support/helps.rb:141 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Collected Data Review</big></b><br>\n" +"Review the data collected by supportconfig. If you do not want to share some of the collected data,\n" +"use <b>Remove from Data</b> and the selected file will be removed.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Configure1 dialog help 1/3 +#: src/include/support/helps.rb:148 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Upload supportconfig tarball to Global Technical Support</big></b><br>\n" +"If you want to store a copy of the supportconfig tarball, select the target\n" +"directory and make sure that this option is checked.\n" +"<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Configure1 dialog help 2/3 +#. Configure1 dialog help 2/3 +#: src/include/support/helps.rb:155 src/include/support/helps.rb:180 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Upload URL</big></b><br>\n" +"This option has the location to which the supportconfig tarball will be uploaded\n" +"as default value.\n" +"Change this value only in special cases.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Configure1 dialog help 3/3, %1 is a URL +#. Configure1 dialog help 3/3 +#: src/include/support/helps.rb:164 src/include/support/helps.rb:189 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Privacy Policy</big></b><br>\n" +"Find SUSE's privacy policy at\n" +"<i>%1</i>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/helps.rb:173 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Upload supportconfig tarball to Global Technical Support</big></b><br>\n" +"If you have already created the supportconfig tarball, write the full path\n" +"into the <i>Package with log files</i> field.\n" +"<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Configure2 dialog help 1/2 +#: src/include/support/helps.rb:198 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Configuration Part Two</big></b><br>\n" +"Press <b>Next</b> to continue.\n" +"<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Configure2 dialog help 2/2 +#: src/include/support/helps.rb:204 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Selecting Something</big></b><br>\n" +"It is not possible. You must code it first. :-)\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. *************************************************************************** +#. +#. Copyright (c) 2008 - 2012 Novell, Inc. +#. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or +#. modify it under the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as +#. published by the Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +#. but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +#. MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +#. GNU General Public License for more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +#. along with this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, +#. you may find current contact information at www.novell.com +#. +#. *************************************************************************** +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:30 +msgid "AppArmor information. security-apparmor.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:33 +msgid "autofs information. fs-autofs.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:36 +msgid "Information related to booting and the kernel. boot.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:39 +msgid "Current system service states. chkconfig.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:42 +msgid "Information related to capturing a system core dump. crash.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:45 +msgid "Information related to cron and at. cron.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:48 +msgid "Disk, file system mounts and partition information. fs-diskio.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:51 +msgid "Domain Name Service information. dns.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:54 +msgid "Novell eDirectory health check information. novell-edir.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:57 +msgid "System environment information, including sysctl and root's environment. env.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:60 +msgid "Recursively gets *.conf files, along with various other configuration files in /etc. etc.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:63 +msgid "Enterprise Volume Management System-related information. evms.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:66 +msgid "Heartbeat/high availabilty cluster information. ha.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:69 +msgid "iSCSI target and initiator information. fs-iscsi.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:72 +msgid "LDAP related information, including a root DSE search. ldap.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:75 +msgid "Novell Linux User Management-related information, including a root DSE, UNIX Config and workstation object searches. novell-lum.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:78 +msgid "Linux Volume Management-related information. lvm.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:81 +msgid "Memory-related information. memory.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:84 +msgid "System kernel module information. modules.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:87 +msgid "Native device mapper multipathing information. mpio.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:90 +msgid "Novell Core Protocol-related information. novell-ncp.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:93 +msgid "Novell Cluster Services-related information. novell-ncs.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:96 +msgid "Network-related information, including firewall rules. network.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:99 +msgid "Network File System-related information. nfs.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:102 +msgid "Novell Storage Services-related information. novell-nss.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:105 +msgid "Network Time Protocol-related information. ntp.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:108 +msgid "OCFS2 file system-related information. ocfs2.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:111 +msgid "List of all open files using lsof. open-files.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:114 +msgid "OpenWBEM-related information. openwbem.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:117 +msgid "Pluggable Authentication Module-related information, including user account information. pam.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:120 +msgid "Printing and CUPS-related information. print.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:123 +msgid "Includes key /proc file content. proc.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:126 +msgid "Update daemon-related information. updates-daemon.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:129 +msgid "Update client related information. updates.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:132 +msgid "System Activity Reporting-related information, including copies of the SAR data files. sar.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:135 +msgid "SLES Real Time kernel-related information. slert.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:138 +msgid "Service Location Protocol related information. slp.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:141 +msgid "" +"Self-Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology-related information for hard disks. WARNING: Some hard disk controllers and drives do not\n" +"behave nicely. Probing SMART data has been known to change file systems to read only mode or even hang the server. Make sure probing SMART data\n" +"works in your environment before enabling this option. fs-smartmon.txt\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:146 +msgid "Samba and CIFS-related information. samba.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:149 +msgid "Software RAID-related information. fs-softraid.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:152 +msgid "Secure Shell server information. ssh.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:155 +msgid "Configuration files found in /etc/sysconfig. sysconfig.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:158 +msgid "UDEV device manager-related information. udev.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:161 +msgid "X graphical system-related information. x.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:164 +msgid "XEN virtualization-related information. xen.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:167 +msgid "Tells supportconfig to search the file system for all eDirectory instances files. If set, ADD_OPTION_FSLIST is automatically set as well. -e" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:170 +msgid "A full file list using find from the root of the filesytem. -L, fs-files.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:173 +msgid "Includes the entire log file, including comments, instead of just VAR_OPTION_LINE_COUNT lines of it. Additional rotated logs are included if available. -l" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:176 +msgid "Minimizes the amount of disk information and detailed scanning. -d" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:179 +msgid "Normally all of the /var/log/YaST2/* logs are included. This option minimizes the amount of each file retrieved." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:182 +msgid "Runs an rpm -V on every installed RPM package. This takes some time to complete. -v, rpm-verify.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:185 +msgid "Normally only the base SLP service types are listed. This option allows you to query each of the discovered service types individually. -s, slp.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:188 +msgid "Company name to include in the basic-environment.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:191 +msgid "Contact's email address to include in the basic-environment.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:194 +msgid "Contact's name to include in the basic-environment.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:197 +msgid "Contact's phone number to include in the basic-environment.txt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:200 +msgid "The number of lines to include when getting a log file. Zero means get the entire file." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:203 +msgid "The supportconfig tarball location. The first valid location in the list is always used." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:206 +msgid "The maximum number of /var/log/messages lines to get. Zero means get the entire file." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:209 +msgid "The maximum number of heartbeat policy engine log files to include in the supportconfig tarball." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:212 +msgid "The maximum number of SAR data files to include in the supportconfig tarball." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:215 +msgid "" +"When set to 1, supportconfig runs in quiet mode. This option is useful if you\n" +"plan on running supportconfig regularly in a cron job for example. Set with -Q." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:218 +msgid "Used to specify where the supportconfig tarball will be uploaded, when using the -u srnum startup option. You can specify any FTP server that supports anonymous uploads. The default is SUSE's public ftp server." +msgstr "" + +#. Initialization dialog caption +#: src/include/support/wizards.rb:147 +msgid "Support Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Initialization dialog contents +#: src/include/support/wizards.rb:149 +msgid "Initializing..." +msgstr "" + +#. global string created_directory=""; +#: src/modules/Support.rb:143 +msgid "To continue, enter root password" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Support.rb:144 +msgid "root Password" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Support.rb:163 +msgid "Password incorrect" +msgstr "" + +#. Support read dialog caption +#: src/modules/Support.rb:267 +msgid "Initializing Support Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Support read dialog caption +#: src/modules/Support.rb:313 +msgid "Saving Support Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 1/2 +#: src/modules/Support.rb:329 +msgid "Write the settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress stage 2/2 +#: src/modules/Support.rb:331 +msgid "Run SuSEconfig" +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 1/2 +#: src/modules/Support.rb:335 +msgid "Writing the settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress step 2/2 +#: src/modules/Support.rb:337 +msgid "Running SuSEconfig..." +msgstr "" + +#. Progress finished +#: src/modules/Support.rb:339 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#. TODO FIXME: your code here... +#. Configuration summary text for autoyast +#: src/modules/Support.rb:438 +msgid "Configuration summary..." +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/sysconfig.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/sysconfig.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/sysconfig.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,571 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. help text header - sysconfig editor +#: src/clients/sysconfig.rb:34 +msgid "Editor for /etc/sysconfig Files" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for command 'list' +#: src/clients/sysconfig.rb:48 +msgid "Display configuration summary" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for command 'set' 1/3 +#. Split string because of technical issues with line breaks. +#. Adjust translation with other two parts to give a clear final text. +#: src/clients/sysconfig.rb:58 +msgid "Set value of the variable. Requires options 'variable' and 'value'" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for command 'set' 2/3 +#. Split string because of technical issues with line breaks. +#. Adjust translation with other two parts to give a clear final text. +#: src/clients/sysconfig.rb:64 +msgid "or 'variable=value', for example, variable=DISPLAYMANAGER value=gdm" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for command 'set' 3/3 +#. Split string because of technical issues with line breaks. +#. Adjust translation with other two parts to give a clear final text. +#: src/clients/sysconfig.rb:70 +msgid "or simply DISPLAYMANAGER=gdm" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for command 'set' +#: src/clients/sysconfig.rb:80 +msgid "Set empty value (\"\")" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for command 'details' +#: src/clients/sysconfig.rb:90 +msgid "Show details about selected variable" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for option 'all' +#: src/clients/sysconfig.rb:102 +msgid "Display all variables" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for option 'variable' +#: src/clients/sysconfig.rb:107 +msgid "Selected variable" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/sysconfig.rb:108 +msgid "If the variable is available in several files use" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/sysconfig.rb:109 +msgid "<variable>$ syntax," +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/sysconfig.rb:110 +msgid "for example CONFIG_TYPE$/etc/sysconfig/mail." +msgstr "" + +#. help text for option 'value' +#: src/clients/sysconfig.rb:116 +msgid "New value" +msgstr "" + +#. header (command line mode output) +#: src/include/sysconfig/cmdline.rb:43 +msgid "All Variables:\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sysconfig/cmdline.rb:43 +msgid "Modified Variables:\n" +msgstr "" + +#. status message - %1 is a device name (/dev/hdc), %2 is a mode name (udma2), %3 is a result (translated Success/Failed text) +#: src/include/sysconfig/cmdline.rb:77 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Setting variable '%1' to '%2': %3" +msgstr "" + +#. result message +#: src/include/sysconfig/cmdline.rb:82 +msgid "Success" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sysconfig/cmdline.rb:83 +msgid "Failed" +msgstr "" + +#. display a new value for modified variables +#: src/include/sysconfig/cmdline.rb:164 +msgid "New Value: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sysconfig/cmdline.rb:167 +msgid "Value: " +msgstr "" + +#. command line output +#: src/include/sysconfig/cmdline.rb:194 +msgid "Variable %1 was not found." +msgstr "" + +#. variable name conflict - full name (with file name) is required +#: src/include/sysconfig/cmdline.rb:217 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Use a full variable name in the form $\n" +"(e.g., %1$%2).\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup message +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:65 +msgid "An error occurred while saving and activating the changes." +msgstr "" + +#. suffix added to the allowed (predefined) values +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:127 +msgid "or any value" +msgstr "" + +#. Translation: description of possible values, regular expression string is added after the text +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:135 +msgid "Value Matching Regular Expression:" +msgstr "" + +#. allowed value description +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:141 +msgid "Any integer value" +msgstr "" + +#. allowed value description +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:154 +msgid "Integer value greater or equal to %1" +msgstr "" + +#. allowed value description +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:163 +msgid "Integer value less or equal to %1" +msgstr "" + +#. Translation: allowed value description, %1 is minimum value, %2 is maximum integer value +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:172 +msgid "Any integer value from %1 to %2" +msgstr "" + +#. allowed value description - any value is allowed +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:179 +msgid "Any value" +msgstr "" + +#. allowed value description - IP adress +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:183 +msgid "IPv4 or IPv6 address" +msgstr "" + +#. allowed value description - IPv4 adress +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:187 +msgid "IPv4 address" +msgstr "" + +#. allowed value description - IPv6 adress +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:191 +msgid "IPv6 address" +msgstr "" + +#. rich text item +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:220 +msgid "File: " +msgstr "" + +#. rich text item +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:236 +msgid "Possible Values: " +msgstr "" + +#. TODO: replace empty value by special text (e.g. "</I>empty</I>") +#. rich text value +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:255 +msgid "Default Value: " +msgstr "" + +#. rich text value +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:277 +msgid "Original Value: " +msgstr "" + +#. header in the variable description text, bash command is appended +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:303 +msgid "Prepare Command: " +msgstr "" + +#. header in the variable description text +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:323 +msgid "Configuration Script: " +msgstr "" + +#. header in the variable description text, service names (e.g. "apache") are appended +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:341 +msgid "Service to Reload: " +msgstr "" + +#. header in the variable description text, service names (e.g. "apache") are appended +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:359 +msgid "Service to Restart: " +msgstr "" + +#. header in the variable description text, bash command is appended +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:376 +msgid "Activation Command: " +msgstr "" + +#. rich text value +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:424 +msgid "Description: " +msgstr "" + +#. modification flag added to variable name (if it was changed) +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:592 +msgid "(changed)" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box widget label - variable name is appended to the string +#. combo box widget label - variable name is appended to the string +#. combo box label +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:602 src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:613 +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:850 +msgid "S&etting of: " +msgstr "" + +#. current value has more than one line - it is displayed incorrectly +#. because combobox widget has single line entry (lines are merged) +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:640 +msgid "" +"The currently selected value has more than one line.\n" +"Joined lines are displayed in the combo box.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. header label +#. label widget +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:671 src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:837 +msgid "Current Selection: " +msgstr "" + +#. popup question dialog: variable value does not match defined type - ask user to set value (%1 is value entered by user, %2 is allowed type - e.g. integer +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:713 +msgid "" +"Value '%1'\n" +"does not match type '%2'.\n" +"\n" +"Really set this value?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. when a comment is too long to display it in the table +#. it is shortened and mark (three dot characters) is added to the end +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:764 +msgid "..." +msgstr "" + +#. Translation: push button label +#. push button label +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:804 src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:889 +msgid "&Search" +msgstr "" + +#. tree widget label +#. term help_space_content = `Tree(`id(`tree), `opt(`notify, `vstretch), _("&Configuration Options"), Sysconfig::tree_content); +#. Wizard::OpenCustomDialog(help_space_content, button_box); +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:815 +msgid "&Configuration Options" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for popup - part 1/2 +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:819 +msgid "" +"<p>After you save your changes, this editor changes the variables in the\n" +"corresponding sysconfig file. Then it starts activation commands, which changes the underlying configuration files, stops and starts daemons,\n" +"and runs low-level configuration tools so your configuration in sysconfig takes effect.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for popup - part 2/2 +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:825 +msgid "<p><b>Important:</b> You still can edit each individual configuration file manually. The name of file is displayed in the variable description.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:830 +msgid "/etc/sysconfig Editor" +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:859 +msgid "&Default" +msgstr "" + +#. help rich text displayed after module start (1/2) +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:866 +msgid "<P><B>System Configuration Editor</B></P><P>With the system configuration editor, you can change some system settings. You can also use YaST to configure your hardware and system settings.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. help rich text displayed after module start (2/2) +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:870 +msgid "<P><B>Note:</B> Descriptions are not translated because they are read directly from configuration files.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. push button label - displayed only in autoinstallation config mode +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:877 +msgid "&Use Current Value" +msgstr "" + +#. push button label - displayed only in autoinstallation config mode +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:879 +msgid "&Add New Variable..." +msgstr "" + +#. popup dialog header - confirm to save the changes +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:921 +msgid "Save Modified Variables" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:927 +msgid "Confirm Each Activation Command" +msgstr "" + +#. // popup dialog header +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:949 +msgid "Search Result" +msgstr "" + +#. help text in popup dialog +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:951 +msgid "The search results are displayed here. If you see the item you want, select it then click \"Go to\". Otherwise, click \"Cancel\" to close this dialog." +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:956 +msgid "&Go to" +msgstr "" + +#. popup message - search result message +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:981 +msgid "No entries found" +msgstr "" + +#. popup window header +#: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:992 +msgid "Help" +msgstr "" + +#. search popup window header +#: src/include/sysconfig/dialogs.rb:33 +msgid "Search for a Configuration Variable" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/sysconfig/dialogs.rb:41 +msgid "&Search for:" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label +#: src/include/sysconfig/dialogs.rb:44 +msgid "&Case Sensitive Search" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label +#: src/include/sysconfig/dialogs.rb:46 +msgid "Search &Variable Name" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label +#: src/include/sysconfig/dialogs.rb:48 +msgid "Search &description" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label +#: src/include/sysconfig/dialogs.rb:50 +msgid "Search &value" +msgstr "" + +#. table column header +#: src/include/sysconfig/dialogs.rb:132 +msgid "Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sysconfig/dialogs.rb:133 +msgid "NEW VALUE" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sysconfig/dialogs.rb:134 +msgid "Old Value" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sysconfig/dialogs.rb:135 +msgid "File" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/sysconfig/dialogs.rb:136 +msgid "Description" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/sysconfig/dialogs.rb:179 +msgid "&Variable Name" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/sysconfig/dialogs.rb:181 +msgid "V&alue" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/include/sysconfig/dialogs.rb:186 +msgid "&File Name" +msgstr "" + +#. warning popup message - variable name is empty +#: src/include/sysconfig/dialogs.rb:210 +msgid "Missing variable name value." +msgstr "" + +#. warning popup message - file name is empty +#: src/include/sysconfig/dialogs.rb:214 +msgid "Missing file name value." +msgstr "" + +#. warning popup message - file name is required with absolute path +#: src/include/sysconfig/dialogs.rb:218 +msgid "Missing absolute path in file name." +msgstr "" + +#. Read dialog help +#: src/include/sysconfig/helps.rb:17 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Initializing sysconfig Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Please wait...<br></p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Write dialog help +#: src/include/sysconfig/helps.rb:21 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Saving sysconfig Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Please wait...<br></p>\n" +"\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Translation: Progress bar label +#: src/modules/Sysconfig.rb:162 +msgid "Searching..." +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/modules/Sysconfig.rb:881 +msgid "S&kip" +msgstr "" + +#. write dialog caption +#: src/modules/Sysconfig.rb:909 +msgid "Saving sysconfig Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. progress bar item +#: src/modules/Sysconfig.rb:923 +msgid "Write the new settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Sysconfig.rb:924 +msgid "Activate the changes" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Sysconfig.rb:934 +msgid "Saving changes to the files..." +msgstr "" + +#. start generic commands +#: src/modules/Sysconfig.rb:965 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#. configuration summary headline +#: src/modules/Sysconfig.rb:1048 +msgid "Configuration Summary" +msgstr "" + +#. Executes a bash command using #exec_action +#. @see #exec_action +#. @param cmd [String] command to execute +#. @return [Symbol] result returned by #exec_action +#: src/modules/Sysconfig.rb:1132 +msgid "Starting command: %1..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Sysconfig.rb:1133 +msgid "Command %1 failed" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Sysconfig.rb:1134 +msgid "A command will be executed" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Sysconfig.rb:1134 +msgid "Command: " +msgstr "" + +#. Restarts or reloads a service using #exec_action +#. @see #exec_action +#. @param name [String] service name +#. @param action [Symbol] :reload or :restart +#. @return [Symbol] result returned by #exec_action +#: src/modules/Sysconfig.rb:1156 +msgid "Reloading service %s..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Sysconfig.rb:1157 +msgid "Reload of the service %s failed" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Sysconfig.rb:1158 +msgid "Service %s will be reloaded" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Sysconfig.rb:1160 +msgid "Restarting service %s..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Sysconfig.rb:1161 +msgid "Restart of the service %s failed" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Sysconfig.rb:1162 +msgid "Service %s will be restarted" +msgstr "" + +#. Returns whether given service is active (info from systemd) +#. If service is not found, reports error in UI and returns nil +#. +#. @param service name +#. @return [Boolean] active? +#: src/modules/Sysconfig.rb:1187 +msgid "Cannot determine service state, systemd service does not exist:" +msgstr "" + +#. progress bar label, %1 is variable name (e.g. DISPLAYMANAGER) +#: src/modules/Sysconfig.rb:1266 +msgid "Saving variable %1..." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup: %1 - variable name (e.g. DISPLAYMANAGER), %2 - file name (/etc/sysconfig/displaymanager) +#: src/modules/Sysconfig.rb:1273 +msgid "Saving variable %1 to the file %2 failed." +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/tftp-server.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/tftp-server.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/tftp-server.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,175 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. description map for command line +#: src/clients/tftp-server.rb:35 +msgid "Configure a TFTP server" +msgstr "" + +#. command line: help text for "status" command +#: src/clients/tftp-server.rb:39 +msgid "Status of the TFTP server" +msgstr "" + +#. command line: help text for "directory" command +#: src/clients/tftp-server.rb:49 +msgid "Directory of the TFTP server" +msgstr "" + +#. command line: help text for "enable" command +#: src/clients/tftp-server.rb:61 +msgid "Enable the TFTP service" +msgstr "" + +#. command line: help text for "disable" command +#: src/clients/tftp-server.rb:67 +msgid "Disable the TFTP service" +msgstr "" + +#. command line: help text for "show" command +#: src/clients/tftp-server.rb:73 +msgid "Show the status of the TFTP service" +msgstr "" + +#. command line: help text for "path" command +#: src/clients/tftp-server.rb:80 +msgid "Set the directory for the TFTP server" +msgstr "" + +#. command line: help text for "list" command +#: src/clients/tftp-server.rb:86 +msgid "Show the directory for the TFTP server" +msgstr "" + +#. command line: show status of tftp-server +#: src/clients/tftp-server.rb:120 +msgid "Service Status: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. command line: show directory server by tftp-server +#: src/clients/tftp-server.rb:140 +msgid "Directory Path: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. Tftp-server dialog caption +#. Tftp-server dialog caption +#. Tftp-server dialog caption +#: src/include/tftp-server/dialogs.rb:67 src/include/tftp-server/wizards.rb:43 +#: src/include/tftp-server/wizards.rb:78 +msgid "TFTP Server Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog help text +#: src/include/tftp-server/dialogs.rb:79 +msgid "<p><big><b>Configuring a TFTP Server</b></big></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog help text +#: src/include/tftp-server/dialogs.rb:83 +msgid "<p>Use this to enable a server for TFTP (trivial file transfer protocol). The server will be started using xinetd.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. enlighten newbies, #102946 +#. dialog help text +#: src/include/tftp-server/dialogs.rb:91 +msgid "<p>Note that TFTP and FTP are not the same.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog help text +#: src/include/tftp-server/dialogs.rb:96 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Boot Image Directory</b>:\n" +"Specify the directory where served files are located. The usual value is\n" +"<tt>/tftpboot</tt>. The directory will be created if it does not exist. \n" +"The server uses this as its root directory (using the <tt>-s</tt> option).</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Radio button label, disable TFTP server +#: src/include/tftp-server/dialogs.rb:115 +msgid "&Disable" +msgstr "" + +#. Radio button label, disable TFTP server +#: src/include/tftp-server/dialogs.rb:124 +msgid "&Enable" +msgstr "" + +#. Text entry label +#. Directory where served files (usually boot images) reside +#: src/include/tftp-server/dialogs.rb:134 +msgid "&Boot Image Directory" +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#. select a directory from the filesystem +#: src/include/tftp-server/dialogs.rb:137 +msgid "Bro&wse..." +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#. display a log file +#: src/include/tftp-server/dialogs.rb:144 +msgid "&View Log" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/tftp-server/dialogs.rb:207 +msgid "" +"The directory must start with a slash (/)\n" +"and must not contain spaces." +msgstr "" + +#. progress label +#: src/include/tftp-server/wizards.rb:46 +msgid "Initializing..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress label +#: src/include/tftp-server/wizards.rb:81 +msgid "Initializing ..." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#. %1 is a command name (or a comma (, ) separated list of them) +#: src/modules/TftpServer.rb:145 +msgid "" +"This module can only use xinetd to set up TFTP.\n" +"However, another program is serving TFTP: %1.\n" +"Exiting.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. xinetd may be needed for other services so we never turn it +#. off. It will exit anyway if no services are configured. +#. If it is running, restart it. +#: src/modules/TftpServer.rb:240 +msgid "Cannot reload service %{name}" +msgstr "" + +#. summary header +#: src/modules/TftpServer.rb:303 +msgid "TFTP Server Enabled:" +msgstr "" + +#. summary item: an option is turned on +#: src/modules/TftpServer.rb:305 +msgid "Yes" +msgstr "" + +#. summary header +#: src/modules/TftpServer.rb:308 +msgid "Boot Image Directory:" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/timezone_db.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/timezone_db.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/timezone_db.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,2472 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. name of time zone region +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:23 +msgid "Europe" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:25 +msgid "Netherlands" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:27 +msgid "Andorra" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:28 +msgid "Greece" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:30 +msgid "Serbia" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:31 +msgid "Germany" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:32 +msgid "Slovakia" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:33 +msgid "Belgium" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:34 +msgid "Romania" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:35 +msgid "Hungary" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:36 +msgid "Moldova" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:37 +msgid "Denmark" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:38 +msgid "Ireland" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:39 +msgid "Gibraltar" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:41 +msgid "Guernsey" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:42 +msgid "Finland" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:44 +msgid "Isle of Man" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:45 +msgid "Turkey" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:46 +msgid "Jersey" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:48 +msgid "Russia (Kaliningrad)" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:50 +msgid "Ukraine (Kiev)" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:51 +msgid "Portugal" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:52 +msgid "Slovenia" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:53 +msgid "United Kingdom" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:54 +msgid "Luxembourg" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:56 +msgid "Aaland Islands" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:57 +msgid "Spain" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:58 +msgid "Malta" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:60 +msgid "Belarus" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:61 +msgid "Monaco" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:63 +msgid "Russia (Moscow)" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:64 +msgid "Norway" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:65 +msgid "France" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:67 +msgid "Montenegro" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:68 +msgid "Czech Republic" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:69 +msgid "Latvia" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:70 +msgid "Italy" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:72 +msgid "San Marino" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:74 +msgid "Russia (Samara)" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:75 +msgid "Bosnia & Herzegovina" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:77 +msgid "Ukraine (Simferopol)" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:78 +msgid "Macedonia" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:79 +msgid "Bulgaria" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:80 +msgid "Sweden" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:81 +msgid "Estonia" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:82 +msgid "Albania" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:83 +msgid "Uzhgorod" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:84 +msgid "Liechtenstein" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:85 +msgid "Vatican" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:86 +msgid "Austria" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:87 +msgid "Lithuania" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:89 +msgid "Russia (Volgograd)" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:90 +msgid "Poland" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:91 +msgid "Croatia" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:93 +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:882 +msgid "Iceland" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:95 +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:878 +msgid "Azores" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:97 +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:880 +msgid "Canary Islands" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:98 +msgid "Switzerland" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:100 +msgid "Ukraine (Zaporozhye)" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#. GL +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:103 +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:908 +msgid "Miquelon" +msgstr "" + +#. name of time zone region +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:111 +msgid "USA" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:114 +msgid "Alaska (Anchorage)" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:116 +msgid "Aleutian (Adak)" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:118 +msgid "Boise" +msgstr "" + +#. US +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:120 +msgid "Arizona (Phoenix)" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:122 +msgid "Central (Chicago)" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:124 +msgid "Kentucky (Louisville)" +msgstr "" + +#. US +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:126 +msgid "Kentucky (Monticello)" +msgstr "" + +#. US +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:128 +msgid "East Indiana (Indianapolis)" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:130 +msgid "Indiana Starke (Knox)" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:132 +msgid "Indiana (Vincennes)" +msgstr "" + +#. US +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:134 +msgid "Indiana (Winamac)" +msgstr "" + +#. US +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:136 +msgid "Indiana (Marengo)" +msgstr "" + +#. US +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:138 +msgid "Indiana (Vevay)" +msgstr "" + +#. US +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:140 +msgid "Indiana (Tell City)" +msgstr "" + +#. US +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:142 +msgid "Indiana (Petersburg)" +msgstr "" + +#. US +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:144 +msgid "Juneau" +msgstr "" + +#. US +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:146 +msgid "Michigan (Detroit)" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:148 +msgid "Mountain (Denver)" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:150 +msgid "Pacific (Los Angeles)" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:152 +msgid "Menominee" +msgstr "" + +#. US +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:154 +msgid "Eastern (New York)" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:156 +msgid "Nome" +msgstr "" + +#. US +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:158 +msgid "North Dakota (Center)" +msgstr "" + +#. US +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:160 +msgid "North Dakota (New Salem)" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#. TT +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:162 +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:405 +msgid "Puerto Rico" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:164 +msgid "Shiprock" +msgstr "" + +#. US +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:166 +msgid "Virgin Islands (St Thomas)" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:168 +msgid "Yakutat" +msgstr "" + +#. US +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:171 +msgid "Hawaii (Honolulu)" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:173 +msgid "Samoa (Pago Pago)" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone region +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:180 +msgid "Canada" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:183 +msgid "Atlantic (Halifax)" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:185 +msgid "Central (Winnipeg)" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:187 +msgid "Eastern (Toronto)" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:189 +msgid "Mountain (Edmonton)" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:191 +msgid "Newfoundland (St Johns)" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:193 +msgid "Pacific (Vancouver)" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:195 +msgid "Saskatchewan (Regina)" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:197 +msgid "Yukon (Whitehorse)" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:199 +msgid "Glace Bay" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:201 +msgid "Moncton" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:203 +msgid "Goose Bay" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:205 +msgid "Blanc-Sablon" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:207 +msgid "Montreal" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:209 +msgid "Nipigon" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:211 +msgid "Thunder Bay" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:213 +msgid "Iqaluit" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:215 +msgid "Pangnirtung" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:217 +msgid "Resolute" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:219 +msgid "Atikokan" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:221 +msgid "Rankin Inlet" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:223 +msgid "Rainy River" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:225 +msgid "Swift Current" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:227 +msgid "Cambridge Bay" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:229 +msgid "Yellowknife" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:231 +msgid "Inuvik" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:233 +msgid "Dawson Creek" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:235 +msgid "Dawson" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone region +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:243 +msgid "Argentina" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:246 +msgid "Buenos Aires" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:248 +msgid "Catamarca" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:250 +msgid "Cordoba" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:252 +msgid "Jujuy" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:254 +msgid "La Rioja" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:256 +msgid "Mendoza" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:258 +msgid "Rio Gallegos" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:260 +msgid "San Juan" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:262 +msgid "San Luis" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:264 +msgid "Tucuman" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:266 +msgid "Ushuaia" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone region +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:273 +msgid "Brazil" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:276 +msgid "Araguaina" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:278 +msgid "Bahia" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:280 +msgid "Belem" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:282 +msgid "Boa Vista" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:284 +msgid "Campo Grande" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:286 +msgid "Cuiaba" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:288 +msgid "Eirunepe" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:290 +msgid "Fortaleza" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:292 +msgid "Maceio" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:294 +msgid "Manaus" +msgstr "" + +#. _("Brazil West"), +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:296 +msgid "Fernando de Noronha" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:298 +msgid "Porto Velho" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:300 +msgid "Recife" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:302 +msgid "Rio Branco" +msgstr "" + +#. _("Brazil Acre"), +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:304 +msgid "Sao Paulo" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone region +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:311 +msgid "Mexico" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:315 +msgid "Cancun" +msgstr "" + +#. MX +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:317 +msgid "Chihuahua" +msgstr "" + +#. MX +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:319 +msgid "Hermosillo" +msgstr "" + +#. MX +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:321 +msgid "Mazatlan" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:323 +msgid "Mexico City" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:325 +msgid "Merida" +msgstr "" + +#. MX +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:327 +msgid "Monterrey" +msgstr "" + +#. MX +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:329 +msgid "Tijuana" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone region +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:336 +msgid "Central and South America" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:339 +msgid "Antigua" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:341 +msgid "Anguilla" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:343 +msgid "Aruba" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:345 +msgid "Asuncion" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:347 +msgid "Barbados" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:349 +msgid "Belize" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:351 +msgid "Bogota" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:353 +msgid "Caracas" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:355 +msgid "Cayenne" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:357 +msgid "Cayman Islands" +msgstr "" + +#. KY +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:359 +msgid "Costa Rica" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:361 +msgid "Curacao" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:363 +msgid "Dominica" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:365 +msgid "El Salvador" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:367 +msgid "Grand Turk" +msgstr "" + +#. TC +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:369 +msgid "Guayaquil" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:371 +msgid "Grenada" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:373 +msgid "Guadeloupe" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:375 +msgid "Guatemala" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:377 +msgid "Guyana" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:379 +msgid "Havana" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:381 +msgid "Jamaica" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:383 +msgid "La Paz" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:385 +msgid "Lima" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:387 +msgid "Managua" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:389 +msgid "Martinique" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:391 +msgid "Montserrat" +msgstr "" + +#. MS +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:393 +msgid "Uruguay" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:395 +msgid "Nassau" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:397 +msgid "Panama" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:399 +msgid "Paramaribo" +msgstr "" + +#. SR +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:401 +msgid "Port-au-Prince" +msgstr "" + +#. HT +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:403 +msgid "Port of Spain" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:407 +msgid "Chile Continental" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:409 +msgid "Santo Domingo" +msgstr "" + +#. DO +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:411 +msgid "Saint Lucia" +msgstr "" + +#. LC +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:413 +msgid "Saint Kitts and Nevis" +msgstr "" + +#. KN +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:415 +msgid "St Thomas" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:417 +msgid "St Vincent" +msgstr "" + +#. VC +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:419 +msgid "Tegucigalpa" +msgstr "" + +#. HN +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:421 +msgid "Tortola" +msgstr "" + +#. VG +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:424 +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:884 +msgid "Stanley" +msgstr "" + +#. Falklands +#. time zone +#. WS +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:427 +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:866 +msgid "Easter Island" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:429 +msgid "Galapagos" +msgstr "" + +#. name of region +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:436 +msgid "Russia" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:439 +msgid "Kaliningrad" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:441 +msgid "Moscow" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:443 +msgid "Samara" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:445 +msgid "Volgograd" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:447 +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:489 +msgid "Anadyr" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#. MN +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:449 +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:531 +msgid "Irkutsk" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:451 +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:543 +msgid "Kamchatka" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:453 +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:549 +msgid "Krasnoyarsk" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:455 +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:559 +msgid "Magadan" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:457 +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:569 +msgid "Novosibirsk" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:459 +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:571 +msgid "Omsk" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:461 +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:589 +msgid "Sakhalin" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:463 +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:599 +msgid "Vladivostok" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:465 +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:627 +msgid "Yakutsk" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:467 +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:601 +msgid "Yekaterinburg" +msgstr "" + +#. name of region +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:474 +msgid "Asia" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:477 +msgid "Aden" +msgstr "" + +#. YE +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:479 +msgid "Almaty" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:481 +msgid "Amman" +msgstr "" + +#. JO +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:483 +msgid "Aqtobe" +msgstr "" + +#. KZ +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:485 +msgid "Aqtau" +msgstr "" + +#. KZ +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:487 +msgid "Ashgabat" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:491 +msgid "Baghdad" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:493 +msgid "Bahrain" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:495 +msgid "Baku" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:497 +msgid "Bangkok" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:499 +msgid "Beirut" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:501 +msgid "Bishkek" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:503 +msgid "Brunei" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:505 +msgid "Kolkata" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:507 +msgid "Choibalsan" +msgstr "" + +#. MN +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:509 +msgid "Chongqing" +msgstr "" + +#. CN +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:511 +msgid "Colombo" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:513 +msgid "Damascus" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:515 +msgid "Dhaka" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:517 +msgid "Dili" +msgstr "" + +#. TL +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:519 +msgid "Dubai" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:521 +msgid "Dushanbe" +msgstr "" + +#. TJ +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:523 +msgid "Gaza" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:525 +msgid "Harbin" +msgstr "" + +#. CN +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:527 +msgid "Hongkong" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:529 +msgid "Hovd" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:533 +msgid "Jakarta" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:535 +msgid "Jayapura" +msgstr "" + +#. ID +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:537 +msgid "Israel" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:539 +msgid "Afghanistan" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:541 +msgid "Karachi" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:545 +msgid "Kashgar" +msgstr "" + +#. CN +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:547 +msgid "Kathmandu" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:551 +msgid "Kuala Lumpur" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:553 +msgid "Kuching" +msgstr "" + +#. MY +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:555 +msgid "Kuwait" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:557 +msgid "Macao" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:561 +msgid "Makassar" +msgstr "" + +#. ID +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:563 +msgid "Manila" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:565 +msgid "Muscat" +msgstr "" + +#. OM +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:567 +msgid "Nicosia" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:573 +msgid "Oral" +msgstr "" + +#. KZ +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:575 +msgid "Phnom Penh" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:577 +msgid "Pontianak" +msgstr "" + +#. ID +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:579 +msgid "Pyongyang" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:581 +msgid "Qatar" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:583 +msgid "Qyzylorda" +msgstr "" + +#. KZ +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:585 +msgid "Myanmar" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:587 +msgid "Ho Chi Minh City" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:591 +msgid "Samarkand" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:593 +msgid "Tashkent" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:595 +msgid "Tehran" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:597 +msgid "Thimphu" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:603 +msgid "Tokyo" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:605 +msgid "Shanghai" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:607 +msgid "Beijing" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:609 +msgid "Taipei" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:611 +msgid "Seoul" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:613 +msgid "Riyadh" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:615 +msgid "Singapore" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:617 +msgid "Tbilisi" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:619 +msgid "Japan" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:621 +msgid "Ulan Bator" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:623 +msgid "Urumqi" +msgstr "" + +#. CN +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:625 +msgid "Vientiane" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:629 +msgid "Yerevan" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:632 +msgid "Mideast Riyadh87" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:634 +msgid "Mideast Riyadh88" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:636 +msgid "Mideast Riyadh89" +msgstr "" + +#. name of region +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:644 +msgid "Australia" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:647 +msgid "Lindeman" +msgstr "" + +#. AU +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:649 +msgid "Eucla" +msgstr "" + +#. AU +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:651 +msgid "Lord Howe Island" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:653 +msgid "Northern Territory (Darwin)" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:655 +msgid "Queensland (Brisbane)" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:657 +msgid "South Australia (Adelaide)" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:659 +msgid "New South Wales (Sydney)" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:661 +msgid "New South Wales (Broken Hill)" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:663 +msgid "Tasmania (Hobart)" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:665 +msgid "Tasmania (Currie)" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:667 +msgid "Victoria (Melbourne)" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:669 +msgid "Western Australia (Perth)" +msgstr "" + +#. name of region +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:677 +msgid "Africa" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:681 +msgid "Abidjan" +msgstr "" + +#. CI +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:683 +msgid "Addis Ababa" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:685 +msgid "Algiers" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:687 +msgid "Asmara" +msgstr "" + +#. ER +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:689 +msgid "Accra" +msgstr "" + +#. GH +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:691 +msgid "Bamako" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:693 +msgid "Bangui" +msgstr "" + +#. CF +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:695 +msgid "Banjul" +msgstr "" + +#. GM +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:697 +msgid "Bissau" +msgstr "" + +#. GW +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:699 +msgid "Blantyre" +msgstr "" + +#. MW +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:701 +msgid "Brazzaville" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:703 +msgid "Bujumbura" +msgstr "" + +#. BI +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:705 +msgid "Cairo" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:707 +msgid "Casablanca" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:709 +msgid "Ceuta" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:711 +msgid "Conakry" +msgstr "" + +#. GN +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:713 +msgid "Dakar" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:715 +msgid "Dar es Salaam" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:717 +msgid "Djibouti" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:719 +msgid "Douala" +msgstr "" + +#. CM +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:721 +msgid "El Aaiun" +msgstr "" + +#. EH +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:723 +msgid "Freetown" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:725 +msgid "Gaborone" +msgstr "" + +#. BW +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:727 +msgid "Harare" +msgstr "" + +#. ZW +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:729 +msgid "Johannesburg" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:731 +msgid "Kampala" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:733 +msgid "Khartoum" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:735 +msgid "Kinshasa" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:737 +msgid "Kigali" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:739 +msgid "Lagos" +msgstr "" + +#. NG +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:741 +msgid "Libreville" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:743 +msgid "Lome" +msgstr "" + +#. TG +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:745 +msgid "Luanda" +msgstr "" + +#. AO +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:747 +msgid "Lubumbashi" +msgstr "" + +#. CD +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:749 +msgid "Lusaka" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:751 +msgid "Malabo" +msgstr "" + +#. GQ +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:753 +msgid "Maputo" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:755 +msgid "Maseru" +msgstr "" + +#. LS +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:757 +msgid "Mbabane" +msgstr "" + +#. SZ +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:759 +msgid "Mogadishu" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:761 +msgid "Monrovia" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:763 +msgid "Nairobi" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:765 +msgid "Ndjamena" +msgstr "" + +#. TD +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:767 +msgid "Niamey" +msgstr "" + +#. NE +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:769 +msgid "Nouakchott" +msgstr "" + +#. MR +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:771 +msgid "Ouagadougou" +msgstr "" + +#. BF +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:773 +msgid "Porto-Novo" +msgstr "" + +#. BJ +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:775 +msgid "Sao Tome" +msgstr "" + +#. ST +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:777 +msgid "Tripoli" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:779 +msgid "Tunis" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:781 +msgid "Windhoek" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:784 +msgid "Antananarivo" +msgstr "" + +#. Madagascar +#. time zone +#. MV +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:786 +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:932 +msgid "Reunion" +msgstr "" + +#. name of time zone region +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:793 +msgid "Pacific" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:796 +msgid "New Zealand" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:798 +msgid "Fiji" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:800 +msgid "Guadalcanal" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:802 +msgid "Guam" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:804 +msgid "Midway" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:806 +msgid "Nauru" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:808 +msgid "Palau" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:810 +msgid "Pitcairn" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:812 +msgid "Tahiti" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:814 +msgid "Samoa" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:816 +msgid "Port_Moresby" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:818 +msgid "Rarotonga" +msgstr "" + +#. CK +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:820 +msgid "Chuuk" +msgstr "" + +#. FM +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:822 +msgid "Pohnpei" +msgstr "" + +#. FM +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:824 +msgid "Kosrae" +msgstr "" + +#. FM +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:826 +msgid "Tarawa" +msgstr "" + +#. KI +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:828 +msgid "Enderbury" +msgstr "" + +#. KI +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:830 +msgid "Kiritimati" +msgstr "" + +#. KI +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:832 +msgid "Majuro" +msgstr "" + +#. MH +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:834 +msgid "Kwajalein" +msgstr "" + +#. MH +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:836 +msgid "Saipan" +msgstr "" + +#. MP +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:838 +msgid "Noumea" +msgstr "" + +#. NC +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:840 +msgid "Norfolk" +msgstr "" + +#. NF +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:842 +msgid "Niue" +msgstr "" + +#. NU +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:844 +msgid "Chatham" +msgstr "" + +#. NZ +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:846 +msgid "Marquesas" +msgstr "" + +#. PF +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:848 +msgid "Gambier" +msgstr "" + +#. PF +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:850 +msgid "Fakaofo" +msgstr "" + +#. TK +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:852 +msgid "Tongatapu" +msgstr "" + +#. TO +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:854 +msgid "Funafuti" +msgstr "" + +#. TV +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:856 +msgid "Johnston" +msgstr "" + +#. UM +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:858 +msgid "Wake" +msgstr "" + +#. UM +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:860 +msgid "Efate" +msgstr "" + +#. VU +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:862 +msgid "Wallis" +msgstr "" + +#. WF +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:864 +msgid "Apia" +msgstr "" + +#. name of time zone region +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:873 +msgid "Atlantic" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:876 +msgid "Bermuda" +msgstr "" + +#. Falklands +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:886 +msgid "Cape Verde" +msgstr "" + +#. CV +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:888 +msgid "Faroe Islands" +msgstr "" + +#. FO +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:890 +msgid "South Georgia" +msgstr "" + +#. GS +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:892 +msgid "Madeira" +msgstr "" + +#. PT +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:894 +msgid "St Helena" +msgstr "" + +#. SH +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:896 +msgid "Jan Mayen" +msgstr "" + +#. SJ +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:899 +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:951 +msgid "Greenland (Nuuk)" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:901 +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:953 +msgid "Greenland (Danmarkshavn)" +msgstr "" + +#. GL +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:903 +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:955 +msgid "Greenland (Scoresbysund)" +msgstr "" + +#. GL +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:905 +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:957 +msgid "Greenland (Thule)" +msgstr "" + +#. name of time zone region +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:916 +msgid "Indian Ocean" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:920 +msgid "Cocos Islands" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:922 +msgid "Christmas Island" +msgstr "" + +#. CX +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:924 +msgid "Chagos" +msgstr "" + +#. IO +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:926 +msgid "Comoro" +msgstr "" + +#. KM +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:928 +msgid "Mauritius" +msgstr "" + +#. MU +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:930 +msgid "Maldives" +msgstr "" + +#. RE +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:934 +msgid "Mahe" +msgstr "" + +#. SC +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:936 +msgid "Kerguelen" +msgstr "" + +#. TF +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:938 +msgid "Mayotte" +msgstr "" + +#. name of time zone region +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:945 +msgid "Global" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:948 +msgid "Arctic Longyearbyen" +msgstr "" + +#. GL +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:960 +msgid "Antarctica (South Pole)" +msgstr "" + +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:962 +msgid "Antarctica (McMurdo)" +msgstr "" + +#. AQ +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:964 +msgid "Antarctica (Rothera)" +msgstr "" + +#. AQ +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:966 +msgid "Antarctica (Palmer)" +msgstr "" + +#. AQ +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:968 +msgid "Antarctica (Mawson)" +msgstr "" + +#. AQ +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:970 +msgid "Antarctica (Davis)" +msgstr "" + +#. AQ +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:972 +msgid "Antarctica (Casey)" +msgstr "" + +#. AQ +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:974 +msgid "Antarctica (Vostok)" +msgstr "" + +#. AQ +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:976 +msgid "Antarctica (DumontDUrville)" +msgstr "" + +#. AQ +#. time zone +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:978 +msgid "Antarctica (Syowa)" +msgstr "" + +#. AQ +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:980 +msgid "CET" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:981 +msgid "CST6CDT" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:982 +msgid "EET" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:983 +msgid "EST" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:984 +msgid "EST5EDT" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:985 +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:1036 +msgid "GMT" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:986 +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:1037 +msgid "GMT+0" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:987 +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:1038 +msgid "GMT-0" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:988 +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:1039 +msgid "GMT0" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:989 +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:1040 +msgid "Greenwich" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:990 +msgid "HST" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:991 +msgid "MET" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:992 +msgid "MST" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:993 +msgid "MST7MDT" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:994 +msgid "NZ" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:995 +msgid "NZ-CHAT" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:996 +msgid "Navajo" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:997 +msgid "PST8PDT" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:998 +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:1041 +msgid "UCT" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:999 +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:1042 +msgid "UTC" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:1000 +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:1043 +msgid "Universal" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:1001 +msgid "W-SU" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:1002 +msgid "WET" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:1003 +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:1044 +msgid "Zulu" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:1008 +msgid "Etc" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:1010 +msgid "GMT+1" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:1011 +msgid "GMT+10" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:1012 +msgid "GMT+11" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:1013 +msgid "GMT+12" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:1014 +msgid "GMT+2" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:1015 +msgid "GMT+3" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:1016 +msgid "GMT+4" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:1017 +msgid "GMT+5" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:1018 +msgid "GMT+6" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:1019 +msgid "GMT+7" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:1020 +msgid "GMT+8" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:1021 +msgid "GMT+9" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:1022 +msgid "GMT-1" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:1023 +msgid "GMT-10" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:1024 +msgid "GMT-11" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:1025 +msgid "GMT-12" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:1026 +msgid "GMT-13" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:1027 +msgid "GMT-14" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:1028 +msgid "GMT-2" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:1029 +msgid "GMT-3" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:1030 +msgid "GMT-4" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:1031 +msgid "GMT-5" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:1032 +msgid "GMT-6" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:1033 +msgid "GMT-7" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:1034 +msgid "GMT-8" +msgstr "" + +#: timezone/src/data/timezone_raw.ycp:1035 +msgid "GMT-9" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/tune.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/tune.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/tune.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,1192 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. Command line help text for the hardware detection module, %1 is "hwinfo" +#: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:49 +msgid "Hardware Detection - this module does not support the command line interface, use '%1' instead." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: popup heading +#: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:73 +msgid "Probing Hardware..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress bar label +#: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:76 +msgid "Progress" +msgstr "" + +#. title label +#: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:311 +msgid "&All Entries" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:323 +msgid "&Save to File..." +msgstr "" + +#. dialog header +#: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:332 +msgid "Hardware Information" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:335 +msgid "" +"<P>The <B>Hardware Information</B> module displays the hardware\n" +"details of your computer. Click any node for more information.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:338 +msgid "<P>You can save hardware information to a file. Click <B>Save to File</B> and enter the filename.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. installation proposal header +#: src/clients/hwinfo_proposal.rb:31 +msgid "System and Hardware Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. this is a heading +#. tree node string +#: src/clients/hwinfo_proposal.rb:50 src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:471 +msgid "System" +msgstr "" + +#. this is a menu entry +#: src/clients/hwinfo_proposal.rb:52 +msgid "S&ystem" +msgstr "" + +#. tree widget label +#: src/clients/inst_hwinfo.rb:87 +msgid "&Details" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/clients/inst_hwinfo.rb:95 +msgid "<P><B>Details</B></P><P>The details of the selected hardware component are displayed here.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. heading text, %1 is component name (e.g. "USB UHCI Root Hub") +#: src/clients/inst_hwinfo.rb:101 +msgid "Component '%1'" +msgstr "" + +#. device model name fallback +#. device model is unknown +#. device name (CPU model name string has key "name" instead of "model") +#. TODO allow setting of module args? +#. vendor is empty, device name is unknown +#: src/clients/inst_hwinfo.rb:143 src/clients/inst_hwinfo.rb:228 +#: src/modules/InitHWinfo.rb:280 src/modules/InitHWinfo.rb:281 +#: src/modules/NewID.rb:418 +msgid "Unknown device" +msgstr "" + +#. device class is unknown +#: src/clients/inst_hwinfo.rb:154 +msgid "Unknown device class" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#. tree node string - means "class of hardware" +#: src/clients/inst_hwinfo.rb:166 src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:373 +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:56 +msgid "Class" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string - CPU information +#: src/clients/inst_hwinfo.rb:166 src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:663 +msgid "Model" +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#: src/clients/inst_hwinfo.rb:170 +msgid "&Kernel Settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#: src/clients/inst_hwinfo.rb:173 +msgid "&Details..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/inst_hwinfo.rb:174 +msgid "Save to &File..." +msgstr "" + +#. help text - part 1/3 +#: src/clients/inst_hwinfo.rb:180 +msgid "<P><B>Detected Hardware</B><BR>This table contains all hardware components detected in your system.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text - part 2/3 +#: src/clients/inst_hwinfo.rb:184 +msgid "<P><B>Details</B><BR>Select a component and press <B>Details</B> to see a more detailed description of the component.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text - part 3/3 +#: src/clients/inst_hwinfo.rb:188 +msgid "" +"<P><B>Save to File</B><BR>You can save\n" +" hardware information (<I>hwinfo</I> output) to a file.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. heading text +#: src/clients/inst_hwinfo.rb:197 +msgid "Detected Hardware" +msgstr "" + +#. progress step title +#: src/clients/system_settings_finish.rb:45 +msgid "Saving system settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. text in dialog header +#. text in dialog header +#. dialog header +#: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:95 src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:262 +#: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:439 +msgid "PCI ID Setup" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#. textentry label +#: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:103 src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:269 +msgid "&Driver" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:110 +msgid "&Vendor" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:117 +msgid "&Subvendor" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:124 +msgid "&Class" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#. textentry label +#: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:133 src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:276 +msgid "Sys&FS Directory" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:140 +msgid "&Device" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:147 +msgid "S&ubdevice" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:154 +msgid "Class &Mask" +msgstr "" + +#. error message, driver name and sysfs directory are empty. one is needed +#. error message, driver name and sysfs directory are empty +#: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:197 src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:314 +msgid "Enter the driver or SysFS directory name." +msgstr "" + +#. error message, user didn't fill any PCI ID value +#: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:204 +msgid "At least one PCI ID value is required." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:286 +msgid "PCI &Device" +msgstr "" + +#. table header, use as short texts as possible +#. tree node string - means "hardware driver" +#: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:366 src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:96 +msgid "Driver" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:367 +msgid "Card Name" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:368 src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:336 +msgid "Vendor" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:369 src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:81 +msgid "Device" +msgstr "" + +#. table header, use as short texts as possible +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:371 src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:321 +msgid "Subvendor" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:372 +msgid "Subdevice" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:374 +msgid "Class Mask" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:375 +msgid "SysFS Dir." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:383 +msgid "&From List" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:384 +msgid "&Manually" +msgstr "" + +#. help text header +#: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:409 +msgid "<P><B>PCI ID Setup</B><BR></P>" +msgstr "" + +#. PCI ID help text +#: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:411 +msgid "<P>It is possible to add a PCI ID to a device driver to extend its internal database of known supported devices.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. PCI ID help text +#: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:415 +msgid "<P>PCI ID numbers are entered and displayed as hexadecimal numbers. <b>SysFS Dir.</b> is the directory name in the /sys/bus/pci/drivers directory. If it is empty, the driver name is used as the directory name.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. PCI ID help text +#: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:419 +msgid "<P>If the driver is compiled into the kernel, leave the driver name empty and enter the SysFS directory name instead.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. PCI ID help text, %1 stands for a button name (OK or Finish -- depends on the situation) +#: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:424 +msgid "<P>Use the buttons below the table to change the list of PCI IDs. Press <b>%1</b> to activate the settings.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. PCI ID help text +#: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:431 +msgid "<P><B>Warning:</B> This is an expert configuration. Only continue if you know what you are doing.</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:26 +msgid "Architecture" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string - means "hardware bus" +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:31 +msgid "Bus" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string - means "hardware bus ID" +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:36 +msgid "Bus ID" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#. tree node string - CPU information +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:41 src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:593 +msgid "Cache" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:46 src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:51 +msgid "Card Type" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:61 +msgid "CD Type" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:66 +msgid "Device Name" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:71 +msgid "Device Numbers" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:76 src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:221 +msgid "Sysfs ID" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:86 +msgid "Device Identifier" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string - means "hardware drivers" +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:91 +msgid "Drivers" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:101 +msgid "Type" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:106 +msgid "Major" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:111 +msgid "Minor" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:116 +msgid "Range" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string (System Management BIOS) +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:121 +msgid "SMBIOS" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:126 +msgid "Interface" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:131 +msgid "Resources" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:136 +msgid "Requires" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:141 +msgid "Revision" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string - location of hardware in the machine +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:146 +msgid "Slot ID" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:151 +msgid "Length" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:156 +msgid "Width" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:161 +msgid "Height" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:166 +msgid "Active" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:171 +msgid "Device Names" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string (number of colors) +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:176 +msgid "Colors" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string (harddisk parameter) +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:181 +msgid "Logical Geometry" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:186 +msgid "Count" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:191 +msgid "Mode" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string (interrupt request) +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:196 +msgid "IRQ" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:201 +msgid "IO Port" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#. tree node string - memory (RAM) information +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:206 src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:496 +msgid "Memory" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string (direct memory access) +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:211 +msgid "DMA" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:216 +msgid "Hwcfg Bus" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:226 +msgid "Parent Unique ID" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:231 +msgid "UDI" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:236 +msgid "Unique ID" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string (monitor parameter) +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:241 +msgid "Vertical Frequency" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string (monitor parameter) +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:246 +msgid "Max. Horizontal Frequency" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string (monitor parameter) +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:251 +msgid "Max. Vertical Frequency" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string (monitor parameter) +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:256 +msgid "Min. Horizontal Frequency" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string (monitor parameter) +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:261 +msgid "Min. Vertical Frequency" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:266 +msgid "DVD" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:271 +msgid "Kernel Driver" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:276 +msgid "HW Address" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:281 +msgid "BIOS ID" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:286 +msgid "Enabled" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string (monitor resolution e.g. 1280x1024) +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:291 +msgid "Resolution" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:296 +msgid "Size" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:301 +msgid "Old Unique Key" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:306 +msgid "Class (spec)" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:311 +msgid "Device (spec)" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:316 +msgid "Device Identifier (spec)" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:326 +msgid "Subvendor Identifier" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:331 +msgid "Unique Key" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#. tree node string - CPU information +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:341 src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:653 +msgid "Vendor Identifier" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:346 +msgid "BIOS Video" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:351 +msgid "Boot Architecture" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:356 +msgid "Boot Disk" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:361 +msgid "Block Devices" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:366 +msgid "DASD Disks" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:371 +msgid "CD-ROM" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:376 +msgid "CPU" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:381 +msgid "Disk" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:386 +msgid "Display" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#. tree node string - generic device name +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:391 src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:713 +msgid "Floppy Disk" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:396 +msgid "Framebuffer" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string (powermanagement) +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:401 +msgid "Has APM" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:406 +msgid "Has PCMCIA" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string (multiprocessing) +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:411 +msgid "Has SMP" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string - UML = User Mode Linux +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:416 +msgid "UML System" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:421 +msgid "Hardware Data" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:426 +msgid "ISDN" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:431 +msgid "Keyboard" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:436 +msgid "Monitor" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:441 +msgid "Network Devices" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#. tree node string - generic device name +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:446 src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:698 +msgid "Network Interface" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:451 +msgid "Printer" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:456 +msgid "Modem" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:461 +msgid "Sound" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:466 +msgid "Storage Media" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:476 +msgid "TV Card" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:481 +msgid "DVB Card" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:486 +msgid "USB Type" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:491 +msgid "Version" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:501 +msgid "Network Card" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:506 +msgid "BIOS" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:511 +msgid "Framebuffer Device" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string - bus type +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:516 +msgid "IDE" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string - bus type +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:521 +msgid "PCI" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string - bus type +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:526 +msgid "USB" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string - bus type +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:531 +msgid "ISA PnP" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:536 +msgid "USB Controller" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:541 +msgid "USB Hub" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:546 +msgid "IEEE1394 Controller" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:551 +msgid "SCSI" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:556 +msgid "Scanner" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:560 +msgid "Mouse" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:563 +msgid "Joystick" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:568 +msgid "Braille Display" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:573 +msgid "Chipcard Reader" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node - Digital camera or WebCam +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:578 +msgid "Camera" +msgstr "" + +#. Point-to-Point Protocol Over Ethernet +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:583 +msgid "PPP over Ethernet" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string - CPU information +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:588 +msgid "Bogus Millions of Instructions Per Second" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string - CPU information +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:598 +msgid "Coma Bug" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string - CPU information +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:603 +msgid "f00f Bug" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string - CPU information +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:608 +msgid "CPU ID Level" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string - CPU information +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:613 +msgid "Frequency" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string - CPU information +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:618 +msgid "Floating point division bug" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string - CPU information +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:623 +msgid "Flags" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string - CPU information +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:628 +msgid "Floating Point Unit" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string - CPU information +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:633 +msgid "Floating Point Unit Exception" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string - CPU information +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:638 +msgid "Halt Bug" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string - CPU information +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:643 +msgid "Processor" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string - CPU information +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:648 +msgid "Stepping" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string - CPU information +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:658 +msgid "Family" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string - CPU information +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:668 +msgid "WP" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string - wireless network adapters +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:673 +msgid "Wireless LAN" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string - tape devices +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:678 +msgid "Tape" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string - Bluetooth devices +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:683 +msgid "Bluetooth" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string - DSL devices +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:688 +msgid "DSL" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string - generic device name +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:693 +msgid "Ethernet Network Interface" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string - generic device name +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:703 +msgid "Loopback Network Interface" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string - generic device name +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:708 +msgid "Partition" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string - generic device name +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:718 +msgid "Floppy Disk Controller" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string - generic device name +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:723 +msgid "PnP Unclassified Device" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string - generic device name +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:728 +msgid "Unclassified Device" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string - generic device name +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:733 +msgid "Main Memory" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string - generic device name +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:738 +msgid "UHCI Host Controller" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string - generic device name +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:743 +msgid "EHCI Host Controller" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string - generic device name +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:748 +msgid "OHCI Host Controller" +msgstr "" + +#. yes/no strings +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:879 +msgid "Yes" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:879 +msgid "No" +msgstr "" + +#. Linux kernel modules (drivers) +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:917 +msgid "Modules" +msgstr "" + +#. tree node string - %1 is device name, %2 is /dev file +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:929 +msgid "%1 (%2)" +msgstr "" + +#. window title +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:1057 +msgid "Save hwinfo Output to File" +msgstr "" + +#. progress window content +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:1063 +msgid "Saving hardware information..." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup message +#: src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:1071 +msgid "Saving output to the file '%1' failed." +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. File: +#. system_settings.ycp +#. +#. Summary: +#. Configuration of System Settings. PCI ID, Kernel parameters, +#. Bootloader parameters etc. +#. +#. Authors: +#. Lukas Ocilka +#. +#. $Id$ +#. +#. explicitly set no help (otherwise CWM logs an error) +#: src/include/hwinfo/system_settings_dialogs.rb:45 +#: src/include/hwinfo/system_settings_dialogs.rb:176 +msgid "Kernel Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label +#: src/include/hwinfo/system_settings_dialogs.rb:93 +msgid "Global &I/O Scheduler" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item - I/O scheduler +#: src/include/hwinfo/system_settings_dialogs.rb:96 +msgid "Not Configured" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item - I/O scheduler, do not translate the abbreviation in brackets +#: src/include/hwinfo/system_settings_dialogs.rb:98 +msgid "Completely Fair Queuing [cfq]" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item - I/O scheduler, do not translate the abbreviation in brackets +#: src/include/hwinfo/system_settings_dialogs.rb:100 +msgid "NOOP [noop]" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item - I/O scheduler, do not translate the abbreviation in brackets +#: src/include/hwinfo/system_settings_dialogs.rb:102 +msgid "Deadline [deadline]" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for the scheduler widget, do not translate 'cfq' +#: src/include/hwinfo/system_settings_dialogs.rb:118 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Global I/O Scheduler</big></b><br>\n" +"Select the algorithm which orders and sends commands to disk\n" +"devices. This is a global option, it will be used for all disk devices in the\n" +"system. If the option is not configured, the default scheduler (usually 'cfq')\n" +"will be used. See the documentation in the /usr/src/linux/Documentation/block\n" +"directory (package kernel-source) for more information.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. .sysconfig.sysctl +#: src/include/hwinfo/system_settings_dialogs.rb:130 +msgid "Enable &SysRq Keys" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: Help text - over taken from /etc/sysconfig/sysctl file +#: src/include/hwinfo/system_settings_dialogs.rb:134 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Enable SysRq Keys</big></b><br>\n" +"If you enable SysRq keys, you will have some control over the system even if it\n" +"crashes (such as during kernel debugging). If it is enabled, the key combination\n" +"Alt-SysRq- will start the respective command (e.g. reboot the\n" +"computer, dump kernel information). For further information, see\n" +"<tt>/usr/src/linux/Documentation/sysrq.txt</tt> (package kernel-source).</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Short sleep between reads or writes +#: src/include/hwinfo/system_settings_ui.rb:29 +msgid "Reading the Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. FIXME: s390: disable reading PCI IDs +#: src/include/hwinfo/system_settings_ui.rb:36 +msgid "Read the PCI ID settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/hwinfo/system_settings_ui.rb:36 +msgid "Read the system settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/hwinfo/system_settings_ui.rb:38 +msgid "Reading the PCI ID settings..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/hwinfo/system_settings_ui.rb:39 +msgid "Reading the system settings..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/hwinfo/system_settings_ui.rb:40 +#: src/include/hwinfo/system_settings_ui.rb:80 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/hwinfo/system_settings_ui.rb:42 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Reading the Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Please wait...</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. I have to admit that this is very ugly but it is here +#. to avoid of the very long starting time of the yast module +#. because the Storage module (which is imported by the Bootloader (imported by the SystemSettings module)) +#. has a Read() function call in its constructor. +#: src/include/hwinfo/system_settings_ui.rb:71 +msgid "Saving the Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/hwinfo/system_settings_ui.rb:76 +msgid "Save the PCI ID settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/hwinfo/system_settings_ui.rb:76 +msgid "Save the system settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/hwinfo/system_settings_ui.rb:78 +msgid "Saving the PCI ID settings..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/hwinfo/system_settings_ui.rb:79 +msgid "Saving the system settings..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/hwinfo/system_settings_ui.rb:82 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Saving the Configuration</big></b><br>\n" +"Please wait...</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. group by CPU names, strip possible white space (see bnc#803000) +#: src/modules/InitHWinfo.rb:56 +msgid "Unknown processor" +msgstr "" + +#. create processor count string +#. the first %s is integer number (greater than 1) +#. the second %s is processor model name +#: src/modules/InitHWinfo.rb:67 +msgid "%sx %s" +msgstr "" + +#. list separator (placed between items) +#: src/modules/InitHWinfo.rb:74 +msgid ", " +msgstr "" + +#. system manufacturer is unknown +#. system product name is unknown +#: src/modules/InitHWinfo.rb:118 src/modules/InitHWinfo.rb:120 +msgid "Unknown" +msgstr "" + +#. probe devices, store model, class, uniq. ID for each device +#. probe by bus +#. list(string) paths = [ "cpu", "memory", "ide", "pci", "scsi", "isapnp", "floppy", "usb", "monitor" ]; +#. probe by device class +#: src/modules/InitHWinfo.rb:235 +msgid "Hardware Detection" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/InitHWinfo.rb:238 +msgid "Detect hardware" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/InitHWinfo.rb:239 +msgid "Detecting hardware..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/InitHWinfo.rb:240 +msgid "Hardware detection is in progress. Please wait." +msgstr "" + +#. set progress bar label +#: src/modules/InitHWinfo.rb:260 +msgid "%1..." +msgstr "" + +#. Error message +#: src/modules/NewID.rb:462 +msgid "File '%1' does not exist. Cannot set new PCI ID." +msgstr "" + +#. test for installation proposal +#. %1 - name of kernel driver (e.g. e100) +#. %2 - PCI ID (hexnumbers) +#: src/modules/NewID.rb:686 +msgid "Driver: %1, New PCI ID: %2" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/update.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/update.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/update.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,797 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. Proposal for backup during update +#: src/clients/backup_proposal.rb:65 +msgid "Create Backup of Modified Files" +msgstr "" + +#. Proposal for backup during update +#: src/clients/backup_proposal.rb:72 +msgid "Create Backup of /etc/sysconfig Directory" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/backup_proposal.rb:76 +msgid "Do Not Create Backups" +msgstr "" + +#. Proposal for backup during update +#: src/clients/backup_proposal.rb:81 +msgid "Remove Backups from Previous Updates" +msgstr "" + +#. this is a heading +#: src/clients/backup_proposal.rb:107 +msgid "Backup" +msgstr "" + +#. this is a menu entry +#: src/clients/backup_proposal.rb:109 +msgid "&Backup" +msgstr "" + +#. screen title for software selection +#: src/clients/inst_backup.rb:54 +msgid "Backup System Before Update" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label if user wants to backup modified files +#: src/clients/inst_backup.rb:67 +msgid "Create &Backup of Modified Files" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label if user wants to backup /etc/sysconfig +#: src/clients/inst_backup.rb:75 +msgid "Create a &Complete Backup of /etc/sysconfig" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label if user wants remove old backup stuff +#: src/clients/inst_backup.rb:84 +msgid "Remove &Old Backups from the Backup Directory" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for backup dialog during update 1/7 +#: src/clients/inst_backup.rb:91 +msgid "" +"<p>To avoid any loss of information during update,\n" +"create a <b>backup</b> prior to updating.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for backup dialog during update 2/7 +#: src/clients/inst_backup.rb:98 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Warning:</b> This will not be a complete\n" +"backup. Only modified files will be saved.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for backup dialog during update 3/7 +#: src/clients/inst_backup.rb:106 +msgid "<p>Select the desired options.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for backup dialog during update 4/7 +#: src/clients/inst_backup.rb:112 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Create a Backup of Modified Files:</b>\n" +"Stores only those modified files that will be replaced during update.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for backup dialog during update 5/7 +#: src/clients/inst_backup.rb:120 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Create a Complete Backup of\n" +"/etc/sysconfig:</b> This covers all configuration files that are part of the\n" +"sysconfig mechanism, even those that will not be replaced.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for backup dialog during update 6/7 +#: src/clients/inst_backup.rb:130 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Remove Old Backups from the Backup\n" +"Directory:</b> If your current system already is the result of an earlier\n" +"update, there may be old configuration file backups. Select this option to\n" +"remove them.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for backup dialog during update 7/7 +#: src/clients/inst_backup.rb:142 +msgid "<p>All backups are placed in %1.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup, user did not enter a valid directory specification +#: src/clients/inst_backup.rb:222 +msgid "Invalid backup path." +msgstr "" + +#. there is not enough space for the backup during update +#. inform the user about this (MB==megabytes) +#: src/clients/inst_backup.rb:261 +msgid "Minimum disk space of %1 MB required." +msgstr "" + +#. screen title for update options +#. this is a heading +#: src/clients/inst_update.rb:48 src/clients/update_proposal.rb:284 +msgid "Update Options" +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#: src/clients/inst_update.rb:51 +msgid "Select Patterns" +msgstr "" + +#. check if state changed +#. Display warning message +#: src/clients/inst_update.rb:59 +msgid "" +"You have already chosen software from \"Detailed selection\".\n" +"You will lose that selection if you change the basic selection." +msgstr "" + +#. Build and show dialog +#. Table item (unknown system [neither openSUSE 11.1 nor SLES 14 nor ...]) +#. Table item (unknown architecture) +#. Table item (unknown file system) +#. label - name of sustem to update +#. starts with >`< +#. Get installed release name +#. TRANSLATORS: label for an unknown installed system +#: src/clients/inst_update.rb:69 src/clients/inst_update.rb:74 +#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:100 src/include/update/rootpart.rb:106 +#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:126 src/modules/RootPart.rb:156 +#: src/modules/RootPart.rb:1441 src/modules/RootPart.rb:1447 +#: src/modules/RootPart.rb:1994 +msgid "Unknown" +msgstr "" + +#. label showing to which version we are updating +#: src/clients/inst_update.rb:80 +msgid "Update to %1" +msgstr "" + +#. label showing from which version to which version we are updating +#: src/clients/inst_update.rb:84 +msgid "Update from %1 to %2" +msgstr "" + +#. frame title for update selection +#: src/clients/inst_update.rb:96 +msgid "Update Mode" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label for update including new packages +#: src/clients/inst_update.rb:108 +msgid "" +"&Update with Installation of New Software and Features\n" +"Based on the Selection:\n" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button label for update of already installed packages only +#: src/clients/inst_update.rb:122 +msgid "Only U&pdate Installed Packages" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for dialog "update options" 1/4 +#: src/clients/inst_update.rb:143 +msgid "" +"<p>The update option offers two different modes. In\n" +"either case, we recommend to make a backup of your personal data.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for dialog "update options" 2/4, %1 is a product name +#: src/clients/inst_update.rb:151 +msgid "" +"<p><b>With New Software:</b> This default setting\n" +"updates the existing software and installs all new features and benefits of\n" +"the new <tt>%1</tt> version. The selection is based on the former predefined\n" +"software selection.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for dialog "update options" 3/4 +#: src/clients/inst_update.rb:164 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Only Installed Packages:</b> This selection\n" +"only updates the packages already installed on your system. <i>Note:</i>\n" +"New software in the predefined software selection, such as new YaST modules, is\n" +"not available after the update. You might miss new features.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for dialog "update options" 4/4 +#: src/clients/inst_update.rb:175 +msgid "" +"<p>After the update, some software might not\n" +"function anymore. Activate <b>Delete Unmaintained Packages</b> to delete those\n" +"packages during the update.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. warning / question +#: src/clients/inst_update.rb:231 +msgid "" +"Changing the update method to 'Update packages only' might\n" +"lead into non-bootable or non-working system if you do not\n" +"adjust the list of packages yourself.\n" +"\n" +"Really continue?" +msgstr "" + +#. yes/no question +#: src/clients/inst_update.rb:243 +msgid "" +"Do you really want\n" +"to reset your detailed selection?" +msgstr "" + +#. error report +#. inform user in the proposal about the failed mount +#. error report +#: src/clients/inst_update_partition_auto.rb:79 +#: src/clients/rootpart_proposal.rb:110 src/include/update/rootpart.rb:385 +msgid "Failed to mount target system" +msgstr "" + +#. Correctly mounted but incomplete installation found +#: src/clients/inst_update_partition_auto.rb:84 +msgid "A possibly incomplete installation has been detected." +msgstr "" + +#. proposal for packages during update, %1 is count of packages +#: src/clients/packages_proposal.rb:119 +msgid "Packages to Update: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. proposal for packages during update, %1 is count of packages +#: src/clients/packages_proposal.rb:127 +msgid "New Packages to Install: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. proposal for packages during update, %1 is count of packages +#: src/clients/packages_proposal.rb:135 +msgid "Packages to Remove: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. part of summary, %1 is size of packages (in MB or GB) +#: src/clients/packages_proposal.rb:143 +msgid "Total Size of Packages to Update: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: warning text, keep the HTML tags (<a href...>) untouched +#: src/clients/packages_proposal.rb:154 +msgid "Cannot solve all conflicts. Manual intervention is required.</a>" +msgstr "" + +#. this is a heading +#: src/clients/packages_proposal.rb:198 +msgid "Packages" +msgstr "" + +#. this is a menu entry +#: src/clients/packages_proposal.rb:200 +msgid "&Packages" +msgstr "" + +#. Proposal for system to update +#: src/clients/rootpart_proposal.rb:70 +msgid "No root partition found" +msgstr "" + +#. Proposal for system to update +#: src/clients/rootpart_proposal.rb:97 +msgid "%1 on root partition %2" +msgstr "" + +#. this is a heading +#: src/clients/rootpart_proposal.rb:149 +msgid "Selected for Update" +msgstr "" + +#. this is a menu entry +#: src/clients/rootpart_proposal.rb:151 +msgid "&Selected for Update" +msgstr "" + +#. Update::deleteOldPackages = false; +#: src/clients/run_update.rb:57 +msgid "&Update" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: error message - the module does not provide command line interface +#: src/clients/update.rb:47 +msgid "There is no user interface available for this module." +msgstr "" + +#. error message in proposal +#. part of error popup message +#: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:87 src/clients/update_proposal.rb:390 +msgid "Cannot read the current RPM Database." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: unknown product (label) +#. TRANSLATORS: unknown product (label) +#. TRANSLATORS: unknown product name +#. TRANSLATORS: unknown product name +#: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:101 src/clients/update_proposal.rb:119 +#: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:174 src/clients/update_proposal.rb:180 +msgid "Unknown product" +msgstr "" + +#. error message in proposal +#: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:129 +msgid "The installed product (%{update_from}) is not compatible with the product on the installation media (%{update_to})." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: proposal error, %1 is the version of installed system +#. %2 is the version being installed +#: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:146 +msgid "" +"Updating system to another version (%1 -> %2) is not supported on the running system.<br>\n" +"Boot from the installation media and use a normal upgrade\n" +"or disable software repositories of products with different versions.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: proposal warning, both %1 and %2 are replaced with product names +#: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:167 +msgid "Warning: Updating from '%1' to '%2', products do not exactly match." +msgstr "" + +#. Proposal for backup during update +#: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:194 +msgid "Only update installed packages" +msgstr "" + +#. proposal string +#: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:209 +msgid "Update based on patterns" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: proposal dialog help +#: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:238 +msgid "" +"<p><b><big>Update Options</big></b> Select how your system will be updated.\n" +"Choose if only installed packages should be updated or new ones should be\n" +"installed as well (default). Decide whether unmaintained packages should be\n" +"deleted.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. this is a menu entry +#: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:286 +msgid "&Update Options" +msgstr "" + +#. part of error popup message, %1 stands for newline-separated list of files +#: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:393 +msgid "None of these files exist:%1" +msgstr "" + +#. continue-cancel popup +#: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:529 +msgid "" +"The installed product is not compatible with the product\n" +"on the installation media. If you try to update using the\n" +"current installation media, the system may not start or\n" +"some applications may not run properly." +msgstr "" + +#. Table item (unknown system) +#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:93 +msgid "Unknown Linux" +msgstr "" + +#. Table item (unknown system) +#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:96 +msgid "Unknown or Non-Linux" +msgstr "" + +#. is a linux fs, can be a root fs, has a fs name +#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:118 +msgid "%1 (%2)" +msgstr "" + +#. label for selection of root partition (for boot) +#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:186 +msgid "Partition or System to Boot:" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for root partition dialog (for boot) +#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:189 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Select the partition or system to boot.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. label for selection of root partition (for update) +#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:196 +msgid "Partition or System to Update:" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for root partition dialog (for update) +#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:199 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Select the partition or system to update.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. headline for dialog "Select for update" +#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:207 +msgid "Select for Update" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for root partition dialog (general part) +#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:214 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b>Show All Partitions</b> expands the list to a\n" +"general overview of your system's partitions.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:234 +msgid "System" +msgstr "" + +#. table header item +#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:236 +msgid "Partition" +msgstr "" + +#. table header item +#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:238 +msgid "Architecture" +msgstr "" + +#. table header item +#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:240 +msgid "File System" +msgstr "" + +#. table header item +#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:242 +msgid "Label" +msgstr "" + +#. check box +#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:252 +msgid "&Show All Partitions" +msgstr "" + +#. pushbutton to (rightaway) boot the system selected above +#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:283 +msgid "&Boot" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:354 +msgid "" +"No installed system that can be upgraded with this product was found\n" +"on the selected partition." +msgstr "" + +#. continue-cancel popup +#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:364 +msgid "" +"The architecture of the system installed in the selected partition\n" +"is different from the one of this product.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. pop-up question +#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:394 +msgid "" +"A possibly incomplete installation has been detected on the selected partition.\n" +"Are sure you want to use it anyway?" +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:398 +msgid "&Yes, Use It" +msgstr "" + +#. Target load failed, #466803 +#. Target load failed, #466803 +#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:436 src/include/update/rootpart.rb:461 +msgid "" +"Initializing the system for upgrade has failed for unknown reason.\n" +"It is highly recommended not to continue the upgrade process.\n" +"\n" +"Are you sure you want to continue?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:442 src/include/update/rootpart.rb:467 +msgid "&Yes, Continue" +msgstr "" + +#. Link to SDB article concerning renaming of devices. +#: src/modules/RootPart.rb:109 +msgid "" +"See the SDB article at %1 for details\n" +"about how to solve this problem." +msgstr "" + +#. label - name of sustem to update +#: src/modules/RootPart.rb:147 +msgid "Unknown Linux System" +msgstr "" + +#. label - name of sustem to update +#: src/modules/RootPart.rb:152 +msgid "Non-Linux System" +msgstr "" + +#. error report, %1 is device (eg. /dev/hda1) +#: src/modules/RootPart.rb:308 +msgid "" +"Cannot unmount partition %1.\n" +"\n" +"It is currently in use. If the partition stays mounted,\n" +"the data may be lost. Unmount the partition manually\n" +"or restart your computer.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. label, %1 is partition +#: src/modules/RootPart.rb:379 +msgid "Checking partition %1" +msgstr "" + +#. @param [String] headline (optional; to disable, use "") +#. @param [String] question +#. @param string button (true) +#. @param string button (false) +#. @param [String] details (hidden under [Details] button; optional; to disable, use "") +#: src/modules/RootPart.rb:416 +msgid "Show &Details" +msgstr "" + +#. #176292, run fsck before jfs is mounted +#: src/modules/RootPart.rb:498 +msgid "Checking file system on %1..." +msgstr "" + +#. popup headline +#: src/modules/RootPart.rb:530 +msgid "File System Check Failed" +msgstr "" + +#. popup question (continue/cancel dialog) +#. %1 is a device name such as /dev/hda5 +#: src/modules/RootPart.rb:534 +msgid "" +"The file system check of device %1 has failed.\n" +"\n" +"Do you want to continue mounting the device?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. button +#: src/modules/RootPart.rb:543 +msgid "&Skip Mounting" +msgstr "" + +#. yes-no popup +#: src/modules/RootPart.rb:1065 +msgid "Incorrect password. Try again?" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: a popup headline +#: src/modules/RootPart.rb:1168 +msgid "Warning" +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: error message, +#. %1 is replaced with the current /boot partition size +#. %2 with the recommended size +#: src/modules/RootPart.rb:1173 +msgid "" +"Your /boot partition is too small (%1 MB).\n" +"We recommend a size of no less than %2 MB or else the new Kernel may not fit.\n" +"It is safer to either enlarge the partition\n" +"or not use a /boot partition at all.\n" +"\n" +"Do you want to continue updating the current system?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. label in a popup, %1 is device (eg. /dev/hda1), %2 is output of the 'mount' command +#: src/modules/RootPart.rb:1265 +msgid "" +"The partition %1 could not be mounted.\n" +"\n" +"%2\n" +"\n" +"If you are sure that the partition is not necessary for the\n" +"update (not a system partition), click Continue.\n" +"To check or fix the mount options, click Specify Mount Options.\n" +"To abort the update, click Cancel.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. push button +#: src/modules/RootPart.rb:1283 +msgid "&Specify Mount Options" +msgstr "" + +#. popup heading +#: src/modules/RootPart.rb:1299 +msgid "Mount Options" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/modules/RootPart.rb:1302 +msgid "&Mount Point" +msgstr "" + +#. tex entry label +#: src/modules/RootPart.rb:1305 +msgid "&Device" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/modules/RootPart.rb:1310 +msgid "" +"&File System\n" +"(empty for autodetection)" +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/modules/RootPart.rb:1387 +msgid "The /var partition %1 could not be mounted.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Informational text about selected partition, %x are replaced with values later +#: src/modules/RootPart.rb:1428 +msgid "" +"<b>File system:</b> %1, <b>Type:</b> %2,<br>\n" +"<b>Label:</b> %3, <b>Size:</b> %4,<br>\n" +"<b>udev IDs:</b> %5,<br>\n" +"<b>udev path:</b> %6" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/RootPart.rb:1442 +msgid "None" +msgstr "" + +#. a popup caption +#: src/modules/RootPart.rb:1465 +msgid "Unable to find the /var partition automatically" +msgstr "" + +#. a popup message +#: src/modules/RootPart.rb:1470 +msgid "" +"Your system uses a separate /var partition which is required for the upgrade\n" +"process to detect the disk-naming changes. Select the /var partition manually\n" +"to continue the upgrade process." +msgstr "" + +#. a combo-box label +#: src/modules/RootPart.rb:1483 +msgid "&Select /var Partition Device" +msgstr "" + +#. an informational rich-text widget label +#: src/modules/RootPart.rb:1489 +msgid "Device Info" +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/modules/RootPart.rb:1630 +msgid "Unable to mount /var partition with this disk configuration.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup message, %1 will be replace with the name of the logfile +#: src/modules/RootPart.rb:1661 +msgid "" +"Partitions could not be mounted.\n" +"\n" +"Check the log file %1." +msgstr "" + +#. read the keyboard settings now, so that it used when +#. typing passwords for encrypted partitions +#. Calling a script because otherwise this module would depend on yast2-country +#: src/modules/RootPart.rb:1705 +msgid "" +"Some partitions in the system on %1 are mounted by kernel-device name. This is\n" +"not reliable for the update since kernel-device names are unfortunately not\n" +"persistent. It is strongly recommended to start the old system and change the\n" +"mount-by method to any other method for all partitions." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/modules/RootPart.rb:1723 +msgid "No fstab found." +msgstr "" + +#. message part 1 +#: src/modules/RootPart.rb:1748 +msgid "The root partition in /etc/fstab has an invalid root device.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. message part 2 +#: src/modules/RootPart.rb:1753 +msgid "It is currently mounted as %1 but listed as %2.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. prepare progress-bar +#: src/modules/RootPart.rb:2115 +msgid "Evaluating root partition. One moment please..." +msgstr "" + +#. intermediate popup while mounting partitions +#: src/modules/RootPart.rb:2197 +msgid "Mounting partitions. One moment please..." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog caption +#: src/modules/RootPart.rb:2212 +msgid "Searching for Available Systems" +msgstr "" + +#. Returns product name as found in SuSE-release file. +#. Compatible with OSRelease.ReleaseInformation. +#. Returns SUSEReleaseFileMissingError if SuSE-release file is missing. +#. Returns IOError is SuSE-release could not be open. +#. +#. @param [String] system base-directory, default is "/" +#. @return [String] product name +#: src/modules/SUSERelease.rb:65 +msgid "Release file %{file} not found" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/SUSERelease.rb:74 +msgid "Cannot read release file %{file}" +msgstr "" + +#. ----------------------------------------------------------------------- +#. GLOBAL FUNCTIONS +#. ----------------------------------------------------------------------- +#: src/modules/Update.rb:309 +msgid "Unknown Product" +msgstr "" + +#. If the current default desktop is not installed, it's a valid use case +#. and we don't continue further +#: src/modules/Update.rb:791 +msgid "" +"Cannot select these patterns required for installation:\n" +"%{patterns}" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Update.rb:796 +msgid "" +"Cannot select these packages required for installation:\n" +"%{packages}" +msgstr "" + +#: control/update.glade.translations.glade:3 +#: control/update.glade.translations.glade:5 +msgid "Update Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: control/update.glade.translations.glade:4 +msgid "Update" +msgstr "" + +#: control/update.glade.translations.glade:6 +#: control/update.glade.translations.glade:7 +msgid "Perform Update" +msgstr "" + +#: control/update.glade.translations.glade:8 +msgid "Update System Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: control/update.glade.translations.glade:9 +msgid "Update Configuration" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/users.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/users.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/users.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,4322 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. translators: command line help text for Users module +#: src/clients/groups.rb:100 +msgid "Group configuration module" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for list action +#: src/clients/groups.rb:113 +msgid "List of available groups" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for unknown parameter name +#. help text for unknown parameter name +#: src/clients/groups.rb:118 src/clients/users.rb:120 +msgid "User parameters that should be listed" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for show action +#: src/clients/groups.rb:125 +msgid "Show information of selected group" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for delete action +#: src/clients/groups.rb:135 +msgid "Delete an existing group" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for ad action +#: src/clients/groups.rb:145 +msgid "Add new group" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for unknown parameter name +#. help text for unknown parameter name +#: src/clients/groups.rb:150 src/clients/groups.rb:165 +msgid "Additional (LDAP) group parameters" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for ad action +#: src/clients/groups.rb:160 +msgid "Edit an existing group" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for list local option +#: src/clients/groups.rb:173 +msgid "List of local groups" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for list system option +#: src/clients/groups.rb:179 +msgid "List of system groups" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for list ldap option +#: src/clients/groups.rb:185 +msgid "List of LDAP groups" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for list nis option +#: src/clients/groups.rb:191 +msgid "List of NIS groups" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for show uid option +#: src/clients/groups.rb:197 +msgid "GID of the group" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for groupname option +#: src/clients/groups.rb:204 +msgid "Name of the group" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for 'password' option +#: src/clients/groups.rb:211 +msgid "Password of the group" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for 'user' option +#: src/clients/groups.rb:218 +msgid "List of group members, usually usernames, separated by commas. The list of LDAP user DNs must be separated by colons." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for new_groupname option +#: src/clients/groups.rb:225 +msgid "New group name" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for new_gid option +#: src/clients/groups.rb:232 +msgid "New GID of the group" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for show option +#: src/clients/groups.rb:239 +msgid "Type of the group (local, system, nis, ldap)" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for ldap_password option +#. translators: command line help text for ldap_password option +#: src/clients/groups.rb:246 src/clients/users.rb:274 +msgid "Password for LDAP server" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for batchmode option +#. translators: command line help text for batchmode option +#: src/clients/groups.rb:253 src/clients/users.rb:295 +msgid "Do not ask for missing data; return error instead." +msgstr "" + +#. caption for dialog "User Authentication Method" +#. dialog caption +#: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:115 src/clients/inst_user.rb:137 +msgid "User Authentication Method" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for dialog "User Authentication Method" 1/3 +#: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:118 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b>Authentication</b><br>\n" +"Select the authentication method to use for users on your system.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext 2/3 +#. help text for dialog "User Authentication Method" 2/2 +#: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:125 src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:164 +msgid "<p>Select <b>Local</b> to authenticate users only by using the local files <i>/etc/passwd</i> and <i>/etc/shadow</i>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. optional helptext 2.5/3 (local users continued) +#: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:133 +msgid "If you have a previous installation or alternative system, it is possible to create users based on this source. To do so, select <b>Read User Data from a Previous Installation</b>. This option uses an existing or creates a new home directory for each user in the location specified for this installation." +msgstr "" + +#. radiobutton to select ldap user auth. +#: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:141 +msgid "&LDAP" +msgstr "" + +#. radiobutton to select nis user auth. +#: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:143 +msgid "N&IS" +msgstr "" + +#. radiobutton to select samba user auth. +#. menubutton label +#: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:145 src/include/users/widgets.rb:159 +msgid "&Samba" +msgstr "" + +#. radiobutton to select samba user auth. +#: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:147 +msgid "&Windows Domain" +msgstr "" + +#. radiobutton to select local user auth. +#. radiobutton label +#: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:151 src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:85 +msgid "L&ocal (/etc/passwd)" +msgstr "" + +#. radiobutton to select local user auth. +#. authentication type +#: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:155 src/clients/users_proposal.rb:48 +msgid "eDirectory LDAP" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext 3/3 -- nis & samba & ldap avialable +#: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:185 +msgid "" +"<p>If you are using a NIS or LDAP server to store user data or if you want\n" +"to authenticate users against an NT server, choose the appropriate value. Then\n" +"press <b>Next</b> to continue with configuration of your client.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext 3/3 -- nis & ldap avialable +#: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:195 +msgid "" +"<p>If you are using a NIS or LDAP server to store user data, choose the\n" +"appropriate value. Then press <b>Next</b> to continue with configuration of your client.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext 3/3 -- samba &ldap available +#: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:205 +msgid "" +"<p>If you are using an LDAP server to store user data or if you want to\n" +"authenticate users against an NT server, choose the appropriate value. Then\n" +"press <b>Next</b> to continue with configuration of your client.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext 3/3 -- only ldap available +#: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:215 +msgid "" +"<p>If you are using an LDAP server to store user data, choose the\n" +"appropriate value. Then press <b>Next</b> to continue with configuration of your client.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext: additional kerberos support +#: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:225 +msgid "<p>Check <b>Set Up Kerberos Authentication</b> to configure Kerberos after configuring the user data source.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label +#. check box label +#: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:240 src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:102 +msgid "&Read User Data from a Previous Installation" +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#. button label +#: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:245 src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:107 +msgid "&Choose" +msgstr "" + +#. frame title for authentication methods +#: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:295 src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:136 +msgid "Authentication Method" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label +#: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:303 +msgid "Set Up &Kerberos Authentication" +msgstr "" + +#. selection box label +#. selection box label +#: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:428 src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:507 +msgid "&Select Users to Read" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label +#. check box label +#: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:434 src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:515 +msgid "Select or Deselect &All" +msgstr "" + +#. Title for root-password dialogue +#. Title for root-password dialogue +#: src/clients/inst_root.rb:88 src/clients/inst_root_first.rb:57 +msgid "Password for the System Administrator \"root\"" +msgstr "" + +#. advise user to remember his new password +#. advise users to remember their new password +#: src/clients/inst_root.rb:95 src/clients/inst_root_first.rb:67 +msgid "Do not forget what you enter here." +msgstr "" + +#. Label: get password for user root +#. Label: get password for user root +#: src/clients/inst_root.rb:101 src/clients/inst_root_first.rb:73 +msgid "&Password for root User" +msgstr "" + +#. Label: get same password again for verification +#. Label: get same password again for verification +#: src/clients/inst_root.rb:109 src/clients/inst_root_first.rb:81 +msgid "Con&firm Password" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#. text entry label +#: src/clients/inst_root.rb:114 src/clients/inst_root_first.rb:86 +msgid "&Test Keyboard Layout" +msgstr "" + +#. push button +#: src/clients/inst_root.rb:119 +msgid "E&xpert Options..." +msgstr "" + +#. help text ( explain what the user "root" is and does ) 1/5 +#. help text ( explain what the user "root" is and does ) 1/5 +#: src/clients/inst_root.rb:124 src/clients/inst_root_first.rb:93 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Unlike normal users of the system, who write texts, create\n" +"graphics, or browse the Internet, the user \"root\" exists on\n" +"every system and is called into action whenever\n" +"administrative tasks need to be performed. Only log in as root\n" +"when you need to be the system administrator.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, continued 2/5 +#. help text, continued 2/5 +#: src/clients/inst_root.rb:137 src/clients/inst_root_first.rb:106 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Because the root user is equipped with extensive permissions, the password\n" +"for \"root\" should be chosen carefully. A combination of letters and numbers\n" +"is recommended. To ensure that the password was entered correctly,\n" +"reenter it in a second field.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, continued 3/5 +#. help text, continued 3/5 +#: src/clients/inst_root.rb:150 src/clients/inst_root_first.rb:119 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"All the rules for user passwords apply to the \"root\" password:\n" +"Distinguish between uppercase and lowercase. A password should have at\n" +"least 5 characters and, as a rule, not contain any accented letters or umlauts.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text, continued 5/5 +#. help text, continued 5/5 +#: src/clients/inst_root.rb:164 src/clients/inst_root_first.rb:133 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Do not forget this \"root\" password.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. additional help text about password +#. additional help text about password +#: src/clients/inst_root.rb:176 src/clients/inst_root_first.rb:145 +msgid "" +"<p>If you intend to use this password for creating certificates,\n" +"it has to be at least %1 characters long.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for 'test keyboard layout' entry' +#: src/clients/inst_root.rb:187 +msgid "<p>To check whether your current keyboard layout is correct, try entering text into the <b>Test Keyboard Layout</b> field.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. report misspellings of the password +#. report misspellings of the password +#. The two group password information do not match +#. error popup +#. The two user password information do not match +#. error popup +#. The two group password information do not match +#. error popup +#: src/clients/inst_root.rb:233 src/clients/inst_root_first.rb:185 +#: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:688 src/include/users/dialogs.rb:146 +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:1247 src/include/users/dialogs.rb:2364 +msgid "" +"The passwords do not match.\n" +"Try again." +msgstr "" + +#. #-#-#-#-# users.rxgettext.pot (PACKAGE VERSION) #-#-#-#-# +#. report if user forgot to enter a password +#. #-#-#-#-# users.xgettext.pot #-#-#-#-# +#. error popup +#: src/clients/inst_root.rb:243 src/clients/inst_root_first.rb:191 +#: src/modules/UsersSimple.pm:749 +msgid "" +"No password entered.\n" +"Try again." +msgstr "" + +#. yes/no popup question, %1 is a number +#. yes/no popup question, %1 is a number +#: src/clients/inst_root.rb:270 src/clients/inst_root_first.rb:224 +msgid "" +"If you intend to create certificates,\n" +"the password should have at least %1 characters." +msgstr "" + +#. last part of message popup +#. last part of message popup +#. last part of message popup +#. last part of message popup +#: src/clients/inst_root.rb:285 src/clients/inst_root_first.rb:239 +#: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:714 src/include/users/dialogs.rb:1269 +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:2391 +msgid "Really use this password?" +msgstr "" + +#. Error msg (yes/no) +#: src/clients/inst_root.rb:301 +msgid "" +"The root password could not be set.\n" +"You might not be able to log in.\n" +"Try setting it again?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text (shown in the 'busy' situation) +#: src/clients/inst_user.rb:144 +msgid "Initialization of module for configuration of authentication..." +msgstr "" + +#. popup label (%1 is package to install) +#. popup label (%1 is package to install) +#. popup label (%1 is package to install) +#: src/clients/inst_user.rb:171 src/clients/inst_user.rb:195 +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:2450 +msgid "" +"Package %1 is not installed.\n" +"Install it now?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. encryption type +#. encryption type +#. encryption type +#. encryption type +#: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:89 src/clients/users_proposal.rb:53 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:52 src/include/users/helps.rb:54 +msgid "DES" +msgstr "" + +#. encryption type +#. encryption type +#. encryption type +#: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:91 src/clients/users_proposal.rb:55 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:56 +msgid "MD5" +msgstr "" + +#. encryption type +#. encryption type +#: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:93 src/clients/users_proposal.rb:57 +msgid "SHA-256" +msgstr "" + +#. encryption type +#. encryption type +#: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:95 src/clients/users_proposal.rb:59 +msgid "SHA-512" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:143 +msgid "Password Encryption Type" +msgstr "" + +#. Radio button label: password encryption type +#. Radio buttons for password encryption: DES-crypt +#: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:149 src/include/users/widgets.rb:513 +msgid "&DES" +msgstr "" + +#. Radio button label: password encryption type +#. Radio buttons for password encryption: MD5-crypt +#: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:151 src/include/users/widgets.rb:515 +msgid "&MD5" +msgstr "" + +#. Radio button label: password encryption type +#. Radio buttons for password encryption: sha256 crypt +#: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:153 src/include/users/widgets.rb:520 +msgid "SHA-&256" +msgstr "" + +#. Radio button label: password encryption type +#. Radio buttons for password encryption: sha512 crypt +#: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:155 src/include/users/widgets.rb:528 +msgid "SHA-&512" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for dialog "User Authentication Method" 1/2 +#: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:162 +msgid "<p><b>Authentication</b><br></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Help text for password expert dialog +#: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:168 +msgid "<p>Choose a password encryption method for local and system users.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Help text for password expert dialog +#. Help text for password expert dialog 4/5 +#: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:170 src/include/users/widgets.rb:491 +msgid "<p><b>SHA-512</b> is the current standard hash method. Using other algorithms is not recommended unless needed for compatibility purposes.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#. text entry +#: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:223 src/include/users/dialogs.rb:403 +msgid "User's &Full Name" +msgstr "" + +#. input field for login name +#. input field for login name +#: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:230 src/include/users/dialogs.rb:433 +msgid "&Username" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#. checkbox label +#: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:252 src/include/users/dialogs.rb:470 +msgid "U&se this password for system administrator" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#. checkbox label +#: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:258 src/include/users/dialogs.rb:446 +msgid "Receive S&ystem Mail" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:261 +msgid "&Automatic Login" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:283 +msgid "Create New User" +msgstr "" + +#. yes-no popup headline +#. The user login field is empty, this is allowed if the +#. system is part of a network with (e.g.) NIS user management. +#. yes-no popup headline +#: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:342 src/include/users/dialogs.rb:1112 +msgid "Empty User Login" +msgstr "" + +#. yes-no popup contents +#. yes-no popup contents +#: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:344 src/include/users/dialogs.rb:1114 +msgid "" +"Leaving the user name empty only makes sense\n" +"in a network environment with an authentication server.\n" +"Leave it empty?" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for main add user dialog +#. alternative help text 1/7 +#: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:450 src/include/users/helps.rb:212 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Enter the <b>User's Full Name</b>, <b>Username</b>, and <b>Password</b> to\n" +"assign to this user account.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for main add user dialog +#: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:453 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"When entering a password, distinguish between uppercase and\n" +"lowercase. Passwords should not contain any accented characters or umlauts.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text %1 is encryption type, %2,%3 numbers +#. help text 2/4 %1 is encryption type, %2,%3 numbers +#: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:457 src/include/users/helps.rb:73 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"With the current password encryption (%1), the password length should be between\n" +" %2 and %3 characters.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. additional help text about password +#: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:467 +msgid "" +"<p>If you intend to use this password for creating certificates,\n" +"it has to be at least %s characters long.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for main add user dialog +#. help text 4/4 +#: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:472 src/include/users/helps.rb:90 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"To ensure that the password was entered correctly,\n" +"repeat it exactly in a second field. Do not forget your password.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for main add user dialog +#: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:476 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"For the <b>Username</b> use only letters (no accented characters), digits, and <tt>._-</tt>.\n" +"Do not use uppercase letters in this entry unless you know what you are doing.\n" +"Usernames have stricter restrictions than passwords. You can redefine the\n" +"restrictions in the /etc/login.defs file. Read its man page for information.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for main add user dialog +#: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:482 +msgid "<p>Check <b>Use this password for system administrator</b> if the same password as entered for the first user should be used for root.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for main add user dialog +#. these are used only during installation time +#. help text 4/7 (only during installation) +#: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:485 src/include/users/helps.rb:259 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"The username and password created here are needed to log in and work with your Linux system. With <b>Automatic Login</b> enabled, the login procedure is skipped. This user is logged in automatically.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for main add user dialog +#. help text 5/7 (only during installation) +#: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:489 src/include/users/helps.rb:264 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Have mail for root forwarded to this user by checking <b>Receive System Mail</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Dialog for expert user settings: authentication method as well +#. as password encryption (see fate 302980) +#. @return true if user accepted expert settings +#: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:573 +msgid "Expert Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. summary label +#: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:625 +msgid "The authentication method is local /etc/passwd." +msgstr "" + +#. summary label +#: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:628 +msgid "The password encryption method is %s." +msgstr "" + +#. summary label, %s is a single user name or multiple usernames (comma separated) +#: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:635 +msgid "User %s will be imported." +msgid_plural "Users %s will be imported." +msgstr[0] "" +msgstr[1] "" + +#. pushbutton label +#: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:650 +msgid "&Change..." +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:657 +msgid "Summary" +msgstr "" + +#. yes/no popup question, %s is a number +#: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:709 +msgid "" +"If you intend to create certificates,\n" +"the password should have at least %s characters." +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for Users module +#: src/clients/users.rb:102 +msgid "User configuration module" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for list action +#: src/clients/users.rb:115 +msgid "List of available users" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for show action +#: src/clients/users.rb:127 +msgid "Show information of selected user" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for ad action +#: src/clients/users.rb:137 +msgid "Add new user" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for unknown parameter name +#. help text for unknown parameter name +#: src/clients/users.rb:142 src/clients/users.rb:157 +msgid "Additional (LDAP) user parameters" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for ad action +#: src/clients/users.rb:152 +msgid "Edit an existing user" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for delete action +#: src/clients/users.rb:167 +msgid "Delete an existing user (home directory is not removed)" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for list local option +#: src/clients/users.rb:175 +msgid "List of local users" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for list system option +#: src/clients/users.rb:181 +msgid "List of system users" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for list ldap option +#: src/clients/users.rb:187 +msgid "List of LDAP users" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for list nis option +#: src/clients/users.rb:193 +msgid "List of NIS users" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for uid option +#: src/clients/users.rb:199 +msgid "UID of the user" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for add/gid option +#: src/clients/users.rb:206 +msgid "GID of user's default group" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for username option +#: src/clients/users.rb:213 +msgid "Login name of the user" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for add option +#: src/clients/users.rb:220 +msgid "Full name of the user" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for shell option +#: src/clients/users.rb:227 +msgid "Login shell of the user" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for home option +#: src/clients/users.rb:234 +msgid "Home directory of the user" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for add + create_home option +#: src/clients/users.rb:241 +msgid "Do not create home directory for new user" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for delete_home option +#: src/clients/users.rb:247 +msgid "Also delete user's home directory" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for add option +#: src/clients/users.rb:253 +msgid "Password of the user" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for home option +#: src/clients/users.rb:260 +msgid "List of groups of which the user is a member (separated by commas)" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for show option +#: src/clients/users.rb:267 +msgid "Type of the user (local, system, nis, ldap)" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for new_username option +#: src/clients/users.rb:281 +msgid "New login name of the user" +msgstr "" + +#. translators: command line help text for new_uid option +#: src/clients/users.rb:288 +msgid "New UID of the user" +msgstr "" + +#. progress step title +#: src/clients/users_finish.rb:63 +msgid "Writing Users Configuration..." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext 1/3 +#: src/clients/users_plugin_ldap_all.rb:105 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Here, see the table of all allowed attributes for the current LDAP entry that were not set in previous dialogs.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext 1/3 (don't translate objectclass"), +#. %1 is list of values +#: src/clients/users_plugin_ldap_all.rb:111 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"The list of attributes is given by the value of \"objectClass\"\n" +"(which is currently:\n" +"<br>%1).\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext 3/3 +#: src/clients/users_plugin_ldap_all.rb:122 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Edit each attribute using <b>Edit</b>. Some attributes \n" +"could be required, as defined in the user template in the <b>LDAP Client Module</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. table header 1/2 +#: src/clients/users_plugin_ldap_all.rb:235 +msgid "Attribute" +msgstr "" + +#. table header 2/2 +#: src/clients/users_plugin_ldap_all.rb:237 +msgid "Value" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/clients/users_plugin_ldap_all.rb:255 +msgid "Additional LDAP Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext +#: src/clients/users_plugin_ldap_passwordpolicy.rb:91 +msgid "<p>Assign a password policy object to this user in <b>DN of Password Policy object</b>. Activate <b>Reset Password</b> to reset the password of modified user.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label +#: src/clients/users_plugin_ldap_passwordpolicy.rb:107 +msgid "Use &Default Password Policy" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry label +#: src/clients/users_plugin_ldap_passwordpolicy.rb:115 +msgid "DN of &Password Policy object" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/users_plugin_ldap_passwordpolicy.rb:120 +msgid "&Reset Password" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/clients/users_plugin_ldap_passwordpolicy.rb:130 +msgid "Password Policy Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. label (date of last password change) +#. label (date of last password change) +#: src/clients/users_plugin_ldap_shadowaccount.rb:118 +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:803 +msgid "Unknown" +msgstr "" + +#. label (date of last password change) +#. label (date of last password change) +#: src/clients/users_plugin_ldap_shadowaccount.rb:121 +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:806 +msgid "Never" +msgstr "" + +#. label +#. label +#: src/clients/users_plugin_ldap_shadowaccount.rb:153 +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:838 +msgid "Last Password Change: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. intfield label +#. intfield label +#: src/clients/users_plugin_ldap_shadowaccount.rb:162 +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:856 +msgid "Days &before Password Expiration to Issue Warning" +msgstr "" + +#. intfield label +#. intfield label +#: src/clients/users_plugin_ldap_shadowaccount.rb:171 +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:865 +msgid "Days after Password Expires with Usable &Login" +msgstr "" + +#. intfield label +#. intfield label +#: src/clients/users_plugin_ldap_shadowaccount.rb:180 +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:874 +msgid "Ma&ximum Number of Days for the Same Password" +msgstr "" + +#. intfield label +#. intfield label +#: src/clients/users_plugin_ldap_shadowaccount.rb:189 +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:883 +msgid "&Minimum Number of Days for the Same Password" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#. textentry label +#: src/clients/users_plugin_ldap_shadowaccount.rb:198 +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:893 +msgid "Ex&piration Date" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/clients/users_plugin_ldap_shadowaccount.rb:213 +msgid "Shadow Account Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. popup text: Don't reorder the letters YYYY-MM-DD!!! +#. The date must stay in this format +#. popup text: Don't reorder the letters YYYY-MM-DD!!! +#. The date must stay in this format +#. popup label - don't reorder the letters YYYY-MM-DD +#. The date must stay in this format +#: src/clients/users_plugin_ldap_shadowaccount.rb:235 +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:1676 src/include/users/widgets.rb:1665 +msgid "The expiration date must be in the format YYYY-MM-DD." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for quota +#: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:97 +msgid "<p>Configure quota settings for the user on selected file systems.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for quota, cont. +#: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:101 +msgid "" +"<p>Define a size limit by specifying the number of 1 KB blocks the\n" +"user may have on this file system. Additionally, you can define an inode limit specifying the number of inodes the user may have on the file system.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for quota, cont. +#: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:105 +msgid "<p>You can specify both soft and hard limits for size and number of inodes. The soft limits define a warning level at which users are informed they are nearing their limit, whereas the hard limits define the limit at which write requests are denied.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for quota, cont. +#: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:109 +msgid "<p>As soon as the user has reached the soft limit, the input fields for the grace interval are activated. Specify the time period for which the user is allowed to exceed the soft limits set above. The countdown of the grace interval starts immediately.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for quota +#: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:115 +msgid "<p>Configure quota settings for the group on selected file systems.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for quota, cont. +#: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:119 +msgid "" +"<p>Define a size limit by specifying the number of 1 kB blocks the\n" +"group may use on this file system. Additionally, you can define an inode limit specifying the number of inodes the group may use on the file system.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for quota, cont. +#: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:123 +msgid "<p>You can specify both soft and hard limits for size and number of inodes. The soft limits define a warning level at which groups are informed they are nearing their limit, whereas the hard limits define the limit at which write requests are denied.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for quota, cont. +#: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:127 +msgid "<p>As soon as the group has reached the soft limit, the input fields for the grace interval are activated. Specify the time period for which the group is allowed to exceed the soft limits set above. The countdown of the grace interval starts immediately.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box label +#: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:188 +msgid "&File System" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:195 +msgid "Size Limits" +msgstr "" + +#. intfield label +#: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:203 +msgid "&Soft limit" +msgstr "" + +#. intfield label +#: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:211 +msgid "&Hard limit" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:231 +msgid "I-nodes Limit" +msgstr "" + +#. intfield label +#: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:238 +msgid "S&oft limit" +msgstr "" + +#. intfield label +#: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:246 +msgid "Har&d limit" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:306 +msgid "Soft limit cannot be higher than the hard limit." +msgstr "" + +#. helper for creating widget with time settings +#. @param [String] id string that preceedes the subwidgets id's +#. @param [Fixnum] seconds number of seconds to be shown in the widget +#: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:496 src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:330 +msgid "Days" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:497 src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:331 +msgid "Hours" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:498 src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:332 +msgid "Minutes" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:499 src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:333 +msgid "Seconds" +msgstr "" + +#. authentication type +#. type of user/group +#. (item of list with the headline 'Choose the type of user to add') +#: src/clients/users_proposal.rb:42 src/include/users/widgets.rb:1365 +msgid "LDAP" +msgstr "" + +#. authentication type +#. richtext label +#: src/clients/users_proposal.rb:44 src/include/users/widgets.rb:136 +msgid "NIS" +msgstr "" + +#. authentication type +#: src/clients/users_proposal.rb:46 +msgid "Samba (Windows Domain)" +msgstr "" + +#. summary label <%1>-<%2> are HTML tags, leave untouched +#: src/clients/users_proposal.rb:69 +msgid "<%1>Root Password<%2> set" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/users_proposal.rb:74 +msgid "<%1>Root Password<%2> not set" +msgstr "" + +#. summary label <%1>-<%2> are HTML tags, leave untouched +#: src/clients/users_proposal.rb:81 +msgid "No <%1>user<%2> configured" +msgstr "" + +#. summary line: <%1>-<%2> are HTML tags, leave untouched, +#. % is LDAP/NIS etc. +#: src/clients/users_proposal.rb:93 +msgid "<%1>Authentication method<%2>: %3" +msgstr "" + +#. summary line: <%1>-<%2> are HTML tags, leave untouched, +#. % is LDAP/NIS etc. +#: src/clients/users_proposal.rb:102 +msgid "<%1>Authentication method<%2>: %3 and Kerberos." +msgstr "" + +#. summary line, %3 are user names (comma separated) +#. <%1>,<%2> are HTML tags, leave untouched, +#: src/clients/users_proposal.rb:116 +msgid "<%1>Users<%2> %3 selected for import" +msgstr "" + +#. summary line, <%1>,<%2> are HTML tags, %3 user name +#: src/clients/users_proposal.rb:124 +msgid "<%1>User<%2> %3 will be imported." +msgstr "" + +#. summary line: <%1>-<%2> are HTML tags, leave untouched, +#. %3 is login name +#: src/clients/users_proposal.rb:134 +msgid "<%1>User<%2> %3 configured" +msgstr "" + +#. summary line: <%1>-<%2> are HTML tags, leave untouched, +#. %3 is full name, %4 login name +#: src/clients/users_proposal.rb:143 +msgid "<%1>User<%2> %3 (%4) configured" +msgstr "" + +#. summary line +#: src/clients/users_proposal.rb:156 +msgid "Password Encryption Method: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. rich text label +#: src/clients/users_proposal.rb:170 +msgid "User Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. menu button label +#: src/clients/users_proposal.rb:173 +msgid "&User" +msgstr "" + +#. menu button label +#: src/clients/users_proposal.rb:175 +msgid "&Root Password" +msgstr "" + +#. password entering label +#: src/include/users/cmdline.rb:55 +msgid "LDAP Server Password:" +msgstr "" + +#. #-#-#-#-# users.rxgettext.pot (PACKAGE VERSION) #-#-#-#-# +#. error message +#. error message +#. error message +#. #-#-#-#-# users.xgettext.pot #-#-#-#-# +#. error message +#: src/include/users/cmdline.rb:226 src/include/users/cmdline.rb:386 +#: src/include/users/cmdline.rb:431 src/modules/YaPI/USERS.pm:1044 +#: src/modules/YaPI/USERS.pm:2491 +msgid "There is no such user." +msgstr "" + +#. label shown at command line (user attribute) +#: src/include/users/cmdline.rb:233 +msgid "Full Name:" +msgstr "" + +#. label shown at command line (user attribute) +#: src/include/users/cmdline.rb:237 +msgid "Login Name:" +msgstr "" + +#. label shown at command line (user attribute) +#: src/include/users/cmdline.rb:241 +msgid "Home Directory:" +msgstr "" + +#. label shown at command line (user attribute) +#: src/include/users/cmdline.rb:245 +msgid "Login Shell:" +msgstr "" + +#. label shown at command line (user attribute) +#: src/include/users/cmdline.rb:249 +msgid "UID:" +msgstr "" + +#. label shown at command line (user attribute) +#: src/include/users/cmdline.rb:253 +msgid "Default Group:" +msgstr "" + +#. label shown at command line (user attribute) +#: src/include/users/cmdline.rb:257 +msgid "List of Groups:" +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/include/users/cmdline.rb:285 +msgid "Enter a user name." +msgstr "" + +#. question on command line +#: src/include/users/cmdline.rb:306 +msgid "Password for New User:" +msgstr "" + +#. question on command line +#: src/include/users/cmdline.rb:309 +msgid "Confirm the password:" +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/include/users/cmdline.rb:314 +msgid "Passwords do not match. Try again." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/include/users/cmdline.rb:318 +msgid "Passwords do not match. Exiting." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/users/cmdline.rb:399 +msgid "" +"You can not delete this user, because the user is present.\n" +"Please log off the user first." +msgstr "" + +#. #-#-#-#-# users.rxgettext.pot (PACKAGE VERSION) #-#-#-#-# +#. error message +#. error message +#. error message +#. #-#-#-#-# users.xgettext.pot #-#-#-#-# +#. error message +#: src/include/users/cmdline.rb:558 src/include/users/cmdline.rb:625 +#: src/include/users/cmdline.rb:701 src/modules/YaPI/USERS.pm:1832 +#: src/modules/YaPI/USERS.pm:1995 src/modules/YaPI/USERS.pm:2158 +msgid "There is no such group." +msgstr "" + +#. label shown at command line (user attribute) +#: src/include/users/cmdline.rb:565 +msgid "Group Name:" +msgstr "" + +#. label shown at command line (user attribute) +#: src/include/users/cmdline.rb:569 +msgid "GID:" +msgstr "" + +#. label shown at command line (user attribute) +#. label shown at command line (user attribute) +#: src/include/users/cmdline.rb:573 src/include/users/cmdline.rb:577 +msgid "List of Members:" +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/include/users/cmdline.rb:637 +msgid "Enter a group name." +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/include/users/complex.rb:89 +msgid "Really abort the writing process?" +msgstr "" + +#. The login name contains uppercase 1/3 +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:69 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"You have used uppercase letters in the user login entry.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. The login name contains uppercase 2/3 +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:73 +msgid "" +"<p>This could cause problems with delivering mail\n" +"to this user, because mail systems generally do not\n" +"support case-sensitive names.<br>\n" +"You could solve this problem by editing the alias table.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. The login name contains uppercase 3/3 +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:80 +msgid "<p>Really use the entered value?</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. password entry label +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:124 +msgid "" +"To access the data required to modify\n" +"the encryption settings for this user,\n" +"enter the user's current password." +msgstr "" + +#. yes/no popup label, %1,%2 are file paths +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:344 +msgid "" +"Crypted directory image and key files\n" +"'%1' and '%2'\n" +"were found. Use them for current user?\n" +"\n" +"This means that data from this image will be used instead of current home directory." +msgstr "" + +#. popup label, %1 is path to directory +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:369 +msgid "" +"The home directory (%1) already exists.\n" +"Use it anyway?" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:377 +msgid "&Change directory owner" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:411 +msgid "&First Name" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:414 +msgid "&Last Name" +msgstr "" + +#. label text +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:422 +msgid "For remote users, only additional group memberships can be changed." +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:456 +msgid "A&utomatic Login" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:480 +msgid "D&isable User Login" +msgstr "" + +#. push button +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:509 +msgid "User &Management" +msgstr "" + +#. group name is not known (combobox item): +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:615 +msgid "(Unknown)" +msgstr "" + +#. combobox label +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:623 +msgid "De&fault Group" +msgstr "" + +#. combobox label +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:630 +msgid "Login &Shell" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:641 +msgid "Addi&tional User Information" +msgstr "" + +#. button label +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:650 +msgid "B&rowse..." +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:656 +msgid "&Home Directory" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:665 +msgid "&Move to New Location" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:678 +msgid "Home Directory &Permission Mode" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:684 +msgid "E&mpty Home" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:698 +msgid "&Use Encrypted Home Directory" +msgstr "" + +#. for max value, see bug 244631 :-) +#. IntField label +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:707 +msgid "&Directory Size in MB" +msgstr "" + +#. label +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:721 +msgid "" +"For remote users, only additional \n" +"group memberships can be changed." +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:738 +msgid "User &ID (uid)" +msgstr "" + +#. selection box label +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:759 +msgid "Additional Gr&oups" +msgstr "" + +#. selection box label +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:766 +msgid "&LDAP Groups" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:848 +msgid "Force Password Change" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#. table header +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:935 src/include/users/dialogs.rb:2217 +msgid "Plug-In Description" +msgstr "" + +#. pushbutton label +#. pushbutton label +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:944 src/include/users/dialogs.rb:2226 +msgid "Add &or Remove Plug-In" +msgstr "" + +#. pushbutton label +#. pushbutton label +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:947 src/include/users/dialogs.rb:2229 +msgid "&Launch" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption: +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:959 +msgid "New Local User" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption: +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:961 +msgid "New System User" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption: +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:963 +msgid "New LDAP User" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption: +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:967 +msgid "Existing Local User" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption: +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:969 +msgid "Existing System User" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption: +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:971 +msgid "Existing LDAP User" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption: +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:973 +msgid "Existing NIS User" +msgstr "" + +#. tab label +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:979 +msgid "Us&er Data" +msgstr "" + +#. tab label +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:981 +msgid "&Details" +msgstr "" + +#. tab label +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:988 +msgid "Pass&word Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. tab label +#. tab label +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:1019 src/include/users/dialogs.rb:2273 +msgid "Plu&g-Ins" +msgstr "" + +#. popup question +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:1308 +msgid "Change home directory to %1?" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:1430 +msgid "" +"The home directory for this user cannot be decrypted,\n" +"because the user is currently logged in.\n" +"Log the user out first." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:1577 +msgid "Enter the size for the home directory." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:1583 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Directory cannot be encrypted." +msgstr "" + +#. popup message +#. popup message +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:1750 src/include/users/dialogs.rb:2485 +msgid "This plug-in cannot be removed." +msgstr "" + +#. popup text +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:2005 +msgid "Now you have added a new user." +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption: +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:2071 +msgid "New Local Group" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption: +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:2073 +msgid "New System Group" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption: +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:2075 +msgid "New LDAP Group" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption: +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:2079 +msgid "Existing Local Group" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption: +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:2081 +msgid "Existing System Group" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption: +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:2083 +msgid "Existing LDAP Group" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:2145 +msgid "Group &Name" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:2154 +msgid "Group &ID (gid)" +msgstr "" + +#. selection box label +#. add items later (when there is a huge amount of them, it takes +#. long time to display, so display at least the rest of the dialog) +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:2174 src/include/users/dialogs.rb:2593 +msgid "Group &Members" +msgstr "" + +#. tab label +#: src/include/users/dialogs.rb:2271 +msgid "Group &Data" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/4 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:62 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"When entering a password, distinguish between uppercase and\n" +"lowercase. Passwords should not contain any accented characters or umlauts. \n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Help text 0/6 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:103 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Here, set default values to use when creating new local or system users.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Help text 1/6 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:109 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b>Default Group</b><br>\n" +"The group name of a new user's primary group.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Help text 1.5/6 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:116 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b>Secondary Groups</b><br>\n" +"Names of additional groups to which to assign new users.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Help text 2/6 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:123 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Default Login Shell</b><br>\n" +"The name of the new user's login shell. Select one from the list or enter your own path to the shell.</P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Help text 3/6 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:127 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Default Home</b><br>\n" +"The initial path prefix for a new user's home directory. The username is added\n" +"to the end of this value to create the default name of the home directory.\n" +"</P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Help text 4/6 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:134 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Skeleton Directory</b><br>\n" +"The contents of this directory are copied to a user's home directory when a new user is added. </p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Help text 4.5/6 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:138 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Umask for Home Directory</b><br>\n" +"Umask to use for creating new home directories.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Help text 5/6: +#. Don't reorder letters YYYY-MM-DD, date must be set in this format +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:143 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Expiration Date</b><br>\n" +"The date on which the user account is disabled. The date must be in the format\n" +"YYYY-MM-DD. Leave it empty if this account never expires.</P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Help text 6/6 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:149 +msgid "" +"<P><B>Days after Password Expiration Login Is Usable</B><BR>\n" +"Users can log in after expiration of passwords. Set how many days \n" +"after expiration login is allowed. Use -1 for unlimited access.\n" +"</P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. For translators: read dialog help, part 1 of 2 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:162 +msgid "" +"<P><B><BIG>Initializing User Management</BIG></B><BR>\n" +"Please wait...\n" +"<BR></P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. For translators: read dialog help, part 2 of 2 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:168 +msgid "" +"<P><B><BIG>Aborting the Initialization</BIG></B><BR>\n" +"You can safely abort the configuration utility by pressing <B>Abort</B>\n" +"now.\n" +"</P>" +msgstr "" + +#. For translators: read dialog help, part 1 of 2 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:180 +msgid "" +"<P><B><BIG>Saving User Configuration</BIG></B><BR>\n" +"Please wait...\n" +"<BR></P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. For translators: read dialog help, part 2 of 2 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:186 +msgid "" +"<P><B><BIG>Aborting the Save Process:</BIG></B><BR>\n" +"Abort the save process by pressing <B>Abort</B>.\n" +"An additional dialog will inform you whether it is safe to do so.\n" +"</P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/7 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:203 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Enter the <b>First Name</b>, <b>Last Name</b>, \n" +"<b>Username</b>, and\n" +"<b>Password</b> to assign to this user.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/7 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:226 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Create the <b>Username</b> from components of the full name by\n" +"clicking <b>Suggestion</b>. It may be modified, but use only\n" +"letters (no accented characters), digits, and <tt>._-</tt>.\n" +"Do not use uppercase letters in this entry unless you know what you are doing.\n" +"Usernames have stricter restrictions than passwords. You can redefine the\n" +"restrictions in the /etc/login.defs file. Read its man page for information.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. alternative help text 2/7 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:241 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"For the <b>Username</b>, use only\n" +"letters (no accented characters), digits, and <tt>._-</tt>.\n" +"Do not use uppercase letters in this entry unless you know what you are doing.\n" +"Usernames have stricter restrictions than passwords. You can redefine the\n" +"restrictions in the /etc/login.defs file. Read its man page for information.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 6/7 (only during installation) +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:269 +msgid "<p>Press <b>User Management</b> to add more users or groups to your system.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. alternative help text 4/7 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:278 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"To see more details, such as the home directory or the user ID, click\n" +"<b>Details</b>.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. alternative help text 5/7 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:286 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"To edit various password settings of this user, such as expiration date, click <b>Password Settings</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 7/7 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:296 +msgid "" +"<p>To forbid this user to\n" +"log in, check <b>Disable User Login</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/6 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:316 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Enter the group data here. \n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/6 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:318 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b>Group Name:</b>\n" +"Avoid long names for groups. Normal lengths are between \n" +"two and eight characters. \n" +"You can redefine the list of characters allowed for group names in\n" +"the /etc/login.defs file. Read its man page for information.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 3/6, %1 is number +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:329 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b>Group ID (gid):</b>\n" +"In addition to its name, a group must be assigned a numerical ID for its\n" +"internal representation. These values are between 0 and\n" +"%1. Some of the IDs are already assigned during installation. You will be\n" +"warned if you try to use an already set one.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 4/6 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:342 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b>Password:</b>\n" +"To require users who are not members of the group to identify themselves when\n" +"switching to this group (see the man page of <tt>newgrp</tt>), assign a\n" +"password to this group. For security reasons, this password is not shown\n" +"here. This entry is not required.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 5/6 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:353 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b>Confirm Password:</b>\n" +"Enter the password a second time to avoid typing errors.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 6/6 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:361 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b>Group Members:</b>\n" +"Here, select which users should be members of this group.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. additional helptext for EditFroup dialog +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:373 +msgid "" +"The second list shows users for which this group is the default\n" +" group. The default group can only be changed by editing the user." +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/8 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:392 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Additional user data includes:\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/8, %1 is number +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:395 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b>User ID (uid):</b>\n" +"Each user is known to the system by a unique number,\n" +"the user ID. For normal users, you should use\n" +"a UID larger than %1 because the smaller UIDs are used\n" +"by the system for special purposes and pseudo logins.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 3/8 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:408 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"If you change the UID of an existing user, the rights of the files\n" +"this user owns must be changed. This is done automatically\n" +"for the files in the user's home directory, but not for files \n" +"located elsewhere.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 4/8 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:417 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b>Home Directory:</b>\n" +"The home directory of the user. Normally this is\n" +"/home/username. \n" +"To select an existing directory, click <b>Browse</b>.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for user's home directory mode +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:430 +msgid "<p>Optionally, set the <b>Home Directory Permission Mode</b> for this user's home directory different from the default.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. alternate helptext 4.5/8; %1 is directory (e.g. '/etc/skel') +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:440 +msgid "" +"<p>To create only an empty home directory,\n" +"check <b>Empty Home</b>. Otherwise, the new home directory\n" +"is created from the default skeleton (%1).</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for Move to new location checkbox +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:452 +msgid "<p>If changing the location of a user's home directory, move the contents of the current directory with <b>Move to New Location</b>, activated by default. Otherwise a new home directory is created without any of the existing data.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for directory encryption +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:464 +msgid "" +"<p>To encrypt the user's home directory, enable <b>Use Encrypted Home\n" +"Directory</b> and set the directory size. Encrypting a user's home directory\n" +"does not provide strong security from other users. If this machine is shared\n" +"among multiple users, it may be possible for a user to compromise system\n" +"security by obtaining another user's key and gaining access to the encrypted data. If strong security is required, the system should not be physically shared.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for directory encryption +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:476 +msgid "<p>Home directories cannot be encrypted if a fingerprint reader device is used. To encrypt the user's home directory, disable fingerprint configuration first.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. alternate helptext 5/8 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:487 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"The home directory of an LDAP user can be changed only on the\n" +"file server.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. alternate helptext 5/8 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:497 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Additional Information:</b>\n" +"Some additional user data could be set here. This field may contain up to\n" +"three parts, separated by commas. The standard usage is to write\n" +"<i>office</i>,<i>work phone</i>,<i>home phone</i>. This information is \n" +"shown when you use the <i>finger</i> command on this user.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 6/8 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:512 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b>Login Shell:</b>\n" +"The login shell (command interpreter) for the user.\n" +"Select a shell from the list of all shells installed\n" +"on your system.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 7/8 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:522 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b>Default Group:</b>\n" +"The primary group to which the user belongs. Select one group\n" +"from the list of all groups existing on your system.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 8/8 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:531 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b>Additional Groups:</b>\n" +"Select additional groups in which the user should be a member.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. helptxt for plugin dialog 1/2 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:544 +msgid "" +"<p>Here, see the list of plug-ins, the\n" +"extensions of user and group configuration.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for plugin dialog 2/3 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:548 +msgid "" +"The check mark in the left part of the table indicates that the plug-in\n" +"is currently in use." +msgstr "" + +#. helptext for plugin dialog 3/3 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:552 +msgid "<p>Start the detailed configuration of a particular plug-in by selecting <b>Launch</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help texts 1/1 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:562 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Save the current user and group settings to the system.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Help text 1/6 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:573 +msgid "" +"<p>Activate <b>Force Password Change</b> to force the user to change the\n" +"password at the next login. If <b>Last Password Change</b> is set to\n" +"<i>Never</i>, the user will be forced to change the password.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Help text 2/6 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:579 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b>Days before Password Expiration to Issue Warning</B><BR>\n" +"Users can be warned before their passwords expire. Set \n" +"how long before expiration the warning should be issued. Set -1 to disable\n" +"the warning. \n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Help text 3/6 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:588 +msgid "" +"<P><B>Days after Password Expires with Usable Login</B><BR>\n" +"Users can log in after their passwords have expired. Set how many days to\n" +"allow login. Use -1 for unlimited access.\n" +"</P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Help text 4/6 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:595 +msgid "" +"<P><B>Maximum Number of Days for the Same Password</B><BR>Set how many days a user \n" +"can use the same password before it expires.</P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Help text 5/6 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:599 +msgid "" +"<P><B>Minimum Number of Days for the Same Password</B><BR>Set the minimum age of \n" +"a password before a user is allowed to change it.</P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Help text 6/6 : Don't reorder letters YYYY-MM-DD, date must be set in this format +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:603 +msgid "" +"<P><B>Expiration Date</B><BR>Set the date when this account expires. \n" +"The date must be in the format YYYY-MM-DD. \n" +"Leave it empty if this account never expires.</P>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/2 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:613 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b>Configuration Overview</b><br>\n" +"Here, see a summary of modules that could affect sources\n" +"of user accounts or authentication type.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/2 +#: src/include/users/helps.rb:621 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b>Changing the Values</b><br>\n" +"You can configure these settings by running appropriate modules. Select the module with <b>Configure</b>.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for Password Policy Dialog +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:62 +msgid "<p>Select the <b>Password Change Policies</b>, <b>Password Aging Policies</b>, and <b>Lockout Policies</b> tabs to choose LDAP password policy groups of attributes to configure.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for pwdInHistory attribute +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:70 +msgid "<p>Specify the <b>Maximum Number of Passwords Stored in History</b> to set how many previously used passwords should be saved. Saved passwords may not be used.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for pwdMustChange attribute +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:74 +msgid "<p>Check <b>User Must Change Password after Reset</b> to force users to change their passwords after the the password is reset or changed by an administrator.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for pwdAllowUserChange attribute +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:78 +msgid "<p>Check <b>User Can Change Password</b> to allow users to change their passwords.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for pwdSafeModify attribute +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:82 +msgid "<p>If the existing password must be provided along with the new password, check <b>Old Password Required for Password Change</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for pwdCheckQuality attribute +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:86 +msgid "<p>Select whether the password quality should be verified while passwords are modified or added. Select <b>No Checking</b> if passwords should not be checked at all. With <b>Accept Uncheckable Passwords</b>, passwords are accepted even if the check cannot be performed, for example, if the user has provided an encrypted password. With <b>Only Accept Checked Passwords</b> passwords are refused if the quality test fails or the password cannot be checked.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for pwdMinLength attribute +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:90 +msgid "Set the minimum number of characters that must be used in a password in <b>Minimum Password Length</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for pwdMinAge attribute +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:94 +msgid "<p><b>Minimum Password Age</b> sets how much time must pass between modifications to the password.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for pwdMaxAge attribute +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:98 +msgid "<p><b>Maximum Password Age</b> sets how long after modification a password expires.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for pwdExpireWarning attribute +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:102 +msgid "<p>In <b>Time before Password Expiration to Issue Warning</b> set how long before a password is due to expire that an expiration warning messages should be given to an authenticating user.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for pwdGraceAuthNLimit attribute +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:106 +msgid "<p>Set the number of times an expired password can be used to authenticate in <b>Allowed Uses of an Expired Password</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for pwdLockout attribute +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:110 +msgid "<p>Check <b>Enable Password Locking</b> to forbid use of a password after a specified number of consecutive failed bind attempts.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for pwdMaxFailure attribute +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:114 +msgid "<p>Set the number of consecutive failed bind attempts after which the password may not be used to authenticate in <b>Bind Failures to Lock the Password</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for pwdLockoutDuration attribute +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:118 +msgid "<p>Set how long the password cannot be used in <b>Password Lock Duration</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text for pwdFailureCountInterval attribute +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:122 +msgid "<p><b>Bind Failures Cache Duration</b> sets how long before password failures are purged from the failure counter even though no successful authentication has occurred.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. tab label +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:171 +msgid "&Password Change Policies" +msgstr "" + +#. tab label +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:173 +msgid "Pa&ssword Aging Policies" +msgstr "" + +#. tab label +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:175 +msgid "&Lockout Policies" +msgstr "" + +#. IntField label +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:211 +msgid "Ma&ximum Number of Passwords Stored in History" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:221 +msgid "U&ser Must Change Password after Reset" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:230 +msgid "&User Can Change Password" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:239 +msgid "&Old Password Required for Password Change" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:248 +msgid "Password Quality Checking" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:258 +msgid "&No Checking" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:266 +msgid "Acc&ept Uncheckable Passwords" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:274 +msgid "&Only Accept Checked Passwords" +msgstr "" + +#. IntField label +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:284 +msgid "&Minimum Password Length" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:373 +msgid "Minimum Password Age" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:376 +msgid "Maximum Password Age" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:381 +msgid "Time before Password Expiration to Issue Warning" +msgstr "" + +#. IntField label +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:387 +msgid "Allowed Uses of an Expired Password" +msgstr "" + +#. check box label +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:416 +msgid "Enable Password Locking" +msgstr "" + +#. intField label +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:424 +msgid "Bind Failures to Lock the Password" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:434 +msgid "Password Lock Duration" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:440 +msgid "Bind Failures Cache Duration" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog label +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:471 +msgid "Password Policy Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup, %1 is attribute name +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:535 +msgid "" +"The \"%1\" attribute is mandatory.\n" +"Enter a value." +msgstr "" + +#. read the list of pwdpolicy objects under base_config_dn +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:666 +msgid "<p><b>Home Directories</b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:668 +msgid "" +"<p>If home directories of LDAP users should be stored on this machine,\n" +"check the appropriate option. Changing this value does not cause any direct\n" +"action. It is only information for the YaST users module, which can manage\n" +"user home directories.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text caption +#. help text +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:675 +msgid "" +"<p>Press <b>Configure</b> to configure settings stored on the\n" +"LDAP server. You will be asked for the password if you are not connected yet or\n" +"have changed your configuration.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. password policy help text caption +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:681 +msgid "<p><b>Password Policy</b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. password policy help +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:683 +msgid "" +"<p>Configure the selected password policy with <b>Edit</b>. Use <b>Add</b> to add a new password policy. The configuration is only possible,\n" +" if the password policies are already enabled on the LDAP server.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:693 +msgid "&Home Directories on This Machine" +msgstr "" + +#. pushbutton label +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:702 +msgid "Configure User Management &Settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:711 +msgid "Password Policy" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog title +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:727 +msgid "LDAP Administration Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. InputField label +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:754 +msgid "Name of Password Policy Object" +msgstr "" + +#. text label,suffix will follow in next label +#. text label,suffix will follow in next label +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:760 src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:796 +msgid "Suffix:" +msgstr "" + +#. pushbutton label +#. pushbutton label +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:763 src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:799 +msgid "Change Suffix" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:812 +msgid "" +"The Policy '%1' already exists.\n" +"Please select another one." +msgstr "" + +#. the type of user set +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:61 +msgid "&System Users" +msgstr "" + +#. the type of user set +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:63 +msgid "&Local Users" +msgstr "" + +#. the type of user set +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:65 +msgid "&NIS Users" +msgstr "" + +#. the type of user set +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:67 +msgid "L&DAP Users" +msgstr "" + +#. the type of user set +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:69 +msgid "Sam&ba Users" +msgstr "" + +#. the type of user set +#. the type of group set +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:71 src/include/users/widgets.rb:103 +msgid "&Custom" +msgstr "" + +#. the type of user set +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:77 +msgid "System Users" +msgstr "" + +#. the type of user set +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:79 +msgid "Local Users" +msgstr "" + +#. the type of user set +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:81 +msgid "NIS Users" +msgstr "" + +#. the type of user set +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:83 +msgid "LDAP Users" +msgstr "" + +#. the type of user set +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:85 +msgid "Samba Users" +msgstr "" + +#. the type of user set +#. the type of group set +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:87 src/include/users/widgets.rb:118 +msgid "Custom" +msgstr "" + +#. the type of group set +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:93 +msgid "&System Groups" +msgstr "" + +#. the type of group set +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:95 +msgid "&Local Groups" +msgstr "" + +#. the type of group set +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:97 +msgid "&NIS Groups" +msgstr "" + +#. the type of group set +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:99 +msgid "L&DAP Groups" +msgstr "" + +#. the type of group set +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:101 +msgid "Sam&ba Groups" +msgstr "" + +#. the type of group set +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:108 +msgid "System Groups" +msgstr "" + +#. the type of group set +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:110 +msgid "Local Groups" +msgstr "" + +#. the type of group set +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:112 +msgid "NIS Groups" +msgstr "" + +#. the type of group set +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:114 +msgid "LDAP Groups" +msgstr "" + +#. the type of group set +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:116 +msgid "Samba Groups" +msgstr "" + +#. richtext label +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:138 +msgid "SSSD" +msgstr "" + +#. richtext label +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:140 +msgid "Samba" +msgstr "" + +#. menubutton label +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:147 +msgid "&NIS" +msgstr "" + +#. menubutton label +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:153 +msgid "&SSSD" +msgstr "" + +#. tab header +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:168 +msgid "&Users" +msgstr "" + +#. tab header +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:178 +msgid "&Groups" +msgstr "" + +#. tab header +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:188 +msgid "De&faults for New Users" +msgstr "" + +#. tab header +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:224 +msgid "&Authentication Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. widgets for "users" and "groups" tabs --------------------------------- +#. MenuButton label +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:257 src/include/users/widgets.rb:2225 +msgid "&Set Filter" +msgstr "" + +#. Menu Buton label +#. Menu Buton label +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:291 src/include/users/widgets.rb:2008 +msgid "E&xpert Options" +msgstr "" + +#. combobox label +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:326 +msgid "D&efault Group" +msgstr "" + +#. combobox label +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:333 +msgid "Default &Login Shell" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:344 +msgid "Se&condary Groups" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:355 +msgid "Path Prefix for &Home Directory" +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:368 +msgid "&Browse..." +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:379 +msgid "&Skeleton for Home Directory" +msgstr "" + +#. push button label +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:390 +msgid "Bro&wse..." +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:401 +msgid "Default E&xpiration Date" +msgstr "" + +#. text entry +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:413 +msgid "&Umask for Home Directory" +msgstr "" + +#. intfield +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:420 +msgid "Days &after Password Expiration Login Is Usable" +msgstr "" + +#. menu button label +#. menu button label +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:445 src/include/users/widgets.rb:2407 +msgid "&Configure..." +msgstr "" + +#. Help text for password expert dialog 1/5 +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:459 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b>This is for experts only.</b>\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Help text for password expert dialog 2/5 +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:468 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Choose a password encryption method for local and system users.\n" +"<b>DES</b>, the Linux default method, works in all network environments, but it\n" +"restricts passwords to eight characters or less.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Help text for password expert dialog 3/5 +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:480 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"<b>MD5</b> allows longer passwords, so provides more security, but some\n" +"network protocols do not support this and you may have problems with NIS.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Label +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:499 +msgid "Password Encryption" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:507 +msgid "Encryption Type" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/3 +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:582 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"You have changed the default encryption for user passwords.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/3 +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:586 +msgid "" +"<p>It seems that you are running a NIS server. In some network environments,\n" +"you might be unable to log in to a NIS client when a user password is\n" +"encrypted with a method other than DES.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 3/3 +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:593 +msgid "<p>Really use the selected method?</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:719 +msgid "AND" +msgstr "" + +#. combo box item +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:721 +msgid "OR" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext 1/4 - caption +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:728 +msgid "<p><b>LDAP Search Filter Changes</b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext 2/4 +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:730 +msgid "<p>Here, extend the search filters for users and groups beyond the default search filters.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext 3/4 +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:734 +msgid "" +"<p>With <b>Default</b>, load the default filter from the user and group\n" +"configuration modules saved on the LDAP server (values of 'suseSearchFilter' attributes).\n" +"If you are not connected yet, you are prompted for the password.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext 4/4 (do not translate the value (written as <tt> font)) +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:740 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Example:</b>\n" +"<br>With the user filter\n" +"<br>\n" +"<tt>(&(objectClass=posixAccount)(uid=u*))</tt>\n" +"<br>\n" +"only obtain users with a username beginning with 'u'.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. radiobutton label +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:763 +msgid "Search Filter for &Users" +msgstr "" + +#. radiobutton label +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:772 +msgid "Search Filter for &Groups" +msgstr "" + +#. frame label +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:783 +msgid "New Condition for Current Filter" +msgstr "" + +#. combobox label +#. combobox label +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:795 src/include/users/widgets.rb:949 +msgid "&Attribute" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:803 +msgid "&Value" +msgstr "" + +#. pushbuttton label +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:806 +msgid "A&dd to Filter" +msgstr "" + +#. Pushbutton label +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:817 +msgid "De&fault" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:852 +msgid "Enter the value for the attribute." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:876 +msgid "Enter the value of the user filter." +msgstr "" + +#. yes/no popup question +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:887 +msgid "" +"The new user filter does not contain the default user filter.\n" +"Really use it?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:902 +msgid "Enter the value of the group filter." +msgstr "" + +#. yes/no popup question +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:913 +msgid "" +"The new group filter does not contain the default group filter.\n" +"Really use it?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext 0/3 - caption +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:967 +msgid "<p><b>Login Settings</b></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext 1/3 - general info +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:969 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"The features described below are only available if you are using KDM or GDM as the login manager.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext 2/3 +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:975 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Auto Login</b><br>\n" +"By setting <b>Auto Login</b>, skip the login procedure. The user chosen from the list is logged in automatically.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. helptext 3/3 +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:979 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Passwordless Logins</b><br>\n" +"If this option is checked, all users are allowed to log in without entering\n" +"passwords. Otherwise, you are asked for the password even if you set a user to log in automatically.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. dialog label +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1004 +msgid "Display Manager Login Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1014 +msgid "&Auto Login" +msgstr "" + +#. textentry label +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1025 +msgid "&User to Log In" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1035 +msgid "Password&less Logins" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1126 +msgid "Cannot delete the user %1. It must be done on the NIS server." +msgstr "" + +#. Continue/Cancel popup +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1135 +msgid "" +"The user seems to be currently logged in.\n" +"Continue anyway?" +msgstr "" + +#. yes-no popup headline +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1157 +msgid "Selected User Is System User" +msgstr "" + +#. yes-no popup contents +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1159 +msgid "Really delete this system user?" +msgstr "" + +#. question popup. %1 is username +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1171 +msgid "Delete the user %1?" +msgstr "" + +#. checkbox label +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1178 +msgid "" +"Delete &Home Directory\n" +"%1\n" +msgstr "" + +#. yes-no popup. %1 is username +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1201 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Really delete the user %1?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. yes-no popup headline +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1230 +msgid "System Group" +msgstr "" + +#. / yes-no popup contents +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1232 +msgid "Really delete this system group?" +msgstr "" + +#. yes-no popup, %1 si group name +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1240 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Really delete the group %1?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. warning popup +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1250 +msgid "" +"You cannot delete this group because\n" +"there are users in the group.\n" +"Remove these users from the group first.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Frame label +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1280 +msgid "User List View" +msgstr "" + +#. Frame label +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1288 +msgid "Group List View" +msgstr "" + +#. type of user/group +#. (item of list with the headline 'Choose the type of user to add') +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1360 +msgid "Local" +msgstr "" + +#. type of user/group +#. (item of list with the headline 'Choose the type of user to add') +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1370 +msgid "System" +msgstr "" + +#. label +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1379 +msgid "User Type" +msgstr "" + +#. label +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1381 +msgid "Group Type" +msgstr "" + +#. menubutton item +#. menubutton item +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1448 src/include/users/widgets.rb:1460 +msgid "Customi&ze Filter..." +msgstr "" + +#. menubutton label +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1473 +msgid "&Login Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. menubutton label +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1480 +msgid "Password &Encryption" +msgstr "" + +#. menubutton label +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1486 +msgid "&Write Changes Now" +msgstr "" + +#. menubutton label +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1500 +msgid "LDAP &Search Filter" +msgstr "" + +#. menubutton label +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1505 +msgid "L&DAP User and Group Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/1 +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1518 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Linux is a multiuser system. Several different users can be logged in to the\n" +"system at the same time. To avoid confusion, each user must have\n" +"a unique identity. Additionally, every user belongs to at least one group.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/3 +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1535 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Users and groups are arranged in various sets. Change the set currently shown in the table with <b>Set Filter</b>.\n" +"Customize your view with <b>Customize Filter</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/3 +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1541 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"Click <b>Expert Options</b> to edit various expert settings, such as\n" +"password encryption type, user authentication method, default values for new\n" +"users, or login settings. With <b>Write Changes Now</b>, save\n" +"all changes made so far without exiting the configuration module.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 3/3, %1 is translated button label +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1550 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"To save the modified user and group settings to your system, press\n" +"<b>%1</b>.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/4 +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1571 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p>\n" +"Use this dialog to get information about existing users and add or modify\n" +"users. \n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/4 +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1580 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"To shift to the group dialog, select <b>Groups</b>.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 3/4 +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1587 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p>\n" +"To create a new user, click <b>Add</b>.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 4/4 +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1595 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"To edit or delete an existing user, select one user from the list and\n" +"click <b>Edit</b> or <b>Delete</b>.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 1/4 +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1616 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p>\n" +"Use this dialog to get information about existing groups and add or modify groups.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 2/4 +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1624 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"To shift to the user dialog, select <b>Users</b>.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 3/4 +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1631 +msgid "" +"\n" +"<p>\n" +"To create a new group, click <b>Add</b>.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. help text 4/4 +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1639 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"To edit or delete an existing group, select one group from the list and\n" +"click <b>Edit</b> or <b>Delete</b>.\n" +"</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. popup error label +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1679 +msgid "" +"The entered home directory skeleton is not a directory.\n" +"Try again.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1697 +msgid "" +"The entered path prefix for home is not a directory.\n" +"Try again.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. yes/no popup +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1706 +msgid "" +"The selected directory does not exist.\n" +"Create it now?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1754 +msgid "" +"These groups do not exist in your system:\n" +"%1\n" +"Try again.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Yes-No popup +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1779 +msgid "" +"If you select a nonexistent shell, the user\n" +"may be unable to log in. Continue?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. directory location popup label +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1933 +msgid "Path to Directory" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1965 +msgid "Login" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1967 +msgid "Name" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1969 +msgid "UID" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1971 +msgid "Groups" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1985 +msgid "Group Name" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1987 +msgid "Group ID" +msgstr "" + +#. table header +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1989 +msgid "Group Members" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:2069 +msgid "" +"NIS groups can only be\n" +"modified and deleted on the server.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:2088 +msgid "Select an entry from the table." +msgstr "" + +#. popup message (user wants to save but there is no modification) +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:2109 +msgid "There are no changes to save." +msgstr "" + +#. yes/no popup (data were changed) +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:2151 +msgid "Reread all data from LDAP server?" +msgstr "" + +#. label, e.g. 'Filter: Local Users', 'Filter: Custom' +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:2219 +msgid "Filter: %1" +msgstr "" + +#. wait popup +#. wait popup +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:2253 src/include/users/widgets.rb:2284 +msgid "Reading sets of users and groups. Please wait..." +msgstr "" + +#. helper function to get information about authentication from +#. appropriate module +#. @param [String] client +#. @return +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:2331 +msgid "<b>yast2-auth-client module not installed</b>" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup, %1 is package name +#: src/include/users/widgets.rb:2435 +msgid "Package %1 is not available for installation." +msgstr "" + +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/users/wizards.rb:102 +msgid "User and Group Administration" +msgstr "" + +#. init dialog caption +#. dialog caption +#: src/include/users/wizards.rb:261 src/include/users/wizards.rb:284 +msgid "User and Group Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. label (during init dialog) +#. label (during init dialog) +#: src/include/users/wizards.rb:263 src/include/users/wizards.rb:287 +msgid "Initializing..." +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "root" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:44 +msgid "root" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "bin" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:48 +msgid "bin" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "daemon" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:52 +msgid "Daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "lp" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:56 +msgid "Printing Daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "mail" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:60 +msgid "Mailer Daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "news" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:64 +msgid "News System" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "uucp" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:68 +msgid "Unix-to-Unix Copy System" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "games" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:72 +msgid "Games Account" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "man" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:76 +msgid "Manual Page Viewer" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "at" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:80 +msgid "Batch Jobs Daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "wwwrun" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:84 +msgid "WWW Daemon Apache" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "ftp" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:88 +msgid "FTP Account" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "named" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:92 +msgid "Name Server Daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "gdm" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:96 +msgid "GNOME Display Manager Daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "postfix" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:100 +msgid "Postfix Daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "sshd" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:104 +msgid "SSH Daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "ntp" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:108 +msgid "NTP Daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "ldap" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:112 +msgid "User for OpenLDAP" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "nobody" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:116 +msgid "Nobody" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "amanda" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:120 +msgid "Amanda Admin" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "vscan" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:124 +msgid "Vscan Account" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "bigsister" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:128 +msgid "Big Sister" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "wnn" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:132 +msgid "Wnn System Account" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "cyrus" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:136 +msgid "User for cyrus-imapd" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "dpbox" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:140 +msgid "DpBox Account" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "gnats" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:144 +msgid "GNATS GNU Backtracking System" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "gnump3d" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:148 +msgid "GNUMP3 Daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "hacluster" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:152 +msgid "Heartbeat Processes" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "irc" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:156 +msgid "IRC Daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "mailman" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:160 +msgid "GNU Mailing List Manager" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "mdom" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:164 +msgid "Mailing List Agent" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "mysql" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:168 +msgid "MySQL Database Admin" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "oracle" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:172 +msgid "Oracle User" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "postgres" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:176 +msgid "PostgreSQL Server" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "pop" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:180 +msgid "POP Admin" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "sapdb" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:184 +msgid "SAPDB Account" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "snort" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:188 +msgid "Snort Network Monitor" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "squid" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:192 +msgid "WWW Proxy Squid" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "stunnel" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:196 +msgid "Daemon User for stunnel (Universal SSL Tunnel)" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "zope" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:200 +msgid "Zope" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "radiusd" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:204 +msgid "Radius Daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "otrs" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:208 +msgid "OTRS System User" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "privoxy" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:212 +msgid "Daemon User for privoxy" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "vdr" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:216 +msgid "Video Disk Recorder" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "icecream" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:220 +msgid "Icecream Daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "bitlbee" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:224 +msgid "Bitlbee Daemon User" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "dhcpd" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:228 +msgid "DHCP Server Daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "distcc" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:232 +msgid "Distcc Daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "dovecot" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:236 +msgid "Dovecot IMAP Daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "fax" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:240 +msgid "Facsimile Agent" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "partimag" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:244 +msgid "Partimage Daemon User" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "avahi" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:248 +msgid "User for Avahi" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "beagleindex" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:252 +msgid "User for Beagle indexing" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "casaauth" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:256 +msgid "casa_atvd System User" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "dvbdaemon" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:260 +msgid "User for DVB daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "festival" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:264 +msgid "Festival daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "haldaemon" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:268 +msgid "User for haldaemon" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "icecast" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:272 +msgid "Icecast streaming server" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "lighttpd" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:276 +msgid "User for lighttpd" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "nagios" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:280 +msgid "User for Nagios" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "pdns" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:284 +msgid "User for PowerDNS" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "polkituser" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:288 +msgid "PolicyKit" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "pound" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:292 +msgid "User for Pound" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "pulse" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:296 +msgid "PulseAudio daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "quagga" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:300 +msgid "Quagga routing daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "sabayon-admin" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:304 +msgid "Sabayon user" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "tomcat" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:308 +msgid "Tomcat - Apache Servlet/JSP Engine" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "tomcat" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:312 +msgid "Apache Tomcat" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "pegasus" +#. User name for user: "cimsrvr" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:317 +msgid "tog-pegasus OpenPegasus WBEM/CIM services" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "ulogd" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:321 +msgid "ulog daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "uuidd" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:325 +msgid "User for uuidd" +msgstr "" + +#. User name for user: "suse-ncc" +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:329 +msgid "Novell Customer Center User" +msgstr "" + +#. label +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:343 +msgid "" +"You have installed a NIS master server.\n" +"It is configured to use a different database\n" +"of users and groups than the local system \n" +"database in the /etc directory.\n" +"Select which one to configure.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:359 +msgid "&Local (/etc directory)" +msgstr "" + +#. radio button, %1 is path (eg. /etc) +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:367 +msgid "&NIS (%1 directory)" +msgstr "" + +#. label above radiobutton box +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:425 +msgid "User Templates" +msgstr "" + +#. label above radiobutton box +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:427 +msgid "Group Templates" +msgstr "" + +#. label +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:452 +msgid "Multiple templates are defined as default. Select the one to read." +msgstr "" + +#. error message 2/2 (= next sentence) +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:491 +msgid "Correct them manually before running the YaST users module again." +msgstr "" + +#. error message 1/2: %1 is file name, %2 is username, %3 is next sentence (2/2) +#. error message 1/2: %1 is file name, %2 is username, %3 is next sentence (2/2) +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:496 src/modules/UsersUI.rb:505 +msgid "" +"There are multiple users with the same name (\"%2\") in the file %1.\n" +"%3" +msgstr "" + +#. error message 1/2: %1 is file name, %2 is groupname, %3 next sentence (2/2) +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:514 +msgid "" +"There are multiple groups with the same name (\"%2\") in the file %1.\n" +"%3" +msgstr "" + +#. error message 1/2: %1 is file name, %2 is line +#. error message 1/2: %1 is file name, %2 is line +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:523 src/modules/UsersUI.rb:534 +msgid "" +"There is a strange line in the file %1:\n" +"%2\n" +"Perhaps the number of colons is wrong or some line entry is missing.\n" +"Correct the file manually before running the YaST users module again." +msgstr "" + +#. error message 1/2: %1 is file name +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:545 +msgid "" +"There is a strange line in the file %1.\n" +"Perhaps the number of colons is wrong or some line entry is missing.\n" +"Correct the file manually before running the YaST users module again." +msgstr "" + +#. default error message +#: src/modules/UsersUI.rb:555 +msgid "Cannot read user or group data." +msgstr "" + +#. Popup text: %1 is the file name (e.g. /etc/fstab), +#. %2 is the directory (e.g. /home), +#: src/modules/Users.pm:740 +msgid "" +"In %1, there is a mount point for the directory\n" +"%2, which is used as a default home directory for new\n" +"users, but this directory is not currently mounted.\n" +"If you add new users using the default values,\n" +"their home directories will be created in the current %2.\n" +"This can result in these directories not being accessible\n" +"after you mount correctly. Continue user configuration?" +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/modules/Users.pm:988 +msgid "Multiple users satisfy the input conditions." +msgstr "" + +#. progress caption +#: src/modules/Users.pm:1566 +msgid "Initializing User and Group Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage label +#: src/modules/Users.pm:1573 +msgid "Read the default login settings" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage label +#: src/modules/Users.pm:1575 +msgid "Read the default system settings" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage label +#: src/modules/Users.pm:1577 +msgid "Read the configuration type" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage label +#: src/modules/Users.pm:1579 +msgid "Read the user custom settings" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage label +#: src/modules/Users.pm:1581 +msgid "Read users and groups" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage label +#: src/modules/Users.pm:1583 +msgid "Build the cache structures" +msgstr "" + +#. progress step label +#: src/modules/Users.pm:1587 +msgid "Reading the default login settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step label +#: src/modules/Users.pm:1589 +msgid "Reading the default system settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step label +#: src/modules/Users.pm:1591 +msgid "Reading the configuration type..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step label +#: src/modules/Users.pm:1593 +msgid "Reading custom settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step label +#: src/modules/Users.pm:1595 +msgid "Reading users and groups..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step label +#: src/modules/Users.pm:1597 +msgid "Building the cache structures..." +msgstr "" + +#. final progress step label +#: src/modules/Users.pm:1599 src/modules/Users.pm:4314 +msgid "Finished" +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/modules/Users.pm:2155 +msgid "User does not exist." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/modules/Users.pm:2407 +msgid "Group does not exist." +msgstr "" + +#. progress caption +#: src/modules/Users.pm:4276 +msgid "Writing User and Group Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage label +#: src/modules/Users.pm:4285 +msgid "Write LDAP users and groups" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage label +#: src/modules/Users.pm:4287 +msgid "Write groups" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage label +#: src/modules/Users.pm:4289 +msgid "Check for deleted users" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage label +#: src/modules/Users.pm:4291 +msgid "Write users" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage label +#: src/modules/Users.pm:4293 +msgid "Write passwords" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage label +#: src/modules/Users.pm:4295 +msgid "Write the custom settings" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage label +#: src/modules/Users.pm:4297 +msgid "Write the default login settings" +msgstr "" + +#. progress step label +#: src/modules/Users.pm:4300 +msgid "Writing LDAP users and groups..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step label +#: src/modules/Users.pm:4302 +msgid "Writing groups..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step label +#: src/modules/Users.pm:4304 +msgid "Checking deleted users..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step label +#: src/modules/Users.pm:4306 +msgid "Writing users..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step label +#: src/modules/Users.pm:4308 +msgid "Writing passwords..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step label +#: src/modules/Users.pm:4310 +msgid "Writing the custom settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. progress step label +#: src/modules/Users.pm:4312 +msgid "Writing the default login settings..." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup (%s is a file name) +#: src/modules/Users.pm:4397 +#, perl-format +msgid "File %s was not read correctly, so it will not be written." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/modules/Users.pm:4433 src/modules/Users.pm:4468 +#: src/modules/Users.pm:4744 +msgid "An error occurred while removing users." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup (%s is a file name) +#: src/modules/Users.pm:4446 src/modules/Users.pm:4594 +#, perl-format +msgid "File %s was not correctly read, so it will not be written." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/modules/Users.pm:4583 +msgid "" +"\n" +"Encryption support is not installed, home directories will NOT be encrypted." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/modules/Users.pm:4785 src/modules/YaPI/ADMINISTRATOR.pm:101 +msgid "An error occurred while setting forwarding for root's mail." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/modules/Users.pm:4861 +msgid "No UID is available for this type of user." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/modules/Users.pm:4892 +#, perl-format +msgid "" +"The selected user ID is not allowed.\n" +"Select a valid integer between %i and %i." +msgstr "" + +#. popup question +#: src/modules/Users.pm:4923 +msgid "" +"The user ID entered is already in use.\n" +"Really use it?" +msgstr "" + +#. popup question, %i are numbers +#: src/modules/Users.pm:4936 +#, perl-format +msgid "" +"The selected user ID is not from a range\n" +"defined for LDAP users (%i-%i).\n" +"Really use it?" +msgstr "" + +#. popup question +#: src/modules/Users.pm:4951 +#, perl-format +msgid "" +"The selected user ID is a local ID,\n" +"because the ID is greater than %i.\n" +"Really change the user type to 'local'?" +msgstr "" + +#. popup question +#: src/modules/Users.pm:4965 +#, perl-format +msgid "" +"The selected user ID is a system ID,\n" +"because the ID is smaller than %i.\n" +"Really change the user type to 'system'?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Users.pm:4999 +msgid "" +"\n" +"The existing username might belong to a NIS or LDAP user.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup, %1 might be additional sentence ("The existing username...") +#: src/modules/Users.pm:5003 +msgid "" +"There is a conflict between the entered\n" +"username and an existing username. %1\n" +"Try another one." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/modules/Users.pm:5033 +msgid "" +"The \"Additional User Information\" entry cannot\n" +"contain a colon (:). Try again." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/modules/Users.pm:5040 +msgid "" +"The \"Additional User Information\" entry can consist\n" +"of up to three sections separated by commas.\n" +"Remove the surplus." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/modules/Users.pm:5103 +msgid "" +"The home directory may only contain the following characters:\n" +"a-z, A-Z, 0-9, and _-/\n" +"Try again." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/modules/Users.pm:5126 +#, perl-format +msgid "" +"The directory %s is not writable.\n" +"Choose another path for the home directory." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/modules/Users.pm:5137 +msgid "" +"The home directory is used by another user.\n" +"Try again." +msgstr "" + +#. yes/no popup: user seleceted something strange as a home directory +#: src/modules/Users.pm:5179 +msgid "" +"The path for the selected home directory already exists,\n" +"but it is not a directory.\n" +"Really use this path?" +msgstr "" + +#. yes/no popup +#: src/modules/Users.pm:5190 +msgid "" +"The home directory selected already exists.\n" +"Use it and change its owner?" +msgstr "" + +#. chown is not needed (#25200) +#. yes/no popup +#: src/modules/Users.pm:5197 +#, perl-format +msgid "" +"The selected home directory (%s)\n" +"already exists and is owned by the currently edited user.\n" +"Use this directory?\n" +msgstr "" + +#. yes/no popup +#: src/modules/Users.pm:5206 +#, perl-format +msgid "" +"The home directory selected (%s)\n" +"already exists as a former home directory of\n" +"a user previously marked for deletion.\n" +"Use this directory?" +msgstr "" + +#. popup question +#: src/modules/Users.pm:5234 +msgid "" +"If you select a nonexistent shell, the user may be unable to log in.\n" +"Use this shell?" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/modules/Users.pm:5254 +msgid "No GID is available for this type of group." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/modules/Users.pm:5287 +#, perl-format +msgid "" +"The selected group ID is not allowed.\n" +"Select a valid integer between %i and %i." +msgstr "" + +#. popup question +#: src/modules/Users.pm:5317 +msgid "" +"The group ID entered is already in use.\n" +"Really use it?" +msgstr "" + +#. popup question, %i are numbers +#: src/modules/Users.pm:5329 +#, perl-format +msgid "" +"The selected group ID is not from a range\n" +"defined for LDAP groups (%i-%i).\n" +"Really use it?" +msgstr "" + +#. popup question +#: src/modules/Users.pm:5344 +#, perl-format +msgid "" +"The selected group ID is a local ID,\n" +"because the ID is greater than %i.\n" +"Really change the group type to 'local'?" +msgstr "" + +#. popup question +#: src/modules/Users.pm:5358 +#, perl-format +msgid "" +"The selected group ID is a system ID,\n" +"because the ID is smaller than %i.\n" +"Really change the group type to 'system'?" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/modules/Users.pm:5377 +msgid "" +"No group name entered.\n" +"Try again." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/modules/Users.pm:5394 +#, perl-format +msgid "" +"The group name must be between %i and %i characters in length.\n" +"Try again." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/modules/Users.pm:5407 +msgid "" +"The group name may contain only\n" +"letters, digits, \"-\", \".\", and \"_\"\n" +"and must begin with a letter.\n" +"Try again." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/modules/Users.pm:5415 +msgid "" +"There is a conflict between the entered\n" +"group name and an existing group name.\n" +"Try another one." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/Users.pm:5531 +#, perl-format +msgid "User %s does not exist." +msgstr "" + +#. error message: group cannot be deleted +#: src/modules/Users.pm:5585 +msgid "" +"You cannot delete this group because\n" +"there are users that use this group\n" +"as their default group." +msgstr "" + +#. error message: group cannot be deleted +#: src/modules/Users.pm:5592 +msgid "" +"You cannot delete this group because\n" +"there are users in the group.\n" +"Remove these users from the group first." +msgstr "" + +#. summary label +#: src/modules/Users.pm:6603 +msgid "<h3>Users</h3>" +msgstr "" + +#. summary label +#: src/modules/Users.pm:6613 +msgid "<h3>Groups</h3>" +msgstr "" + +#. summary label +#: src/modules/Users.pm:6624 +msgid "<h3>Login Settings</h3>" +msgstr "" + +#. summary item, %1 is user name +#: src/modules/Users.pm:6626 +msgid "User %1 configured for automatic login" +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/modules/UsersLDAP.pm:226 +msgid "No password for LDAP was entered." +msgstr "" + +#. popup question, %s is string argument +#: src/modules/UsersLDAP.pm:351 src/modules/UsersLDAP.pm:377 +#, perl-format +msgid "" +"No entry with DN '%s'\n" +"exists on the LDAP server. Create it now?" +msgstr "" + +#. plugin name +#: src/modules/UsersPluginKerberos.pm:122 +msgid "Kerberos Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. user plugin summary (table item) +#: src/modules/UsersPluginKerberos.pm:133 +msgid "No Kerberos Management for Groups" +msgstr "" + +#. user plugin summary (table item) +#: src/modules/UsersPluginKerberos.pm:136 +msgid "Manage Kerberos Principials" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/UsersPluginKerberos.pm:260 +msgid "Cannot execute kadmin.local." +msgstr "" + +#. plugin name +#: src/modules/UsersPluginLDAPAll.pm:147 +msgid "LDAP Attributes" +msgstr "" + +#. plugin summary (table item) +#: src/modules/UsersPluginLDAPAll.pm:158 src/modules/UsersPluginLDAPAll.pm:162 +msgid "Edit Remaining LDAP Attributes" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup (user forgot to fill in some attributes) +#: src/modules/UsersPluginLDAPAll.pm:280 +#: src/modules/UsersPluginLDAPShadowAccount.pm:287 +#, perl-format +msgid "" +"The attribute '%s' is required for this object according\n" +"to its LDAP configuration, but it is currently empty." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/UsersPluginLDAPAll.pm:378 +msgid "An error occurred." +msgstr "" + +#. plugin name +#: src/modules/UsersPluginLDAPPasswordPolicy.pm:147 +msgid "LDAP Password Policy" +msgstr "" + +#. user plugin summary (table item) +#: src/modules/UsersPluginLDAPPasswordPolicy.pm:156 +msgid "Edit Password Policy" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup, %s is object DN +#: src/modules/UsersPluginLDAPPasswordPolicy.pm:239 +#, perl-format +msgid "Invalid DN syntax of \"%s\"." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup, first %s is object DN, second is additional error message +#: src/modules/UsersPluginLDAPPasswordPolicy.pm:251 +#, perl-format +msgid "" +"Error while searching for \"%s\":\n" +"%s" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup, %s is object DN +#: src/modules/UsersPluginLDAPPasswordPolicy.pm:258 +#, perl-format +msgid "" +"The object \"%s\"\n" +"is not a Password Policy object" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/modules/UsersPluginLDAPPasswordPolicy.pm:308 +#: src/modules/UsersPluginLDAPPasswordPolicy.pm:349 +msgid "" +"It is not possible to add this plug-in when\n" +"the plugin for Shadow Account attributes is in use.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. plugin name +#: src/modules/UsersPluginLDAPShadowAccount.pm:183 +msgid "Shadow Account Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. user plugin summary (table item) +#: src/modules/UsersPluginLDAPShadowAccount.pm:192 +msgid "Edit Shadow Account attributes" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/modules/UsersPluginLDAPShadowAccount.pm:350 +#: src/modules/UsersPluginLDAPShadowAccount.pm:396 +msgid "" +"It is not possible to add this plug-in when\n" +"the plug-in for Password Policy is in use.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. plugin name +#: src/modules/UsersPluginQuota.pm:237 +msgid "Quota Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. user plugin summary (table item) +#: src/modules/UsersPluginQuota.pm:248 +msgid "Manage Group Quota" +msgstr "" + +#. user plugin summary (table item) +#: src/modules/UsersPluginQuota.pm:251 +msgid "Manage User Quota" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/modules/UsersPluginQuota.pm:325 src/modules/UsersPluginQuota.pm:365 +msgid "" +"Quota is not enabled on your system.\n" +"Enable quota in the partition settings module." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup, %1 is command, %2 command error output +#: src/modules/UsersPluginQuota.pm:424 src/modules/UsersPluginQuota.pm:435 +msgid "" +"Error while calling\n" +"\"%1\":\n" +"%2" +msgstr "" + +#. the ']' is or-ed... +#. error popup +#: src/modules/UsersSimple.pm:505 +msgid "" +"The password may only contain the following characters:\n" +"0-9, a-z, A-Z, and any of \"`~!@#$%^&* ,.;:._-+/|?='{[(<>)]}\\\".\n" +"Try again." +msgstr "" + +#. help text (default part shown in more places) +#: src/modules/UsersSimple.pm:540 +msgid "" +"<p>\n" +"For the password, use only characters that can be found on an English keyboard\n" +"layout. In cases of system error, it may be necessary to log in without a\n" +"localized keyboard layout.\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/modules/UsersSimple.pm:620 +msgid "" +"The user's full name cannot contain\n" +"\":\" or \",\" characters.\n" +"Try again." +msgstr "" + +#. popup question +#: src/modules/UsersSimple.pm:647 +msgid "You have used the group name as a part of the password." +msgstr "" + +#. popup question +#: src/modules/UsersSimple.pm:650 +msgid "You have used the username as a part of the password." +msgstr "" + +#. popup question +#: src/modules/UsersSimple.pm:659 +msgid "You have used only lowercase letters for the password." +msgstr "" + +#. popup question +#: src/modules/UsersSimple.pm:667 +msgid "You have used only uppercase letters for the password." +msgstr "" + +#. popup question +#: src/modules/UsersSimple.pm:674 +msgid "You have used a palindrome for the password." +msgstr "" + +#. popup question +#: src/modules/UsersSimple.pm:682 +msgid "You have used only digits for the password." +msgstr "" + +#. popup question +#: src/modules/UsersSimple.pm:704 +#, perl-format +msgid "" +"The password is too long for the current encryption method.\n" +"It will be truncated to %s characters." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/modules/UsersSimple.pm:791 +#, perl-format +msgid "" +"The password is too simple:\n" +"%s." +msgstr "" + +#. popup error, %i is number +#: src/modules/UsersSimple.pm:805 +#, perl-format +msgid "The password should have at least %i characters." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/modules/UsersSimple.pm:826 +msgid "" +"No username entered.\n" +"Try again." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/modules/UsersSimple.pm:836 +#, perl-format +msgid "" +"The username must be between %i and %i characters in length.\n" +"Try again." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/modules/UsersSimple.pm:865 +msgid "" +"The username may contain only\n" +"letters, digits, \"-\", \".\", and \"_\"\n" +"and must begin with a letter or \"_\".\n" +"Try again." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/modules/UsersSimple.pm:886 +msgid "" +"There is a conflict between the entered\n" +"username and an existing username.\n" +"Try another one." +msgstr "" + +#. busy popup message, %1 is package name +#. busy popup message +#: src/modules/UsersSimple.pm:1179 src/modules/UsersSimple.pm:1294 +msgid "Retrieving %1 extension..." +msgstr "" + +#. busy popup message, %1 is package name +#. busy popup message +#: src/modules/UsersSimple.pm:1277 src/modules/UsersSimple.pm:1308 +msgid "Releasing %1 extension..." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/modules/YaPI/USERS.pm:533 +msgid "" +"There is a conflict between the entered\n" +"user name and an existing user name.\n" +"Try another one." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/modules/YaPI/USERS.pm:545 +msgid "" +"The home directory is used from another user.\n" +"Please try again." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/modules/YaPI/USERS.pm:741 src/modules/YaPI/USERS.pm:858 +msgid "No plug-in was defined" +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/modules/YaPI/USERS.pm:795 src/modules/YaPI/USERS.pm:912 +msgid "It is not possible to edit a NIS user." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/modules/YaPI/USERS.pm:1025 +msgid "It is not possible to delete a NIS user." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/modules/YaPI/USERS.pm:1684 src/modules/YaPI/USERS.pm:1817 +#: src/modules/YaPI/USERS.pm:1980 +msgid "It is not possible to modify a NIS group." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/modules/YaPI/USERS.pm:1761 src/modules/YaPI/USERS.pm:1924 +#: src/modules/YaPI/USERS.pm:2403 +msgid "No user was specified." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/modules/YaPI/USERS.pm:1858 src/modules/YaPI/USERS.pm:2021 +#: src/modules/YaPI/USERS.pm:2476 +msgid "User was not correctly specified." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/modules/YaPI/USERS.pm:2133 +msgid "It is not possible to delete a NIS group." +msgstr "" + +#. error message +#: src/modules/YaPI/USERS.pm:2451 +msgid "There are multiple users satisfying the input conditions." +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/vm.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/vm.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/vm.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,222 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:37+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. Main +#. Definition of command line mode options +#: src/clients/virtualization.rb:54 +msgid "Install Hypervisor and Tools" +msgstr "" + +#. progress step title +#: src/clients/vm_finish.rb:69 +msgid "Configuring the virtual machine..." +msgstr "" + +#. check for kernel-bigsmp +#: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:158 +msgid "x86_64 is the only supported architecture for hosting virtual machines. Your architecture is " +msgstr "" + +#. we are already in UML, nested virtual machine is not supported +#: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:177 +msgid "" +"Virtual machine installation cannot be started inside the UML machine.\n" +"Start installation in the host system.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage 1/2 +#. Generate a pop dialog to allow user selection of Xen or KVM +#: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:194 src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:282 +msgid "Verify Installed Packages" +msgstr "" + +#. progress stage 2/2 +#: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:196 +msgid "Network Bridge Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Headline for management domain installation +#: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:211 +msgid "Configuring the VM Server (domain 0)" +msgstr "" + +#. xen domain0 installation help text - 1/4 +#: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:214 +msgid "<p><big><b>VM Server Configuration</b></big></p><p>Configuration of the VM Server (domain 0) has two parts.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. xen domain0 installation help text - 2/4 +#: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:218 +msgid "<p>The required packages are installed into the system first. Then the boot loader is switched to GRUB (if not already used) and the Xen section is added to the boot loader menu if it is missing.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. xen domain0 installation help text - 3/4 +#: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:222 +msgid "<p>GRUB is needed because it supports the multiboot standard required to boot Xen and the Linux kernel.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. xen domain0 installation help text - 4/4 +#: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:226 +msgid "<p>When the configuration has finished successfully, you can boot the VM Server from the boot loader menu.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:231 +msgid "The installation will be aborted." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:234 +msgid "Choose Hypervisor(s) to install" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:237 +msgid "Server: Minimal system to get a running Hypervisor" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:238 +msgid "Tools: Configure, manage and monitor virtual machines" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:251 +msgid "KVM Hypervisor" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:253 +msgid "KVM server" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:254 +msgid "KVM tools" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:259 +msgid "libvirt LXC containers" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:261 +msgid "libvirt LXC daemon" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:289 +msgid "Software to connect to Virtualization server" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:291 +msgid "Virtualization client tools" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:307 +msgid "Xen Hypervisor" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:309 +msgid "Xen server" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:310 +msgid "Xen tools" +msgstr "" + +#. SLED doesn't have any installation capabilities (L3 support) +#: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:388 +msgid "Package installation failed\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:396 +msgid "Package installation failed for lxc\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:403 +msgid "Package installation failed for sled client pattern\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:413 +msgid "Package installation failed for sles patterns\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Assume python gtk is installed. If in text mode we don't care +#: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:426 +msgid "Running in text mode. Install graphical components anyway?" +msgstr "" + +#. progressbar title - check whether Xen packages are installed +#: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:439 +msgid "Checking packages..." +msgstr "" + +#. progressbar title - install the required packages +#: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:442 +msgid "Installing packages..." +msgstr "" + +#. error popup +#. Now see if they really were installed (bnc#508347) +#: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:447 src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:454 +msgid "Cannot install required packages." +msgstr "" + +#. If grub2 is the bootloader and we succesfully installed Xen, update the grub2 files +#: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:464 +msgid "Updating grub2 configuration files..." +msgstr "" + +#. Default Bridge stage +#: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:484 +msgid "Configuring Default Network Bridge..." +msgstr "" + +#. Popup yes/no dialog +#: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:505 +msgid "Network Bridge." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:506 +msgid "<p>For normal network configurations hosting virtual machines, a network bridge is recommended.</p><p>Configure a default network bridge?</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Firewall stage - modify the firewall setting, add the xen bridge to FW_FORWARD_ALWAYS_INOUT_DEV +#. Progress::NextStage(); +#. Configure firewall to allow xenbr+ +#. success = success && ConfigureFirewall(); +#. if ( success == false ) { +#. // error popup +#. Report::Error(_("Failed to configure the firewall to allow the Xen bridge") + "\n" + abortmsg); +#. return false; +#. } +#: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:567 +msgid "KVM components are installed. Your host is ready to install KVM guests." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:570 +msgid "KVM components are installed. Reboot the machine and select the native kernel in the boot loader menu to install KVM guests." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:573 +msgid "For installing Xen guests, reboot the machine and select the Xen section in the boot loader menu." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:576 +msgid "Xen Hypervisor and tools are installed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:577 +msgid "Virtualization client tools are installed." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:578 +msgid "Libvirt LXC components are installed." +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/vpn.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/vpn.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/vpn.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,522 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-09-28 18:17+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. Manage VPN client secrets. +#: src/lib/vpn/edit_client_secrets.rb:56 +msgid "Pre-shared key for gateways" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/edit_client_secrets.rb:57 src/lib/vpn/edit_client_secrets.rb:62 +msgid "Gateway IP" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/edit_client_secrets.rb:57 +msgid "Pre-shared key" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/edit_client_secrets.rb:59 src/lib/vpn/edit_client_secrets.rb:63 +msgid "Set" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/edit_client_secrets.rb:60 src/lib/vpn/edit_gw_secrets.rb:188 +msgid "Show key" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/edit_client_secrets.rb:61 +msgid "Certificate/key pair for gateways" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/edit_client_secrets.rb:62 +msgid "Certificate" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/edit_client_secrets.rb:62 +msgid "Key" +msgstr "" + +#. Make sure that tables are filled, then save all settings. +#: src/lib/vpn/edit_client_secrets.rb:121 +msgid "" +"Shared keys for the following gateways are still missing:\n" +"%s" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/edit_client_secrets.rb:127 +msgid "" +"Certificates for the following gateways are still missing:\n" +"%s" +msgstr "" + +#. Load PSKs +#. Reload gateway PSK text input. +#. Load XAuth +#. Load EAP +#: src/lib/vpn/edit_client_secrets.rb:140 src/lib/vpn/edit_gw_secrets.rb:224 +#: src/lib/vpn/edit_gw_secrets.rb:233 src/lib/vpn/edit_gw_secrets.rb:239 +msgid "(hidden)" +msgstr "" + +#. Remove the selected EAP user. +#. Remove the selected XAuth user. +#: src/lib/vpn/edit_gw_secrets.rb:120 src/lib/vpn/edit_gw_secrets.rb:141 +msgid "Please select a user to delete." +msgstr "" + +#. Save PSK and certificate settings. Note that XAUTH and EAP user lists are already saved. +#: src/lib/vpn/edit_gw_secrets.rb:154 +msgid "A pre-shared key is mandatory. Please enter a pre-shared key." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/edit_gw_secrets.rb:166 +msgid "Please enter both certificate file path and key file path." +msgstr "" + +#. Event handlers +#: src/lib/vpn/edit_gw_secrets.rb:175 src/lib/vpn/set_client_cert_dialog.rb:64 +msgid "Pick a PEM encoded certificate file" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/edit_gw_secrets.rb:180 src/lib/vpn/set_client_cert_dialog.rb:69 +msgid "Pick a PEM encoded certificate key file" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/edit_gw_secrets.rb:186 +msgid "Gateway pre-shared key" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/edit_gw_secrets.rb:192 +msgid "Gateway certificate" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/edit_gw_secrets.rb:194 +msgid "Path to certificate file" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/edit_gw_secrets.rb:195 src/lib/vpn/edit_gw_secrets.rb:198 +#: src/lib/vpn/set_client_cert_dialog.rb:50 +#: src/lib/vpn/set_client_cert_dialog.rb:53 +msgid "Pick.." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/edit_gw_secrets.rb:197 +msgid "Path to certificate key file" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/edit_gw_secrets.rb:202 +msgid "User credentials for Android, iOS, MacOS X clients" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/edit_gw_secrets.rb:203 src/lib/vpn/edit_gw_secrets.rb:212 +msgid "Username" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/edit_gw_secrets.rb:203 src/lib/vpn/edit_gw_secrets.rb:212 +msgid "Password" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/edit_gw_secrets.rb:205 src/lib/vpn/edit_gw_secrets.rb:214 +msgid "Add" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/edit_gw_secrets.rb:206 src/lib/vpn/edit_gw_secrets.rb:215 +msgid "Delete" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/edit_gw_secrets.rb:207 src/lib/vpn/edit_gw_secrets.rb:216 +msgid "Show Password" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/edit_gw_secrets.rb:211 +msgid "User credentials for Windows 7, Windows 8 clients" +msgstr "" + +#. Return a user-friendly brief description of the connection. +#: src/lib/vpn/ipsec.rb:199 +msgid "Gateway - PSK" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/ipsec.rb:201 +msgid "Gateway - Certificate" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/ipsec.rb:203 +msgid "Gateway - Mobile clients" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/ipsec.rb:205 +msgid "Gateway - Windows clients" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/ipsec.rb:207 +msgid "Client - PSK" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/ipsec.rb:209 +msgid "Client - Certificate" +msgstr "" + +#. Load parameters from connections of known scenarios +#: src/lib/vpn/ipsec.rb:239 +msgid "" +"ipsec.conf and ipsec.secrets have been manipulated outside of this module.\n" +"Continue using the module will remove your customisation." +msgstr "" + +#. Create a new connection, by default it is a site-to-site client. Return true if successful. +#: src/lib/vpn/ipsec.rb:310 +msgid "The connection name is already used." +msgstr "" + +#. Find an unused gateway scenario +#: src/lib/vpn/ipsec.rb:327 +msgid "" +"You may only have one gateway connection per scenario.\n" +"All of gateway scenarios are already used." +msgstr "" + +#. Warn against duplicated configuration +#: src/lib/vpn/ipsec.rb:344 +msgid "" +"The scenario is already configured with another gateway.\n" +"You may not have two gateways operating under one scenario." +msgstr "" + +#. Create the user (:xauth or :eap). Return true if successful. +#: src/lib/vpn/ipsec.rb:439 +msgid "The user name is already used." +msgstr "" + +#. Set client certificate/key for a connection to remote gateway. Return true if successful, otherwise false. +#: src/lib/vpn/ipsec.rb:503 +msgid "Cannot find a matching client connection." +msgstr "" + +#. Render global options, connection list, and connection configuration frames. +#: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:60 +msgid "VPN Gateway and Client" +msgstr "" + +#. Left side: global config & connection management +#: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:66 +msgid "Global Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:68 +msgid "Enable VPN daemon" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:70 +msgid "Reduce TCP MSS" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:73 +msgid "All VPNs" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:76 +msgid "New VPN" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:77 +msgid "Delete VPN" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:79 +msgid "View Connection Status" +msgstr "" + +#. Event handlers +#. Display a help text to let user know why reducing MSS is sometimes necessary. +#: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:103 +msgid "" +"If VPN clients have trouble accessing certain Internet sites, it is possible that the affected hosts prevent automatic MTU (maximum transmission unit) discovery due to incorrect firewall configuration.\n" +"Reducing TCP-MSS will correct the situation; however, the available bandwidth will be reduced by about 10%." +msgstr "" + +#. Delete the chosen VPN connection. +#: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:124 +msgid "Delete connection" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:125 +msgid "Are you sure to delete connection " +msgstr "" + +#. Check for incomplete configuration +#: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:144 +msgid "Please complete configuration for the following connections:\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Consider enabling the daemon +#: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:151 +msgid "" +"There are VPN connections but the daemon is not enabled.\n" +"Would you like to enable the VPN daemon?" +msgstr "" + +#. Ask user whether he wants to view daemon log +#: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:172 +msgid "Settings have been successfully applied." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:174 +msgid "Failed to configure IPSec daemon." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:177 +msgid "Would you like to view daemon log and connection status?" +msgstr "" + +#. Open dialog to edit VPN client passwords/certificates. +#: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:285 +msgid "Please enter gateway IP before editing credentials." +msgstr "" + +#. Render a table of configured gateway and client connections. +#: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:361 +msgid "Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:361 +msgid "Description" +msgstr "" + +#. Render configuration controls for the chosen connection. +#: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:376 +msgid "Click 'New VPN' to create a gateway or client." +msgstr "" + +#. Make widgets for connection configuration +#: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:386 +msgid "All IPv4 networks (0.0.0.0/0)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:387 +msgid "All IPv6 networks (::/0)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:389 +msgid "Limited CIDRs, comma separated:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:395 +msgid "Connection name: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:396 +msgid "Type" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:398 +msgid "Gateway (Server)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:399 +msgid "Client" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:406 +msgid "The scenario is" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:408 +msgid "Secure communication with a pre-shared key" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:409 +msgid "Secure communication with a certificate" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:410 +msgid "Provide access to Android, iOS, MacOS X clients" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:411 +msgid "Provide access to Windows 7, Windows 8 clients" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:413 src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:427 +msgid "Edit Credentials" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:416 +msgid "Provide VPN clients access to" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:417 +msgid "Clients' address pool (e.g. 192.168.100.0/24)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:421 +msgid "The gateway requires authentication" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:423 +msgid "By a pre-shared key" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:424 +msgid "By a certificate" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:426 +msgid "VPN gateway IP" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/main_dialog.rb:430 +msgid "Use the VPN tunnel to access" +msgstr "" + +#. They are however allowed in password +#: src/lib/vpn/new_user_dialog.rb:64 +msgid "Please enter both username and password." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/new_user_dialog.rb:68 +msgid "" +"Please refrain from using special characters and spaces in the username.\n" +"Acceptable characters are: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, dash, underscore" +msgstr "" + +#. Create a new VPN connection - by default it is a site-to-site gateway. +#: src/lib/vpn/new_vpn_dialog.rb:46 +msgid "Please enter a name for the new VPN connection" +msgstr "" + +#. Return :ok if new VPN connection is created, otherwise :cancel. +#: src/lib/vpn/new_vpn_dialog.rb:58 +msgid "Please enter a VPN connection name." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/new_vpn_dialog.rb:62 +msgid "" +"Please refrain from using special characters and spaces in the name.\n" +"Acceptable characters are: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, dash, underscore\n" +"Name has to begin with a letter." +msgstr "" + +#. Ask for a new certificate/key combination for a VPN client +#: src/lib/vpn/set_client_cert_dialog.rb:49 +msgid "Path to certificate file:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/set_client_cert_dialog.rb:52 +msgid "Path to certificate key file:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/set_client_cert_dialog.rb:54 +msgid "Please do not store the key in the certificate file itself." +msgstr "" + +#. Return tuple of certificate and certificate key locations. +#: src/lib/vpn/set_client_cert_dialog.rb:80 +msgid "Please enter both certificate file and key file." +msgstr "" + +#. Return password string. +#: src/lib/vpn/set_client_psk_dialog.rb:59 +msgid "Please enter a password." +msgstr "" + +#. View log dialog displays current status about all IPSec connections. +#: src/lib/vpn/view_log_dialog.rb:49 +msgid "The logs are refreshed automatically every 3 seconds." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/view_log_dialog.rb:51 +msgid "Restart VPN Daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. Restart IPSec daemon service. +#: src/lib/vpn/view_log_dialog.rb:76 +msgid "Confirm daemon restart" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/view_log_dialog.rb:77 +msgid "" +"Existing connections will be interrupted.\n" +"Do you still wish to continue?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/vpn/view_log_dialog.rb:81 +msgid "Failed to restart IPSec daemon" +msgstr "" + +#. Read daemon status and refresh the content of log views. +#: src/lib/vpn/view_log_dialog.rb:100 +msgid "Status not available: is the daemon running?" +msgstr "" + +#. Install packages +#: src/modules/IPSecConf.rb:172 +msgid "Failed to install IPSec packages." +msgstr "" + +#. Enable/disable daemon +#: src/modules/IPSecConf.rb:180 +msgid "Failed to start IPSec daemon." +msgstr "" + +#. Configure IP forwarding +#: src/modules/IPSecConf.rb:210 +msgid "Failed to apply IP forwarding settings using sysctl:" +msgstr "" + +#. Configure/deconfigure firewall +#: src/modules/IPSecConf.rb:225 +msgid "" +"SuSE firewall is enabled but not activated.\n" +"In order for VPN to function properly, SuSE firewall will now be activated." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/IPSecConf.rb:229 src/modules/IPSecConf.rb:234 +msgid "Failed to restart SuSE firewall." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/IPSecConf.rb:240 +msgid "" +"Both VPN gateway and clients require special SuSE firewall configuration.\n" +"SuSE firewall is not enabled, therefore you must manually run the configuration script on every reboot. The script will be run now.\n" +"The script is located at %s" +msgstr "" + +#. AutoYaST: Return a rich text summary of the current configuration. +#: src/modules/IPSecConf.rb:279 +msgid "VPN Global Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/IPSecConf.rb:280 +msgid "Enable VPN (IPSec) daemon: %s" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/IPSecConf.rb:281 +msgid "Reduce TCP MSS to 1024: %s" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/IPSecConf.rb:282 +msgid "Gateway and Connections" +msgstr "" + +#. Gateway summary +#: src/modules/IPSecConf.rb:288 +msgid "A gateway serving clients in " +msgstr "" + +#. Client summary +#: src/modules/IPSecConf.rb:292 +msgid "A client connecting to " +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/wol.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/wol.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/wol.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. *************************************************************************** +#. +#. Copyright (c) 2002 - 2012 Novell, Inc. +#. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or +#. modify it under the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as +#. published by the Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +#. but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +#. MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +#. GNU General Public License for more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +#. along with this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, +#. you may find current contact information at www.novell.com +#. +#. *************************************************************************** +#. File: clients/wol.ycp +#. Package: Boot Server +#. Author: Anas Nashif +#. Summary: WOL +#. +#. $Id$ +#: src/clients/wol.rb:49 +msgid "" +"Package could not be installed.\n" +"Install the missing packages and try again." +msgstr "" + +#. Table header +#: src/clients/wol.rb:64 +msgid "MAC Address" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/wol.rb:64 +msgid "Host Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/wol.rb:66 +msgid "Wake Up" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/wol.rb:76 +msgid "Wake-On-Lan" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/wol.rb:77 +msgid "" +"<h2>Wake on LAN</h2>\n" +"<p>With WOL, you can 'wake up' your PC simply by sending a 'magic packet' \n" +"over the network.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. UI::ChangeWidget(`id(`edit_button), `Enabled, false); +#: src/clients/wol.rb:127 +msgid "Really delete this item?" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/wol.rb:146 +msgid "Waking remote host" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/wol.rb:171 +msgid "Host Name:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/wol.rb:173 +msgid "" +"MAC Address of\n" +"the Client: " +msgstr "" + +#. read mac addr. from dhcpd.conf +#: src/modules/WOL.rb:101 +msgid "" +"No previously configured clients found.\n" +"However, a DHCP configuration was found on this system. Import the host\n" +"configuration data (MAC addresses and host names) from \n" +"'/etc/dhcpd.conf'?\n" +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/yast2-apparmor.ps.po =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/yast2-apparmor.ps.po (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/po/yast2-apparmor.ps.po 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,1745 @@ +# Copyright © 2013 SUSE Linux Products GmbH. +# Pashto Team , 2009. +# +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: yast2.ps.po\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-08-25 18:36+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2013-08-11 00:15+0200\n" +"Last-Translator: Pashto Team \n" +"Language-Team: Pashto Team \n" +"Language: \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1\n" + +#. Globalz +#: src/clients/AA_AddProfile.rb:66 +msgid "Select File to Generate a Profile for" +msgstr "" + +#. Check for cancel in the file choose dialog +#: src/clients/AA_AddProfile.rb:77 +msgid "Profile for " +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/AA_AddProfile.rb:78 +msgid " already exists." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/AA_AddProfile.rb:80 +msgid "Would you like to open this profile in editing mode?" +msgstr "" + +#. Globalz +#. TODO ELSE POPUP NO ENTRY SELECTED ERROR +#: src/clients/AA_DeleteProfile.rb:64 +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1481 +msgid "Delete profile confirmation" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/AA_DeleteProfile.rb:67 +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1484 +msgid "Are you sure you want to delete the profile " +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/AA_DeleteProfile.rb:70 +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1487 +msgid "" +" ?\n" +"After this operation the AppArmor module will reload the profile set." +msgstr "" + +#. Read the profiles from the SCR agent +#: src/clients/AA_DeleteProfile.rb:90 +msgid "Make a selection from the listed profiles and press Next to delete the profile." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/AA_DeleteProfile.rb:93 +msgid "Delete Profile - Choose profile to delete" +msgstr "" + +#. Read the profiles from the SCR agent +#: src/clients/AA_EditProfile.rb:88 +msgid "Select a listed profile and press Edit to edit it." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/AA_EditProfile.rb:89 +msgid "Edit Profile - Choose profile to edit" +msgstr "" + +#. no command line support #269891 +#: src/clients/apparmor-settings.rb:52 +msgid "Enable AppArmor Functions" +msgstr "" + +#. AppArmor dialog caption +#. Network dialog caption +#: src/clients/apparmor.rb:51 src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:440 +msgid "AppArmor Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. AppArmor dialog help +#: src/clients/apparmor.rb:54 +msgid "" +"<p>Choose one of the available AppArmor modules to configure\n" +" the corresponding action and press <b>Launch</b>.</p>\n" +msgstr "" + +#. Selection box label +#: src/clients/apparmor.rb:69 +msgid "&Available AppArmor Modules:" +msgstr "" + +#. Selection box items +#: src/clients/apparmor.rb:72 +msgid "Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/apparmor.rb:73 +msgid "Manage Existing Profiles" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/apparmor.rb:74 +msgid "Manually Add Profile" +msgstr "" + +#. Label::FinishButton() +#: src/clients/apparmor.rb:90 +msgid "&Launch" +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. *************************************************************************** +#. +#. Copyright (c) 2002 - 2012 Novell, Inc. +#. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or +#. modify it under the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as +#. published by the Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +#. but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +#. MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +#. GNU General Public License for more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +#. along with this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, +#. you may find current contact information at www.novell.com +#. +#. *************************************************************************** +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:52 +msgid "This operation generated the following error. Check your installation and AppArmor profile settings." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:91 src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:103 +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:115 +msgid "Disabled" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:92 src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:104 +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:116 +msgid "1 minute" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:93 src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:105 +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:117 +msgid "5 minutes" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:94 src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:106 +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:118 +msgid "10 minutes" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:95 src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:107 +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:119 +msgid "15 minutes" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:96 src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:108 +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:120 +msgid "30 minutes" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:97 src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:109 +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:121 +msgid "1 hour" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:98 src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:110 +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:122 +msgid "1 day" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:99 src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:111 +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:123 +msgid "1 week" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:131 src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:233 +msgid "Security Event Notification" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:138 +msgid "Terse Notification" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:142 src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:171 +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:200 +msgid "Frequency" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:145 src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:174 +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:203 +msgid "Email Address" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:150 src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:179 +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:208 +msgid "Severity" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:159 src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:188 +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:217 +msgid "Include Unknown Severity Events" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:167 +msgid "Summary Notification" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:196 +msgid "Verbose Notification" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:270 src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:310 +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:350 +msgid "An email address is required for each selected notification method." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:394 +msgid "Configuration failed for the following operations: " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:401 src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:434 +msgid "Notification is enabled" +msgstr "" + +#. Notification Status +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:403 src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:431 +msgid "Notification is disabled" +msgstr "" + +#. AppArmor Status +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:422 +msgid "AppArmor is disabled" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:426 +msgid "AppArmor is enabled" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:441 +msgid "" +"<p><b>AppArmor Status</b><br>This reports whether the AppArmor policy enforcement \n" +"module is loaded and functioning.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:444 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Security Event Notification</b><br>Configure this tool if you want \n" +"to be notified by email when access violations have occurred.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:447 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Profile Modes</b><br>Use this tool to change the way that AppArmor \n" +"uses individual profiles.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:462 +msgid "&Enable AppArmor" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:469 +msgid "Configure AppArmor" +msgstr "" + +#. event notification disabled due to changes in AppArmor +#. `Frame ( _("Security Event Notification"), +#. `HBox( +#. `VSpacing(1), `HSpacing(1), +#. `HVCenter( `Label( `id(`notifyLabel), evEnStr )), +#. `PushButton( `id(`ntconf), _("C&onfigure")), +#. `VSpacing(1), `HSpacing(1) +#. ) +#. ), +#. `VSpacing(1), `HSpacing(20), +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:485 +msgid "Configure Profile Modes" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:491 +msgid "Set profile modes" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:494 +msgid "Co&nfigure" +msgstr "" + +#. May want to replace Wizard() with UI() +#: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:518 +#: src/include/apparmor/config_complain.rb:187 +#: src/include/apparmor/config_complain.rb:235 +#: src/include/apparmor/config_complain.rb:245 +#: src/include/apparmor/config_complain.rb:274 +#: src/include/apparmor/config_complain.rb:293 +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1112 +msgid "&Done" +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. *************************************************************************** +#. +#. Copyright (c) 2002 - 2012 Novell, Inc. +#. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or +#. modify it under the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as +#. published by the Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +#. but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +#. MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +#. GNU General Public License for more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +#. along with this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, +#. you may find current contact information at www.novell.com +#. +#. *************************************************************************** +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_profile_check.rb:49 +msgid "Errors found in AppArmor profiles" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_profile_check.rb:57 +msgid "<p>These problems must be corrected before AppArmor can be started or the profile management tools can be used.</p> " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_profile_check.rb:64 +msgid "<p>Find a description of the AppArmor profile syntax by running " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_profile_check.rb:70 +msgid "<p>Comprehensive documentation about AppArmor is available in the Administration guide located in the directory: " +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. *************************************************************************** +#. +#. Copyright (c) 2002 - 2012 Novell, Inc. +#. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or +#. modify it under the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as +#. published by the Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +#. but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +#. MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +#. GNU General Public License for more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +#. along with this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, +#. you may find current contact information at www.novell.com +#. +#. *************************************************************************** +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:35 +msgid "&Allow" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:36 +msgid "&Deny" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:37 +msgid "Abo&rt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:39 +msgid "Audi&t" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:40 +msgid "Audi&t off" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:41 +msgid "Audit &All" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:42 +msgid "&Opts" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:43 +msgid "&Owner Permissions on" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:44 +msgid "&Owner Permissions off" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:45 +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:63 +msgid "&Inherit" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:46 +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:64 +msgid "&Profile" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:47 +msgid "&Profile Clean Exec" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:48 +msgid "&Child" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:49 +msgid "&Child Clean Exec" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:50 +msgid "&Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:51 +msgid "&Named Clean Exec" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:52 +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:65 +msgid "&Unconfined" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:53 +msgid "&Unconfined Clean Exec" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:54 +msgid "&Profile ix" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:55 +msgid "&Profile ix Clean Exec" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:56 +msgid "&Child ix" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:57 +msgid "&Child ix Cx Clean Exec" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:58 +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:59 +msgid "&Name ix" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:60 +msgid "i&x fallback on" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:61 +msgid "i&x fallback off" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:62 +msgid "&Continue Profiling" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:66 +msgid "&Edit" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:67 +msgid "&Glob" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:68 +msgid "Glob w/E&xt" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:69 +msgid "&Add Requested Hat" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:70 +msgid "&Use Default Hat" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:71 +msgid "&Scan system log for AppArmor events" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:72 +msgid "&View Profile" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:73 +msgid "&Use Profile" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:74 +msgid "&Create New Profile" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:75 +msgid "&Update Profile" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:76 +msgid "&Ignore Update" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:77 +msgid "&Save Changes" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:78 +msgid "&Upload Changes" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:79 +msgid "&View Changes" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:80 +msgid "&Enable Repository" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:81 +msgid "&Disable Repository" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:82 +msgid "&Never Ask Again" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:83 +msgid "Ask Me &Later" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:106 +msgid "" +"Email address format invalid.\n" +"Email address must be less than 129 characters \n" +" and of the format \"name@domain\". \n" +"Enter a valid address.\n" +msgstr "" + +#. UI_RepositorySignInDialog +#. Dialog to allow users to signin or register with an external AppArmor +#. profile repository +#. +#. @param [Hash] agent_data - data from the backend +#. [ repo_url - string ] +#. @return answers - map that contains: +#. [ newuser => 1|0 - registering a new user? ] +#. [ user => username ] +#. [ pass => password ] +#. [ email => email address - if newuser = 1 ] +#. [ save_config => true/false - save this information on ] +#. [ the system ] +#. +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:141 +msgid "AppArmor Profile Repository Setup" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:153 +msgid "Sign in to the repository" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:157 +msgid "Username" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:164 +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:200 +msgid "S&ave configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:167 +msgid "&Sign in" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:178 +msgid "&Register new user..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:186 +msgid "Register New User" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:190 +msgid "Enter Username" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:191 +msgid "Enter Email Address" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:192 +msgid "Enter Password" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:193 +msgid "Verify Password" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:202 +msgid "&Register" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:213 +msgid "&Sign in as existing user..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:249 +msgid "Username is required" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:251 +msgid "Password is required" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:290 +msgid "Username required for registration." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:292 +msgid "Email address required for registration." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:294 +msgid "Password is required for registration." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:296 +msgid "Passwords do not match. Please re-enter." +msgstr "" + +#. UI_RepositoryViewProfile +#. Dialog to allow users to view a profile from the repository +#. and display it in a small scrollable dialog +#. +#. @param [Hash] agent_data - map data from the backend +#. [ user => string ] +#. [ profile => string contiaining profile contents ] +#. [ profile_type => string INACTIVE_LOCAL|REPOSITORY ] +#. +#. @return [void] +#. +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:373 +msgid "Local inactive profile" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:375 +msgid "Profile created by user " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:377 +msgid "Local profile" +msgstr "" + +#. UI_ChangeLog_Dialog +#. Takes a list of profiles and collects one or multiple changelog entries +#. and returns them +#. +#. @param [Hash] agent_data - data from the backend +#. [ profiles - list of profile names ] +#. +#. @return results - map +#. [ STATUS - string - ok/cancel ] +#. [ SINGLE_CHANGELOG - string - set with changelog if user ] +#. [ selects a single changelog ] +#. +#. [ profile 1 name - string - changelog 1 ] +#. [ profile 2 name - string - changelog 2 ] +#. ... +#. [ profile n name - string - changelog n ] +#. +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:449 +msgid "Enter a changelog for the changes for " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:450 +msgid " the selected profiles" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:451 +msgid "Individual changelogs per profile" +msgstr "" + +#. UI_MultiProfileSelectionDialog +#. Two pane dialog with a multi-selection box on the left +#. and a long text on the right. Allows a list of profiles +#. or profile changes to be viewed and selected for further +#. processing - for example uploading to the repository +#. +#. @param [Hash] agent_data - map - data from backend +#. [ title - string - explanation of the forms use ] +#. [ get_changelog - string true/false - prompt user to ] +#. [ supply changelogs ] +#. [ never_ask_again - string true/false - add widget to let ] +#. [ user select to never prompt again to ] +#. [ upload unselected profiles to the ] +#. [ repository ] +#. [ default_select - string true/false - default value for ] +#. [ profile selection ] +#. [ profiles - map ] +#. +#. @return results - map +#. [ STATUS - string - ok/cancel ] +#. [ PROFILES - list[string] - list of selected profiles ] +#. [ NEVER_ASK_AGAIN - string - true/false - mark unselected ] +#. [ profiles as local only and don't prompt ] +#. [ to upload ] +#. [ CHANGELOG - map[string,string] - changelog data from ] +#. [ UI_ChangeLog_Dialog() ] +#. +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:600 +msgid "&Do not ask again for unselected profiles" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_ycp_utils.rb:671 +msgid "Profiles" +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. *************************************************************************** +#. +#. Copyright (c) 2002 - 2012 Novell, Inc. +#. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or +#. modify it under the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as +#. published by the Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +#. but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +#. MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +#. GNU General Public License for more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +#. along with this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, +#. you may find current contact information at www.novell.com +#. +#. *************************************************************************** +#. +#. YCP map containing definitons for Capabiltiies +#: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:35 +msgid "" +"<ul><li>In a system with the [_POSIX_CHOWN_RESTRICTED] option defined, \n" +"this overrides the restriction of changing file ownership \n" +"and group ownership.</li></ul>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:43 +msgid "" +"<ul><li>Override all DAC access, including ACL execute access if \n" +"[_POSIX_ACL] is defined. Excluding DAC access covered by CAP_LINUX_IMMUTABLE.</li></ul>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:49 +msgid "" +"<ul><li>Overrides all DAC restrictions regarding read and search \n" +"on files and directories, including ACL restrictions if [_POSIX_ACL] is defined. \n" +"Excluding DAC access covered by CAP_LINUX_IMMUTABLE. </li></ul>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:57 +msgid "" +"<ul><li>Overrides all restrictions on allowed operations on files, where file\n" +"owner ID must be equal to the user ID, except where CAP_FSETID is\n" +"applicable. It does not override MAC and DAC restrictions. </li></ul>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:65 +msgid "<ul><li>Overrides the following restrictions: user ID must match the file owner ID when setting the S_ISUID and S_ISGID bits on that file; the effective group ID (or one of the supplementary group IDs) must match the file owner ID when setting the S_ISGID bit on that file; the S_ISUID and S_ISGID bits are cleared on successful return from chown(2) (not implemented). </li></ul>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:71 +msgid "" +"<ul><li>Overrides the restriction that the real or effective user ID \n" +"of a process sending a signal must match the real or effective user ID of the process \n" +"receiving the signal.</li></ul>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:79 +msgid "" +"<ul><li>Allows setgid(2) manipulation </li> <li> Allows setgroups(2) </li> \n" +"<li> Allows forged gids on socket credentials passing. </li></ul>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:85 +msgid "" +"<ul><li>Allows setuid(2) manipulation (including fsuid) </li> \n" +"<li> Allows forged pids on socket credentials passing. </li></ul>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:91 +msgid "" +"<ul><li> Transfer any capability in your permitted set to any pid, \n" +"remove any capability in your permitted set from any pid</li></ul>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:97 +msgid "<ul><li>Allows modification of S_IMMUTABLE and S_APPEND file attributes</li></ul>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:103 +msgid "" +"<ul><li>Allows binding to TCP/UDP sockets below 1024 </li> \n" +"<li> Allows binding to ATM VCIs below 32</li></ul>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:109 +msgid "<ul><li> Allows broadcasting, listen to multicast </li></ul>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:115 +msgid "" +"<ul><li> Allows interface configuration</li> \n" +"<li> Allows administration of IP firewall, masquerading and accounting</li> \n" +"<li> Allows setting debug option on sockets</li> \n" +"<li> Allows modification of routing tables</li>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:121 +msgid "" +"<li> Allows setting arbitrary process / process group ownership on sockets</li> \n" +"<li> Allows binding to any address for transparent proxying</li> \n" +"<li> Allows setting TOS (type of service)</li> \n" +"<li> Allows setting promiscuous mode</li> \n" +"<li> Allows clearing driver statistics</li>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:128 +msgid "" +"<li> Allows multicasting</li> \n" +"<li> Allows read/write of device-specific registers</li> \n" +"<li> Allows activation of ATM control sockets </li>\n" +"</ul>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:137 +msgid "" +"<ul><li> Allows use of RAW sockets</li> \n" +"<li> Allows use of PACKET sockets </li></ul>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:143 +msgid "" +"<ul><li> Allows locking of shared memory segments</li> <li> Allows mlock and\n" +"mlockall (which does not really have anything to do with IPC) </li></ul>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:149 +msgid "<ul><li> Override IPC ownership checks </li></ul>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:153 +msgid "" +"<ul><li> Insert and remove kernel modules - modify kernel without limit</li> \n" +"<li> Modify cap_bset </li></ul>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:159 +msgid "" +"<ul><li> Allows ioperm/iopl access</li> \n" +"<li> Allows sending USB messages to any device via /proc/bus/usb </li></ul>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:165 +msgid "<ul><li> Allows use of chroot() </li></ul>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:169 +msgid "<ul><li> Allows ptrace() of any process </li></ul>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:173 +msgid "<ul><li> Allows configuration of process accounting </li></ul>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:179 +msgid "" +"<ul><li> Allows configuration of the secure attention key</li> \n" +"<li> Allows administration of the random device</li> \n" +"<li> Allows examination and configuration of disk quotas</li> \n" +"<li> Allows configuring the kernel's syslog (printk behaviour)</li>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:185 +msgid "" +"<li> Allows setting the domain name</li> \n" +"<li> Allows setting the hostname</li> \n" +"<li> Allows calling bdflush()</li> \n" +"<li> Allows mount() and umount(), setting up new smb connection</li> \n" +"<li> Allows some autofs root ioctls</li>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:192 +msgid "" +"<li> Allows nfsservctl</li> \n" +"<li> Allows VM86_REQUEST_IRQ</li> \n" +"<li> Allows to read/write pci config on alpha</li> \n" +"<li> Allows irix_prctl on mips (setstacksize)</li> \n" +"<li> Allows flushing all cache on m68k (sys_cacheflush)</li>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:199 +msgid "" +"<li> Allows removing semaphores</li> \n" +"<li> Used instead of CAP_CHOWN to \"chown\" IPC message queues, semaphores and shared memory</li> \n" +"<li> Allows locking/unlocking of shared memory segment</li> \n" +"<li> Allows turning swap on/off</li> \n" +"<li> Allows forged pids on socket credentials passing</li>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:206 +msgid "" +"<li> Allows setting read ahead and flushing buffers on block devices</li> \n" +"<li> Allows setting geometry in floppy driver</li> \n" +"<li> Allows turning DMA on/off in xd driver</li> \n" +"<li> Allows administration of md devices (mostly the above, but some extra ioctls)</li>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:212 +msgid "" +"<li> Allows tuning the ide driver</li> \n" +"<li> Allows access to the nvram device</li> \n" +"<li> Allows administration of apm_bios, serial and bttv (TV) device</li> \n" +"<li> Allows manufacturer commands in iaan CAPI support driver</li>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:218 +msgid "" +"<li> Allows reading non-standardized portions of pci configuration space</li> \n" +"<li> Allows DDI debug ioctl on sbpcd driver</li> \n" +"<li> Allows setting up serial ports</li> \n" +"<li> Allows sending raw qic-117 commands</li>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:224 +msgid "" +"<li> Allows enabling/disabling tagged queuing on SCSI controllers\n" +" and sending arbitrary SCSI commands</li> \n" +"<li> Allows setting encryption key on loopback filesystem </li></ul>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:232 +msgid "<ul><li> Allows use of reboot() </li></ul>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:236 +msgid "" +"<ul><li> Allows raising priority and setting priority on other (different UID) processes</li> \n" +"<li> Allows use of FIFO and round-robin (realtime) scheduling on own processes and setting \n" +"the scheduling algorithm used by another process.</li> \n" +"<li> Allows setting cpu affinity on other processes </li></ul>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:245 +msgid "" +"<ul><li> Override resource limits. Set resource limits.</li> \n" +"<li> Override quota limits.</li> \n" +"<li> Override reserved space on ext2 filesystem</li> \n" +"<li> Modify data journaling mode on ext3 filesystem (uses journaling resources)</li>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:251 +msgid "" +"<li> NOTE: ext2 honors fsuid when checking for resource overrides, so you can override using fsuid too</li> \n" +"<li> Override size restrictions on IPC message queues</li> \n" +"<li> Allows more than 64hz interrupts from the real-time clock</li> \n" +"<li> Override max number of consoles on console allocation</li> \n" +"<li> Override max number of keymaps </li></ul>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:261 +msgid "" +"<ul><li> Allows manipulation of system clock</li> \n" +"<li> Allows irix_stime on mips</li> \n" +"<li> Allows setting the real-time clock </li></ul>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:269 +msgid "" +"<ul><li> Allows configuration of tty devices</li> \n" +"<li> Allows vhangup() of tty </li></ul>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:275 +msgid "<ul><li> Allows the privileged aspects of mknod() </li></ul>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:281 +msgid "<ul><li> Allows taking of leases on files </li></ul>" +msgstr "" + +#. encoding: utf-8 +#. *************************************************************************** +#. +#. Copyright (c) 2002 - 2012 Novell, Inc. +#. All Rights Reserved. +#. +#. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or +#. modify it under the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as +#. published by the Free Software Foundation. +#. +#. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +#. but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +#. MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +#. GNU General Public License for more details. +#. +#. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +#. along with this program; if not, contact Novell, Inc. +#. +#. To contact Novell about this file by physical or electronic mail, +#. you may find current contact information at www.novell.com +#. +#. *************************************************************************** +#: src/include/apparmor/config_complain.rb:34 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Profile Mode Configuration</b><br>This tool allows \n" +"you to set AppArmor profiles to either complain or enforce mode.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/config_complain.rb:37 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Complain mode</b> is a profile training state that logs application \n" +"activity. All the violations of the AppArmor profile rules are logged \n" +"(into <i>/var/log/audit/audit.log</i> file), but still permitted, so \n" +"that application's behavior is not restricted.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/config_complain.rb:43 +msgid "" +"<p>With the profile in <b>enforce mode</b>, application is protected by \n" +"AppArmor. The profile rules are enforced and their violation is logged,\n" +"but not permitted (e.g. an application cannot access files, unless it is\n" +"permitted to do so by the profile).</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. Button for showing active or all profiles +#: src/include/apparmor/config_complain.rb:63 +msgid "Could not recognize profile name: " +msgstr "" + +#. Reverse modes for toggling +#: src/include/apparmor/config_complain.rb:75 +msgid "Could not recognize mode: " +msgstr "" + +#. translators: string is value in table for mode of apparmor +#: src/include/apparmor/config_complain.rb:117 +msgid "enforce" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/config_complain.rb:118 +msgid "complain" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/config_complain.rb:134 +msgid "Show All Profiles" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/config_complain.rb:135 +msgid "Configure Mode for Active Profiles" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/config_complain.rb:138 +msgid "Show Active Profiles" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/config_complain.rb:139 +msgid "Configure Mode for All Profiles" +msgstr "" + +#. `Frame( `id(`changeMode), _("Configure Profile Mode"), +#. TODO switch to variable in a module +#. TODO plain reread does not work here +#: src/include/apparmor/config_complain.rb:153 +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1439 +msgid "Profile Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/config_complain.rb:153 +msgid "Mode" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/config_complain.rb:160 +msgid "Toggle Mode" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/config_complain.rb:161 +msgid "Set All to Enforce" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/config_complain.rb:162 +msgid "Set All to Complain" +msgstr "" + +#. Profile Mode Configuration -- Sets Complain and Enforce Behavior +#: src/include/apparmor/config_complain.rb:183 +msgid "Profile Mode Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. We'll need this often - cache it +#: src/include/apparmor/config_complain.rb:231 +#: src/include/apparmor/config_complain.rb:241 +#: src/include/apparmor/config_complain.rb:270 +#: src/include/apparmor/config_complain.rb:289 +msgid "Configure Profile Mode" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/config_complain.rb:297 +msgid "Select an action to perform." +msgstr "" + +#. START Help Section +#. ********************************************************** +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:32 +msgid "" +"<p>The Security Event Notification screen enables you to setup email \n" +"alerts for security events. In the following steps, specify how often \n" +"alerts are sent, who receives the alert, and how severe the security \n" +"event must be to send an alert.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:38 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Notification Types</b><br> <b>Terse Notification:</b> \n" +"Terse notification summarizes the total number of system events without \n" +"providing details. <br>For example:<br> <tt>dhcp-101.up.wirex.com has \n" +"had 10 security events since Tue Oct 12 11:10:00 2004</tt></p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:44 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Summary Notification:</b> The Summary notification displays \n" +"the logged AppArmor security events, and lists the number of \n" +"individual occurrences, including the date of the last occurrence. \n" +"<br>For example:<br> <tt>AppArmor: PERMITTING access to capability\n" +"'setgid' (httpd2-prefork(6347) profile /usr/sbin/httpd2-prefork \n" +"active /usr/sbin/httpd2-prefork) 2 times, the latest at Sat Oct 9 16:05:54 2004.</tt>\n" +"</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:53 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Verbose Notification:</b> The Verbose notification displays \n" +"unmodified, logged AppArmor security events. It tells you every time \n" +"an event occurs and writes a new line in the Verbose log. These \n" +"security events include the date and time the event occurred, when \n" +"the application profile permits access as well as rejects access, \n" +"and the type of file permission access that is permitted or rejected.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:61 +msgid "" +"<p>Verbose Notification also reports several messages that \n" +"the logprof tool uses to interpret profiles. <br>For example:<br>\n" +"<tt> Oct 9 15:40:31 AppArmor: PERMITTING r access to\n" +"/etc/apache2/httpd.conf (httpd2-prefork(6068) profile \n" +"/usr/sbin/httpd2-prefork active /usr/sbin/httpd2-prefork)</tt></p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:68 +msgid "" +"<li> For each notification type that you would like \n" +"enabled, select the frequency of notification that you would \n" +"like. For example, if you select <b>1 day</b> from the \n" +"pull-down list, you will be sent daily notifications of \n" +"security events, if they occur.</li>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:75 +msgid "" +"<li> Enter the email address of those who should receive \n" +"the Terse, Summary, or Verbose notifications.If there is no local \n" +"SMTP server configured to distribute e-mails from this host to the \n" +"domain you entered, enter for example <i><user>@localhost</i> \n" +"and enable <i><user></i> to receive system mail, if it is not \n" +"a root user. </li>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:83 +msgid "" +"<li>Select the lowest <b>severity level</b> for which a notification \n" +"should be sent. Security events will be logged and the notifications \n" +"will be sent at the time indicated by the interval when events are \n" +"equal or greater than the selected severity level. If the interval \n" +"is 1 day, the notification will be sent daily, if security events \n" +"occur." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:91 +msgid "" +"<b>Severity Levels:</b> These are numbered 1 through 10, \n" +"10 being the most severe security incident. The <b>severity.db</b> \n" +"file defines the severity level of potential security events. \n" +"The severity levels are determined by the importance of \n" +"different security events, such as certain resources accessed \n" +"or services denied.</li>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:99 +msgid "" +"<li>Select <b>Include unknown security events</b> if \n" +"you would like to include events that are not rated with a severity number.</li>" +msgstr "" + +#. ---------------------------- +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:103 +msgid "<b>AppArmor Profiling Wizard</b><br>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:106 +msgid "" +"This wizard presents entries generated by the AppArmor access control module. \n" +"You can generate highly optimized and robust security profiles \n" +"by using the suggestions made by AppArmor." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:111 +msgid "" +"AppArmor suggests that you allow or deny access to specific resources \n" +"or define execute permission for entries. Questions \n" +"that display were logged during the normal application \n" +"execution test previously performed. <br>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:117 +msgid "" +"The following help text describes the detail of the security profile \n" +"syntax used by AppArmor. <br><br>At any stage, you may \n" +"customize the profile entry by changing the suggested response. \n" +"This overview will assist you in your options. Refer to the \n" +"Novell AppArmor Administration Guide for step-by-step \n" +"instructions. <br><br>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:125 +msgid "<b>Access Modes</b><br>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:126 +msgid "File permission access modes consists of combinations of the following six modes:" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:129 +msgid "<li>r - read</li>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:130 +msgid "<li>w - write</li>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:131 +msgid "<li>m - mmap PROT_EXEC</li>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:132 +msgid "<li>px - discrete profile execute</li>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:133 +msgid "<li>ux - unconfined execute</li>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:134 +msgid "<li>ix - inherit execute</li>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:135 +msgid "<li>l - link</li>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:136 +msgid "<b>Details for Access Modes</b>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:137 +msgid "<b>Read mode</b><br>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:138 +msgid "" +"Allows the program to have read access to the\n" +"resource. Read access is required for shell scripts\n" +"and other interpreted content, and determines if an\n" +"executing process can core dump or be attached to with\n" +"ptrace(2). (ptrace(2) is used by utilities such as\n" +"strace(1), ltrace(1), and gdb(1).)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:146 +msgid "<b>Write mode</b><br>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:147 +msgid "" +"Allows the program to have write access to the\n" +"resource. Files must have this permission if they are\n" +"to be unlinked (removed.)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:152 +msgid "<b>Mmap PROT_EXEC mode</b><br>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:153 +msgid "" +"Allows the program to call mmap with PROT_EXEC on the\n" +"resource." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:154 +msgid "<b>Unconfined execute mode</b><br>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:155 +msgid "" +"Allows the program to execute the resource without any\n" +"AppArmor profile being applied to the executed\n" +"resource. Requires listing execute mode as well.\n" +"Incompatible with Inherit and Discrete Profile execute\n" +"entries." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:162 +msgid "" +"This mode is useful when a confined program needs to\n" +"be able to perform a privileged operation, such as\n" +"rebooting the machine. By placing the privileged section \n" +"in another executable and granting unconfined \n" +"execution rights, it is possible to bypass the mandatory \n" +"constraints imposed on all confined processes.\n" +"For more information on what is constrained, see the\n" +"apparmor(7) man page." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:172 +msgid "<b>Discrete Profile execute mode</b><br>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:173 +msgid "" +"This mode requires that a discrete security profile is\n" +"defined for a resource executed at a AppArmor domain\n" +"transition. If there is no profile defined then the\n" +"access will be denied. Incompatible with Inherit and\n" +"Unconstrained execute entries." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:180 +msgid "<b>Link mode</b><br>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:181 +msgid "" +"Allows the program to be able to create and remove a\n" +"link with this name (including symlinks). When a link\n" +"is created, the file that is being linked to MUST have\n" +"the same access permissions as the link being created\n" +"(with the exception that the destination does not have\n" +"to have link access.) Link access is required for\n" +"unlinking a file." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:190 +msgid "<b>Globbing</b>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:191 +msgid "" +"File resources may be specified with a globbing syntax\n" +"similar to that used by popular shells, such as csh(1),\n" +"bash(1), zsh(1)." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:196 +msgid "<li><b>*</b> can substitute for any number of characters, except '/'<li>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:199 +msgid "<li><b>**</b> can substitute for any number of characters, including '/'</li>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:202 +msgid "<li><b>?</b> can substitute for any single character except '/'</li>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:205 +msgid "<li><b>[abc]</b> will substitute for the single character a, b, or c</li>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:208 +msgid "<li><b>[a-c]</b> will substitute for the single character a, b, or c</li>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:211 +msgid "<li><b>{ab,cd}</b> will expand to one rule to match ab, one rule to match cd</li>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:214 +msgid "<b>Clean Exec - for sanitized execution</b>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:215 +msgid "" +"The Clean Exec option for the discrete profile and unconstrained \n" +"execute permissions provide added security by stripping the \n" +"environment that is inherited by the child program of specific \n" +"variables. You will be prompted to choose whether you want to sanitize the\n" +"environment if you choose 'p' or 'u' during the profiling process.\n" +"The variables are:" +msgstr "" + +#. Globalz +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:55 +msgid "" +"<b>Capability Selection</b>.\n" +"<br>Select desired capabilities for this profile. \n" +"Select a Capability name to see information about the capability." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:62 +msgid "Capabilities enabled for the profile" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:80 +msgid "Capabilities" +msgstr "" + +#. We'll need this often - cache it +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:153 +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:179 +msgid "All" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:199 +msgid "Network Family" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:205 +msgid "Socket Type" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup the Edit Profile Entry dialog +#. return a map containing PERM and FILE +#. for the updated permissions and filename +#. for the profile entry +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:292 +msgid "Profile Entry for " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:297 +msgid "Enter or Modify Filename" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:298 +msgid "&Browse" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:306 +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1032 +msgid "Permissions" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:310 +msgid "Read" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:315 +msgid "Write" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:320 +msgid "Link" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:325 +msgid "Append" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:330 +msgid "Lock" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:335 +msgid "MMap PROT_EXEC" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:340 +msgid "Execute" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:345 +msgid "Inherit" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:350 +msgid "Profile" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:355 +msgid "Profile Clean Exec" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:360 +msgid "Unconstrained" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:365 +msgid "Unconstrained Clean Exec" +msgstr "" + +#. Popup a dialog to let a user browse for a file +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:542 +msgid "Select Directory" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:545 +msgid "Select File" +msgstr "" + +#. Update table values +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:602 +msgid "Entry will not be added. Entry name or permissions not defined." +msgstr "" + +#. Prompts the user for a hatname +#. Side-Effect: sets Settings["CURRENT_HAT"] +#. returns true (hat entered) +#. false (user aborted) +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:849 +msgid "" +"Enter the name of the Hat that you would like \n" +"to add to the profile\n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:859 +msgid "&Hat name to add" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:865 +msgid "&Create Hat" +msgstr "" + +#. Check for no application entry in the dialog +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:881 +msgid "" +"You have not given a name for the hat you want to add.\n" +"Please \n" +"enter a hat name to create a new hat, or press Abort to cancel this wizard." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:889 +msgid "The profile already contains the provided hat name. Enter a different name or press Abort to cancel this wizard." +msgstr "" + +#. FIXME: format these texts better +#. help text +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:928 +msgid "<p>View and modify the contents of an individual profile. For existing entries double click the permissions to access a modification dialog.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:933 +msgid "" +"<p><b>Permission Definitions:</b><br><code> r - read <br> \n" +"w -write<br>l - link<br>m - mmap PROT_EXEC<br>k - file locking<br>\n" +"a - file append<br>x - execute<br> i - inherit<br> p - discrete profile<br>\n" +"P - discrete profile <br> (*clean exec)<br> u - unconstrained<br> \n" +"U -unconstrained<br> (*clean exec)</code></p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:942 +msgid "<p><b>Add Entry:</b><br>Select the type of resource to add from the drop down list.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text - part x1 +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:947 +msgid "<p><ul><li><b>File</b><br>Add a file entry to this profile.</li>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text - part x2 +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:951 +msgid "<li><b>Directory</b><br>Add a directory entry to this profile.</li>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text - part x3 +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:955 +msgid "<li><b>Capability</b><br>Add a capability entry to this profile.</li>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text - part x4 +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:959 +msgid "" +"<li><b>Include</b><br>Add an include entry to this profile. This option \n" +"includes the profile entry contents of another file in this profile at load time.</li>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text - part x5 +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:963 +msgid "" +"<li><b>Network Entry</b><br>Add a network rule entry to this profile. \n" +"This option will allow you to specify network access privileges for the profile. \n" +"You may specify a network address family and socket type.</li>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text - part x6 +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:969 +msgid "" +"<li><b>Hat</b><br>Add a sub-profile for this profile, called a Hat. This\n" +"option is analogous to manually creating a new profile, which can be selected\n" +"during execution only in the context of being asked for by a <b>changehat\n" +"aware</b> application. \n" +"For more information on changehat, see <b>man changehat</b> on your system or the Novell AppArmor Administration Guide.</li>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text - part x7 +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:977 +msgid "</ul></p><p><b>Edit Entry:</b><br>Edit the selected entry.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:982 +msgid "<p><b>Delete Entry:</b><br>Removes the selected entry from this profile.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. help text - part y1 +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:987 +msgid "" +"<p><b>*Clean Exec</b><br>The Clean Exec option for the discrete profile \n" +"and unconstrained execute permissions provide added security by stripping the environment \n" +"that is inherited by the child program of specific variables. These variables are:" +msgstr "" + +#. help text - part y2 +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:998 +msgid "&File" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:999 +msgid "Network &Rule" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1000 +msgid "&Directory" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1001 +msgid "&Capability" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1002 +msgid "&Include File" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1012 +msgid "AppArmor profile " +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1020 +msgid "&Hat" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1021 +msgid "AppArmor profile for " +msgstr "" + +#. Define the widget contents +#. for the Wizard +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1032 +msgid "File Name" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1039 +msgid "Add Entry" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1040 +msgid "&Edit Entry" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1041 +msgid "&Delete Entry" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1075 +msgid "AppArmor Hat Dialog" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1105 +msgid "AppArmor Profile Dialog" +msgstr "" + +#. Widget activated in the table +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1145 +msgid "Include entries can not be edited. Select add or delete to manage Include entries." +msgstr "" + +#. Make sure that the entry doesn't already exist +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1294 +msgid "Hats can not have embedded hats." +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1306 +msgid "Select File to Include" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1335 +msgid "Invalid #include file. Include files must be located in one of these directories: \n" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1379 +msgid "Save changes to the profile" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1380 +msgid "" +"Save the changes to this profile? \n" +"(Note: after saving, AppArmor profiles will be reloaded.)\n" +msgstr "" + +#. We'll need this often - cache it +#: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1476 +msgid "You must select a profile to edit." +msgstr "" + +#: perl-lib/Notify.pm:51 +#, perl-format +msgid "Failed copying %s." +msgstr "" Added: branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/yast2-trans-ps.spec.in =================================================================== --- branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/yast2-trans-ps.spec.in (rev 0) +++ branches/SLE12-SP1/yast/ps/yast2-trans-ps.spec.in 2015-10-01 14:25:53 UTC (rev 93099) @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +@HEADER-COMMENT@ + +@HEADER@ +BuildRequires: pkgconfig yast2-devtools +BuildArch: noarch +Provides: locale(yast2:@LL@) + +Summary: YaST2 translations for ps localization +%define Y2LANG ps + +%description +- + +@PREP@ + +@BUILD-PO@ + +@INSTALL-PO@ + +@CLEAN@ + +%files +%defattr(-,root,root) +%doc @docdir@ +%dir @localedir@ +%lang(@ISO639@) @localedir@/@LL@